p

V CORNELL UNIVERSITY LIBRARY Cornell University Library PK 231.M13

Vedic rammar /

ill 3 1924 023 050 325 Cornell University Library

The original of this book is in the Cornell University Library.

There are no known copyright restrictions in

the United States on the use of the text.

http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924023050325

Grundriss der Indo-Arisohen Philologie und Altertumskunde

(ENCYCLOPEDIA OF INDO -ARYAN RESEARCH)

BEGRiJNDET VON G. BUHLER, FORTGESETZT VON F. KIELHORN,

HERAUSGEGEBEN VON H. LUDERS UND J. WACKERNAGEL.

. . BAND, 4. HEFT.

VEDIC GRAMMAR

BY

A. A. MACDONELL

STRASSBURG

VERLAG VON KARL J. TRUBNER The printing was commenced in May, 1907, and afterwards delayed by the death of the editor

Prof. Kielhorn. Grundriss der Indo-Arischen Philologie und Altertumskunde

(ENCYCLOPEDIA OF INDO -ARYAN RESEARCH)

BEGRtJNDET VON G. BOHLER, FORTGESETZT VON F. KIELHORN.

I. BAND, 4. HEFT.

VED IC GRAMMAR

A. A. MACDONELL.

INTRODUCTION.

I. General Scope of this \Vork.—Vedic grammar has never till now been treated separately and as a whole. Both in India and in the West the subject has hitherto been handled only in connexion with Classical . Hundreds of Panini's Sutras deal with the language of the ; but the account they give of it is anything but comprehensive. In the West, Benfey was the first, more than half a century ago (1852), to combine a description of the linguistic peculiarities of the Vedas with an account of the traditional matter of Panini; but as Vedic studies were at that time still in their infancy, only the ^ and about one-fourth of the Rgveda^ having as yet been published, the Vedic material utilized in his large grammar ^ was necessarily very limited in extent. In Whitney's work'* the language of the Vedas, which is much more fully represented, is treated in its historical connexion with Classical Sanskrit. Partly for this reason, his work does not supply a definite account of the grammar of the Sarnhitas as compared with that of the later phases of the language; thus what is peculiar to the Brahmanas or to a particular Sarnhita is often not apparent. Professor Wackernagel's grammars, which when finished will present the ancient language of India more completely than any other work on the subject, deals with the combined Vedic and post-Vedic material from the point of view of Comparative Philology. Different sections or individual points of Vedic grammar have been the subject of separately published treatises or of special articles scattered in various Oriental and philological journals or other works of a miscellaneous character. It is advisable that all this as well as additional material* should now be brought together so as to afford a general survey of the subject. In view of the prominent position occupied by the Indo-Aryan branch in Comparative Philology and of the fact that the language of the Vedas

1 Edited by Benfey, with German trans- Wackernagel, I. Lautlehre, Gbttingen 1 896; lation and glossary, Leipzig 1848. II, I. Einleitung zur Wortlehre. Nominal- 2 Vol. I edited by Max Muller, London komposition, 1905. (Cp. Baetholomae, Bei- 2nd 1849, vol. VI 1875; ed. London 1890— trage zur altindischen Grammatik, ZDMG. 92; edited by Aufrecht, Berlin l86l and SO, 674-735)- 1863 (vols. VI and vil of Indische Studien), 6 Such additional material is supplied in 2"ii ed. Bonn 1877. this work from collections made for me by 3 Vollstandige Grammatik der Sanskrit- my pupils Prof. H. C. Norman (Benares) sprache, Leipzig 1852. from the Vajasaneyi Sarnhita, and Mr. A. B. 4 A , Leipzig 1879; s^d Keith from the Taittirlya Sarnhita, the ed. 1896. in the Aitareya Aranyaka, and the 5 Altindische Grammatik von Jacob Khilas of the Rgveda.

Indo-arische' Philologie. I, 4. I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

represents the foundation of the subsequent strata, it seems important for the sake of clearness and definiteness that the earliest phase should be treated as a whole independently of later developments. The present work will therefore deal with the grammar of only the portions of the Sarnhitas; that is to say, it will embrace the whole of the Rgveda, the ', the Samaveda'', and the Vajasaneyi Sarnhita^, but will exclude those portions of the Taittirlya Samhita'*, the Maitrayani Sarnhita^ and the Kathaka^ which have the character of Brahmanas'. Reference will also be made to Mantra material not found in the canonical texts of the Sarnhitas, that is, to the Khilas* of the Rgveda and the occasional Mantras of this type occurring in the Brahmanas' and Sutras. As the linguistic material of the Rgveda is more ancient, extensive and authentic than that of the other Sarnhitas, all of which borrow largely from that text", it is taken as the basis of the present work. Hence all forms stated without comment belong to the Rgveda, though they may occur in other Sarnhitas as well. From the other Vedas, such matter only is added as occurs in their independent parts or, if borrowed from the Rgveda, appears in an altered form, the source being in such cases indicated by an abbreviation in parentheses (as VS., TS., AV.). The addition of the abbreviation 'RV.' means that the form in question occurs in the Rgveda only. 2. Verbal Authenticity of the Texts".-—-In dealing with the linguistic material of the Sarnhitas the question of the authenticity of the forms which it embraces is of great importance. What guarantees then do we possess that the original form of the texts handed down by tradition has not in the course of ages undergone modification and modernization in respect to vocabulary, phonetics, and grammatical forms? This question must first be applied to the Rgveda, the oldest of the Sarnhitas, which forms the very foundation of Vedic tradition. The evidence of the SarvanukramanT", which states the number of stanzas, the metre, and the deity for every hymn of the RV., shows that in general extent, form, and matter, this Sarnhita was in the Sutra period the same as now. The Pratisakhya 'J demonstrates that its phonetic character was also the same. Yaska's commentary'* proves that,

1 Edited (Samhita text only) by Roth and Mass., 1904); ScHEFTELOWlTZ, Die Apokry- Whitney, Berlin 1856 (Index Verborum in phen des Rgveda (edition of the Khilas), JAOS., vol. XII); translated by Whitney Breslau 1906 (cp. Oldenberg, Gottingische (Books I—xix), -with a critical and exegetical Gelehrte Anzeigen 1907, 210—41). commentary, Cambridge, Mass., 1905 (vols. 9 Cp. Oldenberg, op. cit., 359 ff. ; Auf- VII and VIII of the Harvard Oriental Series); RECHT, Das Aitareya Brahmana, Bonn 1879, also edited by Shankar P. Pandit (both p. 420 f. Sarnhita and Pada text), Bombay 1895 — 99- ^ Cp. Oldenberg, op. cit, chapter in; 2 Besides Benfey's edition also that of Macdonell, History of Sanskrit Literature, Satyavrata Sama^rami, 5 vols., Calcutta 181 and 186. 1874—78 (Bibliotheca Indica). " Cp. Oldenberg, op. cit., chapter ui 3 Edited by Weber, with the commentary (271 —369) Der Riktext und der Text der of Mahldhara, London and Berlin 1 852. jiingeren Sarnhitas und der Brahmanas; 4 Edited by Weber (vols, xi and xii of Lddwig, Ueber die Kritik des Rgveda- Indische Studien), Berlin 1871—72. Textes, Abhandlungen d. k. bohm. Gesell- 5 Edited by L. v. Schroeder, Leipzig schaft der Wissenschaften, Prag 1889. 1881—86. 12 Edited by A. A. Macdonell, Oxford 6 Edited by L. v. Schroeder, vol. i 1886. (books I —xvill), Leipzig 1900. 13 The Rgveda Pratisakhya, edited with 7 Cp. Oldenberg, Die Hymnen des , German translation by Max Muller, Leipzig Band J (Prolegomena), Berlin 1888, p. 294ff. 1856—69; edited with Uvata's commentary, 8 See Aufrecht, Die Hymnen des Rigveda^, Benares Sanskrit Series 1894. vol. 11, 672—88; Max Muller, Rgveda^, 14 Yaska's Nirukta, edited by RoTH, Got- vol. IV, 519 —41; cp. Macdonell, Bfhad- tingen 1852; edited by Satyavrata Sama- devata, vol.1, introduction, §15 (Cambridge, ^RAMi, 4 vols. (II—IV with the commentary Introduction. as regards the limited number of stanzas explained by him, his text was verbally identical with ours. The frequent statements of the Brahmanas concerning the number of verses contained in a hymn or liturgical group agree with the extant text of the Rgveda. The explanatory discussions of the Brahmanas further indicate that the text of the Rgveda must have been regarded as immutably fixed by that time. Thus the Satapatha Brahmana, while speaking of the possibility of varying some of the formulas of the , rejects as impossible the notion of changing the text of a certain verse of the Rgveda as proposed by some teachers ^- Probably soon after the completion of the actual Brahmanas the hymns of the Rgveda were fixed in the phonetic form of the Samhita text; and after no long interval, in order to guard that text from the possibility of any change or loss, the Pada text was constituted by Sakalya, whom the Aranyakas or appendixes to the Brahmanas, the Nirukta, and the Rgveda Pratisakhya presuppose ^ By this analysis of the Sarnhita text, its every word, stated in a separate form as unaffected by the rules of euphonic combination, has come down to us without change for about 2,500 years. The Samhita text itself, however, only represented the close of a long period in which the hymns, as originally composed by the seers, were handed down by oral tradition. For the condition of the text even in this earlier period we possess a large body of evidence corresponding to that of Mss. for other literary monuments. It was then that the text of the other Vedas, each of which borrowed extensively from the Rgveda, was constituted. With each of them came into being a new and separate tradition in which the borrowed matter furnishes a body of various readings for the Rgveda. The comparison of these variants, about 1200 in number, has shown that the text of the Rgveda already existed, with comparatively few exceptions, in its present form when the text of the other Vedas was established. The number of instances is infinitely small in which the Rgveda exhibits corruptions not appearing in the others. We have thus good reason for beHeving that the fixity of the text and the verbal integrity of the Rgveda go several centuries further back than the date at which the Samhita text came into existence. As handed down exclusively by oral tradition, the text could hardly have been preserved in perfectly authentic form from the time of the composers themselves; and research has shown that there are some undeniable corruptions in detail attributable to this earliest period. But apart from these, the Samhita of phonetic text, when the original metre has been restored by the removal combinations which did not prevail in the time of the poets themselves, nearly always contains the very words, as represented by the Pada text, actually used by the seers. The modernization of the ancient text appearing in the It has preserved Samhita form is only partial and is inconsistently applied. the slightest the' smallest minutiae of detail most hable to corruption and differences in the matter of accent and alternative forms which might have been removed with the greatest ease. We are thus justified in assuming that divested of the the accents and grammatical forms of the Rgveda, when to us, in the euphonic rules applied in the Samhita text, have come down themselves. vast majority of cases, as they were uttered by the poets a general Though the tradition of nearly all the later Samhitas has m way been guarded by Anukramanls, Pratisakhyas, and Pada texts, its value This is only natural in the case is clearly inferior to that of the Rgveda.

Oldenberg, op. cit., 3SZ- of ), Calcutta 1882—91 (Bibliotheca I ' See 2 See Oldenberg, op. cit., 380 f. Indica). | 1* I. Allgemeines und Sprache. Vedic Grammar. of collections in which the matter was largely borrowed and arbitrarily cut up into groups of verses or into single verses solely with a view to meet new liturgical wants. Representing a later linguistic stage, these collections start from a modernized text in the material borrowed from the Rgveda, as

is unmistakable when that material is compared with the original passages. The text of the Samaveda is almost entirely secondary, containing only seventy-five stanzas not derived from the Rgveda. Its variants are due in part to inferiority of tradition and in part to arbitrary alterations made for

the purpose of adapting verses removed from their context to new ritual uses '. An indication that the tradition of the Yajur and Atharva Vedas is less trust- worthy than that of the Rgveda is the great metrical irregularity which is characteristic of those texts " Of all these the Vajasaneyi Sarnhita is the best preserved, being not only guarded by an Anukramanij a Pratisakhya, and a Pada text, but partially incorporated in the Satapatha Brahmana, where the first 1 8 books are quoted word for word besides being commented on. The Taittiriya Sarnhita has also been carefully handed down, being protected by an AnukramanT, a Pratisakhya, and a good Pada text 5. The MaitrayanT Sarnhita

is not so well authenticated, having no Pratisakhya and only an inferior

Pada text, of which but a single somewhat incorrect Ms. is known "*. Least trustworthy of all is the tradition of the Kathaka which lacks both a Pratisakhya and a Pada text. Moreover only one complete Ms. of this Sarnhita is knownS. As that Ms. is unaccented, it has only been possible to mark the accent in small portions of that part of the text which has as yet been pubhshed (Books I—xviii). As, however, the texts of the Black Yajurveda often agree even verbally, and the MaitrayanI Sarnhita is closely connected with the Kathaka, the readings of the latter can to some extent be checked by those of the cognate Samhitas. The inferiority of tradition in the Atharvaveda was increased by the lateness of its recognition as a canonical text. It contains many corrupt and uncertain forms, especially in Book xix, which is a later addition*. The text is guarded by Anukramanls, a Pratisakhya, and a Padapatha^. The latter, however, contains serious errors both in regard to accentuation and the division of compound verbal forms, as well as in other respects. The Padapatha of Book xix, which is different in origin from that of the earlier

books ^, is full of grave blunders?. The critical and exegetical notep contained in Whitney's Translation of the Atharvaveda accordingly furnish important aid in estimating the value of the readings in the Saunakiya recension of the Atharvaveda. The Paippalada recension is known in only a single corrupt Ms., which has been reproduced in facsimile by Professors Garbe and '°- Bloomfield About one-eighth or one-ninth of this recension is original, being found neither in the Saunakiya text of the Atharvaveda nor in any other known collection of Mantras". The various readings of this recension, in the

1 On the Padapatha of the Samaveda see 6 See Lanman's Introduction to Book xix Benfey's edition of that Sarnhita, p. Lvu—LXiv. in Whitney's Translation of the Atharva- 2 See Whitney's Introduction to the veda. Atharvaveda, p. cxxvil; Bloomfield, The 7 See Lanman's Introduction to Whitney's Atharvaveda, Grundriss II, IB, § I. Translation, p. Lxix—Lxxiv. 3 Cp. Weber's edition p. vinf., and 8 The Padapatha of the Atharvaveda has Indische Studien 13, I — 114 (Ueber den been edited in full by Shankar P. Pandit Padapatha der Taittirlya-Samhita). in his Atharvaveda. 4 See L. V. Scheokder's edition, Intro- 9 Cp. Bloomfield, The Atharvaveda p. 16. duction, p. xxxvif. ^o The Kashmirian Atharva-Veda, Balti- 5 Cp. L. V. ScHROEDER's Introduction to more 1901. his edition, § i. " Bloomfield, The Atharvaveda p. 15; —

I. Phonology. Pronunciation. Sounds.

material common to both recensions, are given in the critical notes of Whitney's Translation. The variations range from slight differences to complete change of sense, and exact textual agreement between parallel stanzas is comparatively rare'. The text of this recension has not yet been critically edited except Book I^

I. PHONOLOGY.

Rgveda Prati^akhya, ed. with German translation by MaxMuller, Leipzig 1856—69; with Uvata's Commentary, Benares Sanskrit Series, 1894. — Atharvaveda Pratisakhya, ed. Whitney, JAOS. vols, vu and x. — Taittirlya Pratisakhya, ed. Whitney, JAOS. vol. ix, 1871. — Vajasaneyi PratiSakhya, ed. Weber, IS. vol. iv, 1858; with Uvata's Commentary, Benares Sanskrit Series, 1888. — Riktantravyakarana (= Pratisakhya of 'the SV.), ed. and transl. by Burnell, Mangalore 1879. Benfey, Vollstandige Grammatik p. I — 70. — Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar p. 1 — 87. — Wackernagel, Altindische Grammatik. I. Lautlehre (very full bibliography).

3. Ancient Pronunciation. — Evidence throwing light on the phonetic character of the language of the Samhitas is furnished not only by the pronunciation of its sounds by the Brahmans of to-day, who still recite those texts, but also by the transcription of Sanskrit words in foreign languages, particularly Greek, in ancient times; by the summary information contained in the works of the old Sanskrit grammarians, Panini and his successors^ and more especially by the detailed statements of the Pratisakhyas and the Siksas. From these sources we derive a sufficiently exact knowledge of the pronunciation prevailing about 500 b. c. This pronunciation, however, need not necessarily have coincided in every particular with that of the Sarnhitas, which date from many centuries earlier. Nevertheless, judging by the internal evidence supplied by the phonetic changes and analogical formations occurring in the language of the texts themselves and by the external evidence of comparative philology, we are justified in concluding that the pronunciation, with the possible exception of a very few doubtful points, was practically the same. 4. The Sounds of the Vedic Language. — There are altogether 52 sounds, 13 of which are vocalic and 39 consonantal. They are the following:

A. Vocalic sounds.

1 . Nine simple vowels : adiiuurf I. 2. Four diphthongs: 0^ at ''.

B. Consonantal sounds.

Twenty-two mutes, divided into five classes, each of which has its class nasal, making a group of twenty-seven: a) five gutturals: k kh g gh n, b) five palatals : c ch j jh it, c) seven cerebrals: / tk d and p dh and Ih^ n, d) five dentals: t tk d dh n, e) five labials: p ph b bh m.

cp. Whitney's Translation of the Atharva- 3 These are really simple long vowels, veda p. 1013—23. being diphthongs only in origin (= at, du). * On the readings of the Paippalada re- 4 Pronounced di, du (see Whitney on cension, see Lanman's Introduction p.Lxxix APr. I. 40 and TPr. 11. 29), but derived LXXXIX. from diphthongs with a long first element. 2 The Kashmirian AtharvaVeda, Book One. 5 These sounds take the place of d dh Edited with critical notes by Leroy Carr respectively between vowels; e. g. tie (but Barret, in JAOS. 26, 197—295. tdyd), mJlhuse (but mldhvan). 6 I. Allgemeines und Speache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

2. Four semivowels: y r I v. 3. Three sibilants: / (palatal), f (cerebral), j (dental). 4. One aspiration; h.

5. One pure nasal: m {m) called Anusvara ('after-sound'). 6. Three voiceless spirants: h (Visarjaniya), h (Jihvamuliya), k (Upa- dhmamya). 5. Losses, changes, additions. — In order that the phonetic status of the Vedic language may be understood historically, the losses, changes, and additions which have taken place in it as compared with earlier linguistic stages, must be pointed out. a. It has lost the IE. i) short vowels e and 3; 2) long vowels e 0; 3) diphthongs ei oi, eu ou; Si ei oi, au eu ou; 4) sonant nasals; 5) voiced spirant z.

b. It has replaced a number of IE. sounds by others : i) the short vowels e by a, a by i; 2) the long vowels eohya; 3) the diphthongs ei oi by e, eu ou by 0; also dz ez oz by eo; 4) f by ir {ur), I by r; 5) ei oi by di,

au eu ou by du ; 6) r, when followed by a nasal, has become f; 7) gutturals (velars) have, under certain conditions, become palatals'; 8) a palatal mute has become the palatal spirant s^. c. It has added the whole series of eight cerebrals (including the spirant s). The above innovations are specifically Indian, excepting (i) the loss of the vowels e 3, together with the diphthongs formed with them; (2) the loss of the sonant nasals; and (3) the addition of the spirants / and s. These the Avesta shares with the Vedas.

I. The simple vowels.

6. The vowel a. — This is by far the commonest vowel, being much more than twice as frequent as a; while these two «-vowels combined occur

as often as all the rest (including diphthongs) taken together -5. According to the modern Indian pronunciation, a has the sound of a very short close neutral vowel like the English in but. That such was its character as early as the time of Panini appears from his last Sutra, according to which a is not the short sound corresponding to a. To the same effect are the statements of the Pratisakhyas "i, which describe « as a 'close' (samvrtd) sound. This pronunciation is borne out by the reproduction of Indian words in Greek, where the vowel, though usually represented by a, appears as e or also; on the other hand, the frequent reproduction of the Greek a by the Indian a indicates that, to the Indian ear, that vowel was both longer and had more distinctively the sound of a. Similarly, Hindus of the present day make the observation that the English pronunciation of a in Sanskrit words sounds long {dirgha) to them. As the ancient Iranian languages have the normal a throughout, the close pronunciation must be an Indian innovation. But whether it already prevailed in the period when the Sarnhitas were composed is uncertain. The fact, however, that in the RV. the metre hardly ever admits

of the a being elided after e or (?, though the written text drops it in about 75 per cent of its occurrences, seems to indicate that when the hymns of the RV. were composed, the pronunciation of a was still open, but that at

I Cp. Brugmann, Kurze vergleichende 2 Op. cit. 233. Orammatik der indogermanischen Sprachen 3 Cp. Whitney, 22 and 75. 1902, I, 244. 4 APr. I. 36; VPr. I. 72. ^;

I. Phonology. Simple Vowels.

the time when the Samhita text was constituted, the close pronunciation was already becoming general.

a. Though a ordinarily represents IE. a e S^, it also often replaces an original sonant nasal ^ representing the reduced form of the unaccented Vedic syllables «+nasal- x)an in derivative and inflexional syllables ; e. g. sat-S beside the stem sant- 'being' ; mhv-ati they sacrifice (suffix othervirise -ami); z) «+nasal in radical syllables; e. g. (a-id- 'stretched'- ytan-; g-a-ta-^^^OTve-.ygam-; das-md-'^NOxiiiTiou^' -.ydams-; stem /a/^»- 'path', beside /a«^/i3- in words as 3) shown by comparative philology; e. g. ^ato'-w 'hundred' (Lat. =>j ^ \ ^^«A««), dasa 'ten' (Lat. decem)i. j, Very rarely a is a Prakritic ^ representative of r, as in vi-Mta-i 'monstrous', beside vi-krta- 'deformed'.

7. The vowel a. —This sound represents both a simple long vowel and a contraction; e. g. d-stha-t 'he has stood'; asam 'I was' (= d-as-am), bhdraii 'may he bear' (= b/idra-a-ti). a. Like a, the long vowel a frequently corresponds to or is derived from a syllable containing a nasal; e. kks-td- g. 'dvig-.yk/ian-; a-tmdn- 'soul' : an- 'breathe'. In very rare instances the nasal is retained in the RV.: jighamsati 'desires to %Xx\\.e -.yhan-; srantd- 'wearied': )//»2-; dhvantd-'^'ixY-.Ydhvan- there are six or eight more instances in the later Samhitas*. Here the reappearance of the nasal in a weak radical syllable is an innovation due to the influence of other forms with nasals'.

8. The vowel /. — This sound in the first place is an original vowel; e.g. div-i 'in heaven'. It also frequently represents the low grade of ^ and j'a

both in roots^ and suffixes; e. g. vid-md 'we know', beside ved-a 'I know'; ndv-istha- 'newest', beside ndv-yas- 'newer'. It further appears as the low grade of a in roots containing that vowel: e. g. sidhyati 'succeeds', beside sadhati; sistd- 'taught', beside sdsti 'teaches'; especially when the vowel is final, as in sthi-td- 'stood': \fstha-. From the latter use it came to assume the function of a 'connecting' vowel; e. g. jan-i-tf- 'begetter' :"(/;'««-; after heavy syllables also in the ending -ire of 3 pi. pf mid. vavand-ire (beside nunudre). In Hthird- 'loose' i would be a Prakritic representative of /-, if the word is derived from Yh-atA-'^.

g. The vo'wel 7. — This sound is an original vowel, e.g. mjivd- 'hving'^". It also often represents the low grade of both in roots and suffixes; e. g. jT-td- (Av.), 'overcome': Yj'yS-; as-i-mdhi 'we would attain', beside as-ydm 'I would attain'. It further seems to represent the low grade of both radical and suffixal a; but this can probably in all instances be explained as either a low grade of ai or a later substitution for i; e. g. gi-tha- (AV.) beside -thd- 'song', is from the root gai-; adi-mahi (VS.) and di-sva (VS.), from 1/2 ^a- and Y?>^^'i occur beside forms in i from the three roots da- which have i only in the RV.; hind- 'forsaken', ixovaYha-, occurs once in RV. x beside forms with

i only in RV. i— ix. A similar explanation probably applies to the -7iT- of the ninth class of verbs beside -na-, q. g. grbknT-igrbkna-'^'^.

1 Cp. Brugmann, kg. 92, 104, n6. work in its conventional sense (cp. Brug- 2 Cp. Brugmann 184. mann, KG. 365), and 'roots' will be 3 See Wackernagel i, 7 (p. 7— 10). quoted in the usually low grade form in 4 Cp. Wackernagel i, 146. which they appear in Sanskrit grammar. 5 It represents IE. a e 0: cp. Brugmann, The term 'base' will be used to designate KG. 98, no, 122. It also appears for IE. the phonetic unit which is the starting point before single consonants: cp. Wacker- of vowel gradation (cp. Brugmann, KG. nagel I, 10. 21 1). Thus bhava- or bhavi- is a 'base', bhii- 6 See below, past passive participles S74, is a 'root'. 2 a. 9 Cp. Wackernagel i, 16 (p. 19, note). 7 See Wackernagel i, 13. 1° Cp. Brugmann, KG. 73. 8 will retained in the present " See Wackernagel i, 18. This term be | 8 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

10. The vowel u. — This sound is an original vowel; e.g. t'/ 'up to'; duhitr- 'daughter'; mddhu- 'sweetness'. It also represents the low grade of or both in roots and suffixes; e. g. yugd- m. n. 'yoke', beside yoga- m.

'yoking'; supta- (AV.) 'asleep' : jz'(/?>«a- m. 'sleep'; krnu- : krnd- present base of kr- 'make'. 11. The vowel u. — This sound is an original vowel; e. g. bhru- 'brow'; sAra- 'hero'. It is also the low grade for avi, au, va; e. g. bhu-t 'has become' : bhavi-sydti 'will become'; a'/5afe'-'shaken' : dhautdrl-, f. 'shaking";

sud- 'sweeten' : svad- 'enjoy'. 12. The vowel r. — The vowel /-' is at the present day usually pronounced as ri; and that this pronunciation is old is shown by the confusion of the two sounds in inscriptions and Mss., as well as by the reproduction of r by ri in the Tibetan script ^. But r was originally pronounced as vocalic r. The

Pratisakhyas of the RV., VS., AV.3 describe it as containing an r, which

according to the RPr. is in the middle. According to the commentator on the VPr. this medial r constitutes one-half of the sound, the first and last quarter being a*. This agrees with sr), the equivalent of r in the Avesta. Except in the ace. and gen. plur. of r-stems (where f is written), the long vowel is in the RV. represented by tlae sign for r: always in forms of the verb mrd-^ 'be gracious', in the past participles trlhd- 'crushed', drlhd- 'firm', in the gen. nrndm, and in the one occurrence of the gen. tisrnam^- In the later Sarnhitas, the vowel in these instances was pronounced short'';

and it was doubtless for this reason that r came to be erroneously written for f in the text of the RV. 13. The vowel r^- —This long vowel, according to RPr. and APr.9, contains an r in its first half only. It appears only in the ace. and gen. plur. masc. fem. of f-stems; e. g. pitfn, mdirs; pitfndm, svdsfnam. Thus the f was written only where a- i- z^-stems showed analogous forms with a t u; and prosodical evidence proves that, in the RV., f is required even in the two genitives in which r is written {nrnam and tisrnSm) ^°- In the TS., how-

ever, all these genitives plur. have r'' (that is, piirnSm as well as nrnam, tisrnam). 14. The vowel /. —This sound, though pronounced as Iri at the present '^ day, was originally a vocalic /. Its description in the Pratisakhyas is analogous

to that of r. It is found only in a few forms or derivatives of the verb kip- 'be in order': caklpre, 3 pi. perf.; ciklpati, 3 sing. aor. subj.; klpti- (VS.) 'arrangement'. In the RV. r appears beside it in krp- 'form"''.

2. The diphthongs.

15. The diphthongs e and 0. — At the present day these sounds are pronounced in India as long monophthongs like e and in most European

' 8 In several instances _?• appears to re- The f of the gen. pi. is an Indian inno- present an IE. / sound. Cp. 'Wackeknagel vation; cp. 5, b 6 and 17. On the other I, P- 33- hand, IE. f- is represented by tr and (after 2 See Wackernagel i, 28. labials) ur; e. g. from kr- 'commeinorate', 3 RPr. vm. 14; VPr. IV. I45; APr. I. 37,71. klr-A- 'fame'; pr- 'fiW .Jin7--td-, n. 'reward'; as 4 Cp.BEHFEY, Vedica und Verwandtesi, 18. low grade of ra in dlrgh-a- 'long', beside

5 Except possibly RV. vll. 56"7 where the dragh-iyas- 'longer'. Cp. Wackernagel I, 22. vowel is metrically short; cp. op. cit. I, 6; 9 RPr. xui. 14; APr. I. 38. Arnold, Vedic Metre, p. 143. 1° See above, 5, b 6. 6 RV. V. 692. 'I Cp. Benfey, Vedica und Verwandtes 7 In the AV. the vowel is still metrically I. 3-

long in some of these instances : Olden- " RPr. xm. 14; VPr. IV. 145.

EERG, Prolegomena 477. 13 Cp. Wackernagel 1, 31. ,

I. Phonology. Simple Vowels. Diphthongs. languages. That they already had this character at the time of the Pratisakhyas ' and of Pariini's successors Katyayana^ and Patanjali^, appears from the accounts given by those authorities, who at the same time recognize these two sounds to be in many instances the result of the euphonic combination {samdhi, Sandhi) « of « + and a\u respectively. This evidence is borne out by the reproduction of Indian words by the Greeks'* and of Greek words by the Indians 5 from about 300 B. c. onwards. a. These two sounds as a rule represent earlier diphthongs of which the second element was i or u respectively, i. This is most evidently so when they are produced in Sandhi by the coalescence of U with t and u. As the result of such a combination they are explicable only on the assumption of an earlier pronunciation of these sounds as the genuine diphthongs ai and au. — 2. They are further based on prehistoric con- tractions within words in declension and conjugation; e. g. loc. sing, of aha- 'horse' : dive (cp. nav-i- 'in the ship') ; riom. ace. du. neut. of padd- 'step' : pade (cp. vdcas-T 'two words'); 3. sing. pot. mid. bhiveta 'should become' (cp. as-lta 'would sit'); magh6n- weak stem (=niagha-un) of maghdvan- 'bountiful'; d-voc-at 3. sing. aor. of vac- 'speak' i=^d-va- uc-at)°. — 3. These two sounds also represent the high grade corresponding to the weak grade vowels i and «; e. g. j-fVaA' 'pours', beside «/5-/o- 'poured'; bhoj-am, beside ihuj-am, aor. of bhuj- 'enjoy' 7. b. I. In a small number of words «i° represents Indo-Iranian az (still preserved in the Avesta) before d dh and h [= dh): dehi 'give', and dhehi 'set' (Av. dazdi); e-dhi 'he.'' beside ds-ti; ned-iyas- 'very near', ned-isfha- 'nearest' (Av. nazdyo, nazdisia-); med/id- 'insight' (Av. mazdas); miyedha- 'meat-juice' (Av. myazda-]; vedhds- 'adorer' (Av. vazdanh-'); sed-^ weak perf. of sad- 'sit' (Av. hazd- for Indo-Iranian sazd-)9. — 2. Similarly o'o represents az in stems ending in -as before the bh of case-endings, e. g. from dvcs-as- n. 'hatred', inst. pi. dveso-bhis; and before secondary suffixes beginning with y or v. amko-yu- 'distressing' (but apas-yit- 'active'); duvo-yu- 'wishing to give' (beside dzivas-yu-); sdho-van- (AV.) 'mighty', beside sdhas-vant- (RV.). In derivatives of sds- 'six', and of vah- 'carry',

represents az before d or dk, which it cerebralizes : s6-dasa (VS.) 'sixteen' ; so-4ha 'six- fold'; vo-dhum 'to carry'. 16. The diphthongs ai and au. — These sounds are pronounced at the present day in India as diphthongs in which the first element is short. Even at the time of the Pratisakhyas they had the value of at and ak" But that they are the etymological representatives of at and au is shown by their becoming ay and av respectively before vowels both in Sandhi" and within words; e. g. gav-as 'kine', beside gdu-s 'cow"''. That such was their original value is also indicated by the fact that in Sandhi a contracts with e^*: to ai, and with to ««'5. 17. Lengthening of vowels. — i. Before «, vowels are lengthened only (except r in the gen. pi.) in the ace. pi. in -an, -in, -un, -fn^^, where the long vowel is doubtless pre-Indian'7. 2. Before suffixal y, i and u are phonetically lengthened: a) as finals of roots; e. g. ksi-yate 'is destroyed' {Yksi-); su-ydte 'is pressed' {Ysu-); srU-yis 'may he hear' {Ysru-); b) as finals of nouns in denominatives formed with -yd and their derivatives; e. g. jani-ydnt- 'desiring a wife' {jdni-); valgu-

from the monophthongs re- 1 See Whitney on APr. i. 40. pronunciation ai du. 2 Varttika on Panini viil. 2, 106. presenting the diphthongs and 11 on APr. I. 40 and TPr. 3 Comment on Varttika 1 and 3 on Panini See Whitney u. 29. I. I, 48. 12 See below 4 Thus Kekaya-, name of a people, becomes 73. 13 i, 36. JCyjKiai; Gonda- name of a people, /ovSaXoj. Cp. Wackernagel 14 That is, originally a -{- {e =) at be- 5 Thus /irfkoi becomes ^rameba-/ia- ; upa becomes Aara. came di. 15 .That is, originally a -{ {0 =) au be- 6 Cp. Wackernagel I, 33 b. came all. 7 Op. cit. I, 33 c, d, e. ID For original a i u r -\- ns. 8 On this base see below on the Per- 17 As the J which caused the length by fect, 483 a, 2. position had already for the most part dis- 9 Cp. Wackernagel I, 34 a. in the Vedic language. 10 These e and are not distinguished in appeared I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

ydii 'treats kindly' {valgu-); gatu-ydti 'desires free course' {gati'i-; but also gatu- ydti) ' The AV.^ has a few exceptions: arati-ydti 'is hostile'; jani-ydti as well as jani-ydti^; c) i in the suffix -i-ya and in the comparative suffix -lyas. 3. Before r, if radical, i and u seem to be lengthened when a consonant

follows; e. g. gJr-bkis htside glr-as {gi'r- 'song of praise'); pur-si'i beside pi'ir-as {pur- 'fort'), but Tr and ur here represent IE. r*. In a few instances this is extended by analogy to words in which the r is not radical: asir 'blessing' {asls-); saji'ir 'together' {YJ"?')^- 4. Before v, the vowels a i u are lengthened: a) in some instances the augment: avidhyat 'he wounded' {Yvyadh-)'^; b) once before the primary suffix -vams of the perfect participle: jigT-viims- 'having conquered' (l//V-); c) often before the secondary suffixes -van^ -vana, -vatit, -vala, -vin; e. g. rta-van- 'observing order'; ktirsX-vana- (AV.) 'ploughman'; yd-vant- 'how great'; ivdsi-vant- (RV.) 'snorting' {j\fsvas-^; -krsi-vala- 'ploughman'; dvaya-vin- 'dishonest'; d) often before the second member of a compound; e. g. gurta- vasu- 'whose treasures are welcome'''. 5. Before llr. z and z, when followed by one or more consonants, vowels are lengthened by way of compensation for the loss of the z or z^; a) a (= az) in tadhi 'hew' (//fl/^j-); badhd- 'firm' {Ybamh-); sddhr- 'conquering', d-sadha- 'invincible' (l//?-); b) t^=iz in id- 'adore' {YyV' 'sacrifice', or|/z^- 'wish'); nidd- 'nest'; pid- 'press'; midhd- 'reward'; midhvAins- 'bounteous'; rldhd- 'licked' {Yrih-); vldii- 'swift'; stdati (= sizdati) 'sits'; kTd- 'be angry' (cp. /lims- 'injure'), c) u = tiz in udhd- 'borne' (j/z'^/z-); gudhd- 'concealed' {Yg^^'i-y- 6. Vowels also appear lengthened under conditions other than those

enumerated above (1 — 5). a. Final a i u are very frequently lengthened in the Sarnhitas before a single consonant owing to rhythmical predilections; from this use the lengthening of the vowels is extended to syllables which are reduplicative or precede suffixes'".

b. For metrical reasons the length is in a few words shifted to another syllable. Thus didihi often appears instead of the regular didihi; and in vira-scit 'ruhng men', vira-^'- stands for vtra-. A similar explanation perhaps applies to cardtha- 'moving', beside cardtha-; and mdhina- 'gladsome', beside mdhina-. c. The long vowel beside the short in the same stem appears in some instances to be due to vowel gradation; as in tvdtpitaras (TS.) 'having thee as a father', beside pitdras; prthu-jaghana- 'broad-hipped', beside jagkdfta-

' Before this -yd, the final of a-stems is (for dus-") e. g. in dur-gd- 'hard to tra- sometimes lengthened, but probably not verse'. phonetically; see below 6 d. 6 The lengthening of the augment in 2 See Whitney on APr. iii. i8. ayiinak, Syukta [Yyt'/-) and arinak, araik 3 No lengthening takes place in the i^ric-'', follows this analogy. optative present of verbs of the 5'h or 8'h 7 The lengthening here probably started class, e. g. srnu- (sru- 'hear'); nor in from that in Sandhi: cp. Wackernagel

adverbs formed with -_yo from z^-stems ; e.g. I, 42.

asu-yd 'swiftly' ; amu-ya 'thus'. 8 This appears to be the only kind of 4 See above on r, p. 8, note ^. compensatory lengthening in the Vedic 5 Cp. Wackernagel I, 23. When ir stands language. Cp. 17, I. for suffixal -is, it remains unchanged; c. g. 9 On e and for az as, see above, 15, a, b, havirbhis 'with oblations' {kav-is-), krivir-dat-'i and cp. Wackernagel i, 40. 10 'saw-toothed'; -zir, with genuine u, remains See Wackernagel i, 43. short in -unjara- 'field', tn-vi- 'wide', uniiya 11 Metrical shortening of a long syllable 'widely' {imc- 'wide'), urv-dn- 'desire', dur- I. Phonology. Lengthening and Loss of Vowels. Contraction.

*hip'; snu-sdk ''in continuous order', beside Mtu- 'along' as first member of a compound.

d. The lengthening of the vowel in a certain number of instances appears to be due to analogy; thus the denominatives in -ayd beside -ayd from ^-sterns (e. g. rtayd- 'observe order', beside rtayd-Y, seem to follow the model of those in -lydti and -uydti, which would account for the fluctuation in quantity.^ Tlksnd- 'sharp' (beside tigmd- : tij- 'be sharp') and hdlikma- (TS.) \)t.%\^^ halik^na- (VS.), a kind of animal, appear to owe their f to the influence of desideratives which in several instances have f (partly for older i) before ks. The reason for the u in tusnim 'silendy' {tus- 'become quiet'), and in sumnd- (VS.), otherwise sumnd- 'favour', is, however, obscure. i8. Loss of vowels. — Vowels are very rarely dropped in the language of the Samhitas. Medial loss is almost entirely restricted^ to the isolated disappearance of u before v and m. That vowel is dropped at the end of the first member of a compound in anvartita (RV^) 'wooer' (= anu-variita); dnvartisye {KSf?) T shall follow' 3; car-vadana- (AV. Paipp.) 'of lovely aspect' (= caru-vadana-) and car-vac- (AV. Paipp.) 'speaking pleasantly"^. The only example of the loss of a in this position seems to be til-pinja- (AV.) a kind of plant, beside tila-pinji- (AV\). The vowel u is further dropped before the m of the I pers. pi. pres. ending of the s'li {-mi-) class, when the u is preceded by only one consonant, in krn-mahe and krn-mdsi (AV.)3 'we do'.

Initial vowels also occasionally disappear. The only vowel that is lost with , any frequency is a, which is dropped in Sandhi after e and o, according to the evidence of metre, in about one per cent of its occurrences in the RV. and about twenty per cent in the AV. and the metrical portions of the YV.'^ In a few words its disappearance is prehistoric: in vi- 'bird'?

{Lat. avi-), possibly in «/- 'in' (Greek eV/)*, in pTd- 'press' 9, bki-sdj-''° 'healer'. a is lost in ttndn-, beside a-imdn-, but the reason has not been satisfactorily explained". In va 'like', beside iva, the loss of i is probably only apparent: cp. va 'like' (Lat. ve 'or')". Initial u seems to be lost, if the reading is not corrupt, in smasi (RV. ii. 31*) beside usmdsi 'we desire' {Yvas-). 19. Contraction. — Long vowels and diphthongs are often the result of contraction in Sandhi'^. They have frequently a similar origin in the interior of words ^+. a. Contractions of a with a vowel or diphthong are the following: 1. a. often stands for a -\- a, a + a, or a-\- a; e. g. dj-at, augmented imperfect (= d-aj-at); dd-a, red. perf. (^ a-dd-d); bhdrati, pres. subj. (= bhdra- ati); uktkd^^, inst. sing. (= ukthd-d); dsvas 'mares', nom. pi. (= dsva-as); ddti, aor. subj. (= dd-ati); devdm, gen. pi. (= devd-ant). 2. e stands for a + f and a-\-i; e.g. dive, loc. sing. (= dsva-i); padi.

(at the end of a tristubh-line), without inter- berg, ZDMG. 44, 321 ff. (Der Abhinihita change of quantity, appears in sirasu, loc. Sandhi im Rgveda). plur. of sTrd- 'stream'. 7 Cp. 25, A I; Wackernagel i, 71. 1 See below, Denominatives, 563, a. 8 Cp. Schmidt, KZ. 26, 24; Wacker- 2 Apart from the syncopation of a in low nagel 21, p. 73. grade syllables : cp. 25, A I. S Op. cit. 2', p. 71 (bottom). 10 .1 Cp. B6HTLINGK, ZDMG. 39, 533; 44, Op. cit. 21, p. 72 (bottom). 11 492 f.; cp. Oldenberg 324. Op. cit. I, p. 6 1 (top). 12 4 See Bohtlingk's Lexicon s. v. Per- Cp. op. ciL I, 53 c, note; Arnold, haps also in jdmbila- (MS.) 'knee-pan', if Vedic Metre, 129 (p. 78J. = Janu'vila-. 13 See below 69, 7°. 5 Cp. DelbriJck, AIV. 174; V. Negelein, H See above 15, a 2. Zur Sprachgeschiclite des Veda 60 {r- 15 The original inst. ending -a under the Wurzeln). influence of this contracted form became -a; 6 Cp. Wackernagel I, p. 324; Olden- cp. Wackernagel i, p. 102, mid. .

12 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar. nom. ace. du. neut. (= padd-i); bhdves, opt. pres. (= bhdva-is); yami 'twin' sisters', nom. ace. du. fem. (== yajna-t). 3. o stands for a-\-u; e. g. dvocam, aor. of vac- 'speak' (= dva-uc-am).

4. ai stands for a-\-e and, in augmented forms, a + f ; e. g. tdsmai 'to- him', dat. sing. masc. (= tdsma-e); devydi^ dat. sing. fem. (= devyd-e); dicchat, 3. sing, impf {= d-icchai); dirata, 3. pi. impf. (= d-iratd) 'set in motion'. 5. au stands for a-\-a in augmented forms; e. g. ducchat, 3. sing. impf. of vas- 'shine' (= d-ucchai); auhat, 3. sing. impf. oiuh- 'remove' (= a-Uh-af). b. Contractions of / with i or a are the following:

1. t stands for i-\-i in the nom. ace. pi. neut. of /-stems; e. g. tri 'three' (= tri-i).

2. I stands for « + / in weak forms of the perfect, when the reduplicative vowel is immediately followed by / (either original or reduced from yd)\ e. g. ts-ur (= i-is-ttr from is- 'speed'); ij-e (= i-ij-e from yaj- 'sacrifice').

3. t stands for i + a in the inst. sing. fem. and the nom. ace. du. mase. fem. of stems in -i; e. g. mati (= mati-a) 'by thought'; pdfi 'the two lords' {= pdti-a, cp. rivij-a), si'cc-T, du. fem. 'the two bright ones' (= suci-a). 4. T stands for i-\-a in compounds of dvi- 'two', ni 'down', prdti 'against", with the low grade of 5p- 'viaXef : dvTp-d- 'island'; nip-d- 'low-lying' (K.)^; pratipdm 'against the stream' ^-

5. I stands for i-\-a, when reduplicative i is followed by the low grade form of a root beginning with a : ipsa-ti (AV.), desiderative of ap- 'obtain' (= i-ip-sa-) 3. A similar contraction takes place when initial radical a is long by position, in iks-ate 'sees' (cp. dks-i 'eye') and mkh-dyati 'swings' (cp. pari- ankhdyate 'may he embrace'). In ij-ate 'drives', beside dj-ati 'drives', the contraction to f of ? + « is perhaps due to analogy*. c. Contractions of u with u (x a are the following:

1. u stands for u-\-u in weak forms of the perfect when the reduplicative vowel is immediately followed by u (either original or reduced from va); e. g. iic-e, 3 sing. mid. (= u-uc-e) from uc- 'like'; uc-i'ir (= u-uc-ur) from vac- 'speak'. 2. u stands for u-\-a in the compound formed with dnu 'along' and the low grade of ap- 'water': anup-d-'< 'pond'. 3. u stands for u-\-a in the nom. aec. du. masc. fem. of K-stems; e. g. bahu

'the two arms' ( = bahu-d). 4. u seems to stand for u-\-i in the nom. ace. pi. neuter of «-stems; e. g. vdsu (= vdsu-i), from vdsu- 'good'; but the vowel may possibly be lengthened by analogy s, for the Pada text always has u. 20. Hiatus. — a. In the written text of the Sanihitas, hiatus is, as a rule, tolerated in diphthongs only, vowels being otherwise separated by consonants. It nevertheless appears: 1. in Sandhi, when a final s y ox v has been dropped before a following vowel; when final i a e of dual endings are followed by vowels; when a remains after final e and 0; and in some other instances*; 2. in compounds, when the final j of the first member has disappeared before a vowel; e. g. dyo-agra- 'iron-pointed' (ayas- 'iron'); pura-etr- 'leader' {purds 'before'); and when, by a Prakritism, y is lost in prd-uga- 'fore-part of the shaft' {= prd-yuga-);

1 Cp. nip-ya- (VS.), 'lying at the bottom'. 4 Cp. Wackernagel I, 90 c, p. 104. 2 Cp. dnika- and prdtTka- 'face'. 5 That is, of the a and i stems; e. 3 Cp. Samprasarana I and zZ for ya and bhadra, tri. 6 See below, Sandhi 6g— 73. I. Phonology. Contraction. Hiatus. Svarabhakti. 13

3. in the simple word tltaii-^ 'sieve' (probably from tarns- 'shake'), by z. loss of J, due most likely to borrowing from an Iranian dialect (where medial s would have become A, which then disappeared). b. I. Though not written, hiatus is common elsewhere also in the Samhitas^ The evidence of metre shows that_j' and v must often be pronounced -as i and u, and that a long vowel or a diphthong has frequently the value of two vowels. When the long vowel or diphthong is the result of contraction, the two original vowels must often be restored, within a word as well as in Sandhi. Thus pdnti 'they protect', may have to be read z& pa-anti {= pi-anti)^, anjan 'they anointed' as d-anjan; jyistha- 'mightiest' as jyd-istha- {= jyi-istha- from Jya- 'be mighty'); dicchas as d-icchas 'thou didst wish'; aurnos as a-urnos "'thou didst open'*.

2. Hiatus is further produced by distraction of long vowels ^ which, as the metre shows, are in the Rgveda often to be pronounced as two short vowels. This distraction was doubtless originally due partly to a slurred accentuation which practically divided a syllable into two halves, and partly ^to the resolution of etymological contraction. From such instances distraction spread to long vowels in which it was not historically justified. It appears most often in a, especially in the gen. pi. in -am, also in the abl. sing, in -at, the nom. ace. pi. in -as, -asas of a-stems, in the ace. sing, in -am of such -words as abjdm 'born in the water'; and in many individual words ^- Distraction it is etymologically is further found in the diphthongs of words in which not justified; as in the genitives ve's 'of a bird', gos 'of a cow', in tredhd 'threefold', .ndtr- 'leader', reknas- 'property', sreni- 'row'; and in other words 7. 21. Svarabhakti. — When a consonant is in conjunction with r or a nasal, a very short vocalic sound tends to be developed between them, and the evidence of metre shows that a vowel must often be pronounced between precedes •them. It is the general view of the Pratisakhyas* that when an r another consonant a vowel is sounded after it; according to some of them call this also takes place after / or even after any voiced consonant. They describe as equal to or '/2 it svarabhakti or 'vowel-part', which they '/s, ^U, sound. -mora in length and generally as equivalent \.o a ox e (probably = e) in syllable is frequently a. The metre of the RV. shows that an additional consonant; -required in words in which r either precedes or follows 9 another (quadrisyllabic) {ndra-^°, name of a god e. g. darsatd- 'worthy to be seen' ; (very often trisyllabic); /ri 'forth' (dissyllabic)".

appearance of slurred accentuation: Wacker- 1 Cp. Wackernagel 1, 37 b, note. 2 See Oldenberg, Prolegomena 434 ff.: NAGEL I, 47. 8 I3f., VPr. iv. 16; TPr. xxi. 'Hiatus und Contraction'; Arnold, Vedic RPr. VI. I5f.; APr. I. loiff. Metre, chapter iv, p. 70 ff. (Sandhi), chapter v, 9 The vowel which has to be restored in 'p. 81 ff. (Syllabic Restoration). e the gen.loc. du. termination -^wj, which must 3 As a rule, one vowel (including and 0) Olden- always be read as a dissyllable, is not to is shortened before another: see be explained as Svarabhakti, since -taros is berg, op. cit., 465 ff.; 447 ff- the original ending. 4 Wackernagel i, 46 b. (Vocale 10 Cp. Oldenberg, ZDMG. 60, 711—745 5 See Oldenberg, op. cit., 163 ff. (Die Messung von , rudrd u. a.). mit zweisilbiger Geltung). 11 There seem to be a few instances of a 6 See Wackernagel i, 44- This is a very Svarabhakti vowel being actually written: phenomenon, as it is found in the Avesta -old the secon- forms: Olden- iardsanil, beside iras- 'tremble' ; -in the gen.pl. and in other dary derivative svaitdrim, beside svitra- (AV.) berg 181; Wackernagel i, p. 50. distraction 'white' puritsa- and piirusa- 'man', probably 7 Wackernagel i, 46. This ; parallels for *pursa- (Wackernagel I, 51, cp. 52). of diphthongs is also pre-Vedic, The initial vowel of kMo-, which is commoner being found in the Avesta. Its use gradually than lokd- 'world', has not yet been satis- decreases in the RV. and is lacking in the factorily explained; cp. op. cit. I, 52 d. Hater Samhitas, doubtless owing to the dis- 14 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. Vedic Grammar.

b. When a consonant is followed by n, n, or in, the same parasitic vowel often appears; e. g. yajnd- (= yafnd-) 'sacrifice'; gnA- (= g^nd-) 'woman'. It is, however, here frequent only as representing the second syllable after the caesura in tristubh and jagati verses; it rarely occurs at the beginning of such verses, and never at the end'.

VOWEL GRADATION.

I. The Guna series: e o an.

22. A. Low grade: / u r. — In the same root or stem the simple vowels i u r I are found to interchange^ with the respective high grade forms e o ar al^ called Guna ('secondary form'.?) by the native grammarians, according to the conditions under which the formative elements are attached. Beside these appear, but much less frequently, the long grade forms ai au ar called Vrddhi ('increase') by the same authorities. The latter regarded the simple vowels, as the fundamental grade, which, from the Indian^point of view, these vowels often evidently represent: thus from urnavdbhi- (SB.) 'spider', we have the derivative formation aurnavabhd-''S'pr\m.g from a spider'*. Comparative grammar has, however, shown that in such forms we have only a secondary application of an old habit of gradation derived from the IE. period, and that Guna^ represents the normal stage from which the low grade form, with reduced or altogether lacking vowel ^, arose in less accented syllables. This theory alone can satisfactorily explain the parallel treatment of Guna gradation {e ar beside i u r) and Samprasarana gradation {ya va ra beside i u r)^ as in dis-td-, di-des-a {dis- 'point out') and is-td-, iydj-a (yaf- 'sacrifice'). In other words, i u r can easily be explained as reduced forms of both Guna and Samprasarana syllables (as ending or beginning with i u r), while the divergent 'strengthening' of i u r, under the same conditions, to e o ar or ya va ra cannot be accounted for 7. The interchange of Guna and simple vowel is generally accompanied by a shift of accent: Guna appears in the syllable which bears the accent,, but is replaced by the simple vowel when the accent is transferred to the following syllable. This shows itself most clearly in inflexional forms; e. g. i-mi 'I go', but i-mds 'we go'; ap-nS-mi (AV.) 'I obtain', but ap-nu-mds 'we obtain'; vdrdhaya, but vrdhdya 'to further'. Hence it is highly probable that change of accent was the cause of the gradation '. a. Long grade or Vrddhi: ai, au, ar. — Vrddhi is far more restricted in use than Guna, and as it nearly always appears where Guna is to be expected, it may be regarded as a lengthened variety of it^ dating back to the IE. period.

1 See Oldenberg, Prolegomena, 374, normal stage in the gradation of the a- note. vowels in many roots: see 24; Wacker- 2 This interchange was already noticed NAGEL I, 55 b. by Vaska; see Nirukta X. 17. 6 The vowel sometimes disappears in the 3 The only root in which the gradation low grade of the a-series ('Schwundstufe') al:l is found is kip-, cp. 14. It is employed see 24. in word-formation much in the same way 7 Cp. Wackernagel I, 55. as in verbal and nominal inflexion. 8 Occasional exceptions, such as vfka- 4 See below a, 3 and cp. 25 B2; Wacker- 'wolf, are capable of explanation: cp. NA.GEL I, 55, p. 62, note (top). Wackernagel i, 57. 5 Both a and a represent the Guna or 9 'Dehnstufe'; cp. Wackernagel i, 61. :

I. Phonology. Vowel Gradation. Guna Series. 15

It is to be found i) in strong forms of a few monosyllabic substantives, in the nom. sing, of sdkhi- 'friend' and of stems in -r, and in the loc. sing, of stems in i and u: su-hard- 'good-hearted' (from hfd- 'heart'), dydu-s 'heaven'^

(from dyit-), gdu-s 'cow' (from go-); sdkka'', piia'; agnai (from ag7ii- 'fire';,

aktdu (from aktit- 'night'); 2) before the primary nominal suffixes -a, -i, -ti, -tna, -man, -vana; e.g. sparh-d- 'desirable' {Ysprh-); Mrd-i- 'hsaxt' (from kfd-); /^irj--?'- (VS.) 'drawing' {Ykrs-); sraus-tt'dbtdiitnt' {Ysrus-); (yaz^-Zraa- 'stimulating' {Y0'»-); bharman- 'board' {Y^hr-); kars-T-vana- (AV.) 'ploughman'; 3) in secondary nominal derivation, generally to form patronymics or adjectives expressive of connexion or relation ">; e. g. gairiksitd- 'descended from giri-ksif; aidijd- 'son of Usif; srautrd- 'relating to the ear' (sritra-); hairanyd- 'golden^ {hiranya- 'gold'); 4) in the singular pres. of a few verbs of the second class and in the active j-aorist of roots ending in vowels: ksndu-mi 'I sharpen'

{Yksnu-); mars-ti'^ 'he wipes' ( V^wr;-); ydu-mi (AV.) 'I unite' {Yyu^', a-jai-sam 'I have conquered' (l/>V-); ydu-s, 2 sing, 'ward off' ("j/j'^-); a-bhar-sam 'I have borne' (l/Mr-).

B. Low grade : T u fr. —The same Guna and Vrddhi forms as a rule correspond to these long vowels as to their short forms i u r. Thus bhi- 'fear' bi-bhdy-a and bi-bhay-a\ hu- 'call' : ju-hav-a; tf- 'cross' : ta-tar-a, beside tir-dte and -ttr-na- (just like sri- 'resort' : si-sray-a; sru- 'hear' : su-srav-a; kr- 'do' : -kar-d). Before consonants the roots pri- 'love', vi- 'desire', vt-

'impel', SI- 'lie'j ni- 'lead', bliT- 'fear', have Guna forms in e, the last two also> Vrddhi forms in ai; but roots in u and f have avi^ and ari as Guna^ avi and ari as Vrddhi, respectively; e. g. pa- 'purify', aor. pavi-sta and apavisur; kr- 'scatter', aor. subj. kari-saV.

a. t and u instead of Guna. In a few verbs and some other words

I and U are the old weak grade vowels (almost invariably medial) of e and 0, the length of which has been preserved by the accent shifting to them (while when not thus protected they have been shortened to i and u), and which as thus accented, sometimes appear instead of the Guna vowels. Thus i is found in ris-ant- 'injuring' {= *rts-dn(-), beside resa-, the low grade form of the radical syllable otherwise becoming ris-^. Similary gfihati 'hides' appears beside goh-a- 'hiding-place', the root being also shortened in guh-ydte, etc.; dus-dyati 'spoils', beside dos-a- and dosds- (AV.) 'evening', also dus-ti- (AV.)

'destruction'; ih-ati 'removes', beside 6h-a- 'gift'; nU 'now', , nti-tana- 'new',. nu-ndm 'now', beside ndva- 'new', also ni'c 'now' (never at the beginning of a sentence); mUs- 'mouse', beside mosatha 'ye rob', also musitd- 'stolen'; yiipa- 'post', he:a\die yuyopa 'has infringed', also yupitd- (AV.) 'smoothed'; sta-pa- 'tuft'^ beside sto-kd- 'drop', also stu-pd- (VS.) 'tuft '9.

b. In a few roots ending in »'", the radical vowel i represents the low

1 With loss of the final element, which 6 They have in the intensive redupli- however, remains in datives like idsmai, cation only; e. g. sosu- : ysii-. probably because the diphthong was here 7 Cp. Wackernagel i, 76. pronounced with a slurred accent: cp. 8 The accentuation of i, the low grade of WackernAgel I, 93. ya, is probably to be explained similarly in 2 With loss of r, the preceding vowel feminines like napti-s ira.s^sc.ndpat-'); shortened having compensatory IE. lengthening (cp. to napti in voc; cp. 19 b 3 and 29. the Wackernagel I, 61 c). In a, few instances, 9 The accentuation of u, low grade of the Vrddhi of the nom. sing, spread to other 11a is probably to be explained similarly in cases (cp. 25 B b l); e. g. iar-as, nom. pi., feminines like kadrii-s {^^. B.) 'brown' (masc. from old nom. sing. *sidr (beside stf-hhis). kadru-m, TS. B.); shortened to u in voc, 3 Also agndu, like the 2<;-stems. s.g.bibhru; cp. Wackernagel i, 82. 4 See below 191. 10 That is, the original form would have 5 From the present the^ ar spread to been tu- or iu- according as a vowel or a other forms, e. g. perf. mamarja (AV.). consonant followed. i6 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. Vedic Grammar. grade, but early began to supplant e; thus from div- 'play', beside dideva (AV.), dev-ana- 'game of dice', occur div-yati, div-i and div-i dat. and loc. of div- 'game of dice'; from sriv- 'fail', beside Jrevdyant-, srivayati (AV.); but from miv- 'push', only miv-ati etc.; from siv- 'sew', only siv-yati etc. It is a peculiarity of these roots that iv appears before vowels and y only, becoming yu or u before other consonants; thus dyu-td- (AV.) 'play'; -mu-ta- 'impelled', mu-rd- 'duir, nui-tra- (AV. VS.) 'urine'; syu-id- 'fastened', su-d- 'needle', sd-ira- (AV.) 'thread'; srd- 'lead ball".

II. The Samprasarana '' series.

a. Gradation of ya va ra.

23. Low grade: / u r\ — In place of the accented syllables ya va ra (corresponding to the Guna vowels e ar) appear the low grade vowels i u r* when the accent shifts to the following syllable in some fourteen roots, viz. yaj- 'sacrifice', jyae- 'extend', vyadh- 'pierce', vac- 'speak', vad- 'speak', vap- 'strew', vai- 'be eager', vas- 'dwell', vas- 'shine', vah- 'carry'; svap- 'sleep', ^raM- wAgrah- 'st\zt\ pracck- (properly /ra/-) 'ask', vrasc- 'hew';

e. g. is-td- : yds-tave; us-mdsi : vds-ti; susup-vArns- : susvdpa. a. Besides these, a good many other roots, in occasional verbal forms or nominal derivatives, show the same gradation in the radical syllable.

1. / appears in inimiksi'ir : mimydksa perf. of ywjai/-; vithura- 'wavering', vithurydti 'wavers', beside vydth-ate 'wavers'.

2. u in uksant- 'growing' : vavdksa 'has grown'; sus-dnt- : svas-iti 'breathes'; ju-hur-as : hvdr-ati 'is crooked'; ur-u- 'broad': comp. vdr-Tyas-^ superl. vdr-istka-\

Mr- : dvdr- 'door'; dhun-i- 'resounding' : dhvan-i- (AV.) 'sound'. r in 'laments': aor. akrapista; grnaiti {KS[ gratk-itd- 'tied'; 3. krpate .) :

-irth-ita- : srath-nati 'becomes loose'; rj-i'i.- 'straight' : rdj-istha- 'straightest'; rbh-u-

'adroit' : rdbh-ate 'grasps'; drh-ya 'be firm' (impv.) : drah-ydt 'firmly'; prth-u-

'broad' -.prdth-ati 'spreads out'; bhrin-d- 'error' : bhram-d- 'whirling flame'; d-ni-bhrs-ta- 'undefeated': bhras-at aor., bhras-td- {KSl^ 'fallen'; mrd-ti- 'soft':

mrada 'soften' (impv.), Urna-mradas- 'soft as wool.'; sfk-van- : srdk-va- 'corner of the mouth'. b. This gradation also appears in the stems of a few nouns and in certain

nominal suffixes: dyu-bhis : dydv-i loc, dydu-s nom. 'heaven'; sun- : svd-, svdn-

'dog' iydn- {=yic-un-) -.yi'iva-, yuvan- 'youth'; catur- : catvar- 'four'; the superlative

and comparative suffixes -is-tha and -yas; the perf part, suffix -us : -vat, -vanis 5.

•' b. Gradation of ya va ra.

24. Lo'w grade: T u Tr. — Corresponding to the reduction of the short syllables ya va ra to the short vowels / u r, the long syllables ya va ra

appear as T u ir {^= IE. f).

1 The etymology of this word is, how- to suppose that every i and u has a similar ever, doubtful. Cp. Wackernagel i, 81. origin. On the contrary, it is more lilcely 2 In the terminology of the native gramma- that IE. i and u have been preserved by rians Samprasarana ('distraction') designates the side of the reduced vowels and that the the change of the semi-vowel only to the Guna grade has in many instances been corresponding vowel (but see also Panini VI. subsequently added to original i and u. I, ro8). Here we use the word to express Cp. Pedersen, if. 2, 323, note. the reduction of the entire syllables ya va ra 4 This reduction goes back to the IE. pre-

to the corresponding vowels z u r. tonic syncope oieo: cp. Wackernagel I, 62 3 Though ;• seems invariably to have (p. 69, mid.). — On the two forms of the roots

resulted from the reduction of Guna or cp. also Niruktall. 2 and Mahabhasya I, 112. Samprasarana syllables, there is no reason 5 See Wackernagel i, 63. ; ;

I. Phonology. Samprasarana Series. «- Series. 17

a. I is found thus both in radical and suffixal syllables: i. in jt-td- {AN.) ji-ydte (AV.) and ji-yate : -jyii- 'might', Jyi-yas- 'stronger', ji-jya-sant- 'desiring to overcome'; 2. in the fem. suffix -v. kan-i-nam (for kani-nam) from kanya- 'girl'; in nom. ace, e. g.^ , devim, , beside -ya- in dat. abl. gen. loc. sing. devydi {=devya-e), devyas {^devya-as), devy&m (= devya-ani); 3. in the optative, either before or after the accented syllable, beside -ya-; e. g. bruv-i-td and bhdret {= bkdra-t-t), but i-ya-t. b. U is found: i. in forms of sud- 'put in order' (= 'make palatable'), e. g. su-sud-ati, sud-dyati, sam-sud-d- (TS.) 'gum', beside forms and derivatives of svad- 'enjoy', 'taste', e. g. svada-te, svattd-, svad-u- 'sweet'; 2. in fem.

nouns in -u beside -va in dat. abl. gen. loc. sing.; e. g. svasrd- 'mother-in-law', dat. svasr-vdi (AV., = svasr-va-e), gen. svasr-vds (AV., = svasr-vi-as), loc. svasr-vam (= svasr-vd-am). c. tr (= f) is found in dirgh-d- 'long', beside dragh-tyas- 'longer', dragh- istha- 'longest', drdgh-mdn- 'length'.

III. The fl-series.

a. Gradation of a.

25. A. Low grade: a or -, — Many roots and formatives have a in the Guna or normal stage. The reduction of r from ar or ra indicates that in low grade syllables this a would normally disappear. As a rule, however, it remains', doubtless because its loss would in most cases have led to unpronounceable or obscure forms'- At the same time, the syncope takes place in a considerable number of instances:

1. in verbal forms: ad- 'eat' : d-dnt- (= old pres. part.) 'tooth'; as- 'be':

s-dnti, s-yat, s-dnt-, beside ds-ti 'is'; gam- 'go' •.ja-gm-ur; ghas- 'eat' : a-ks-an, 3. pi. impf., g-dha (= ghs-td), 3. sing. impf. mid., Ja-ks-tydt, perf. opt., beside gkas-a-i ^Tii3,y he eat'; pat-'iaR' pa-pi-ima, pa-pt-iir, pa-pt-ivdms-, perf, a-pa-pt-at, :

aor., heside pd:(-anfi ; pad- 'go' -.pi-bd-a-mana-, led. -pres. paxt, pi-bd-and- 'standing

firm', beside pdd-yate 'goes'; bhas- 'chew' : -ps-ati, 3 pi. pres., bd-ps-at-, pres.

part., beside bhds-a-t 'may he chew'; sac- 'follow' : sd-sc-ati, 3. pi. red. pres., sa-sc-ata, 3. pi. impf. mid., sa-sc-ire, 3. pi. perf. mid., beside sac-ante 'they

accompany'; sad- 'sit' : sid-ati (= si-zd-ati), 3. sing, pres., sed-i'cr {= sa-zd-i'ir), pi. perf., beside d-sad-at 'he sat'; han- strike' gAn-dnii, pi. pres., beside 3. : 3. hdn-ti 3. sing.

2. in nominal derivatives: ghas- ^e&t' : a-g-dhid- (TS.) 'eating what is uneaten' (= a-ghs-ta-ad-), sd-g-dhi (VS.) 'joint meal' {= sa-ghs-ti-); bhas-

'chew' : d-ps-u- 'foodless'; pad- 'walk' : upa-bd-d-, upa-bd-i- 'noise' (lit. 'tread');

tur-iya- 'fourth' (^ *ktur-iya-) : cati'ir- 'four'; napt-i- 'granddaughter' : ndpat- 'grandson'. 3. in suffixes: -s- for -as- in bhi-s-a, inst. sxng.-.bhiy-ds-a 'through fear';

sir-s-dn- : sir-as- 'head'; -s for -as in the abl. gen. sing^ ending of stems vni u 0: e. g. agnfs, visno-s, go-s. B. Long grade: a.— The Vrddhi corresponding to the a which represents the Guna stage is a. It appears: a. in the root: I. in primary nominal derivation: thus pdd- 'foot': pad-, bd- 'walk'; raj-

1 See Wackernagel i, 70. 'go' : ga-ta- ; dyu-mdnt-, inst. sing, dyu-mat-a 2 When a is followed by n or m, the nd-man; inst. pi. nama-bhis. The a in such syllables an and am, if preceded by a con- low grade syllables is generally regarded as sonant, usually lose the nasal before mutes historically representing the sonant nasal n : cp. i, 66. e. g. han- strike' : -tkas 2. du. pres. ; gam- Wackernagel Indo-arische Philologie. I. 4. 2 :

i8 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

'king' : raj-, rj- 'direct'; vac- 'voice' : vac-, uc- 'speak'; ksis, nom., ksim, ace,

'earth' : ksam-, kpn-; nabh- 'well' : ndbk-as, abh-rd- {abh- = nbh-) 'cloud'.

Also before primary suffixes: ap-as : dp-as 'work'; vas-as 'garment' : vas-, us-

'wear'; vSh-as 'offering' : vah-, uh- 'convey'; vSs-tu 'abode' : vas-, tis- 'dwell'.

Perhaps also pith-as 'place' : path- 'path' '.

2. in secondary nominal derivation; e. g. kanvd- 'descended from ';.

vapus-d- 'marvellous' : vdp-us- 'marvel'.

3. in the active of the j-aorist: thus a-cchant-s-ur : chand-, chad- (= cAnd-) 'appear'; a-yam-s-am, i. sing. -.yam-, ya- {= ym-) 'stretch'; sak-s-ama, also mid. ^- sak-s-i, sak-s-ate : sah- 'overcome' b. in the suffix of nominal stems: 1. in the nom. sing. masc. of stems in -mant and -vant, and throughout the strong cases of stems in -an, of mahdt- 'great', and of ndpat- 'grandson':

thus dyu-mSn 'brilliant' : dyu-mdnt-, dyu-mdt- (= -mnt-); re-vdn 'rich' : re-vdnf-,

re-vdt- (= vni-^^; rsj-a, ace. raj-afi-am 'king' : rdj-an-, rsj-n-, raj-a- {= raj-n-); mah-in, ace. mah-ant-am; ndpat, ace. ndpat-am. 2. in the nom. ace. pi. neuter of stems in -an and -as and of one in

-ant; thus ndma* 'names' : nAman, ndma- {= nSmn-); mdnams-i 'minds' : mdn-as;

sdnt-i : s-dnt- 'being'. c. in anu- as first member of a compound in anu-sdk and anukdm

'continuously' : otherwise anu-.

b. Gradation of a.

26. Low grade: /. — The vowel a is not always the long grade vowel: in a number of roots it represents Guna. The low grade of this a is

normally /; it sometimes, however, appears as i, owing to analogy 5, and,

especially with a secondary accent, as a. Thus sthi-td- : stha-s 'thou hast

dhi-td- : 'pXa.cts' pu-ni-M pu-nd-ti, ixova pa- '^gvaiiy' stood'; dd-dha-ti ; : ; gdh-ana-

'depth', gdh-vara- (AV.) 'hiding-place' : ^(i/4-a/^ 'plunges'. a. The low grade vowel disappears: i. in roots ending in a before vowel terminations; in the weak forms of the reduplicated present base of da- 'give' and dha- 'put', before all terminations;' and in the weak form of the suffix -na- in the ninth class before vowel terminations; thus in the perf. of da-: dad-dthur, dad-atur; dad-d, dad-ur; dad-e; in the pres. oi dha-: dadh- mdsi; beside pu-nd-ti 'he purifies', pu-n-dnti 'they purify'. Similarly from ha- 'forsake' occurs, in the opt. pres., the form jah-yat (AV.). 2. in the final member of compounds formed with the perf. part, passive of da- 'give', and da- 'cut', or with a substantive in -ti- from da- 'give' devd-tta-, a name ('given by the gods'); dva-tta- (VS.) 'cut off'; pdrT-tta- (VS.) 'given up'; d-pratl-tta- {tiN^ 'not given back'; bhdga-tti- 'gift of fortune'; maghd-tti- 'gift of presents'; vdsu-tti- 'gift of wealth' (beside vdsu-dhiti- 'bestowal of wealth' : dha.-). Also in -dh-^ 'fire-placer', a kind of priest 7.

1 Cp. Aui'RECHT, BB. 14, 33; Wacker- 5 That is, under the influence of i as NAGEL I, 72 (p. 79, bottom). low grade of ai which before consonants 2 Op. cit. I, 72 b S (p. 80). appears as a, as in gT-ld- beside ga-thd-, 3 The long vowel in these nominatives from gai- 'sing', pres. gdv-ati; cp. 27 a. is to be accounted for by IE. compensatory ^ Cp. agni-dhana- 'fire-place' ; in VS. lengthening [-man = mant-s, etc.); in the agntdh- appears instead, as if 'fire-ldndler' following examples it has spread from the (from idh- 'liindle'). nominative to other cases. 7 For a few other examples (which are 4 Such neuter plurals were in origin prob- doubtful) of the loss of the low grade vowel ably feminine singular collectives : cp. Brug- in the final member of compounds, see

MANN, KG. 481 ; Wackernagel I, 73 and 95. Wackernagel i, p. 82 (mid.). :

I. Phonology, a Series, ai and au Series. 19

IV. The ai and au series.

a. Gradation of ai.

27. Low grade: 7. — As the final of roots and in suffixes i is graded with ai (as with ya^), which appears as ay- before vowels and as a- before consonants". The roots in which this gradation is found are stated by the Indian grammarians in five different forms. They are:

a. I. roots given with -ai- (because their present base appears as -ay-a) : gai- 'sing' : gi-td-, gT-yd-mana-, beside gAy-ati 'sings', -giy-as 'song', and ga-s-i, 1. sing. aor. vaiA., ga-thd- 'song'; pyai- 'swell' -.pT-nd-, beside pydy-aie; s'rai- 'boil': srT-nA-ti, srT-td-, beside irdy-ati, sra-td-. — 2. with -ay-: cay- ^o\)%ex\€ : cikt-hi (AV.), beside cay-amana-, cay-i'i- 'respectful'. — 3. with -e-: dhe- 'sxssHs! -.dhi-td-, beside dhdy-as 'drink', dhay-i'o- 'thirsty', and dha-tave 'to suck', dha-ru- (AV.) 'sucking'. — 4. with -a-\ pa- 'drink' :/r-/i2'-, /r-^/- 'drink', beside pay-dyati, caus., pdy-dna- 'causing to drink', and d-pa-t, aor., pd-tave; rd- 'give' : ra-ri-thds, 2. sing, injv., beside rdy-a 'with wealth', and rd-sva, impv., rd-m, ace. — 5. with -r- ni- 'lead' : ;^r-/«'-, beside ndy-d- 'leader', and -na-thd- (AV.) 'help'; pi- 'revile': pi-yati, pT-ya-tnu- and pi-y-u- 'reviler', beside pay-u- (VS.) 'anus'; prT- 'love': pri-nd-ti, prT-td-, beside prdy-as-e^; s'l-^ 'lie'; -si-van- 'lying', beside a-say-ata, 5 3. sing. b. This gradation also occurs in the final of dissyllabic bases: thus grabhi-sta, a-grahhi-t, grhhi-td-, beside grbhay-dti 'seizes'*; and in the base of the ninth class: grbhni-ta, 2. pi., beside grbhni-ti. c. It is also found in the suffixes -ethe -ete and -ethdm -etam of the 2. 3. du. mid. of the a-conjugation, which can only be explained as containing ithe Tte and itham ftam, with weak grade t corresponding to the accented a of dike die and dthdm dtam of the non-thematic conjugation (and parallel to the -I- of the optative beside -ya-'').

b. Gradation of au.

is 28. Low grade : 0. — As the final of roots u graded with au (parallel with vd ^), much in the same way as f with ai, appearing as av before vowels, d before consonants 9; but the certain examples are few. Thus dhu-no-ti 'shakes', dha-ti- 'shaker', dhu-md- 'smoke', beside dhdv-ati 'runs', dha-rd- 'stream'; dhu-td- 'washed',, beside dhdv-ati 'washes'. But here au appears 'shake'; before consonants as well as a; thus dhau-tdri- ^ 'shaking', beside dha- and dhau-ti- 'spring', dhau-td- (SV.), beside dhdv-ati 'washes'. Similarly gd-m

1 See above 24. to this e that ay- sometimes appears instead 2 ai appears only in the j-aor., as nai-s-ta, of ay- in some of the above verbs; as iroaiypri-;ray-i-'vrea,\th.', 2. pi., rii- 'lead', owing to the analogy of /;-fly-iZf- 'enjoyment', forms like d-jai-s-, from Ji- 'conquer'. from yra-; idy-e, 3. sing., from if- 'lie'. 6 3 Occurs RV. IV. 21' (Pp. pro. ayase (and is Cp. Wackernagel i, 79 b (p. 89). explained by Bohtlingk (pw.) as ==prayase. 7 Op. cit. I, 79 c (p. 89). 8 b. 4 Perhaps also in iT- 'fall' : ityate (AV.), See above 24 beside iata-yati 'cuts off', which may be a 9 Similarly in the RV. the -au of duals and denominative from *sa.-ta- 'fallen'. Cp. of as/du 'eight' normally appears as dv before Whitney, Roots, under ysat- and j/i h-; vowels and a before consonants in Sandhi. nominatives in a of -r stems and -an Wackeenagel I, 79 a S (p. 88). The sva 'dog', are probably 5 In some of the above roots e appears stems, e. g. ma/a, final r instead of a before consonants; e. g. ce-ru- due originally to the loss of the and sentence, 'devout', beside cay-u-; pe-ru- 'causing to n before consonants in the then drink', beside pay-ana-; dhe-nic- 'milch cow', becoming the regular form everywhere. as^du the only in- dhi-na- id.; U-se, beside a-iay-ata; ne-tf-, Conversely has become the asfa- appearing beside na.y-a-; ste-nd- 'thief, beside stay-u- dependent form in AV., first member of a compound. Cp. (VS.) id., and std:^-ant- (AV.) 'furtive'; sena- only as missile', beside say-oka-. It is, perhaps, due Wackernagel i, 94, 95. 2* )

I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar. and gii-s, ace, beside g&v-as, nom. pi., but gau-s, nom. sing., 'cow'; and dya-m, ace. sing., beside dyAv-as, nom. pi., but dydu-s, nom. sing., 'heaven'.

V. Secondary shortening of / u r.

29. Low grade: / u r. — Owing to the shift of the accent from its normal position in a word to its beginning, the low grade vowels J u ir ur (=f are often further shortened to i u r in compounds and reduplicated forms. A pre-tonic syllable thus acquires a post-tonic position, where the force of the accent is weakest. It is the same cause which shortens final weak grade i and u in the vocative singular; e. g. devi, nom. devi; svdsru, nom. svasrUs'^. This shortening often appears in: a. compounds^:

1. those in which the final member is derived with -ta- and -ti-, the accent being regularly thrown back on the first member •5; thus d-ni-si-ta- 'resdess', «/-«-/«- (TS. B.) 'night', from sT 'lie'; prd-si-ti- 'onset', beside sdy-aka- 'missile'''; su-su-ti- 'easy birth', beside sfiti-ka- (AV.) 'lying-in woman'; a-str-ta-

'unconquered', d-ni-str-ta- 'not overthrown', beside stir-nd-, from sir- 'strew' 5; a-huti- 'invocation', otherwise -hu-ti- in sd-huti- 'joint invocation', devd-huti- 'invocation of the gods', and other compounds. 2. those in which the final member is a root in t^ or u with or without the suffix -t; e. g. dhi-jit- 'thought inspiring', beside jii- 'hastening', ju-td- 'impelled'; very often -bhii-, beside bhu-, as in d-pra-bhu- 'powerless', vi-bhi'c- 'mighty'; ni-yu-t- 'team', beside yu- 'unite' (as in yu-thd- 'herd'). 3. those in which the final member is formed with other suffixes; thus madhydn-di-na- 'midday', su-di-na- 'bright', beside di- 'shine'; su-su-mdnt- 'very stimulating', beside su-td- 'impelled'; also in tuvi-gr-d- and tuvi-gr-i- 'much devouring', beside sam-gir-d- (AV.) 'devouring', as r here = rT. 4. some Bahuvrlhis (in which the first member is normally accented)*; thus brJidd-ri-'^ 'possessing much wealth' (rdi-); try-udh-dn- 'having three udders', beside tldh-an- 'udder'. b. reduplicated forms" in which accentuation of the reduplicative syllable, especially in the third class and one form of the aorist, counteracts the normal accent of the verb; thus from di- 'shine', are formed di-di-hi, 2.sing.impv., di-di-vSms-, perf part, ^/-(/z-z'z- 'shining', 'btsiA.t df-paya- (causative)

1 Cp. 23. 5 The secondarily shortened form of the 2 The application of this shortening pro- past part, str-ta- is not found as an in- cess becomes obscured, on the one hand dependent word in the RV.; it first appears because the phonetically shortened vowel in later texts.

has found its way into accented final 6 An example of the shortening of i is members of compounds as being character- perhaps adki-ksi-t- 'ruler', ksX- being according

istic of the end of a compound; while, on the to J. Schmidt, Pluralbildung 419, the original other hand, Tulr ur (=iP)forthe most part weak form of the root; cp. Wackernagel have remained unchanged, even when the I, 83 b. accent has shifted, because of the influence of 7 Cp. Kketschmer, KZ. 31, 397; Wacker- the uncompounded word; e.g. su-siita-'^^- nagel I, 83 u. begotten','J»-d-suia- 'impelled'; a-kuti- 'inten- 8 See accentuation of compounds, go.

tion' ; rid-dhiti- 'truly adored' ; pra-tilrti- 9 Occurring only in the dat. sing, brhdd- 'onset'. raye, beside rdy-e, dat. of rdi- 'wealth'. 3 That this is the cause of the shortening 1° On the shortening of the radical syllable is shown by the fact that the i of the inst. in some verbs of the fifth and the ninth sing, of derivatives in -ti appears as z only classes, ji-no-si, beside ji-rd- 'lively', dic-no-ii when such words are compounded: e. g. 'burns', beside dii-nd- (AV.); 7a-?«a-ft' 'impels', prd-yiikti 'with the team'. Cp. Wackernagel hesiiej'u-id-; pu-na-ii 'purifies', beside pu-^d-, I, 84. see Wackernagel i, 85, note (bottom). * Cp. 27, note 5. 1

I. Phonology. Secondary Shortening of r « f. Consonants. 2

Tsindle'; from dhi- 'think', dx-dhi-ma, i. pi. perf., di-dhi-ti- 'devotion', beside dhi-ti- 'thought'; from kf- 'commemorate', car-kr-se, intv., car-kr-ti- 'praise',

beside kir-ti- 'praise'; from/f- fill', pi-pr-tdm, 3. du., beside pur-nd- and J>ar-td-. Such shortening often occurs in red. aor., e. g. bi-bhis-a-thas, 2. sing, mid., beside vi-bhh-ana- 'terrifying'. It is also found in a few nouns; e. g. H-ii-ra- {PiiSf:) 'coolness', beside h-td- 'cold'; tu-tu-md- beside ta-ya- 'strong' '-

The Consonants.

30. Doubling of consonants. — All consonants, except r /5 /, Anusvara, and Visarjamya, can be doubled, and the distinction between double and single consonants is known to the Pratisakhyas as well as to Panini. Aspirates are, however, nearly always written double by giving the first in the unaspirated form. A double consonant^ is pronounced by the organs of speech dwelling longer on it than on the single sound. Within words ^ a double consonant appears: 1. as the result of the contact of the same consonants or the assimilation < of different ones; e. g. cit-td- 'perceived' (= cit-ta-); uc-cd- 'high' (= ud-ca-); bhet-tr- 'breaker' (= bhed-ir-); dn-na- 'food' (= ad-na-). 2. in a few onomatopoetic words: akhkhali-krtya 'shouting'; ciccikd- a kind of bird; kukkutd- (VS.) 'cock'; tittiri- (VS.) and tittiri- (TS. B.) 'quail'; pippaka- (VS.) a kind of bird. 3. in the case of the palatal aspirate, which regularly appears as cch between vowels (though often written as ch in the Mss.), for it always makes the preceding vowel long by position and is derived from an original conjunct consonant*. Some forms of khid- 'press down', are doubled after a vowel in the TS. {fzkkhidat, d-kkhidra-; a-kkhidate, pari-kkhidate). In the TS.* bh appears doubled in pari bbhuja. In a school of the White Yajurveda

initial v was regularly doubled '. 4. when final n is doubled after a short vowel if followed by any vowel sound '*- a. In the Mss., when double consonants are preceded or followed by another con- sonant9, one of them is frequently dropped, because in such consonantal groups there was no difference in pronunciation between single and double consonants. Hence the VPr. (vi. 27) prescribes a single / in ksaiira- 'dominion' (= ksad-ira-), and in saitrd- 'sacrificial session' (= sad-Ira-'). Such shortening is further presupposed by the analysis of the Pada texts in kr[d)-dyotah (AV. I. 22') and hr(d)-dy6tanah (AV. v. 20^2) as hr-dyotdh

and hr-dyoianah; in id(d]dyd}>i (AV. IV. 1 96) as idt yam (instead of tat dydni); and in updstha-, which appears in the RV. Pada as upd-stha- instead of ufds-stha-, if Grassmann's suggestion is right 1°. In some instances this reduction is IE., as in satrd- (IE. seilo-)^^.

1 On variations in cognate forms between as in dviksat (AV.) = *dvis-sat, aor. of dvis- i « f and i u r in some other words see 'hate', is also an Indian innovation. Wackernagel I, 86. 3 On double consonants in Sandhi, see 2 Sometimes a single j represents the below 77. double sound, as in asi 'thou art' (= as-si); 4 The evidence of theAvestan iaxva.vsr3^ka- apdsu (RV. VIII. 414), loc. pi. of apds- 'active'; shows that the double consonant in vrkkd- dmhasu (AV.), loc. pi. of dnihas- 'distress'; (AV. VS.) 'kidney' is due to assimilation. j6-si 'thou shalt taste' (Jus-); probably also in 5 See below 40; Wackernagel i, 133. gho-si [ixora. ghus- 'sound'}, in us-ds, gen. sing., 6 See TPr. xiv. 8. ace. pi. of us-, weak stem of us-ds- 'dawn' 7 See Weber, Abh. d. Berliner Ak. d. ffor *uss-as), possibly in usr- 'dawn' (for Wiss. 1871, p. 83 f. *uss-r-). As the single t in such forms is 8 See below 46; cp. Wackernagel \ shown by cognate languages also, it seems 279 a. here to be pre-Vedic, and the double ss in 9 Cp. Roth in ZDMG. 48, 102 f. forms like rdjas-su, loc. pi., is probably an 1° See his Lexicon, s. v. updstha-. II Indian innovation. The change of ss to ks, See Wackernagel i, 98 b, note. :

I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

Mutes.

31. Modes of articulation. — There are 20 mutes (or 22 counting//-^ among the cerebrals), which comprise a tenuis, an aspirate tenuis, a media, and an aspirate media in each of the five groups of gutturals, palatals, cerebi^als, dentals, and labials (4). These four modes of articulation are initially and medially liable to but little variation except when they come into contact with other mutes or with following sibilants.

1. The tenues regularly represent IE. tenues; e. g. cakrd- 'wheel', Gk. /c'JkXo-?; fitr- 'father', Gk. iraTrip, Lat. pafer. 2. The mediae regularly represent IE. mediae; e. g. gdcchati, Gk. ^a.

'undivided' /re- 'mix'; girikd- (MS,) : kirikd- (VS.)^ a kind of dn-ava-prgna- : demon. These examples may be due to popular dialects, in which tenues largely became mediae^. In a few derivatives the media g appears instead of k before \ht n m v of suffixes owing to the influence of Sandhi : e. g. vag-nu- 'sound', from vac- 'speak', but rik-nas- 'wealth', from ric-; sag-md- 'helpful', from sak-, but ruk-md- 'gold', from rue- 'shine'; vag-vin- (AV.) 'eloquent', from vak 'speech', but tak-vd- 'swift', from tak- 'hasten'. 3. The evidence of cognate languages shows that the Vedic aspirate tenuis in a large number of instances is original, and it is highly probable that it is the regular representative of IE. aspirate tenuis. The following are examples in which mutes of this character are inherited 3; a. khan- 'dig'; kJia- 'spring'; khad-ati 'chews'; nakhd- 'nail'; makhd- 'lively'; mukha- 'mouth': safikhd- (AV.) 'shell'; sdkhi- 'companion'. b. ch = IE. sM, e. g. in cAid- 'split'; = IE. s£ in inchoative gdcchati 'goes', ucchdti 'shines'. c. th = th in sas-thd- (VS. AV.) 'sixth'; sthiv-ati (AV.) 'spits'. d. th'> in dtha 'then'; athari- 'tip'; dtharvan- 'fire-priest'; drtha- 'use';

'V.-a.oH 'vi&y' prtk-u- 'hronA' prdth-as 'hrtadih' prethat- 'snorting'; granth- ; path- ; ; ; math- 'stir'; mith- 'alternate'; yd-tha 'as'; rdtha- 'car'; vyathate 'wavers'; snath- 'pierce'. Further in the various suffixes -tha: forming primary nouns; e. g.

uk-thd- 'praise', ga-thd- f. ga-thi- 'song'; as -atha in svas-dtha- 'hissing'; forming ordinals: catur-thd- (AV.) 'fourth'; saptd-tha- 'seventh'; forming 2. sing,

perf. : ^ijiate-z'/zia: 'thou gavest', »//-i'/lfl; 'thou knowest'; forming 2. pi. pres.: bhava-

tha 'ye are'; also in -thas of 2. sing, mid., e. g. a-sthi-thas 'thou hast stood'. e. ph in phdla- 'fruit'; phala- 'ploughshare'; sphar- and sphur- 'jerk'; sphd{j)- 'grow fat'. 4. The aspirate media, which represents the same IE. sound, is a media combined with h. This is proved by the express statements of the

Pratisakhyas 5 ; by the fact that Ih = dh is written with the separate letters / and h; and by the change of h following a media to an aspirate media (as tdd dhi for tdd hi). a. In two or three words an aspirate media interchanges with an aspirate tenuis nadhamana- 'praying', nadhita- 'distressed', beside nathiia- 'distressed' (where th is probably due to the influence of -naiha- 'help'); ddha and dtha 'then' 6; nisaitgadhi- (VS.) and nisahgdthi- (TS.) 'scabbard'.

I For some doubtful instances of media sprachliche tenuis aspirata dentalis im ari- representing IE. tenuis, see Wackernagel schen, griechischen und lateinischen' by I, 100 b, p. 117, note. 2 L c. ZUBATY in KZ. 31, I —9. 3 Op. cit. loi. 5 RPr. XIII. 2. 5 ; TPr. II. 9. t A complete list of Vedic and Sanskrit 6 There seem to have been a few IE. words containing th in his article 'Die ur- doublets ofthiskind: seeWACKERNAGEL 1,103. ,

I. Phonology. Mutes. Modes of Articulation. Loss of Aspiration. 2 3

32. Loss of aspiration. — Aspiration is lost when there is another aspirate in the same syllable or at the beginning of the next in roots \ Hence

a. initial aspiration is lost: i. in the reduplicative syllable: e. g. ja- ghsn-a {han-, ghan- 'strike'); ca-cchand-a (chand- 'please'); da-dha-ti {dha- 'put'); par-phar-at {phar- 'scatter'?). But when the reduplication consists of two syllables, the rule does not apply; e. g. ghdni-ghan-at, intv. part, of han- (beside jan-ghn-at), ghana-ghan-d- 'fond of striking'; bhdri-bhr-at, intv. part, of bhr- 'bear'. Loss of aspiration, however, began, even in the RV.^, to spread from monosyllabic to dissyllabic reduplication; thus a-pdni-phan-at, intv. part, of phan- 'bound'. — 2. in the following words, according to the

evidence of cognate languages: kumhhd- 'pot' 3; gadh- 'attach'; gdbhas-ti- 'arm'; guh- 'conceal'; grdh- 'be greedy'; grhd- 'house'; grabh- 'seize'; jdmhas 'gait'; jdngha- 'leg'; jaghdna- 'buttock'; dabh- 'harm'; dah- 'burn'; dih- 'besmear'; duh- 'milk'; duhitf- 'daughter'; drahydt 'strongly'; druh- 'injure'; bandh- 'bind'; babhru- 'brown'; badh- 'distress'; bahii- 'arm'; budh- 'awake'; budhnd- 'bottom'; brh- 'be great'. It is probable also in dagh- 'reach': bamh- 'be firm'; badhird- 'deaf; bahu-, bahuld- 'much'; bradhnd- 'pale red'; brdhman- 'devotion'. b. Final aspiration is often lost*, i. When this occurs before suffixal s,

orignal initial aspiration is lost in some cases ; thus from guh- 'hide', desid. 'harm' desid. 3. du. ju-guk-sa-tas; grdh- 'be eager' : ^r/ja- 'dexterous'; dabh- : part, ddksat-, dip-sa-ti, dip-su- 'intending to hurt'; dah- 'burn' : impv. dak-si, aor. etc., part. ddksu- and daksus- 'iiaming'; duh- 'milk' : aor. a-duksat, duksds, des. 'eat' -.jak-siydt, perf. opt.; duduksan^; bhas- 'chew' : bap-safi, part, bdps-at-; ghas- 'drop'^. has- 'iaugh' : part. yi^j-i3/-; also in the word drap-sd- But in some of the above and in analogous forms with s, the original

remains; thus from guh-, aor. aghuksaf; dah- : dhdksi, part. initial aspirate _ etc. 2. impv. dhdksat-, fut. part, dhaksydn; duh- : aor. ddhuksat, dhuksdn, 'awake' aor. d-bhut-s-i. dhuk-sva; badh- 'distress' : bi-bhat-su- 'loathing'; budh- : 2. When the loss of final radical aspiration is due to any other cause than suffixal s, the original initial aspirate regularly remains; thus from '^vA! dah-, aor. a-dhak; budh- 'waken' : nom. -bhut 'waking'; dha- : dhaf always before s 3. sing., dhat-thas, d-dhat-tam, etc.; and in the latter verb also: dhat-se, dhat-sva, desid. dhit-. c. On the other hand, there is no loss of aspiration in the root if an aspirate follows which belongs to a suffix or second member of a compound; 'snorting'; dhestha- 'giving most' e. g. vibhu-bhis 'with the Vibhus'; proth-dtha- {dha-istha-); ahi-hdn- 'serpent-slaying'; garbha-dhi- 'breeding-place'. The only exceptions^ are the two imperatives bo-dhi %e {{ox*bho-dhi'^ instead of *M2<- dhi) a.-a.Aja-hi (for *jha-hl) from han- 'strike' ">-

1 Except when the second aspirate belongs 6 IE. dhrebh- 'coagulate'. to a suffix or second member of a com- 7 For dhadh-t. 8 bud-dha- iax budh-ta can pound, see below c. Forms like exceptions since 2 Later this became the rule. hardly be regarded as is assumed by the suffix 3 Initial aspiration has perhaps been lost the aspiration in the initial of the also in sakha- 'branch', and in the roots instead of reappearing siigh- 'mount', and stambh- 'make firm'. root. 9 Here bho- is a Prakritic contraction for Cp. Wackernagel I, 105 a. 4 This may also be the case in the roots bhava-. 10 viddtha- 'feast', if correctly derived hhuj- 'bend', chid- 'split', chad- 'cover', dhraj- Also from vidh- 'vjrorship'; on this word see Max 'sweep': op. cit I, 105 b, note. MiJLLER, SEE. 32, 350; FOY, KZ. 34, 5 These forms from dah- and duh- almost I2 ff.; always appear in the Pada text with dh, 226; Bloomfield, JAOS. 19, 2, Wacker- doubtless because from the time of the Geldner, ZDMG. 52. 730—61; I, 108. few more uncertain exam- Brahraanas this initial aspiration had become NAGEL A ples might be exceptions : garda-bhd- 'ass' the rule'; cp. Benfey, GGA. 1873, p. i8f. ' 5

24 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

d. There are a few cognate words in which an aspirate is found beside the corresponding media or tenuis: mdj-man- 'greatness' : wza'y?- 'great'; vi- spulinga-kd- 'scattering sparks' : sphur-dti 'darts' e. In a few isolated words a media seems, according to the evidence of cognate languages, to stand for an IE. aspirate: gma- 'earth', gen. gmds; jmd- 'earth', gtry. jmds, inst jmd; dvAr-, dur-^ 'door'; majjdn- marrow'. 33. Aspirates in contact with other mutes. — Of two mutes in juxtaposition (of which both must be voiced or both voiceless^), the second only can be aspirated. In such case either 1. the second represents an original aspirate, the first an aspirate or not:

e. g. dhat-thds = *dhadh-thds {dha- 'put'); ran(d)-dhi = *randh-dhi (randh- 'make subject'), uk-thd- 'song' = uk-thd- (vac- 'speak'); vet-tha = *vSd-tha {vid- 'know'); sag-dhi 'help' = *sak-dM {sak- 'be strong'); or 2. the first represents an aspirate media*, the second a dental tenuis which assumes the mode of articulation of the first; e. g. ddg-dhr- 'one who burns' (ace.) = *ddgh-tr- {dah- 'burn'); -vid-dha- 'pierced' = *vidh-ta- {vyadk-); -lab-dha- 'taken' = *labh-ta- (labk-). An intervening sibilant {z = s) did not prevent the same result: jag-dhd-, jag-dhvSya, jag-dhvd, (AV.), a-g-dha (TS.) from ghas- 'eat', gdh representing gzdh- for gzh-i- from gh{a)s-t-. a. When the first is h representing an old palatal aspirate (= zh^ IE. gfi)^,

it disappears after cerebralizing the dental and lengthening the preceding vowel;

e. g. Udhd- = *uz-dhd- for uzh-td- from vah-td-T. b. In a few instances the t does not become dh owing to the influence of cognate forms: thus dhaktam (instead of *dagdham = *dhagh-tdm) according to 2. 3. sing. dJiak {^= *dhagh-t) from dqgh- 'reach'; dhat-tdm etc. (instead of ^dad-dham for *dhad/i-tam) according to 3. sing, dhat (= *dhadh-f), 2. sing. mid. dhdi-se, etc. {= *dhddA-se)^.

The Five Classes of Mutes,

34. The gutturals. — These mutes, by the Indian phoneticians called kanthya ('produced from the throat'), are minutely described in the Pratisakhyas as formed at the 'root of the tongue' {jihva-muld) and at the 'root of the jaw' (hanu-muld)'^. They are therefore velar'" sounds and, as the evidence

(if from grdh- 'be greedy'), barjaha- 'udder' 5 There seems to be no example of any (if from brh- 'be great'), sabar-dicgha-, sabai'- other tenuis in contact with a preceding dhu-, sabar-dhiik, epithet of cows (if sabar- aspirate media within a word, but the result = Gk. a^ap: Bartholomae, BB. 15, l8): would probably have been the same. There cp. Wackernagel i^ lo8, note, 217 b; ZDMG. is no example of th becoming voiced in

43, 667 f. ; 46, 292 [barjaha-] . this combination; it remains in dhat-thds 1 A few doubtful examples discussed by (= *dadh-lhds). Wackernagel I, p. 129 bottom. 6 See below 58. 2 Op. cit. 1, 109, note (mid.)^ according to 7 According to this rule us-tra- 'buffalo', Bloomfield, Album Kern^ p. 1 93 f., the media is could not ;be derived from vah- 'carry' (as due to the influence of the numeral dva- 'two'. in that case it would have become udhra-'):

3 This was often due to assimilation, the cp. Wackernagel i, hi b, note. mode of the articulation of the second 8 Before sibilants, all aspirates as well as generally prevailing; e.g. dt-ti =:=*ad-ti (ad- mediae become tenues; but according to 'eat'); vH-tha = *ved-tha; sag-dhi = *sak- TPr. XIV. 12, APr. n. 6 (cp. RPr. vi. 15) dhi; the articulation of the first prevails a tenuis in such a position may be pro- in 33. 2- nounced as an aspirate; see Wackernagei. t An aspirate tenuis loses its aspiration I, 113-

in these circumstances; thus grnatti (AV.) 9 See APr. I. 20 and WmxNEY's note, for *grnath-ti, if this form is derived from 'o That is, pronounced with the velum or 'tie'. soft palate. .

I. Phonology. The five Classes of Mutes. Gutturals. Palatals. 25 of cognate languages shows, derived from IE. velars'- Gutturals are found interchanging to some extent with sounds of the four other classes. I. Under certain conditions they interchange with the new palatals {c J h) which are derived from them''; with the old palatal /3 (also old/ and h) only when followed by j (which then becomes s) *. Between this ks = is and ks=^k-s it is possible to distinguish by the aid of Iranian, where the two are represented by different sounds S; _ and the original value of the k can thus be determined even in words in which no form without the sibilant occurs. ksudh-

'eyelash'; maksu 'quickly'; raks- (AV.) 'injure'; rdks-as- 'injury'; b. k-s: ksatrd- 'dominion'; ksd;p- 'night'; ksi- 'rule'; ksip- 'throw'; ksird- 'milk'; ksud- 'shake', ^joV-aj- 'rush of water', ksudrd- 'small' (VS.), n. 'minute particle'; ksubh- 'swift motion'; tvaks- 'be strong'; vrksd- 'tree'.

2. In a few instances k stands for a medial t: in vrkkdu (AV.) 'kidneys', for *vrtkdu ?; J>r/isu (SV.) = Jirtsu 'in battles'. In these two forms the sub- stitution is due to Prakritic influence; this is probably also the case in skambh- beside stambh- 'prop'^. The guttural only seems to stand for a dental in dsikm- beside dsita- 'black', pdlikni- beside palitd- 'grey', and hdriknika- (AV.) beside hdrita- 'yellow', as there is no etymological connexion between -krii- and -ta-'^. 3. In a few words a guttural interchanges with a labial medially: kakdrdu- beside kaparda- 'braid of hair'; kulika (YS.) : pulika {MS.) a kind of bird; kulikdya- pultkdya- {TQ.) : (MS.), kullpdya- (yS.) : purikdya^° (AV.) a kind of aquatic animal; nicunkund- (TS.) : nicumpund- 'flood'; and in the TS. (B.) tristugbhis and anustvgbhyas occur beside tristi'ib-bhis and ' anusti'ibbhyas ' 4. In a few verbal forms from three roots k stands for s before suffixal j"^, though this k never made its way into the loc. pi. (where only -s-su- or -h-su, -t-su occur). The only example in the RV. is pinak (for pinak-s) 2. sing, impf of pinas-ti {pis- 'crush'). In the AV. occur dvik-s-at, dvik-s-ata, aor. of dvis- 'hate'; sisliksate, -sisliksu-, desid. of sHs- 'embrace'. Other possible examples from the RV. are -rksard- 'thorn' (if from rs- 'prick'); ririksa-ti and ririksti-, desid. (if from ris- 'injure'); viveksi (if from vis- 'workj)'^. 35. The palatals. — These are pronounced in India at the present day as a close combination of a ^sound followed by a palatal spirant /. The evidence of the Greek reproduction of Indian words ''^ points in the same

1 That is, the jr-sounds; some, however, 7 See above 30, note 4. are derived from IE. labio-velars or^J'-sounds; 8 Cp. Wackernagel i, p. 136, note (top). see Brugmann, KG. I, 244 and 254; 9 Cp. J. Schmidt, Pluralbildung 398. 10 Wackernagel I, 115. See ZDMG. 33, 193. 2 See Brugmann, op. cit. 244. " See Weber, IS. 8, 40. 54; 13, log. 3 Op. cit. 233. 12 This probably started from the paralle-

4 See below 56. lism of the 3. sing, of roots in j and s : 5 That is, s-s by / and k-s by hs\ thus thus dves-ti from ^dvis-, and vas-fi from yvas-; vaksi, from vas- = vast; vaksya-mi, from then the 2. sing, dvek-si for dves-si, followed vak- (for vac-) = vaksyd. vak-si. 6 The two components of ks cannot yet 13 The relation of the k in dadhrk 'firmly', have coalesced when s dropped out between to dadhrsd-, dadhrs-vdni- 'bold', is uncertain. two mutes in abhakta, for abhak-s-ta (aor. of Cp. Wackernagel i, 118, note (end). bhaj-), and atasta for aiak-s-ta- from iaks- 14 Thus rfavSavov = candana- 'sandal- (Av. tas^ 'fashion'; otherwise the two differ- wood'; Tiaaravi;; = faj-/a«a-, N. ; IlofaXai = ent original sounds could not have been pancala-, N. of a people; 2avS/3o'/fu?rTo; = kept apart in these two forms. candragupta-, N. ; 'O^T\-r(] = iijjayinl- (Prakrit 26 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

direction. It is therefore likely that they were thus pronounced in Vedic times'. Prosodically, however, they have the value of a single consonant (excepting ch"). They date from the Indo-Iranian period only; but in order to understand their place in the Vedic language, especially in relation to the gutturals, we must go back to their ultimate origin. The evidence of com- parative grammar shows that two distinct series of palatals, the later and the earlier, must be distinguished. This evidence alone can explain how the same Vedic palatal sound {j or h) is, under certain conditions, treated differently. 36. The new palatals {c,j\ h) are derived from gutturals (velars), being interchangeable, in most roots and formatives, with gutturals, and being in most cognate languages represented by the same sounds as represent original gutturals. Thus from the root he- 'shine' come verbal forms such as socaii, beside the nominal derivatives soka-, sukvan-, sukrd-, sukld- (AV.); from yuj- 'yoke', yuje i.sing. mid., etc., beside j^w^i-, yoga-, yukid-, yugvan-; from druh-

'injure', dudroka, 3. sing, perf., etc., beside druhyu-, a name, and drogha- 'deceitful'. The (Indo-Iranian) change from gutturals to palatals was regularly produced before the palatal sounds i i y^; e. g. d^M- 'noticed', beside k/ia- 'wiir, from «V- 'perceive'; ojiyas- 'stronger', beside ugrd- 'strong'; druhyu- beside drogha-. This change invariably takes place in Iranian, while the exceptions in Vedic appear only before vowels which were not originally palatal. a. Gutturals thus appear instead of palatals before ir {il) and ir (= IE. rr- and _r)*, which were not yet pronounced with an z'-sound in the Indo-Iranian periods; thus dngiras-, a name; giri-^ 'mountain'; kirdti, 3. sing., kirdna- 'dust', from kf- 'scatter'; carkirama, carkiran, kirti- 'fame', from kF- 'commemorate'; gir- 'lauding', from gr- 'praise'; girati (AV.), 3. sing., -gila- (AV.) 'devouring', from gf- 'swallow'. Before i (= IE. 9)'' k appears in ok-i-vdms-, part, from uc- 'be pleased', and g in tigitd-^ 'sharp', beside tejate, tejas- 'brilliance', and other derivatives, from tij- 'be sharp'. Otherwise a guttural followed by a palatal vowel is due to the influence of cognate forms. This is the case

I. in the initial of roots a) in gi-, the weak stem of gai- 'sing', beside gay-, ga-; §) in reduplicated forms with cik-, jig-, due to forms like cikdya, jigdya- (where the guttural is in accordance with phonetic law) and to the frequency of palatal reduplication of guttural initial; thus perf. ciky-ur, part. ciky-at-, desid. cikTsate, impv. cikihi (AV.), from ci- 'perceive'; intv. cekit-, cikit-, desid. cikits-, from cit- 'petceive'; ^tri. jigy-ur, Atsid. jigTsate, Jigyu- 'victorious',

ujjent), N. of a city; Aiaij.Qvva = yaimcnd-, I, 121 (p. 140, top). The palatal aspirate N. of a river. Cp. Wackernagel i, 119. in fact never represents a guttural aspirate, 1 Cp. Whitney on APr. i. 21. but only an IE. palatal, or sibilant and 2 Cp. above 30, 3; 31, 3 b; and below 40. palatal. 3 The sphere of the palatals has been 4 Cp. Wackernagel i, 24. 25. extended by analogy at the expense of the 5 Cp. Wackernagel i, 123 a a. gutturals and vice versa. The aspirate guttural 6 In Av. gairi-. /ih appears where the other gutturals are 7 This sound had probably not yet become replaced by palatals; thus before the j/ in a pure palatal in Ilr. khyd- 'see' (but Jya-) 'overpower'; before ^ Otherwise the palatal regularly appears the thematic a of the present: rikhati before this i in perfect forms; e. g. saiciri 'sits' (but dahati); before the -ayaii of the (sac- 'accompany'); bhejiri [bkaf- 'divide'); Causative: mkhayati 'swings' (but arcayati); uvocitha, iicise {uc- 'be pleased'); diidohitha and notably in sdkhi- 'friend': dat. sakhye, [duh- 'milk'). pi. sdkhibyas (Ilr. sachi-): cp. WackernagSl ;

I. Phonology. Palatals. 27

fromyz- conquer'; 7) in the pronominal forms kis, kirn, km, kiyat, kivant-, kidrs-, beside the enclitic cid, because owing to the influence of the frequent forms ka-s, kd-d, etc., k appeared to be characteristic of the interrogative pronoun \ 2. m the final of roots in which guttural forms predominate, before the of y^ the optative and the gerund; thus dagh-yas, from dagh- 'reach'; sak-yam, from hk- 'be able'; sagh-yasam (TS.), from sagh- 'be equal to'. It also appears very often before the suffixes -i, -r, -in, -ya forming derivatives from nouns the last consonant of which is a guttural: e. g. pldyogi- 'descendant of Playoga'; vrk-i- 'she-wolf {vrka-); sak-in- 'powerful' {sakd-)] srng-in- 'horned' {sfnga-); upa-vak-ya- 'to be praised' (beside upavacya-) from upavakd- 'praise'. Siinilarly dragh-iyas- 'longer', dragh-istha- 'longest' (beside dirghd- 'long', dragh-mdn- 'length'); sphig4- 'buttock', with g from the nom. sphik of sfhij-, which occurs in the post-Vedic language only. 3. in a certain number of abnormal words, almost invariably at the beginning: a) words which may be suspected of foreign origin owing to meaning or phonetic form: kimsukd-, kiydmbu- plant names; kimidin-, kikata-, kirata- (VS.), sva-kiskin- (AV.) names of foreigners or demons; kija- a kind of utensil; kilbisa- 'guilt' (contains the rare letter b), kistd- 'singer' {st instead of J'/);,/?) onomatopoetic words: kikidivi- 'blue jay'; kikira-kr- 'tear to tatters'; kikkita (TS.) an interjection; 7) some words of doubtful origin: kikasa-

'vertebra'; /^r/z«ra- 'ploughman' (?); /5r«a/a- 'ploughman'; Z'2-/a/i?- 'sweet draught' kirmird- 075.) 'variegated'; kisord- {KST.) 'foal'; kisniila- (AV. Paipp.) a kind of disease.

37. New palatals as radical initials. — a. Before a, a, and diphthongs, both palatals and gutturals are very frequent in Vedic and Iranian. Comparative grammar shows that the palatals occur before a vowel or diphthong representing IE. e e or a diphthong beginning with e e""; but gutturals before IE. a or sonant nasal. According to this evidence the palatal has come into being in the following words: ca 'and'; cakrd- 'wheel'; catvdras 'four'; 'last'; caramd- caru- 'pot'; . cdru- 'agreeable'; pdiica 'five'; jathdra- 'belly'; }dnT-, -j'ani- 'woman'; jami- 'akin'; hdras- 'flame'. On the other hand, the original guttural has remained in kakud- 'peak'; kdksa- 'armpit'; karu- 'poet'; Ma- 'will'; gdus 'cow'; ghartnd- 'hot'; ghord- 'terrible'; and in the roots kas- (AV.) 'cough'; gadh- 'clasp'; ga- 'go'; gah-

'plunge'; gai- 'sing' 3. b. Among the roots vsrith u n / as low grade vowels, the only one in which the regular phonetic interchange of palatal and guttural takes place, is jar- -.gP- 'call'; g appearing before r ir ar {=^ IE. or), j before ar {= IE. er) preceding the thematic -a- of the present or the suffix -tr-; thus gr-ndti, gir-, -gard- (VS.), beside jdrate, jarddhyai, jaritf-. In other roots either the guttural or the palatal appears throughout; mostly the guttural, because the forms with u r I and ar al {= IE. ou or 81), which required the guttural^ were more numerous than those with ar al (= IE. ey. er el); thus from kr- 'do', dkar aor. 'has done', kartr- 'agent', kdrman- 'action', retain the guttural, though the palatal would be phonetic (as ar here = IE. er), through the influence of forms with kr- and of kdrana- 'deed' (where ar = IE. or).

1 Cp. Wackernagel I, 128 a (p. 150, 3 In the IE. vowel gradation of these bottom). roots only B. and appear. In other roots 2 Cp. Italian and the Balto-Slavic languages in the IE. vowel gradation of which e is which palatalize before e as well as i. found, an initial palatal would be expected :;

28 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

On the other hand, the palatal appears in cud-^, codati 'impel'; scut-, scotati 'drip', because here forms with u, which required a guttural, were rare; in car-, carati 'move', where the palatal is almost invariably phonetic in RV. (but AV. has cacard); in crt- 'bind', the palatal has fixed itself in spite of many forms with r; while beside harsate 'rejoices', hdrsant-, part, both h and gh occur in weak forms: hrsita-, ghrsu- 'lively', ghfsvi- 'gladdening'. c. Among roots in -an and am, survivals of the regular interchange are found in kan- 'be pleased', and han- 'strike'. The former has the palatal (= IE. ke-) in the aor. caiiistam, in the superl. cdnistha-, and in cartas- 'favour', but otherwise the guttural. In Aan-, h appears before an (= IE. eti) and, by analogy, also before aii = nn and a = n; but gh before n and a = IE. 0; thus hdn-ti, inf. hdn-tave; han-mas, han-yama; ha-thds, -ha-td, and with / in impv. jahi (= *jhahi), but perf. jaghana, and ghand- 'striker', ghanaghand- 'found of striking'. In the intv. janghan-, gh stands for h before a = IE. e to the influence of the weak stem janghn-. In gam- 'go' ga- = gm- owing , (e. g. in gdcchati, ga-td-) has led to the use of gam- = *jam-, as in gdm-anti^. d. In the remaining verbs, that is, those with a (25) or e (22) as high grade vowel, there appears chiefly the palatal throughout; thus caks- cacdksa (for *cakdksd). The phonetic guttural is, however, preserved in some forms of the three verbs ci- 'observe' (perf cikdyd); cit- 'observe' (perf. ciketa; kita- 'will'; ketu-^ 'appearance'); and /z- 'conquer' {^&:'i. jigdya; gdya- 'house- hold'). A guttural not phonetically justified appears before a (== IE. e) only in ghas- 'eat' (aor. dghas, subj. ghas-a-t) and in gal- 'drop' {gal- galiti VS.). e. In reduplicative syllables containing a of roots having initial guttural or palatal, the palatal always appears in the perfect, pluperfect, or

reduplicated aorist; thus kr- 'make' : cakara; khad- 'chew' : cakhada; gam-

'go' •.jagama; ghas- 'eat' •.jaghAsa; caks- 'see' : cacdksa; pluperf. oi kr- : acakrat;

red. aor. oi jas- 'be exhausted' : yo/ffj-^a'/w. The palatal is here historically

phonetic, as the IE. reduplicative vowel was e. In the intensive, however, the palatal is invariable only when the

reduplication is monosyllabic; e.g. kram- 'stride' : can-kramata; gr- :ja-gr- 'awake'; han- 'strike' :jan-ghanti. But when the reduplication is dissyllabic,

the guttural 5 predominates; thus kr-, paxtkdri-kr-ai-; krand- 'roar' : kdni-kra[ii)d-;

gam- 'go' -.gani-gan-, gani-gm-; han- 'strike' : ghani-ghn- {cp.ghariaghand-); skand-

'leap' : both kdni-skand- and cani-skadat subj. 38. New palatals as radical finals, a. Verbal forms. — Before the thematic verbal endings (including those of the a-aorist and the reduphcated aorist) the final of roots regularly appears as a palatal which, though phonetic* only in about the same degree as the guttural, has prevailed. Gutturals are

in certain forms ; but fewtraces of this remain, 3 Beside cmi- 'devout', keru- appears in as the forms of each verb have been nor- the compound mdhi-keru- 'wery devout'; cp. malized. Wackernagel 21, p. loi (43 b). 1 If kutsa- N. is derived from cud-, and 4 In the post-Vedic language, the palatal carsani- 'active', from h/-, the initial conso- is invariable even in dissyllabic redupli- nant has not been affected by the norma- cation. lizing influence of the roots, because these 5 But if the initial of the root is a palatal, words have been isolated. the reduplicative consonant is of course al-

2 The correct phonetic interchange appears ways a palatal ; thus cand- 'shine' : cdniscad-

in jdngahe 'kicks', and jamhas- 'course', if car- 'move' : caracard-; cal- 'move' : calacald- these forms are connected, as BR. think. 'ever moving'. Cp. 32 a. Whitney, Roots, however, considers the 6 Phonetically we should have *pdkami

former an intensive of gah- 'plunge'. (^lE. 0), pac-asi and pdc-ati (IE. e). ;

I. Phonology. Palatals. 29 rare at the end of the root, appearing only' in sak- 'be able'; 2. sing, sak-as; sagh- 'be equal to': 3. sing, sagh-at; dagh- 'reach' : dagh-at (TS.); in these roots the guttural prevails throughout owing to the influence of the present stem sak-nu; sagh-nu-^. Even in the non-thematic presents and in the perfect the palatal carried the day, though phonetic in still fewer forms; thus the guttural alone would be historically justified in the forms yundj'S, yunje; yuyoja 3. The palatal further regularly appears before the causative* suffix -dya-, where it is phonetic (= IE. eie); e. g. arc-dya-ti from arc- 'praise' 5. b. As shown by the appearance, in cognate forms^ of a guttural before other consonants than j, the final of the following verbs is a new palatal: anj- 'anoint'; ej- 'stir'; tij- 'sharpen'; tuj- 'beat'; tyaj- 'forsake'; nij- 'wash'; bhaj- 'divide'; bhanj- 'break'; bhuj- 'bend'; yuj- 'yoke'; ranj- 'colour'; ruj- 'break'; vij- 'shoot up'; vrj- 'turn'; sinj- 'sound'; sanj- 'attach'; svanj- 'embrace'; also in the noun srdj- 'garland'. c. Apart from being the result of the Sandhi of d-\-j, jj is shown by the evidence of cognate languages to be derived from a sibilant + guttural {= IE. zg^ and thus to belong to the series of new palatals in majjdn- 'marrow' 7'djju- 'rope'; bhrjjdti 'roasts'; majjati 'dives', from which is derived madgu- (VS.) 'diver- (a bird). d. Nominal derivatives, i. Before the suffix -a, the final of the root is mostly guttural, because the a in nearly all the cases of the noun represents IE. 0. The rule in the RV. is that the guttural appears before both unaccented -a and accented -a, but the palatal before accented -d only^; e. g. abhi-

droh-d-, druh-A- 'injury' : drSgh-a- 'injuring'; bhoj-d- 'liberal' : bhig-a- 'enjoyment'; a-yuj-d- 'companionless'; yog-a- 'yoking'; ruj-d- 'breaking': rog-a- (AV.) 'disease';

vevij-d- 'swift' : vSg-a- (AV.) 'speed'; suc-d- 'bright' : s6k-a- 'flame'; ruc-d- (VS.)

and roc-d- (AV.) 'shining' : rok-a- a.nd rok-d- 'light'?. 2, Before the suffix -as, the palatal generally appears, as it is for the

most part phonetically required; e. g. 6j-as- 'force' : ug-rd- 'mighty'. The guttural, however, prevailed in dnk-as- 'bend'; ag-as- 'offence'; -ny-ogh-as- 'streaming'; bhdrg-as- 'brilliance'; as there were no corresponding verbs with

palatal beside these words; it also prevailed in 6k-as- 'ease' and ny-okas- 'comfortable', as well as -hk-as- 'flaming', though there are such verbs {uc- 'be pleased', and sue- 'shine'). 3. Before other suffixes beginning with a, the final of the root is generally palatal; thus before -ana (= IE. -eno-), vac-and- 'speaking'; Uj-ana- 'act of sharpening'; mamh-dna- 'gift'*; before -ant, -ana (under the influence of

1 Apart from roots ending in kh, see35, note 3. 6 The fluctuation of words in -a- probably 2 In ni-megha-mana- 'drenching oneself, arose from some cases in oxytones having the gh seems to be phonetic (as -amana = had IE. e, others 0; hence in some words -omem). In vdlgate (AV.) 'springs', the guttural the palatal prevailed throughout, in others

is perhaps due to the preceding /, as neither the guttural. The agent-nouns, being mostly If nor Ic is ever found to occur. oxytone, show a preference for the palatal, 3 This normalization of the palatal is which originally appeared in oxytones only. note, probably Indo-Iranian, see J. ScHMffiT, KZ. Cp. Wackernagel I, 128 a (p. 150, 35, 104. end). 4 The denominatives in -ayd- (IE. eie and 7 A palatal before an unaccented -a oie) follow the noun from which they are first appears in doh-a- (RV. x. 122), other- derived; e. g. from aghd- 'evil', aghayaii wise dogha- 'milking' ; moh-a- (AV.) 'delusion', 'wishes to injure'. beside mogk-a- 'vain'; krimc-a- (VS.) 'cur- 5 The causative ingayati of ejati 'stirs' is lew', is probably only an extension of kruiic- probably due to an old present base *inag-, (VS.) 8 ihg- formed according to the 7th class ; the The gh oijaghana- 'buttock', is phonetic phonetic form -injayati is found in the BAU. (Gk. Kayavi]). VI. 4, 23. :

3° I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

verbal forms), e. g. duh-ana- and duduh-and^; before -ata (= IE. -eto), e. g. pac-atd- 'cooked'^; before -an in majj-dn- 'marrow'^. 4. Nouns formed without suffix (including infinitives and gerunds) have the palatal of the corresponding verb; e. g. pfc-as, nom. pi. 'food'; a-pfc-as and a-prc-e 'to satisfy'; tuj-dye 'to procreate'. A guttural of course appears where the verb has a guttural only; e. g. pra-tank-am (AV.) 'gliding' (/ai-'run'). 5. The suffix -ka is treated analogously to the final guttural of roots*. The guttural regularly appears except when the suffix, being attached to- asmd-ka- 'oxir^ unaccented prepositions, is itself accented; thus ; yupnd-ka- 'your'; dpa-ka- 'coming from afar'; abhi-ka- 'collision'; and even with the suffix accented in locatives such as upa-ki, upa-kdyos 'in the vicinity' and in the abl. pard-k&t 'from a distance'; but uc-ca and uc-cdis 'above'; para-cdis 'aside'; pai-cd and pas-cdt 'behind'; pra-cdis 'forwards'. 39. Irregular palatalization. — Before u r and consonants (except y), the gutturals were not originally palatalized. Hence roots which regularly have palatals before a and diphthongs, usually retain the guttural before u r and consonants. Thus from ric- 'leave', are formed, rik-u- 'empty', rek-n-as- 'property',

perf part, ririk-vdms-; 3. sing. pres. rindk-ti, 2. sing. perf. mid. ririk-se (but opt. riric-yat); vg-rd- 'mighty', beside oj-as- 'strength'; ghn- beside han- 'strike').

Nevertheless palatals appear by analogy before ^l, r, n, m, r, v.

a. initially: i. in the roots scut- 'drip', crt- 'bind', hrs- 'rejoice', in which the unphonetic palatal before the low grade vowels is due to the phonetic palatal before the high grade vowels o (= IE. eu) and ar {^= IE. ei). 2. in the reduplicative syllables cu-^ and ju- of the perfect and aorist (in RV. occurring only in cyu- 'shake', gup- 'guard', giir- 'praise') for older

"^ca- ya- {a = e, the IE. reduplicative vowel). b. finally: i. in verbal inflexion, the palatal which appears before a and diphthongs always appears also before u, and nearly always before m and r (instead of the phonetic guttural); thus sisic-ur beside sisic-atur, sisic-e^ from sic- 'pour'; bubhuj-mdhe beside bhundj'-amahe, from bkuj- 'enjoy'; anj-mas beside anj-dnti, andj-an from anj- 'anoint'; riric-ri beside riric-S, from ric- 'leave'; d-yuj-ran, yuyuj-ri beside yuyuj-S, from yuj- 'yoke'; duh-re, duh-rate, duduk-rJ, duh-rdm and duh-ratam (AV.j beside duh-i, from duh- 'milk'. The guttural, however, regularly remains before the -nu of the Sth class: sak-?iu- 'be able', sagh-yiu- 'be equal to', spreading thence to other forms''. Phonetic k remains before m in vivak-mi from vac- 'speak'; and before r in vavak-re beside vac-ydte, vdnc-ati (AV. VS.) from vaiic- 'move crookedly'.

2. in nominal derivation the guttural as a rule remains^: e. g. rug-nd- 'broken', from ruj- 'break'; ruk-md- 'brilliant', from rue- 'shine'; suk-rd-, suk-ld- (AV.) 'bright', from sue- 'shine'; pak-vd- 'ripe'j from pae- 'cook'. The perf. part, for the most part follows this rule: e. g. ru-ruk-vdms-, from rue- 'shine';

1 Strictly phonetic (but rarer) is diigh- on the other hand the palatal appears un- atia- 'milking'; also vagh-at- (IE. -nt-") 'insti- phonetically before u in the intv. part, car- tutor of a sacrifice'. curyd-mdna- from car' 'move'. 2 The k in sik-aid- (AV. VS.) 'sand', is 6 Otherwise cu- occurs only in the ono- phonetic (IE. -nia-). matopoetic ni-cumpU7id- 'swell' — and in a 3Beside>'a'/5-?'^ (AV.) 'liver', and Jfl'i-.^^ 'dung', few words suggestive of foreign origin

the k is found in the stemsyak-an-, sak-an-, cumuri-, N. of a demon; cu-punlka-, N. of a. but only in weak forms before » or a krttikd. (TS.). (= n): yak-nds, yak-na (VS.); sak-nd (yS.); 7 Also dagh-nu- 'reach', in a Brahmana iak-'nds (AV.); sdka-bhis (TS.) passage of the Kathaka, and siigh-nu~

4 See above 38 d, I ; Wackernagel 1, 129. 'mount', in a similar one of the TS. 5 phonetic guttural, 8 The however, appears CoLLrrz, BB. 3, 230 f.; J. ScHMrox,. in ^,fc-j-«i- 'lively', ghrsvi- 'gladdening'; while KZ. 25, 70 f, I. Phonology. Palatals. 31

vi-vik-vsms; from vie- 'divide'; ok-i-vims- (36 a), from uc- 'find pleasure' (but dat. sing, uc-us-e). The following are, _ however, exceptions: oj-man- 'might"; ^ bhuj-mdn- frmtful'; muh-ur 'suddenly'; druh-u- (AV.) 'injurer'; yac-ny&- (AV.) 'request'. old 40. The palatals {ch, j, s, h). — The aspirate ch. This sound IS, m pronunciation, the aspirate c^ _ of and is therefore represented in reduphcation by c. But in origin ch has nothing to do with c. The fact that^ after a mute it takes the place of / in Sandhi shows that it is allied to In /. fact, unlike J and h, it belongs exclusively to the old series of palatals; for it does not interchange with a guttural kkK In the Avesta ck is regularly represented by s and in cognate European languages by a conjunct consonant beginning with s and standing for IE. skh (that is, j + palatal mute aspirate); e. g. chid- 'cut off', Gk. (ryjl-. This in Indo-Iranian probably became sJh, which differentiated into Avestic s and Vedic ch. In the inchoative suffix - igdcchatt, Gk. ^dsicco) this palatal aspirate seems to represent IE. s^, a conclusion is which supported by the old inchoative verb rapsate 'is full' = rap{s)sate, where after the s has been dropped between two consonants'*, •f = IE. k remained. Thus ch represents a double sound and metrically lengthens a^preceding short vowel. Hence the RPr. (vi. i) prescribes the doubling of ch (that is c-ch) between vowels. Though the Vedic Mss. almost invariably write ch^ and Aufrecht's edition of the RV. and v. Schroeder's edition of the MS.^ follow this practice, the speUing cch is to be preferred. a. In sakha- 'branch', the initial i probably stands for ch owing to the law by which two aspirates in the same syllable are avoided 7.

b. In a few instances ch is a Prakritic representative of ks and. ps : -7-cchdra- (AV.) beside rksala- (VS.) 8, part of an animal's leg; krcchrd- 'distress', perhaps iox*krpsrd-, and allied to krpate 'laments', and krpana- 'misery' 9.

41. The old palatal j. — This / is the media of / (while as a new palatal it is the media of c). It is recognizable as an old palatal by the following indications:

1. when there are parallel forms with j- before t, th, or a cerebral appears either as final or before mutes; e. g. beside ydj-ati 'sacrifices', yds-tr- 'sacrificer',. is-td- 'sacrificed', a-yat 'has sacrificed'; similarly in the roots bhraj- 'shine';

mrj- 'wipe off'; raj- 'rule'; rej- 'tremble' (?) ; vraj- 'wander'; srj- 'send forth'; possibly also in bhrajj- 'roast''".

2. when min the formlorm min question or min cognate forms^ sounds followfoil

which do not palatalize gutturals'", that \%, u r n m r v; such are: dj-'\j-ra-

'plain'j dj-ma{n)- 'course'; drjuna- 'white', rj-rd- 'reddish'; rj-i'i.- 'straight', rj-iy'-tyas-

1 Under the influence of oj'-Tyas- 'stronger' in Sandhi and ducchuna- for "^dus-sunj- 'mis- and 6j-isfha- 'strongest', such_ nouns in -man- fortune'. being often closely connected with compara- 5 Except those of the Kathaka, which, tives and superlatives. write ich (cp. note 2). 2 In the Kathaka ch is spelt ich, which is 5 Also Roth's ed. of the Nirukta and probably only a provincial assibilation, and Macdonell's ed. of the Brhaddevata; cp. not the survival of an older sound; cp. AUFRECHT, RV2, p. VI. 7 Cp, J. Schmidt, KZ. 27, 332. 32. 3 miirkhd- 'dull', occurring in a B. passage 8 On AV. Ms. spelling ch for ks in two of the TS., is probably a new formation or three words, see Whitney, JAOS. 12, analogous to iokd- (AV.) from socati. Some 92- 175- scholars hold that there is an etymological 9 On the origin of ch, cp. Brugmann, KG.- connection between chand- 'appear', chand-as- 240; on the sound as a whole, Wacker- 'song', and skdndati 'leaps'; between chid- nagel I, 133 f. 10 'cut off' and khid- 'press' ; between chd- (AV.) But cp. 38 c, and Wackernagel 1, 139. 'cut off' and - [khan-] 'dig'. Cp. Wacker- 11 Apart of course from the exceptions-

NAGEL I, 131, note, bottom. due to analogy: see 39. 4 Cp. above p. 25 note 6; cp. here cch = t-\-s ;

32 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

'straighter', rdj-istha- 'straightest'; /«««- 'knee' beside y;22^-; jrmbh- 'yawn"; 'earth'; 'go'; /o/'-ri- 'fat'; - 'knoyf' ; j'md-, gen. jm-ds 7W- -jvard- 'suffering'; maj-mdii- 'greatness'; vdj-ra- 'thunderbolt'; jurdti, juryati, jujur-vams-, jur-nd-, from jr- 'grow old'. 3. when in inflexional forms, in which roots with a new palatal show a guttural, the / remains; e. g. jajana from jan- 'beget'; jajasa (AV.) from jas- 'be exhausted'; jujosa from jus- 'like'; jujur-vams-, jajara (AV.), from jf- 'grow old'''- 4. when j is the reduplication of an old palatal / or h; e. g. jajdna, jajdra (AV.), juhoti. 5. when it is shown to be an old palatal by the evidence of the cognate languages; thus in ajd- 'he-goat', a;'i-'goat'; ajina- (AV.) 'skin'; Urj- '' 'son- 'nourishment'; jdmhas- cqu\%€ ; jdnghs- ''\tg' ; jambA- 'chew up'; jsmatr- in-law'; dhraj- 'sweep'; bhisaj- 'heal'; rajatd- 'silvery'; vdja- 'swiftness'; rjipyd- 'going straight'. a. It is uncertain whether / represents an old or a new palatal in the following words:

1. because the comparative evidence is conflicting: vi-jsman- 'related'; jindti s. ju- 'h^sXev! ; jya-, 'overpower' 2. because the Vedic and comparative evidence is insufficient: ubj-'coe.rce'; kuj- (AV.) 'hum'; jdnjat-T-, pres. part., of uncertain meaning (a. X.); jdrate 'approaches'; jihamana- 'panting'; jihmd- 'transverse'; dkvdj-, dAvaJd- ^hajmer' paj- 'be rigid' (in dpa...pdpaje 'started back'); -pujana- 'honouring'; bajd- a kind of plant; btja- 'seed'; mimja- 'sedge'. b. Irregular/. — i. As the two kinds of / were indistinguishable in pro- nunciation, a guttural sometimes intruded among the old palatals owing to the analogy of the new palatals; thus from bhisaj- 'heal', bkisdk-tama-, spv., bhisdk-ti, 3. sing, pres., a-b/nsnak, 3. sing. impf. (like anak-ti from anj- 'anoint');

from mrj- 'wipe' : ni-mrg-ra- 'attached', apa-margd- (AV.) a kind of plant, vi-mfg-varT- (AV.) 'cleanly'; from srj- 'discharge', asrg-ram, asrgran, dsasrgram, sasrgmdhe (SV.) beside sasrjmdhe; from jf- 'grow old', jagara (AV.) beside iajdra (AV.). 2. The guttural beside the palatal may be due to IE. dialectic variety in gnd- 'woman' beside jan- 'beget'; gm-ds beside /w-a'j 'of the earth'; bhdrgas- 'splendour', bhrgu- a name, beside bhraj- 'shine'. 3. In jyotis- 'light', jy seems, by an old Prakritism, to represent dy, as the word is probably derived from dyut- 'shine'. 4. The media aspirate j/i^ occurs only in one form, jdjhjhat-i- (RV.'^), a pres. part, probably meaning 'laughing' as an epithet of lightning (a metaphor connected with lightning elsewhere also in the RV.); it appears to be derived, by an old Prakritism, from has- 'laugh' -.jAjh probably iox jjh^ here = IS^.gzh, which otherwise would become ks-, as in jdks-at-, part., 'laughing'. 42. The cerebrals. —The designation given to these sounds by the native phoneticians^, murdhanya 'produced in the head', indicates that they were pronounced at the highest point in the mouth nearest the (upper part

1 In which only forms with / occur; 4 The other two old palatals s and h will cp., however, Hubschmann, KZ. 23, 393. be dealt with below in their alphabetical 2 The only instance of a new palatal order: 54, 58. [c j h = k g gh) before ilr (= IE. f) is 5 The Kashmir Ms. of the RV. reads carciiryd-mana- (RV. x). For some more or jdjjhatTr for jdjhjhatTr (V. 52^): ScHEFTE- less doubtful examples of old palatal j, see LOWITZ, WZKM. 21, 86. Wackernagel I, 137 b note. 6 See RPr. i. 19; APr. i. 32; TPr. 3 Op. cit. I, 137 e, note. "• 37- I. Phonology. Cerebrals. 33 of the) head. They are described by the Pratisakhyas as pronounced by turning the tip of the tongue up to the roof of the mouth and bending it backwards. They were therefore pronounced farther back in the mouth than the palatals. This is also their pronunciation at the present day in India. An indication that it was such even in Vedic times is the fact that 4 is sometimes found in the later Samhitas interchanging, between vowels, with /' (which itself interchanges with r), and that in the RV. itself 4 dh become / Ih between vowels. It is also to be noted that the Greeks reproduced

As a rule, they have arisen immediately after j- or an r sound from dentals. But before consonants and finally they may represent the old palatals / / h.

a. The voiceless cerebrals / th take the place of the dentals t th after _s (= s, s or/); e. g. vrs-ti- 'rain' (suffix -ti); dus-tdra- 'invincible' (= dus-tdra-); ndkis te (== ndkis te); vds-ti 'wishes' (= vds-tt); mrs-td- 'cleansed' (= mrj-td-)\ Similarly the voiced cerebrals d dh take the place of the dentals d dh after *z {= s or old palatal /, h), which has disappeared*; e. g. mdd- 'nest' (= IE. nizdo-); du-dhi- 'ill-disposed' (= dus-dhi-); id-e 'I worship' {*iz-d- = ij-d- for yaf-d-); driihd- 'firm' (= drh-td-). The preceding voiced sibilant *z {= s and s) has (instead of disappearing) itself become d in didid-dhi (from dis-

'show') and vivid-dhi (firom vis- 'be active') '. a. When the dental here was immediately followed by an > sound, the cerebralization seems originally to have been stopped. Hence dfdhrd- (= drh-ira-), beside dfdhd- {==drk-ta-) 'firm'; and though str occurs several times in theRV. *, the r seems to have been dropped in pronunciation, as tlie only stems ending in -sira- which show a. case- form with n, do not cerebralize it: usirdndm and rdsfrdndm, as if no r preceded. In TS. I. 2. 5>, r is actually dropped after st in ivdsftmaii- 'accompanied by Tvastrl'. b. In several instances a cerebral appears by an evident Prakritism, in place of a dental originally preceded by an r (or /) sound; thus vi-kata- 'monstrous', beside kr-td- 'made'; katd- 'depth', beside kartd-"^ 'pit'; avatd-

(SV. VS.) 'pit', beside avdr'^° 'down'"; and as shown by comparative evidence, kdtuka- 'sharp'; kudayati 'singes'; ke'vata- ''^\^-jjddhu- 'dull'; kutd- (AV.TS.) 'horn- less'. In the following words, though cognate languages show /'^, the cerebral ;-'^ is similarly based on Indian r or -t- dental: knta- 'frontal bone'; jathdra- 'belly'; ^a^zV- 'contiguous', iada- (AV.)'blow';/zWa- lump'; kanda-{AY.) 'piece' ^+. c. Cerebrals have in some instances supplanted dentals owing to the

1 Cp. VPr. IV. 143; V. Bradke, KZ. if from krt- 'cut'; but see Bartholomae, 28, 298. IF. 3, iSo'f. 12 2 See Wackernagel i, 143, note. IE. / by rhotacism became r in Ilr. 3 Op. cit. I, 144. 13 MS. IL 47 has the reading y/wwa rdvdt 4 Ibid., note. for that of TS. u. 4. 7' jinvdr avft and 5 Cp. above 41, I. K. XI. 9 jinva rdvat. Cp. below p. 70, note 4. 14 6 Cp. above 17, 5. The cerebral could be similarly accounted 7 See Wackernagel i, 145 a, note (end). for in i2a-) 'family', kuldya- 'nest'. Cp. 42 d (p. 34) end. to and (AV.) 8 In rdsfrd- 'dominion% usfra- 'buffalo', In dandd- 'staff' if identical with Gk. ihhpov note i) desfri- 'Directress'; danistra- 'tooth'; sfr- in (J. ScHMmT, KZ. 25, 52, we seem a-ni-strta- 'not shaken off', ivdstf-mant- to have an instance of a cerebral for a -\- 'accompanied by Tvastf ; nd^ in kundf- dental following r, but such a change naa- 'house-lizard' (?). seems not to be in accordance with the 9 Wackernagel i, 146 a. phonetic laws of either Vedic (cp. dfdhrd; 10 Cp. Bartholomae, IF. 3, 179. above a, a) or Prakrit. On two other n Perhaps also renuka-kdta- 'stirring dust', examples of this supposed change, anda- Indo-arische Philologie. L 4. 3 34 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

analogy of similar words with phonetic cerebral. In padbhis 'with feet', and

"p&xhajps, Jidd-grbhi-, N., it is due to padbkis, inst.pl. of both /«'/- 'look.', and of pas- 'cord', and to pddbisa-, fddvisa (VS.) 'fetter', which is derived from pdi- 'cord''- Vdsat and srdusat, sacrificial calls, probably for vdksat and

*srdsat (3. sing. aor. subj. of vah- 'convey', and sru- 'hear'}, seem to owe their cerebral to the influence of the sacrificial call W/ (VS.), vdi{TS.), 3. sing. aor. of Yvah-. The d oipurodai- 'sacrificial cake' (from das- 'worship'), is perhaps due to du-dds'- 'impious' (for duz-das-)'- appears d. In a few instances a cerebral f or d in place of the cerebral sibilant s. The phonetic representative of the latter before b/i would be d (parallel to d for IE. z before b/i)^, where it appears in viprud-bhis (VS.)

'with drops'. From here the cerebral spread to the nom. sing., where it appears in vi-pri'it (AV.) 'drop', from prus- 'sprinkle', and in edhamana-dvit 'hating the arrogant' (from dvis- 'hate'). The cerebral d also appears before the -dhi of the 2. sing. impv. for s in aviddhi (= avi-s-dhi) aor. of av- 'favour', and in vividdhi (= vivis-dhi), red. aor. of vis- 'be active'. The phonetic form here would be *idk (= iz-dh)*, instead of which iddk appears under the influence, perhaps, of the cognate verbal forms with the short vowel {avistu, avistdm etc.). 43. Cerebrals in many instances represent the old palatals / / h. They are found thus:

a. as final: i. in nom. sing. m. f : Mri/ 'lustre' (M/'47-); r«/ 'ruler' (r47-)> vipat, N. of a river {vipas-); vit 'settlement' {vis-), spat 'spying' {spas-); sat 'overcoming' {sdk-); -vat 'conducting' {-vah-), pasthavat (VS.), -vit (TS.). The guttural k would have been phonetic in this case, as the nom. sing, originally ended in s^, and even the old palatals became k before s; the cerebral must here therefore be due to the influence of forms in which it was phonetic. 2. in nom. ace. sat, from sds- 'six'. As k might have been expected (IE. sveks), the cerebral is doubtless due to forms containing sas-, as sasti- 'sixty', sasthd- (AV. VS.) 'skth'. 3. in the first member of a compound, where the final of the nom. sing, appears, in sat- 'six', and pad- (from pas- 'cord', in pdd-bua-). 4. in 2. 3. sing. aor. for the radical palatal after the endings have been dropped: thus d-bhrat {bhraj- 'shine'); yat {yaj- 'sacrifice'); rat {raj- 'shine'); nat, d-nat {nas- 'reach'); d-prat {pras- 'ask' in pras-nd- 'question'); d-vat {vak- 'convey'). Here / is phonetic in the 3. pers. only, standing for s-t {= IE. k-t). It has been transferred to the 2. sing., where k would be phonetic (standing

'egg', and manduka- 'frog', see Wacker- rtvik 'sacrificer' CJ/ya;'-); urk (VS.) 'nourish- NAGEL I, 147, note. ment' {urj-); dik (AV.) 'region' (dii-). For 1 Op. cit. I, 148 a (p. 172, top). -d-f-k, the later Samhitas have -dfh also. In 2 The form vy-dvaf in MS. Itl. 49 (B.) the n. nom. the m. f. form appears: -dfk, beside vy-avat, AV. vm. I^', from vi-Tjas- sprk; but as there was no s here, it 'shine forth', is probably due to the influence must be assumed that the cerebral was of a-vai, aor. of yvah- ; but cp. Bartholomae, originally used in these neuter forms. In Studien I, 34, note. On the cerebral in avata- bhisdj- 'healer', the k has spread from the (SV. VS.), beside avata-, nadd- 'reed', beside nom. to other cases, where it is not phonetic nadd-, and in kTtd- (AV.), markdfa- (VS.) cp. (cp. Wackernagel i, 138). The original Wackernagel I, 148 b, note. value of the palatal in usij- 'desiring', usnik- 3 See below 44 a, 3. (AV. VS.), a kind of metre, which have k 4 Cp. above 17, 5. in the nom. is uncertain. The k in the nom, 5 This phonetic k for an old palatal is ndk 'night' is probably not based on an old preserved in the nominatives -dfk 'seeing' palatal i (cp. Wackernagel i, 149 a u, \d]'s-\ -spfk 'touching' (sprs-), spfk 'desiring' note).

{sprh-), an-dk 'eyeless' {-aks- ; as- 'penetrate'); I. Phonology. Cerebrals. Dentals. 35

for k-s IE. i>). = The reverse transference of k to the 3. sing, has taken place mj>rd nak beside i-nat (nas- 'reach') and in d-srak (from srj- 'discharge'). b. before consonant suffixes: I. the phonetic cerebral appears before case-endings beginning with bk in pai-bhis, from pds- 'look' and 'cord'; vid-bhis from vis- 'settlement'; sardd- hhyas 'for the bees' (probably from *sardh-y, sad-bMs^. In anadud-bhyas (AV), from anad-vah- 'bull', d appears for d by dissimilation; while the guttural of the nom. instead of the phonetic d appears in susamdrg-bhis (from drs- 'see') 'fair to see' and in dig-bhyds {KSf.) from dis- 'region'.* 2. before the -su of the loc. pi. k is phonetic, and appears in vik-m, from vis-, in spite of the unphonetic t of the nom. vit. But owing to the influence of the other cases the unphonetic cerebral (in the form of t dissimilated for /) appears in anadut-su.

3. before the dhi of the 2. sing. impv. the cerebral is phonetic in dididdhi, from dis- "; also in z (== s), which after cerebralizing the dk is dropped, leaving a compensating length, in tadhi from taks- 'hew' (= IE. tegzdhi); also in so-dha 'sixfold' (for sas-dha : as-, like as-, becoming before a voiced mute) 3. c. The cerebrals in the following words have not been satisfactorily explained: aghati- and a-ghatd- (AV.) 'striker', beside -a-ghata- (VS.); andd- 'egg'; itdnt- (x. 171') 'wandering' (?) , kuta- 'house' (?); kata- 'frontal boiie'; kfptta-'iatV{7); manduka- 'frog'; ita-{KS[.) 'reed'; rarita- laldta- (\^.), {KN.) 'forehead'. Some others, mostly containing b, may be suspected of non-Aryan

origin: bat, badd, interjections; baturin- 'broad' (?), btrita- 'troop' (?); bekandta- 'usurer'; addmbara- (VS). 'drum'; khadgd- (VS. MS.) 'rhinoceros'; candald- (VS.) 'outcast'; markdta- (VS.) 'ape'. 44. The dentals. — The dentals are at the present day pronounced as interdentals in India, but according to the Pratisakhyas* they were post-dental, being produced at the root of the teeth {dantamula). They represent IE. dentals, corresponding to similar sounds in the cognate languages. When two IE. dentals met, there seems to have been a tendency to change the first to a sibilant 5. A survival of this appears in some Vedic combinations of d or dh with dk, which point to an earlier zdA, viz. in de-hi, beside dad- dhi 'give'; dhe-hi (for *dhadh-dhi) 'put'; kiye-dhi 'containing much', in all of which examples e is based on Ilr. az^. a. Change of s to i. The dental sibilant as the final of roots or nominal stems becomes f: I. before the « of verbal suffixes (future, aorist, desiderative) in the three verbs vas- 'dwell', vas- 'shine', and ghas- 'eat'*: thus avatsTs (AY.) 'thou hast dwelt'; vdt-syati (MS.) 'will shine'; jighat-sati (AV.) 'desires to eat', and jighat-si'i- (AV.) 'hungry'.

1 From this phonetic change of j to rf corresponding forms). This sibilant, Indian/, before bh is to be explained the stem id- first became the cerebral mute d before the 'refreshment', beside is- (which occurs before i^/4-suffixes (as dental ^ became dental d) when vowel endings only): id-bhis etc. would have it first spread to the nom., and lastly to the led to the formation of id-a, etc. (inst. sing.), loc. pi. which then gave rise to id-a- as an extension 4 See RPr. I. 19; TPr. 11. 38. of id-\ cp. also iddyata (RV. I. igi^ MM., 5 For example, Gk. J-oiaia, Av. voista, il&yata, AufrecHt) : ilayati (AV.) 'be quiet'. beside vet-tha 'thou knowest'. Cp. Wacker- 2 It is not phonetic in aviddhi and vividdhi nagel I, 152 b. (see above, 42 d). Cp. Wackernagel i, 149 c 6 Loc. cit., also note. (end). 7 See discussion of attempted explanations 3 The cerebral which in this paragraph in Wackernagel i, 153, note. represents (except before s) the old pala- 8 All the other roots in j add the suffix tals, is based on an llr. sh- sound / z (as with connecting vowel i. shown by the Avesta having j z in the 3* 36 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

2. before the t of the 3. sing, of a past tense: thus vy-avat (AY.) 'has shone forth', from vi-vas-. This is, however, probably not a phonetic change, but is rather due to the influence of the 3. sing, of other preterites with -/; *d-vas-t having thus, instead of *d-vas, become d-vaf^- 3. before case-terminations beginning with bh, and when final (in nom. ace. sing, neut), in the perf. part, and in four other words: thus Jagr-vdd-bkis, inst. pi., 'having awakened', tatan-vdt, ace. n., 'having stretched'; usdd-bhis, from usds- 'dawn'; mad-bhis, vidd-bhyds (AV.), from mas- 'month'; svd-tavad- hhyas (VS.), from svd-tavas- 'self-strong'. The change of J to / began before the bh endings (like that of s to / or d) ^ and was extended to the nom. acq. sing. neut. in the E.V., but not till later before the -su of the loc. pl.3

a. Allied to the change of final s of roots and ' stems to t, is the apparent change of the medial dental sibilant to d in madgu- (VS.) 'diver', from niajj- 'dive' yjj = \Y.. zg)\. ^. The substitution of dentals for other mutes is extremely rare. In consequence

of dissimilation, a. dental replaces a cerebral in anadiitm and anaditdbhyas (AV.), from anadvah- 'bull'; in drdhrd- 'firm', beside drdhd-S; in Jiasi/iafdi (TS.) 'four year old bull', beside pasfhavap (VS.). A dental seems to take the place of a labial in ad-lhis, ad-bhyas, beside af- 'water': but this is probably due to the analogy of *nadbhis, nadbhyds, beside napdi- 'grandson' ^.

45. The labials. — These sounds as a rule represent IE. labials; e. g. pitf-, Gk. TcaTfjp; bhdra 'bear', Gk. ^ipz. But owing to the great rarity of IE. b, there are very few Vedic examples of inherited b; e. g. rambate 'hangs down', Lat. labi 'glide'?. a. The number of words containing b has been greatly increased by new formations, i. Thus b replaces / or bh before other voiced mutes: e. g. pi-bd-and- 'firm', beside pad-d- 'place'; rab-dhd-, beside rabhante 'they take'. — 2. It is the regular substitute for bh in reduplicative syllables or when initial aspiration is lost owing to a following aspirate; e. g. ba-bktiva from bhu- 'be', baku- 'arm', bandh- 'bind'^. — 3. In a few examples it takes the place of or interchanges with v^; \hMS pddbisa- (RV.), latsiAe pddvTsa- (VS.); band- beside vand- 'arrow'; -balsa- (AV.) beside -valsa- 'twig'; band- (AV.) 'music' beside vand-; -blina- (AV.) 'crushed', beside vltna- (B.)". — 4. It further occurs in some new onomatopoetic words; budbudd- 'bubble'; bsl (AV.) interj. 'dash!'; bata interj. 'alas!' and batd- 'weakling'. — 5. In one instance b seems to stand for m before r, in bru- 'speak', for *mru-'^'^, originally appearing most likely after a pause or after a final consonant ^^- b. In many words the origin of 5 is obscure. Most of these probably come from a foreign source: i. owing to their meaning: arbudd- and drbuda-,

balbuthd-, sdmbara-, sfbinda-, names of foes of Indra and of the Aryans; brbt't-, a proper name; bajd- (AV.), bdlbaja- (AV.), bilvd- (AV.), names of plants; bdkura- and bakurd-, a musical instrument. — 2. owing to their phonetic form: kilbisa- 'sin'; bisa- 'root-fibre'; busd- 'vapour'; bat 3xA bada, interjections;

1 Cp. Wackernagel I, 154. different scholars, see Wackernagel i, 158 b, 2 See 42 d (p. 34). note. 3 Cp. Wackernagel i, 155 a, note. 8 See above 32 a, T, 2. 4 Op. cit. I, 15s b, note. 9 There is some confusion between forms 5 See 42 a a (p. 33). of bfh- 'be great', and vf^h- 'tear'. 6 The name in-d-ra and ndnan-df- 'hus- 10 On some doubtful or wrong explanations band's sister', are explained by some scho- of b for V [ni-bfh- 'crush', bdla-, bdlbaja-, bat, lars as containing a Prakritic d. See WACKER- sabdla-, idmba-), seeWACKERNAGELI, 161, note. NAGEL I, 157, note. '^ Cp. Gk. fiporig for *iJ.por6(. 7 On some words (sabar-, batd-, bdla-, bal- " See Wackernagel i, 159. buthd-) in which b is regarded as IE. by I. Phonology. Labials. Nasals. 37

bandd- {KSl) 'crippled'; bdrsva- (VS.) 'socket'; baskdya- 'yearling'; bdskiha- (VS.) 'decrepit'; bila-'caNQ', bUma-'c\{\^'-, ^frzVa- 'troop' (?); bekandta- 'nswtr' . — 3. for both reasons: ilibha- and brsaya-, names of demons; aldbu- (AV.) 'bottle gourd'. — 4. Other words which if not of foreign origin, are as yet insufficiently explained: bdrjaha- 'udder'; ^a;-^a- 'he-goat'; ^aV/ 'quickly'; -(5ara- 'aperture'; (55r«- 'seed'; bundd- 'axrovf'; brbdd-uktha-, an epithet of Indra; chubiika-'okiva'; sabdla- 'brindled'; sdmba-, a weapon of Indra; baldsa- (VS. AV.), a disease; bleska- (K.) 'noose'. '^ 46. The nasals. — There are five nasals corresponding, in regard to place of articulation, to the five classes of mutes. Each of them can only appear before a mute of its own class ^. Before sibilants and h the nasals do not appear 3; before / only 7n is found; « does not appear finally any more than the palatal mutes.

a. The guttural nasal n regularly appears before gutturals: e. g. ankd- 'hook'; ankkdya- 'embrace'; dnga- 'limb'; jdngha- 'leg'. Before other consonants or as a final, it appears only when a following k o^ g has been dropped, as in stems ending with -nc- or -nj- and in those compounded with -dfs-; Q.g.pratydn, nom. sing, ol pratydnc- 'facing'; yundhi {^ yuhj-dhi), 2.sing. impv. of yuj- 'join'; kt-dfn, nom. sing, of ki-dfi- 'of what kind?'. b. The palatal nasal n is found only before and after c or /, and before ch; e. g. vdncati (AV.) 'wavers'; yajnd- 'sacrifice'; varichantu 'let them desire'.

Ci The labial nasal m a.s a rule represents IE. m; e. g. maff- 'mother', Lat. mater; ndman- 'name', Lat. nomen. It is by far the most common labial sound'*, its frequency being greater than that of the four labial mutes taken togetherS. By some scholars m is regarded as representing an original n or v in certain instances^.

d. The dental nasal n a.s a, rule represents IE. n; e. g. nd 'not', Lat. -ne; mdnas- 'mind', Gk. [i.zvoq. It is the commonest of the nasals, being more frequent than m, and about three times as frequent as the other three taken together?. The dental nasal also appears instead of dental mutes and of the labial nasal.

a. It appears in place of d before the nominal suffix -na, and of t, as well as d, before the m of secondary suffixes; e. g. dn-na- 'food' {ad- 'eat'); chin-nd- 'cut off' {chid-); vidyim-mant- 'gleaming' {vidyut- 'lightning'); mfn-maya- 'earthen' {mfd- VS. 'earth'). This substitution is in imitation of Sandhi, as dn tm dm otherwise occur within words; e. g. udna (from uddn- 'water'), atmdn- 'breath', vid-md 'we know'.

^. dental n regularly appears in place of m : i. before t; e. g. from yam-

'restrain' : yan-tur- and yan-tf- 'guide', yan-trd- 'rein'; from sram- 'exert oneself :

srantd- 'wearied'; 2. before suffixal m or v; e. g. from gam- 'go' : d-gan-ma, radically final, originally followed by suffixal gan-vaki, jagan-^ims-^ ; 3. when s or t; e. g. from gam- 'go', d-gan, 2. 3. sing. aor. (^ d-gam-s, d-gam-t)\ from jj/az^- 'restrain', a-yan, 3.sing.'aor.(= a-yam-s-t); from ddm-'houst', gtTi.{pdtir) ddn'>

1 Op. cit. I, 162. 8 This change of m to n may be due 2 Excepting in a few instances when a to the influence of the cognate forms in mute has been dropped, as in yundki = which m phonetically becomes n when final yungdhi (see a). (below 3). 3 Excepting in a few instances h or n 9 On this explanation of dan (denied before the -su of the loc. pi. by PiscHEL, VS. 2, 307 ff.) see especially 4 Excluding the semivowel v. Bartholomae, if. 8, in 'Arica' 229—249; 5 Cp. Whitney 50 and 75. also RiCHTER, KZ. 36, III — 123, on dcim- 6 Cp. Wackernagel I, 177, note. pati-. 7 Whitney 75. . ;

38 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

'of the house' (= dams). Here the change oi m to n was evidently due (as in i) to the dental s ox t which originally followed'. 47. The cerebral n. — This nasal, like the cerebral mutes, is an Indian innovation. It is for the most part the result of a regular phonetic development, but is also in a number of words due to Prakritic influence; A. Besides regularly appearing before cerebral mutes, e. g. in dandd- 'staff', the cerebral n phonetically takes the place of dental n after r r s', either immediately preceding, e. g. nrnam 'of men', vdrna- 'colour', umd-

'hot'; or when only vowels 3, guttural or labial mutes'* or nasals, y v or. h, intervene; e. g. krpdna- 'misery'; krdmana- 'step'; ksobhana- 'exciting'. This

rule is followed throughout within a word even when a j which it contains is produced by SandhiS; thus not only trpnoti {trp- 'be satisfied') z.-aA grbhnsti {grbk- 'seize'), but also u suvandh (for suvandh, ix. 107^). In su-sumnd- 'very gracious' (where the s is produced by internal Sandhi), the dental n remains probably owing to the influence of the simple word sumnd-. a. The cerebralization of dental n takes place almost as regularly in verbs compounded with the prepositions prd 'before', para 'away', pdri 'round', nir (for nis) 'out'; as well as in nominal derivatives of these com- binations. But the r does not cerebralize n when there is tmesis or any other preposition but a intervenes*- The cerebralization takes place: 1. in the initial of roots; e. g. prdnak {nas- 'reach'); param'tde {nud- 'thrust); pra-netf- 'guide' {m- 'lead'). But n remains if r or ks follows; hence prdnriyat {KSf.) from nrt- 'dance', zxiA-pdri naksati 'encompasses' («a^j- 'reach').

The cerebralization is also absent, without this dissimilating cause 7, in abhi prd nonu- (SV.) beside abhi prd nonu- 'shout towards', and in prd-nabk-^ (AV.) 'burst'. 2. medially or finally in the roots knu- 'hide', an- 'breathe', han- 'strike' (though not in forms with gkn); thus pdri-hnuta (AV.) 'denied'; prdniti 'breathes'; nir hanyat (AV.), but abhi-pra-ghndnti.

3. in suffixal n the cerebralization fluctuates: it always takes place in the n of the I. sing, subj., e. g. nir gamani; not always in the pres. base of M- 'impel'; e. g. prd hinomi, etc., but pari-hinomi^; never in that of minati 'diminishes' or of minoti 'estabhshes'; it is also absent in ydju skanndm (x. i8i3)«'; but -trnna- (VS.), from trd- 'pierce'. b. In nominal compounds cerebralization takes place less regularly when there is r r ox s in the first member, and n in the second:

I. an initial n is here nearly always cerebralized in the RV.: e. g. dur-naman- 'ill-named'; prd-napat- 'great-grandson'; also dur-ndia- (AV.) 'un-

1 The dental « may stand for / in carma- + In some instances where the mute mnd- 'tanner' (cp. carmani mlaiani): BR. immediately precedes the n, the cerebrali- According to Benfey, it is used to fill the zation does not take place; e. g. v^tra-ghne hiatus in declension, e. g. kavi-n-a; and in ksepnu- 'springing'. the perf. red. syllable an-, e. g. in anrcur; 5 In one curious instance, sam . . pindk cp. Wackernagel I, 175 c, note. (he?,iAs pinasfi, iiompis- 'crush'), the cerebral 2 The cerebral mutes and nasal not only lost at the end of a syllable has transferred do not cerebralize a n separated from them its cerebral character to the beginning of by a vowel, but even stop the influence of the syllable. a preceding r r s; thus in reduplication 6 The preposition ni foUovnng another only the first n is cerebralized; e. g. pra- containing > is mostly cerebralized. nindya («> 'lead'); cp. manina inst. oi mani- 7 Cp. above 42 a, a. 'pearl' (B.b.). This arises from a disinclination 8 Cp. tri-ndbhi- 'three-naved', and vfsw- to pronounce cerebral mutes and nasals in nabhi- 'strong-naved'. successive syllables. 9 Cp. VPr. m. 87; APr. m. 88; IV. 95; TPr. 3 On the absence of cerebralization in xm. 12. 10 ustrdnam and j-asiranam, see above 42 a, a. Cp. Wackernagel i, 167 b e. I. Phonology. The cerebral 39

attainable', dur-nihita- (AV.) 'ill-preserved'; but (because s, r r or s follows) not in -nrmiia- 'manhood', -nistha- 'eminent'; -nissidh- 'gift'; -nirnij- 'adornment'; nor (owing to the intervening gh and m) in dirgkd-nitha-, N., yusmd-mta- 'led by you'. The cerebralization is further absent, without any preventing cause, in aksa-ndh- 'tied to the axle' (beside pari-ndh- 'enclosure'); tri-nakd- 'third heaven'; tri-nabhi- p'mar-nava- 'three-naved', and vfsa-nabhi- 'great-naved' ; 'renewing itself (but AV. pimar-nava-); dur-niydntu- 'hard to restrain'.

2. it is less frequent medially; e. g. purvahnd- forenoon'; aparahnd- (AV.)

'afternoon'; nr-vdhana- 'conveying ratr)!;pra-vdkana-{N'&) 'carr)dng oT ; purTsa- - (VS.) beside purlsa-vdhana- (TS. K.) 'removing rubbish'; nr-mdnas- 'kind to men', vrsa-manas- 'manly-spirited', but fd-manas- 'of far-seeing mind'; //r«-^/^a«(i- 'wooden club', but vrtra-ghnS, dat., 'Vrtra-slaying'; su-sumnd-^ ^v&nj gracious'; su-pra-pand- 'good drinking place'; nr-pdna- 'giving drink to men'; but pari-pdna- 'drink', pari-pdna- (AV.) 'protection'; pary-uhyamana- (VS.) beside pary-uhyamana-{ Yvak-). c. Even in a closely connected following word cerebralization may take place after r r s in the preceding one. 1. This is frequently the case with initial n, most usually in nas 'us', rarely in other monosyllables such as mi 'now', nd 'like'^; e. g. sa^d m nah (vm. 73^). Initial n occasionally appears thus in other words also; e. g. pdri netd . . visai {ix.. 103+) ; srnga-vrso napat {SV., napat, RV.); asthuri nau (VS., no RV. TS.); {gSmad)' u su nasatya (VS.) prd ndmani (TS.); punar nayamasi (AV.); suhdr nah (MS.) = suhard nah; vdr ndma (TS. v. 6. i3). 2. Medial n also occurs thus, most often in the enclitic pronoun ena- words also after 'this'; e. g. indra , enam. It occasionally appears in accented

final r: gor ohena (i. i8o5); m'r inasah (AV.); nfbhir yemandh (SV, yemandh, RV.); panibhir viydmanah (TS.)3. A final n is treated as medial and cere- bralized thus in ifn imdn (MS.) and aksdn dva (MS.). B. In a number of words n has a Prakritic origin. a. It is due to a preceding r or r which has been replaced hj a i u or has disappeared through assimilation. This is indicated to be the case by the appearance beside them of cognate words containing r ox I sounds: I. in Vedic itself: thns am- 'pin of the axle'; /5a«a- 'one-eyed', beside karnd-''

'crop-eared' (MS.); kdna- (AV.) 'particle' : kald- 'small part'; janjana-bhdvan 'ghttering' .jurni- 'glow' {-jan- probably = jrn- from old pres. *j'rnati); punya- cp. parpharat 'may 'auspicious' -.pf- 'fill'; phan- 'bound' (= *phrn-, *pharn-) in alHed languages: he scatter'; dhdnika- ' c\mw&^ -.dhdraka- (VS.), id.— 2. gand- 'crowd'; paii- (VS.) 'purchase'; vanij- 'merchant'^; dnu- 'minute'; kiinaru- 'having a withered arm'; pani- 'hand'; sthanu- 'stump' ^. b. Owing to the predilection for cerebrals in Prakrit, which substituted n for n throughout between vowels, even without the influence of neigh- bouring cerebrals, one or two words with such n seem to have made their 'at onct' amndh way into Vedic: mani- 'pearl' (Lat. monile); amndh (MS.) : (AV.), id. 7. of c. The exact explanation of the 11 in the foUowmg words (some kalydna- 'fair'; which may be of foreign origin) is uncertain: kdnva-, N.;

uhana. Cp. Lanman, Sanskrit 1 See above 47 A (end). haps be manor passage. 2 Cp. Benfey, Gottinger Abhandlungen Reader, note on this 4 See Wackernagel i, 172 a (p. 192, mid.). 20, 14. , , , avena, 5 See Fr6hde, BB. 16, 209. 3 agner avena (l. 128^), Pp. agneh \ 6 Wackernagel i, 1 72 d, note, 173, note. is probably yiTong ior agneh jravena. On Cp. doubtful instances, op. cit. I, the other hand, for mdjw rukdna (l 328), 7 On a few reading should per- 173, note. Pp. manah \ ruhanah, the ; ;;;

40 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar. kdnukd-, of doubtful meaning; nicumpund-, of doubtful meaning; nimk 'secretly', 7iinyd-'^ 'inner'; pain-, a kind of demon; (Jizwa- 'arrow'; z^^wi- 'udder', 'arrow',

'music'; z/^iwf- 'music'; vdnici-, a kind of musical instrument; sona-^x&d'; vgana- (SV. VS.), of doubtful meaning; ki'mapa- {KN) 'corpse'; ^««i- 'division' (AV.) cupttnika-(J^5.), N.; nicankund- (TS.) and nicunkund- (TS.), of doubtful meaning; venu- (AV.) 'reed'; sdnu- (AY.) 'hemp'^

48. The semivowels. —The semivowels y, r, /, v have the peculiarity that each has a vowel corresponding to it, viz. i r I u respectively. They are called anta{h)stha in the Pratisakhyas 3, the term doubtless meaning 'intermediate', that is, standing midway between vowels and consonants. a. / and v regularly represent the final i and u of diphthongs before vowels, e and ai becoming ay and ay, and au av and av. But while j and v are regularly written for i and u before vowels, they were often pronounced as iy and uv. This is shown by the fact that: 1. iy and uv are frequently written, beside y and v, in the inflexion of I- and z7-stems. Thus from dhi- 'thought', there are several compounds, in some of which the stem is written with iy before vowels, as itthadhiy- 'very devout', in others withj', as adhy- 'longing'. Similarly -ju- 'hastening', regularly appears as -juv-; but -/«- 'purifying', -/^-'swelling', -ja- 'bringing forth', always as -pv-, -SV-, -sv-'^. In the same way, the suffix -ya is often written -iya-, e. g. dgr-iya- 'first', beside dgr-ya- (VS.); ftv-iya- and fiv-ya- 'regular'; urv-iyd and urv-yd (VS. TS.) 'widely'. This spelling is characteristic of the TS. Here iy is generally written where more than one consonant precede, almost invariably so in the inflexion of stems in i and I; e. g. indrSgniy-os 'of Indra and Agni', laksmiyd 'by Laksmi'; very often also in the suffix -ya; e. g. dsv- iya- beside dsv-ya- (RV.) 'relating to horses' '. Similarly uv appears here for V in suvar- and suvargd- 'heaven', beside svar (RV.) and svargd- (RV.); in the inflexion of tana- 'body', in some forms of - 'wind', bahu- 'arm', uru- 'thigh'^. In the SV. and MS.7 there are two or three other examples of iy and uv for y and v^. 2. according to metrical evidence, y and v (though written as pronounced in classical Sanskrit) have a syllabic value in a large number of examples in '° the Vedic hymns ''. This was recognized to be the case by the Pratisakhyas 3. r appears instead of r before the suffix -ya\ e. g. inpitr-ya- 'paternal', from pitf- 'father'. 4. ay ay ey appear before the suffix -_ya"; e. g. saha-sey-yaya, dat, 'for lying together'. Here yy is always to be read as y-iy in the RV. (except in

Book X and daksdyya- in I. 129^)'^-

1 Perhaps from *nirnaya-, see Benfey, the present suffix -_)/a; the comp. suffix -^aj; GGA. 1858, p. 1627. the gen. ending -jya, and the fut. suffix -jya 2 On these words see "Wackernagel I, the initial z* of suffixes; the ^z/- of the 5th class; 174 b and 173 d, note. in asva- 'horse' and tvasfr-, N. On the otherhand 3 RPr. I. 2; VPr. IV. 101 ; also Nirukta the syllabic pronunciation is sometimes used II. 2. Cp. Whitney on APr. I. 30. artificially by the poets, as is apparent from 4 Cp. Wackernagel i, 181 a, note. the isolation of such occurrences. In some 5 Several other examples, loc. cit. individual words the written iy and uv have 6 Cp. Whitney on TPr. 11. 25. to be pronounced as consonantal j/ and v. 7 See Wackernagel 1, 181 a, note (p. 201, always in suvand-. pres. part, of su- 'press' mid.). occasionally in bhiyds- 'fear', hiyand- 'im- 8 On the other hand there are some iso- pelled'. Cp. Wackernagel i, 181 b, note, lated instances of y and v in the Vedas as bottom. compared with iy and uv in classical Sans- 10 RPr. vin. 22; XVII. 14. krit; see Wackernagel i, p. 201, bottom. " See Grassmann, Wb. 1711, columns 9 In certain words and formatives j/ and v 4 and 5. are regularly consonantal: in the relative j'fl- 12 Wackernagel i, 181 c 7. I. Phonology. Semivowels. 41

That this syllabic pronunciation was not simply i and u (with hiatus), but iy tiv, and is rendered probable not only by the spelling iy uv beside;/ v, but by the consideration that j/ and v are respectively the natural transition from i and u to a. following dissimilar vowel.

. b. In the RV. / and v are pronounced with a syllabic value under the following conditions:

1. almost invariably after a group of consonants and generally after a single consonant if preceded by a long vowel. Thus the ending -bkyas and the suffix -tya are regularly pronoimced as dissyllables after a long vowel, but as monosyllables after a short vowel. Hence, too, v is pronounced as well as written in the forms davidhv-dt, susv-ati, susv-and-, jukv-e', jt'ikv-ati^. 2. after a single initial consonant at the beginning of a verse, or, within a verse, if the preceding syllable is heavy, in some half dozen words. Thus tyd- 'that', and tvdm 'thou' are nearly always pronounced as they are written after a short vowel, but iiyd- and tuvdrn at the beginning of a Pada or after a long vowel. The y is pronounced as iy in j'yd- and jyakd- 'bowstring' only at the beginning of a verse or after a long vowel, in jydyas- 'mightier' only after a long vowel. Finally tva- 'many', must generally be read as tuva- after a long vowel, but almost invariably tva- after a short vowel. 3. in the inflexion of the nouns in r (nom. sing, -i-s) and W^, where the stem has (with only six exceptions) to be pronounced with iy and uv. 3 Thus the transition from iy and uv to y and v began in the RV., the traditional text writing for the iy and uv which was pronounced by the poets of that Veda, sometimes iy and uv, sometimes y and v. 49. The semivowel /. — This semivowel, when not derived from i before other vowels (48 a) within Vedic itself, is based either on IE. i (= Gk. spiritus asper) or voiced palatal spirant (= Gk. tY; e. g. yds 'who' (0-?); yaj- 'sacrifice' {dy-io^); yudh- 'fight' {i

'boil' (Cew); yuj- 'yoke' (fu/-); yusdn- 'broth' {^.v-i^yj). It is probably due to this diiference of origin that yas- 'boil' and yam- 'restrain', reduplicate with ya- in the perfect, but yaj- 'sacrifice', with /-. a. This semivowel sometimes appears without etymological justi- fication: r. after roots in -a before vowel suffixes; e. g. da-y-i, 3. sing. aor. {da- 'give'), d-dha-y-i {dha- 'put'), d-jna-y-i {jna- 'know'); upa-stha-y-am, abs.

'approaching'; rsabha-da-y-in- (AV.) 'bestowing bulls'. This is probably due to the influence of roots in -ai (27 a), which have a- before consonants, but ay- before vowels; t. g. pai- 'di'mk.^ -.pd-iave, d-pay-i, pay-ana-. — 2. owing to the influence of closely allied words or formations, in: yu-y-dm 'you' (for *yusam, Av. yuzem, cp. yus-md-, stem of other cases) 5 because of vay-dm 'we'; bhu-y-istha- 'most' because of bhii-yas- 'more'; bhdve-y-am, i. sing. opt. (for *bhdvayam) because of bhdves, bhdvet, etc. b. very rarely in the later Samhitas after palatals: tirascye {KSf. xv. 35) var. lect. for tirasce, dat, 'transverse'; snydptra- (TS. i. 2. 13 3) -.indptra- (VS.) 'corner of the mouth'. c. interchanging (after the manner of Prakrit) occasionally with w^ in

1 Qnvyurnv-dn, vy-^irfiv-att-heside aporvuv' 6 In khya- 'tell', y seems at first sight to anias, see Wackernagel I, 182 a a, note. be interchanged with the s of ksa-, which 2 See below 375, 382 a. occurs in the K. and the MS. (cp. v. Schroe- 3 For various explanations of this see der's ed., I, p. XLm, 7); but the two verbs,

Wackeknagel I. 182 a 7, note (p. 205). though synonymous, have probably a different 4 See Brugmann, KG. i, 302. origin. Cp. Wackernagel i, 188 c, note. 5 Cp. Wackernagel i, 86 c; 187, note. ;

42 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

the Samhitas of the YV.; a. g. atatayln- (VS.) beside atatavin- (TS.) 'having one's bow drawn''. 50. The semivowel v. — This sound was, at the time of the Prati- sakhyas^, a voiced labio-dental spirant Hke the English v or the German w.

Within Vedic it is very frequently derived from u^. It seems otherwise always to be based on IE. u; there is no evidence that it is ever derived from an IE. spirant v which was not interchangeable with «t. a. This semivowel is sometimes found interchanging with b^, with y^, and according to some scholars, with mi.

b. In two roots in which v is followed by r, an interchange of sonantal and consonantal pronunciation, together with metathesis takes place, vr becoming ru: hence from dhvr- 'bend' are derived both -dhvr-t- and -dhru-, -dhru-t-, dhru-H-; from hvr- 'go crooked', -hvr-t-, -hvr-ia-, -hvr-ti- and hru- ni-ii, 3. sing., hru-t-, -hru-ta-. The root rudh- 'grow', may be a similar variation of vrdh- 'grow'^- 51. The semivowel r. — The liquid sound r must originally have been a cerebral, as is shown by its phonetic effect on a following dental « (47 A). By the time of the Pratisakhyas?, it was, however, pronounced in- other phonetic positions also. Being the consonantal sound corresponding to r before vowels (like y v \.o i v), it is in that position correspondingly

graded with ar; e. g. d-kr-an, d-kr-ata, beside d-kr-thas : d-kar-am, aor. of kr- 'do'; dr-ii- : ddr-u- 'wood'. a. r generally corresponds to r in the cognate languages, but not

infrequently to / also; and where these languages agree in having /, the latter may in these instances be assumed to be the original sound. As old Iranian here invariably has r, there seems to have been a tendency to rhotacism in the Indo-Iranian period'". Words in which Vedic r thus represents IE. / are the following: 1. initially: raks- 'protect'; rag/i-t'i- 'swift'; ramhate 'speeds'; rabh- 'grasp'; ramb- 'hang down'; ra- 'bark'; ric- 'leave', rip- 'smear'; rih- 'lick'; rue- 'shine', ruj- 'break'; rudh- and ruh- 'grow'. 2. medially: dngara- 'coal'; ajird- 'agile'; aratni- 'elbow'; arh- 'be worthy'; iydrti 'sets in motion'; ir- 'set in motion'; Urna- 'wool'; urmi- 'wave'; garutmant-, a celestial bird; gardabhd- 'ass'; gdrbha- 'womb'; cakrd- 'wheel'; car- 'move'; caramd- 'last'; cird- 'long'; chardis- 'protection'; dharu-

(AV.) 'sucking'; parasu- 'axe'; piparti 'fills'; pi'tr- 'fort'; puri'i- 'much'; prath- 'spread out'; -pru-t- 'swimming', -pruta- part, 'floating', pravate ^V2isit^ mdrdhati 'neglects'; -marsana- (AV.) 'touching'; inurdhdn- 'head'; vard- 'suitor', and various forms of vr- 'choose'; vdrcas- 'light'; iarand- 'pro- tecting'; sdrman- 'protection'; sdrkara- 'gravel'; Usira- (AV.) 'cold season'; sri- 'lean'; iru- 'hear'; sroni- 'buttock'; sar- in forms of sr- 'run', and sarird- (VS.) 'flood'; sarpis- 'clarified butter'; sahdsra- 'thousand'; svar- 'heaven'; - 'sun'; harit- and hdrita- 'yellow'; hiranya- 'gold'; hradi'mi- 'hail'".

1 Cp. Benfey, GGA. 1852, ii4f.; Webek, 9 See Whitney on APr. i. 20, 28.

IS. 2, 28; Wacicernagel I, 188 I,. 1° It seems as if the Vedic relation of r 2 See Whitney on APr. 1. 26. to / could only be accounted for by assum-

3 See above 48 a.. ing a mixture of dialects; one dialect 4 Cp. Wackernagel I, 196; Beugmann, having preserved the IE. distinction of r KG. I, 148 and 155. and /; in another IE. / becoming r (the 5 See 45 a, 3. Vedic dialect); in a third r becoming / 6 49 c. 1 46 c. throughout (the later Magadht). See Brug- 8 For some other possible instances see MANN, KG. I, 175, note. i, Wackernagel 18 |. b, note. " See Wackernagel i, 189. ^

I. Phonology. Semivowkls. 43

b. r appears in place of phonetic d (= z, Ilr. i)' as final of stems in -is and -us, before endings which begin with bk-; e. g. havir-bhis and vdpur-bhis. This substitution is due to the influence of Sandhi, where is, us would become ir, ur. r also takes the place of d in ira- beside ida- 'refreshing draught'. In urubjd- 'wide open' r apparently takes the place of dental d (= *ud-ubjd-), perhaps under the influence of the numerous compounds beginning with uru- 'wide', e. g. uru-jri- 'wide-striding' c. Metathesis of r takes place when ar would be followed by s or h + consonant. Under these conditions it appears to be phonetic, being due to the Svarabhakti after r being twice as great before h and sibilants as before other consonants 3; when a vowel followed the sibilant or h (e. g. darsatd-)^, the Svarabhakti was pronounced; but if a consonant followed, rS took the place of ar + double Svarabhakti. This metathesis appears in forms of drs- 'see' and srj- 'send forth': drdstum (AV.), drastr- (AV.) 'one who sees'; sdm-srastr- 'one who engages in battle', 2. sing. aor. sras (== *sra/e)i; also va.prds-ti- 'side-horse', beside /«V/-z/- and prsti- 'rib'; moreover in brahmdn- 'priest', brdhman- 'devotion', beside barhis- 'sacrificial litter' (from brh- or barh- 'make big'); perhaps also drahydi 'strongly' {drh- 'be firm'). The same metathesis occurs, being, however, very rare and fluctuating, before ks-: thus tuvi-mraksd- 'injuring greatly', mraksa-kftvan- 'rubbing to pieces' (from mrj- 'wipe', or mrs- 'stroke'), but tdrksya-, N.*. 52. The semivowel I. — The liquid sound / is the semivowel corre- sponding to the vowel / (which however occurs only in some half dozen perfect and aorist forms of the root kip- 'be adapted'). It is pronounced at the present day in India as an interdental; but it must have had a post- dental sound at the time of the Pratisakhyas 7, by which it is described as being pronounced in the same position as the dentals*. a. It represents IE. /9 and, in a few instances, IE. r. It is rarer in Vedic than in any cognate language except old Iranian (where it does not occur at all)". It is much rarer than r, which is seven times as frequent". partly also owing The gradual increase of /, chiefly at the cost of r, but to the appearance of new words, is unmistakable. Thus in the tenth Book of the RV. appear the verbs mhic- and labh-, and the nouns loman-, lohitd-, but in the earlier books only mruc- 'sink', rabh- 'seize', roman- 'hair', rohitd- 'red'; similarly dasanguld- 'length of ten fingers', hlddaka- and hlddika-vant- 'refreshing', beside sv-anguri- 'fair-fingered', hradd- 'pond'. Moreover, while in the oldest parts of the RV. / occurs" in a few words only, it is eight times as common in the latest parts. Again, in the AV. it is seven times as common as in the RV.'3; thus for rap- 'chatter', rikh- 'scratch', a-srird- texts 'ugly', appear in the AV. lap-, likh- (also VS.), aslTld-. The various

'wreath', ra- does not stand for ar, 1 Cp. above p. 35, note 3. sraj- 2 On a supposed parasitic r in chardis- Wackernagel I, 190 d, note. indication 'fence', yajatra- 'adorable', vibhrtra- 'to be 7 Cp. PiSCHEL, BB. 3, 264. An is the fact that borne hither and thither', see Wackernagel that it was not a cerebral Is never occurs (while rs is common). I, 189, note 7. 8 3 According to the APr. I. 1 01. See 44. is largely represented 4 Cp. above 21 a. 9 Which, however,

also : cp. a. 5 Cp. V. Negelein, Zur Sprachgeschichte by r 51 10 Loc. cit. des Veda 83, note 7. ^ 11 il, XLff. 6 On the interchange of ra and ar in See WmTNEY, JAOS. p. 12 See Arnold, 'L in the Rigveda', in raj- 'colour', rajata- 'silvery', raj- 'shine', and Festgruss an Rudolf von Roth, 1893, p. 145 arjuna- 'bright' ; bhraj- 'shine', and bhdrgas- Historical Vedic Grammar, JAOS. 'brilliance'; bhratr- 'brother', and bhartr- 'hus- — 148; 258f.; Vedic Metre p. 3. band'; see Wackernagel i, 190 e, note 18, 2, p. 37, 13 Wackernagel i, 191 c. (end). In vraja- 'fold', vrati.- 'ordinance'. Cp. 44 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

of the YV. also show an increased number of words with / as compared with the RV.; thus babhluid- (VS.) 'brownish' beside babhru- 'brown'; kulala- (VS.) 'potter' beside caril- 'pot'. The MS. has a special predilection for /^; thus pulitdt 'pericardium' beside puritdt (AV. VS.). The SV. has pamsuld- 'dusty', for pamsurd- in the corresponding passage of the RV. In a certain number of words !• interchanges with / in the same period: thus puru- and pulu- 'much'; mis'rd- and -misla- 'mixed'; jargur- and jalgul-, intv. of gr- 'swallow'; in the AV.: -gird- and -gild- 'swallowing', ksudrd- and ksuUakd- (= *ksudla-kd) 'small', tirya- and Hid- 'sesamum'. The above considerations render it probable that the Vedic dialect was descended from an Indo-Iranian one in which rhotacism had removed every /.

But since the oldest parts of the RV. contain some words with IE. /, and in its later parts as well as in the other Sarnhitas / predominantly inter-

changes with r representing IE. I, there must have been another Vedic dialect in which IE. r and / were kept distinct; from the latter / must have found its way into the literary language to an increasing extent''. b. In the oldest parts of the RV. there are no verbal forms which

preserve IE. /, and only a few nouns, viz. {u)lokd- 'free space', slSka- 'call', and -misla- 'mixed'. A few other words containing / have no IE. cognates and may therefore be of foreign origin: titia- 'dark-coloured', /a'/aj-a- 'healing', iilvila- 'fertile', and the denominative tilvilaydte. In the latest parts of the RV. / represents IE. /in: i. verbal forms and primary derivatives: lebhire, lebhand-, labdhd-, from labh- 'grasp', layantam, from It- 'cling'; alipsata, aor. ol lip- 'anoint'; lobhdyanti- part, from lubh- 'desire'; cala-cald-, -cacali- 'swaying' {3X50 pums'-cali- 'whore', AV. VS.), from cal- 'move'; pldvate, plavd- 'boat', from plu- 'swim'. 2. the following nouns: logd- 'clod'; uluka- 'owl'; ulkd- 'meteor'; ulba- 'membrane'; kaldsa- 'jar'; kalA- 'small portion'; kdla- 'time'; kalyana- 'fair'; kt'ila- 'family'; gdldd- 'trickling' (VS. gal- 'drop'); palitd- 'grey'; pulu- (in compounds)

'much'; phalgva- 'weakly'; bdla- 'strength' 3 ; ball- 'tax'; mdla- 'dirty garment'; salild- 'surging'; hladaka- and hlidikdvant- 'refreshing'; also words with the suffix - , especially with diminutive sense; e. g. vrsa-ld- 'little man', sisii-la- 'little child' 5. a. In the later Sarnhitas / represents IE. / in the following words: -kulva- (VS.) 'bald'; kloman- (AV. VS.) 'lung'; gldhana- (AV.) 'dicing'; gldu- {KSf. VS.) 'excrescence'; tulfi- (VS.) 'balance'; palAva- (AV.) 'chaff'; pula-sti- (VS.) 'smooth-haired'; plihd?!- (AV. VS.) 'spleen'; phalgu- (VS.) 'reddish'; laghu- (AV.) 'light'; lap- (AV.) 'prate' (= rap- RV.).

c. On the other hand, / to some extent represents IE. /* also*. 1. In the RV. this value of / is rare and occurs only in the neigh-

bourhood of labial sounds {u, 0, p, m, v): ulukhala- 'mortar' beside uru- 'broad'; Jalgul-, intv. of gf- 'swallow'; pli'isi-, a kind of insect, beside prus- 'squirt'; klosa- 'call' beside krosant- 'calling', kroiand- 'crying'; -lohitd- 'red', lodkd-, a kind of red animal, beside rokit-, rohitd- 'red'; lopdsd- 'jackal', lup- (AV.) 'break', beside rup- 'break'; vpala- 'upper millstone' beside updri 'above'; jdlpi- 'muttering'; pippala- 'berry'; mla- 'fade' beside mr- 'die'; vald- 'cave' beside vdrate 'encloses'. 2. In the later Sarnhitas the use of this / = IE. ;' extends further than

in the RV.; thus dlam (AV.) 'enough' : dram; lis- (VS.) 'tear' : ris-; -luncd- (VS.)

» L. V. ScHROEDER, ZDMG. 33, 196. 4 See Arnold, Festgruss an Roth 147. 2 See Wackernagel i, 192 b, and cp. 5 See Wackernagel i, p. 218. above p. 42, note 10. 6 Cp. above 51 a. 3 Cp. above p. 36, note i". ^;

I. Phonology. Semivowels. Sibilants. 45

'tearing out'; babhlusd- (VS.) 'brownish' : babhru- 'brown'; sthald- (AV. VS.) '. 'gross' : sthUrd- 3. In a few instances / represents IE. r by dissimilation; thus dlarsi dlarti, intv. of r- 'go' (= arar-); prd tilami (VS.) = prd tirami 'I promote' d. In the later Samhitas / occasionally appears in place of phonetic d^ between vowels; and that this change could easily arise, is shown by the fact that / regularly appears instead of d between vowels'*. This substitution is regularly found in the Kanva recension of the VS.; e. g. ile= ide^KY.ik); dsalha = dsadha (RV. dsalha). Other instances are ildyati (AV.) 'stands still', for Hddyati (RV. ilayati) s from id- 'refreshment';, ila- (MS.) 'refreshment',

byform of Ida- (RV. ila-); mil- (AV.) 'close the eyes' ^, connected with mis- 'wink'. In the later Samhitas / is also found for d between vowels when the final of a word (like / in RV.): thus turasal dyuktasah (VS.) for turasat 'over- powering quickly'; phdl Hi (AV.) for pkdt (AV.); probably also in sdiiii (AV.) and bdl Hi (AV. TS.), cp. RV. bdl itthd. e. In at least one word / stands for dental d: ksidla-kd- (AV.) 'small', for *ksudld-, byform of ksudrd- (VS.) 'small'. f. Sometimes / has an independent Indian origin in onomatopoetic words; thus alala-bhdvant- 'sounding cheerfully'. g. On the other hand there are many words in which a foreign origin may be suspected; such are, besides those already mentioned in 45 b, the following: kaulitard-, N.; dlina- and bhalands-, names of tribes; libuja- 'creeper'; lavand- (AV.) 'salt'.

53. The sibilants. — The three sibilants, the palatal s, the cerebral s, and the dental s, are all voiceless. Even apart from the regular phonetic change of / or j- to s, and of s to s, both the palatal and the dental are further liable, in many words and forms, to be substituted for each of the other two. a. Assimilation of j is liable to occur 1. initially, when / or j appear at the end of the same or the beginning of the next syllable. This is the case in svdsura- 'father-in-law'; hasrU- 'mother-in-law'; imdsru- and -smasaru- 'beard'; sdsvant- 'ever-recurring'; in sds- 'six' (Lat. sex), and its various derivatives, sas-ti- 'sixty', sodM (= *saz- dha) 'sixfold', and others 7. 2. initially s in the RV. almost invariably becomes s in sah- 'overcoming', when the final h (= Ilr. i), with or without a following dental, becomes cerebral: nom. sing, sdt 'victorious', and the compounds /awa-j-a/, tura- sat, pura-sdt, prtana-sdt, vlra-sdt, vrtka-sdt, rta-sdt (VS.), visva-sdt (TS. AV.) also d-sadha- 'invincible'. The only exceptions are sadhd, nom. sing, of sddhr- 'conqueror', and the perf. part. pass, sadhd- (AV.)^- The s of the nom. has been transferred to forms with -sdh-, when compounded with prtana-, though

' In B. passages of the TS. and MS. are 2 See Wackernagel i, 193 b, note. found intv. forms of ti 'sway': alelayat, pf. 3 See above SI b. lelaya, also the adv. leldya 'quiveringly'. In 4 See above p. 5, note S. similar passages the prepositions prd and 5 According to B6HTLINGK, ildyaii is para are affected : plenkha- (TS.) =prenkha- wrong for ildyati. Cp. above p. 35, note '. swing'; plaksdrayan (MS. in. 102) 'they caused 6 A form with the original d is found in to flow' {]/ksar-),pald-y-ata (TS.) 'fled' (para-i-). mtdam (K.) 'in a low tone'. Some uncertain or wrong explanations of 7 Cp. Wackernagel i, 197 a, note. atdirnd- 'miserly', utoid- 'wide space', ^at- 8 A B. passage of the MS. has sadhydi 'drop', with / = IE. r, are discussed by (I. 83). Wackernagel I, p. 221, top. :

46 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

there is no phonetic justification for the cerebral (as the s is preceded by a) thus prtana-saham, gen. prtana-sdhas, prtana-sAhya- 'victory in battle', but prtana-sdham (SV.). When compounded with dyumna-, dhanva-, ratha-, vibhva-y sada-, the phonetic form -sS/i- remains'. 3. Medial s has been assimilated to initial / in sasd- 'hare' (IE. kaso-').

b. Without assimilation 3, s 01 s has been changed to s, mostly

under the influence of allied words, in the following: k^sa- 'hair' : kisara- (AV. VS.); sdkrt^ 'excrement'; subh- 'adorn' (probably owing to sudh- 'purify');

suska- 'dry' (Ilr. suska-), si'csyati 'dries'; stu- 'flow', srdvas- 'stream' : sru-, srdvas-y

has-, jW- 'breathe'; svatra-, svdtrya-'Asanty' : svad-''tastt'i; pyasisTtnahi {AN'.) i pyasisimahi (VS.), aor. (534) oipya- 'swell'; osistha-hdn- (VS. TS.) 'striking very swiftly' beside osistha-dAvan- (TS.) 'giving very rapidly' (from osdm 'quickly', lit. 'burningly'), owing to aiistha- 'very swift'; kosa- 'receptacle' (in the later language often also kosa-); kustnd- (VS.) beside kusmd- (MS.), a kind of demon; ruiati- (AV.) 'angry', beside rus- 'be angry', probably owing to. ri'iiant- 'shining'.

a. On the other hand, s occasionally appears in the later Samhitas, chiefly AV., for h. thus asyate (AV. v. 192) : as- 'eat'; vasT- (AV.) 'pointed knife': vast-; sdru- (AV.} 'arrow': Jdru-; arus-srana- {AY.), a kind of wound preparation: Jra- 'boil'; saspin/a>'a- (TS.) 'ruddy like young grass', owing to sasd- 'grass', for sas-piiijara- (VS. MS.) = sas\pd\- pinjara- 6.

54. The palatal s. — This sibilant is a palatal both in origin (= Ilr. /), as indicated by cognate languages, and in employment, as its combination with other consonants shows. Thus it represents an old palatal in satdm 'a hundred', dsva- 'horse', svdn- 'dog', sru- 'hear''. In external Sandhi it regularly appears before voiceless palatal mutes, e. g. ca. At the present day the pronunciation of / in India varies between a sh sound (not always, distinguished from s) and a j' sound followed by y. It is to some extent confused with the other two sibilants even in the Samhitas, but it is to be noted that here it interchanges much oftener with s than with s^- The aspirate of / is ch'^; its media is represented byy and when aspirated by h. ^ These four form the old palatals (Ilr. s, sh, i, ih), representing IE. k kh g gh. The exact phonetic character of the latter is doubtful, but it is probable that they were dialectically pronounced in two ways, either as mutes (guttural'" or palatal) or as spirants, the centum languages later following, the former, the satem languages the latter". a. In external Sandhi s regularly appears for * before the palatals c,ck,s^^. It also stands for s internally in /ajVi/ and /a^^i/a/ 'behind"^, and in vrscdti 'hews' beside -vraskd- 'lopping'.

b. Before s the palatal sibilant when medial is regularly replaced by k, and sometimes also when final; e. g. dfk-sase and -drk, from drs- 'see'. Otherwise / very rarely interchanges with k or c; thus rusant- 'brilliant', beside rue- 'shine'; perhaps kdrna- 'tax' : sru- 'hear'"*. There are also a few words

1 Wackernagel I, 197 b. 9 Cp. above 40. 2 See, however, op. cit. i, 197 c, note. '° The fact that i before s regularly be- 3 For i and s are strictly distinguished in comes k and sometimes also when final, the RV. ; cp. op. cit. I, 197 d a, note (end). seems to favour the assumption of the- 4 Cp., however, op. cit. I, 197 d a. guttural pronunciation.

5 Op. cit. p. 226, top. " Cp. Wackernagel i, 200 b. 6 See op. cit, p. 226/?; and below 64, I a. 12 See below, Sandhi, 78. 7 On the relation of s to the corresponding ^3 Cp. Av. faskat and pasca. sounds in cognate languages, see Wacker- '4 For some words in which such an. NAGEL I, 200 a; Brugmann, kg. I, 233. assumption is doubtful or wrong, seeWACKER- 8 See above 53, 3. NAGEL I, 201 a,. I. Phonology. Palatal /. Dental s. Cerebral j. 47

with s to which k corresponds in the safem languages; such are ^rus- 'cry'; dsman- 'stone''.

55- The dental *. — This sound as a rule represents IE. dental s; e. g. sa 'he', Gothic sa; divas 'horse', Lat. equo-s; dsti, Gk. s

56. The cerebral s. — The cerebral sibilant is altogether of a secondary nature, since it always represents either an original palatal or an original dental sibilant. The cerebral s stands for a palatal before cerebral tenues (themselves produced by this j from dental tenues) in the following two ways: a. for the palatal / Ilr. J) Ilr. (= and / (= z) ; e. g. nas-td-, from nas- 'be lost'; mrs-ta, 3.sing.mid., from mrj- 'wipe'; prs-td- 'asked', prds-tum 'to ask', from pras- 'ask' in pras'-nd- 'question' (present sttra. J)rccM-^ with inchoative suf&x -ckd). In some instances it is shown by the evidence of cognate words to represent /; thus astdu 'eight' beside asfti- 'eighty'; prsti- 'rib', prdsti- 'side-horse', beside pdrsu- 'rib'; dstra- 'goad', beside asdni- 'thunderbolt'; possibly also apasthd-^ 'barb', beside dsman- 'bolt'. b. for the combination ks, which in origin is /+ s^; e. g. cds-te, a-casta, firom caks-^ 'see'; a-tas-ta, tas-td-, tds-tr-'^, beside taks- 'hew'; nir-as-ta- 'emasculated' beside nir-aks-nu-hi (AV.) 'emasculate'; also aorist forms like d-yas-ta, 3. sing. mid. from yaj- 'sacrifice', beside 3. sing. subj. ydks-at; d-srs-tay 3. sing, mid., beside d-srks-ata, 3. pi. mid. from sfj- 'emit'. As in all these instances ks = s -{ s or/ (= z) + s^°, loss of s before t must here be assumed, the remaining / or / combining with the following t as usual to j/"- A similar origin of s is indicated by the evidence of cognate languages in sas-t/td- (AV.) 'sixth', where the final j has been dropped (as in Gk. sk-to?), while retained in Lat. sex-tus; also in sas-ti- 'sixty', sodhd 'sixfold', sodasd- (AV.) 'sixteenth'. It has possibly the same origin in asthivdnt- 'knee"^. 57. The cerebral s stands for dental s after vowels other than a or a, and after the consonants k, r, s.

I. Medially this change regularly'3 takes place, both when the s is radical — e. g. ti-sthati, from st/ia- 'stand'; su-sup-ur, 3. pi. perf. from svap-

I This seems to point to fluctuation in spirant tenuis (]i) or media [d/i). In a few

the IE. pronunciation ; cp. Wackernagel I, words, ksif-, ksu-, ksubh-, ksura-, the sibilant

201 b. comes first in the cognate languages : see

= See Wackernagel t, 210. Wackernagel i, 209. 3 Cp. above 54 a, and below 78, 2. I' Similarly, when ks = guttural + j is + See below 56. followed by «, the j disappears and the guttural 5 Cp. 40. combines with the t% thus from ghas- 'eat', 6 Cp. Wackernagel i, 202 b; and below gdha- {== ghz-ia-); ixora jaks- 't3X', Jagdkd- p. 48, note 7. [= jaghz-ta-), jagdhvaya (= jaghz-tv&ya); 7 Cp. op. cit. I, 116 b. from bhaj- 'share', aor. d-bhak-ta [=al>haj-s-td), 8 Cp. Av. casman-. beside d-bhak-s-i. 9 On the origin of tvas^r- = *lvarftr-, see 12 Cp. Bartholomae, Studien zur indo- Wackernagel r, 202 c, note. germanischen Sprachgeschichte 2, 103. 1° Tliough ks is regularly based on a n The change does not take place in, palatal or a guttural+-f in the Vedic language, some forms of the perfect of sic- 'pour' : there are some words of IE. origin in which sisice (lU. 3215), sisicur (iL 24*), beside sisicatiir.. the s appears to represent not s but a dental ;

48 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

'sleep'; us-and-, part, from vas- 'wear'; rsa-bhd- 'bull'; uksdn- 'ox'; varsd- 'rain' — and when the j is suffixal; as in the superlative suffix -istha; in the loc. pi. suffix -su, e. g. agni-su, aktic-su, nf-su, vik-su, gtr-su, kavis-su; in the j-suffix of the aorist, e. g. ydk-s-at, from yaj- 'sacrifice'. The change is phonetic even when Anusvara intervenes between pimsdnti from pis- 'crush'; ~i u f and s; e. g. Aavtmsi 'offerings' from havis-; cdksumsi 'eyes' from cdksus-. The s, however, remains in forms of hims- 'injure', nims- 'kiss', and pums- 'man', being probably transferred from the strong forms kindsti, pi'imamsam, etc.

a. The s, however, remains when immediately followed by r or r, owing to a i; distaste for a succession of cerebrals e. g. tisras, tisrbhis, tisfnam, f. of tri- 'three' usrcis gen, usi-i s.nA.usram, loc. (beside war, voc), usrd- 'matutinal'; 2/wa- 'bull'; sansrpd-

'creeping'-. Owing to the influence of forms with si; the j- further remains in the syllable sm; instead of sm; as in sisarsi, sisaj-ii (beside sisrate, sisrai-, sarsri etc.). In khara- (AV. VS.) 'hair', the retention may be due to the ? having originally followed the s imme- diately 2. The s also remains unchanged in the combinations stir, stiir, spar, spr, sphur; e. g. tistire, from stf- 'strew'; pisprsas, from sprs- 'touch' 3. It remains in the second of

three successive syllables in which s-s-s would be expected ; thus yasisTsfhas, beside ayasisam, from ja- 'go'; sisaksi, beside sisakti, from sac- 'follow'.

^. Words in which s otherwise follows r or any vowel but a, must be of foreign origin; such as bisa- 'root fibre'; busd- 'vapour'; bfsaya-, a demon; rbfsa- 'cleft'; ki/id- 'praiser'; barsvd- (VS.) 'socket'; htsula- (AV.), a kind of demon; musala- (AV.) 'pestle' (for mt'isra-l); stsa- (AV. VS.) 'lead' 4.

y. The cerebral s is sometimes found even after a, representing an early Prakritic change in which as^ is based on rs and as on arsS. Instances of this are kasaii (AV.) 'scratches'; pasthavdh- (VS. TS.) 'young bull' (lit. 'carrying on the back') a.nA pasthauht-6 'young cow', beside prsthd- 'back'; pasya-1 'stone'; bhasd-i (VS.) 'barking' 9. There are besides several unexplained instances, doubtless due to foreign influence or origin; such

are dsatara- 'more accessible'; kavdsa-, N.; cam- 'blue jay'; ccisdla-'''k.noh' ; jdlasa- 'remedy'; baskdya- 'yearling'; baskiha- (VS.) 'decrepit'; mdsa- 'bean' (AV. VS.); sdspa- (VS.) 'young grass' 10. 2. Initially^' the change regularly takes place, in the RV.: a. in verbal compounds after prepositions ending in i or u, and in nominal derivatives from such compound verbs; also after the preposition nis 'out'; e. g. ni sida (x. 98*); dnu stuvanti (viii. 3*); nih-sdhamana^

(I. 1273).

a. But (as when it is medial) the s remains unchanged when followed by r (even when t or p intervenes) or r (even though a intervene, with an additional m or v in the roots sinar- and svar-); e. g. vi srja 'let flow', vi-sfsfi- 'creation'; vi striutam 'let him extend'; ni-spfse 'to caress' (but d-ni-sirta- 'unchecked'); pdri-sncta- 'flowed round'; vi-sargd- 'end', vi-sdrjana- 'extension' (owing to the influence of the forms with sr from J?7'-); vi-sarmdn- 'dissolving', vi-sard- 'extent', and even vi sasre (owing to the influence of forms with sr from sr- 'flow'); prdti smaretham 'may ye two remember' [ysmr-); abhi-svdranli 'praise', abhi-svdr- 'invocation', abhi-svare, loc, 'behind', abhi-svartf- 'invoker'. But St sp sph are changed according to the general rule, when ar ir ur follow; c. g. prdti sphura 'repel'. In roots which contain no r, the initial s rarely remains; thus in as- santi. forms of 'be' : abhi pari santu, pdri santi (beside pari santi], abhi sydma (beside abhi-syama); and owing to dislike of repeated s: anu-sisidhat (sidh- 'drive off'); dnu-spasfa- 'iioticed' [spas- *s&e^); pdri sani-svanat [svan- 'sound').

1 Cp. above 42 a, a and p. 38, note 2. 6 Cp. Bartholomae, KZ. 29, 579; 2 See Wackernagel i, 50. WiNDISCH, KZ. 27, 169. 3 The combination sr is found only where 7 Cp. FORTHNATOV, BE. 6, 217 ; J. SCHMIDT, sr would be quite isolated amid cognate KZ. 32, 387. forms with s\ thus ajus-ran, from jtis- 'be 8 FORTUNATOV, 1. C. satisfied', since all the other very numerous 9 On doubtful instances like kastha- forms of this verb have /. 'goal', asfhivdntau 'knees', apdsfhd- 'barb', cp. 4 See Wackernagel i, e, 203 note. Wackernagel i, 208 b a, note; b /3, note. 5 Sometimes >o representing also IE. Is and Cp. Wackernagel i, 208 b /S. Is; cp. Wackernagel i, 208 b a. " Finally, s stands for j in the first ;;

I. Phonology. Cerebral s. 49

j3. In the later Samhitas initial s is similarly changed to j; but its retention is in

some instances somewhat less restricted ; thus aiM sphilrjati (AV.) 'sounds towards'

adhi skanda (AV.) and abhi-skandam'^ , heside pari-siandd- (AV., VS.), from skand- 'leap'; praH-spasana- (AV.) 'lying in wait', prati-spasd- (TS.) 'spying'; dnu sthana (TS. V. 6. \\

from as- 'be' ; owing to the following j- also in abhi sisyade (AV.) from syand- 'run'. y. The divergence between the later Samhitas and the RV. is much greater when the augment intervenes between a preposition ending in i and the initial j of a root. In the RV. the s regularly remains unchanged (as ny-dsTdat, vy-dsikai, etc.) except in pary dsasvajat 'embraced' (under the influence of pari sasvaje). In the other Samhitas, however, the j here regularly becomes s; thus abhy-dsihcan (TS.), abky-dsicyanta (AV.) from sic- 'sprinkle'; vy-asahanta (AV.)^, from sah- 'overcome'; ddhy-astham (AV.), dd/iy- asthat (AV.), abhy-astham (AV.) from stkd- 'stand'. In the root sthTv- 'spit', which first occurs in the AV., the initial s has been displaced by s throughout. The form p-aty asthivan indicates the transition which led to the change. Similarly when a reduplicative syllable containing a intervenes between a preposition

ending in i and an initial radical j, the latter always remains unchanged in the RV. thus /ar/ sasvaje; ni-sasdttha. (VIII. 489); ati-taslhdu (x. 5o3); but the AV. has vi-tasfhiri, vi tasthe (owing to vi tis/kate, vi-sfhiia-), but also ddhi tast/mr. b. Initially in the second member of other than verbal compounds s is more common than j when preceded by vowels other than a. But J even in the RV. the is not infrequently retained; not only when r or r follows as in hrdi-spfs- 'touching the heart', su-sdriu-, N., rsi-svard- 'sung by seers', but also when there is no such cause to prevent the change; thus go-sakhi- beside go-sakhi- 'possessing cattle'; go-sdni- (AV. VS.) beside go-sdni- 'winning cattle'; rayi-sthdna- beside rayi-sthdna- (AV.) 'possessing wealth'; tri-saptd- beside tri-saptd- (AV.) 'twenty-one'; si't-samiddha- beside su-samiddha- (SV.) 'well-kindled'; apake-stha- (AV.) 'standing in the oven' beside -stJia- in other compounds after -e-\ prthivi-sdd- (VS.) beside prthivT- sdd- (AV.) 'seated on the earth'; su-samrddha- (AV.) 'quite perfect'. After r the s becomes j in svar-sd- 'light-winning', svar-sati- 'obtainment of light'; after k, probably only in fk-sama- (TS.) 'resembling a re], beside fk-sama- (VS.). a. In Avyayibhavas s seems to appear in the RV. only; thus anu- svadhdm 'according to wish'; anu-satydm 'according to truth'; anu-svdpam 'sleepily'. ^. In some compounds j appears where it is not phonetically justifiable, owing to the influence of cognate words; thus upa-stut, adv., 'at one's call' (because of the frequency oi -stu- after i and a), beside upa-stut- 'invocation'; sa-stubh- (TS.), a metre, owing to anu-stubk-, tri-stubh-; savya-sthd- (AV.), owing to compounds in -e-stha-. y. In Amredita compounds, however, the s regularly remains unchanged because of the desire to leave the repeated word unaltered; thus sutfsute and somi-some 'at every Soma draught'; also in stuhi stuJii 'praise on' 3. 3. Initially in external Sandhi s frequently becomes s after a final

i and u in the RV. This change chiefly takes place in monosyllabic pronouns and particles, such as sd{s), sd, syd{s), sim, sma, svid, and particularly sii. It also appears in verbal forms like stka sthas sthana, santu, syam, sysma (from as- 'be'); sidati, satsat, saisi (from sad- 'sit'); sinca, sincata (from sic- 'pour'); stavama, stave, stuhi (from stu- 'praise'); in participles like sdn, satds (from as- 'be'); sidan (from sad 'sit'); suvands {su- 'press'); sitdm {si- 'bind'); stutds (stu- 'praise'); skanndm {skand- 'leap'). In other words the change

member of the compound and often in 3 This is not treated as an Amredita external Sandhi; see below 78. compound in the Padapatha (vui. 13°): pibd-piba (ll. IIii) is 1 Cp. APr. II. 104. sluhi\stuhi\U\; but 2 Cp. Whitney's Translation of the AV. analyzed as piba-piba\it\.

I, p. LXlv (mid.). Indo-arische Philologie I, 4. :

50 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar. rarely takes place; e. g. dnu rajati sti'ip (ix. 96'^); tri sadhdstha (ill. 565); nih sadkasthaf (v. 3i9); mi sthirdm (i. 64'5); ddhi snund (ix. 97"^). The J usually follows short words such as u, tu, mi, si'i, hi, and occurs where there is a close syntactical connection of two words; e. g. rdjahsu sidan (vii. 34^^); vdmsu stdati (ix. 57^); divi sdn (vi. 2*); divi santu (v. 2'°); rcchdnii sma (x. 102^). In no word, however, even when these conditions are fulfilled, is the change of initial s to s invariably made. a. In the later Samhitas, apart from passages adopted from the RV. this form of external Sandhi is very rare except in the combination u su. Examples are ad u stendm (AV. iv. 3^); md/ii sdd dyumdn ndmah (TS. m. 2. 8^)^- 58. The breathing h. — The sound h is, at the present day, pro- nounced as a breathing in India, and this was its character at the period when Greek and Indian words were interchanged, as is shown e. g. by 'pa. being reproduced by hora. It is already recognised as a breathing by the

TPr. (11. 9), which identifies it with the second element of voiced aspirates {g-h, d-h, b-h). This is borne out by the spelling rag l-h (= dh) beside ^ / (^ cf). The TPr. further (n. 47) assigns to it, on the authority of some, the same place of articulation as the following vowel, this being still characteristic of the pronunciation of h at the present day in India 3. The breathing is, moreover, stated by the Pratisakhyas "i to have been voiced. This pronunciation is proved by the evidence of the Sarnhitas themselves; for h is here often derived from a voiced aspirate, e. g. hitd- from dha- 'put'; it is occasionally replaced by a voiced aspirate, e. g. jaghdna from han- 'strike'; and in Sandhi initial h after a final mute regularly becomes a voiced aspirate, e. g. tdd dhi for tdd hi. It is in fact clear that whatever its origin (even when = Ilr. zh) ^, h was always pronounced as a voiced breathing in the Sarnhitas. As h cannot be final owing to its phonetic character*, it is represented in that position by sounds connected with its origin 7. It appears in combination with voiced sounds only; being preceded only by vowels, Anusvara, or the semivowels r and /* (in Sandhi also by the nasals 7I and n), and followed only by vowels, the nasals n, ti, m, or the semivowels y, r, I, v. The breathing h as a rule represents a voiced aspirate, regularly a palatal aspirate, occasionally the dental dk and the labial bh. It usually represents a new palatal (= Ilr. Jh, Av.j^), appearing beside gh, e. g. druhyu- drogha-, as j beside g, e. g. ojiyas : ugrd-. But in many words it also stands (like j for i) for the old palatal zh, the voiced aspirate of /, being recognizable as such in the same way as/'". la. h represents the palatalization (= Ilr.jh) oi gh when, in cognate forms, gh (or g) is found before other sounds than s; e. g. hdn-ti 'strikes' ghn-dnti, jaghsna; drhati 'is worthy' : arghd- 'price'; rh-dnt- 'weak' : ragh-u-

'light'; jdmh-as- 'gait' -.jdngha- 'leg'; ddhati 'burns' : dag-dhd- 'burnt'; dohate

'milks' : dughana- 'milking', dug-dhd- 'milked'; dudroha 'have injured' : driig-dhd-

'injured', drogha- 'injurious'; mdmhate 'presents' : maghd- 'gift'; mih- 'mist'

I 8 ih and uk produce the same effect as 1 Xhe combination Ih is rare; it is found simple i and u, as they were originally in upa-valh- (VS.) 'test riddles'; vihdlha- | by pronounced as is and iif (cp. Sandhi, p. 7I,l(AV.}, of unknown meaning; and in the e 2); e. g. agni(s) stave; yajuis) skanndm. Kanva recension of the VS. as represen-

2 Cp. Wackernagel I. 207 b. ting dh.

3 Cp. Whitney on APr. I. 13 and TPr. 9 Cp. 36. This h being related to gh II. 47. as J is to g, it must represent IE. gh. This 4 See RPr. I. 12; XII. 2; APr. I. 13. survives, with loss of the aspiration, injahi 5 See below I b. (^ Ilr.y.^a-o'^i), 2. sing. impv. oi han- 'strike'. 6 See below, Sandhi, 66. 10 Cp. 41. 7 Ibid, b 6, S. : ;

I. Phonology. The breathing h. SI

meghd- 'cloud'; rm'ihyati 'is perplexed' : ^zar^^/^a- 'gone astray', mSgha- 'vain'; rdmhi- 'speed' : raghi'c- 'swift'; haras- and gharmd- 'heat'; harmye-sthd- and gharmye-stha- 'dwelling in the house'; hrsitd- '^a,^' -.ghf-su- 'joyful', ghfsvi- 'gladdening'. In dhi- 'serpent' and duhitj-- 'daughter' the guttural origin of h is shown by cognate languages'. b. h represents the old palatal aspirate (= Ilr. ih)

a. when, either as a final or before /, it is replaced by a cerebral (like the old palatals s and /= Ilr. i); e. g. vah- 'carry': d-vat, 3. sing. aor. guh- ^ concQsX xgudhd-^ 'concealed'; trhdti ^crash.Qs' :trdhd-^; dftnkafi 'raakts; firm', drhyati 'is iarcH : drdkd- 'firm'; bakii- 'abundant' : ^arf/^i- 'aloud'; mik-

'make VfaX&c' : me'dkra- {KSf) 'penis'; rikdti ^Yick!,' : re'dhi ^licks' , ridha- 'licked'; vdhati 'carries' : vodhum 'to carry', ndhd- 'carried'; sdhate 'overcomes' : sddhr-

' victor'.

^. when it is followed by sounds which do not palatalize gutturals*, before which dh and bh do not become h, and before which the other old palatals / and, / (= i) appear; thus dmhas- and amhati- 'distress' because of am/iil- 'narrow'; dkan- 'day', because of dhnam, g. pi., and pUrvahnd- 'forenoon' (not ghn as in ghnanti from han-); jehamana-^ 'panting', because oi jihmd- 'oblique'; bahu- 'arm'; brdhman- n. 'devotion', brahmdn- 'one who prays*; rahu- (AV.), demon of eclipse; yahvd-, yahvdnt- 'ever young', because of yahu-, id. This applies to all words beginning with hu-, kr-, hn-, hr-, hv-; e. g. hu- 'pour'; hrd- and hfdaya- 'heart'; -hraya- 'ashamed'; -hva-, hu- 'call'; hvr- 'be crooked'. y. when the 'satem' languages have a corresponding voiced spirant {z or i)*; thus ahdm T; ehd- (AV.) 'desirous'; garhate 'complains of; dih- 'besmear'; pllhdn- (AV. VS.) 'spleen'; barhis- 'sacrificial straw'; mah- 'great'; varahd- 'boar'; sahdsra- 'thousand'; simhd- 'lion'; sprh- 'desire'; hamsd- 'goose'; Mnu- 'jaw'; hi- 'impel'; hemdn- 'zeal', heti- 'weapon'; hdya- 'steed'; hdri- and hdrita- 'tawny'; hdryati 'likes'; hdsta- 'hand'; ha- 'forsake'; hayand- (AV.) 'year'; hi 'for'; himd- 'cold'; hiranya- 'gold'; hiri- (AV. VS.) 'vein'; hims- 'injure'; he'sas- 'wound'; hr- 'take'; hyds 'yesterday' ?. 8. h according to the evidence of cognate languages, represents other palatals in some words. Thus in hfd- 'heart', / = IE. k would be expected; and y = IE. g in ahdm 'I', mahint- 'great', hdnu- 'jaw', hdsta- 'hand', hva-, hu- 'cair. These irregularities are probably due to IE. dialectic variations^. 2. h also represents dh and bh not infrequently, and dh at least once. a. It takes the place of dh in four or five roots (with nominal derivatives) and in a few nominal and verbal suffixes. Thus it appears initially in hitd-, -hiti-, beside -dhita-, dhiti-, from dha- 'put'. Medially it is found in gahate 'plunges' (with the derivatives gahd- 'depth', gdhana- 'deep', dur-gdha- 'impassable place') beside gadhd- 'ford'; rdhati 'rises', 'grows' (with the derivatives ruh- 'growth', rohana- 'means of ascending', rohas- 'elevation') beside rodhati 'grows' (with the derivatives vt-rudh- 'creeper', -rSdha- 'growing', 'be red' rohit-, rohita-, rodhas- 'bank', a-rodhana- 'ascent'); derivatives oi*rndh- :

in has- 'laugh' ha- 1 Cp. Wackernagel I, 214 b. 7 Perhaps also and verbs no forms with 2 That is for *guzdhd (through gtizk-ta- 'go', as these have gh nad-dhd-. for gugh-td-), the cerebral 2 disappearing but also naA- 'bind'- in spite of In leaving the vowel long. several words the origin of the h is un- certain, e. jdngahe 'struggles', as the 3 Cp. 12 and 17, 5. g. doubtful. 4 See above 41, 2. evidence is Roots, under jeh; and 8 See Wackernagel i, 216 b; for a few- , S See Whitney, examples, ibid. 2l6 a, note. cp. 41 a, 2. doubtful 6 This includes several examples given under a and p. ,

52 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

rauhind- -lo/titd- 'red', beside MM- 'reddish animal', rudhird- {KSl) 'red'; also beside rudkikrd-, names of demons; the evidence of cognate languages further shows that h represents d/i in gr/id- 'house". k moreover represents dh in the adverbial suffix -ha in visvd-ha beside visvd-dha 'always'; in sahd 'together', beside sadka- in compounds; in i/id 'here', as shown by the Prakrit idha; and doubtless also in sama-ha 'somehow', though there is no direct evidence. The evidence of cognate languages, more- over, shows that in the endings of the i. du. -vahe, -vaki, -vahai and the

I. pi. -make, -maki, -maliai h represents dh (cp. Gk. -{x.s'ha, etc.)^. b. h takes the place of bh in the verb graJi-, grh- 'seize' (with its derivatives grdha- 'ladleful', grahi- 'demoness', grahy\- 'to be grasped', grhd- 'servant'; hasta-grhya 'having take the hand') beside grabh-, grbh- (with the derivatives grdbha- 'taking possession of, grabhd- 'handful'); and in the nouns kakuhd- 'high', beside kak'cbh- 'height', kakubhd- (VS. TS.) 'high', m. (AV.) a kind of demon; bali-hH- 'paying tax' (beside bhr- 'bear'); probably bdrjaha- 'udder'(?), if formed with suffix -ha = - (in rsa-bhd-, etc.) 3. c. h takes the place of dh in bdrbrhi, 2. sing. impv. of the intv. bdrbrh- of the root brh- 'make strong', for *barbrdhi (= ^barbrzdhi, with the cerebral dropped after lengthening the preceding /- in pronunciation)*. d. The rule is that h appears for dh, dh, bh, only between vowels 5, the first of which is unaccented; e. g. ihd, kakuhd-, grhd- bdrjaha-, bali-hrt- rauhind-, sahd. Similarly in gi-abh- 'seize', h alone appears after unaccented /' in RV.i—IX*; while on the other hand, in the 2. sing. impv. of graded roots, -dhi regularly appears after strong and therefore originally accented vowels; e. g. bodhi (from bhu- 'be'), yjdhi (from yu- 'yoke'), yuyodhi (from yu- 'separate'); sisadhi, but sislki (sS- 'sharpen'). Again, in fudh- 'rise', the unaccented form of the root is regularly ruh-, while when it is accented, forms such as rodhati appear beside rokati, and in nominal derivatives dh predominates in accented radical syllables, the RV. having rjdha- and a-rodhana- only, but the AV. roha- and arohana-''. a. At the same time dh and bh remain in a good many instances after an un- accented vowel; thus in the 2. sing. impv. kfdhi, gadhi, srudhi, srnudhl; in arf/^aj 'below', adhamd- 'lowest', abhi 'towards'; rbhu- 'deft'; m'.dh'i- 'reward'; medha- 'wisdom'; vidkati 'adores'; vidhi't- 'solitary'; vidkdvd- 'widow'; vadhu- 'bride'; sidhii- 'right'; i~udhird- (AV.) 'red'; derivatives formed with -dhi-, -bhd-, etc."* The retention of the dh and bh here is partly to be explained as an archaism, and partly as due to borrowing from a dialect in which these aspirates did not become h, and the existence of which is indicated by the Prakrit form idha beside the Vedic ihd 'here'. The guttural aspirate media is probably to be similarly explained in megha- 'cloud' and ajhd- 'sinful'.

I Cp. Wackernagel I, 217 a. I appears, though a vowel does not follow, The h in the perf. aha, dhur, ms^y\in gr^Jidiu (iv. ^7) and hasia-g'^hya, is due represent dh\ not, however, in ndhyati 'binds', to other forms of grabh- in which k is in spite of naddhd-; nah- rather stands for followed by a vowel. Ilr. naih- (cp. Lat. nectd); the pp. instead of * In RV. x, however, grdha- and grahi- *nadha-, became naddhd- through the in- occur; cp. above, 2 b. fluence of baddha- from bandh- 'bind'. Cp. 7 Exceptions lilce rohiia-, visvdha and Wackernagel i, 217 a, note, where several inflected forms such as gahate, are due to other wrong explanations oi h = dh are normalization. discussed. 8 Where the RV. fluctuates between h and 3 Some erroneous etymologies in which dh bh (above 2, a, b), h appears throughout h is explained as ^ bh are discussed in in the later Samhitis ; thus always -hi, after Wackernagel i, 217 b, note. vowels in imperatives except edhi 'be'; thus 4 Cp. 12 and 17, 5. for srnudht (KSr. VIIL 843), SV. has irnuht. 5 It appears initially in hitd- = -dhiia-, But a new h of this kind hardly occurs. but originally it was doutbless preceded in Cp. Wackernagel i, 219 a. this position by a final vowel. That h I. Phonology. The cerebral /. Anusvara and Anunasika. S3

3. The various origins of h led to some confusion in the groups of forms belonging to roots which contain h.

a. roots in which h represents an original guttural (Ilr. //^) show some forms which would presuppose an old palatal (Ilr. ih). Thus from muh- 'be confused', phonetic derivatives of which are mvgdhd-, mog/ia-, axe. formed mudhd- (AV.) 'bewildered' and muhur 'suddenly'. b. roots in which h represents an old palatal (Ilr. zh) show forms with a guttural before vowels and dentals; thus from dih- 'besmear' is formed digdhd- (AV.) 'owing to the influence of dah- 'burn', and duh- 'milk'.

Similarly, from *sardh- 'bee', beside sarddbhyas, is formed saraghd- (AV. VS.) 'derived from the bee".

c. the root ruh-, though = r//(//2- 'ascend', is treated as if the h represented (as in vah-^ an old palatal (Ilr. zK); hence aor. druksat, des. ruruksaii, pp. -rudha- (AV.), ger. rudhvd (AV.). - 59. The cerebral /. — This sound, as distinguished from the ordinary

dental /, is a cerebral /^. It appears in our {Sakald) recension of the RV. as a substitute, between vowels, for the cerebral d and, with the appended

sign for k, for the cerebral aspirate d/i^; e. g. ila- 'refreshment'; d-salha- 'invincible'. It also appears in Sandhi when final before an initial vowel; e. g. turdssl abhibhutyojah (in. 43*). In the written Sarnhita text, however,

it does not appear if followed by a semivowel which must be pronounced as a vowel; e. g. vidv-attga- 'firm-limbed', to be pronounced as vilu-anga- and analysed thus by the Padapatha. In one passage of the RV. the readings fluctuate between / and / in nilavat or nilavat {yi\. 97'')'*. 60. Anusvara and Anunasika. — Anusvara, 'after-sound', is a pure nasal sound which differs from the five class nasals; for it appears after

vowels only, and its proper use is not before mutes, but before sibilants or h

(which have no class nasal). But it resembled the class nasals in being pronounced, according to the Pratisakhyas of the RV. and the VS. 5, after the vowel. The vowel itself might, however, be nasalized, forming a single combined sound. The Pratisakhya of the AV.^, recognizes this nasal vowel, called Anunasika, 'accompanied by a nasal', alone, ignoring Anusvara, which with the preceding vowel represents two distinct successive sounds. Whitney?, however, denies the existence of any distinction between Anunasika and Anusvara. In any case, the Vedic Mss. have only the one sign ^ (placed either above or after the vowel) for both^, employing the simple dot^ where neither Anusvara nor Anunasika is allowable. The latter sign is used in the TS. for final m before y v, and in both the TS. and MS. before mutes instead of the class nasal 5, a practice arising from carelessness or the desire

'• to save trouble. There is thus no ground for the prevalent opinion that

represents Anunasika and -^ Anusvara'". Throughout the present work m with a dot {m) will be used for both, except if they appear before a vowel, when m with the older sign (m) will be employed.

1 The root sagh- 'take upon oneself, 4 Cp. Benfey, Gott. Abhandl. 19, 138, has no connexion with sak- 'overcome'; note. See also Whitney on APr. i. 29. nor vaghat- "institutor of a sacrifice', with 5 See RPr. xui. 13; VS. I. 74f., 147 f. vah- 'convey'. The relation of go-nyoghas- 6 See Whitney on APr. i. 11. 'streaming among milk', to vah- is un- 7 On TPr. 11. 30; JAOS. 10, Lxxxvif. certain; cp. Wackernagel I, 220 b, 8 Cp. Whitney on TPr. 11. 30. note. 9 In the MS. also when -am is written for 2 Cp. above 42. -an. 3 This practice is followed by the Mss. JO See Whitney, JAOS. 7, 92, note. of secondary texts of the RV. 54 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

Anusvara and Anunasika are commonest when final. As in that position they belong to the sphere of Sandhi, the conditions under which they then appear, will be stated below'. Medially Anusvara and Anunasika are found under the following conditions: a. regularly before sibilants and h; e. g. vamsd- 'reed'; havimsi 'offerings'; mainsd- 'flesh'; simhd- 'lion'. This is generally recognized as the sphere of

Anusvara, except by the APr. ^; but mamscatu- 'light yellow', is stated 3 to have Anunasika, while pumscali- (AV. VS.) is said to have both Anunasika and Anusvara*. The Anusvara usually appears before s, and all forms with ins are shown to be based on original ns or ms by the evidence of

cognate forms corroborated by that of allied languages 5; \!wi& mdmsate, 3. sing, subj. aor. of man- 'think'; jlghamsati, des. from han- 'strike'; pimsdnti beside pindsli, from pis- 'crush'; the neuter plurals in -amsi, -Tmsi, -umsi from stems in -as, -is, -us, with nasal after the analogy of -anti, nom. ace. pi. from neuters in -nt; stems in -yams, -vams beside nom. sing, in -yan, -van; kramsydte (AV.) from kram- 'stride'. When Anusvara appears before / and h derived

from an IE. palatal or guttural, it represents the corresponding class nasal.

The reduction of these old nasals to Anusvara is probably Ilr. after long

vowels (am, -imr, -umr); probably later after short vowels, for it does not appear in forms like dhan (for dhans), though j- was not dropped after an in the Ilr. period; but the j must have been dropped early in the Indian

period, before -ans became -ams''. Anusvara before h {^^ Av. 7/7) must have arisen in the Indian period. b. before any consonant in the intensive reduplicative syllable, the final

of which is treated like that of the prior member of a compound; e. g. ndimiam- Tti (v. 835)" from nam- 'bend'. c. before any consonant which is the initial of secondary suffixes; thus from sam- 'blessing', is formed sam-yu- 'beneficent'; sdm-tati- or idntxti- 'blessing'. 61. Voiceless Spirants. — a. The sound called Visarjaniya^ in the Pratisakhyas', must in their time have been pronounced as a voiceless breathing, since they describe it as an usman, the common term for breathings and sibilants. This conclusion is borne out by the fact that, in the RPr., JihvamulTya and Upadhmanlya, the sounds which are most nearly related to and may be replaced by Visarjaniya, are regarded as forming the second half of the voiceless aspirates k/i and ph respectively, just as h forms the second half of the voiced aspirates gk, bh, etc. At the present day Visarjaniya is still pronounced in India as a voiceless breathing, which is, however, followed by a weak echo of the preceding vowel. According to the TPr.'°, Visarjaniya has the same place of articulation as the end of the preceding vowel. The proper function of this sound is to represent final j- and r in pausa; it may, however, also appear before certain voiceless initial sounds, viz. k,kh,p,ph, and the sibilants (occasionally also in compounds) "- b. Beside and instead of Visarjaniya, the Pratisakhyas recognise two voiceless breathings as appropriate before initial voiceless gutturals {k, kh)'^^

1 See below, Sandhi, 75. 8 The term visai-ga is not found in the 2 APr. I. 67; 11. 33f. Pratisakliyas (nor in Panini).

3 Cp. RPr. IV. 9 RPr. 1. etc., VPr.' I. 35. 5 41 etc.; APr. I. J 4 Cp. VPr. IV. 7f. etc.; TPr. i. 12 etc. 5 Cp. Wackernagel I, 224 a. 10 See Whitney on TPr. n. 48. 6 Loc. cit.; cp. Brugmann, KG. 354, 17. " See below, Sandhi, 78, 79. 12 7 In Aufrecht's edition printed nanna- See RPr. I. 8; VPr. m. ii etc. mid. ;

I. Phonology. Voiceless Spirants. Loss of Consonants. 55

and labials (/, phy respectively. The former {h) called Jihvamiiliya, or sound 'formed atjhe root of the tongue', is the guttural spirant x; the latter {/}), called Upadhmaniya, or 'on-breathing', is the bilabial spirant /^ In Mss. they are regularly employed in the Kasmirian Sarada character. 62. Loss of Consonants.— Consonants have been lost almost exclusively when they have been in conjunction with others. The loss of a single

consonant which is not in conjunction with another is restricted to the dis- appearance of V before «, and much more rarely of / before /. The v thus disappears finally in the Sandhi of av before u in the RV. and VS.3 Initially, v is lost before Ur derived from a r vowel; thus in irana- and zJra- 'sheep'; z/raj- 'breast'; ar-awa-, mid. part, (w-- 'choose'); ?ir/- 'vigour'; flrna- 'wool'; urnoti 'covers' {vr- 'cover'); urdhvd- 'high'; urmi- 'wave'. Such loss of V before Ur also occurs after an initial consonant in turtd- 'quick' (= Ilr. tvftd-); dhUrvati, ddhUrsata, dhurti-, from dhvr- 'cause to fall'; hUrya-, juhur- thas; juhur, from hvr- 'go crookedly' +- Before simple u the v has disappeared at the beginning of the reduplicative syllable 11- {= *vu- for original va-), in u-vac-a from vac- 'speak'; u-vdsa from vas- 'shine'; u-vah-a from vah- 'convey'.

Similarly initial y has disappeared from the reduplicative syllable z- = *yi- in the desiderative i-yak-sati, i-yak-samSna-, from yaj- 'sacrifice's. 1. When a group of consonants is final, the last element or elements are regularly lost (the first only, as a rule, remaining) in pausa and in Sandhi ^

2. When a group of consonants is initial, the first element is frequently lost. The only certain example of an initial mute having disappeared seems to be tur-iya- 'fourth', from *A(ur-, the low grade form oi catiir- 'four', because the Vedic language did not tolerate initial conjunct mutes'. An initial sibilant is, however, often lost before a mute or nasal. This loss was originally* doubtless caused by the group being preceded by a final consonant. There are a few survivals of this in the Vedas; thus cit kdmbhanena (x. iii'), otherwise skdmbhajta- 'support'; and the roots stambh- 'support', and stha- 'stand', lose there s after ud-; e. g. ut-fkita-, I'd-tabhita-. On the other hand the sibilant is preserved after a final vowel, in compounds or in Sandhi, in d-skrdkoyti- 'uncurtailed', beside krdhu- 'shortened'; scandrd- 'brilliant', in dsva- scandra- 'brilliant with horses'?, ddhi scandrdm (vin. 65"), also in the intens. pres. part, cdni-scad-at 'shining brightly', otherwise candrd- 'shining', and only candrd-mas- 'moon'. In derivatives from four other roots, forms with and without the sibilant'" are used indiscriminately, without regard to the preceding

1 See VPr. i. 41. 7 There are some words in which an 2 Cp. Ebel, KZ. 13, 277 f. initial mute seems to have been lost in the 3 See below, Sandhi, 73- IE. period; thus t in satdm 'hundred' (^lE. 4 The V has either remained or been tkntditi); d perhaps in vimsati- 'twenty' and restored before such ur and «?' in hotr-vurya- vi- 'between'; / perhaps mydkrl- 'liver'. An 'election of the invoker'; in the opt. vurTta, initial mute seems to have been lost before from vr- 'choose'; and in the 3. pi. perfect a sibilant (originally perhaps after a final babhii-vur, jiihu-vur, sum-vur, iuspu-vur. consonant) in stana- 'breast', svid- 'sweat' 5 The evidence of cognate languages seems sas- 'six' (KZ. 31, 4iSff.)- to point to the loss of initial d in dsru- 'tear' 8 Dissimilation may also have played (Lat. dacruma, Gk. laxpv). It is, however, some part in the loss of the sibilant in the probable that there were two different but reduplicative syllable of roots with initial sk(h) synonymous IE. words akni and dakru. On st{h), s{(K), as caskanda, tlsfhami, faspdrsa. some doubtful etymologies based on loss of 9 See Grassmann's Worterbuch sub verbo initial consonants, seeWACKERNAGEL I, 228 c, scandrd; note. 10 The verb kj-- 'do', after fdri and sam,

' 6 See below, Sandhi, 65. shows an initial s; e. g. fm-iskrnvanti, fdri- 56 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar. sound; from stan- 'thunder', stanayitnu-, beside tanayitni'i- 'thunder', tanyatil- (also AV.) 'thunder', tanyu- 'thundering', tanyati 'resounds'; stend- 'thief, stay-diit- (AV.) 'stealing', stayu- (VS.) 'thief, steya- 'theft', beside tayu- 'thief; str-, beside tf- 'star'; spas- 'spy' and spas- 'see' in verbal forms d-spas-ta aor., paspas- perf., spasdyati caus., -spasta- part., 'seen', beside pdsyati 'sees''. The loss of initial s may be inferred in the following words from the evidence of cognate languages in which it has been preserved: tij- 'sharpen'; tuj- 'strike'; tud- 'beat'; narmd- (VS.) 'jest'; nrt- 'dance'; parnd- 'wing'; pikd- (VS.) 'Indian cuckoo'; plihdn- (VS. AV.) 'spleen'; phena- 'foam'; mrd- 'crush', mrdu- (VS.) 'soft'; vip- 'tremble'; stipti- 'shoulder'. A few examples occur of the loss of the semivowels / or 1^^ as the last element of an initial consonant group. Thus y disappears in derivatives of roots in Tv formed with suffixes beginning with consonats: -muta- 'moved', mu-rd- 'impetuous', mtt-tra- (AV. VS.) 'urine', from miv- 'push'; suci- 'needle', su-nd- 'plaited basket', sfl-tra- (AV.) 'thread', beside syii-man- 'thong', syu-td- 'sewn', from sTv- 'sew'. Loss of v seems to have taken place in siti- 'white' (only at the beginning of compounds), beside svit- 'be bright', svity-diic- 'brilliant', Jvitrd- (AV.) 'white', svitrya-, perhaps 'white'; and, on the evidence of the Avesta, in ksip- 'throw' (Av. hsiw), sds- (Av. Jisvas). 3, When the group is medial, the loss usually taken takes place between single consonants, a. The sibilants s and ^ thus regularly disappear between mutes; e. g. d-bhak-ta, 3. sing, aor., for *dbhak-s-ta beside d-bhak-s-i, from bhaj-, 'share'; cas-te for caks-te {= original *cas'-s-te)i. Similarly a-gdha- (TS.) 'un- eaten', for *a-ghs-ia-, from ghas- 'eat'^. b. The dental t has disappeared between a sibilant and c in pas-cA and pas-cdt 'behind' (= IE. post-qe, post-git); and between / and j in *nap-su which must have]been the loc. pi. (AV. Jiafsu), from *napt-, 'weak stem oindpat-, beside the dat. ndd-bhyas 'to the grandsons', for napt-bkyas, where on the other hand the p has been dropped. c. A mute may disappear between a nasal and a mute; e.g. panti- for pankti-, ywidhi for yungdhi. This spelling is common in Vedic Mss.; it is prescribed in APr. 11. 20, and, as regards the mediae, in VPr. vi. 30. 4. The only example of the loss of an initial s mute in a medial group of consonants seems to be that of b before dbh 'in nddbhyas for *nabdbhyas from napt- for ndpat-. The semivowel r seems to be lost before a consonant when another r follows in cakr-dt (Pp. cakrdn) and cakr-iyas^ for *carkr- beside carkar-mi, from kr- 'commemorate'; and, on the evidence of the Avesta, in tvdstr- (cp. pwarss 'cut', pwarsta- 'created').

skfta-, sam-skria- ; also after nis in nir askrta 3 See above 56, b. (Pp. akfta), perhaps owing to Sandhi forms 4 On apnas- 'property', ddmpati- 'lord of with sk such as niskuni (AV.). There can the house', see Wackernagel I, 233 c, note. be little doubt that the j here was not ori- 5 The guttural mute only seems to be ginal but was due to analogy; cp.WACKER- lost when ks + t becomes //: see above, NAGEL I, 230 a, ;S, note. 56, 6. The loss of 711 in the inst. sing, -na of 1 Wackernagel I, 230 a 7, note, discusses nouns in -man is only a seeming one ; for dana, several uncertain or erroneous etymologies prathind, prend, bhnna, niahind, Tjarina (TS.) based on loss of initial j (including maryas appear beside the stems daman- etc., because interpreted as 2. sing. opt. of smr-). The evi- some of them had a stem in -n without m, dence of Prakrit seems to point to the loss so that -nd seemed an alternative from of of initial j in iefia- 'tail', krJd- 'leap', krus- mnd: see Benfey, GGA. 1846, 702. 880; 'cry', parasu- 'axe', panisa- 'knotty'; cp. Gottinger Abhandlungen 19, 234; Bloom- Wackernagel i, 230 b. field, JAOS. 17, 3; cp. IF. 8, Anzeiger, 2 On the possible loss of r in bhahj- p. 17. (Lat. frango) and of k in savyd- (Lat. scaemis), 6 But see Geldner, VS. l, 279. see Wackernagel i, 232 c, note. ' ;

I. Phonology. Loss of Consonants. 57

probably starting from forms like tvdsira {KST) in which the r immediately followed But the loss of a spirant (Ilr. j, z, z, Ui) at the beginning of a medial group is common. a. The sibilant s ^ has thus been lost before k followed by a consonant in vavrktam, vrknd-, vrktvf, vrkd (TS.), from vrak- 'lop' (cp. -vraskd-). b. The voiced form (Ilr. z) of dental s has disappeared ^ before voiced dentals, without leaving any trace, in the roots as- 'sit', and sds- 'order'; thus a-dhvam, sasa-dhi. But when d preceded the z, the disappearance of the sibilant is indicated by e taking the place of az before d, dk, h {= dh); thus e-dhi, from as- 'be'; sed-'-, perfect stem of sad- 'sit' (for sazd-, like sasc- from sac-). This e also replaces az with loss of the sibilant in de-hi 'give'; dhe-hi 'put'; kiye-dha- 'containing much'; ned-Tyas- and ned-istha- 'vtxy vaaQ}r! \ j>ed-ii-^ N.; medatl 'is fat'; medhd- and medhds- 'wisdom'; m'edha- 'juice'*. c. When a vowel other than a preceded, the z was cerebralized (like s before a voiceless dental) and disappeared after cerebralizing the following dental and lengthening the preceding vowel; thus a-sto-dhvam'' (= d-stoz-dhvam for a-stos-dhvam) 2. pi. aor., beside a-sto-s-ta, 3. sing., from siu- 'praise'. Thus also are to be explained mdd- 'nest' (= nizda- for ni-sd-a-); pid- 'press' {== pizd- iox J>i-sd- 01 pis-d-) ; mid/id- 'reward' (Gk. fj.ia66g); vid-u- 'strong', viddyati 'is strong' (from -vis- -work' +-^)*; Jud-'^ 'be angry', and its Guna forms, e. g. hed-as- 'anger'; ttirddti 'be gracious', mrdikd- 'gracious' (for mrz-d- from mrs- 'forget') with vowel pronounced long (12), d-red-ant- (TS.) 'not deceiving' {= a-rezd-atit-), from ris- 'injure'. d. Similarly the old voiced palatal spirant (Ilr. z) disappeared after cerebralizing a following ^_^or dh and lengthening the preceding vowel; thus ta-dhi Jox *tai-dhi {= tak-s-dhi) from taks- 'fashion'; so-dhA for *sas-dhd (= sak-s-dka), beside sas-thd- (AV.) 'sixth'. A similar loss is to be assumed in id- 'praise' (= iz-d ior yaj--{- d)'^°. e. This loss is specially frequent in the case of the old voiced palatal aspirated spirant Qlr.z/i) represented by k, which was dropped after cerebralizing and aspirating a followed i and lengthening the preceding vowel; thus baclhd-

» In a few forms of the AV. the semi- suffixes beginning with m,yorv, the sibilant vowel y seems to be lost at the end of the is lost (instead of becoming d in the former medial group ksy: meksami, yokse, vidhaksdn, circumstances, or remaining in the latter) sakse. But these forms may be due to errors owing to the influence of Sandhi; e. g. in the MSS. dveso-b/iis from dves-as- 'hate'. An original 2 In. ch^ IE. skh, the original s was lost sibilant has perhaps been lost in mahisd-, in a pre-Indian period. sahvdms-jjahiisa, hraduni-,;as- 'be exhausted'

3 Before voiced mutes other than dentals, cp. Wackernagel i, 237 a ,8, note. z became d, as in madgt'i- (44, 3 a) 'diver'; 7 The origin of krodd- (AV. VS.) 'breast' similarly 2 became d, as in fadbhis, from (Av. hraozdra- 'hard') and of many words pas- 'look' or 'cord'; and in vi-prud-bhis with d or dh preceded by a long vowel, and from viprits- 'drop'. with no collateral forms containing a sibi- 4 The loss of the voiced sibilant [z] must lant, is obscure. be older than the original text of the RV., 8 Cp. HiJBSCHMANN, KZ. 24, 408. In as the e of sed- has been transferred to sTda- (= sizda-) from sad- 'sit', the d has other stems which contain no sibilant, as in been retained owing to the influence of bhej-iri, from bhaj- 'divide'. Similarly the other forms of the verb sad-. See, however, vowel of Kid-, though derived from iz, is RozwADOWSKi, BB. 21, 147, and cp. ZDMG. regarded as a primitive I'va. the form ajlhidat 48, 519. (AV.): cp. Wackernagel i, p. 272 (mid.). 9 Plnda- perhaps stands for *pinzda-, from 5 Cp. Bartholomae, KZ. 27, 361. On pis- 'crush; cp. WACKERNAGEL I, 146, d. edh- 'thrive', miyedha- 'broth', vedhds- 'virtuous', 10 On /end-, cp. WACKERNAGEL I, 238 b, td-, see Wackernagel i, 237 c. note; PiscHEL, BB. 23, 253 if. On cp. 6 In stems in -as before case terminations Oldenberg, SBE. 30, 2. beginning with bh, and before secondary ;

I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

'strong', ni-bndha- 'dense' (= bazdhd- for bah-td-) from bamh- 'be strong'; sddhr- 'conqueror', d-sadha- 'invincible', from sah-; rjdhd- (= rizdkd-), from rih- 'lick'; iidkd- (= usdhd-) from va/i- 'carry'; gadhd- 'concealed', ixoia. guh- 'hide'; trdhd-, trdhva (AV.), from trh- 'crush'; drdhd- 'firm', from drh- 'be strong'. Here e also appears for az in trnedhu (AV.) from /-^i^- (^ trnaz-

dhu); and

prefix a 3, while otherwise the forms dam, das, dat alone appear. 64. Syllable. — The notion of the syllable is already known to the late hymns of the Rgveda, though the word {a-ksdra-) is there generally used as an adjective meaning 'imperishable'. Thus aksdrena mimate saptd vdnih means 'with the syllable they measure the seven metres'. The vowel being according to the Pratisakhyas » the essential element of the syllable, the word aksara-^ is used by them in the sense of 'vowel' also. Initially, a vowel, or a con- sonant and the following vowel form a syllable. Medially, a simple consonant

begins a syllable, e. g. ta-pas; when there is a group of consonants, the last

begins the syllable, e. g. tap-ta-, and if the last is a sibilant or semivowel,

the penultimate also belongs to the following syllable'^, e. g. astam-psTt, an-

tya-. A final consonant in pausa belongs to the preceding vowel, e. g. i-dain. By the process called haplology one of two identical or similar syllables

in juxtaposition is dropped. Syllable is here to be taken in the sense not only of a consonant with a following vowel, but of a vowel with a following consonant.

I. The first of the two syllables is dropped within a word in tuvi-rd\va\van 'roaring mightily"', beside tuvi-rdva-\ madh{yd\ya 'in the middle', from mddhya- (like asa-yti, nakta-ya); vf\td\tha 'at will', from vrtd- 'willed' (like rtu-tha

'according to r/«-'); svapatydi for svapat{ya\yai, dat. sing. f. oi sv-apatyd- 'having good offspring'; perhaps also Vj, hfi\^% ydyos, gen. loc. du. of^i-*- Examples of a vowel with following consonant being dropped are: ir\adfi\ddhyai, inf. ofzVaayz-'seektowin'; ca^ati^anta, r[an]anta, v[an]anta9 ; perhaps sdd[as]as-pdti- beside sddasas-pdti- 'lord of the seat'".

a. The final syllable of the first member of a compound is sometimes dropped in this way; thus se[vd\-vara- 'treasury'; se{vd\-vrdha- 'dear'; madugha- (AV.),

1 stoka- Perhaps 'drop', may stand for as the designation of syllable is not found *skota.-, from imi- 'drip-, under the influence in Panini. of stukd- 'tuft'. 6 See TPr. xxi. 7, 9. On the division of 2 Cp. Wackernagel I, 212 b, note, and syllables cp. further RPr. I. 15; VPr. I. looff. b. 239 APr. I. 55ff.; TPr. xxi. iff.; and Whitney 3 These forms are not resolved in the on TPr. XXI. 5. Pada text, i. e. they are treated as if they 7 Cp. Bartholomae, KZ. 29, 527, 562. did not contain the verbal prefix a. 8 Cp., however, eti-os for ena-yos. \ RPr. xvm. 17; VPr. i, 99. 9 See KZ. 20, 70 f. 5 Though known to Katyayana and Patan- 10 See Bloomfield, JAOS. 16, xxxv. jali as well as to the Pratisakhyas, aksara- ^

II. Euphonic Combination ^^ (Sandhi). 59 N. of plant a yielding honey, beside madhu-dugha- 'shedding sweetness'; sas[pa]-pinjara- (VS.) 'tawny like young grass''. 2^. The second syllable is dropped in the d&'iwts pdumsya\ja], ratnadheyj[ya], saMyd[y a], and abhikhyd beside abhikhyaya; also \xi vrkdt[at\i- 'destruction', beside vrkdtat- and devd-iati-; and at the beginning of the second member of a compound in sirsa-[sa\M- (AV.) 'headache' a. A following syllable is sometimes dropped in spite of a different one intervening; thus in the dative marydda[ya] 'boundary'; and somewhat pecuHarly iri dvarrv[ar]ur, 3. pi. impf beside the 3. sing, d varivar and 3, sing. pres. a varTvarti.

II. EUPHONIC COMBINATION (SANDHI).

Benfey, Vollstandige Grammatik p. 21—70. — Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar p. 34 — 87. — Wackernagel, Altindische Grammatik i, 301 —343. — Arnold, Vedic Metre p. 70 — 80.

65. The nature of Vedic Sandhi. — The sentence is naturally the unit of speech which forms an unbroken chain of syllables euphonically combined. It is, however, strictly so only in the prose portion of the AV.3

and the prose Mantras of the YV. As the great bulk of the Vedas is metrical, the RV. and the SV. being entirely so, the editors of the Sarnhita text treat the hemistich (consisting generally of two Padas or verses) t as the euphonic unit, applying the rules of Sandhi with special stringency between the Padas or metrical units which form the hemistich. The evidence of metre, however, shows that, in the original form of the text, Sandhi at the end of an internal Pada is all but unknowns. The verse, therefore, is the true euphonic unit®. The final of a word appears either at the end of this

unit in pausa {avasane) 7, or within it as modified by contact with a following initial. The form which the final of a word assumes in pausa, being regarded as the normal ending, is generally the basis of the modification appearing within the verse. It will therefore conduce to clearness if the rules relating to absolute finals are first stated. 66. Finals in pausa. — a. Vowels' in this position undergo no change other than occasional nasalization. 1. In all the Sarnhitas a % u'^ are frequently nasalized when prolated; e. vindatiim vindati (x. 146'); babhuvaiin babhUva x. 2''); g. \ = \ = (AV. vivesaim vivesa (VS. xxiii. vii. 4^°). mamdim \ (TS. \ = 49); = mama 2. In the Sarnhita text of the RV. there survive, at the end of a verse within a hemistich, from the period when such end also was accounted a pause, several instances of nasalized c, preserved to avoid hiatus and con-

'' This explanation is doubtful in uloka- 5 The only probable exception is RV. IX. for u\hi\bka- (cp. Erugmann, Grundriss i, 113, 7 c d; cp. Arnold, Vedic Metre 119. 624, p. 471); susmaya- (TS.) for iusma- 6 The sentence within a Pada, as well as mdya-; bhTmala- (VS.) 'terrible', for bhTma- the Pada itself, is the unit of accent; cp. mala-; improbable ia ne/anas for rujand-nas, below, 83. 'with broken nose' (Bloomfield, JAOS. 16, 7 Cp. RPr. L 3; VI. 5; x. S; xi. 30. xxxiv). 8 Final r never occurs in the RV., its 2 Cp. Whitney, Translation of AV. I, 123. place being supplied by iir as nom. ace. s. n. 3 See Bloomfield, The Atharvaveda, in e. g. sihitur 'standing' (cp. WaCKERNAGEL, this Encyclopedia, §1 (beginning) and note i. KZ. 25, 287 f.); but the TS. already has i In the Gayatrl metre, in which there janayiif and bhartf (B ?), Wackernagel I, are three Padas, the third alone constitutes 259 a, note. the second hemistich; in the Pankti, which 9 The vowels I and li, when dual termina- has five Padas, the last three constitute the tions (pragrhya), cannot be nasalized. second hemistich. 6o I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

traction. Thus a appears as am before e and 0; e. g. ghanenaiBekas (i. ZJ,''); a appears am before ^

The old palatal y, however, becomes /, e.g. rat ij. i2i3), m. £ 'king', 'queen', = raj; in rtvik, however, it becomes the guttural, = rtvlj 'priest' {{xovayaj-

'sacrifice') ^. 3. The ritual exclamations vdsat (x. iis') and srdusat (i. 139'), which are probably modified forms of the 3. sing. aor. subj. of »«/?- 'carry', and srti- 'hear'*, have t for i owing to the analogy of the exclamations vdtiys.), vat

(TS.), 3. sing. aor. of Yvah-^. 4. The nasals occurring as finals, «, n, m^, remain unchanged. Of these, n and m are very common; but n is found very rarely and only secondarily after the loss of a following k (representing an original palatal; e. g. prsfi for *prdnk, from prdnc-). Probably no instance of final n can be found in Vedic Mantras. The palatal n never occurs, since final palatals become guttural (b, 2). a. In the rare instances in which a radical m becomes final after dropping a following -t or -s, it appears as n owing to the influence of the dental; thus ddn (= *dam-s) 'of the house' {dam-)T; d-kran (^=*d-kram-t), 3. sing. aor. of kram- 'stride'; d-gan (= *a-gam-s, *a-gam-t), 2. 3. sing, aor., a-Jagan {=*ajagam-i), 3. sing, plup., aganTgan (VS.), 3.sing. intv. of gam- 'go'; d-yan {= *a-yam-s-t), 3. sing. aor. of yam- 'reach'*. 5. The semivowels y v /^ do not occur as finals, r is represented by Visarga; thus pi'mar 'again', is written punah'^°. 6. The sibilants and h are all changed when final. a. The dental s, which is by far the commonest of final sibilants, becomes Visarga; e. g. ketus is written ketuh (iii. 61 3). ^. The cerebral s, which is very rare as a final, becomes cerebral / in sdt 'six', for sds; -dvit 'hating', for -dvis; vi-prut (AV.) 'sprinkling'.

1 The ritual interjection 6m (VS.) may be 7 In the K. also occurs the 'form a-nSn due to the nasalization of an original = *-!iSm-s-i, from nam- 'bend'. The SB. prolated (cp. RPr. xv. 3). Thus the JUB. has prasan 'painless', ^= *pra-sam-s.

I. 24. 3ff., mentions the pronunciations o as 8 See 46 d, /?. well as om, both of which it rejects in favour 9 Final / is spoken of as occurring rarely of om. (Wackernagel i, 260 c), or as very rare 2 O^. RPr. I. 13; Whitney on APr. 1.43, (Whitney 144), but I have been unable 3 Cp. Wackernagel I, 149 a a. to find a single example in the Vedas (or 4 Cp. above 42 c (p. 34). even in post-). But though no 5 Loc. cit. etymologically final / seems to occur either 6 Final m is often incorrectly written as in pausa or in Sandhi, it is found as a sub- Anusvara in Mss. (as conversely in Prakrit stitute for d in two or three words in the Mss. m is often written as m under Sanskrit later Sainhitas (see above 52 d, p. 45). influence: cp.PlscHEL.Grammatik derPrakrit- 10 When h stands for etymological r, this Sprachen, in this Encyclopedia, 339, 348), is indicated by an added iti in the Pada- and their example is sometimes followed in patha; e. g. piinar iti (x. 8518). printed editions. :

n. Euphonic Combination. Finals. Rules of Sandhi. 6i for vi-pri'is. These are the only examples occurring in the RV. and AV. In the only two examples in which s occurs in the RV. as a final in the com- pound form ks, it is dropped: andk 'eyeless', from an-dks-; d-myak, 3. sing. aor. of myaks- 'be situated' (?).

y. The palatal s becomes either k or t'; e. g. -^r^ fox drs- (m. 61 9); vtpai, N. of a river, for vip3,s-.

8. According as it is guttural or palatal in origin, h become k ar i; thus d-dhok, 3. sing. impf. of i/z^,^- 'milk'; hvX d-vdt, 3. sing. aor. of z/a/^- 'carry'.

c. Th'i rule is, that only a single consonant may be final. Hence all but the first of a group of consonants are dropped; e. g. dbhavan for *dbhavant\ tAn for *idns; tuddn for iuddnts; prAh for *prAhks (= *prancs); acckaii for *ackantst, 3, sing. aor. of chand- 'be pleasing'.

a. k t or t, when tliey follow an f and belong to the root, are allowed to remain; e. g. vdrk, 2. 3. sing. aor. of vrj- 'bend'; urkj^S), nom. of a;;;- 'strength'; d-m3,rt, 3. sing, impf. of mrj- 'wipe'; a-vart, 3. sing. aor. of vrt- 'turn'; stthdrt (AV.), nom. of suhard- 'friend'. The only instance of a suffix remaining after ris dar-t, 3 sing. aor. of dr- 'cleave', used also for 2. sing, beside d-dah = d-dar (for *d-dars). 8. Some half-dozen instances have been noted, in the Samhitas, in which a suffixal s or f seems to have been retained instead of the preceding consonant; but they are probably all to be explained as due to analogical influence. They are 1. the nominatives sadka-mas (beside sadha-mdd) 'companion of the feast'; ava-yds 'sacrificial share', and piro-das (ace. purodasam) 'sacrificial cake'. Sadha-mds may be due to the influence of nom. with phonetic j- like -mas 'moon', beside inst. pi. mJd-bhis it in the RV., has to be read as (44 a 3). Ava-yas, in the only passage m which occurs quadiisyllabic (also in AV.), i. e. as ava-yajah, and is probably to be explained as a con- traction which retains the living -s of the nom. (and not the prehistoric s of *-yaj-s). Puro-das (from das- 'worship'), occurring only twice in the RV., may be due to the in- fluence of a frequent nom. like draviiw-djs 'wealth-giver'. That the prehistoric nom. -j- should in these three forms have survived in the linguistic consciousness of the Vedic poets, and as such have ousted the preceding consonant, which in all other analogous nominatives alone remains, is hardly conceivable =. The only reasonable explanation is to assume the analogical influence of the nom. -s which was in living use after vowels. 2. The four verbal preterite forms [a-yas (for *a-yaj-s) beside a-y3f, 2. sing. aor. olyaj- 'sacrifice'; srSs {KV.) = *a-srdj-s, 2. sing. aor. oi srj- 'emit'; a-bhanas[KS>j ^*a-bhanak-s, *a-sras-t, sing. aor. of sras- 'fall') 2. sing. impf. of bhanj- 'break' ; and a-srat (VS.) = 3. are the beginnings of the tendency (of which there are several other examjDles in the Brahmanas)3, to normalize the terminations, so as to have -s in 2. sing, and -/in the s and i of 2. 3. sing^ even to i. sing, 3. sing. This tendency is extended in the RV. from in the forms a-kramlm (beside a-kramisani) owing to a-kram-u, a-k7-am-it; and vam (for var-am) owing to 2. sing, vak (for var), aor. of vr- 'cover'. 67. Rules of Sandhi. — The body of euphonic rules by which final consonants are assimilated to following initials and hiatus is avoided between editors final and initial vowels is called Sandhi in the Pratisakhyas +. The of the Samhita of the RV. have greatly obscured the true condition of the text which vidth which they dealt by applying to it rules of euphonic combination did not prevail at the time when the text was composed. Thus though the Sandhi between the verses of a hemistich is (excepting a few survivals from elsewhere, the older form of the text) 5 appHed with greater stringency than hemistich con- the metre clearly shows that the end of the first verse of a the verse, moreover, stitutes a pause as much as the end of the last. Within not applied where the caesura Sandhi is, according to metrical evidence, 'not'), is never contracted occurs; nd, when it means 'like' (as opposed to nd t w before with any following vowel, nor (?^ 'then' with a preceding a^; and

4 RPr. 11. 2. 7. 13; VII. l; VPr. III. 2; 1 Cp. 43 a. 2 Cp. Whitney 146 a; Bt.oomfield, AJP. APr. IV. 414. manisa agnih (l. 701). ff. 5 E. g. \ 3, 28 ff.; Bartholomae, KZ. 29, 578 6 In these instances there is a pause in 3 Cp. Whitney 555 a. ;

62 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar. dissimilar initial vowels are hardly ever changed to the corresponding semi- vowels', and often remain uncontracted even before similar vowels^; the elision of a after e Va rare^; contraction is commonly avoided by the final vowel of monosyllabic words, and by an initial vowel followed by conjunct consonants'*. Nevertheless, it may be said in a general way that the poets of the RV. show a tendency to avoid the meeting of vowels ^. The divergences between the apparent and the real Sandhi which appear in the RV., decrease in the later Vedas, while the application of particular rules of Sandhi becomes more uniform^- a. External Sandhi, or that which applies between words in the sentence, is to a considerable extent identical with internal Sandhi, or that which applies within words. The most striking difference is, that in the latter consonants remain unchanged before verbal and nominal terminations beginning with vowels, semivowels, or nasals'. External Sandhi is on the whole followed in the formation of compounds, the divergences from it in the latter being merely survivals of an earlier stage of external Sandhi due to the closer connexion between members of a compound that renders them less liable than separate words to be affected by modifications of phonetic laws. External Sandhi is to a considerable extent affected by the law of finals in pausa. Under that influence it avoids final aspirates and palatals. There are, however, in the treatment of final n r, and s, certain survivals which do not agree with the corresponding forms in pausa. b. There are certain duplicate forms which were originally due to divergent euphonic conditions. Thus the tendency was to employ the dual ending a before consonants, but au before vowels. Similarly, the word sdda 'always', was used before consonants, but sddam before vowels^. 68. Lengthening of final vowels. — Final vowels as a rule remain unchanged before consonants. But a i u are very frequently lengthened 9 before a single initial consonant'" both in the metrical portion of the Samhitas and in the prose formulas of the Yajurveda; e. g. irudhi hdvam 'hear (our) call'. This practice includes examples in which the consonant is followed by a written y or w, to be pronounced, however, as i or u; e. g. ddha hy ague 10=*) (iv. = ddha hi agne; abhi sv arydh (x. 5 9 3^) = abhi si'i arydh. The lengthening here appears to have arisen from an ancient rhythmic tendency of the language to pronounce long, between two short syllables, a final short vowel which was liable to be lengthened elsewhere as well"; this tendency being utilized by the poets of the Sarnhitas where metrical exigencies required a long syllable. Thus ddha 'then', appears as ddha when a short syllable follows. Similarly tu 'but' generally becomes til before a short syllable; and sic 'weir nearly always becomes sii between short syllables '^-

the sense; cp. Oldenberg, Prolegomena 443, 8 Cp. Wackernagel I, 309, bottom. note 2; Arnold 122. 9 The Padapatha in these instances regu- 1 Arnold 125. larly gives the original unlengthened vowel. 2 Op. cit. 124. '° Except in compounds, this lengthening 3 Op. cit. 127. disappears in the later language; there are, 4 Thus mSfsavah (iv. 47d) must be read however, several survivals in the Brahmanas 7iia dpsavah, but maduvah (for mci dduvali) see Aufrecht, Aitareya Brahmana 427; and remains (ibid.). cp. Wackernagel i, 264 b. 5 Cp. Oldenberg 434 f. II This tendency survived in the post- * Cp. Bartholomae in KZ. 29, 37, Vedic language in compounds, in words P- 5ilf- (which followed the analogy of compounds) sakat, 7 Thus d-saknuvan, salra-, sdkvan- before suffixes beginning vfith consonants, (from sak- 'be able'), in all which forms g and in reduplicative syllables. would be required by external Sandhi. " Cp. Wackernagel i, 266 b. '

II. Euphonic Combination. Vowels. 63

a. The short vowel regularly remains unchanged at the end of a verse (even within a hemistich); and often before the caesura of a Tristubh or JagatT Pada (even in terminations otherwise liable to be lengthened) ^. b. The final vowel is not lengthened in i. vocatives (except vrsabks

vni. 4538, and hariyojana i. 61'^); 2, datives in -aya; 3. nom. plur. neuter in -i; 4. verbal forms ending in -i and -u (excepting imperatives in -dhi and the

3. sing, ra/^jff/z II. 26*) 3; 5. the prepositions i'ipa'> and dpa (except dpa vrdhi VII. 27=). c. In some instances final vowels appear to be lengthened before vowels 5 or two consonants^.

69. Contraction of similar vowels. — When a final a i o^ u^ is followed by corresponding initial a i or «, contraction resulting in the long

form of the respective vowel regularly takes place; e. g. ihdsti = ihd asti; tndrA = indra d; tvagne = tva agne; viddm (vi. 9') = vi iddm; a. The contraction of « + a and oi u \- u occasionally does not take place even in the written text of the E.V. both at the end of and within a Pada; thus manisa agnih (1.70'); mantsd abki {i.ioi^); puss dsurak (v.51"), \ pusd abhi- (vi. 50^), pusd avistu (x. 26^*^); villi utd (i. 39^); su urdhvd{h) 47'"'^)^. (vi. 249); SIC Utibhih (i. ii2'~^3)j the compound suutdyah (viii. b. On the other hand, in many instances where the contraction is written, the original vowels have to be restored in pronunciation with hiatus 9. The restored initial in these instances is long by nature or position, and the preceding final if long must be shortened in pronunciation'"; e. g. casdt (i. 273) ^= ca as&t; carcata

(i. 155') = ca areata; mdpeh = ma apeh; mdpsdvah = ma apsdvaJi; mrlaiidfse {iw.ij']^) = mrlaii idfse; ydntindavak {iv.^T^) =yd?iti Indavak; bhavantuksdnah (vi. idt^) = bhavantu uksdnah. After monosyllables, the hiatus is regular in the

case of the written contractions i and u, especially when the monosyllables are vi and hi; e.g. vindra (x. 32^) = vi indra; hTndra (i. io25) = hi indra'^'^.

c. Duals in a / tf are regularly uncombined. Such i and u are usually written with hiatus in the Samhita text; the dual a always appears before z^", but at the end of internal Padas invariably coalesces in the written text. 70. Contraction of a with dissimilar vowels.— i. When final a is followed by % u, contraction takes place resulting m e o''^ respectively; e. g. piteva = pad iva; em = d Tm; obhd = d ubhd. When a is followed by r, "t, contraction is never written in the RV. and VS. but the metre shows that the combination is sometimes pronounced as ar, as is the case in the compound saptarsdyah 'the seven seers' '3.

1 Apparent exceptions are due to erroneous 8 Cp. Benfey, SV. XXXII f.; Roth, Litte- metrical division of Padas by the editors of ratur 67f. the Samhitas, or to mechanical repetition of 9 nd 'like', is never combined in pro- formulas originally used in a different posi- nunciation, see above 67; cp. Arnold 120. havam (i. 2519) 'o Long vowels being regularly shortened tion in the verse. Thus srudhl \ appears in imitation of srudhi hdvam which before vowels; see Oldenberg 465 f. is frequent at the beginning of a verse " Cp. Arnold 124. 12 120. other vowels, av, •(11. Ill, etc.). Cp. Oldenberg 420 f. Op. cit. Before 2 See ZUBATY, Der Quantitatswechsel im the Sandbi form of au, the alternative dual Auslaute vedifcher Worter, Vienna Or. ending, appears. 13 Because the long monophthongs /and Journal 2, 315. IE. ai and du. 3 See ZuBATY, op. cit. 3, 89. represent 14 does not contract either, but 4 See Oldenberg 399. The MS. the contrary often lengthens d to a, even 5 Op. cit. 60. on 6 Cp. Wackernagel l 265 b, note. where the metre requires contraction. Cp. i, 267 a «, note. 7 There is no example of contracted f in the Wackernagel 15 Wbrterbuch vil Samhitas, as r r never meet; and in the RV. See Grassmann, p. final r never occurs (cp. above, p. 59, note 8). ;

64 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

isayuh (Pp.)'; a. In the RV. a+i is once contracted to ai- in pi-discryur (l. 120^) =fra atid in the in the SV. a+z is once contracted to ai- in dindra = a indra (l. 2. I. 45); and AV. and "VS. the preposition a contracts with r to 5;- in arti- = a-fii- 'suffering', archain = a-rcchatu^. The last three instances are ^perhaps survivals of an older con- traction. That a is not otlierwise contracted with i il r to ai au ar, is doubtless to be accounted for by the previous shortening of a in hiatus 3. b. Occasionally a followed by i remains uncontracted in the written text of the (vin. ihd (VIII. \yhen a RV. ; thus ;>« iydm (vi. 753); piba imdm 171); ranaya 34")4. iortdt/ia r- is followed by .r, it is either shortened 5 or nasalized; e. g. tdtha r-tuh (iv. rtdsya iadam rlacid (v. '39)^ = kada r-; vibhvam rbhur 333)6 = vibhvar-; vifanyaml \ (iv. 112) = vipanyd rtasya.

c. On the other hand, in many instances where the contraction ^ or is written, the original simple vowels must be restored with hiatus; e.g. endragnT {l. lo84) = a indragtu; subhdgosah (l. 487) = subhdgd usak^.

2. Final a contracts with a following e or ai to ai; and vi^ith or au to au; «' original €. g. dibkih for eb/tih. But though the contraction is written, the vowels must sometimes be restored; e. g. disu (i. 6i'^) must be read a em.

a. Final a, instead of being contracted with e and 0, is in a few instances elided before those diphthongs; thus iatdr' eved (vn. 333) = tatdra eTicd; iv'etayah (x. git) = aivin' evil (VU. awina evct; ydth' ohise (VIH. 53) = ydlha ohse;^ up' esatu iva etayah; 99) = \ = iipa esattcg. An example of a compound with this elision seems to be ddso>n-'^° = ddia-oni- 'having ten aids'.

b. Final a, instead of being contracted with ' is, in a few instances, nasalized >o) before that diphthong; thus aminantani evaih'^'- (l. 79'-) for -a e-; sdJaddnxm id (l. 123 i-; upastham ikd (I. for -d e-. for -a \ 356)

3. When a remains after a final jy or J has been dropped, it does not as a rule contract with the following vowel. Nevertheless such contraction is not infrequent in the Sariihitas. In some instances it is actually written; thus sdrtavajdu (in. 32*) = Pp. sdrtavdi ajdn; vAsdii (v. 173) = Pp. vdi asdu; and the compound rdjesitam (viii. 46^*) = Pp. rdjah-isitam; in the later Sain- hitas are found krtyeti (AV. x. I's) = Pp. kftyah iti; pivopavasananain (VS. XXI. 43) = Pp. pivah-upavasananaiti '^. In other instances the contraction, though not written, is required by the metre; thus ta indra (vii. 21'^), Pp. te indra, must be read as tendra; prthivya upa (AV. antdriksat (AV. ix. i9), Pp. prthivyah, zs. prthivyantdriksai'^^ ; gosthd IX. 4^J), Pp. gosthe upa, as gosthjpa.

a. There appear to be several other instances of such written contraction, which are however otherwise explained by the Padapatha; thus rdyotd (x. 93"°) = rdyi utd,

1 Several instances of this contraction 6 vibhvam occurs thus three times; see occur in B and later. Lanman 529. 2 The TS. extends this contraction to pre- 7 In opposition to the Mss. Max Muller, positions ending in a: updrchati, avarchati\ RV2. reads vipanydm ridsya because Sayana see Whitney, APr. iii. 47 f., TPr. iii. gf. appears to favour tliat reading. In the post-Vedic language this contraction 8 See Arnold, Vedic Metre 123. was extended to all prepositions ending 9 This is a precursor of the post-Vedic in 5. rule by which the a of a preposition before 3 Cp. Benfey, GGA. 1846, p. 822. initial e and of verbs (except eli etc. and 4 The Pp. explains pibd and ?-aiiayd as edhate etc.) is elided. imperatives {piba, ranaya); but the a here 10 Though the AV. has pdncaudana- =' may represent -ds of the subjunctive (cp. pdhca odana- the elision of a before -odana- Wackernagel i, p. 311 mid.). Occasionally often takes place in the Sutras and later. a remain uncontracted because the editors 11 The old hiatus is here treated as it regarded them as representing ak-e, or dh, as would be at the end of an internal Pada. in raizla itya (viI. %,(i}i]jmaya dtra (VII. 393). Cp. The TS. (ill. I, IIS) retains the hiatus in RPr. II. 28f; Benfey, SV. xxxf.; Wacicer- the same verse without nasalization; cp.

NAGEL I, 267 a ;8. Oldenberg 46gff. 'o; 12 5 See p. 63, note a is shortened See Wackernagel i, 268 b. before r in the AB.; see Aufrecht's ed. 13 In the Paippalada recension this con- 427. traction is actually written. II. Euphonic Combination. Vowels. 6S

Pp. raya u/d; bhiimyopari (x. 753) = bhiimyah itpdri, Pp. bhumya updri^. In a few of these the contraction must be removed as contrary to metre; thus usa yati (ill. 61^), Pp. ttsa.h yati, which means 'Dawn goes', should be read as usd a yati, as the sense requires 'Dawn comes', and the metre requires an additional syllable; abhisfipasi (11.202), Pp. -p&asi, should be read as abhisfipa{li) asi; vrmbheva (VI. 46*), Pp. vrsabha iva^, as vrsabhd[h) iva. b. In a very few instances a final m is dropped after a, which then combines with a following vowel. This contraction is actually written in durgdhaitat {w. 182) for

durgdham etdt (but Pp. durgdha etdi)i, and sdvaneddm (TS. I. 4. 442) for sdvanam iddm (Pp. sdvana, iddm). Occasionally this contraction though not written is required by the metre; thus rastrdm ihd (AV.) must be read rasfrehd.

71. Final / and u before dissimilar vowels.— i. The final vowels i and ?/* before dissimilar initial vowels and before diphthongs are in the Samhitas regularly written as / and fS respectively; e. g. prdty ayam (i. II*) = prdti ayam; a tv eta (i. 5') =

a semivowel, especially before augmented forms; e. g. adhydsthah (I. 49=); dnv acdrimm (I. 2323); also dnv ihi (x. 53^)7. b. In all the Samhitas the particle n following a consonant is written as v and pronounced as u before a vowel; e. g. avid v indra (I. 281)8; but the long form of the same particle occasionally remains unchanged in the RV. even after a consonant; c. g. id u ayavi (vi. 71^); tdm il akrnvan (X. 8810). 0. In RV. I —IX there are other instances of monosyllabic and disyllabic words at the end of which >> and v are pronounced; but the only example of a trisyllabic word in which this occurs is stvyaiu in sfvyatv dpah (11.32''). In RV. X there are a few further examples; e. g. devesv ddhi (x. 1218)9. d. The semivowel is regular in the compounds rlv-ij-, gdvy-uti- 1°, sv-aha, and sv-id''-'^.

2. Unchangeable J and u. a. The dual r and ii never change to w; is the ever prosodically shortened, though the latter some- J)' or nor former 7 times is; e. g. hdri (o -) rtdsya; but sadhii (_u) asmai (11. 2 '5). The dual f may remain even before i; e.g. kdri iva, hdri indra, akst iva; but the contraction is written in upadhiva, pradhiva, ddmpativa, vispdtiva, nrpdtiva (AV.), rodasimi (vii. 90'3) = rodasT im^ 'these two worlds'. There are also several passages in which the contraction, though not written, must be read". '3 b. The rare locatives in i and ii (from stems in I and li) are regularly

written unchanged in the Samhita text of the RV., except vMy asyam (11. 3''),

I Cp. Wackernagel I, 268 a. iy and uv are sometimes written for i and u; ' In instances in which contraction with e. g. suv-itd- = su-itd- 'accessible'; hence iva seems to take place, the existence of a the pronunciation may have \ie.zxiiy,uv; cp. byform va has to be taken into consider- Wackernagel i, 270 c, 271 a. ation; cp. Grassmann, Worterbuch, column 9 See Arnold, Vedic Metre 125. 10 221; Wackernagel i, 268 a, note. If the analysis of BR., gdvi-uti-, is correct; 3 Cp. Delbruck, Verbum 67, end. the Pp. divides go- yiiti-. 11 4 In the RV. r is never final, and I doubt See ArnolO, Vedic Metre 125. whether any example can be quoted from 12 Cp. Wackernagel i, 270 b, note. Here the other Sainhitas in which it is followed we have probably not contracted forms with by an initial vowel. iva, but the dual T.\-va, the byform of iva. 13 5 The Sandhi which changes a vowel to The vowels which regularly remain the semivowel is called ksaipra 'gliding', unchanged are called pragrhya, 'separated', in the PratiSakhyas; cp. RPr. II. 8; HI. 7; by the native phoneticians; see RPr. I. 16 etc.; VPr. I. 92 etc.; APr. I. 73 etc. They VII. s- 6 The long vowel being regularly short- are indicated as such in the Pp. by an ened; cp. Oldenberg 465. appended iti. The particle u is indicated 7 Wackernagel i, 271 b; Oldenberg 438, as pragrhya in the Pp. of RV. and AV. by form (nasalization being note, ZDMG. 44, 326 note; Arnold, Vedic its nasalized im Metre 125. employed to avoid hiatus : see above 66, I). 8 The TS. has uv for v. Elsewhere also

Indo-arische Philolog^ie. I. 4. 66 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar. where, however, the vowel must be pronounced (_ w —). The vowels here (unlike the dual i) seem always to be treated as prosodically shorts c. The final i of other cases also occasionally remains unchanged; thus the nominatives prthivi, prihujrdyi, samrijiil and the instrumental susdmT sometimes retain their i, and the inst. uti frequently does so '. 72. Final e and 0. — i. a. Before a. The diphthongs e and remain unchanged before an initial a. This a is often not written in the Samhitas 3, being dropped in about three-fourths of its occurrences in the RV. and in about two-thirds in the AV.'t; but the evidence of metre shows that, in 99 instances out of 100 in the RV., and in about 80 in the AV. and the metrical parts of the YV., it is, whether written or not, to be read, and at the same time shortens the preceding diphthong to e or 0^. In visve devdso apturah (i. 3*)

a is written in sundve 'gne (i. i9) it the both and pronounced; \ must be restored: sundve dgne^. The exceptional treatment of e in stotava \ ambyam (viii. 725), for stotave ambyam, indicates that the Sandhi of e and o before a was originally the same as before other vowels 7. But their unchanged form, as before consonants, gained the day, because the short close a, when coming immediately after them in their character of monophthongs, would have a natural tendency to disappear and thus leave a consonant to follow. b. Before other vowels. The diphthongs e and o before any vowels but a would naturally become ay and av, as being originally = di and au, and as having the form of ay and av within a word. But ay regularly drops the y; e. g. agna ihd (i. 22'°); av on the other hand generally retains the v, dropping it before u^; e. g. vAyav a yahi (i. 2^); but vAya ukthSkir (i. 2^).

2. Unchangeable e. a. The e of the dual nom. ace. f. n. of a-stems, e. g. t'Me 'both', is regularly uncontracted {pragr/iya), because it consists ol a -1- the dual i^. b. Under the influence of this nominal dual e, the verbal dual e^° of the 2. 3. present and perfect middle, e. g. vdhethe 'ye two bring', bruvate 'they two speak', as-athe 'ye two have obtained', come to be uncontractable, though the e is nearly always prosodically shortened; e. g. yunjathe apdh (i. 151'*); 'but parimamndtke asman (vii. 93*).

c. The e of the locative tve 'in thee', is uncontractable. Under its influence the other pronominal forms asme 'us', and yusme 'you', are also

always treated as pragrhya by the Samhita as well as the Padapatha; it is.

1 Cp. 8 Oldenberg 456, note; Wacker- There are a few survivals of ay; e. g. NAGEL I, 270 b. tdy a (MS. L 11) = td a (TS.); cp. TPr. X. 2 Cp. op. cit. I, 270 b, note. Such forms, 23; Oldenberg 447 ff. In the MS., the K., in which the absence of contraction is only and Mantras occurring in the Manavasutras, occasional, are not indicated by iti in unaccented a for e before an accented initial

the Pp. vowel is lengthened; e. g. a dadha iti. 3 This form of Sandhi is in the Prati- 9 See above 71, 2. A dual e once called sakhyas abhinihila 'elided'; RPr. 11. appears contracted in dhisnyemi {vn. 72^), 13 etc.; VPr. I. 114, 125; APr. m. 54; TPr. which, however, should probably be read H. 8. uncontracted as dhisnye ime. The -eva which 4 See Whitney c. occurs 186'* 135 several times (l. etc ) and looks 5 Cp. Oldenberg 435 f., 453 ff., ZDMG. like a contraction of the dual e with iva, in 44. 33 iff.; Wackernagel i, p. 324. reaUty probably stands for the dual e-{-va, 6 The few instances (70 out of 4500) of the byform oiiva; cp. Wackernagel I, p.3i7, the elision of a in the RV. are the fore- note, top. 10 runners of the invariable practice of post- There was originally no difference be- Vedic Sandhi. tween this dual e and any other e in middle 7 Internally the original Sandhi of the forms, such as that of the dual -vahe, the compound go-agra- must have been gav-agra-; singular -ie, and the plural -ante. cp. Wackernagel 1, p. 325, note. II. Euphonic Combination. Consonants. 67 however, doubtful whether they were so treated in the original text of the RV.\

3. Unchangeable 0. a. When is the result of combining the final a of particles with tf (which itself is often unchangeable) ^ it is pragrkya; thus 6 (= d u), dtho (= dtha u), uto (= utd u), mi (= md u). b. Following this analogy, tlie vocative in of «-stems is sometimes treated zs. pragrhya in the Sarnhita of theTS.j e. g. pito a (TS.v. 7.2+). It is regularly so treated in the Padapathas of the RV., AV., VS., TS. (but not SV.).

Thus in vdyav a (i. 2'), vdya ukthibhir (i. 2^), vayo tdva (i. 2^) the vocative is equally given in the Padapatha as vayo Hi. 73- The diphthongs al and au. —The diphthongs ai and au are treated throughout in the same way as e and before vowels other than a. Thus ai is regularly written a (having dropped the y of ay'); e. g. tdsma aksi

(i. 116'^); tdsma indraya (i. 4'). On the other hand, au is generally written av, but always a before it in the RV. and VS.; e.g. tav A (i. 2^); tdv indragm (\.\o%i); but sujihvS. I'lpa (i. 13*). In the AV. a appears before u in pads, ucyete (AV. xix. 65). In the MS. a appears before other vowels also '. 74. Euphonic combination of consonants. — The Sandhi of final consonants, generally speaking, starts from the form which they assume in pausa. Thus an aspirate first loses its aspiration; the palatal c becomes k; j s h become k or /t; and of a group of consonants the first alone remains. Final n is, however, to a great extent differently treated from what it is in pausa; and the Sandhi of s and r is, for the most part, based not on h, their form in pausa, but on the original letter. A final consonant is assimilated ^ in quality^ to the following initial, becoming voiceless before a voiceless consonant, and voiced before a voiced sound 7; e. g. tdt satydm (i. i^) for tdd; ydt tva (i. 15") ioiydd; havyavad juhvhsyah (i. 12*), through -vAt for -vah; gdmad vafebki/i (i. 53) for gdmat; arvdg rddhah (i. 9^) for arvdc through arvdk.

a. A final media before a nasal may become the nasal of its own class. There seems to be no certain instance of this in the RV.; cakrdn na (x. 9512- ^3), however, probably stands for cakrdt nd, though the Pp. has cakrdn na. This assimilation is regular in some compounds; e. g. sdn-navati- '96' for sdt-navati-. From here it penetrated into internal Sandhi; e. g. san-n&m, b. Assimilation not only in quality, but also largely in the place of articulation occurs in the Sandhi of final m, of the final dentals 8 i n s, and of final r (under the influence of s). 75. Euphonic combination of final m. — i. Before vowels, final m remains unchanged; e. g. agnim tie (i. i ') In a very few instances, however, Sandhi is mostly the m is dropped, and the vowels then contract. This indicated by the metre only: it is very rarely written?, as in durgdhaitdt

scholars think that the 3. sing.impv., 1 Cp. Oldenberg 4S5, note. 7 Some bhdvatu represents bhavat u for original 2 Cp. above 71, i b. e. g. bhavad u, the t being retained owing to the 3 SeeGARBE, GGA. 1882, 117 f; Wacker- influence of the innumerable forms of the NAGEL I, 274; Oldenberg, ZDMG. 60, 755 -ti, -te, (cp. Wacker- —758 (Duale auf -a und -au). 3. sing, wiih -t, etc. NAGEL I, b); but this is doubtful; Del- 4 Some compounds, however, preserve 276 Altindische Syntax Sl7ff.,_ thinks it survivals of an earlier phase of Sandhi; e. g. BRUCK, originally have beenMflt'a+2'K(particle); vis-pdti- 'lord of the house'; vispdla-'is., not may IF. 71. vii-; nabh-raj- (MS.) 'cloud-king', not nab-raj-. cp. 18, 8 example of a final guttural becoming Cp. L. v. ScHROEDER, ed. of MS. I, p. XVI. An dental before a dental occurs in TS. l. 5 Final t before vowels becomes / in the a where samydi ie stands for samydk te. RV., not d as later; c. g. bdl itthi, for bdt. 2. 7', other examples in B. passages 6 Within a word a voiced consonant is There are a few see Wackernagel i, b. not necessary before vowels, semivowels, of the TS.; 277 See above b. and nasals. 9 70, 3 5* 68 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

(iv. 1 80 for durgd/iam etdt, and it is never analysed by the Padapatha in this way. It may perhaps have started from the analogy of the doublet tubhya beside tt'ibhyam 'to thee". 2. Before mutes, final in is regularly assimilated^ becoming the corresponding nasal, and before n similarly becoming fi. The Mss. and printed texts, however, represent this assimilated m by the Anusvara sign; e. g. bhadrdin karisydsi (i. i*) for bhadrdh karisydsi; bhadrdm no (x. 20"^) for bhadrdn no. This actual change of m to n before dentals led to some errors in the Pada text; e. g. ydn ni-pAsi (iv. 11^), analysed as ydt instead oi yam; dvi-venan tdm (iv.24^), analysed as aw'-w^aw instead of az'2-z'i?«aOT (cp. iv. 253). 3. Before r s s s and A^. final m becomes Anusvara {m); e. g. hotaram ratnadhdtamam (i. i'); vdrdhamanam svi (i. i?); niitrdm huve (i. 2 7). From its original use before sibilants and h, Anusvara came to be employed before the semivowel also *. A compound like sam-rdf- 'overlord' shows that m originally remained unchanged in Sandhi before r. . ^ . 4. Before y I v, final in is assimilated as nasalized y I v. The TPr.^, however, allows Anusvara beside these, while the APr. even requires Anunasika

e.. yudhi before J' and v; and the printed texts regularly use Anusvara; g. sdm (i. 83); yajhdm vdstu (i. 30'°). Forms like yamydmana- 'extended' and dpa- mlukta- 'concealed' show that final m originally remained unchanged in Sandhi before y and l^; and forms like jaganvdn, from gam- 'go', point to its having at one time become n before v in Sandhi.

76. Euphonic combination of final t. — i. Before /, final t^ becomes

fully assimilated as /; e. g. dngal lomnah (x. 163^) for di'igat ISmnak. 2. Before palatals (including /j7 final t^ becomes palatal*; e. g. tdc

cdksuh (vii. 66^^) for tdd cdksuh; rohic chyavA (i. 100'*) for rohit syava; and in a compound yataydj-jana- 'marshalling men', for yataydt-jana-. Euphonic combination of final n. — i. Before vowels. Final « 77. 9,

a. if preceded by a short vowel, is doubled'"; e. g. dhann d/iim (11. ii5) for dhan. The final n is here chiefly based on original its or nt. Though it is always written double'^, the evidence of metre shows that this rule was only partially applied in the RV. '^. b. If preceded by a long vowel, it becomes within '^ a Pada in the RV. in after a '"t, but mr after T u f^i; e. g. sdrgam iva, for sdrgan; paridhtmr dti, for paridhin; abkisuinr iva, for abhisun; nriiir abki, for nfn. This Sandhi was caused by the n having originally been followed byj'^; e.g. vfkan originally

1 Cp. Wackernagel I, 283 a, note. 11 For various explanations of this doubling, 2 Op. cit. I, 283, b a. see Wackernagel i, 279 a (p. 330). 12 3 Op. cit. I, 283 d. Cp. Oldenberg 424f., 429 ff. 4 In the post-Vedic language Anusvara 13 At the end of a Pada, -an -m -tin remain came to be allowed before mutes and nasals unchanged (as being in pausa) before a also. vowel. For passages in which -an is un- 5 Cp. Wackernagel i, 283 c. changed within a Pada, see below and 6 Representing th d dh also, if they occur. Oldenberg 428. 7 In the MS. t anomalously becomes ti, 14 In the MS. and K., -am is shortened instead of c, before s; see L. v. Schroeder, to -am; c. g. asmdm ahwtu for asman. Cp. ZDMG. 33, 185; ed. of MS. i, p. xxix. On V. Schroeder, ed. of the MS. i, p. xxix. the aspiration of i in this Sandhi, see 15 fn becomes fffir only once (v. S415), below 80 a. remaining unchanged elsewhere because two 8 Final dentals never come into contact r sounds are avoided in the same syllable with initial cerebrals in the Samhitas. (see below 79). 9 This rule applies to final guttural n 16 For examples of this Sandhi applied to also; e. g. kTdfhn i- (x. lo83), cp. LanmaN nominatives in -an, see Lanman 506 A, hihn akrnoi (l. 490; 16428J for hin a-. note (mahdn), 512 {-van), 514 {-ydn), 517 10 The compound vfsan-asvd- 'having {-man); for accusatives, 346. stallions as steeds', forms an exception. II. Euphonic Combination. Consonants. 69

' "vrkans ; mahan for '^mahants; d-yan, 3. sing. aor. for *d-yan-si (i . sing, d-yamsam) '.

The n became Anusvara (or Anunasika) before this s-, which was treated in exactly the same way as when it followed an unnasalized vowel {as becoming a, but Ts, us, rs becoming tr, ur, fr).

a. The an of the 3. pi. subjunctive (originally anl), however, remains unchanged before vowels within a Pada, obviously owing to the -t which at one time followed. There happen to be only five occurrences of this form under the conditions required: a vahan am (I. 8418J; gkosan t'lttara (iii. 338); sphuran rjipyam (vi. 67"); gacchan id (vm. 795); gacchan icttara (x. 1010)3. 2. Before consonants. Final n remains unchanged before all gutturals and labials (including m), as well as before voiced dentals (including n). It iSj however, liable to be changed before the following sounds:

a. Before />, finals, when etymologically ^ns, sometimes becomes w^; thus nhnh pahi (vm. 843)+; nfmh pAtram (i. 121'). b. Before all palatals that occur it becomes palatal fi; e. g. urdhvdn cardthaya (1.36"*) for urdhvdn; tan jusetham (y.^i^) ior tdn; vajrin chnathihi

( I. 635) for vajrin snathihi^; devdh chlokah (x. 12 5) for devdn slokah. Before o, however, the palatal sibilant is sometimes inserted '^ in the RV., the « then becoming Anusvara. This insertion occurs only when the sibilant is etyrpologically justified (that is, in the nom. sing, and ace. pi. masc.) almost exclusively (though not invariably) before ca and cid; thus anuySjdtns ca (x. 51*), amenims cid (v. 31^^. In the other Samhitas the inserted sibilant becomes commoner, occurring even where it is not etymo- logically justified (that is, in the 3. pi. impf, and the voc. and loc. of ft- stems) *. c. Before dental t^, final n usually remains; but the dental sibilant is sometimes inserted in the RV., the n then becoming Anusvara. This insertion, however, occurs in the RV. only when it is etymologically justified; it is commoner in the other Samhitas '°, where it appears even when not etymolog- ically justified. d. Before y r v h, final n as a rule remains unchanged; but -an, -In, -un sometimes become -am^^, -Tmr, -umr, as before vowels; e.g. -annani rayivfdhah (vii. pi^) for -annan; dadvdm va (x. 1323) for dadvSn; panmr hatam (i. 184^) for panin; ddsyumr yonau (i. 63:) for ddsyUn.^ '^; e. Before /, final n always becomes nasalized / e. g.jigivdllaksdm{\i.i2'^).

f. Before the dental sibilant, final n remains; but a transitional t^^ may be inserted; e. g. ahant sdhasa (i. 80^°) 'he slew with might'; tdn mm may also be written tdnt sdtn'"'. In the former example the t is organic; from snch survivals it spread to cases where it was not justified. A similar insertion may take place before /; that is, vajrin snathihi may become vajrin snathihi or vajrin chnathihi (through vajrinc snathihi for vajrint snathihi) '5.

1 Cp. Cretic Xwov?. post-Vedic language a sibilant is invariably 2 In all the other Sainhitas the pause inserted after n before all voiceless palatals, forms -an -in -tin -fn predominate. In the cerebrals, and dentals. post-Vedic language they became the only 9 Neither th nor t fh occur in the Sarn- allowable forms. hitas after final n. 1° a, note. 3 Cp. Oldenberg 428. Cp. Lanman 5_i6 11 of theRV. (ix. 1071) 4 The MS. (u. 13") has nfms pdhi. For dadhanvdmydh (XIX. has dadhanva yah. 5 For examples of nominatives with this and SV., the VS. 2) J2 above Sandhi, see LanMan 506 A, note, 512 (top), As m does before /; see 75, 4. 13 Before s a transitional k may similarly SI7- after a final ii ; e. pratyah sd 6 Op. cit., 506 A, note, and 514. be inserted g. also be written pralyaiik sd. 7 Op. cit., 512. may 8 There are no examples of the inserted 14 See Lanman 506 A, note, and 346. 15 I, note. sibilant before ck in the Sarnhitas. In the Cp. Wackernagel 282, 70 Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

78. Euphonic combination of final s. — i. Before voiced sounds. a. Final s after all vowels except a, assumes its voiced form r before all vowels and voiced consonants'; e. g. fdbhir idyo (i. i^) for fsibhis; agnir hotd (i. 1 5) for agnis] paribhtir dsi (i. I't) for paribhris; nijtanair utd (i. i^) for ndtanais. The s doubtless became r througli an older transitional voiced cerebral z'', as is shown by the Avesta, e. g. in duzita- = dur-ita-i. b. Final j' after a must originally have become z before voiced sounds. But az drops the sibilant before vowels and voiced consonants, while az drops it before vowels except a+, but becomes 0^ before voiced con- sonants^ and a; thus sutA i?ne' (l. j*) for sutas; visva vl (l. 3'^j, for visvas; khya d for Myas (1.4^); no dti (1.4^) for nas; indavo vam (1.2') for tndavas. 2. Before voiceless consonants, a. Before the palatals c, cA, s

final s becomes the palatal sibilant /' ; e. g. devas cakrmd (x. 37'^}. b. Before the dental /9, final s following a always remains; z.g.yds te

(i. 4''); medhiras tesam (i. ii?). After i u^°, it remains as a rule; e. g.

dnvibhis tana (i. 3+). But s becomes s, which cerebralizes the following t to /: a. regularly in compounds " in all the Samhitas; e. g. dus-tara- 'insuperable' for dus-tara- (but rajas-tur- 'traversing the air'j; ^. often in external Sandhi in the RV. This occurs chiefly, and in the independent passitges of the other Samliitas'^ only, before pronouns; e. g. agnis te; krdtus tdm; otherwise it

occurs occasionally only in the RV. ; thus nis-tataksur (x. 31'); gobhis tarema (x. 42'°); nctkis taniisu (viii. 20 '^j '3. c. Before k kh p ph, final y as a rule becomes Visarjamya (its pause

' When final s becomes r before r, it is a voc. in -tar (from a stem in -tr), which treated like an original r, being dropped would become -to. before r. after lengthening the preceding vowel. 6 The starting point of this Sandhi was 2 This z would be the voiced cerebral probably the treatment of az before voiced corresponding to the voiceless j which appears dentals, where the sibilant was dropped and before voiceless consonants (e. g. in dit-sk/ia-). the preceding vowel lengthened to e or u. 3 This z would account for the Sandhi of The latter finally carried the day, e surviving some Vedic compounds formed with dus- only in sure duhita (l. 345); cp. Bartholo- ^'\\M -.du-ddbha-j dil-dds-, du-dhl-^ dii-ndsa-, dii- MAE, BB. 15, if.; Wackernagel i, p. 338. nasa-, beside diir-niydnlu-. It may possibly 7 So cU does not stand for sdh cit, but also account for the forms svddkiiTvaiv.Z''), for sd tt cit. for svddhitiz va (Pp. svddhitir-iva), and m~ii 8 If initial cerebral mutes had existed in Iva (ix. 9615), where the metre requires urn va the Sarnhitas, final s would doubtless have (Pp. nrii-iva); the cerebral being dropped become the cerebral sibilant s before them. after lengthening the preceding vowel. 9 No example of initial th occurs in the

4 In the MS. unaccented -a for -as is Samhitas ; but the internal Sandhi of sthd- lengthened before an accented vowel; e. g. 'stand', in ti-sthati (for ii-stha-ti) shows that laid indrah. InTS. II. 4. 7^ ar for a {n Jinvar initial Ih would have been treated in the dvft is merely a bad reading (MS. H. 47 same way as t. i3. ° jinva rdvdi); cp. above p. 33, note Final rs never occurs ; fs, occurring only 5 dnar-vis- (l. In the compound 121') I once in the RV., remains unchanged in 'having a wain as his abode', ar instead of niatfs trtn (I. 16410). It (cp. anas-vant- 'possessed of a wain)' is 1 The only exception in the RV. is perhaps due to the influence of vanar-, cdtus-trimsat 'thirty- four', doubtless due to j

beside vanas- and vana-. On a still more I the avoidance of the combination sir. anomalous compound of the same word, 12 The TS. also has iiis lap- 'heat'. On the anad-vah- 'drawer of a cart', 'bull', cp. usage of the SV., see Benfey, SV. p. XLIIl; Wackernagel I, p. 339, top. The vowel on that of the AV., see Whitney, AFr. n. 84. a. appears in praceta rd/an 13 to the far numerous instead of \ Owing more (l. 24'4) '0 wise king' [p}-aceio rajan in the occurrences of is before t, combined with

same verse, TS. I. 5. 11 3), probably owing the disinclination to change the^ following

to the voc. p-acetah, as il; would have been initial, the retention of j after ? ii gradually pronounced at the end of a Pada in the gained ground and finally prevailed in the original text, having been misunderstood as post-Vedic language, even in compounds. n. Euphonic Combination. Consonants. 71 form), or JihvamulTya {h) before the gutturals and Upadhmanlya (h) before the ^labials; e. g. indrah pdhca (i. 75). But as remains and ts us fs become is us rs': a. regularly in compounds in all the Samhitas; t. g. paras-pd- 'far-protecting'; havis-pa- 'drinking the offering'; ^«f-/5//- 'evil-doing'; dus-pdd- 'evil-footed'. The general rule, however, applies in the following compounds: purdh-prasravana- 'streaming forth'; chdndah-paksa- {KSf) 'borne on the wings of desire'; sreyah-keta- (AV.) 'striving after superiority'; sadyah-kri- (AV.) 'bought on the same day'; bahihparidhi (TS.) 'outside the enclosure'; itdh- pradana- (TS.) 'offering from hence (= this world)'. The repeated (or amreiita) compounds also follow the general rule, doubtless from a desire to change the repeated word as httle as possible; thus ptirvah-purvo 'each first'; pardhparah 'always without' (AV.); pdrusah- parusas (VS.) 'from every knot'; pilrusah-puruso (TS.) 'every man'; pdrit/i- paruh (TS.) 'joint by joint', but pdrus-parur also in RV. AV. TS. ^. Often in external Sandhi in the RV.^; e.g. divds pdri (x. 45')

'from the sky'; pdtnivatas krdhi (i. 14^) 'make them possessed of wives'; dydus pita (iv. i '°) 'Father Heaven'. d. Before mutes immediately followed by s or s, final s regularly becomes Visarjaniya; e. g. satdkratith tsdrat (viii. i"); ubhayatah-kmur (TS.) 'two-edged'. Occasionally the sibilant disappears, as in ddka ksdrantlr {wn. ^i^')i.

e. I. Before a simple sibilant final j' is either assimilated or becomes Visarjaniya; e.g. vas sivdtamo or vah Hvdtamo (x. 9'); devis sal or divih sal

(x. 1285); nas sapdtna or nah sapdtna (x. 128'). Assimilation is undoubtedly the original Sandhi* and is required by some of the Pratisakhyas^; but the Mss. usually employ Visarjaniya, and European editions regularly follow this practice* a. The sibilant disappears in the compounds barhi-sdd- 'sitting on the sacrificial litter'; dyau-samsita- (AV.) 'sky-sharpened'; and, after lengthening the preceding a, ayi- saya raja-saya hard-saya (TS. I. 2. 112 = MS. I. 27) for ayai-, rajas-, haras-. 2. Before a sibilant immediately followed by a voiceless mute, a final sibilant is dropped; e. g. mandibhi stomebhir (i. 9 3) for mand'bhis; mitJia- spfdhya (i. 16 69) for mithas-; du-siutl- 'ill praise' for dus-T . The omission is required by the Pratisakhyas of the RV.^ VS., TS., and is the practice of all the Mss. of the MS. 3. Before a sibilant immediately followed by a nasal or semivowel, a final sibilant is optionally dropped; thus krta srdvah (vi. 5 8 3), beside which (though the Pp. reads ir/fl) the MS. reads krtah srdvah'''; ni-svardm (vii. i?) for nis-svardm 'noiseless' (Pp.^ however, ni-svardm). 79. Euphonic combination of final r. — As A is the pause form of both r and s, a certain amount of mutual contamination appears in their Sandhi; r, however, suffers much more in this respect than s. Since both j- and r when preceded hy t u have the same natural Sandhi, it is in a few

1 This treatment of final s before voice- 4 Cp. Whitney on APr. 11. 40. less gutturals and labials, which is parallel 5 Cp. Wackernagel I, p. 342, top. S (x. ito probably to that before t, was doubtless the original \u pdrTto sihcata 1071), from of sentence Sandhi. = ltd u (Pp. pdri iidh). due to the 2 ado pito (l. 1877) is probably only an 7 The omission was doubtless to apparent exception, as ado = Ada ?/, not fact that it made no difference the pro- adas (Pp. adah); the Paippalada recension nunciation. Hence probably the wrong of the AV., however, has adas fito, for analysis of isastut by the Pp. as isak-stut, adas. instead of isa-stut, as in isd-vant- (cp. BR.). 3 Though the Pp. reads adha, the PB. in 8 Cp. BOLLENSEN, ZDMG. 45, 24; PiSCHEL, Studien I, quoting the verse has adhah ; see Olden- Vedische 13. BERG 369, note I. 72 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar. instances uncertain which was the original sound. Thus it is somewhat doubtful whether the -uh of the abl. gen. sing, of r-stems and of the 3. pi. act. of past tenses represents original us or ur. In the verbal form, the r in the corre- sponding middle termination of the perfect, -re, seems to decide in favour of ur^.

1. a. Before vowels and voiced consonants (except r itself) r remains

only preceded by 7 u', but by a also^; e. gtr isd (\. 117')^ not when g. \ par devatra (vii. 52'); pratdr agnih (v. 18'); punar nah (x. 575); svar druho (n. 35*)*- b. Before r, r disappears, after lengthening a preceding vowel; e. g. piina rupini (AV. i. 24*). In a few instances^ however, appears instead of a {= ar), under the influence of -ah as the pause form of neuters in -as;

thus iidko romasdm (viii. 31 5), for fldha; and the compound aho-ratrd- 'day and night', for aha-. 2. Before voiceless consonants final r is as a rule treated like s. a. Before the gutturals k kh and the labials p ph, it becomes h under the influence of the pause form; e. g. pi'mah kaleh (x. 39^); piinah pdtriim (x. 85^9); punah-punar (i. 92'°). But that the r originally remained before these consonants is shown by its survival in the compounds pdr-paii-, svar-paii; var-karyd-, ahdr-pati- (VS.). But even here the pause form was

gradually introduced; e. g. svah-pati- (SV.); it supplanted the r of antdr throughout; e. g. antah-peya- 'drinking up'; antah-kosd- (AV.) 'inside of a store-room'; antah-parsavyd- (VS.) 'flesh between the ribs'; a?itah-patrd- (AV.) 'interior of a vessel'; and because the pause form of r and J was identical,

the Sandhi of i' came to be applied here even in the RV.; thus dntas-patha- 'being on the way' (for dntar-); cdtus-kaparda- 'having four braids', cdtiis-pad- 'four-footed' (for cdtur-). b. Before the palatals c cA, final r invariably (like s) becomes the

palatal sibilant /; e. g. piis ca (i. 189^) iox piir ca. This applies almost always even in compounds; e. g. cdtus-catvarimsat (VS.) 'forty-four'. There are only two examples of the r being retained even here: svar-caksas- 'brilliant as light', svar-canas- 'lovely as light'. c. Before dental t, final r is without exception treated like s; e. g.

gis tribarhisi (i. 181*) ioi gir; cdtus-trimsat 'thirty-four' for cdtur-. The retention of r before t in avar tdmah (1.92'') is only apparently an exception, as this really stands for avart tdmah^. d. Before sibilants, final r appears in its pause form as Visarjamya 38't). in sentence Sandhi, e. g. punah sdm (11. In compounds, however, it

1 Cp. Wackernagel I, 284 note (p. 335). as the form would originally have been 2 A list of root-stems in -«- and -ur will pronounced at the end of an internal Pad a. be found in Grassmann's Worterbuch 1693 iidho for udhar, which appears before u, — 1694, columns 3—4. and m, is due to the influence of neuters 3 r is original in dvar- 'door'; ziar- 'pro- in as, the pause form of which, -ah, would tector'; z'Jr- 'water'; dhar- 'day'; usar- 'dawn'; be the same as of those in -ar. The form udhar- 'udder'; vddhai-- 'weapon'; vanar- avo, for avdr 'down', which appears be-

'wood'; ivat- 'light'; antdr 'within'; avdr fore d {avo divdh v. 40^, etc. ; but before

'down'; punar 'again'; p-aidr 'early'; the m, avdr mahdh, I. 133^), is due to the . voc. of r-stems, e. g. ihrdtar; the 2. 3. sing, of influence of pdro divdh and pdro diva (for past tenses from roots in -r, e. g. dvar, from pdras), cp. RPr. I. 32. avo before a, d, m, vr- 'cover'. explained by Benfey (SV. XL and 176) as 4 dha evd (vi. 48') for dhar eva is due to standing for dvar is probably from vas- dhah, the pause form of dhar, being treated 'shine' (cp. Wackernagel i, p. 335, like that of a neuter in -as, dhas. In aksd top). indur (ix. 983) for aksar indur (Pp. aksdr), the 5 Cp. above 62, I. editors of the Samhita misunderstood aksdh. n. Euphonic Combination. Compounds. 73 , frequently ^remains; thus vanar-sdd- and vanar-sdd- 'sitting in the wood'; dhur-sdd- 'being on the yoke'; svar-sa- 'winning light'; svar-sati- 'acquisition of light'; dhur-sah- (VS.) 'bearing the yoke'. This indicates that it originally remained before sibilants in sentence Sandhi also. 8o._ Initial aspiration. — The palatal sibilant s and the breathing h, when initial, may under certain conditions be changed to aspirates. a. After a final c, initial / may become, and in practice always does become, ch; e. 2 g. ydc chakndv.ama (x. J) for ydd sakndvama. The same change occasionally takes place after /; thus vlpat chuiudri (iii. 33'), for sutudri; turasst chusmi (v. 40"*) for susmi. b. After a final voiced mute, initial h may be and usually is changed to the aspirate of that mute; e. g. tad dhi (1.126^) for tdd hi; sidad dhota (x. 12') iox sidad (= sidat) hdta; dvad dhavyani (x. 16") for havyani. 8r. Sandhi of compounds'. — The euphonic combination at the junction of the members of compounds is on the whole subject to the rules prevailing in external Sandhi or between words in a sentence. Thus the evidence of metre shows that contracted vowels are often even in compounds to be read with hiatus, when the initial vowel of the second member is in a heavy syllable; e. g. yuktd-asva- 'having yoked horses', devd-iddha- 'kindled by the gods', dccha-ukti- 'invitation'. Many archaisms of Sandhi are, however, preserved in compounds which have either disappeared from or are obsolescent in the sentence. I. An earlier stage of Sandhi has been preserved by compounds alone in the following instances: a. Several old phonetic combinations appear in single words: dvi-bdrha- jman- 'having a double course' for dvi-bdrhaj-jman- (=^ *dvi-bdrhad- from

bdrk-as, with -ad for -as before the voiced palatal) ='; barhi-sdd- 'sitting on the sacrificial litter' (from barhis- for barhis-sdd-); vis-pdti- 'lord of the house'

and vis-pdtm- 'mistress of the house' (with / retained instead of/; 3, sam-raj- 'sovereign ruler' (with m preserved before r)'<.

b. In a group of compounds with dus- 'ill' as first member, the combi- nations du-d = duz-d and du-n = duz-n appear instead of dur-d and dur-n : du-ddbha- 'hard to deceive', du-dhi- 'malevolent', du-ndsa- 'hard to attain', du- nAsa- 'hard to attain' and 'hard to destroy', du-das- (AV.) 'not worshipping'.

But dur-, the form which would be required by external Sandhi, is already commoner in the RV.; e. g. diir-drsika- 'looking bad', dur-dhdr-T-tu- 'hard to restrain', dur-niman- 'having a bad name', dur-ndsa- (AV.) 'hard to attain'.

c. Final r in the first member is preserved in the RV. before voiceless sounds 5; thus var-karya- 'producing water', svar-caksas- 'brilliant as light', pur-fati- 'lord of the stronghold', svar-pati- 'lord of heaven', dMr-sdd-'^ 'being on the yoke'. d. Radical stems ending in -ir and -ur mostly lengthen their vowel

before consonants (as within words), e. g. dhur-sdd- 'being on the yoke', dhur- sah- (VS.) 'bearing the yoke', pur-pati- 'lord of the stronghold', pur-bhid- 'breaking down forts', pur-bhidya- n. 'destruction of forts', pur-ydna-'' 'leading to the fort'.

' See Benfey, Gbttingische Abhandlungen 6 External Sandhi gradually encroaches 15, 105 ff.; Wackernagel 2', 125—139. here in the later Samhitas, as in svah-pati- 2 Cp. above 44 a, 3. (SV.). On punah- for punar- in punah-sara-, 3 Later iiif-pati- (TB. II. 5. 74), and even in dntas- for dntar- in dntas-paika-, and antah- the RV. pdd-blia- 'fetter' from pas- 'bind'. in antah-peya- see Wackernagel 21, 126 y, 4 Otherwise Anusvara, as in sam-rajantam. note, and above 79, 2 a,. 5 While in external Sandhi it would be- 7 But gir retains the short vowel in gir- come Visarjanlya or a sibilant. vanas- 'fond of praise', gir-vdhas- 'praised in 74 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

e. As first member of a compound dyu- 'heaven' appears as div- before

vowels ' (while yu would in external Sandhi become yv), as dlv-isti- 'striving for heaven', div-it- 'going to heaven'. 2. Compounds in the Sainhitas preserve many euphonic archaisms which, while still existing in external Sandhi, disappear from the sentence in later periods of the language though still partially surviving in compounds. a. A final consonant disappears before the same consonant when the latter is the initial of a group: upd{s)-stha- 'lap', nd{k)-ksatra- 'star', hr[d)-dyotd- (AV.), an internal disease, hr{d)-dy6tana (AV.) 'breaking the heart' ^. b. A final sibilant disappears before a mute followed by a sibilant, as in divd-ksa- 'heavenly' ('ruling over heaven', div-ds, gen.) 3. c. A sibilant as initial of the second member is retained; thus scandra- 'bright' in puru-scandrd- 'much-shining' and many other compounds, but almost invariably candrd- as an independent word*. d. A final s in the first member or an initial s in the second is cerebralized; e. g. dus-tdra- 'invincible', nis-tdkvari- (AV.) 'running away', dus-svdpnya- 'evil dream'.

e. An original n in the second member is cerebralized after a, r r s with the necessary phonetic restrictions (47) a. In derivatives from verbs com- pounded with prepositions containing r, initial, medial, or final n of the root is almost invariably cerebralized in the Sarnhitas; thus nir-nij- 'bright garment',

htiit-^, pari-hnuta- (AV.) 'denied' ( \f pari-ndh- 'enclosure', pary-a-naddha- (AV.) 'tied up', pra-Tii- and pra-netr- 'leader', prd-niti- 'guidance', prand- 'breath', prdnana- and prandtha- (VS.) 'respiration' {an- 'breathe'). The cerebralization

appears even in suffixes, as pra-ydna- 'advance' 5.

j3. In other compounds n greatly predominates when the second member is a verbal noun; e.g. grama-nt- 'chief of a village', dur-gdni 'dangers'; nr- pana- 'giving drink to men', pitr-yina- 'trodden by the fathers', pUr-ydna- (AV.) 'leading to the fort', rakso-hdn- 'demon-slaying', vrtra-hdn- 'Vrtra-slaying'. The cerebralization fluctuates in -yavan: thus pratar-ydvan- 'going out early', vfsa-pra-yavan- 'going with stallions', but puro-ydvan- 'going in front', subhra- yavan- 'going in a radiant chariot'; also in punsa-vahana- (VS.) and purisa- vdhana- (TS. K.) 'removing rubbish'. Cerebralization never takes place in -ghn-j the weak form of -han- 'killing'; nor in aksa-ndh- 'tied to the axle', kravya-vdhana-^ 'conveying corpses', carma-mnd- 'tanner', yusmd-mta- 'led by you'.

f. The cerebralization takes place somewhat less regularly when the second member is an ordinary (non-verbal) noun; e. g. uru-nasd- 'broad-nosed',

tri-navd- (VS.) 'consisting of three times nine parts', tri-naman- ( AV.) ' 'having three names', dru-ghand- 'mallet', nr-mdnas- 'friendly to men', puru-naman-

'many-named', purvahnd- 'forenoon', prd-napat- 'great-grandson'. There is

song'. The long vowel in dn-asTr-da- 'not as go- 'cow' instead of gav- before vowels, fulfilling expectation', asTr-da- and asir-daya- e. g. go-agra- 'headed by cows' ; cp. Wacker- 'fulfilment of a benediction' is due to analogy, NAGEL 21, p. 129 e. Another kind of inno- as a-Hs- is derived from the root sas-. vation in compounds is due to haplology; 1 dyit- remains before consonants: dyu-ksd-, cp. Wackernagel I, 241 a /3; 21, p. 128 dyu-ga-t-, dyit-bhakta-, bottom. 2 Also in external Sandhi 'ta dyam (AV. 5 There are a few exceptions : pari-pana- IV. 196) for tad dyim. 'drink', pary-uhydmcina- 'being led home' 3 Also in external Sandhi adha ksarantlr [S/vah-), p-d-pTna-^ (VS.) .'distended'. (vil. 342), cp. above 78, 2 d. 6 Like kavya vihana- 'conveying oblations'. 4 Divergence from external Sandhi is 7 The later Sarnhitas always have n after sometimes not archaic but due to innovation; iri-, while the RV. always has n; as tri- II. Euphonic Combination. Compounds. 75 fluctuation when dus- 'ill' assumes the later Sandhi form dur-, _ of as dur- ndrnan- 'having a bad name', dur-hanu- 'having ugly jaws', but dur-niydntu- 'hard to restrain"; also in vardkra-nasd- {TS,.) 'rhinoceros' and vardhrl-nasd- (VS.) 'having streaks on the nose'; sri-manas- (TS.) and iri-manas- (VS.) 'well-disposed'.

But n often remains in this type of compound: initially in krpd-nila- iwhose home is splendour', candrd-nirnij- 'having a brilliant garment', varsd- nirnij- 'clothed with rain', tvesd-nrmna- 'of brilliant power', dlrghd-mt/ia-, N. of a man, punar-nava- 'again renewed', babhru-nikasa- (VS.) 'looking brownish', vfsa-nabhi- 'having a mighty nave'; medially in fsi-manas-^ 'inspired', itidragni 'Indra and Agni', ksatra-vdni- (AV.) 'addicted to military rule', 'brdhma-vani- (VS.) 'well disposed to the priesthood', cdtur-anika- 'four-faced', try-anikd- 'three- faced', jyotir-anika- ^ 'having a shining face', citrd-bhanu- 'having bright lustre', dhruvd-yoni- (VS.) 'having a fixed abode', pra-mdnas- (AV.) 'careful', fidri- manyu-sayaka-'- (RV. x) 'stimulating the mettle of the bays'. f. The final vowel of the first member is often lengthened. This frequently occurs before »-; e. g. anna-vrdh- 'prospering by food', prati-vartd- (AV.) 'returning into itself, pra-vrs-^ 'rainy season'. It is often due to the rhythmical tendency (which also prevails in the sentence) to lengthen a vowel before a single consonant between two short syllables; e. g. ahi-iuva-, N. of a demon (from ahi-), urU-nasd- 'broad-nosed', rta-sdh- (VS.) 'maintaining the sacred law', pavt-nasd- (AV.) 'having a nose like a spearhead', nagha-risd-° (AV.) N. of a plant', ratha-sdh- 'able to draw the car'. Lengthening of a vowel between other than two short syllables is less common, being probably due to imitation of compounds in which the long vowel is produced by the normal rhythm; e. g. dhanva-sdh- 'skilled in archery' and vibhva-sdh- 'overcoming the rich' like ratha-sdh-; sahdsra-magha- 'having a thousand gifts' like sats.- magha- 'having a hundred gifts'. The interchange of short and long is entirely regulated by the rhythmic principle in sana- 'of old' and almost entirely in tuvi- 'much'; e. g. sana-jur- 'long since aged' and sdna-sruta- 'famous of old', iuvf-maghd- 'very rich' and tuvi-badhd- 'killing many''. The final vowel of prepositions is particularly often lengthened in the later Sarnhltas without reference to rhythm, especially before nouns ending in -a with long radical vowel, e. g. ni-vid- (AV.) 'liturgical invitation', abhi-moda-mi'id- (AV.) 'excessively joyful', ni-nahd- (AV.) 'girth', prati-bodhd- (AV.) 'vigilance', vi-barhd- (AV.) 'scattering'. Sometimes the final vowel is left unlengthened between two short syllables; e. g. rayi-pdii- 'lord of wealth', ghrta-duh-as (voc. pi.) 'yielding ghee'*- g. On the other hand, final a and T of the first member are often shortened before a group of consonants or a long syllable; e. g. amiva- cdtana-{AN) 'driving away disease' and amiva-hdn- 'dtstroy'vag disease' {dmiva-); Urna-mradas- 'soft as wool' {flrna-) and *urna-vabhi- 'spinning wool', 'spider', in the patronymic aurnavabhd-; kaksya-pra- 'filling out the girth' {kaksya-^; naki- 'third heaven', iri-n&bhi- 'having three 7 Cp. 2l%o pra-sdh- ani pra-sak- 'victorious'. naves'. The long vowel in the former is probably 1 The AV. here always has the cerebral, historic, = IE. pro. as dur-nihita- 'badly kept'. 8 The vowel is originally long, in asfd- 2 But nr-manas- 'friendly to men' and 'eight', probably also in accha- 'to' and vfsa-manas- 'manly-spirited'. viiva- 'all', and may be differently ex- 3 But purv-amka- 'having many faces'. plained in a-- 'hostile to the gods', 4 But vfsa-manyu- (RV. l) 'vigorous- a-rupUa- (iv. 5') meaning, and a-sat-; see minded'. Wackernagel 2', p. 131, note. 5 Cp. Wackernagel I, 42. 6 Beside nagha-niard- (AV.) N. of a plant. — —

76 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

sena-jit- (VS.) 'vanquishing armies' {sena-); gduri-vtti- N. of a seer (from gatiri), frthivi-stha- 'standing on the earth'; even before a short syllable in ^rthivi-sdd- (AV.) and prthivi-sdd- (VS.) 'sitting on the earth' {prtMvi-), sdrasvati-krla- (VS.) 'made by Sarasvati''. 82. Extension of external to internal Sandhi. — The rules of sentence Sandhi as applied between members of a compound are often found to affect the internal form of words. a. Nominal (chiefly secondary) suffixes with initial consonants are frequently treated like the second member of a compound; e. g. beside duvas-yii- 'worshipping', appears duvo-yt'i-'. This influence extends even to

radical finals before primary suffixes; e. g. dn-na- 'food' for dd-na-; san-nAm for saf-nSm, from sds- 'six'; ndmo-bkis, from ndmas- 'obeisance', with for ad

(as in tisdd-bkis from usds- 'dawn') J; havih-su'- for havis-su, from havis- 'oblation'; JigT-vdms- for jigi-vAms- 'having conquered', with radical final lengthened as in sentence Sandhi. b. In the verb the influence of sentence Sandhi is seen in reduplicated forms. Thus parallel with the lengthening of final syllables in the sentence, the final radical vowel is made long before the ending -hi in didihi beside the more usual didihi, from di- 'shine'. The rhythmical lengthening in the reduplicated aorist is probably due to a similar influence.

III. ACCENT.

Roth, Nirukta LVil— Lxxn: Ueber die Elemente des indischen Accentes nach den Pratigakhja Sutren. — Benfey, VoUstandige Grammatik p. 9— 13. — Whitney, 'On the nature and designation of the accent in Sanskrit', Transactions of the American Philo- logical Association, 1869— 70; Oriental and Linguistic Studies 2, 318 ff. ; Sanskrit Grammar3, 28 p. — 33 ; see also General Index, s. v. 'Accent'. — Haug, Ueber das Wesen und den Werth des wedischen Accents, Miinchen 1873 (cp. Weber, Indische Streifen 3, 335 ff.; Whitney, JAOS. 10, ixff., cnif.). — Wackernagel, Altindische Grammatik i, 243 ff. Cp. also HiRT, Der indogermanische Akzent, Strassburg 1895, and Akzentstudien in IF. VI—IX; Brugmann, Kurze vergleichende Grammatik I (Strassburg 1902), p. 52 (>6. Besides the PratiSakhyas several other native authorities refer to the accent. Panini and his commentators give an account of it; all the Sutras of Panini relating to accentu- ation are collected in a chapter of the Siddhanta-kaumudi called vaidika-svara-prakriyd 'section on the Vedic accent'. The accent is further dealt with in the Bhasikasutra, in the Pratijnasntra, in the Siksas, and as regards the position of the accent in individual words, in the Unadisutras and especially in the Phitsfltras.

83. General character of the Vedic accent. — In Vedic literature sacred texts only, primarily all the Sainhitas ^ have been handed down in an accented form. Of all other sacred texts, only those to which a special importance was attached, have preserved the accent. These are the Taittiriya Brahmana (together with its Aranyaka) and the Satapatha Brahmana (including

the Brhadaranyaka Upanisad). There is, however, evidence to show -that the Paiicaviinsa Brahmana^ and other Brahmanas were at one time accented''.

1 On the relation of this shortening to 4 See 57, i. the lengthening in the same position, and 5 The Mss. of the Kathaka are so its probable explanation, see Wackernagel defective as regards accentuation that L. v. 2'. P- 135 (56 g). Schroeder found it possible to print parts 2 Hence the Padapatha treats a nominal only of his edition of the text (vol. I, 1900) stem which takes a suffix with initial consonant witli accents. like the first a 6 member of compound, Weber, Indische Studien 10, 421 ; cp. separating it from the suffix by ; Max MiiLLER, ASL. 348; Burnell, Sama- e. g. dtivah-Syuh. for diaioyuh; adriSziak for vidhana Brahmana p. VI. The Mantra parts adrivah, voc, 'armed with a bolt'; utiibhih of the AitareyaAranyaka are accented (Keith's for utibhis 'with aids'. ed. p. 10). 3 See above 44 a, 3. 7 The Suparnadhyaya, an artificially archaic ;

III. Accent. General Character of Vedic Accent. 77

The Sutras, though not themselves accented, occasionally accent the Mantras ivhich they quote.

The Vedic accent, like that of ancient Greece, was of an essentially riusical nature. This is indicated by the fact that the accent exercises no influence on the rhythm of versification. The phoneticians of the Prati- E(akhyas, in describing it, speak only of its pitch, which is also indicated by the name of the chief tone, ud-atta 'raised', 'high' '. But that the Vedic accent was accompanied by some stress ^ is shown by certain phonetic changes which cannot otherwise be explained^. In the Vedic accent three degrees of pitch may be distinguished : the high, properly represented by the udatta, the middle by the svarita ('sounded'), and the low by the an-udatta ('not raised'). That the Udatta originally-

denoted the highest pitch in the oldest form of the Vedic language, is shown by the evidence of Comparative Philology, and especially of Greek which, as far as its peculiar laws of accent will admit, has the acute on the same syllable as in the Vedic language has the Udatta (e. g. A//6f : divas

smd : sapid; oktm : astdu). This conclusion is also supported by the method of marking the Udatta in the Samaveda, the Maitrayani Sainhita, and the Kathaka. In the Rgveda, however, the Udatta has a middle pitch, lower than that of the Svarita, as is shown both by the way in which it is marked and by the account given of it in the Pratisakhyas. This must be an innovation, though an old one. The Svarita is a falling accent of a dependent nature, marking the transition from an accented to a toneless syllable. It regularly follows an Udatta, to the rise of which its fall corresponds in pitch. It assumes an independent appearance when the preceding Udatta is lost in consequence of the vowel that bears the Udatta being changed to a semivowel in Sandhi. It is described in Panini i. 2 3't as a combination of Udatta and Anudatta, which means that it falls from the high pitch of the acute to the low pitch of unaccented syllables. According to the RV. Pratisakhya and the TS. Pratisakhya, however, the first part of the Svarita sounds higher than the Udatta. This means that, instead of falling immediately from the high pitch of the preceding Udatta, it first rises somewhat before falling to low pitch ^- It would thus have something of the nature of a in the RV.; only the rise in pitch above the highest level of the Udatta is but slight (corre- sponding to the initial rise of the Udatta from Anudattatara to Anudatta level), while the fall corresponds to the total rise of the Udatta^. The low tone of the syllables preceding an accented syllable (with Udatta or Svarita) is called an-udatta 'not raised' in the Pratisakhyas ^ When it follows a Svarita it is called the pracaya^ {svara), or 'accumulated pitch' (as several such unaccented syllables often occur in succession) which continues at the low level reached by the preceding Svarita till the syllable immediately

poem composed in the style of the Vedic 3 See Wackernagel i, 218 and cp. OsT- hymns, is also accented, but with many HOFF, Morphologische Untersuchungen 4, 73. mistakes; see Grube's edition in Indische 4 In agreement with VPr. I. 126; APr. 1. Studien, vol. Xiv. 17; cp. Haug 73. 1 Cp. Haug, op. cit. 19. 5 See Oldenberg, Prolegomena 483 f. 2 The Vedic accent, like the Greek, was, 6 According to Panini's account the Svarita after the beginning of our era, changed to does not rise above Udatta pitch before a stress accent which, however, unlike the falling; see Oldenberg, loc. cit. modern Greek stress accent, did not remain 7 See RPr. Ul. i; cp. Haug 91. on the original- syllable, but is regulated by 8 Haug 92 f. the quantity of the last two or three syllables, much as in Latin; cp. Haug 99, end. I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

preceding the next accent'. The latter syllable, called sanna-tara 'lower' or

antidatta-tara ^ 'more lowered', sinks somewhat belovv this monotone. ' 84. Methods of marking the accent. — The accent is maiked in tie Vedic texts in four different ways.

I. The system of the Rgveda is followed also by the Atharvaveda '^, the Taittirlya Sarnhita (along with its Brahmana) and, with only slight devia- tions in the treatment of the Svarita, by the Vajasaneyi Sarnhita. This system

is peculiar in not marking the principal accent at all. The explanation is doubtless to be found in the fact that the pitch of the Udatta is in the RV. intermediate between that of the other two tones. Hence the preceding

Anudatta, as having low pitch, is marked by a horizontal stroke below the syllable, while the following Svarita, as rising to a higher pitch, is marked by a vertical stroke above the syllable''; e.g. ^ffi^^i agnina = agntna. The presence of successive Udattas at the beginning of a hemistich is recognizable

by the absence of all marks till the Svarita which follows the last of them, or the Anudatta which follows the last of them and precedes the next accented syllable; thus (TToiT aiffTf tav a yatam = tav a yatam; tavet tat satyam = tdvet tat satyam. On the other hand, all the unaccented syllables at the beginning of a hemistich are marked; e. g. ^^T'lTW = vaisranaram = vaisvanardm. But all the

syllables following a Svarita remain unmarked till the one immediately preceding

the next Udatta or Svarita; e. g. ?H flf i!^ JJH^ ^Jl^afrl 'Jfifgr imam me gahge yamune sarasvaii suiudri = i??idm me gaiige yamune sarasvati sittudri^. a. The hemistich being treated as the unit with regard to accentuation*, the marking of the Anudatta and of the Svarita is not limited to the word containing the Udatta which those accents precede and follow respectively'. Hence the final syllable of one word may be marked with an Anudatta as preceding an Udatta of the next initial syllable; or the initial syllable of one word may be marked with the Svarita following the Udatta at the end of the preceding word; e. g. 'ggfvraifisrfiTT purvebhij- rdbhir ptlrvebhir fsibhir; = . aTniraTTT yajfiam ddhvaram ^ yajndm adhvardm. But if an initial syllable

after a final Udatta precedes an accented syllable, it loses the enchtic Svarita and must be marked as Anudatta; e. g. Sg^rffcraiT devam rtvijdm = devdm rtvijam.

b. If an independent Svarita^ precedes an Udatta, it is marked with the

numeral \ (i) when its vowel is short, and with a (3) when it is long, the figures receiving both the sign of the Svarita and that of the Anudatta 9 which precedes an Udatta; e.g. ^rm\ ^\ =apsv antdr; XW\\'^^\ = rayo 'vdnih. The phenomenon is described by the phoneticians with the words kampa

1 See Oldenberg, Prolegomena 485, end. 7 In the Padapatha, on the other hand, 2 Sanna-tara, APr. I. 43; anudatta-tara in each word receives its natural accent only, Kasika vrtti on Panini 1. 24°. so that where the one text has a Svarita, 3 The Mss. of the AV., however, show the other may have an Anudatta; e. g. in considerable variations; see Whitney's I. I-' the Sarnhita has rqyim asnavqt, the Translation p. cxxi ff.. Pada rqyhn qsnavqi (the latter word being 4 In the Kashmir ' Ms. of the RV. the unaccented has the Anudatta marked under Udatta and the independent Svarita only each syllable). are marked, the former by a vertical stroke 8 Examples of independent Svarita are above the accented syllable, the latter by a svar for sum-; kva for kua; viryam for vTriam. hook above (c\) the accented syllable; see 'Independent' Svarita in the above rule is ScHEFTELOWiTZ, Die Apokryphen des Rgveda intended to include that which results from 48 ff. change to a semivowel [ksaipra), from Cp. 5 Haug, op. cit. 92 f. contraction {praslisla) and from elision of a 6 From the point of view of the sentence (abhitiihitd). accent the Pada is the unit; thus a verb or 9 The long vowel before the ^ receives vocative is always accented at its beginning. the Anudatta stroke as well. III. Accent. Method of marking Accent. 79

'qbaver', vikampita, and the verb pra-kamp-. In the TS. it appears only when the second syllable as well as the first has the Svarita, and the figure 2, as wel'; as I and 3, is here used. ' 2. In the system of the Maitrayani Sarnhita' and of the Kathaka% the Udatta is marked by a vertical stroke above (which seems to indicate that this accent was here pronounced with the highest pitch); e. g. ^frinr = agnina. The two Saiiihitas, however, diverge in their method of indicating the Svarita. The MS. marks the independent Svarita by a curve below the accented syllable, e. g. cflw viryam ; but the dependent Svarita by a horizontal stroke in the middle or three vertical strokes above the accented syllable. The Kathaka, on the other hand, marks the independent Svarita by a curve below (if an unaccented syllable follows), e. g. cfljj gyrfk viryam badhnati; or by a hook below (if an accented syllable follows)^ e. g. g?ij ouratS viryam vyacade; but the dependent Svarita by a dot below the accented syllable^. Both these Samhitas mark the Anudattatara in the ordinary way by a stroke below the syllable. In L. v. Schroeder's editions, however, the Udatta and the independent Svarita only are marked. When the text of any of the Sarnhitas is transliterated in Roman characters, it is the regular practice to omit any indication of the dependent Svarita and of the Anudatta as unnecessary. 3. In the system of the Samaveda, the figures i 2 3 are written above the accented syllables to represent three degrees of pitch. Here I always stands for the highest pitch (Udatta), and 3 always for the lowest (Anudatta), and 2 generally for the middle pitch (Svarita); e. g. 3 12 barhisi = RV. barhisi (barhist). But 2 also represents the Udatta when the latter is not followed by a Svarita (that is when the Udatta syllable is final in the hemistich or when an Anudattatara preceding another accented 32 , 323. 23I2_ syllable follows);' e.g. giro. = RV. gira (gird); yajhanaiii hots, visvesam = RV. yajnanam hotq visvesam (yajnanam hots visvesam). If there are two successive Udattas, the second is not marked, but 2 r is written over the 31 2r following Svarita; e.g. dviso martyasya =RV. dviso martyasya (dviso mdrtyasya). If in such case there is no room for 2 r, the first Udatta has 2 u written over 3 2U 3 I 2 it instead; e. g. esa sya piiaye = RV. esa sya pUaye (esd syd pTtdye). The independent Svarita (as well as the dependent one which follows two successive

Udattas) is marked with 2r; and the Anudatta which precedes it, with 3k; 3k 2r e. g. tanvs. Syllables which follow a Svarita and in which the pitch remains 31 2 312 unchanged, are left unmarked; e. g. dutam vrnimahe hotSram = RV. dutam

vrmmahe hotaram {dutdm vrnimahe hStSram) ''. 4. Though the Brahmanas do not come within the scope of this work, the system of accentuation in the Satapatha Brahmana cannot be passed

over here, as it must be treated in connexion with the other systems of the . It is historically important as forming a transition to the post- Vedic period, when the accent assumed a different character 5. The system of the SB. in various respects differs considerably from the three de- scribed above.

1 See Haug 27—32; L. v. Schroeder, i On some peculiarities of the VS. i Introduction to his edition I, p. xxix—XXXlV; marliing the Svarita, see Haug 32 —35. ZDMG. 33, l86ff. 4 For further details see Haxjg 35 —42. 2 Cp. L. y. ScHROEDER, Introduction to his 5 Cp. Leumann, KZ. 31, 50 (mid.). edition, 2, p. x—XI. 8o I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

a. Its chief peculiarity is that it marks only the main accent, ihe Udatta. This is done by means of a horizontal stroke below the accented syllable; e. g. u^u: piirusah. If there are two or more successive Udaitas, only the last is"^ marked; e. g. agnir hi vai dhur atha = agnir hi vdi dhdr dtha. When, however, an Udatla is thrown back as the result of Sandhi, an immediately preceding Udatta is also marked; e. g. so 'gnim evabhT_ksam.anaIji. = so 'gnim evabhiksamanah, where evabhi- stands for evabhi- = evd abhi-. Two successive syllables are also sometimes marked when a compound receives a secondary Udatta; e. g. sprhayad-varnah, for sprhaydd-varnah. b. An independent Svarita is thrown back on the preceding syllable in the form of an Udatta; e. g. manusyesu, that is, mani'tsyesu for manusyesu. The Svarita resulting from change to a semivowel {ksaipra), from contraction (praslista), or elision of a {abhinihita), is similarly treated; e. g. katham nv imam, that is, kathdm nv imam for kathdm nv imdm; evaitad, that is, evaitdd from evd etdd; te_ 'rcantah, that is, te 'rcaniah for // arcantah. When, however, the prepositions & and prd, and final d in the first member of a compound, combine with an unaccented vowel, the contracted syllable retains the Udatta; e. g. ehi (= a ihi); praha {= prd aha); citroti- (= citrd-uti-) 'bestowing wondrous gifts'. c. Before a pause an accented syllable may lose its Udatta or receive a reduced accent marked with three dots, if the initial syllable or independent Svarita; e. sa bhagqh samsthite, after the pause has an Udatta g. \ for sd bhagd/i\sdinsthite. The penultimate syllable may also be thus reduced; t.g.juhoti\\atha, iox juhoti\\diha. This may occur even when the following initial syllable is unaccented; e. g. 7iqpsu\\apa, for ndpsu\\apd. d. Reduplicated forms or long compounds accented on the first syllable or prior member, sometimes receive a secondary accent near the end of the word; e. g. balbalUi, that is bdlbaliti for bdlbaliti; e_ka-catvarimsat, that is, eka-catvarimsdt for ika-catvarimsat. Sometimes, in such case, the primary accent itself is lost; e. g. eka-saptatih beside eka-saptatih. Somewhat analogous to this double accentuation of compounds is the frequent accentuation of both verbal prefix and verb at the sam.e time; e.g. abhi gopaydd {c^. 109). Finally, the accent occasionally appears on a syllable different from that on which it usually rests. The irregularities mentioned here (d) are much commoner in Books X— XIII than in the earlier Books; they are commonest of all in xiv^. 85. Normal accentuation of words. —-As a general rule, every Vedic word is both accented and has one main accent only. The Udatta is the only main accent in the original text of the Rgveda. It is generally found on the syllable which, according to the evidence of Comparative Philology ^ bore it in the Indo-European periods. Sometimes, however, the Udatta is secondary, being a substitute for the independent Svarita (itself the result of an original Udatta). Thus there is already a tendency in the RV. to change a final Svarita into a final Udatta: the vocative dyaus {= diaus) 'O Heaven', appears

as dydiis (vm. 89"); arya- (= aria-) 'kind', occurring only once (i. 123'), otherwise and very frequently appears as aryd-; thus, too, sv&n- 'dog', was probably at one time svhn- for si'ian- (Gk. kucov), which would explain the

1 For further details, see Haug, 43—48; Vedic Udatta shifted, in a few instances, to Leumann, Die accentuation des (Jatapatha- other syllables in the Brahmanas and in Brahmana, 22 KZ. 31, — 51 ; cp. also Wacker- Panini's system ; thus sapid, SB. and C. NAGEL I, 252; Bhasikavrtti, ed. by KlEL- sapta, astau, C. dstau; AV. VS. SB. tild- HORN IS. 10, 397 ff. 'sesamum', C. iila-; sidati 'sit', C. also siddti; 2 Cp. Brugmann, kg. 45, 1. AV. gdhvara- 'deep', C. gahvard-. 3 Under the influence of analogy the :

III. Accent. Normal Accentuation of Words. abnormal accentuation simas etc. instead of the regular accentuation *sunds etc. prevailing in monosyllabic stems (93). Or the final Svarita is thrown back as anUdatta on the preceding syllable: thus 7«/^r)'a- 'friendly', beside /wZ/rya-'-

In some Vedic words, however, the only accent which is written is the 'independent' Svarita, by the native phoneticians called the 'genuine' {jatya) ^

or also the 'invariable' {nitya). Always following a jy or ». it is, however, just as much due to a preceding Udatta (lost by the change of i and u to y and v), as the dependent Svarita is; e. g. kva (= ki'ia) 'where?'; svar (= suar^ TS. suvar) 'light'; rathyam (= ratkiam, from rathi- 'charioteer'); tanvam (= tanuam from /a«z?-'body'); ok-ya- {= ok-ia-) 'belonging to home'; vasav-ya- (= vasav-ia-) 'wealthy'. In reading the RV. the original vowel with

its Udatta must be restored except in a very few late passages 3. a. Double accent. Contrary to the general rule that a word has a single accent only, a certain class of infinitives and a special type of compounds

have a double accent +. The infinitives in -tavai, of which more than a dozen examples occur, accent both the first and the last syllable; e. g. e-tavdi 'to go', dpa-bhartavdi 'to take away'. The Udatta on the final syllable is probably to be explained as a secondary accent like that of the SB. in intensives and compounds {bdlbaliti, eka-catvarinisdt, cp. 84, 4 d), where an accent at the beginning of a word is counterbalanced by another at the end. A good many compounds of a syntactical type, in which both members are duals in form or in which the first member is nearly always a genitive in form, accent both members; e. g. ^iz/rfi-z^arK^a 'Mitra and ', bfhas-pdti- 'Lord of prayer's. b. Lack of accent. Contrary to the general rule that every word is accented, some words never have an accent, while others lose their accent under special conditions. 1. The following are invariably enclitic a. pronouns: tva- 'another'; sama- 'some'; ena- 'he', 'she'^; me, D. G., 'of or to me'; ma. A., 'me'; nau, du. A. D. G., 'us two', etc.; nas, A. D. G.,

'us', etc.; te, D. G., 'of or to thee'; tva. A., 'thee'; vam, A. D. G., 'ye two', etc.; vas, A. D. G., 'you', etc.; im, slm 'him', 'her', 'it', 'them', etc.; kis 'some one' in nd-kis, mi-kis 'no one'; kim in d-kfm 'from', nd-kim, ma-ktm 'never'.

^. particles: ca 'and'; u 'on the other hand'; vs. 'or'; iva 'like', 'as it were'; kam 'indeed' (after nu, su, hi); , ha 'just' (emphasizing); cid 'at all'; bhala 'indeed'; sama-ha 'somehow'; jz^a 'just', 'indeed' (almost invariably with the present tense); svid 'probably'. 2. The following classes of forms or individual words are subject to loss of accent according to their position or function in the sentence; a. vocatives, unless beginning the sentence or Pada. S. finite verbs, in principal clauses, unless beginning the sentence or Pada. a-, y. all oblique cases formed from the demonstrative pronoun when used merely to replace a preceding substantive, and not occurring at the beginning of a sentence or Pada; e. g. asya jdnimani 'his (i. e. Agni's) births' (but asyA usdsah 'of that Dawn').

1 Cp. the accentuation of the SB., 84, 4 b. 3 Cp. Benfey, Gott. Abhandlungen 27, In, Panini's system of accentuation this 31 ff. further; thus V. mrya- 4 In the Brahmanas also the particle vava- tendency went still _ below, on the accentuation of (= viria-), becomes in C. vtrya-; and the 5 See gerundive in -tavya (= -tavid) appears in compounds, 91. 6 sing. f. occurs once (viii. 619) C. as -tdvya also. The A. at the beginning of a Pada as enam. 2 RPr. m. 4, VPr.l. inf.; cp. Haug 75. accented

Indo-arische Philologie. I. 4. 6 82 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

8. ydtha 'as', when used in the sense of iva 'hke', 'as it were', at the end of a Pada; e. g. taydvo yatha (i. 50^) 'like thieves'. e. nd 'not', when followed by hi 'for'', the two particles being treated as one word; e. g. nahi tva . . . invatah (i. 10*) 'for the two do not restrain thee'; similarly when combined with the particle m'l 'now' : na-nu 'certainly not'.

I. Accentuation of Nominal Stems.

86. A. In primary derivation no general law for the accentuation of nominal suffixes can be stated; but there is a tendency, when -a, -ana, -as, -an, -man are added, to accent the root in action nouns, and the suffix in agent nouns; and in nouns formed with -as and -man difference of gender

is to some extent accompanied by difference of accent. 1. Root stems wh.en reduplicated or compounded with prepositions as a rule retain the accent on the radical syllable; e. g. juhu- 'tongue' and 'ladle', yavi-yudh- 'eager to fight'; pra-neni- 'guiding constantly'. In stems formed with intensive reduplication, however, the reduplicative syllable is sometimes accented; thus jogU- 'singing aloud', vdnivan- 'desiring', ddridra- (VS.) 'roving'. The prefix is accented in dva-sa- 'deliverance', t'lpa-stu-t- 'in-

vocation', pdri-jri- 'running round' ^. 2. When the suffix -a is added, the root is accented in action nouns, but the suffix in agent nouns; e. g. ved-a- 'knowledge', sisndth-a- 'perforation'; but cod-d- 'instigator', cacar-d- 'moveable' ^. When there is a verbal prefix, the final syllable is as a rule accented; e. g. sam-gam-d- m. 'coming together'. In a few of these compounds, however, the root is accented, as ut-pat-a- (AV.) 'portent', a-s'res-a- (AV.) 'plague'; and in some others (mostly agent nouns)

the prefix: d-bhag-a- ^s\i3Jm^, prdti-ves-a- 'neighbour', vy-os-a- {AN.) 'burning', sdm-kas-a- (AV.) 'appearance'.

3. The suffix -ata is always accented on the final syllable; e. g. dars'- atd- 'visible', pac-atd- 'cooked', yaj-atd- 'to be adored'. 4. Of the participial suffixes -at and -ani the former is never accented when the sense is verbal; e. g. ddd-at- 'giving', dss-at- 'worshipping'. A few old participles, however, which have become substantives, have shifted the accent to the suffix: vah-dt- 'stream', vegh-dt- (AV. VS.) 'barren cow', vagh-dt-

'sacrificer', srav-dt- 'stream', sasc-dt- 'pursuer'. The suffix -ant is accented in the present participle of the second (450) and sixth (429) classes and of the denominative (562), e.g. ad-dnt-, tud-dnt-, aghay-dni-; in the future (537), e. g. dasy-dni- (AV.); in the root aorist, e. g. bhid-dnt- and sometimes in the fl-aorist, e. g. vrdh-dnt-; also in the old present participles which have become adjectives, rh-dnt- 'weak', brh-dnt- 'great', and (with lengthened vowel) mah- dnt- 'great'.

5. The suffix -an is generally accented; e. g. uks-dn- m. 'bull', ud-dn- n.

'water'. The radical syllable is, however, not infrequently accented; e. g. rdj-an- m. 'king', udh-an- n. 'udder'.

6. Stems formed with -ana predominantly accent the root; e. g. kdr-ana-

n. 'act', cod-ana- (AV.) 'impelling'. The final syllable is, however, accented fairly often; e. g. kar-and- 'active', kros-and- 'yelling', ksay-and- (VS.) 'habitable', tvar-and- (AV.) 'hastening', roc-and- 'shining' (AV.), n. 'light', svap-and- (VS.) 'sleepy'. The penultimate is also accented in several words: the substantives

I The SB., however, accents both particles; ^ Cp. WmxNEY 1147 g. I cp. Leumann, KZ. 31, 22. 3 Cp. Whitney 1148; Lindner I p. 34. III. Accent. Accentuation of Nominal Stems. 83

kir-dna- m. 'dust', krp-dna- n. 'misery' (but krp-and- 'miserable' AV.), dams- dna- n. 'great deed', vrj-dna- n. 'enclosure', ves-dna- n. 'service'; and the adjectives tur-dij.a- -hastening', doh-dna- 'milking', bhand-dna- (VS. TS.) 'rejoicing', man-dna- 'considerate', mand-dna- 'joyful', saks-dna- 'overcoming'.

When the stem is compounded with a verbal prefix, the root is nearly always accented; e.g. sam-gdmana- 'gathering together'; but the final syllable is accented in vi-caksand- 'conspicuous', upari-sayand- (AV.) 'couch'. 7. The suffix -ana^ whether forming the feminine of adjectives in -ana or f action nouns, is always accented either on the penultimate or the final syllable; e. g. tur-dm- 'speeding', spand^ana- (AV.) 'kicking'; arh-dna- 'merit', jar-and- 'old age'. The word pft-ana- 'fight' is irregularly accented on the radical syllable. 8. The suffix -an/ is always accented, either on the final or the pen- ultimate syllable; e. g. dyot-ani- 'brilliance'; as-dni- 'missile'. g. The suffix -am being the feminine form of action and agent nouns in -ana, is similarly accented; e. g. pis-ani- (AV.) 'beautiful' {pe's-ana-). The accent is, however, sometimes shifted to the final syllable; e. g. tap-ani- 'heat' {idp-ana-).

10. Stems formed with the suffix -as accent the root if they are action

nouns, but the suffix if they are agent nouns; e. g. dp-as- n. 'work', but ap-ds- 'active'. There are also some masc. substantives with the accent on the suffix; e. g. raks-ds- m. beside rdks-as- n. 'demon'. 11. The suffix -a, forming action nouns from roots and secondary con-

jugation stems, is invariably' accented; e. g. nind-a- (AV.) 'blame'; jigis-d- 'desire to win'; gamay-d- (AV.) 'causing to go'; asvay-A- 'desire for horses'. 12. The suffix -ana^ forming middle participles, is normally accented on

the final syllable; e. g. ad-and- 'eating'. Reduplicated stems, however, regularly accent the first syllable; e. g. dad-ana- 'giving', johuv-ana- 'invoking'. A few others accent the root; e. g. cit-ana- (AV.) 'shining', dyut-ana- (RV'.) 'beaming' (beside the usual dyut-and-Y. There are also a few adjectives and substantives ending in -ana in which the primary character of the suffix or the derivation of the word is doubtful. These also accent the first syllable; e. g. vdsav-ana-

'possessing wealth', pdrs-ana- m. 'abyss' J. 13. No general rule can be stated regarding the suffix -i, either the suffix or the root being accented with about equal frequency; e. g. aj-i- 'race', grah-i- 'seizure'. Action nouns used as infinitives, however, regularly accent the suffix; e. g. drs-dye 'to see'. Reduplicated derivatives tend to accent the initial syllable; e.g. cdkr-i- 'active'; while stems compounded with a preposition usually accent the final syllable; e. g. para-dad-i- 'delivering over'. 14. Stems formed with the superlative suffix -istha regularly accent the

root; e. g. ydj-istha- 'sacrificing best'. The only exceptions are jyesthd- when meaning 'eldest' (but jyistha- 'greatest') and kan-isthd- 'youngest' (but kdn- istha- 'smallest', TS. B). When the stem is compounded with a preposition

tiie latter is accented; e. g. a-gam-istha- 'coming best'. 15. The suffix -is is nearly always accented; e. g. arc-is- 'flame'. The exceptions are am-is- 'raw flesh', j-j^V-w- 'light', and vydth-is- 'course' (?). 16. The few action and agent nouns formed with the suffix -r, are accented either on the root or the suffix; e. g. deh-i- 'rampart', idc-i- 'power'.

1 If jahgha- 'leg' is formed with this 3 See below, Nominal stem formation, suffix, it is the only exception. under -ana- (130). 2 See Lindner p. 54, top. 84 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

17. Stems formed with the comparative suffix -lyams invariably accent

the root; e. g. jdv-iyams- 'swifter'. When the stem is compounded with a preposition the latter is accented; e. g. prdti-cyav-Tyains- 'pressing closer against'.

18. The suffix -u is usually accented; e. g. ur-u- 'wide', pad-i'i- m. 'foot'.

The radical syllable is, however, not infrequently accented; e.g. /'a'/5-«- 'speeding',

ds-u- m. 'life'. The suffix is regularly accented in adjectives formed from desiderative, causative, and denominative stems; e. g. dips-u- 'wishing to harm', bhavay-u- 'cherishing', aghay-u- 'malignant'. 19. Substantives formed with the suffix -us regularly accent the root

(excepting jan-us- 'birth'); e. g. dhdn-us- 'bow'. But a few adjectives which are never used as substantives accent the suffix; e. g. jay-us- 'victorious', but tdp-us- both 'hot' and 'heat'.

20. The suffix -u forming independent feminine substantives is regularly accented; as cam-a- 'dish', vadh-ii- 'bride'.

21. When the suffix -ia forms past passive participles it is invariably

accented; e. g. ja-td- 'born', raks-i-td- 'protected'. But a few ordinary nouns formed with this suffix accent the radical syllable: e-ta- 'variegated'; m.: gdr-ta-

'car-seat', mdr-ta- 'mortal', vd-ta- 'wind', hds-ta- 'hand'; n. : ds-ta- 'home', ndk-ta- 'night'. 22. Stems formed with the suffix -tar generally accent the root when

the meaning is participial, but the suffix when it is purely nominal; e. g. dd-tar- 'giving' (with ace), but da-tdr- 'giver'. 23. Stems formed with the suffix -ii accent the root more frequently

than the suffix; e. g. is-ti- 'offering', ksl-ti- (AV.) 'destruction', dhii-ii- m. 'shaker',

but is-ti- 'desire', ksi-ti- 'abode', jiia-ti- m. 'relative', ra-ti- 'gift'. Reduplicated

derivatives seem to have accented either the first syllable or the suffix; e. g. didhi-ti- 'devotion' and carkr-ti- 'fame'. When these stems are compounded with prepositions, the latter are nearly always accented; e. g. d-hu-ti- 'offering'; the only exceptions are a-sak-ti- 'pursuit', a-su-ti- 'brew' and 'enlivening', and

abhi-s-ti- m. 'helper' beside abhi-s-ti- f. 'help'. 24. Derivatives formed with the suffix -iu, with some half dozen exceptions, accent the root (invariably when they are used as infinitives); e. g. tdn-tu- 'thread', but ak-tu- 'ray'.

25. The suffix -tnu is always accented ; e. g. ha-tni'c- 'deadly', jigha-tnu- 'harming'. 26. Derivatives formed with the suffix -tra generally accent the root; e. g. indn-tra- 'prayer', but ksa-trd- 'dominion'. 27. Gerundives formed with the suffix -iva regularly accent the root; e. g. kdr-tva- 'to be made', vdk-tva- 'to be said', bhdv-i-tva- 'future'. 28. Derivatives formed with the suffix -iha generally accent the latter; e. g. uh-thd- n. 'saying'. Sometimes, however, the root is accented; e. g. dr-tka- 'goal'. When the suffix is added with the connecting vowel -a-, the latter is generally accented; e. g. uc-d-tha- n. 'praise'.

29. The suffix -na when forming past passive participles is invariably accented; e. g. bhin-nd- 'split'. When forming ordinary nouns, whether adjectives or masc. substantives, it is usually accented; e. g. r-nd- 'guilty', ghr-nd- m. 'heat'; but a few masculines accent the root, as kdr-rm- 'ear', vdr-na- 'colour', svdp-?ta- 'sleep'. Neuters (except su-nd- 'welfare') and feminines {-no) accent the root; e. g. dn-na-'^ 'food', tf-na- 'grass', tfs-na- 'thirst'.

I Originally a past participle of ad- 'eat'. )

III. Accent. Accentuation of Nominal Stems. 85

30. Derivatives jformed with -ni accent either the root or the suffix; e. gi yo-ni- m. 'receptacle', but ag-ni- m. 'fire'. 31. The suffix -nu is almost invariably accented; e. g. vag-nu- 'sound'. An exception is vis-nu-'', N. of god. 32. Derivatives formed with the suffix -ma accent the suffix more than twice as often as the root; e. g. tig-ma- 'sharp', ghar-md- 'heat', dhu-md- 'smoke', but n-tna- 'friend', s6-ma- 'Soma'. 33. Derivatives formed with -man regularly accent the root in neuter substantives; e. g. kdr-man- 'action', jdn-man- 'birth', nd-man- 'name'. There are, however, several masculine agent nouns which accent the suffix; e. g. dar-mdn- 'breaker'. In several instances the accent varies in the same word according to the gender and meaning; e. g. brdh-man- n. 'prayer', brah-mdn- m. 'one who prays'; sdd-man- n. 'seat', sad-mdn- m. 'sitter'. These stems when compounded with prepositions nearly always accent the latter; e.g. prd-bharman- n. 'presentation'. 34. The participial suffix -mana is never accented except in the anomalous perfect participle sasr-mand- (RV'.) = sasr-and- 'speeding'. The accent of these derivatives is regularly on the same syllable as in the tense- stem to which the suffix is added; e. g. ydja-mana- 'sacrificing', icchd-mana- 'desiring', idhyd-mana- 'being kindled', yaksyd-mana- 'about to sacrifice'. 35. Gerundives formed with the suffix -ya invariably accent the root; e. g. hdv-ya- 'to be invoked'. 36. The suffix -ra is usually accented; &. g. ak-rd- xa.. 'banner', rud-rd-, m. N. of a god, abh-rd- n. 'cloud'. The root is, however, accented in a good many words; e. g. gfdh-ra- 'greedy', dj-ra- m. 'field', md-ra-, N. of a god, dg-ra- n. 'point'. 37. Derivatives formed with the suffix -ri accent the root oftener than the suffix; e. g. bha-ri- 'abundant', but also su-ri- m. 'patron'. 38. Derivatives formed with the suffix -va accent the suffix rather oftener than the root; e. g. rk-vd- 'praising', but also fbh-va- 'skilful'. 39. The root is regularly accented in derivatives formed with the suffix -van; e. g. kr-t-van- 'active', pdt-van- 'flying', ydj-van- 'sacrificing'. This is the case even when the stem is compounded with a preposition; e. g. vi-mfg-van- (AV.) 'cleansing'. 40. The suffixes -vana^ -vanu, -vani are always accented, the first two on the final,' the last on the initial syllable; e. g. vag-vand- 'talkative', vag-vam'i- m. 'noise', bhur-vdni- 'restless'. 41. Derivatives formed with the suffix -vara chiefly accent the final syllable when they are masc. nouns, but the root when they are neuter n. substantives; e.g. zV-z/am- 'going', fj-'-waw- (AV.) 'able', but /^aV-z/rtr^?- 'deed',

altindischen Sprache, Amsterdam 1898; cp. I This word may, however, be differently 427 'crossing the derived; possibly vi-snu- 'der in die Weite Bloomfield, AJPh. 17, f., world)'. strebende', according to Uhlenbeck, Kurz- back (of the gefasstes etymologisches Wortefbuch der ,

86 I. Allgemeines UND Sprache . 4. Vedic Grammar.

44. Derivatives formed with the suffix -sa sometimes accent the root, sometimes the suffix; e. g. grt-sa- 'adroit', ut-sa- m. 'fountain', but prk-sd- 'dappled', ghram-sd- m. 'sun's heat'. 45. The suffix -snu is always accented; e. g. ji-sim- Victorious', vrdh-a- snu- 'joyful', car-i-snu- 'wandering', ni-sat-snu- 'sitting down', tapay-i-snu- 'tormenting', abhi-socay-i-snu- (AV.) 'causing torments'. B. In secondary derivation five groups of stems may be distinguished with regard to accentuation : a. those which accent the suffix, being formed with -ayand, -dyf, -dyya, -in, -iya, -ma, -iya, -mi, -inya, -td, -tav-ya, -tvd, -tvd-ta, -tvand, -md, -mdya, -min, -mnd, -yin, -vd, -vat, -vald, -vin; b. those in which the suffix is not accented, being formed with -taya, -tara, -ta, -tat, -tati, -tya, -vya; c. those in which only the first syllable is accented, being formed with -i and -ni; d. those in which either the first or the last syllable is accented, being formed by means of Vrddhi with the suffixes -eya, -a or -na (the last two also without Vrddhi); e. those in which the accent is sometimes on the suffix, and sometimes on one or other syllable of the primitive stem, being formed with the suffixes -a, -ani, -ima, -z, -ka, -tana or -tna, -tama, -tha, -bha, -mant, -ya, -ra, -la, -van, -vant, -vaya, -sa. The following is a detailed account of the accent in derivatives formed with the above secondary suffixes in their alphabetical order.

1. Stems formed with the suffix -a and Vrddhi of the first syllable from primitive stems ending in -a are predominantly accented on the final syllable. This is, however, mostly the case when the primitive is accented on any syllable other than the last; e. g. amitrd- 'hostile' from amitra- 'foe', narasamsd- 'belonging to Nara-samsa', saucadrathd-, patronymic from sucdd-ratha- 'having a shining car', pavamand- 'relating to the clear-flowing (pdvamana-) Soma'. In several instances, however, the primitive stem is also oxytone, e. g. kauHkd- 'belonging to Kusika'. On the other hand, stems formed with Vrddhi sometimes accent the first syllable, when the primitive is otherwise accented; e. g. mdd/iyamdina- 'belonging to midday' {madhydin-dina-), sdubhaga- n. 'luck' from su-bhdga- 'lucky', vAdhryasva- 'descendant of Vadhryasva'. The derivative ddivodasa- 'belonging to Divodasa' is, however, formed from a stem similarly accented (divo-dasa-). A similar rule prevails in the accentuation of stems derived from other primitives by means of the suffix -a and Vrddhi of the first syllable; e. g. ayas-d- 'made of metal' (dyas-), saumanas-d- 'benevolence' from su-mdnas-

' well-disposed'; also sometimes from stems similarly accented, as paidv-d- 'belonging to Pedu'. On the other hand, the first syllable is accented in derivatives from primitives mostly accented on the last; e. g. parthiva- 'earthly' from prthivi- 'earth', maghona- 'belonging to the bountiful one' {maghdvan-); but sometimes also from stems similarly accented, as nahus-a- 'neighbouring' from ndhus- 'neighbour'. The accentuation is similar when the secondary -a is added without Vrddhi; e. g. parus-d- 'knotty' from pdrus- 'knot', but hdrit-a- 'fallow' from harit-. 2. The suffix -a forming feminines to masculines in -a retains the accent on the same syllable as in the masculine; e. g. priyd- beside priyd- 'dear'. 3. Stems formed with the somewhat rare suffix -arii accent one of the last three syllables; t. g. - 'wife oflndra', mudgalam- 'viiit oi yiAAgaXaJ purukutsarii- 'wife of Purukiitsa', usTndratn- 'queen of the UsTnaras'.

4. The only example of the patronymic suffix -a/ana in the RV. kanv-ayana- 'descendant of Kanva' is unaccented (occurring in the voc. only); the final syllable seems to have been accented \\iAgm%\yj daks-ayand- III. Accent. Accentuation of Nominal Stems. 87

(VS. AV.) 'son of Daksa', and the fem. ramayani- (AV.) 'daughter of the Black one'. The derivative uksanyayana-, N. of a man, is unique both in accentuation and absence of Vrddhi. 5. The suffix -ayi occurs accented on the first syllable only in agn-Ayi- 'wife of Agni'; vrsakap-ayi- (RV.) 'wife of Vrsakapi', occurring in the voc. only, is unaccented.

6. The suffix -ayya- forming gerundival adjectives is always accented on its first syllable; e. g. pan-Ayya- 'to be admired'. 7. Derivatives formed with the suffix -/ and Vrddhi, being almost exclusively patronymics, always accent the first syllable; thus sgnives-i- 'son of ', pdurukuts-i- 'descendant of Purukutsa', prdtardan-i- 'descendant of Pratardana', prahrad-i- (AV.) 'son of Prahrada', sdmvaran-i- 'descendant of Samvarana'. Similarly formed and accented is sarath-i- 'charioteer' (from sa-rdtha-m 'on the same chariot'). Two other words, formed without Vrddhi, take the secondary -i: tdpus-i- 'burning' {tdptis- 'heat') and, accented on the final syllable, sucant-i-, N. of a man.

8. The very frequent suffix -in forming possessive adjectives is always

accented; e. g. asv-in- 'possessing horses', dhan-in- 'wealthy'; manis-in- 'wise'; abhimat-in- 'insidious'. The adjective sak-in- 'powerful' occurs once accented

on the first syllable: sAk-T (i. 51*); the accentuation of this form and of the two nominatives (each occurring once) ir-i 'violent' and sdr-i 'speeding' is perhaps due to error. 9. The accentuation of the suffix -ima^ which is attached to three stems in -tra- and to one in -ra, varies: khanitr-ima- 'made by digging', krtr-ima- 'artificial', putr-ima- (AV.) 'purified'; agr-imd- 'foremost'.

10. The suffix -iya is regularly accented either on its first or its second

syllable; e. g. abhr-iya- and abhr-iyd- 'derived from the clouds' {abhrd-), ksatr-iya- 'having authority' {ksatrd-), amitr-iya- 'inimical' iamitra- 'foe'); agr- iyd- 'foremost', indr-iyd- 'belonging to Indra'. The only exceptions are ftv-iya- (AV.) 'being in season' {rtu-), beside rtv-iya-, and srotr-iya- (AV.) 'learned' (Jrotra- 'learning'). 11. Derivatives with the feminine suffix -T commonly accent the same

syllable as the corresponding masculines (except oxytones); e. g. bhdvant-i- 'being', m. bhdvant-. But the feminine in -i from masculines in -a that are not accented on the final syllable usually accents the -T (and follows the

radical t- declension) ; e. g. rath-i- 'charioteer' (m. f.) from rdtha- 'chariot'. The

-f is also accented when it forms the fem. of masc. oxytones in -u, e. g. p_rtAv-i- 'hxoa.d' {prih-u-)\ '\n.-ant, e.g. usat-i- 'desiring' (us-dnt-); in -tdr, e.g. avitr-i- 'protectress' {avi-tdr-}; in -anc taking Samprasarana, e. g. pratic-i- 'facing' (praty-dnc-). The fem. in -T from masc. oxytones in -a sometimes retains the accent on the suffix, e. g. devi- 'goddess' {devd- 'god'), but more

usually throws it back on the first syllable, e. g. drus-i- 'ruddy' (arum-). 12. The suffix -ina is generally accented on its first syllable, rarely on

its last; e. g. apac-ina- 'western', samvatsar-ina- 'annual'; pratic-ind- 'turned towards'. The suffix is unaccented only in mAk-Tna- (RV.) 'mine'. 13. The suffix -Tya is always accented on its first syllable; e. g. arjTk- lya- a kind of Soma vessel, ahavan-iya- (AV.) 'sacrificial fire', grhamedh-iya- 'relating to the domestic sacrifice', parvat-iya- (AV.) 'mountainous'. Similarly in the ordinals dvit-iya- 'second', trt-iya- 'third', tur-iya- 'fourth'. 14. The suffix -ena is accented on the final in its only occurrence in the feminine form satnidh-eni- 'relating to fuel' {samidh-). regularly 15. The suffix -e/J/a, nearly always forming gerundives, accents 88 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

its first syllable; e. g. drs-inya- 'worthy to be seen'. The only exception is vdr-enya- 'desirable'. Similarly accented are the ordinary adjectives vtr-enya- 'manly' (vird-) and lart-enya- 'famous' {kXrti- 'fame'). 16. Derivatives formed with the suffix -eya and Vrddhi accent the final syllable when they have a patronymic sense, but otherwise the first; e. g. ars-eyd- 'descendant of a seer' (fsi-), but pdurus-eya- 'relating to man' (Jiurusa-).

The analogy of the gerundive from roots ending in -a, which is formed with -eya (e. g. deya- 'to be given'), is followed by didrks-iya- 'worth seeing'

(didrksd-) and sabh-eya- 'fit for an assembly' {sabha-). 17. Derivatives formed with -ka are variously accented. Those which have a diminutive sense regularly accent the suffix; e. g. arbha-kd- 'small', kamna-kd-^ 'youth', kumara-kd- 'little boy'. Otherwise the accent sometimes remains on the same syllable as in the primitive; e. g. dnta-ka- 'making an end' {dnta-), yusmd-ka- 'your' {yusmd-') ; or it shifts to the suffix, e. g. anya-kd- 'other' (anyd-), sana-ka- 'old' (sdna-); or to the first syllable, e. g. riipa-ka- (AV.) 'having an assumed form' (rupd- 'form').

18. The rare suffix -ia is regularly accented: eka-td- (VS.) 'First', dvi-td-

'Second', tri-td- 'Third' as Proper Names, ava-td- 'well', muhur-td- 'moment'. 19. Derivatives formed with the suffix -tana or its syncopated form -ina are variously accented: nil-tana- and nti-tna- 'present', sana-tdna- (AV.) and sand-tna- (AV.) 'lasting', pra-tnd- 'ancient'.

20. The suffix -fama when forming superlatives is hardly ever accented^, the primitive nearly always retaining its original accent; e. g. tavds-tama-'^ 'very strong'. But when it forms ordinals the final syllable is accented; e. g. sata-tamd- 'hundredth'. 21. A few adjectives formed with -taya from numerals meaning 'consisting

of so many parts', accent the primitive : cdtus-taya- (AV.) 'fourfold', ddsa-taya- 'tenfold'.

22. The suffix -iara forming comparatives is hardly ever accented, the

primitive retaining its original accent; e. g. rathi-fara- 'better car-fighter'. An exception is vrtra-tdra- 'a worse Vrtra'. 23. Derivatives formed with -t& regularly accentuate the syllable preceding the suffix; e. g. a-go-ta- 'want of cows', devd-ta- 'divinity', purusd-ta- 'human nature'. The only exception is a-vira-ta- 'want of sons'. 24. Derivatives formed with -tail and -tat have the same accentuation

as those formed with -ta; e. g. a-ristd-tati- 'security', devd-tati- 'divinity', sdtn- tati- 'good fortune'. The accent is exceptional in dsta-tati- 'home' and ddksa- tati- (AV.) 'cleverness'.

25. The suffix -iya^ forming nouns from particles, is never accented: dpa-tya- n. 'offspring', amd-tya- 'companion', dvis-tya- 'manifest', ni-tya- 'own', nis-tya- 'foreign', sdnu-tya- 'secret'. When attached to the substantive ap-

' water' it is, however, accented: ap-tyd- and ap-tyd- 'watery'.

26. The suffix -iva is invariably accented; e. g. amrta-tvd- 'immortality', pati-tvd- 'matrimony'.

27. The very rare suffix -iva-td is accented on its first syllable: isita- tvdta- 'excitement', purusa-tvdta- 'human nature'.

28. The suffix -tvana is always accented on its final syllable; e. g. Jkavi- tvand- 'wisdom', pati-ivand- 'matrimony', sakhi-tvand- 'friendship'.

1 Accented kanlnaka- in the VS. The fem. tanid- 'highest', sasvat-tama- 'most frequent' in the RV. is kanmaka- but in the AV'. (with the ordinal accent). kanmika-. 3 It is shifted in mfdaydt-tama- 'showing '' Except puru-lama- 'very many' and ut- great compassion' {mrddyat-). Cp. below 89. ;

III. Accent. Accentuation of Nominal Stems. 89

29. The suffix -iha, forming ordinals from a few numerals and adjectives

of a cognate sense from pronominal stems, is nearly always accented: thus

cattir-thd-^ (AV.) 'fourth', sas-tM- (AV. VS.) -'sixth', kati-ihi- 'the how-maniest' but saptd-tha- 'seventh'. 30. The rare derivatives formed with the suffix -na are accented either on the first or the last syllable: strdi-na- 'feminine' {stri- 'woman'), visu-na- 'various'j hwt pura-nd-^ 'ancient', sama-nd- 'like'. 31. With the suffix -bha^ are formed the names of a few 'animals with

one exception accented on the final syllable: rsa-bhd- and vrsa-bhd- 'bull', garda-bhd- 'ass', sara-bhd- {KS[ . VS.) 'fabulous eight-legged animal'^ rasa-bha- 'ass'. This suffix also occurs once in the adjective sthula-bhd- (AV.) 'big'. 32. The suffix -ma is regularly accented, whether forming superlatives; t.g. adka-md- 'lowest', madhya-md- 'middle-most', or ordinals; e.g. asta-md- 'eighth'. An exception is dnta-ma-^ 'next'. 33. Derivatives formed with the suffix -mant retain the accent of the

primitive, unless the latter is oxytone, when the accent in the great majority

of instances (about three-fourths) is thrown forward on the suffix; e. g. osadhi- mant- (AV.) 'rich in herbs', asdni-mant- 'bearing the thunderbolt'; but agni- mdnt- 'having fire' iagni-). 34. The suffix -maya is always accented on the first syllable; e. g. ayas- mdya- 'made of metal', go-mdya- 'consisting of cows', saka-mdya- 'arising from excrement'. 35. The suffix -min is accented (like -in) in the only two derivatives formed with it: is-min- 'impetuous', and rg-min- 'jubilant with praise' {rc^. 36. The rare suffix -mna is always accented: dyu-mnd- 'brightness', nr-mnd- 'manliness', ni-mnd- 'depth', su-mnd- 'welfare'. 37. Derivatives formed with the suffix -ya and Vrddhi accent the initial or the final syllable with the same shift as appears in those formed with -a: the initial, when the primitive is accented on the final (or some- times a medial) syllable, but the final, when the primitive is accented on the initial (or sometimes a medial syllable); e. g. ddiv-ya- 'divine' {devd- 'god'), artvij-ya- 'office of priest' {rtvtj-), garhapat-ya- 'position of a householder' {grhd-pati-); but adit-yd- 'son of ', prajapat-yd- (AV.) 'relating to Prajapati'. In a very few instances the accent remains unchanged, as adhipat-ya- 'lord- ship' {adhi-pati- 'lord'), pdums-ya- 'manhness' {pt'ims- 'maif), vdis-ya- 'man of the third caste' {vis- 'settler'), srdisth-ya- (AV.) 'superiority' {sristha- 'best'); while in several instances it shifts from the final syllable to the suffix (instead of to the initial syllable); e. g. kav-yd- 'descendant of Kavi' (but kiv-ya- 'endowed with the qualities of a sage', kavi-). a. In derivatives formed without Vrddhi the accentuation is to some extent similar; thus a final accent shifts to the first syllable; e. g. in pitr-ya- 'belonging to the fathers' {pitf-), prdtijan-ya- 'adverse' {prati-jand- 'adversary' AV.); or from the first to the last; e. g. gram-yi- 'belonging to

the village' {grima-) ; or it remains on the first syllable ; e. g. dv-ya- 'belonging to sheep' (dvi-), gdv-ya- 'derived from cows' {go-); or it shifts from the final syllable to the suffix (instead of the first syllable); e. g. kav-yd- 'wise' {kavi-). But here the accent may also remain on or be shifted to a medial syllable; to e. g. svaraj-ya- 'autocracy' {svarij- 'sovereign'), visvddev-ya- 'belonging all gods' {visvd-deva-)\ hiranyd-ya- 'golden' {hiranya- 'gold'), avyd-ya- 'derived from sheep' (beside avya-ya-), gavyd-ya- 'derived from cows' (beside gdvya-).

I Cp. BB. 28, 318, bottom. ' Cp. Preli.witz, BB. 22, 74—114, on animal names in -bha. 3 But antamehhik (I. 165S). 90 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

But a peculiarity of the derivatives formed without Vrddhi is that the

majority of them have the Svarita accent on the suffix; e. g. rajan-ya- 'belonging to the royal class' (ryan-); dosan-ya- 'relating to the arm' {dosdn-); vayav-ya- 'belonging to Wind' {vayu-); -dicndubh-ya- (VS.) 'relating to a

drum' (dundubhl) ; budhn-ya- 'belonging to the bottom' {bud/ind-). The suffix thus accented also appears in the gerundive in -iav-ya- (twice found in the AV.) formed from an infinitive stem in -tu (585,4). 38. The rare suffix -yin is (like -in) always accented: atata-yin- (VS.) 'having one's bow drawn', dhanva-yln- (VS.) 'bearing a bow', mara-yin-, N. of a man, srka-yi?i- (VS.) 'having a spear', svadha-yin- (VS.) 'owning the Svadha'. 39. Derivatives formed with -ra having a comparative sense (chiefly from

prepositions) accent the initial syllable: ddha-ra-'\o^tx\ d^a-ra- ^\a.ter', dva-ra- 'lower'j vpa-ra- 'lower', dnta-ra-^ 'near' (anta- 'end'). Other nouns formed with the suffix are chiefly accented on the final syllable; e. g. a-srl-rd- 'ugly', dhum-rd- (VS.) 'dusky' {dhumd- 'smoke'), pamsu-rd- 'dusty, rath-i-rd- 'riding

in a chariot' ; but sometimes otherwise ; thus dgnidh-ra- 'belonging to the fire- kindler' {agnidh-), midh-i-ra- 'wise', karma-ra- 'smith'.

40. Derivatives formed with -la nearly always accent the suffix; e. g. a-sli-ld- (AV.) 'ugly', jlva-ld- (AV.) 'lively', bahu-ld- 'abundant', madhu-ld-

'sweet'; but tilvi-la- 'fertile', seva-la- (AV.) 'slimy', sihi-la- 'little child'.

41. The suffix -va is regularly accented: arna-vd- 'billowy', kesa-vd- (AV.) 'hairy', anji-vd- (AV.) 'slippery', santi-vd- (AV.) 'friendly', sraddhi-vd- 'credible'. 42. The fern, substantives formed from adverbs or prepositions with the suffix -vol always accent the final syllable: arva-vdt- 'proximity', a-vdt- (AV.) 'proximity', ud-vdt- 'height', ni-vdt- 'depth', para-vdt- 'distance', pra-vdt- 'height', sam-vdt- 'region'. 43. Derivatives formed with the suffix -van may have the accent on any syllable; e.g. dthar-van, 'fire-priest', zW/5a«-z'a«- 'possessed of fuel', fgha- van- 'violent'; rta-van- 'regular', maghd-van- 'bountiful'; aratX-vdn- 'hostile', srustT-vdn- 'obedient'. 44. Derivatives formed with -vant generally retain the original accent except in oxytone stems (if not ending in a or a), which as a rule throw it on the suffix; e. g. kesa-vant- 'hairy', putrd-vant- (VS.) 'having a son', prajd- vant- 'having offspring', dydvaprthivt-vant- 'connected with heaven and earth'; but agni-vdnt' 'having fire' {agni-), asan-vdnt {KSl^ 'having a mouth'. The accent is anomalously shifted in krsaiia-vant- 'decorated with pearls' (krsana-) and visu-vdnt- 'central' {vim-) 'in both directions'. 45. The very rare derivatives formed with the suffix -vaya accent either the suffix or the primitive: dru-vaya- (AV.) 'wooden dish' and cdtur- vaya- 'fourfold'. 46. Derivatives formed with the rare suffix -vala accent their final syllable: krsT-vald- 'peasant', nad-vald- (VS.) 'reed bed'.

47. The suffix -vin is always accented; e. g. namas-vin- 'reverential', yasas-vin- (AV.) 'beautiful', medha-vin- (AV.) 'wise', dArsad-vIn- 'bold'. 48. The very rare names of relationship formed with the suffix -vya accent the first syllable: bhrdtr-vya- (AV.) 'nephew'. 49. A few adjectives and substantives formed with the suffix -sa accent either the final or, less often, the first or second syllable: arva-sd- or

I This word may, however, be derived from antar- 'within', with BR. and WHITNEY 1209 i. in. Accent. Accentuation of Compounds. 91 drva-sa- 'hasting', eta-sd- ox ita-sa- 'variegated', babhlu-id- (VS. MS.) 'brownish', roma-sd- '\vwcf,yuva-sd- 'youthful', anku-sd- 'hook', turvd-s'a-, N. of a man.

Perhaps also kdsma-sa- (AV.) 'stupefaction' (?), and kald-sa- 'jar'.

2. Accentuation of Compounds.

AuFRECHT, De accentu compositorum Sanscriticorum, Bonn 1847. — Garbe, KZ. 23i 47° f- — Reuter, Die altindischen nominalcomposita, ihrer betonung nach unter- sucht, KZ. 31, 157 —232; 485 —612. — Wackernagel, Altindische Grammatik 21, P- 40—43, etc.

87. The rule as to the accentuation of compounds, stated in the most general way, is that iteratives, possessives, and governing compounds place the accent on the first member; determinatives and regularly formed copula- tives (with one accent) on the last member and to a large extent on its final syllable. Speaking generally the accent of a compound is that of one of its members. But some words always change their accent when compounded;

thus visva- 'all' regularly becomes vihd-, and in the later Sanihitas sdrva-

'all' sometimes becomes sarvd-. Other words when compounded change their accent in certain combinations only; thus some paroxytones become oxytone, as pfirva- 'prior' in purvd-citti- 'foreboding', pUrvd-pTti- 'precedence in drinking',

purvd-huti- 'first invocation'; nima- 'one' in nemd-dhiti- 'separation'; medha- 'sacrifice' in medhd-pati- 'lord of sacrifice', and medhd-sati- 'receiving the oblation'; vfsan- in vrsd-kapi-, N. of a monkey; on the other hand some oxytones throw back the accent, as khadi- 'bracelet' in khsdi-fiasta- 'having hands adorned with bracelets'; gnvA- 'neck' in tuvi-griva- 'powerful-necked'; vird- 'hero' in />««i:-z'zV'«- 'possessed of many men' and su-vira- 'heroic'; dhumd- 'smoke' in saka-dhuma- (AV.) 'smoke of cowdung'. An adjective compound may shift the accent from one member to the other if it becomes a substantive or a Proper Name; thus a-ksdra- 'im- perishable', d-ksara- 'speech'; su-krta- 'well done', su-krtd- n. 'good deed'; d-raya- 'niggardly', a-raya-, N. of a demon. 88. In iteratives, which may consist of repeated nouns, pronouns, adverbs, prepositions, or particles, the first member alone is accented, the two words being separated by Avagraha in the Pada text, like the members of other compounds. Examples are: dhar-ahar jayate tnasi-masi {:s..S2i) 'day after day he is born, month after month'; ydd-yad ydmi tdd d bhara (viii. 61^) 'bring to me whatever I ^.^C; yatha-yatha matdyah sdnti nrndm (x. in') 'as are the desi?es of men in each case'; adyddya svdh-iva indra trdsva pari ca nah (viii. 6i'0 '011 each to-day, on each to-morrow protect us, Indra, and in the future'. The prepositions which appear as iteratives are upa, para, 'forth prd, sdm; e. g. prd-pra pusnds tuvijatdsya sasyate mahitvdm (i. 138') and again the greatness of the mighty Pusan is praised''. The only verbal 11")'' iterative occurring is piba-piba (ir. 'drink again and again'. 89. Governing compounds always accent the first member when it is a man. the a verbal noun 3, as trasd-dasyu- 'terrifying the foe', N. of When its final syllable is invariably first member is a present or aorist participle, accented, whatever the original accentuation may have been, e. g. viddd-vasu- 'winning wealth', tardd-dvesas- 'overcoming {tdrat-) foes'.

2 a repeated verbal form is I In a few instances the repeated Otherwise stuhi siuhi words are not treated as a compound and not treated as an iterative, e. g. are both accenteid, as nu nu 'now, now', (vni. 13°). sik^a-nara- 'helping men'. ihcha (AV.) 'here, here', sam sdm (AV.). 3 Except ;

92 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

a. When the first member is a preposition, the accentuation is much the same as in possessives: either the first member is accented on its proper syllable, as abhi-dyii- 'directed to heaven'; or the last member on the final

syllable, but only when it ends in the compositional suffix -a, or when as a

simple word it is not accented on the final syllable; e.g. adhas-fad-d-%€\ag under the feet', anu-kamd- 'according to wish' {kSma-). The accentuation of

api-prana- (f. -f-) 'accompanying the breath' is quite exceptional. 90. A. Possessive compounds (Bahuvrlhis) normally accent the first member on the same syllable as the simple word, e. g. rdja-putra- 'having kings as sons' (but raja-putrd- 'son of a king'). Other examples are: dn-abhimlata-varna- 'whose colour is not dimmed', iddhdgni- 'whose fire is kindled', ind7'a-jyestha- 'having Indra as chief, indra-sakhi- 'having Indra as a friend', ghrtd-prstha- 'butter-backed', ridad-vatsa- 'having a bright calf,

sahdsra-pad' 'thousand-footed" Similarly when the first member is a pre- position, an ordinary adverb, or sahd- and (chiefly in the later Vedas) sa- in the sense of 'accompanied by'; e.g. nir-hasta- (AV.) 'handless', prd-mahas- 'having pre-eminent might', vi-grTva- 'wrynecked', visvdto-mukha- 'facing in all directions', sahd-vatsa- 'accompanied by her calf, sd-kama- ('accompanied by' =)

'fulfilling desires' (VS.), sd-cetas- 'inteUigent' ^.

a. The original accent of the first member is sometimes changed, i. The adjective vuva- 'air always, and (owing to its influence) saiva- 'all' sometimes in the later Sam- hitas, shift their accent to the final syllable; e. g. visvd-pesas- 'having all adornment', sarvd-Janman-^ (AV.), sm-va-suddha-vala- (VS.) 'having a completely white tail', sarvayus- (VS.) 'having all life"*. — 2. Present participles in several instances shift the accent to their final syllable; e. g. krandad-isti- 'having roaring [irdndai-) speed'^ dravad-aiva- 'having swift {lirdvat-'f steeds'. Other participles with this shift of accent are ai-cdt- and bhaiiddl- 'shining', rapsdt- 'swelling', svandt- 'resounding'. — 3. There are also a few

miscellaneous examples of shift of accent in the first member : abhisfi-dyumna- 'abounding in aid', jyott-ratha- 'whose car is light' (jyo/is-), dadrsand-pavi- 'whose felly is visible' [dddrsana-], avdkolba- (AV.) 'surrounded with Avaka plants' {dvakd-)\ cdiur-ahga- 'four- membered' [caii'ir-], khddi-hasta- 'having hands adorned with bracelets' [khadi-]. B. About one eighth of the total number of Bahuvrlhis accent the second member, and in the majority of instances on the final syllable.

a. This accentuation is common when the first member is a dissyllabic adjective ending in / or u. It is invariable in the RV. after the very frequent puru- 'much' and the less frequent krdhi'i- 'shortened', bahu- 'much', siti- 'white'; e. g. puru-putrd- 'having many sons', puru-vdra- 'having many treasures', krdhu-kdrna- 'having short ears', bahv-annd-^ 'having much food' {anna-), siti-pdd- 'white-footed'. Examples of this accentuation after other adjectives ending in i and u are: asu-hesas- 'having swift steeds', teru-ksdya- 'having a wide abode', rju-krdtu- 'whose works are right', tuvi-dyumnd- 'having great glory', trsu-cydvas- 'moving greedily', prthu-pdksas- 'broad-flanked', vibhu- krdtu- 'having great strength', vilu-pdni- 'strong-hoofed', hiri-siprd- 'golden- cheeked' ?. In the later Samhitas there is an increasing tendency to follow

1 When another adjective or an adverb sdrva- in the AV., where sdrva- as first precedes the first member, it has the accent member is common. e. g. eka-sUi-pad- (VS. TS.) 'having one foot 4 sdrva- shows this shift of accent in the white'; cp. Wackernagel 2', p. 291. RV. in the adverb sarvd-ias 'from all sides' 2 There are, however, a few exceptions and in the derivative sarvd-tati- 'totality'. in which the final member is accented, as 5 Here the accent may be affected by vi-Hkhd- 'hairless' (but vi-Hkha- AV.), puro- that of the adverb dravdt 'swiftly'. rathd- 'whose car is foremost', sa-prdthas- 'ex- 6 After iahu- the final syllable is always tensive', sdngd- (AV.) 'together with the limbs'. accented, even in the later Sainhitas. 3 This is the only example (occurring beside ' Both accentuations occur in prthti- vihjd-janman-) of this shift of accent in iudhnd- and p^thit-budhna- 'broad-based'. III. Accent. Accentuation of Compounds. 93

the general rule; e. g. puru-naman- (AV.) 'many-named', sUi-kakud- 'having a white hump', and siti-bhasad- 'having white buttocks' (TS. v. 6. 14"). b. Bahuvrihis beginning with dvi- and tri- generally accent the second member; e. g. dvi-pdd- 'two-footed', dvi-dhAra- 'forming two streams', tri-tdntu- 'having three webs', tri-ndbhi- 'having three naves', tri-vandhurd- 'three-seated' ^. The only exceptions to this rule in the RV. are dvi-savas- 'having twofold might', try-ambaka- 'having three mothers' and try-asir- 'having three products of milk'. The later Sainhitas accent dvi- and tri- in new Bahuvrihis as often as not. In a few possessives beginning with other numerals the second member is accented on the last syllable, e. g. catur-aksd- 'four-eyed'^. c. Possessives beginning with the negative prefix a- or an- almost invariably accent the final syllable irrespectively of the original accent of the second member (doubtless in order to distinguish them clearly from deter- minatives); e. g. a-ddnt- 'toothless', a-phald- 'unfruitful' {pkdla-), a-bald- 'not possessing strength' {bdla-). A very few accent the penultimate; a-bhratr-^ (AV.) 'brotherless', a-vira- 'childless', a-se'sas- 'without offspring'. On the other hand a good many (though only a small proportion of the whole) accent the prefix (hke determinatives), especially when the second member is a noun formed with the suffix -ti; e. g.'* d-gu- 'kineless', d-jnas- 'kinless', d-dyu- 'not burning', dn-api- 'kinless', d-prajas- (AV.) 'childless';, d-mrtyu- 'deathless', d-hri-

'bold', d-ksiti- 'imperishable' 5.

d. Possessives beginning with dus-^ 'ill' or su- 'well' regularly accent the

second member, usually on the original syllable; e. g. dur-mdnman- 'ill disposed'^

su-bhdga- 'well endowed'. There is, however, a tendency to throw the accent forward on the final syllable; e. g. sv-aiiguri- 'fair-fingered' {angiiri-), su-phala- (AV.) 'fruitful', su-bandhu- (AV.)? 'closely related'*. On the other hand, the accent is in a few instances shifted from the final to the penultimate syllable, as su-vira- 'rich in heroes' ivtrd-), and su-gdndhi- 'sweet-smelling' beside su- gandhi- (from gandhd- 'smell') 5. gi. Determinatives as a rule accent the last member, and pre- vailingly on the final syllable. A. I. In the descriptive type, that is, those in which a substantive is described by an adjective or an appositional substantive ^Karmadharaya) and those in which a verbal noun is described by an adverbial word, the accent

is on the final syllable; e. g. krsna-sakuna- (AV.) 'black bird', maha-dkand- 'great spoil', ajnata-yaksmd- 'unknown disease', yavayat-sakhd- 'a protecting friend', raja-yaksmd- ('king' =) 'royal disease"", surya-svit- 'sun-bright'; /z^ra-^/r- 'going before', prathama-ja- 'first-born', pratar-yuj-'^^ 'early yoked', svayam-bhii-

'self- existent', dus-kft- 'acting wickedly', su-pra-tiir-" 'victorious', a-gharin- (AV.) 'not anointing', a-cit- 'senseless', a-jarayu-'^^ 'not aging', a-jicr- 'unaging'.

1 But astorvandhura- 'having eight car- 8 For other examples see Wackernagel seats'. 21, p. 294, bottom. 2 Cp. Whitney 1300 c. 9 Op. cit. 2', p. 295 7, note. '° 3 But in the RV. with the usual accen- Exceptions, when the first member is tuation a-bhratf-. a noun, are all compounds formed with 4 For many other examples see Wacker- vihia- 'all', as visvd-manusa- 'every man', 'midday', vrsa-kapl- NAGEL 2', 114 note (p. 293). also madhydm-dina- 'male original 5 The only possessive of this kind in ape', in all of which the accent of which the second member ends in -ti and the first member is shifted. 11 accents the final syllable seems to be ddhri-gu- 'irresistible' and sadhd-stha- a-gavyuti- 'pastureless'. 'standing together', are exceptions. 6 The only exception in the case of dus- 12 sv-d-vrj' 'easy to acquire' is an ex- is dur-oHr- 'ill-mixed'. ception. 13 d-mavisnu- 7 The RV. retains the original accent, But 'immoveable'. su-phdla-, su-bandhu-. 94 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

a-yoddhf- 'not fighting', a-rajin- 'not shining', a-pra-mrs-ya-'^ 'indestructible', a-budh-ya- 'not to be wakened', an-aty-ud-yd- (AV.) 'unspeakable', an-adhrs-ya-

'unassailable', an-amayi-tnu- 'not making ill'. a. When, however, the second member ends in -van, -man or -i, or has the form of a gerundive used as a neuter substantive, the penultimate (radical) syllable is accented; e. g. raghu-pdtvan- 'swift-flying', puro-ydvan-'^ 'going in front'; su-tdrman- 'crossing well', vilu-pdtman- 'flying mightily', raghu- ydman- 'going swiftly', su-vd/iman- 'driving well', dur-grbhi- 'hard to hold', rju-vdni 'striving forward', tuvi-svdni- 'roaring rm^t^f purva-pdyya- 2xA pUrva- , peya- n. 'precedence in drinking', saha-seyya- n. 'act of lying together', amutra- bhaya-'^ (VS.) n. 'state of being in the other world'.

2. The first member is, however, accented under certain conditions.

a. It is generally accented if it is an adverbial word and the last member is a past participle in -ta or -««+ or a verbal noun in -ti; e. g. ddmsu-juta-

'speeding wondrously', dur-hita- 'faring ill', sdna-sruta-^ 'famed from of old'; puro-hiti- 'priestly ministration', sadhd-stuti- 'joint praise'. — b. The privative particle a- or an- when compounded with a participle ^ adjective, or substantive is nearly always accented; e. g. dn-adant-^ 'not eating', d-ditsant- 'not wishing to give', d-manyamana- 'not thinking', d-kimsana- 'not injuring', d-vidvams- 'not knowing', d-krta-^ 'not done'; d-kr-a-'^ 'inactive', d-susv-i- 'not pressing Soma', d-tandra- 'unwearied', d-kumara-'^° 'not a child'; d-citii- 'thought'

lessness'. The particle is regularly accented when it negatives a compound;

e. g. d-dus-krt- 'not doing ill', dn-aiva-da- 'not giving a horse', d-paicad-daghvan- 'not remaining behind'; d-punar-diyamana-^^ (AV.) 'not being given back', dn-agni-dagdha- 'not burnt with fire', dn-abhi-sasta- '^ 'blameless'. B. I. Dependent determinatives as a rule accent the second member and that mostly on the last syllable, even if the simple word is not an oxytone.

a. When the second member is a root 'J, a verbal noun in -a, an ordinary substantive (without verbal sense), or an adjective ending in -z«'+, the final

1 This is the regular accent of the tives a-rundhai-i- (AV.) a name, and a-jdrant-T- gerundive with the negative prefix, which (VS.) 'unaging'. is, however, accented in some half dozen in- 8 Exceptions are a citta-, a-dfsfa-, a-mfta-,

stances : d-gohya-^ d-jesya-, d-dabhya-, d-nedya-^ a-yida- n. 'myriad' but (AV.) d-ynta- 'undisturb- d-yahhya- (AV.) and a ghnya- beside a-ghnyd-. ed', a-turta- (beside d-turta-'), a-bhinnd- (AV.) Two of these compounds in the AV. retain beside d-bhinna-. the Svarita of the simple gerundive: an- 9 There are also some verbal derivatives ativyddhya- and an-adharsya-. in -a which accent the second member; 2 saiyd-viadvan- 'truly rejoicing' is an ex- e. g. a-ksdr-a- 'imperishable', a-jdr-a 'un- ception. aging', a-ddbh-a- 'not-deceiving', a-trp-d- 3 sadhd-sliUya- n. 'joint praise', is an ex- 'dissatisfied'j a-vadhd- 'inviolable', a-vrdh-d- ception. 'not furthering', an-avrask-d (AV.) 'not falling 4 Here the adverb is treated like a pre- off'; cp. Whitney 1283— 88. position compounded with a past participle. 'o There are also several ordinary nouns 5 There are a good many exceptions in which are accented as second member; e. g. which the original accent of the past parti- a-citrd- 'colourless', a-mitra- 'enemy', -a-vTra- ciple remains on the final syllable; e. g. 'unmanly'. tuvi-jdtd- 'mightily born', dus-krtd- 'ill done'^ I' But a ni-pddyamdna- (AV.) 'not going to su-jatd- (beside su-jdta-). This is the regular rest' where RV. has d-ni-padyatndna. accentuation when the first member \spuru-; 12 But an-d-iastd- (KV'.) 'not praised', e. g. puru-sluld- 'much praised'. a-pra-sastd- beside d-pra-sasta- 'not praised', 6 Not, however, when the second member ^3 There are a few exceptions when deri-

is a gerundive, a root, or a noun with verbal vation from a. root is not clear, as in 6sa- meaning ending in -yu, -tnu, -snu, -in, -ir-; dhi- 'plant'; otherwise -dhi from dhd- 'put' see examples above (A l). is regularly accented; c. g. isu-dhi 'quiver'. 7 But a-sascdnt- iDeside dsascant- 'not '4 This suffix being invariably accented in ceasing', a-coddnt- (v. 442) and as substan- the simple word (_86 B. 8). III. Accent. Accentuation of Compounds. 95

syllable is regularly accented; e. g. gotra-bhid- 'opening the cowpens', ghrta-

of water'j go-saphd- (VS.) 'cow's hoof, jiva-lokd- 'wo'rld"of the living', indra- sena- 'Indra's missile' {sSna-), krmajind- {KSl. TS.) 'hide {ajina-) of the black antelope', deva-kom-'- (AV.) 'cask {kosa-) of the gods', deua-mand-i 'abode {mana-) of the gods'; uktha-sams-in- 'uttering praise', bhadra-vad-in- 'uttering auspicious cries'. a. The word pati- 'lord' follows this rule in only a few compounds occurring in the later Samhitas; thus in the AV. : apsard-pati- 'lord of the Apsarases', vraja-pati- 'lord of a troop' {vraja-pati-,^ RV.); in the VS.: amhasas-pati- 'lord of perplexity', upa-pati- 'paramour', edidhisuh-paii- 'husband of a younger sister', nadl-pati- 'lord of rivers' ; in the MS.: ahar-pati- 'lord of day', cit-pati- 'lord of thought', vdk-pati- 'lord of speech'. In a few determinatives pdti- retains its own accent as second member, as nr-pdti- 'lord of rayi-pati- men', 'lord of wealth', ms-pdti- 'lord of the tribe', also the f. in vasu-patnT- 'mistress of wealth', vis-pdtm-i, 'mistress of the tribe'; in the VS. ahar-pdli-, cit-pdti-, vak-pdti-; in the AV. rtupdti- 'lord of proper seasons', pasu-pdti- 'lord of animals' (VS.), pustirpdti- 'lord of welfare', bhuta-pdti- 'lord of beings', slha-pdti-i 'governor'. In compounds with pdti-, however, the first member is usually accented, there being 22 cases in the RV., besides 10 with/a/m-; c. g. grhd-pati- 'lord of the house', go-pati- 'lord of kine', pdsu-pati- 'lord of creatures', medhd-pati-^ 'lord of animal ^ sacrifice' iniedha-), vdsu-pati- 'lord of wealth', vaja-pati- 'lord of booty', svdr-pati- 7 'lord of light' ; grhd-patrii- 'mistress of the house', devd-patnl- 'wife of a god', vaja-patm- 'queen of booty'. In the AV., of 15 new masculines ending in -pati- more than half accent the first member as do all the

8 new ones ending in patnT-; e. g. dtithi-pati- 'entertainer of a. guest'. In the other Samhitas also occur: ksatrd-pati- (VS.) 'lord of dominions', bhuva-pati- (VS.) 'lord of the atmosphere', bhuvana-pati- (VS. TS.) 'lord of beings', bhu-pati- (TS.) 'lord of the world',

samvesd-pati- (VS.) 'lord of rest', visnu-paini- (VS. TS.) 'Visnu's wife' 8.

b. Determinatives which have as their second member verbal nouns in -ana'^, adjectives in -i and -van, as well as action nouns in -ya, regularly accent the radical syllable of the second member; e. g. deva-mdd-ana- 'exhilarating the gods', kesa-vdrdh-ana-'^° 'causing the hair to grow'; pathi-rdks-i- 'protecting the road'; soma-pa-van- 'somadrinking', talpa-si-van- 'lying on the couch', pratar-i-t-van-^^ 'coming early'; ahi-hdt-ya- 'slaughter of the dragon', deva- hu-ya- 'invocation of the gods', mantra-sru-t-ya- n. 'listening to counsel', vrtra- tar-ya-^^ 'conquest of Vrtra'. 2. Dependent determinatives, however, which have as their second member past passive participles in -ta and -na or action nouns in -ti accent

1 dugha- retains its original accent, as 7 svd-pati- 'one's own lord' is a Karma-

madhu-dugha- 'yielding mead', kama-diigha- dharaya ; as a Bahuvrlhi it is accented sva- (AV. VS.) 'yielding desires'. A few others pati- (AV.) 'having an own consort'. have the original accent of the first member: 8 On doubly accented compounds with marud-vrdha- 'delighting in the Maruts', pati- see below (3). divi-caror (AV.) 'moving in the sky', suti-kara- 9 Just as when such nouns are compounded 'active at the Soma offering'. Cp. Whitney with prepositions. 1278. 1° The very few apparent exceptions to 2 A few accent the penultimate syllable this rule are due to these words losing their of the final member with shift of the original verbal character ; e. g. yama-sadand- (AV.) accent, as godhuma-^ (VS.) 'wheat', iaka- 'Yama's realm'. dhuma- (AV.), yama-rajya- (AV. VS.) 'Yama's 11 In nidtari-svan- and mdtaribhvan- the sway' {rdjyd-); cp. WaCKERNAGEL 2', p. 268, suffix is probably -an; here the original top, note. accent of the first member (if it is the loc. 3 But deva-yana- 'going to the gods'. 7ndidri) has shifted, perhaps owing to the 4 Also the Karmadharaya sa-pdtm- 'cowife' influence of words like prdiar'-i-tvan-. and the Bahuvrlhi su-pdtm- 'having a good 12 An exception is sadhd-stu-t-ya- 'joint husband'. praise'. A few feminines in -ya, which are 3 Cp. Bloomfield, SBE. 42, 319. closely allied to these neuters in -ya, retain 6 In K. medha-paii-. their accent on the final syllable, as deva- 96 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

the first member (like a preposition); e. g. indra-prasuta- 'incited by Indra', devd-hita- 'ordained by the gods', hdsta-yata- 'guided by the hand''; devd- kuti-^ 'invocation of the gods', dkdna-sati-^ 'winning of wealth'. 3. Double accentuation. A certain number of determinative compounds, syntactical in origin, which have a genitive case-form in the first member, and nearly always -pdti- in the second, are doubly accented. Such are bfhas- pdti- and brdhmanas-pdti-'- 'lord of prayer', gnas-pdti- 'husband of a divine woman' (with the anomalous fem. gnSs-pdtm- 'divine wife'), jss-pdti- 5 'head of a family'. The compound sddas-pdti- 'lord of the seat' (sddas-) probably stands by haplology for *sddasas-pdH-, but vdna-s-pdti-^ 'lord of the wood'

perhaps, and rdtha-s-pdti- 'lord of the car' {rdtha-) probably,- owe their j- to the analogy of bfhas-pdti-''. Though without case-ending in the first member, sdcT-pdti- 'lord of might' follows the analogy of the above compounds. Other doubly accented compounds with case-form in the first riiember but not ending

in -pati- are si'mah-sepa- 'Dog's tail', N. of a man; ddsyave-vfka- 'Wolf to the Dasyu', N. of a man; apdm-ndpat- 'son of waters', the analogy of which is followed by tdnu-ndpat- 'son of himself (iami-) though it is without case- ending in the first member; ndra-sdmsa-^ 'Praise of men' (for *ndram-sdmsa-), the analogy of which is followed by nf-sdmsa-. The name nabha-nedistha- seems to contain an old locative in the first member, while the uninflected

stem appears in as-pdtra- (TS. 11. 5. 9^) 'vessel for the mouth'. 92. I. The regular class of copulatives, which have only one accent, places the acute on the final syllable? irrespective of the accent of the uncompounded word. In the plural occur: ajavdyah m. 'goats and sheep', uktharka n. 'praises and songs', akoratrini 'days and nights'; in the dual: rk-sami n. 'song and chant', satyanrte n. 'truth and untruth', sasananasane n. 'what eats and does not eat'; in the singular: nilalohitdm n. 'blue and red"°, ista-pUrtdm^'- n. 'what is sacrificed and presented', kes'a-hnasru- (AV.) n. 'hair and beard', anjanabhyanj'andm (AV.) n. 'salve and ointment', kasipu-barhandm (AV.) n. 'mat and pillow', krtakrtdm (AV.) n. 'what is done and undone', dttakutdm (AV.) n. 'thought and desire', bhadra-papdm (AV.) 'good and evil', bhuta-bhavydm (AV.) n. 'past and future', n. pi. priyapriydni (AV.) 'things yaj-ya- 'worship of the gods', beside deva- by s. The only other instance in the RV. ydj-ya-, jata-vid-ya- 'Itnowledge of things', of a Tatpurusa with case-ending in the first musfi-hat ya- 'hand to hand fight'. member and yet singly accented is divo- 1 There are, however, a good many ex- ddsa-, N. of a king. Elsewhere occur apsu- ceptions in which the final syllable is accented yogd- (AV.) 'connecting power in water', (as in prepositional determinatives), e. g. amhasas-pati- (VS.), perhaps mdiur-bhrdtrd- agni-taptd- 'glowing with fire', agni-dagdhd- (MS. I. 6 '2) 'mother's brother' (the Mss. read 'burnt by fire'. matur-bkrdtrd-). 2 The original accent of the first member In vdnas-pdti- the first member may be is shifted in ne7nd-dhiti- 'putting opposite' the gen. sing, of van- 'wood' (gen. pi. van- 'fight', vand-dhiti- 'layer of wood', medhd- am); but in rdtha-s-pdti- the s must be in- sati- 'receiving of the oblation'. organic; cp. Garbe, KZ. 2,3,490; RiCHTER, 3 When the verbal sense is lost in the IF. 19, 17; Bartholomae, BB. 15, 15 notei; second member, the general rule of final Wackernagel 2', p. 247. accentuation applies; e.g. deva-sumati- 'favour 7 The only new instance of double accen- of the gods', deva-heti- (AV.) 'weapon of the tuation of a compound with -pdti- after gods'. This analogy is followed by sarva- the RV. seems to be nfms-pdti- (MS.); cp. jydni- (AV.) 'loss of one's all'. Wackernagel 2', p. 248 d. 4 Though 6rdhntanas-pdti- is not treated 8 Cp. FoY, JAOS. 16, CLXXli-iv. as a compound in the Pada text, it is so treated 9 The two or three exceptions which occur in the Dvandv'a indrd-brahmanaspatX (u. 2412). in the AV. and VS. are doubtless due to 5 Thus accented inBookvil, hxiX jas-fati, wrong readings. in Book I. The latter is the only Tatpurusa 1° The adjectives being used as substan- in the RV. in which double accentuation tives. does not take place when -pdti- is preceded 'I In the VS. used in the dual also. III. Accent. Accent in Declension. 97

agreeable and disagreeable'; and as adjectives tMnra-dhumrd- (AV.) 'tawny

and dark', daksina-savyd- (AV.) 'right and left', saptamastamd- (AV.) 'seventh and eighth'. a. The very few adverbial copulatives which occur accent the first member: dhar-divi 'day by day', saydm-pratar (AV.) 'at even and at mom'. 2. The class of D svata-dvandvas, each member of which is dual in form, and which in the RV. is about thrice as frequent as the regular class, retains the accent of simple words in each member of the compound': thus agna-^imu {hSl^^ agni-soma, indra-pusdna, indra-brkaspdti', indra-vdruna, indra-visnu, indra-sSma, usasa-ndkta 'Dawn and Night', dyJvd-ksama 'heaven and earth'j dydva-prthivf, dyAvS-bhimT, ndktosdsd, pdrJanyd-vAtS, prtkivi-dydva, mitrd-vdrwia, siirya-mAsa. A few others are formed in the same way from substantives which are not the names of deities: krdtu-ddksau (VS.) 'under- standing and will', turvdsa-ydda (iv. 30'?) 'Turvasa and Yadu', dhuni-cumurl 'Dhuni and Cumuri', m%tdra-pitdra (iv. 6 7) 'mother and father'. a. A certain number of these compounds have been assimilated to the regular class of copulatives by giving up the accent of the first member: indragnt, indra-pusdna, soma-pUsdnd, vatd-parjanyd, surya-candramdsa, bhava- rudrdti (AV.), bhava-sarvdu (AV.)^; one has been completely assimilated by giving up also the dual form in the first member: indra-vayii. a. There occurs once a secondary adjective copulative accented on both members, being formed from an adverbial Dvandva: ahar-divd- i^?,^ '&3SS.f {ahar-divi 'day by day').

3. Accent in Declension.

93. The vocative, when accented at all (85, 2) invariably has the acute on the first syllable; e. g. pitar, N. pita 'father'; deva, N. devd-s 'god'. The regularly accented vocative of dyu- {dydv-) 'heaven' is dyciu-s'', that is dlaus,

but the nominative form dydus is also used in its stead.

a. Otherwise, in the ^z-declension (f. -a) the accent always remains on the same syllable; e. g. N. devd-s, G. devd-sya, pi. devd-nam. This rule is also followed by monosyllabic pronominal stems in -a; e. g. from ma-:

I. mdy-a 'by me', D. md-hyam, L. mdy-i; from td- 'that', G. sing, ta-sya, pi. G.

ie-sam, I. td-bkis^.

a. An exception to this rule is formed by the plural cardinal stems ending in -a. They regularly accent that vowel before endings with initial consonant, and throw the acute on the ending of the genitive; c. %. panca 'five': 1. pancd-bhis, G. pancd.7tdm% astd 'eight', however," shifts the accent to the endings generally, thus I. asta-bhis, D. asta- bhyds (TS.).

94. When the final syllable of the stem is accented, the acute (except in the a -declension) is liable to shift to the endings in the weak cases.

I. This is the rule in monosyllabic stems; e. g. ndu- 'ship': A. n&v-am,

but I. ndv-A, pi. I. nau-bhis, L. nau-si'i; ddnt-va.. 'tooth': I. dat-&, pi. A. dat-ds^,

I. dad-bhis.

1 The double accent is retained even in again, have only one accent, which as in the derivatives mitra-vdruna-vant- 'accom- the regular class is on the final syllable. panied by Mitra and Varuna', and dyava- 4 Retaining the nom. -s, instead of *dimt prtkivi-vant- (AV.) 'accompanied by heaven (Gk. Z«S). and earth'. 5 An exception is the pronoun a- 'this', 2 Retaining the double accent of the which is treated like a monosyllabic stem, second member. e. g. G. a-syd, pi. m. e-sam, f. d-sam; a few 3 In the AV. the number of Devata- times, however, the accentuation d-smai, dvandvas is only about half that in the RV. d-sya, a-hhis occurs; cp. Whitney 502 b. (though the total number of Dvandvas is - The accusative plural is treated as a more than double); about one-half of these, weak case and accented on the ending in Indo-arische Philologie. I. 4. 7 98 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

a. Exceptions to this rule are the rare monosyllabic stems in -a, which retain the accent on the stem; e.g. ffna- 'woman': pi. I. gnd-bhis, L. gnd-su. Individual exceptions are go- 'cow', dyo- 'sky'; e. g. I. giv-a, pi. G. giv-am, I. go-bhis; L. dydv-i, pi. I. dyu- bins. Similarly ///- 'man': D. nar-e, pi. I. nf-bhis, L. nf-su, but G. nar-am and iir-nani; ksam- 'earth'; L. ksam-i; ian- 'succession: I. ^dn-a (a.nd ian-d), Tl. idn-e; ran- 'joy': rdn-e, pi. L. ram-su; van- 'wood': pi. L. vdtn-su (but G. van-Sm); vip-'roA': G.vip-as; slf-'fAax': pi. I. str-bhis; svar- 'light': G. sur-as (but D. siir-i); also the infinitives badh-e 'to press', vah-e 'to convey'. In some words the irregular accentuation is due to their having originally been dissyllables; such are di-ii- 'wood', snii- 'summit', han- 'dog', yun- weak stem ai yt'ivan- 'young'; eg, I. dru-na; pi. L. snu-su; I. iiin-a, pi. ivd-bhis; \. yun-a^.

2. When the accented vowel of the final syllable in polysyllabic stems disappears either by syncope or by changing to a semivowel, the acute is thrown on endings with initial vowel in the weak cases; thus from mahimdn-

'greatness', I. mahimn-d; from murdhdn- 'head', D. murdhn-e; from agni- 'fire',

G. du. agny-6s\ from dhenu- 'cow', I. sing. dkenv-S; from vadhii- 'bride',

D. vadkv-di (AV.); from pitr- 'father', I. pitr-S.

a. Polysyllabic stems in -?', -I'l, -r, and in the RV. usually those in -X, throw the acute on the ending of the G. pi. also, even though the vowel retains its syllabic character in this case; e. g. agni-ndm, dhenu-nsm, datf-ndm; hahvi-7iam ^ 3. Present participles in -at and -dnt throw the acute on the endings with initial vowel in the weak cases; e. g. from tud-dnt- 'striking': I. sing. tud-at-a (but' tud-dd-bhis). This rule is also followed by the old participles

?nah-dt- 'great' and brh-dt 'large', e. g. mahat-d (but mahdd-b/iis)^. 4. In the RV. derivatives formed with accented -aiic throw the acute

on endings with initial vowel in the weak cases when contraction to t and u appears in the final syllable; thus from praty-dnc- 'turned towards', I. sing. pratic-d (but L. pi. praiydk-su); from anv-dnc- 'following'; G. anUc-ds (but from prdfic- L. sing, prdc-i). The other Sarnhitas, however, generally retain the accent on the stem*.

4. Verbal Accent.

95. As regards personal endings, those of the singular active in all tenses and moods are always unaccented except the 2. imperative -dhi or -hi. Others may be accented; if dissyllabic, they have the acute on the first syllable, as -dnti, -mdhi. When the tense stem ends in -a in the present, in the future, in the unaugmented imperfect and aorist, and throughout the subjunctive, the accent

is never on the ending, as it remains on the same syllable of the stem throughout. 96. All tenses formed with the augment invariably accent the latter, if the verb is accented at all (85, 2/?); e. g. impf. d-bhara-t, plupf d-jagan, aor. d-bku-t, conditional d-bharisya-t. If the augment is dropped, the accen- tuation is as follows. In the imperfect the acute is on the same syllable as in the present; e. g. bhdra-t, pres. bhdra-ti. The pluperfect, if regularly

hardly more than one third of the stems the plural cardinals in -a: as pdnca 'five', occurring; see Whitney 390 a; cp. Lanman pancd-nam, ddsa 'ten', dasa-nani. '494, 499, 504 top, 505. 3 The accent is, however, not shifted in ' When a monosyllable becomes the final the old participle vaghdt- m. 'worshipper'; member of a compound, it loses its mono- nor in the two forms a-coddt-e 'not urging' syllabic accent; e. g. su-dhi- 'wise', G. pi. (from cod-ani-) zxvi. rathirdydl-am 'speeding'; sii-dh'inam. On the other hand/w- 'pressing cp. Lanman p. 505 — 6 (top). on' though a compound {pra-is-] is accented 4 Thus the f. stem /ra^/f-> (AV.), but RV. like monosyllables in the I. sing, pi-es-i,. fratlc-i- (cnce in the A. fraltcim). 2 This regularly takes place in the G. of III. Accent. Verbal Accent. 99 formed, accents the root, as 3. sing, cakan (Ykan-), 3. sing, rardn (Yran-), 1. sing, ciketam {Ycit-); when formed with thematic -a, it accents that vowel, as 3. pi. cakrpa-nta. The aorist if formed with -sa, accents that syllable, e. g. 3. pi. dhuk-sa-n, dhuk-sd-nta (from dnh- 'milk'); if formed with -s, it accents the root, as may be inferred from i. sing, vdm-s-i (from van- 'win'), the only accented example occurring; if formed with -is-, it accents the root, e. g. I. sing, sdms-is-am'^ . If formed from the root, it accents the radical vowel in the singular active, but the endings elsewhere, as 3. sing, vark ( ]/'vrj-), 2. but sing. mid. nut-thas ( Ynud-). If formed from the root with thematic -a, it usually follows the analogy of the present «-class, e. g. ruhd-m, bhujd-t, vidd-t, budhd-nta; in several instances, however, it accents the root, as dra-nta (r- 'go'); sdra-t {sr- 'flow'); sdda-tam {sad- 'sit'); sdna-t {san- 'gain') but opt. sane'ma; vdca-f {vac- 'speak') but opt. voceyam. The reduplicated aorist usually accents the reduplicative syllable, as 2. sing, didharas, ninas'as, Ty.svxg. piparat, sisvap, jijanat, -^X. jijaiian; but sometimes the root, as 2. sing. Usrdthas, 3. sing. pipdrat, sihidthat. Passive aorists accent the root, e. g. dhd-y-i, srdv-i, vM-i, jdn-i, pdd-i, sdd-i. 97. Present system. —-i. Throughout the present system of the a-conjugation the accent remains on the same syllable of the stem in all moods; on the radical syllable in verbs of the first and fourth classes; e. g. bhdva-ti from bhu- 'be', ndh-ya-ti from nah- 'bind'; on the thematic -a in the sixth class ; e. g. tudd-ti from tud- 'strike'. 2. In the second or graded conjugation, the singular indicative active, the whole of the subjunctive, and the 3. sing, imperative active' accent the stem, while all other forms accent the endings^. In the strong forms the radical syllable is accented in the second class; generally the reduplicative syllable, but sometimes the root, in the third class; the suffix in the fifth, eighth, seventh, and ninth; e. g. 3. sing. ind. ds-ti, subj. ds-a-t, impv. ds-tu, from as- 'be', 2nd cl.; 3. sing. ind. bi-bhar-ti from bhr- 'bear', 3rd cl.; 3. sing. ind. kr-nc-ti, subj. kr-ndv-a-t, 2. pi. impv. kr-m-ta, and kr-no-tana from /It- 'make', 5'h cl.;

3. sing. subj. man-dv-a-te ixom. man- 'think', Stl^cL; i. %v!\g.'mA.yu-nd-j-miy 3. sing. subj. jyu-nd-j-a-t ixova yuj- 'join', 7th cl.; 3. sing. ind. grb/i-nd-ti, 2. sing. subj. grbh-nd-s from grabh- 'seize', 9'hcl.; but 2. sing. impv. ad-dhi, 3. pi. opt. ad-yi'ir from ad- 'eat', 2nd cl.; i. pi. ind. bi-bhr-mdsi; 1. sing. ind. xsaA.kr-nv-S, 2. sing. impv. kr-nu-kl; i. pL opt. van-u-ydma, 3. pi. impv. van-v-dntu from van- 'win', 8'h cl.; 3. sing. TmA. yunk-te, 2. sing. impv. mid. yunk-svd; i. pi. ind. gr-ni-mdsi, g'li 2. sing. impv. gr-ni-hl from gr- 'praise', cl.

a. Irregularities. In the second or root class, several verbs accent the radical syllable throughout''': si- 'lie' does so besides taking Guna; e.g. I. sing, say-e, 2, sing. ie-se etc. 5 Occasional accentuation of the root in weak forms appears in 2. sing. impv. Jan-i-svad (yjizn.-), mat-sva^mad-), yak-sva[\/yaj-), sak-sva 3.Tii sak-sva {\/sak-), fdh-a-t, subj. [rdh- 'thrive'), 3. pi. impv. svdp-antu (AV.) and kias-anlu (AV.)7. A few roots of the third class accent the root instead of the reduplicative syllable in the strong forms. These ci-ke-si are ci- 'note', mad- 'exhilarate', yic- 'separate', ha- 'sacrifice'; e. g. 2. sing, (AV.)j ma-mdi-iu; sing. snhj. yu-ydv-a-i, 2. pi. impv. yii-ya- 3. sing. subj. ma-mad-a-t, $. sing. impv. $. iatia; 3. sing. /«<-/i(J-6'. Occasional forms thus accented are 2. sing. «>-a>-« (RV'.) froni

1 Of the «>-aorist no accented forms occur. 4 These are as- 'sit', Id- 'praise', Tr- 'set caks- taks- 'fashion', 2 The 2. pi. impv. active often accents in motion'^ is- 'rule', 'see', the stem, which is then strong, as e-ta, tra- 'protect', nims- 'kiss', vas- 'clothe', su- forth'. e-tana from i- 'go'; this is sometimes also 'bring the case with the 2. du. in -tarn. 5 See Whitney 628 and 629. 6 3 The final syllable of the ending of the Op. cit. 631 a. in 7 Op. cit. 630. 3. pi. middle is regularly accented several verbs, as ri-hati, duh-ate; see WHITNEY 61 3, 685, 699; Delbruck, Verbiim 73. I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4, Vedic Grammar. r- 'go', 2. sing. mid. dhat-sc from dha- 'put', and bi-bhdr-ti (RVi. AV^.) beside tlie usual bi-bhar-ti. Both types, when the ending begins with a vowel, throw the accent back on the reduplicative syllable; e.g. ^. -^X, juhv-ati and bibhr-ati, but 2.\>\, jiilai-tha and bibhr- tha. The subjunctive here, as usual, follows the accentuation of the strong indicative; its stem from the same two roots would hejuhav-a- and bibhar-a-. In the optative middle the accent is thrown back on the reduplicative syllable because the modal affix begins with a vowel; e. g. I. sing, dadh-tya etc. beside I. sing. act. dadh-yam etc. ' The KV., however, once has dadhT-ta beside dadhl-ta (3 times). In the imperative, endings with initial consonant are accented in the weak forms, otherwise the reduplicative syllable; jihataiii. act. e. g. 2. sing, de-hi, 2. du. dat-tain, but 3. mid. pi. The strong 3. sing. impv. follows the strong ind., e.g. dadhaiic, pifartu; the 2. pi. is often strong; e. g. j'uhoia, dadhaia. The participle regularly accents the reduplicative syllable; e.. %. juhv-at, jiikv- ana, except only pipand- {pa- 'drink'). — In the seventh class the root kirns- 'injure' (originally perhaps a desiderative of halt- 'strike') accents the radical syllable in weak forms, as 3. sing, hims-te, pi. Idms-anti, part, hims-ana-. — In the fifth and eighth classes the RV. has several instances of irregular accentuation of the final syllable in the 3. pi. mid.: kr-nv-ate, vr-nv-ate, spr-nv-aic; tan-v-ati, man-v-atl.-— In the ninth class the irregular accentuation of the 3. pi. mid. occurs in pu-n-a-ii and ri-n-ati [ri- 'flow'). The ending -ana, which is here added in the 2. sing. impv. act. to a few roots with final consonant, is accented on the last syllable: grh-ana, badh-and (AV.), siabh-and (AV.). 98. The perfect. — The singular indicative active and the whole sub- junctive^ accent the radical syllable; all other forms of the indicative, as well as the whole imperative and optative accent the endings; e. g. ind. 3. sing.

cakdr-a, pi. cakr-ur, i. pi. mid. cakr-mdhe; subj. sing. "z. paprdth-a-s, pipray-a-s; pi. i. 2,. jabMr-a-t, piprdy-a-t, mumoc-a-t; dadhdrs-a-ti, vavdrt-a-ti; cakdn-ama, sUsdv-ama, 3. paprdth-a-n; opt. sing. i. vavrt-ydm, 2. susril-yds, 3. tutuj-ystl 2. sisrT-td du. 2. suiru-yhtam; pi. 3. vavrj-yiir; mid. sing. vavrdh-i-thds, 3. (Jri- 'resort'); impv.sing. 2. pipri-ki, mumiig-dhi {Ymuc^, du. i. jajas-tSm; mid. sing. 2. dadhi-svd^. The participle, both active and middle, accents the suffix; e. g. cakr-vims-; cakr-and-. gg. The aorist. — The accentuation of the unaugmented forms of the indicative has already been stated (96). With regard to that of the moods, the following notes may be added. 1. The root aorist accents the radical syllable in the subjunctive; e. g. sing. 2. kdr-a-s, 3. kdr-a-t, du. 3. srdv-a-tas, pi. 3. gdm-a-nti, mid. sing. 3. bhoj- a-te; in the injunctive, the radical syllable in the singular, but the ending

elsewhere; e. g. sing. i. ndm-s-i, pi. 3. dabh-i'w, mid. sing. 2. mr-thas; in the optative, the endings throughout; e. g. act. sing. i. as-ySm, 2. bku-ySs, mid. pi. I. ai-imdhi; in the imperative, the root in the 3. sing, act., but the ending

elsewhere; e. g. sing. 3. sro-tu, but 2. kr-dki, du. 2. ga-tdm, pi. 2. bhu-td'^, mid. sing. 2. kr-svd; in the participle, the suffix is accented in the active, e. g. bhid-dnt-, and generally in the middle, e. g. budh-and-, but in several instances the root; e. g. dyi'it-ana-. 2. In the a-aorist the accentuation follows that of the unaugmented indicative; thus the subjunctive sing. 3. viddt; the injunctive sing. i. ddrsa-m

ruhd-m, 3. ruha-t, vidd-t, sdna-t, pi. 3. vidd-nta; optative, sing. i. videyam, sanfyam, pi. i. saketna, sane'ma and sdnema; the imperative, sing. 2. sdna, sdra, du. 2. riihd-tam, sdda-tam, pi. 2. khyd-ta. The participle usually accents the thematic -a^ but sometimes the root; e. g. trpd-nt-, but sdda-nt-; guhd- mana-, but ddsa-mana-.

1 Cp. Whitney 645 a, 668 a, 669. 3 A few forms accent and strengthen the 2 When the primary endings are added, radical syllable, du. 2. mumoc-ri-tam, pi. 2. mu- the reduplicative syllable is almost always moc-a-ta, mid. sing. 2. pipydy-a-sva.

accented ; e. g. jitjosad; some others, which \ But the root is strong and accented in take secondary endings, but do not strengthen several forms, kdr-ta etc., of the 2. pi. im- the root, also accent the reduplicative perative. syllable, as dddhrmnta; see below 490. III. Accent. Verbal Accent.

3. In the reduplicated aorist the only accented form in the subjunctive seems to be vocati;- in the injunctive, either the redupHcative syllable or the root is accented; e. g. sing. 2. ninas-as, sisrdikas, 3. piparat and pTpdrat; in the optative, the thematic vowel or the ending; e. g. pi. i. vocema, cucyuv-t- nidhi; in the imperative, the thematic vowel or the ending; e. g. du. 2.jigr-tdm, pl.jtgr-id, susudd-ta (AV.).

4. The s-aorist accents the root in the subjunctive; e. g. ddr-s-a-t {dr- 'split'), ydk-s-a-t {yaj- 'sacrifice'), du. 2. pdr-s-a-thas (pr- 'take across'); the root in the injunctive as far as can be judged from the extremely few accented forms, as mid. sing. i. vdm-s-i {van- 'win'); the ending' in the optative, as mid. bing. i. bhak-s-i-yd ( ybhaj-), pi. dkuk-s-T-mdhi {duh- 'milk'); in the imperative no accented forms occur; the participle accents the root in the active, as ddk-s-ant- {dak- 'burn'), but in the irregularly formed middle^ nearly always the suffix, as arc-a-s-and-, but oh-a-s-ana- (527). 5. The AS-aorist accents the root in the subjunctive; e. g. sing. 3. bodh- is-a-t; the root in the injunctive, e. g. sing. 2. mdt/i-is, but once the ending in pi. 3. tar-is-i'ir (AV.); the ending in the optative; e. g. sing. i. edh-is-'iyd (AV.); the ending in the imperative; e. g. sing. 2. av-id-dhi, du. 2. av-is-tdm. 6. In the s/s-aorist no accented forms occur except one in the imperative, where the ending has the acute, du. 2. ya-sis-tdm.

7. The sa-aorist accents that syllable in the injunctive, as pi. 3. dhuk-sd-nta

(but once sing. 3. dhuk-sa-td), and in the imperative, as sing. .2. dhuk-sd-sva

( Yduh-'). No subjunctive or optative forms occur. 100. The future.—The accent in all forms of this tense remains on the suffix -syd- or -i-syd; e. g. sing. 3. e-syd-ti (AV.) 'he will go' {Yi-)', sing. i. stav-i-sydmi 'I shall praise' ( Ystu-), 3. kar-i-sydti 'he will do' {Ykr-^; participle kar-i-sydtit- 'about to do'. loi. Secondary conjugations. — All these, except the active form of the intensive, accent the same syllable of the stem throughout. They are the causative, the denominative, the passive, the secondary form of the intensive, and the desiderative, the stem of all of which ends in -a. The causative accents the penultimate syllable of the stem; e. g. krodh-dya- 'enrage'.—The passive, the secondary form of the intensive, and the denominative, accent the suffix -yd; e. g. pan-yd-te 'is admired'; rerih-yd-te "licks repeatedly'; gopa-ydnti 'they protect'. A certain number of unmistakable denominatives, however, have the causative accent; e. g. inantrd-ya-te 'takes counsel'. — The desiderative accents the reduplicative syllable; e. g. pipri- sa-ti. — The primary form of the intensive agrees in accentuation with the third or reduphcating class of verbs, that is, it accents the reduplicative syllable in the strong forms, but the endings with initial consonant in the weak forms of the indicative active; e. g. sing. 2>- Johav-T-ti, A\y.i.jar-bhr-tds, pi. 3. vdr-vrt-ati. In the middle indicative, however, the reduplicative syllable is more often accented than not; e. g. te-tik-te and nenik-te. In the subjunctive the reduplicative syllable is regularly accented; e. g. sing. :^. Jdngkan-a-t, but once the root in sing. 1. jangMn-ani; mid. pi. t,. jdnghan-anta, but once the ending in du. 3. tantas-dite. No accented form of the optative occurs. In the imperative the ending is accented; e. g. sing. 2. jagr-hi, car-kr-tat. In the participle, both active and middle, the reduplicative syllable is regularly accented; e. g. cekit-at-, cekit-ana-; there are, however, two exceptions in the middle: badbadJi-atid- and marmrj-and- {^afi^).

1 Once the root is accented in the irregular participles irregularly formed with -viana. form du. 2. tra-s-i-tham. ha-s-a-7nana- and dht-s-a-mana-. 2 The root is accented in two middle I02 I. AlLGEMEINES UND SpRACHE. VedIC GRAMMAR.

5. Accent of nominal verb forms.

102. The accentuation of participles formed from tense and conjugation stems has already been stated. When these are compounded with pre- positions, they retain their accents; thus the present and perfect participles of apa-gdm- 'go away' would be apa-gdcchant-, apa-gdcchamana-; apa-jaganv&ms-,

apa-jagmand-. The preposition is, however, not infrequently found separated

from the participle by another word or is placed after it, when it is treated

as independent and accented, e. g. prd smdsru dodhuvat {yi. 23') 'shaking his beard'; dpa drlhs.nl ddrdrat (yi. 175) 'bursting strongholds asunder'; a ca pdra

ca pathlbhis cdrantam (i. 164J') 'wandering hither and thither on (his) paths',

niddhu bibhrata -iipa (i. 166^) 'bringing sweetness near'; tanvdnta A rdjah (n^ 45') 'extending through the air'. The preposition is occasionally found

independently accented immediately before the participle, as abhi ddksat (11. 4?)

'burning around'; vi vidvan (i. 189') 'distinguishing' (probably in distinction from vividvan, perfect participle of vid- 'find'). a. When there are two prepositions, either both are compounded and unaccented, as vi-pra-ydntah (ix. 2 2 5) 'advancing', pary-a-vivrtsan (vii. 63^) 'turning round'; or one is compounded and the other independent and accented, as abhi a-cdrantih (viii. 96'^) 'approaching'; ava-srjdnn upa tmdna

(j. 142") 'bestowing indeed'; prd vaykm uj-jihanah (v. i^) 'flying up to a branch'. b. Participles in -iar generally accent the root, as kdr-tar 'making', but when compounded the suffix. But ni-cetar- 'observing' occurs beside ni-cetdr- 'observer'.

103. The past passive participle regularly accents the suffix; e. g. ga-td- 'gone', pat-i-td- (AV.) 'fallen', chin-nd- 'cut off' {Y^hid-). But when this participle is compounded with prepositions, the latter are as a rule accented. In several instances, however, the accent of the simple participle is retained, as apa-kri-td- (AV.) 'bought', ni-ci-td- 'seen', nis-kr-td- 'prepared', ni-sat-td- 'seated', ni-va-td- (AV.) 'uninjured', pra-jak-i-td-. 'given up' (from Jah-, a secondary form of ha- 'leave'), pra-sas-td- 'celebrated', sam-skr-td- 'prepared'

(beside sdm-skr-ta-), sam-hi-td- (VS.) 'variegated' '. The preposition may be separated from the participle by another word, as pari soma siktdh (ix. 97 '5) 'poured, O Soma, around'. When there are two prepositions, the first remains unaccented, as api-vrktah (viii. 80^) 'removed' {apa-d-\ sam-d-kr-tavi (x. 84O 'accumulated'; or it may be separated and independently accented, as prd ydt samudrd d-hitah (ix. 64^9) 'when despatched forth to the ocean'; iidri gobhir d-vrtam (ix. 86^') 'encompassed round by streams of milk'. 104. Of the gerundives, those in -ya (or -t-yd) and -tva accent the root; e. g. cdks-ya- 'to be seen', sru-t-ya- 'to be heard', car-kf-t-ya- 'to be praised', vdk-tva- 'to be said'; those in -ayya, -enya, -aniya (AV.) accent the penultimate; e. g. pan-dyya- 'to be admired', iks-cnya- 'worthy to be seen', while those in -tavya accent the final syllable, as jan-i-tavya- (AV.) 'to be born'^ When compounded with prepositions^, gerundives nearly always leave the accent unchanged; e. g. pari-cdks-ya- 'to be despised'; with Svarita on the final syllable in the RV. only a-kay-ya- 'desirable' and upa-vdk-ya-

^ Such compounds are also thus accent- only begin to appear in the AV., where ed when turned into substantives, as nis- two examples of each occur (581 a, b). kr-td- n. 'rendezvous', upa-slutd-, N. of a 3 The preposition is here always inse- man. parable. 2 -aiiTya The gerundives in and -tavya , III.^ Accent. Accent of Nominal Verb Forms. 103

'to be addressed'; abhy-a-yams-^nya- 'allowing oneself to be drawn near'; a-mantr-aniya- (AV.) 'to be addressed'. 105. Infinitives are as a rule accented like ordinary nominal cases formed from the same stems. a. The dative infinitive from root stems accents the ending; e. g. drs-e 'to see', but when compounded, the root; e. g. sam-idh-e 'to kindle', abhi-pra- Cilks-e (i. 113^) 'to see'. Those formed from stems in -as generally accent that suffix, but sometimes the radical syllable; e. g. car-ds-e 'to fare', but cdks-as-e 'to see'. Those formed from stems in -i and -ti accent the suffix; e. g. drs-dy-e 'to see', p-tdy-e 'to drink'. Those from stems in -tu accent the root, as bhdr4av-e; also those from stems in -tava, but with a secondary accent on the final syllable, as gdn-tavdi. When these two forms are com-

pounded with prepositions, the latter are accented; e. g. prd-vantave'' 'to win', dpa-bhartavdi 'to be taken away', the latter retaining its final accent as well. When there are two prepositions, the first may be independent and accented as well; e. g. vi prd-sartave (vm. 67") 'to spread'. Infinitives formed with -dhyai generally accent the preceding a of the verbal stem, but sometimes the root; e. g. iyd-dhyai 'to go', but gdma-dhyai 'to go'. Those formed from stems in -man accent the root; e. g. dd-man-e 'to give', except vid-mdn-e 'to

know* ; from stems in -van there are da-vdn-e 'to give', tur-vdn-e 'to excel', dhUr-vati-e 'to ' but injure' ( Y'^^W') b. The accusative infinitive if formed from a radical stem accents the root even when compounded with a preposition; e. g. h'tbh-am 'to shine', a-sdd-am 'to sit down'; if formed from a stem in -tu, it accents the root in a simple stem, but the preposition in a compounded stem; e. g. di-tum 'to give',

prd-bkar-tum 'to present', dnu prd-volhum 'to advance' 3. c. The ablative-genitive infinitive, if formed from radical stems, which here occur only in combination with prepositions, accents the root; e. g. ava- pdd-as '(from) falling down'; if formed from a stem in -tu, the root in a simple stem, but the preposition in a compound stem; e. g. gan-tos 'going', ni-dha-tos 'putting down'. d. The locative infinitive if formed from radical stems accents the

ending in the simple form, but the root in the compounded form; e. g. budh-i 'at the waking', but sam-dfs-i 'on seeing'. The one locative infinitive formed

from a stem in -tar, and those from stems in -san accent the suffix; e. g. dhar-tdr-i 'to bestow', ne-sdn-i 'to lead'. 106. Uncompounded gerunds formed with -tvT, -tva, tvaya accent the suffix, while the compounded gerunds'- formed with -yd or -tya accent the root; e, g. ga-tvi 'having gone', bhu-tvd 'having become', ga-tvdya 'having gone'; sam-gfbh-ya 'gathering', upa-sru-tya (AV.) 'having overheard'. 107. Case-forms used as adverbs frequently show a shift of accent. This appears oftenest in the accusative neuter. Thus drav-dt 'quickly', but drdv-ant- 'running', probably also drah-ydt^ 'stoutly'; apardm 'later', but

dparam as neuter adjective; d-vyus-dm (AV.) 'till dawn'^; and the adverbs in -vat, as -vdt 'like Angiras', vianus-vdt 'as Manus did', purana-vdt,

I The infinitive from stems in -tu in all first is independent and therefore also its cases accents the preposition ; e. g. sam- accented. hartum 'to collect', dpi-dhaiave 'to cover up', 4 The preposition is here always in- ava-gantos 'of descending'. separable. ^ A preposition is occasionally uncom- 5 Which seems to be formed from an pounded with or separated from the infinitive, irregular present participle of drk- 'be firm'. when both are accented, as pra daiidne 6 The ordinary A. of vj-us- 'dawn' would (IV. 32^; v.653)j p'A dasiise datave (iv. 20"). be vyus-am. 3 When there are two prepositions, the -

104 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

purva-vdt, pratna-vdt 'as of old', which are accusative neuters of the adjective suffix -vant^ (unaccented)j and some adverbs from the comparative in -tara, ut-tardm (AV.) 'higher', but I'd-tara- as adjective; similarly ava-tardm, paras- tardm and para-tardm 'farther away', vi-iardm 'more widely' ^ sam-tardvi (AV.)

'still farther'. Similarly the instrumental diva 'by day', but diva 'through heaven'; and the dative aparaya 'for the future', but dparaya 'to the later'; and the ablatives apakat 'from afar' {dpaka- 'far'), amat 'from near' (ama- AV. 'this'), samit 'from of old' {sdna- 'old') 3.

6. Accent in Sandhi.

108. I. When two vowels combine so as to form a long vowel or diphthong, the latter has the Udatta if either or both of the original vowels

had if; e. g. nudasvatha for nudasva dtha; tdve't iox tdva it; kvtlt ior kva it^; agat for d agat; piteva for pita, iva, sato for satd u; nintaras (vi. 63^) for nd dntaras. The contraction of /+ i is, however, accented l,^ the (dependent) Svarita

having here (in / 1) ousted the preceding Udatta'; e. g. divlva (RV. AV.) for divi iva. This is the praslista, 'contracted', Svarita of the Pratisakhyas ^. 2. When i and u with Udatta are changend to y and v, a following unaccented vowel receives the Svarita; e. g. vy Snat for vi mat. The uncontracted form with Udatta must, however, almost invariably be read in the RV. This is the ksaipra'^ Svarita of the Pratisakhyas ^- Here the enclitic Svarita assumes the appearance of an independent accent. 3. When d is elided, it throws back its Udatta on unaccented e or 0; e. g. sundve ^gne for sundve dgne; v6 'vasah for vo dvasah. But when un- accented a is elided, it changes a preceding Udatta to Svarita; e. g. so 'd/iamdh for so adhamdh. This is the abhinihita Svarita of the Pratisakhyas ^. Here also the enclitic Svarita (in 6 a) has ousted the preceding Udatta (as in divVud) '°.

7. The Sentence Accent.

Haskell, Vocative-Accent in the Veda, JAOS. 11, 57. — BShtlingk, ein erster Versuch uber den Accent im Sanskrit (Memoires de I'Acadernie imp. de St. Peters- bourg 1843) p. 38 ff. — WmxNEY, JAOS. 5, 193 fF., 387 ff. — Aurel Mays, Beitrage aus dem Rigveda zur Accentuirung des verbum finitum (Sitzungsberichte der phil.-hist. Classe der Itaiserlichen Akademie der Wissenschaften, Wien 1871, p. 219 ff.). — Weber, IS. 13, 70ff. — BOHTLINGK, Sanskrit-Chrestomathie^ p. 356 WmXNEY, Sanskrit Grammar 591 ff. — Delbruck, Altindische Syntax (Halle 1888) 21 — 29. — Oldenberg, Die Verbalenldisis im Rgveda, ZDMG. 60, 707—740.

log. The vocative. — a. The vocative, which whether it consist of a single word or a compound expression, is invariably accented on the first syllable, retains its accent only at the beginning of a sentence or Pada";

' Cp. Whitney 1107 a. 9 So called because 'uttered with a 2 See op. cit. in 9. quick' (ksipra-) pronunciation, the semivowel 3 Cp. op. cit. 1 1 14 a. replacing the vowel. 10 4 Cp. Benfey, Vollstandige Grammatik 64. Cp. Wackernagel I, 251, b «; Brug- 5 But when a Svarita is followed by an MANN, ICG. 45, A. unaccented syllable, it of course remains; " This applies to the second as well as e. g. kveyatha for kva iyatJia (VIII. 17). the first Pada of a hemistich (as some of the ^ Except in the Taittirlya texts which above examples show), thus indicating the follow the general rule [diviva). independent character of these Padas, which ^ 7 This also takes place in sudgatA (TS.) is obscured by the way in which the re- for si'i-udgata 'a good Udgatr' (TS. VII. I. dactors of the Samhitas apply the rules of 8' : B.). Sandhi and mark the dependent Svarita. 8 Cp. Haug 75. III. Accent. Accent in Sandhi. Sentence Accent. 105

that is to say, when, having the full force of the case, it occupies the most

emphatic position; e. g. dgne supayani bhava (i. i^"^) 'O Agni, be easy of access'; lirjo napat sahasavan (x. iis^""} 'O mighty son of strength'; hStar yavistha sukrato (1V.4"'') 'O most youthful, skilful priest'. This rule also applies

to doubly accented dual compounds, as mitravaruna (i. 15^'') '0 Mitra and Varuna' (N. mitrd-vdruna).

a. Two or more vocatives at the beginning of a Pada are all accented; e. g. ddiU, m'Ura, varuna (II. 27^4^); iirjo napad, bhadrasoce (vill. 71"') 'O son of strength, O propitiously bright one' i.

b. The vocative, when it does not begin the sentence, loses its accent, being unemphatic as referring only incidentally to a person already invoked; e. g. rtena mitravarunav rtavrdhav rtaspria (i. 2') 'through Law, O Mitra and Varuna, lovers and cherishers of Law'; vpa tvajxgne dive-dive, dosa-vastar

dhiya vaydin . . . Smasi (i. i^ 'to thee, O Agni, day by day, illuminer | O of darkness, with prayer we come'; a rajana^ maha rtasya gopa (vii. 64^) 'hither (come), O ye two sovereign guardians of great order'; ydd, indra brahmanas-pate, abhidrohdm cdramasi (x. i64'*)3 'if, O Indra, Brahmanas- pati, we commit an offence'*.

a. The vocative, whether at the beginning of or within a, sentence, not being regarded as part of it, does not interfere with the normal accentuation of the sentence. Hence a verb |at the beginning of a sentence, following a vocative, is accented as the first word of the sentence; while a verb within a sentence, following a vocative, remains unaccented; e. g. deva, jivaia (AV. XIX. 70') 'O gods, live'; astni it su, vrsana, madayetham

(i. 1842) 'beside us, ye two heroes, enjoy yourselves'. no. The verb. — A. The finite verb in a principal sentence is unaccented except when it is the first word; e. g. agnim tie purohitam (i. i^) 'I praise Agni, the domestic priest'; but ile agnim vipasdtam (in. 27^) 'I praise Agni the wise'. This rule and its exception must, however, be understood with the following restrictions: 1. A sentence is regarded as capable of having only one verb. Hence all other verbs syntactically connected with the subject of the first, are accented as beginning new sentences (a subject or object coming between two such verbs being generally counted to the first); e. g. tesam pahi, srudhi i32t) hdvatn (i. 2') 'drink of them, hear our call'; asmdbhyam jesi yStsi ca (i. 'conquer and fight for us'; tardnir ijjayati,ksM, pusyati (vii. 32?) 'the energetic man conquers, rules, thrives'; jahi prajAm ndyasva ca (KSf. i. 83) 'slay the progeny and bring (it) hither'. 2. The verb, though not beginning a sentence, receives the accent if

it coincides with the beginning of a Pada (which is treated as the beginning te dntamanam vidy&ma sumatinam (i. of a new sentence); e. g. dtha \ 43J. at the beginning of a sentence is 3. Since a vocative (or vocatives) treated as extraneous to it, the verb which immediately follows it becomes accented; dgne,jusdsva the first word of the sentence and is accordingly e.g.

preceding example may 1 Here bhadrasoce is treated as an in- vocatives. The also, as as dependent vocative; it would lose its accent contain two the accent of two well as of one vocative would be lost within if intended to form a compound expression but \i rajana stood at the beginning with urjo napat = 'O propitously bright son a Pada; a Pada, the accentuation would be rajana of strength', as is the case m hotar yavisiha of inaha rtasya gopa, supposing vocatives sukrato. two intended. 2 When the first word of u compound were 4 The very rare exceptions to the rules vocative is an adjective (not a genitive), it given above (a, b) are doubtless due to retains its accent within a Pada; thus vUve the part of the editors or of tra- devasah 'O All-gods', would appear within a errors on Pada as well as at the beginning. dition. 3 This is an example of two distinct io6 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

no havih (m. 28') 'O Agni, enjoy our sacrifice'. Thus the following sentence of six v/ords contains three accented verbs as well as three accented vocatives: hidra, jiva, siirya, jiva, deva, jivata {KSf. xix. 70') 'O Indra, live; O Surya, live; O gods, live'. 4. There are some instances in the RV. of the verb when emphatic, even though not placed at the beginning of the sentence, being accented before the particle id, and even before cand'^; e. g. ddha sma no maghavaii

carkrtdd id (i. 104^) 'then be mindful of us, bounteous one'; nd, deva, bhasdihas cand (vi. 59't) '(him) O gods, ye two never consume'^. B. The accent always rests on the verb of a subordinate clause

(which is almost invariably introduced by the relative ya- and its derivatives, or contains the particles ca and ced 'if, ned 'lest', hi 'for', kuvid 'whether');

e. g. yam yajfidm paribhcir dsi (i. i*) 'what offering thou protectest'; grhfin gaccha grhapdtni ydthajisah (x. 85^*) 'go to the house, that thou be lady

of the house'; indras ca mrldyati no, nd nah pascdd aghdm nasat {i\. 41")

'if Indra be gracious to us, no hurt will thereafter reach us'; vi ced ucchdnty, asvina, usdsah, prd vain brdhmani kardvo bharattte (vii. 72+) 'when the dawns shine forth, O Asvins, the singers offer their prayers to you'; md cirdm

tanutha dpah, net tva . . tdpati siiro arcisa (v. 79?) 'do not long delay thy

work, lest the sun burn thee with his beam'; tvdm Id baladd dsi (iii. 53'*) 'for thou art a giver of strength'; tdm, indra, rnddatn d gahi, kuvin^ nv asya

irpndvaJi (iii. 42^) 'come to this gladdening drink, Indra, (to see) whether

thou mayst enjoy it'. 1. When the first of two clauses, though in form a principal one, is virtually subordinate in sense (being equivalent to one introduced by 'if or 'when'), its verb is occassionally accented; e. g. sdm dsvaparnas cdranti no ndro, ''smdkam, indra, rathino jayantu (vi. 47^') 'when our men winged with steeds come together, may the car-fighters of our side, O Indra, win the victory'. 2. Similarly, but much more frequently, the verb of the first of two clauses which are antithetical in sense, is accented*. The occurrence of correlative words like anyd-anyd, eka-ika, va-va, ca-ca, often makes the antithesis obvious; e. g. prd-prajinye ydnti, pdry anya asate (in. 93) '(while) some go on and on, others sit about'; sdm cajidhdsva jxgne, prd ca bodhaya^enam (VS. XXVII. 2) 'both be kindled, O Agni, and waken this man's knowledge': ud

va sihcddkvam vpa va prnadhvam (vii. 16'') 'either pour out or fill up'. If

the verb of both clauses is the same, it usually appears (as is natural in the circumstances) in the first only; e. g. dvipdc ca sdrvam no rdksa, cdtuspad ydc ca nah svdm (AV. vi. 107') 'protect both every biped of ours and whatever quadruped is our own'.

3. The second clause, on the other hand, accents the verb if it contains an impeiative (with a final sense), and follows a clause with an imperative of i; gam- or ya- 'go'; e. g. eta, dhiyam krndvama (v. 45^) 'come, let us (== that we may) make prayer'; tayam d gahi, kdtivesu sdca piba (vin. 43)

'come quickly, beside the drink thy fill'. Ill, Verbal prepositions.—A. The preposition, which generally precedes, but sometimes follows the verb, being often separated from it by other words.

1 Cp. DELBRUCK23, 3, 4; 26,2; Whitney the verb; cp. Grassmann, sub verbo; Del- 598 a. In the SB. hanta regularly accents BRfJCK 550, end. the verb. 4 This accentuation is more strictly applied 2 Cp. Grassmann, Wb. under id and cana. in B. than in V., and among the Samhitas 3 in the There are only two passages RV. least strictly in the RV. ; cp. Whitney 597 a. (v. 310, 36^) in which kiivid does not accent ;

IV. Nominal Stem Formation. 107

IS regularly accented in principal sentences; e. g. d gamat {1. i^) 'may he come"; jayema sdm yudhi sprdhah (i. 83) 'may we conquer our foes in fight'; ^avam dfa vrajdm vrdhi (i. 10') 'unclose the stable of the kine'; gdmad vaiebhir a sd tiah (i. 53) 'may he come to us with booty'. a. When there are _ two prepositions, both are accented in the RV., being treated as separate words; e. g. upa prd yahi (i. 82*) 'come forth'; pari spaso fii sedire (i. 25^3) 'the spies have sat down around'; upa prdyobhir A gatam (i. 2+) 'come hither with refreshments'; dgne, vi pasya brhatAjibhi raya (III. 23^) 'O Agni, look forth towards (us) with ample wealth'. a. When a immediately follows another preposition (unless it ends in i), it alone IS accented, both being compounded with the verb; e. g. upa^ahi-^ (l. 9110) 'come hither'; samakrnoujivdse (x. 256) 'thou fittest (them) for living'. The general rule, however, is tollowed if the preposition preceding a ends in i; e. g. pretty a tanusva (iv. 44) 'draw (thy bow) against 2. (them)' In the only passage in which it has been noted in com- bination with another preposition preceding it, dva is treated like a: upavasrjaI (x. noi") .J \ I 'pour out' 3.

B. The preposition in subordinate clauses is generally compounded with the verb, it when is regularly unaccented; e. g. ydd . . niddaihah'' (viii. 9^') 'when ye two sit down'. It is, however, often separated from the verb, is and then accented as well as the verb. In this case it is commonly the first word of a Pada, but occasionally comes after the verb; e. g. vi yo mami rdjasi{i. i6ot) 'who measured out the two regions'; yds tastdmbha sdhasa vi jmo dntan (iv-so") 'who with might propped earth's ends asunder'. Occasionally the preposition is separate and accented even when immediately preceding the verb; e. g. yd ahutim pdri ve'da ?idmobki/i (vi. i?) 'who fully knows the offering with devotion'. a. When there are two prepositions, either both are unaccented and

compounded with the verb, or the first only is separate and accented; e. g. yuydm hi, devTr, rtayugbhir dsvaih pariprayathd (iv. 515) 'for ye, O goddesses, proceed around with steeds yoked by eternal order'; sdm ydm aydnti dhendvah (v. 6^) 'to whom the cows come together', ydtra jibhi samndvamahe (viii. 695) 'where we to (him) together shout'. A very rare example of two independent

prepositions in a dependent sentence is prd ydt stota . . . upa girbhir itte (ill. 525) 'when the praiser pours forth laudation to (him) with songs'.

IV. NOMINAL STEM FORMATION.

Grassmann, Worterbuch zum Rig-veda 1687—1738 (list of nominal stems according to alphabetical order of the final letter). — Lindner, Altindische Nominalbildung. Nach den Samhitas dargestellt. Jena 1878. — Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar i 136 — 1245; Roots, Verb-forms, and Primary Derivatives, 1885.

112. The bare root, both verbal and pronominal, is often used as a declinable stem. But much more generally the stem in declension is formed by means of suffixes. These are of two kinds: primary, or

1 There seems to be an exception in goes much further, apparently making accen- dtas cid, indra, na iipa ydhi (VIII. 921°) 'thence, tuation of the second preposition the rule O Indra, come to us', but upa here coming cp. Delbruck p. 48. at the end of a Pada, is used adnominally 3 Cp. Delbruck p. 47, end. with nak, 4 It is not clear why the Pada text 2 The treatment of two prepositions is analyses forms like ny dsTdat (i. 14'?'), ny on the whole the same in the AV. (cp. asiak (Vir. 18"), vy dsthai (11.4') as ni dsldat, Whitney, APr. 185 ff.) and the TS. (cp. ni dstah, vi dsthat. There are about thirty Weber, IS. 13, 62 ff.); but the TS. treats instances of this; cp. Whitney 10S4 a. some other prepositions like a, and the MS. io8 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar. those that are added directly to roots; secondary, or those that are added to stems aheady derivative (pronominal stems being also accounted as such). The distinction between these two kinds is, however, not absolute. Suffixes containing a secondary element sometimes have the appearance and appli- cation of primary suffixes (as -aniya = -an-Tya). Less frequently primary suffixes come to be used as secondary ones; thus the participial suffixes are added not only to the root, but also to primary and secondary conjugation stems as well as to tense stems. These nominal suffixes are sometimes added by means of what looks like and may conveniently be called a connecting

vowel, though it may not be so in origin. Primary suffixes are also added to roots compounded with verbal prefixes ^

I. Primary Nominal Derivation.

113. As regards form, the root when used without suffix usually remains unchanged in respect to its voweP; it is then, however, hable to modification

in two ways: always adding the determinative -t if it ends in -i, u, or -r, and occasionally appearing in a reduplicated form. But before primary suffixes the root usually appears in a strong form: either with Guna of medial or

final vowels, as ved-a- 'knowledge' from Y'^^'^'t sdr-atia- 'running' from Ysr-; or with Vrddhi of final -z, -11, -r and lengthening of medial a, as kar-d- 'making* from Ykr-, grabh-d- 'seizer', from ]/^raM-. a. As regards meaning, there are two classes of primary derivatives: the one expressing abstract action nouns (with an infinitival character), the other concrete agent nouns (with a participial character) used as adjectives or substantives. Other senses are only modifications of these two; as that of the passive participle, which expresses an agent who becomes the recipient of an action. The primary suffixes forming action nouns can also nearly all be used to form agent nouns; and many of those properly forming agent nouns may also form action nouns. Those which properly form action

nouns are: -a, -an, -ana, -anS, -ani, -am, -as, -a, -i, -is, -i, -ika, -us, -tas,

-ti, -tu, -tna, -tha, -thu, -nas, -ni, -nu, -pa, -ma, -man, -mi, -yu, -van, -sas. Those which properly form agent nouns are: -aka, -at or -ant, -ata, -aniya, -asi, -aku, -ana, -in, -istha, -lyams, -u, -uka, -u, -Uka, -ka, -ta, -tar, -tnu, -tra, -tri, -iva, -thi, -na, -tnana, -min, -ya, -ra, -ri, -ru, -la, -li, -lu, -va, -vana, -vaiii, -vanu, -vara, -vas, -vams, -vi, -sa, -sani, -saru, -S7ia, -snu.

Root stems.

114. These stems are used both as action nouns (often in the function of infinitives) and as agent nouns, either substantives or adjectives.

I. Examples of the simple root form are: dyi'ct- f. 'splendour', nft- (AV.) f.

'gesticulation', bi'idh- f. 'awaking'; dd- 'giver', bktd- f. 'destroyer', yi'tj- m. 'companion', spas- m. 'spy'; mdh- 'greaf, vfdh- 'strengthening'. — 2. With root determinative -/: mi-t- f. 'pillar', stu-t- f. 'praise'. — 3. With reduplicated root: cikit- 'wise' {cii- 'observe'), juhit- f. 'sacrificial spoon' {hu- 'offer'), juhii- 'tongue'

{Jiu- 'call'), dadfh-^ 'hearty' (drh- 'be firm'), didyi't- m. 'missile', didyi'i-t- f. • 'missile', 'lightning', sasydd- f. 'running stream' (syand- 'run') and with intensive

I Those chiefly thus used are approxima- 2 That is, the root appears in the weak tely in the order of their frequency: -a, form, in which it is usually stated. -ana, -ti, -tar and -tra, -in, -ya, -van and 3 In dadhfk adv. 'heartily'.

-man, -i, -u, -as; cp. WHITNEY I141 u. 4 Perhaps also gdiiga- f. 'Ganges' if IV. Nominal Stem Formation. Primary Nominal Derivation. 109

reduplication; jogu- 'singing aloud' {gu- ''sound'), pra-neni- 'guiding constandy' {ni- 'lead'), yaviyudh- 'warlike' {yudh- 'fight'), vdmvan- 'desiring', a-susil- (AV.) 'barren' ('not bringing forth'), ddridra- (VS.) 'roving' {dra- 'run') is a transfer to the radical a-stems".

-a : action and agent.

115. A vast number of derivatives is formed with this suffix, before which the root is generally strengthened, but sometimes remains unchanged or is reduplicated. Those formed with Guna are more than twice as numerous as all the rest taken together. Medial a generally remains unchanged. 1. Examples of derivatives with Guna are the following action nouns: dy-a- m. 'course' (z- 'go') hdv-a- m. 'invocation' {hu- 'call'), tdr-a- m. 'crossing' {tr- 'cross'); ved-a- 'knowledge' {vid- 'know'), /Jj-a- 'enjoyment' {jus- 'enjoy'), sdrg-a- 'emission' {srj- 'send forth'); agent nouns : //az'-«'- m. 'boat' [plu- 'float'), megh-d- m. 'cloud' {mih- 'discharge water'), cod-d- 'instigator' {cud- 'incite'). With medial a\ grdbh-a- m. 'seizure' {grabh- 'seize'), srdm-a- m. 'weariness' {sram- 'be weary').

a. In several words thus formed the meaning varies according as the root is accented or the suffix, the word in the former case being nearly always an abstract substantive, m the latter regularly an adjective or an agent noun; thus ardh-a-ra.. 'side', ardh-a- 'half; is-a- m. 'speed', es-d- 'speeding'; c6d-a- m. 'goad', cod-d- m. 'instigator'; var-a- m. 'choice', var-d- m. ('chooser') 'suitor', sds-a- m. 'command', sas-d- m. 'commander', sok-a- m. 'glow', sok-d- (AV.) 'glowing'. 2. Vrddhi of final vowels and lengthening of a': action nouns are

dav-d- (AV.) 'fire' {du- 'burn'), tar-d- (VS.) 'crossing' {if- 'cross'), bhag-d- 'share' {bhaj- 'divide'); agent nouns are nay-d- 'leader' {m- 'lead'), jar-d- 'lover', grabh-d- 'seizer'. 3. Several derivatives are formed from the weak form of the root, the suffix being accented^; thus priy-d- 'dear' {pri- 'please'), sruv-d- m. 'spoon'

{sru- 'flow'), vr-d-^ m. 'troop' {vr- 'surround'), tur-d- 'rapid' {tf- 'cross'); yug-d-n.

'yoke', suc-d- 'bright', krs-d- 'lean' 5.

a. Several derivatives of this type, which occur almost exclusively at the end of compounds, are made from, various tense stems; e. g. -a-saj-a- 'stopping', -iud-d- (AV.) 'impelling', -pas-ya- 'seeing', -inv^d- 'urging', -fr-nd- 'bestowing', -indh-d- 'kindling', -bntv-d- (AV.) 'saying', -pib-a- (AV.) 'drinking', -^'-ayi- 'exciting' 6; y^-j-o- m. 'attainment' (aor. stem oi ji- 'conquer'), nesd- m. 'guidance' (aor. stem of ni- 'lead').

4. A considerable number of derivates are formed from the reduphcated root; thus cacar-d- 'movable', dadhrs-d- 'bold', vavr-a- m. 'hiding' {vr- 'cover), sisay-d- 'strengthening' (//- 'sharpen'), Hindth-a- 'perforation' {snath- 'pierce'). sasr-d- 'flowing' {Ysr-). They are more usually formed directly from the intensive stem or from stems analogously reduplicated; e. g. caksm-d- 'gracious' {ksam- 'forbear'), rerih-d- (AV.) 'continually licking' {rih- 'lick), -rorud-d- (AV.) 'shedding tears' {rud- 'weep'), vevij-d 'quick' {vij- 'dart'); cara-car-d 'far- extending', cala-cal-d- 'unsteady', fani-spad-d- (AV.) 'palpitating' {Yspand-), mari-mri-d- (AV.) 'groping' {mrs- 'feel'), mali-mluc-d- (AV.) 'moving about in

from gd- 'go'; sisu- m. 'child', if from su- on the root as differentiated from kam-d- 'des- 'grow'. iring'; similarly sak-a- 'help' and sdk-d- 'help- 1 jdgat- 'going', living', is an old parti- ful'. ciple present of the reduplicated stem of 3 See Lindner p. 33. gd- 'go'; Whitney, however, thinks (i 147 e) 4 According to Grassmann, f. vra-, that it is made from the reduplicated form 5 Some of the derivatives of this type are jaga- {= ja-gam-) with the root determina- transitions from the root stems to the a-de-

tive -i. clension, especially at the end of compounds. 2 In these words the suffix is almost in- 6 See below. Determinative Compounds,

variably accented ; kdm-a- 'desire' is accented 272. I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

the dark', a kind of demon {mluc- 'set', of the sun), vari-vrt-d- (AV.) 'rolHng'

{vrt- 'turn'), sani-syad-d- (AV.) 'running' ( Ysyand^, sani-sras-d- (AV.) 'decrepit''

{srams- 'fall'), sarT-srp-d- 'crawling' ( Vsrp-).

a. The suffix -a is by far the most frequent one used in forming derivatives from the root with a verbal prefix, being nearly always accented whether the noun ex-

'climbing over', d-dardir-d- 'crushing', iii-iud-d- (AV.) 'rousing', pari-car-a,- (AV. VS.) 'wan- dering', vi-hodh-d- 'wakeful', savi-gir-d- (AV.) 'swallowing', sam-jay-d- 'victorious' '. b. There are many words which have the appearance of ending in this suffix,, though the root cannot be found elsewhere. They include several nouns of plants and animals. Examples are ukhd-'^ (AV.) 'caldron', krodd- (VS. AV.) 'breast', khild- (AV.> 'waste land', nakhd- 'naiV, paisd- 'wing', vamsd- 'reed' 3.

-tt-ka : agent.

116. This suffix, which consists of the primary -a with the secondary -ka

added, is in a few words used as a primary suffix forming agent notms only: abhi-kris-aka- (VS.) 'reviler', piy-aka- (AV.) 'abuser', a class of demon, vadh- aka- (AV.), a kind of reed ('destructive'), sAy-aka- n. 'missile' (!/"«-); also pav-akd- 'purifying', 'bright', which though always written thus is invariably to be pronounced pavakd-''.

-ata : agent.

117. In a few adjectives the primary suffix -a v^ith -id added is attached to the strong form of the root, chiefly with the sense of the gerundive: dars- atd- 'visible', pac-atd- 'cooked', bhar-atd- 'to be tended', yaj-atd- 'to be adored',. raj-atd-^ 'silvery', hary-atd-^ 'desirable'.

-at and -ant : agent.

118. The suffixes -at and -ant are almost restricted to the formation of active participles. The former appears chiefly in the formation of present, participles of the reduplicating class, as ddd-at- 'giving'; also in das-at- 'wor- shipping', sds-at- 'instructing', and the aorist participle ddks-at- and dhdks-at- from dah- 'burn'. There are besides a few substantives originally participles,

which have shifted their accent, formed with -at: vah-dt- f. 'stream', vegh-dt-

(AV. VS.) f. 'barren cow', vagh-dt- m. 'sacrificer', srav-dt- f. 'stream', sasc-dt- m.

'pursuer' 7. The suffix -ant is used to form the active participle of present stems (excepting those of the reduplicating class), of future stems, and aorist. stems. Some of these have become independent adjectives: rli-dnt- 'weak',. pfs-aiit- 'spotted', hrh-dnt- 'great', mah-iint-^ 'great', riis-ant- 'brilliant'; also the substantive d-dnt- m. 'tooth'?, dvay-ant- in d-dvay-ant- (RV^) 'not double- tongued' has the appearance of a participle of a denominative stem from. dvi- 'two'. With the same suffix are formed the two pronominal stems i-y-ant- 'so great' ('making this', /-) and kl-y-ant- 'how great?' ('making what?' ki-).

an- : action and agent,

iig. Few words are formed with this suffix, and in some of them the-

root is doubtful.

1 Cp. Lindner p. 35. 6 Formed from the denominative stem 2 Also in tikha-ccfiid- (RV'.) 'fragile as a of hdri- 'bright'.

pot', f. ukhd: 7 See below. Participial stems in -at, 3 Cp. Lindner p. 33, bottom. 3TI A. 4 -aka- also appears in the Proper Name 8 With lengthened vowel in the strong; nabh-alia-, cases. 5 Probably from the root raj- 'colour'. 9 See below, Participles in -ant, 313. IV. Nominal Stem Formation. Primary Nominal Derivation.

' The only action nouns are the following neuters: /«a/«-a'^- 'greatness', raj-dn- (RV.) 'guidance', gdmbh-an- (VS'.) 'depth'. The infinitives in -s-dn-i (588c) are, however, probably locatives of action nouns formed with -an from aorist stems.

Agent nouns are: uks-dn- m. 'ox', cdks-an- (AV.) n. 'eye', tdks-an- m. ^carpenter', pus-dn- la.., N. of a god, flih-dn- (VS. AV.) m. 'spleen', tnajj-dn- m. 'marrow', murdh-dn- m. 'head', raj-an- m. 'king', ifs-an- adj. 'virile', m. 'bull', sdgh-an- (TS. in. 2. i^) 'vulture'.

a. There are also several words formed with -an the root and original meaning of which are mostly doubtful: 1. yu-v-an- m. 'youth', yds- an- f. 'maiden', sz/-dn- m. 'dog'; 2. defective neuternouns; ah-an- 'eye', as-an- 'blood', asth-dn- 'bone', dh-an- 'day', ds-an- 'face', tid-dn-^ 'water', udh-an- udder', dadh-dn- 'sour milk', dos-dn- (AV.) 'arm', yak-dn- 'liver', idk-an- (AV. VS.) 'dung', sakih-dn- 'thigh' ; 3. stems occurring at the end ot compounds only: -gm-an- and -jm-dn- (also used independently) 'course', -div-an-^ 'playing'; bhv-an-', 'being', -hi-an-S 'growing' (?) 6.

-ana : action and agent. 120. With the suffix -ana are formed a large number of derivatives with both types of meaning. The root generally shows Guna, sometimes Vrddhi, occasionally no change, rarely a weakened vowel. These derivatives very often appear with a preposition, such verbal compounds coming next in frequency to those formed with the suffix -a.

1. With Guna are formed neuter action nouns; e. g. kdr-ana- 'deed",

cdy-ana-{hN.) 'piling', dh-ana- 'play', bhoj-ana- 'enjoyment', vdrdh-ana- 'increase', ved-ana- 'possession', hdv-ana- 'invocation', adhi-vi-kdrt-ana- 'cutting off'; also agent nouns; e. g. the adjectives kar-and- 'active', cet-ana- 'visible', cod-ana- (AV.)' 'impelling', vi-mSc-ana- 'releasing'; from a dupHcated (intensive) stem:

mgar-and- (VS.) 'waking' ( Yi^')- 2. With Vrddhi^ or lengthened medial a are formed neuter action nouns, sometimes with a concrete sense; e. g. ut-pAr-ana- (AV.) 'transporting', upa-vds- 'clothing', '6j:q5s' 'proclamation', ana- {AY.) , pra-vac-ana- sad-ana- 'stsX'; also agent nouns; e.g. sain-srav-ana- (AV.) 'flowing together'; -iriz-a/za- 'driving away', msd-ana- 'gladdening', -vah-ana- 'conveying', -spas-ana-'^ (AV.) 'spying'; svdd-ana- m. 'sweetener'. 3. With unchanged vowel (final -a and medial a) are formed neuter action nouns; e. g. ddna- 'giving', ud-ydna- (AV.) 'going out', ni-dhdna- 'receptacle', rdks-ana- 'protection', sad-ana- 'seat', ava-pra-bhrdms-ana- ^° (AV. XIX. 39^) 'slipping down', prSn- ana- 'breathing' {Yan-); anomalously formed directly from a preposition, sdm-ana- 'meeting'; also agent nouns; &. g. tdp- a?ia- 'burning', a-krdm-ana- (VS.) 'stepping upon', sam-gdm-ana- 'assembling'. 4. With weak vowel are formed very few derivatives: either neuter action nouns partly with concrete meaning: krp-dna- 'misery', pfs-ana- 'tenderness', bhi'tv-ana- 'being', vrj-dna- and (once) vfj-ana- 'enclosure', -si'iv-

a«ia:- (AV.) 'procreation'; or agent nouns: krp-and- {ASf.) 'miserable', tur-dna-

1 Used in the instrumental only. 7 In the RV. only as final member of 2 From ud- 'be wet'. compounds, rsi-codana- etc. 3 From dlv- 'play' in pratl-dlv-an- 'adver- 8 In this type the only vowel appearing sary at play'. in the radical syllable is a. vi-b/ivdn- 9 \n prati-spasana- (AV. viu. + From bhu- 'be' in vi-bhvan- and J")- 'far-reaching'. 10 See Whitney's note on navaprabhrdiu- 5 In the Proper Names matari-sv-an- and iana- in his translation of AV. XIX.398 and rji-iv-an-, cp. Wackernagel 21, p. 125, Weber's erroneous interpretation of this as- bottom, and above, p. 95, u. ". 'descent of the ship'. o -kaman- in ni-kaman- 'desirous' is a transition form for the «-stem ni-kdma-. 112 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

'speeding'; m. I'lr-ana- 'ram' {vr- 'cover'), kir-dna- m. 'dust' ('scattering'), vfs-ana- (VS.) 'testicle'.

-ana : action and agent.

121. With this suffix (accented on the first or the last syllable) are formed some feminine action nouns (like the neuters in -and) which sometimes have a concrete meaning: as-and- 'missile', jar-and- 'old age', dyot-and- 'brilliance', ma7i-and- 'devotion', rodh-and- ('obstruction') 'dam', svet-and- 'daybreak', has-ana- ^laughter'. kap-and- 'caterpillar' and ras-and- 'rein' have the appearance of being formed with this suffix, though the radical parts are not found in independent use. Accented on the penultimate syllable: arh-dna- 'merit', jar-ana- 'dry wood'(?), bark-ana- 'might', bhand-dna- 'brilliance', mamh-dna- ^readiness', meh-dna- 'abundance', vaks-dna- 'belly', vadh-dna- 'slaughter', van- ana- 'desire'. The formation of yos-dnd- (RV'.), usually yos-ana-, 'woman' is

obscure '. With the suffix -ana- is also formed (though irregularly accented on

the radical syllable) /.r/-a«3- ' 'fight' from a root not found in independent use^. The suffix -ana also forms feminine agent nouns (adjectives) corresponding to masculines in accented -ana-; thus tur-dna-'- 'speeding', tvar-ana- (AV.) "hasting', spand-and- (AV.) 'kicking'.

a. Derivatives in -ana with verbal prefixes, if compounded with other -v^ordsj^ form

their f. in -ana- ; thus an-apa-vac-ana- (AV.) 'not to be ordered away', siifa-vanc-ana- and siipa-sM-f-ana- 5 [K^J.) 'easy of approach', sad-vi-dhaiia- 'forming an ox&^x {vi-dhana-^ of six'.

-a/7/ : action and agent.

122. This suffix, accented either on the first or the last syllable, is added to either the strong or the weak form of the root. 1. It forms feminine action nouns, sometimes with concrete sense; thus as-dni- 'missile', is-dni- 'impulse', ksip-ani- 'blow', dyot-ani- 'brilliance', dham-dni-

'piping', vart-ani- 'tra.cY , sar-dni- 'va]vLxy' ; also /izra«z'- 'noise' (?) in the compound jarani-prd- 'moving with noise' (?).

2. It forms agent nouns, both m. f. substantives and adjectives; thus

ar-diii- f. 'fire-stick', caks-dni- m. 'enlightener', car-dni- 'movable', 'active', tar-dni- 'swift', dhvas-dni- 'sprinkling', vaks-dni- m. 'strengthener'; also in the

compounds dn-ars-ani-, N. of a demon, dj-ani- (AV.) f. 'stick for driving' {a-aj-) and tidani-mdt- 'abounding in waves' (ud-ani- 'undulating' from ud- %e wet').

a. From the reduplicated root: papt-ani- {pat- 'fly') in su-papt-ani- f.

'swift flight'. From aorist stems: cars-ant- 'active' {car- 'move'), f. pi. 'men',

/fln--a'«2- 'crossing' (//--'cross'), j'iZ/5j-(z';z2- 'overcoming' ( "iAj^/^-). From desiderative stems: ruruks-dni- 'willing to destroy' {ruj- 'break'), sisas-dni- 'eager to win'

( Ysa-), a-suhiks-dni- 'gleaming forth' {sue- 'shine').

-am : action and agent.

123. This suffix is the feminine form corresponding to the action and agent nouns formed with -ana firom the strengthened or unreduced root*, with or without verbal prefix; thus -cdd-ani-'' 'vagiug^ {cod-ana-), pes-ani- (AV.)

'well-formed' {pes-ana-), proks-ani- (VS. AV.) f. 'sprinkling water', pra-jndni-

1 Other stems with the same meaning 4 This is the only example of such

are : yos-an-, ySs-a-,yds4i-. The rootis probably accentuation. yu- 'unite'. 5 That is, su--upa-vahc-ana- and su-ufa- 2 The suffix -and never otherwise occurs sarp-and'. when the root is accented. 6 See -ana, 12.0, I — 3. 3 Only as a nominal stem prt- 'fight'. 7 In -codani- 'stimulating devotion'. IV. Nominal Stem Formation. Primary Nominal Derivation. 113

(AV.) 'easily known', spar-ani- (AV.) 'preserving'; abhi-sav-anJ- (AV.) 'pressing implement', vi-dhdr-ani- (AV.) 'preserving'. a. In some (partly obscure) words the accent here shifts from the radical vowel to the^ final of the suffix : ars-ant- (AV.) 'piercing pain', cet-ard- (AV.) 'visible' {ck-ana-), tap-ant- 'heat' {tap-ana- 'burning'), ted-ani- (AV. VS.) 'blood', pri-ani- 'tender' \pfi-ana- 'tenderness'), vrj-ani- 'enclosure' {vrj-dna- and vfj'-ana-).

-an-7ya : gerundive.

124. This is a new compositive suffix beginning to be attached directly to the root in the formation of the gerundive. It is based on the primary suffix -ana of neuter action nouns extended with the secondary adjective suffix -Tya. There are two examples in the AV.: upa-jTv-aniya- 'to be subsisted on', and a-mantr-aniya- 'to be addressed'.

-ar : agent.

125. This suffix is found in a very few words: us-dr- f. 'dawn', dev-ar- m.

'husband's brother', nd-nand-ar- I. 'husband's sister' '-

-as : action and agent.

126. This suffix forms a large class of neuter action nouns (which some- times acquire a concrete sense) accented on the root, and a small class of agent nouns (mostly adjectives) accented on the suffix. Some words belong to one class or the other according to the accent. The root generally takes Guna, and medial a is sometimes lengthened, while the vowel is reduced in a few instances.

I. Examples of action nouns are: with Guna, /roy-aj- 'pleasure' ( l//rr-), ( srdv-as- 'fame' (lAjra-), kdr-as- 'deed' '/'i^r-), cet-as- 'brilliance' (!/'«/-), tij-as- 'splendour' {Ytij-^, doh-as- 'milking' {Yduh-Y. With medial a unchanged: dv-as- 'aid', tdf-as- 'heat', prdth-as- 'breadth', vdc-as- 'speech'; and with partially or wholly concrete meaning, cdks-as- 'lustre', 'eye', mdn-as- 'thought', 'mind', sdr-as- 'lake'. "With lengthened a: -vac-as-^, vss-as- 'covering', 'garment', vAh-as- 'offering', -svad-as- 'flavour' in prd-svadas- 'agreeable'; and from roots not in independent use: paj-as- 'briUiance' zxiA path-as-'^ 'path'. 'With reduced vowel: ur-as- 'breast', juv-as- 'speed' (beside j'dv-as-), mfdh-as- 'contempt', sir-as- 'head'; also vip-as- 'inspiration' in the compounds vipas-cit- 'inspired' and vipo-dha- 'bestowing inspiration'; iras- 'anger' in the denominative iras-yd- 'be angry'; hur-as- 'deceit' in huras-dt- 'plotting mischief. Perhaps also the adverbs (with shift of accent) tir-ds 'across' and mith-ds 'mutually'. a. To roots ending in -a the suffix is added direct in bhas-S n. 'light' {bha- 'shine') and -dds-S 'giving' 6 (ydd-). jiias- 'kinsman' and mas- 'moon' are probably also formed with the suffix -as, but being masculines were most likely agent nouns in origin: ma-ds- = 'measurer' (?«a- 'measure'). The suffix seems to be added with an intervening y in -hay-as 'agility' 7 if it is derived from ka- 'leave' 8, while in dhay-as- n. 'enjoyment' and -gdy-as- 'song' 9 the y probably belongs to the root'o.

1 svasar- 'sister' in probably an old com- 5 Often to be read as dissyllables, bhaas- pound in which -sar represents a root; cp. and daas: Brugmann, Grundriss 2, 8, note. 6 In -das- 'giving' and -dhas- 'placing' an 2 The word hes-as- 'missile' is perhaps -as has been formed probably by a mis- formed from the aorist stem of hi- 'impel'. understanding of the N. sing, -dd-s and -dhd-s. vi-hdyas- 3 In vi-vdcas- (AV.) 'speaking variously' 7 In 'vigorous' and sdrva-kdyas- and sa-vdcas- (AV.) 'speaking similarly'. (AV.) 'having all strength'. 8 4 According to Oldenberg, ZDMG. S4. 6°? But it may be a derivative of hi- this word means 'home' and is perhaps formed 'impel'. with a suffix -thas horn pa- 'protect'; accord- 9 From dhe- 'suck' and gai- 'sing'; cp. ing to SlEG, Gurupujakaumudl 97, it means above 27 a. 10 pT-v-as- n. 'fat' {pi- 'swell') the w ay 'food', and is derived from /a- 'drink'. In m Indo-arische Philologie. I. 4. 114 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

2. Agent nouns in -as, mostly adjectives, correspond in several instances to action nouns accented on the root. These are ap-ds- 'active' {dp-as- 'work'), tar-ds- (VS^) 'quick' (tdr-as- 'quickness'), tyaj-ds- m. 'descendant' {tydj-as- 'abandonment'), duv-ds- 'stirring' {duv-as- 'worship'), mah-ds- 'great' {md/i-as- 'greatness'). The derivative tav-ds- occurs both as an adjective 'strong' and without change of accent' as a m. substantive 'strength'. A few others have no corresponding action noun: tos-ds- 'bestowing', dhvar-ds- 'deceiving', yaj-ds- 'offering', vedh-ds- 'worshipper', ves-ds- (AV.) 'neighbour'; and from a denomi- native stem mrgay-ds- (AV.) 'wild animal'^. a. There are a few substantives accented on the suffix and seemingly never neuter, which are allied to the neuter action nouns in meaning, some being abstract, others concrete in sense. The change of accent may be due to change of gender^. Thus raks-ds- m. occurs beside rdks-as- n. both meaning 'demon'. There also occur jar-ds- m. 'old age', bhiy-ds- m. 'fear', tves-ds-'' 'impulse', hav-ds- 'invocation'; us-ds- f. 'dawn' may have been an agent noun originally; dos-ds- (AV.) f. (?) beside dos-d- 'night' may be due to parallelism with us-ds-. The stem upds- 'lap' (the gender of which is uncertain, as it occurs only in the locative singular) may have been formed under the influence of upd-stha-^ m. 'lap'.

a. A few Proper Names are formed with the suffix -as; thus nodh-as-; arcananas- is a compound of anas- 'wain', possibly also bhaldnds-. ap-saras-(> f. 'nymph' is perhaps a compound ('moving in the waters'), angiras-, a name of Agni, has the appearance of being formed with this suffix, but the -s is perhaps secondary?.

-asi : action and agent.

127. This suffix, which is an extension of -as with -/, forms a couple of action nouns with concrete sense, and a few agent nouns: dhasi- m.

'drink' {dhe- 'suck') and dhasi- f. 'abode'; at-as'i- m. 'beggar', dharn-asi- 'strong', san-asl- 'victorious'.

-a : action.

128. By far the greatest proportion of words in -a consists of secondary feminine adjectives corresponding to masculines and neuters in -a.

There is, however, also a considerable number of feminine action nouns of an independent character, formed by adding -a sometimes to the root, but usually to secondary conjugation stems (desiderative, causative, denominative). Thus is-d- (AV.) 'dominion', nind-d- (AV.) 'blame'; jigis-S- 'desire to win', bhiks-d- (AV.) 'begging', virts-d-^ 'desire to frustrate'; gamay-d-^ (AV'.) 'causing to go'; asvay-d- 'desire for horses', apasy-d- 'activity', urusy-a- 'readiness to help', jtvanasy-d- (TS. 11. 3. io^-3) 'desire of life', sukratuy-d- 'skill'.

a. This suffix has the appearance of being added to a reduplicated stem xajangh-a- 1" 'leg' and jihv-a- 'tongue'; it may also be contained in the very obscure word snsd-^'^ (AV'.). have been inserted owing to the influence but owing to the accent it is probably oi pi-van- adj. 'fat'. masc. 1 Whitney 1152, 2 e, erroneously, tavas- 5 According to Grassmann, however, 'strength'. updstha- probably = iipds-stha-; cp. 81, 2 a. 2 The suffix is probably contained in 6 See Macdonell, Vedic Mythology 47, a-han-as- 'wanton', but the derivation is note 3; but cp. PlscHEL, VS. 3, 197. obscure, Cp. FrShde, BB. 21, 321 —330. 7 Cp. Brugmann, Grundriss 2, p. 188. 3 The dative infinitives from stems in -as 8 From vi-Trtsa- desiderative of rdh- are sometimes accented on the root, but 'prosper'. usually on the suffix (105 a). This may indicate a 9 The causative stem used in the forma- difference of gender, the former being neuter, tion of the periphrastic perfect. the latter masculine. 10 Cp. Brugmann, Grundriss 2, p. 106, 4 As tves-ds- and hav-ds- occur in the top. I' I. sing, only, the gender is uncertain, See Whitney's note on AV. i, ii^. ;

IV. Nominal Stem Formation. Primary Nominal Derivation. 115

-aku : agent.

129. This very rare suffix seems to have been limited to the formation of agent nouns. It appears in mrday-aku- 'gracious' (formed from a causative stem), pfd-aku- (AV. VS.)' 'adder', iksv-aku-, N. of a man.

-ana : agent.

130. This suffix forms a middle participle^ from the present (455, 461, 4^7) 473) 479)) the perfect (493) and (in the form of -s-and) from the aorist tense stems (527). It also appears in the formation of a few adjectives and substantives, a preceding u always taking Guija. Such adjectives are: tdkav-ana- 'speeding' (beside tdk-u- and tdk-va-), bhrgav-ana- 'beaming' (beside bhfgu- m.), vdsav-ana- 'possessing wealth' (vdsu-), urdhva-s-and- 'being erect' (formed like an aorist participle from urdhvd- 'upright'). There are also the Proper Names dpnav-ana-, cydv-ana-, pfthav-ana-; also cydvat-ana- which looks as if formed by adding -ana to the active

present participle stem of cyii- 'fall'. Of doubtful derivation are the substantives

pdrs-ana- m. 'abyss' and ruj'ana-^ f. 'river' (i. 32*).

-/ : action and agent.

131. With this suffix are formed numerous feminine action nouns, agent nouns (adjectives and masculine substantives), and a few neuters of obscure etymology 5. The root appears in various forms: sometimes with Guna, Virddhi or lengthened a, generally with unchanged or weak vowel, often reduplicated. Before the suffix a final radical palatal regularly appears (not the original guttural). In many of these derivatives the root is not traceable elsewhere. The accent is so fluctuating that no general rule can be stated. The meaning is often greatly specialised. 1. Examples of action nouns are: with Guna, rSp-i (AV.) 'pain',

hc-i (AV.) 'heat'; with lengthened a: aj'-i- m. f. 'race', grdh-i- 'seizure', dhraj-i- 'course'; with unchanged vowel: san-i- 'gain'; with weak vowel: tvis-i- 'brilliance', krs-i- 'tillage', ri'tc-i- (AV.) 'brightness'. 2. Examples of agent nouns are: with Guna, ar-i- 'devout', arc-i- m. 'beam'; with Vrddhi, kirs-i (VS.) 'drawing'; with lengthened vowel

-jani-^ f. 'wife', sar-i- f. 'arrow' (RV^), a kind of bird (VS. TS.), da?-i- (AV.) 'poisonous matter'; also in a few words of obscure etymology, drap-i- m.

'mantle', nabh-i- f. 'navel', pan-i- m. 'hand', ras-i- m. 'heap'; with unchanged vowel: h'ld-i- 'playing', granth-i- m. 'knot', mdh-i- 'great'; with weak vowel:

siic-i- 'bright', grbh-i- (AV.) 'container', bhfm-i- 'lively' (beside bhrm-i- f. 'lively motion'). From the reduplicated root, which nearly always has a weak or reduced radical vowel, are formed with ordinary reduplicative vowel: ctkit-i-^ (SV.) 'understanding', cdkr-i- 'active', jdghr-i- 'sprinkling about' {ghr-), pdpr-i- 'bestowing abundantly', babhr-i- 'carrying', vavr-i- m. 'covering', sdsr-i- 'speeding', susv-i- 'pressing'; yuyudh-i- 'warlike', vivic-i- 'appropriating' {Yvyac-);

1 It occurs in the RV. only as the 4 For this word occurring in the form of '. first member of a compound in pfdaku- rujanas see p. 59, note sanu- 'having a surface like that of a 5 See Grassmann, Worterbuch r7l8f. snake'. Lindner p. 55—58. 6 At the end of compounds beside the 2 See Lindner p. 53 — 55. 3 apnana- seems to be an irregular present independent jani: participle of o^- 'obtain' formed from the stem 7 Various reading for the cikit-t'i- of the Sp-nd- instead of ap-nu-. RV. 8* ii6 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

'go'), jdghfi-i- 'striking' han-), sdsn-i- 'vfinning' jdgur-i- jdgmi- 'hastening' {gam- ( Y ; 'conducting' (l/^^-), tdtur-i- 'victorious' {Y^P')> pdpur-i- and pupur-i- (SV.) 'bestowing abundantly' {Vpf-) beside pdpr-i; with lengthened or strong reduplicative vowel: tdtrp-i- 'gladdening', dddhrs-i- 'bold', v&vah-i- 'driving swiftly', sasah-i- 'victorious'; ttituj-i- 'speeding', tutuj-i- m. 'stimulator', yiiyuv-i-

'driving away', y&yudh-i- 'warlike'; jarbhdr-i- 'nourishing'' ( lAiJ/^r-) '. The weak reduplicated present stem appears in dad-i- 'giving' and dddh-i- 'bestowing'; from similar stems (appearing in the perfect) are formed /«/-/ 'drinking' {Ypd-)

and yay-i 'speeding' ( Yys-}. a. There are only about half a dozen neuters formed with the suffix -i, nearly all being obscure in origin. They are dis-i- 'eye', dsth-i- (AV. VS.) 'bone', dddh-i- 'sour milk', sdm-i- 'toil' {sam- 'work'); and with Vrddhi hird-i- 'heart'. b. The root is sometimes compounded with verbal prefixes in these derivatives, the suffix being then usually accented; thus a-j&n-i- f. 'birth',

vi-vavr-i- m. 'opening', sam-tan-i- f. 'harmony', 'music', a-yaj-i- 'bringing near by offerings', a-mur-i- m. 'destroyer', ni-jaghn-i- 'striking down', para-dad-i- 'delivering over', vi-sasah-i- 'victorious', vy-anas-i-^ 'pervading'. c. From dha- 'put' is derived the stem -dhi- which is used in forming many m. compounds; e. g. antar-dhi- (AV.) 'concealment', ud-dhi- (AV.), part of a car, ni-dh{- 'treasure', pari-dhi- 'fence'. From stha- 'stand' is similarly

formed -sthi- in prati-sthi- f. 'resistance'. There is here some doubt as to whether we have a reduced form of the root (as in dhi-ta-) or displacement of the radical vowel by the very frequent suffix -i. The latter alternative is perhaps the more probable owing to the almost invariable accentuation of the i and the occurrence of a stem like prati-sthi- 'resistance' beside prati- sthd- 'standpoint'.

-in : agent.

132. The very frequent secondary suffix -in seems sometimes to have the value of a primary suffix, exclusively, however, at the end of compounds; thus -ad-in- 'eating', -«•-/«- (AV.) 'seeking', -tod-in- 'piercing', d-n&m-in- 'unbending', -vySdh-in- (AV.) 'piercing'; from a present stem -as-nuv-in- (VS.) 'reaching'; from an aorist stem -saks-in-^ overpowering {Y^ah-); from a reduplicated '4 stem -yay-in- 'going'

'istha : agent.

133' With this suffix attached to the root is formed the superlative with an adjectival sense. The root is regularly accenteds, i and u taking

Guna, while a remains unchanged, though in two or three instances it is strengthened with a nasal. Roots in -a combine that vowel with the initial -i

of the suffix to e, which, however, is usually to be read as two syllables. About fifty superlatives formed with this suffix occur in the Sarnhitas. Examples are: ndy-istha- 'leading in the best manner' {ni- 'lead'), jdv-istha- 'quickest' (Ju- 'speed'), ved-istha- 'procuring most' {jjid- 'find'), ioc-istha- 'most brilliant' (sue- 'shine'); ydj-istha- 'sacrificing best'; bdmh-istha- 'most abundant' (bamh-

1 The words bdmbhar-i- (VS.) m., a soma- + In ni-yay-in- 'passing over'. Cp. Lindner guarding genius, karkar-i- f. 'lute', dundubk-i- p. 59; Whitney 1183 a. m. 'drum' may be onomatopoetic in origin. 5 Except two or three times jyestka- and 2 From the perfect stem an-as- of ai- kan-istha- (see above p. 83, 14); and when 'attain'. the superlative is compounded with a prefix, 3 In pra-saks-in- 'victorious'. which then has the accent. \

IV. Nominal Stem Formation. Primary Nominal Derivation. 117

'make firm'), mdmh-istha- 'most liberal' {mah- 'be great'); jyhtha- 'greatest' and jyesthd- 'eldest' {jya- 'overpower'), dhhtha- 'bestowing the most' ( Ydha-), ySstha- fastest' 'going ( !/>«-) a. In many instances these superlatives attach themselves in meaning to derivative adjectives, being formed from the root which the latter contain; thus os-istha-"- (TS. i. 6. i23) beside 6sa-m 'quickly', bdrh-istha- 'greatest' beside brh-dnt- 'great', vdr-istha- 'choicest' {vr- 'choose') beside vdr-a- 'choice', sadh-istha- 'straightest' beside sadh-u- 'straight'. In a few cases the suffix is added to the derivative form of the root which appears in the adjective; thus As-istha- {KS[\) 'swiftest' beside as-u- (from as- 'reach'); and in ndv-istha- 'newest' the suffix is attached to the radical element in ndv-a-'' 'new" (and not directly to the root from which that word may be derived). b. In some cases the root is compounded with a verbal prefix or other indeclinable; thus d-gam-istha- 'coming best', d-sram-istha- 'never tiring', idtn-bhav-istha-^ 'most beneficial'. a. There are some irregularities in the formation of this superlative. Thus hhu- retains its vowel unchanged, adding the suffix with an intervening -y. bhu-y-isiha- 'greatest'; the roots j!>?-J- and irl- are treated as if they ended in -a: presfha- 'dearest', iresfha- 'most glorious'; pdr-s-isfha- 'taking across best' is made from an aorist stem of pr- 'cross'. The abnormal accentuation of jyesfhd- 'eldest' is doubtless intended to differentiate its meaning from jyistha- 'greatest'. The use of kan-isthd- 'youngest' is parallel to that of the formers.

-is : action.

134. This suffix forms a dozen neuter action nouns, mostly used in a concrete sense. Though the root takes Guna, the suffix is accented except in three instances. The words thus formed are: arc-is- 'flame', am-is-^ 'raw flesh', krav-is- 'raw flesh', chad-is- 'cover', chard-is- 'protection', j'yot-is- 'light', barh-ts- 'straw', roc-is- 'light', vart-is- 'track', vydih-is- 'course' (?), soc-is- 'flame', sarp-is- 'melted butter', hav-is- 'oblation'. a. Besides these av-is- appears for av-as- 'aid' and mah-is- for mdh-as- 'greatness' in a few derivatives: avis-ydnt- 'helping readily', avis-yd- 'desire', avis-yt'i- 'desirous'; mdhis-vant- 'great'; and with inorganic -s tuvi-s- 'might', suci-s- 'flame', su-rabhi-s- 'fragrant' for iuvi-, s'uci-, surabhi- in a few derivatives: tuvis-mant- 'mighty', sucis-mant- (only voc.) 'brilliant', surabhis-tama- 'very fragrant'.

-7: action and agent.

135. This suffix, besides its secondary use in the formation of feminines, chiefly adjectives, from m. and n. stems in -a, -i, -u, -r, as well as various consonant stems (201), seems to be primary in forming a few independent feminine action and agent nouns. Such are deh-i- 'rampart', nad-i- 'stream', nand-i- 'joy', pSs-i- (RV.) 'swaddling clothes' (?), ves-i- 'needle', sdc-i- 'power', sdm-t- and sim-i- 'work'; seemingly from an aorist stem {yvah-^ vaks-i- (RV.) 'flame'. There are also about a dozen masculines: ah-i- 'serpent', upav-i- (VS.) 'encouraging', daks-i- (RV'.)^ 'flaming', prav-i- 'attentive', dus-prav-i-

1 In the compound osistha-davan- 'giving 5 kan-istha- 'smallest' appears in books v immediately'. and VI oif' the TS. 2 Probably from a demonstrative root nu- 6 This word, which occurs in the L. sing, which appears in nic 'now', nu-iana- -present'. form dmis-i only, is given as m. in BR., pw., 3 This superlative is formed under the and Grassmann, but why it should not be influence of the positive sam-bhu- as the in- like all the rest a neuter, is not clear. dependent superlative of bhu- is bhu-y-istha-. 7 Only voc. daksi, Pada dhaksi-, x. 14 18. 4 The regular form bhav-htha- occurs in Cp. p. 119, note 5. combination with sam-. ii8 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

'unfriendly', su-prav-i- 'very attentive', rath-i- 'charioteer', d-raih-i- 'not a charioteer'; and the Proper Names ndm-i- and pfth-T-'^.

-ika : action and agent.

136. This suffix forms a few neuter substantives and some adjectives: thus dn-ika- n. 'face', dfs-ika- n. 'aspect', mrd-ikd- n. 'grace', a-sar-Tka- (AV.) n. 'rheumatic pains'; -rj-Tka-^ 'beaming', dfbh-tka- m., N. of a demon, vrdh- ikd- m. 'increaser', vi-sar-ika- (AV.) m., a kind of disease; from a reduplicated

stem: par-phar-ika- m. 'filler'.

-Tyatps : agent.

137. This suffix is used in forming comparatives, being added to the root in the same way as the superlative suffix -istha (133). At least 40 of these derivatives^ occur in the Samhitas. Examples are: jdv-tyams- 'quicker', mdmh-Tyams- 'more liberal', ydj-iyams- 'sacrificing better', tej-iyams- 'sharper', vcd-iyams- 'procuring more', yodh-Tyams- 'fighting better', preyams-^ 'dearer'

iVpri-), sreyams-^ ( yiri-) 'more splendid', -stheyams- 'lasting' (V^J'^/^a-). Connected in sense with the corresponding positive are dn-tyams- (AV.) 'smaller', beside dim- 'minute', sds-iyams- 'more frequent', beside sds-vani- 'constant'; and from a derivative form of the root tikm-iyams- (AV.)^ 'sharper', beside tiksnd- 'sharp' {tij- 'be sharp'). a. Beside the usual form in -Tyams- there appear some half dozen

comparatives made with a shorter form of the suffix -yams : tdv-yams- beside tdv-iyams- 'stronger', ndv-yams- beside ndv-iydms- 'new', pdfi-yams- beside pdn- tyams- 'more wonderful', bhii-yams-^ '(becoming) more', 'greater', beside bhdv- tyams- 'more plentiful', rdbh-yams- beside rabh-iyams- (VS.) 'more violent', sdh-yams- beside sdh-iyams- 'stronger'; j'yd-ySms- 'greater', 'older', and sdn-yams- 'older' {sdna- 'old') appear without an alternative form beside them. b. With verbal prefixes or particles: vi-kled-iydms- (AV.) 'moistening more', pdri-svaj-iydms- (AV.) 'clasping more firmly', prdti-cyav-Tyams- 'pressing closer against'; d-stheyams- 'not enduring'.

-u : agent.

138. This suffix forms a considerable number of agent nouns, both adjectives and substantives. The latter are chiefly masculines, but there are also several feminines and neuters. The suffix is usually accented. The root is generally weak, but sometimes shows Vrddhi, least often Guna; it also occasionally appears in a reduplicated form. Medial a usually remains

unchanged, but is sometimes lengthened; occasionally it is nasalized or appears as e. Final -a adds an intervening y, but is occasionally dropped. Gutturals only (not palatals) appear before this suffix.

I. Examples of adjectives are: ur-i'i- 'wide', rj-i'i- 'straight', prth-u-

'broad', mrd-i'i- (VS.) 'soft', vidh-u- 'solitary'; jay-i't- 'conquering' (y^V-), dar-i'i.- 'splitting' iydr-); say-it- 'lying' (V/r-), ciJdt-u- 'shining' {Ycit-), jigv-t'i- 'victorious', sisn-u- 'ready to give' {^san-y-, tak-u- 'swift', tan-u- 'thin',

1 See below 375 B; Lindner p. 80; from the adjective stem papa-, the radical Whitney 355 b. element of which is uncertain. 2 As final member of a few compounds, 6 With the radical vowel unchanged as as bha-rjTka- 'light shedding'. in the superlative. 3 See Lindner p. 155; Whitney 466 — 7 Some other words have the appearance 470. of being reduplicated: babhr-u- 'brown', 4 The roots prT- and srl- being treated as a-rdr-u- 'hostile' {rd- 'give'); nialimlu- (VS.) ending in -a: pra-lyims- and sra-iyanis- as seems to be a mutilated form of malimlucd- in the superlative. (AV.) 'robber'. 5 In the TS. pdp-Tyd»ts- is formed directly IV. Nominal Stem Formation. Primary Nominal Derivation. 119

tAp-u- 'hot', as-u- 'swift' {as- 'reach'); amh-u- 'narrow'; cer-u- 'active' {car- 'move'); dhd-y-ic-'^ 'thirsty'j pa-y-u- 'protecting'; y-i'c- 'going' (!/>«-)='; reku- 'empty' {Yric-).

2. Examples of substantives are: m. grh-u- 'beggar', rip-ii- 'cheat'; pipr-u-, N. of a demon; ds-u- 'life', mdn-u- 'man', pad-u- 'foot', bah-i'i- 'arm', aitts-tl- 'filament', va-y-u- 'wind'; f. h-u- (also m.) 'arrow', sindh-u- (also m.) 'river', dhdn-u- 'sandbank', pdrs-u- 'rib', Mti-u- 'jaw'; n. ay-u 'life', jan-u- 'knee', tdl-u- (VS.) 'palate', trdp-u- (AV. VS.) 'tin', ddr-u- (also m.) 'wood', sdn-u (also m.) 'summit'; with syncope, ks-u- 'food' {ghas- 'eat'); with redu- plication, tl-ta-ii- 'sieve'. a. In a few of these derivatives the root appears with a prefix: upa-y-u- (TS. I. I. I') 'approaching', ni-cer-ii- 'ghding', pra-may-u- (AV.) 'liable to destruction', pari-tatn-u- (AV.) 'surrounding', sdm-vas-u- 'dwelling together'; ab/iis-u-i m. 'rein', vi-kUnd-u- (AV.) m. a kind of disease. 139. There is besides a large class of agent nouns formed with -u not directly from the root but from tense or secondary conjugation stems. 1. From present stems are formed: tany-u- 'thundering' {tanya-ti 'roars'), bhind-i't-m.. 'destroyer' (bhind-dnti 'they split'), -vind-u-^ 'finding' {vindd-ti 'finds'); from an aorist stem ddks-u-^ and dhdks-u- 'burning'. 2. From desiderative steins are formed i-yaks-u- 'desirous of sacrificing' cikits-u- (AV.) 'cunning' cit-), Jigis-ii ( VO"?/-)j ( \f 'desirous of winning' ( yyV-), jighats-u- (AV.) 'greedy' {ghas- 'eat'), titiks-u- (AV.) 'patient', dits-u- 'ready to give' (l/'^a-), didfks-u-^ (vii. 86^) 'eager to see' {Ydrs-), didhis-n- 'wishing

to obtain' ( Yd/ia-), dips-u- 'wishing to harm' ( Y^abh-), ninits-u- 'wishing to revile', blbhats-n- 'feeling disgust' ( yfbadh-), mimiks-u- 'mingling' ( Ymis-), mumuks-u- 'desiring release' ririks-t'i- ( \ftnuc-), 'wishing to damage' ( Yris-), vivaks-ic- sisas-i'i- (AV.) 'calling aloud' ( Yvac-), (AV.) 'eager to win' ( Ysa-^. 3. From causative stems are formed: dharay-i'i- 'streaming', bhdjay-u- 'liberal', bhdvay-i'i- 'cherishing', mamkay-u- 'liberal', manday-u- 'joyous', sramay-i'i- 'exhausting oneself; from a causative denominative mrgay-u- (AV.VS.) m. 'hunter'. 4. By far the commonest are the derivatives from regular denominatives, of which nearly 80 occur in the RV., and at least half a dozen additional cases in the AV. About 35 of these words are formed from denominative

stems in actual use ? ; thus aghay-u- 'malignant', aratly-2'1- (AV.) 'hostile', vasuy-t'c- 'desiring wealth', carany-u- 'mobile', manasy-i'i- 'desirous'. A few are formed from pronouns, as ahamy-u- 'selfish', asmay-u- 'favouring us', kimy-i'c- 'desiring whatp'j tvay-i'i- 'loving thee', yuvay-u- and yuvay-u- 'desiring you two', svay-i'i-

'left to oneself. In the absence of an accompanying denominative, there is the appearance of a secondary suffix -yu (with the sense of 'desiring' or some more general adjectival meaning) attached directly to nouns. Thus there are

derivatives in the RV. in which the -as of noun stems is changed to -

-uka : agent,

140. This suffix probably consists of the primary -u extended with the secondary -ka. It is very rare in the Samhitas. There is no certain example

1 Here the y really belongs to the root 3 Probably from abhi-\-is- 'rule'. dAe- 'suck'. 4 In go-vindi'i- 'searching for millc'. 2 Also in the reduplicated form ydy-u- 5 The Pada text has dhaks-u-. Cp. p. 117, (VS.) 'swift'; the final-o seems also to be note 7. dropped in a-kh-u- 'mole' (kha- 'dig') and in 6 With irregular accent. su-sih-u '(standing) well' {siha- 'stand'). 7 See the list in Lindner p. 63. I20 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar. in the RV., but san-ukd- (RV'.) 'desirous of prey' (yjaw-) and the Proper Name per-ukd- (RV.) may be instances. In the AV. occur ghat-uka- 'kilhng', vi-kas-uka- 'bursting', sdm-kas-uka- 'crumbhng up', d-pra-may-uka- 'not dying suddenly'. In the TS. occurs vas-iikd-, but the meaning and derivation are doubtful.

-us : action and agent.

141. This suffix forms neuter action nouns which have mostly a concrete sense, and masculine agent nouns, altogether less than 20 in number. All the substantives except one are accented on the root, which generally takes Guna, but in one instance Vrddhi. Those adjectives which also appear as substantives have the same accentuation; but those stems which are used solely as adjectives accent the suffix.

1. The neuter substantives are : dr-us- (AV.) 'wound', Sy-us- 'life', cdks-us- 'light', tdp-us- 'heat', tdr-us- 'battle', dhdn-us- 'bow', pdr-us- 'knot', ydj-iis- 'worship', vdp-us- 'marvel', sds-us- 'command'; with accent on the suffix: jan-i'is- 'birth' (also m.). 2. The masculine substantives are: ndh-us- 'neighbour', mdn-us- 'man'; adjectives identical in form with neuter substantives are: cdks-us- 'seeing', tdp-us- 'glowing', vdp-us- 'wondrous'; adjectives without corresponding sub- stantives are: jay-us- 'victorious', van-i'cs- 'eager', vid-us-^ 'heedful'; also daks-us- 'flaming' from the aorist stem.

-u : feminine substantives.

142. This rare suffix chiefly forms feminines corresponding to masculines and neuters in -u^. Independent feminine substantives are: cam-U- 'dish', tan-ti- 'body', vadh-U- 'bride'; perhaps pan-a-^ 'admiration'. There are also the compounds pums-cal-d- (VS.) 'courtesan', pra-jan-ii- (AV.) 'organ of generation'.

-Uka : intensive adjectives.

143. This suffix is merely the lengthened form of -uka used in forming a few derivatives from the reduplicated intensive stem. It appears in jagar- aka- 'wakeful', dandas-uka- (VS.) 'mordacious', salal-aka- (RV'.) 'wandering aimlessly'.

-ka : agent.

144. This is a very common secondary suffix, but very rarely appears in a primary character. It is thus used in dt-ka- m. 'garment', su-me-ka- 'firmly fixed' {mi- 'fix'), si'is-ka- 'dry', sld-ka- m. 'call' {sru- 'hear'), sto-kd- m.

'drop'. In vric-i-ka- m. 'scorpion' the suffix is added with connecting -i-. The feminine form of the suffix appears in stii-ka- 'flake', ra-kd-, N. of a goddess.

-ia : agent.

145. This suffix is employed almost exclusively to form past participles*, chiefly with passive, sometimes with intransitive meaning. Its more general and original sense is, however, preserved in some words used as adjectives or as substantives with concrete meaning; thus tri-td- 'rough', drdhd- 'firm', si-td- 'cold', vavd-ta-^ 'dear'; m. du-td- 'messenger', sil-td- (AV. VS.) 'charioteer'.

1 With weak root; the only instance of form occurring is the I. sing, fanva. medial vowel other than a in the radical 4 See below, Past passive participles, 572, syllable. and the lists in Lindner p. 70 f. 2 See below, derivative -k steins, 384. 5 From a reduplicated form of va- 'win', 3 The stem may be pan-u-, as the only and with unusual accent. ,

IV. Nominal Stem Formation. Primary Nominal Derivation. 121

kistd-^ 'singer', bastd-'^ 'he-goat'; n. r-ld- 'right', ghr-td- 'ghee', ja-td- 'kind', dyu-td- (AV.) 'gambling', nrt-td- (AV.) 'dance', pur-td- 'reward', vra-id-'

'ordinance'; with accented and strong radical syllable: (f-ta- 'variegated'; m. gdr-ta- 'car-seat', mdr-ta- 'mortal', vd-ta- 'wind', hds-ta- 'hand'; n. ds-ta- 'home', ndk-ta- 'night'.

a. In many past participles the suffix is added with connecting -/-, as raks-i-td- 'protected'. Some of these are used as n. substantives; thus jiv-i-td- 'life', car-i-td- 'behaviour'. Several words thus formed appear as adjectives only; thus tig-i-td-^ 'sharp', pal-i-td- 'grey'; also some other names of colours with strong and accented radical syllable: ds-i-ta- 'black', rSh-i-ta-

'red', lok-i-ta- (AV.) 'red', hdr-i-ta- 'yellow' ; sye-td- 'white' is perhaps anomalously formed with -ita- from syd-'- 'freeze'5.

-iar : agent.

146. The agent nouns formed with this very frequent suffix* are often

used participially, governing an accusative. The root is generally accented when they have this verbal force, but the suffix, when they are purely nominal (86 A 22). The root regularly has Guna, a and a remaining unchanged; thus ne-tar- 'leader' (l/«r-), ho-tar- 'priest' {Yhu-), kar-tdr- 'doer' {Ykr-), bhet-idr- 'breaker' (Ybhid-), yok-tdr- 'yoker' {Yyuj-^; yas-tdr- 'sacrificer' (vO'^-)j dd-tdr- 'giver'7. With weak root: us-tdr- m. 'ploughing bull'". a. Less commonly the suffix is added to the root with connecting -/-:

regularly when the root ends in more than one consonant 5, as vand-i-tdr-

'praiser', but also often when it ends in a single consonant and sometimes

when it ends in a vowel, as cod-i-tdr- 'instigator', sav-i-tdr- 'stimulator' ( }/ su-'). b. The suffix is combined with -J- instead of -i- in grdbh-T-tar- (AV.) 'seizer', prati-grah-i-tdr- (AV.) 'receiver', sam-grah-l-tdr- (VS.) 'charioteer', pra- tar-i-tdr- 'prolonger', a-mar-i-tdr- 'destroyer'; with -u- in tdr-u-tar- 'winning' and tar-u-tdr- 'conqueror', dhdn-u-tar- 'running swiftly', sdji-u-tar- 'winning'; with -u- in var-u-tdr- 'protector'; with -0- in man-o-tar-''° and man-o-tdr- 'inventor'. c. These derivatives are very frequently compounded with prepositions";

e. g. pura-e-tdr- 'leader', apa-bhar-tdr- 'taking away', prdv-i-tdr- 'protector' {av- 'favour'), pra-sav-i-tdr- 'vivifier'. d. They are very rarely formed from secondary conjugation or from tense stems, as coday-i-tdr- 'stimulator'", bodhay-i-tdr- 'awakener', ne'-s-tar-'^i a kind of priest. From the reduphcated root is formed vavd-tar- 'ad- herent'. e. Several names of relationship appear to be formed with this suffix. Being all very old words, the radical syllable is obscure in meaning or irregular in form. They are jd-vid-tar- 'son-in-law', duh-i-tdr- 'daughter', ndp-tar- 'grandson', pi-tdr- 'father', bhrd-tar- 'brother', ma-tdr- 'mother'.

1 These two words are of doubtful origin. 7 -itir appear, instead of -tar in yan-tur- 2 If derived from v)-- 'choose' with ano- heside yan-idr- 'guide' and in stha-tur- beside 'stationary'. malous form of radical syllable ; but accord- stha-tar- ing to Whitney (11 76 b) it is to be ex- 8 The f. of these words is formed with plained as vrat-a- formed from vrt- 'turn' t from the weak stem, i. e. in -irJ. like vraj-d- from \vrj-. 9 Except danis-fdr- (AV.) 'biter'. 10 3 With anomalous guttural before^ -i-. Connected with the present stem manu-ie 4 Originally perhaps 'rimy', cp. Hl-ta- 'cold'. etc. of man- 'think'. 11 f. 5 The f. of these adjectives of colour is See Lindner p. 73 formed from other stems: eni-, asikm-, 12 In the f. coday-i-tr-i-. 13 the aorist stem of m- 'lead'. pdlikm-, rohini-, lohim- {KV.), syenT-, harim-. From 6 See the lists in Lindner p. 72—75. :

122 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

-fas : action.

147. This suffix is identical in meaning with -as, being used to form neuter action nouns which have acquired a concrete meaning. It is very rare, occurring only in re-fas- "^semen' (ri- 'flow') and sro-tas- 'stream', 'current' {sru- 'flow').

-i'l : action and agent.

148. This suffix is used to form a large number of feminine action nouns; it also appears in a few agent nouns employed either as adjectives or masculine substantives'. The root generally has the same weak form as appears before the -ta of the past passive participle^; it is, however, more often accented than the suffix. In a few words the suffix is added with the connecting vowels -a-, -i- or -T-.

1. Action nouns. With accent on the suffix are formed e. g. is-ii- 'desire' {is- 'seek'), u-tt- 'aid' (lAai--), kir-tl- 'praise' {kr- 'commemorate'), dhau-ti- 'stream' {dhav- 'flow'), pi-t'i- 'draught' {pa- 'drink'), pur-tl- 'reward'

{pr- 'fill'), bhak-ti- 'distribution' {bhaj- 'divide'), ma-ti- 'thought' {man- 'think'), ra-ti- 'gift' {ra- 'give'), ri-tl- 'flow' (rz- 'flow'), vis-ti- 'work' {vis- 'be active'), stu-ti- 'praise'; from the reduplicated root: carkr-tl- 'praise' {kr- 'comme- morate'); with connecting -a-j: amh-a-ti- 'distress', drs-a-ti- 'appearance', mith-a-tl- 'conflict', vas-a-ti- 'abode'. With accent on the root are formed e. is-ti- g. 'offering' ( YyV')) ga-ti- 'motion' ( Ygam-), di-ti- 'liberality' {da- 'give'), vfd-dhi- 'increase' {Yvrdh-), san-ti- (AV. VS.) 'repose' ('[/"jWw-); from the reduplicated root didhi-ti- 'devotion' {dhi- 'think') -t; with connecting -a-: dm-a-ti-^ 'indigence' {am- 'be afflicted').

a. The derivative di-ti- 'giving' when used as the final member of a compound is reduced to -tti- : hhaga-ili-, inagha-tti-, vasu-iti- ; above 26 a 2. 2. Agent nouns. These are rare, amounting to hardly 20 in number. Accented on the suffix: jM-ti- m. 'relative', pat-ti- m. (AV. VS.) 'pedestrian', ra-ti- 'willing to give'; with connecting -a-: ar-a-ti- m. 'servant', khal-a-ti- (VS.) 'bald', and with accent on the connecting vowel vrk-d-ti- m. 'murderer'.

Accented on the root: m. dhfl-ti- 'shaker', pd-ti- 'master', 7ni'is-ti- 'fist', sdp-ti- 'steed'; adjectives: dhrs-ti- (VS.) 'bold', pii-ti- (AV.) 'putrid', vds-ti- 'eager'; and from the reduplicated root Jigar-ti- m. 'swallower'; with connecting vowels: dm-a-ti- 'poor', rdm-a-ti- {KS!. TS.) 'liking to stay', fj-i-ti- 'glowing', turv-i-ti-, N. of a man {turv- = tur-, tr- 'overcome'), dabh-i-ti-^, N. of a man' 7, sneh-a-ti- 'carnage' and snlh-i-ii- (SV.).

a. These derivatives are often compounded with prepositions 8, which are almost always accented; thus anu-ma-ti- 'assent', abhili- 'attack' {aihi-iti-), a-hu-ti- 'offering', itir-r-ti- 'dissolution', vy-ap-ti- {A}J .) 'attainment', sam-ga-ti- 'coming together', aihi-ma-ti- 'insidious' (?««:«- 'think')9; with suflix accented, only a-sak-ii- 'pursuit', d-su-ti- 'hxevf' {^su-) and 'enlivening' (ysii-); also abhi-s-ii- m. 'helper' beside abhi-s-ti- f. 'help'.

1 See the list in Grassmann, Worterbuch fatuated' (also d-drp-ta-). These are, however, 1719 —21; Lindner p. 76— 79. the only two examples. 2 The roots tan- 'stretch', ram- 'rest', han- 5 But with the connecting -a- accented:

'strike' may retain the nasal : tdn-ii- f. 'cord', am-d-ti- 'lustre', ram-d-ti- (AV.) 'haunt', vrat- ran-ii- 'enjoyment' (AV. VS. TS.) beside d-ti- 'creeper'. ra-ii- (VS.), a-han-ti- (VS'.) beside d-ha-ii- ^ This word may be a compound (*o'a^,^/- 'uninjured condition'. iti-). 3 The -a- here often, if not always, belongs 7 yaydti-, N. of a man, is according to to a verbal stem. BR. and Grassmann derived from yat- 4 Roots which have the connecting -i- in 'stretch'. the past participle, do not take it here 8 See Lindner p. 77 f. gup-ii- (AN .) 'protection' hesiAe giip-i-td-, pi-d- 9 Compounded with a noun: ktima-ka-H- drp-ti- 'arrogance' beside d-drp-i-ta- 'not in- 'requiring the fulfilment of a wish'. IV. Nominal Stem Formation. Primary Nominal Derivation. 123

b. The suffix is added to a secondary stem ia. Jdn-aya-ti- (VS.) f. 'generation'; it seems to have a secondary character in yuva-ti- f. 'maiden', adj. 'young'. It is secondary \TX pak^a-ti (VS.) 'root of the wing'; in the numerals vimsa-ti- '20', sas-ti-'6o', and others; va. pank-h- f. 'set of five'; in the pronominal words 'ka-ii 'how many?', id-ti (AV.) 'so many jj/fl-ft 'as many as'; , and in addha-ti- m. 'sage', formed from the adverb ad-dha 'truly'.

-iu : action and agent.

149. The great majority of the words derived with this suffix are infinitives appearing in the form of the dative, ablative-genitive, and accusative cases. Besides these, there are a few action nouns used independently, and still fewer agent nouns. The root is usually accented' and takes Guna; but the suffix is accented in some half dozen instances, in two or three of which the radical syllable is weakened. The gender is usually masculine, but a few feminines and neuters also occur. 1. Accented on the root: m. o-tu- Sveft' {va- 'weave'), krd-tu- 'capacity' (>^r- 'make'), to'«-/z/- 'thread', -^/5«-/&!-^ 'element', sdk-tii- 'gxozX%' {Ysanj-), se-iu- Tjond' {si- 'bind'), s6-tu- 'libation' {su- 'press'), dha-tu- adj. 'drinkable' {dhe- *suck'); m. mdn-tu- 'adviser'; f. vds-tu- 'morning' {vas- 'shine'), sil-tu-T' (AV.) 'birth'; n. da-iu- 'division' {da- 'divide'), vas-tu-'^ 'abode' {vas- 'dwell'). 2. Accented on the suffix: m. ak-tit- 'ray' {anj- 'anoint'), ga-tii- 'way' {ga- 'go') and 'song' {ga- 'sing'), jan-tu- 'creature', he-ti'i- 'cause' {hi- 'impel');

with weak radical vowel: r-ti'i- 'season', pi-tii- 'drink' {pi- 'swell') 5. a. The suffix is attached in a few instances (as in some infinitives) with connecting -1-: dur-dhdr-i-tu- 'irresistible', su-Jidv-T-tu- 'to be successfully invoked', tur-phdr-J-tu-^. b. The suffix appears in a few instances to be attached to a present or a secondary conjugational stem: edha-tu- m. 'welfare' {edha-te 'thrives'), tapya-tu- adj. 'glowing' {tapyd-te 'is heated'), vaha-ta- m. 'wedding' {vdha-ti

'conveys'), sisSsd-tu-^ 'desirous of obtaining'; jTva-tu- f. 'life' {jiva-ti- 'lives')_

c. Derivatives formed with -tii are in several instances compounded with the particles dus- and su-; diir-dhdr-T-tu- and dur-dhdr-iu- 'irresistible', dur-vdr-iu- 'difficult to ward off', dus-tdr-T-tii- 'unconquerable', sa-ydn-iu- 'guiding well', su-sro-tu- 'hearing willingly', sic-hdn-tu- 'easy to slay'; also with a pronoun in svditu- 'going one's own {sva-) gait' {etu-).

-tna : action and agent.

150. This suffix is very rare, occurring only in cyau-tnd- n. 'concussion',

adj. 'animating' {cyu- 'stir') and in rd-tna- n. 'gift' {ra- 'give').

-inu : agent.

151. This suffix, which is always accented, forms more than a dozen adjectives and a few substantives. It is added to the root either directly or more commonly with the connecting vowel -a- (which probably belongs to the

present stem) or -i- (which is almost exclusively used with causative stems). 1. Attached directly to the root: kr-tnu- 'active', dar-tm'i- m. 'breaker',

: jiga-tm'i- 'hastening' {gam- 'go'), ha-tiiH- 'deadly' ( Y^an-) ; with reduplication jigha-tnii- 'harming' {han- 'strike'). 2. With connecting -a-: kav-a-tnu-^ 'miserly', piy-a-tmi- 'revihng' {piya-ti

1 The infinitives always accent the root(l05). 6 The derivation of this word is uncertain 2 Only in the compounds tri-dhdlu-' three- and its meaning is obscure. [Cp. Mahabhasya fold' and saptd-dhatu- 'sevenfold'. Vol. I, p. 363, 1. 25.J 3 Without Guna. 7 From the desiderative stem of sa- 4 With lengthened a. 'obtain'. 5 krtv-as 'times' is probably an ace. pi. of 8 Cp. Whitney, Roots, under hi- 'design'. a stem kf-tu- 'making'. Cp. BB. 25, 294. 124 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. Vedic Grammar.

'abuses'), meh-a-tnu-, N. of a river {miha-ti), a-riij-a-tnu- 'breaking' (rujd-ti 'breaks'). 3. With connecting -/-: drav-i-tml- 'running' {dru- 'run'); from causative stems: tanay-i-tnu- 'thundering', dravay-i-tnic- 'hasting' {dru- 'run'), posay-i-tnu- 'causing to thrive' {Ypus-), maday-i-tnii- 'intoxicating' {Ymad-), suday-i-imi-

'causing sweetness to flow' ( Ysud-), stanay-i-trn't- m. 'thunder' {Ysiaji-); an-amay-i-tnu- 'not making ill', 'curative' (]Aa»«-).

-tra : agent.

152. This suffix was doubtless originally formed by a secondary -a added to -/;- (the weak form of tar-). But having early attained an independent character, it came to be largely employed as a primary suffix. It is used to form some half dozen adjectives' and about 60 substantives, the latter being neuters except about a dozen (partly masc. and partly fem.) \ The substantives generally express the means or instrument by which the action of the verb

is performed, sometimes the place where it is performed. The root is generally

accented and has Guna; but it is sometimes unaccented and has a weak

vowel. The suffix is generally added directly to the root, but in about a dozen instances with a connecting vowel. 1. Attached directly to the root: adjectives: jdi-tra-^ 'victorious',

sva-trd-'- 'invigorating'; with reduplication: y^^?i-^ra- 'calling aloud' ( ]A/^«^-). m. a-trd-i 'eater', us-tra-^ 'buffalo', ddms-tra- 'tusk' {dams- 'bite'), mdn-tra- 'prayer'; with weak (etymologically doubtful) root: pu-trd- 'son', mi-trd-i 'friend', vr-trd-^ 'foe'.

f. ds-tra- 'goad' (tf/- 'reach'), nas-irS- (AV. VS.) 'destroyer' {Ynas'-), ma-tra- 'measure', ho-tra- 'sacrifice'. n. With accent on the root: d-tra-9 'food', kdr-tra- (AV.) 'spell', kse-ira- 'field', ksno-tra- 'whetstone', ga-ira- 'hmb', /nS-tra- (VS.) 'intellectual faculty',

tdn-tra- 'warp', dd-tra-^° 'gift', da-ira- 'knife', dhdr-tra- 'support' (VS. TS.), pdt-tra- (VS.)" 'wing', pa-tra- 'cup', (pa- 'drink'), pes-tra- (AV.) 'bone', mU-tra- (AV.) 'urine', medhra- (AV.) 'penis', ySk-tra- 'rope', vdr-tra- (AV.) 'dam', vds-tra- 'garment', sro-tra- 'ear', su-tra- (AV.) 'thread' (siv- 'sew'). With accent on the suffix and often with an abstract meaning: as-trd- (AV.) 'missile', ksa-trd-^'' 'dominion'; da-trd- 'share', des-ird- 'indication' {Ydis-), ne-trd- (AV.) 'guidance', ras-trd- 'dominion', sas-trd- (VS.) 'invocation', sas-trd- 'command', sat-trd- 'sacrificial session', sto-trd- 'praise', stha-trd- 'station', ho-trd- 'sacrifice'. 2. With connecting vowel -a-: dm-a-tra- 'violent', ydj-a-ira- 'adorable'; krnt-d-ira- 'shred' gay-a-trd- 'song' pdi-a-ira- 'wing',vddA-a-fra- , , 'deadly weapon',

f. var-a-tr&- 'strap'; with -/-: khan-i-tra- 'shovel', car-i-tra- 'ioQt',jan-i-tra- 'birth-

place', pav-i-tra- 'sieve', bhar-i-tra- 'arm', bhav-i-tra- 'world', san-i-tra- 'gift'; with -u-\ tdr-u-tra-^^ 'overcoming'.

1 These have mostly masc. forms, some 8 Occurs also as a n. in the RV. when neuter; the only one which has fem. forms is plural. ydjatra- 'deserving adoration'. 9 For at-tra- from ad- 'eat'. 2 Six or seven masculines and five femi- 1° Probably for dal-ira- from the present- nines. stem of da- 'give'. 3 With exceptional Vrddhi of the radical »i Only at the end of a compound in the syllable. RV. 4 From iva- = sii- 'swell'. 12 naksaira- 'asterism' is perhaps a com- 5 For ai-trd- hom. ad-' e3.t'. Cp. p. 125, note'. pound. Cp. above 81, 2 a. 6 With weak root though accented. '3 Cp. tar-u-tm-- 'victor'. 7 Occurs in the RV. as a u. when it means 'friendship'. IV. Nominal Stem Formation. Primary Nominal Derivation. 125

-tri : agent,

153. This very rare suffix occurs in only three or four derivatives: d-tri-^ 'devouring', sd-tri- m., N. of a man^; with connecting -a in arc-d-tri- 'roaring'; also in the f. form with i in ra-tri-^ 'night'.

-tru : agent.

154. This suffix is found only in sdtrit- 'enemy' for *sdt-tru-, perhaps from sad- 'prevail'.

-tva : agent.

155. This suffix probably arose by the addition of the secondary suffix -a to action nouns in -tic, which turned them into adjectives used in a gerundive sense. It occurs in about a dozen such derivatives which are almost restricted to the RV.; e. g. kdr-tva- 'to be made'*.

-iha : action.

156. This suffix is almost exclusively used to form action nouns (some of which have acquired a concrete meaning) in all genders'. The root generally appears in a weak form, as the suffix is mostly accented. The suffix is attached to the root either directly or more commonly with a connecting vowel*. 1. Attached directly to the root: m. dr-tha-^ 'goal', ga-thd- 'song', pak-thd-, N. of a man, bhr-thd- 'offering', rd-ika-^ 'car', kd-tha-'^ 'slaughter'; in composition with prepositions: sam-i-thd- 'conflict', nir-r-thd- 'destruction', sam-ga-thd- 'union' {gam- 'go'), ud-gi-tM-^° (AV.) 'singing of chants'; in com- position with nouns: putra-kr-thd- 'procreation of sons', dirgha-ya-thd- 'long course', go-pT-thd-'^'^ 'protection' {pa- 'protect') and 'draught' {pa- 'drink') of milk'. — f. kas-tha- 'course', gd-tha- 'song', ni-tha- 'trick'. — n. uk-thd- 'saying' {Yvac-'), tir-thd- 'ford' {tf- 'cross'), rii-thd- 'song', yu-thd-'^'^ 'herd', rik-thd- 'inheritance' '^.

2. 'With connecting vowel -a- : ay-d-tha- n. 'foot', uc-d-tha- n. 'praise'

( y^z/ac-), car-d-tha- n. 'mobility', tves-d-tha- m. 'fury', proth-d-tha- n. 'snorting', yaj-d-tha-'^'' 'worship', rav-d-tha- m. 'roar', vaks-d-tha- m. 'growth', vid-d-tka-''^ n. 'assembly', sap-d-tha- m. 'curse', say-d-tha- n. 'lair', has-d-tha- m. 'snorting', sac-d-tha- m. 'aid', stan-d-tha- m. 'thunder', stav-d-tha- m. 'praise', srav-d-tha- pra-vas-a-tkd- m. or n. 'flow'; with prefix: a-vas-a-thd- (AV.) ^abods:', n. 'absence', pran-d-tka-'^^ (VS.) 'respiration'. a. With -u:jdr-u-tha-, m. a kind of demon ('wearing out'j^r-), vdr-u-tha- n. 'protection'; with -u: mat-ti-t/la-^^ m. 'sage'.

For di-in- from aii- 'eat'. Cp. p. 1 24, note 5. '2 The root in this word is uncertain. For sat-tn- from sat- 'cut in pieces'. 13 prsfka- 'back' probably contains the 3 In AV. 7-a-iri- also. root stha- 'stand', ^ *fra-siAd- 'prominent'. 4 See below, Future Passive Participles, '4 The gender is uncertain, as the word 581 occurs in the dat. sing. only. 5 The fem. form of the suffix is -tlid. 15 Probably from vidk- 'worship' - Olden- 6 This vowel for the most part belongs BERG, ZDMG, 54, 608—611; cp. above p. 23, in reality to a present stem. note 10. 16 7 With accented strong root. When there is a prefix the accent is 8 The root is uncertain. thrown on the suffix ; but pran- {=pra-an-) 9 With root accented though weakened is treated like a root. I' by loss of nasal [han- 'slay'). Perhaps from man- with double suffix 10 With gd- 'sing' weakened to gi-. {-iu, -ihd). " Both pa- 'protect' and pa- 'drink' are weakened to pT-. Cp. above 27. —

126 I. Allgemeines UND Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

-ihi : agent.

157. As far as can be judged from the very few examples occurring, this suffix was used to form agent nouns. It is attached with or without a connecting vowel. The derivation of all the words which seem to be formed with this suffix is doubtful: dt-i-thi- m. 'guest' (if from at- 'wander'); ud-ar-a-thi- adj. 'rising'; ine-thl- (AV.) m. 'pillar' (tni- 'fix'). The neuters dsthi- (AV. VS., beside astk-dn-) 'bone' and sdkthi- (beside sakth-dn-) may be formed with the suffix -/.

-ihu : action.

158. This very rare suffix, which is not found in the RV., appears only with the connecting vowel -a- (which in reality belongs to a present stem),, forming masculine action nouns: ej-d-thu- (AV.) 'trembling', z'^-aV.^a- 'quivering',. stan-d-thu- (AV.) 'roar'.

-na : action and agent.

159. This suffix is in the first place used, like -ta, to form past passive

participles'; e.g. bhin-nd- from Mz'rf- 'split'; but, unlike -/"a, it is never added to the root with a connecting vowel or to a secondary conjugation stem. It is further employed to form a number of adjectives and masculine substantives, mostly accented on the suffix. It also forms a few feminine {-no) and neuter substantives, all but one of the latter being accented on the root. The substantives have partly an abstract and partly a concrete meaning.. A medial vowel never takes Guna, but a final vowel nearly always does. 1. The adjectives (f. -a) are: ds-nd- 'voracious', us-nd- 'hot', u-nd-

'deficient', r-7id- 'guilty', krs-nd- 'black', kso-nd- 'immovable' (?), nag-jid- 'naked',. bradh-nd- 'pale red', s6-na- 'red', sro-nd- and ilo-nd- (AV.) 'lame', slaks-tid- (AV.) 'slippery', svit-na- 'white', syo-nd- 'agreeable'; compounded: an-amr-nd- 'inviolable', d-ruks-na- (AV.) 'tender', sada-pr-nd- 'always munificent'. 2. Substantives are: m. ghr-nd- 'heat', bttdh-nd- 'bottom', bhru-nd- 'emhiyo\ yaj'-nd- 'sacrifice', sye-nd- 'eagle', ste-nd- 'thief; sam-pras-nd- 'question'; accented on root: ds-na- 'stone', kdr-na- 'ear', vdr-na- 'colour', lus-na-, N. of a demon, svdp-na- 'sleep'. — n. //-/za- 'grass', dkd-na-' 'booty', par-nd- 'wing',. vas-nd- 'price', sls-na- 'penis', su-nd- 'welfare', su-na- 'want', si-na- 'property'. f. tf-s-na- 'thirst', dhe'-na- 'milch cow', si-na- 'missile', sthii-na- 'post'.

-nas : action.

160. This suffix, which has the same meaning as -as and -tas, is used in forming a few action nouns which have mostly acquired a concrete sense.

These are dp-nas- n. 'possession', dr-nas- n. 'flood', -bhar-nas-^^ 'bearing' (?), rek-nas- n. 'property left by bequest' {ric- 'leave'). With connecting vowel: drdv-i-nas- n. 'movable property' {dru- 'run'), pdr-T-nas- m. 'abundance''

{pr- 'fill'). It also appears in the agent noun ddm-u-nas- adj. 'domestic', m. 'friend of the house' {dam-).

-ni : action and agent.

161. This not very frequent suffix is employed to form m. and f. action nouns as well as agent nouns (adjectives and substantives). Either the radical vowel or the suffix may be accented; and the root in several instances takes Guna. The feminines have rarely an abstract sense, having generally acquired a concrete meaning.

' For a list of these see below 576. I 3 In sahdsra-hharnas- 'thousandfold'. 2 Probably from dha- 'place'. 1 IV". Nominal Stem Formation. Primary Nominal Derivation. 127

1. The feminines axQ-.jUr-ni- 'heat', -jya-ni-'- (AV.) 'injury', me-ni- 'missile', sre-ni- 'line', sro-ni- 'hip', sr-ni- and sr-ni- 'sickle'; masculines are: ghf-ni-"^ 'heat', yo-ni- 'receptacle'. 2. Agent nouns, adjectives and m. substantives, are: ag-ni- m. 'fire', jur-ni- 'singeing', ti2r-ni- 'speeding', d/iar-n{- m. 'supporter', pfs-ni- 'speckled',^ pre-ni- 'loving' {VprT-), bhttr-ni- 'excited', vdh-ni- m. 'draught animal', vfs-ni- and vrs-ni- 'virile', m. 'ram'. a. The suffix occurs with a connecting -u- in hrad-u-ni- f.(?) 'hail' J.

-nu : action and agent.

162. With this suffix is formed a small number of action and agent nouns of all genders, but mostly masculine. The action nouns often have a concrete meaning. As the suffix is almost invariably accented, the radical vowel, with one exception, never shows Guna. This suffix, like -tu, is some- times preceded by -a (which really belongs to present stems). 1. The substantives occurring are: ksep-ni'c- m. 'jerk' (x. 51*), dd-nu-^ m. f 'demon', f. 'dew', n. 'drop', dhe-nu- f. 'cow', bha-nu- m. 'light', vag-nu- m. 'sound', vis-nu-^ m., N. of a god, su-w'e- m. 'son', stha-ni'i-^ m. 'pillar'; with connecting -a-: krand-a-nu- m. 'roaring', ksip-a-711'i.- m. 'missile', nad-a-mi- m. 'roaring', nabh-a-ni'c-'' m. 'fountain''.

2. Adjectives are: grdh-nu- 'hasty', dhrs-ni'i- 'bold'; with connecting -a-: the compound vi-bhahj-a-nu- 'breaking to pieces'.

-pa : concrete substantives.

163. A few words are formed with this suffix, but the origin of all of them is more or less obscure'. These zx&: pih-pa- n. 'flower', stu-J>d-^° (ys.) m. 'tuft', stii-pa-^° m. 'top-knot'; perhaps also tdl-pa- m. 'couch', sds-pa- (VS.) n. 'blade of grass', sil-pa (VS.) n. 'ornament', Mr-pa- (AV.) 'winnowing basket';, possibly apu-pd- m. 'cake', I'da-pa- m. 'shrub', kuna-pa- (AV.) n. 'corpse"^^

-ma : action and agent.

164. This suffix forms a considerable number of action nouns (almost exclusively masculine) as well as agent nouns, both adjectives and substantives.. Only a single neuter and one or two feminine substantives occur. The suffix is accented more than twice as often as the root. The vowel r always takes- Guna in the radical syllable; on the other hand, initial or medial i and u never take Guna; when final they only do so if the root is accented. Several of these derivatives in -ma appear beside others in -man; some at least are transfers from the latter; thus dkdr-man- 'ordinance' alone is found in the RV.,. while dhdr-ma- appears beside it in the later Sainhitas.

I. Accented on the suffix: adjectives: e. g. /V/^-ywi- 'obhque', tig-md- 'sharp', das-md- 'wondrous', bhi-md- 'terrible', sag-md- mighty'; with redupHcation,.

1 In sarva-jyani- (AV.) 'complete loss of 6 The origin of the cerebral n here is property'. obscure. 2 Beside ghr-na- m. and ghf-na- f. 7 Also nabh-amd.- f. 3 This suffix is in several words preceded 8 The Proper Name kr^-anii- is perhaps- by -a-, much in the same way as -ii; but similarly formed, but with long -a-. as -ani has assumed a more independent 9 Cp. Lindner p. 69; Liden, IF. 18, characteritiB treated above (122) as a separate 496. 10 suffix. Probably from a root siu- 'drip'; see 4 With irregular accent. Whitney, Roots. 11 'sacrificial 5 Perhaps originally an adjective *vis-nu-, yupa- m. post' is probably- with shift of accent on becoming a Proper derived from yuf- 'obstruct'. Name. But cp. p. 85, note '. 128 I. Allgemeines UND Sprache. Vedic Grammar. tutu-md- 'powerful'; substantives: m. aj-md- 'course', idh-md- 'fuel', ghar-md- 'heat', //ar-»«a- 'breaker', (//Jz7-«ii- 'smoke', fiar-md-{YS.) 'jest', ruk-md-'oxnaxaexit', hi-ind- 'cold'. 2. Accented on the root: substantives: m. e. g. fl-ma- 'friend' {av- 'favour'), e-ma- (VS.) 'course', dhdr-ma- (AV. VS. TS.) 'ordinance', bha-ma-

'brightness', sdr-ma- 'flow', so-ma- 'Soma' ( ]/^«,;-), stS-ma- 'praise' ( J^.f/«-), hS-ma- 'offering'; f. hl-ma- 'winter'; n. bil-ma- 'chip'.

a. The suffix seems to be added once with connecting -a- (which really belongs to a present stem) in the f. sar-d-md- 'the fleet one', N. of a goddess.

-man : action and agent.

165. This suffix forms a large number of derivatives', which are almost exclusively action nouns. The great majority of these are neuters accented on the root, but there are also a good many masculines accented on the suffix. Besides these occur a few agent nouns, mostly accented on the suffix, both adjectives and masculine substantives, all of them, except brah-mdn- 'priest', of rare occm-rence. The same word in several instances varies in meaning according to the accent and gender^; e. g. dhdr-man- n. ordinance', m. dhar-mdn-^ 'ordainer'. The root in these derivatives usually takes Guna;

in a few instances it has Vrddhi or lengthens a; sometimes it is weak. The suffix is often added with the connecting vowels -i- or -T-. The derivatives are occasionally compounded with prepositions, which are then nearly always accented. 1. Examples of action nouns are: n. dd-man- 'food', e'-man- 'course', Jidr-man- 'action', kars-man- 'goal', jdn-man- 'birth', tra-man- 'protection', dd-man- 'gift' {da- 'give') and 'bond' {da- 'tie'), nd-man- 'name', pdt-man- 'flight', brdh-man- 'devotion', bhdr-man- 'table', bhii-man- 'world', vdk-man- 'invocation', vdrt-man- 'course', ves-man- 'dwelling', sdk-man- 'power', ids-man- 'praise', sdk-man- 'power', ho-man- 'sacrifice' {yhu-) and 'invocation' {Yhu-); with connecting -/-: jdn-i-man- 'birth', vdr-i-man- 'expanse' (beside var-i-mdn- m.); with connecting-/"-: (fi2>-r-/«««- 'destruction', dMr-T-man-'ordma.nce',/dr-t-fnan-i 'abundance', bhdr-i-man- 'maintenance', vdr-i-man- 'expanse', sdr-T-man- 'course', sdv-T-man- 'impulse'*, hdv-i-man- 'invocation'. — m. us-mdn- (AV. VS.) 'heat', -o-mdn- 'favour', je-mdn- (VS. TS.) 'superiority', dragh-mdn- (VS.) 'length' (beside dragh-i-mdn-), pap-mdn- (AV.) 'wickedness', bhu-mdti- 'abundance', vid-mdn- 'knowledge', svad-mdn- 'sweetness', he-mdn- 'impulse'; with connecting -/-: jar-i-mdn- 'old age', prath-i-mdn- 'breath', mah-i-mdn- 'greatness', var-i-mdn-, .vars-i-mdn- (VS.) 'height' (beside vdrs-man- and vars-mdn-), har-i-mdn- 'yellowness'. 2. Agent nouns accented on the suffix are: dar-yndn- 'breaker' jia-mdn- 'giver', dhar-mdn- 'supporter', brah-mdn- 'one who prays', bhuj-mdn- 'fertile', vad-mdn- 'speaker', sad-mdn- 'sitter', so-mdn- 'Somapresser'; accented on the root: ds-man- 'stone', o-man- 'friend', je-man- 'superior', bhds-man- 'chewing'5.

a. The following words are according to difference of accent neuter action nouns or masculine agent nouns da-man- 'gift' and da-man- 'giver'; dhar-inan- 'ordinance' and -dhar-man- 'ordainer'; brdh-man- 'worship' and brah-mdn- 'priest'; sad-man- 'seat' and sad-man- 'sitter'.

1 Forlists of these see GRASSMANN.Worter- I 4 Also j-/c?-J-»ia«- 'spreading' used in the buch 1730 f.; Lindner p. 91 — 93. loc. as an infinitive. 2 the 5 In a compound also s^adu-ksdd-man- Somewhat in the same way as i

-derivatives in -as (126). i 'having sweet food'. 3 Also with anomalous -e-:Jidr-e-man-[S'^''-.). ^ IV. Nominal Stem Formation. Primary Nominal Derivation. 129

b. In a few words diflference of gender and accent is not accompanied by difference of meaning: vdrs-man- n. and vars-man- m. both mean 'height'; sv&d-man- n. and svad- mdn- m. 'sweetness'; vdr-i-man- n. and var-i-man- m. 'expanse'. c. In a few instances difference of accent is accompanied by a reversal of the usual distinction of meaning: 7V-OTa?2- 'victorious', y.?-;»fl«- (VS. TS.) 'superiority'; 6-man- m. 'friend', o-mdn- m. 'favour'. d. A few derivatives in -man both action and agent nouns are compounded with prepositions: vi-ga-man- n. 'step', prd-bhar-man- n. 'presentation', prd-ya-man- n. 'de- parture', vi-dhar-man- m. 'maintainer', vi-pai-man-'^ 'flying through', dnu-vart-man- (AV.) 'following after', vi-sar-mdn-^ m. 'flowing asunder'.

-mdna : agent.

166. This suffix is used to form the present^, future, and aorist middle participle and the present passive participle*. It is always preceded by a except in the anomalous perfect participle sasr-mand- (= sasr-and-) 'speeding'. -mi and -ml: action and agent.

167. The suffix -mi is used to form a few adjectives and masculine

substantives; it also forms (generally in the form of -mt) a few feminine substantives with a concrete meaning: ur-mi- m. 'wave' {Vvr-^, -kur-mi- 'action' in tuvi-kur-mi- 'working mightily', j'a-mi- 'related', 'kinsman'; bhri-mi-

and bhfi-mT- f. 'earth', laks-mi- f. 'sign', sur-mi- f. 'tube'; probably also ras-mi- m. 'ray' and the adj. krudh-mi-^ (RV'.) 'irascible'.

-min : agent. 168. A few adjectives have the appearance of being formed with a suffix -viin. They are is-min- 'impetuous', bha-min- 'shining', ius-min- 'roaring'. They may, however, be explained as secondary derivatives made with the suffix -in, like dhum-in- from dhumd- 'smoke'.

-ya : gerundive.

169. This suffix is used to form a large number of future participles passive^. It probably has a primary character in other derivatives besides

these; but it is so difficult to distinguish them from those which are secondary,

that it is preferable to treat all but gerundives under secondary -ya (228).

-yu : action and agent.

170. This suffix forms a few action and agent nouns. The root remains unchanged, while the accent varies. Action nouns are: man-yu- m. 'anger', mrt-yu- m. 'death'. Agent nouns are: dds-yu- m. 'enemy', druh-yu-, N. of a man ('hostile'), sim-yu- 'enemy'; bhuj-yi'i- both adj. 'wealthy' and m. as N. of a man. Adjectives only are: ydj-yu- 'pious', hindh-yu- 'pure', sdh-yu- 'strong'.

-ra : agent.

171. A large number of derivatives are formed with this suffix?, which appearing with a is usually accented, the root consequently almost always weak vowel. These words are mostly adjectives, but a few substantives connecting occur in all genders. The suffix is frequently added with the vowels -a-, -i-, -T-, -u-.

occurring krudhmi, N. 1 Or as a Bahuvrlhi 'having the flight of 5 The only form n. might, however, come from krudh- a bird' (ot-). pi. 2 With unusual accent on the suffix in- min-. 6 Future participles passive, stead of on the preposition. See below. Delbruck, Verbum Lindner 3 In the a-conjugation. 578; cp. 230; 4 See below under those tenses, 427, 435, 76, p. 96—99- See Lindner p. 100—102; Whitney 442, 447; 512, 538; and cp. Delbruck, 7 78, Verbum 226; Lindner 72. 1 188. Indo-arische Fhilologie. I. *. 9 I30 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

1. Of derivatives accented on the suffix there are more than 60

adjectives; e. g. ak-rd- 'swift', ug-rd- 'mighty', cit-rd- 'bright', tu-rd- 'strong', mu-rd- 'stupid', s'ak-rd- 'mighty', suk-rd- 'bright', hims-rd- 'injurious', Sub- stantives are: m. us-rd- 'bull', ksu-rd- 'razor', mrdh-rd- 'foe', rud-rd-, N. of a god, vam-rd- 'ant', wf-ri-'man', sud-rd- 'man of the fourth caste'; n. abh-rd- 'cloud', krcch-rd- 'distress', kru-rd- (AV. VS.) 'wound', ksi-rd- 'milk', khid-rd- 'weight', rip-rd- 'defilement', si-rd- 'plough'; f. hi-ra- (AV. VS.) 'vein'. a. With connecting vowel -a-, drav-a-rd- 'running', pat-a-rd- 'flying', ny-oc-a-rd- (AV.) 'suiting''; n. gambh-a-rd- 'depth', tas-a-rd- 'shuttle'^; with /': aj-i-rd- 'swift', is-i-rd- 'lively', dhvas-i-rd- 'stirring up', badh-i-rd- 'deaf, mad- i-rd- 'pleasing', rudh-i-rd- (AV.) 'red', sphi-rd- 'fat'; m. khad-i-rd-, a kind of tree; n. sar-i-rd- (VS.) 'wave'; with T: gabh-i-rd- and gambh-i-rd- 'deep'; with u: amh-u-rd- 'narrow', vith-u-rd- 'tottering'. 2. Of stems accented on the root the only adjectives are: grdh-ra- 'greedy', tiim-ra- 'stout', dhi-ra- 'wise', vip-ra- 'inspired'; substantives are: m. dj-ra- 'field', ind-ra-, N. of a god, vdj-ra- 'thunderbolt', vdrdh-ra- (AV.) 'girth', su-ra- 'hero'; n. dg-ra- 'point', rdndh-ra- 'hollow'^ svdbh-ra- 'pit';

f. dha-ra- 'stream', sip-ra- 'jaw', si'i-ra- 'intoxicating liquor'. a. With connecting vowel -/-: sthdv-i-ra- 'firm'; m. dng-i-ra-, N. of a seer, ds-i-ra- 'missile'; with -/-: sdv-T-ra- 'mighty'; n. sdr-T-ra- 'body'; with -U-: m. ds-u-ra- 'spirit', bdk-u-ra- 'trumpet'. a. A few of these derivatives are compounded with prepositions: m'-aVa- 'attentive', ni-mrg-ra- 'attached'; m. a-kha-rd- 'lair', sam-ud-rd- 'sea'.

-/•/' : agent.

172. This suffix forms adjectives as well as m. and f. substantives. It is sometimes added with connecting -u-. The root is more frequently accented than the suffix. 1. Adjectives are: bhu-ri- 'abundant', vddh-ri- 'emasculated', subh-ri- 'beautiful'; with connecting -u-\ jds-u-ri- 'exhausted', dds-u-ri- 'pious', sdh-u-ri- 'mighty'. 2. Substantives are: m. dngh-ri- (VS.) 'foot', ji-ri- 'flowing water', su-ri- 'patron'; f. dbh-ri- (AV. VS.) 'hoe', ds-ri- 'edge', us-ri- 'dawn', vdnk-ri- 'rib'; with connecting -u-: afig-u-ri- 'finger'; -ri occurs in tand-ri- (AV.) 'weariness'.

-ru : agent.

173. This rare suffix forms adjectives and a very few neuter substantives.

It is added either directly to the root or with a preceding -a-, -a-, or -e-. Either the root or the suffix may be accented. 1. Adjectives are: cd-ru- 'dear', dha-ru- (AV.) 'sucking', pi-ru- 'causing to swell' (^r-), bkt-ru- 'timid'; ar-d-ru- 'hostile', pat-d-ru- 'fl3ring'; jdb-a-ru-^ (RV'.) 'speeding', ply-a-ru- 'reviling', vand-a-ru- 'praising', sar-d-ru- 'injurious'; mad-e-ru- 'intoxicating', san-e-ru-'' 'obtaining'. 2. Substantives are: n. ds-ru- 'tear', smds-ru- 'beard'.

-la : agent.

174. This rare suffix, a later form of -ra, is equivalent in sense and use to the latter, sometimes also interchanging with it. It forms adjectives and a

I bharvard- (of doubtful meaning) is 2 Also -fksard- 'thorn' m. in an-rksard- probably a secondary formation, and vdsard- 'thornless'. 'matutinal' seems to be derived from vasar- 3 Perhaps for *jdv-a-ru- from jil- 'speed'. 'moming'. 4 The suffix is secondary in mitri-iv- 'ally'. IV. Nominal Stem Formation. Primary Nominal Derivation. 131

few masculine and neuter substantives. The radical syllable is accented in two or three substantives only. The suffix is added either directly to the root or with the connecting vowels -a-, -i-, -u-. Derivatives thus formed are: -pa-Id- (VS.) m. 'guardian' in aja-pald- (VS.) 'goat-herd', suk-ld- (AV.) n. 'white colour' (beside suk-rd- 'white'), sthu-ld- (AV.) 'thick' (beside sthu-rd-); with connecting -a-: trp-d-la- 'joyous', bhrm- a-ld- (AV.) 'torpid', mus-a-la- (AV.) m. 'pestle', sab-d-la- 'mottled', sdm-a-la- (AV.) n. 'defilement'; with -/-: dn-i-la- m. 'wind', trd-i-ld- 'porous', sal-i-ld- 'surging' (beside sar-i-rd- VS. 'flood'); with -u-: tan4-u-ld- (AV.) m. 'grain', iak-u-ld- (AV. VS.) m., a kind of fish.

-//' and -lu : agent.

175. The suffix -// occurs only once as the equivalent of -ri in ang-u-li- (VS^.) f. 'finger' (beside ang-u-ri-). Similarly -lu occurs only once as the equivalent of -ru in pataya-lu- (AV.) 'flying', formed from the conjugation stem patdya- (from pat- 'fly').

-va : agent.

176. This suffix forms about 20 adjectives and seven or eight substantives,

mostly mascuhnes with a concrete meaning. With one or two exceptions it is added directly to the root. The accent is rather oftener on the suffix than on the radical syllable. The root hardly ever appears in a strengthened form. 1. Accented on the suffix are the adjectives: Urdh-vd- 'upright', rk-vd- 'praising', rs-vd- 'lofty', tak-vd- 'swift', dhru-vd- 'fixed', pak-vd- 'ripe', mal-vd-

(AV.) 'foolish', yah-vd- 'swift', ran-vd- 'joyful', vis-vd-'^ 'all', sik-vd- (AV.) 'deft', sya-vd- 'dark brown', hras-vd- (VS.) 'short'; the substantives: m. Ur-vd- 'stair, sar-vd- (AV. VS.), N. of a god, sru-vd- 'ladle'; f. prus-va- (AV.) 'rime'; vidh-d-va-'^ 'widow'. 2. Accented on the root are: fbh-va- 'skilful', S-va- 'quick', m. 'course', pi-va- 'fat', pur-va- 'preceding', vdk-va- 'twisting', vis-va- 'all', sdr-va- 'all'; m. ds-va- 'horse', khdl-va- (AV. VS.), a kind of grain, srdk-va- 'corner of the mouth'; f. dm-i-va- 'disease' 3.

a. A few such derivatives occur only compounded witli prefixes: d-khar-va- 'not shortened', ati-fadva- (VS.) 'too bald', vi-bha-va- 'brilliant'.

-van : agent.

177. This suffix is used almost exclusively to form agent nouns +j both adjectives and substantives, which are mostly masculine, but sometimes neuter.

Though the root is regularly accenteds, it almost invariably appears in its unstrengthened form. If it ends in a short vowel -t- is added before the suffix. The feminine of these words is regularly formed with -vari (179 a). Examples of adjectives are: /^,^-&a«- 'praising', kr-t-van- 'axiXiwe', druh-van- 'injurious', pdt-van- 'flying', pi-van- 'fat'^ ydj-van- 'sacrificing', rd-van- (VS.)

1 Cp. Brugmann, Grundriss 2, p. 126. 5 The only exceptions are two words 2 Cp. Roth, KZ. 19, 223; Brugmann, formed with the connecting vowel -i-, mus- Grundriss 2, p. 126. i-van- 'robber', san-i-t

'bestowing', sdk-van- (VS.) 'able', su-t-van- 'pressing Soma'; substantives: m. ddh-van- 'road', dr-van- 'steed', grd-van- 'stone'; n. tug-van- 'ford', dkdn- van- 'bow' and 'desert', par-van- 'joint', snd-van-^ (AV. VS.) 'sinew'.

a. Several derivatives with -van are compounded with prepositions; thus ati-skdd- van- (VS.) 'transgressing', upa-hds-van- 'mocking', vi-vds-van- 'shining forth', vi-mfg-van- (AV.) 'cleansing', sam-bhf-t-van- (AV.) 'accumulating' 2.

-vana, -vani, -vanu : agent.

178. These rare suffixes are doubtless secondary forms of -van. They are all three accented: -vana and -vanu on the final, -vani on the first syllable. With -vana axe formed: vag-vand- 'talkative', sat-vand-, m. 'warrior'

(beside sdt-van-), and from the reduplicated root suiuk-vand- 'shining' ( Ysuc^. The suffix -vani seems to be preferred for derivatives from the reduplicated root; thus besides tur-vdni- 'overcoming', bhur-vdni- 'restless', occur jujur- vdni- 'praising', tutur-vdni- 'desiring to gain', dadhrs-vdni- 'daring', susuk-vdni- 'shining' {Y^uc-); the obscure word arharisvdni- 'exultant' seems to be derived with this suffix from an irregularly reduplicated form of hrs- 'be excited'. With -vanu is formed only vag-vam'c- m. 'noise'.

-vara, -vala : action and agent.

179. This suffix makes a few masculine nouns (f -i) chiefly accented on the final syllable of the suffix, and a very few neuter substantives accented on the root. The masculines are: i-t-vard- 'going', is-vard- (AV.) 'able', phdr-vara- 'sower', vyadh-vard- (AV.) 'piercing'^ {Yvyadh-^. Neuter sub- stantives are: kdr-vara- 'deed', gdh-vara- (AV.) 'thicket'. There are also two feminines which have the appearance of being derived with this suffix, ur-vdra- 'field' and ur-vdri- (AV.) 'filament', but their origin is uncertain. This suffix appears with / instead of r in vid-vald- 'cunning'.

a. The f. of this suffix, -van , is used as the f. of adjectives in -van, with which it corresponds in accent and treatment of the radical syllable. There are about 25 of these feminines in the RV. ; c. g. ydj-van- 'pious', sf-i-varl- 'speeding' 4.

-vas : action and agent.

180. This very rare suffix forms only the neuter subtantive vdr-i-vas- 'wide space' (beside vdr-i-man-) and the adjectives fbh-vas- 'skilful' (beside fbk-va- and fbh-van-) and sik-vas- 'skilful' (beside slk-van-). The vocative kkid-vas (vi. 22+) 'oppressing' is probably from a perfect participle khid- vSms-^ formed without reduplication, not from a stem khid-vas-.

-vams : agent.

181. This suffix is used to form a large number of perfect participles active, being added with or without the connecting vowel -/-; e. g. cakr-vams- 'having done', fy-i-vatns- 'having gone'; sometimes without reduplication; e. g. vid-vdms- 'knowing'^- This suffix, which is always accented, is in the weak cases reduced to -us- before vowels 7.

1 On two or three doubtful derivatives nines occurring in the AV. see his Index with this suffix see Whitney 1169 b. Verborum 375. 2 Several others are compounded with 5 Cp. pw.; in BR. the stem is given as nouns; see Lindner p. 107. khid-Tian-. According to WHITNEY 1173 b, 3 According to the Pada text vi- it is derived from \khad-. adhvard: 6 For the forms occurring see below 492. 4 See Whitney 1171 b; for such femi- 7 See Declension, -vams stems, 347. IV. Nominal Stem Formation. Primary Nominal Derivation. 133

-vi : agent.

182. This rare suffix is used to form some half dozen adjectives and one f. substantive, partly from the simple root (which is accented), partly from the reduphcated root (of which the reduplicative syllable is accented). The adjectives are: ghfs-vi- 'lively', jir-vi-'' (AV.) 'aged', dkn'i-vi- 'firm'; jdgr-vi-'w3XchM, di-dhr-vi- 'smtwamg', dt-di-vi- 'shining'^; f, ddr-vi-^ 'ladle'.

-vit : agent.

183. This suffix, which is perhaps an extension of -vi with -/, occurs in the single form cikit-vit (RV.) 'dehberately'.

-sa : agent.

184. This suffix is used to form about two dozen adjectives and substan- tives of all genders. It is added to the root with or without the connecting vowels -i- or -«-. The accent is sometimes on the suffix, sometimes on the root, which is usually unstrengthened. Many of these derivatives are of obscure origin.

The suffix is added direct in: gft-sa- 'adroit', -dfk-sa-'' (VS.), prk-sd-

'dappled' ( iZ/rc-); ut-sa- m. 'fountain', kut-sa-, N. of a man, ghram-sd- m.

'sun's heat', drap-sd- m. 'drop', ruk-sd- m. 'tree'; bhx-sa-^ f. 'fear'. a. The suffix is added with a connecting vowel (-?-, -u-) in: tav-i-sd-^

'strong', bhar-i-sd- 'rapacious', mah-i-sd- 'mighty'? ; rj-i-sd- 'rushing', rbi-sa-^ n.

'chasm', pur-i-sa- n. 'rubbish'; man-T-sd- f. 'devotion'; ar-ti-sd-^ 'red', as-us-a-

' voracious', tdr-u-sa- m. 'overcomer', pur-u-sa- m. 'man', mdn-u-sa- 'man'; ang-U-sd- m. 'hymn', piy-u-sa- n. 'biestings'.

-sani : agent.

185. - This suffix is found only in the derivatives car-sani- 'active', f. pi. 'people', and par-sdni- 'carrying across' {pr- 'cross').

-sara : agent.

186. This suffix appears only in mat-sard- 'intoxicating' (Yviad-) and perhaps in sap-sard- (i. 168") 'inspiring awe'(?) if derived from sap- 'do homage'.

-sas : action.

187. This suffix seems to be contained in vdp-sas- (RV'.) 'beauty' (?) '°, and possibly in tdr-u-sas- (RV.) 'superior' {Ytr-).

-sna : agent,

188. This suffix (perhaps syncopated for -sand) forms some half dozen adjectives and m. or n. substantives: tTk-snd- 'sharp' {YtiJ), de-snd-^^ n. 'gift'

1 From y^-' age'; see Whitney's note on 7 The f. is mahisT-. AV. XIV. lai. -The RV. 'ha.s Jiv-ri-. 8 The absence of cerebralization in the s, 2 The derivation oi pra-pharvi- (RV'.) is together with the b, makes the origin of

uncertain. this word quite uncertain ; it is most probably 3 In VS. ddrvi- in the vocative darvi. borrowed.

4 In i-dfk-sa- (VS.) 'looking like this' 9 The f. is artcsT-. 'such' (from df^- 'see'). 1° This is Sayana's interpretation of the 5 Only in the I. s. bhisa which is a con- word. traction for bhiyasa. II Generally to be read trisyllafaically as

6 The f. is idvisJ-. da-isna-. 134 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

m. {da- 'give'), slak-snd- {KV.) 'smooth'; with connecting -a-: kar-d-sna- 'foie- arm', mdt-a-sna-, n. 'lung', vadh-a-snd- n. 'deadly weapon'.

-snu : agent.

189. This suffix, which is always accented, forms adjectives, being added with or without a connecting vowel to the simple root, or more usually with connecting -i- to the causative stem.

1. From the simple root: ji-sim- 'victorious', dank-snu- (VS.) 'biting' (^ydams^, «zVfl^--s'«2^- 'sitting down'; z'sfl'/^-a-Jw?/- 'murderous', wr^/^-a-fwz^ 'joyous'; car-i-snu- 'wandering', d-mavisnu-'^ (x. 94") 'immovable {Ymu- = tniv-). 2. From the causative stem: tapay-i-snu- 'tormenting', namay-ism'i- 'bending', patay-i-snu- 'flying', paray-i-snu- 'saving', posay-i-pit'i- (AV.) 'causing to thrive', maday-i-sni't- 'intoxicating', abhi-socay-i-snu- (AV.) 'causing torments'.

II. Secondary Nominal Derivation.

LiNDNEK, Altindische Nominalbildung p. 114— 52. — Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar p. 454—80.

190. Secondary nominal stems are those derived from stems already ending in a suffix. They, however, include derivatives from pronominal roots, as i-tara- 'other', and exceptionally from indeclinable words or case-forms, as antdr-vant- 'pregnant' {antdr 'within'), mima-ka- 'belonging to me' {mdma

'of me)'. The stem to which secondary suffixes are added is subject to certain changes. Thus final -a and -i vowels are regularly dropped before suffixes beginning with a vowel or y, while final -u generally takes Guna; thus asv-in- 'possessing horses' {dsva-), khad-in- 'adorned with rings' (Jthadi-), vayav-ya- 'relating to the wind' {vayi'i^. Again, the n or the a of stems ending in

-an is occasionally lost, e. g. vrsa-tvd- 'manly power', vfsn-ya- 'manly' (but vrsan-vant- 'drawn by stallions'); while stems in -ant regularly appear in the weak form of -at, e. g. vdivasvat-a- 'son of Vivasvant'. The commonest change is, however, the strengthening of the initial syllable with Vrddhi^, e. g. dmitrd- 'hostile' {a-mitra- 'enemy'), pdrthiv-a- 'relating to the earth' (prfhivi-), maitravarund- 'derived from Mitra-varuna', sdubhaga- 'luck' (su- bhdga- 'lucky'). As regards meaning, the great majority of secondary suffixes form adjectives with the general sense of 'relating to' or 'connected with'. In several, however, the meaning has become specific. Thus the suffixes -ayana,

-i, -eya, form patronymics or metronymics; -in, -mant, -vant express possession; -tama and -tara imply degrees of comparison; -ta and -tva form abstract substantives. The masculines and feminines of adjectives are frequently used as appellatives, while the neuter is commonly employed as a substantive expressing the attributive sense of the adjective as an abstraction. a. The secondary suffixes are in their alphabetical order the following:

-a, -a, -aril, ayana, ayi, ayya, -i, -in, -ima, -iya, -i, -ma, -lya, -em, -enya, -eya,

-eyya, -ka, -ta, -tana and -tna, -tama, -taya, -taj-a, -tavya, -ta, -tat, -tati, -tya,

-tva, -tvata, -tvana, -tha, -na, -rii, -bha, -ma, -mant, -maya, -min, -mna, -ya, -yin, -ra, -la, -va, -vat, -van, -vant, -vaya, -vala, -vin, -vya, -sa.

1 Thus derived in pw.; in BR. emended hand, extremely rare in secondary derivation, to a-marisnu- 'immortal'; in Grassmann ex- as devd- 'divine' ((AV- 'heaven'), drona- 'wooden plained as ama-vimu- 'mit Ungestiim an- vessel' [dru- 'wood'), bhesaj-a- 'medicine' dringend'. (bhisaj- 'healing'); op. 191 a a. 2 Strengthening with Guna is, on the other :

IV. Nominal Stem Formation. Secondary Nominal Derivation. 135

19 r. With the suffix -a is formed a very large number of derivatives which are primarily adjectives expressing the sense of relation to or connexion with the primitive word; in the m. and f. they are, however, often used as appellatives, and in the neuter as abstracts. The first syllable of the primitive word, whether it is simple or compound is in the great majority of instances strengthened with Vrddhi; e. g. mdrut-a- 'relating to the Maruts' (marut-), mdghon-a-^ n. 'bountifulness' {maghdvan- 'bountiful') ', dasarajn-d- "battle of the ten kings' {dasa-rSjmi-)''; jaitr-a- 'victorious' (Ji-tr- 'conqueror'), tvastr-d- 'belonging to Tvastr'; manav-d- 'belonging to man' {mdnu-), tinv-a-^ 'belonging to the body' (tanu-); sarasvat-d- 'coming from the Sarasvati', aindragn-d- (AV.^ VS. TS.) 'belonging to Indra and Agni' {indragni); yamun-d- (AV.) 'coming from the Yamuna'; vddhryasv-a-'' 'descended from Vadhryasva', vaisvadev-d- (AV. VS.) 'sacred to all the gods' (vihd-deva-). a. A comparatively small number of derivatives add the suffix without taking Vrddhi. These are probably to a considerable extent due to transfers from other declensions to the a-declension. Such are tamas-d- (AV.) 'dark- coloured', parus-d- 'knotty' {pdrus- 'knot'), hemant-d- 'winter'; dpak-a- 'distant' (dpanc- 'behind'); hotr-d- 'office of priest' {fwtr-); sakhy-d- 'friendship' isdkhi- 'friend').

a. With Guna are formed tray-d- 'threefold' {in- 'three'), dvay-d- 'twofold' {dvi- 'two'), nav-a- 'new' {nit- 'now'); dev-d- 'divine' {div- 'heaven'), bhesaj-d- 'medicine' {bhisdj- 'healer').

192. The suffix -a is used in a very large number of stems to form the feminine of adjectives which in the masculine and neuter end in -a. Thus ndv-a- {., ndva- m. n. 'new'; priy-d- f., priyd- m. n. 'dear'; gat-d- £, gatd- m. n. 'gone'.

193. The suffix -a/7/" 5 is used to form the feminine from stems in -a, designating the wife of the corresponding male being, or expressing a feminine personification: arany-ani- 'Forest Nymph' {dranya- 'forest'), indr-ani- 'wife of Indra', unndr-ani- 'Queen of the Usinaras', urj-dm- 'Strength' (personified), purukuts-ani- 'wife of Purukutsa', mudgal-dm- 'wife of ', varun-ani- 'Varuna's wife'. 194. The suffix -ayana- forms a few patronymics with Vrddhi in the first syllable: anty-Syand- (NSi.TS.) 'descendant of Antya', amusy-ayand- {AN.) 'descendant of so and so' {amusya- gen. of adds), kanv-ayana- 'descendant

of Kanva', ddks-ayand- (VS. AV.) 'descendant of Daksa'; also the f. ram- ayani- (AV.) 'daughter of the Black One' {ramd-). The derivative uksaft- Ayana-, N. of a man, being formed without Vrddhi is perhaps not meant for a patronjTnic. 195. The suffix -ayT occurs perhaps only twice, forming the feminine from two masculine stems in -i and designating the wife of the corresponding male agn-ayi- 'wife of Agni' and vrsakap-ayi- (only voc.) 'wife of Vrsakapi'. 196. The suffix -ayya forms gerundives*; e. g. srav-dyya- 'glorious' (Jru- 'hear'). There are also a few other derivatives similarly formed, which are used as ordinary adjectives or as neuter abstracts; thus nr-pdyya- 'guarding

1 Formed from the weakest stem maghon-. -a is added to stems in -a as to others (the 2 With syncope of the vowel of the suffix. finalvowel of the primitive disappearing before 3 Without Guna of the ii; similar ex- it) and not that derivation by Vrddhi alone ceptions in parsv-d- 'side' (pdrsu- 'rib'), takes place here; cp. Whitney 1208 i. paidv-d- 'belonging to Pedu', madhv-a- 'full 5 Cp. Leumann, KZ. 32, 294. ff. of sweetness' {mddhu-), yadv-a- 'belonging 6 These are probably formed from dative to Yadu'. infinilives in -ai + -ya; cp. Brugmann, Grund- I t It is natural to suppose that the suffix riss p. 1422 ; cp. also IF. 12, 2. | 2, 136 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar. men', bahu-payya- 'protecting many'; purva-payya- 'first drink', mahay-dyya- 'enjoyment', kunda-pdyya- and puru-mayya- as Proper Names; also formed from nouns, ras-dyya- 'tasteful' {rasa- 'sap') and uttam-Ayya- n. 'summit' {uttatna- 'highest')'. 197. The suffix -/ forms a few patronymics from nouns in -a with Vrddhi in the initial syllable: Agnives-i- 'descendant of Agnivesa', pdurukuts-i- 'son of Purukutsa', pratardan-i- 'descendant of Pratardana', prahrad-i- (AV.) 'son of Prahrada, sAmvaran-i- 'descendant of Sarnvarana'. Similarly formed, but with the sense of an ordinary substantive, is sArath-i- 'charioteer' (from sa-rdtha-m 'on the same chariot'). Two other words add a secondary -i without Vrddhi or patronymic sense: tdpus-i- 'burning' and sucant-i-, N. of a man (seemingly an extension of the participle suc-dnt- 'shining') 198. Hundreds of adjectives are formed with the suffix -in from stems

in -a, but very rarely from stems with any other final; e. g. ark-in- 'praising' (arkd- 'praise'), manis-in- 'wise' {mani-sA- 'wisdom'), arc-i7i- 'radiant' {ixrci- 'beam'), satagv4n- 'consisting of hundreds' (*saia-gva-), varm-in- 'clad in armour' {vdrman-), svan-in- (VS.) 'keeping dogs' (Jvdn-). With loss of final -as: ret-in- 'abounding in seed' {re'tas-) and perhaps in the Proper Name varc-in- {vdrc-as- 'power'); with loss of -ya: Jiiran-in- 'adorned with gold' (hiran-ya-). 199. The suffix -ima is very rare, being employed to form adjectives from the stems in -tra and from one in -ra: krtr-ima- 'artificial', khanitr-ima- 'made by digging', putr-ima- (AV.) 'purified'; agr-imd- 'foremost' {dg-ra- 'front'). 200. The suffix -iya is employed to form some 20 adjectives (from stems in -a). It is only a modified form of -ya which is added for facility of pronunciation after two or more consonants, the last of which is generally r, rarely n, m or v; e. g. abhr-iyd- 'derived from the clouds' (abhrd-), samudr- iya- 'belonging to the sea' {samudrd)-, indr-iyd- 'belonging to Indra'; krsn-iyd-, N. of a man {krsnd- 'black'); rgm-iya 'praiseworthy'; asv-iyd- 'con- sisting of horses', 'troop'. 201. The suffix -T is employed in a very large number of derivatives to form the feminine of masculine stems; often from stems in -a^; e. g. drus-T- 'ruddy' {arusd-), dev-i- 'goddess' {devd-); or in -u; e. g. prthv-i- 'broad' iprth-i'i-) ; or from stems formed with suffixes ending in consonants, as parti- ciples in -at or -ant, e. g. piprat-T- /protecting' [pr- 'take across'), ad-at-i-

'eating' {ad-dnt-), mdd-ant-i 'rejoicing' or in -vams-, e. g. jagm-us-i- 'having gone'; comparatives in -Tyains-, e. g. ndv-iyas-i- 'new'; stems in -tar, e. g. avitr-i- 'protectress'; in -mant, e. g. dhenu-mdt-i- 'abounding in nourishment'; in -vant, e. g. dma-vat-i- 'impetuous'; in -an, e. g. soma-rajn-T- 'having Soma as king'; in -in, e. g. arkin-T- 'radiant'; in -anc, e. g. arvAc-t- 'hitherward'; in compounds of -han 'slaying', e. g. a-pati-ghn-i- 'not killing a husband', of -drs- 'look', as su-dfs'-T- 'well-looking', and of -pad 'foot', as a-pdd-i- 'footless'. 202. The suffix -Tna forms more than a dozen adjectives from the weak stems of derivatives in -anc-, expressing direction without change of meaning; e. g. arvac-ina- and arvac-ind- 'turned towards' {arvaiic- 'hitherward'). It also forms six or seven adjectives from other words, expressing the general sense of relation; e. g. anjas-ina- 'straightforward' {anjasa- 'straight'), visvajan-ina- (AV.) 'containing all kinds of people'.

1 See Whitney 1218 a. formed with | Vrddhi in the initial syllable; 2 This is regularly the case in stems e. jnanus-a- \ g. 'human', f. manus-T-. IV. Nominal Stem Formation. Secondary Nominal Derivation. 137

203. The suffix -lya forms fewer than a dozen general adjectives, of which only two occur in the RV.; e. g. arjik-iya-, designation of a Soma vessel, grha-medh-iya- 'relating to the domestic sacrifice'; ahav-an-iya- (AV.) 'sacrificial fire', parvat-iya- (AV.) 'mountainous'. This suffix also appears in the three ordinals dvit-iya- 'second', trt-iya- 'third', tur-tya- 'fourth'. 204. The suffix -ena with Vrddhi of the initial syllable, occurs only once, forming a general adjective, in its feminine form samidh-eni- 'relating to fuel' {samtdk-). 205. The suffix -enya was doubtless originally formed by the addition of -ya to derivatives made with -na, but it nearly always has a primary value as forming gerundives; e.g. drs-inya- 'worthy to be seen'. It appears, however,^ also in the two ordinary adjectives kirt-enya- 'famous' {ktrti- 'fame') and vir-enya- 'manly' {vird- 'hero').

206. The suffix -e/ff, with Vrddhi of the initial syllable, is employed to form fewer than a dozen adjectives of a patronymic or metronymic value and some half dozen adjectives of a general character, the latter occasionally

appearing in the neuter as abstract substantives; e. g. ars-eyd- 'descended from a seer' {fsi-), adit-eya- 'son of Aditi'; pdurus-eya- 'relating to man' (purusa-), mdun-eya- 'position of a sage' {muni-). Two words with this suffix are formed without initial Vrddhi, following the analogy of gerundives from roots ending in a like deya- 'to be given' {da- 'give'): didrks-eya- 'worth

seeing' (as from didrk-sa- 'desire to see') and sabh-eya- 'fit for an assembly' {sabhd-). 207. The very rare suffix -eyya forms adjectives with a gerundive sense in sius-eyya-"- 'praise-worthy', and sapath-eyya- (AV.) 'worthy of cursing'. It also forms an ordinary adjective used as a neuter substantive, sahas-eyya- n. 'lying together' («- 'lie)'. 208. The suffix -ka was probably used originally to form adjectives

expressive of connexion, but it has become so attenuated in meaning as often to be added to substantives or adjectives without changing the sense; while on the other hand it has become specialized as a suffix forming diminutives. 1. Examples of its significant use are: dnia-ka- 'making an end' {dnta-), rupa-ka- (AV.) 'having an assumed form' {rupd- 'form'); asmd-ka- 'our' {asmd- 'us'), mdma-ka- 'my' {mama 'of me'); dnti-ka- 'near' {dnti 'before').

2. The suffix appears without changing the meaning in e. g. dura-kd-

'distant' {dura- 'far'), vamra-kd- 'ant' {vamrd- 'ant'), sarva-kd- (AV.) 'all'

{sdrva-), and in the fem. form of -ka in : avi-ka- 'ewe' {dvi- 'sheep'), isu-kd- (AV.) 'arrow' {hu-), dhenu-ka- (AV.) 'cow' {dhenu-). 3. The diminutive sense appears in e. g. arbha-kd- 'small', kumara-kd- 'little boy', pada-kd-

'little foot', putra-kd- 'little son'^. Sometimes a contemptuous meaning is conveyed at the same time, as in anya-kd- 'other' {anyd-), dla-ka-m 'in vain' {dla-m 'enough')^.

a. With Vrddhi in the first syllable is formed mama-kd-'- 'belonging to me' {mama); and with connecting -?-: vdrs-i-ka- (AV. VS.) 'belonging to the rains' {varsd-), vdsant-i-ka- 'belonging to the spring' {vasantd-), and in the fem. kairat-ikd- (AV.) 'relating to the Kiratas'. 209. The rare secondary suffix -ia has an ordinal sense in eka-td- (VS.)

1 This gerundive is probably based on small', kumarika.- (AV.) 'little girl', kharv- the infinitive stiise 'to praise'; cp. Brugmann, ika- (AV.) 'mutilated', sakunt-ikd- 'little bird',

Grundriss 2, p. 1422 (5). iit-ikd- 'cool' (AV. Slid- 'cold'). 2 The feminine of some of these diminu- 3 Cp. Whitney 521. tives is formed with -ika : iyatt-ikd- 'so 4 Beside the more normal mdma-ka-. 138 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

'First', dvi-td- 'Second', tri-td- 'Third' as Proper Names. It also appears in ava-td- 'well' and muhur-td- 'moment'. 210. With the suffix -tana and its syncopated form -tna are made, from adverbs or prepositions, a very few adjectives with a temporal sense: mi-tana- and na-tna- 'present' {nu 'now'), sana-tdna- (AV.) and sand-tna- (AV.) 'eternal' {sdna 'from of old'), pra-tnd- 'ancient' {prd 'before'). 211. The suffix -tama has two uses. It is employed to form superlatives from nominal stems and from the preposition lid; &. g. puru-tdma- 'very many', mddhumat-tama- 'very sweet', rathi-tama-'^ 'best charioteer'; ut-tamd-' 'highest'. It is also used to form ordinals; e. g. sata-tamd- 'hundredth'. 212. With the suffix -iaya are formed only two adjectives from numerals in the sense of 'consisting of so many parts': cdtus-taya- {KM.) 'fourfold' and ddsa-taya- 'tenfold'.

213. The suffix -iara is regularly used to form comparatives from adjectives, substantives, or the preposition ud; e. g. tavds-tara- 'stronger', rathi-tara- 'better charioteer', vrtra-tdra- 'worse Vrtra'; ut-tara- 'higher'. It also forms the ordinary adjective diva-tara- (RV.) 'diurnal' (diva 'by day'), and a few substantives in which the meaning of the suffix is somewhat obscure: asva-tdra-^ (AV.) 'mule' (f. -i), vatsa-tard-^ 'weaned calf's (f. -/). 214. The suffix -iau-ya, probably originating from the predicative use of dative infinitives in -tav-e and beginning to be used in a gerundive sense, appears only twice in the AV. : jan-i-tav-ya- 'to be born' and hims-i-tav-ya- 'to be injured'. 215. The suffix -to. forms, from adjectives and substantives, some two dozen abstract nouns expressing the sense conveyed by the English suffixes -ness and -ship; e. g. bandhi'i-ta- 'relationship', vasu-ta- 'wealthiness'; ago-ta- 'lack of cattle', devd-ta- 'divinity', purusd-ta- 'human nature'; jand-ta- (AV.) has acquired the concrete sense of 'mankind' *. Exceptional formation appears in mamd-ta- 'selfishness' and tre-ta- 1 (VS. TS.) 'triad'. This suffix is probably contained in su-nf-ta-^ 'gladness' also. a. The suffixes -tati and -tai are related to -ta and have the same sense. With the former are made about a dozen abstract substantives; e.g. a-ristd-tati- 'security', grbhitd-tati- 'the being seized', jyesthd-tati- 'superiority', devd'tati- 'divinity', vasu-tati- 'wealth', sarvd-tati- 'completeness'. The two substantives sdm-tati- 'good fortune' and satyd-tati- 'truth' also appear as adjectives meaning respectively 'beneficent' and 'truthful'. The suffix -tat, which seems to be an abbreviation of -tati and occurs only in the RV., is employed to form four or five abstract substantives: upard-tat- 'proximity', devd-tat- 'divine service', vrkd-tat- 'wolfishness', sarvd-tat- 'completeness'. 216. The suffix -tya forms some half dozen adjectives and sub- stantives from prepositions and adverbs. These are dpa-tya- n. 'offspring', amd-tya- 'companion' {ama 'at home'), Svis-tya- 'manifest' {avis 'openly'), nis-tya- 'foreign' {nis 'out'), sdnu-tya- 'secret' 9. This suffix is also added to

1 Also in the Proper Name gd-ta?na-. the verbal -tara 'speeding' {t]'- 'cross'). 2 The superlatives tuvi-s-tama- 'strongest' karotard- 'filter' and kaulitard-, designation and surabhi'S-iania- 'most fragrant' insert a of Sambara, are probably formed vifith -a sibilant before the suffix. and Vrddhi. 3 Perhaps 'more (like a) horse' (than an 6 Like 'humanity' in English. assl. 7 Also in tret-in-l- (RV.) 'the threefold I Probably 'more than a calf. flame of three fires'. 5 In ratham-tard-, designation of a kind 8 Though it appears also as a neuter sii- of Saman, in which the case ending of the nfta- 'gladness' and as an adjective 'joyful'. ace. remains, the second is doubtless 9 part Cp. sanu-tdr 'aside', I IV. Nominal Stem Formation. Secondary Nominal Derivation. 139 the substantive Up- 'water' to form the two adjectives ap-tyd- and ap-tyd- ' watery'. 217. With the suffix -tva are formed more than thirty abstract substan- tives with the same sense as those in -ta; e. g. amrta-tvd- 'immortahty', aham-uttara-tvd- (AV.) 'assertion of superiority', bhratr-tvd- 'brotherhood', maghavat-tvd- liberahty', raksas-tvd- 'sorcery'. The final syllable of the primitive is lengthened in an-agas-tvd- 'sinlessness'j while it is shortened in sadhani-tvd- ^ 'companionship'. Owing to the influence of the nominative, j is inserted before the suffix in su-praja-s-tvd- 'possession of many children' and with initial Vrddhi in saupraja-s-tvd-^ {KV^.) 'possession of good offspring'. a. The two suffixes -ta and -tva, identical in meaning, are pleonastically

combined in the form of -tva-ta.- in. the two derivatives isita-tvdta- 'excite- ment', and purusa-tvdta- 'human nature'. 218. The suffix -ivana, an extension of -tva with -na, appears in the formation of some eight neuter abstracts occurring almost exclusively in the

RV. These are kavi-tvand- '•wisdoia', jani-tvand- 'state of a wife^ ; pati-tvand- 'matrimony', martya-tvand- 'the ways of man', mahi-tvand- 'greatness', vasu- tvand- 'wealth', vrsa-tvand- 'manliness', sakhi-tvand- 'friendship'. All of these except martya-tvand- have beside them the corresponding abstracts formed with -tva^, 219. The suffix -iha forms a few ordinals from cardinals, and adjectives from pronominal stems with a general numerical sense. Thus catur-thd (AV.) 'fourth', sas-thd- (AV. VS.) 'sixth', saptd-tha- 'seventh'; kaii-thd- 'the how manieth?'- 220. The rare secondary suffix -na appears in one adjective derived with initial Vrddhi from a substantive, strdi-na- 'feminine' {stri- 'woman), and

in three adjectives derived firom adverbs without any internal change : pura-nd- 'ancient {puri 'before'), visu-na- 'various' i^visu- 'apart'), sama-nd- 'like' {samd- 'equal'). 221. The suffix -tiT is used to form the feminine oi pdti- 'lord' and parus-d- 'knotty', as well as of several adjectives in -ta denoting colours. Thus pdt-nT- 'mistress', pdrus-ni-, as N. of a river. The suffix is substituted for -ta in e-ni- 'variegated' \e-ta-), rohi-ni- 'red cow' {rohi-ta- 'red'), syS-ni- 'white cow' (Jye-td- 'white'), hdriin- 'fallow' {hdri-ta-). In a few such words f-: dsik-ni- -m is substituted for the final a, while k takes the place of the 'black' (dsi-ta-), pdlik-m- 'grey' {pali-td-), hdrik-ni- in the diminutive form hdrikn-ika- (AV.) 'yellowish' {hdri-ta- 'fallow'). 222. The suffix -bha forms half a dozen derivatives, all names of animals except one adjective S: rsa-bhd- and vrsa-bhd- 'bull', garda-bhd- and rssa-bha-^ 'ass', sara-bhd- (AV. VS.) 'fabulous eightlegged animal'. The one adjective is sthula-bhd- {KSl'^^ beside sthuld- 'big'. 223. The suffix -ma forms some eight superlatives, partly from prepo- 'eight', 'nine', sitions, and the ordinals from the cardinals for 'five' and 'seven', apa-md- 'farthest', ava-md- 'lowest', 'ten'. The former are : adha-md- 'lowest',

Morphologische Unter- I From sadha-ni- ('one who leads with 4 See Brugmann, and Grundriss 2, him') 'companion', which is, however, ana- suchungen 2, p. 198, sa-dhani-. p. 315- "the Pada text as . lysed in ^ , Grundriss s saubhaga-tva- 'happiness' is formed from 5 See Brugmann, 2, p. 203; 'condition- of welfare', cp. p. 89, note 2. 'welfare' = . soMbhaga- , Formed, with Vrddhi, and accented on not from su-bhdga- 'lucky', from which is 6 subhaga-iva- 'welfare'. the initial syllable, from ras- 'roar', 'bray' etc. formed | 28. 3 Cp. Lindner 26 and | 140 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar. upa-md- 'highest', dnta-ma-'^ 'nearest', cara-md- 'last', para-md- 'remotest', madhya-md- 'middlemost'. The ordinals are: panca-md- (A.V. VS.) 'fifth', sapta-md- (VS.) 'seventh', asta-md- 'eighth', nava-md- 'ninth', dasa-md- 'tenth'. 224. The suffix -mant forms in the Sainhitas between 80 and 90 possessive adjectives, like the parallel suffix -vant', with which it is to some extent interchangeable. Unlike -vant, however, it never forms derivatives from stems ending in -a except kdnva-mant- (RV'.) 'prepared by the Kanvas' and ydva-mant- 'rich in barley'. Examples are : asdni-mant- 'possessing the thunder- bolt', dsadki-mant- (AV.) 'rich in herbs', krdtu-mant- 'having power', vadhti-mant- 'drawn by mares'(?), hotr-mant- 'provided with a sacrificer', go-mant- 'rich in kine',

?/m^/J-OTa«^ 'gleaming', garut-mant- 'winged' (?), kakud-mant-^ 'provided with a hump', cdksus-mant- 'possessed of eyes', vidyim-mant-'- 'containing hghtning'.

(Ivisi- a. A final -i is sometimes lengthened : tvisT-mant- 'vehement' 'vehemence'), dhraji-mant- 'gliding' [dhrdji- = dhraji- 'gliding motion'), hin-mant- 'tawny-horsed' (hiri- jy/oV/j-- = hdri- 'bay steed'); -'i- is inserted Kn jyotis-i-mant- (AV.)5 'full of light' (beside mant-), and s in iuci-s-mant-^ 'shining'. In the derivative susu-mdnt- (RV'.) 'very stimu- lating' the suffix seems to have primary value?. The adverb dsu-mdt (AVi), formed from the neuter of this suffix, seems to follow the analogy of adverbs in -vat from derivatives in -vant,

225. The suffix -maya (f. -t) forms fewer than a dozen adjectives with the sense of 'consisting of, 'derived from', 'abounding in'. The suffix -as remains unchanged before the m, but d is assimilated as in external Sandhi. Derivatives thus formed are: ayas-mdya- 'made of metal', asman-mdya- 'made of stone', kim-mdya- 'consisting of what?', go-mdya- 'consisting of cattle', nabhas-mdya- 'vaporous', manas-mdya- 'spiritual', mrn-mdya- 'made of clay' {mrd-), saka-mdya- 'arising from dung', su-mdya-^ 'well-fashioned'. 226. The suffix -min was most probably due to the derivatives in -in from nouns in -ma, like dhum-in- 'smoking' (dhumd- 'smoke') which are fairly common. It has an independent character, however, in is-min- 'impetuous' and rg-min-'^ 'jubilant with praise' {fc-). 227. The rare suffix -mna forms a few neuter abstracts from nouns or par- ticles. It seems to be an extension with -a of -man syncopated hke -tna for -tana. The derivatives formed with it are: dyu-m?id- 'brightness' {dyu- 'sky'), nr-miid- 'manliness' {nr- 'man'), ni-mnd- 'depth' {ni 'down'), su-mnd- 'welfare' {su- 'well'). 228. The very common suffix -ya'^° forms a large number of adjectives of relation, including a good many patronymics, and abstract substantives. It is pronounced -ia nearly four times as often as -ya. The feminine is usually -ya, both in adjectives and abstract substantives; but in the former it is some- times -r, as ar-i- and dr-ya- 'Aryan', ddiv-T-'^^ and ddiv-ya- 'divine'. a. All the patronymics besides a good many general adjectives, and most of the abstract substantives are formed with initial Vrddhi; e. g. adit-yd- 'Son of Aditi', sahadev-yd- 'descendant of Sahadeva'; grdiv-ya- (AV.) 'relating to the neck' (grivd-), ddiv-ya- 'divine' (devd-god'), prajapat-yd- (AV.)

1 Once (l. 1655) anta-md-; cp. p. 89, 7 The word is analysed in the Pada text note 3. as susu-mdn. 2 Which is, however, about three times 8 This derivative seems to preserve the as common. originally nominal character of this suffix. 3 The VS. has kakun-mant- as in external 9 In this derivative the original guttural Sandhi. appears, though it has become sonant as in + With assimilated t as in external Sandhi. external Sandhi. 5 1° 210 Following the analogy of tdvisT-mant- See Whitney 1 — 1213 (p. 459—466) 'strong', and Lindner 36 (p. 138—144). 6 Occurring only once in the vocative " These are evident instances of the re- sucis-mas. |duction of unaccented yd to 2; cp. 24 a. IV. Nominal Stem Formation. Secondary Nominal Derivation. 141

'relating to Prajapati'; adhipat-ya- 'lordship' {ddhi-pati- 'lord'), jdnaraj-ya- (VS.) 'kingship' (Jana-rajan- 'king of the people'), vaimanas-yd- (AV.) 'de- jection' {vi-manas-), samgramajit-ya- (AV.) 'victory in battle' {samgrama-jH- KSr^ 'conquering in battle'), sduvasv-ya-'' 'wealth in horses' {sv-dsva-). b. Derivatives formed without Vrddhi are mostly ordinary adjectives, being about four times as numerous as those formed with Vrddhi. They are made from stems with all kinds of finals. The following are examples: dh-ya- 'relating to horses' {dsva-); urvar-ya- (VS.) 'belonging to cultivated land'

svaraj-ya- 'autocracy' {sva-rSj- 'sovereign') ; karman-ya- 'skilful in work' {kdrtnan-), vfsn-ya-^ 'virile' {vfsan- 'male'); sat-yd-'* 'true' isdnt-), prac-ya- (AV.) 'eastern' {prMc-); ayus-ya- (VS. AV.) 'length of life' {dyus^.

a. The final -a is retained before the suffix in hiranyd-ya- 'made of gold' [kiranya-), while -an is dropped before it in aryam-ya- 'intimate' {arya-man- 'companion'). The suffix is added pleonastically in avyd-ya- and dvya-ya- 'belonging to sheep' (beside dv-ya-) and gavyd-ya- 'derived from cows' (beside gdv-ya-); also in forming a few possessive com- pounds, as su-hdst-ya- 'skilful-handed' (beside su-hdsia-)S. It is also used in forming a few governing compounds, as ddhi-gart-ya- 'being on the driver's seat' [gdria-), abhi- naih-yd-m, adv. 'near the clouds' {ndbhas-)^.

(S. In some adjectives and substantives, the suffix has a primary appearance; e. g. pus-ya- 'flower', yuj-ya- 'related', niddh-ya- 'middle', mdr-ya- 'young man', sur-ya- 'sun', f. sur-ya- 7 (svar- 'light').

)*. Though as a gerundive suffix -ya must be regarded as primary, it is manifestly secondary in certain adjectives which have a gerundive sense; thus a-vi-mok-yd- (AV.) 'not to be loosened', pari-varg-yd-^ (AV.) 'to be avoided'. S. Akin to the gerundives are a few abstract feminines in -yd; e. g. k^-i-ya- 'action', 'enchantment', md-ya-9 (AV.) 'knowledge', deva-yaj-yi- 'worship of the gods'.

22g. The rare suffix -y'ln^ like -in, forms a few possessive adjec- tives, all of which except one occur in the VS. They are atata-yin- (VS.) 'having one's bow drawn' {d-tata-), dhanva-yin- (VS.) 'bearing a bow' {dkdnvan-), mara-yin-^° (RV'.), N. of a man, srka-yin- (VS.) 'having a spear' {srkd-), svadka-yin-^^ (VS.) 'owning the Svadha'. 230. The suffix -ra forms four superlatives from prepositions and about a dozen ordinary nouns, most of which are adjectives. The superlatives are ddha-ra- 'lower', dpa-ra- 'later', dva-ra- 'lower', upa-ra- '^ 'lower'. The ordinary adjectives formed with the suffix have the sense of 'belonging to' or 'connected with'. It is usually added direct; e. g. dhutn-rd- 'grey' {dhumd- 'smoke'), asrt-rd- 'ugly', pamsu-rd- 'dusty' {pamsi'i- 'dust', AV.), and with initial Vrddhi igriidh-ra- 'belonging to the fire-kindler' {agnidk-). It is added with connecting i in medh-i-rA- 'wise' {medkd- 'wisdom') and rath-i-rd- 'riding in a car'. It also occurs in a few substantives, some of which are of

1 As if from suvasva- ; like vaiyasv-d- 6 Cp. Whitney 1212 m. 'descendant of VyaSva'; cp. Whitney 7 Cp. Whitney 1213 e; and Roots, under 1204 b, c. svar- 'sound'. 2 With Guna of final -u as usual before 8 Here the guttural shows that these secondary suffixes (190); prdiav-yd- 'to be words are derived from nominal stems partaken of (pra-as-) and iirjav-yd- 'rich in -moka- and -varga-. nourishment' (urj-) are formed without any 9 In the RV. only in the compound /aiii- primitives praiu- and urju-. vidyd- 'knowledge of creatures'. 3 With syncope in the suffix of the pri- '° Perhaps meaning 'brilliant' or, according mitive; cp. 190. to Sayana, 'destroying' enemies. 4 From the weak stem of the primitive; 11 The TS. IV. 4. 114 has svadha-vin: cp. 190. 12 For dnta-ra cp. above p. 90, 39 and 5 Cp. Whitney 1212 c. note I. 142 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar. doubtful etymology: karmd-ra-^ 'smith', muska-rd- (AV.), a kind of small animaP, sdmbara-^, N. of a demon, /a/U'wra- (AV.) 'penis', sahds-ra- 'thousand'. 231. The suffix -la forms about a dozen adjectives with the same meaning as those formed with -ra, with which it sometimes interchanges and

of which it is generally a later form. Examples are: aslt-ld- (AV.) 'ugly', kapi-ld- 'brown', jiva-ld- (AV.) 'lively', tilvi-la- 'fertile', bahu-ld- 'abundant', madhu-ld- 'sweet', seva-la- (AV.) 'shiny'. This suffix also forms two or three diminutives: vrsa-ld- 'little man', sihi-la- 'little child', and the fem. salaka-ld- (AV.) 'small splint'. 232. The suffix -va forms a few adjectives: arwa-z/a- 'billowy', kesa-vd- (AV.) 'hairy', ahji-vd- (AV.) 'slippery', santi-vd- (AV.) 'friendly', sraddhi-vd- 'credible'. 233. The suffix -vat forms seven feminine abstract substantives, with a local sense, from adverbs or prepositions: arva-vdt-'' 'proximity', a-vdt- (AV.) 'proximity', ud-vdt- 'height', ni-vdt- 'depth', para-vdt- 'distance', pra-vdt- 'height', sam-vdt- 'region'. 234. With the suffix -van, before which -a and -i may be lengthened, are formed some twenty derivatives, nearly all adjectives with the sense of 'possessing' or 'connected with'. The adjectives are: amati-vdn- 'indigent', arati-vdn- 'hostile', fgha-van- 'impetuous', rna-vdn- 'indebted', dhitd-van-^ 'rich

in gifts', dhi-van- (AV.) 'clever', maghd-van- 'bountiful', srusti-vdn- 'obedient',

satyd-van-^ (AV.) 'truthful', samdd-van- 'warlike', svadhd-van-, f. -vari-'' 'faith-

ful', hdrd-van- (VS.) 'hearty'; also the feminines sumnd-vdri- 'bringing favour', sunfta-varT- 'joyous'. Somewhat anomalously formed are indhan-van- 'possessed of fuel' {ind/iana-), saka-van-^ and sdho-van-"^ (AV.) 'mighty'. There are also the substantives dthar-van- m. 'fire-priest', mitsi-vdn- m. 'robber', and sani-t- van-^° 'reward'. 235. The suffix -vant forms, from nominal stems of every kind, possessive adjectives numbering at least 250 in the Sarnhitas. A final vowel is often lengthened before the suffix, most frequently -a, but very rarely -u. Examples are: kesa-vant- 'hairy', dsva-vant- 'possessed of horses' (beside dsva-vant-); prajd-vant- 'having progeny'; sdkhi-vant- 'having friends', sdkti-vant- 'mighty' (Jdkti- 'might'); dydva-prtkivi-vant-'^^ (AV.) 'connected with heaven and earth'; visnu-vant- 'accompanied by Visnu', visu-vdnt- 'dividing' {visu- 'apart'); hdrit- vant- 'gold-coloured'; asan-vdnt- (AV.) 'having a mouth', roman-vant- and Uma-vant- (AV.) 'hairy', strsan-vdnt- (AV.) 'having a head'; kakiibh-vant- (MS. I. 11') 'having a peak'; svar-vant- 'splendid'; pdyas-vant- 'containing milk',

nas-vdnt- {KY .) 'having a nose'. With external Sandhi: //jafl?-j'3«/- 'variegated''^. a. Some of these derivatives, especially if formed from pronominal stems, have the meaning of 'resembhng' instead of 'possessing'; thus md-vant- 'like

me', i-vant- ''SO great', ii-vant- 'how fa.i?', indras-vant-'^'^ 'like Indra', nila-vant-

1 sevara- 'treasury' probably stands by 9 The only instance of external Sandhi haplology for Uva-vdra-. with this suffix. 2 The word occurs in TS. V. (B) as an 1° With -i interposed, as after short radical adjective meaning 'having testicles'. vowel preceding primary -van; e. g. kf-t-

3 Probably a, foreign word. van-. 4 From arva- 'hither' contained in arvahc- 11 Retaining the double accent of the pri- 'hitherward' and some other derivatives. mitive. 5 The Pada text has dhitd-van-. 12 In a few derivatives -vant has the S The Pada text has saiyd-van-. appearance of a primary suffix : vivds-vant- 7 The fem. of the secondary -van being or vi-vasvani- 'shining', dr-vani- 'swift', yah-

formed like that of the primary -van ; see vdnt- 'speeding'. 177 and cp. 179 a. 13 With the s of the nominative. 8 The Pada text has sahd-van-. V. Compounds. Form of Compounds. 143

'blackish', nr-vdnt- 'manly'. From this sense is derived the use of the neuter ace. as an adverb of comparison, e.g. manus-vdt 'like Manus', 'as Manus did'. 236. The very rare suffix -vaya^ probably a noun in origin, seems to be found only in one numeral adjective, cdtur-vaya- 'fourfold', and one sub- stantive, drii-vdya- (AV.) 'wooden dish'. 237. The suffix -vala (cp. 179) seems to be used in the formation of secondary derivatives only in krsi-^ald- 'peasant' {krsi- 'tillage') and in the fem. nad-^ala- (VS.) 'reed-bed'.

238. The suffix -vin is used in forming nearly twenty possessive adjectives from stems ending in -a (which is lengthened), -a% -as; thus ubhaya-vin- 'partaking of both' {ubhdya-), astra-vin- 'obedient to the goad', yasas-vin- {KSI^ 'beautiful'. To the analogy of the derivatives from stems in -as is due the insertion of s in sata-s-vin- 'possessing a hundred'. The only derivatives from stems ending in any consonant other than j are dhrsad-vin- 'bold' {dkrsdt-) and vag-vin- (AV.) 'eloquent' {vile- 'speech'), both formed as in external Sandhi. 239. The only derivative of the suffix -vya forming names of relation- ship which occur in the Samhitas seems to be bkrstr-vya- (father's) 'brother's son'^ 240. The suffix -sa forms eight or nine adjectives or substantives without in most instances changing the original meaning. The adjectives are ita-sa- 'variegated', babhlu-sd- (VS.) 'brownish', yuva-sd- 'youthful', and with possessive sense roma-sd- 'hairy'. The substantives are ahku-sa- m. 'hook', kdsma-sa-

(AV.) m. or n. 'stupefaction' (?), kald-sa- m. 'jar', turvd-sa-, N. of a man, lopa-sd-^ m. 'jackal'.

V. COMPOUNDS.

Benfey, VoUstandige Grammatik p. 245 —282. — Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar 1246—1316. — Reuter, Die altindischen nominalcomposita, ihrer betonung nach unter- sucht, KZ. 31, 157—232; 485—612. — Wackernagel, Altindische Grammatik, 21, (Anzeiger). Nominalkomposition, 1905 : cp. Bartholomae, IF. 20, 162—172

241. Form of compounds. — The Vedic language has inherited from the Indo-European speech the power of combining words into a compound treated like a simple word as regards accent, inflexion, and construction. Both in the frequency and the length of compounds the Vedic language resembles that of Homer. In the RV. and the AV. no compounds of more than three independent members occur; and those which consist of three members are rare, such as ddabdha-vrata-pramati- 'superior-minded owing to unbroken observances', purva-kama-kftvan- 'fulfilling former wishes', mitho- avadya-pa- 'mutually warding off want', hdri-manyu-sayaka- 'stimulating the mettle of the bays'. The two characteristic features of a compound are unity of accent and use of the uninflected stem in the first member (or members). There the are, however, exceptions to both these rules. The Sandhi between two in sentence. numbers is occasionally different from that between words a Occasionally also tmesis of a compound occurs ^ Generally speaking a

dyava I The doubtful word vy-ainuv-in- (VS'.) 4 Frequently in dual compounds, as earth'; occasionally seems to add -in to the present stem with ha ksama 'heaven and simai cic chepam for iunah- interposed euphonic -v-. in others also, as ; ndrd va sarnsam for ndra-iamsam ipitf-vya- 'father's brother', 'uncle', occurs Hpam ; sapid for sapid-sapta me. in the later language. saptd me 3 Cp. Gustav Meyer, IF. i, 328. 144 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar. compound assumes a modified and single meaning as compared with the same words used in juxtaposition in a sentence; e. g. krsna-sakuni- (AV.) 'raven', while krsndh sakunih would mean 'black bird'. Compounding must take place when a derivative has to be formed from the two words; as ksditrapat-ya- 'property' beside kseirasya pdti- 'lord of the field'. Sometimes, however, the case-ending remains while the compound accent is used, as rayas-posa-dd- 'bestowing abundance of wealth', beside rayas pom- 'abundance of wealth'. There is a tendency to compounding when the first of two syntactical words is indeclinable. Thus beside /sot yos 'happiness and wel- fare' also appears iam-yos (i. 34*); and analogously the indeclinable form or stem of a word takes the place of the case^ Sometimes compounds are formed by the coalescence of inflected words occurring side by side in a sentence. Thus visvaha (TS.) 'all days' beside aha visva (RV.) has become visvsha 'daily' with a single accent. Occasionally, when two compounds have the same final member, the latter is used only once, as mitrotd'^ medhyatithim (i. 36'') for mitratithim utd medhyatithim; pataydn ma7idaydt- sakham (i. 4?) for pataydt-sakham mandaydt-sakham. Sometimes one of the members of a compound governs a case^ outside the compound, as drvato mamsa-bhiksam (i. 162'^) 'begging for the flesh of the steed'; in some instances pleonastically, as ganmani gand-patim (11.23') 'troop-leader of troops'. A case- form may agree with the first member of a compound when that member has the form or even only the sense of that case, as rayds-kanw visvdpsnyasya (vii. 42*) 'desirous of wealth of all forms'; or a case-form may agree with the second member, while coordinated in sense with the first, as maha-dhane

. . drbhe (1. 75) 'in great booty (and) in small'.

a. The gender of compounds is, in Copulatives (Dvandvas) and Determinatives (Tatpurusas) ending in substantives, that of the last member"*; but collective compounds are regularly neuter 5. Compounds ending in adjec- tives, possessives, and governing compounds have the gender of the substan- tives with which they agree or which they represent. The number in Deter- minatives is that of the last member. In Copulatives of the older types it is dual or plural according to the total number meant by the combination, while it is singular (and neuter) in the later type. Collective compounds (whether copulatives or possessives) are singular. Compounds ending in adjectives, possessives, and governing compounds, have the number of the substantive with which they agree or which they represent.

A. The First Member of Compounds.

242. Its form. — The first member of nominal compounds may consist of nouns (including numerals and pronouns) or indeclinables suitable for quali- fying nouns. Exceptionally an inflected form appears in this position qualifying the second member in dependent determinatives and possessives. This is mainly due to words frequently in juxtaposition becoming permanently joined; thus beside the two independent y^oxAs, jas pdtih (vii. 38") 'lord of the family'

1 Thus for visnoh krdma- (AV. TS.) 'step first member prevails (265, notes I and 2); of Visnu' there appears in a B. passage of and a few Determinatives change the gender the TS. (v. 2.1^) the compound »/j««-/5?-az«a-. of the final member, as paim-sala- (VS.) n. 2 The Pada text reads miira utd. {iala-) 'shed for the wives (of sacrificers)' 3 This seems to be almost restricted to and agra-jikvd- (VS.) n. 'tip of the tongue' the genitive in the Samhitas, but many {^jihva-\ examples of other cases (ace, inst., dat., 5 Both Dvandvas (266) and Bahuvrihis abl.) occur in the later language. (290). 4 In a few Dvandvas the gender of the V. Compounds. The First Member of Compounds. 145

we find the .covrnpound yds-paiim (i. 185^)'. But it partly also arises from a desire to express the syntactical relation of the words in the compound even without antecedent juxtaposition; as in the verbal determinatives dhanain-jayd- 'winning booty', apsu-sdd- 'dwelling in waters'; or in possessives like rayds- kama- 'desirous of wealth'. Such case-endings show a tendency to encroach beyond their legitimate sphere; thus the frequency of the ending -as before -pati-, e. g. vac-ds-pdti- 'lord of speech', led to its becoming the general genitive sign before that word, as in rdtha-s-pdti- 'lord of the car' {rdtha-). Similarly, according to apsu-ksi-t- 'dwelling in the waters' was formed apsu-ji-t-

beside ab-ji-t- 'winning waters', where the locative is not appropriate. Ordinarily the first member appears only in its stem form. As the stem cannot express number it may mean either the singular or the plural. That it often indicates the plural is shown by expressions like narAtn or jdnanam nr-patf- 'man- guardian of men' or 'people'. The plural sense is also evident in compounds like devd-krta- 'made by the gods', vird-jata- 'produced by men', nr-pdti- 'lord of men'. In personal pronouns and cardinals the number is of course inherent in the stem itself. a. The gender is expressed in the first member only in as far as feminine words retain their f stem when coordinated in copulatives or depen- dent on the final member in the sense of a case in determinatives; e. g. patni-sala- (VS.) 'shed for wives'. The f suffix -a is, however, often shortened to a^, as in armva-hdn- 'destroying suffering', amiva-sdtana- 'dispelling suffering' {dmiva-). But when a feminine adjective as first member agrees attributively with a feminine in the last member, it appears in the masculine stem-form^; e. g. prdyata-dakdna- 'one by whom a sacrificial fee {ddksina-) has been

presented' +. 243. If the stem is liable to gradation, that form is used which occurs in the weak cases. Thus in the vowel stems -i, -u, -r, appear; &.g.pdH- justa- 'dear to a husband', vasu-vid- 'finding wealth', pitr-yajnd- 'sacrifice to the manes'. Similarly dyu- (diu-) 'heaven' appears before consonants, as dyu-ksd- 'dwelling in heaven', dyu-bhakta- 'presented by heaven', but div- before vowels, as div-it- 'going to heaven', div-isti- 'prayer'. The two stems dart^- 'wood' and Ap- 'water' are reduced to dru- and ap-. dru-padd- 'wooden pillar', drii- sdd- 'sitting on the tree'; ap-tiir- 'overcoming the waters', ab-jA- 'derived from "waters'. The stem pumams- 'man' appears in the weak form pums- in pums- cali' (VS. AV.) and pums-cala- (VS.) 'courtezan' ('running after men'). a. Stems in -an have -a not only before consonants 5, but also before 'king's son', uksAnna- 'devouring bulls' vowels^ and y, v" ; e. g. raja-putrd- {uksdn-), dsmasya- 'whose mouth is a rock' {dsman-), brdkmeddka- 'kindled with devotion' {brdhman-), brahmaudand- (AV.) 'boiled rice (pdand-) for Brahmans' {brahman-). Exceptions, however, are nemann-is- 'following the lead', vrsan-ahd- 'drawn by stallions', vfsan-vasu- 'having great wealth'^. b. Stems in -in seem to follow the same analogy, dropping the -n before consonants; thus saci-gu- (only voc.) 'having strong cattle' and saci-pujana-

(only voc.) 'worshipping the strong' 9.

zxiAjagac-chandas- (AV. VS.) 'having 1 The compounding of such forms probably as metre' first members doubtless often started from vocatives like sahasas putra JagatI as metre', the of the metres. treated as a unit in regard to accent. represent neuter names rSja-bhis etc. 2 This, however, seems to be due to 5 As in influence. 6 Unlike rdj-n-e etc. metrical ^ -an as in rdjan-ya-, udan-vant-. 3 An exception in urvy-uti- 'giving wide 7 Not 8 In dsann-isu- 'having arrows in his aid', where the f. stem urvt- appears instead first is a locative. of the m. uru-. mouth' the member Wackernagel 2', p. /3, note. 4 In irhdc-chandas- (AV.) 'having BrhatI 9 Cp. 54 Indo-arisohe Philologie. I. 4. 10 :

146 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

c. Occasionally the weak grade stem used as first member does not occur as an independent word; thus ksd-pavant- and ksa-pivant- 'earth- protector' from ksdm- 'earth'; jnu-bddh- 'bending the knee' from jAnu- 'knee'; man-dhatf- 'devout man' from mdn-as- 'mind' (through *manz-), sdt-pati- 'lord of the abode', probably from sdd-as- 'abode' (through *sats-). 204. When in the inflexion of a word two or more collateral stems (not differing in gradation only) are used, the one which appears in weak cases is mostly employed as first member in compounds, i. Even though the stem as-ya- 'mouth' is inflected throughout, the alternative stems of weak cases as- and asan- are preferred: d-daghnd- 'reaching to the mouth', Ssdnn-

tsu-'^ 'having arrows in his mouth'. 2. uddn-^ 'water' is preferred to z^a'a-zJa- ^ uda-grabhd- m. 'holding water', uda-pa- (AV.) 'purified by water', uda-meghd- 'water-shower'; uda-kd- appears only in uddkattnan-'- (AV.) 'having water for

its chief substance'. 3. Of the three stems pdnthan-, path'i-, pdth-, only the middle one, which appears before consonant endings, is used: patki-kft-'^a&i- making', pathi-rdksi- 'protecting roads'. 4. sdkan-i is preferred to sdkrt-

'dung' : saka-dhama- (AV.) 'dung-smoke', saka-pindd- (VS.) 'lump of dung', sdka-puta- ('purified by dung'), N. of a seer. 5. sTrsdn- is preferred to s'lras- 'head': sirsa-kapald- (AV.) 'skull', hrsa-bhidya- (AV.) n. 'head-splitting', hrsa- mayd- (AV.) m. 'disease {amaya-) of the head'. 6. There is fluctuation between pdd- and pdda- 'foot', mams-^ and mamsd- 'flesh', hfd- and hfdaya- 7 ger. 'seizing 'heart' : pad-ghosd- (AV.) 'sound of footsteps', but pada-gfkya, by the foot'; mams-pdcana- 'used for cooking flesh', but mamsa-bhiksd- 'begging for flesh', hrd-rogd- 'heart-disease', but hrdaya-vidh- 'wounding the heart'* 245. Alternative adjective stems sometimes appear in the first member of compounds. Thus in the RV. mahi- interchanges with mahs-'^ 'great' in Karmadharayas and Bahuvrihis, as mdhi-ksatra 'owning great sway', but maha- dhand- 'great booty', mahd-manas- 'great-minded''". A few stems in -z appear instead of or interchanging with others in -ra: rji- in rji-pyd- and the Proper Names rji-svan-^'^ beside r/>a- 'quick' mrjrdsva- ('having quick horses'), N. of a man; *dabhi- in dabhiti- (for *dabhi-iti-) 'injurer', beside dabhrd- 'smair in dabhrd-cetas- 'of little wit'; sviti- in svity-dnc-''^ 'bright', beside svitrd- (AV.) 'white'; saci- in saci-vid- 'belonging together', beside d-sk-ra-'^^ 'united'; perhaps also -kravi- for *kruvi- in d-kravi-hasta- 'not having bloody hands', beside kru-rd-'"- (AV.) 'bloody'. a. A few adjective stems in -i used as first member neither occur as uncompounded adjectives nor have corresponding adjective stems in -ra: iuvi-jatd- 'mightily born', tuvi-griva- 'strong-necked', luvy-ojas- 'very strong'; gabhi-sdk (AV.) 'deep dov?n'.

1 See above p. 145, note 8. 8 On the other hand, of the alternative 2 Inst. sing, iida, pi. udd-bhis. stems dsfj- and asdji- 'blood', only the nom. 3 Nom. n ace. udakdm. ace. form is used; e. g. asrk-pavan- (AV.) 'bloody- 4 With irregular accent; cp. Wacker- 'drinking blood', dsrh-mukha- (AV.) NAGEL 21, p. 56, note. faced'. mahi- the n. nom. 5 Inst, sdka-bhis (TS.), nom. ace. sdkrt. 9 mahd- being the m., ^ 6 Beside vand- 'wood' (which is fully in- ace. stem, beside the weak dat. mah-i etc. 10 mahdt- the flected and appears in vand-dhiti- 'layer of The AV. has the stem in wood'), the stem van- (gen. van-am, loc. Karmadharaya mahat-kdndd-, 'great section'. 11 ^jlti- rji-iti-), vam-su) is perhaps used in vdni-saga- 'bull', Perhaps also in (= cp. van-dhiira- 'car-seat', and van-dd- 'devouring Wackernagel^ 21, p. 59. 12 Cp. siti-pad- 'white-footed', siii-fj's/ha- wood' (?). 7 Perhaps in pdd-grbhi-, N. of a man or 'white-backed'. 13 'be attached' with syncope. demon, if fad- = pad-, cp. Wackernagel From sac- 21, I, 148 a. H Cp. Wackernagel p. 59. V. Compounds. The First Member of Compounds. 147

246. Extension of the stem sometimes takes place in the first member. The commonest addition is -a owing to the frequency of that ending: dur- a-dabhnd- (AV.) 'eluding doors', asvin-a-krta- (VS.) 'done by the Asvins'; visaujas-^ (VS.) 'ruling the people'; sad-a-rcd-' {AN.) 'collection of six verses'. An a-stem becomes one in -as in yaksmo-dha- (AV.) 'seat of a disease' {ydkstna-). An extension with -d appears in satdd-vasu-^ 'having a hundred {satd-) treasures', and in dn-atid-bhuta-^ 'unsurpassed'. a. Shortening of the stem sometimes takes place by the dropping of a final / or j (preceded by a) or of the vowel -a; thus prsodard- (TS.

may also be an example, but it is more probably a modification of sas- pinjara- (VS. xvi. 17) by haplology for *saspa-pinjara-. 247. Adverbs often occur as first member of compounds. In several instances a nominal stem in -a represents an adverbial case (ace, inst., abl., loc.) formed from that stem; thus nitya-vatsa- 'having a calf continually' (niiyani); satya-ydj- 'sacrificing truly' {satydm), samantd-siti-bahu- (VS.) 'whose forefeet are white all round' (samantdm); sana-ja- 'born of old' (= sand or sandt); upakd-caksas- 'visible from near at hand' («/a/J/ 'near'). Occasionally a nominal stem which has no separate existence is abstracted from the adverb; thus ard-manas- 'ready-minded' (from dram 'ready'), ard-mati- 'suitable prayer', abhyardha-ydjvan- 'offering apart' (abhyardhds). A cardinal is sometimes thus used instead of its adverb: try-arusa- 'reddish in three places' {tri-s), dvi-jd- (AV.) 'bom twice' {dvi-s). 248. The case-ending is also preserved in several instances; thus arain-kft- 'preparing', sakam-uks- 'sprinkling together', sakam-yuj- 'joined together' {sakdm), sayam-bhavd- (AV.) 'becoming evening'; pasca-dosd- (VS.) 'late evening'. Adverbs that are neither case-forms nor look like them regularly remain unchanged; thus aksnayd-druh-^ 'injuring wrongly'; ittha-dhi- 'truly devout'; ida-vatsard- (VS. AV.) 'the present year', a particular kind of year; pt'inar-nava- 'renewing itself, punar-bha- 'arising again'; visvdto-dhi- 'observing in all directions', visu-rUpa- 'coloured variously' {visu-), visu-vft- 'rolling in various directions'. A nasal is added in maksu-m-gamd- 'approaching quickly' (maksu). 249. Prepositions frequently occur as the first member of a compound. I. Owing to their originally adverbial character they may qualify ordinary adjectives or substantives like adverbs; thus dti-krsna- (VS.) 'excessively dark', 'very 'great grandson', vi-vac- 'opposing shout'; vi-mahi- ^esX' ; prd-napai- and in Bahuvrihis: pra-srhgd- (VS.) 'having prominent horns', vy-amsa- 'having shoulders wide apart'. 2. Owing to their constant connexion with verbs they are very common before verbal nouns; e.g. I'lpa-stu-t- and upa-stuti- 'invocation'; furo-hita- 'domestic priest'. 3. Owing to their frequent connexion with cases, they also appear in a governing sense; e. g. ddhi-gart-ya- 'being on the car-seat', anu-pathd- 'following the path'^

1 For visa-ojas- like (AV. VS.) satydujas- 5 According to the analogy of gav-isd- (= saiya-ojas-^ instead of vid-ojas-. 'desiring cows'. 2 Like paiicarcd- = pahca-fca. 6 aksna-yavan- 'going across' stands by 3 Influenced by the analogy ol paiicasdd- haplology for *akmayd-yavan-. Cp. WaCKER- '50' etc., and viddd-vasu-, etc. NAGEL 2', p. 128 d. 4 Due to a confusion of *ati-bhuta- = ati- bhuta- 'surpassed' and ddbhuta- 'marvellous'. 10* 148 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

a. Prepositions as first member sometimes appear in a shortened form ; thusM;- = abhi^ in bhi-sdj-^: 'healer'; o- = ava in o-gand- ('away from the crowd') 'isolated', 'wretched', and in o-fasd- 'top-knot' ('that which is tied down', from pas- 'fasten'). On the other hand, dnu several times appears lengthened to anu-: thus an-anu-krtyd- 'inimitable', an-anu-da- 'not giving way', dn-anu-disla- 'unsolicited', dn-anu-bhiiti- 'disobedient', dnu-sdk 'in constant succession'.

250. Sam and sa-. — The preposition sdm is of very common occur- rence as first member. This is its form invariably before vowels, and when accented originally always before consonants. Its unaccented form sa- (^ s?n-) should phonetically always appear before consonants. But the proper use of sdm- and w- before consonants has begun to be confused. a. In determinatives (i) when the final member is a verbal noun sam- always appears before a vowel, as sam-ankd- (AV.) 'hook' (from aiic- 'bend'), sam-idh- 'fuel'; and sdm- if accented predominates 3 before consonants, being phonetic; e. g. sdm-gati- f. 'coming together', sdm-dhatr- 'one who puts together', sdm-prkta- 'mixed', sd-, however, also occurs in sd-gdhi- (VS. MS.) f. 'eating together', sd-cyuti- (MS. 11. 7'^) 'falling together', sd-pTti- (VS. MS.)

f. 'drinking together', sd-huti- i. 'joint invocation'. (2.) sa- is preserved before accented verbal nouns formed from the simple root with or without -t, or with the suffixes -a, -ana, -van, -in; thus sa-cit- 'thinking', sa-badh- (TS. iii. 2. i24) 'oppressed', sa-yuj- 'united', sa-vfdh-

'increasing together', sa-sh'ibh- (TS. iv. 3. 12^), a kind of metre, sa-sydd- 'streaming together''*; sa-ksi-t- 'dwelling together', sa-sru-t- 'streaming's; sa-gm-d- (VS.) 'coming to terms', sa-Josa- 'unanimous', sa-mddana- 'conflict'*; sa-yi-van- 'going along with', sa-yug-van- 'united with', sa-sthd-van- 'standing together', sa-ji-t-van- 'victorious'; sa-vas-in- (AV.) 'dwelling together'^. (3.) Before ordinary adjectives sam- appears in sdm-vasu- 'fellow-dweller', sdm-misla- 'commingling', sdm-priya- (VS.) 'loving one another', and even when unaccented before ordinary substantives in sam-vatsard- 'year', sam- gramd- (AV.) 'assembly', but sa-pdtnl- 'co-wife'. b. In Bahuvrihis when the meaning is (i.) 'together' (as in the verbal use of the preposition) sam- appears, as sdm-hanu- (AV.) 'striking the jaws together', sam-gavd- m. '(time when the) cows (are driven) together', and (as usual before vowels) sam-udrd- m. 'sea'. But when the meaning is (2) 'united with', 'accompanied by' what is expressed by the final member, sa- is almost exclusively used (and nearly always even accented) ^, as sd-ceias- 'accompanied by intelligence', 'rational'; jaw- occurs here only in jaw-j-a/^^zjra- 'accompanied by a thousand', and in sdm-patni- (AV.) 'accompanied by her husband's. In this sense sam- still appears before vowels in sdm-agra- and sam-agrd- (AV.)

('including the top'), 'complete', sdm-anga- (AN.) 'accompanied by all limbs'^", 'complete', sdm-asir- 'accompanied by mixture', 'mixed'; but even here sa- once in the RV. takes the place of sam- in the compound sasana- (x. pot)

1 The initial a- of some other prepositions 6 But also sam-gamd- 'coming together', is lost in the later language : //- = «j&'(SB.); sam-cdrana- 'suitable for walking on'. dhi- = ddhi and va- = dva are post-Vedic, 7 With verbal nouns otherwise formed, 2 See Wackernagel 21, p. 72 e, and cp. as with -ira or -na only sam- occurs, as Brugmann, KZ. 25, 214, note. sani-hotrd- 'joint sacrifice', sam-prahid- 'inter- 3 sam- occurs more than three times as rogation'. often as sa- before consonants, doubtless 8 With the usual Bahuvrlhi accent on the owing to the parallel use of sam- with first member. verbs. 9 In order to distinguish this sense from 4 But also sam-gir- 'assenting', sam-ydt- that of sa-pdim- *co-wife'. 10 'contiguous'. Cp. also the adv. sam-antd-m (AV.) 'in- 5 But also sain-ji-t- 'conqueror', sam-hd-t- cluding the ends', 'completely'. 'layer'. :

v. Compounds. The First Member of Compounds. 149

'provided with food' {ds'ana-), 'eating', and becomes common in the later Samhitasj e. g. sAnga- (AV.) 'accompanied by the limbs' {diiga-), sdntardesa- (AV.)_ 'accompanied by the intermediate quarters' {antar-desd-). — When the is meaning (3.) 'in common', 'same', 'identical' ' sa- ^ is very common before consonants, zs, sd-keta- 'having the same intention', sd-laksman- 'having the same characteristics'; while sam- appears only in satn-sUvari- 'having a calf in^common', sdm-manas- {KSf.) 'being of the same mind', unanimous', sdm- matr- 'having the same mother'. In this sense sam- alone appears (as usual) before vowels: sdm-anta- 'contiguous' ('having the same boundary'), sdm-okas- 'having a common abode', 'living together'. 251. Particles, which for the most part have no independent existence, frequently appear as first member of compounds.

1. The negative particle, the form of which in the sentence is na, almost invariably appears in composition as a- J before consonants, and in- variably as an- before vowels. It completely reverses the meaning of the final member; thus mitrd- 'friend', a-mitra- 'enemy', sasti- 'praise', d-sasti- 'curse'+. As participles, infinitives, and gerunds are nominal forms, they may be compounded with the privative particle: thus d-bibhyat- 'not fearing', d-iudhya-mana- 'not waking', d-dasyant- (AV.) 'not about to give',

d-vidvams- 'not knowing' 5. The syntactical form of the particle is very rare *. na-murd- (AV.) 'non-dying' (?) Perhaps also in nd-pat- 'grandson', if it

originally meant 'un-protected' ?. 2. su- 'weir, 'very', except in the RV. very seldom used independently^, and dus- 'ill', 'hardly', which occurs as a prefix only, appear as first member in determinatives and possessives; e. g. su-kdra- 'easy to be done', su-krta- 'well-done', sti-dd- 'giving willingly', su-vasand- 'fair raiment', su-varnd- 'fair- coloured', sv-dsva- 'having excellent horses'; du-das- (AV.) 'not-worshipping', 'irrehgious', dus-cyavand- 'difficult to be felled', dur-vdsas- Tiaving bad clothing', 'ill-clad'; dur-ska {KV.) 'wail!' is formed as an antithesis to sv-dha 'hail!'. 3. There are a few prefixes beginning with k- which seem to be etymo- logically connected with the interrogative, and express depreciation, bad- ness, or difficulty: ^tf-^in ^«-^«ri- 'wandering about', /^z

1 samana- is also used in this sense: as 6 na-pinisa-ka- 'neuter' also occurs in MS. samana-bandhu- 'having the same relatives'. and SB. 2 sa- has the sense of 'one' in sahna- (AV.) 7 See LeumANN, Festgruss an Bohtlingk, 'lasting one day', sa-kft 'once', sa-divas and p. 77 f. For a few other doubtful compounds sa-dyas 'on one and the same day'. with na- see Wackernagel 2', p. 78, note. 3 This is the low-grade form (= ?2-) of 8 sii occurs as an independent particle na-, about 250 times (but never at the beginning 4 It frequently reverses the pregnant sense of a sentence) in the RV., rarely in the of the final member, as vi-sastf- '(good) later Samhitas : only 14 times in AV. dissector', a-viiasif- 'bad dissector'. 9 Often in adverbs such as ku-ias 'whence', 5 See Knauee, Ueber die betonung der ku-tra 'where'. composita mit a privativum im Sanskrit, KZ. 10 On a few doubtful compounds with ku-, 27, I — 68; examples from the later Sam- see Wackernagel 2', p. 83, note. hitas in Delbruck, Altindische Syntax 11 Also in kdva-tiryahc- (TS.) 'directed p. 540 f., Syntaktische Forschungen 2, p. 530 f. somewhat across'. 15° I. Allgkmeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar. appended; thus tad-id-artha- 'directed to that particular object'; ka-cit-kard- 'effecting all manner of things'; ku-cid-arthin- 'striving to get anywhere', kuha- cid-vid- 'wherever being'. 5. A few interjectional or onomatopoetic words are compounded with -kara- and -krti- 'making' = 'sound', 'utterance', or -kartr- 'maker', to express the actual phonetic sound of those words: thus vasat-kard- (AV. VS.) 'the interjection vasaf, svadhd-kard- 'pronouncing (the benediction) sva-dha', svaha-ki'ti- 'consecration with the call svaha', hiii-kartf- (TS.) 'one who utters the sound hifi , hih-kard- (VS.) 'the sound hifi . In has-kartf- 'enli- vener', has-kard- 'laughter', hds-krti- 'loud merriment', the first member represents either an interjection connected with the verb has- 'laugh', or a reduced form of *hasas- 'laughter' (like sdt-pati- for sddas-pati- through *sdts-pati-).

B. The Last Member of Compounds.

252. Its form. — Practically all nouns may appear in this position. But many verbal nouns, especially participles, if used in their primary sense, are found exclusively after indeclinables which are capable of being combined with the corresponding verbs. Some stems also occur as final members though not used independently; such are verbal nouns formed from the simple root with or without an added determinative -t; also derivatives like — -jatiina- (AV.) 'belonging to the people {j'dna-) of '. a. Change of ending. — When the gender of the final member is changed, the -a of feminine words, even though radical, becomes -a in masculine or neuter compounds; thus priyosriyd- 'fond of cows' {usriya-); an-avasd- 'restless' (from ava-sS- 'rest'), a-sraddhd- 'unbelieving' (from srad-dhd-

'belief'), rtd-jya- 'well-strung' {iroisijyd- 'bowstring'). Even -?' in a few instances becomes -a; thus ati-ratrd- 'performed overnight' and aho-ratrd- 'day and night' (rdirf-); api-sarvari 'early in the morning' and ati-sarvare or ati- sarvaresu (AV.) 'late at night' {sdrvarT-). On the other hand m. and n. stems in -a regularly end in -a in the feminine, as cittd-garbha- 'having evident offspring' {gdrbha- m.); and pdti-

'husband' in f. possessives substitutes -patm-; thus ika-patni- (AV.) 'having a single husband', dasd-patnt- 'having demons as lords', sa-pdtrii- 'having one husband in common', sdm-patni- (AV.) and sahd-patm- (AV.) 'having her husband with her', su-pdtni- 'having a good husband'; also in the deter- minative vird-patni- 'wife of a hero'. 253. Alternative stems. — When in the inflexion of a word alternative stems are used, only one of these, and as a rule the older one, appears as final member of possessive compounds; thus ddnt- 'tooth' (not ddnta-) in satd-dant- (AV.) 'hundred-toothed', si'ici-dant- 'bright-toothed'; pad- 'foot' (not

' pdda-) : a-pdd- 'footless', uttand-pad- 'whose feet are extended', ika-pad- 'one- footed'; nds- 'nose' (not ndsa-) in fju-nas-^ 'straight-nosed', N. of a man^; adhan- 'udder' (not ftdhar-) in an-udhdn-'* 'udderless', rapidd-udhan- 'having a distended udder', f. d-cchidrodhn-i- 'having an intact udder'; dhdnvan- 'bow' (not dkdnus-) in abald-dhanvan- (AV.) 'having a weak bow', dvatata-dhanvan- (VS.) 'having an unstrung bow', kdprd-dhanvan- 'having a swift bow', satd-

' The AV., however, has the nom. sing. 3 According to Wackernagel 2!, p. 92(top), eka'pada-h, a-nasikd- occurs in TS. (vil. 5. 121. * According to Bloomfield also in 4 _ Cp. Wackernagel 2S p. 93, note. rujanas, for rujana-nas 'broken-nosed'; see p. 59, note I. V. Compounds. The Last Member of Compounds. 151 dhanvan- (VS.) 'having a hundred bows''; strsdn- 'head' (not siras-) in a-sirsdn-

'headless', tri-itrsdn- 'three-headed' ^, f. rurii-sirsn-T- 'having the head of a Ruru antelope' 3; hfd- 'heart' (not hfdaya-) in its long-grade form -hard- in dur- Mrd- (AV.) 'ill-disposed' and su-h&rd- 'good-hearted'. a. Sometimes an alternative stem is used which has not been preserved as an independent word; thus -jnu- 'knee' (weak form oi jdnu-) in asitd-jiiu- (AV.) 'dark-kneed', »«VaV««- 'firm-kneed'*; an q\A ^\.tva. -medhas- xa. su-medhds- 'wise' and puru-midhas- (SV.) 'wise' beside the regular compounds in -medha- (from medha- 'wisdom') such as puru-midha- 'having much wisdom'; -tvacas-^ 'skin' in sUrya-tvacas- (AV. VS.) 'having a skin bright as the sun' and hiranya- tvacas- (AV.) 'having a golden skin', beside tvac- in sUrya-tvac- and hiranya-tvac-. 254. Transfer stems. — Some four stems appear in certain forms changed to stems in -as from a misunderstanding of the nom. -s in -as (as in su-prajd-s); thus from profa- 'offspring', d-prajas- (AV.) 'having no off- 5 spring', and su-prajds-^ 'having good offspring', ida-prajas-^ (MS. i. J) 'descendant of Ida'; from ksa- 'dwell', divd-ksas- 'living in heaven'; from da- 'give', dravino-dds- 'bestowing wealth'; from dha- 'put', vayo-dhds- (AV. VS.) 'bestowing strength' and uarco-dhds- (AV.) 'bestowing vigour'. On the other hand, by the loss of final -J or -i a few consonant stems are trans- formed to a-stems; thus beside dn-agas- 'guiltless' appears dn-aga-, and beside puru-ddmsas- 'abounding in wondrous deeds', puru-ddmsa-; urv-asthmd- (VS.)*, n. du. 'thigh and knee', beside asthi-vdnt- m. du. 'knees ('bony'); ubhayd-da-^ (AV.) 'having teeth in both (jaws)', beside ubhayd-dat-. grade 255. Vowel gradation in final member. — a. i. The low vowel of the roots da- 'give' and da- 'cut' disappears when the past parti- ciples *dita- 'given' '° and dita- 'cut' and the action noun "^diti- 'giving' become unaccented final members in a compound: thus dva-tta- (y?,.) 'cut off', devd-tta- 'given by the gods', vy-d-tfa- (AV. VS.) 'opened', /aVr-Z/a- (VS.) 'given up'", d-prati-tta- (AV.) 'not given back'; bhdga-tti- 'gift of fortune', maghd-tti- 'giving of presents', vdsu-tti- 'granting of wealth'". Unreduced forms, how- in havyd-dati- ever, occur in tvd-data- and tvd-datta- 'given by thee' and 'sacrificial gift"^. the final member is 2. The vowels T and u in the radical syllable of 'having three udders' in a few instances reduced to i and u; thus try-udhdn- 'having a good {fldhan-\ dhi-ju- 'inspiring the mind' {ju- 'impel'), su-sird- TB.), a-hutt- m- channel', 'hollow' (sira- 'stream'), su-suii- 'easy birth' {su-ti- Derivative -i is reduced vocation' (otherwise sd-huti- 'joint invocation', etc.). unabated power' (tdvh-i^ to -i in d-ni-bhrsta-tavid- 'having

8 Formed by dropping the -t of the weak 1 The determinative indra-dhanus- 'Indra's a}thT-vdt-. bow', occurs in the AV. stem by dropping the -t of the weak 2 The AV. however has /;>-/,4«-A>(ZJ- 'broad- 9 Formed headed'. stem -dat-. occur 10 This phonetic form has otherwise been 3 From asthan- (beside asthi-, AV.) ousted by the anomalous participle dat-td- both an-as(Mn- and an-astha- 'boneless'. (VS.) made from the weak present stem dad: 4 Other reduced stems are sa-gdhi- prd-tla- 'given up' also 'nest' (niArysad-). 11 The participle 'joint meal' f:Mghas-), nUa- occurs in TS. II. 2. 8* (B). 'noise' {upa^\pad-) a-sk-ra- 'united upa-bd-i- 72 part of 12 pra-tti- 'gift' also occurs in TS. v. 4. ([/sac-); perhaps pan-msd- 'best (B) and nir-dva-tti 'distribution of shares' (dmia- 'part'). _ . ,AI7•^ K. ivacas-ya- (AV.j in . 5 Also in the derivative , •,. 13 The a of soman- 'chant is perhaps 'being in the skin'. reduced to ava.fk-sama-(^'i>i, /-^-sama- (TS.), 6 Under the influence of this new stem of good and /-d-sama-; cp. Wackernagel 2', 43 f., is formed su-prajas-tva- 'possession note. offspring' (for *su-praja-tva-). _ with the a 7 In K. ida-prajas- (IS. 3, 463) of idd- unshortened. 152 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

3. The of go- 'cow' is reduced to -u in ptisti-gu- 'rearing cows', N. of a man, and su-gu- 'having fine cows'. The -ai of rdi- 'wealth', is reduced to -i in brhdd-ri-'^ 'having abundant wealth'; perhaps also in rdhdd-ri-'^, N. of a man. -/' 4. Final and -u of the first member combine with the low grade form of a of np- 'water' in the last member to i and «, in dvTp-d-^ 'island' {dvi-ap-), pratip-d-m 'against' {prati-) 'the stream', anup-d- 'pond' (atiu-ap-^. b. On the other hand, radical o in several instances appears lengthened to a+. This occurs in several possessive compounds oi jdni- 'wife': bhadra- jani- 'having a beautiful wife' (only voc), yuva-fatti- 'having a young wife', vittd-jani- 'having found a wife', 'married', and with shifted accent dvi-jdni- 'having two wives' and a-jani- (AV.) 'having no wife'. A similar lengthening appears in prthu-jaghana- (only voc. f.) 'broad-hipped'; sahd-janusa- 'with

offspring' (Jamis-); 7ii-padd- 'low ground' (padd-); tvdt-pitaras (TS. I. 5. 10^), N. pi. 'having thee as father'; su-vdcas- 'having good speech', 'very eloquent', sd-vacas-^ (AV.) 'employing similar speech', vi-vacas- (AV.) 'speaking in various ways' {vdcas-), vihd-s'arada- (AV.) 'occurring every autumn' {sardd-) 'annual', satd-iarada- 'lasting a hundred autumns'*. 256. Adjectival suffixes. — Adjective compounds not infrequently add certain suffixes to mark their adjectival character more clearly. These suffixes

are -ka^ -i, -ya, -a, -in.

1. The suffix -ka'' is thus used in only two somewhat obscure compounds in the RV. tri-kadru-ka- (only pi.), a designation of certain soma vessels {kadrii-) and try-amia-ka- 'having three mothers' {amba voc); in the AV.

occur vt-manyu-ka- 'free from anger' and sahd-kanthi-ka- f. 'with the throat' (kanthd-, B.)^. 2. In the final member of a few Bahuvrihis, the suffix -/ sometimes takes the place of -a; thus prdty-ardhi- 'to whom the half (drdha-) belongs'; dnjana-gandh-i- 'having a smell {gandhd-) of ointment', dhumd-gandhi- 'smelling

of smoke', su-gdndki- or su-gandhi 'sweet-smelUng' ; krstd-rad/ii- {AN.) 'attaining success [-) in agriculture'. 3. The suffix -ya is frequently added in Bahuvrihis; thus anyodar-ya- 'born from another womb' {uddra-), ddsa-mas-ya-^ 'ten months old', dirgha- jihv-ya- 'long-tongued' '°, mddhu-hast-ya- 'honey-handed', mayi2ra-sep-ya-^-^&z.coc!&- tailed' ", visvd-jan-ya- 'belonging to all men', visvd-dev-ya- 'relating to all gods', vihang-ya- (AV.) 'being in all Hmbs', sd-garbh-ya- (VS.) 'born from the same

1 In the dative brhddraye; cp. BB. 25, adjectives, as anta-ka- 'ending' from anta- 250. 'end'. 2 In the anomalous gen. sing, rdhad- 8 In the YV. several examples occur; rayas. WackIernagel 21, p. 102, quotes from the 3 Also nif-a- 'low-lying' [ni-ap- 'into which TS. a-karnd-ka- 'earless', a-dantd-ka- 'tooth- the water flows down') in K. less', a-fadd-ka- 'footless', an-aksi-ka- 'eye-

4 For a. phonetic explanation of this phe- less', an-asihi-ka- 'boneless', a-tvdk-ka- 'skin- nomenon see Wackernagei, 2', 43 (p. 100); less', sdsTr-ka- 'accompanied by a blessing', and cp. I, 68. an-aifr-ka- 'lacking a blessing' ; from the MS. 5 There is a various reading sit-vacasas a-cchandds-ka-'ratirtXtss,', an-dstha-ka- 'bone- in AV. VII. 122, on which see Whitney's less'. note. 9 Also san-niasya- 'six months old', and 6 On vi-hayas- 'of extensive power', sdrva- safia-masya- 'seven months old' in K. hayas- (AV.) 'having all vigour', su-- 'o Also in TS. some compounds formed 'delighting', su-yama- 'guiding well', see with -deva-tya- 'having — for a deity' (devdtd-); Wackernagel 2', p. 10 1 (middle). nana-vis-yd- (MS.) 'consisting of various 7 This suffix, which is never accented, is villages'. probably identical with that which forms II Also vi-Hsn-ya- (K.) 'tailless'. V. Compounds. The Last Member of Compounds. 153

womb', sa-dhan-ya- 'accompanied by gifts', sd-yuth-ya- (VS.) 'belonging to the same herd', su-Mst-ya- 'fair-handed' (beside su-Msta-), hiranya-kes-ya- 'golden- maned' (beside Mranya-keia-') '. The suffix -ya is also common in governing compounds with pre- positions as first member; thus ddhi-gart-ya- 'being on the car-seat', aniak- parsav-yd- (VS.) and antah-parsv-yd- (VS.) 'being between the ribs', dnv- antr-ya- (AV.) 'being in the entrails', api-kaks-ya- 'situated near the arm-pit', upa-trn-ya- (AV.) 'being in the grass', upa-mas-ya- (AV.) 'occurring every month', pdri-rath-ya- (AV.)^ 'being around the car', n. part of the car. It also appears in the adverbially used governing compounds abhi-nabh-yd-m 'near the clouds' and ud-ap-ya-m (AV.) 'upstream'. 4. The final member of Bahuvrihis is very frequently extended by the suffix -a. In the RV. there are at least fifteen such stems; thus aks- 'eye'

in aw-fl^j-a'-'eyeless', afl%_y-ffl/5.j-a- 'eye-witness', catur-aks-d- 'four-eyed', bhury-aks-d- 'many-eyed', sahasraks-d- 'thousand-eyed', hiranyaks-d- 'golden-eyed', aktaks-a- (AV.) 'whose eyes are anointed', dn-aktaks-a-^ (AV.) 'whose eyes are not anointed', dhumaksd- (AY.) 'smoke-eyed', paryastaks-d- (AV.) 'with eyes cast about', sanisrasaks-d- (AV.) 'having constantly falling eyes', hary-aks-d- (VS.) 'yellow-eyed'; *astk-^ 'bone' in an-asth-d- 'boneless' beside an-asthdn-; *udar- 'water' in an-udr-d- 'waterless'; go- 'cow' in su-gdv-a- 'having fine cows', sam- gav-d- 'time when cows come together', and in atithi-gv-d-, a name, ita-gv-a- 'variegated', ddsa-gva-, N. of a mythical group, ndva-gv-a-^, N. of a mythical group; janus- in sahd-janus-a- 'with offspring'; div- 'heaven' in brhdd-div-a- and brhad-div-d-, N. of a seer, su-div-d- (AV.) 'bright day'; dur- 'door' in satd-dur-a- 'having a hundred doors'; dhur- 'yoke' in su-dhur-a- 'going well under the yoke' (beside su-dkur-), sd-dhur-a- (AV.) 'harnessed to the same yoke'; nas- 'nose' in uru-nas-d- 'broad-nosed', pavT-nas-d- (AV.) 'having a nose like a spear-head', vardhri-nas-d- (VS.) 'rhinoceros'; mrdh- in vi- mrdk-d-^ {KST.) 'warding off foes' (beside vi-mfdh-, VS.); rdi- 'wealth' in d-ray-a- 'not liberal'; vdstu- 'dwelling' in ndva-vastv-a- 'having nine abodes'; sardd- 'autumn' in satd-sarad-a- 'lasting a hundred autumns'; ap- 'water' in dvip-d- 'island'''. In the later Sarnhitas several other final members extended with -a occur: (AV.) dhan- 'day' in sahii-d- {KSi:) 'lasting a day'; re- 'verse' in eka-rc-d- of good 'consisting of one verse'; kmm- 'earth' in su-ksm-d- (VS.) 'consisting as leader': path- earth'; netf- 'leader' in agni-netr-a- (VS. TS.)^ 'having Agni chariot ('fit for untrodden paths'); pdd- 'road', in 'vi-path-d- (AV.), a kind of (VS.) 'three years 'foot' in d-bd-a- (VS.) 'year'; *vatas- 'year' in tri-vats-d- old'; sam-drs- 'aspect' in mddhu-samdrs-a- (AV.) 'sweet-looking'. -a after a a. The final member is also sometimes extended with governing preposition; thus dnu-patk-a- 'going along the road', dntas-path-a- upanas-d- 'being 'being on the road', anup-d- 'tank' ('lying along the water'), {aks-), puro-gav-d- on the car' {-dnas-\ paro-ks-a- (AV.) 'away from the eye' 'leader' ('preceding the cows').

4 2', p. 108 (bottom). 1 aiva-budh-va- 'based on horses' is See Wackernagel 5 See Bloomfield, AJPh. 17, 422 ff. probably for *dsva-budhn-ya- (from budhna- 6 Also the f. vi-mrdh-a- (TS. 11. 4. 21 B). 'bottom') beside diva- budhna- 'borne by 7 a few doubtful instances see Wacker- horses'. On (bottom). 2 Tlie accent of tliese words in -ya is nagel 2', p. 109 8 In TS. I. 8. 71 = VS. IX. 35, 36 several usually the same as it would be without the other names of deities compounded with suffix; for a few exceptions, see Wacker- •neir-a- occur. NAGEL 21, 47 d (p. 108). anaktdksa-. 3 The Mss. (AV. xx. 1286) read 154 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

b. A similar extension with -a occurs in collectives which are allied to Bahuvrlhis: thus try-ayus-d- (VS.) 'threefold lifetime', dvi-raj-d- (AV.) 'battle of two kings', sad-rc-d- 'aggregate of six stanzas', sam-udr-d- 'collection of waters' {*udar-), 'sea', sa-vidyui-d- (AV.) 'thunderstorm' ('accompanied by lightning'). Akin to these are compounds in which the first member expresses a part of the last (with change of gender); thus ardha-rc-d- (AV. VS.) m. 'half-stanza', aparahii-d- (AV.) m. 'afternoon', ny-dhn-a- (AV.) 'decline of day', purvahn-d- 'forenoon', prd-pad-a- 'tip of the foot'. There are further some neuter determinatives which probably had originally a collective sense; thus, with change of gender, tri-div-d- 'third heaven', su-div-d- (AV.) 'fine day'; d-path-a- (AV.) 'pathlessness', su-pdih-a- 'good path'. From neuter stems in -as, deuainas-d- (AV.) 'curse of the gods', manusyainas-d- (AV.) 'sin {enas-) of men'; brahma-varcas-d- (AV. VS.) 'divine power', hasti-varcas-d- (AV.) 'vigour of an elephant', brahmana-varcas-d- (AV.) 'dignity of a Brahman'. c. The ending -a frequently takes the place of -««' in the final member of Bahuvrlhis, collectives, and Karmadharayas; thus deva-karmd- 'doing divine work', visvd-karma- 'performing all work', vird-karma- 'per- forming manly work', priyd-dhama- 'occupying desirable places', chando-nama- (VS.) 'named metre', 'metrical', vi-parva- 'jointless', dvi-vrsd-'^ (AV.) 'having two bulls', aiiji-sakthd- (VS.) 'having coloured thighs', ut-sakthd- (VS.) 'lifting

up the thighs', lomasd-saktha- (VS.) 'having hairy thighs' 3, rk-samd- 'the Re verses and the Samans', sad-ahd- (AV.) m. 'period of six days'; bhadrahd- (AV.) n. 'auspicious day', eka-vrsd- (AV.) 'only bull', maha-vrsd- (AV.) 'great bull'. d. The suffix -a takes the place of -/' in kava-sakhd- 'having a niggard for a friend' {sdkhi-), in mandaydt-sakha- 'gladdening his friend', and in dasanguld- 'length of ten fingers' {anguli-). 5. In Bahuvrlhis the suffix -in is sometimes pleonastically added; thus ku-nakh-in- (AV.) 'having bad nails', maha-hast-in- 'having large hands', yaso- bhag-in- (VS.) 'rich in glory', sa-raih-in- (VS.) 'riding on the same chariot'. 257. Classification of Compounds. — The Indian grammarians divided compounds into three main classes according to their syntactical relations: i) copulatives, or those in which the members are coordinated, called dvandva-^ ('couple'); 2) determinatives, or those in which the first member determines the second, called tat-puriisa- ('his man') 5; 3) those which are

dependent on another word, called bahu-vrihi-^ . The latter are usually regarded as compounds of the determinative class transmuted to adjectives, which would thus have a secondary character. They are often called 'possessives' since their meaning can usually be rendered by 'possessing', as bahv-annd- 'possessing much food'. To these may be added three other groups in order to treat Vedic compounds exhaustively: 4) governing compounds, or those in which the first member governs the last in sense; e. g. ksaydd-vira- 'ruling men'; 5) a certain remnant of irregular combinations which are best dealt with together; 6) iteratives, or repeated words which are treated as compounds in the Samhitas inasmuch as they have only one accent and a special meaning when thus combined; in these the second member is called amredita- 'repeated' by the Indian grammarians.

1 This -a probably started in stems ending 4 The word first occurs in a. B. passage in -man, representing *-mn-a-; see Wacker- of the TS. (l. 6. 94) in the form oi dvandvani KAGEL 2', p. 118 C. 'couples', and in the AB. 2 -vrsa- lor -vrsan- occurs in the AV. after 5 An example used as the name of the other numerals also. class. 3 For some doubtful examples see Wacker- 6 'Having much rice', an example used NAGEL 2', p. H6. as the name of the class. ;

V. Compounds. Iteratives. Copulatives. I5S

I. Iteratives.

COLLITZ, Transactions of the Oriental Congress of Berlin 22, 287 ff. — Delbruck, Vergleichende Syntax, Dritter Theil (1900), p. 141 — 153: Iterativcomposita. — Wacker- NAGEL 2', p. 142—148.

258. The repetition of an inflected form with loss of accent in the second word is very frequent in the RV. Such repetitions are treated in the Pada texts as compounds the members being separated by the Avagraha. The word thus repeated is generally a substantive and iteration is expressed chiefly

in regard to time or distribution in regard to space; e. g. dhar-akar, div^- vise-vise 'in dive, dydvi-dyavi 'every day' ; grhe-grhe, dame-dame, every house' diso-disak (AV.) 'from every quarter'. Substantives are also thus repeated to express frequency or constant succession in other matters: sdtroh-satroh 'of every foe'; dnnam-annam (AV.) 'food in perpetuity'; agnim-agnim vah samidha.

duvasyata (vi. 1 5^) 'worship Agni again and again with your fuel', yajndsya- yajhasya 'of every sacrifice' (x. i^), dfigad-angat 'from every limb' (x. 163^), pdrvani-parvani 'in every joint' (x. 163^). Adjectives repeated in this way 2^5j are less common; e. g. pdnyam-panyam . . a dhavata . . somam (viii. 'cleanse Soma who is again and again to be praised'; prAcTm-pracim pradisam

(AV. XII. 3 7) 'each forward (eastern) direction'; lUtaram-uttaram sdmam (AV.

XII. 1 3 3) 'each following year', 'year after year'^.

a. The repeated word was originally used in the singular only. But the plural meaning of this repetition led to the beginnings of plural forms, as ekam-ekd iati daduh (v. 5217) 'they have given a hundred each' (lit. 'hundreds, each one'). But a word thus iterated seems never to be in the plural except in agreement with a plural. b. The frequency of -e as locative of a-stems led to the occasional use of the dative in consonant stems; div-e-div-e (for *div-i-div-i) and vU-i-vis-e (for *vis-i-vis-i). c. The transition from iteratives to regular compounds, which appears in B., began with numerals. Thus the eka-ekah of the RV. (ui. 2915) appears in the SB. as ekaika-; and from the dva-dva of the RV. (vm. 68h) we come to the adverbial dvan-dvdm 'in pairs' in the MS., and finally to dvandva- 'pair' in the TS. (B). d. Adjective compounds in which a word is repeated for emphasis are unconnected with iteratives, differing from them both in sense and accent; thus mahd-mahd- 'mightily great'; esaisi- f- of *esaisd- {:= esa-esd-) 'very speedy' 3. Whether card-card- and cala-cald- 'moveable' belong to this group is somewhat uncertain.

2. Copulative Compounds.

Reuter, Die altindischen nominalcomposita, KZ. 31, 172—87: I. Copulative compo- Nominalkomposita . — Delbruck, Altindische Syntax 31.- Richter, Die unechten Sanskrit Grammar 1252-61. — des Altindischen und Altiranischen : IF. 9, 23 ff. — Whitney, Wackernagel 21, 62—74 (p. 149—173). compounds 259. Classification of Dvandvas. — This class consists of consisting of two substantives, far less commonly adjectives, the syntactical regarded relation of which in the sentence is the same and which may be the developrnent as connected in sense by 'and'. The successive stages in in the Samhitas. of this class can be closely traced from the beginning group (about three-fourths I. First we have in the RV. the most numerous

3 According to Geldner, VS. 2, 15 the 1 A vocative repeated to express em- esaisya (RV'.) is the inst. sing, of phasis is not treated in the same way: form esaisi- f- of *esaisd-; but according to BR. in aranydny dranydni (x. 146") both voca- Grassmann it is neut. pi. of esaisya- tives are accented, the second being as and U=i esa-esya-) 'to be striven for with desire', emphatic as the first. 2 The only repetition of a verbal form in •desirable'. this way is fiba-piba (ll. II") 'drink again and again'; cp. above 88. 156 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

of all the Dvandvas) in which the compound consists of two co-ordinated nouns in the dual, each with its own accent. 2. The first member assumes an unchangeable form. 3. Only one accent remains and is restricted to the last syllable of the final member. 4. The first member assumes (but quite rarely in the RV.) the form of the stem. 5. The formation, becoming more general, can assume plural endings (but the RV. has only a few examples in the last book). 6. In the later Sarnhitas this type becomes quite general, forming a single category with the dual Dvandvas. 7. The final stage (of which the examples are few) is that of Dvandvas which are neuter singulars of a collective character. 260. In the commonest and earhest type of the old Dvandvas each member is dual in form and has a separate accent. This type seems to have originated from tvvo grammatical practices frequent in the Vedas: (a) the juxta- position of two coordinate words without ca; e. g. bhumano divas pari (ix. 735) 'away from earth and heaven', krdtum ddksain (viii. 42^) 'under- standing and will'; (b) the use of the elliptic dual^ which puts one of a pair in the dual to express both, as dydva 'heaven and earth'. This origin

is probable because the dual Dvandvas are found alternating with one or both of these usages; thus mitrd-vdruna 'Mitra and Varuna' appears beside both mitra. alone and mitro vdrunak (or mitro vdrunas ca and viitrds ca vdrunas ca); matdra-pitdra 'mother and father' beside matdra or pitdra and pitre matri and other cases, the VS. (ix. 19) having pleonastically even pitdra- matdra ca meaning 'father and mother'. The transition from the syntactical

collocation divds . . prthivyds (vi. 30^) to a dual compound is seen in divds- prthivyos 'of heaven and earth' (occurring four times in the RV.) where the second word is put in the dual to show clearly that an associated couple is meant. In the RV. the two duals of the compound are often separated; e.g. dydva ha ksdma (x. 12^) 'heaven and earth'; dydva yajfidih prthivi (vii. 53^); indra -no dtra vdruna (iv. 41')^; d ndkta barhiJi sadatam usdsa (vn. 425) 'let Night and Dawn seat themselves upon the litter'; i7idra nu pusdna (vr. 57O 'Indra and Pusan'; indra nv agni (vi. 593) 'Indra and Agni', indra yo agni (vi. 60') 3; cdksur mdhi mitrdyor dm M priydm vdrunayoh (vi. 51') 'the great, dear eye of Mitra and Varuna comes'. In two or three examples of tmesis the dual ending appears in the first member only, while the singular remains in the second; thus mitra ...vdrunaA (viii. 25^) and indra yo vdm varuna'^ (vi.685) 'O Indra and Varuna'. Generally, however, the two duals are in immediate juxtaposition, as indra-bfhaspdti 'Indra and Brhaspati'; dydva-prthivi 'Heaven and Earth'; agni-soma 'Agni and Soma'; gen. miirdyor- vdrunayoh^ 'of Mitra and Varuna'. The characteristic final vowel of the first member is -a^, as usdsa-ndkta (or ndktosdsa); hence it even ousts -i as in dgtia-visnu (AV.) 'O Agni and Visnu'. Beside this -a there sometimes appears a in the vocative, both in tmesis, as in mitra rajdna varuna (v. 62 3) 'O kings Mitra and Varuna' (voc. of rdjanS mitrd-vdruna, ill. 56"; x. 64^); and when the members are joined, as

1 Cp. Wackernagel, KZ. 23, 302 ff., * The Pada text here reads vdruna; cp. Reuter, KZ. 31, 176 fr., Delbruck, Alt- indra ko vam varuna (iv. 41'). indische Syntax 58 (p. 98), Vergleichende 5 Double duals in -bhydm. do not appear Syntax, Erster Theil 41 (p. 137 f.). to occur. 2 In each of the first 6 stanzas of IV. 41 6 The ending -au or -av never occurs in indra and vdritna are separated by one or the first member. two words of two or three syllables. 3 Also visnu agan vdntnd *Visnu and Va- runa' in a Mantra in TB. II. 8. 45. V. Compounds. Copulatives. 157

in pdrjanya-vata (vi.49^), voc. olparjdnya-vata (vi. 50"), and always in indra- vayu^ 'O Indra and Vayu'. The ending -i appears in the first member in agni-sSmau 'Agni and Soma'; and -u in krdtu-ddksau (VS.)^ 261. These coordinate duals having early come to be regarded as a unit, the commonest ending of the first member, that of the nom. ace, came to

be retained unaltered in other cases and in derivatives 3. Thus arose the forms mitra-vdrunabhyam; mitrd-vdrunayos beside mitrdyor-vdrunayos, indra- vdncnayos; in the AV. dyava-prthivibhyam and dyava-prthivyos (instead of the divds-prthivyos of the RV.). 262. In a minority of instances, but comparatively oftener in the later Sarnhitas than in the RV., the first member loses its accent and only the last syllable of the final member (irrespectively of its original accent) has the acute'*; thus indra-pusnos (beside indra-pusdna); soma-pusdbhyam; bhava- rtidrdu (AV.) 'Bhava and Rudra', bhava-sarvdu (AV.) 'Bhava and Sarva'S; vata-parjanyi. 'Vata and ' {parjdnya-); surya-candramdsa 'sun and moon' {candrd-mas-).

a. In the later Samhitas there are a few examples in which the nom. sing, of stems in -tr has, doubtless owing to identity in form of the final vowel with the Vedic dual ending -a, become fixed in the first member: pita-puirdu (AV.) 'father and son'; nesfa- potfbhyam (TS. I. 8. iS') 'to the Nestr and the Potr' 6. They doubtless started from syn- tactically coordinated nominatives (like divas-pfthivyds beside divas pj-thivyas, VI. 4727)7. 263. Dvandvas with a single accent having established themselves, the stem form began to encroach in the first member. The only two examples from RV. i.—ix, are indra-vaya (the transition being facilitated by the more frequent occurrence of the vocative indra-vayu) and satyanrti^ (vii. 493) 'truth and untruth'. Two additional neuters occurs in book x: sasananasane

'what eats (sa-asana-) and does not eat' {an-asana-); a-YiA. rk-samdbkyam 'with hymns and chant'. In the later Samhitas this becomes the prevailing type regularly followed in new formations; prasiotr-pratihartfbhyam (TS. 1.8. 18') 'to the Prastotr and Pratihartr'; krdtu-ddksau (VS.); daksa-krata (TS.), sudrarydu (VS.) 'a Sudra and an Arya'9. 264. The stem form having established itself in the first member, the compounding of Dvandvas became freer, and not only neuters but feminines began to be admitted, as diksa-tapds-os (VS.) 'consecration and austerity'. Here, too, the final syllable of the compound has the acute; the svarita of

the original word is, however, retained in brahma-rajanydu (VS. xxvi. 2 ; AV. XI. 32^) 'a Brahman and a warrior'. 265. Dvandvas with plural ending are on the whole later than those with dual ending. They would first have been used to express the plural sense of the pair in question, thus sdl ahur dyava-prthivih (viii. 9^^) 'they speak of six lieaven-and-earths'; aho-ratrdni = 'pairs of day-and-night'.

1 This Dvandva always has u. even in the are examples which may contain the stem nom. indra-vayu. form in the first member (263). 2 The dual notion is sometimes empha- 5 Wackernagel 21, p. 153, also quotes sized by the addition of ubhdu 'both', as soma-rudrdyos (TS.), umiha-kakubhau (MS.). ubha miira-vdrund; sUryd-candramasav ubha 6 On tvasfi-varuirT see Wackernagel 2', • (AV.). 64 (p. 154).' 3 Like jeder-manns for jedes-manns m 7 The three divisions of Dvandvas treated German. Bartholomae, IF. 20, i68(Anzeiger) above include masculines and feminines only. regards these Dvandvas as abbreviations by Neuters of similar type first appear in the dropping the common ending in the first Stltras, as idhmd-barhisi 'fuel and litter'. member. 8 This is the earliest example of a neuter 4 This accentuation is probably due to Dvandva. the influence of collective compounds which 9 Wackernagel 21, p. 155, gives some are nearly allied to Dvandvas. Indragm, further examples from B. portions of the indragntbhyam, indragnyos and agriindrabhyam later Samhitas. iS8 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

A transition to the use of plural Dvandvas, that is, of pairs of groups, is made by indra-marutas 'O Indra and Maruts', where the dual notion is made up of a singular on the one hand and a group on the other. The older type of such plural Dvandvas (which express two coordinated plurals, the first member retaining its accent and the archaic ending -a, like the -a of dual Dvandvas) is represented by dnga-pdrumd 'limbs and joints' occurring in

a B. passage of the TS. (11. 5. 6'). Examples of the later type with one accent are uktha-sastrdni (VS. xix. 28) 'recitations and praises', uktha-madani (AV.) 'recitations and rejoicings', and probably uktharkd (vi. 34') 'reci- tations and hymns". The latest type of these plural Dvandvas (like that of the duals) has the stem form in the first as well as the acute on the last syllable of the final member. The only examples of this type in the RV. occur in book x: aho-rdtranP 'days and nights', ajavdyas 'goats and sheep', dhana-bhaksisu 'in riches and enjoyments'. In the later Sarnhitas this

type becomes quite general, forming a single category with the duals; e. g. deva-manusyas (AV. viii. lo?), bhadra-papds (AV.) 'the good and the bad', priyapriydni (AV.) 'pleasant and unpleasant things'^.

a. The expression dmrta mdriyanam (I. 269) appears to be an abridgment for amftandm mdriyanam 'of immortals (and) mortals', amounting almost to a plural Dvandva (^ amfia-martyanarn) 4. 266. A few Dvandvas appear in the Samhitas with a singular ending, these being neuter only. The older type in which a dual or plural has been turned into a singular at the end, only in order to express a collective

meaning, is represented in the RV. by ista-purtdm^ 'what has been offered or given'j originally a pi. n. in both members (*ists-purtd) which has become a singular to emphasize its collective character*. Both owing to the lack of an early type of neuter Dvandvas and because of the desire to express a collective sense, nearly all the neuter Dvandvas of the later kind are singular. In most instances both members are neuter; e. g. krtakrtd-m (AV.) 'what has been done and not done', cittakutd-m (AV.) 'thought and intention' {dkuta-), bhuta-bhavyd-m (AV.) 'the past and the future', samista-yaji'is (VS.) 'sacrifice and sacrificial formula'; bhadra-papdsya (AV.) 'of good and evil', ahjanabhyaiijana-m (AV.) 'unction and inunction' {abhyanjana-), kasipupabarhand-m (AV.) 'mat and pillow'. a. In a few instances the first member is a masculine or feminine: kesa- smasru (AV.) 'hair and beard', isv-ayudhe (loc. sing.) 'arrows and weapons' (AV.). 267. Adjectives also occur as Dvandvas, but they are of rare occur- rence. Three types may be distinguished. 1. Adjectives of colour expressing a mixture: e. g. nila-lohitd- 'dark-blue and red' = 'dark red'; tamra-dhumrd- (AV.) 'red and black' = 'dark red'; arund-babhru- (VS.) 'ruddy and yellow', dhumrd-rohita- (VS.) 'grey and red' ?.

1 Probably = uktha-arka, not uktha-arka, 4 Cp. Wackernagel 2', p. 157. the gender of the first member having pre- 5 See WINDISCH in Festgruss an Bohtlingk, vailed over that of the last. p. iisff. ^ 2 The gender of the first member here 6 Wackernagel (2', 68) quotes idhma- prevails over that of the second. barhis from the MS., 'fuel and litter', which 3 Some other examples from B. passages with its double accent as well as dual ending of the Sarnhitas in Wackernagel 2', p. 157. in the first member represents a still earlier The oldest example of a Dvandva consisting type. of three members is prdndpdnodanisu (TS. 7 Except in these colour adjectives in the VII. 3. 31) 'in the outward, the downward VS., the accentuation of the adjective and the upward airs', where the plural results Dvandvas is the same as that of neuter sub- from the addition of three individual things stantive Dvandvas, that is, the last syllable (not three groups). of the final member has the acute. v. Compounds. Determinatives. 159

2. Adjectives expressing a contrast; e. g. utkala-nikula (VS.) 'going uphill and downhill'. 3. Adjectives used with dual or plural substantives to express that each is an attribute of one unit of the kind; e. g. padbhy&tn daksina-savy&bhyam (AV. XII. i^^) 'with the right foot and the left'; or with the substantive to be supplied, saptamasjamabhyam svaha (AV.) 'hail to the seventh and the eighth (Angirasa)'; aghasamsa-duhsamsabhyam (AV.) 'by those plotting evil and those plotting ill'; sahnatiratrau {KSl^ 'terminating with a day {sa-ahna-) and ex- ceeding a day' (ati-ratrd-). 268. As regards the order of the members in a Dvandva, the rule seems to be that the more important or the shorter word comes first; thus dydva-ksima, dy&va-, dyava-prthivi'^ 'heaven and earth'; sUrya-mdsa and surya-candramdsa 'sun and moon'; indra-vdruna 'Indra andVaruna'; ulukhala- musale (AV.) 'mortar and pestle'. Indra- regularly comes first in the RV. and the later Sarnhitas in some dozen Dvandvas'; e. g. indragnt; otherwise agni- always precedes; soma- comes after indra- and agni-, but before /Sja«7 and rudra-. The longer word comes first, perhaps, as the more important, in parjdnya-vdta^ 'Parjanya and Vata' and in turvdsa-yddu 'Turvasa and Yadu'. This can hardly be the reason in sambadha-tandryas (AV.) 'oppressions and weariness'. The shorter word comes first in mitrd-vdruna, though Varuna is the more important of the twct; in rk-samdbhyam the shorter word is at the same time the more important.

3. Determinative Compounds. 269. Classification. — The large class of determinative compounds in which the first member determines or limits the sense of the last, is best divided into two main groups. In the one, the final member is a verbal noun which governs the first member in meaning, and often even in form, as a verb governs its case. In the other^ the final member is an ordinary noun (either adjective or substantive), the relation of which to the first member is a purely nominal one.

a. Verbal Noun as final member.

270. The final member is often a verbal noun either not occurring as a simple word or at least not belonging to a type used as simple words: suffixes either the bare roots or a verbal derivative formed with the as final members -a -ana, -i, -in, -man, -van. These nouns limited to use sam-idh- 'flaming', are agent nouns; e. g. havir-dd- 'eating the oblation', 'causing injury' go-ghn-d- 'cow-slaying', jyotis-kf-t- 'producing light', abhi-hru-t- , 'devouring a-kar-d- 'scattering'; amitra-ddmbh-ana- 'injuring enemies', tuvi-gr-i- much', uru-cdkr-i- 'doing large work'; bhadra-vad-lti- 'uttering an auspicious much'. Occasionally cry'; dsu-he-man- 'swiftly speeding', bhuri-dd-van-^ 'giving — agent-nouns limited to use as final members are formed with other suffixes: vi-bhv-dn- 'skil- prati-div-an- 'adversary at play', vi-bhv-an- 'far-reaching' and 'spontaneously frightened'; ful'; pra-py-asd- (AV.) 'swelling', sva-bhy-asd- (AV.)

5 Appearing in its weakest form or, if 1 This form occurs 79 times in the RV. a. short vowel, with determina- and prthivi-dyava, only once. ending in 2 Otherwise only agmndribhyam (VS.) tive -1. 6 -mant and -vant occasionally appear as 'Agni and Indra'. Cp. the list of .dual divi- variations for -man and -van, as vi-ruk- nities in Vedic Mythology, Grundriss III, I A, mant- 'shining'; prana-da-vant- (AV.) 'life- p. 126. giving' (cp. "Whitney on AV. iv. 355); see 3 Once also vaia-parj'anya. Reuter, KZ. 31, 560 f. 4 Cp. Wackernagel 21, p. i68 (middle). i6o I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar. duh-ias-u- 'malignant', vi-bhind-i'i- 'splitting', pra-yiy-u- 'used for driving', go- vind-u- 'seeking cows', pari-tatn-iV (AV.) 'encompassing', pums-cal-a- (VS.)

'prostitute'; /z'z'a-J^/^a-Z'a'-" (AV.) 'abounding in fat', «/-/^(?-,^a- 'whirlwind' ; vi- bhahj-ani'i- 'shattering'; pra-cet-una- 'affording a wide prospect'; div-i-tmant- 'going to heaven'; tuvi-kurm-i{n)- 'stirring mightily'; vasaf^-palpul-i- (VS.) 'washing clothes'.

a. The meaning of these agent-nouns restricted in use as final members is chiefly active. But in those of them which consist of the bare root (with or without the determi- native -i) it is often intransitive; e. g. namo-vfdh- 'growing by adoration'; it is not in- su-yuj- frequently passive, as mano-yuj- 'yoked at will', 'well-yoked' ; yama-hu- 'called by entreaties', indra-pa-tama- 'most eagerly drunk by Indra', tivra-su-i- 'pressed from the fermenting mass', hrdaya-vidh- 'pierced to the heart' ^ (AV.). The passive meaning also appears in one derivative formed with -a: pari-mar-d- (TS.) 'died around' = 'around whom people die'. Final members formed with -a, -ana, [i)-tu when compounded with su- or dus- also have a passive (gerundive) meaning expressive of the ease or difficulty with which the verbal action is performed; e. g. su-kdr-a- 'easy to be done', su-mdn-tu- 'easily recognisable', su-ved-and- 'easily acquired'; dur-dp-and- 'hard to attain'; dur-ni- ydn-tu- 'hard to restrain', dur-dhdr-T-tu- 'irresistible', du-ddbha- 'hard to deceive' ; also an isolated derivative with 4, dur-gfbh-i- 'hard to catch', and one with -na, su-sru-na- 'easily heard' (beside su-sru-t- 'hearing easily'). 271. A certain number of verbal nouns restricted to employment as final members which are formed from the simple root (with or without deter- minative -i) or with the suffixes -a, -ana, -tha are nouns of action; e.g. srad-dkd- 'htYisi' , anr-dd- (VS. TS.) 'fulfilment of wishes', tip a-s(u-t- 'invocation', pari-pad- 'snare', sani-nam- (AV.) 'affection'; ksudha-mar-d- (AV.) 'death by hunger', papa-vad-d- (AV.) 'evil cry'; deva-hed-ana- 'offence against the gods', baddhaka-moc-ana- (AV.) 'release of a prisoner'; go-pi-thd- 'drink of milk', putra-kr-thd- 'procreation of sons', sam-i-thd- 'conflict', kama-pr-d- is both a noun of action, 'fulfilment of desires' (AV.) and an agent-noun, 'fulfilling desires' (RV.)3. a. A class of secondary nouns of action is here formed by adding the suffixes -ya and -ya to agent nouns formed from the simple root (with or without -t). These are abstracts (neuter and feminine respectively); e. g.

/^aOT>-aV-_)'ff- 'enjoyment of the q\>\z.'C\ovIi;, pUrva-p&y-ya- s.nd^ purva-pe-ya- 'preced- ence in drinking' {purva-ps- 'drinking first'}, nr-pdyya- 'protection of men', bahu-pdy-ya- 'protection of many', 'large hall', deva-ydj-ya- n. and -yaj-yd- i. 'adoration of the gods' {deva-ydj- 'adoring the gods', VS.), nr-sdh-ya- 'over- coming of men' (nr-sdh- 'overcoming men'), raja-su-ya- (AV.) 'royal con- secration' {raja-sti- 'creating a king', VS.), madkyama-stkSy-ya- 'standing in the middle' (inadhyama-sthd- adj., VS.); su-krt-yd- 'righteousness' (su-kf-t- 'righteous'). 272. The close verbal connexion of these final members with the roots from which they are derived, shows itself formally. Thus they retain the palatal of the verb where the guttural would otherwise appear"*. Again, agent nouns of this kind are formed from almost every kind of present stem. The following are examples of such nouns from present stems of: i. the first class: cakram-a-sajd- 'stoppings the wheel'; 2. the sixth class: ut-tudd- (AV.) 'instigator' {tudd-ti), sam-gird- (AV.) 'swallowing' {sdin girami). 3. stems with -cha: go-vyacchd- (VS.) 'cow-tormentor' (from a lost present stem *vyaccka-)

' YoxpTvas-sp/idkd.;\iis Mss. rs3.Apibasphakd-m 4 See Wackernagel 2', 76. Exceptions {?z.&2. pibah-phdkdm): see Whitney on AV. to this would be iuvi-kurmi-(n)- and diva- IV. 73. kard- (AV.) 'sun', if these words are derived 2 But 'heart-piercing' (RV.). from car- 'fare'. 3 Isolated examples of nouns of action 5 From a sajdmi 'I attach'. formed with other suffixes are su-papi-ani- 'good flight', sam-sres-ind- (AV.) 'conflict'(?). V. Compounds. Determinatives. i6i

4. the fourth class or passive with -ya: akrsta-pacyd-'^ (AV. VS. TS.) 'ripening in unploughed ground', a-pasyd- 'not seeing', ugram-pasyd- (AV.) ^'fierce-looking', mam-pasyd- (AV.) 'looking at me', adhi-pasya- (AV. Paipp.) '^superintendent', punar-manyd- 'remembering' {mdnya-te 'thinks'), d-risanya- 'not failing' {risanyd-ti), bala-vi-jnayd- 'recognized by his strength', a-vi-dasyd- 'not ceasing' {vi dasyanti 'they cease'), a-vi-driyd- 'not bursting' {dr- 'split'). stems a-, 5. with -ay vacam-mkhayd- 'stirring the voice', samudram-lhkhaya- (only voc.) ^'stirring the vat' {inkhdya-nii 'they shake'), visvam-ejaya- (only voc.) ^x<^ring air {ejdya-ti 'sets in motion)', ati-parayd- 'putting across'. 6. the

-ti

_ - .. 'reaching to the mouth' ^ {dagh-nu-yat _ „ 'may reach', K.), dura-dabhnd- (AV.) 'eluding doors' = 'not to be kept by bars and bolts' (dabhnuv-anti 'they deceive'), danu-pinvd- 'swelling with drops' {pinv-and- 'swelling'), sada-prnd- 'always giving' {prnA-ti 'fills', 'bestows'), a-mind-i (beside d-minant-) 'undiminishing' {mind-ti 'diminishes'), pra-mrnd- 'destroying' {pra-mrndnt- 'crushing', prd mrna 'destroy'), a-sinvd-'' (beside d-sinvani-) 'insatiable', a-sunv-d- 'not pressing Soma' (beside d-sunv-ant-), 7. the sixth and seventh classes: agnim-indhd- 'fire-kindling' {indh-dte 'they kindle'), pra-krntd- (TS.iv.5.3') and vi-krntd- (VS.) 'cutting to pieces' {krntd-ti 'cuts'), bhumi-drmhd- (AV.) 'firmly fixed on the ground' (dfmha-ta 'make firm'), ni-linipd- (AV.) a kind of supernatural being («/ limpami 'I besmear', AV.). 8. the root class: vrdtya-bruvd- (AV.) 'calling himself a Vratya' {bruv-dnii

'they say'). 9. the reduplicating class: anu-jighrd- (AV.) 'snuffing at' {jighranti 'smelling'), sam-pibd- (AV.) 'swallowing down' {sdm pibami, AV.) 5. a. In a few instances verbal nouns which are final members of compounds in the RV. or the later Samhitas subsequently appear as independent words. Thus jata-vidya- 'knowledge of things', vidya- (AV. TS.) 'knowledge' 6. On the other hand, verbal nouns derived from roots without suffix, which in the RV. appear both as independent words and as final members of compounds, often^ survive in the later Samhitas in their com- pound form only; such are tier- 'racing', da- 'giver', sii- m. 'begetter', f. 'mother', siha- 'standing'. As a rule verbal nouns which occur independently have the same general meaning as when they form the final member of a compound. But those formed without any suffix generally, and those formed with -a occasionally, have the sense of agent nouns at the end of compounds, but of action nouns or of designations of things con- - ceiv " - • - . - - - fiva-

Mara- 'bringing prosperity'. Sometimes the simple word has the meaning of an agent noun as well as Of an action noun; e. g. dfs- adj. 'seeing' and f. 'act of seeing'; bhiij- adj. 'enjoying' and f. 'enjoyment'; siubk- adj. 'shouting' and f. 'shout'; but at the end of a compound these three words express the agent only. Similarly grabh-a- m. 'seizer' (AV.) and 'grasp', but grava-grabh-d- 'handling the Soma stones'^. 273. Independent verbal nouns. — Several kinds of verbal nouns which are also capable of independent use occur as final member of compounds. Among these the only ones of frequent occurrence are those in -ta which are adjectives (often used as substantives) and the corresponding abstract

1 Wackernagel 21, p. 179 (bottom), refutes ace. f. 'life-giving' (beside dyur-da-, AV. VS. the view that this -ya is identical with that TS.): ddd-ati 'they give'. of the gerundive. 6 For examples of verbal nouns which 2 -daghna- forms the last member of assume an independent character in the several other compounds in the later Sam- later language, see Wackernagel 21, 77 a. hitas. See Wackernagel 21, p. 181. 7 On the origin of these verbal compounds 3 Cp. Wackernagel 21, p. 181, note. and the relation of the final member to the 4 From a lost root *si-nd-ti 'satisfies'. independent word, see Wackernagel 2', 5 There is also a transition form (leading 78 b and note (p. 186 f.). to the later -dada-) in ayitr-ddd-am (AV.) | Indo-arische Philologie. I. 4, .\\ l62 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar. substantives in -ti\ e. g. puro-hita- adj. 'placed in front', m. 'domestic priest'; puro-hiti- f. 'domestic priesthood'.

1. Agent nouns. Those which are formed with -aka and -snu are compounded with prepositions only: abhi-kros-aka- (VS.) 'one who cries out', vi-l&y-aka- (VS.) 'melter'; abhi-socayi-snu- (AV.) 'causing heat', ni-sat-snu- 'sitting firmly'. Agent nouns in -tr may be compounded with adverbs, as pura-etf- 'going before', purah-sthatf- 'standing at the head', and rarely with substan- tives, as nr-patf- 'protecting men', man-dhaif- ' 'applying (his) mind', 'thoughtful man'. Agent nouns formed with -u from secondary present stems are in a few instances compounded with substantives: gir-vanasy-u- 'fond of hymns', deva-pTy-u- (AV. VS.) 'hating the gods', rastra-dips-u- (AV.) 'wishing to injure the country'. 2. Action nouns. A few action nouns formed with -a from adjectives in -u derived from secondary verbal stems, begin in late passages of the

RV. to appear in composition with a substantive: mamsa-bhiks-a- (i. 162") 'request for flesh', sraddha-manasy-a- 'faithful intent' (x. 1135); sajata-vanasy-a-

(TS. II. 6. dP) 'desire to rule over relatives'. Much more common are the abstracts in -ti (corresponding to adjectives in -to), which may be compounded with indeclinables or nouns (adjective or substantive)^; e. g. dn-uti- 'no help', d-sasti- 'curse', nir-rti- 'dissolution', sd-huti- 'joint invocation', su-uti- 'good aid'; soma-ptti- 'drinking of Soma', soma-suti- 'pressing of Soma'. Some of these are becoming or have become agent nouns; thus jardd-asti- 'attaining great age' as well as 'attainment of old age'; vdsu-dhiti- 'bestowing wealth' as well as 'bestowal of wealth'; but vdsu-mti- (AV.) only 'bringing wealth'. Others, even in the RV., approximate to the type of the non-verbal determinatives, as dsu-niti- 'world of spirits', rju-niti- 'right guidance', devd-hiti- 'divine ordi- nance', ndmo-vrkti- 'cleansing for adoration', purvd-citti- 'foreboding' : these can, however, be understood as abstracts to corresponding compounds in -ta^. 3. Gerundives. The gerundives formed with -ya are ordinarily compounded with adverbial prepositions, as puro-nuvakya- (sc. fc- AV.) '(verse) to be repeated beforehand'. In the later Samhitas a noun here sometimes appears as first member: nivi-bharya- (AV.) 'to be worn in a skirt', prathama-vasya- (AV.) 'worn formerly'. The Proper Names ku7ida-pdyya-, puru-mayya, vrsti- hdvya-, if they are formed with the gerundive suffix -ya, would be examples from the RV.'*. — Gerundives formed with -arijya and -enya^ are compounded with prepositions and a{n)- only: a-mantraniya- (AV.) 'to be asked'; sam- car^iiya- 'suitable for walking on', iz-ifz/zj-tf/z^a- 'not malevolent'. — Gerundives in -iva are not compounded at all except with «(«)-. 4. Participles. Besides prepositions and «(«)-, only indeclinable words occurring in connexion with verlDS are found compounded with participles (exclusive of the past passive participle): thus alala-bhdvant- 'murmuring' (waters) and jahjana-bhdvant- 'crackling' (flame), astam-ydnt- (AV.) 'setting' and astam-esydnt- (AV.) 'about to set', d-punar-diyamana- (AV.) 'not being given back', avis-krnvand- 'making visible', dur-vidvams- 'ill-disposed, su- vidvams- 'knowing well'.

I From manas- through ''manz-dhaif-. (AV.) 'uttering a single sound', a kind of ' The verbal force is strongest when the spectre, and var-kdrya- (l. SS"*) are obscure preceding substantive has the sense of an in their formation. object. 5 A fevf gerundives in -tavya begin to be' 3 As devd-hiti- 'act of ordaining by tlie compounded with prepositions or particles gods' beside devd-hita- 'ordained by the in the B. portion of the TS. and MS. : pra- gods'. vastavydm (TS.) 'one should go on a jour- 4 The compounds amd-vdsya- (AV.) sc. ney'; a-bhartavyd- (MS.) 'not to be borne', rdtrJ- 'night of the new moon', eka-vddya- sv-etavyam (TS.) 'easy to go'. V. Compounds. Determinatives. 163

a. By far the commonest verbal nouns occurring as final member are the past participles in -fa, which are compounded with nouns as well as prepositions and other indeclinables. The meaning is mostly passive. It is, however, sometimes active, but in the RV. almost exclusively when a pre- position precedes, as ud-iia- 'risen'; when a noun precedes, only in sdr^a- takta- 'speeding w^th a rush' and sdrga-pratakta- 'darting forth with a rush'. In the AV. a noun appears also in uda-plutd- 'swimming in the water'; occa- sionally even transitively governing the first member in sense: krtd-dvista- (AV.) 'hatmg what has been done' (by another)'. b. The past participle in -na is less frequent and occurs in the RV. only compounded with prepositions, «(«)- and su-; e. g. pdri-cchinna- 'lopped around'; d-bhinna- 'not split'; su-purna- 'quite full'. But it is found a few times in the later Samhitas with a preceding substantive: agni-nunna- (SV.) 'driven away by fire', resmd-cchinna- (AN.) 'rent by a storm'; and with active (transitive) sense gara-girnd- (AV.) 'having swallowed poison'. 5. There are besides some verbal adjectives in -ra or (after a vowel) -ira, -la and -ma, the first of which occurs compounded with nouns as well as prepositions: a-sk-ra- 'united' % ni-mrg-ra- 'attached to', tanU-subh-ra- 'shining in body', hdri-scand-ra- 'shining yellow'; vi-bhr-tra- 'to be borne about in various directions' a-mis-la-, ; ni-mis-la-, j-aw-wzY-Za;- 'commingling' ; dva-kss-ma- (AV.) 'emaciated', uc-chtis-ma- (TS. i. 6. 2') 'hissing upwards', ni-sus-ma- (TS. I. 6. 2^) 'hissing downwards'. 6. Comparatives and superlatives in -Tyams and -isiha having originally been verbal adjectives are found in composition with prepositions and mm- when they still retain their verbal meaning: ud-yarniyams- 'raising excessively', pdri-svajiyams- (AV.) 'clasping more firmly', prdti-cyaviyams- 'pressing closer against', vi-klediyams- (AV.) 'moistening more'; a-gamistha- 'coming quickly', sdm-bhavistha- 'most beneficial'.

First member in verbal determinatives.

274. a. Prepositions. At the beginning of determinatives prepositions are employed in accordance with their use in verbal forms; e. g. pra-ni- and prd-niH- 'furtherance', pra-netf- 'leader', prd-mta- 'furthered', pra-neni- 'guiding constantly'. Even in the many instances in which the corresponding verbal com-

bination has not been preserved, it may be assumed to have existed; e. g. in abhi-pra-mur- 'crushing' and abhi-pra-bhangin- 'breaking'. Occasionally, how- ever, the preposition has a meaning which otherwise occurs only before non- verbal nouns; e. g. aii-yajd- 'sacrificing excessively'^. A preposition belonging to the second member is once prefixed to the first in sam-dhana-ji-t (AV.) 'accumulating (= sam-ji-t-) 'wealth'. b. Adverbs. Various kinds of adverbs occur in this position, as puro- yavan- 'going before', a/§j'«aya-a'r?//4- 'injuring wrongly'; amutra-bhUya-{KS[.VS>^

'state of being there' (i. e. in the other world). The privative a{n)- though

belonging in sense to the final member always precedes the first; e. g. dn- agni-dagdha- 'not burnt by fire'; d-pakad-daghvan- 'not remaining behind'; d-dara-sr-t (AV.) 'not falling into a crack'. c. Nouns. The first member, when a noun, expresses various relations •to the last.

1 Cp. Wackernagel 21, p. 195; but also 3 In TS. II. 5. 44 (B.) ad-yaj- means 'to Whitney on AV. vii. 1131. pass over in sacrificing'. 2 From sac- 'be associated'. 11* 164 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

It expresses: I. the object, which is the prevailing meaning when the final

member is an agent noun or an action noun; e.g. ab-ji-t- 'winning waters', asva- hayd- 'urging on steeds', nr-patf- 'protecting men', vaja-sati- 'act of winning

booty', vrtra-hdtya- n. 'act of slaying Vrtra' '. When the final member is a verbal noun formed from kr- 'make', the first member does not necessarily express the product, but may mean the material with which the activity is concerned;

. thus hiranya-kard- (VS.) is not 'gold-maker' but 'worker in gold', 'goldsmith'. 2. the agent when the last member has a passive sense; e.g. indra-pd- tama- 'most drunk by Indra', soma-sita- 'excited by Soma'; occasionally also when the final member is an action noun, as devd-hiti- 'ordinance of the

gods', parna-sadd- {K^l. VS.) 'fall of leaves', mitra-tdrya- (AV.) 'victory of friends'. 3. the instrument, the source, or the locality when the final member

is an agent noun or a past passive participle; e. g. ddri-dugdha-' 'milked with stones', aritra-pdrana- 'crossing with oars'; go-jata- 'produced from kine', tivra-su-t- 'pressed from the fermenting mass'; uda-plutd- (AV.) 'swimming in the water', dhar-jata- (AV.) 'born in the day', puru-bha- 'being in many places', bandhu-kd-t- 'dwelling among relatives', pfsni-ni-presita-^ 'sent down to earth'. 4. in an appositionally nominative sense, that as or like which the action of the final member is performed; e. g. tsana-kr-t- 'acting as a ruler', pUrva-pd- 'drinking first', vamd-jata- 'born as one dear' = 'dear by nature'; dhara-vakd- 'sounding like streams', syend-juta- 'speeding like an eagle'. 5. in the sense of a predicative nominative before a past participle, or a predicative accusative before an agent noun expressive of 'saying'; e. g. bhaksdm-krta- (TS.) 'enjoyed', stoma-tasta- 'fashioned as a hymn of praise'; vratya-bruvd- (AV.) 'calling oneself a Vratya'. 6. adverbially the manner in which an action is done, sometimes by means of a substantive, more often by means of an adjective; e. g. rtv-ij- 'sacrificing at the proper time', that is, 'regularly', sdrga-takta- 'speeding with a rush'; asu-pdtvan- 'flying swiftly', dhruva-ksi-t- (VS.) 'dwelling securely', satya- ydj- 'sacrificing truly'; with a numeral in dvi-jd- {PC

virith a case-ending "*, generally with that which the corresponding verb would govern in a sentence. The accusative is here the commonest case, the locative coming next, while the other cases are rarer. A singular case- ending (the ace. or inst.) may here indicate a plural sense; e. g. dsvam-isti- 'seeking horses', puram-dard- 'destroyer of forts', hinesita- 'driven by dogs'

(Ji'ina-). Plural (ace.) endings sometimes occur, but dual endings are never found in these compounds. The accusative case-ending is very common, generally expressing the object of a transitive verb, as dhanam-jayd- 'winning booty'. But it also ex- presses other senses, as that of the cognate accusative; e. g. subham-yd-{va7i)- 'moving in brilliance'; or of an adverbial accusative, e. g. ugram-pasyd-^

I Wackernagel 21, p. 198, quotes hka- the body it expresses the sense of 'with • jit-am svargam ( AV. IV. 348) as showin g that reference to', as bahu-jiita- 'quick with the the first member was felt to have an accu- arms'. sative sense = 'winning the heavenly world' 3 The local sense here is that of the {svargam lokdm); but the Paipp. Ms. has the accusative of the goal. reading svargyam, which Whitney regards 4 Cp. Lindner, Nominalbildung p. 28. as better, translating 'world-conquering, 5 Occasionally the -m is inorganic, as in heaven-going'. maksum-gamd- and dium-gd- (AV.) 'going » of When the first member is a part swiftly'. In fatam-gd- 'hivi' , paiam- probably V. Compounds. Determinatives. 165

(AV^) 'looking fiercely'; or of a predicative accusative, e. g. ayaksmam-kdrana- (AV.) 'producing health', srtam-kartf- ^TS. iii. i. 4*) 'making cooked". The ace. pi. occurs in ka-cit-kard- 'doing all manner of things', pdha-isii-^ 'desiring kine', vipas-cit- 'understanding eloquence', vipo-dha- 'granting eloquence', huras- cit-i 'intending evil't. a. The accusative form is commonest before agent nouns ending in -a or -i which begin with a single consonant and the first syllable of which is short; that is, the -m here appears in a syllable in which rhythmic lengthening would be alloweds. This accusative form is the regular rule in the RV. when the stem of the first member ends in -a, being found before -kara- 'making', -caya- 'collecting', -jaya- 'conquering', -tara- 'overcoming', -dara- 'cleaving', -bhara- 'bearing', -ruja- 'breaking', -sani- 'winning', -saha- 'over- whelming'; e. g. abhayam-kard- 'procuring security'. The only exceptions to this rule_ in the RV. are asva-hayd- 'urging on steeds', sukra-dugha- 'emitting clear fluid'. In the RV. the ending -im also occurs va. pusUm-bhard- 'bringing prosperity' and harim-bhard-^ 'bearing the yellow-coloured (bolt)'; and -urn inorganically in maksum-gamd- 'going quickly'. In the later Samhitas also occur iram-madd- (VS.) 'rejoicing in the draught', duram-gamd- (VS.) 'going far', devam-gamd- (TS.) 'going to the gods', yudhiin-gamd- (AV.) 'going to battle', viivam-bhard- (AV.) 'all-sustaining', sakam-bhard-^ (AV.) 'bearing ordure'* b. The accusative form in -am is not uncommon before a final member with initial vowel (coalescence of the two vowels being thus avoided); e.g. cakram-Ssajd- 'obstructing the wheel', visvam-invd- 'all-moving', dsvam-isti- 'desiring horses', vacam-ihkhayd- 'word-moving', samudram-Tnkhaya- (only voc.) 'stirring the vat', visvam-ejayd- 'all-exciting'; in -im: agnim-indhd- 'fire-kindler'; in -am: tvSm-ahuti- (TS.) 'offering oblations to thee'.

c. The accusative form is common when the final member is formed from a present stem, owing to the close connexion of such verbal nouns with the verb; e. g. dhiyam-jinvd- 'exciting meditation', ugram-pasyd- (AV.) 'looking fiercely', mam-pasyd- {KSf?) 'looking at me'. d. Apart from the conditions stated above (a, b, c) the accusative case- ending rarely occurs in the first member of verbal determinatives; e. g. vanam-kdrana-, a particular part of the body; dhiyam-dhd- 'devout', subham- ya-{van)- 'moving in brilliance' '.

a. In the great majority of instances the first member, if it has the accusative case-form, ends in -am, mostly from stems in -a, but also from monosyllabic consonant stems {pur-am- etc.) i°, and from one stem in -J [dhiy-am-). Otherwise there are three or

represents IE. fetn-; while xa. puram-dhi- nation of fiiam-cayd- and rna-cil- 'paying a 'fertile woman' and vfsan-dhi- 'bold', the debt', khajam-kard- and khaja-kft- 'causing origin of the nasal is doubtful; cp.WACKER- the din of battle', dhaiiam-jayd- and dhana- NAGEL 21, p. 202. ji-i- 'winnmghooly', Janam-sa/id- 'overcoming 1 In B. this predicative accusative some- beings' and vrdta-saha- 'conquering crowds', times comes to have the value of a predi- fi Beside kavi-vrdhd- 'prospering the wise'. cative nominative when compounded with a 7 Here the ace. of an a-stem is substituted gerundive or a derivative of bhil-, as ij^tam- for sakdn-. kftya- (TS.) 'to be made cooked', nagnam- 8 The compound nardm- dhisa- (VS.) is of bhavuka- (TS.) 'becoming naked'. doubtful meaning and irregular accent. 2 pasvds ace. pi. 9 For several other examples occurring in 3 Here kuras- might be a genitive as \/dt- Brahmana passages of the later Samhitas governs that case as well as the ace. see Wackernagel 2', p. 207 d, e. 4 puro-ha 'destroying forts' may contain 10 In hrd-am-sdni- 'winning the heart' the an ace. ; also isa-siut- 'praise of prosperity', neuter hrd- is treated as if it were a masc. which the Pada analyses as isah-siui: or fern. 5 How much the use of these forms is dependent on rhythm is seen in the alter- i66 I. Allgemeines und Sprache 4. Vedic Grammar.

four in -im [agnim- etc.), one in -urn [makstim-), and two pronominal accusatives in am {tnam-, tvdm-). Polysyllabic consonant stems never have the accusative case-ending in the first member i. 276. The locative case-ending is in the RV. almost limited to em- ployment before agent-nouns formed from the simple root with or without determinative -t: agre-gd- 'going before', agre-gii- (VS.) 'moving forwards', agre-ni- (VS.) 'leader', agre-pd- 'drinking first', agre-pi- (VS.) 'drinking first', ahge-stha-'^ (AV.) 'situated in a member of the body', rte-jd-'^ 'produced at the sacrifice', krcchre-sri-t- 'running into danger', gahvare-sthd- (VS.) 'being at the bottom', divi-ksi-t- 'dwelling in heaven', divi-ydj- 'worshipping in heaven', divi-srl-t- (AV.) 'sojourning in heaven', divi-sdd- (AV.) 'sitting in heaven', dure-drs- 'visible afar', dosani-sris- (AV.) 'leaning on the arm', rathe-subh- 'flying along in a car', rathe-stha- 'standing in a car', vane-raj- 'shining in a wood', vane-sdh- 'prevailing in woods', sute-grbh- 'taking hold of the Soma', hrdi-spfi- 'touching the heart'*. 2. The RV. has only two examples of a locative before an agent noun formed witli the suffix -a: divi-ksayd- 'dwelling in heaven', vahye-sayd- 'resting

in a litter' 5. There are several others in the later Sarnhitas: agre-vadM- (VS.)

'killing what is in front', talpe-sayd- (AV.) 'resting on a couch', divi-card- (AV.) 'faring in heaven', divi-stambhd- (AV.) 'supported on the sky', dure-vadhd-

(VS.) 'far-striking', hara-iayd-^ (MS. i. 2^) 'resting in gold'. In the AV. also occurs an example of the locative before an agent noun formed with -in: parame-sth-in- 'standing in the highest (place)'. 3. The locative plural is much rarer than the singular in the first member: apsu-ksi-t- 'dwelling in the waters', apsu-ja- 'born in the waters', apsu-ji-t- 'van- quishing in the waters', apsu-sdd- 'dwelling in the waters', apsu-vdh- (SV.) 'driving in water', apsu-samiita- (AV.) 'excited in the waters', gosu-yudh- 'fighting in (= for) kine', prtsu-tur- 'conquering in battles', bharesic-jd- 'pro- duced in fights', hrtsv-ds- 'piercing to the heart'.

a. In these locative compounds the second member is most commonly -stha- or -stha- in the RV., while the first member is most usually agre-, dure- or vane-. The locative in -e is the predominant one, even displacing -z in pathe-sthd- 'standing on the road' beside pathi-stha- (AV.). 277. The instrumental case-ending occurs several times in the first member of verbal determinatives: ksama-card- (VS.) 'being in the ground', gira-vfdh- 'rejoicing in song', dhiya-jur- 'aging in devotion', yuvd-datta- 'given by you two', yuvd-riita- 'led by you two', yusmd-datta- 'given by you', ymmS- mta- 'led by you', sunesita- 'driven by dogs' {h'ma). When the stem of the

first member ends in -a there is some doubt whether -a here represents the instrumental ending or lengthening of the vowel ?; thus sapha-ruj- may mean 'breaking with the hoof or 'hoof-breaker'; and in yuva-yuj- 'yoked by you two' the vowel may be simply lengthened. In diva-kard- (KSl^ 'sun' the first member is an old instrumental used adverbially*. a. The examples of the ablative case-ending are rare: daksinat-sdd-

1 iakan- substitutes the ace. of an a-stem; 3 In sute-kara- 'active in (offering) Soma', above p. 165, note 7. the accent shows that the final member has 2 There are several other locatives com- an adjectival, not a verbal sense. In the pounded with -sfha-. name matari-ivan- the first member is inter- 3 There are several other locatives com- preted in RV. HI. 29" as a locative; cp.

pounded with -ja-. RiCHTER, IF. 9, 247, note ; Macdonell, 4 In nare-sfha- (RV'.), an epithet of the Grundriss ni. I A, p. 72 (middle). car, the first member may be a locative 6 In VS. v. 8 hari-saya,-; hara- here is the (Sayana), but it may also be a dative of «/- locative of hdri-. (BR., Grassmann), 'serving for a man to ' Cp. Wackernagel 21, 56. stand on'. 8 See Wackernagel 21, 213 a, note. V. Compounds. Determinatives. 167

(MS. II. 63) 'sitting in the south'; divo-ja- 'produced from heaven', divo-dith- (SV.) 'milking from the sky', divo-ruc- 'shining from the sky'. b. The ending of the genitive would naturally appear only before deri- vatives from verbs governing the genitive. There seem to be no certain examples: divd-ksas- 'ruling over the sky' {divas) however seems probable'.

b. I. Ordinary Adjective as final member. 278. Ordinary adjectives which are not of a verbal character may appear as final member of determinatives much in the same way as past participles in -ta and -na (273, 4). But adjectives ending in -u are almost exclusively compounded with the privative a{n)- and prepositions; e. g. i2;z-aj-M- 'not swift', dn-rju- 'dishonest', d-daiu- 'impious', d-hhiru- 'not terrible'; pram- 'very {prd) swift' {asu-). The only final members otherwise compounded are -vasu- 'rich' in vibhd-vasu- 'radiant' and other compounds, and -raghu- 'swift', in made- raghu- 'quick in exhilaration'. a. The first member may be a substantive in the relation of a case to the last; e. g. tanii-subhra- 'shining in body', yajha-dhira- 'versed in sacrifice', vakmaraja-satya- 'faithful to the ordainers of hymns', visvd-sambhu- 'salutary for all'. The relation is sometimes expressed by the case-ending : the locative in gdvi-sthira- (AV.) 'strong in kine {gdvi)' as a name, mdde-raghu- 'quick in exhilaration', sute-kara- 'active in (offering) Soma', sumnd-api- 'united in affection {sumni)'; instrumental = in dhiyd-vasu- 'rich in devotion',

vidmanSpas- 'working iapds-) with wisdom {vidmanaf . The first member may also appositionally express a comparison as representing a type: h'tka-babhru- (VS.) 'reddish like a parrot'^. b. The first member may be an adjective qualifying the final member in an adverbial sense; thus aprami-satya (voc.) 'eternally true', urdhvd-prsni-^ (VS.) 'spotted above', try-arusa- 'reddish in three (parts of the body)', maha- nagni-^ {AY.) 'courtezan' ('very naked'), maM-mahi-vrata- ^xnYingYtry ja\^'d\y', maha-vaturin- 'very broad', visvd-scandra- 'all-glittering'*-

c. Adverbs and particles often appear as first member; e. g. an-asu- 'not swift', anydta-eni- (VS.) 'variegated on one side {anydtas)', evara- 'quite {evd) ready {dra-)', duh-siva- 'unfavourable', punar-nava- 'renewing itself, sato-mahant- 'equally {sa-tds) great', sato-brhatt- (VS.) 'the equally great' (a metre), satydm- ugra- 'truly mighty', su-priya- (AV.) 'very dear'. d. Several prepositions appear as first member, mostly with their original adverbial meaning; e. g. dti-krsna-^ (VS.) 'very dark'; d-misla-tama- 'mixing very readily'^; upottamd- (AV.) 'penultimate'; ni-dhruvi- ('fixed down') 'per- severing', nis-kevalya- (VS.) 'belonging exclusively'; praii'i- 'very swift', pra-

1 But it has also been otherwise explained; 4 Here the adjectival stem is used for the cp. Wackernagel 2', p. 213 c, note; who adv. urdhvdm. also quotes a-kasya-md- 'knowing nothing' 5 From this is formed the m. mahd-nagnd- from the MS. (AV.) 'paramour'. 2 The word jatu-sfhira- probably contains 6 The meaning of sddhv-aryd- 'truly faith- an old instrumental = 'naturally solid'; in ful' (?), which occurs only once, is doubtful; nabha-nedistha- 'nearest in kin' as a name, cp. Wackernagel 2S p. 237 (top). the first member though looking like a loca- 7 ati in the sense of 'very' does not occur tive, probably represents an Ilr. stem nabha-; in the RV., but in the later Sarnhitas it is cp. RlCHTER, IF. 9, 209. The compounds the commonest of the prepositions com- fcT-sama-, an epithet of Indra, and ghase- pounded with adjectives. ajra- (VS.) are Bahuvrlhis. 8 'Very slightly mixed', Geldner, VS. 3, 3 A transition to this compound use appears 181. — a-tura- 'suffering' is obscure in origin. in mano jdvisfham (RV. VI. 9 5) 'very swift as thought'. i68 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar. sardha- (voc.) 'bold'; vi-mahT- 'very great', vi-sama- (VSO 'uneven', vi-sadrsa-

' dissimilar', vy-lni- 'variously tinted' (dawn) ; sdm-vasu- ,'d.welling together', sdm-priya- (VS.) 'mutually dear'.

b. 2. Ordinary Substantive as final mernber.

279. Determinatives with ordinary non-verbal substantives as their final member ' are not common in the earliest period of the language. In the first nirie books of the RV., except the frequent compounds in -pati- and -paint-, there are not many more than three dozen examples^; the tenth book has quite two dozen more, and the AV. seven dozen more. The first member is frequently a substantive also. Its relation to the final member seems to be hmited to the genitive sense in the Sarnhitas. This genitive sense appears when the final member is a word expressive of relationship, or -pati- 'husband' or 'lord'; e. g. raja-putrd- 'king's son', mrtyu- bdndhu- 'companion of death', vis-pdti- 'lord of the tribe'. It sometimes ex- presses the material, as dru-padd- 'post of wood', hiranya-rathd- 'car of gold' or 'car full of gold'. In deva-kilbisd- 'offence against the gods' we have an example of an objective genitive. There seems to be no instance in the RV. of a Proper Name appearing as the first member of a determinative in the genitive sensed except in indra-send- {'X.102^) 'Indra's missile'"*, which compound is itself perhaps a Proper Name 5. In camasadhvaryu- (AV.) 'the priest of the cups', the first member expresses quite a general genitive sense of relation = 'the priest who is concerned with the cups'. 280. As in determinatives with verbal noun as final member, the case- ending may appear in the first member. But it is less common here, and owing to the purely nominal character of the final member, is almost restricted to the genitive. The ending of this case is very common before -pati-

'lord' or 'husband' : amhas-as-pati- (VS.) 'lord of distress', N. of an intercalary month, gna-s-pdii-^ 'husband of a divine vioms.'a', Jd-s-pdti- 'lord of the family', bfh-as-pdti-^ and brdhman-as-pdH-'\ox& of devotion', tndnas-as-pdti- 'lord of mental power', vdn-as-pdti-^ 'lord of the wood', 'tree', vac-ds-pdti- 'lord of speech', vastos-pdti- 'lord of the dwelling', subh-ds-pdii- 'lord of splendour', sddas-as- pdti-"^ 'lord of the sacrificial seat'. According to the analogy of these com- pounds which end in -s-pati-, were also formed from a-stems rta-s-pati- (only voc.) 'lord of pious works' and rdtha-s-pdti- 'lord of the car'. The word ddm-pati- may stand for *ddm-s-pati-'^° 'lord of the house' (dam-, the gen. pi. of which, dam-Am, occurs).

1 Bahuvrihis with ordinary substantives from this word after the etymology had as final member were common from the been forgotten, as conversely the m. sapaina- beginning; hence combinations which appear 'rival' was formed from sa-fdtnT- 'co-wife'. as Bahuvrihis in the older period, are often 7 *bfh- here is synonymous with brahman-, only found later as Tatpurusas, the latter brahmanas-pdti- being a parallel and explana- being thus occasionally affected by the tory formation. On bfhas-pdti- and cognate formal peculiarities of Bahuvrihis. compounds see Otto Strauss, Brhaspati im 2 See Wackernagel z', p. 241 (97 note). Veda (Leipzig 1905), p. 14 — 17. 3 If this compound is a Proper Name, it is 8 van- 'wood' appears also in the pi. G. the only instance with the stem-form in the van-am, L. vdm-su. first member; but the genitive case-ending 9 It is unnecessary to assume the existence appears in the first member of a few deter- of a stem sad- to explain sddas-fdti- and

minative Proper Names; see below, 280 a. sdt-pati- since the stem sadas- occurs ; nor 4 'Indra's mi.ssile' (BR.), 'Indra's army' is radh- necessary to explain rddhas-pati- (Grassmann). (only voc.) as radhas- is frequent. 10 5 This is the opinion of Geldner, VS. PiscHEL, vs. 2, 93 ff., 307 ff., rejects any 2, 1, and ofDELBKUCK, Vergl. Syntax 3, p. 202. connexion between ddmpati- and dam- 'house'. 6 An anomalous f. gnas-fatni- was formed Cp. Wackernagel 2', p. 249 e, note. V. Compounds. Determinatives. 169

a. These compounds in -pdii- are treated by the Pada text in tliree different ways: I. gnaspati-, bfhaspati-, vdnasfati-, vispdti- (and vispdlm-) appear as simple words; 2. gnah- pdlnJ; jdh-pdti-, sdci-pdti-, j^ia-paie (voc), radhas-pate (voc), and those with a single accent (except vispdti-') as compounds separated by the Avagraha sign; 3, all other doubly accented compounds (e. g. brdhmanas-pdti-) as two separate words; even rdthas-pdtis is written rdthak \pdiih as if rdthah. were sing, i \ a nom. a. Otherwise the genitive ending appears only two or three times in the RV. in Proper Names: divo-dasa- 'Servant of heaven' (?), si'mah-sSpa-^ 'Dog's tail', and (with gen. pi.) ndra-sdmsa- (for *ndfam-sd>nsa-)^ 'Praise of men', an epithet of Agni. The VS. has also rayas-posa- 'increase of wealth* in rayas-posa-da- 'bestowing increase of wealth' and rayas-posa-vdni- 'procuring increase of wealth'. b. Other case-endings are very rare in such determinatives. The locative appears in svapne-dusvapnyd- (AV.) 'evil dreaming in sleep'"*; the instrumental in vacd-stena- 'thief by speech', 'one who makes mischief by '^is words'; the dative in dasyave-vrka- (voc.) 'Wolf to the Dasyu', N. of a man; and possibly ddsyave sdhah (i. 36'*) may be meant as a name with double accent. 281. In a few instances the first member is a substantive used appo- sitionally to express sex or composite nature: purusa-mrgd- (VS.) 'male antelope'; uluka-yatu- 'owl demon' (= demon in form of an owl), susuhika- yatu- 'owlet demon'; furusa-vyaghrd- 'man-tiger', a kind of demon, vrsd- kapi- 'man-ape'. 282. An adjective may appear as first member determining the sense of the following substantive. This type, which is called Karmadharaya by the Indian grammarians, is uncommon in the Samhitas. Among the oldest are candrd-mas-^ '(bright) moon'* 3.j\& pilrnd-mas-a- (TS. 111.4.4') 'full moon'.

Besides these occur eka-vird- 'unique hero', krsna-sakuni- (AV.) 'raven' 7, nava-jvard- 'new pain', maha-gramd- 'great host', maha-dhand- 'great booty', maha-vTrd- 'great hero'^ sapta-rsdyas 'the Seven Seers', N. of a group of ancient sages (beside the separate words saptd fsayah and fsayah sapid in Books i-ix), sapta-grdhrih (AV.) 'the seven vultures' 5. a. A variety of karmadharaya is that in which the first member expresses a part of the last: adhara-kanthd- {Y^.) 'lower part of the neck', ardha-devd-^"^ 'demi-god', ardha-masd- (AV. VS.) 'half-month', madhydm-dina- 'midday'; also with change of gender: agra-jihvd- (VS.) n. 'tip of the tongue {jihvA-y ; with the suffix -a: ardha-rc-d- (AV. VS.) 'hemistich', /zZrt'a/^w-a- 'forenoon'". 283. Prepositions frequently occur as first member, all except pra in their ordinary adverbial senses. Those which are thus used in the RV.

candrd- I See Wackernagel 2', p. 241 (97 a a, mean 'moon' as an abbreviation of note). mds: s This name occurs once with tmesis, 7 With change of meaning from 'black sunas cic chepam (v. 2'). bird'. 8 dative visva-devaya, 3 Cp. naram nd idnua- (l. 1 739 etc.) and In K. appears the idmso naram (vi, 242); see Wackernagel 2', the expression visve devtih having become a p. 248 d, note. Karmadharaya. vin. 918) 4 hrade-caksus 'mirrored in the lake' is 9 Translated by Whitney (AV. regarded by Geldner (VS. I, 173) as a Tat- as a Bahuvrlhi, 'seven-vultured'. purusa = 'eye in the lake'. For one or two 10 ardhd- 'half is here used in a figurative doubtful examples of locative pi. see Wacker- sense. II (AV. TS. VS.) and taia-mahd- nagel 21, p. 249 (bottom). pitd-mahd- 'grandfather' and prd-pitamaha- (VS. 5 That this is a very old combination is (AV.) grand- shown by the fact that mas- 'moon' occurs TS.) and p-a-iatdniaha- (AV'.) 'great notKarma- almost exclusively in compounds (surya-masa father' (only voc.) are probably but formed in imitation of maka- 3.T\d. piirnd-mds, SB.), only two or three times dharayas, of alone (though often in the sense of 'month'), mahd- which appeared to be a gradation Wackernagel 21, p. note. and is therefore obsolescent in the RV. mahani-; cp. 255. 6 In the later Samhitas candrd- comes to .

170 I. Allgemeines vai) Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

are dMi 'over', ni 'down', /arz 'around', prd 'forward' ', 'front part of ', 'extreme' (of high degree), 'great' (in names of relationship), /raV« 'against', w/ 'asunder' 5, sdm 'together' (also sa- in the same sense); and in the later Sarnhitas, anidr 'between', dj>a 'away', d 'at hand', t'td 'up', i/-pa 'beside', j'/pari 'above'. The following are examples in the alphabetical order of the prepositions: ddhi-pati(JiN VS.) 'over-lord', ddhi-patni- (AV.VS.) 'sovereign lady', ddhi-bhojana- 'additional

gift', adhi-rajd- 'supreme king'; antar-desd- (AV.) 'intermediate region', antah- patrd- {Kyi.') 'inner (= interior of the) vessel'; dpa-rupa- (AV.)t 'absence of form', 'deformity'; a-pati- (VS. MS. i. 2?) 'the lord here'.; *ut-surya-

'sunrise' in otsurydm (AV.) 'till sunrise' {a-utsurydm); upa-pati- (VS.) 'paramour'

(lit. 'sub-husband'); upari-sayand- (AV.) 'elevated couch'; ni-dhdna- (AV.) 'conclusion', ni-paksati- (VS.) 'second rib', ni-padd- 'low ground', ny-dhna-^ (AV.) 'close of day'; pdri-pati- 'lord (of all) around', pari-vatsard- 'full year'; pra- gathd- (VS.) 'fore-song', a kind of stanza, pra-dis- 'region' and (AV.) 'inter- mediate quarter', pra-dhdna- 'prize of battle', pradhvand- ('forward course', ddhvan-) 'bed of a river', prartha- (AV.) 'preparation', 'implement'; prd-pada-^

'tip of the foot', prd-iiga- 'forepart of the shafts (of a chariot)' 7; prd-napat- 'great-grandson', pra-tatamaha- (AV.) and prd-pitamaha- (VS. TS.) 'great- grandfather'; pra-div- (AV.) 'third (or fifth) heaven', prd-patha- 'distant path', prd-maganda- 'arch-usurer', prd-vira- 'great hero', prayus- (MS. i. S^) 'long life' (ayus); prati-jand- (AV.) 'adversary', prati-divan- 'adversary at play'; vi-dis- (VS.) 'intermediate region', vi-madhya- 'middle', vi-manyu- 'longing'*, vi-vac- 'opposing shout', 'contest', vy-odana- (RV^) 'different food' 9; sa-pdtm- 'co-wife', sam-gramd- (AV.) 'assembly', 'encounter', sam-amkd- 'battle-array' '°, sam-bdndhu- 'akin', sam-vatsard-'^^ 'full year'. 284. Other indeclinables sometimes occur as first member, but very rarely in the RV. They include a few adverbs and the particles a(«)-, dus-, SU-, kim-, ku-: pasca-dosd- (VS.) 'late evening', puro-agni- (VS.) 'fire in front'; a-mitra- 'enemy', d-hotr- (AV.) 'incompetent Hotr'; duc-chuna- 'calamity''^; su-brahmana- (AV.) 'good Brahman', su-bhesaja- (AV. TS.) 'good remedy', su-vasand-^^ 'fair garment'; kim-purusd- (VS.) a kind of mythical being, ku- iara- (RV.), a kind of reed.

4. Bahuvrihi Compounds.

285. The term Bahuvrihi, employed by the Indian grammarians to designate this type, is perhaps the most convenient name for these secon-

dary adjective compounds, as it represents their general character both in form and meaning. For the final member is practically always a sub- stantive, and the relation of the first member to the last is mostly attributive

I Without perceptibly changing the meaning 6 Once prd-pad- in AV. of the final member. 7 Probably for fra-yuga-. ^ This and the following meanings do not 8 From manyu- 'zeal'. occur in the combination ai pra with verbs. 9 This is Sayana's explanation [vividhe 3 Expressing separation, extension, deri- 'nne) of the word in viii. 52^. vation. 10 From dmka- 'front'. + In apa-kama- 'aversion' the final member 11 sdm in this compound expresses com- is a verbal noun. There seem to be no cer- pleteness. tain instances of this kind of compound with 12 Cp. sundni 'with success'. On the Sandhi apt: cp. Wackernagel 2', p. 259 p, note. see p. 31, note 4. 5 In ny-arthd- 'destruction' the second 13 Though vasana- has a concrete sense member is a verbal noun. On the relation here, the compound may have arisen when of ny-hrbuda- (AV. VS.) and ny-arbudi- (AV.) the word had a verbal meaning. to arbuda- and arbudi-, see WACKERNAGEL 2', p. 260 (top). V. Compounds. Bahuvrihis. 171

(Karmadharaya), less commonly dependent (Tatpurusa), and very rarely

coordinative (Dvandva). The best name otherwise is 'possessive'', as this is their meaning in the vast majority of instances. In a few examples, how- ever, the more general sense of 'connected with' (which may usually be ex- pressed more specifically) is required to explain the relation between the _

substantive and the Bahuvrlhi which agrees with it; thus dha-prstha- 'borne on horse-back', devd-psaras- 'affording enjoyment for the gods', parjdnya-retas- 'sprung from the seed of Parjanya', visvd-krsti- 'dwelling with all peoples', vihd-nara-" 'belonging to or existing among all men', vird-pastya- 'belonging to the abode of a hero', satd-sarada- 'lasting a hundred autumns', sura-v'ira- (AV.) 'characterized by heroic men' = 'making men heroic' (amulet). 285. Attributive Bahuvrihis. — The commonest form of Bahuvrlhi is that in which an attributive noun is the first member. It is most fre- quently an adjective, as ugrd-bahu- 'powerful-armed', urvy-Uii-^ 'giving wide

s.\6! "*. , jTvd-putra- 'having living sons', sukrd-varna- 'bright-coloured' The first member is also often a past passive participle in -ta or -na, the action expressed by which is usually performed by the person denoted by the sub-

stantive with which the Bahuvrlhi agrees; e. g. prdyata-daksina- 'he by whom

the sacrificial fee has been presented', ratd-havis- 'who offers an oblation' 5. The action is, however, not infrequently supposed to be performed by others, always in the case of hata- 'slain'; e. g. hatd-vrsn-i- 'whose hus- band has been slain', hatd-matr- 'whose mother has been slain'. Both senses appear in ratd-havya- 'he by whom' and 'to whom offerings have been made'. An outside agent is sometimes expressed by an additional member at the beginning of the compound, as jivd-pxta-sarga- 'whose streams have been drunk by the living'^. A present participle occasionally occurs as first member; e. g. a-ydd-vasu- (AV.) and sam-ydd-vasu- (AV.) 'to whom wealth comes', bkrSjad-rsti- 'having glittering spears', rusad-vatsa- 'having a shining calf, sucdd-ratha- 'having a brilliant car'?; also a perfect-participle in dadrs-

and-pavi- 'whose felly is visible', yuyujand-sapti- 'whose steeds are yoked'. a. The first member is further often a substantive used predicatively; e. g. dha-pania- 'horse-winged' = 'whose wings are horses' (car); indra-satru- jWhose foe is Indra'j tad-id-artha-^ 'having just that as an aim', dronahava- jwhose pail (ahavd-') is a trough', sisnd-deva- 'whose god is a phallus', siirodaka- (AV.) 'whose water is spirit' {sura-). The final member is here sometimes a comparative or superlative (including pdra-) used substan- tively: avaras-pard-9 (VS.) 'in which the lower is higher' = 'topsy-turvy' '°, dsthi-bhuyams- (AV.) 'having bone as its chief part' = 'chiefly bone', indra- iyestha- 'having Indra as chief, 'of whom Indra is chief, yamd-srestha- (AV.) 'of whom Yama is best', soma-srestha- (AV.) 'of which Soma is best'.

1 For other names see Wackernagel 21, 6 Cp. Whitney 1299 a. p. 273 (107 a, note). 7 Cp. Whitney 1299 b. 2 For several other examples formed with 8 Here a pronoun appears instead of a vihd- see Whitney 1294 b. substantive in the first member. 3 Cp. p. 145, note 3. 9 Here the first member retains the -s of 4 Cp. Whitney 1298. the nom. surviving from the use of the two 5 The sense is thus identical with verbal words in syntactical juxtaposition; the first determinatives or verbally governing com- member also is used substantively in this pounds such as vajam-bhara- and bhardd- compound. vaja- 'bearing booty'. In vili-hotra- 'having 1° On eka-para- (said of dice) see now an invitation sacrifice' = 'inviting to sacri- LuDERS, Das Wiirfelspiel im alten Indien fice', a stem in -A' is used almost like a (Abh. d. K. Ges. der Wiss. zu Gottingen past participle in -ta; cp. vTia-havya- as a 9, 2) p. 64. name. 172 I. Allgemeines und Speache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

A comparison is sometimes implied between the first substantive and the second: varsdj'ya (AY.) 'whose rain is like butter', vrksd-kesa- 'tree-haired' = 'whose trees are like hair' = 'wooded' (mountain). The first member further sometimes expresses the material of which the second consists; e. g. rajatd-nabhi- (VS.) 'whose naval is (made of) silver'; hiranya-nemi- 'whose fellies are (made of) gold'; or something closely connected with and characteristic of it, as niyiid-ratha- 'whose car is (drawn by) a team'. 287. Dependent Bahuvrihis. — The first member is dependent on the last in the sense of a case-relation, the case-ending being sometimes retained.

a. It has often a genitive sense ', as pdti-kama- (AV.) 'having desire for a husband'; with genitive ending, rayds-kama- 'having a desire of wealth'. Here the first member often implies a comparison (when it never has the case- ending) : agni-tejas- (AV.) 'having the brightness of fire', 'fire-bright', fksa-grTva- (AV.) 'having the neck of a bear' (demons), gS-vafus- 'having the form of a cow', jnati-mukha- (AV.) 'having the face of (= like) relatives', mdno-javas- 'having the swiftness of thought' = 'swift as thought', mayiira-roman- 'having the plumes of peacocks' (Indra's steeds).

b. In a few instances it has the sense of, and then always the ending of, the instrumental: d-giraukas- 'not to be kept at rest {okas-) by a song (gird)', krdtva-inagha- 'constituting a reward (gained) by intelhgence', bhasd- ketu- 'recognisable by light' ^." c. The locative sense is more frequent, being often accompanied by the case-ending: asdnn-isu- 'having arrows in his mouth', divi-yoni- 'having origin in heaven'; also several formed with dure- 'in the distance', as dure- anta- 'ending in the distance', duri-gavyuti- (AV.) 'whose sphere is far away' 3. There are further examples in which the last member has the locative sense when it is a part of the body and what is expressed by the first member appears in or on it: asru-mukht- (AV.) 'having tears on her face', 'tear-faced', kildlodhn-i- (AV.) 'having sweet drink in her udder', ghrtd-prstha- 'butter-backed', pdtra-hasta- (AV.) 'having a hand in which is a vessel', mani- grtvd- 'having pearls on the neck', mddhii-jihva- 'having a tongue on which is honey', vdjra-bahu- 'having an arm on which is a bolt'. 288. Coordinate Bahuvrihis. — No example is found in the RV. and hardly any in the other Sarnhitas of the first and last members of Bahuvrihis being coordinated in sense. The VS. has stSma-prstha- 'containing Stomas and Prsthas'; also dhar-divd- (xxxvm. 12) 'daily', which is a kind ofDvandva Bahuvrihi, being formed from the adverb dhar-divi 'day by day'. The form somendrd- 'belonging to Soma and Indra', occurs only in B. passages of later Sainhitas (TS. MS. K.). 289. Indeclinables as first member. — In a number of Bahuvrihis the first member is not a noun, but an indeclinable word, either a preposition or an adverb. a. Prepositions are common as first member of Bahuvrihis, expressing the local position of the final member in relation to the substantive with which the Bahuvrihi agrees. Some sixteen prepositions are thus used, the most frequent being vi which occurs as often in the RV. as all the rest put together. They are dti 'beyond', ddhi 'on', antdr 'within', dpa 'away', abhi

^ An accusative in sense and form appears not a Bahuvrihi with apas- 'work'; cp. 278 a in tvdm-kama- 'having a desire for thee'. and 91 B. 2 The compound vidmanapas- 'working 3 On a few doubtful instances of such with skill' \vidmdna) is probably a determi- locative compounds see Wackernagel 2', native formed with the adj. apds- 'working', p. 278 (bottom). V. Compounds. Bahuvrihis. 173

'around' and ^'toward', dva 'down', 'away', s 'near', ud 'upward', tipa 'near', m 'down', nis 'away', pari 'around', prd 'in front', 'very', prdti 'against', vi 'apart', sdm 'together'. Of these upa is used thus in the RV. only, while antdr, dva, ni appear in the later Samhitas only. The following are examples of compounds thus formed in the alphabetical order of the prepositions: dty-urmi- 'overflowing', dti-cchandas- (VS.) 'having redundant metres' (verse); ddhi-nirnij- 'having a garment on', ddhy-aJzsa- 'having an eye on', 'overseer'; antar-davd- (AV.) 'having fire within'; dpodaka- 'waterless', apa-rtu- (AV.) 'un- seasonable'; abhl-vira- and abhi-satvan- 'having heroes around', abhi-rupa- (AV.) 'beautiful', abhi-send- 'directing arrows'; ava-kesd- (AV.) 'having hair hanging down', dva-toka- (AV. VS.) 'miscarrying'; d-deva- 'having the gods near', 'devoted to the gods', A-manas- (AV.TS.) 'kindly disposed'; ut-saktha- (VS.) 'having the thighs raised', ud-ojas- 'highly powerful'; upa-manyii- 'having zeal at hand', 'zealous', tips-vasu- 'bringing riches near'; ni-manyu- (AV.) 'whose anger has subsided', ni-vaksas- (TS. v. 6. 23') 'having a sunken breast', ni-kuld- (VS.) 'going down hill', ni-kilbisd- 'deliverance from sin' ('that in which sin has subsided'); nlr-jarayu- (AV.) 'having cast its skin', nir-mdya- 'powerless', nir-hasta- (AV.) 'handless' ; /flrz-wara- (TS.v.6.21') 'having death around' = 'round whom people have died', pari-manyii- 'very angry'; pra-srngd- (VS. TS.) 'having prominent horns', prd-tvaksas- 'very energetic'; prd-manas- (AV.) 'very thoughtful'; prdti-rupa- 'having a corresponding form', 'like', prati- vartmdn- (AV.) 'having an opposite course', prdti-vesa- 'neighbour' ('living i'/ opposite'); ^ 'apart' : vi-karnd- (AV.) 'having ears far apart', vi-sakha- (AV.) 'branched', vy-amsa- 'having the shoulders apart', 'broad-shouldered'; = 'extensive': vi-manas- 'wide-minded', 'sagacious', vi-hayas- 'of extensive power'; = 'divided': vy-adhvd- (AV.) 'having a divided course' = 'being midway between zenith and earth'; = 'various': vy-ailaba- (AV.) 'making all kinds of noises'; = 'divergent': vi-pathi- 'following wrong paths', vi- vrata- 'refractory'; = 'distorted': vi-griva- 'having a twisted neck', vy-aAga- (AV.) 'having distorted limbs'; = 'different': vi-rupa- 'having a different form', vi-vacas- (AV.) 'speaking differently'; = 'devoid of, 'less': vi-mdya- 'devoid of magic', vy-enas- 'guiltless'; sdtn-hanu- (AV.) 'striking the jaws together'. b. Adverbs with a local meaning, which are akin to prepositions, also frequently appear as first member of Bahuvrihis, being generally speaking equivalent in sense to predicative adjectives. Examples of such Bahuvrihis in the alphabetical order of the adverbs are the following: adhds 'helow' : adkd- varcas- (AV.) 'powerful below'; dnti 'near' : dnti-mitra- (VS.) 'having friends at hand', dnti-sumna- (AV.) 'having benevolence at hand', dnty-uti- 'having aid at hand'; avds 'down' : avo-deva- 'attracting the gods down'; are 'afar' : are-agha- 'having evil far-removed', ari-satru- (AV.) 'whose foes are far away'; itds 'hence' : itd-uti- 'helping from hence'; ihd 'here' : iheha-matr- 'whose mothers are, the one here, the other there'; ihd-- (AV.) 'whose will is hitherward', ihd-citta- (AV.) 'whose thought is hitherward'; fdhak 'apart' : fdhan-mantra- (AV.) 'having a special sacred text' '; kuhaya 'where?' : kuhaya- krti- (only voc.) 'where active?'; dakdna-tds 'on the right' : daksinatds-kaparda-

'having a coil of hair on the right'; nua 'downward' : rucA-vayas- 'whose strength is low'; purds 'in front' : puro-rathd- 'whose car is in front', puro- vasu- (TS. III. 2. 5') 'preceded by wealth' (only voc); pracA 'forward' : pracA- iihva- 'moving the tongue forward', praca-manyu- (only voc.) 'striving forward'.

I According to Whitney on AV. v. i^; BR., pw. 'lacking speecli'; Ludwig 'of distinguished meditations'. :

174 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

a, Bahuvrihis are also formed with a few adverbs of another kind as first member ittha-dhJ- 'having such thought', 'devout', nana-sirya- 'illuminated by various suns', punar- magha- (AV. TS.) 'repeatedly offering oblations', /»r«(2'/ia-/?-fl^7^a:- 'having various aspects', sadyd-iii- 'helping at once''. There are also several formed with sa/td-, sunidd-, smdd-^ 'together with', as sahd-gopa- 'having the cowherds with them', sahd-furusa- (AV.) 'accom- panied by the men', sumdj-jani- 'accompanied by his wife', smndd-gti- (AV.) 'accompanied by the cows', smid-ablilsu- 'provided with reins', smad-ista- 'having an errand', snidd- iidhan- 'provided with an udder'.

c. Certain particles frequently appear as the first member of Bahu- vrihis. These are the privative a- or an-, ku-^ expressing depreciation, dus-

'iir, su- 'well'; e. g. a-pdd- 'footless', a-sapatnd- 'having no rivals', an-udakd- 'having no water', 'waterless'; ku-yava- 'causing a bad harvest', dus-pdd- 'ill-footed'; su-parnd- 'having beautiful wings'. 290. Bahuvrihis are very frequently used as m. (sometimes f.) sub- stantives in the sense of Proper Names, in many instances without the adjectival sense occurring at all; thus brhdd-uktha- m., as the N. of a seer and adj. 'having great praise'; brhdd-diva- m., N. of a seer {brhad-diva- f., N. of a goddess) and adj. 'dwelling in high heaven'; but priyd-medha- m. ('to whom sacrifice is dear') and vamd-deva- m. ('to whom the gods are dear') only as the names of seers. a. Bahuvrihis are further not infrequently used as neuter substantives with an abstract and a collective sense, especially when the first member is the privative particle a- or an- and sdrva- 'all'; e. g. a-satri'i- 'free from foes', n. (AV.) 'freedom from foes', a-sapatnd- 'having no rivals', n. (AV.) 'peace', a-sambadhd- (AV.) n. 'non-confinement', a-skambhand- (AV.) n. 'lack of support', an-apatyd- 'childless' (AV.), n. 'childlessness', an-amitrd- (AV.) 'foeless', n. (AV. VS.) 'freedom from foes'; sarva-rathd- 'the whole line of chariots', sarva-vedasd- (AV. TS.) 'whole property'; ni-kilbisd- n. 'deliverance from sin', pitr-bandhu- (AV.) 'paternal kinship', matr-bandhu- (AV.) 'maternal kinship', rikta-kumbhd-'> (AV^) 'empty-handedness', su-mrgd- (AV.) 'good hunting' 5. b. A special category of Bahuvrihis used as substantives are those in which the first member is a numeral from dvi- 'two' upwards^. They ex-

press a collection or aggregate and are singular neuter ? except those formed with -ahd- 'day', which are singular masc; e. g. tri-yugd- n. 'period of three lives', iri-yojand- (AV.) n. 'distance of three Yojanas', try-udayd- n. 'threefold approach to the altar', dasanguld- n. 'length of ten fingers', dasantarusyd- n. 'distance of ten stations', dvi-rajd- (AV.) n. 'battle of two kings', panca- yojand- (AY.) n. 'distance of five Yojanas', sad-aAd-{AY. TS.) m. 'series of six days'. These numeral collectives always end in accented -d^. 291. Origin of Bahuvrihis. — Considering that Bahuvrihis, which are adjectives, are far commoner than the corresponding determinatives, which

are substantives, it cannot be assumed that the former always passed through

1 The Bahuvrihi compound avir-rj'ika- is n. 'safety' (adj. 'free from danger'), and vi- of uncertain meaning; see Wackernagel hrdaya- (.A.V.) 'lack of courage'. 21, p. 287 (middle). 6 These are called Dvigu by the Hindu 2 Compounds formed with these three grammarians, and are classed by them as a words might also be explained as belonging subdivision of Tatpurusas. to the 'governing' class. 7 A few numeral collectives are determi- 3 Also the cognate kirn- in kim-sild- (VS. natives used in the pi. and the original TS.) (land) 'having small stones'. gender: sapiarsdyas 'the seven seers', sapia- 4 See WmxNEY's note on AV. XIX. %''. grdhrds 'seven vultures' (AV.); iri-kadric-ka-

5 Accentuation of the final syllable (as in pl. 'three soma-vessels' (from kadru- f.). " the cognate singular Dvandvas) prevails in 8 With the suffix -j/a is formed sahasrdhn-ya- these n. Bahuvrihis; exceptions are d-bhaya-. n, (AV.) 'a thousand days' journey'. :

v. Compounds. Governing Compounds. 175 the process of transmutation from the latter. They must in the vast majority of instances have been formed directly and independently in conformity with the type of these secondary adjectives which had come down from the Ilr. periods Wackernagel (2', 112) adopts the view that the origin of Bahu- vrihis is not to be explained by transmutation from determinatives, but from the predicative or appositional use of groups of words characterizing a sub- stantive ^. This use he exempH&es by the following quotations from the E.V. uruh kdkso nd gangydh iyi. 45^') 'like the broad shoulder dwelling on the

Ganges', that is, for *uru-kaksah 'Broad-shoulder' as a Proper Name; sd iayase sdho mahdt (v. 11*) 'thou art born a great power' (^ *»2a,^5-i'(3:,^a^ 'one having great power'); ivdcam krsnSm arandhayat (i. 130^) 'he delivered over the black skin' (that is, 'those having a black skin', 'the black-skins') ; droghaya cid vdcasa anavaya (vi. 6 2 9) 'to Anava, deceitful speech', that is, 'who utters deceitful speech' 3; and narim . . sdmsa/i (11.34^) 'praise of men' as repre- senting an earlier stage than ndra-sdmsa- 'receiving the praises of men' as a Bahuvrlhi. Appositional Bahuvrihis, he thinks, similarly arose from explanatory clauses, as indra-jyestJia devah 'the gods having Indra as their mightiest' from devah indro jyisihah 'the gods — Indra their mightiest'. The first step here would have been assimilation in case and number to the main substantive, involving change to a compound (with stem-form and single accent), followed by assimilation in gender. The change to the Bahuvrihi had already become the rule in the pre-Vedic period.

5. Governing Compounds.

292. In a considerable number of compounds the first member governs the last in sense, being either a preposition (prepositional adverb) or a verbal noun. These compounds being adjectives are allied to Bahuvrihis. I. In the prepositional group the first member is a preposition or adverb capable of governing a case. There are about twenty examples in the RV. In some instances they seem to have arisen from the corresponding syntactical combination, as ddhi-ratha- n. 'wagon-load' from ddhi rathe (x. 64") 'on the wagon'. In other instances they seem to have originated from the corresponding adverb; thus the adjective va. pra-div-a ketuna (v.eo^) 'with long-existing light' has been changed from the adverb pra-divas 'from of old' to agree with a substantive in the instrumental. The ending of the second member has been preserved for the most part only when it was -a; otherwise the suffix -a or this -ya is generally added. Like Bahuvrihis, compounds of type may become neuter substantives; thus upanas-d- 'being on the wagon', n. (AV.) 'space in a wagon'. a. All prepositions which govern cases (except dva) as well as prd capable of being (though it never governs a case), besides several adverbs used with a case, are employed as first member in these compounds*. The following are examples of prepositional governing compounds: ati-matrd- (AV.) 'beyond measure', ati-ratrd- 'lasting overnight', dty-ainhas- (VS.) 'beyond 'being the reach of distress', dty-avi- 'running over the wool'; ddhi-gart-ya- adhas-pad-d- 'being on the car-seat', adhi-gav-d- (AV.) 'derived from cows';

in form to the prepositional Bahu- 1 Cp. Brugmann, Grundriss 2, p. 88; IF. similar vrihis; the meaning, however, is quite 18, 63 ff. the preposition 2 On substantives used instead of adjec- different, as in the latter govern the following member, but tives cp. Brugmann, Grundriss 2, p. 89. does not refers adverbially to the substantive with 3 Cp. drogha-vdc- 'uttering deceitful speech'. Bahuvrlhi agrees. 4 Tiiis type of governing compound is which the ^

Vedic Grammar. 176 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4.

dnu- under the feet', adho-aksd- 'remaining below the axle'; dnu-path-a- and variman- (AV. VS.) 'along the road', anu-kamd- 'according to wish', dnu- vrata- 'obedient'; dntas-path-a- 'being within the path'; api-prSita- 'being on (= accompanying) the breath', api-sarvard- 'bordering on night' (JdrvarT-); abhi-dvu- 'directed to heaven', abhi-rastra- 'overcoming dominion'; a-Jaras-d-"-

'occurring every month'; updri-duMna- 'la.issda.bove the gionnd', updri-martya- 'being above men'; urdhvd-nabhas- (VS.) 'being above the clouds', urdhvd-barhis- (VS.) 'being above the litter'; tiro-ahn-ya- ('being beyond a day' =) 'belonging to the day before yesterday'; pari-panth-in-'^ ('lying around the path') 'adver- sary', pari-hastd- (AV.) ('put round the hand') 'hand-amulet'; paro-matra- ('being beyond measure') 'excessive', parS-ks-a- (AV.) ('lying beyond the eye') 'invisible'; puro-gav-d- ('going before the cows') 'leader'; prati-kamya- (AV.) 'being in accordance with desire'; sam-gayd- 'blessing the household'. 2. In verbal governing compounds the first member is either an agent noun or an action noun governing the last member as an object. The abnormal position of the verbal form before the object in this class is probably to be explained by the first member having originally been an imperative, which usually has this position. These compounds are an old formation, two types going back to the Indo-European period, and one to the Indo-Iranian. They are adjectives, but the final member never adds a compositional suffix except in siksa-nar-d- 'helping men'. Three types are to be distinguished. a. The first member consists of a present stem or the root, which probably represents an imperative^; of this type there are few examples: trasd-dasyu- m., N. of a man ('terrify the foe'), rada-vasu-'' (only voc.) 'dispensing wealth', siksa-nard-'' 'helping men', sthi-rasman-^ 'loosening bridles' b. Examples of the second type are more numerous. Here the first member ends in -at, but the participle, being formed from present stems in -a, -d or -aya, which appears in these compounds, in a few instances does not occur in independent use. This type, which is almost entirely restricted to the RV., is also Iranian. It seems to have taken the place of the older one (a), which owing to its form was apt to be confused with Bahuvrihis though differing from them in meaning. The form which they assumed was probably aided by the analogy of Bahuvrihis with a present participle as their first member, like sucdd-ratha- 'having a brilliant car', which are formed from intransitive verbs, while those in the governing com- pounds are of course transitive. Examples of this type are the following: rdhdd-ray-^ ('increasing wealth') m., N. of a man, and rdkdd-vara-'' 'increasing goods', ksaydd-vira^ 'ruling men', codaydn-mati-^ 'stimulating devotion', /(ZwaV-'"

1 Occurs only in the dative as an advevb is doubtful; it may be a simple Bahuvrihi; meaning 'up to old age'. 'having firm bridles' (Grassmann). 2 Formed with the suffix -in which is not 6 krpa-nlda- would be another example if properly attached to compounds; cp.WACKER- it means 'arranging his abode', but the NAGEL 21, 53 (p. 121 bottom). meaning of the first member is doubtful. 3 See Brugmann, IF. 18, 76; Delbruck, 7 fdhdt- is an aorist participle of rdh- Vergleichende Syntax 3, 174; Jacobi, Com- 'increase'. positum und Nebensatz (1897), 46—82; 8 From ksdyati 'rules'. Wackernagel 21, p. 315. 9 From codayati 'urges'. 4 Rhythmically lengthened for ;-arfa-,«te-. 1° Jamdi- a palatalized form from gavi- 5 The Bada has sthdh-raiman-. The meaning 'go'. .

V. Compounds. Syntactical Compounds. 177 agni- ('going to Agni'), N. of man, tardd-dvesas-'' ''OYtrcoxam.giots', dravaydt- sakha-^ 'speeding the comrade', dharaydt-kavi- 'supporting the wise' and dharaydt-ksiti-i 'supporting men', bhardd-vaja- ('carrying off the prize') m., N. of a man, and a-bhardd-vasu-'' 'bringing wealth', mamhayid-rayi-^ 'lavishing wealth', manddd-vira-^ 'gladdening men', *viddd-asva-^ 'possessing steeds', viddd-vasu-'^ 'winning wealth', iravaydt-pati- 'making his lord famous', and sravaydt-sakki-9 'making his friend famous', sandd-rayi- 'bestowing possessions' and sandd-vaja-^° 'bestowing booty', saddd-yoni-^'^ 'sitting in one's place', sprhaydd- varna-^'^ 'striving after lustre'. Two such governing compounds are once com- bined in such a way that the final member common to both is dropped in the first: pataydn mandaydt-sakham (i. 4^) 'causing his friend to fly {patdya-) and to be glad' {manddya-)^^. c. In the third type, which goes back to the Indo-European period '*, the first member is a noun of action variously accented. There are some half-dozen

examples in the RV. : dati-vara- 'giving treasures', pusti-gu- ('rearing kine') m., N. of a man, rity-ap- 'S 'causing waters to flow', viti-rddhas- 'enjoying the oblation', vitl-hotra- 'enjoying the sacrifice', vrsti-dyiv- 'causing the sky to rain' '*.

6. Syntactical Compounds. 293. There are some irregular formations in which words not in coordi- nate, attributive, dependent or governing relation are compounded owing to constant juxtaposition in the sentence. 1. The relative word yat (abl.) 'in so far as' is compounded with a

superlative in RV. m. 53": utibhih ... yac-chresthabhih'-^ 'with the best possible

aids', lit. 'with aids in so far as (they are) the best'. The adverb yad-radkyam

(11. 38^) 'as quickly as possible', lit. 'in so far as possible', is analogous. 2. The initial words of a text begin to be compounded in the later Samhitas as a designation of that text; thus ye-yajamahd- (VS.) in the nom. pi. m. means the text beginning with the vioxd% ye ydjamahe^^. 3. Phrases, almost always consisting of two words, used in connexion with certain actions are compounded; thus aham-uttard-^^ (AV.) 'dispute for precedence', from the phrase used by each disputant ahdm t'lttarah 'I (am) higher' ; mama-satyesu 'in disputes as to ownership', in which every one says

mama satydm '(it is) certainly mine'; mam-pasyd- (AV.) as the name of a plant used by a woman to secure the love of a man with the words m&yn pasya 'look at me'^^"- Similarly in connexion with persons, as kuvt-sa- 'some

1 From tdra-ti 'overcomes'. 14 See Wackernagel 21, p. 320 (bottom). 2 From dravdya- causative of dru- 'run'. 15 This is the only example recognized 3 From dharaya- causative of dkr- 'sup- by BR. as belonging to this type; Grass- port'. MANN explains them all as Bahuvrihis. 16 + From bhara-ti 'bears'. Brugmann, if. 18, 70 f., explains these 5 From mamhaya- causative of mamh- 'be compounds as having originated in impera- great'. tives, while Jacobi, Compositum und Neben- 6 From vidnda-ti 'gladdens'. The SV. has salz p. 64 f., thinks the first member re- the wrong variant vandad-vlra-. presents an original 3. pers. sing. 17 7 To be inferred from the patronymic In AV. VII. 311 yavac-chresthabhis is a vdidadasvi-. corrupt variant. Compounds formed with 8 From vidd-ti 'finds'. yavai- do not otherwise occur till the Sutras. 18 9 From iravdya- causative of sru- 'hear'. In the TS. also occurs iddm-madhu- m. JO From sdna-ti or sand-ti 'wins'. as a designation of the text iddm evd 11 Lengthened for sadad- from sdda-ti's\\.%' saraghdm. tnddhu. This kind of compound 12 From j^^/^aya-tf .'desires'. becomes common in the ancillary literature 13 On the doubtful examples arcdd-dhiima-, when particular hymns are referred to, kridd-vasu, fraidd-vasu, bhuvad vdsuk (VUI. 19 Used in the locative only. 2° 1937), vrsad-anji- (voc.) see Wackernagel One or two doubtful examples are dis- 21, p. 319 note. cussed by Wackernagel 2', p. 327 (top). Indo-arische Philologie. I, 4. 12 178 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar. one' from the phrase kuvit sd 'is it he?'- This type is more commonly based on phrases used by people about themselves; thus dham-sana'^ (voc.) 'rapa- cious', that is, one who says ahdm saneyam {dhdnani) 'may I obtain (wealth)'; akam-purvd- 'eager to be first', that is, one who says aMm parvah (syam)

'I (should be) first'; kim-tvd- (VS.) 'asking garrulously' that is, one who con- tinually says 'what (are) you (doing)?'.

VI. DECLENSION.

Benfey, VoUstandige Grammatik 707 — 780. — Whitney, Grammar 261 — 526. 294. General character. — Declension means the inflexion of nominal stems by means of endings which express the various relations represented by what are called cases. The stems belonging to the sphere of declension are most conveniently divided, owing to difference of meaning, form, and use, into nouns, pronouns, and numerals. Pronouns have to be treated separately because they have certain peculiarities of inflexion, besides to some extent lacking the distinction of gender. Numerals again show other pecu- liarities of form as well as partial lack of gender. Nouns are divided into substantives as names of things and adjectives as names of attributes. But as no definite line of demarcation can be drawn between substantive and adjective in any of the classes of declension in the Vedic language, these two categories are nowhere treated separately in the present work.

I. Nouns.

Lanman, Noun-inflection in the Veda, JAOS. vol. x (1880), p. 325—600.

295. Owing to considerable divergencies of inflexion, nominal stems are best grouped in the two main divisions of consonant and vowel de- clension. Stems ending, in semivowels form a transition fi'om the former to the latter. The stems contained in the two main classes have further to be sub-divided, owing to difference of derivation and, in part, consequent variety of inflexion, into radical and derivative stems. a. Like other Aryan tongues, the Vedic language distinguishes in declen- sion the three genders, masculine, feminine, and neuter. It also distinguishes three numbers, the singular, dual, and plural, the dual being in full and regular use^- b. There are eight cases: nominative, vocative, accusative, instrumental, dative, ablative, genitive, locative, all in regular and unrestricted use. The same ending, however, is to a limited extent employed to express the sense oftwo and sometimes of three cases. Thus the! eight cases of the dual have among them only three endings; in the plural the single ending -bhyas does duty for both dative and ablative; while in the singular the same ending -as appears for both ablative and genitive in all but the a-declension. c. The normal endings of cases are the following:

Singular: nom. m. f -.r, n. none; voc. of all genders, none; ace. m. f.

•am, n. none; inst. -a, dat. -e, abl. gen. -as, loc. -i.

Dual: nom. voc. ace. m. f -a, -au, n. -T, inst. dat. abl. -bhyam, gen. loc. -os.

Plural: nom. voc. ace. m. f. -as, neut. -z; inst. -bhis, dat. abl. -bhyas, gen. -am, loc. -su.

RV. vm. 6l9; cp. ahdm sand v. 752. the 'hieratic' parts of the RV. ; see Bloom- a But while the employment of the dual FIELD, Johns Hopkins University Circular for is generally strict, the plural is often used 1905, p. 18 f., Oliphant, ibid. p. 22— 31. instead of the dual of natural pairs in VI. Declension. Nouns. Consonant Stems. 179

d. A distinction is often made in the stem between strong (or full) and weak (or_ reduced) case-forms. It appears in its full development only in derivative consonant stems, affecting the suffixes -am'; -an, -man, -van; -ant, -mant, -vani; -tar; -yams; -varns. The strong form of the stem appears in the masculine nom. voc.^ ace. singular and dual, and in the nom. voc. plural; and in the neuter nom. voc. ace. plural only. The weak form of the stem appears in the remaining ' cases. But in the first four and in the last of the above suffixes the weak stem which appears before endings with initial consonant is further weakened before endings with initial vowel. e. The way in which the normal endings are attached to the strong and the weak stem with accompanying shift of accent, may be illustrated by the inflexion of the stem ad-ant- 'eating' in the masc: Singular: N. ad-dn. V. dd-an. A. ad-dntam. I. ad-at-a. D. ad-at-l Ah. G. ad-at-ds. L. ad-at-L

Dual: N. A. ad-dnt-a, -au. V. dd-ant-a, -au. I. D. Ab. ad-dd-bkyam. G. L. ad-at-ds.

Plural: N. ad-dnt-as. V. dd-ant-as. A. ad-at-ds. I. ad-dd-bhis. D. Ab. ad- dd-bhyas. G. ad-at-S.ni. L. ad-dt-su. The neuter differs only in the N. A. V. of all numbers : Sing. : N. A. ad-dt; V. dd-at. Du.: N. A. ad-at-i. PL: N. A. ad-dnt-i.

A. Consonant Stems.

296. Among these stems there are none ending in gutturals 3 and only two ending in the cerebral d. Those which end in the labials /, bh, m are fairly numerous. The majority end in dentals, the only class of consonants

in which every sound contained in the group {t, th, d, dh, n) is represented. Of the semivowels, y is represented by one stem, v by three stems, and r by a large number of stems. There are many stems ending in the sibilants s, s, s, and several in the breathing A as representative of both a new and an old palatal.

I. Palatal Stems.

297. I. Radical stems in -c. — All uncompounded stems (being of course monosyllabic) are, with very few isolated exceptions, feminine

substantives. The exceptions are: tvdc- 'skin', otherwise f., occurs twice in

the L. sing, tvaci as a m.; drc-, in its only occurrence, I. sing, arc-d, is a m. adj. in the sense of 'shining'; and kri'mc-, 'curlew' (VS.) is a m. sub- stantive. Compounds, as being adjectives, are often m.; but excepting those formed with anc- the only n. is a-pfk (from pre- 'mix'), used adverbially. Compounds ending in -anc'' regularly distinguish strong and weak forms. This distinction elsewhere appears to a limited extent only in compounds ending in the three roots vyac- 'extend', vac- 'speak', sac- 'accompany': the first by nasalization in uru-vydncam^ 'far-extending', the other two by lengthening the radical vowel in several compounds.

I Though in origin a radical element, (as distinguished from the old palatals yi aiic is practically a suffix; cp. 298. and /^i). ' The voc. sing., however, generally 4 These compounds formed with the root assumes a somewhat shortened form owing aiic- will, owing to the peculiar changes to the accent invariably shifting to the which the stem undergoes, be treated apart initial syllable in this case. from other words ending in radical t. 3 The gutturals as finals of nominal stems 5 Through the influence of compounds having become the new palatals c,j'' and h^ formed with -anc, like fraty-dncam. 12* i8o I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

Inflexion.

The forms actually occurring, if made from vac- f. 'speech', would be the following: vace. — Sing. : N. V. vak. A. vacant. I. vacA. D. Ab. G. vacds. L. vaci. Dual: N. A. V. vaca and vdcau. I. vagbhySm (VS.). — Plur.: N. V. vdcas. A. vicas and vacds. I. vagbhis. D. vagbhyds (VS). Ab. vagbhyds (AV.). G. vacam. a. The forms actually occurring are:

Sing. N. f. rk (AV.) 'stanza', tvdk 'skin', vak 'speech', h'lk (AV. VS.) 'flame', sruk 'ladle'; ni-mruk (AV.) 'sunset', purusa-vak (VS. xxiv. 33) 'human- voiced', puro-ruk (TS.vir. 3. 13') 'forward light', j-a;«-»i/5 (VS. ix. 12) 'argument'. — m. /5r«7? (VS. XIX. 43) 'curlew'; anrta-vAk {AM.) 'speaking untruth', upa-pfk 'adhering to', tri-suk (VS. xxxviii. 22) 'having triple light', yatd-sruk 'extending the ladle', sUrya-tvak (AV.) 'having a covering (bright) as the sun', hiranya- tvak 'coated with gold'.

A. f. ream, tvdcam, ri'icam (VS. TS.) 'lustre', vscam, si'icam (AV.), sicam 'hem', srucam (AV.); a-sicam 'oblation', vi-mt'ccam 'unyoking', sUrya- tvacam. — m. amho-mucam 'delivering from distress', ddrogha-vacam 'free from treacherous speech', kuya-vacam 'speaking ill', ianu-rucam 'brilliant in person', dhdnarcam 'shining {ream) with booty', puro-rucam 'shining in front', madhu-pfcam 'dispensing sweetness', mrdhrd-vacam 'speaking injuriously', su- ri'icam 'shining brightly", su-vacam 'very eloquent', surya-tvacam (Kh. iv. 63). With strengthened stem: uru-vydncam; satya-vacam 'truth- speaking'; apatya- sacam 'accompanied with offspring', abki-sdcam 'accompanying', drona-sdcam 'clinging to the trough', dhama-sdcam 'keeping his place', -sicam 'bestowing gifts'. —- n. (adv.) a-pfk 'in a mixed manner'.

I. f. rca, tvaca, inrca 'injury', ruca, vaca, suca, sicd, srucd; puro-ruca (VS. XX. 36) 'forward light', su-ri'ica. — m. arcA 'shining'; uru-vydca, sUrya-tvaca. D.f. .;>-^/(VS.xiii.39), /«^/ 'offspring', tvace'{NN.), ruce, z/ai;/ (VS.xxii. 23), suce (VS. XXXIX. 12); uru-vydce (AV.). — m. amho-muce (TS. i. 6. 1 2 3), tidyata- sruce 'extending the ladle', yatd-sruce, visva-iuce 'all-enlightening'.

Ab. f. tvacds, srucds (AV. VS.); ni-mrucas. G. f. reds, tvacds, vacds; vi-mucas {napat, V.). — m. puru-rucas 'shining brightly', su-rucas. L. f. tvaci, vaci, sruci; a-tuci 'evening', ud-rci 'end', ni-mruci, vi-vaci 'crying aloud'. — tvaci 'skin' (ix. 9 loi'*). m. 6 3, V. m. dkrtta-ruk 'possessing unimpaired lustre' (x. 84+). Du. N. A.V. f. vdcau, sicau; ghrta-prca 'sprinkling fatness', tanu-ruca. — With strengthened stem: satya-vdea. — m. kriincau (VS. xxx. 6); tanu-ri'ica, yatd-sruca, su-vdca; sam-pfcau (VS. ix. 4) 'united'. I. m. ati-ri'igbhyam (VS. xxv. 3) 'fetlocks'. PI. N. f. fcas, prcas 'food', ri'icas, vdcas, sicas (AV.), sriicas'; a-preas 'filling' (viii. 40 9)^, divo-ri'icas 'shining from heaven', ni-mrucas (AV. VS.), vi-mucas (AV.), V. bhadra-vacas 'speaking auspiciously'. — m. dudhrd-vacas 'speaking confusedly', yatd-srucas, vasu-rucas 'bright as the Vasus', vi-pfcas (VS. XIX. 11) 'parted', z/Z-z/acay, j-aw-j'/iraj- (AV.) 'shedding together', sam-pfcas (VS. XIX. 11), su-rucas, su-vdeas, suktd-vacas 'uttering good- speech', V. surya- tvacas. — With strengthened stem: abhi-sdcas, dyajna-sacas 'not performing sacrifice', drogha-vdcas 'speaking maliciously', V. nr-sacas 'befriending men',

I AV. once (xtx. 422) with wrong accent I = According to BR., infinitive of a-pfc- srucas. 'satiate oneself. ,

VI. Declension. Nouns. Consonant Stems. i8i

ranya-vacas 'speaking agreeably', rayi-sacas 'possessing wealth', raii-sdcas, satya-vacas, smdd-rati-sacas 'attended by liberal men', hari-sicas 'occupied with the tawny (Soma)'. A. f. rucas, vacas and (once) vacds, sucas (AV.), skas (AV.), srucas and (once) srucas {AN^^ dur-vAcas (AV.) 'having a bad voice', mrdhrd-vacas, su-rucas. — m. an-rcas 'hymnless', a-rucas 'lustreless', mrdhrd-vacas, vddhri- vacas 'talking idly', vi-vacas.

I. f._ rgbhis. — D. f. srugbhyds (VS. ii. i). — Ab. f. rgbhyds (AV.) — ^ G. f. ream, tvac&m (AV.); madhu-pfcam (AV.).

2g8. Stems in -ano. A considerable number of compounds is formed by adding as final member the root anc- 'bend', which almost assumes the

character of a suffix ' expressing the meaning of '-ward'; e. g.pranc- {= prd-aiic-) 'for-ward'. Strong and weak forms are regularly distinguished, the nasal

which appears in the former being always lost in the latter. If -anc is preceded by a word ending in i or u, the syllables ya and va thus produced are further weakened to t and i( before vowel endings, and if bearing the accent, shift it to those endings ^; e. g. Sing. A. m. pratydncam, N. n. pratydk, G.pratTcds.

In these compounds -anc is added to words ending in i, a, with which it coalesces : adhardnc- 'tending downward' {ddhara-)i, dpafic- 'backward' {dpa), arvaiic- 'hitherward' (arvd-\ dvanc- 'downward' (dva), asmatraiic- 'turned toward us', ghrtahc-\ 'filled with ghee' (ghrtd-), devanc- 'directed toward the gods' [devd-), pdrdnc- 'turned away' {pdrd), prdnc- 'forward' {pro), visvdnc- 'universal' {visva-^i, sairdnc- 'going together' {satra)^. 2. -i: akiidhrydnc- 7 'going nowhere' (aku-dhri-\ asmadryanc- 'turned towards us' [asmad-ri-Sl itdahc-^ 'turned upward' {ud), kadrydhc-l (turned towards what' (kdd-), tirydnc- 'going across' {iiri-)9, a'i2a'/4j/a««r- 'sprinkling curds' [dddhi-), devadrydnc-7 'turned towards the gods' [devd-), nydnc- 'turned down' (ii'i), pratydnc- 'turned towards' {prdli), madryaiic-l 'turned towards me' (mad-ri-), viivadryanc- 'going everywhere' [visu-a-dri-), svitydnc- 'whitish' [ivit-i-"), sadhryanc- 7 'co^r\g together' [sa-dhrt- 'the same goal'), samydfic- 'going together' (sam-i-). 3. -«; anvdnc- 'going after' (ffiw/), r/J'cw- 'moving straight forward' (/^'k-)^ visvahc- 'going in all directions' [visu-), svdiic- 'going well' [su). The two feminines puritc-t- 'abundant' and uriic-i- 'far-reaching' presuppose similar stems i^puru-diic- and *urti-dne:-).

Inflexion. 299. These stems are inflected in the m. and n. only, as they form a

f. in -f from the weak or contracted stem, e. g. prdnc-, £ prdc-i-; pratydnc-,

f. prattc-i-. The only cases occurring in the pi. are the N. A. and in the du. the N. A. and L. The forms actually found, if made from pratydnc-, would be as follows: Sing. N. m. pratydn, n. pratydk. A. m. pratydncam. I. praticd. D. pratice. Ab. G. praticds. L. pratici. — Du. N. A. m. pratydncd, pratydncau (AV.), n. pratici. L. m. praticos. — PI. N. m. pratydncas. A. m. praticds and praticas (AV.). a. The forms actually occurring are the following: Sing. 'ii.m, adhardn {KV), dpah, arvdn, azwz (TS.iii. 2. 5^), tida7i{AN'),

1 Cp. Whitney 407; Lindner, Nominal- ° The f. nardc-i- [PC

tirydn (AV.), dadhydn ^, nyah, pdran (AV.), pratydn ', prdn, visvafi, sadhryan (Av.), su-prdn. — n. Nearly all the following forms are used adverbially: akudhryak, adharik (AV.), dpak, drvak and arvak (AV.), asmadryak, udak, tirydk (AV.), nyak, pdrak (AV.), pratydk, prfik, madryak, visvak, visvadryak, sadhryak, samydk^. A. m. adharmcam (AV.), anvdncam (AV.), dpaiicam (AV.), arvdncam, t'tdancam, tirydncam (VS. x. 8), nydncam, pdrancam (AV.), pratydncam, prmcam, madryancam, visvancam, samydncam, svdncam. I. m. arvdca. — n. devadrtca, satrdca; used adverbially with shifted accent: tirascd, nicd, pracd^. D. m. dadhice, svitice. — Ab. m. praticds. — G. m. dadhicds, visvdcas^. — L. m. prdci. Du. N. A. m. dpancau (AV.), arvdnca and arvancau (AV.), visvancau (Av.), sadhryanca, samydiica and samydiicau (AV. VS.). — n. pratici, samicf

(VS. I. 31, TS. IV. I. 3^). — L. m. visucos. PI. N. rri. adhardncas (AV.), dpancas (AV.), arvdiicas^, asmairdncas, asmadryahcas, udaiicas, rjvdncas, tirydncas (AV.), pdrancas, pratydhcas, prdncas, visvancas, svitydncasT, sadhryancas, samydncas, svdncas. A. m. adhardcas, anUcds and arnicas (AV.), dpacas, arvdcas, dvScas, udicas, nicas (AV.), pdracas, praticds and praticas (AV.), prdcas, visucas, satrdcas. 300. Radical stem in -ch. — Only one stem ending in ch, which occurs in a single form as a noun, has been found. This is made from the root prcch; 'ask', in the compound N. du. m. bandhu-pfcch-a 'asking after kinsmen'. The D. and A. of the same stem also appear as infinitives in the forms prcche 'to ask', sam-pfcche 'to greet'; vi-prccham and sam-pfcchatn 'to ask'. 301. Stems in radical -j. — These stems are inflected in all three genders alike. The neuter would of course differ in N. A. V. dual and plural, but these forms do not occur. When uncompounded these stems are

f. substantives except yi'ij- and rdj-, which appear as m. also; bhrdj-, which

occurs as a m. adj. as well as a f. substantive; dj'-, which is found once (AV.)*, and vij- twice as a m. only. Neuter cases occur from bhdj-, yuj'-, rdj- and vrj- as final members of adj. compounds, but no distinctively neuter forms (N. A.V. du. pi.) are met with even here. The only stem showing traces of the distinction of strong and weak cases is /«/-, which has the nasalized form yi'mj- beside the unaltered stem in the N. A. sing, and du.

In the N. sing, the /, when derived from a guttural, appears as k, but when it represents an old palatal, it becomes the cerebral / except in rtv-ij'^ 'priest'; but before the -su of the L. pi. both alike ^° become k.

1 On the doubling of the n before vowels, 6 The weak form arvdcas seems to be see Lanman 456. used for arvdficas in VII. 48'. 2 pratydnk- before s- in TS. I. 8. 21 '. 7 A transition form, N. m. sviticayas (x. 46') 3 The forms ivadAk, madrikax^&madryadrik, = sviiydncas, is made from an i- stem ytivadrik, 'towards thee, — me, — you', are ivitici- based on the regular f. hitici-. doubtless shortened forms of -drydk, which 8 In AV. XIX. 50^, where the reading pronunciation is favoured by the metre in djam is somewhat doubtful; see Whitney's

some instances : Lanman 456 (bottom). note.

4 prdca is probably used adverbially in 9 Which is derived from yaj- 'sacrifice' : III. 31' also. As an adj. the form, being a riu-ij- 'sacrificing in due season'. compound, would be accented pracd. 10 See above 34, I. 5 N. of a demon, formed with -aiic, from visva-^ an extension oivisu-^ asm-visva'dryafic-. VI. Declension. Nouns. Consonant Stems. 183

Inflexion.

302. Sing. N. I. with -k-.ra.. yi'm^ (VS. x. 25) 'associate'; a-bhuk -'not haying enjoyed', ardha-bhdk (AV.) 'sharer', rta-yuk 'duly harnessed', rtv-ik 'priest', ghrtd-nirnik 'having a garment of fat', candrd-nirnik 'having a brilliant garment', para-yfk 'outcast', bhi-sdk' 'healing', satd-bhisak (AV.) 'requiring a hundred physicians', sam-vrk 'overpowering', sa-yuk 'companion', hiranya- srak (AV.) 'having a golden garland'.— f. lirk (VS. iv. 10) 'vigour', nir-nik^ 'bright garment', hiraiiya-nirnik. — n. N. A. sv-d-vrk 'easily acquired', su-yuk 'well-joined' (adv.). 2. with -if: m. bhraf^ 'shining', rat 'king'; eka-rdt 'monarch.', jana-rdt (VS.v. 24) 'lord of men', vane-rdf 'shining in a wood', vi-bkrdt 'resplendent', vi-rdt 'ruling far and wide', visva-bhrdt 'all-illuminating'; satra-rdt (VS. v. 2) 'king of a Soma sacrifice', sam-rdt 'universal ruler', sarva-rdt (VS. v. 24) 'ruler of all', sva-rdt 'self-ruler'. — With anomalous loss of the final of the root and retention of the N. -s: dva-yas^ (i. 162=), a priest who offers the share of the oblation {ava-ydj-). — f. rdt 'mistress'; vi-rdt. — With anomalous loss of the final of the root {yaj-) and retention of the N. -s: ava-yas^

'share of the sacrificial oblation' (i. 173'^). A. m. djam (AV.) 'driver', yunjam^, yi'ijam; rtv-ijam, j'yestha-rdjain

'sovereign', tri-bhujam (AV.) 'threefold', deva-ydjam (VS. i. 17) 'sacrificing to the gods', para-vfjam, pi'iskara-srajam (VS. 11. 33) 'wearing a lotus wreath', purya-bhdjam 'first sharer', prtandjam 'rushing {-djam) to battle', praihama- bkdjam 'receiving the first share', pratar-yujam 'yoking early', bhi-sdjam (VS. XXV111.9), yuva-yi'ijam 'yoked by both of you', ratha-yi'ijam 'yoking to a chariot', vi-rdjam, sapha-ri'ijam 'destroying with hoofs', satya-ydjam 'worshipping truly', sam-rdjam, sa-yi'ijam, su-tydjam 'easily letting loose', su-ydjam 'worshipping well', su-yi'cjam 'well-yoked', su-srdjam (AV.) 'wearing a beautiful garland', sva-rdjam, sva-vfjam 'appropriating to oneself. — f. flrjam, tujam 'offspring', bhujam 'enjoyment, bhrdjam (VS. iv. 17) 'splendour', srdjam 'garland'; upa- spijam'^ (x. 88'*) 'emulation', nir-nijam, pari-vfjam 'avoiding', pra-yujam (VS. XI. 6G) 'impulse', mano-yi'ijam 'yoked by thought', vi-rdjam, sahdsra- nirnijam 'having a thousand adornments', sva-rdjam (AV.). I. m. yujd; bhi-sdjd (VS. AV.), mano-yi'ija, vaco-yi'ija 'yoked by a mere word', sa-yuja (AV.), sahdsra-nirnija, su-ydja (VS. TS.) 'good sacrifice', su-yuja. — f. urjd, tujd, bhrajd 'lustre'; nir-nija, mano-yuja (AV.), vi-rdja. — n. svatra-bhdjd 'strengthening'. D. m. yuje (AV.); mrtd-bhraje^ (AV.) 'whose virility is dead', rakso-yi'ije

'associated with demons', vi-rdje (VS. AV.), sam-rdje, sva-rdje'^°. — f. urji, tuje^^, bkuje; nir-nije. — Ab. m. yujds; vi-rdjas. — f. nir-nijas.

G. m. sam-rdjas, sva-rdjas. — f. urjds, bhrajds " (AV.) 'virility', yujds; pra-yi'ijas 'team', ratna-bhdjas 'dispensing gifts', vi-rdjas (AV.) — n, sva-rdjas.

I Yor yunk; cp. VPr. IV. 1 04. 7 Strong form (301). * Probably 'one wlio conjures', cp. in the 8 According to Sayana, used adverbially later language, abhi-sajaii 'utters an impre- in the sense of 'emulously'. cation'; cp. Brugmann, Grundriss 2, p. 8, 9 -bkraj- is probably a reduced form of bottom; Uhlenbeck, Etymologisches Wor- bhrdj- : cp. the later meaning of tejas~- terbuch, rejects this etymology in favour 'lustre'. of a derivation connected with Av. -bis 10 There is also the transfer form bhrajaya 'healing'. (VS. VIII. 40) 'for the bright one'. 3 From nir-nij- 'wash out'. 11 There is also the transfer form tujaye 4 There is also the transition form (v. 46^) from tuj-i: bhraja-s (ix. 170^). 12 Probably a reduced form of bhraj- 5 See Lanman 463. 'lustre'. Cp. Whitney on AV. vn. 902. 6 See above 66 c |S (p. 61). i84 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. Vedic Grammar.

L. m. dsva-nirniji 'adorned with horses'. — f. sam-sfji 'collision'. V. m. ghfta-nirnik, satfi-rSt.

Du. N. A. V. m. yunja ', yi'ija; riv-ija, tanu-tydja 'risking one's life', puru-bkuja (V.) 'enjoying much', puskara-sraja, pratar-yitja, brahma-yi'ija 'harnessed by prayer', bhi-sdja, mano-yuja (VS. AV.), vaco-yi'ija, sam-rSja, sa-yi'ija, sakam-yuja 'joined together', su-yuja; anu-vfjau (AV.) a part of the body near the ribs, apna-rajau 'ruling over wealth' (apna- = aptias), bhi-sajau (V.), sam-rajau, sa-yi'ijau (AV.), su-yi'ijau (AV.). — f. aiva-yi'ijau (AV.) 'harnessing horses'. D. m. bhi-sdgbhyam (AV.). — G. m. sam-rajos. PI. N. m. yi'ijas; a-yujas (AV.) 'joining on', rtv-ijas, V. riv-ijas (AV.), krtd-dhvajas 'furnished with banners', giri-bhrdjas' 'glittering on the mountains', ghrtd-nirnijas, tanu-tydj'as, divi-ydjas 'worshipping in heaven', dur-yujas 'difficult to be yoked', nih-sfjas 'pouring out', pitu-bhAjas 'enjoying food', purva-bkdjas, prtanajas {-ajas), pra-yujas (AV.), brahma-yujas, bhi-sdjas, mano- yfijas, mitra-yiijas 'joined in friendship', ratha-yi'ijas, varsd-nirnijas 'clothed with rain', vama-bhajas 'partaking of goods', viha-sfjas (AV.) 'all-creating', sam-rSyas, V. sam-rdjas, su-yi'ijas, sva-yiijas 'aUies', sva-rAjas, hdrita-srajas (AV.) 'wearing yellow garlands'. — f. lirjas, tujas, bhi'ijas; abhi-yujas 'assailants', go-bhsjas 'bestowing cows', nir-nijas, prksd-prayajas 'in which oblations begin to be offered', pra-yujas, m-rajas (VS. xvii. 3), stana-bki'/jas ^ 'enjoying the udder', sv-a-yi'ijas 'easy to yoke'. A. m. vijas 'stakes' (at play); ddhi-nirnijas 'covered over', aiva-yujas, catur-yujas 'yoked as (a team of) four', sapha-ri'ijas, sa-yi'ijas, su-yujas. — f. tujas, bhujas, srdjas; abhi-yujas. I. m. ariina-yi'igbhis 'furnished with ruddy (rays)', rta-yvgbhis, vi-yugbhis'' (AV.), su-yugbhis, sva-yugbhis.

D. f. pra-yiigbhyas (VS.xxx. 8) 'impulses'. — Ab. m. bhi-sdgbhyas (AV.) —

G. m. rtv-ijam, bhi-sdjam. —- f. urjam, bhujam; nir-majam^. — L. f. sraksu; pra-ydksu (AV.) 'offerings' ^-

303. Stems in derivative -j. — There are seven m. and f. adjectives or substantives formed with the suffixes -aj and -ij: d-svapnaj- 'sleepless',

trsndj- 'thirsty', dhrsdj- 'bold', sandj- 'old'; us-ij 'desiring', bhiir-ij- f. 'arm',

van-ij- m. 'trader'. There is also the n. dsrj-'' 'blood', which is of obscure etymology, but the -j of which is probably a reduced suffix. The forms occurring are the following: Sing. N. m. usik, vanik. — n. dsrk. — A. m. uHjam, trmdjam, vanijam (AV.) — I. usfja (VS. XV. 6) 'ghee'. — D. m. trsndje, vanije. — G. m. usljas. Du. N. f. sandja. — G. f. bhurijos. — L. f. bhurtjos.

PI. N. m. usljas, trsndjas, d-trsnajas, dhrsdjas, d-svapnajas. — f. usijas. — A. m. usijas. — I. m. usigbhis. — D. m. usigbhyas. — G. usijam.

2. Cerebral Stems.

304. There is only one doubtful derivative stem in -/, raghdt-, which occurs in the single form raghdtas (AV. viii. 7^*), possibly a mistake for ragkdvas^ 'swift'.

1 Strong form (301). S Tlie corresponding form is fra-ydtsu in 2 Occurring once (x. 68'), ihraj- being a TS. iv. I. 8£ and VS. xxvu. 14. reduced form of dhraj~j cp.lD. m. virid-bhraje, 7 Cp. Brugmann, Grundriss 2, p. 559, G. f. bhrajds (AV.); cp. p. 183, notes 9 and '2. 560. 3 The Pada text reads stana-bhujas. 8 See Lanman 466, and Whitney, note 4 See WmTNEV's note on AV. Vll. 41. on AV. vm. 724. 5 A word of doubtful derivation and meaning, occurring only once (via. 420), VI. Declension. Nouns. Consonant Stems. i8S

There are besides only two radical stems ending in -(/, id-'' 'praise' and id-" 'refreshment'. the Of former occurs only the sing.' I. tda; of the latter only the smg. I. idd and the G. idds^.

3. Dental Stems. 305. Stems ending in all the dental mutes as well as the nasal are of frequent occurrence except those in -th. There are radical stems ending in each of the dentals, but no derivative stems in -th or -dh. The distinction of strong and weak appears with slight exceptions only in the derivative stems in -ant and -an. 306. Stems in radical -t. — The only four monosyllabic stems occurring are feminine substantives: dyut- 'splendour', nft- 'dancing', ///- 'battle', vrt-'' 'hostile array'. There are also two reduplicated stems, which are primarily adjectives: cik'it- 'knowing' {Ycit-) and didyi'it- 'shining'. The rest are com- pounds, used mostly in the masculine or feminine. Neuter cases occur from only four of them: aksi-pdt- 'falling into the eye', dn-apa-vrt- 'not turning away', tri-vft- 'three-fold', sam-ydt-^ 'continuous'.

Inflexion.

The forms occurring would, if made from tri-vft-, be as follows:

Sing. N. m. f. tri-vft (also n.). — A. m. f, tri-vftam. — I. m. f. tri-vfta (also n.). — D. m. f. tri-vfte. — Ab. G. m. f. tri-vftas. — L. n. tri-vfti (AV.). Du. N. A. m. f. tri-vfta, tri-vftau. — L. f. tri-vftos.

PI. N. A. m. f. tri-vftas. — I. n. tri-vfdbhis (AV.). — G. m. f. tri-vftam. — L. f. tri-vftsu. — V. m. f, tri-vrias. The forms actually ocurring are the following: Sing. N. m. ana-vft 'not returning', dbandhu-krt^ (AV.) 'not cutting off

kin', 6*a-jr/ (AV.) 'one-fold', 'simple', ^'/JiV'knowing',' /r?-z'r/'( VS. x. 10) 'triple', pra-vft (VS. XV. 9), manas-cit 'thinking in the mind', mida-kft (AV.) 'cutting roots', vipas-cit 'inspired', vi-vft (VS.xv.9), visu-vft 'rolling in various directions',

sa-vft (VS. XV. 9), su-vft 'turning well'. — f!, cit (VS.1v.19) 'thought'; apa-cit (AV.) a noxious insect, didyi'tt 'shining', vi-dyut 'flashing'. — n. eka-vft (AV.), tri-vft: as adv. aksi-pdt 'a little' and dnapa-vrt 'unremittingly'. A. m. a-cttajn 'unthinking', eka-vftam (AV.), ghrta-scutam 'sprinkling ghee', tri-vftam, dus-citam (AV.) 'thinking evil', madhu-sci'itam 'distilling sweetness', vipas-citam, visU-vftam, su-vftam, huras-dtam 'plotting deceit'. — f. dyi'dam, vftam; a-vftam 'turning home', ghrta-scutam, vi-cftam 'loosening', vi-dyutam, vipas-citam, sam-ydtam, sam-vftam (AV.) 'approach', sam-cftam 'union'.

I. m. tri-vfta, vipas-cita (VS. iv. 32), su-vfta. — f. dyuts, vrtd; a-cita 'attention', ghrta-sci'ita, tri-vfta, pra-cdta 'with concealment' (adv.), vi-dyi'iia. — n. sam-ydtd, tri-vfta (AV.).

D. m. a-cite, tri-vfte (VS. xv. 9), pra-vfte (VS. xv. 9), vipas-cite, vi-vfte (VS. XV. 9), sa-vfte (VS. xv. 9), su-dyiite. — f. vi-dyute.

Ab. m. tri-vftas (VS. xiii. 54), vi-dyi'dasT . — f. didyutas.

' Cp. above 17, 5. 5 From yat- 'unite'. 2 Derived from is- 'refreshment' which 6 From krt- 'cut'; but it may be 'not is of very frequent occurrence; cp. above relative-making' (kr-t); see Whitney's note p. 35, note I. on AV. IV. 191. 3 This form is regarded by Grassmann in 7 The Ab. didyot (TS. I. 8. I41) and vidyot

one passage (vil. 47 1) as an A. pi.: cp. (VS. XX. 2) are probably irregular formations Lanman 466. due to parallelism ; cp. Lanman 468. 4 vft- occurs once in the dual as a fem. ad- jective. 1 86 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

G. m. tri-vftas, vipas-citas, sa-citas 'wise', su-dyutas 'shining beautifully'. —

f. vi-dyutas. — L. n. tri-vfti (AV.).

Du. N. A. V. m. vipas-cita (V.), isu-kfta'^ (1.1843). — f. vftau; a-vfta, madhu-sci'ita, vi-cftau (AV.). — L. f. vi-cftos (AV.). PI. N. m. a-vftas, rsti-vidyutas 'glittering with spears', eka-vftas (AV.), ghrta-ici'ctas, dui-citas (AV.), vi-dyutas, vipas-citas, sam-ydtas, surya-svitas 'bright as the sun', svd-vidyutas 'self-lightning', hraduiiT-vftas 'bringing hail'. — V. rsti-vidyutas, vi-dyutas. — N. f. apa-citas (AV.), a-vftas (AV.), upa-vftas

(VS. AV.) 'return', ghrta-scuias, ghrta-scyutas (VS. xvii. 3), madhu-scutas, madhu-scyi'itas (VS. xvii. 3), vi-dyutas, sam-ydtas. — V. dpa-citas (AV.). A. m. a-citas, a-dyutas 'lacking brightness', ghrta-sci'das, vipas-citas, huras- citas. — f. nftas (AV.), vftas; tri-vftas (AV.), daksina-vftas, didyi'itas, puru- vftas (AV.) 'moving in various ways', madhu-sci'ctas, vi-dyiitas, visu-vftas (AV)., sam-ydtas, sam-vftas (AV.). I. n. tri-vfdbhis (AV.). — G. m. vipas-dtam. — f. apa-citam (AV.), vi- dyutam (AV.). — L. f. prtsu^^ — 307. Stems in determinative -t. • Derivative nominal stems are

formed from nearly thirty roots ending in the short vowels /, u and r by

means of the suffix -t^. The roots adding it are i- 'go', kr- 'make', ksi- 'dwell', gu- 'sound', ci- 'pile', 'note', cyu- 'move', ji- 'conquer', dhr- 'hold', dhvr- 'injure',

//- 'swell', pru- 'flow', bhr- 'bear', mi- 'fix', yu- 'join' and 'separate', ri- 'flow', vr- 'cover', sri- 'resort', sru- 'hear', su- 'press', sr- 'flow', stu- 'praise', spr- 'win', sru- 'flow', hu- 'sacrifice', hr- 'take', hvr- or hru- 'be crooked'. Two other roots, gam- 'go', and han- 'strike', are modified so as to end in short a (representing the sonant nasal) before adding the suffix: -gd-t and hd-t.

These stems are mostly m. and f. Neuter cases are very rare, occurring from five or six stems only. The inflexion is exactly the same as that of the stems in radical -/. Inflexion.

308. Sing. N. m. with -kri: anukama-kft 'acting according to desire', abhisti-kft 'giving help', aji-kft 'instituting a contest', Tsana-kft 'acting as a lord', rsi-kft 'making into a seer', khaja-kft 'causing the din of battle',

jyotis-kft 'causing light', tanu-kft 'preserving life', pathi-kft 'path-making', puru-kft 'doing much', pUrva-kft (VS. xx. 36) 'active from of old', bhadra- kft 'bestowing blessings', uloka-kft 'procuring free space', vayas-kft 'creating youthful vigour', varivo-kft 'bestowing freedom', vijesa-kft 'procuring victory', su-kft 'acting well', steya-kft 'committing theft', syona-kft 'causing comfort', svista-kft (VS. II. 9) 'offering right sacrifice'; with -jii: apsu-jit 'con- quering in the waters', ab-jit 'winning waters', abhimati-jit (VS. xxvii. 3) 'conquering foes', asva-jit 'winning horses', rta-jit (VS. xvii. 83) 'winner of right', go-jit 'winning kine', dhana-jit 'winning booty', ranya-jit 'winning in battle', ratha-jit 'winning chariots', visva-jit 'all-conquering', samsrsta-jit 'con- quering combatants', satya-jit (VS. xvii. 83) "winner of truth', satra-jit 'wholly victorious', samarya-jit 'winning battles', sahasra-jit 'conquering a thousand', sena-jit (VS. xv. i g) 'conquering armies', svar-jit 'winning heaven', hiranya-jit 'winning gold'; with other roots: acyuta-ksit (VS. v. 13) 'dwelling immovably'; acyuta-cyiit 'shaking what is firm'; d-dara-srt (AV.) 'not falling into a crack'; a-ksit 'dwelling'; rna-cit 'avenging guilt', rta-cit 'observing sacred order';

I isu-kfieva here may, however, be a 1 3 This suffix -i partakes of the character D. sing, for isukHe va; see Lanman 468. of a root determinative, as roots in -i -u -r

^ With double ending once (l. 1294) are hardly ever used without it as nominal

i>fim-su. I stems. VI. Declension. Nouns. Consonant Stems. 187 kilbisa-spft 'removing sm' ksatra-bhft (VS. xxvii. 7) 'holder of sway'; carsani- dhft 'preserving men' dlrgha-srt'd 'heard afar', deva-srt'it (VS. xxxvii. 18) 'heard by the gods'; dhana-spft 'winning booty'; dhruva-ksit (VS. v. 13) 'dwelling firmly'; pari-hrut 'overthrowing'; puta-bhft (VS. xviii. 21) a kind of soma vessel; bhara-bhft 'bearing a load'; mada-cyut 'reeling with excite- ment'; madhu-sut 'emitting sweetness'; yaksa-bhf-t 'supporting pursuers' (?), vajra-bhrt 'wielding a thunderbolt'; vaja-sH 'running for a prize'; sapatna-kslt (VS. I. 29) 'destroying rivals'; «/:/'3r;z«-«V (VS. xxvii. 45) 'heaped up like the bird Suparna'; soma-si'it 'pressing Soma'; sva-srt 'going one's own way'; havana- sriit 'hearing invocations'. — f. upa-bhft (VS. ir. 6) 'sacrificial ladle'; upa-mit 'prop'; rta-cit; pari-sriit (VS.xix. 15) 'fermented liquor'; prasasta-kft 'bestowing praise'. — N. A. n. visva-jit; dirgha-iri'it, nava-gdt (AV. TS.) 'first-bearing', purTtdt^ (VS. xxxix. 9) 'pericardium'; as adverbs: upa-sjut 'invoked', dyu-gdt 'going to heaven', sa-krt ('one-making') 'once'.

A. m. adhi-ksitam 'ruler', adhvara-kftam (VS. I. 24) 'performing sacrifice', arno-vftam 'enclosing the waters', uktha-bhftam 'offering verses', uda-pridatn 'swimming in water', rna-cyutam 'inciting to (fulfil) obligations', carsam-dhftam, tivra-si'ctam 'pressing pungent (juice)', trsu-cyutam 'moving greedily', dirgha- sri'Uam, dus-kftam 'acting wickedly', dveso-yutam 'removing hostility', dhana- jitam (VS. xi. 8), dhana-spftam, nadi-vftam 'stream- obstructing', pari-sri'ctam 'flowing around', pratar-jltam 'conquering early', mada-cyi'dam, mithu-kftam

'fallen into trouble', vayas-kftam{^%.u\.\Z), vaja-jitam (VS. 11. 7) 'winning spoil', sravo-jitam 'winning renown', sam-jitam 'conqueror', satya-dhvftam 'perverting truth', satra-jitam (VS. xi. 8), sahas-kftam (VS. iii. 18) 'bestowing strength', sama-bhftam 'bringing chants', su-kftam, svar-jitam, svista-kftam (VS. xxi. 47), havana-sri'Uam, havis-krtant 'preparing the oblation'. — f. aram-kftam 'making ready', upa-prutam 'flowing near', deva-srutam, ni-yiitam 'team', pari-srutam.

I. VQ.. abhi-jita (^S.yiW]) 'victorious', upari-pri'ita (VS. vii. 3) 'falling from above', carsam-dhfta, brahma-kfta 'offering prayers', soma-suta. — f. ni-yutd, pari-sruta '{YS.ynyi.&z), pari-hvrtd' (viii. 47^) 'deceiving'. D. m. aram-kfte, dus-kfte, dharma-kfte 'establishing order', brahma-kfte, su-krte; ab-jite, asva-jite, urvara-jite 'winning fertile fields', go-jite, dhana-jite, nr-jite conquenng men visva-jite, satra-jite, svar-jite; giri-ksite 'dwelling in mountains', parvata-cyi'de 'shaking mountains', soma-bhfte (VS. v. i) 'bringing Soma'. Ab. m. pari-srutas (VS. XIX. 75) 'foaming', brahma-krtas, sarva-hidas 'offered completely'. — f. abhi-hrutas 'injurious'. G. m. carsant-dhftas, vaja-jitas (VS.ix. 13), virya-kftas (VS.x. 25) 'doing isa-sti'das^, deva-stidas mighty deeds', ' sam-jitas, su-kftas, havis-kftas. — f. 'praising the gods', pari-srt'das (AV.). L. m. mada-cyidi, go-jiti, vasu-jiti (AV.) 'winning goods', sam-dhana-Jiti^ (AV.) 'winning booty together'. V. m. acyuia-cyut, uru-krt 'making wide', rta-cit, khaja-krt, puru-krt, (VS. 11. rana-krt 'causing joy', vandana-srut 'listening to praise', vaja-jit 7), rdsjra-bhrt (AV.) sahasra-jit, havis-krt (VS i. 15). — f. upa-bhrt (AV.), 'bearing sway'.

'refreshment', BR.; but the 1 The second part of the word may be 3 isa- = is- isah-stutas, and GRA.SSMANN derived from tan- 'stretch' like -ga-i- from Pada text reads regards isa isak (before si-) as G. of z';-. gam- 'go'. = of *dkana-sam-Jiti. 2 With anomalous accent; but the form may 4 Instead beL. oipari-hvrti; the normal accent of which would he-pari-hurti-; seeLANMAN 502 (bottom). 1 88 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

Du. N. A. V. m. go-jita, divi-ksUs 'dwelling in the sky', pari-ksita 'dwelling around', mada-cyuta, j-z^-inz/a 'hearing well', havana-sruta, Y. pdt/ii-krts {KV.); d-dns-krtau, krsna-pri'itan 'moving in darkness', sa-kfiau (AV.j 'acting at once', sa-ksHau 'dwelling together', sii-kftau (AV.), bhadra-kftau (AV.), su-sri'dau

(AV.). — f. ugra-jitau (AV.) 'fierce-conquering' (name of an ). —

G. f. su-kfios, pari-ksUos.

PI. N. V. m. citas (VS. i. iS) 'heaping up', hrutas 'stumbling-blocks'; with -krt: aram-kftas, isana-kfias, karma-kftas (VS. iii. 47) 'skilful in work', dudhra-lftas 'boisterous', dus-kftas, dhanya-kftas'^ 'preparing grain', brahma- krtas, yajna-nis-kftas 'preparing the sacrifice', vayas-kftas, su-kftas, havis-kftas; with -cyiit: dhama-cyutas 'shaking the ground', dhruva-cyutas 'shaking the immovable', parvata-cyi'itas, mada-cyiitas; with -ksit: apsu-ksitas 'dwelling in the waters', uj>a-ksttas 'dwelling near', vraja-ksitas (VS. x. 4) 'resting in their station', sa-ksitas; with other roots: adhva-gdtas (AV.) 'travellers', arthetas'

(VS. X. 3) 'swift', uda-prutas, urdhva-ciias (VS. i. 18) 'piling up', krcchre-sritas 'undergoing danger', grama-jltas 'conquering troops', carsam-dkftas, jana- bhftas (VS. X. 4) 'supporting people', divi-sritas (AV.) 'going to heaven', deva- sriitas (VS. VI. 30), dveso-yutas, ni-gutas 'enemies', pari-cUas (VS. xii.46) 'piling up around', pitu-bhftas 'bringing food', purva-citas (VS. xxvn. 4) 'piling up first', mano-dhftas 'inteUigent', V. vaja-jitas (VS. ix. 9), vi-citas (VS. iv. 24) 'sifting', visva-bhftas (VS. x. 4) 'all-nourishing', satya-sriitas 'hearing the truth', satra-jilas, su-kftas (VS. xxxiii. 16), su-sriitas, soma-suias, sva-sftas, havana- s'rutas. — f. tnitas 'posts', sttitas 'praises'; uda-pri'itas, ni-yutas, pari-sri'das, pitu-bhftas, sam-hatas 'layers', sa-srutas 'streaming'. — N. A. n. dXrgha-srut 'far- renowned' appears to be used as a n. pi. in agreement with vrata (viii. 25^^)3. A. m. hrutas and hrutas"^ (AV.); a-pitas 'not swelling', go-jitas, jyotis- kftas, dus-kftas, ni-gutas, mada-cyutas, su-kftas. — f. ritas 'flowing'; I'lpa-stutas 'invocations', dirgha-sri'itas, ni-yutas, bali-hftas 'paying tribute', varuna-dhri'itas 'deceiving Varuna', vi-sftas 'flowing asunder', sa-srutas.

I. m. soma-sudbhis. — f. antariksa-prudbhis 'floating over the atmosphere', ni-yudbhis. D. m. isu-kfdbhyas (VS. xvi. 46) 'arrow-makers', dhanus-kfdbhyas (VS. XVI. 46) 'bow-makers', pathi-kfdbhyas, bandhu-ksidbhyas 'dwelling among kinsmen'. -— Ab. n. tanu-kfdbhyas. G. m. agni-hotra-hutam (AV.) 'offering the oblation to Agni', isu-bhftam (AV.) 'archers', mantra-kftam 'composers of hymns', su-kftam. — f. abhi-hrictam, upa-citam (VS. xii. 97) a kind of disease, upa-mitam (AV.), ni-yutam, pari- mitam (AV.) 'rafters', prati-mitam (AV.) 'props', ratha-jitam (AV.). L. m. su-kftsu.

Derivative Stems in -vat, -tat, -it, -ut and secondary -t.

309. The following stems are formed with the suffix (i) -vat^: arva-vdi-

f 'proximity', a-vdt- (AY.) i. 'proximity', ud-vdt- f 'height', ni-vdt- i. 'depth', para-vdt- f. 'distance', pra-vdt- i. 'height', sam-vdt- i. 'region'; (2) -tat^:

upard-tat- f. 'vicinity', devd-tat- i. 'divine service', vrkd-tat- i. 'wolfishness',

satyd-tat- f. 'reality', sarvd-tat- f. 'totality'; (3) -it: tad-it- f. 'contiguous', div-it-^

' dhanya-kfias in the Pada text. 5 See above, secondary nominal derivation, 2 That is, 'going [i-t) to the 233- [drtha-]. 6 Cp. above 215 a. 3 See Lanman 503 (bottom), and 474 on 7 In this word the suffix -it probably con- the N. A. pi. n. sists of the root /- 'go' with the primary 4 With irregular accent. (determinative) -t (307). VI. Declension. Nouns. Consonant Stems.

'gomg to the sky', yos-It- f. 'young woman', roh-it- f. 'red mare', sar-U- f. 'stream', /lar-it- f. 'fallow'; -ut; (4) mar-ut- m. 'storm-god'; (5) with secondary -i: the two neuters ydkr-t--" (AV.) 'liver', Ukr-t-^ 'excrement', and perhaps the etymologically obscure m. ndpati 'descendant', all three of which are supple- mented in the weak cases by the stems yakdn-, sakdn- and ndptr- respectively. The inflexion of this group of ^/ stems is the same as that 'of the radical -/ stems. Inflexion.

310. Sing. N. m. taiit, tdnu-ndpat 'son of himself, ndpat, prd-napat 'great-grandson'. — i. paravdt, pravdt, rohit, sarii (VS. xxxw. 11). — n. vdjirf (VS. AV.), Jdkri.

A. m. tdnu-ndpatam, ndpatam. — f, arvavdtam, pardvdtam, pravdtam, yositam, rohitam {KS[.), samvdtam (AV.). I. m. divita. — f. udvdta, devdtsta^, nivdta, pravdta, satydtata^, sarvdtata'i, harita.

D. f. devdtate. There is also the transfer form avirat-e (from a-vira-ta- 'lack of sons'). Ab. f. arvavdtas, udvdtas^, nivdtas^, paravdtas, pravdtas, samvdtas. — G. f. pravdtas. L. f. arvavdti, upardtati, devdtati, paravdii, vrkdtati. V. m. tanu-7iapat, napat^.

Du. N. A. V. m. ndpata. — f. harita. — G. f. haritos. Pi. N. m. ndpatas, marutas, haritas. — f. dvdtas (AV.), udvdtas, taditas, paravdtas (AV.), pravdtas, yositas (AV), saritas, haritas. A. m. marutas. — f. udvdtas, nivdtas, paravdtas, pravdtas, yositas (AV.), rohitas, samvdtas, saritas, haritas. I. m. marudbhis. — f. pravddbhis. — D. m. mari'idbhyas.

Ab. m. marudbhyas. — G. m. tnariitam. — f. pravdtam. Li. m. marutsu. — f. udvdtsu, nivdtsu, pravdtsu. V. m. indra-marutas 'O Indra and the Maruts'j napatas, marutas.

Participial Stems in -at and -ant,

311. Participles in -at are almost limited to the present active form of stems made with reduplication, viz. those of the third class (457) and of intensives (545). The old reduplicated participle (from ga- 'go') jdgat- 'going', 'living', is used chiefly as a n. substantive meaning 'the animate world'. The analogy of these participles is followed by a few others formed from un-

^ reduplicated stems : dis-at- 'worshipping', sis-at- 'instructing' ; also ddksat- and dhdksat-, the aor. participle of dah- 'burn'. A few others, again, originally participles, having come to be used as substantives, have shifted the accent

to the suffix: vah-dt-^ 'stream', veh-dt-^ (AY. YS.) f. 'barren cow', vdgh-dt-^° m. 'sacrificer', srav-dt-^^ f. 'stream'; Hke the regular participle sds'c-at- (from sac- 'accompany'), which as a substantive becomes sak-dt- m. 'pursuer'. In

' Cp. Lat. jecur. 6 Perhaps marut in evaya-marut. 2 Cp. Brugmann, Grundriss 2, p. 559. 7 Lanman 505, would place dasat- 'in- 3 The suffix may here have been a pri- juring' here, but there is no evidence, as mary -t added to the root pa-: cp. Leu- only a weak case, dasatas G. sing., occurs. mann's etymology (1888), Festgruss an Boht- 8 But vdh-ant- 'carrying'. lingk 77 f.; Brugmann 2, p. 366. 9 The derivation of this word is obscure. 4 These forms might be locatives of 10 In one or two passages vdghdt- still devdtati-, salydtati-, sarvdtati-. retains its participial sense. 5 These forms might be A. pi. " But srdv-ant- 'flowing'. 190 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. Vedic Grammar. this class masculines are frequent, but only about half a dozen neuter forms occur, and the feminines are limited to three substantives' and the adjective a-sascdt 'unequalled'^. The inflexion is like that of the radical -t stems, the accent never shifting to the endings.

Inflexion.

^ 312. Sing. N. m. i. reduplicating class : clkyat, jdhat, j'uhvat, dddat,

bdpsat bibhyat, bibhrat. — 2. intensives : kdnikradat and dddhat, ( Ybhas-), kdnikrat, kdrikrat {kr- 'do') and {a-)cdrikrat (AV.), ghdnighnat and jdilghanat {Y han-), cdniscadat {Yscand-), cdrkrsat, cakasat {Ykas-), cdkitat (j^c/V-), idrbhurat, jcigrat, tdvitvat, ddrdrat, dMisat, didyat, ddvidyutat, dodhuvat, ddvidhvat, ndnadat, ndnnamat, pdniphanat, bhdribhrat, mdrmrjat, mdrmrsat, me'myat, rarajat, rMhat, roruvat, vdrivrjat, vdvadat, vdvidat, vhisat, sosucat, sdnisyadat {Ysyand-), sesidhat. — 3. non-reduplicating verbs: vaghdt, s'dsat; aor. ddksat and dhdksat. — N. A. n. I. jdgat, ddvidyutat, pepisat, ydyuvat (AV.). — N. f. vehdt (AV. VS.). A.m. 1. d-sascatam {1.112'^), dddatam, Mbhratam. — 2. kdrikratam{hN.), gdnigtnatam, dtdyatam, ndnadatam, pdnipnatam, rSruvatam (AV.). — f. a-saicdtam

(11. 3 2 3); vehdtam (AV.). I. m. dddata, sosucata. — f. a-sascdta. — n. jdgata (AV.).

D. m. 1. jujosate, juhvate, dddhate, bib/irate, sdkate. — 7,. ghdnighnate. — 3. vaghdte. — n. I. jdgate {KSf^. Ab. m. 2. kdnikradatas. G. m. I. jigatas, dddatas, dddhatas, bdpsatas. — 2. jdnghnatas, tdritratas, dodhatas, vevisatas. — 3. vaghdtas, sdsatas, dhdksatas (aor.). — n. i.jdgatas. — 2. a-vdrvrtatas (AV.), vdvadatas. — L. n. jdgati, Du. N. A.V. m. a-sascdta, bdpsata, bibhrata; tdritrata; sasata; dddhatau, bibhratau. — f. a-sascdta. — G. m. pipratos. PI. N. m. I. juhvatas, titratas, dddatas, dddhatas, pipratas, bdpsatas, bibhratas, sisratas'^. — 2. kdrikratas, j'dgratas, j'ohuvatas, ddvidhvatas, didhyatas, dddhatas, nonuvatas, mdrmrjatas, sSsucatas. — 3. ddsatas, vaghdtas. — {.a-sascdtas, vahdtas, sravdtas. — A. m.i. jdksatas ( l/^/zaj-). 1. j'dgratas (AV.), dddhatas (AV.), sdsvasatas, sdsucatas (AV.). — f. sascdtas; sravdtas. I. m. 2. ndnadadbhis, popruthadbhis, vdvadadbhis, sdsvasadbhis. — 3. vaghddbhts. — G. m. Jdgatam, bibhyatdm (AV.); vaghdtam. — f. sravdtam. V. m. jagatas, vaghatas. 313. Participles in -ant are formed from all present stems (except those of the reduplicating class and of intensives and the few others that follow their analogy), from all future stems, and from aorist stems. Their

analogy is followed by rhdnt- 'weak', pj-sant- 'spotted', brhdnt- 'great', riisant- 'brilhant', which have lost their participial function; also by ddnt-^ m. 'tooth'. The adjective mahdnt- 'great', having lost its original participial meaning deviates from the participial declension in lengthening the vowel of the suffix in the strong forms. In the inflexion of this group the distinction between

1 The f. of the regular participles is 5 This word is probably an old pres. formed by the suffix -i. participle of ad- 'eat', with prehistoric loss 2 But d-sascant-i from sdscat-. of the initial a like s-dnt- 'being' from.fw- 3 See below. Verb, 461. 'be' (25, I). The RV. has one transfer form, There occurs once an anomalous N. pi. N. dania-s (starting from the A. ddnt-am);

with -ant from a reduplicated stem : vavfdh- the AV. has others, ddntas and ddntais. dntas. See below, Perfect, 492, note on vdvfdhvams-. :

VI. Declension. Nouns. Consonant Stems. 191 strong and weak forms is regularly made, -ant appearing in the former only and being reduced to -at in the latter, which shift the accent, if resting on the suffix, to the| ending. These participles are declined in the m. and n. only, as they form a special f. stem in -r\ The m. and n. forms are the same, except of course in the N. A.; the former are very frequent, the latter rare.

Inflexion.

314. The forms occurring, if made from bhdvat- 'being', would be as follows

Sing, N.m. bhdvan ^ — n. bhdvat. — A. m. bhdvantam. — I. m. n. bhdvata. — D. bhdvate. — Ab. m. n. bhdvatas. — G. m. n. bhdvatas. — L. bhdvati. Du. N. A. V. m. bhdvanta and bhdvantau. — n. bhdvati. — D. bhdvad- bhyam. — G. m. n. bhdvatas.

PI. N. m. bhdvantas. — n. bhdvanti. — A. m. bhdvatas. — I. bhdvadbhis. — D. m. bhdvadbhyas. — Ab. m. bhdvadbhyas. — G. m. n. bhdvatam. — L. m. n. bhdvatsu. Forms actually occurring are the following. It is unnecessary to enumerate all the m. N. and A. forms, as in the RV. alone 228 forms of the N. sing., 121 of the A. sing., and 166 of the N. pi. 3 occur. Sing. N. m. Examples are: drcan, sidan; ghndn, ydn, sdn; pdsyan; icchdn; krnvdn, sunvdn; bhanjdn; jandn; jandyan; yuyutsan; karisydn. Also dan, 'tooth' "*; mahan^. — n. andt, dsat^, isndt, ejat, e'saf, kulaydyat, cdrat, citdyat, trpdt, dhrsdt, pdtat, patdyat, mindt, ydt, raghuydt, vdrdhat, sdmsat, Hksat, svdyat, sdt, sunvdt; adj. brhdt, mahdt, rusat; aor. sdksat (y'j-a/i-); fut. bhavisydt (AV.). As adv. with shift of accent: dravdt 'swiftly' {dru- 'run'}, drahydt 'firmly' (irregular formation from drh- 'be firm'). A.m. Examples are: cdrantam; ydntam, usdntam, sdntam; yudhyantam; vidhdntam; krnvdntam; prncdntam; grndntam; dltsantam; ddntam; brhdntam, mahdntam. 1. m. d-ghnata, dvata., d-sunvatd, cdrata, janati, tuj'atd, pusyata, bhindats, vanusyatd; data, syavd-data (AV.) 'dark-toothed', brhatd, mahatd, rusata. — n. d-drpyata, d-sredhata, d-hedata, dsata^, usatd, gavyats, tvayatd, dhrsatd (adv.), sucatd, sravasyatd, samaryata, sumnayatd; brhatd, mahatd, rusata. D. m. I. firom stems accented on the suffix: avasyate, asvayate, isayate, isudhyat^, isuyat^, usate, rjUyate, rtayate, kpwate, gavyate, grnat^, jurati, janati, tvdyate, devayate, dvisate, dhiyayate, dhunvate, prnate, prcchate, brahmanyate, mahayati, mdnavasyate, yajndyate, yate, vanvate, vidhate, srnvate, sravasyatd, sakhiyate, sati, sificati, sunvate, stuvate; rhate, brhate, mahatS; fut. avisyate. — n. sucate, sanayate. 2. from stems accented on the radical or the penultimate syllable: d-ghnate, a-coddte^, d-tninate, drcate, drhate, iyaksate, cdrate, cetate, tdrate.

1 On the difference in the form of this f. regarded by Benfey as N. sing. m. (Gottinger stem see 201, 377, 455, 461, etc. Nachrichten 1878, p. 190). 2 On the Sandhi of such nominatives see 6 For a-sai (vil. 10412); the Pada reads Lanman 506. asal. 3 Lists of the participle stems will be 7 The Pada reads a-hat (x. 8914). found below under each of the conjugational 8 Once (IV. 514) with lengthened initial for classes, under the secondary conjugations, a-sat-a 'not being', also once asatasi;ya.. 1048); and under the future. the Pp. has asata and asaiak. See Grass- 4 Occurring also in several compounds MANN, Worterbuch, under d-sat. a-ddn 'toothless', etc.; ubhay&-dam.(kN.v, 192) 9 Wrong accentuation (in v. 442) for must be emended to -dann. d-codaie; see Lanman 508 (top). 5 maham in II. 24", iv. 23', IX. 1097 is 192 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. Vedic Grammar.

trsyate, ddsate, fdcafe, pipTsate, pusyate, ydjate, yi'idhyati, rajate, risate, vddafe, sdmsate, sdrdhate, sisasate, hdryate; a-ddte'^ 'toothless'. Ab. I. m. krnvatds, prnatds, vanusyatas; brhatds. — n. brhatds, wahatds. — 2. m. d-bhuhjatas, d-vadatas, jighamsatas, risatas. — n. d-satas. G. m. I. aratJyatds, undatds, usatds, rgkSyaids, risyaids, krnvatds, ksiyatds, grnatds, tujatds, turatds, turanyatds, tvayatds, durhanayatds, dvisatds, dhrsatds, piiuyatds, prnatds, brahmanyatds, minatds, misatds, yatds, rudhatds, vapusyatds, vidhatds, sucatds, satds, saparyatds, sunvatds, stuvatds, huvatds; brhatds, mahatds; fut. karisyatds. 1. d-ghnatas, d-juryatas, d-bhunjatas, drcatas, d-sunvatas, inaksatas, cdratas, cetatas, jdyatas, jdratas, jigharnsatas, jij'yasatas, jivatas, turvatas, tfsyatas, didasatas, drdvatas, dhdmatas, dhrdjatas, piyatas, bhiisatas, yudhyatas, ririksatas, rebfiatas, vdyatas, vdrdhatas, ve'natas, sdrdhatas, socatas, sisasafas, sidatas, hdrsatas; n'csatas.

n. I. krpayatds, pranatds'^, misatds, yatds, satds; brhatds, mahatds. — 2. asatas^, cdratas, bhdvatas, ve'natas, sisasatas; ri'csatas. L. m. I. yati, sunvati; mahatl. — 2. irdyati, ubhaya-dati (AV.). —

n. I. mahatl. — 2. d-sati. Du. N. A. V. a) forms in -a. i. accented on the suffix: ainanta, irajydnta, usdnta, gmdnta'', gavydnta, dasasydnta, disdnta, duhdnts, pants, pundnta, prncdnta, bhujdnta, mindnta, misdnta, ydnta, yanta, vanvdnts, vasnay- dnta, vajaydntd, ly-dnta, vrdhdnta, srnvdnta, sdnta, saparydnta, sumnaydnta; brhdnta, brhanta (V.), mahdnta. — 2. accented on the penultimate or ante- penultimate: d-mardhanta, d-yatanta, drhanta, isdyanta, ksdyantS, cdranta, coddyanta, jandyanta, jdranta, drdvanta, dhdmanta, pardyantd, pipanta, mddanta, rddanta, vddanta, vdpants, vdhanta, vajdyanta, venanta, sddanta, sdpanta, sdhanta, sadhantl, hdyanta. b) forms in -au. i. ai7idntau, tirdntau, ydntau, vrdhdntau, sdntau; mahdiitau. — 2. isdyantau, kridantau, ksdyantau, mddantait (AV.), ydjantau, rAjantau. N. A. n. yatt; brhati. — D. m. mrdayddbhySm; mahddbhyam. — G. m. jdratos. — n. sam-yatos (AV.) 'going together'. PI. N. m. From the very numerous forms occurring the following may- be quoted: mddantas; gh7idntas, ydntas, sdntas; pdsyantas; icchdntas; bhinddntas; krnvdntas; gpidntas; devaydntas, vajaydntas; dipsantas^; aor. krdntas^, bkiddntasT pfsatas (VS. xxiv. maha.ntas'^. — V. usantas; mahantas. — ; 11), N. A. n. sdnti'^; brhdnti (AV. vm. g'), mahinti. A. m. I. usatds, rghdyatds, grnatds, tarusyatds, tvayatds, prnatds, prtanyatxs, bhandandyatds, manayatds, yatds, rudatds, vanusyatds, vajayatds, vidhatds, srnvatds, sravasyatds, srudhiyatds, sakhiyatds, satds, sasatds, stuvatds; brhatds, mahatds; datds. 2. d-prnatas, d-prayucchatas, drcatas, ksdyatas, dhdvatas, dhrdjatas, pdtatas, rdyatas, risatas, ri'iruksatas ( Yruh-^, vddatas, vrddhatas, sdrdhatas, sisrpsatas; syavd-datas (AV.).

1 On the accent see 90 B c. The dative ^ gmdntas should perhaps be read for of ad-dni- 'eating', would be ad-ai-i. gmdnta in I. 12211. 2 That is, pra-anatas. 7 On the anomalous N. pi. perf. participle, 3 For dsaias according to tlie Pada text. vavrdhdntas, see above p. igo, note 4. 4 Aor. participle of gam- 'go'. In one 8 ubhaya-datas in X. go'o is perhaps a,

passage (l. 122") the Pada reads gmanta; metrical shortening for -ifa»;'(Zj'; cp. Lanman the sense seems to require the pi. gmdntas. 509 (bottom). The AV. has the transfer form See Lanman 509. ddntds; cp. p. 190, note 5. 5 Desiderative of dabh- 'injure'; cp. Lan- 9 The Pada text reads sdnii; see RPr. man 508 (gen. masc). IX. 25. ;

"VI. Declension. Nouns. Consonant Stems. 193

I. m. d-nimisadbhis, d-prayucchadbhis, d-sredhadbhis, usddbhis, citdyad- bhis, tujdyadbhis, devayddbhis, dhdvadbhis, patdyadbhis, rebhadbhis, vddadbhis, vajayddbhis, vrdjadbhis, sucddb/iis, sucdyadbhis, subhdyadbhis, socadbhis; brhddbhis, mahddbkis, rusadbhis; dadb/iis^. — n. sucdyadbhis, standyadbhis brhddbkis, mahddbhis, rusadbhis. D. m. iisddbhyas, ksudhyadbhyas, grnddbhyas, tvayddbhyas, pdsyadbhyas, prayddbhyas, vddadbhyas, vdhadbhyas, sunvddbhyas; brhddbhyas, mahddbhyas; dadb^ds (AV.). — Ab. m. para-yddbhyas. G. m. I. adhvarJyatam, usatam, rjUyatdm, grnafdm, ghnatam, juratdm, devayatam, dvisatsm, yatdm, yatdm, vanusyatdm, vajayatam, satrUyatdm, srnvatdm, sravasyatdm, sakhTyatdm, satdm, sasatdm, sunvatdm, stuvatdm, sthatarn', brfiatdm, mahatdm; datdm (AV.). — 2. d-sunvatam, cdratam, jdyatam, nrtyatam, pdtatam, vivasatam, sdrdhatam. — n. ratkiraydtam^. L. m. gnuUsu, devaydisu, patdyatsu, mahdtsii. — n. j&ryatsu.

Stems in -mant and -vant.

315. As these two suffixes have the same sense, that of 'possessing', and are inflected exactly alike, the stems formed with them are best treated together in declension. These stems are used in the m. and n. only*, as

they form a separate f. by adding -r to the weak stem. They are inflected like the participles in -ant except that they lengthen the vowel of the suffix in the N. sing. m. and never shift the accent from the suffix to the ending in the weak cases. Strong and weak forms are as strictly distinguished as in the -an( stems s. The regular vocative of these stems ends in -mas and -vas in the RV., but the AV. has neither* in any in- dependent passage, and the VS. has only bhagavas and patnivas. The RV. has also three vocatives in -van, and the AV. adds five others; but no voc. in -man occurs. Three stems in -vant and one in -mant have case-forms supplementing the inflexion of stems in -an and forming transitions from the latter declension to the former. Thus from maghdvant- 'bountiful' alone are formed the pi. I.: maghdvadbhis, D. maghdvadbhyas, L. maghdvatsu; also the N. sing, maghdvan beside the usual tnaghdva from maghdvan-; from sdhavant- the N. sdhavan beside sahdva; from yuvant- 'young', the A. n. yuvat beside the N. m. yuvd; from varimdnt- the I. m. sing, varimdta beside forms from varimdn- 'width' 7,

Inflexion.

316. Sing. N.m. i. from stems in -vant: aksanvdn^, agnivdn, dngirasvan> dnnavan, d-pavtravan, dmavan, drvan, asirvan, idavan, isdvan, fghavan, etdvafi, kaksivan, ksapdvan and ksdpavan, ghfmvan, jdnivan, tdpasvdn, tarsydvdn, tdvasvdn, tdviswdn, tdvdn, tuvirdvSn^, tvdvan, damsdndvdn, ddksina-

1 The AV. (xi. 337) has the transfer form kratumata (x. 59'), N. du. m., indravatas (iv. dintais. 274), N. pi.; see Lanman 516. 2 From the aor. stem stJmt- 'standing'. 6 In AV. XIX. 348 the Mss. read bhagavas 3 With irregular accent on the suffix in- which is emended to samabJiavas in the stead of the ending, from rathird-yat-. printed text. 4 In two or three instances the m. form 7 On the other hand, arvant- 'steed', has seems to be used for the f., as havismata two forms representing a transition to the anidnam. {I. 1282) and rdthavate (l. 122"); see Lan- -an declension: N. arva, A. MAN 515 (bottom). 8 On the Sandhi of these forms, see Lan- 5 There seem, however, to be two or man 517. three instances of a weak form used instead 9 Probably for *iuvl-rdva-vdn. of a strong: ksuviati (iv. 218), A. pi. n., Indo-ariscbe Philologie. I. 4. 13 194 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Gr-\mmar.

van^, datravan, dsnavan, ddsvan, durhdndvan, devdvan, dev&van, dyumndvan, ndmasvan, niyutvan, nilavSn, pdyasvdn, pavHravdn, pdviravan, pastyavan, pi'iramdhivan, pusanvan, praj&van, prdyasvan, pravdtvan, prahAvan, bhdgavan, maghdvan, matdvan, matsardvan, mdnasvan, mari'dvan, mdhasvan, maydvdn, mahinavan, mehdndvan, ydsasvdn, yatumavan, rdbhasvdn, rdsavdn, revdn, vAjavdn, vajinivan, vivakvan, vivdsvan, vfsanvan, vrsnyavdn, sdcivdn, sarddvdn, sdsvan, sipravan, siprinivan, simTvdn, sdkhivan, sabksvan, sdrasvdn, sdhasvdn, sahavan and sdhavan, sutsvan, sunrtsvan, stavdn', svadh&vdn, svddhitivdn, svarvdn, hdrivan, hitdvdn, hemydva7i. 2. From stems in -/ufltnf: abdiman, dviman, asdniman, isuman, udanimSn, rbkumdn, kakudmdn, krdtuman, gari'itmdn, gStnan, iuvismdn, tvdstrmdn, tvisimdn, dyumdn, dhrdjiman, nadanumdn, parasumdn, pasumdn, pitumdn, barhismdn, mddhuman, vdsuman, viri'ikmdn, vrstimdn, sdrumdn, socisman, susumdn, havismdn, hiriman. N. A. n. I. apdsthdvat, dmavat, arcivdt, dsvavat, dsvdvat, atmanvdi, avftvat, iravat^ fghdvat, etdvat, ksditavat, gopsvat, grdbhanavat, ghrtdvat, candrdvat, tdvat, tokdvai, tvdvat, ddksinavai, dyumndvat, dhanavat, dhvas- manvdt, ndmasvat, nilavat, nrvdt, padvdt, pdyasvat, pastydvat, pfsadvat, prajdvat, barhdndvai, ydvat, yuvat^, rdthavat, rdsavat, revdt, vayunavat, vayundvat, vdjavat, vipfkvat, vivdsvat, visdvat, vTrdvat, satdvat, s'apkdvat, sdsvat^, sahdsravat, sdhasvat, sinavat, svarvat, hiranyavat. 2. abkistimdt, rbhumdt, ketumdt, krdtumat, ksumdt, gomat, jyotismat, tvisTmat, dasmdt, ddnumat, dyumdt, nidhimdt, pasumdt, pitumdt, pustimdt, mddhumat, manyumdt, ydvamat, rayimdt, vdsumat, svastimdt. A. m. I. apidhdnavantain, apupdvantam, drvaniam, dsvdvantam, asthan- vdntam, dtmanvdntam, indrasvantam^, urjasvantam, lirndvantam, eidvajitam. enasvantam, ojasvantam, omanvantam, omydvantam, kaksivanta?n, ghrtdvantam, ddsvantam, devdvantam, dhdndvantam, dhivantam, nrvdntam, padvdntam, pdrasvantam, prajdvantam, bhdsvantam, marutvantam, mdhisvantam, rdina- vantam, revdntam, vapdvantam, vaydvantam, vdjavantam, vdravantam, vivas- vantam, virdvantam, vfsanvantam, satdvantam, sdsvantam, sacandvantam, sdrasvantam, hdrivantam, hdstavantam, hiranyavantam. 2. rbhumdntam, kdnvamaniam, ketutndntam, ksumdntam, gomantam, jyotismantam, tdvinmantam, dyumdntam, nidhimdntam, piiumdntam, bdndhu- tnantam, bhdnumdntam, mddhumantam, vdsumantam, vdsimantam, vrstimdntam, srustimdntam, havismantam, fiotrmantam. 1. I. m. drvatd, dsvdvatd, udanvdtd, fkvata, kaksivata, niyt'itvatd, nrvdtd, marutvatd, ydsasvatd, revdtd, visvddevyavatd, visuvdtd, subhrdvata, sdhasvatd. — n. etdvatd, candrdvata, prajdvatd, barhdndvatd, vivdsvatd, sunrtdvata, hdrit- vatd, sdsvata. 2. m. gomatd, jyotismatd, divitmats, dyumdtd, bhrstimdtd, varimdtd^, vdsumata, viriikmata, havismatd. — n. divitmatd, viriikmatd, havismatd; as adv. sdsvata'^. D.i.m. drvate, dsvdvate, kaksivate, afe'te'wSz'a^^ 'adroit' and 'bestowing gifts', datvdte, ddsvate, niyutvate^, pusanvdte, maridvate, mdvate, yuvdvaie, rdihavate'^,

1 Representing two words : I. 'dexterous' 6 Transfer form from the -an stem {daksina- 'right hand'); 2. 'possessing sacri- variman-. fical gifts' [daksina-). 7 See Lanman 518 (bottom).

2 To be read siavan 'thundering', from 8 Erronously unaccented (l. 135'). ystan-; see Grassmann, s. v. 9 The f. raihavatyai should perhaps be read 3 Transfer form from the -an stem j/uz)an-. for rathavate in I. 122^1, as the latter form 4 Also the Amredita compound idsvac- agrees with a f. substantive, and the former chahiai, is favoured by the metre; cp. Lanman 5 19. 5 With the N. -j- anomalously retained. VL Declension. Nouns. Consonant Stems. 195

vivdsvate and vhasvaie, sdclvate, idsvate, sdhasvate, sunrtsvate, svarvate, hdrivate. — n. padvdte, revdte, sdsvate. 2. m. gdmaie, cdksusmate, ^ tvisTmate, divitmate, dyumdie, barhismate, kavismate. Ab. I. m. tvavatas, vivdsvaias, vfsnyavaias. G. I. m. drvatas, dsvavatas, kaksivatas, jdvatas, tvavatas, dadhanvdtas'-, dasvatas, devdvatas, dhivatas^, niyutvatas, nrvdtas, prajavatas, marutvatas, mavatas, mehdnavatas, ydiasvatas, revdtas, vdyasvatas, vsjavatas, vivdsvaias and vivasvatas, virdvatas, sdcivatas, sdsvatas, sdrasvatas, sdhasvatas, sutdvatas, surdvatas, svadhdvatas, hfsivatas. — n. etdvatas, ydvatas, visuvdtas, sdsvatas. 2. m. ksumdtas, gomatas, dyumdtas, havismatas. — n. gdmatas. L. I. m. drvati, ddksinavati 'bestowing gifts', nrvdti, pastyhvati, ydsas- vatif vdnanvati, vivdsvati and vivasvati, saryandvati. — n. dsvavati, simivati, svarvati. — 2. m. gomati. V. m. I. The normal form in -vas'^ occurs in sixteen examples: rsivas, gnavas'^, tavistvas, niyutvas, patntvas (VS.), bhagavas (VS. TS.), marutvas, rayivas, vajrivas, viravas, saktivas, sacTvas, sarasvas, sahasvas, svadhavas, harivas. — Of the later V. ending in -van, the RV. has three examples: arvan, satavan^, iavasavan. In the AV. the following five additional forms occur: marutvan^, vajinivan, vrsnyavan, svadhavan, harivan^. The MS. has patnivanT. — 2. There are six examples of the form in -mas: tuvismas, dyumas, bhamtmas, mantumas, sucismas, havismas. — No vocative form in -7nan occurs. Du. N. A. V. m. I. with -a: dngirasvanta, dnasvanta, drvanta, indra- vanta, kdsavanta, kesavanta, dhdrmavanta, ndmasvanta, niyi'ttvanta, pavitra- vanta, mari'itvantd, mitravdrimavanta, vdjavantd, visnuvanta, vydcasvanta, sdsvanta^, sdptivanta; with -au: asthtvdntau, ydvaniau (AV.), romanvantau, sdhasvantau (AV.), V. svddhdvantau (AV.). — 2. arcimdnta, rbhumdnta, krdtumanta^, vadhftmantd. Ab. I. m. asthivddbhydm. — G. i. m. vdjinivatos, simtvatos, sdrasvatwatos. Plur. N. V. m. i. aksanvdntas, dnasvantas, dmavantas, drvantas, dsva-

vantas, asirvantas, iddvantas, indravantas, mdravantas (TS.iv. y. 14^)^°, lirjas- vantas, enasvantas, kaksivantas, kdrnavantas, ghrtdvantas, casdlavantas, ddkdnavantas'\>^^\amag^i\£, dsmanvantas, duvasvantas (VS.xvi. 6$), drdvinas- vantas, dhtvantas, ndmasvantas, niyutvantas, nrvdntas, pdtnivantas, padvdntas, pdyasvantas (VS.xx1.42), pavitravantas, pdjasvantas, pustdvantas, pUsanvdntas, prajdvantas, prdyasvantas, pravdivantas, bhdgavantas, mari'itvantas, mdhasvantas (VS.xx1.42), yajndvantas, vacandvantas, vdyasvantas (VS.iii. 18}, vdrmanvantas, virdvantas, vrctvantas, sdktlvantas, sdsvantas, simivantas, sdptTvantas, sutd-

vantas, srkdvantas (TS. iv. 5. 11^), svadhdvantas (V.), svdrva?itas, himdvantas, kfsivantas. 2. anjimdntas, dyusmantas (TS.), isumantas, rstimdntas, ksumdntas,j'ydtis- mantas, tvdsirmantas (VS.xxvii. 20), tvisimantas, dyumdntas, mddhumantas,

1 'containing curds'; cp. Lanman 513. 5 The Pada text reads sata-van; cp. RPr. 2 Also the Amredita compound dhivato- IX. 10. dkvuaias. 6 These two forms occurring in passages 3 Elsewhere ten vocatives in -vas and -mas taken from the RV. are substituted for occur: five from perfect participle stems in marutvas and harivas of the RV. -vams: khidvas, cikiivas, titirvas, didivas, 7 That is, patnlvdin. midhvas; four from stems ending in -van: 8 The mysterious form satapanta (x. 106^) riavas, evayavas, p-atarituas, matarihas; and should perhaps be corrected to sdtavanta = pumas from pumdms-. There are also two saia-vanld ? in -yas from comparative stems in -yavis: 9 The weak form kratuviatd seems to be ojiyas and jyayas. used for kratumantd in x. 591. 10 4 In II. l5 gnmjos should probably be read The weak form indrdvatas seems to be gnavas as a vocative. used for indravantas in IV. 27 . 13* 196 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

yavamantas, rayimantas, vadhihnantas, vdstmantas, sisumanias, midhusmantas, sthivimdntas, harmmdntas, havismantas. N. A. n. 1. ghrtdvanti. — 2. pasumdnti. The Padapatlia reads -afiti ' in these forms, and the lengthening of the vowel seems to be metrical ^ — The weak form ksumdti (used with, yuthd) seems to be used for ksumdnti in iv. 2'*. A. m. I. drvatas, indravatas, rtviyavatas, krsandvatas, jdnivatas, tdpas- vatas, trsydvatas, tvavatas, nrvdtas, pdtnTvatas, pdrasvatas (VS. xxiv. 28) 'wild asses', pastyavatas, posyavatas, prajavatas, bhanguravatas, ydsasvaias, yatuma- vatas, rdbhasvatas, rayivdtas, revdtas, vdnanvatas, vfctvaias, saryandvatas, sdsvatas, simTvatas, stddvatas, sUnrtdvatas, hiranyavatas, Msasvatas. — 2. rtumdtas (VS. xix. 61), gjmatas, jyotismatas, dyumdtas'^, prdsiimatas, mddhumatas, vadhAmatas, virnkmatas, stlnutndias, svastimdtas. I. I. m. drvadbhis, ddksinavadbhis, pdtmvadbkis, maghdvadbhis'', rdbhas- vadb/tis, revddbhis, vdjavadbhis, sdsvadbhis, simlvadbhis, sutdsomavadbhis. — n. ghrtdvadbhis. — 2. m. rstimddbhis, krldumddbhis, gomadbhis, barhls- madbhis, bkanumddbhis, vidyumiiadbhis, havismadbJiis. — n. mddhumadbhis.

D. I. m. dicvasvadbhyas (VS.ix. 35), bhdgavadbhyas{PiS[.), maghdvadb/iyas^, mujavadbhyas (AV.), somavadbhyas (AV.). — 2. m. asimddbhyas (VS.XVI. 21), isumadbhyas (VS. xvi. 22), matrmddbhyas (AV.), yltumddbhyas. — n. vibhu- mddbhyas.

G. m. I. drvatatn, ddksinavata7n, datvdtam (AV.), bhangurdvatam, yatumd- vaiam, sdsvatam, simTvatam, sutdvatam, himdvatatn (AV.). — 2. gdmaiam(AY.). L. m. I. dmavaisu, drvatsu, magkdvatsu^, yusmdvatsu. — 2. dyumdtsu.

Stems in radical -th.

317. There are only three stems in -th: kdprth-^ n. 'penis', path-^ m. path', with its compound su-pdth- .'fair path', and abhi-sndth- adj. 'piercing'. Among them these three furnish examples of all the cases in the singular, but there are no dual forms, and in the plural only the A. and G. occur.

Sing. 'H. kdprt; K.kdpri''; I. paikd^, supdtha; D. pat/ttf (VS.); Ab. pathds, abhi-sndtkas; G. pathds^; L. pathl. — PI. A. pathds^°; G. pat/idm^'^.

Stems in radical -d,

318. About a hundred stems ending in d are made in the form of compounds (only seven being simple stems) from the twenty roots aif- 'eat', ksad-

'divide', chad- 'cover' and 'please', pad- 'go', mad- 'be exhilarated', sad- 'sit', syad- 'move on'; chid- 'cut off', nid- 'revile', bhid- 'cleave', vid- 'know', vid- 'find'; ud- 'wet', ttud- 'push', mud- 'rejoice', rud- 'weep', sud- 'enjoy', sUd-

1 As also in the only N. pi. n. of the but it is suffixal if the word is connected present part, in -anl, santi (3 14). The SV. with Lat. caper (cp. Uhlenbeck, Etymo- also has the short a. logisches Worterbuch, s. v.). With this 2 Cp. Lanman 521. possible exception there are no derivative 3 In VI. 1714 the Padapatlia reads dyumata stems in -th. indra as dyumatah; Grassmann explains it 6 This stem supplements paniha- and as a D. dyumatc agreeing with rayi. On palhi-. the other hand dyuinanta\Ji\ in AV. xvni. 7 kapfthd-m occurs once as a transfer form. 1^7 should probably be emended to 8 Once (i. 1299) nasaliaed before a vowel dyumatah; cp. Whitney's note, and Lanman patham a-. 9 Once (11. 24) with the radical vowel 4 Forms transferred from the -van de- lengthened, pathas. clension. 10 Accented as a weak form. 5 The derivation of this word is uncertain: 'I The transfer form paihTndm also occurs the -th is radical if the word is derived in TS. IV. 2. 55. from prath- 'extend' (see Grassmann, ». v.); ^

VI. Declension. Nouns. Consonant Stems. 197

'put in order'; trd- 'pierce', mrd- 'crush". Of tliese roots only seven occur as monosyllabic substantives: nid- 'contempt', bhid- 'destroyer', vid- 'knowledge', lid- 'wave', mi'id- 'joy', mrd- 'clay', being f., and pad- 'foot', m. There is also the monosyllabic n. hfd- 'heart' Strong and weak forms are not distinguished except in pad-; and the inflexion is the same in all genders except, of course, the N. A. n. du. and pi.

a. The following pecularities or irregularities of tliis declension are to be noted. I. The weak reduplicated present stem dad- of da- 'give', is once treated as a root in the form dyur-ddd-am (AV.) 'giving long life'. — 2. The vowel of mad- is lengthened in sadha-mdd- 'drinking companion', and so?>ia-m&d- 'intoxicated with Soma', of both of which, however, only strong cases occur. The vowel of pad- is lengthened not only in the strong cases, but occasionally in others also: dvipat, N. sing, n., beside dvipdt,

D. dvipadei, L. pi. dvipdtm, while the N.pl. m. is once dvipddas {KSI.). — 3. The euphonic combination is irregular in the I. pi. ai pad- which is padbhis'' — beside the Ab. &u. pad- bhyam. • 4. The stem hfd- is found in weak cases only^. Its place is taken in the N. A. sing. pi. by hfd-aya-, which is also used in other cases {hfdaydt, hfdaye, kfdayesu), though in the RV. almost entirely in late passages. — 5. There are ii few transitions to the a-declension in the inflexion of these stems. Starting from the strong A. pad-am are formed the N. ^vag. pada-s and the N.pl. pddas, both in late passages of the RV.6. Similarly, starting from the A. sadha-mdd- am are formed the locatives sadha-made and sadha-mhdesu. Beside nid-as, the ordinary Ab. of nid-, the form nidayas occurs once.

Inflexion.

319. The inflexion of these stems is identical with that of the radical -i stems. The forms actually occurring, if made from pad- 'foot', and -vld-

m. f. n. 'finding', would be as follows: Sing. N. pit, -vtt. — A. pddam, -vidam. — n. -vH. — I. padd, -vida. — D. pade, -vide. — Ab. padds, -vidas. — G. padds, -vidas. — L. padi, -vidi. — V. {sdrva)-vit. — Du. N. A. V. psda, m. i. -vi'da. — I. padbhydm. — Ab. padbhydm. G. padds. — L. pados.

PI. N. pddas, m. f. -vidas. — A. padds, m. f. -vidas. — I. padbhis (AV.), -vidbhis. — D. -vidbhyas. — G. paddm, -vidam. — L. patsu, -vitsu. a. The forms actually occurring are the following: Sing. N. m. i. with lengthened vowel: pdd- with its compounds and sadha-mdd-: pdt (AV.); a-pdt, eka-pat, eka-iiti-pat (VS. xxix. 58) 'having one white foot', cdtus-pat, tri-pdt, dvi-pdt and dvi-pat (AV.), viivdtas-pat, siti-pdt {KSf^, sdrva-pat (AV.), sahdsra-pat; sadha-mat (iv. 21') and the abnormal sadha-mds'' (vii. 18'). 2. with unchanged vowel, being compounds ending in various roots: 8''), visvdt, havyat; from from ad- : agdhdt (TS. iii. 3, karambhdt, kravydt, chad- -.prathamacchat^; from pad- : anu-pdt (VS.xv.8) 'coming to pass'; from gotra-bhit, pur-bhit; from chid- : ukha-cchit; from bhid- : adri-bhit, ud-bhit, vid-: d-ksdra-vit, as'va-vit, Jzratu-vit, ksetra-vit, gatu-vit, go-vit, dravino-vit,

I -vid -sad 5 Its high grade form -hard occurs in the Compounds formed with and \ N. sing. m. are the commonest. ; 2 The strong form of this word, hard-, 6 Probably also the A. sing. m. panca- 1 appears in composition with dus- and su-. padam; see Lanman 47 2. Another word for 'heart', srad- (Lat. cord-) 7 See above 55. 8 (x.8li); n. occurs only in the A. sing, with the verbs 'appearing first', 'typical' accord- kr- and dha-. ing to Sayana from chad- 'cover' = 'covering 3 The lengthening here is, however, first'. metrical. 4 Owing to the confusing influence of the I. pi. padbhis from pas- 'look'. igS I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

nabho-vit, natha-vit (AV.), pasu-vh (AV.), purana-v'it (AV.), praja-vit (AV.), rayi-v'it, vaco-vit, vayund-vlt, varivo-vit, vasu-v'it, visva-v'tt, vXra-vit (AV.),

sruta-vit, sarua-vit (AV.), svar-v'it, hiranya-v'it; from sad- : adma-sdt, antariksa- sdt, upastha-sdt, rta-sdt, turanya-sdt, daish/a-sdi {YS. xxKvm. 10), durona-sdt, duvanya-sdt, pragharma-sdt, 7>ara-sdt, vyotna-sdt, su-sam-sdt; camU-sdt, dru-sdt,

nr-sdt, vedi-sdt, suci-sdt. Also su-kdri^ (AV. 11. 7^) 'friendly'.

f. I. a-pdt. — 2. a-cchdt (VS. xv. 5), pra-cchdt (VS. xv. 5) 'covering'; su-yavasst (-ad); sain-v'it; sam-sdt, su-a-sdt (AV.)'. N. A. n. I. -pad- appears with both unaltered and lengthened vowel: dvi-pdt, cdtus-pat and tri-pst, dvi-pat, cdtus-pat. 2. hrt (TS. IV. 4. 7'); prakala-vit 'knowing very little'; raghu-sydt 'moving

quickly' (j\fsyad-). A. in. I. pddam; a-pAdam, tri-pddam^, dvi-padam (VS. xm. 47), Uti- pddam (AV.), sahdsra-psdam; sadha-mddam; dur-hArdatn (AV.). — 2. from

ad- : kravysdam, vihddam; from pad- : dvi-pddam (VS. xxviii. 32) a metre

from chid pra-cchidam (VS. xxx. 16) 'cutting to pieces'; from bhid- : ud-bh'idam. :

gotra-bkldam, pur-bh'idam \ from vid- : ahar-v'idam, kratu-vidam, ksetra-vidam gatu-vldam, go-v'idam, varivo-vidam, vasu-vldam, visva-vidam, saci-vidam, svar-

vldam, hotra-vldam; from sad- : garta-sddam, su-sam-sddam; apsu-sddam, dru

sddam, dhur-sddam, barhi-sddam'' , vanar-sddam; from -syad- : rag/tu-syddam havana-syddam. — f. 2. n'ldam^, mrdam (VS. xi. 55; TS. iv. 1.5'); ayur-dddani (AV.)^, upa-sddam, go-vidam (AV.), ni-v'idam, pari-pddatn 'snare', pari-sddam (Av.), pitr-sddam, barhi-sddam'', vaco-vidam, visva-vidam, sam-^uidam, sam- sddam, sa-mddam 'battle' ('raging together').

I. m. pad&T ; dpa-dtis-pada, cdtus-pads, dvi-pdda; ksetra-vida, varivo-v'ids,

svar-vida, su-sdda (AV.). — f. uda, mudS, vida; upa-vida, ni-vida, Jii-sdda, pra-muda (VS. xxxix. 9), pra-vida, sam-sdda, svar-vida. — n. hrda; cdtus- pada (AV.), dus-pdda, dvi-pdda. With adverbial shift of accent: sarva-hrda. D. m. a-pdde, kuhacid-vlde, kravyAde, cdtus-pade, tad-vide (AV.), vedi- sdde, sadana-sdde, sarva-vide (AV.), svar-vide. — f. nide^ mudd; pitr-sdde,

pra-mdde (VS. xxx. 8), pra-mude (VS. xxx. 10), sam-pdde (VS. xv. 8). — n. lirde; cdtus-pade, dvi-pdde^.

Ab. m. padds (AV.); dvi-pddas. — f. nidds'^; uttand-padas, sam-vldas (Av.). — n. hrdds; sdt-padas (AV.). G. m. ika-padas (AV.), dur-hardas (AV.), nr-sddas, yavAdas {-adas),

raghic-syddas (AV.), siiar-vidas. — f. pra-mudas, sain-sddas (AV.). — n. hfdds; cdtus-padas, dvi-pddas.

L. m. padl; svar-v'idi. — f. ni-sddi, sam-sddi. —• n. hrdl^°. V. m. visva-vit, sdrva-vit (AV.). Du. N. A. V. m. I. pAda; pAdau. — 2. V. ahar-vida, kavi-cchdda 'delight-

' This seems to be the preferable reading 6 From a secondary root dad- formed (suh&rt tend); the Pada has su-hah. Other- from the present stem of da- 'give'. wise the N. appears as su-har in MS. IV. 2' 7 BR. take sddd in AV. IV. 47 as I. of (p. 26, 1. 19) in suhar nah; see LaNMAN's sad- 'position', but owing to the accent it note in Whitney's AV. Translation on xix. must be taken as an adv. 'always', see 452, and Grammar 150 b. Whitney's note on the passage.

2 Perhaps also nisdi in AV. XX. 1326- 7, 8 Beside dvi-pade occurring eleven times, where the edition has vanlsdd. dvi-pade occurs once (I. 121^), when the 3 pdnca-pada-m (l. 16412) is probably a lengthening is metrical. transfer to the a-declension; see Lanman 9 The transfer form n'lddyas occurs once, 4712. 'o On the possibility of hrdi representing 4 For barhis-sddam; see above 62. an A. sing. n. in two or three passages, see 5 In the Amredita compound nldam- Lanman 4731. nidam. VI. Declension. Nouns. Consonant Stems. 199 ing in sages', kratu-vida, vasu-vida, — visva-vida, svar-vida'' ; atma-sddau.

f. ud-bhida, barhi-sddd^ \ sranta-sddau (AV.). I. m. padbhydm (AV.). — Ab. m, padbhyam. — G. m. padSs (AV.) \ — L. m. pados. — f. prd-pados (AV.).

PI. N. V. m. I. a-pddas, cdtiis-padas, dvi-padas^, siti-psdas^ ; sadha- midas, soma-mSdas] su-hdrdas (AV). — 2. lirjadas, puru-sddas, madhv-ddas, yavasddas, somddas, havir-ddas; d-tfdas^, V. pra-trdas; deva-nidas; ud-bhidas; obhTmoda-mudas (AV.), svadu-sam-mudas (AV.); anna-vidas (AV.), ahar-vidas, V. gatu-vidas (AV.)j ni-vidas (AV), ni-vidas (AV.), nitha-vidas, brahma-vidas (AV.), yajur-vidas (AV.), vaco-vidas, varivo-vidas, vasu-vidas, viha-vidas (AV.), svar-vidas, kotra-vidas; adma-sddas, antariksa-sddas (AV.), apsu-sddas (TS. I. 4. 10^), upa-sddas (AV.), pascat-sddas (VS. ix. 36), purah-sddas, sartna-

sddas, sabha-sddas (AV.), svadu-sam-sddas ; camu-sddas, divi-sddas (AV.),

dhur-sddas, barhi-sddas, V. barhi-sadas, vanar-sddas, vedi-sddas (VS. 11. 29); raghu-syddas. — f. I. dur-hdrdas {KSf^; nidas, mudas; agha-rudas (AV.), amddas {-ddas), upa-sddas (AV.), nis-pddas, pra-mi'cdas, visva-su-vidas, sam- sddas, suhutddas {-ddas), svar-vidas. A. m.7 padds; dur-hdrdas (AV.), su-hdrdas (AV.); apsu-sddas (AV.), kravyddas, cdtus-padas (AV.), tva-nidas, deva-nidas, dvi-pddas (AV.), /ar?-

sddas, pastya-sddas, bahu-ksddas, sattra-sddas (AV.). — f. nidds, bhidas; ni-vidas, pra-tnudas, vasu-vidas, vi-niidas, sa-mddas, sa-syddas, havya-sudas. I. m. padbhis (AV. TS. VS.), padbhis in RV. and VS. 8; gharma-sddbhis, satd-padbhis. — n. hrdbhis. D. m. antarikm-sddbhyas (AV.), daksina-sddbhyas (VS. ix. 35), ^zV?- sddbhyas (AV. TS.), pascat-sddbhyas (VS. ix. 35), prthivi-sddbhyas (AV.). G. m. su-hdrdam (AV.); adma-sddam, cdtuspadam (VS. TS. AV.),

L. m. patsu. — f. sa-mdtsu. — n. hrtsu.

Steins in derivative -d,

320. There are some six stems formed with suffixal -d, seemingly all feminines 9, which with one exception {sardd-) are of rare occurrence. They are drsdd- and dhrsdd- (RV^) 'nether millstone', bhasdd- 'hind quarters', with its compound su-bhasdd- 'having beautifiil buttocks', vandd-'^° (RV'.) 'longing', sardd- 'autumn'; kakud-^'^ 'summit', with its compound tri-kakud- (AV.) 'three- peaked', kakud- 'palate'. The inflexion is like tiiat of radical -/ stems. The forms occurring are the following:

Sing. N. f. ka/kiit, kakut, dhrsdt, bhasdt, sardt. — m. tri-kakut (VS. AV.).

1 xvui. 2^4 occurs the ungramma- (xxm. 13) owing to confusion with padbhis, In AV. 1 pathi-sadi an imitation of fathi- I. pi. of pas- 'look'. tical form \ rdksi of RV. X. \^'^. 9 Except the adj. iri-kakud- (AV.), Hti- I 2 The form rapsudd, occurring once, is of kakud- (TS.) 'white-humped' and possibly uncertain meaning and origin, vanad-. 1° 3 This form is used with an ablative This stem occurs only once (n. 4^) in sense in AV. I. 182. the form vanadas, N. pi. m. 'Verlangen' (from 4 AV. X. 26 has dvi-pddas. van- 'desire') according to BR.; G. sing. m. 5 The transfer form padds occurs once in of van-ad- 'wood-consuming' according to the RV. (I. 1639). Grassmann. 6 Used as ablative infinitive. II The origin of this -d is obscure. On 7 There are no N. A. V. forms in the the relation of this word to kakuik- see n. pi. Cp. Lanman 474. Lanman 471*. 8 Four times in RV. and once in VS. 20O I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

A.f. kaki'idam, drsddam, bhasddam (AV.), sarddam. — m. tri-kakudam (AV.). I. f. drsdda, safdda (TS. iv. 4. 122). — D. f. sardde. — Ab. f. kakudas.

— L. f. kakudi ^{AN' sarddi. — PL N. f. vanddas, sarddas. — f. iarddas. .), A. — I. f. iarddbhis. — G. f. sarddam (AV.). — L. f. sardtsu (AV.).

Stems in radical -dh.

2,7.1. Stems ending in -dk are all radical, simple or compound. There are some fifty derived, with only two or three exceptions, from the following sixteen roots; badh- 'oppress', sad/i- 'succeed'; idh- 'kindle', vidk- 'pierce'

(^ vyadh-), sidh- 'succeed', sridh- 'blunder' (?); ksudh- 'be hungry', budh- 'waken', yudh- 'fight', rudh- 'grow' and 'obstruct'; rdh- 'thrive', mrdh- 'neglect', vrdh- 'grow', sprdh- 'contend'. In this declension there occurs no stem distinguishing strong and weak cases. Masculines and feminines are inflected exactly alike. No distinctively neuter forms (N. A. du. pi.) occur, and only four case-forms (G. L. sing.) are found as neuters. There are two monosyllabic m. nouns: vfdh- 'strengthening' and (perhaps) badh-'-; besides seven f substantives: nddh-^ 'bond'; sridh- 'foe'; ksudh- 'hunger', yudh- 'fight'; mfdh- 'conflict', vfdh- 'prosperity', spfdh- 'battle'.

Neuter cases occur in the sing. (I. G.) of compounds of -vidh, -yudh, and -vrdh.

a. Three or four stems are of doubtful origin : agnidh- is probably to be explained as agni-dh- 'priest who prepares (dka- 'put') the fire', rather than as a shortened form of agnidh- 'fire-kindler' (from idh- 'Icindle') which does not occur in the RV. ^; isidh- 'offering' (RVi.) is perhaps a shortened form of nis-sidh- 'offering"*; prksudh- (RV'.) is obscure in meaning and origin; iurudh- f. 'invigorating draught' is perhaps derived from srdh- 'be defiant' with Svarabhakti ^. Inflexion.

322. Sing. N. m. agnit, anu-rut (VS.) and anu-ri'it 'loving'; usar-bhiit

'waking {budh-) at morn', yaviyiit^ 'eager to fight', sva-vit {KSI . VS.) 'porcupine' ('dog-piercer', Yvidh-), sam-it 'flaming'. — f. ksut (AV.); pra-vft 'growth', vt-rut 'plant' (AV.), sam-iV 'fuel'. A. m. vfdham, and its compounds: anna-vfdham 'prospering by food', ahutl-vrdham 'delighting in sacrifices', gira-vfdham 'delighting in praise', tugrya- vfdham 'favouring the Tugryas', namo-vfdham 'honoured by adoration', payo- vrdham 'full of sap', parvata-vfdham 'delighting in pressing stones', madhu- vfdham 'abounding in sweetness', yajna-vfdham (AV.) 'abounding in sacrifice', vayo-vfdham 'increasing strength', sadyo-vfdham 'rejoicing every day', saho- vrdham 'increasing strength', su-vrdham 'joyous'; agnidham, anu-rudham (VS. XXX. 9), a-sridham 'not failing', usar-budham, gosu-yudham^ 'fighting for kine', marma-vidham (AV.) 'piercing the vitals', yajna-sddham 'performing sacrifice', hrdaya-vidham (AV.) 'wounding the heart'. — f. ksudham, yudham, sridham; a-sridham, usar-biidham, nis-sidham, vTrudham, sam-riidham (AV.) 'check' (in gambling) 9, sam-idham. I. m. su-vfdha. — f. ksudhd (AV.), yudhd, vrdha; sam-idha, su-bi'idha (AV.) 'good awakening', su-vfdha (AV.), su-sam-idha 'good fuel'. — n. payo- vfdha, yavtyudha, sakain-vfdha 'growing together'.

• I In badhas A. pi. in VI. Ili (Grassmann); 3 See above p. 18, note 6. BR. do not acknowledge a m. use of bhdh-, 4 Cp. is-kfti- for nis-krii-. and in VIII. 4510, ix. 1096 they would join 5 Cp. above 21. the word with the preceding pari. fi From the intensive stem oiyudh- 'fight'. 2 In nddbhyas (x. 606) if derived from 7 In the Amredita samit-samii. nadh- = nah- 'bind' (BR. s. v. ndh-); but it 8 With the L. pi. gosu instead of the is more probably = *ndbd-bhyas from napt-, stem go-. weak stem of ndpat-, as also indicated by 9 Cp. Whitney's note on AV. vn. 50^. the accent. VI. Declension. Nouns. Consonant Stems. 201

D. m. usar-budhe, rta-vrdhe 'fostering truth', puru-nissidhe 'repelling many (foes)', mahi-vfdhe 'greatly rejoicing', vi-infdhe (VS. viii. 44) 'dispeller of foes', sam-fdhe (AV.) 'welfare', sa-vrdhe (VS. xvi. 30) 'growing'. — f. ksudhe, yudM (AV.)% vrdhS, sam-idhe. Ab. f. ksudhds, yudkds, sridhds. G. m. gosu-yudhas, vi-mrdkds'- 'foe', sumatv-vrdkas (VS. xxir. 12) 'delighting in prayer'. — f. ksudhds. — n. hrdaya-vidhas. L. f. mrdki, yudhi, sprdhi; pra-h'idhi 'awaking'. Du. N. A. V. m. a-sridha, rta-vfdha, V. rta-vrdka, namo-vfdhs, puro- yudha 'fighting in front'; rta-vfdhau. — f. fdu-vfd/iS 'increasing sweetness', ghrta-vfdha 'rejoicing in fatness', payo-vrdha, vayo-ifdha, sakam-vfdha; sam-idhau (AV.). PI. N.V. m. rta-vfdhas, V. rta-vrdhas, tugrya-vfdhas, payo-vfdhas, parvata- vfdhas, vayo-vfdhas, J-w^^-w/^/^aj 'rejoicing in good progress', su-vfdAas; a-sridhas, ayur-yudhas (VS. xv:. 60) 'struggling for life', usar-biidhas, gosu-yudhas, jnu- badhas 'bending the knees', pra-yudhas 'assailing', vrsa-yudhas 'combating men', surMhas, soma-pari-badhas 'despising Soma'. — f. ksiidhas (AV.), mfdhas, spfdhas, sridhas (VS. xxvii. 6) 'foes'; amitra-yudhas 'fighting with enemies', a-sridhas, isidhas, rta-vfdhas, nis-sidhas, pari-bddhas 'oppressors', pari-spfdhas 'rivals', vT-rudhas, V. vT-7-udhas, surudhas, sam-idhas. A. m. badhas; rta-vfdhas, tamo-vfdhas 'rejoicing in darkness', rayi-vfdhas

'enjoying wealth', usar-budhas, suri'idhas. — f. mfdhas, ytidhas, spfdhas, sridhas^; vT-ri'idhas, surudhas, sam-idhas, sam-fdhas, sa-vfdhas 'increasing together' +.

I. f. sam-idbhis, vJ-rudbhis (AV.). — D. f. ndd-bhyas^. — Ab. f. vi- rt'tdbhyas (AV.).

G. m. vrdhdm; rta-vfdham, pra-budham 'watchful'. — f. yudham^ (AV.), sprdham; nis-sidham, vT-ri'idham, vT-rudham^ (AV.).

L. f. yutsu, vT-rutsu.

Stems in radical -n.

323. The radical stems ending in -n are formed from half a dozen roots: from tan- 'stretch', ran- 'rejoice', van- 'be pleasant', are formed monosyllabic substantives meaning 'succession', 'joy', 'wood', respectively; from svan- 'sound' is formed the adj. svan-^ 'sounding' and the compound tuvi-svdn- 'roaring aloud'; from sa7t- 'gain', the compound go-sdn- 'winning cows'. From these six nouns very few case-forms occur. But from han- 'strike' no fewer than 35 compounds are made in the RV., and all the singular cases as well as several of the du. and pi. cases are formed. All the stems formed from these six roots 9 are m. except tan-, which is £'°, and only a single n. case-form occurs from a compound of han- {dasyu-ghnd). The distinction between strong and weak forms is made in -han- only. Here in the weak cases a as

1 The infinitive yudhaye is a transition 6 In the V. yudham fate. to the /-declension, there being no stem 7 In the V. virudham pate. yudhi: 8 The accent of the monosyllabic stems

2 With irregular accent ; cp.LANMAN477(top). is irregular in remaining on the radical 3 Fifteen times accented sridhas, once syllable except tana (beside tana) and vanam: (ix. 718) sridhas. cp. Lanman 479* and above 94, I a. 4 In VIII. 454°, IX. 1056 pari-badhas should 9 Other roots in -n used as nominal stems perhaps be read instead of fari badhas. have gone over to the a- or a-declension; 5 If from nah; according to BR. (cp. aksd- thus Jan- becomes -Ja- or -Jd-. 10 nahas (A. p. f.); according to Weber, IS. -han- forms a separate fem. stem in -?

13, 109, from nap: It is probably from from its weak form ; -ghn-i-. napi- = napat. See above 321, note on nadh: . . :

I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar. representing the sonant nasal appears for an before consonants, while before vowels the root, by syncopation of its vowel, assumes the form of -ghn-. The N. sing. n. of -han is -ha-m, a transition to the a-declension ' (for -ha, which does not occur). Inflexion.

324. All forms are represented in this declension except Ab. sing., the weak cases of the du., and the D. Ab. pi. The forms made from -han- are: Sing. N. -^<^^ K.-hdnatn, I. -gk?ia, D. -ghnJ, G. -ghnds, L. -g/ini, V.^ -han. — Du. N. A. -hdns, -hdnau (VS.TS.), V. -hana. — PI. N. -hdnas, A. -ghnds, I. -hdbhis. The G. would be -ghnim and the L. -hdsu according to the analogy of other stems in this declension. The forms of radical «-stems which occur are the following Sing. N. m. aghasamsa-ha 'slaying the wicked', adrsta-ha 'slaying unseen (vermin)', abhimati-hd 'destroying adversaries', amitra-hd 'killing enemies', amiva-hd 'destroying pains', ariisa-ha 'striking the dark (cloud)', d-vira-ha 'not slaying men', asasti-hd 'averting curses', flj-wra-z^i 'demon-slaying', ahi-hd 'killing the serpent', krsH-hd 'subduing nations', go-hd 'killing cattle', dasyu-hd 'destroying the Dasyus', dtirnama-hd (AV.) 'destroying the ill-named', nr-hd 'killing men', puro-hd 'destroying strongholds' 3, //'/«z~/^i (AV.) 'slaying the speckled (snake)', mano-hd (AV.) 'mind-destroying', musti-hd 'striking with the fist', yatu-hd (AV.) 'destroying witchcraft', rakso-hd 'destroying demons', vasar-hd 'destroying at dawn', vrtra-hd 'Vrtra-slaying', sarya-hd 'killing with arrows', satra-hd 'destroying entirely', sapatna-hd 'slaying rivals', sapta-hd 'slaying seven'. — n. Only two transition forms occur: vrtra-hd-m and satra-hd-m^ A. m. d-pra-hanam^ 'not hurting', abhimati-hdnam, ahi-hdnam, tamo- hdnam 'dispelling darkness', dasyu-hdnam, rakso-hdnam^, valaga-hdnam 'destroying secret spells' (VS. v. 23), mano-hdnam (AV.), vira-hdnajn^ (VS. XXX. 5) 'homicide', vrtra-hdnam^, satra-hdiiam^, sapatna-hdnam (AV.).

I. m. vftra-ghnd^ . — n. dasyu-ghnd. — f. tana (once) and tana'' (19 times).

D. m. rdneT ; abhimati-ghni {NS.vi. ^z), -ghne^, ahi-ghn^, nr-ghnd^, ^' iii. 2. 'slayer of Makha', vrtra-ghne^. — f. tdne'. tnakha-ghni (TS. 4. ^),

G. m. go-sanas (in the V. gosano napat); asura-ghnds^ , vrtra-ghnds^ Li. m. svdtii^ (ix. 669), tuvi-svdni; bhruna-ghni (AV.) 'killer of an embryo'. Without an ending: rdn'i. V. m. amitra-han, ahi-han, vrtra-han.

Du. N. A. V. taino-hdna, rakso-hdna^, vrtra-hdtia, Y. vrtra-hana^. With

-au : rakso-hdnau (VS. v. 25), valaga-hdnau (VS. v. 25; TS. i. 3. 2^).

PI. N. V. m. V. tuvi-svanas ; a-bhog-ghd?ias'^° 'striking the niggardly one', punar-hdnas^ 'destroying in return', yajna-hdnas (TS.) 'destroying sacrifice', satru-hdnas'^ 'slaying enemies'. A. m. sata-ghnds (AV.) 'gain-destroying', With strong form: rakso-hdnas^ and valaga-hdnas (VS. v. 25; TS. i. 3. 2'). I. m. vrtra-hdbhis. — G. m. vandm. — L. m. rdmsuT, vdmsuT.

1 The forms made from -ghna-, viz. -ghnds, 5 See above 47, A b 2 (p. 39J. -ghnam, -ghnaya, -gnasya, -ghne, are probably 6 See above p. 38, note 4. to be explained as transition forms starting 7 Against the rule of accentuation in from the weak stem -ghn-. monosyllabic stems (94). 2 Formed like the N. of derivative -an 8 This form may, however, be the 3, sing, stems (327). passive aor. See below 501, note on sadi. 3 That is, puras, A. pi. of pur-, the 'case 9 With loss of the loc. ending as in the termination being retained. •an declension (325). 4 The normal forms would be ^vftra-ha '^° -ghdnas for -hdnas, see above 80, 81. and *saira-hd. ;

VI. Declension. Nouns. Consonant Stems. 203

Derivative stems in -an, -man, -van.

325- T*^^^ declension embraces a large number of words, the stems in -van being by far the commonest, those in -an the least frequent. It is almost limited to masculines and neuters; but some forms of adjective stems serve as feminines, and there is one specifically f stem, yJs-an- 'woman".

The distinction of strong and weak forms is regularly made. In the strong cases the a of the suffix is usually lengthened, e. g. ddhvan-am; but m half a dozen -an and -man stems it remains unchanged; e. g. arya-man-am. In the weak cases the a is often syncopated before vowel endings, though

never when -man and -van are preceded by a consonant^, e. g. I. sing, gra- vn-a^ from grd-van-, 'pressing stone"*, while before consonant endings the

final n disappears 5, e. g. raja-bhis. In the RV. the syncopation never takes place in the N. A. du. n., nor with one exception (Jata-davn-i) in the L. sing. As in all other stems ending in -n, the nasal is dropped in the N. sing. e. g. m. ddhva, n. karma. But there are two peculiarities of inflexion which, being common to these three groups, do not appear elsewhere in the consonant declension. Both the L. sing, and the N. A. pi. n. are formed in two ways. The

ending of the L. sing, is in the RV. dropped more often than not, e. g. murdhdn-i and murdhdn, the choice often depending on the metre*. The N. A. pi. n. is formed with -ani from 18 stems and with -a from 19 stems' in the RV.; seven of the latter appear with -a in the Samhita text, but with -a like the rest in the Pada text. The evidence of the Avesta indicates that there were in the Indo-Iranian period two forms, naman and namani, the former losing its -71 as usual when final after a long vowel. On this ground the -a form of the Samhita, though the less frequent, would appear to be the older *- There are here many supplementary stems and numerous transitions to the a-declension. I. Stems in -an.

326. These stems, which are both m. and n., are not numerous. They include some which at first sight have the appearance of belonging to one of the other two groups: yu-v-an-'^ 'youth', sv-dn- 'dog', rji-sv-an'^° N. of a man, matari-sv-an-^° N. of a demi-god, vi-bhv-an-^'^ 'far-reaching'; pdri-j'm-an-^^ 'going round'. The n. sirs-dn- is an extended stem from siras- 'head' = sir{a)s-dn-.

a. Besides the N. pi. yosan-as 'women', six or seven forms of this declension appear

to be feminine as agreeing with f. substantives: vfsa 'raining' [kam, vdk), vfsanam {ivdcani), vrsana [dyava-prthivt], pdri-Jmanas 'going round' [vidyutas), rapsdd-udhabhis 'having distended udders' {dhenubhis)'^'i, vaja-karmabhis (SV. TS.) and vdja-bharmabhis (vin. 1930J 'bringing rewards' {iiiibhis).

1 The stems in -van regularly form their 6 48 locatives (occurring 127 times) have f. in -ziarT, e. g. fi-van, pt-varl; those in -an the i, 45 (occurring 203 times) drop it. See and -man by adding -J to the syncopated Lanman 535. stem at the end of compounds; e. g. sdtna- 7 But those in -a», occur nearly twice as rajn-i-, pdnca-nimn-i- (AV.). often. 2 This exception does not apply when -an is 8 Cp. Brugmann, kg. 483 and Lanman preceded by two consonants, e. g. sakth-nd, 538. 3 But also G. sing, vrsan-as (AV.). The synco- 9 Cp. the comparative yav-iydn and the pation nearly always takes place in -an stems Avestan yvan. and in nearly half of the -man and -van 10 -svan in both these compounds is probably stems. derived from iu- 'grow'. 4 When the accent is on the suffix it is " From bhu- 'be'. thrown on the ending in these syncopated 12 From gam- 'go'. forms, e. g. mahna from niah-dn-. 13 The f. of -an stems at the end of 5 That is, a here represents an original compounds is formed with -i in dcchidra- sonant nasal, see p. 17, note =. udhn-t- 'having a faultless udder', sam-raJn-T- .

204 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

b. In the strong forms the stems j-bhu-ksdn- 'chief of the Rbhus', piisdn-, and the

f. ySsan-, retain the short a, while uksan- 'ox' and vfsan- 'bull' fluctuate between a and a. The words svan- and yiivan- form their weak stems before vowels with Samprasarana, sun-, ytin-; the latter is once used in the N. du. m. ioxrsx yiina instead oi yuvand. In the weak cases syncopation always takes place' except xn'CasioTxas uksanas s.n&.vfsanas.

c. A number of -an stems have supplementary forms from other stems : aksdn- from aksi-; asihdn- from dsthi-; dhan- from dhas- and dhar-; dsdn- from asya-, as-, and asa-;

uddn- from ud- and uda-kd- ; ndhan- from udhas- and udhar- ; dadhdn- from dddhi- ; dosdn- from dos-; yakdn- from ydkri-; yosan- from yosand- 2caA yosa-; sdkan- from Idkrt-; sakthdn- from sdkthi-. As no stem in -an has been found in the N. A. sing, u., such forms appear to have been avoided and to have been purposely replaced by forms from supplementary stems. These forms are the N. A. n. dksi, dsthi (AV.), dhar, asydm, udakdm, udhar, ydkrt (AV.), sdkrt, sdkthi; also yiivat instead of *yuva, as well as siras and strsd-m (AV.) in- stead of ^sTrsd^, d. There are here several transitions to the a-declension. The A. sing, pusdn-am is the starting point for the '^. piisdn- a- s and the G. pUsand-sya-^. The N. A. pi. n. is

the starting point in other instances : the two pi. forms s7rsa and sirsani give rise to the L. sing, iirsi (AV.i) beside sirsdni, as well as to the du. N. A. iTrse and the N. A. sing.

sJrsd-m (AV.) ; similarly the two plurals dhd and dkdni led to the G. pi. dhdndm beside dhndm; and yiisdni, the pi. oi yiisdn-, which has the appearance of a pi. of a stem yiisd-, led to the formation of an I. sing, yiisena (TS.) beside the regular yiisna (VS.). Again, the weak forms din-as, ahn-ds etc., gave rise to the transition stems dsna- and dhna-, from which are formed the I. pi. dsnais and the L. sing, piirvahni. Transition o-stems often take the place of -an stems at the end of compounds. Thus -aksd- appears in several compounds for -aksdn-, and -vfsd- (AV.) for -vfsan-; an- asthdn- once forms the N. sing. m. an-asthd-s (VIII. 134); beside the N. sing. m. bj'hdd-uksa appears the D. brhdd-uksaya (VS.); beside rajanani is found the A. m. adhi-rajd-m (X. 1289) 'over-lord'; and beside saptdbhis 'seven', the compound tri-saptdis''

Inflexion.

327. The normal forms, if made from rsjan- 'king' in the m., and from dhan- 'day' in the n., would be as follows:

1. m. Sing. N. rAja. A. rdjanam. I. rsjna. D. rdjne. Ab. rdjnas. G. rdjnas. L. rdjani and rdjan. V. rnjan.

Du. N. A. rdjana and rdjanau. I. rdjabhyam. D. rdjabhyam. G. rdjnos.

PI. N. V. rdjanas. A. rdjnas. I. rdjabhis. D. rdjabhyas. Ab. rijabhyas (Av.). G. rajham. L. rajasu.

2. n. Sing. N. A. — s. i. dhna. D. dhne. Ab. G. dknas. L. dkani axid

dhan. — Du. N. A. dhani. G. dhnos (AV.). — PI. N. A. dhani. I. dhabhis. D. Ab. dhabhyas. G. dhnam. L. dhasu. The forms actually occurring are the following: Sing. N. m. aji-asthd 'boneless', dyah-sTrsa 'iron-headed', a-sirsd 'head- less', uksd 'bull', rji-sva N. of a man, tdksa 'carpenter', tdpur-tnurtiha 'burning- headed', try-udhd^ 'three-uddered', dvi-bdrha-JmS'' 'having a double course', pdri-jmd 'surrounding', pusd 'Pusan', plihd (VS.) 'spleen', brhdd-uksa 'having great oxen', majjd (VS. AV.) 'marrow', matari-sva 'Matarisvan', murdhd 'head',

yuva 'youth', rdja 'king', vi-bhva 'far-reaching', vi-rdja (TS. v. 7. 4'*) 'sovereign', svd 'dog', sahdsra-sirsa 'thousand-headed'.

'queen', soma-rdjil-T- 'having Soma as king', 3 With shifted accent. hatd-vj-sn-i- 'whose lord has been slain', rui-u- 4 On the other hand there are two trans- sTrsn-h 'deer-headed', saptd-iirsn-T- 'seven- itions from the a-declension to the a«-de- headed', eka-niiirdhn-i- (AV.) 'having the clension in ni-kdmabhis beside ni-kdmais and head turned in one direction', sindhu-rajii-T- nakid-bhis for ndktam, but these forms are (AV.) 'having Sindhu as queen'. due to somewhat artificial conditions; see 1 The restoration of the a seems to be below, I. pi. p. 206, notes 3 and 4.

metrically required in a. few instances: see 5 Only supplementary forms occur: see Lanman 525. Lanman 530 (bottom). 2 The N. sing. n. of the adj. vfsan- is S The metre seems to require try-udhh

avoided in several ways : see Lakman 530 (III, 563). (bottom). 7 Here bdrha- = bdrhas-. .

VI. Declension. Nouns. Consonant Stems. 205

A._ m. ukssnam, taksanam (VS. xxx. 6), tri-murdhanam 'three-headed', tri-sirsdnani 'three-headed', pdnthanam (VS. AV.) 'path', pdri-jmxnam, prthu-gmdnam ' 'broad-pathed', plikinam (AV.), majjdnam, matarl-svanam, murdhanam, yuvanam, rdjanam ^, vfsanam, svAnam, sapta-sTrsanam 'seven- headed'. — With short a: uksdnam, rbhu-ksdnam'^ 'chief of the Rbhus', pUsdnam, vfsanam *. I. m. I. fjl-svana, matari-svana, vi-bhvdna. — 2. With syncope: ds'na^, pUsnA, plihna (VS.), majjna (AV.), mUrdhna (VS. xxv. 2), rajha, vfsnS. — 3. With Samprasarana: hina^ (AV.). — n. asni (VS. xxv. 9) 'blood', dhna 'day', asnA 'mouth', udnA 'water', dadhiiA 'curds', mahnA 'greatness', yaknA (VS. xxxix. 8) 'liver', yusnA (VS. xxv. 9) 'broth', vi-krsna (Kh. I. iit) 'headless', saknA (VS.) 'excrement', sirsnA 'head', sakthnA (VS.) 'thigh'.

D. m. I. rji-svane, pdri-jmane, matari-svane, vi-bhvdne, vfsane (TS. ill. 2. 5^)7. — 2. pusne, prati-divne 'adversary at play', murdhni (VS. xxii. 32), rAjne, vfsne^. — 3. yane. — n. i. dharv-ane 'hurting'. — 2. dhne, asne, hrsne. Ab. m. 2. plihnds (AV.), murdJinds, vfsnas'^. — n. 2. aksnds 'eye', dhnas, asnds^°, udnds^^, ttdhnas, yaknds 'liver', zf/j/zaj- 'shedding rain', lirsnds. G. m. I. durgrbhi-svanas 'continually swelling', pdri-jmanas, matari-

svanas (VS.1. 2), vfsanas'^^ (AV.). — 2. dsnas^^, uksnds, pusnds, yumds (or n.), rAjnas, vrsnas. — 3. ydnas, simas. — n. aksnds (VS. iv. 32; TS.), asnds^* (AV.) 'blood', asthnds (AV.) 'bone', dhnas., udnds, dadknds, vrsnas, saknds (AV.), hrsnds'^i.

L. m. I. rji-svani, matarl-svani, murdkdni, rajani. — i.jmdn '-viz.y', pdri- j'man, matari-svan (AV.), murdhdn. — n, i. dhani, asdni, uddni, udhani 'udder', ksAmani 'earth', rajdni, sirsdni; dhni (AV.). — 2. dhan, asdn, uddn, Udhan, ksAman'^^, gdmbhan (VS. xiii. 30) 'depth', sTrsdn'^'i. V. m. I. uru-jman (AV.) 'extension', pari-j'man, prthii-jman (AV.), pusan,

murdhan (VS.xviii. 55), yuvan, rSj'an, vrsan, s'aia-murdAan (VS.xvn. y i ; TS.) 'hundred-headed', satya-rajan (VS. xx. 4) 'true king'. — 2. matari-svas'^^ Du. N. A. V. m. I. pdri-jmana, V. mitra-rajana 'ye kings Mitra (and Yaxuna)', yuvana, Y.yuvanS, rAjana, svAna. With short vow^el: indrd-pusdna, 8 pUsdim, vfsanS, V. vrsana, somS-pusana. With weak Stem: yunS (ix. 6 5) ior yiivdna (probably through _y«z'fl«5). — 2. With au: rAjdnau, vfsdnau (AV.), ivAnau; V. vrsanau, soma-pusaij,au. N. A. n. dham, cdksaiu (AV.) 'eyes', dosdni (AV.) 'fore-arms' ''. I. m. vfsabhy3m. — D. m. soma-pusdbhyain. — G. m. pdri-Jmanos, indrd- pusnos. — n. dhnos (AV.). — L. n. aksnos (Kh. i. 11^).

i^ 1 -gman- = -jman- 'path'. Also the supplementary form udak&t. 2 There is also the transfer form adhi- >2 For vfsa-nama (ix. 97^*) GrassmANN rajd-m (x. 1289). would read vrsano nd; cp. Wackernagel 2', 3 Perhaps from ksa- = ksi- 'possess'. 68 a, note (p. 160). ij 4 In the RV. vfsanam occurs 53 times, This form (occurring once) may be vfsanam only twice. shortened for dsmanas (occurring four times). 5 This form (occurring thrice) may possibly 14 With supplementary stem dsf-j-. be shortened for asmana (which occurs 'S The G.piisandsya, occurring once, seems twice) from dsman- 'stone'. to be a transfer form starting from the A. 6 For *sa-an-a; hence no shift of accent pusdnam {yi(i dj. as in monosyllabic stems. iS There are also the transition forms 7 Also usdn-e (vi. 20") according to Benfey, sTrse, piirvjhni: see LanmAN 536. Orient und Occident 2, 242. 17 The compound nemann-is- 'following 8 There is also the transition form brhdd- guidance' probably contains a loc. 18 uksaya (VS. VIII. 8). Following the analogy of some stems in 9 Benfey, Gott. Abh. 19, 261, regards •van. (x. as Ab. vibhvdna^. 19 Also the transition form sirsL vibkvdna 765) = ^ 10 Also the supplementary forms asyat, as as. 206 I. Allgemkines ™d Speache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

PI. N. V. m. u/:.f,i':tis (VS. xxiv. 13), fi^mii-mBn/ASfias 'sharp-edged', J>,int/ia>:as iAV.\ mlirJ/uinas, yik\inas, nijilnas, irdfias. — With short

vo'wel : ui::t>i'U7s. rMu-i'sJ/Ms, r/sa/uis. N. A. n. I. cd-sJrii, asf^iini (,TS. iv. 7. 1°)', ,i/t,7m, sTfsdni, sa^fAdni. —

2. li/tti, si/y,!'- A. m. I. w'r'(7«(j'f, u/:siitias, v/sa'itts. — a. ufynt}s,j'a/ia-rii//las Tcing of men', im/Jiids (A^^"), mli/t/AnJs, yamii-rJ/'/ias 'subject to Yama', riijyhis. r/xnas. — yiifias, sr'mas. 3. — I. m. uJ!:s,il>/us\ yihaMis, nijaMis, r/saMis, fPiii/th (Kh. v. iS')*- n. a^.fM/iis, ast/ttid/iis, li/iaMis, ifsddAis, ui/iiMis, liMabfu's, tnaAdbhis, r/saMis, sJiad/iis (TS. v. 7. 23*\ su-h'tti-iar»iaMu (Kh. m. 12.') 'doing good deeds'-\

D. m. /j7v-<7/'/i'j'''-'' (VS.), ma/jdd/iyas (TS. VS. xxxix. 10), y.rraMyas, rjjab/iyas, h\ihM\is (,AV. VS.). — n. asthib/iyas (VS. x.xxix. 10; TS. v. 2. 12^), lihitbhyas. — Ab. m. maJJiibAyas yX\'.). — n. ,}/inb/tyiis. G. m. r/\y.i~"". rtij'~hJm (VS. .\V.), suium {XW). — n. <}/i/nlm^- L. m. majjiisu (AV.), yuMii-rii/as;/ (AW), nijasu. — n. Masu, Jlrsdsu.

a. Stems in -man. 3a8. These stems are about equally divided between the masculine and the neuter gender, tlie former being agent nouns, the latter verbal abstracts. These stems seem to ha\-e been used normally for the f. as well as tlie m.;

for though no simple stem in -maf) occurs as a f , about a dozen of them

are used as f. at the end of compounds, while no certain example appears

in tlie RV. of a f. being formed by adding -7 to -man''. A peculiarity of

tlie inflexion of tlie stems in -wrf//, as compared with those in -an and -van,

is that in the sjTicopated forms of the I. sing, several words drop the »/,

while two drop the // of the suffix; e. g. ma/iind^ for mahimnii, and rastnd for rasmnd.

a. The f. forms which occur .it the end of compounds .ire: Sing. N. /ifrti-lirm.l (VS. X. 9) 'giving wide shelter" (aV/A'-'l, sd-Za/tfrntl (x. lo') 'similar'; A. ifyii/ti,>\i;imiiniim (y. So') 'having a shining course' [iisdsaHi); sH-tdrma(iam (Till. 42'') 'easily conveying across' [tiiiz'ii/H), sii-f/iimiifiam (X.6^^^^) 'protecting well' (/>//;h^im^, ji/-Jii/)/itl>i,iJ>i (X. 63'"') 'granting

secure refuge' (di/itim) \ V. drif/a-d/iarmaii (vui. lS+) 'yielding security' (,»ijV.v\ pi-thu-y'iman

(VI. 644) 'having a broad path' [dii/iilar); Du. N. sii-Jmimani^ (1. 160^) 'producing fair things" (d/iisaite); PI. A. s!'(d-/,!'imant)s (VI, 393) 'of radiant birth' {iisiisos): I. ftya-MnrmitMis (VIII. 193°) 'winning rewards' [iitiMis\ sit-l&riHiiMiis (IX. 70'M 'skilful' (fingers)j G. hiha- sadinanSm (vl. 47^) 'having a bright dwelling-place' (imisain)'^°. Yrom /liiman- 'name" the

AV. forms with -i the f. stem -iidmul- at the end of five compounds : Jio--nAin>iT- 'WL' named', /(w7(-<7.-«(7»/«r- 'having five names', wmm-'\iK\'\\\^ all names', sa/idsni/nimnT' 'thousand-named". The f. ..'«/i;.)'/«rt«-/- (VS. II. 20) 'noxious food' is perhaps similai-ly formed".

I In the corresponding passage of VS. 7 The AV, has five stems thus formed at (xvilt. 3) dst/iTni. the end of compounds, ' Both these might be formed from the 8 Cp. Bloomfield, BB. 23, 105 ff,, AJPh. transition o-stems d/ia-, .find-. This is per- ]6, 409—434; Bartholomae if. S, An- haps the reason why these are the only two j;eiger 17, plurals of this declension which retain the 9 With the ending of the neuter; see a in the Pada text; d/m appears in I. 92^. Lanman 433 (top). 3 The form ni-iamai/iis 'eager' for «/- 'o Possibly also w-^wmo (tl. 32') 'bearing

/aw/fl/j'is due to the parallelism oi cvayavathh weir ; but it is derived from *sii-ma- according in X. 92'. to BR. and Grassmann. 4 There is also a transition form dsiiais >' The f. I'ld/tmt- (ix. 335) formed from 'stones", beside the stem dian-. /iid/iman- is quite exceptional, being due to 5 The unique form /nii/d/'/iis (as if from a a play on words (see Lanman 528). The stem ntii/dn-) is doubtless used for metrical form /mdiij'i = tmdiia in sense, occurring reasons instead of ndktaiii in Vli. I04'8. twice in the RV., may be an I. sing. f. of 6 There is also the transition form ImdnT-: cp, GrasSMANN and BR. d/ianam. VI. Declension. Nouns. Consonant Stems. 207

b. In tlie strong forms aryaman- 'Avyaman', iman- 'self, taidL jimaii- 'victorious' retain tlie short vowel of the suffix. In the weak forms, even when the suffix is preceded _vo_wel, ^y _} ^about a ^dozen forms do not syncopate the «i: I. omdnd, pravad-yamana, bhiimdna,^lihumana, syumand, hemina; D. tramane, damane; Ab. G. bhumanas; G. maid- mdnas, damanas, y&manas, vydmanas. The forms which, besides syncopating, drop the m or the « of the suffix are: prathina, prena, bhunci., mahina, varini; draghmh, raima. c. Beside the -man stems there are several transfer stems in -ma, which are, however, of rare or late occurrence: rfflwm'- 'destroyer' beside darmdn-; dhdrma-{PC

Inflexion.

329. The normal forms actually occurring would, if made from diman- 'stone' in the m. and from karman- 'act' in the n., be as follows; Sing. m. N. dsma. A. dsmanam'. I. dimana^. D. dsmane'^. Ab. dhnanas^. G. dsmanas^. L. dsmani and dsman. V. dhnati. — Du. N. A. V. dsmana'^. L. dsmanos. — PI. N. V. dsmanas. A. dsmanas. I. dsmahhis. D. dsmabhyas. G. dsmanam. L. ds'masu (AV.).

Sing. n. 'N. A. kdrma^. I. kdrmanH^. D. kdrmane^- .\b. kdrmanas^. G. kdrmanas^. L, kdrmani and karman. — Du. N. A. kdrmani. G. kdrmanos. — PI. N. A. kdrmani, karma, kdrma. I. kdrmabhis. D. kdrmabhyas. Ah.- kdrtnabhyas. G. kdrmanatn^. L. kdrmasu. Forms which actually occur are the following: Sing. N. m. a-karma 'wicked', d-brahma 'lacking devotion', aryamS. 'Aryaman', dsma 'stone', a-sremA 'faultless', atmh 'breath', asu-hema 'speeding swiftly', istd-yama 'going according to desire', usrd-yama 'moving towards brightness", rtd-dhama (VS. iv. 32) 'abiding in truth', krtd-brakma 'having performed devotion', jarimd 'old age', jata-bharma 'ever nourishing', jema (VS. XVIII. 4) 'superiority', trpdla-prabharma 'offering what is refreshing', darmd 'demolisher', damd 'giver', dur-ndma 'ill-named', dur-mdnma 'evil-minded', dyutdd-yama 'having a shining path', draghimA (VS. xviii. 4) 'lengtli', dvi- jdnma 'having a double birth', dharmd 'arranger', dhvasmd 'dai-kening', pdka- stkamS N. of a man, papmd (VS. vi. 35) 'misfortune', prthii-pragama 'wide- striding', prathimd (VS. xviii. 4) 'width', brahmd 'devout man', bhufmd^ 'abounding in valleys', bhUmd (TS. vii. 3. 13') 'plenty', bhdri-janma 'having many births', mahimd 'greatness', yajnd-manma 'ready for sacrifice', raghu- ydma 'going quickly', resmd (AV.) 'tempest', vadmd 'speaker', varimi 'width', »«mV««^ (VS. xviii. 4) 'height', visvd-karma^a^\.-cx&aXox', visvd-sama (VS.xvm. 39) 'having the form of all Samans', vfsa-prabharma 'to whom the strong (Soma) is offered', satdtma 'possessing a hundred lives', satyd-dharma 'whose laws are true', satyd-manmd 'whose thoughts are true', saptd-nama 'seven-named', sahdsra-yama 'having a thousand courses', sadhu-karma 'acting well', su-kdrms 'working skilfully', su-jdnima 'producing fair things', su-trAma 'guarding well', su-dy6tmU 'shining bright', su-brdAms 'accompanied by good prayers', su- mdntu-nSmU 'bearing a well-known name', su-mdnma 'benevolent', su-vdhma

I The vowel has also to be restored in S Also with syncope, mahimnds, etc. | several other forms (see Lanman 524 f.). " Also with short vowel aryamdna,j(mand. » With short vowel asyamd^am, tmdnam, 7 Sometimes kdrmd in the Samhita text. 3 Without syncope after vowel bhumanS, 8 Also with syncope, namnd, etc. etc. ; with syncops niaAimn&,maAin&, drdghma, 9 bhujma (I. 65s) should probably be read etc. bhujmh; see BR., Grassmann, Lanman 530 4 Also with syncope, mahimni, etc. (top). 208 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

'driving well', su-idrmd (VS. viii. 8) 'good protector', su-sthama 'having a firm support', svadu-ksddma 'having sweet food' '. N. A. n. djma 'track', ddma 'food', ema 'course', karma 'deed', kdrsma 'goal', ksddma 'carving knife', cdrma 'skin', jdnima 'birth', jdnma 'birth', tjkma 'young blade of corn', ddma 'cord', dhdrma 'ordinance', dkdma 'abode', ndma 'na.me', pdtma 'flight', brdhma 'prayer', bhdsma (TS. VS. xii. 35) 'ashes', bhiima 'earth', mdnnia 'thought', mdrma 'vital part', ydma 'course', loma (TS. VS. XIX. 92) 'hair', vdrtma 'path' (Kh. v. 2'), vdrma 'mail', vdsma 'garment', vema (VS. xix. 83) 'loom', vesma 'house', vyoma 'sky', sdkma 'power', sdrma 'refuge', sddma 'seat', sdma 'chant', sdma 'wealth', sthdma 'station', syuma 'strong', svddma 'sweetness', homa 'oblation'. — With final vowel lengthened in the Samhita text: kdrma, j'dniml, dhdma (AV.), bhdma, vyoma^ su-stdrlma^ (TS. v. i. 11^) 'forming an excellent couch', svddma^. A. m. dsmqnam, a-sremdnam, atmdnam, usmdnam (AV.) 'heat', ojmd?iam 'power', omdnam'ia.fOUT\ klomanam (VS. xix. 85) 'right lung', yar/»?a«a/«, tuvi- brahmanam 'praying much', darmdnam, damdnam 'gift', dur-mdnmanam, dyutdd- yamana?n, dvi-jdnmanam, dharmdiiam,pdka-sthamanam, papmanam (VS.xii. 99;

TS. I. 4. 41'}, puru-tmdnam 'existing variously', pziru-natnanam (AY.) 'having many names', bra/imdnam, bhumdnam, mahimdnam, resmanam (VS.xxv. 2), varimdnam, varsmdnam 'height', visvd-karmanam, vi-sarmdiiam 'dispersion', satdtmanam^ satyd-dharmanam, sadmdnam 'sitter', sahd-samanam 'accompanied by songs', su-tdrmanam (TS. i. 2. 2") 'crossing well', su-dyjtmanam, su-brdh- manam, su-sdrmanam, somdnam 'preparer of Soma', stamdnam (AV. v. 135)

'track' (?), svadmdnam 'sweetness', harimdnam 'jaundice'. — With short a : aryamdnam, tmdnam 'breath'.

I. m. dsmana, atmdna (VS. xxxii. 11), usmdna (VS. xxv. 9), tmdna, papmdna (VS. xix. 11), bhdsmana 'chewing', majmdna 'greatness', varsmdnS, visvd-karmana. — I. omdna, pravdd-yamana 'having a precipitous course', bhumdna 'abundance', satd-yamaiia (AV. SV.) 'having a hundred paths'. —

2. aryamnd (AV.), pamnd (AV.) 'scab', bhumnd (VS. in. 5), mahimnd, varimnd'' (VS. AV.), satd-yamna. — 3. prathind'^, prend^ 'love', bhundT, mahind^, varind (TS.)'; drag/imd, ralmd '°- — n. kdrmaria, jdrimana, dhdrmana 'ordinance', pdtmana, brdkmana, bhdsmana (VS. vi. 21) 'ashes', mdmnana, vdrmana, vidmdna 'wisdom', vi-dharmana 'extension', sdkmanS, sdrmana, sdkmana 'might', svd-ja?imana 'self-begotten', hdnmana 'stroke'. — i. bkiimana 'earth', syiimana, hemdnd 'zeal'. — 2. ddmna (AV.) 'tie', dkdmna, ndmna, lomna (AV.) 'hair', sdmna, sutrdmna (ySi.y:.^. :^^) 'protecting well'. D. m. I. atmdne (VS. vii. 28), takmdne (AV.) a kind of disease, tmdne, pdpmdne (AV. VS.), brahmdne, bhtiri-karmane 'doing much', visvd-karmane

(TS. VS. VIII. 45). —• 2. aryainne, jarimne, bhumne (VS. xxx. 13) 'plenty', mahimne; dn-usra-ydmne 'not going out during daylight', usrd-ydmne, su-trdmne (VS. x. 31), su-sdmne N. of a man ('having beautiful songs'], suhdvltu-namne 'whose name is to be invoked successfully'. — n. kdr-

1 su-dharma (VS. XXXVIII. 14) 'well support- 8 mahina occurs 35 times, mahimna only ing' seems to be meant for a V. (wrong 3 times. accent), but perhaps su-dharma should be 9 Beside vanmna (AV.). The TS. twice has read. varina, which in the corresponding passages of 2 susiarlma in the Pada text. the VS. is replaced by varimna; cp. Lanman 3 See Lanman S3I'- 533- 4 Once also the transfer form varimata, 1= In these two forms the m being preceded according to the declension in -inant. by a consonant remains, the n being dropped: 5 For prathimni, from prathimdn-. = draghmna 'breadth', and raimna 'rein'. 6 For premna from p-eman-. Probably also ddtia for ddmna 'gift', and 7 For bhumna beside bhumdna. possibly ami = dsmani. VI. Declension. Nouns. Consonant Stems. 209

mane, fdnmane, dhdrmane, brdhmane, dAdrmane'supTpoTt', vidmdne, vi-dharmane, sdrmane. — i. tramam 'protection', damane. — 2. dkSmne, simne 'acquisition'. Ab. m. dsmanas, atmdnas, usmdnas (VS.vi. 18), satyd-dharinanas {KSf). — 2. klomnds (AV.), jarimnds (AV.), varimnds (AV.). — n. cdrmanas, Jdnmanas, dhdrmanas, tndnmanas, vdsmanas 'nest', sddmanas. — i. bhumanas. — 2. dimnas, dhdmnas (VS. vi. 22) ^, Umnas. G. m. a-mdrmanas 'having no vital spot', brahmdnas, vi-patmanas 'speeding away', vipra-manmanas 'having an inspired mind', mci-janmanas 'of radiant birth',

su-sdrmanas, visvd-karmanas (VS. xxxi. 1 7). — i. mahimdnas. — 2. aryamnds, jarimnds (AV.), mahimnds, sthird-dhamnas (AV.) 'belonging to a strong race'. — n. kdrmanas, jdnmanas, dhdrmanas, brdhmanas, mdnmanas, vdrmanas. — I. damanas, bhimanas, ydmanas, vyomanas. — 2. dhdmnas, samnas. L. m. I. dsmani, atmdni, tmdni, brahmdni, mahmdni (AV.) 'greatness', su- sAmani. — 2. dsman, tmdn, atmdn (VS. AV.). — n. i. djmani (AV.), kdrmani, cdrmani (AV.), j'dnmani, dAmani, dirghd-prasadmani 'affording an extensive abode', dhdrimani 'established usage', dhdrmani, dhAmani, pdrTmani 'abund- ance', prd-bharmani 'presenting', prd-yamani 'setting out', brdhmani, mdnmani, mdrmani, yAmani, Idksmani (TS. vii. 4. 19^) 'mark', vdkmani 'invocation', vi-

dharmani, ve'smani {KY.), vyomani, sdrmani, JaVJwa??? 'current of air', sdvTmani 'impulsion', su-samdni, stdrimani 'strewirig', hdvTmani^ invocation', homani 'offer- ing' 'invocation'. and — With syncope: l6mni{KY.), vijAmni{KV.) 'knuckle' (?), sthAmni (AV.). — 2. djman, d-yjman 'no expedition', e'man (VS.TS.), odman (TS. VS.) 'flooding', kdrman, kArsman, cdrman, jdniman, j'dnman, ddrlman 'destruction', dhdrman, dhAman, pdtman, brahman, bhdsman (VS. TS.) 'con- suming', bhArman 'table', mdnman, mdrman, yAman, vdriman, vdriman 'width, vdrsman, vij'Aman 'related to each other', vi-dharman, vyoman, sdrman, sdsman 'song of praise', sdkman 'attendance', sddman, sAman, svAdman, hdvTman. V. m. aryaman, dsman (TS.iv. 6. i'), Asu-he7nani!Y'S,.\.'j.']'^),takman (AV.), tri-naman (TS. AV.) 'three-named', papman (AV.), puru-naman, puru-hanman N. of a seer, brahman, vi-dharman, visva-karman, visva-saman N. of a seer, vrsa-karman 'doing manly deeds', satya-karman 'whose actions are true', sahasra-dhaman (AV.) 'having thousandfold splendour', su-daman 'giving good gifts', su-yaman (AV.), sva-dharman 'abiding in one's own customs'. Du. N. A. V. m. brahmdna, satya-dharmana, sa-namand 'of the same

kind', su-sdrmana; aryamdna, jemana 'victorious', sAmatmana (Kh. iii. 2 2 5; cp. TB. II. 8. 9') 'endowed with chants', su-kdrmand (VS. xx. 75). N. A. n. sdrmani, jdnmanT, sddmani. — I. dhAmarii, sdmani (VS. x. 14). — 2. nAmni (AV.). — G. n. sddmanos. — L. m. dsmanos. PL N. V. a-ddtnAnas 'unbound' and 'not giving gifts', a-dhvasmAnas 'undarkened', dnu-vartmdnas {yS.'Xwii.?i(i) 'followers', d-brahmdnas, a-rasmAnas 'having no reins', Sha-brahmdnas 'conveying sacred knowledge', jarimAnas,

brahmAnas (VS. xxvii. 2), bhrAjajjanmdnas 'having a brilliant birthplace', mahimAnas, sucij'anmdnas, sdtya-dharmdnas, ja'-Za/wwawaj (TS. 1.3. lo"^) 'having the same marks', su-kdrmdnas, su-jdnimdnas, su-rAmdnas (VS. xxi. 42) 'very delightful', su-sdrmdnas, sthA-rasmdnas 'having firm reins', svddmAnas. — With

short o: aryamdnas, mahdtmdnas (Kh. iii. 12^) 'high-minded'. N. A. n. I. r/J-j-awzaw? (VS.xviii. 43), kdrmani, cdrmdjii, Jdnimdni, jdnmdni, dAmani (AV.), dhdrmdni, dhAmani, nAmdni, pdksmdni (VS, xix. 89) 'eyelashes', brdhmani, mdnmani, mdrmdni, romdni 'hair', Umdni (AV.), vdrtmdni, vdrmdni (Av.), sdrmdni, sddmani, sdmani. — 2. kdrma", j'dnima, j'dnma, dhdrma,

1 BR. and Eggeling suggest that this is short final a in the Pada as well as the a corruption for daninas 'bond'. Samhita text. 2 This and the following forms have

Indo-arische Philologie. I. 4. 14 210 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

dhima, nSma, brdhma, bhiima, mdnma, roma'^, sdrtna, sddma. — 3. jdnima', dhdnna, fiSmS, brdhma^ bhiima, roma, sddma^. A. m. dhnanas, takmdnas (AV.), brahmdnas. — 2. dur-ndmnas (AV.). I. m. d-khidra-yamabhis 'unwearied in course', a-dhvasmdbhis, dsmabhis, dima-hanmahhis 'strokes of the thunderbolt', asu-Mmabhis, omabhis, klomabhiS' (VS. XXV. 8), brahmdbhis, maytira-romabhis .'peacock-haired', vTlu-pdtmabhis

'flying strongly', su-kdrmabkis, su-mdnmabhis , su-sdrmabhis. — n. djmabkis, emabhis, kdrmabhis, tJimabhis (VS.xix.8i), trdmabhis, dMrmab/iis, dkdmabhis, ndmabhis, pdtmabhis, brdhmabhis, bhdrimabhis 'nourishment', mdnmabhis, yamabhis, vdrimabhis, vdja-karmabhis'' (SV. TS. ni. 2. 11^) 'active in war', vdja-bharmabhis (viii. 19^°) 'bringing reward', vi-gamabhis 'strides', sdkmabhis, sdmabhis, hdvimab/iis. D. m. brahmdbhyas. — n. dhdmabhyas. — Ab. n. Umabhyas. G. m. brahmdnam. — 2. dur-iidmnam (AV.). — n. dhdrmaiiam, brdhmanam, mdnmanam, mdrmanam (Kh.i. 5^). — 2. dhi-namnam^ 'animals named snake', sdmnam (AV.). L. m. dsmasu (AV.). — n. kdrmasu, Jdnmasu, dhdmasu, vdrmasu, sddmasu.

3. Stems in -van.

330. The -van stems are by far the most numerous of the three groups. They are chiefly verbal adjectives and are almost exclusively declined in the masculine. Hardly a dozen of them make neuter forms, and only five or six forms are used as feminines.

a. The few feminine forms are cases of adjectives agreeing with f. substantives. They are: %va^.'^. sa-yiigva (x. 130"^) 'companion' [gdyairt), an-arva (11. 40*) 'irresistible' [ddHis); A. an-arvdnam (X. 9214) 'irresistible' (aditim); du. N. sam-sthavana (VUI. 374) 'standing

together' {rodast); pi. I. indhan-vabhis'^ (11. 34^) 'flaming' (dhenubhis); G. sahasra-davnam

(I. 17^) 'giving a thousand gifts' isitniatTnani). The f. of these stems is otherwise formed with -I, which is however never added to -van, but regularly to a collateral suffix -vara ^. Twenty-five such stems in -varX are found in the RV. and several additional ones in the Samhitas. It is convenient enumerate here: agrHvarl-^ later perhaps most to them (kS.) 'going in front', abhi-kftvarJ- 'bewitching' (AV.), abhi-bhuvar'i- 'superior', abhiivarT-9 (TS. VS.) 'attacking', uUdna-sivarl- (AV.) 'lying extended', ri'oz'a;-J- 'regular', eva-yavari- 'going quickly', kftvarl- (AV.) 'bevifitcher', talpa-Hvari- 'lying on a couch', nis-sidhTjari- 'bestowing', pivarl- 'fat', purva-javarl- 'born before', pra-suvari- 'furnished with flowers', bahti-suvarT' ' 'bearing many children', bhuri-davari- 'munificent', w^a/aW-Mz'iZ?-/"- 10 'being with her mother', 7ndiari-svari- 11 (AV.) 'mother-growing*, ^j/iJ/z/arJ"- 'worshipping', vdkvari- 'rolling', vahya-stvarJ- (AV.) 'reclining on a couch', vi-bhhvari- 'brilliant', vi-mfgvar> (AV.) 'cleansing', sdkvari- ('powerful') a kind of metre, sdrvarl-'^^ '(star-spangled) night', iruslJvdrJ- 'obedient', sveta- ycivarT- 'white-flowing', satn-sisvan- '3 'having a calf in common', sa-jiivan- 'victorious', sa-yavarT- 'accompanying', sumndvdrt- 'gracious', sutiridvarl-'^^ ^^oi\o\is\ sfivarl- 'stream- ing', svadh&vart- 'constant'.

1 f. Perhaps singular. j 7 The atharvt-, formed from dtharvan- | 2 The Pada text has always a in this and "fire-priest", is quite exceptional,

the following forms. I 8 That is, agra-i-t-varT-. 3 This lengthening is found in neither 9 That is, abhi-i-i-vart-. 10 van stems nor -an stems, except dhd and From what only seems to be a, -van sirsd, which may be formed from transfer stem which is really = -bhil-an-. stems and in which the Pada as well as the I' This seems to be a corruption in AV. Samhita text has the long vowel. V. 2' of nidtaribhvart- in the corresponding

4 vdJa-karmabhis is a v. 1. of vaja-bharmabhis, passage of the RV.

and both adjectives 'as agreeing with iitibhis 12 The f. of sarvara- 'variegated' occurring have the value' of feminines. in api-sarvard- n. 'early morning'; a stem 5 The G. chando-naminam (VS. IV. 24) sdr-van- does not occur. 'named metre' seems to be a transfer to 13 The f. of what only seems to be a stem the a-declension. in -van but is really = siiu-an-. 6 Formed from indhana- 'fuel', with loss 14 Also sunrtdvatT-, of the final vowel. VI. Declension. Nouns. Consonant Stems. 211.

b. In the strong cases there is one instance in which the a remains short; an- arudnam'i (X. 921+), and two others in which the wealiest stem is used: A. sing, maghdnam (VS. XXVIII. 9) instead of maghavanam, N. pi. maghonas (VI. 44'2) instead of maghavanas'^. In the weak cases when the suffix is preceded by a vowel, the a is always syncopated in the Samhita text except in the forms davdne, vasuvdne (V.S.), and rtavani, but it may have to be restored in one or two instances ^. c. The three words fk-van- 'singing', maghd-van- 'bountiful', saha-van- 'powerful' make a few forms from supplementary stems in -vant: I. sing, fkvaia; pi. I. niaghd- vadbhis, D. viaghavadbhyas, L. magkdvaisti; N. sing, sahavan and sdhavan. Beside dadhi- kravan-, N. of a mythical horse, also occurs the stem dadhi-krd-. d. Eight or nine words in -van show transitions to the a-declension by extending the stem with -a or, more commonly, by dropping the n. Thus saivand-m and satvandis occur beside the numerous regular forms from ja'tofflw- 'brave'. The N. sing. m. anarvdn-a-s (V. 51", VIII. 3112) may have started from the A. anarvdn-am (X. 92'4), while the n. anarvd-m (l. 1642) may have been due to the f. (ddiiir) aitarva which appears like the f. of the a- declension. Other transitional forms are rkvd-s beside fkvan-; ftikva-m 'dexterous' beside fbhvan-; takvd-s 'swift' beside tdkvan-; vdkvas, N. pi., 'rolling' beside vdkvan-; vibhava-m 'brilliant' beside vibhavan-; iikvd-s (AV.) 'skilful' beside sikvan-.

Inflexion.

331. The normal forms occurring, if made from grsvan- 'pressing stone' in the m. and from dhdnvan- 'bow' in the n., would be: Sing. m. N. gr&va. A. grdvanam. I. gr&vna. D. gr&viie. Ab. gr&vnas. G. grdvnas. L. grdvani and grAvan. V. grdvan. — Du. N. A. V. grcivand and gr&vanau. I. grdvabhyam (AV.). G. grdvnos. — PI. N. V. grdvanas. A. grdvnas. I. ^rdvabhis. D. grdvabhyas. G. grdvnam. -L. grdvasu. Sing. n. N. A. dhdnva and dhdnva. I. dhdnvana. D. dhdnvane. Ab. G. dhdnvanas. L. dhdnvani and dhdnvan. — PI. N. A. dhdnvani, dhdnva, dhdnva (AV.). I. dhdnvabhis. D. dhdnvabhyas (VS.). Ab. dhdnvabhyas (AV.). G. dhdnvanam (AV.). L. dhdnvasu. Forms actually occurring are the following: Sing. N. m. agra-ydva 'going in front', dtharva 'fire-priest', adma-sddva 'companion at a meal', ddhva 'road', an-arvd'^ 'irresistible', abhi-yugva (VS. XVII. 86) 'attacking', abhisasti-pdva 'protecting from curses', abhi-satva 'sur- rounded by heroes', abhyardha-ydjva 'receiving sacrifices apart', amativd 'suffering want', arativd 'hostile', d-ravS 'not giving', 'hostile', drva 'steed',

dvatata-dhanva (VS. ill. 61) 'whose bow is unbent', asu-pdtva 'flying swiftly', ugrd-dhanva 'having a mighty bow', fkva 'praising', fghava 'impetuous', r7ia- ydva 'pursuing guilt', rnavd 'guilty', rt&va 'pious', fbhva 'dexterous', krsnd- dhva 'having a black track' {adhva), kratu-prdva 'granting power', ksiprd- dhanva 'having an elastic bow', gravd 'pressing stone', tdkva 'bird of prey', dadhi-krdva N. of a divine horse, deva-ydva 'going to the gods', dru-sddva 'sitting on the wood', nr-sddva 'sitting among men', pdtharva N. of a man, pdtva 'flying', puru-kftva 'doing much', purva-gdtvd 'leader', purva-ydva 'leader', pra-tdkva (VS. v. 32) 'steep', pra-rikva 'extending beyond', prana-ddva^ (AV.) 'breath-giving', pratar-itva 'coming in the morning', badha-sftva 'striding much', mightily', brhdd-grava (VS. i. 1 5) 'like a great stone', bhuri-ddva 'giving maghdva^ 'bountiful', mddva 'exhilarating', mraksa-kftva 'rubbing to pieces', ydjva 'sacrificer', ydva 'aggressor', yuktd-grava 'having yoked the pressing stones', yudhva 'warlike', raghu-pdtva 'flying swiftly', rdrava 'giving abun- dantly', rdva (VS. VI. 30) 'giving', vdkva 'rolling', vasu-ddva 'giving goods',

transition to the a- 1 This seems to be a metrical shortening; 4 an-amdn-a-s is a according to Grassmann it is an A. of a declension. prdna-davdn in transfer stem an-arvdna-. 5 Emendation for AV. 2 The form kflvanas in AV. XIX. 35^ as IV. 35^. 2. 6 Also once maghd-van, transition form N. pi. m. is a conjecture; cp. p. 213, note a stem in -vant. 3 See Lanman 524 (bottom). from U* ;

2 12 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar. vaja-dava 'granting wealth', vi-jsroa 'bodily', 'own', vi-bhdva 'brilliant', vi- bhftva 'bearing hither and thither', vrsa-parva 'strong-jointed', vyoma (VS. IV. 23) 'heaven'', subham-ykva 'flying swiftly', h'lbhva 'bright', syena-patvd 'borne by eagles', srutarva N. of a man, srustlvd 'obedient', satina-satva 'truly brave', satyd-madva 'really exhilarated', satva 'brave', samddva 'eager for battle', sakava' 'mighty', sutva 'Soma-pressing', su-dhdnva 'wielding a good bow', iftva 'speeding', soma-pdva 'drinking Soma', soma-sutva 'pressing Soma', stubhva 'praising', hltva 'speedy'.

N. A. n. dhdnva^ 'bow' and 'desert', pdrva (AV.) 'joint', vi-vdsva 'bright flame', sndva (AV.) 'sinew'. A. m. ddkvanam, an-arvSiiam, d-yajvanam 'not sacrificing', drvSriam, fjisvanam N. of a man, riiav&najn, rtAvJnam, gravanam, dadhi-kravanam, dhita- vanam 'bountiful', pivanam 'fat', puru-nissidkvatiam 'bestowing many gifts', puro- ydvanam 'going in front', pratar-ydvanam 'coming in the morning', maghdvanam, musivdnam 'thief, satd-yavanam (Kh.i. 3^) 'having a hundred ways', srustTvdnam, sa-jitvanam 'victorious', sdtvanam, sa-ydvanam 'accompanying', sahdvanam, sfkvanam 'corner of the mouth', hdrdvanam (VS. xxxviii. 1 2 ) 'strengthening hearts'. I. m. I. dtharvana, abhi-yugvana, cikiivana 'wise', satd-parvana 'having a hundred joints', sikvana (TS. 11. 5.12^) 'skilful'. — 2. grdvna. — n. I. dhdnvana, pdrvana. — 2. sndvna (AV.). D. m. I. ddhvane, d-pakad-daghvane 'not staying behind', kftvane 'active', jdsvane 'needy', druhvane 'hostile', prstha-ydjvane 'sacrificing on the ridge', mddvane, ydjvane, vasuvdne (VS. xxi. 48) 'winning of wealth', sdkvane (VS. V. 5) 'skilful', satd-dhanvane (VS. xvi. 29) 'having a hundred bows', srutdrvane, sdtvane, su-kftvane ''g\ovis,\ su-dhdnvane (VS. xvi. 36), st/iird-dAanvatte ''ha.Vvag a. strong bow'. — 2. d-ravne, rtdvne, osistha-ddvne (TS.i. 6. 12^) 'giving immedia- tely', vfsa-prayavne 'going with stallions', suta-pdvne 'Soma-drinker', su-ddvne 'giving abundantly', soma-pdvne, sva-dhdvne 'independent'. — n. i. turvdne 'victory', davdne 'giving', dhdnvane (VS. xvi. 14).

Ab. m. I. ddhvanas (VS. xxvi. i ; TS.), paka-sutvanas 'offering Soma with sincerity'. — 2. d-ravnas, puru-rdvnas (VS. ill. 48) 'loud-roaring'. — n. i. dhdnvanas (AV.), pdrvanas. G. m. I. dtkarvanas, ddhvanas, d-yajvanas, d-strta-yajvanas 'sacrificing indefatigably', ydjvanas, vy-adhvanas 'striding through'. — 2. d-ravnas, dadhi- krdvnas, bhuri-ddvnas, yuktd-gravnas, suta-pdvnas, soma-pdvnas; maghonas^. — n. I. dhdnvanas 'bow'. L. m. I. dtharvani, ddhvani, rtdvani, srutdrvani, su-kftvani. — 2. sata- ddvni^. — 3. W^ithout ending: ddhvan. — n. i. tugvani 'ford', pdrvani. — 3. an-arvdn, a-parvdn, dhdnvan, pdrvan (AV.). V. m. I. {AN.), asva-davan 'giving horses', davan {P^h-V.^.^^^), maghavan, vasu-ddvan, visvato-davan (SV.i. 5.2. i') 'giving everywhere', visva- davan (AV.) 'giving everything', satya-satvan 'truly strong', satrd-davan 'giving everything', sahasdvan 'strong', suta-pdvan, soma-pdvan, sva-ddvan 'having good taste', sva-dhavan, sva-ydvan 'going one's own way'. — 2. With -vas: rtdvas, eva-ydvas 'going quickly', prdtar-itvas, vibhava^.

1 As a masculine. however the a must be metrically restored; 2 Also sahavan and sahavan from a stem there are no examples in the -an or -man in -vant. stems, but the AV. has one in the former 3 Once with final vowel lengthened in the and three in the latter. Samhita text, dhanva. 6 khid-vas (vi. 224) is perhaps best taken 4 Sometimes to be read as magha-vanas as V. of a stem khid-vams-\ BR. and LanmAN see Lanman 534. explain it as from khid-van-. The V. matarisvas 5 The only example of syncopation in the is formed as if from matarU-van- instead of L. of this declension in the RV. (v. 275), where maiari-iv-an-; cp. p. 2IO, notes '° and '3. VI. Declension. Nouns. Consonant Stems. 213

Du. N. A. V. m. agradvana 'eating {advan-) first', a-druhvdna 'not hostile', rtdvanS, grdvdna, pratar-yAvana, maghdvana, ratha-yavand 'driving in a car', subhra-ydvann 'driving stately', srustivdnd, sa-jitvdnd. — With -au : ^tSvdnau, gravdnau (AV.). — I. m. grdvabhyam (AV.). — G. m. maghonos. PI. N. V. m. aksna-ydvdnas 'going across', dtharvdnas, an-arvdnas, d-yajvdnas, upa-hdsvdnas 'mocking', urdhvd-grdvdnas 'lifting the pressing stone', fkvdnas, rtdvdnas,grdvdnas,g/irta-pdvdnas{y'&.vi. 19) 'drinking ghee', driihvdnas, ni-kftvdnas 'deceitful', pari-sddvdnas 'besetting', pivanas (TS. iii. 2. 8S), prd- sthdvanas 'swift', prdtar-yavdnas, maghdvdnas, raghu-pdtvanas, vdnivanas^ 'demanding', vasd-pdvdnas (VS. vi. 19) 'drinkers of fat', iubham-ytivanas, irustivdnas, sdtvdnas, su-dhdnvdnas, su-h'ckvanas 'shining brightly'. — Weak form for strong: maghiinas (vi. 44")'. N. A. n. I. dhdnvani, pdrvdni, sndvdni (AV.). — 2. dhdnva, pdrva^; with long final vowel only pdrvd (AV. xii. 5'*^). A. m. I. ddhvanas, d-yajvanas, driihvanas (AV.). — 2. d-rdvnas, eva- ydvnas, grdvnas, prdtar-ydvnas; maghonas. I. m. ddhvabhis, d-prayutvabhis 'attentive', fkvabhis, eva-ydvabhis, grdvabhis, ydjvabhis, rdnvabhis 'agreeable', sikvabhis, sdtvabkis, sanitvabhis prdtar-ydvabhis'^ , 'bestowers', sa-ySvabkis, su-pra-ydvab/iis's'pet

Stems in -in, -min, -vin.

332. The suffixes -in, -min, -vin, which have the sense of 'possessing', are used to form secondary adjectives. The stems in -in are very common, those in -vin are fairly frequent, numbering nearly twenty, but there is only one in -min: rg-jnin- 'praising'. They are declined in the m. and n. only 9; but the neuter forms are very rare, amounting to fewer than a dozen altogether. The inflexion presents hardly any irregularities. The vowel of the suffix remains accented throughout'", and is not liable either to syncope or to lengthening in the G. pi. It is lengthened in the N. sing. m. only". As in n. all derivative stems ending in -n, the nasal disappears in the N. sing. m. and before terminations beginning with consonants.

' the a. There are a few transition forms to the a-declension starting from 'most A. sing. m. in -in-am understood as -ina-m. Such z.ie. faramesih-ina-m (AV. XIX. 9*) exalted', N. sing, n.; the V. mahin-a and the G. mahina-sya from mah-in- 'mighty', and

f. stem by adding 1 From the intensive of \van-. 9 They form a special 'possessing horses' 2 The form kHvano in AV. xix. 3S5 is a -T; c. g. from asv-tn- conjecture for the lirsndvo of the Mss. asvin-T-. 10 .irin-, sakin-, sarin-, and the 3 In Pada as well as Sarnhita. Except kdru-laiin-, maha-vafurin-, indra- 4 Also the supplementary form maghavad- compounds of which a single form bhis. medin-, from each compounds formed with 5 Also the supplementary form maghavad- occurs; also the a-namin-. bhyas. the negative a-; e. g. " lengthened in the 6 The form sahasra-davnam is read as a It would doubtless be N. A. n. pi. also if that form occurred. f. in I. 17^ 7 Accented gravasu in the edition. 8 There is also the transfer form magha- vatsu. :

'214 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar. the n. pi. vanina-ni (x. 665]i from van-in- m. 'forest-tree'. The isolated form mandi-m (l. 92) is a transition to the «-declension, starting probably from the I. sing, mandin-a 'exhilarating' understood as mandi-na.

Inflexion. 333. All the case-forms are represented in the m., but in the n. the three singular case-forms, N. A., I, and G. only. As only eight or nine n. forms occur, they may most conveniently be enumerated separately: Sing. n. N. d-nami 'unbending', ubhaya-hasti 'filling both hands', tsari (AV.) 'hidden', patatri 'winged', vajl 'vigorous' (Kh. iv. 6^), sakalyesi (AV.)

'seeking shavings'^. I. kjrina 'praising', su-gandhina^ 'fragrant'. G. pra- hosinas 'offering oblations'*. The m. forms actually occurring, if made from hast-in- 'having hands', would be as follows:

Sing. N. hasti. A. hastinam. I. hastlna. D. hastine. Ab. hast'inas. G. hast'inas. L. hastini. V. hdstin. -— Du. N. A. hastlna and hastinau. I. D. hastibhyam. G. L. hastinos. — PI. N. hast'inas. A. hastlnas. I. hast'ibhis. D. hastibhyas (VS. AV.). G. hastinam. L. hast'isu. a. The forms actually occurring are Sing. N. I. Stems in -in: anki 'possessing a hook', ati-vyadkf (VS. XXII. 22) 'wounding', abhya-varti 'coming near', arthf 'active', asvi 'possessed of horses', iri^ 'powerful', uj-jest (VS. xvii. 85) N. of one of the Maruts, udri 'abounding in water', rjipi 'moving upwards', rjisi 'receiving the residue of Soma', ekaki (VS. TS.) 'solitary', kapardi 'wearing braided hair', kdrU-lati^

'having decayed teeth', kamt 'desirous', kidayi (TS. iv. i . 9^) 'forming a nest', kevaladf 'eating by oneself alone', ken 'having long hair', krTdi (VS. xvii. 85) 'sporting', grha-medhi (VS. xvii. 8 5 ) 'performing the domestic sacrifices', candri (VS. XX. 37) 'golden', tsari 'hidden', (i^«7««J 'majestic', nis-sapi 'lustful', pakthi'cooYmg the oblation',/3/fl/'r/(TS. 1. 7. 7^} 'winged', /ara/^^-j//^/ (VS. viii. 54) 'most exalted', pari-panthi 'waylayer', prsty-amayt 'suffering from a pain in the side', pra-ghdst (VS. XVII. 85) 'voracious', pra-bhafigi 'destroying', pra-vepanf 'causing to tremble', bahu-sardhi 'relying on his arms', brahma-cari 'practising devotion', brahma- varcasi (VS. xxii. 22) 'eminent in sacred knowledge', bhadra-vadi 'uttering auspicious cries', manisi 'thoughtful', manthi (VS. vn. 18) 'stirred Soma juice', mandi 'exhilarating', marayi 'destructive' (?j, maha-hasti 'having large hands', mayi 'crafty', medi 'ally', rathi 'possessing a car', rambhi 'carrying a crutch', rukmf 'adorned with gold', vajri 'armed with a bolt', varmi 'mailed', vast 'having power', vajl 'vigorous', vi-rapsi 'copious', sata-svi 'having a hundred possessions', sakt^ 'strong', sipri 'full-cheeked', jWjot/ 'roaring', //c^/ 'sounding', svaghni 'gambler', sodas i (VS. TS.) 'having sixteen, parts', sdri^ 'hastening', sahasri 'thousandfold', sad 'companion', somt 'offering Soma', svabdt 'bellowing', hastt 'having hands'. — 2. stem in -min: rgmi 'praising'. — 3. stems in -vin\ d-dvayavi 'free from duplicity', d-yudhvi^ 'not fighting', astravt 'obeying the goad', tarasvi (VS. xix. 88) 'bold'. A. I. atrinam 'devourer', adhi-kalpmam (VS. xxx. 18) 'gamble-manager'.

1 Instead of vanin-as, probably due to the 5 With abnormal accent. metre. 6 Accented like a Bahuvrihi. 2 The Pada text reads sakalya-esi; but the 7 Thus accented VS. xvn. 85, but saki Paippalada recension has the better reading RV. I. 518: the latter is probably an error sakalyem 'among the shavings' : seeWHiTNEY's as the suffix is accented in the three other note on AV. I. 252. forms ^akinam, ^akine, ^akinas. 3 But this form might be from su-gandhi-. 8 B6HTHNGK(pw.) regards this as a gerund: 4 The isolated form krudhmi (vil. 568) d-yud-dhvT 'without fighting'. agreeing with nidnamsi is a N. pi. n. of a stem krudh-mi-, rather than of krudh-min- 'angry'. :

VI. Declension. Nouns. Consonant Stems. 2IS

abhi-prasninam (VS. xxx. lo) 'inquisitive', abhi-matinam 'insidious', arkinam 'praising', ava-krakdnam 'rushing down', d-vajinam 'a bad horse', asvinam,

adar'mam 'breaking open', ayinam (TS. ii. 4. 7') 'hurrying up', isminam 'speeding', uktha-samsmam 'uttering verses', ukthinam 'praising', udritiam, rjtsmam^, kapardinam, karambhinam 'possessing gruel', kalpinam (y?>.y.yiyi. 18) 'designing', kalmalikinam 'flaming', kaminam, karinam 'singing', kulayinam, kucid-arthinam 'striving to get anywhere', catinam 'lurking', jana-vadinam (VS. xxx. 17) 'prattler', tri-sthinam (VS. xxx. 14) 'having a threefold footing', dyumninam, dhaninam 'wealthy', ni-yaymam' 'passing over', paksinam 'w'mgQA!,patatrinam{y^.y.iK.io), pari-panthinam, p'ltha-sarpinam (VS. xxx. 21) 'cripple', putrinam 'possessing sons', purTsinam 'possessing land', pra-vadinam (VS. xxx. 13) 'speaking pleasantly', prasn'mam (VS. xxx. 10) 'questioner', bahu-vadinam (VS. xxx. 19) 'talkative', nianis'inam, manthmam, mandinam^,

manyu-savinam 'pressing Soma with zeal', tnaytnam, medinam (TS. iv. 7. lot), rathinam, vamsa-nartinam (VS. xxx. 21) 'pole-dancer', vajrinam, vaninam 'bountiful', vaninam 'forest tree', vayak'inam 'ramifying', varcinam N. of a demon, vajinam, vi-rapi'mam, vi-stuninam (VS. xxiii. 29) 'wetting', sata- gvinam 'hundredfold', saiinatn 'hundredfold', sakinam, susminam, irhginam 'horned', svaninam (VS. xxx. 7) 'keeping dogs', sahasra-posinam 'thriving a thousandfold', sahasrinam. — 3. d-dvayavinam, ubhayavinam 'partaking of both', tarasvinam, namasv'mam 'reverential', mayavinam 'employing deceit', medhdvinam (VS. xxxii. 14) 'possessed of wisdom', raksasvinam 'demoniacal'. I. I. arcina 'shining', as'vtna, kimidina 'evil spirit', kir'ina 'praising' *, balina

(TS. HI. 3. 8^) 'strong', mandlna, mah&-vaturina'> 'very wide', vaturina 'wide', vdjina. — 3. raksasvina. D. I. abhya-vartme, a-mitrine 'hostile', ava-bhedme {YS.'XNi. :^^) 'splitting', a-tatayine (VS. xvi. 18) 'having one's bow drawn', d-yudhine (VS. xvi. 36) 'warrior', upa-vitine (yS.'^vi. 17) 'wearing the sacred cord', usnisine (VS. xvi. 22) 'wearing a turban', kapardine, /^fl»i7(rzW (VS. xvi. 35) 'mailed', karine, kimidine, tantrayine (VS. xxxviii. 12) 'drawing out rays', ni-vyadhine (VS. xvi. 20) 'piercing', ni-sarigine (yS.'^i.Yi. 20) 'sword-bearer', //-a-i-a/Jj/w^ 'victorious', bilmine (VS. XVI. 35) 'having a helmet', bhatnine 'angry', manidne, mantrine (VS. XVI. 19) 'wise', mandine, mahUie 'mighty', rathine, vajrine, varuthine (VS. XVI. 35) 'wearing armour', varmine (VS.), vi-namsine (VS. ix. 20) 'vanishing', vi-rapsine, vy-asnuv-ine^ (VS. xii. 32) a genius of food, vyadhine (VS. xvi. 18) 'piercer', sdkine, siprine, hesmine, sodas'me (VS. viii. 33), sv-ayudhine (VS. XVI. 36) 'having good weapons'. — 3. raksasvine. Ab. I. abhi-prabhahginas 'breaking completely', patatrinas, manthinas (TS. VS. XIII. 57), sominas. G. I. arthinas, rjistnas, kapardinas (TS.VS.xvi. 10), dkaninas, patatrinas (TS. IV. 7. 13')) parninas 'winged', pra-gardhinas 'pressing onwards', bhuri- /(^j/^aj- 'much-nourishing', manthinas iySi.vii. i?>), mandinas, mayinas, ratninas 'possessing gifts', raj/waj- 'juicy', r^/Z^a.?' 'abounding in seed', vaj'rinas, vaninas 'bountiful', vaninas 'forest tree', varcinas, vajinas, vi-rapsinas, vilu-harsinas

100' 1 fjisdm in I. 32'^ is possibly a metrically 4 Grassmann in i. proposes to read shortened form iorfjisinam: op. Lanman 543 2. kirine. 2 As this compound occurs only once 5 Accented like BahuvrThi; but cp. beside the simple adj. yayi-, which occurs P- ^S4=- several times, the former is perhaps a trans- 6 Formed from the present stem of j/aJ- fer from the /-declension. vi-as-nuv- in-, rstas- 3 mandi-m (I. 92) is probably a transition 7 From reta- for 'seed'. form; but BR. regard it as a contraction in pronunciation of mandinam. 2i6 I. Allgemeines UND Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

'refractory', vrandinas 'becoming soft', sailnas, susminas, srnginas, sahasrinas, sominas. — 3. d-dvayavinas, dvaydvinas 'double-dealing', namasvinas. L. I. dvipini (AV.) 'leopard', parame-sthini (AV.), brahna-carini (AV.), mayini, vajbii, somini.

V. I. dna-bhayin 'fearless', abhya-vartin (VS.xii. 7), amatrin 'having a large drinking vessel', rjTpin, rj'isin, tuvi-kurmin 'working powerfully', pra-pathin 'roaming on distant paths', yaksin 'living', vajrin, vajin, virapnn, savasin 'mighty', siprin, s'usmin, sahasm 'mighty'. — 3. ubhayixvin. Du. N. A. V. I. asvifiS, V. asvina and dsvina, kumarina 'having children', kesina, V. pajra-hosina 'having rich oblations', parnina, putrlna, purislna, pra- saksina, manthina, V. mayina, vajriria, vajina, V. vSjina, vi-ghanina 'slaying', susmina, sarathina(ySs.yix.v/^.'j;T'S>^ 'driving in the same car', sama-carina (Kh. III. 2 2 5) 'faring with chants'. — 3. mayavina. — Forms with -aw': asvinau, V. dsvinau and ahinau, patatrinau (VS. xviii. 52), vajinau. I. asvibhyam, indra-medibhyam (AV.) 'whose ally is Indra'. — D. asvi- bhyam. — G. asvinos. — L. asvinos. PI. N. V. I. ankusinas 'having a hook', atrinas, arkinas, arcinas, arth'mas, avarokinas (VS. xxiv. 6) 'brilliant', isminas, ukthlnas, upa-mantrinas 'persuading', rjisinas, kapardlnas, kabandhinas 'bearing casks', kaminas, karinas, kirinas, krsanmas 'adorned with pearls', kesinas, khadinas 'adorned

with rings', ganinas (TS. i. 4. 11') 'having attendants', gathinas 'singers', gdyatrinas 'singers of hymns', gharminas 'preparing the Gharma offering', dasagvinas 'tenfold', drapsinas 'falling in drops', dhutninas 'smoking', ni-karinas (TS. VS. xxvii. 4) 'injurers', ni-iodiiias 'piercing', ni-rdminas 'lurking', ni-sahg'mas, paksmas, patatrinas, pari-panihmas, pari-parinas (VS. iv. 34) 'adversaries', parninas, pasinas 'laying snares', purisinas, pra-kndinas 'sporting', pra-sak- sinas, balinas, manismas, mandinas, mahinas, mayinas, medinas, raih'inas vaninas 'bountiful', vaninas 'forest trees', varminas, vdjlnas, vi-raps'inas, vi- rokinas 'brilliant', visaninas 'holding horns' (a people), vrata-carinas 'performing vows', satagvinas, satinas, sdkinas, susminas, sahasrinas, sominas, svaninas 'resounding', hastinas, hiraninas 'golden'. — 2. rgminas. — 3. tarasvinas, dvaydvinas, dhrsadvinas 'bold', namasvinas, mdydvinas. A. I. atrinas, a-rajinas 'lacking splendour', arthinas, asvinas, uktAa-samsinas, kaminas, karinas, grathinas 'false', dyumninas, paksinas, pra-ghasinas (VS. HI. 44), bhdminas, ma?idinas, mdyinas, mitrinas 'befriended', rathinas, vaninas 'bountiful', vaninas 'forest trees', vdjinas, vrandinas, sahasrinas, sominas hastinas (VS. xxiv. 29), hiraninas. — 3. raksasvinas. I. I. asvibhis, kesibhis, ni-sangibhis, patatribhis, manlsibhis, mandibhis, rukmibhis, vajibhis, susmibhis, hastibhis. — 2. rgmibhis.

D. I. rta-vddibhyas (VS. v. 7) 'speaking the truth', kridibhyas (VS. xxiv. 16), grha-medhibhyas (VS. xxiv. 16), dhanvayibhyas (VS. xvi. 22) 'carrying a bow' rathibhyas (VS. xvi. 26), sikhibhyas (AV.) 'peaked', svanibhyas (VS. xvi. 27) JT'/Iray/Mjvflj' (VS.xv1.21) 'having a spear', svadhayibhyas (VS. xix. 36) 'owning the Svadha'.

G. I. kdrindm, mdyindm, vasindm (AV.), vajindm, srngindm. — 3. stukd- vindm 'shaggy'. — L. i. khddisu, dvarisu 'obstructing', hastisii (AV.).

4. Labial Stems,

a. Stems in (radical) -p. 334. These stems are inflected alike in the masculine and feminine, there being no neuters. All the monosyllables are feminine substantives.

I According to Lanman 544 the -a forms occur 369 times, the -au forms 32 times. :

VI. Declension. Nouns. Consonant Stems. 217

They are: a> 'water', kfp- 'beauty', ksdp- 'night', ksip- 'finger', rip- 'deceit', rup- 'earth', vip-'^ 'rod'. Feminine are also the compounds a-tdp- 'heating', pati-rip- 'deceiving a husband', vi-stdp- 'summit', rta-sdp- 'performing worship'. All other compound stems are masculine. They are: agni-tdp- 'enjoying the fire', warmth of abhi-lapa-ldp-'' {AN .) 'excessively whimpering', asu-tfp-i 'delighting in lives', keta-sdp- 'obeying the will (of another)', pari-rdp- 'crying around', pasu-tfp-'>' 'delighting in herds', pra-sup-^ 'slumbering', rity-ap- 'having streaming (riii-) water'. a. The distinction of ^ strong and weak forms appears in dp- and its compound rity-ap; as welL as in the two compounds of sat>- 'serve', rta-sdp- and kela-sap-. The strong form dpas is used a few times in the A. pi., but the long vowel in pari-rapas as A. pi. is due to the metre; on the other hand, the weak form ap-ds appears twice in the AV. as N. pi. b. The A. pi. apds is nearly always accented on the ending as a weak case; ksapas similarly appears two or three times, and vipds once. u. No N. sing. m. or f. occurs, but a n. transition form once appears in this case

vistdpa-m (IX. Il3'"j, a. form which doubtless started from the A. sing. f. vhldp-avi. The n. pi. of the same transition stem occurs once as vistapa (Vlli. 80^). Two other transition forms are ksapabhis and kdpabhis.

Infiexion. 335. The forms actually occurring are the following:

Sing. A. na. pasu-tfpam. — f. vi-stdpam. — I. m. vipd 'priest'. — f. apd,

kj-pA, ksaps, vipA. — Ab. f. apds; a-tdpas, vi-stdpas. — G. m. vipas 5. — f. apds, ksapds, ripds, rupds. — L. f. vi-stdpi. Du. N. m. rity-apa; asu-tfpau^. PI. N. m. rta-sApas, keta-sspas, V. rlti-apas; vipas; agni-tdpas, abhl-lapa- Idpas (AV.), asu-tfpas, pra-supas. — f. Apas, V. Spas, rta-sApas; ksipas, vipas, ripas; pati-ripas. The A. form apds occurs twice in the AV. for the N.?.

A. m. asu-tfpas, pari-rApas*. — f. apds and Apas^, ksapds and ksdpas^°, vipds and vipas ", ripas.

I. f. adbkis". — 'D. f. adb/iyds" (VS.VI.9). — Ab. f. adbhyds". — G. m. vipim. — f. apAm '-3, ksapAm, vipAm. — L. f. apsu '+.

b. Steins in (radical) -bb.

336. Both masculines and feminines occur in this declension, but there are no neuters. The stems comprise five monosyllables formed from roots, together with compounds of three of the latter {grabh-, subh-, stubh-), and

kakubh-. The stems are: ksubh- f 'push', grbh- f. 'seizing', ndbh- f. 'destroyer',

subh- f. 'splendour', stubh- adj. 'praising', f. 'praise'; jTva-gfbh- m. 'capturing alive', 'bailiff', sute-gfbh- 'taking hold of the Soma', syuma-gfbh- 'seizing the

I vip- as an adjective is used as a m. times in books I and X of the RV., and 16

also. times in the AV. ; it also occurs in Kh. III. 9. » An irregular intensive formation. 10 ksdpas 6 or 8 times in RV., ksapas 2 or 3 Cp. Kluge, KZ. 25, 31 if. 3 times. 4 From map- 'sleep'. 11 vipas thrice, vipds once in RV. 5 With irregular accent. 12 By dissimilation for *ali-bhis, *ab-bhyds; 6 Cp. Lanman 482 (middle). cp. Johansson, IF. 4, 134—146. See Lan- 7 There is also the transition form in the man 483. There are also the two transfer n. vi-sfdfd. forms ksapabhis and ksipabhis, each occurring 8 Metrical for pari-rapas, which is the once. reading of the Pada text in II. 233' 14; see 13 On the metrical value of apani see Lan- RPr. IX. 26. man 484 (top). 9 apds is the regular form occurring 152 14 BR. regard apdsu in viii. 414 as = apsu times in the RV. and 26 times in the AV. with inserted -a-. See Lanman 484. The strong form apas is used half a dozen 2l8 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

reins'; rathe-sabh- 'flying along in a car'; anu-stuhh- f. 'after-praise', a metre^ fta-stubh- 'praising duly', tri-stubh- 'triple praise', a metre, pari-stubh- 'exulting on every side', sain-stubh- (VS.) 'shout of joy', a metre, gharma-stubh- 'shouting in the heat', chandah-stubh- 'praising in hymns', vrsa-stiibh- 'calling aloud', su-stubh- 'uttering a shrill cry'; kakubh- f. 'peak', tri-kakubh- 'three- pointed'. a. The distinction of strong and weak forms does not appear except in the N. and A. pi. of ndbh-. The inflexion of these stems is incompletely represented, there being no dual forms, and no plural forms the endings of which begin with a consonant.

Inflexion. 337. The forms occurring are: Sing. N. m. stup; tri-kaki'ip. — f. am-sti'ip (VS. AV.), anu-sti'ik (TS. v. 2. II'), tri-stup; kaki'ip (VS. AV.).

A. m. rathe-si'ebAam, sute-gfbham. , gfbham, subham; rta-stiibham, anu-sti'Mam, tri-stubham ; kakubhain. I. m. stubhA; su-stiibka. — f. ksubka, grbhd, subhA; atiu-sticbha, tri-sttibha

(VS. XVII. 34; TS. II. 2. 48); kaki'tbha (VS. xxviii. 44). D. m. gharma-stubhe, syuma-grbhe. — f. subhe (AV. VS. xxx. 7); anu- stubhe (VS. XXIV. 12), tri-stubhe (VS. xxiv. 12); kakubhe (VS. xxiv. 13). Ab, m. jiva-gfbhas. — f. grbhds (VS. xxi. 43); anu-stubhas (VS. xiii. 54), tri-stubhas (AV.).

G. m. su-stubkas. — f. iubhds'^ (in subhds pdtT, du. N. A. and subhas pan, v.).

L. f. tri-stubhi (VS. xxxviii. 18}; kakubhi (TS. m. 3. 9"; VS. xv. 4). PI. N. m. chanda/i-stubkas, vrsa-sii'cbkas, pari-sh'tbhas, su-sti'cbhas. — f. nsbhas', subhas, stiibhas.

A. f. fidbhas, stubhas; tri-stubhas, pari-stubhas; kakiibhas.

G. f. kakubham.

c. Stems in -m.

338. There are only about half a dozen stems in -m which among them muster a few more than a dozen forms. All are monosyllables except a compound of nam- 'bend'. Neuters are sdtn- 'happiness' and perhaps ddm- 'house'. A possible m. is him- 'cold'; and there are four feminines: ksdm-, gam-, and jdm-, all meaning 'earth', and sam-ndm- (AV.) 'favour'. Strong and weak forms are distinguished in ksdm-, which lengthens the vowel in the strong cases, and syncopates it in one of the two weak cases occurring; gdm- and jdm- are found in weak cases only, where they syncopate the vowel. The forms occurring are the following:

Sing. N. A. n. sdm. — I. f. ksama, jma; m. him-S.^. — Ab. f. ksmds, gmds, j'mds. — G. f. gmds, Jmds^; n. ddn^. — L. f. ksdmi^- — Du. N. f. ksama, dyava-ksama 'heaven and earth'. — PI. N. f. ksimas; sam-ndmas (AV.). — G. n. damSm.

1 The form ddbhas in v. 19 is regarded 4 Cp. Brugmann, Grundriss 2, 580. by BR. and Grassmann as N. sing. m. 5 For *dam-s (like d-gan for *d-ffam-s) 'destroyer'. Lanman 485 thinks it may be occurring only in the expressions pdtir dan a G. sing. f. with wrong accent. axiipdilddn and equivalent to ddm-patih and 2 Strong form. ddm-patX at the end of a tristubh line. Cp. 3 This is the only form, occurring twice, Brugmann, Grundriss 2, 453. from a possible stem him-, beside himena, 6 With irregular accent; cp. above 94 a. from himi: It might, however, be an I. from the latter stem. Cp. 372. :

VI. Declension. Nouns. Consonant Stems. 219

5. Stems in Sibilants.

I. a. Stems in radical * and s.

339. In radical stems ending in s and s, the sibilants are identical in origin, both being alike etymologically based on the dental s, which remains after a, but is cerebralized after other vowels and after k. In the RV. there are of radical ^--sterns some 40 derived from about 15 roots; of radical j-stems, some 50 derived from about 15 roots; in both groups taken together there are nearly 20 monosyllabic stems, the rest being compounds. Masculine and feminine stems are about equally numerous; but there are altogether only 7 or 8 neuters. a. The distinction between strong and weak forms appears in three words piimams and Jiums- 'male'; nds- and nas- 'nose'; ui(Aa-sas- a.nd n/e^/ia-sds- 'utteiing verses'. TheA.pl. has the accentuation of weak stems in the ina.sca\\aes jnas-ds, pums-ds, mds-ds and in the feminines is-ds, tis-ds, dvis-ds.

b. The stem as- 'face' is supplemented in its inflexion by the an- stem as-dn- ; the stem is- is supplemented before consonant endings by idd-'^; and dos- 'fore-arm' is supplemented by dos-dn- in the dual form dosdnl (AV. IX. 7'). c. Transitions to the a- or a -declension appear in forms made from as- 'face', is- 'refreshment', kas- 'cough', nas- 'nose', mas- 'month', d-sds- 'hope', ni-mis- 'winking'. I. From as-, beside and probably through the influence of the I. sing. ds-&, is formed the adv. dsaya 'before the face of (as from a stem ds&-, and with adverbial shift of accent instead of *dsdyd). — 2. Forms like G. is-ds gave rise to isd-m; and the supplementary stem ida- probably started from the I. sing, id-a, which itself was probably due to id- the form assumed by is- before bk- endings; the stem is- further shows a transition to the i- declension in the D. isdye. — 3. From kas- 'cough' there is the transition V. kdse (A.V.). — 4. The strong dual form nas-d furnished a transition to an a- stem, from which is formed the dual nase (AV.). — 5. As pad-am gave rise to a, new N. pada-s, so from mas-am arose the new stem masa-, from which are formed the N. sing, m&sa-s and the A. pi. masdn. — 6. In the RV. the stem a-sds- alone is used; but in the AV. appears the A. dsam (perhaps a contraction for d-sdsam) which, understood as dsd-m, was probably the starting point of the dsa-, the only stem in the later language. — 7. From ni-mis- 'winking' there appear, beside the regular compound forms A. d-nimis-am, I. d-nimis-a i. 'non-winking', the transition forms N. a-niviisd-s, A. a-nimisd-m, I. a-nimisina, N.pl. a-nimisas, adj. 'unwinking', with the regular Bahuvrihi accent (90 B c).

Inflexion.

340. In the N. sing, the sibilant is of course dropped if preceded by a consonant, as an-dk 'eyeless', pitman 'man'. Otherwise s remains, while s

becomes t^. Before bh- endings, .r becomes d in two forms which occur '{mad-bkis, mad-bkyds)^ and r in the only other one (dor-bhydm); while j- becomes d in the only example occurring {vi-prud-bhis). The forms actually occurring, if made from mas-'- m. 'month' as an

s- stem, and from dvis- f. 'hatred' as a j-stem, would be as follows: Sing. N.S mis; dvit. A. mdsam; dvisam. I. masa; dvisd. D. masi;

dvisl Ab. tnasds ; dvisds. G. masas; dvis as. 'L. masi; dvisi. — Du. N. A. wi^a; dvisa. G. masds. L. masSs (AV.TS.). — PI. N. masas; dvisas. A. masds; dvisas and dvisas. I. madbkis; dvidbhis. D. madbhyds (AV.). Ab. madbhyds (AV.). G. masSm; dvisdm. L. masst'i (AV.). The forms actually occurring are:

I As ksdp- and ksip- by ksapa- and ksipd- 3 Cp. J. Schmidt, KZ. 26, 340. respectively. 4 In this word (derived from md- 'mea- dadhfk sure') the s is really secondary, probably I 2 It (becomes ^only in the n. form -as {mas- md-as-); 'boldly', used as an adv. from dadhfs-, if the representing the suffix = Grundriss p. Vord is derived from dhrs-'he bold'; but the cp. Brugmann, 2, 398. 5 only V. occurring is pumas. word is perhaps more probably derived from The drk- 'be firm', see BR. s. v. dadhHi, and cp. Bartholomae, IF. 12, Anzeiger p. 28. ;

I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

Sing. N. I. m. piiman^ 'male'; candra-mas 'moon', durS-bhas' 'shining to a distance', su-dds^ 'worshipping well'. — f. d-jhas 'having no kindred', a-sts^ 'prayer'. — n. bhss 'light', mis 'flesh'; dos 'arm', yos 'welfare', sam-yus 'luck and welfare'. — 2. m. an-dk^ 'blind', edhamana-dvit^ 'hating the insolent'. — f. vi-pri'U (AV.) 'drop'. A. I. m. mdsa7n 'month', pi'imamsam; a-ySsam 'dexterous', uktha-sasami 'uttering verses', suddsam, su-bhdsam 'shining beautifully', sv-asisam'- 'well- praising', sv-dsam 'fair-mouthed'. — f. kdsam^ (AV.) 'cough'; a-slsairf^, pra- sisam + 'precept' 5. — 2. m. ghrta-pn'isam 'sprinkling ghee', jara-dvisam 'hating decrepitude', brahma-dv'isam 'hating sacred knowledge', visva-pi'isam 'all-nourish- ing'. — f. isam 'refreshment', dvisam 'hatred', prksam 'satiation'; d-nimisam 'non-winking', dosani-srisam (AV.) 'leaning on the arm', hrdaya-srisam (AV.)

'clinging to the heart'. Also the adverbial A. a-vy-usdm (AV.) 'till the dawn'. — n. dadhfk 'boldly' as adv. 1. 1, m. masd. — f. kasd (AV.), nasd (AV.) 'nose', sasd 'ruler' "; abM-sdsa" 'blame', ava-sdsd (AV.) 'wrong desire', d-sdsa 'hope', a-sisa, nih-sdsd 'blame', pard-sdsa (AV.) 'calumny', pra-sisa (AV. VS.). — n. asd 'mouth', bhasd. — 2. m. visva-pt'isd'^'^. — f. isd, tvisd 'excitement'; d-nimisa, prd-rfsd (AV. TS.)

'rainy season', press'' ^ 'pressure'. — n. gfirtaprusa. D. I. m. pumse (AV.); su-ddse. — n. bhase'iyS:. xiii. 39). — 2. m. d-prd- yuse'^'' 'not careless'; d-vi-dvise (AV.) 'for non- enmity', rsi-dvtse 'hating the seers', brahma-dvise; gav-ise 'wishing for cows', pasv-ise 'wishing for cattle' sdkam-ukse'-^ 'sprinkling together tvise, prkse, rise "mjury, prdse

(VS. V. 7). ^ ^ Ab. I. m. pumsds. — f. kasds (AV.) — n. asds. — 2. f. isds, ivisds. dvisds, risds; abki-srisas 'ligature', ni-misas 'winking'. G. I. m. pumsds; a-sdsas 'not blessing', su-ddsas, sv-dsas. — f. d-sisas (TS. IV. 6. 6^). — 2. m. srfrga-vrsas'^^ a man's name. — f. isds, usds 'dawn', dvisds, prksds; abhra-prusas 'sprinkling of the clouds', ni-tnisas.

L. I. m. pumsi, mdsi. — f. iipdsi 'in the lap', nasi (VS.); d-Hsi (AV.), pra-sisi (Av.). — 2. f. ni-mtsi, prd-ifsi, vy-i'isi 'dawn'. V. m. pumas^^. Du. N. A. I. m. uktAa-sdsd'"^, siiryd-mdsa^° 'sun and moon'. — f. ndsa".

— I. I. n. dorbhydm (VS.xxv. 3). — G. i. f. nasus. — L. i. f. nasos (AV. TS.). PI. N. I. m. a-ydsas, V. aydsas, uktha-sdsas'"^, su-sams'dsas'^ (AV.)

'well-directing'. — f. d-sdsas; a-s'Isas, pra-sisas, vi-shas (AV.) 'explanations'.

1 On the Sandhi of this N. see Lanman 13 Accented thus as a monosyllabic stem instead pylsa pra-is-d). 49S'- of [= 2 See Lanman 495'. 14 From pra-\-yu- 'separate' with s as root 3 There are also the transition forms determinative. mdsa-s and a-nimisd-s. 15 Perhaps also drani-ise (vili. 46' 7) 'hasten- 4 The root in a-sis- and pra-iis-, being a ing near', Pada dram ise; cp. Lanman 496'. reduced form of sas- 'order', is here treated 16 Also the transfer to the ;-declension as belonging to the j-class. isdye. 5 From an-dks- 'eyeless'. 17 In a compound vocative with napal. 18 6 The N. of is- would be*2/': its place is In the f. are found the transfers to the supplied by the extended form idd. a-declension ide and kdse (AV.). 19 7 Strong stem from sas- = sams- 'pro- Strong forms; Pp. tckiha-sdsd, -sdsas. claim'. 20 This might be from the transition stem 8 Accented iSsdm (AV. v. 22"). -mdsa-, 9 Also the transition forms a-nimisdm and " There is also the transition form asam (AV.). ndse (AV.). 1° Cp. Lanman 495 (bottom). 22 There are also the transition forms 11 From sas- = sams- 'proclaim'. nidsds, a-nimisas. 12 There is also the transition form a^nimisena. VI. Declension. Nouns. Consonant Stems. 221 sam-sisas (AV.) 'directions'; vi-srdsas- (AV.) 'falling apart', su-srdsas (AV.) 'falling off easily', svayam-srdsas (AV.) 'dropping spontaneously'. — 2. m. md.ksas 'flies', mfisas 'mice'; anrta-dvisas 'persecuting untruth', V. a-saca-dvisas 'hating non-worshippers', gav-isas, ^ ghrta-pricsas, pari-pr'isas 'sprinkling', brhad-uksas 'shedding copiously', brahma-dvisas, yajna-mtisas (T3. ill. 5. 4') 'sacrifice stealer', vata-tvisas 'having the impetuosity of the wind'. — f. isas, tvisas, pfksas\ dn-a-dhrsas (AV.) 'not checking', ghrta-prusas, ni-mlsas {KSl.), fiemann-isas^ ^ 'following guidance', pati-duisas 'hating her husband', vy-usas (AV.), sam-isas 'darts', sakam-i'cksas, su-pfksas 'abounding with food'. I. A. m. jnasds 'relatives', pumsds, mlsds 3; an-ssas 'faceless', dn-urdhva- bkzsas 'whose splendour does not rise',, a-ydsas, a-s'dsas, hrtsv-dsas 'throwing into the heart'. — f. a-sdsas; a-s'isas, pra-iisas. — 2. m. brahma-dvisas. — f. Isas and isds^, usds, dvisas and dvisds^, pfksas; camrisas", vi-prusas (AV.).

1. 1, m. madbhis. — 2. f. vi-pruiibhis'' (VS.). — D. i. m. tnadbhyds (AV.). — Ab. I. m. madbhyds (AV.). — G. i. m. pumsam (AV.), masdm, vasdm^ 'abodes'; a-ydsam. — 2. f. isdm, dvisdm. — L. i. m. pumsii'^ (AV.).

I. b. Stems in derivative -s.

«• Stems in -is and -us.

341. The stems formed with the suffixes -is and -us may best be treated together, as their inflexion is identical. The -is stems, numbering about a dozen, consist primarily of neuters only'"; these when they are final members of compounds are secondarily inflected as masculines also, but only in a single form (N. sing, svd-socis 'self-radiant') as feminine. The -us stems, numbering sixteen (exclusive of compounds) in the RV., include primary masculines (two also as f.) as well as neuters; three of the latter as final members of compounds are also inflected as feminine. Eleven of the -us stems are neuter substantives, all but one accented on the radical syllable; four of these are also used as m. adjectives'' accented in the same way {drus-, cdksus-, tdpus-, vdpus-). Three of those -us stems which are exclusively m. are adjectives accented en the suffix, while two are substantives accented on the root {ndh-us-, mdn-us-)^^.

a. The N. A. pi. n. are distinguished as strong forms by lengthening and nasa- lizing the vowel of the suffix (as in the -as stems), c. g. jyoCimd and cdhumsi. b. Among these stems appear a number of transitions to, and a few from, other declensions, i. The N. sing, n., as in soc-is and cdks-us, having in some passages the appearance of a N. sing. m. sods and caksu-s, led to formations according to the /- and u-dedension. Such are N. pi. socayas (AV.) 'flames', V. sing, pavaka-soce 'shining brightly', bhadra-soce 'shining beautifully', sukra-soce 'shining brilliantly'; N. pi. arcdyas 'beams', I. pi. arci-bhis. The form of krav-is- 'raw flesh' in the compound d-kravi-hasia- 'not having bloody hands' is probably due to the same cause. From cdks-us- 'eye' is once formed the Ab. cdkso-s and the V. sakasra-cakso (AV.) 'thousand-eyed'. From tdp-us- 'hot' is once

1 The Mss. read vi-srasas; see Whitney's 8 This word, occurring in this form only, note on AV. xix. 343. might be a f. 2 neman- is here probably a locative. 9 mdssu- occurs Pane. Br. iv. 4. i and 3 There is also the transition form masu (like pumsu for punis-su) TS. vir. 5. 22. masan. The f. transition form idasu occurs as the 4 isas occurs 63 times, isas 7 times in the L. pi. of is-. ' RV. 10 There seems no reason why dm-is- 5 dvisas occurs 39 times, dvisas 4 times occurring in L. s. only, should exceptionally in the RV. be regarded as m. (BR., Lanman, Grass- 6 The meaning of this word is perhaps MANN). 'libations in ladles'. T-1- One of these, tdpus- 'hot', has a single tdpusa. 7 There is also the transition form iiabhis f. form, A. du. 12 above 19. as an I. pi. of is-. See p. 84, I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar. formed the G. iafo-s; from z;a«-«j- 'desiring', as if vanii-s in N., the K.Aag.vand-m and pi. vaniin; from ay-us- 'life' occurs not only the L. sing, ayu-n-i, but several compound forms, V. dtrghayo 'long-lived', adaidhayo (VS.) 'having unimpaired vigour', A. vrddh&yu-m 'full of vigour', n. Z'Wz'iyz; 'all- quickening', A. m. viivayu-}n, Tl. visvayave, G. vUvayo-s'^. — 2. There are also some transition forms from three masculines in -iis, by extension of the stem, to the a- declension: from ndh-tis- 'neighbour', starting perhaps from the G. nahus-as taken as a N. sing, ndhusa-s, are made the G. nahusa-sya and the L. ndhuse; from man-ns- 'man', starting from the N. pi. manus-as taken as a N. sing, mdnusa-s, come

^^Vi.mdnusaya and \!az G.mdnusa-sya; from vdp-us- 'be3.i\ty' , once T>. vdpusaya beside the frequent vdpis-e. — 3. On the other hand, there are a few transitions from the declension of /- and u- stems to that of stems in -is and -us. Beside su-rabhi- 'fragrant', the superlative form su-raihu-{ama7n^ occurs once; and beside numerous compounds formed with tuvi- appear the stems iuvis-mant- 'powerful' and tuvis-fama- 'strongest'^. Beside the G. dhdkso-s and ddkso-s't 'burning', there appears once the form daksus-as^, which is doubtless due to the false analogy of forms like tasthusas. Though mdn-iis- 'man' may be an independent formation beside mdn-u-, the probability is rather in favour of regarding it as secondary (starting from a N. nidnu-s), because nidnu- shows eight case-forms, but minus- only three". The stem d-prayiis-, occurring only once beside the less rare d-prayu-, probably represents a transition from the latter stem.

Inflexion.

342. The final j becomes j before vowel endings, and r before -bh. The inflexion of the n. is the same as that of the m. except in the A. sing.,

N. A. du. and pi. The only f. forms occurring are in the N. or A. They are the following; N. sing, svd-socis 'self-radiant'; cdksus 'seeing', d-ghora-caknis 'not having an evil eye', hradi-caksus 'reflected in a lake'; citrayus 'possessed of wonderful vitality'; A. du. tdpusa 'hot'; A. pi. gj-vapusas 'having the form of cows'. The actual forms occurring, if made from sods- 'glow' in the n., and from -socis- in the m. (when it difiers from the n.), and from cdksus- 'eye' as n. and 'seeing' as m., would be as follows:

1. Sing. N. socis. A. socis; m. -socisam. I. sociss. D. socise. Ab. socisas.

G. socisas. L. socisi. V. socis. — Fl. N. A. sociinsi; m. -socisas. I. socirbhis. D. m. -socirbhyas. G. socisam. L. socissu.

2. Sing. N. cdksus. A. cdksus; m. cdksusam. I. cdksusa. D. cdksuse. Ab. G. cdksusas. L. cdksusi. — Du. N. A. cdksusT; m. cdksusa. D. cdksurbhyam

(VS.). — PI. N. A. cdksumsi; m. cdksusas. I. cdksurbhis. D. cdksurbhyas (VS.). G. cdksusam. The forms which actually occur are the following: Sing. N. m. i. d-havis 'not offering oblations', krsnd-vyathis 'whose path is black'; citrd-jyotis (VS. xvii.80) 'shining brilliantly", sukrd-jyoiis (VS.xii. 15) 'brightly shining', satyd-jyotis (VS. xvii. 80) 'truly brilliant', su-jyotis (VS. XXXVII. 21) 'shining well'; citrd-socis 'shining brilliantly', duroka-socis 'glowing unpleasantly', sukrd-socis 'bright-rayed'; jivd-barhis (AV.) 'having a fresh litter', su-barhis (VS. xxi. 15) 'having a goodly litter', stirnd-barhis 'who has strewn the litter'; svd-rocis 'self-shining'; sv-arcisi 'flashing beautifully'. — 2. cdksus 'seeing', vdpus^ 'beautyful', vidus 'attentive' 9; d-dahdha-caksus (AV.) 'having undamaged sight', ksitdyus 'whose life goes to an end', dirghAyus 'long-lived', duh-sasus 'malignant', vi-parus (AV.) 'jointless', visvdtas-caksus 'having eyes on all sides', sdrva-parus (AV.) 'having all joints', sahdsrayus (AV.) 'living a thousand years'.

' There is probably insufficient reason to 4 Desiderative adj. from dah- 'burn'. assume a primary independently formed stem 5 The Pada text has dkaksusas. -a;/-K- beside ay-us-; cp.LANMAN569(bottom). 6 Cp. Lanman 570, (bottom). 2 Retaining the j- of the N. like indras- ' There are also the transition forms vant-. arci-s and soci-s,,tbe neuters becoming mas-

3 luv-is- as an independent formation would culines of the i- declension. be irregular, since the radical vowel otherwise 8 Also the transition forms cdksu-s, tapu-s. shows Guna before the suffix -is (134). 5 This may be an «-stem: vidu-s. VI. Declension. Nouns. Consonant Stems. 223

N. A. n. I. arcis 'flame', kravis (AV.) 'raw flesh', chadis 'cover', c/iardis 'fence', jyotis 'light', barhis 'litter', vards 'circuit', vydthis 'course', sods 'lustre', ja/^>/j 'clarified butter', havis 'oblation'; vailvanard-jyotis (VS. xx. 23) 'light of Vaisvanara', sukrd-jyotis (TS. iv. i. 93), svar-jyotis (VS. v. 32) 'light of heaven'.^— 2. drus (AV.) 'wound', ayus 'life', cdksus 'eye', ^i/wj 'glow', dhdnus 'bow', /ar«j- 'joint', ydjus 'worship', vdpus 'beauty', sAsus 'command'; indra-dham'is (AV.) 'Indra's bow', sv-ayus'' (VS. iv. 28) 'full vigour'. A. m. I. d-grbhita-socisam _ 'having unsubdued splendour', ajird-socisam 'haying a quick light', urdhvd-socisam 'flaming upwards', citrd-socisam, dirghAyu- soci?am 'shining through a long life', pavakd-socisam 'shining iDrightly', sird- socisam 'sharp-rayed', sukrd-socisam, srestha-socisavi 'most brilliant'; citrd- barhisam 'having a brilliant bed', vrkid-barhisam 'having the litter spread', su-barMsam, stirnd-barhisam (VS. xiv. 49); daksina-jyotisam (AV.) 'brilliant by the sacrificed gift', hiranya-j'yotisam (AV.) 'having golden splendour'. — 2. janusam 'birth', dlrghdyusam, purv-ayusam 'bestowing much vitality', satdyusani^ 'attaining the age of a hundred'.

I. I. n. arcisa, kravisa, chardisa (VS. xiii. 19), jyotisa, barhisa (VS. XVIII. 63; TS.), rocisa 'brightness', socisa, sarpisa, havisa. — m. manthi-socisa (VS. VII. 18) 'shining like mixed Soma', sukrd-jyotisa (VS.). — 2. n. dyusa, cdksusa, janiisa, tdpusa, dhdnusa (Kh. in. 9), pdrusa, yd;'usa, satAyusa^ satnista-yajusa (VS. xix. 29) 'sacrifice and formula', sv-ayusa (VS. iv. 28) 'full vigour of life'. — m. tdpusa, ndhusa 'neighbour', mdnusa 'man', vanusa 'eager'.

D. I. n. arcise (TS. VS. xvii. jyotise (VS. AV.), barhise 11. i), ^ 11), (VS. socise, havise. — m. tigmd-socise 'sharp-rayed', pavakd-socise, sukrd-socise, vrktd-barhise, sttrnd-barhise, ratd-havise 'liberal offerer', su-hdvise 'offering fair oblations'. — 2. n. ayuse (VS. AV.), cdksuse, jani'ise, tdpuse (AV.), ydjuse (VS.

I. 30), vdpuse. — m. cdksuse, mdnuse, vanuse^. I. Ab. n. j'yjtisas (AV.), bar/dsas, havisas. — 2. n. dyusas (TS. iv. i . 4^), cdksusas (TS. v. 7. 7'), janusas, pdrusas (TS. iv. 2. 9^), vdpusas. — m. ndhusas, mdnusas, vdpusas.

G. I. n. kravisas, chardisas, jyotisas, barhisas, socisas, sarpisas, havisas. — Ta..pavakd-socisas, vrddAd-sodsas'hlnzmg mightily', vdsu-rodsas 'shining brightly',

vrktd-barhisas'' . — 2. n. dyusas, cdksusas, tdpusas, tdrusas 'superiority', pdrusas^ vdpusas. — va. cdksusas, ndhusas, mdnusas, vanusas^; istd-yajusas {VS.wiii. 12) 'having offered the sacrificial verses'.

L. I. n. arcisi, Smisi^ 'raw flesh', jyotisi, barhisi, sddhisi (VS.'X.iii. i,^) 'resting-place', havisi; tri-barhisi 'with threefold litter'. — 2. n. dyusV, tdrusi, pdrusi, vdpusi. V. I. n. barhis^; deva-havis 'oblation to the gods' (VS. vi. 8). — 2. m. e'kayus^ 'first of living beings'. Du. N. A. 2, n. cdksusT (AV., Kh. iv. 11 'Oj jani'isi. — m. cdksusa, jay?isa 'victorious'. — D. 2. n. cdksurbhyatn (VS. vii. 27).

1 Also the transition form visvayu 'all- 6 Accounted a m. by BR., Grassmann, quickening'. Lanman. 2 Also the transition forms vanu-m, 7 Also the transition form ayuni; and m< vfddh&yu-in, visvayu-m. ndhuse. 3 Transition forms: vihayave; mdnusaya, 8 Also the transition forms pavaka-soce, ziapusaya; d-prayuse 'not careless'. bhadra-soce, sukra-soce. 4 Also perhaps a transition form hce-s; cp. 9 Also the transition forms adabdhayo (VS.), Lanman 568. dlrgkayo, sahasra-cakso (AV.). 5 Also the transition forms tapos, visvayos; nahusasya; mdnusasya; dha&sustis{24l'b,'p.222). 224 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

PI. N. m. I. dgrbhita-socisas, ajird-socisas, vAta-dhrajisas (Kh. I. 3^) 'having the impulse of wind', vrktd-barhisas, V. vrkta-barhisas, sddma-barhisas 'preparing the litter', V. su-barhisas, su-jykisas and su-jyotisas, svd-rocisas '. — 2. ndkusas, mdnusas, V. manusas, vanusas, vdpusas. N. A. n. I. arcimsi, jySttmsi, barhtmsi (VS. xxviii. 21), socfmsi, havimsi. — 2. Ayuinsi, cdksumsi, januinsi, tdfumsi, pdrumsi (TS. VS. AV.), ydjwnsi (VS. AV.), vdpumsi. A. m. I. su-j'yotisas. — 2. ndkusas, mdnusas, vant'esas^.

I. I. n. havirbhis'^. — 2. n. dhdnurbhis (AV.), ydjurbhis (VS.iv.i), vdpur- bhis. — D. I. m. urdhvd-barhirbhyas (VS. xxxviii. 15) 'being'above the litter'. -— 2. n. ydjurbhyas (VS. xxxvm. 11). G. I. n. jyotisam, havisam (AV.). — 2. n. cdksusam (AV.), janusam, ydjusam (AV.), vdpusam. — m. vanusdm, msvd-manusam 'belonging to all men'. L. I. n. havissu.

^. Stems in -as.

343. Primarily this declension consists almost entirely of neuters, which are accented on the root, as mdn-as- 'mind'; but these as final members of

adjective compounds may be inflected in all three genders, as N. m. f. su-mdnas, n. su-mdnas 'well-disposed'. There are besides a few primary masculines, which are accented on the suffix, being either substantives, as

raks-ds- 'demon', or adjectives, some of which occur in the f. also (as well as n.), as ap-ds- 'active'; and one feminine, us-ds- 'dawn'*.

a. Strong cases are regularly distinguished only in the N. A. pi. a., where the vowel of the suffix is lengthened and nasalized' (as in the -is and -us stems), as dmhamsi 'troubles'. Otherwise the stem usds- shows in the A. sing., N. A. du., N. V. pi., strong forms with lengthened vowel in the suffix, which occur beside the unlengthened forms 6, the latter being nearly three times as frequent in the RV. The long vowel is here required by the metre in 20 out of 28 occurrences, and is favoured by the metre in the rest'; so that the lengthening may be due to metrical exigencies. The strong form usasasi occurs once (X. 39') for the weak usdsas as the G. sing, or A. pi. There is further the single strong form N. du. m. iosasa'^ 'bestowing abundantly''". b. Supplementary stems ending in -as beside -an are fbhvas- 'skilful' (as well as fbhva-) beside fbhvan-, and sikvas- 'strong' (as well as sikva-) beside Hkvan-. c. There is here a large number of transition forms both to and from the 5- declension. Many pairs of stems in -a and -as are common in both forms and seem therefore to be of independent derivation. But there are also a good many such doublets of which the one is the normal stem, while the other has come into being through mistaken analogy or metrical exigency, i. In the transitions to the a- declension several may be explained as starting from the misleading analogy of contracted forms. To this group belong the following: from dngiras-, a name of Agni, L. sing, angire besideN.pl. dngirds', from dn-dgas- 'sinless', A. pi. dn-dgdn beside A. sing, dn-agdm and K. pi. dn-dgds; from ap-sards- 'water-nymph', apsardbhyas (AV.), apsardsu (AV.), apsard-paies (AV.) beside apsaram (AV.); from tisds- 'dawn', N. du. use (VS.), usabhydm (VS.), beside A. sing, usam and pi. usds; irora /ards- m. 'old age', f. smg.N. jara (AV. VS.), T). jarayai{A.V.), beside

1 Also the transition forms arcdyas, 7 See Arnold, Vedic Metre, p. 130, II (a); iocdyas. cp. Lanman 546. 2 Also the transition form vanun. 8 The Pada text has usdsah. 3 Also the transition form arci-bhis. 9 Here the long vowel appears in the 4 The derivation of a few stems ending Pada text also. This is the only form made

in -ajis obscure; as a/cV- 'lap' (only L. sing, ), from the stem tolas- (from ius- 'drip'). and risddas- 'destroying enemies'. 1° The form sa-psarasas 'enjoying in com- 5 On the origin of this form as a com- mon (?)', occurring once, must be the pi. bination of -dn-i and -ds-i see Johansson, of sa-psard- (BR., Grassmann), not of *sa- BE. 18, 3 and cp. GGA. 1890, p. 762. psards- (Lanman S46, Geldner, VS. 3, 197), The lengthened vowel never occurs in because -as is never accented in Bahuvrihi the Pada text in these forms (excepting of compounds; see Wackernagel 2', p. 301 d course the N. usas). note, su-medhds- 'very wise' is not a Bahuvrihi. ; : .

VI. Declension. Nouns. Consonant Stems. 225

A. jardm i from sa-josas- ; 'united', N. du. sa-jasau beside pi. sa-j6?Ss. There is a further group of transitions to the a- declension starting not from contracted forms, but from the N. sing, n. m.J. understood as From avas- 'favour' is thus formed I. dvena; from krdndas- 'battle-cry', D. krandayal (AV.), and the compound suci-kraiida-m 'crying aloud'; from mrdhas- n. 'troop' the m. forms sardka-m, idrdhena, sdrdhaya, idrdha-sya, sdrdha7i\\ from hidas- n., once (l. 94") hila-s N. m., hence A. hida-m (AV.j, L. hile; also the compound forms N. f. du. a-dvese 'not ill-disposed', beside dvesas- 'hate'; dur-oka-m (vtl. 43) 'un- okas-^ wonted' beside 'abode'; vi-dradlu (iv. 3223) 'unclothed' (?) beside drddhasT (TS.) •garments'; prthu-jrdya-m (IV. 441) 'far-extending' h&%\i.z jrdyas 'expanse'; puru-pesasu 'multiform' beside pesas 'form' ^. 2. The second class, comprising transitions to the -as declension, consists of the two groups of transfers from the radical -a stems and the derivative -a stems. The former group embraces forms of compounds made from km- 'abode', pra-ja- 'offspring', -di- 'giving', -dha- 'bestowing', besides mas 'moon', starting from the N. in as which is identical in form with that of stems in -as. The forms of this type are the following N.pl. divd-ksas-as beside N. sing. divd-Asds 'having an abode in heaven'; A. sing, d-prajas-am (AV. VS.) 'childless', A. pi. f. ida-prajas-as (TS. MS.), A. sing, su-prajds-am (AV.), N. pi. m. su-prajds-as (AV. TS.) 'having a good son' beside N. sing. m. su-prajas; V. dravino-das^

beside N. sing, dravino-dd-s, A. drav'mo-dd-m 'wealth-giving' ; varco-dds-au (VS.) 'granting vigour'; yf&-a'/4aj--aj (VS.) 'impregnating' beside N. sing. m. reto-dhas; A.ziayo-dhds-am{yS.), I. vayo-dkds-d(y?i.), vayo-dhds-e (VS.), V^.vayo-dhas, N. pi. vayo-dhds-as {kV) beside N. sing. vayo-dhas 'bestowing vigour'; D. sing, varco-dhds-e (AV.) beside N. sing, varco-dka-s [kV.) and A. sing. f. varco-dha-m (VS.); of candrd-mds-7 'moon' all the forms occurring, except the N. sing, which is their starting-point, are transfer forms: A.. candrd-masamiyS.'X.'X.ni.t,^^,

I. candrd-masd (AV.), D. candrd-mase (VS.), G. candrd-masas, L. candrd-masi (AV.), V. candra- nias (AV.), N. du. candfd-masd, surya-candra-mdsd and suryd-candra-mdsazt. 3. There are further several sporadic transition forms from -as stems occurring beside the ordinary corresponding -a stem. These may sometimes have started from an ambiguous N. sing., but they seem usually to be due to metrical exigencies. Such forms are the following: ddksas-e, ddksas-cis, putd-daksas-a and puid-daksas-as beside very

frequent forms of ddksa- 'skill' ; dosds-as 8 (AV.) once beside forms of dosa- 'evening' (viivdyu)-posas-am beside the common posa-; N. sing, sd-bhards, A. visvd-bharas-am beside the frequent bhdra- 'supporting'; w«a'j--fflj 9 (AV.) beside vesd- 'neighbour'; sepas as A. sing, in AV. (XIV. 2-3*) for the sepam of the RV., from sepa- m. 'tail', N.sing. sepas; N.sing.m. su-sevds occurs in the AV. as a variant for su-seva-s 'very dear' of the RV.; sahdsra-sokds occurs once as N. sing. m. beside the common soka- 'ilame'; A. sing, tuvi-svands-am and

N. pi. iiivi-svands-as, beside svand- 'sound' ; A. pi. f. gharmd-svaras-as beside svard- 'roaring' also the D. dhruvds-e (vil. 701) for dhnivdya to which it is preferred owing to the metre and the influence of infinitives in -dse, and similarly vrdhds-e (v. 64^) parallel to vrdhaya (vilt. 836). 4. There are besides a few quite abnormal transition forms. The occurrence of the very frequent N. pi. m. of vi- 'bird' with a singular verb -(l. 1418) and once as an A. pi. (1. 1041) may have produced the impression of a n. collective vdyas- and thus led to the n. pi. vdyamsi (AV.), helped perhaps by the existence of the very frequent n- stem vdyas- 'food'. The isolated form N. sing. m. sv-dncds is probably lengthened for sv-diica-s (like su-sevas for su-sevas) which started from the A. sing. m. sv-dhc-am. The G. du. rodas-os occurs once (ix. 22^), evidently on account of the metre instead of the ordinary rodasJ-os'^^.

1 Lanman 552 thinks that medha- 'wis- 7 From mas- (A. mds-am, etc.), where the dom' va.'^.medha, I. medhdyd, '^.^l.medh&s, s belongs to the stem. It is formed probably I. medhabhis started from medham as con- with -as from ma- 'measure' {md-as), being tracted A. of medkas- found in su-medhds-. thus in origin a contracted -as stem, in which, This seems doubtful to me. however, the N. vias giving rise to the 2 In VI. 66* rokas might be taken as transition forms was understood as the N. sing. m. (as Grassmann takes it) beside lengthened form of *mas. rokds, m. S In usaso dosdsas ca (AV. xvr. 4^) ob- 3 Cp. also the D. carayai (vil. 771) beside viously due to parallelism with usdsas. cardse (l. 92'', v. 47*), and tdrdya (u. 1312) 9 Clearly owing to the metre instead of beside idrase (ill. iS''). vesasas. 10 4 Cp. Lanman 353 and 554, 8. Similarly aks-6s occurs in AV. v. Ii'o aksT-os. 5 There is also an -as ^ stem extended (but contrary to the metre) for On with -a in the D. d-jarasaya (x. 85*-') 'till the transition forms of the -as declension old age', based on the adv. compound cp. Lanman 546—558, a-jaras-dm (B.) 6 Cp. Brugmann, Grundriss 2, p. 398.

Indo-arische Philologie. I. 4. 15 226 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

Inflexion.

344. The N. sing. m. f. lengthens the vowel of the suffix; e. g. m. dngiras'^, i. usas. In about a dozen compounds the long vowel appears (owing to the influence of the m.) in the n. also; e. g. tirna-mradas 'soft as wool'. Before endings with initial bh the suffix -as becomes -0^. The forms actually occurring, if made from dpas- n. 'work' and apds- m. f 'active', would be as follows: Sing. N. dpas; apds. A. dpas; apdsam. I. dpasa; apdsa. D. dpase; apdse. Ab. dpasas\ apdsas. G. dpasas; apdsas. L. dpasi; apdsi. V. dpas; dpas. — Du. N. A. V. dpasi; apdsJ and apdsau^. D. apibhyam (VS.). G. dpasos (VS.). — PI. N. dpatnsi; apdsas. A. dpamsi; apdsas. I. dpobhis; apobhis. D. dpobhyas; ap5bhyas. Ab. dpobhyas. G. dpasam; apdsani. L. dpassu; apdssu^. The forms actually occurring are as follows: Sing. N. m. dngiras^ an epithet of Agni, ddmunas 'domestic', nodhds name of a seer, yams 'glorious', raksds 'demon', vedhds 'ordainer'; com- pounds : a-cetds 'senseless', dty-amhas (VS. xvn. 80) 'beyond distress', ddri- barhas 'fast as a rock', d-dvayas 'free from duplicity', dn-agas^ 'sinless', an-udhds 'udderless', dnuna-varcas 'having full splendour', an-ends 'guiltless', d-pracetas 'foolish', abhibhuty-ojas 'having superior power', dmitaujas 'almighty', a-rapds 'unhurt', dvayata-helas 'whose anger is appeased', dsamaty-ojas 'of unequalled strength', a-hands 'exuberant', uru-cdksas 'far-seeing', uru-vydcas 'widely extending', fsi-manas 'of far-seeing mind', rsvdujas 'having sublime

(rsvd-) power', karu-dhayas 'favouring the singer', kftti-vasas (VS. iir. 61) 'wearing a skin', keta-vedas 'knowing the intention', khddo-arnas 'having a devouring flood', gabhird-vepas 'deeply moved', gurtd-manas 'having a grateful mind', gurtd-sravas 'the praise of whom is welcome', go-nyoghas 'streaming among milk', ghrtd-prayas 'relishing ghee', jatd-vedjs 'knowing created beings', tdd-apas 'accustomed to that work', tad-okas 'rejoicing in that', tdd-ojas 'endowed with such strength', tardd-dvesas 'overcoming foes', tigmd-tejas (VS. i. 24) 'keen- edged', iri-vayas 'having threefold food', dabhrd-cetas 'little-minded', dasmd- varcas 'of wonderful appearance', dirghd-tamas N. of a seer, dlrghdpsas 'having a long fore-part', dur-osas 'hard to excite', devd-psaras 'serving the gods as a feast', devd-sravas 'having divine renown', dvi-bdrhas 'doubly strong', nd-vedas 'cognisant', nr-cdksas 'watching men', nr-mdnas 'mindful of men', ny-okas 'domestic', pavakd-varcas 'brightly resplendent', puru-rdvas (VS. V. 2) N., prthu-jrdyas 'widely extended', /rZ/zw^^i/S'S' 'far-shining', /ra-^/aj 'atten- tive', prd-vayas 'vigorous', bahv-ojas 'strong in the arm', brhdc-chravas 'loud- sounding', brhdd-ravas (VS. v. 22) 'loud-sounding', brhdd-vayas (TS. I. 5. 10^) grown strong', bodhin-manas 'watchful-minded', bhari-retas (VS. xx. , 44) 'abounding in seed', bhfiry-ojds 'having great power', mddhu-vacas 'sweet- voiced', mdno-javas 'swift as thought', maha-yasAs (Kh. iv. 8*) 'very glorious', mitrd-mahas 'rich in friends', raghu-pdtma-jamhas 'having a light-falling foot',

1 The stems sva-iavas- and sv-dvas- form 5 The J- of the N. sing, is perhaps lost in the irregular N. svd-tavan and sv-dvan, VS. usdna; but this form may be a transition, sv-dva. starting from the A. usdnxm (= usdnasam)

2 Except in f. usddbhis and m. sfvd- after the analogy of the f. ; another instance tavadbhyas (VS.); op. Brugmann, Grundriss 2, is perhaps an-eha (x. 6 1 12). p. 713 (bottom). 6 The form dn-avayds (AV. vii. 90'), 3 The ending -au is here very rare and meaning perhaps 'not producing concep- occurs chiefly in the later Samhitas. tion', may belong to this declension. See 4 Represented in f. by apsardssu (Kh.) and Whitney's note. Lanman 443, places it m. apdsu. if for apdssu. under radical -d stems. VI. Declension. Nouns. Consonant Stems. 227

rdthaujas (VS. xv. 1 5) 'having the strength of a chariot', risadas 'destroying enemies', vdsu-sravas 'famous for wealth', v&ta-rmnhas 'fleet as wind', vi-cetas

'clearly seen', vi-manas 'very wise'j visvd-cakms 'all-seeing', visvd-dhayas 'all- sustaining', visvd-bharas'' (VS.xi. 32)' all-supporting', visvd-bhojas 'all-nourishing', visvd-manas 'perceiving everything', visvd-vedas 'omniscient', visvd-vyacas (VS. XIII. 56) 'embracing all things', visvdujas 'all-powerful', vi-hayas 'mighty', vilu- dvesas 'hating strongly', vilu-haras 'holding fast', vrddhd-makas 'of great might', vrddhd-vayas 'of great power', vrddhd-sravas 'possessed of great swiftness', satd-tejas (VS. I. 24) 'having a hundredfold vital power', satd-payas (TS. VS.) 'having a hundred draughts', iukrd-varcas 'having bright lustre', sraddha-manas 'true-hearted', sri-manas (VS.) 'well-disposed', sd-canas 'being in harmony with', sd-cetas 'unanimous', sa-josas 'united', satyd-radhas 'truly beneficent', satydu/'as (AV. VS. TS.) 'truly mighty', sa-prdthas 'extensive', sdm-okas 'dwelling together', sahdsra-caksas 'thousand-eyed', sahdsra-cetas 'having a thousand aspects', sahdsra-pathas 'appearing in a thousand places', sahdsra-retas 'having a thousandfold seed', sahdsra-sokas'^ 'emitting a thousand flames', sahdsrapsas 'thousand-shaped', su-ddinsas 'performing splendid actions', su-mdnas 'well- disposed', su-medhds'^ 'having, a good understanding', sii-rddhas 'bountiful', su-reknas 'having fair possessions', su-retas 'having much seed', su-vdrcas

'splendid', su-vdsas 'having beautiful garments', suma-caksas (TS. 11. 2. 12+) 'looking like Soma', stoma-vahas 'receiving praise', sparhd-radhas 'bestowing enviable wealth', sv-dncas ' 'going well', sv-dpas 'skilful', svdbhuty-ojas 'having energy from inherent power', svd-yaias 'glorious through one's own acts', svar-caksas 'brilliant as light', svar-canas 'lovely as light', sv-ojas 'very strong'.

f. «j(?j- 'dawn'; aVzVir/zflWifaj' (TS., VS. xxi. 22) a metre, d-dvayas, ap-sards 'water-nymph', a-repas 'spotless', a-hanAs, uru-vydcas, Urna-mradas 'soft as wool',

dvi-bdrkas, mca-vayds 'whose strength is low', nr-mdnas, prd-cetas, mddku-vacSs, yavaydd-dvesas 'driving away enemies', vi-cchandas (TS. v. 2. 11') 'containing various metres', vi-hayas, vf-sa-manas 'manly-spirited', sukrd-vasas 'bright-robed', sd-cetas, sd-cchandas (TS. v. 2. 11^) 'consisting of the same metres', sa-josas,

sa-prdthas, sd-bharas^ 'furnished with gifts' (?), sahd-yasas (TS. IV. 4. 12^) 'glorious', su-ddmsas, su-pesas 'well-adorned', su-mdnas, su-medhds^, su-vAsas. N. A. n. dmhas 'distress', diijas 'ointment', a-dvesds 'without malevolence', dnas 'cart', an-ehds 'without a rival', dndhas 'darkness' and 'plant', dpas 'work', apds 'active', dpnas 'property', dpsas 'hidden part of the body', dmbhas 'water', dyas 'metal', a-raksds 'harmless', a-rapds, drnas 'flood', dvas 'favour', dgas 'sin', apas 'religious ceremony', I'lras 'breast', adhas 'udder', e'nas 'sin', okas 'abode', ojas 'strength', ksodas 'rushing water', cdnas 'delight', dtas (VS. XXXIV. 3) 'intellect', chdndas 'metrical hymn', jdmhas 'course', ji'cvas 'quickness', jrdyas 'expanse', tdd-apas, tdpas 'heat', tdmas 'darkness', tdras 'velocity', tejas 'sharp edge', tydjas 'abandonment', ddmsas 'marvellous power', duvas 'worship', drdvinas 'property', dvesas 'hostility', ndbhas 'vapour', ndmas 'obeisance', pdksas 'side', pdyas 'milk', pdsas (VS. xx. 9) 'penis', pAjas 'vigour', pAthas 'place', ptvas 'fat', puru-bhojas 'greatly nourishing', pesas 'ornament', prdthas 'width', prdyas 'enjoyment', psdras 'feast', bhdrgas 'radiance', bhasas 'light', mdnas 'mind', mdyas 'joy', mdhas 'greatness', mahds 'great', mfdhas

'disdain', medas 'fat', ydsas 'fame', rdksas 'damage', rdjas 'region of clouds', rdpas 'infirmity', rdbhas 'violence', rAdhas 'bounty', reknas 'wealth', retas 'flow', ripas 'stain', rodhas 'bank', vdksas 'breast', vdcas 'speech', vdyas 'bird' and

1 Probably a transition form (p. 225, 3, 4). as stem occurs only in su-medhdsam (once) 2 Perhaps a transfer form from medha.-, and su-niedhasas (four times in a, refrain). since the latter stem is common, while the 15* 22 8 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

'food', vdrivas 'space', vdrcas 'vigour', vdrpas 'figure', vag-ojas (VS. xxxvi. i) 'speech-energy', vdsas 'garment', vdhas 'offering', vidas 'wealth', vepas 'quivering', vydcas 'expanse', vrdyas 'superior power', sdrdhas 'troop', sdvas 'power', Eras 'head', sesas 'offspring', srdvas 'renown', sa-josas, sddas 'seat', sdnas'^ (Kh.

III. 15'^) 'gain', sa-prdthas, sa-bAdhas 'harassed', sdras 'lake', sahas 'force', sahdujas (VS. xxxvi. i) 'endowed with strength', su-retas, srotas 'stream', svd-tavas 'inherently strong', hdras 'flame', hilas 'passion', hvdras 'crookedness'. — Ending in -as^ (like m.): asrT-vdyas^ (VS. xiv. 18), uru-prdthas (VS. XX. 39) 'far-spread', arna-mradas, gUrtd-vacas 'speaking agreeably', devd- vyacas 'affording space for the gods', dvi-bdrhas, visvd-vyacas (AV.), vi- spardhas (VS. xv. 5) 'emulating', vird-pesas 'forming the ornament of heroes', vJlu-karas, sa-prdthas (AV. VS. TS.), siimdnas (TS. iv. 5. i^)"*. A. m. jardsam 'old age', tavdsam 'strong', 'strength', tyajdsam 'offshoot', ddmunasam, pdrinasam{\(>o)''2h\\.'a.&sia.c€, bhiydsam '{ea,r', yas'dsam, raksdsam^ vedkdsam; a-cetdsam, dnasta-vedasam 'having one's property unimpaired', dn- agasam, dnu-gayasam 'followed by shouts', an-endsam (TS.i. 8.5-5), an-ehdsam, apdsam, d-pratidhrsta-savasam 'of irresistible power', abhibhuty-ojasam, ard- manasam 'obedient', a-radhdsam 'not liberal', a-repdsam, arcandnasam 'having a rattling carriage' (iST. of a man), a-kandsam, I'lccaii-sravasam (Kh. v. 14^) 'neighing aloud' (N. of Indra's horse), upakd-caksasam 'seen close at hand', uru-cdksasam, uru-jrdyasam 'extending over a wide space', uru-vydcasam, tirna-mradasam (VS. 11. 2), urdhvd-nabhasam (VS. vi. 16) 'being above the clouds', ksetra-sAdhasam 'who divides the fields', gathd-sravasam 'famous through songs', gayatrd-cchandasam (VS.viii. 47) 'to whom the Gayatrl metre belongs', gayatrd-vepasam 'inspired by songs', gir-vanasam 'delighting in invocations', gir-vahasam 'praised in song', gUrtd-sravasam, gj-arnasam 'abounding in cattle', go-dhayasam 'supporting cows', cikitvln-manasam 'atten- tive', citrd-mahasam 'possessing excellent bounty', citrd-radhasam 'granting excellent gifts', jdgac-chaiidasam (VS. viii. 47) 'to whom the Jagati metre belongs', Jaid-vedasam, tuvi-radhasam 'granting many gifts', tuvi-svandsam. -^ 'loud-sounding', tuvy-jjasam 'very powerful', tristup-chandasam (VS. viii. 47), dandukasam 'delighting {pkas-^ in a sacrificial meal', dyuksd-vacasam 'uttering heavenly words', dvi-bdrhasam, dvi-savasam 'having twofold strength', dhrsnv- ojasam 'endowed with resistless might', ndryapasam 'doing manly {ndrya-) deeds', nr-cdksasam, pahkti-radhasam 'containing fivefold gifts', puru-pesasani 'multiform', puru-bhjjasam, puru-vdrpasam 'having many forms', puru-vepasam 'much-exciting', prd-cetasam, prd-tvaksasatn 'energetic', brdhma-vahasam 'to whom prayers are offered', bhttri-caksasam 'much-seeing', bhfiri-dhayasam

'nourishing many', mdno-javasam (TS. 11. 4. 7'), yajnd-vanasam 'loving zz.cr\- fice' yajnd-vahasam 'offering risddasam^, , worship', vdja-sravasam 'famous for wealth', vi-cetasam, vi-josasam 'forsaken', vi-dvesasam 'resisting enmity', visvd- dhayasam, visvd-bharasam', visvd-vedasam, visvd-7!yacasam, visvayu-posasam'' 'causing prosperity to all men', visvAyu-vepasam 'exciting all men', vi-hayasam, viti-radhasam 'granting enjoyment', sd-cetasam, sa-josasam, satyd-girvahasam 'getting true praise', satyd-radhasam (VS.xxii. 11), satyd-savasam 'truly vigorous'.

1 Though sdnas does not otherwise occur 4 Cp. Lanman 560; see also the neuters {sana- m. is found as last member of a in as, Lanman 445 (mid). compound), the context in Khila III. 1515 5 For this form, TS. lU. 3. II^ has errone- seems to require an A.; ahdm gaizdhdt-va- ou.sly tuvis-manasam. rupena sdna a vartaydmi te. 6 Also the transition form vayo-dhdsam 2 Cp. Lanman 560. (VS.) 'bestowing strength'. 3 Of doubtful meaning; the form may 7 Probably to be explained as a transition possibly be N. pi. of asrivi-. Cp. BR. form (p. 225, 3). 1

VI. Declension. Nouns. Consonant Stems. 229

sddma-makhasam 'performing sacrifice in a sacred precinct', sa-prdthasam (VS. XXI. 3), samudrd-vasasam 'concealed in the waters', samndrd-vyacasam 'extensive as the sea', sdrva-vedasam (VS. xv. 55; TS. iv. 7. 134) 'having complete property', sahdsra-caksasam, sahdsra-bharnasam 'a thousandfold', sahdsra-varcasam 'having a thousandfold power', su-cetasam 'very wise', su- ddmsasam, su-pe'sasam, su-praydsam 'well regaled', su-bhojasani 'bountiful',

su-medhdsam ', su-radhasam, ste-re'tasam, su-vdrcasam (TS. ill. 2. 85), su-srdvasam 'famous', srprd-bhojasam 'having abundant food', svd-yasasam, sv-dvasam 'affording good protection', hdri-dhayasam 'giving yellow streams', hdri- varpasam 'having a yellow appearance'. — Contracted forms: usdnam N. of a seer, maksm, vedham. f. usdsain and usasam^, dhvardsam 'deceiving'; dn-agasam, an-ekdsam, a-raksdsam, a-repdsam^ dsva-pesasam 'decorated with horses', ud-ojasam 'exceedingly powerful', uru-vydcasam, cikitvin-matiasam, puru-bkojasam, yavaydd- dvesasam, vsja-pesasam 'adorned with precious gifts', visva-dofiasam 'yield- ing all things', visvd-dhayasam, visvd-pesasam 'containing all adornment', visvd-bhojasam, satdrcasam 'having a hundred supports' (reds-), si'ici-pesasam 'brightly adorned', sahdsra-bharjiasam, svd-yasasam, hdri-varpasam. —

Contracted forms : usdm, jarsm, medhdm 'wisdom', vaydm 'vigour'; dn-agam, ap-saram (AV.) ^. I. m. jardsa, tdrusasa 'giving victory', tavdsa, tvesdsa 'impulse', pdrinasa, bJiiydsa'', yasdsa, sdhasa 'mighty', havdsa 'invocation'; an-ehdsa, a-raksdsa, go-parmasa 'having abundance of cows', prtku-psjasa, mdno-javasa, visvd- pesasa, su-pesasa, su-srdvasa, sv-dpasd (VS. xxv. 3).

f. usdsa, yajdsa 'worshipping' ; dti-cchandasa (VS. i. 2 7), a-repdsa, uru- cdksasa (VS. iv. 23). n. dnjasa, dnasa, dndhasa, dpasa, apdsa, a-raksdsa, drnasa, dvasa, urasa (VS.TS.), enasa, ojasa, ihasa'-^xos^tc'i, ks6dasa,gd-arnasa, ira/Jjizj^ 'brightness', cetasa, chdndasa (VS. TS.), jdvasa and (once) javdsa^ 'with speed', tdnasa 'offspring'^ tdpasa, tdmasa, tdrasa, t^jasa, tydjasa, tvdksasa 'energy', ddmsasa, dohasa 'milking', dhayasd 'nourishing', dhrdjasd 'gliding power', ndbhasa, ndmasd, pdyasa, pajasa, pjvasa, pesasd (VS. xx. 41), prdyasa, bahvojasa, bhrsjasd 'lustre', mdnasa, mdhasa, me'dasa, yasdsa^ 'glorious', rdksasd, rdjasa, rdpasa, radhasd, reknasa, retas'a, vdcasd, vdnasd 'enjoyment', vdyasaT, vdrcasa, vdrpasa, vSsasa, vihasa, ve'dasa, vepasd, sdvasd, sirasd

(Kh. I. 9^), sesasa, srdvasa, sdhasU, su-ddmsasd, su-retasa, srotasd, hdrasa, hesasd 'vigour'^. D. m. tavdse, duvdse 'worshipper', yasdse, raksdse, vedhdse, sikvase 'adroit', sdhase 'mighty'; abhisti-savase 'granting powerful aid', ukthd-vahase 'offering verses', uru-vydcase, rtd-pesase 'having a glorious form', gayatrd-vepase, gir-vanase, gir-vahase, ghord-caksase 'of frightful appearance's, jatd-vedase, tdd-apase, tdd- okase, dirghd-yasase 'renowned far and wide', dtrghd-sravase 'famous far

1 Perhaps to be explained as a transition 7 Also the transition form vayo-dkdsa (VS. form starting from N. su-medhi-s. XV. 7). ' In Pada text usasam. 8 A few forms in -as appear to have the value of instrumental as agreeing with 3 Cp. J. Schmidt, Heteroklitische nomina- a tive singularis auf -as in den arischen spra- word in that case: vdcas (I. 262 etc.), yajiia- chen, KZ. 26, 401—409; 27,284; Collitz, vacas (AV. XI. 319), savas (l. 81''); edhas (AV. BB. 7, 180; Prellwitz, BB. 22, 83. XII. 32); cp. Bloomfield, SBE. 42, 645; * Also contracted to bhlsA with adverbial see Lanman 562^ and cp. Caland, KZ. 31, shift of accent occurring 3 times {bhiydsa 1 261. times). 9 Also the transition form candrd-niase

,5 In IV. 271. (VS. xxx. 21).

. 6 Cp. Grassmann, s. v. yasds: \ 230 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

and wide', dyumnd-sravase 'producing a clear sound', vr-cdksase, ny-okase, puru-rdvase, prthu-jrdyase, prthu-pdjase, prd-cetase, prd-tavase 'very strong', brdhma-vahase, mrktd-vahase 'carrying off what is injured', N. of a seer, yajhd- vahase\ visvd-caksase, vi-/iayase, satyd-rSdhase, sahdsra-caksase, svd-tavase, svd-yaiase.

f. usdse, vrdhdse 'furtherance'; dti-cchandase (VS. xxiv. 13), dur-vdsase 'ill-clothed', parjdnya-retase 'sprung from the seed of Parjanya'. n. apdse, a-pesdse 'formless', dvase, oj'ase, cdksase, j'avdse, tdpase, tdmase, tdrase, tejase (VS. xv. 8), ddksase 'ability', dhdyase, dhruvdse 'stopping', ndbhase (VS. VII. 30), ndmase, pdjase, prdyase, psdrase, mdtiase, mdhase (VS. xix. 8),

ydsase (VS. xx. 3), ysdase (VS. xxx. 20) 'voluptuousness', rdksase, rSdkase, re'tase, vdcase, vdrcase, /aVa.fif (VS. xxxvm. 15) 'skin of boiled milk', sdvase, srdvase, sdhase, svd-yaiase, hdrase. Ab. m. a-radkdsas, Jardsas, tavdsas, pdrTnasas, raksdsas^, sdhasas. —

{. usdsas. — n. dmhasas^, dnasas, dndhasas, dpasas, drnasas, dgasas (TS. iv. 7. 15^), enasas, okasas, ujasas, ksodasas, Jrdyasas, tdpasas, tdmasas, drdvinasas, pdyasas, pdjasas, prdthasas, bhdmsasas 'intestine', mdnasas"', rdjasas, radhasas, ve'dasas, sddasas, sdrasas, sdJiasas. G. m. dfigirasas, apdsas, dpnasas, tavdsas, pdrTnasas, raksdsas, vedhdsas; dn-agasas, dpaka-caksasas 'shining from afar', abhi-vayasas 'refreshing', a-raksdsas, upafiid-sravasas 'most highly famed', krsnd-jamhasas 'having a black track', jatd-vedasas, danapnasas 'having abundance of gifts', dlrghd-sravasas, dvi- bdrhasas, nr-cdksasas, pdri-dvesasas 'enemy', puru-bhojasas, prthii-srdvasas 'far- famed', prd-cetasas, prd-tna/iasas 'very glorious', praydsas (TS. iv. i. 8^), bhd- tvaksasas 'having the power of light', vi-cetasas, vidmandpasas 'working with 1 wisdom', visvd-manasas, vfka-dvarasas^, satyd-radhasas (TS. in. 3. 1 '), satyd- savasas (VS. iv. 18) 'having true impulsion', sa-bddhasas, su-praydsas (VS. xxvii. 15), svd-yasasas. — f. usdsas^. n. dmhasas, dnasas, dndhasas, dpasas, dyasas, drnasas, drs'asas (YS-XiLgj) 'piles', dvasas, enasas (VS. viii. 13), okasas, Sjasas, gj-arnasas, tdpasas (VS. IV. 26; Kh.iv. 11'^), tdmasas, tydjasas, ddksasas'', drdvinasas, ndbhasas, ndmasas, pdyasas, pdjasas (Kh. i. 7^), prdyasas, mdnasas, me'dasas, rdjasas, rdpasas, rddhasas, re'tasas, vdcasas, vdpsasas 'fair form', vdyasas, vdrpasas, vdsasas, sdvasas^, srdvasas, sddasas, sdrapasas^, sdhasas, hdrasas"^. — Contracted form: nr-mdnas (x. 92''*). L. m. dngirasi^° (VS.iv. 10), go-arnasi, jatd-vedasi, ddmunasi, prthu-srdvasi, yajhd-vahasi (VS.ix. 37), satyd-sravasi 'truly famous', N. of a man. — f. iisdsi. — n. dmhasi, dnjasi, apdsi, dvasi, dgasi, okasi, krdndasi 'battle-cry', cdksasi, tdmasi, ndmasi, pdyasi, pathasi (VS. xiii. 53), mdnasi, rdjasi, rddhasi, ritasi,

srdvasi, sddasi, sdrasi, hedasi (TS. iii. 3. 1 1*). V. m. dngiras, fiodhas, vedhas; uktha-vahas, iipama-sravas, karu-dhayas.

' Also the transition form vayo-dhasely5. 6 Once the strong form iisasas (x. 39') for XXVIII. 46). the weak. 2 Also the transition form reio-dhdsas (VS. 7 This, as well as the D. n. ddksase, is a

vili. 10). transition form (p. 225, 3). 3 In VI. 31 amhas is probably the stem 8 The stem savas in Vlil. 36 may be used used instead of the very frequent Ab. dmh- for the G. Perhaps also sddas-pdii- stands as-as, rather than the Ab. of dmh-, as this for sddasas-pdli-. Cp. Lanman 563*. would be the only form from such a stem, 9 Transition forms are sdrdhasya, nir- and the accent would be irregular. avdsya; candrd-masas, reio-dhdsas (VS.); 4 Also the adv., in the sense of the Ab., ddksasas, dosdsas (AV.). medas-tds (VS. XXI. 60). 10 Also the transfer forms dhgire, hile; 5 Of uncertain meaning. candrd-masi (AV.). VI. Declension. Nouns. Consonant Stems. 231 gir-vanas, gir-va/ias^, jsta-vedas, deva-sravas, dhrsan-manas 'bold-minded', nr-caksas, nr-manas, puru-ravas, pra-cetas'', brahma-vahas, mitra-mahas, vaja-pratnahas 'superior in strength', visva-caksas, viiva-dhayas, vis'va-manas, vrsa-manas, satya-radhas, su-dravinas 'having fine property', su-mahas 'very- great', sva-tavas, sv-ojasi. — f. usas; a-kanas, tigma-tejas (AV. VS.). — n. dravinas, sdrdhas. Du. N. A. V. m. apdsiz, tavdsa, tosasa'^ 'showering', yasdsa, vedhasa; a-repdsa, asu-hesasa 'having neighing horses', Tya-caksasa 'of far-reaching sight', uktha-vahasa, uru-cdksasa, krsty-ojasa 'overpowering men', gambhira- cetasa 'of profound mind', go-parinasa, jatd-vedasa, tdd-okasa, na-vedasa, nr-cdksasa, nr-vahasa 'conveying men', puru-ddjnsasa 'abounding in wonder- ful deeds', puru-bhojasa, putd-daksasa^ 'pure-minded', prthu-pdksasa 'broad- flanked', prd-cefasa, prd-makasa, bodhin-manasa, ^za^a-z/a^aja 'heeding prayers', mano-javasa, yajna-vahasa, risddasa, vatsa-pracetasa 'mindful of Vatsa', vi- cetasa, vi-paksasa 'going on both sides', vipra-vakasS 'receiving the offerings of the wise', visvd-bhojasa, vihd-vedasa, vy-masa 'guiltless', srestha-varcasa

'having most excellent energy', sa-josasa, V. sdtyaujasa (TS. iv. 7. 15^), sd-manasa 'unanimous', samand-varcasa 'having equal vigour', sdm-okasa, sd-vayasa 'having equal vigour', sd-vedasa 'having equal wealth', sindhu-vahasa 'passing through the sea'(?), su-ddmsasa, su-praydsa, su-radhasa, su-re'tasa, su-vdcasa 'very eloquent', sv-dvasS, hitd-prayasa 'who has offered an oblation of food', h'lranya-pesasa 'having golden lustre'^. — With au: a-repdsau,

V. jata-vedasau (TS. i. 3. 7^j, nr-cdksasau, prd-cetasau (VS. xxviii. 7), vis'vd-

sardhasau 'forming a complete troop', sd-cetasau (VS. v. 3;' Kh. iii. 15'^), sa- josasau (VS. xil. 74), sd-manasau (TS. I. 3. 7O, sdm-okasau (TS. I. 3. 7^)''. — f. usdsd and usdsa^, ndktosdsa 'night and morning', an-e/idsa, uru-vydcasa, nr-cdksasa (AV.), bhfiri-retasa, bhciri-varpasa 'multiform', visvd-pesasa, sd- cetasa, sd-manasa, su-ddtnsasa^, su-pssasd. — W^ith -oui: ap-sardsau (AV.), a-repdsau, usAsau (VS. xxi. 50), yasdsau; nr-cdksasau, visvd-sardhasau, vy- enasau (AV.)^°. — n. dndhasT, krdndasT, j'dnasi, drddkasT (^S. iii. 2. 2^) 'gar-

.'), ments', ndbhasi {KS! nddhasT 'refuges', pdksasT{KN.), pajasJ, rdjasT, vdcasT, vdsasi (TS-. I. 5. 10^). D. m. sa-josobhyam (VS. vii. 8). G. n. diksd-tapdsos'^^ (VS. iv. 2) 'consecration and penance'. PI. N. V. m. diigirasas, apdsas, tavdsas, ddmunasas, duvdsas 'rest- less', mrgaydsas 'wild animals', yasdsas, raksdsas, vedkdsas, sikvasas; d-giraukasas 'not to be kept back by hymns' {gird), a-cetdsas, a-coddsas 'unurged', ddbhutainasas 'in whom no fault {inas) is visible', an-avabhrd- rddhasas 'giving undiminished wealth', dn-agasas, an-ekdsas, a-repdsas, d-vicetasas 'unwise', a-sesasas 'without descendants', dhia-radhasas 'equipping horses', d-sdmi-savasas 'having complete strength', d-hanasas, ukthd-vahasas, tid-ojasas, uru-vydcasas (VS. xxvii. 16), ksetra-sddhasas, gambhird-vepasas,

I In VI. 246 Grassmann would read 7 Also the transition forms sUrya-candra- gimavahas, as N. ; cp. Lanman 5642. mdsau, varco-dasau (VS. VII. 27), sa-josau. z TS.1. 5. i\^\i:>s p7'aceto rajan; the original 8 In the Pada text usasa. passage, RV. I. 241'*, has praceld rajan (Pada, 9 In VII. iy puru-ddmsa is perhaps a con- pracetak); see Lanman 554'5. tracted form. 3 Transition forms are sd-praiha (TB.), 1° Also the transition forms use (VS.), candra-mas (AV.), vayo-dhas, dravino-das. a-dvesi, vi-dradhe. II 4 With lengthened vowel. There are also in the f. the transition 5 Probably to be explained as a transition forms usabhydm I. and rodasos G. form (p. 225, 3). 6 Also the transition forms candramasa, suryd-candramasa. ,

232 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

ghrsvi-radhasas 'granting with joy', ghord-varpasas 'of terrible appear- ance', citrd-radAasas, tdd-okasas, tuvi-svandsas'^, dvi-bdrhasas, d/irsnv-hjasas, nd-vedasas, nr-cdksasas, pathi-rdksasas (VS. xvi. 60) 'protecting roads', putd- daksasas\ prtku-psjasas, prd-cetasas, prati-jiiti-varpasas 'assuming any form according to impulse', prd-tavasas, prd-tvaksasas, prd-sravasas 'farfamed', bahv- ojasas, bhalanasas N. of a people, mddku-psarasas 'fond of sweetness', mddhye-

cchandasas (TS.iv. 3. 1 13) 'sun' or 'middle of the year' (Comm.), yajna-va/iasas, yutd-dvesasas 'delivered from enemies', risddasas, rukmd-vaksasas 'wearing gold ornaments on the breast', vdruna-sesasas 'resembling sons of Varuna', vita- ramhasas, vdta-svanasas 'roaring like the wind', vi-cetasas, vidmandpasas, vidyun-mahasas 'rejoicing in lightning', vipra-vacasas 'whose words are in- spired', vi-inahasas 'very glorious', vis'vd-dhayasas, visvd-mahasas 'having all splendour', visvd-vedasas, vi-:pardhasas 'vying', vi-hayasas, vrddhd-iavasas 'of great strength', sre'st/ia-varcasas, sd-cetasas, sa-josasas, satya-savasas, sa- bharasas'-, sd-manasas, sdtn-okasas, sd-vayasas, sd-srotasas (VS. xxxiv. 11) 'flowing', sahd-cchandasas 'accompanied by metre', sahdsra-pajasas 'having a thousandfold lustre', sahdujasas (VS. x. 4), su-cdksasas 'seeing well', su-cetasas, stt-ddmsasas, su-pivdsas 'very fat', su-peiasas, su-prdcetasas 'very wise', su-praj'dsas' (TS.1. 6. 2^; AV.) 'having a good son', su-mdnasas, su-mahasas, su-medhasas^, su-rSd/iasas, stira-caksasas 'radiant as the sun', sUrya-tvacasas (VS. X. 4) 'having a covering bright as the sun', siirya-varcasas (VS. x. 4) 'resplendent as the sun', stoma-vahasas 'giving praise', svd-tavasas, sv-dpasas, sv-dpnasas 'wealthy', svd-yasasas, sv-dvasas, hitd-prayasas. — Contracted forms: diigiras, dn-agas*, ndvedas, sajosas. — f. apdsas, usdsas and usSsas^, yasdsas; agni-bhrajasas 'fire-bright', an-ehdsas, ap-sardsas, uru-vydcasas (TS. IV. I. 8^), trsu-cydvasas 'moving greedily', dhdnv-arnasas 'overflowing the dry land', nr-pesasas 'adorned by men', prd-cetasas, prd-svadasas 'pleasant', mddkv- ariiasas 'having a sweet flood', vi-cetasas, su-peiasas, siida-dohasas 'milking sweetness', sv-dpasas, svd-yasasas. — Contracted forms: medhds; d-joms 'insatiable', nd-vedas, su-rAdhas. N. A. n. dnthainsi, dnkamsi 'bends', dndhamsi, dpamsi, drnamsi, dvSmsi, Sgamsi, enamsi, okatnsi, ojamsi, kdramsi 'deeds', chdndamsi, jdvamsi, jrdyamsi, tdmamsi, tvdksamn, ddmsamsi, di'tvainsi, dvesamsi, pdySmsi, pajamsi, pdthamsi (VS. XXI. 46), pesamsi, prdyamsi, bhd.sam.si, mdnamsi, tndhatnsi, rdksamsi, rdjamsi, rdpamsi, rddkamsi, rdtamsi, rodhamsi, rohamsi 'heights', vdksamsi, vdcamsi, vdyamsi, vdramsi 'expanses', vdrivamsi, vdrcavisi (VS. ix. 22), vdrpamsi, vasamsi, sdrdhamsi, sdvamsi, srdvdmsi, sddamsi, sdramsi, sdhamsi, skdndhamsi 'branches', helamsi, hvdramsi. A. m. dfigirasas^, dhvardsas, yasdsas, raksdsas, vedhdsas; dn-agasas, an-ehdsas, d-pracetasas, a-radhdsas, uru-cdksasas, tuvi-rddhasas, putd-daksasas^ prd-cetasas, brhdc-chravasas, yajnd-vanasas, risddasas, vi-mahasas, vi-spardhasas, sa-josasas (VS. in. 44), sd-manasas (VS. vii. 25), su-pesasas, su-rddhasas, sv-

dpnasas^- — Contracted forms: dn-agas, su-medhds"^ . — f. apdsas, usdsas'^°, yasdsas; a-javdsas 'not swift', an-apndsas 'destitute of wealth', an-ehdsas, ap- sardsas, ari-dhayasas 'wilhngly yielding milk', gharmd-svarasasi 'sounding like (the contents of) a boiler', tdd-apasas, bhUri-varpasas, vdja-dravinasas 'richly

^ Probably a transition form (p. 225, 3). 7 Probably a transition form (p. 225, 3). 2 Probably a transition form (p. 225, 2). 8 Also the transition forms sardhan, an- 3 Probably a transfer form; see'p. 227, note ». agan. 4 Perhaps also an-ehas (x. 6112); see Lan- 9 It is somewhat doubtful whether this is MAN 551'. a contracted A. pi. (vH. gi^J. 5 In the Pada text usdsas. 10 Once also usdsas. In in. 6' and VJII. 6 In I. 11218 Lanman would take ahgiras 41^ Lanman (566) would take usasa&A.-pl. sa A. pi. m. -without ending. without ending. VI. Declension. Nouns. Consonant Stems. 233

rewarded', vdja-sravasas, visvd-dohasas, visvd-dhayasas, su-pesasas"- . — Con- tracted form: usds (ix. 415). I. m. dhgirobhis; agni-tdpobhis 'having the heat of fire', svd-yasobhis. — f. svd-yasobhis; -ad- -0-: with for usddbhis (44 a, 3). n. d-yavobhis (VS. xit. 74) 'dark halves of the month', drnobhis, dvobhis, ojobhis, chdndobhisi^.v.i''), tdpobhis, tdmobhis, tdrobhis, ddmsobhis, dvesobhis, dhayobhis, ndbhobhis, ndmobhis, pdksobhis (VS.xxix. 5 ; TS. v. 1. 1 1^), pdyobhis, prdyobhis, mdkobkis, rdjobkis, radhobhis, vdcobhis, vdyobhis, vdrobhis, sdvobhis, srdvobhis, sdhobhis.

D. m. dhgirobhyas; with -ad- for -0-: svd-tavadbhyas (VS. xxiv. 16). — n. medobhyas (VS. xxxix. 10), rdksobhyas, vdyobhyas (AV.), sdrobhyas (VS. XXX. 16). — Ab. n. dvesobhyas. G.m. dngirasam, apdsam, tavdsam, yasdsam, vedhdsam; ddbhutainasam,

dastnd-varcasam, mahd-manasam 'high-minded', stjma-vahasam. — f. apdsam, usdsam; ap-sardsam, ndksatra-savasam 'equalling the stars in number'. —

n.^ c/idndasam, tdrasam (AV.), ms'dasSm (VS. xxi. 40), rdksasam (VS. 11. 23), rddhasam, ve'dasam^- L. f. ap-sardssu (Kh. iv. 8^). — n. dmhassu^ (AV.), lidhassu, rdjassu, vdksassu, vdyassu (AV.), srdvassu, sddassu^.

1^. Steins in -yams.

345. The primary suffix -_j'a;«j- (137),' is used to form comparative stems.

It is added either directly or with connecting -i- to the root, which is always

accente(J. There are seven duplicate stems formed in both ways : tdv-yams- and tdv-Tyams- 'stronger'; ndv-yams- and ndv-iyzms- 'new'; pdn-yams- and pdn- Tyams- 'more wonderful'; bhayams- and bhdviyams- 'more'; rdbhyams- and rdbhiyams- (VS.) 'more violent'; vdsyams- and vdsiyanis- 'better'; sdk-yams- and sdhi-yams- 'mightier'. Strong and weak forms are regularly distinguished. In the latter the suffix is reduced by loss of the nasal and shortening of the vowel to -yas. These stems are declined in the m. and n. only, as they

form their f. by adding -i to the weak stem; t. g. preyas-i- 'dearer'. No forms of the dual occur, and in the plural only the N. A. G. are found.

Inflexion.

346. The V. sing. m. ends in -as'^. The forms actually occurring, if made from kdntyams- 'younger', would be as follows: Sing. N. m. kdtiTym, n. kdniyas. A. m. kdniyamsam, n. kdniyas.

I. m. n. kdniyasa. D. m. n. kdniyase. Ab. m. n. kdniyasas. G. m. n. kd7ityasas. L. m. kdriiyasi. V. m. kdniyas. — PL N. m. kdniyamsas. A. m. kdniyasas. N. A. n. kdniyamsi. G. m. kdniyasdm. The forms which occur are the following: Sing. N. m. d-tavyan'' 'not stronger', ojlyan 'stronger', kdniyan, jdvTyan 'swifter', jy&yan 'mightier', tdriyan^ 'easily passing through', tdviyan 'stronger', tdvyan 'stronger', dhdviyan 'rimning fast', ndvTyan 'new', mdmhiyan 'more bountiful', ydjiyan 'worshipping more', yodhiyan 'more warlike', vdniyan 'imparting more', vdriyan 'better', vdrnyan (VS. xxiii. 48) 'higher', vdsyan

1 Also the transition forms ida-prajasas for m. apassu; cp. Wackernagel I, p. Ill, "- (TS.i.S.6';MS.l.S^p. 70). note.

2 Tiie form vayam is perhaps contracted 5 Cp. J. Schmidt KZ. 26, 377—400 ; Hirt, for vayasam (l. 1651S etc.); see Lanman IF. 12, 201 f. 552^- 6 As in the -mant, -vant and -vams stems. 3 All the Mss. read amhasu; see Whitney's 7 On the Sandhi of these nominatives see note on AV. vi. 352. Lanman 514 (middle). 4 The form apdsu (vill. 414) is perhaps 8 Cp. Keichelt, BB. 27, 104 f. 234 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

'better', vediyan 'knowing better', sreyan 'better', sdniyan (TS. in. 5. S'J) 'winning much', sdhiyan 'mightier', skdbhiyan 'supporting more firmly'. N. A. n. fjiyas 'straighter', ojiyas, Mnfyas', jyayas, tdvtyas, ddviyas 'farther', drdghiyas 'longer', ndvtyas, ndvyas, n^dtyas 'quite near', preyas 'dearer', bhiiyas" 'more', vdriyas, vdrsiyas, vdsiyas (TS. VS.), vdsyas, sreyas (TS. VS.), svadiyas 'sweeter'. A. m. jydyamsam, tdvyamsam, drdghiyainsant, ndvyamsam, pdnyamsam 'more wonderful', vdrfiyamsam (AV.), sdhyamsam 3 'more frequent', sreyamsam, sdhiyamsam (AV.).

I. m. jdviyasa, ndvyasa, bkiiyasa, sdhiyasa (Kh. i. i'). — n. tejlyasa 'keener', tvdksiyasa 'very strong', ndviyasS, ndvyasa, pdnyasa, bhdvTyasa 'more abundant', bhiiyasa, vdsyasa, sdhiyasa. D.m. tdtyase, ndvXyase, pdniyase,pdnyase, bdliyaseiKY.) 'mightier', vdrsTyase (VS. XVI. 30), ir.y/aj-d' (VS. XXXI. 11), sdnyase''o\&sx\ sdkiyase'^, sdhyase, hdniyase (VS. XVI. 40) 'more destructive'. — n. ndviyase, ndzyase, sdnyase. Ab. m. tdviyasas, rdbhyasas 'more violent', sdhiyasas, sdhyasas. — n. bktiyasas. G. m. kdmyasas, j'ydyasas, idvyasas, ndviyasas, ndvyasas, bhiiyasas. — n. ndvyasas. L. m. vdrstyasi (VS. vi. 11), sdhiyasi. — V, m. ojiyas, jydyas. PI. N. m. tiksmyamsas (AV.) 'sharper', bhiiyamsas (TS. VS. AV.), sreyamsas. — n. ndvyarnsi. A. m. kdmyasas, ?ie'dTyasas, bhiiyasas, rdbhiyasas (VS. xxi. 46), vdrstyasas (AV.), vdsyasas, vdliiyasas 'driving better', sreyasas (VS. TS.).

G. m. d-stheyasam 'not firm' (137). The f. form ndvyastnam is twice used owing to metrical exigencies instead oi ndvyasam in agreement with marictam^.

§. Stems in -vdrps.

347. The suffix -vams^ is used to form the stem of the perfect parti- ciple active. Strong and weak stem' are regularly distinguished; but the latter assumes two different forms according as it is followed by a vowel or a consonant. The suffix is reduced before vowels, by loss of the nasal

and Samprasarana, to -us which becomes -us; before a consonant (i. e. bh)-, it is reduced, by loss of the nasal and shortening of the vowel, to -vas, which becomes -vat^. The latter form of the stem occurs only three times in the RV. There are thus three stems employed in the inflexion of these participles: -vams, -vat, -us. The weakest form of the stem {-us) appears instead of the strong twice in the A. sing. m^. and once in the N. pi. m. The accent rests on the suffix in all its forms except in compounds formed with the negative a- or with su- 'well' and dus- 'ill', where it shifts to these particles. This declension is restricted to the m. and n., as the f. is formed by adding -i to the weakest stem, as jagmus-i- 'having gone'. There are altogether (including compounds) about 75 stems in -vams in the RV. Inflexion. 348. No specifically n. forms occur except two in the A. sing. No L. has been met with in any number; all the other weak cases are wanting in

1 6 The {o\-!a javTyas occurs in VS. XL. 4 (I5a On this suffix cp. J. Schmidt, KZ. 26, Up.). 2 Once to be read bhaviyas: Lanman 514 . 7 On the formation of this perfect stem, 3 Comparative of the root from which see above i8i and below 491. sds-vai- 'constant' is derived. 8 This form was transferred to the N. A. 4 To be read sdhyase in I. 71*. sing. n. in whicli no consonant (-M or -s) 5 See Lanman 515. followed; cp. 44 a, 3. , ,

VI. Declension. Nouns. Consonant Stems. 235

the dual as well as the D. Ab. in the plural. The V. sing. m. is regularly formed with -vas^. The forms actually occurring, if made from cakrvdms- 'having done', would be the following:

Sing. N. m. cakrvdn. A. m. cakrvdmsam, n. cakrvdt. I. cakricsU. D. m. cakruse. Ab. cakrusas. G. cakrusas. V. m. cakrvas. — Du. N. A. m.

cakrvdmsa. — PI. N. m. cakrvdmsas. A. m. cakrusas. I. m; cakrvddbhis. G. m. cakrusam. The forms actually occurring are the following: Sing. N. m. d-cikitvan' 'not knowing', d-prosivan 'not gone away' 3, d-rarwan 'not liberal', d-vidvan'> 'not knowing', cqkrvdn 'having done', cikitvdn 'having noticed', jaganvdn 'having gone', jaghanvdn 'having slain', jajnivdn^ 'having recognized', /z^rwiw* 'having conquered', jujurvdn 'having grown old', jujusvdn 'having enjoyed', jujuvdn 'having sped', tatanvdn 'having stretched', tasthivan 'having stood', dadasvdn^ 'having bitten', dadasvdn 'become ex- hausted', dadrsvdn 'having seen', dadvdn 'having given', dadhanvdn * 'having streamed', dadhrsvdn 'having become bold', dasvdn'^ 'worshipping', didivdn 'having shone', nir-jagmivdn (TS. iv. 2. i*) 'having gone out', papivdn 'having

drunk' 9, pupusvdn 'having made abundant', babhuvdn 'having become', bibhivdn 'having feared', niamrvdn 'having died', mJdkvdn'' 'bountiful', yayivdn 'having gone', rarivdn 'having given', ru7~ukvdn 'having shone', vavanvdn 'having accepted', vidvdn^ knowing', vivikvdn^° 'having divided', vividvin 'having found', vividkvdn'^^ 'having wounded', susukvdn'^'^ 'having shone', susruvdn, 'having heard', sasavdn 'having won', sasahvdn 'having conquered', sakvdn'' 'having overcome'. A. m. lyivdmsam '-5 'having gone', cakrvdmsam, cakhvdmsam " 'stretching out', cikitvdmsam, jagrvdmsam 'waking', jujuvdmsam, tastabhvdfnsam 'having

held fast', tasthivdmsam, dasvdmsam*', dldivdmsam, di'tr-vidvamsam ^i][-dL\s'^o%td.' papivdmsam'^^, paptivdmsam 'having flown', pTpivdmsam 'having swelled', mamrvdmsam, ririhvdmsam 'having licked', vavrvdmsam 'having enclosed', vavrdhvdmsam 'having grown strong', vidvdinsam'', {pra-)vivisivdmsam(^?i. lY. .7.15'), susuvdmsam 'having increased', sasavdmsam, sasrvdmsam 'having sped', sasahvdmsam, si'i-vidvamsam'' 'knowing well', susupvdmsam 'having slept', susuvdmsam 'having pressed (Soma)'. — Weak forms for strong: cakrusam (x. 137') for cakrvdmsam; emusdm (viii. 66'°)'^ 'dangerous'. A. n. tatanvdt 'extending far', sam-vavrtvdt 'enveloping'. I. m. d-bibhyusa 'fearless', cikitiisa 'wise', vidiisa^. — n. d-bibkyusa, bibhyusd. D. m. d-raruse, uciise'^'' 'pleased', cakrt'ise, cikituse, jagmi'ise ^hsNing gont' jigyi'ise, dadak'tse 'worshipping', dah'ise^^, bibhyuse, milhi'ise^^, vidi'tse'^^, seduse^'^ 'having sat down'. Ab. m. d-rarusas, jujurusas. — n. tastkiisas'°.

1 11 'pierce'. Cp. the -mant and -vant stems (3 1 6) From vyadh- 12 and the -yams stems (346). From sue- 'shine'. 2 On the Sandhi of these nominatives see 13 From i- 'go'. Lanman 512. 14 From a root kha-. 3 From p'a and vas- 'dwell'. 15 Lanman adds faprivhtnsamij). 4 Without reduplication. iS From am- 'be injurious', with weak 5 From jM- 'know'. stem, together with anomalous accent, for

6 From ji- 'conquer'. » *em-i-vavjsam; cp. Lanman 512^. 7 From dams- 'bite'. 17 From uc- 'find pleasure'. 8 From dhanv- 'run'. 18 Unreduplicated form. 9 Lanman adds paprivdnlj). 19 From sad- 'sit down'. 10 From vie- 'separate'. 20 This may be A. pi. m. 236 I. Ali.gemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

G. m. d-ddsusas 'not worshipping', d-rarusas, lyi'isas, cikitusas, jagmi'isas, jaghmisas, janusas'^ 'knowing', jigyusas, tatarusas 'having crossed', tasthusas, dadusas, dasusas^, didiyi'isas, papusas, bibhyusas, mamri'isas (AV.), milMsas^, vividiisas 'having found', sedi'isas, susuviisas. — n. vavavri'isas^ 'enveloping'. V. m. cikitvas 'seeing', titirvas 'having crossed', didivas 'shining', miihvas^. ^ — With -van : cikitvan (AV.). Du. N. A. m. okivnmsa'' 'accustomed to', jaganvamsa, jagrvimsa, tasthi-

viimsS, didivSmsa, papivSmsa, vavanvSmsa, vidvamsa^ , susuvdinsa, susruvamsa. — With au: vidvdmsau^. PI. N. m. d-vidvamsas, cakrvdmsas, cikitvdmsas, jaksivdmsas (TS. i. 4. 44^) 'having eaten', jaganvdmsas, Jagrvatnsas, jigivamsas, tasthivamsas, titirvamsas, tustimdmsas 'having praised', dadrvdmsas 'having burst', dasvamsas \ papivdmsas

(TS. I. 4. 44^), paptivdmsas, midkvdmsas^, ririkvdmsas^ 'having abandoned',

vidvdmsas ^, hdukvdmsas, susuvdmsas, sasavainsas, sasrvamsas, sasahvamsas, sahvdmsas^, su-vidvamsas (TS. iv. 6. 5^), susvpvdmsas. — Weak form for

strong: d-bibhyusasi (i. w^). The AV. has the hybrid form bhakti- vdmsas^ A. m. cikitiisas, jagmt'csas, Jigyusas, tasthusas, dasi'isas^, mllkt'isas^, vidusas^, sedi'isas.

I. m. jagrvddbhis. — G. m. d-dasusam 5, Jigyusaiti, dadusam, miUiiisam ', vidiisam 5.

2. Radical Stems in -s.

349. This declension comprises only radical stems, both monosyllabic and compound, formed from some dozen roots, numbering altogether about

sixty. Some forty of these occur in the m., nearly thirty in the f , and half a dozen in the n. Nine monosyllabic stems are f, viz. dds- 'worship', dis- 'direction', dfs- 'look', nds- 'night', pds- 'sight', pis- 'ornament', prds-"^ 'dispute', vis- 'settlement', vris- 'finger'; but only two m., viz. //- 'lord' and spas- 'spy'; all the rest are compounds, about 20 of which are formed from drs-. The

inflexion is the same in all genders: the only n. forms which would differ

from the m. and f. (N. A. du. and pi.) do not occur.

a. The only trace of the distinction of strong and weak forms appears in the nasalization of the stem in the N. sing. m. of some half dozen compounds of -drs- 'look' 10. b. As the s represents an old palatal (40), it normally becomes the cerebral d before terminations beginning with bh, as vid-bhis; but in dis- and -drs- it becomes a guttural, owing doubtless to tlie influence of the k in the N. sing, and L. pi. It regularly becomes k before the -su of the L. pi., where it is phonetic (43 b 2); it usually also becomes k in the N. sing, (which originally ended in -A But in four stems it is represented

by the cerebral /, e. g. vit, owing to the influence of forms in which the cerebral is phonetic. \t\ puro-das 'sacrificial cake', the palatal is displaced by the -j of the N.i^

1 Unreduplicated form from jna- 'know'. 9 From p-as- 'question'. Lanman would 2 With anomalous additional reduplicative correct the reading of AV. II. 27? to pi'asi, syllable. explaining the word as a compound (pra-as-), 3 AV. VII. 97^ for cikitvas of the corre- where the accent prdsi would be regular. sponding verse of the RV. (ill. 2916), as if 10 That is, -drn, which in its three occur- from a -vant stem. rences in the RV. appears before vowels 4 From uc- 'be wont'. and doubles the n: -drnn. 5 Without reduplication. " It cannot, however, have been directly 6 From He- 'leave'. ousted by the N. -j (the former existence of 7 See Lanman 513^. which in consonant stems must have been 8 In AV. VI. 793 for the reading of the long forgotten), but was doubtless due to edition bhaJdivavisah syama the Paipp. has the influence of a- stems, such as dravirio- bhaksiniahi. dd-s. VI. Declension. Nouns. Consonant Stems. 237

''" ^""^ ^"^^ ^'"° transition forms to the a-declension T from puro-das- : furoiaiena (VS. XIX. and purodasd-vatsa. 85) (AV. XII. 4^5) 'having a sacrificial cake as a calf'.' The D. infinitive drsaye is a transition to the «-declension, for drs-eT-.

Inflexion. The 350. normal forms actually occurring, if made from vis- f. 'settle- ment', would be as follows:

Sing. N. V. vit. A. viiam. I. vim. D. vise. Ab. visas. G. visas. L. visi. — Du. N. A. visa and visau. — PI. N. visas. A. visas. I. vidbhis. D. Ab. vidbhyds. G. visam. L. viksL Forms which actually occur are the following: Sing. N. m. i. with nasalized stem: ki-dnt^ 'of what kind?', sa-drni 'resembling'; in VS. xvii. 81: anya-dfh 'of another kind', i-dni 'such', prdti- sadpi 'similar''*. — 2. ending in -k: i-drk (AV.), eta-drk 'such', ta-drk 'such', divi-spfk 'touching heaven', ni-sprk^ 'caressing', ya-dfk 'of what kind', ranvd- samdrk 'appearing beautiful', svar-dfk 'seeing light', hiranya-samdrk 'resembling gold', hrdi-spfk 'touching the heart'. — 3. ending in -f: spdt; vi-spdt 's^y'. — 4. ending in -S: puro-dds 'sacrificial cake' (occurs twice). f. 2. ending in -k: dik (VS. AV.), ndk; dn-apa-sprk (AV.) 'not refusing', upa-drk 'aspect', ranvd-satndrk, sam-drk 'appearance', su-drsTka-samdrk 'having a beautiful appearance'. — 3. ending in -i: vit\ vi-pat ('fetterless') N. of a river. N. A. n. eia-dfk^, su-samdrk 'handsome'; ta-dfk may be a neuter in v. 44". A. m. spdsam; puro-ddsam; upari-spfiam 'reaching above', divi-spfsam, hrdi-spfsam; tvesd-samdrsam 'of brilliant appearance', pisdhga-samdrsam 'of reddish appearance', ranvd-samdrsam, su-samdrsam; dUre-dfsam 'visible far and wide', su-drsam 'well-looking', svar-dHam; dUrd-adisam'' 'announcing far and wide'. — f. disam, prdsam (AV.), visam; a-disam 'intention', rta-spriam 'connected with pious works', pisdnga-satndrsam (AV.), pra-disam 'direction', vi-pasam, hikra-pisam 'radiantly adorned', sam-dfsam.

I. m. visva-pisa 'all-adorned', su-samdfsa^. — f. dasd^, disd, pisd, visd; pra-disa. — n. divi-spfsa, dure-dfsa. D. m. dnar-vise 'seated on the car', i-dfse, divi-spfse, du-ddse (AV.) 'irreligious', dure-dfse. — f. dise (AV. VS.), vise; sam-dHe^°. Ab. m. svar-dfsas. — f. disds (AV.), visds; sam-drsas, sam-spfsas (VS. XXXVIII. 11). G. m. upa-spfsas (AV.) 'touching', divi-spfsas, prdti-prasas" (AV.) 'counter-

disputant', su-dfsas, svar-drsas, Mranya-samdrsas, hrdi-sprsas. — f. disds (AV.), visas. — n. sadana-sprsas 'coming into one's house'. L. m. divi-spfsi. — f. disi (AV.), drsi., prdsi (AV.), visi; pra-disi, vi-pasi, sam-dfsi. — V. m. tvesa-samdrk. Du. N. A. V. m. rta-sprsa, divi-spfsa and divi-sprsa, mithu-dfsa 'appearing alternately', svar-dfsa. — f. mithu-dfsa^ — With -au: visau. PI. N. m. spdsas; upari-spfsas (AV.), rta-spfsas, divi-spfsas, mandi-ni- spfsas 'fond of Soma', ratha-spfsas "touching the chariot', hrdi-spfsas; dure-

1 Cp. Lanman 4901. 6 The form manandk (x, 6l6), perhaps the 2 kidfnn i- (x. 108^). same as manak 'a little', is explained by ^ sadfnh always before a- in RV. In TS. Grassmann as maita-nds 'dispelling wrath'. II. 2. 8* (Bj the final k is preserved before 7 For dm'i-d-disain, s: sadfnk samandis. 8 In the Isa Upanisad (VS. XL. l) also 4 Also sadHi: all four before ca. Cp. occurs lid. Lanman 4561 and 4631. 9 Cp. Lanman 490 (bottom). 5 From ni-spfs-, BR., Grassmann, Lanman; 10 There is also the transition form drsdye. from ni-spfh- 'desirous of (loc), Bohtlingk " Cp. Whitney's note on AV. II. 271. The (pw.). accent should be prati-prams. 238 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

dfsas, yaksa-dfias 'having the appearance of a Yaksa', su-dfsas, svar-dfsas; st'i-sadrsas tvesd-samdrsas, su-samdfias; visva-pisas, su-pisas 'well adorned' ; 'handsome'. — f. disas, visas; a-disas, ud-diias (VS. vi. 19) 'upper quarters',

upa-sprsas, pra-dUas, vi-dUas (VS. vi. 1 9) 'intermediate quarters', sam-dfsas. A. m. spdsas; ahar-dfsas 'beholding the day', bhimd-samdrsas 'of terrible appearance', svar-dfsas, hiranya-samdrsas. — f. disas, visas, vrisas; a-disas, pra-disas, sam-dfsas. 2'^) — I. m. su-samdfgbhis. — f, padbhis' (iv. 'with looks', vidbhis. ^ D. f. digbhyds (VS. vi. 19). — Ab. f. digbhyds, vidbhyds. — G. f. disim, viiani; a-disam. — L. f. diksi'i (AV. VS.), viksu.

6. Radical stems in -A. 351. This declension comprises some 80 stems formed from about a dozen roots. All three genders appear in its inflexion; but the neuter is rare, being found in only two stems and never in the plural. Of monosyllabic stems six or seven are £, one m., and one n. All the remaining stems are compounds, about three-fourths of which are formed from the three roots druh-, vaJi- and sah- (over 30 from the last). The origin of the two stems usnih- (AV.) a metre, and sardh-^ 'bee' is obscure.

a. The distinction of strong and weak appears in compounds of vtth- and sah-^, tlie vowel being lengthened in the N- A. sing, and N. pi. m.; also in the N. A. du. m. forms indra-vaha, indra-vahau, anad-vahau; and in the f. sing. N. daksind-vat and A. havya-vaham. The strong stem -vah- twice appears in weak cases, while it is metrically shortened 18 times in strong cases*. The word anad-vah- 'ox' (lit. 'cart-drawer') distinguishes three stems, the strong one being anad-vah-, and the weak anad-uh- before vowels and anad-ut- ^ before consonants. b. As h represents both the old guttural aspirate gh and the old palatal//^, it should phonetically become g and d respectively before bh. But the cereJDral appears for both in the only two case-forms that occur with a -bh ending: sarddbhyas from sarah-, and anad-iidbhyas (AV.) from anad-vah-, where the dental d takes the place of the cerebral by dissimilation. Before the -su of the L. pi., k would lie phonetic; but here again, in the only form occurring, the cerebral appears: anadutsu^^. On the other hand the phonetic k appears in the N. sing, in the six ioxn\s-dhak, -dhuk, -dhruk', -ruk, spfk, usnik{A\.)i; while the unphonetic /appears in the two forms t'a/ and -j-a/^. The word anad-vah- forms, instead of *anad-vat, the anomalous anadvan as if from a stem in -vant, c. The stem mahd- is perhaps a transfer to the a-declension from the far more frequent but defective mah- 'great'. Several cases are formed from it: sing. N. maha-s, G. mahasya, L. mahe; pi. N. maha and mahani, n., G. mahanam. The D. sing, mahdye, used as an infinitive, is a transfer to the i-declension from mah-.

Inflexion.

352. The forms actually occurring, if made from sdh- 'victorious', would be as follows:

1 Bloomfield is of opinion that here, as 7 Occurring respectively in usa-dhak 'burn- well as in the 5 other passages in which ing with eagerness', in three compounds of this form occurs in the RV., it means 'with duh- 'milk', and in five compounds of druh- feet': Johns Hopkins University Circular, 1906, 'injure'. These three forms, together with are the only examples of the resto- P- 15—19. usar-bhut, 2 That the h here represents an original ration of initial aspiration in the declension guttural is shown by the N. pi. saraghas of the RV. (SB.) and the derivatives sardgha- and 8 The derivation of this word (AV. VS.),

saragha- (TB.). is uncertain ; it occurs in the RV. only in 3 The Pada text has always vah- on the the extended form of usniha.-. one hand, but sah- on the other. 9 When the final h becomes /, the initial 4 Cp. Lanman 498 (middle). J is cerebralized. 5 For anad-ud- by dissimilation. 6 The dental again by dissimilation for

the cerebral t. 3

VI. Declension. Nouns. Consonant Stems. 239

Sing. N. sat. V. m. f. sat. A. m. f. sd/tam. I. saM. D, sahL Ab. sahds. G. saMs. L. saAi. — Du. N. A. V. m. f. sd/iS and sMau. N. A. n. sahi. — PI. N. V. m. f. sdAas. A. m. sd^as and i-a/ia'j, f. sdAas. D. m sad-bhyas^. G. m. sahdm. L. m. satsi'i'^. The forms actually occurring are the following: Sing. N. m. i. with -k: usd-dhak 'burning with eageni go-dhuk 'milkman', prati-dhiik^ (AV. TS.) 'fresh milk'; aksnaya-dhruk 'injuring wrongly', a-dhruk 'free from malice', antaka-dhruk 'demon of death', abhi-dhru'k 'inimical', asma-dhruk 'inimical to us'. 2.^ with -i: sat; abhi-sdt 'overpowering', rsi-sdt 'overcoming the seer', jana-sdt 'overcoming men', tura-sdt 'overpowering quickly', nis-sdt 'over- powering', ni-sdp (AV.) 'overcoming', piira-sdt 'victorious from of old', prtand- sdt 'conquering hostile armies', prahi-sdt 'finishing swiftly', bhuri-sdt^ 'bearing much', rayi-sdt 'ruling over wealth', vane-sdt 'prevailing in woods', vira-sdt^ 'ruling men', visva-sdt^ (AV.) 'all-conquering', vrtha-sdt 'conquering easily', satrU-sdf (AV.) 'overcoming foes', satra-sdt 'always conquering'; ttirya-vdf

(TS. IV. 3. 3^) 'four-year-old ox', ditya-vdt^ (VS. xiv. 10; TS. iv. 7. 10') 'two-

year-old ox', pastha-vdt (VS. xiv. 9) 'four-year-old ox' ', madhyama-vdt 'driving at middling speed', havir-vdt 'conveying the oblation', havya-vdt 'conveying the offering'. — Irregular form: anad-vdn (AV. TS. VS.) 'ox' ;°. f. I. usnik (VS. AV.) a metre, garta-ruk^^ 'ascending the car-seat', sabar- dhuk 'yielding nectar'- — 2. daksina-vdt 'borne to the right' ". — n. i. puru- spfk 'much desired'! A. m. I. Strong forms with -vdham and -saham (after a) or -sdham (after I or f): anad-vdkam, turya-vdham (VS. xxviii. 28), ditya-vdham (VS. xxviii. 25), pastha-vdham (VS. xxviii. 29), vira-vdham 'conveying men', svasti- vdham 'bringing welfare', havya-vdham (also f.); pra-sdham 'victorious', yajna- saham'^^ 'mighty in sacrifice', visva-sdkam, satra-sdham; abhimati-sdham 'con- quering adversaries', rti-sdham 'subduingassailants', nr-sdham 'overcoming men', 't. prtana-sdham — With metrical shortening of -sdh- or -sdh- : rti-sdham, prtana-sdAam^^ ; carsam-sdham'^^ 'ruling over men', pra-sdAam, vibhva-sdham 'overcoming the rich', sada-sdham 'always holding out'. — 2. a-druham, puru-

spfham. — f.- guham 'hiding-place', driiham 'fiend', miham 'mist'; umiham (VS. XXVIII. 25); parT-ndham 'enclosure'. I. m. dhanva-sdha 'skilled in archery', puru-spfha, visu-druhd 'injuring in various parts'. — f. guM^^, druhd, mahd 'great'; usnika {WS. xxi. 13); prd- sdhd'^'' 'might', vi-sruhd 'plant'. — n. viahd. D. m. druhe^^, make; a-druhe, abhi-druhe, abkimati-sdhe'^9 (TS. v. 2. 7^), ^°. ^'. — carsanT-sdhe'^^, saira-sdhe — f. make; usnihe (VS. xxiv. 12); go-duhe n. make.

1 To be inferred from anadudbhyas and 12 The N. ol sarah- 'bee', occurs as sardt anadutsu. in TS. V. 3. 122 (B) and in SB. xiii. 3. i*. 2 There is no evidence to show the gender 1 For yajna-sUham. of this word. 14 With unphonetic cerebral after 5 owing 3 For ni-sat. to the influence of the N. prtana-sdt. 4 For bhiiri-sdt. 15 The s is here not cerebralized after i. 16 5 For vTra-sdf. guhd which occurs 53 times (beside 6 For vUva-mt. guhd, once) is used adverbially, 'in secret', 7 For satru-sdt. with retracted accent. 8 Here ditya- seems to be == dvitiya-. 17 From prd-sdh, beside pra-sah-. 9 Probably from pastha- = prsfha- 'back'. iS This form is perhaps f. The TS. (iv. 3. 32 etc.) has pasfha-vat with 19 Strong form for weak. 20 dental t for cerebral /. Strong form for weak (11. 21=), but the 10 There is also the transfer form mahd-s, Pada text has satrd-sdhe. supplying the place of a N. of mdh-. 21 There is also a transfer to the z-de- " For garta-ruk. clension: t/iahdye (as an infinitive). 240 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

Ab. m. druhds, mahds; rti-sdhas. — f. druhds'^ — n. mahds. G. m. drukds, makas"; a-driihas, anaduhas (AV.), prtana-sdhas; with strong form: abhimati-sahas^. — f. drukds, mihds; prd-sdhas. — n. mahds; puru-spfhas. L. m. anadi'ihi (AV.)*. — f. upa-ndhi (AV.) 'shoe', pari-ndhi (AV.). V. I. m. tura-sat (VS. x. 22), prtana-mt (AV.), havya-vat. — 2. m. go- dhuk {AN.). — Ld-d/iruki. Du. N. A. V. I. m. anad-vdhau, indra-vdha and indra-vdkau 'conveying Indra', dhur-sahau (VS.iv. 33) 'bearing the yoke'; shortened: carsani-saka, ratha-sdha 'drawing the chariot'. — 2. m. a-druha, dn-abhidruha 'not inimical', puru-sprha. — f. a-driiha, a-druha. — n. mahf.

PI. N. V. I. m. anad-vdhas (AV.), indra-vdhas, turya-vdhas (VS. xxiv. 1 2), ditya-vdhas (VS.), pastha-vdhas (VS.), prsti-vdhas (AV.) 'carrying on the sides', vajra-vAhas 'wielding a thunderbolt', vira-vdkas, saha-vahas 'drawing together', susthu-vdhas 'carrying well', havya-vdhas; abhimaii-sdhas, satru-sdhas; shortened: V. carsani-sahas. — 2. m. drtihas, mahds^; a-druhas, V. a-druhas, go-diihas, puru-spfhas, V. puru-sprhas.

f. ? mihas, riihas'&'g'roxiXs' ; a-druhas, a-rI'lhas {KVyshoot5\ ghrta-di'thas^gvvmg ghee', puru-driihas 'injuring greatly', puru-spfhas, pra-ruhas (AV.) 'shoots', mano-muhas (AV.) 'bewildering the mind', vi-sruhas. A. m. druhds^, mahds*, a-druhas, anaduhas (AV.), puru-spfhas. —

f. dri'ihas, nihas'^ (AV. VS.) 'destroyers', mihas, riihas (AV.); aksa-7idhas 'tied to the axle', a-druhas, upa-riihas 'shoots', pra-ruhas (AV.), sam-dihas 'mounds'.- D. m. anadi'idbhyas (AV.) — f. sarddbhyas 'bees'. — G. m. mahdm ^°, carsani-sdham (VS. xxviii. i). — L. m. anadi'itsu.

7. Stems in semivowels : r, y, v.

353. This group forms a transition from the consonant to the vowel declension inasmuch as the stem often assumes a vocalic form before endings with initial consonant, and in some cases takes endings which otherwise appear in the vowel declension only. The -r stems are nearest the consonant declension as their radical division conforms almost without exception to that type; their derivative division, however, has several points in common with the inflexion of vowel stems.

I. Stems ending in -p.

354. A. Radical stems. Here the stems ending in radical r must be distinguished from those in which the r belongs to a suffix. The radical

I stem¥ numbering over 50 are formed from some sixteen roots, the vowel of which is nearly always i or u. Only three of these stems contain a and only two a. Nearly a dozen are monosyllabic, but the rest (numbejing over 40) are compounds, almost a dozen of which are formed with -tur.

1 amhas (vi. 31) is probably not an Ab. of ^ With irregular accent. anih- 'distress' (which does not occur else- 7 There are no neuters except the trans- where), but by haplology for dmhas-as, which ition forms maha and mahani. is very frequent. 8 With irregular accent as if weak forms. 2 There is also the transition form Cp. above 94, note ^ and LANMAN501 (middle). mahdsya. 9 The derivation of this word is uncertain: 3 The Pada text has -sahas. it is explained by Mahldhara as = nihanir-. 4 There is also the transition form make Whitney (AV. 11. 6^) would emend to nidas. {m. n.). ° There is also the transition form 5 See Whitney's note on AV. vii. 736. mahanani. VI. Declension. Nouns. Consonant Stems. 241

The inflexion is the same in all genders except the N. A. neuter. A pecu- liarity is the lengthening of the radical i and tt when a consonant ending follows or originally followed '-

a. The distinction of strong and weak appears in dvar- f. 'door', which is reduced to dur- in weak cases; in tdr- and sldr- 'star', from which are made tdras and stfbhis; and in the n. svar 'light' two weak cases, the D. and G. sing., are formed from the con- tracted stem sm-: b. There are here a few transitions to the a-declension: iaia-dm^asya and iatd- durestt 'leaving a hundred doors', which started from weak cases like duras; su-dhura-s, N. sing. m. 'well-yoked', due to the A. su-dhur-am; perhaps also the A. sing. f. dn-apa- sphura-m 'not pushing away', which occurs beside the N. pi. dn-apa-sphur-as^. On the other hand the N. pi. m. vandhiir-as 'car-seats' seems to be a transition from the a-declension, as vandhiira- is probably the older stem. c. The form yan-tur-am 'guide', which occurs twice for yan-tdr-am has been formed as if from -tur owing to the parallelism with ap iuram which once appears beside it 3.

Inflexion.

355. The forms actually occurring, if, made from pur- f. 'stronghold', would be as follows: Sing. N. pUr. A. puram. I. purd. D. pure. Ab. purds. G. purds. L. puri. — Du. N. A. pura and purau. — PI. N. V. pitras. A. puras. I. purbhis. D. purbhyds (VS.). G. purim. L. pursu. The forms actually occurring are as follows: Sing. N. m. gtr 'praising', v&r'^ 'protector'; muhur-gir 'swallowing suddenly'; diir-ahr 'badly mixed'; raJas-tar 'traversing the air', ratha-tur 'drawing a chariot', visva-tiir 'all-surpassing', su-pra-t&r 'very victorious' 5. — f. gir 'praise', dvar (AV.) 'door', dhilr 'burden', pfir; ama-jiir 'aging at home', a-str^ (AV. TS.) 'mixture'. N. A. n, var 'water', suar'' 'light' ^ siivar (TS. 11. 2. 12'). A. m. tiiram 'promoter'; ap-turam'^ 'active', aji-turam 'victorious in battles', rajas-turain, ratha-ti'cram, vrtra-turam 'conquering enemies'; a-juram 'unaging', apa-sphuram 'bounding forth', rta-jdram 'grown old in (observing) the law', gdvasiram 'mixed with milk', ydvdsiram 'mixed with corn', sahdsra- dvaram 'having a thousand doors', su-dhuram 'well yoked'". — f. giram, dvSram{hY.), dhuram, piiram; a-siram, upa-stlram'coyer\ sain-giram'a.sstiA'. I. m. bdndhura'''^ (AV.) 'binder' (?). — i.gird, dhura,pura; abhi-pra-mura 'crushing', abhi-svdra 'invocation', a-sira. — n. viha-tura. D. m. gire; nis-ture 'overthrowing'. — f. upa-stire. — n. sure.

Ab. f. dhurds; ni-juras 'consuming by fire'. G. m. gdvasiras, ydvasiras, radhra-turas 'encouraging the obedient'. — f. ama-jiiras. — n. suras "; rdsasiras 'mixed with juice'.

is only declensional form of 1 That is, the -s of the N. sing. m. and f. 7 This the the This rule also applies in var (I. 1322) if this word occurring in AV. 8 in -r are GkassMann is right in explaining .this form Neuter compounds ending has the transition as a N. sing. m. meaning 'protector', from avoided; thus the AV. n. vdr- {vr- 'cover'); but BR., s. v. vdr-, regard form ndva-dvdra-m, N. ap-{a)-s-iuram 'getting over work'. this form as a corruption. 9 For 10 is also the anomalous form 2 In the later language dvar- f. and pur- f. There yantdram. went over to the a- declension as dvara- n. and yaniuram for " transfer from the a-declen- pura- n., while var- n. went over to the i- Probably a declension as vari-. sion. 12 accentuation of a dissyllabic 3 See Lanman 486 (bottom). With the {siiar). In viu. 6l'7 for sura a the 4 If this form is not a corruption. stem text sure a, but it is probably the G. 5 There is also the transition form su- Pada has 66'°, 69'° the uninflected form dhura-s. suras. In I. used in a G. sense. 6 From sr- 'mix'. suar seems to be

Indo-arische Philologie. I. 4 18 242 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

Lr. f. d/iuri, puri. — n. si'car^. Du. N. A. m. vrtra-titra, sana-ji'ira 'long grown old', su-dhi'ira. — f. dvdra; mithas-tura 'alternating'; with au: dvarau, dkurau. PI. N. V. m. giras, gi?-as, muras 'destroyers'; ap-ti'tras, a-mi'iras 'destroyers'; gdvasiras, try-asiras 'mixed with three (products of milk)', dddhy- dsiras 'mixed with curds'; dur-dhuras 'badly yoked', dhiya-juras 'grown old in devotion', nis-turas, bandhiiras (AV.), vandhuras 'seat of the chariot', vrtra-turas (VS.vi. 34). — f. giras, giras {KY.), tAras 'stars'^, dvSras^, dvaras, puras; dn-apasphuras 'not struggling', ama-juras, mithas-turas. A. m. giras; a-jituras, gdvasiras, mithas-turas, ydvasiras, sam-giras, su-dhuras. — i. giras, duras*, dkuras, puras, psuras^ 'victuals'; ni-puras^ (VS. AV.), para-piiras^ (VS. AV.), vi-stiras 'expansion', sam-stiras 'con- traction'.

I. m. ratha-tarbhis. — f. girbhis, purbhis'', strbhis^ 'stars'. — D. n. vdrbhyds (VS.). — G. m. sdm-dsirdm 'mixed'. — i. girdm, puratn. — L. m. tursu. — f. girsi'c, dhursu, pursi'i. — n. prtsu-tdrsu 9 'victorious in battle'. 356. B. Derivative stems. — Derivative stems ending in r consist of two groups, the one formed with the suffix -ar, the other with -tar. The former is a small group containing only eight stems, the latter is a very large one with more than 150 stems. Both groups agree in regularly distinguishing strong and weak cases. The strong stem ends in -ar or -ar, which in the weak forms is reduced to r before vowels and r before consonants. Both groups further agree in dropping the final of the stem in the N. sing. m. f., which case always ends in -5"=. They resemble the vowel declension in adding the ending -n in the A. pi. m., and -j in the A. pi. f. and in inserting n before the -am of the G. pi. They have the peculiar, ending -ur in the G. sing. ".

a. Stems in -ar.

357. There are only five simple m. and f. stems in -ar, viz. us-dr- 1.

'dawn', dev-dr- m. 'husband's brother', ndnand-ar- f. 'husband's sister', 7idr-^' m.

'man', svdsar-^'^ f. 'sister'; and the two compounds svar-nar- m. 'lord of heaven' and saptd-svasar- 'having seven sisters'. Of these, usdr- shows only case- forms according to the consonant declension, while ndr- and svdsar- have some according to the vowel declension also. Of ndnandar- only the G. and L. sing, and of devdr- only the A. sing, and the N. and L. pi. occur. Nearly all case-forms are represented by these five stems taken together. There are also the three neuters dh-ar- 'day', adh-ar- 'udder', and vddh-ar- 'weapon', which occur in the N. A. sing. only. The first two supplement the -an stems dh-an- and lidh-an- in those cases.

1 This form is used 5 times as a L. sing, 7 From pur- 'stronghold' and pur- 'abun- dropping the -z like the -an stems, as ahan dance'. beside ahani. 8 Weak form, accented like a dissyllabic 2 Strong form of iar- = star- 'star'. The stem. In Kh. I. 116 normally accented, but gender is uncertain. spelt with ri as stribhis. 3 Once the weak form duras. 9 With L. pi. ending kept in the first 4 The strong form dvaras is once used. member. The accentuation of a wealc case, duras, 1° In this they resemble the N. m. of nouns occurs once. of the -an declension. 5 Occurring only in X. 26^; it is a n. sing, " Except nar-as and usr-ds. according to BR. 12 This word is probably derived with the 6 The meaning and derivation of these two suffix -ar; cp. Brdgmann, Grundriss 2, p. 359. words is uncertain; see Whitney's note on ^' Here -sar is probably a root; cp. AV. xvui. 2^8. Brugmann, op. cit., 2, p. 8, footnote. VI. Declension. Nouns. Consonant Stems. 243

Inflexion.

358. Sing. N. m. hatd-svasa (AV.) 'whose sisters have been slain'. — f. svdsa; saptd-svasa 'having seven sisters'. — n. dhar, ttdhar, vddhar.

A. m. devdram, ndram. — f. svdsaram. — I. f. svdsra. — D. m. ndre; svar-nare. — f. svdsre. — Ab. f. svdsurK — G. m. ndras. — f. usrds,

ndfiSfidur (AV.), svdsur. — L. m. ndri. — f. usri' and usrdm 3, ndnandari''. — V. f. usar.

Du. N. A. m. ndrd, V. nard and narau. — f. svdsdrd and svdsarau. — L. f. svdsros.

PI. N. m. deimras, ndras, V. naras, suar-naras. — f. svdsaras. —

A. m. «r«5. — f. tcsrds, svdsfs. — I. m. nfbhis. — f. svdsrbhis. — D. m. fifbhyas. — Ab. m. nfbhyas. — G. m. naram^ and nrndmT. — f. svdsram^ and svdsfnam. — L. devfsu, nfsu.

b. Stems in -iar.

359. This group includes two subdivisions, the one forming its strong

stem in -tar, the other in -tar. The former consists of a small class of I five names of relationship: three masculines, pi-tdr- 'father', bhrd-tar- 'brother',' ndj>-tar-^ 'grandson', and two feminines, (/^/^z'-ZaV- 'daughter', and ma-tdr- 'mother';

and the m. and f. compounds formed from them. The second class consists of more than 150 stems (including compounds), which are either agent nouns accented chiefly on the suffix, or participles accented chiefly on the root.

These are never used in the f., which is formed with -i from the weak stem of the m., e. %. jdnitr-T- 'mother' (377).

a. This declension is almost restricted to the m. and f. gender. The only n. stems are dhar-iar- 'prop', dhnia-tdr- 'smithy', Ji'/ia-ZoV- 'stationary', vi-dhar-tar- 'meting out'; and from these only about half a dozen forms occur. The only oblique cases met with are the G. sthatitr and the L. dhmatarl (Pada -tdri). The N. A. sing, which might be expected to appear as -tar, seems to have attained to no fixity of form, as it was of extremely

rare occurrence. It seems to be represented by the following variations : sthatar iyi. SfCi^), ggi^ sthatfn (l. 726), sthatiir (l. 585, 70'], dhartari (IX. 86*^; II. 2317), vi-dharlari (vill. 592; IX. 474) 9. Inflexion.

360. The inflexion is exactly the same in the m. and f. except that the

A. pi. m. ends in -tfn, but the f. in -tfs.

The form's actually occurring, if made from matdr- f. 'mother'^ as re- presenting a name of relationship, and from janitdr- m. 'begetter', as re- presenting an agent noun, would be as follows: Sing. N. mati; j'aniti. A. matdram; janitAram. I. matrd; janitrS. D. mdtre; janitrL Ab. mati'ir; janitur. G. mati'ir; janitur. L. tnatdri; janitdri. V. mdtar; jdnitar. Du. N. A. matdrd and mdtdrau; janitAra and janitsrau. I. janitfbhyam (VS.). D. janitrbhyam. G. mdtros; janitros. L. matros; janitros.

1 The ending -tir in this declension 6 The only two forms in the derivative -(^ar appears to represent original -rz through declension in which -am is added direct to xA-Z^jCgJ-ANMAN 426, BRUGMANN, KG. p. 381 the stem. 7 Often to be read as nfnani; see Lan- 2 The metre requires usa7i. As to the sr MAN 43. 8 cp. 57, I «. In the RV. this stem occurs in weak 3 The ending -am is a transfer from the forms only, being supplemented in the strong

I- declension. The metre requires usardm in by napat. The TS. (l 3. 41) however has which -am is added direct to the stem. the strong form naptaravi with long vowel, + The metre requires nandndri (x. 8546). like svdsaram. 5 On nfn as a metrically shortened form 9 See Lanman 422 f. for other' cases see Pischel, VS. I, p. 42f. ]6* )

244 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

janitdras. janitrbhis. PI. N. matdrds; A. matfs; janitfn. I. matfbhis ; janitrbhyas. matrbhyas; jani- D. matrbhyas ; Ab. janitrbhyas. G. matnidm; tfndm. L. maffsu; janithu. V. mdtaras; jdnitaras. Forms actually occurring are the following: Sing. N. I. m. pits, bhrata; ddksa-pita (TS. iv. 3. 4'; VS. xiv. 3) 'having Daksa as father', tri-mata 'having three mothers', dvi-mata. 'having two mothers', hatd-bhrata (AV.) 'whose brothers have been slain', hatd-mSta (AV.) 'whose mother has been slain'. — f. duhita, tnata; a-bhraUi 'brotherless', sindhu- matri ' 'having a stream as mother'. 2^ ,m. a«z/-5-^ir«/(i (VS.xvni. 59)3, awVi? 'protector', upa-sattd {T^.YS. kY 'attendant', krostd 'jackal' ('yeller'), janitd, jaritd 'praiser', tratd 'protector', tvdstd 'fashioner', djtd 'giver', dhartd 'supporter', iietd 'leader', prati-grahita (VS. VII. 48) 'receiver', prati-dhartd (VS. xv. 10) 'one who keeps back', pra- vaktd (Kh. IV. 8*) 'speaker', vodhd and vidha 'driving'; etc. A. I. m. pitdram, bhrdtaram; ddri-mataram 'having a rock for a mother', jd-mataram 'son-in-law', sindhu-7nata?:am. — f. duhitdram, inatdrain, saptd- mataram 'having seven mothers'. 2. m. adhi-vaktdram 'advocate', anu-ksattdram (VS.xxx. 11) 'doorkeeper's mate', abhi-sektdram (VS.xxx. 12) 'consecrator', abhi-sartdram (VS.) 'assistant', ava- satdrani 'liberator', avitdram, dstaram 'shooter', a-yantdram 'restrainer', is-karta- ram 'arranging', upa-manthitdrain (VS.xxx. 12) 'churner', upa-sektdram (VS.xxx.

1 2) 'pourer-out', kdrtaram 'agent', ksattdram (VS. xxx. 1 3) 'door-keeper', gdntaram 'going', goptdram (Kh.v. 3 5) 'protector', cettdram 'attentive', janitdra?n (WQ.yjM.

51), jaritdramj'etdram 'victorious', jostdram (VS.xxviii. 1 o) 'cherishing', tarutdram 'victor', fratdram, tvdstaram, datdram 'giver', ddtdram 'giving', dhartdram, ni- datdram 'one who ties up', nis-kartdram (TS.iv. 2. 73) +, netdram 'leader', panitdram 'praising', pari-vestdram (VS. xxx. 12) 'waiter', pavitdram 'purifier', pura-etdram (VS. XXXIII. 60) 'leader', peiitdramiy^.yx^i. 12) 'carver', pra-karitdrani(y?).:&y.^. 12) 'sprinkler', pra-netdram 'leader', pra-ddtdram (VS.vii. 46; TS.) 'giver', pra- hetdram 'impeller', bodhayitdram 'awakener', bhettdram (TS. 1.5.6'') 'breaker', maiidhdtdram 'pious man', marditdram 'comforter', yantdram 'ruler', ydntdram 'restraining', ydtdram 'pursuer', yoktdram (VS. xxx. 14) 'exciter', raksitdram 'protector', vanditdram 'praiser', vi-bhaktdrain 'distributor', vi-moktdram (VS.xxx. 14) 'unyoker', samitdram (VS. xxviii. 10) 'slaughterer', srtam-kartdram (TS.

III. I. 4'') 'cooking thoroughly', srotdram 'hearer', sanitdram 'bestower', sam- eddhdram^ 'kindler', savitdram 'stimulator', stotdram 'praiser', hantdram 'slayer', has-kartdram 'inciter', hetdram 'driver', hotdram 'invoker'.

I. I. m. ndptrd, pitrd, bhrdtrd (AV.). — f. duhitrd, mdtrd (VS. AV.). — 2. vs\. dstrd, tvdstrd {KS[^, (//^a/rr? 'estabhsher', /rfl-jawVri (VS.x. 30) 'impeller', savitrd. '

D. I. m. ndptre, pitre. — f. duhitre, mdtre. — 2. m. dstre (AV.), kartri (AV.), krostrd {KV.), /aritre, jostre (VS.xvii. 56), /z/aV/r^ (VS. xxii. 20), ddtre, dhartri (VS.xvii. 56; TS. IV. 6. 3^), dhdtre (AV.), prati-grahitre (VS. vii. 47), raksitre (.A. v.), vi-dhdtre (AV.) 'disposer', samitre (TS. iv. 6. 3^), sdvitre, stotri, hantre (VS. XVI. 40), hotre. Ab. I. m. pitur, bhrdtur, vi-jdmdtur 'son-in-law'. — f. dukitur mdti'cr. — , 2. m. dstur, tvdstur (AV.), dhdti'cr, savitur, hotur.

1 On the Sandhi of these nominatives in cipient use as a periphrastic future: ='will a see Lanman 423 — 5. follov^'. 2 The nominatives of the m. agent nouns 4 RV. X. l4o5 and VS. xii. no have are so numerous (140 in the RV. alone) that is-kartaram in the same passage. examples only can be given here. 5 For *edk-laram , from idh- 'kindle'. 3 Used -with the A., an example of in- •

VI. Declension. Nouns. Consonant Stems. 245

G. I. m. ndptur, pitiir, bhratur. — f. dufiitur, ndnandur (AV.), matiir. — 2. m. abhi-ksattur 'carver', avitur, dstiir, utthaticr (AV.) 'resolving', karti'ir (Kli. IV. s^- ^^), cettur (AV.), janitur, jaritiir, tratiir, tvastur, datur, dhatur (VS. TS. AV.), ni-dhatur 'one who lays down', neti'ir, nestur 'leader', mandhstur, yantur (VS. IX. 30), vanditur, vavatur 'adherent', vidhur'' 'draught-horse', samitur, sanitiir, savitur, sotur 'presser of Soma', stotur, hJtur. L. I. m. pitdri. — f. duMtdri, matdri. — 2. m. netiri, vaktdri (AV.) 'speaker', sotdri. — With metrically protracted -7: etdri^, kartdri, vaktdriK V. I. m. j'amatar, pitar, bhratar. — f. duhitar, matar. — 2. m. ava- sfiartar 'preserver', avitar, janitar, jaritar, tratar, tvastar, dartar 'breaker', dosa-vastar 'illuminer of the dark', dhartar, dhatar, netar, nestar, pra-netar, pra-yantar 'bringer', yajna-hotar 'offerer at a sacrifice', vi-'d/iartar 'ruler', vi-dhatar, vi-sastar (AV.) 'slaughterer', sanitar, savitar, su-sanitar 'liberal giver', sotar, stotar (VS.xxiir.7; TS.vn.4.20), sthatar 'guider', hotar.

Du. N. A.V.'* I. va.,pitdra, bhrdtara; iMha-matara 'whose mother is here and there', ddksa-pitara, matdra-pitdra^ 'father and mother', sindhu-matara. — f. duhitdra, matdra, sam-matdra 'twins'. — With -au: m. pitdrau, sam- matdrau (AV.). — f. duhitdrau (AV. Kh. 111.15 ^3)^ matdrau. — 2. m. avitara, a-snatara 'not (fond of) bathing', ustAra 'ploughing bulls', gdntara, coditdra 'instigators', janitara, dhartdra, ni-cetara 'observers', pretara 'lovers', yantara 'guides', raksitdra, samitara, sthdtara, hjtara. — ^A^ith shortened vowel: manotdra 'disposers'. — With -au: anu-sthatdrau (AV.) 'undertakers', ksattdrau (AV.) 'carvers', goptdrau (AV.), datdrau, raksitdrau, hotarau (VS. XX. 42), hotarau (TS. iv. i. 8=^). — With shortened vowel: dhdnutamu^ 'running swiftly', savatdrau (VS. xxviii. 6) 'having the same calf'?. I. 2. m. hotrbhyam (VS. xxi. 53). — D. i. m. pitrbhyam ^. — G. i. m. pitros. — f. matros. — 2. m. pra-iastros (VS.) 'directors'. — L. r. m. pitros. — f. matros'^. PL N. I. m. pitdras, Y. pUaras, bhrdtaras; ddksa-pitaras^ ddksa-piiaras'^'' (TS. I. 2. 3'), go-mataras 'having a cow for mother', pfsni-mataras 'having Prsni for a mother', sindhu-mataras, su-matdras 'having a beautiful mother'. —

f. du/iifdras, matdras, V. mdtaras; a-bhratdras and a-bhrdtaras (AV.). — 2. m. agni-hotaras 'having Agni for a priest', abhi-ksattdras, abhi-svartdras 'invokers', dstaras, upa-ksetdras 'dwelling near', gdntaras, cetdras 'avengers', jaritdras, jostdras, tratdras, ^ai/zVaVai' (VS. vii. 14) 'keepers', datdras, dkartdras, dhdtaras, ni-cetdras 'observing' and 'observers', ninditdras 'scorners', nr-patdras 'protectors of men', netaras and netdras, panitdras, pari-vestdras (VS. vi. 13), pavitdras ''pmih&rs', pura-etdras (VS. xvii. 14; TS. iv. 6. 1'*), pra-/natdras 'con- ductors', pra-netdras, pravitdras 'promoters', pretdras, yantdras, raksitdras, vantdras 'enjoyers', vi-dhatdras, vi-yotdras 'separators', samitdras, srotSras, saiiitdras, sotdras, stotdras, sthatdras, svdritaras 'roaring', hetaras, hotaras'^^.

J For *vah-iur, from vah- 'draw'. 8 No form in -bhyam with the Ab. sense 2 Grassmann takes this form (v. 411°; occurs. L. as VI. 12*J as a N. f. of etar- 'one who approaches 9 These G. forms well as svdsros or asks'. must be pronounced trisyllabically in the RV. 3 The Pada text has i in all these forms. except mairos in vii. 3'. See Lanman 428. 10 Cp. Neisser BB. 20, 44. With long grade vowel. 4 In the RV. the ending -a occurs 176 " The form vasu-dhdtaras (AV. V. 276) may times, -ati only 10 times: Lanman 427 (mid.). be N. pi. with shortened vowel, but Whit- 5 A Dvandva compound in which both ney regards it as a comparative N. sing, members are inflected. 'greater bestower of wealth'. See his note 6 The shortening is probably metrical. on AV. V. 276. 7 This is the interpretation of the com- mentator; but the derivation of the word is obscure. 246 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

A. I. m. pitrn'^; ddksa-pitrn, pfhii-mdtfn. — f. matfs'^. — 2. m. asini, a-snatrn, kartfn (AV.; Kh. iv. 53°), goptrn (AV.), jarithi, trairn, datfn, patfn (AV.) 'drinkers', pra-vodhhi 'carrying off', stotfn, sthatfn, hotfn. I. I. m. n rptrbhis, pitrbkis, bhrdtrbkis; saptd-matrbhis. — f. matfbhis. — 2. m. dstrbhis, kartrbhis, dhatfbhis, pai'tfbhis 'with aids', setfbhis 'bindings', soti-bhis and sotrb/iis, hetfbkis, hotrbhis. D. I. m. pitfbhyas. — f. matrbhyas. — 2. m. ksattrbhyas (VS.xvi. 26) 'cha- rioteers', raksitfbhyas {AM.), stotrbkyas, sam-grakttf-bkyas (VS.xvi. 26) 'drivers'. Ab. I. m. pitfbhyas. — f. matrbhyas. G. m. I. pitnidm^. — 2, unnetfnam (VS. vi. 2) kind of Soma priests, ;aritrmim, datPnSm'' (AV.), dhatfndm, stotPndm, hotrnam. — With _/: I. pitrndm 7.' (TS. I. 3. 6' etc.); 2. dhatrndm (TS. iv. 14^), netrndm (TS. I. 3. d^)^. L. 1. m. pitfsu (AV.). — f. matfsu. — 2. m. hotrsu.

2. Stems in / and v.

361. These stems, of which there are only five, form a transition to the vowel declension because, while taking the normal endings like the ordinary consonant declension, they add -s in the N. sing. m. f. and show a vowel before the endings with initial consonant. There are no neuter forms *-

a. Stem in -ay {-ai).

362. This type is represented by only one word, usually stated in the form of rdi-, which never appears in any case. This word, which is both m. and (rarely) f, means 'wealth', being in origin doubtless connected with the root ra- 'give'. The stem appears as ray- before vowels and ra- before

consonants. The forms occurring are: Sing. A. rdm. I. rayd. D. raye. Ab. rayas. G. rdyds^. — PI. N. r&yas. A. rayds^. G. rdydm.

a. The inflexion of ray- is supplemented by 7-ayi-, m. f., from which occur the addi- tional cases siog. N. rayis, A. rayini, I. rayyd and rayind'^ pi. I. rayibhis, G. rayTnam.

b. There are three forms which seem to be irregular compounds of ray- : sing. G. rdhad-rayas ('increasing wealth') N. of a man, D. brhdd-raye 'having much wealth', and du. N. said-rd 'having a hundred goods'. In the first two forms the vowel of the stem has probably been shortened metrically'; in the third form, the stem as it appears before consonants has been used.

b. Stems in -av (-0) and -av {-au).

363. There are two stems in -a?', viz. gdv- m. 'bull', {. 'cow', and dydv- m. f. 'heaven', 'day'. Both distinguish strong forms, in which the vowel is lengthened; both take -s in the N. sing, before which the end of the stem assumes the form of -au. Both show various irregularities in their inflexion.

1 On the Sandhi of these accusatives see 7 The G. a few times has the irregular Lanman 429. accent rdyas. 2 Once with m. ending mdifn (x. 352). 8 Accented thus 22 times as a weak case 3 With n before the ending -dm as in the in the RV., and four times rdyas as a strong vowel declension, and accent shifted to the case (also VS. 11. 24). The SV. 1. 4.1. 41 has ending as in the i- and u- declension when the A. pi. rds in the variant adhad rah for those vowels are accented. adhatta of RV. via. 96' 3. 4 See Whitney's note on AV. v. 24^. 9 According to BR. and Grassmann, they 5 Also udgatj-ndm (TS. III. 2. 9') and bhra- are formed from the stems i^hdd-ri- and trndm (TS. II. 6. 6=). See Benfey, Vedica, rdhdd-ri-. Cp. Lanman 431. p. 1—38; IS. 13, loi; Lanman 430. 6 Except the isolated dyavT occurring once as V. du. of dydv- 'heaven'. VI. Declension. Nouns. Stems in Semivowels. 247

The inflexion of gav-, which is almost complete (the only forms not

represented being the weak cases of the dual) is as follows:

Sing. N. gdus. A. gdm. I. gdva. D. gave. Ab. gos, G. gos.

L. gdvi. — Du. N. A. gava and gavau. — PI. N. gavas. A. gas. I. gobhis. D. gobhyas. G. gdvam and gjnam. L, gosii. V. gavas. a. Three of these forms, gam, gas, gos must, in the RV., be read as dissyllables in a few instances, though this is doubtful in the case of ,^ds^. b. The normal G. pi. gdvdm, which is by far the commoner, occurring 55 times in the RV., is found only 3 times at the end of a Pada (which in two of these instances ends iambically); the irregular G. gojtam^, occurring 20 times in the RV., is found at the end of a Pada only. The use of the latter form thus seems to have arisen from metrical exigencies. c. It is to be noted that from tl^e point of view of accentuation the stem is not treated as a monosyllable, since the Udatta never shifts to the ending in weak cases. d. There are three compounds formed from this stem: d-gos^ G. sing. m. 'having no cows'; pfsni-gavas'^ N. pi. m. 'having dappled cows'; rusad-gavi L. sing. f. 'having bright cows'. 364. The strong form of dydv- (in which the y has often to be read as /) is dydv-, which appears as dydu- before the -s of the N., and with loss of the final u, in the A. sing, dydm 5. The normal stem dydv- appears in weak, cases only, in the contracted Ab. G. dyos^ and the L. dydvi; it is otherwise entirely displaced by the Samprasarana form div- (from which the

accent shifts to the ending in weak cases) before vowels and dyi'i- before consonants. The weak grade stem div- has not only entirely ousted dydv- from the I. D. sing., and largely from the Ab. G. L. sing., but has even encroached on the strong forms: divam occurring (21 times) beside dydm (79 times), and divas (once) beside dyavas (22 times) in the N. pi. Similarly dyu-^ has displaced dydv- in the weak plural forms : A. dyftn (for *dydvas) and I. dyi'ibhis (for *dyo-bhis). The inflexion of dyav- is less complete than that of gdv-, the D. Ab. G. L. pi. being wanting as well as all the weak cases of the dual. The forms occurring are the following:

Sing. N. dydus. A. dydm; divam. I. divA. D. dive. Ab. dyos; divds^.

G. dyjs; divds'^. IL. dydvi; divi^°. V. dydus and dydus^"^. — Du. N. A. V. dydva^^; dyavT^^. — PI. N. V. dyavas; divas'^^ (once). A. m. dydn; f. divas'^^

(twice). I. m. dyubhis^^.

a. The A. dyam seems to require dissyllabic pronunciation in a few instances. The form dydus occurs once (l. 718) as an Ab. instead of dyos. The form divam doubtless made its way into the A. sing, owing to the influence of the very fre- quent weak cases divas etc., which taken together occur more than 350 times in the RV.

I See Lanman 431 (bottom). The form 9 In the RV. dyos occurs 4 times as G., gavas is actually used for the A, in Kh. divds I So times. 10 II. 6'5. dydvi occurs 12 times, divi 118 times i Formed on the analogy of the vowel in the RV. declension. 11 dyaus, that is, diaus occurs only once 3 This might be formed from the reduced and is to be read as a dissyllable. stem a-gu: 12 In the G. du. of the Dvandva divds- 4 There is also from the reduced stem prihivyos, the G. sing, lakes the place of gu- the A. sing. m. pfsni-gum, as the N. of the G. du., which would be divos. a man. 13 The neuter form used once for the m. ^ _ , 5 For *dya[u]m like gam for *gd[u\m. 14 Also twice in AV. 6 Like gh for *gavas. 15 Also 3 or 4 times in AV. 16 7 Based on ditf-. dytin and dyuhhis occur only in the RV. 8 In the RV. dyos occurs only twice as or in verses borrowed from the RV. Ab., divas 50 times. 248 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

b. Starting from div-as etc. a transition stem diva- according to the a- declension came into being. From tliis occur the forms diva-m 'heaven' and dive-dive 'every day', and in compounds tri-divd-m (AV.) 'third heaven', iri-divc, su-diva-7n (AV.) 'bright day'. c. It is to be noted that the accentuation of forms from div- foUov^fs the rule of monosyllables, while that of forms from dyav- and dyii-, as may be inferred from dyavi and dyubhis, does not, being the same as that of gav-. d. The follo^ving case-forms of compounds of rf/di'- occur: '€\n%.'^. pra-dyaus [^.) 'highest heaven', I. pra-divS, Ab. pra-divas, Y,. pra-divi; ahar-divi 'day by day'; du. N. A. p]-thivt-dyava 'earth and heaven', dydva-ks dnia, dydvd-pfthivl, dydva-bhiimi 'heaven and earth', vr^ti-dydva, 'having a raining sky'; pi. N. vrsti-dyavas, su-divas.

365. There are two stems in -av, viz. nav- {ndu-) f. 'ship', and glav- {gldu-)

m. or f. 'lump'. The inflexion is very incomplete, as no dual and only two plural forms are found; but as far as can be judged from the forms occurring

it is quite regular, the accentuation being that of monosyllabic stems. The forms of ndv- are:

Sing. N. ndiis. A. nsvam, su-ndvam 'good ship' (VS. xxi. 7). I. navd'^. G. navas. L. navi. — PI. N. nAvas. I. ndubhis.

From glAv- occur only the two forms N. sing, glaus (AV.) and I. pi. glaubhis (VS. xxv. 8) ^ B. Vowel stems.

366. The vowel declension comprises stems ending in a, i, zi, both long and short. These differ considerably in their inflexion according as they are radical or derivative. The radical stems, which virtually all end in the long

vowels a, z, u^, axe aUied to the consonant declension in taking the normal

endings; but they add -s in the N. sing. m. f. The derivative stems, which end in both long and short vowels, modify the normal endings considerably;

though they for the most part add -s in the N. sing. m. f , those in -a and -i

regularly drop it.

I. a. Stems in radical -a.

367. Radical ei- stems are frequent in the RV., but become less common in the later Sarnhitas where they often shorten the final vowel to a and are then inflected like derivative a-stems. The great majority of the forms occurring are nominatives or accusatives, other cases being rare and some not occurring at all. In the RV. the N. sing, forms with a occur ten times oftener than those with the shortened vowel a, and five times oftener than the forms with a in the AV. On the other hand, the AV. has only slightly more forms with a than with a, and no m. forms at all from a- stems in the obhque cases*. This tendency to give up the a forms in the later Samhitas may be illustrated by the fact that the forms of the RV. N. sing, carsani- prd-s 'blessing men', nama-dhd-s 'name-giver', prathama-jd-s 'first-born', V. soma- pa-s 'soma- drinker', are replaced in the AV. by carsmii-prd-s, nama-dhd-s, prathama-jd-s^, V. soma-pa respectively. This declension includes stems formed from about thirty roots. Of these, four appear as monosyllables in the m.: jd- 'child', /ri- 'protector', da- 'giver',

sthd- 'standing'; and seven in the f : ksd-^ 'abode', -khd- 'well', gnd-'' 'divine

1 There is also the transition form accord- consonant declension by almost always

ing to the d- declension I. sing, ndvayd, the adding the root determinative -t. accentuation of which indicates that it 4 See Lanman 435'.

started from nava. 5 The form prathama-jas, however, also 2 The N. pi. gldvas also occurs in the occurs in the AV. AB. 6 From ksd- = ksi- 'dwell', 'rule'. 3 These, however, by being shortened 7 Perhaps formed with suffixal d from a often appear secondarily as a, i, it, when root *gan- and sometimes to be pronounced they are inflected like derivative stems. as a dissyllable [gazta-], but inflected as if Radical l u and j- stems have joined the a radical stem. ",

VI. Declension. Nouns. Vowel Stems. 249

woman', jd- 'child', jyd- 'bowstring', ma- 'measure', vrd- ' 'troop'; the rest appear 3 .only at the end of compounds: -/jr(?-^ 'doing', -Z'r«'- 'scattering', -^j(?- 'ruling', -/^y^^- 'digging', -/J^ji- 'seeing', -^«- 'going', -^(?- 'singing', ^(i-'born', ^/m- 'knowing', -jyd- 'power',_ -ta- 'stretching', -da- 'giving', -drd- 'sleeping', -dhd- 'putting', -dhd- 'sucking', -/

These stems are inflected in the m. and f. only. There are no distinctively n. forms ^, as the stem shortens the radical vowel to a, in that gender and is consequently inflected according to the derivative a-declension.

a. ^ Three anomalously formed m. derivative stems in -a follow the analogy of the radical a-stems. i. From the adverb td-tha 'thus' is formed the N. sing, a-tatha-s 'not saying "yes"'. 2. usdna-, N. of a seer, forms its A. iisdnam and D. tddnel; the N. sing,

being irregularly formed without -s, has the appearance of a N. sing. f. from a derivative asteni8. 3. Tlie strong stem of pathi- 'path' is in the RV. pdniha- only: N. sing. pdntha-s (+ AV.)^ A. pdniha-vi {+ AV.), N. pi. pdnthas. The AV. also uses the stem pdnthan-, from virhich it forms N. sing, pdiithd (once), A. fdnthanam (once), and N. pi. pdnthanas. Though the stem pdnthan- never occurs in the RV., the evidence of the Avesta points to its having been in use beside pdniAa- in the Indo-Iranian period 9. The A. pdniMmi°, as a contraction oi pdnlkdnam, may have been the starting point of the N. sing, pdniha-s. Inflexion. 368. The forms occurring in the oblique cases are so rare that some endings, such as those of the L. sing., G. L. du. and G. pi. are not represented

at all. The m. always takes -s in the N. sing., but the f. often drops it, doubt-

less owing to the influence of the f. of derivative ^-sterns. Excepting the few forms occurring in the D. and G. sing. ", the N. sing, with -s is the only case

in which the inflexion of the radical stems can be distinguished in the f. from that of the derivative a-stems in form '3. The forms actually occurring would, if made from jd- 'offspring', be the following:

Sing. N. m. f jd-s^ f. also jd. A. m. f. jd-m. I. I. j-d. D. m. f. j-6. G. m. j-ds. V. m. jd-s.

Du. N. A. V. m. jd, jdu. I. jd-bhyam '"*.

PI. N. m. I. jds. A. f jds. I. m. f jd-bhis. D. f. jd-bhyas. Ab. lii. jd-bhyas. L. £ jd-su. ' The forms actually occurring are the following: Sing. N. m.yi-j-'S 'child', dd-s'^^ 'giver', stkA-s 'standing'. — dadhi-krd-s''T

1 From an extended form of the root vr- ition forms L. sing, dpaydydm, N. of a river, 'surround'. and puro-dhdydm (AV.). 2 An extension with -a of kr- 'do'. 12 The N. sing, with -s is about as common 3 An extension with -a of kf- 'scatter'. as that without it in the RV., the latter 4 The root mid- 'soften' occurs in the occurring in late hymns; in the AV. the modified form of -mnd- in^ carma-mnd- former are less common. 'tanner'. 13 But on etymological grounds other cases 5 Four of these roots, khd-, gd-, jd-, sd-, may commonly be distinguished as belonging are collateral forms of others ending in a to either one group or the other; thus nasal, khan-, gam-, jan-, san-; cp. Delbruck, A. f. d-gopdm 'having no herdsman' must be Verbum, p. 92 f., Lanman 442. regarded as a radical a-form, because the 6 Five N. sing. m. forms with -s are found m. is almost without exception go-pd-m, and in agreement with n. substantives. not as a derivative f. from go-pd-. 7 There is also a L. sing, usdne, which is 14 Contrary to the rule generally applicable formed as if from an a-stem. to monosyllable stems, the accent remains 8 The starting-point of this may have on the radical syllable throughout. been usdndm as a contracted A. for usdnasam. 15 Lanman 443 thinks gas in x. 1278 is a 9 See Lanman 441. N. sing, 'singer' {gd- 'sing'), but it is probably 10 The analogy of pathi- is followed by the A. pi. of go- 'cow'. mathi- 'churning-stick', which once has the 16 Also dha-s in TS. II. 6. 44. A. form mdntha-m. 17 These compounds are arranged accord- I' There are otherwise only the f. trans- ing to the alphabetical order of the roots. 250 I. Alt.gemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

N. of a divine horse. — rhhu-ksh-s 'lord of the Rbhus'. — Hsa-JzhA-s 'digging

up lotus fibres'. — agre-gA-s (VS.xxvii. 31 ; Kh. v. 6') 'going before', an-a-gA-s 'not coming', furo-ga-s 'leader', samana-gA-s 'going to the assembly'. — sama- gA-s 'singing chants'. — adri-jA-s 'produced from stones', apsu-jA-s 'born in

the waters', ab-jA-s 'born in water', abhra-jA-s {KSl!) 'born from clouds', rta-jA-s 'truly born', rte-ja-s 'produced at the rite', go-jA-s 'born from the cow', tapo^A-s (VS. xxxvii. 16) 'born from heat', divi-jA-s 'born in the sky', deva-jA-s 'god- born', dvi-jA-s 'twice-born', naksatra-jA-s (AV.) 'star-born', nabho-jA-s 'produced from vapour', nava-jA-s 'newly born', furd-jA-s 'primeval', purva-jA-s 'born before', prathama'jA-s 'first-born', bahu-pra-jA-s 'having numerous progeny', manusya-jA-s 'born of men', vane-jA-s 'born in woods', vata-jA-s (AV.) 'arisen from wind', sana-jA-s 'born long ago', saha-jA-s 'born together', saho-jA-s 'pro- duced by strength', supra-ja-s 'having good offspring', hiranya-ja-s (AV.) 'sprung from gold'. — rta-jna-s 'knowing the sacred law'. — parama-jyA-s 'holding supreme power'. — apana-da-s (TS. VS.) 'giving the downward air', atma-dA-s 'granting breath', ayur-da-s (TS. VS ) 'granting long life', asir-da-s (VS.xviii. 56) 'fulfilling a wish', ojo-da-s 'granting power', go-dA-s 'giving kine', caksur-dA-s (TS.iv.6.i5) 'giving sight', dravino-dA-s 'giving wealth', dhana-dA-s 'giving booty', prana-dA-s (VS. TS.) 'life-giving', bala-dA-s 'giving power', bhiiri- dA-s 'giving much', rastra-dA-s (VS.x. 2) 'giving dominion', varivo-da-s (VS. TS.) 'giving space', varco-dA-s (VS. TS.) 'giving vigour', vasu-da-s (AV.) 'giving wealth', vyana-dA-s (VS. TS.) 'giving breath', sahasra-da-s 'giving a thousand', saho-dA-s 'giving strength', svasti-dA-s 'giving happiness', havir-da-s (AV.) 'giving oblations', hiranya-dA-s 'yielding gold'. — abhi-dhA-s (VS. xxii. 3) 'surrounding', Mye-dhA-s 'containing much', cano-dJiA-s (VS. viii. 7) 'gracious', dJiama-dhs-s 'founder of dwellings', dhiyam-dhA-s 'devout', nama-dha-s 'name- giving', bhaga-dha-s (TS. iv. 6. 3^) 'paying what is due', ratna-dhA-s 'pro- curing wealth', reto-dha-s 'impregnating', vayo-dhA-s 'bestowing strength', varco-dha-s (AV.) 'granting vigour', visvd-d/ia-s (VS. 1.2) 'all-preserving', sarva- dha-s 'all-refreshing'. — adhi-pA-s 'ruler', apana-pA-s (VS. xx. 34) 'protecting the downward breath', abhisasti-pA-s 'defending from imprecations', abhisti- pA-s'^ 'protecting with assistance', aprita-pA-s (VS. viii. 57) 'guarding when gladdened', ayus-pA-s (VS. xxii. i) 'life-protector', rta-pA-s 'guarding divine order'; go-pA-s 'herdsman', d-gopa-s 'lacking a cowherd', devd-gopa-s 'having the gods for guardians', su-gopA-s 'good protector', soma-gopa-s 'keeper of

Soma'; caksus-pa-s' (VS. 11. 6) 'protecting the eyesight', tanu-pA-s 'protecting the person', nidhi-pa-s (AV. VS.) 'guardian of treasure', paras-pA-s ^ 'protecting afar', pasu-pA-s 'keeper of herds', prana-pA-s (VS. xx. 34) 'guardian of breath', vrata-pa-s 'observing ordinances', sevadhi-pA-s 'guarding treasure', stipA-s 'protecting dependents', svapA-s^ (AV.) 'protector of his own'. — dn-riu- pas 'not drinking in time', rtu-pA-s 'drmking at the right season', purva-pA-s 'drinking first', suta-pA-s 'drinking the Soma-juice', soma-pA-s 'drinking Soma', hari-pA-s 'drinking the yellow (Soma)'. — a?itariksa-prA-s 'traversing the air', kratu-prA-s 'granting power', carsani-prA-s 'satisfying men', rodasi-prA-s'^ 'filling heaven and earth'. — rna-yA-s 'exacting obligations', eva-yA-s 'going quickly', tura-yA-s 'going swiftly', deva-ya-s 'going to the gods'. — ap-sA-s 'giving water', asva-sA-s 'giving horses', dhana-sA-s "winning wealth', vaja-sA-s 'winning booty', sata-si-s 'gaining a hundred', sahasra-sA-s 'gaining a thousand'; go-sA-s 'acquiring cattle', nr-sA-s 'procuring men', su-sA-s 'gaining

I In abhistipasi (11. 20=), where the Pada 3 The Pada text of AV. lu. 31 divides

text reads abhisti-fa asi. See Lanman 443 sva-pdh ; but the correct division may be (bottom). su-apah; see WHrrNEV's note. 2 On the Sandhi in this compound cp. c. ^~^ox rodasi-prd-s. 78 \ VI. Declension. Nouns. Vowel Stems. 251

easily', jz/ar-j-fi-j- 'winning light'. — ddhara-stha-s^ (Kh. n. 8^ 'subordinate', rta-sthii-s (AV.) 'standing right', rocana-sth&s 'abiding in light', sUpa-stha-s^ (VS. XXL 60; TS. L2. 2 3) 'forming a good lap'; ahge-sthA-s (AV.) 'situated in a member of the body', adhvare-sthd-s 'standing at the sacrifice', giri-stha-s 'mountain-dwelling', ni-stha-s 'excelling', piiru-ni-sthcl-s 'excelling among many', bhuvane-stha-s'^ (AV.) 'being in the world', mamhane-sthA-s 'X^oxaS: , madhyame- sthA-s (AV.yS. TS.) 'standing in the middle', rathe-stha-s 'standing on a car', vandane-stha-s 'mindful of praises', vandhure-sthA-s 'standing on the car-seat', savya-stha-s'^ (AV.), hari-stha-s 'borne by bay horses'. — ghrta-sna-s 'sprinkling ghee'. — Also the abnormal forms d-tatha-s 'not saying "yes" ', pdntha-s 'path'. ' f. /5j^-j 'abode', gnA-s 'divine woman', vra-s^ (l 124^) 'troop'. — rtapA-s, rte-jA-s, kula-pA-s (AV.) 'chief of a family', go-dJiA-s^ 'sinew', go-pd-s (AV.) 'female guardian', go-sa-s, divi-fd-s, divo-jA-s 'born from heaven', vane-jA-s, vayo-dhA-s (AV.), vasu-dA-s (AV.), sata-sa-s, samana-gA-s, sahasra-sA-s t. — Without -s in the Pada but with hiatus in the Sainhita^: jya 'bowstring';

ni-drA 'sleep', pra-pA 'place for watering', srad-dhA 'faith', sva-dhA'^ 'self- power'; un-mA (TS.) 'measure of height', prati-ma (TS.) 'counter-measure', pra-mA (TS.) 'fore-measure', vi-ma (TS.) 'through-measure' '°- — Without -5 as in the derivative a- declension: jA {KY.), mA (TS. iv. 3. 7') 'measure'. — dpa-ga^^ (AV.) 'going away', abhi-bhA 'apparition', d-samjna (AV.) 'discord', upa-jA (AV.) 'distant posterity', go-d/iA'^, dur-gA (AV.) 'hard to go upon', devd- gopa, dyu-ksA 'heavenly', pra-jA 'offspring', /ra/i-wi 'image', pra-pA(KY.m.^o^), pra-mA 'measure', madhu-dka'^i 'dispensing sweetness', s'rad-d/iA{KN.), sana-jA, svd-gopa 'guarding oneself, sva-dhA. n. With -s and agreeing with n. substantives: sthA-s 'stationary'; indra- jA-s (AV.) 'descended from Indra', saia-sA-s, su-pra-yA-s 'pleasant to tread on', soma-jA-s^^ (AV.) 'Soma-born'. A. va..jAm, trAm 'protector', sthAm. — dadhi-kram, rudhi-krAm N. of a demon. — tamo-gam 'roaming in the darkness', tava-gAm 'moving mightily', svasti-gAm 'leading to prosperity'. — sama-gAm, — agra-jAm 'first-born', ab-jAm, nabho- jAm, pura-jAm, prathama-jAm, bharesu-jam 'existing in battles'. — dn-asiia-dam 'not giving horses', dn-anr-ddm 'not giving a blessing', a-bhiksa-dAin'^^ 'giving without being asked', upa-dAm (VS. xxx. 9) 'giving a present', jani-dAm 'giving a wife', dravino-dAm, dhana-dAm, rabho-dAm 'bestowing strength', vasu-dAm, sako-dAm, havir-dAm (AV.). — ratna-dkAm {hY.,YQ.iv. 2^), reto-dhAm (VS. viilio), vayo-dMm, varivo-dhAm 'granting space', varco-dhAm (VS.iv. 11), vipo- dhAm 'inspiring'. — abhisasti-pAm, go-pam, tanii-pAm, ni-sikta-pAm 'protecting the infused (semen)', vrata-pAm. — ahjas-pAm 'drinking instantly', srta-pAm 'drinking boiled milk', soma-pAm. — antariksa-prAm, kaksya-prAm 'filling out the girth',

1 The Ms. reads adhira-stha nmasat. (l. 1655) i.-a&.svadhdmitd{\.T,\'^), where it must 2 That is, su-upa-sthd-s. be pronounced with hiatus. 3 While Kh. m. 222 has in the same verse "> All these four compounds ofmd- 'measure' bhfwiane-sthak (sic). occur in TS. IV.4.ll3; see TPr.x.13, IS. 13, 4 The Pada reads savya-sihdh; see APr. n. 104, note '. I' 95, and cp. Whitney's note on AV. vni. S^''. BR. would accentuate apa-gd; cp. Whit- 5 N. sing. Grassmann and Lanman, N. pi. ney's note on AV. \. 34^.

Roth and Sayana. 12 Probably i"»-(i'/5ir in X. 2811; cp. Lanman 6 The derivation is uncertain. 44S- .... 7 The above are the only N. sing. f. '3 Also marydda 'limit' if viaryd-dd, but forms written vifith -s in the Pada text. the derivation is doubtful. 8 It may therefore be assumed that the 14 These forms must be regarded as m. N. was formed with -s. used as n. Cp. the -as forms of -as stems used 9 Cp. RPr. IL 29. With regard to sva-dha, as n. (344). the Samhita text is inconsistent, writing it 15 According to the Pada text alhi-ksa-ddm contracted with a following vowel in svadhaslt ('destroying'). . . ;

252 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar. carsani-prdm, ratha-pram 'filling a car', rodasi-prdm '. — ap-ssm, urvara-sam 'granting fertile land', ksetra-sdm 'procuring land', dhana-sam, sada-snm 'always gaining', sahasra-sam; go-sim, svar-mm. — rocana-sthdm, sv-asa-stMm (VS. 11. 2) 'offering a good seat'; giri-stham, 7iare-stham 'serving for a man^ to stand on', ni-sthdm, karma-nisthdm 'diligent in religious acts', pathi-stham (AV.) 'being on the way', pathe-st/uim^^ 'standing in the way', pari-sthdm 'surrounding', parvate-sthdvi 'dwelling on the heights', barhi-sthdm t 'standing on the sacrificial grass', rathe-sthdm, rayi-sthdm (AV.) 'possessed of wealth', hari-sthdm. — Also the abnormal derivative forms pdntham, mdntkam 'churning-stick'. f. ksam, kham 'well', gndm, jam, jydm, vrdm. — d-gopam, antariksa- prd/n, ava-sdm 'liberation', dsva-sdm, upa-vdin (AV.) 'act of blowing upon', uru-sdm 'granting much', rta-jiidm, tiro-d/idm (AV.) 'concealment', dicr-dhdm 'disarrangement', dkana-sdm, pra-jdm, prati-dJidm (AV.) 'draught', prati- sthdm 'standpoint', pra-vdin (AV.) 'blowing forth', pra-hdm 'a.dva.nta.ge:', yaksmo- dhdm^ (AV.) 'maker of disease', vaja-sdm, srad-dMm, sabhdm^ 'assembly', su-prajdm, sva-jdm 'self-born', sva-dhdm, svar-sim.

I. f. t apa-dhd 'concealment', abhi-khyd 'splendour', a-sthd 'without standing' , asir-dd (VS.) 'fulfilment of a wish', prati-dhd, prati-sthd^, sva-dhd. D. m. de; kilala-pe 'drinking (the beverage called) kilala', dhiyam-dhe 'devout', pasu-se 'bestowing cattle', rdyas-posa-de (VS. v. i) 'granting increase of wealth', suci-pe 'drinking the clear (Soma)', subham-ye 'flying swiftly along', havir-de.

f. kse; srad-dhe'i. — Also the infinitives pi-a-khydi 'to see', vi-khydi 'to look about'; para-ddi 'to give up'; vayo-dhdi 'to strengthen'; prati-7ndt'° 'to imitate'; ava-ydi 'to go away', a-ydi 'to approach', upa-ydi 'to come near', pra-ydi 'to go forward; ava-sdi'^^ 'to rest'"- G. m. krsti-prds 'pervading the human race', pasu-sds'^i.

V. m. rta-pa-s (TS.iii. 2.8"), rtu-pa-s, puro-ga-s (TS.v. 1. 1 it), bhUri-da-s, sukra-puta-pa-s 'drinking bright and purified (Soma)', suci-pa-s, srotra-pa-s (VS. XX. 34) 'protecting the ear', suta-ps-s, soma-pa-s^'' Du. N. A. V. m. kaksya-prd, go-pa, gharmye-stJzd 'being in a house', chardis-pd 'protecting a house', jagat-pd 'protecting the living', tanu-pd, taptes-pd 'drinking warm beverage', dravino-dd '5, paras-pd, pura-jd, puru-tra 'protecting much', vaja-da 'bestowing vigour', Juci-pa, su-gopd, soma-pd, sti-pd. — With -au: d-krau'^^ 'inactive', a-doma-dhdu (AV.) 'not causing inconvenience', adhva- gdu 'travelling', go-pdv, go-pau, madhu-pau 'drinking Soma', rayi-ddu 'bestowing wealth', suta-pau^T

1 For rodasl-prctvi^ 12 See below, the Dative Infinitive, 584. 2 The D. case-form of ;//- 'man' being 13 The form jas- in Jas-pati- {l. 1 858) 'lord retained in the compound. of the family' is probably a f. G. of jd- 3 The L. of the sXtra paiha- ^^ pathi- being and gnas probably G. of gna- in gnas-paii- retained in the compound. 'husband of a divine woman'. There are 4 barhi- for bayhis-; see 62. also the transition forms jydyas and p'a- 5 With the N. case-form retained in the Jdyds. compound; see Whitney's note onAV.lx.S'. '4 There are also in the f. the transition 6 The derivation of this word is uncertain. forms gaiige, srad-dhe, iiro-dhe (AV.) 'conceal- 7 Used adverbially = 'at once'. ment'. 8 Cp. Lanman 4471. There are also the 15 The Pada text reads dravino^dau. transition forms jyaya, prajaya. ^^ Some of these duals in -au may be 9 Also the transition form prajayai. formed from radical stems with shortened 10 The infinitive prati-mi is probably a a; cp. Lanman 450' locative. '7 There are also the f. transition forms '• These dative infinitives are formed by rdu-pe 'drinking what is sweet', piirva-jc combining the full root with the ending -e, 'born before', sv-dsa-slhe 'sitting on a good while in the ordinary datives the radical a seat'. is dropped before the ending. .

VI. Declension. Nouns. Vowel Stems. 253

I. Only four compounds of -/^z in 2. ^ TS.in. lo': kratu-pabhyam 'watching one's intentions', caksus-pabhyam, vak-pAbhyam 'protecting speech', irotra- pdbhyUm ^.

PI. N. V. m. rbhu-ksUs. — agni-jds (AV.) 'fire-born', d-pra-jas 'childless', apsu-jas {KS[), osadhi-jas (AV.) 'born among herbs', khala-jds {KSl) 'produced on a threshing-floor', deva-jAs, purd-jAs, prat/iatna-Jas, pravate-jAs 'grown in an airy place', raglm-jAs 'produced from a racer', saka-dhuma-jAs (AV.) 'produced from cow-dung',^ su-pra-jAs, sva-jAs. — rta-jnAs, rta-Jnas, pada-jnAs 'knowing the track'. — asva-dAs 'giving horses', asir-dAs {ySi.Nm..^), go-dAs, dravino-dAs, dhana-dds, vara-dds (AV.) 'granting boons', vastra-dAs and vaso-dAs 'giving garments', hiranya-dds. — jani-dhAs'- (x.295), dhiyam-dhAs, ratna-dhas, reto- dh&s, vayo-dhAs. — payo-dhas 'sucking milk'. — kula-pAs 'heads of the fa- mily'; go-pas, indra-gopas 'protected by Indra', devd-gopas, vdyu-gopas 'pro- tected by Wind', su-gopAs; tanu-pAs, pas'u-pAs, vrata-pAs. — agre-pds 'drinking first', anjas-pds, payas-pds 'drinking milk', mant/ii-pas^ (VS. vn. 17) 'drinking the stirred Soma', soma-pds, sJma-pis (AV.), havis-pds 'drinking offerings'. — carma-mnds'' 'tanners'. — jma-yds 'going on the earth'. — dhana-sds, sadd-sds, sahasra-sds. — prthivi-sihds^ 'standing on the earth', rathe-sthds^ , harmye- sthds^ 'dwelling in the house'. — ghrta-snds 'sprinkling ghee'. — Also the abnormal derivative pdnthas''. f. gnds, vrds. — d-gopds, ava-stJiAs 'female organs', dki-gopas 'guarded by

the dragon', a-tas 'iiaxats' , rta-jnAs {AN.), gin-jds 'mounta,m-horn', jarani-prds', devd-gopds, deva-yds, pada-jfids (AV.), pra-jds, praihama-jds, pra-yas 'advance', manusya-jds (AV.), vaksane-st/ids 'being in Agni'(?), vdja-dds, hisma-dds 'bestowing strength', su-gopds, soma-pds, svayain-jds^ 'self-born'.

A. m. There is no certain example: vane-jds (x. 79^) is possibly one 9. f. ksds, gnds, jds. — dn-agni-trds 'not maintaining the sacred fire', anu- sthds 'following in succession', asva-dds, deva-yds, pari-jds (AV.) 'places of origin', pari-sthds 'impediments', pra-jds, manusya-jas, vi-sthds 'positions', sahd- gopds 'accompanied by herdsmen', su-gas 'easy to traverse', sva-dhds. I. m. agre-pdbhis. — f. gndbhis; rtic-pdbhis, ratna-dhdbhis, prajabhis, srad-dhdbhis, sva-dhdbhis.

D. f. pra-jdbhyas. — Ab. m. bhuri-ddbhyas'^° L. f. ksdsu, gnasu, jasu; d-tdsu'^^, pra-jdsu, sabhdsu.

I b. Stems in Radical -a. 369. These consist almost entirely of stems in radical a which has been shortened to a. With the exception of khd-'^^ 'aperture' they occur at the end of compounds only. They are: -ksd- 'dwelling', khd-, -gd- 'going', -gd- 'singing', ^^ -jd- 'born', -jya- 'bowstring', -i'a- 'stretching', -//-a- 'protecting', -afa- 'giving' "t, -dd- 'binding', -dM- 'putting', -pd- 'guarding', -pd- 'drinking', -prd- 'filling', -mnd-

1 In the L. du. there also occur the f. 8 There is also the f. transition form transition forms janghayos (AV.) and sva- ndva-gvas, dhayos, 9 Cp. Lanman 451*. 2 Of doubtful meaning. 1° In the G. occur the f. transition forms 3 The stem is maniAi-pd- ncccrding to BR. pra-Jndnafn (AV.) 'fore-knowing', vi-bhandm 4 From ym/d-: 'softening hides'. 'radiant'. 11 5 Pj^Aivi- ^ pj'thim-. Probably from td- = tan- 'stretch'. 6 With the L, ending retained in the first 12 The nominatives dra-s ^nAvrd-s'va.hN. member of ihe compound. XI. 73 (also nyd-s, 74) are of unknown meaning 7 The form panthAsas also occurs once. (see WmxNEY's note). It is doubtful whether the plurals dyii-ksasas 13 Cp. Gaebe in KZ. 23, 476, 480. and priya-sasas are to be regarded as formed '4 Perhaps also -dra- 'running' in krsna- from a- stems. Such plurals are probably drd-m (AV.). made from a- steins. 254 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

'thinking', -mla-'^ 'softening', -sd- 'winning', -sthd- 'standing'; also -grd-' 'swallow- ing', -gva-^ 'going', M-'* 'slaying'. These stems are inflected in the m. and n. only. This is the form assumed in the n. by all radical a-stems (367).

Inflexion.

370. The inflexion of the radical a-stems is identical with that of the derivative (2-stems (371). The forms which occur are the following: Sing. N. m. dyu-ksd-s 'dwelling in heaven'. — su-khd-s 'having a good (axle) hole'. — agre-gd-s 'going in front', asum-gd-s (AV.) 'swift-going', rju-gd-s (AV.) 'going straight on', patam-gd-s^ 'going by flight', vala-gd-s (AV.) 'hidden in a cave'*, sitivi-gd-s (AV.xi. 5'^) 'white-goer', su-gd-s 'easy to traverse'. — ddsa- gva-s 7 'going in tens', ndva-gva-s ' 'going in nines' ^. — a-jd-s 'unborn', adhri-ja-s 'irresistible', eka-jd-s (AV.) 'produced alone', jarayu-jd-s (AV.) 'viviparous', ni-jd-s (AV.) 'familiar' 9, prathama-jd-s (AV.) 'first-born', samudra-jd-s (AV.) 'sea-born', stamba-jd-s (AV.) 'shaggy' (?). — an-anu-dd-s 'not giving way', danu- dd-s 'dripping', daya-dd-s (AV.) 'receiving {a-da-) inheritance {daya-)\ prana-dd-s 'life-giving'. — nama-dhd-s (AV.) 'name-giver'. — akuti-prd-s (AV.) 'fulfilling wishes', kama-prd-s (AV.) 'fulfilling desire', carsani-prd-s (AV.) 'satisfying men', prthivi-prd-s (AV.) 'earth-filling''". — apnah-sthd-s 'possessor', go-sthd-s (AV.) 'cow-pen', puru-nisthd-s 'excelling among many'. — satru-hd-s (AV.) 'slaying enemies', sahasra-hd-s (AV.) 'slaying a thousand'. N. A. n. khdm 'aperture'. — a-doma-ddm (AV.) 'not causing inconvenience', antdri-ksam 'air', krsna-drdm (AV.) 'black runner' (?)'', tuvi-ksdm 'destroying many', dur-gdm 'impassable', dyu-ksdm, prathama-jdm (AV. VS.), vAta-gopam (AV.) 'guarded by the wind', vrtra-hdm 'slaying foes', satra-hdm 'always destroying', sadhd-stham 'abode', su-gdm , su-mndm 'benevolent'. A. m. atithi-gvdm ('to whom guests go') N. of a man, an-anu-ddm, arati-hdm (AV.) 'destroying adversity', as'va-pdm (VS. xxx. 11) 'groom', d-sva- gani (AV.) 'homeless', eka-Jdm, garbha-dhdm (VS. TS.) 'impregnator', grha- pdm (VS. xxx. 11) 'guardian of a house', go-pdm 'herdsman', carma-mndm (VS.) 'tanner', tri-sthdm 'having three seats', ddsa-gvam, dava-pdm (VS. xxx. 19) 'forest-fire guard', dyu-ksdm, patain-gdm, prathama-jdm (VS. xxxiv. 51), madhti- pdm 'honey-drinker', vana-pdm (VS. xxx. 19) 'wood-ranger', vala-gdm (AV.), vitta-dhdm (VS. xxx. 11) 'possessing wealth', su-khdm, su-gdm (AV.), hasti-pdm (VS. xxx. 11) 'elephant-keeper'. I. m. rathe-sthena 'standing on a car'. — n. antdri-ksena, rtd-jyena 'whose bowstring is truth', kama-prena, su-gena (AV.), su-mnena. D. m. atithi-gvdya, dyu-ksdya, fatam-gdya, ratke-sthdya'^'. — n. pards- paya (VS.) 'protecting from afar', su-mnSya. — Ab. m. rsya-ddt (x. 39**) 'pit for antelopes'. — n. antdri-ksai^^, dur-gat, sadhd-sthat.

1 In the form ai-mna- in carma-mna- 'tanner'. Bloomfield, AJPh. 17,422—27; cp. above 2 An extension of gr- 'swallow'; cp. -kra- p. 153 (mid.). and vra- among the radical a- stems. 8 The compound puro-gava-s 'leader' pos-

3 In its original form perhaps -gva-; a sibly = *puro-gvd-s ; but it is probably a reduced form -gu- appears in vanar-gii- 'forest- governing compound; cp. above, p. 176'. roaming' . 9 See Whitney's note, on AV. ill. 52. 10 4 A reduced form of han- 'slay'. Also fam-sa-s (v. 411) if it is N. sing, 5 See Bartholomae, BB. 15, 34 and cp. and not a G. oi pasu-sa-. BB. 18, 12. " Cp. Whitney's note on AV. ix. 7*. 6 The etymology and meaning are some- 12 svaj'dya (AV.) is analyzed by the Com- what doubtful; cp. IS. 4, 304. mentator as sva-jdya 'self-born', but is ex- 7 These two compounds as well as atiihi- plained by Whitney (AV. vi. 562) as 'con- gvd- and eta-gz'a-, are with more probability strictor' (from svaj- 'embrace'). derived from a reduced form of go- 'cow' by 13 See Lakman 337. VI. Declension. Nouns. Vowel Stems. 255

G. m. a-j'dsya, atithi-gvdsya^ . — n. antdri-ksasya, asthi-jdsya (AV.) 'pro- duced in the bones', tanu-jdsya (AV.) 'produced from the body', su-mndsya. L. m. ddsa-gve, ndva-gve, ratha-samg^ 'encounter of war-cars', sam-stM 'presence', sam-ge 'conflict', su-khe, svar-ge 'going to heaven'. — n. antdri-kse, khe. — karanja-he 'pernicious to the Karanja tree', dur-ge, bhayd-sthe 'perilous situation', sadhd-sthe, su-mne. — V. m. eka-ja, dyu-ksa, patam-ga (AV.), soma-pa (AV.) 'drinking Soma'. Du. N. A. m.^ ita-gva 'going swiftly'. — A. n. sadhd-sthe. PI. N. V. m. ajya-pas (VS. xxi. 40) 'drinking clarified butter', ha-gvas, tanu-jas (AV.), tapo-jds (AV.) 'produced by austerity', ddsa-gvas, ndva-gvas,

patam-gds, vala-gas (AV.), su-gas. — Also four forms with asas : ddsa-gvdsas, dyu-ksdsas, ndva-gvasas, priya-sAsas^ 'granting desired objects'. N. A. n. I. dmsa-tra 'armour protecting the shoulder', antdriksa, dur-gi, prathama-ja"' (AV.), sadhd-stha, su-ga, su-mtia. — 2. khsni. — antdri-ksani, ararin-dani^, dur-gini, sadhd-sthani, su-gani, sii-mndni. A. m. go-pin^ tapo-Jsn, dur-gin (AV.), patam-gan, purva-jAn (TS.) 'born before', srta-pAn 'drinking boiled milk', saha-jan (TS.) 'born at the same time', su-gAn, soma-pAn (AV.). I. m. I. tuvi-grebhis 'swallowing much', mitho-avadya-pebhis 'mutually averting calamities', ratna-dhebhis 'preserving wealth', sama-gibhis {SSf^ 'reciting chants', su-gebhis. — 2. A-tais^ 'frames', ddsa-gvais, ndvagvais, dhana-sdis 'winning wealth', ndva-gvais, patam-gdis, su-khdis. — n. i. madhu-pebhis,

su-gebhis, su-mnebhis. . — 2. su-mndis. D. m. purva-jebhyas. — G. m. dvi-janatn (AV.) 'twice-born', sakam- janam 'being born together'. — L. m. dravino-desu 'giving wealth', su-khesu. — n. dur-ge'su, sadhd-sthesu, su-ge'su, su-mne'su.

2 a. Derivative stems in -a. Benfey, VoUstandige Grammatik p. 293—317. — Whitney, Grammar 326—334 (p. 112 — 116). — Lanman, Noun-Inflection 329—354. 371. This is the most important of the declensions as it embraces more than one-half of all nominal stems. It is also the most irregular inasmuch as its ending diverge from the normal ones more than is elsewhere the case. This is the only declension in which the N. A. n. has an ending in the singular. Here the I. D. Ab. G. sing, are peculiar; and in the plural, the A., the G., one of the forms of the I. and of the N. A. n. do not take the normal endings. The final vowel of the stem is also modified before the endings with initial consonant in the du. and pi. Three of the pecuhar case-ending'^ of the sing. (I. Ab. G.) are borrowed from the pronominal declension, while in the pi. two of the case-endings (G. and N. A. n.) are due to the influence fof the stems in -n. This is the only declension in which the Ab. sing., as a /result of taking the pronominal ending, is distinguished from the G. As else- where in the vowel declension, the N. sing. m. here adds the ending -s throughout; but the V. sing, shows the bare stem unmodified. This declension includes

1 svajasya in AV. X. 41°- '5 is according to fanthdsas, occurring once beside the ordinary Whitney 'constrictor', not sva-jasya 'self- panikas formed from the anomalous deri- born'; cp. p. 254, note 12. vative a- stem. puK/Ad-, proves nothing regard- 2 Some of the m. duals given under the ing radical 5- stems. radical a-declension ought possibly to be 4 This is the reading of the Pada text, placed here. the Samhita having -jd r- (70 a). 3 There is no reason to suppose that any 5 A word of uncertain meaning. of these are plurals of a- stems, since the 6 Two other forms, atas and dtasu are first three appear as a- stems only and formed from the f. stem of this word, d-ta-, p-iya-sa- does not otherwise occur. The pi. which is probably a radical a- stem. :

256 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

m. and n. stems only, as the corresponding f. follows the derivative a-declension.

There is here no irregularity in the accent, which remains on the same syllable in every case except the V., where it of course shifts to the first.

Inflexion.

372. The inflexion of the n. differs from that of the m. in the N. sing, and the N. A. du. and pi. only. In the G. L. du. y is inserted between the final -a of the stem and the ending -os. The forms actually occurring, if made from priyd- 'dear', would be the following:

Sing. N. m. priya-s, n. priyd-m. A. priyii-m. I. priyena and priya. D. priyaya. Ab. priyat. G. priydsya. L. priyi. V. priya. Du. N. A. m. priyS and priydu, n. priye. V. m. priya and priyau. I. D. Ab. priyabhyam. G. L. (friyi^^. PI. N. m. priyAs and ffiySsas, n. priyd and priydni. A. m. priydn, n. priyd and priydni. I. priydis and priyShis. D. Ab. priyebhyas. G. pri- ydnSm. L. priyesu. V. priyas and priyasas. Owing to the enormous number of words belonging to this declension, only forms of commonest occurrence will be given below as examples under each case. Sing. N. m. This case is formed in the RV. by 1845 a-stems and occurs more than 10 000 times. The most frequent substantive is indras N. of a god, found more than 500 times; next in order come somas (220) N. of a plant, devds (203) 'god', mitrds (132) N. of a god, vdrunas (94) N. of a god. A. m. After the N. sing, m., the A. sing. m. is the commonest declensional form in the RV., being made from 1357 stems' and occurring nearly 7000 times. The nouns most frequently found in this case are indram (335), somam, (212), yajildm (183) 'sacrifice', vdjam (123) 'vigour', sttryam (90) 'sun', hdvam (88) 'invocation', vrtrdm (82) N. of a demon, stomam (77) 'praise'^. N. A. n. This is the only declension in which these cases take an ending. They here add -m, being thus identical in form with the A. sing. m.3. They are very frequently used, being formed from about 950 stems and occurring, taken together, more than 4000 times. Examples are: rtdm (70) 'sacred order', ghrtdm (47) 'clarified butter', paddni (46) 'step', rdtnam (44) 'wealth', sakhydm (43) 'friendship', drdvinain (41) 'wealth', satydm (40) 'truth'*. I. m. n. I. The usual form of this case ending in -ena, is very frequent, being formed from more than 300 stems nearly equally divided between m. and n. The commonest forms are; m. sAryena (37), indrena (34), vdjrena (33) 'thunderbolt', yajiiena (13). — n. ghrtena (31)5. a. The final vowel appears lengthened in about twenty-five forms: amftena (AV.) 'ambrosia', d-sivena 'malevolent', djyena 'melted butter', riena, kdvyena 'wisdom', ki'disena 'axe', peivena 'ram', tavisina 'strong', ddksinena 'right', ddivyena 'divine', bdkureiia 'bagpipe', bhadrena (AV.) 'excellent', mdrtyena 'mortal', mdruiena 'consisting of storm-gods', ravdthena 'roar', vdrunma, vithurena 'staggering', vi-ravena 'roar', viryena 'heroic power', vrjdiiend 'might', vrsabhena 'bull', sahasyena 'mighty', sdyakend 'missile', s&ryena, skdmbhanena

1 The pronominal forms tarn and yam mining whether a word is m. or n.; cp. occur 509 and 259 times respectively in Lanman 331 (middle). the RV. 4 On occasional elision of the final -m 2 On the occasional elision of the -m be- and subsequent contraction, see Lanman 331. fore iva and subsequent contraction, see 5 The final vowel is twice nasalized Lanman 331. ghaninam ikas (l. 334) and tijanenmli ekam 3 For this reason there is in some in- (I. no'). stances not sufficient evidence for deter- VI. Declension. Nouns. Vowel Stems. 257

'support' '. These forms regularly occur where the metre at the end of a Pada favours a long vowel; e. g. skdmbhanena jdnitn (in. 31'^), but kdmbhanena skdbhiyan (x. iii5); on the other hand, the long vowel appears to be used arbitrarily at the beginning of a Pada, though the short vowel here is much more frequent. Hence the a seems to be a survival and not to be due to metrical exigencies. 2. There are also more than a dozen forms made with the nominal ending -a. In the m. there are no quite certain examples beyond yajfia; possibly also krana 'acting', ghani 'club', dand 'gift'^, camasa^ 'cup'. The n. forms are kavitvA and kavitvand 'by wisdom', taranitvd 'by energy', mahitvd and mahitvand 'by greatness', ratna-dheya 'by distribution of wealth', rdthya 'belonging to a car', vTrya 'with heroism', sakhyd 'with friendship', sarva-rathd 'with the whole line of chariots', su-hdva 'with good invoca-

tion'*. — This ending is also preserved in a few instrumental adverbs:

and. 'hereby', uccd 'above', pakd 'behind', sdna 'from of old' 5. D. m. n. This case, which has the abnormal ending -aya, is of very frequent occurrence, being formed in the RV. from over 300 stems in the m. and from nearly 150 in the n. The commonest forms are: m. mdrdya (188), mddlya (76) 'exliilaration', devdya (26), mdrtyaya (25), mitrdya (23); Tarun-lya (23), ydjamanaya 'sacrificing', s'iryaya (11); n. stivitaya (34) 'wel- fare', sakhydya (29), tokdya (21) 'offspring', tdnayaya (18) 'line of de- scendants'*.

a. The normal form would have been for example *>'a/77fl7 =>'a7Ho'-i?'. This would in Sandhi have become *yajnay, which was ultimately extended with -a, owing to the frequent combination with a following a- in Sandhi (e. g, yajvay-a fi iox yajnay api), or with the shortened form of the preposition d^. Ab. m. n. These are the only nominal stems in which the Ab. is formally distinguished from the G. Instead of the normal ending -as, they take the -d which appears in the pronominal declension (e. g. md-d 'from me'), lengthening the -a of the stem before it?. This Ab. in -ad is formed in the RV. from over 200 stems, nearly equally divided between m. and n. occurrence Some of the n. fonns are used as adverbs. Forms of common are: m. samudrdt (15) 'sea', updsthat (9) 'lap', indrat (8); n. antdri-km^° (15) 'air'; durdt (19) 'from a distance', /a/ra/ (26). G. m. n. These are the only nominal stems in which the G. sing, does " which is not end in -x". Instead of the normal ending -as, they add -ya

iad-vasaymfi em (11. 14=) and 1 In all these forms the Pada text has the fore vowels: evd (l. 1 short final vowel a; see RPr. vut. 21 andcp. savayam 13'). tena, 7 normal ending -e is actually used APr. 111. 16. The pronominal forms The declension, c g. tdsmai yend, svend also appear, and always with the in the pronominal the other = tasma-e. short vowel in the Pada text ; on 8 Johansson, BB. 20, 96 ff. and Bar- hand, end is always ena in the Pada, while See Arische Forschungen 2,69-; 3,63. the unaccented end, beside ena, has the THOLOMAE, BB. 16, 136 and Brug- short vowel in the Pada. See Lanman 332 9 Cp. Johansson, Grundriss 588. (bottom). MANN, 2, 10 This is really a radical a- stem; see z See Lanman 334 (ntiddle). Pada above, 370. 3 Nasalized in camasam iva (x. 254), 11 In the G. sing, of stems in -ar and -tar, camasin. On these forms see Lanman 335. also appears the final r seems to represent original -s; 4 This form of the instrumental beside the see above 358, note on svasiir. a few times in the pronoun iva 12 The is never to be read as i; possibly usual ivdyd; it also occurs in a few compounds, y 'given by thee'; however about five times in the pronominal as tvd-datta- and tva-ddta- asyd. The final -a in two or three instances cp. Lanman 334 (middle). nicais; but undergoes protraction of a purely metrical 5 Perhaps also nwd 'below', cp. character: see Lanman 338-5. the I. of nyanc-. it may be ,. , , be- 6 Such D. forms are twice nasahzed 17 Indo-arischs Philologie. I. 4. 2s8 I. Aligemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar. otherwise found in the pronominal declension only. This case is very common, being formed in the RV. from over 500 stems in the m. and 175 in the n., occurring altogether over 3300 times'. Among the frequent forms ^ are: m. indrasya (123), sAryasya (93), somasya (88), devasya (60), yajhdsya (55), sutdsya (53) "pressed"; n. rtdsya (187), bhiivanasya (39) 'world', amftasya (35)^. L. m. n. This case is formed with the normal ending -/, which combines with the final -a of the stem to -e. It is formed in the RV. from 373 stems in the m., and over 300 in the n., occurring altogether about 2500 times. Among the frequent forms are: m. adhvare {6?>) 'sacrifice', sufe (^3), upd-sthe (49), 7ndde (48), dame (40) 'house', indre (33), yajiie (28), jdne (26) 'man', grhe (23) 'house'; n. viddthe (49) 'assembly', dgre (43) 'front', sddane (35) 'seat', pade (33), duroni (31) 'abode', mddhye 'middle' (29). V. m. n. In this case the bare stem (always accented on the first syllable) is employed. It is formed in the RV. from about 260 stems, occur- ring about 2500 times in the m.; but in the n. there is no undoubted example*. The AV. however has four or five n. vocatives. Among the commonest forms are: m. soma and soma (240), deva (132), sTira (94) 'hero', pavamdna (63) 'bright Soma', ptcru-huta (49) 'much invoked', varuna (45)1 mitra (35), yavistha (29) 'youngest', vrsabha (27) 'bull', iigra (23) 'mighty', amrta (i2)5; n. antariksa'^ (AV. vi. 1301), trdikakuda 'coming from the three- peaked (mountain)' and devanjana (AY. xix. 44*) 'divine ointment', fa/pa (AV. XII. 2*'') 'couch', visa (AV.iv.63) 'poison'?. Du. N. A. V. m. The ending of these cases in the RV. is ordinarily -a, much less frequently -au^. The former is taken by over 360 stems occurring about 1150 times, the latter by fewer than 90 stems occurring about 170 times. The ending -d is therefore more than seven times as common as -au. The rule is that -a appears before consonants 5, in pausa at the end of a Pada '", or within a Pada in coalescence with a following vowel; while -au " occurs in the older parts of the RV. only before vowels in the Sandhi form of -Sv, within a Pada. Examples of this rule are (d vam (i. 184'); rtJvrdhx (i. 47^''); dasrdf^^ (i. 116^°') for dasrd dt; mitragnim (i. 142) for \ mitrd agn'iin; but tdv'^^ apardvi (1.184'). Hiatus, when the metre requires two

1 The pronominal genitives asya and asya, times a various reading for -a of the RV. tdsya, ydsya, -jisvasya occur over 900 times In the independent Mantra portions of the in the RV. ; cp. Lanman 338. TS. there are at least seven forms in -a and 2 The commonest G. in -sya is tlie pro- fourteen in -au. In the Khilas -a is nearly nominal asya which (accented or unaccented) three times (32) as common as -au (12). occurs nearly 600 times in the RV. 9 -au occurs 23 times before a consonant 3 The final vowel is once nasalized at within a Pada; mostly in passages showing the end of a Pada in rtasyam (viii. ekam 89') ; signs of lateness. Cp. Lanman 576. 10 cp. RPr. II. 31. -au occurs 5 times at the end of an odd 4 Cp. Lanman 339. Pada before a, consonant; and 4 times as 5 There are two instances of the final -a -av at the end of an odd Pada before a being nasalized: ugram okas (vil. 254) and vowel. At the end of an even Pada -au puru-stutam eko (vili. 153- "); cp. RPr. XIV. 20. occurs 4 times. There is a purely metrical lengthening of 11 Lanman 343 enumerates the forms in the final vowel in vrsabha (viii. 4522. 38]^ -au which occur in the RV. 12 sima. (VIII. 41), and hariyojana (1. 61 16); At the end of an odd Pada -a is always perhaps also marya (I. h^); cp. Lanman written in the Samhita contracted with a 339- following vowel, but must always be read 6 Properly a radical a- stem. with hiatus. 7 By a syntactical peculiarity the N. indras 13 This is the normal use of -au, which in ca^ is some ten times coupled with a vocative 70 per cent of its occurrences is found as vayo, agne etc. .See Lanman 340 (topV -av before a vowel within a Pada; in the 8 In the AV. -au is more than twice as AV. the percentage is only 26.

common as in the RV. ; it is there some- VI. Declension. Nouns. Vowel Stems. 259

syllables, is thus removed' by the use ol-av, except when ic or u follows ^ In the latter case the Samhita text writes -a u-\ e. g. ubkd upamh'c (x. 83?), though the Pada always has -au u-. There are seven or eight passages of the RV. in which -a is written with hiatus before other vowels (a- i- o-Y, but those passages are all obscure or corrupt 5.

a. About a dozen forms, occurring altogether some 20 times, shorten the dual -a to a, mostly owing to the metre, but in a few instances against the metre. In the forms asura,^adUya, deva, dhrla-vrata, mitra, varuna, indra-varuna, mitra-varuna^ the Pada text has -a; but in paura (v. 74'*) and vlra (vi. 6310) the short vowel appears in the Pada also . A similar shortening occurs in the first member of the dual compounds indrci- v.iyu (l. 2') and mitra-rajdna (v. 623).

N. A. n. This form takes the normal ending -i^ which combines with the final -a of the stem to -e. It is made in the RV. from about 30 nominal stems. The vocative does not occur. Only seven of these n. forms are found more than once, ifhge 'two horns' being the commonest (5) I

^.'^^^ ^^^^''' 'night' is irregular in its ,j - " forming du. N. as a m. in the compound usasa-ndkta 'dawn and night', in agreement with which a f. adjective is used, owing doubtless to the predominance of 'Dawn', in the combination. Vnw. y)'^,yugiva nabhyeva 'like two yokes, like two naves', though analyzed by the Pada as yuga iva and nabhya iva, must be explained as regular n. forms yuge and ndbhye-\-va. I. D. Ab. Before the normal ending -bhyam^ which forms these cases, the final -a of the stems is lengthened, e. g. msatyabhyam. In the RV. this form is made from only about a dozen nominal stems in the m. and three in the n. The cases can of course only be distinguished exegetically. I. m, kdrnabhyam (AV.) 'ears', ddmsirabhyam (TS. AV.) 'teeth', daksma- savyabhyam (AV.) 'right and left', ddsa-sakhabhyam 'having ten fingers', mitra-vdricnabhyam'^° , yuktsbhyam 'yoked', vrihi-yavdbhyam (AV.) 'rice and barley', subhrabhyam 'shining', surya-candramdsabAyam (AV.) '° 'sun and moon', hdstabhyam 'hands', haryatdbhyjm 'desirable'. — n. rk-samdbhyim 'hymn and chant', srfigabhyam (AV.). D. m. tvesdbhyam 'violent', JidsatyabhyJm 'truthful', nicirdbhyJm 'attentive'. Ab. m. dinsabhyam 'shoulders', kdrnabhyxm. — n. parsvdbhyam (AV.) 'sides', prd-padabhyjm 'tips of the feet', mdta-snabhyam certain internal organs. G. L. These cases take the normal ending -os, between which and the stem y is inserted. In the RV. only eight nominal" forins occur with the genitive sense, and twelve with the locative sense. One form, dhvasrdyos (ix. 58^), seems to be used as an Ab. There are one or two others which anomalously drop the final -a of the stem, instead of inserting y, before the ending -os'^'^.

1 In two instances hiatus is removed by 7 The shortening of the du. -a at the end

' nasalization : ufdstham eka (i. 356) sxiAJdnam of odd Padas before r, occurring in four dsamd (vi. 67'). passages (11. 3?; vi. 682; -viii. 66"; x. 66^^) 2 There are 40 instances of this in the is due to Sandhi; see 70- RV.; see Lanman S7S- 8 These neuter duals are enumerated by 3 This is also the practice of the Brah- Lanman 343. manas; see Aufrecht, AB. 427; cp. Sarva- 9 To be read -bhiam in two or three nukramanl, ed. Macdonell, p. x. In the forms. AV. (as in the later language) -av u- is 10 In this compound only the second dual regularly written (except miiskd updvadhlt, takes the proper case-ending. XX. 1362). 11 There are also the pronominal forms 4 See Lanman 341*. G. L. m. ayos, ubhdyos, idyos, ydyos; Idyos also 5 Except VII. 70* where devd osadhXsu as G. n. (Pada devau) is written, 0- being treated like 12 Also the pronominal forms av-6s, en-bs, U-, perhaps owing to its labial character. y-os. Cp. Lanman 344. 6 See KPr. iv. 39, 40. 1; ;

26o I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

The forms occurring are: G. m. indra-variinayos, Tsanayos 'ruling', devdyos, mitrdyos, mitra-vdrunayos, yaindyos 'twins', vdrunayos, vaikarnayos 'descendants of Vikarna'. — n. pasy-hs (for *pasyci-y-os) 'pressing stones', piirixn-y-os'^ (for *purand-y-os) 'ancient'. L. m. dmsayos, divayos, upakdyos 'closely connected', kdrnayos (AV.), jdmbhayos (TS. iv. i. lo^) 'jaws', iuvi-jatdyos 'of powerful nature', ddmstrayos (Av.), naddyos 'roarers', mitrdyos, muskdyos 'testicles', vdrunayos, vdhisjhayos 'drawing best', vt-vratayos 'refractory', s.thurdyos 'strong', hdstayos. PI. N. V. m. Here there are two forms. In the more common form the normal ending -as coalesces with the final of the stem to -as, e. g. devds. The less common form appears to be made by adding the normal ending

-as over again ^, e. g. devds-as. The form in -as is about twice as frequent in the RV. as that in -asas"-', the former being made from 808 stems, the latter from 403. In the original parts of the AV. -as is 24 times as frequent as -asas, the former occurring 1366 times, the latter only 57 times'*. Both forms frequently occur side by side, the choice of the one or the other being often no doubt determined simply by the metre; e. g. brhda vadema viddthe suvirah (11. i '*) 'abounding in heroes we would speak aloud in the assembly', but suvtraso viddtham a vadema (11. 12 '5) 'abounding in h;roes we would speak to the assembly'. Examples of the most frequent forms made with the two endings are: I. devdsas {S16), Jdnasas {^i), s6masas{^i), sntasas {2()), adifydsas{2^) 'Adityas', yaj/uyasas {21) 'holy', amrtjsas {11). — 2. de'vls and devas (311), somas {^2), adityas (39), siitds (27), jdnas (24), amftas (22), yajhlyas (10). N. A. n.5 Here, as in the N. m. there are t%vo forms, a shorter and a longer, the former being the older and original, as well as the more fre-

quent one. The older form is made not by adding the normal ending -/, but by lengthening the final -a of the stem, e. g. havya 'oblations'*. The later form ends in -ani and is doubtless due to transitions from the stems in -an^ which form the n. pi. N. A. with both -a and -ani, e. g. ndma and namani. The form in -a is in the RV. made from 394 stems, that in -ani from 280, the proportion of the occurrences of the former being roughly

three to every two of the latter. The proportion in the AV. is almost exactly reversed, the form in -a being there made from 102 stems, that in -ani from 158^. The two forms are so common side by side that when two n. plurals occur in the same Pada, the one generally ends in -ani and the other in -S*; e. g. ya te bhimdni dyitdka (ix. 6i3°) 'thy terrible weapons'. This phenomenon

1 With y inserted though -a is dropped. a collective; this would account for the 2 See Brugmann, Grundriss 2, p. 661, agreement of the singular verb with this pi. in where several examples are given of endings Greek; cp. also sarva ta . , , astu (RV. i.

I being repeated in other languages. 1628); see Brugmann, Grundriss 2, d. 682. 3 The form in -asas seems to be an Indo- 7 The G. ahanam is an example of the Iranian innovation, as there are no certain transference of another case from an -an traces of it in other Indo-European languages stem.

cp. Brugmann 1. c. 8 In the independent Mantra portions of 4 In the original Mantra portions of the the TS. the forms in -a seem to outnumber TS. the pi. in -as is very numerous, but I those in -atii in about the same proportion

have noted only 1 1 forms in -asas. In the as in the RV. : there are at least 20 forms Khilas, forms in -as are three times (30) as of the former and 14 of the latter. In the numerous as in -asas (10). Khilas the two forms are almost equally

5 There is no example of a V. in the divided, as 10 examples of -li and 12 of -ani RV., and only one, ciUdni (III. 2"*), in the occur. AV. where the Mss. have cittani. 9 Similarly, the form in -5 appears beside 6 This form in -a is commonly supposed n. pi. forms in -Jni, -iini or even -amsi,

to have started from a N. sing, f, in -a as Jmsi, -I'/mfi; e. g. Ihiinni bhadra (I. 166'°); VI. Declension. Nouns. Vowel Stems. 261

is clearly due to the influence of metre. The -a here seems never to be shortened to -a, as is so frequently the case in the N. A. n. pi. of -an stems \ Nor does it avoid hiatus (like the -a of the N. A. du. m.), though coalescence with a following vowel sometimes takes placed Examples of the commonest forms are : i. /lavyd (44), bhuvaiia (36), duritd 'distresses', (31) sdvana (30), uktha (25) 'praises'. — 2. bhuvanani (57), vrtr&ni (36) 'foes', vratcini (34) 'laws', havydni (25), krtani (20) 'done'. A. m. The ending of this case is not the normal -as, but -«, before

which the final vowel of the stem is lengthened^, e. g. dsva-n. The form is frequent, being made from more than 250 stems in the RV. That the ending

was originally -tts is shown by the treatment of -an in Sandhi, where it becomes -am before vowels and the sibilant itself occasionally survives before c- and t-'^. I. m. n. In this case there are two forms, the one adding the normal ending -bhis (before which the final vowel of the stem becomes -e), while the other ends in -ais (which does not appear in any other declension). The form in -ais is only slightly commoner in the RV., being made from 221 stems, while that in -bMs is made from 211. In the AV., however, the former is 5 times as frequent as the latter 5. The two forms* often appear in the

same Pada; e. g. upamebhir arkdis (i. 33^) 'with highest songs'. The choice is often due to the metre; e. g. yatdm dhebhir asvina (vin. 5') 'come with your steeds, Asvins', and aditydir yatam asvina (ym. 2,$^^) 'with the Adityas come, O Asvins'. In the RV. the m. forms are roughly twice as numerous as the n. Examples of the most frequent forms are: i. arkdis (43)' uktkdis (35), yajiidis (34), devdis (31), dsvais (30), stomais (25). — 2. devebhis (52), stomebhis (26), vojebhis (21). D. m. n. This case is formed with the normal ending -bhyas, before

which the final -a of the stem appears as -e. In the RV. it is made from over 40 stems in the m., but from only one in the n. In about half the forms occurring the ending has to be read as a dissyllable -bhias. The forms occurring are: ajdrebhyas 'unaging', dmavattarebhyas 'mightier', dranebhyas

(Kh. V. I ^) 'foreign', arbhakibhyas 'small', adityebhyas, asin^bhyas 'aged', asv-apas- tarebhyas 'working more quickly', tlmebhyas 'helpers', gdrbhebhyas 'infants', grhe'b/iyas,jdnebkyas,jTvebkyas '\iwmg\jnate'b/iyas{Kh..iii. 16') 'known', tavak^bhyas

'thy', ddsa-kaksyebhyas 'having ten girths', ddsa-yoktrebhyas 'having ten traces', ddsa-yojanebhyas 'having ten teams', dev^bhyas, pajribhyas 'strong', pdrvatebhyas 'mountains', pasprdhanebhyas 'striving', pitu-kfttarebhyas 'procuring more nourish- ment', pisunebhyas 'treacherous', putrebhyas 'sons', pi'irusebhyas 'men', ptlrvebhyas 'former', badhitebhyas 'oppressed', bharatebhyas 'descendants of Bharata', mdrtye-

sdvana ptruni{\M. 368) ; iirdhvd soclnisi frdsthila 5 In the independent Mantra portions of rdjamsi (III. 44); rabhasa vdpiimsi (m. 18). the TS. the proportion is about the same 1 There seems no sufficient reason to as in the AV. The following four forms with assume that in visved aha (l. 92'') as com- -bhis occur: etasebhis (l. 2. 4'), devebhis (ill. pared with aha viha (I 1302), aha is formed I. 4''), rudrebhis (ll. I.II»), su-ydmebhis (iv. 7. from the transition stem aha- rather than 15^). In the Khilas 5 forms in -ais to 7 in from dhan-; cp. Lanman p. 348. -ebhis occur. The latter are: amiva-cdtanebhis 1 2 On some probable mistakes made by (l. 1 7), artavebhis (lir. 166), uklhibhis (V. 6^), the Pada in contracted forms see Lanman rsvebhis (ni. i'), kdmarebhis (l. 51), rathebhis 1 348. (l. 11''), saraghibhis (I. 1 '). In the later 3 This lengthening is at least Indo-Iranian: language the form in -bhis survives in the Brugmann, Grundriss 2, p. 6722. pronominal ebhis alone. 6 the origin of the two 4 See above 77 ; and cp. Lanman 346 on On forms cp. the Sandhi of -an in general. Brugmann, Grundriss 2, p. 717. 262 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

bhyas, fnanave'bkyas'mQn', manusebkyas^-catn', ^za^^iJ/^j/ffj 'descendants of Mana', yajatibhyas 'adorable', yajniyebhyas, rdthebhyas 'chariots', vidiistarebhyas 'very wise', viprebhyas 'seers', vy-ahebhyas 'horseless', sasamanebhyas 'toiling', suvida- triyebhyas 'bountiful', soma-rabhastarebhyas 'intoxicated with Soma', somyebhyas 'preparers of Soma', stenibhyas 'thieves'. — n. bhuvanebhyas 'beings'. Ab. m. n. This case is formed like the D. with the normal ending -bhyas from nearly two dozen stems in the RV. about equally divided between the m. and n. In more than half of these forms the ending must be pronounced as a dissyllable. The forms occurring are: m. dntebhyas 'ends', dsurebhyas 'divine spirits', iigrebhyas, grhebhyas, jdnebhyas, jivebhyas 'living beings', deveMyas, pdrvatebhyas, makhebhyas 'vigorous', viprebhyas, siirebhyas, syene- bhyas 'eagles'. — n. anyd-krtebhyas 'done by others', antrebhyas entrails', duritibhyas, nakhebhyas 'nails', padebhyas, parlhivebhyas 'terrestrial spaces', bhuvanebhyas, mrdhribhyas 'contempt', vdnebhyas 'forest trees', harmyebhyas 'houses'. G. m. n. Instead of the normal ending -am these stems almost invariably add the ending -nam, before which the final vowel is lengthened as in the

-i, -u and -r stems. This ending (like -ani in the n. pi.) must have been due to the influence of the -n stems'- The case is thus formed in the RV. from over 100 stems in the m. and over 20 in the n. In nearly half these forms the final syllable may be metrically read as aam'^. Two-thirds of these reso- lutions are, however, not necessary as they occur at the end of octosyllabic Padas which may be catalectic; but many undoubted resolutions are required within the Pada3. Among the forms of most frequent occurrence are m. devdnam (148), jdnanam (34), yajniyanam (12), aditycinam (11), ad/ivarSnam (10). — n. dhdnanam (13).

a. The organic form e. g. from devd- would have been devdm (= devd-am\ Not more than three or four^ examples of this survive in the RV., and only two of these seem undoubted: yiithyam dsvandm (vill. 56'*) 'of horses belonging to the herd' and

cardtham in gdrbhas ca sthatdm gdrbhas cardthdvi (l. 70^) 'offspring of things that are stationary, offspring of things that move^"*. There are further some half dozen forms

written with final -an or -an which seem to stand for the G. pi. in -am : devafi jdnina

(l. 71^; VI. 11^) 'the race of the gods' (Pada devan); devan jdnmatid (X. 64'4) 'with the race of the gods' (Pada devan); visa d ca mdrtdn (iv. 2-^) 'and hither to the dwellings of mortals' (== ntdrlam); coskiiydle visa indro manusydn (vi. 47'^) 'Indra protects the tribes of men'. L. m. n. This case adds the normal ending -su before which (as before -bhis and -bhyas) -e takes the place of the final vowel of the stem and cere- bralizes the following sibilant. It is formed from some 123 stems in the m. and some 92 in the n. 5 It is almost invariably* to be read with hiatus, even before u-t. Among the most frequently occurring forms are: m. devesu (99), vdjesu (41), yajiiesu (35), adhvaresu (27), mdrtyesu (25), sutesu (16). — n. viddthesu (33), vdnesu (20), sdvanesu (14), bhuvanesu (12), ukthesii (10).

1 See Lanman 352 c; Brugmann, Grund- 5 The gender is doubtful in some" in- riss 2, p. 69 u stances. 2 Lanman (352, bottom) enumerates the 6 The only undoubted exception to this forms in which resolution takes place. rule in the RV. occurs in a late hymn fx. 3 Lanman 3524, gives a list of the forms I218), where devesv ddhi must be read. Cp. in which resolution is required; cp. Arnold, Lanman 354. Vedic Metre 143 fp. 92). 7 On the probable origin of the ending 4 Perhaps also hinisandm (x.x^i^^M G. pi. su cp. Brugmann, Grundriss 2, p 700. of a participle himsana-, and sdsdm if G. of

iasd- 'ruler' (II. 2312). vanam (x. 46') is G. pi. of van- rather than vdna-. Cp. Lanman 353. > T-

VI. Declension. Nouns. Vowel Stems. 263

2 b. Derivative Stems in -a. Lanman Noun-Inflection 33S-365. - WmTNEY, Sanskrit Grammar p. 131-137. — Cp. COLLITZ, die herkiinft der 5-deklination, BB. 29, p. 8 [ — 114.

373- The derivative a-declension corresponds to the derivative a-declen- sion, for the m. adjectives of which it furnishes the f. stems. It includes more femmmes than any other declension. Like the a-declension it has many irregularities of inflexion, every case in the singular, except the A., and two cases in_ the plural showing some abnormal feature. The N. sing, shares with the_ derivative r-declension the peculiarity of not adding the ending -s ; the I. sing, has an alternative form borrowed from the pronominal declension; the D. Ab. G. L. sing, are formed under the influence of the derivative r- stems; and the V. sing, ends in -e instead of appearing in the form of the bare stera^ In the plural the N. has to a limited extent the same alternative form in -asas as the m. of the a-declension, and the G. is similarly formed with -nam. As in the a-declension, the accent remains in the same position throughout except the V., where it of course shifts to the first syllable.

Inflexion.

374. The forms actually occurring, if made from/nji- 'dear', would be as follows:

Sing. N. priya. A. priydm. I. priya and friyaya. D. priydyai. Ab. G. priyayas. L. priydyam. V. pr'iye.

Du. N. A. priyL I. Ab. priydbhyam. G. I., priydyos. PI. N. priyds and priydsas. V. 'priyas. A. priyds. I. priydbhis. D. Ab. priydbhyas. G. priydnam. L. friydsu.

Sing. N. This case never adds the normal ending -.f. It is formed in the RV. from 424 stems and occurs more than 1000 times. Examples of the most frequent forms are: yosa (24) 'maiden', ddksina (24) 'good milch cow', ila (17) 'refreshment', jayd (17) 'wife', su-bhdga (13) 'beautiful', sunrta (10) 'joyful'j citrd (9) 'brilliant'. a. At the end of odd Pad as the final -a of this N. is regularly written with Sandhi, but must always be read with hiatus; coalescence with e- and r- is, however, twice avoided by nasalization 2, while twice'' the -a is shortened before r-. b. Within a Pada the -5 is written with Sandhi in 160 instances in the RV., but is pronounced (unlike the -a of the N. A. du. m.) with hiatus in 23 of these instances; while the nominatives Isd 'car-pole' and mariisa 'devotion' are written as well as pro- nounced with hiatus*, the former once, the latter four times.

A. This case, which is formed with the normal ending -m, is in the RV. made from over 200 nominal stems occurring more than 400 times. Examples

of the most frequent forms are: mantsdm (21), jayam (n), dmtvam (9) 'distress', yosam (7), yosanam (6) 'maiden'.

a. This case is often identical in form with the L. sing. f. of stems in -J; thus piirvyam may be the A. of pHrvyd- 'previous' or L. of pHrvt- 'much'. In one instance at

least elision of the -»2, followed by contraction, takes place ^: saiatamavivesih (VIL 1 9' j for

'^ The stem^«- 'woman', though originally manisd iyani (v. II ' ; VII. 70^) ; manlsa asmat (vil. dissyllabic, came to be regarded as a radical 341); cp. RPr. II. 29. Lanman 356 suggests that a-stem and accordingly forms its N. sing. the comparative frequency of this hiatus justi- gtia-s [w. 9*).. fies the restoration of the augment in Padas

2 sasadanam '^id (l. 1 23'°) and_j'am ' rnamcayi short of a syllable; e.g.prdsd [a]vdd{yu. ^8^). (V. 30"*)- 5 On some contractions in which -m has 3 p-iya^f- (l. IS I*), rju-hastaW- (v. 41'^). probably been elided but explained wrongly Cp. ^o by the Pada as containing nominatives in -a, 4 t^a dk}0 (vm. 529); mamsa abhi (I. loi^); see Lanman 356. 264 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

iafatamam avivcsVi. In two or three instances llie metre seems to require -am to be read as aam'^,

I. There are two forms of this case. In the one, the normal ending

-a is added direcdy to the stem and, by contracting with its final -a, produces a form identical in appearance with the N., e. g. Jihvd {^ jihva-a) 'tongue'. In the other, y is interposed between the ending -a and the final -a of the stem, wliich is shortened, e. g. jihvd-y-a. The latter form is due to the in- fluence of the regular pronominal I. sing, f, e.g. tdya^. This form is already shghtly the more common in the RV.J^ being made from 113 stems* as compared with 95 which take the older form with -a. In the later Samhitas

the I. in -a is very rare in original passages, the AV. using only five such forms independentlys. Both forms are (unlike the N. pi. m. in -asas and -as) comparatively seldom made from the same stem, a&jihvA a.ndijihvdya. Two thirds of the total number of 95 stems which have the older form, end in the suffixes -tCi and -ya, as purusd-ta 'after the manner of men', hiraiiyayd 'golden'. The choice of the alternative forms is, as elsewhere, often deter- mined by the metre ^ Examples of the commonest forms are; i. dosA (13) 'evening', barhdna (13) 'might', manisA (13), viamhdna (11) 'willingness', sravasyA (7) 'desire to praise' 7. — Also asTr-dayA (TS. m. 2. 8^) 'fulfilment of blessing', visvd-psnya (TS.i. 5. 3^; VS. XII. 10) 'omniform'. — 2. dhAraya (53) 'stream', jihvdya (24), maydya (20) 'craft'.

a. There are some instrumentals sing. f. formed from derivative a- stems, whicli are used as adverbs with shift of accent to the ending. Sucli are: a-dairayd 'without a. gift' [a-dalra-), ubhaya 'in both ways' (ubhaya-), riaya 'in the right way' (rta-), daksina 'on the right' (daksina-), naktaya 'by night' (iiakla-), madhyd 'in the middle' [mddhya-], samana 'together' {sdi?iana-), svapnaya (AV.) 'in dream' (sviipia-)^.

D. This case is anomalously formed by adding -yai to the stem, e. g. jarA-yai'^. It is not of common occurrence, being made from only 14 nominal'"

stems in the RV. The forms occurring are : a-gotayai 'lack of cows', a-vira-

/aya? 'lack of sons', tikhAyaii!T'S>.\N.\.<^^)'-^ot\ uftanAyai {IS. lY. 1.4^ ; Kh.v. 16^) 'supine', ghjsayai N. of a woman, carAyai 'for going', j'arAyai (AV.) 'old age', tvd-yatayai 'presented by thee', diicchi'inSyai 'mischievous demon', piitrd-ka7iiayai (Kh.iv. 13') 'desiring sons', putd-kratayai N. of a woman, mMiAyai 'eagerness', viipdlayai N. of a woman, sivAyai 'auspicious', svetanAyai 'dawn', sunftayai

'joy', suryAyai 'sun-goddess'.

a. Two forms have been preserved in which the D. is made by adding the normal ending -e directly to the stem with the -a of which it coalesces to -ai: mahlyai

(i. 113^) 'greatness', sv-apa/yai^^ (I. 54") 'accompanied with fair offspring'. These are formed like the D. infinitives from radical rt-stems such as vi-khyai (584). b. In one passage (vu. I'9) the form a-vlra/e, for a-viratayai 'lack of sons',

1 See Lanman 357 (top). 7 Lanman 358 enumerates the homopho- 2 Cp. Brugmann, Grundriss 2, p. 629, 783. nous instrumentals. 3 The corresponding later form in the 8 These forms may have been due to the Avesta is much commoner than the older: influence of the pronominal adverb a-ya Brugmann 2, p. 629. 'in this way' (with adverbial shift of accent,

4 This number given by Lanman 357 in- cp. tdyd etc.); see J. Schmidt, Pluralbildung pronominal stems. Brugmann's 212 ff., and Grundriss eludes some Brugmann, 2, p. 629 ; statement (2, p. 629) that the form in -aya is otherwise Bartholomae, BB. 15, 20 f. less common than the form in -a in Vedic, 9 Formed m the Indo-Iranian period, pro- is not applicable even to the RV. bably under the influence of the derivative

5 The forms are daksiita, devdta, dosd, stems in -T originally -ya, i. c. -yai for -yd-e. sumnaydf vitia-kamyd'y only the last is peculiar '° Also svdyai from the possessive pronoun to the AV. sva-. 6 Euphony also has some influence; thus I Brugmann, Grundriss 2, p. 600, thinks hiranyayaya does not occur. this form may be shortened for sv-apatyayai. ;

VI. Declension. Nouims. Vowel Stems. 265 takes the ending -e direct, but witli elision of tlie stem vowel, as in the radical a- declension '.

Ab. This case is formed anomalously by adding the ending -yas to the stem'. It is rare, being made in the RV. from only seven stems, the AV. having three additional examples. The forms occm-ring are: urdhvayas (AV.) 'upright', kanayas 'maiden', jikvdyds, daksinjyas, dur-evayas 'ill-disposed', dur-hiinayas 'mischief, ddivyayas 'divine', dhruvdyls (AV.) 'firm', nidayas 'dis- grace', vy-adhvdyas (AV.)-! 'lying half-way'.

G. This case is formed in the same way as the Ab., but is much more frequent, being made from 26 stems in the RV. The forms occurring are: dghnyayas and aghnyAyas 'cow (not to be killed)', ilayls, ukhayas, usriyayas 'ruddy cow', drmyayas 'night', kamiyas, Mslhayas 'course', Jikvdyas, ddksinayas, darsatSyjs 'conspicuous', diirvayas 'Durva grass', dhisdnayas 'offerTng', dkisamanayas^ 'longing', pdjrayas 'vigorous', pdritakmyayas 'wandering', mahinayas 'mighty', rasAyas a mythical river, vayAyas 'branch', vis'pdiayas, sasvattamAyas 'most recent', slphayas N. of a river, sucAyas 'pure', sabar-di'ighayas 'yielding nectar', sc/ianAyas^ 'victorious', surayls 'intoxicating liquor', suryAyiis. L. This case is formed by adding the anomalous ending -yam to the stem, e. g. bhadra-yam. It is not common, being formed from only 16 or 17 stems in the RV. The forms occurring are: apayAyam^ N. of a river, amAyam 'raw', uttanAyam 'outstretched', usrlyayam, {A)-gataySm 'come', grlvAyam 'neck', jumayam 'ancient', ndvayam 'new', pdri-taktnyayam, b/iadrAyatn 'bene- ficent', yamunayam N. of a river, varairAyam 'thong', vdsayam (Kh.ii. lo?) 'cow', simsdpayam N. of a tree, slrinayam 'night', sabhAyam (TS.L8. 3') 'assembly', surayam, su-somayam''"ii. of a river, hariyupiyayam N. of a locality. V. This case has the abnormal ending -e^ and is in the RV. formed from over 50 stems; e. g. ahe. The original form must have been the bare stem

with the final vowel shortened; e. g. *ds'va. but of this there is no certain survival. The form amba which occurs in the RV. three times (unaccented)

may originally have been an exclamation, and it can have this sense alone in one of the three passages of the RV. (x. 97^), where it is used with a plural. In the two other passages it may very well mean '0 mother' (ir. 41'^; X. 867). The VS. (xxiil x8) and the TS. (vii. 4. 19') have the V. dmbe as from a stem dmba 'mother''. The forms occurring are: dg/myasye^° (Kh. iv. 5'®- j^) 'cow-faced', aghnye, apve N. of a disease, amartye 'immortal', dmbike (TS. VS.) 'mother', ambitame 'most motherly', as've 'mare', asva-sUnrte 'rich in horses', Aditya-varne'^'^ (Kh. iL (fi) 'sun-coloured', arjikiye N. of a river, ile goddess of devotion, istake

(TS. IV. 2. 9^) , 'brick', ugra-putre 'having mighty sons', nttare 'mightier', uttana-parne 'having extended leaves', tiru-vraje 'extending afar', urmye, rsve 'exalted', kadha-priye 'ever pleased', kane 'one-eyed', kdma-dughe (TS. IV. 2. 9^) 'cow of plenty', krtye (Kh. iv. £^5) 'magic', ghora-rttpe (Kh.iv. 5"*) 'of awful form', gange 'Ganges', ghore 'awful', citre, ciira-maghe 'having brilliant gifts', jaye, durve (TS. iv. 2. 9^), deva-jute 'impelled by the gods'

1 This forms a transition to the consonant 5 Perfect participle middle oisah- 'conquer'. declension like dcvaiafe beside devdtataye; 6 A transition form from the radical a- i'. cp. Lanman 3S9=. declension, see p. 249, note 2 Like the D. it is due to the influence 7 Also the pronominal form svayam. of the stems in derivative -X, to the fuller 8 The origin of this ending is uncertain form of which, -ya-, the normal ending -as cp. Brugmann 2, 541. was added. 9 This is a common stem in post-Vedic 3 Also the pronominal svayas 'own'. Sanskrit. 4 Participle, perhaps desiderative, of dhi- 1° The ed. has aghnyasye. 'thiak'. " The ed. has adityd-vartte. 266 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar. devi-tame'^ 'most divine', dhisane 'goddess of devotion', nadt-tame 'best of rivers', pathye 'path' (as goddess), fastye 'goddess of the house', putra- kame, puru-priye 'much beloved', frthu-jaghane 'broad-hipped', prthn-stuke 'having broad braids of hair', priye (TS. vii. i. 6*), brahma-samsiie 'sharpened by prayer', marud-vrd/te N. of a river, yamune, rake N. of a goddess, vapustame (Kh. iv. 7') 'most beautiful', vdra-rupe (Kh. iv. 5^*) 'of excellent form', vi-kate 'monstrous', vivasvad-vate (TS. iv. 4. 12't) 'desired by Vivasvat', visva-rupe (TS. iv. 2. 5^) 'omniform', visva-vare 'possessed of all goods', saravye 'arrow', sTtike 'cool', iufige (Kh. v. 15*) N. of a goddess, subhre 'shining', sa-danve 'associated with demons', sarame N. of a goddess, sTite 'furrow', su-jate 'well-born', su-putre 'having good sons', su-bhage, su-labhike 'easy to win', su-snuse 'having fair daughters-in-law', su-nrfe, surya-varne (Kh. IV. 77) 'sun-coloured', surye, stoma-trayastrimse (TS. iv. 4. 12't), hdriklike (Kh. V. 15') 'yellowish', hiranya-pame (Kh. iv. 7?) 'gold-winged', hladike 're- freshing'. Du. N. A. V. These cases are identical in form, having final -e which doubtless contains the same dual ending -r as N. A. V. du. of the a- declen- sion ^ They are of frequent occurrence, being made from over 130 stems in the RV. The ending -e is Pragrhya, being distinguished by the Pada text with an appended /// from the e of the V. sing, f ; e. g. V. du. f. subhre Hi, but V. sing. f. subhre. Examples of the most frequent forms are: ubhe (66) 'both', su-me'ke^ (8) 'well-established', devd-putre (7) 'having gods as sons', vi-rupe (7) 'of different forms', sipre (5) 'cheeks'. The compound sitasite 'black and white' occurs in a Khila (p. I7i5). I. Ab. These cases, made with the ending -bhyam, are identical in form with the I. D. Ab. m. n. of the a- declension. They are represented by only two forms in the RV. : siprabhyam (x.' 105^) which seems to be I.'', and nasikabhyain (x. 163') 'nostrils', Ab. No form with a D. sense occurs. G. L. Both these cases add, with interposing -y-, the normal ending -OS to the final -a of the stem, which is shortened. They are thus identical in form with the G. L. du. m. n. of the a- declension. There are only four nominal forms in the RV. and AV. : in the G. sense jdnghayos (AV.) 'legs', yamdyos 'twins'; and in the L. sense uttandyos, svadhdyos 'homestead'-. PI. N. V. The regular form ends in -as and is very common, being formed from nearly 260 stems in the RV. Examples of the commonest forms are: bhadras (19), dhdras (16), mamsas (10)*. There is, however, a second form in -asas which occurs nearly 20

times in the RV. Considering the rarity of this form here, while it is the commoner as N. pi. m. in the a- declension, the probability is that its intro- duction was due to those very numerous masculines. The forms occurring are: d-tandrasas 'indefatigable', a-mftasas (AV.) 'immortal', dur-mitrdsas 'un- friendly', pasprdhanasas 'vying'', pdrthivasas^ 'terrestrial', pavakasas 'pure', bhejanSsas^ 'having obtained', vanvanasas'^° (SV.) 'having obtained', vasSsas,

I Superlative of devt, the final being 6 In two or three passages the Pada text sboitened as in the simple vocative devi. seems to confuse forms in -as with others in ^ Cp. Brugmann, Grundriss 2, 286 (p. 643). -a; see Lanman 362. 3 Cp. WiNDiscH in Festgruss an O. v. B6ht- 7 Perfect participle middle of \5prdh-. LINGK II4f. 8 Cp. Lanman 362. 4 The pronominal form tdbhydm (x. 88'^) 9 Perfect participle middle olbhaj- 'share'. has a locative meaning. 10 The variant of the SV. for bhejanasas 5 There are also the pronominal forms of the RV. ayos and ydyos. In III. 542 the Pada text reads dyds probably for ayos. VI. Declensions. Ncuns. Vowei, Stems. 267

vasrasas 'roaring', vidanisas' 'being found', vrd/iasas 'helping', a-iusanasas ' 'stimulating', sughamsas^ 'swiff, sdmmitasas{hN)''coxxt%^oxi&m^^smdyamanasas 'smiling', hdvamanasas 'calling'*. A. This case is formed with the normal ending -as which coalesces with the final of the stem to -as, e. g. sunrtas. It is very frequent, being made from more than 160 stems in the RV. Examples of the commonest forms are:^ mayas (22\ pf-tanas (13) 'battles', usrAs (12) 'dawns', dhAras (11), usr'iyas (10)^. Two instances occur of forms in -asas being wrongly used as A. pi. f.: samvidanAsas (x. 30"^) 'united' and aram-gamAsas (AV. xiii. 2») 'ready to help'. I. This case is always formed by adding the ending -bhis directly to the stem, e. g. suiirta-bhis. It is made from over 80 stems in the RV. Examples of the most frequent forms are: mayAbhis (13), citrAbhis (8), dhArabhis (7), h'jtrabhis (7) 'libations', ilabhis (6). The form drAgJiisthabhis (in. 62'') 'for longest times'^ is used adverbially., D. Ab. These cases are formed with the same ending -bhyas (sometimes to be read as two syllables) added directly to the stem. In the RV. only 4 datives and 11 ablatives occur from nominal stems ^ The forms occurring are: D. aghnyAbhyas, usriyabhyas, diicchunabhyas, devdtabhyas (TS. iv. 2. 9*) 'deities', vrtAbhyas 'movements'. — Ab. ddhardbhyas 'lower', Ambhyas 'regions', uttarabhyas, usnihabhyas 'nape of the neck', kikasabhyas 'cartilages of the breast-bone', gudabhyas 'intestines', grivAbkyas, damsdnabhyas 'wondrous powers', dhisdnabhyas 'Soma bowls', vaksdnabhyas 'bellies', iyavyhbhyas 'darkness'.

G. This case being made with the abnormal ending -nam is identical in form with the G. pi. m. of the a- declension. It is formed in the RV. from 22 stems. There is no certain example here of forms with the normal ending -dm which is found in a few genitives of the a- declension (372). There are only a couple of instances in which the resolution of the final syllable as -aam seems required by the metre ^. The G. of kanyh,- 'girl' always appears in the contracted form of kaninam ' (occurring five times) in the RV. ^° The forms actually occurring are: dksaranam 'speech', dgfmyanaw, a-nivesanAndm 'affording no place of rest', d-bkaysiiam 'free from danger', dsma-vrajanam 'whose pen is a rock', Asandm (TS. iv. 4. 12^), urvdranajti 'arable fields', usrAndm, usriyanam, kAsthanam, krtyAnam (Kh.iv. ^i°),ji/t//iAnam

'transverse', dwyAnam 'heavenly', di'ighanam 'milch kine', a'ifZ'ffVa'7;^»2 (Kh.ii. 4'), deva-senAnam 'hosts of the gods', dhisdnanam, ndvdnam, navyAnam 'navigable rivers', fiastydnam 'abodes', mamsAndm, rAmyanam "nights', sdmdnam 'years', sunftdndm 'songs of joy', stiyanam 'still waters'. L. This case is formed by adding the ending -su directly to the stem. The final -u though always combined with a following vowel both at the end of an internal Pada or within a Pada, is invariably to be read with hiatus

1 Participle middle, with passive sense, of 6 Cp. aparibhyas 'for future times'. vid- 'find'. 7 There are also the pronominal forms 2 Participle middle of yhas: abhyds and abhyas, iabhyas, yabhyas. 3 This word (AV.) is of uncertain deri- 8 dhandnam in VIII. 59'^ 3,nd p^tananam vation. in VIII. 59'. In sunftandm (i. 3") the metre 4 There are besides two or three doubtful seems to require the shortening of the final instances which may be m.; see Lanman 362. of the stem: sunftanam; Lanman 364. 5 In several instances -as is most probably 9 This is a form of some importance as to' be read where the Pada text has -.-f, see showing how the suffix -i arose from -yd.-, 10 I.ANMAN 363. In a, few forms the resolution It also occurs once in Kh, r, 5', of -as as -aas or -ads seems necessary;

Lawman 1. c. 2 68 I Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

in the RV.; e.g. svisu unuirasu (x. 50^) for svdsurvdrasu \ This case is formed from over 50 nominal stems in the RV. The forms occurring are: aghdsu 'evil', amftSsu, dvarasu 'later', dmdsu, Srtanasu 'uncultivated', ilasu, I'iparasu 'neighbouring', urvdrasu, usriyasu, rirmyasu\ kanydsu, kdsthasu, krs/idsu 'black', grivfisu (TS. iv. 2. 52), cittd-garbhasu 'visibly pregnant', citrdsii, jagmandsu^ 'having gone', jatSsu 'born', tiigryasu 'des-

cended from Tugra', duryasu 'abodes', dcvdtdsu (TS. i. 6. 4^), dhisnyasu 'fire- places', dhruvdsu 'unchangeable', ndvasu^ pathydsu^ pddyasu 'footsteps', pastydsu, pduca-janyi3su 'relating to the five tribes', puru-pisasu 'multiform', pnrvasu 'earlier', pftanasu, pradhanyasu 'forming the spoil', priydsu, mddyasu 'fond of exhilaration', madhyamdsu 'middlemost', manusySsu 'human', mandrasu (TS.iv. 1.8^), mdrtyasu 'mortal', mahinttsu ^mighty', yajmyasu 'devout', (prd-)- yatasu 'presented', ydsanasu, rdmyasu, ropandkdsu a kind of bird, vaksdnasu 'bellies', vrddhasu 'great', vrdJiasandsui 'growing', sayasu 'resting-places', suskasu 'dry', syavfisu 'nights', srutasu 'famous', sdnayasu 'old', saptd-sivasu 'blessing the seven (worlds)', sirAsu 'streams', su-vrjdnasu 'dwelling in fair regions', hdvyasu 'to be invoked'.

3. a. Stems in radical -T. Lanman, Noun-Inflection 365 —400. — Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar 348—359.

375. This declension consists primarily of fewer than 50 m. and f. nouns derived from 9 roots. Only four of these words appear as monosyllables, the rest being compounds. The analogy of this primary group (A) is closely followed both in inflexion and accentuation by a second group of about 80 polysyllabic stems which, though formed with derivative -t, are for the sake of clearness best treated as a division (B) of this declension. The normal endings as they appear in the inflexion of consonant stems are taken throughout this declension. The G. pL, however, with the exception of a single form occurring only once {d/iiydm), takes the ending -«£?wj and the N. sing, always adds -s. Accentuation on the final syllable of the stem is characteristic of this declension; and except in monosyllabic stems the acute remains on that syllable throughout*. Before vowel endings the -i is split to -iy in the mono- syllabic nouns; e. g. dhiy-am; this is also the case in compounds formed with these nouns, except -dhi when it is accented, e. g. jana-sriyam, ndna- dhiyas, but S-d/uayn; in compounds formed with roots it is split only when two consonants precede; e. g. yajna-priyam, but yajiia-niam; in the secon- dary group it is split in samiidri- and partly in cakri-, e. g. samiidr'iyas and cakriyaii, but cakr'ias. Otherwise the T is always written as y, but is in the RV. invariably 5 to be pronounced as a vowel; e. g. nadyam pronounced nadiam ^.

A. The stems belonging to the primary group are: i. the monosyllabic feminines dhi- 'thought', bhi- 'fear', srt- 'glory'; and the m. vi- 'receiver' (which occurs only once in the N. sing.). — 2. Compounds (mostly Bahuvrihis) formed with the first three: a-dhi- f. 'care', itthd-dhi- 'right devout', dirghddhi-

1 Cp. the L. pi. of the o-declension. verse (cp. Lanman 379') and N. pi. nadyas 2 Perfect participle middle of gam- 'go'. (vil. 50''). The AV. has six such forms;

3_ Participle middle from vrdh- 'grow'. aivataryas, nadyas, naptyas, nadyas, fippalyas, 4 There are one or two exceptions to this vfksa-sarpyas. rule in compound words in the A group, 6 The resolved forms are therefore always and a few others, in the AV., in the B given below, spelt with i in this declension. group. This will not lead to any confusion with the 5 There are only two exceptions in the written forms of the Sarnhita text in which

RV. : A. sing, siaryam (vil. 688) in a late the < of the stem always appears as iy ox y. VI. Declension. Nouns. Vowel Stems. 269

'having a far-reaching mind' {a-dh':-), dur-a-dhl- 'malevolent', dard-adhi-'"-\ox\g\vig for the distance', sv-sdhi- 'attentive', du-(ih'i- ^ 'malevolent', nina-dki- 'of various

mitn^, vihdto-dhl- 'all-attending', su-dhi- 'devout'; avadya-bhf- f. 'fear of blame'; agni-sri- 'fire-bright', adhvara-srl- 'adorning the sacrifice', ksatra-srt- 'blessing dominion', ghrta-sri- 'glittering with ghee', jana-sri- 'blessing men', darsata-iri- 'of beauteous splendour', mdrya-sri- 'adorned like a wooer', yajha-sri- 'beauti- fying the sacrifice', sii-srt- 'glorious', hari-sri- 'of golden glory'. — 3. Com- pounds^ formed with the roots kri- 'buy', m- 'lead', prX- 'love', mX- 'diminish',

VI- 'move' and 'cover', sT- 'lie', in- 'mix': pra-krt- {AN.) 'purchasable', sadyah- kri- (AV.) 'bought on the same day'; agre-ni- (VS.) 'leading', rta-ni- 'leading the rite', grama-ni- 'leading the community', padci-nl- (AV.) 'following the steps of another', pra-ni- f 'furtherance', pra-neni-'< 'powerfully furthering', mana-ni- 'spirit-leading', yajha-nf- 'leading the sacrifice', vaia-nf- m. 'commander', vrata- nt- 'carrying out the ordinance', sadha-ni- 'accompanying', seni-ni- rn. 'leader of an army', skambha-nt- {yS>.) 'furnishing a prop'; abhi-pri- 'gladdening', kadha- pri- 'gladdening whom?', pari-pri- 'dear', hrahma-prt- 'prayer-loving', yajna-pr':- 'sacrifice-loving'; manyu-mt- 'rage-obstructing', vdta-pra-mT- 'surpassing the wind'; takva-vt- m. '(swiftly darting) bird', deva-vi- and deva-vi- 'god-refreshing', pada- vf- m. 'leader', pama-vi- 'moving with wings', pratT-vt-^ 'gladly accepting', hiranya-vi- 'gold-bringing'; pra-vi- (VS.) 'wound round'; jihma-si- 'lying pro- strate', patsu-tas-si-^ 'lying at the feet', madhyama-si- 'lying in the midst', syona-st- 'lying on a soft couch'; abhi-srt-i 'admixture', gana-sri-'' 'mixing in troops'. B. This secondary group comprises upwards of 80 polysyllabic stems, accented on the final vowel, which are all substantives except about half a dozen. It includes fewer than a dozen masculines. Of the remainder, which are feminine, more than half are names of female beings; about 30 are the

f. form of m. stems that are not accented on the final vowel, as purusi- 'woman' beside purusa- 'man'. There are also some f adjectives corresponding

to m. in -j/a, as svart- beside svarya- 'resounding'. This derivative group closely follows the analogy of the third division of the radical group (compounds ending in roots with final accented -i)\ it joined the radical declension doubt- less owing to the accentuation of the final vowel. The m. stems are: ahi- 'serpent', upavi-(yS>.) ^ 'encouraging', daksi->'> 'flaming'; /raz//- ^ 'attentive', dus-pravi- 'unfriendly', su-pravi- 'very attentive'; jc^y/-'" 'going'; rathi- 'charioteer', d-ratki- 'not a charioteer'; sahdsra-starT- 'having a thousand barren cows', hiranya-vasi- 'wielding a golden axe'.

The f. stems are: athari- 'flame', atharvi- 'priestess' (m. dt/iarvan-), d-durmangall- 'not unlucky', apart- pi. 'future days' (m. dpara-), apast- (VS.) 'industrious' (m. apdsya-), ambi- 'mother', arayl- 'demoness' (m. draya-), arunt- 'dawn', asvatarl- (AV.) 'she-mule', asta-karnf- 'cow with notched ear', a-pathi- 'impediment', eni- 'doe' (m. eta-), onf- 'breast', kalyaiit- 'fair woman' (m. kalydna-), kavasf- 'creaking' (m. kavdsa-), kilasi- 'spotted deer' (m. kilAsa-), kumart- (AV.) 'girl', kudi- (AV.) 'fetter', krmi- 'night', ksoni- 'flood', khari- 'measure', gandharvt- 'female ', gauri- 'buffalo cow', cakri- 'wheel', tandrt-

» For dilre-adhi: formed by adding the suffix -tas to the ' From t/us-if/it: L. pi. oi pad- 'foot'. 3 Mostly Tatpurusas, generally with accu- 7 Formed directly from the root irT- = 'mix', and not from the subbtantive in-. sative sense ; some Karmadharayas. 8 upa pra-{-av- 4 An intensive formation from ni- From and 'favour'. 'lead'. 9 To be assumed as the stem of the V. 5 'Coming towards', prd/i, with lengthened dahi, Pad a text dhaksi. 10 final vowel. The final vowel is here perhaps radical 6 From patsu-tas, an adverb anomalously in origin. 270 I. Allgemeines imB Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

(AV.) 'weariness' (m. tdndra-), tapanf- 'heat' (m. tdpana-), tila-pinji-'^ (AV.) N. of a plant (m. iila-pihja), t'lksna-s'rngf- (AV.) 'sharp-horned' (m. tlksnd- si-figa-), dati- 'messenger', dehi- 'dam', nadi- 'stream', napti- 'daughter' (m. ndptr-), nadt- 'pipe', nandi- 'joy', nistigrt- N. of Indra's mother, palali-^ {kN?j 'stalk', pippali- (Av.), 'berry' (m. pippala-), purusf- 'woman' (m. purusa-), prapharvi- 'voluptuous girl', mandukf- 'female frog' (m. mandaka-), mayuri- 'peahen' (m. maytira-), mahi-nadi- 'great stream', mahisi- (TS.) 'buffalo cow', inest- 'ewe', yaml-

^o;m.Q!&: yatudhani- 'sorceress' (xa. yatud/idna-), rai/d- 'female chario- 'YamT',_;'(7j'/-^ , teer' (m. rdtha- 'car'j, laksmt- 'mark', lalami- 'speckled mare' (m. lalAma-), vaksf- 'flame', vi-kesi- {KSI) 'shaggy hog', viball- N. of a river, vi-liptt- (AV.) 'cow', vi-lidlii- (AV.) 'female monster', visva-rupi- 'brindled cow' (m. vihd-rupa-), vrki- 'she-wolf (m. vrka-), vrksa-sarpi- (AV.) 'tree-serpent', vest- 'needle', vyasta-kesi- (AV.) 'shaggy hog', sakati- 'cart' {sdkata-), sabaU- (TS.) 'cow of plenty' (m. sabdla-), sakthi- 'thigh' (n. sdkthi-), sasarpari- 'trumpet', sahasra- parni- (AV.) N. of a plant (m. sahdsra-parna-), simhi- 'lioness', su-mangall-^ 'lucky woman' (m. su-mangdla-)^ sUrmi- 'pipe', srni- 'sickle', start- 'barren cow', sphigl- 'hip', hastmt-^ (AV.) 'female elephant', hiranya-ke'ji- 'gold-haired' (AV.) (m. hiranya-kesa-).

a. There are further a few f. adjectives in -J from m. stems in -ya: dpi- 'watery' (m. dpya-), samudri-^ 'belonging to the sea' (m. samudriya-), svari- 'resounding' (m. svarya-).

a. There are a few transition forms from the /-stems: karharyas^ (A.V.) from karhari- 'lute' (karkari-); N. sing, arhl (VS. VI. 36) from art- 'faithful' beside the usual art-; and the stems yayt-, saktht-, srni- also occur beside yayi-, sakthi-, sfni- respectively. The only certain transition from the derivative T- declension to the radical T- declension is represented by stj-t- 'woman', originally a dissyllables, from which occur the forms A. sing, striyam, N. A. pi. striyas, I. slribhis. Other transition forms are probably ffsanias G. sing. N. pi., yahvias A. pL, suparnias'^ N. A. pi.

Inflexion.

376. The forms actually occurring if made from dht- 'thought', yajna-

srt- m. f. 'adorning the sacrifice', sena-ttt- m. 'leader of an army', rathi- m. f. 'charioteer' respectively, would be the following: A. I. sing. N. dhis. A. dhiyam. I. dhiya. D. dhiyL G. dhiyds. — PI. N. dhiyas. A. dhiyas. I. dhibhis. G. dhinam '°. L. dhXsu.

2. sing. N. yajha-srts. A. yajna-sriyam. I. yajna-sriyS. D. yajfia-sriye. G. yajtia-sriyaa. — Du. N. A. yajha-sriya and yajna-sriyau (AV.). — PI. N. yajna-sriyas. A. yajha-sriyas. I. yajha-srtbhis. 3. sing. N. sena-nts. A. sena-niam. D. sena-nie. G. sena-nias. — Du. N. A. sena-nia. G. sena-nios. — PI. N. seni-nias. A. send-nias. D. sena- nibhyas. G. sena-ninam. B. Sing. N. rathts. A. rathiam. I. rath'ia. D. rath'ie. G. rathias.— V. rathi. — Du. N. A. rathia. I. f. rathtbhyani. G. f. rathios. L. rathios.

PI. N. rathias. A. rathias. I. rathibhis. D. f. rathtbhyas. G. rathtnam.

L. f. rathtsu.

1 In these words the accent is shifted 5 Grassmann regards this as a f. of an to a vowel ending in weak cases. adjective samudia-. 2 The final vowel in this word is perhaps 6 See Whitney on AV. iv. 3 7 5. radical in origin (from ya- 'go'). 7 See Lanman 371 '. 3 The V. pi. su-kastias (ix. 46*), presupposes 8 In I. 122' starts seems to be the equi- a stem su-haslt-, but as the form is a m., valent of sirt. See pw. s. v. the reading ought perhaps to be emended 9 Cp. Lanman 372^. to suhaslias with BR. 10 The form dhmam occurs 7 times in ^ hastiiii- (ix. 3'?) means 'having a hand'. the RV., dhiydni' Qx\^ once. VI. Declension. Nouns. Vowel Stems. 271

The forms actually occurring are the following: Sing. N. A. I. m. vfs. — f. dhts, bhls, iris. — 2. m. itthdd/us, ksatra- sr'ls, ghrta-sris, darsata-sris, durd-adkis, mdrya-srls, vUvdio-dkis, sv-adhls. —

f. abhi-sris. — 3, m. agre-nis (VS. vl 2), grama-nis, takva-vfs, deua-vis and deva-vis, patsu-tas-sis, pada-nfs (AV.), pada-vis, pari-vts (VS. vi. 6), parna-vfs, pra-krts (KSI^, pra-nenis, madhyama-sis, manyu-mis, yajna-nis, yajna-pris (VS.— XXVII. 31), vasa-nfs, sadyah-krfs, sena-nfs, skambha-nis (V^. i. 19), syona-Hs. f. pra-kris (AV.), vrata-nis. — B. m. d-rathis'^, pravts, supravis, raikis' sakdsra-starTs, hiranya-vahs. — f. d-dur-mangalis, arunts, kalyanis, kfsnfs, ksonts^, gandharvts, gaurh, Jatrfs^ (AV.), tandris (AV.\ dutis, naptis, nSdis,

mahisis^ (TS. I. 2. 12^), yamts, yatudhanh (AV.), rathfs, laksmfs, lalamfs, vilva-rupfs {TS.l,$. 6''), vrkis, sakatis, sabalis (J^Q.iv. ^.ii^), sasarparis, simhis

(TS. I. 2. 12^), su-mangalis^, startsT.

Ace. A. I. f. dhiyam, bkiyam, sriyam. — 2. m. dur-adhiam, sv-adhiam, adhvara-sriyam, ksaira-sriyam, ghrta-sriyam, jana-sriyam, yajna-sriyam, su-

srlyam, hari-snyam^. — f. abhi-sriyam. — 3. m. gatha-niam, grama-niam (VS. XXX. 2o)j yajha-niam; deva-viam, prati-viam; abki-priyam, ghrta-priyam

(AV.), brafima-priyam. — f. deva-viam'^. — B. m. rathiam, su-praviam. —

f. atharviam, arayiam, kumariam (AV.), kadlain (AV.), gauriam, nadlam, naptiam, nandiam, prapharviam, yamiam, laksmiam (AV.), lalamiam (AV.), vibaliam, viliptiam (AV.), vilidhiam (AV.), visva-rupiam, vrkiam, shnklam, surmiam, stariam '°, spkigiain, svariam.

I. A. I. f. dhiya, bhiya, sriya. — 2. m. du-cihia. — f. avadya-bhiya'-^, a-dhia" (AV.). — B. m. rathia. — f. ti/a-pinjia" (AV.), palslUi''' (AV.),^ mandukia, vesia, sahasra-parnid^^ (AV.), sUrinia, sphigla. — The form iapant may be a contraction for iapanla^K D. A. I. f. dAiyJ, sriye. — 2. m. iti/id-d/iiye, dur-adhie, du-dhle. —

f. a-dhie. — 3. m. gana-sriye (VS. xxii. 30), yajna-priye; jihma-sie, sena-nie XVI. — B. m. rat/iie, su-pravie'^''. — f. nandie, mes'ie, vrkie. (VS. 17). — I. f. dhiyds. — 2. m. du-d/uas, su-dhias. — n. sv-adhias'^^. G.'5 A. — 3. m. gana-sriyas; gatha-mas, manyu-mias'^T . — B. m. ahias, su-pravias.

f. atkarias, dpias'-^, nadias, nisti-grias, prsanias, mesias; srnias. L. f. gaurt (ix. i23) and sarasi (vii, 103') may be locatives containing the normal ending -i.

ivacam (ix. 1 There is also the transition form arTs 9 In agreement with 74^). 10 This form is once (vil. 688) pronounced (VS. VI. 36)., 2 On rathha occurring once or twice for siarydm, being one of the two only examples declension being rathir iva, cp. Lanman 375 (bottom). in the RV. of the f in this a vowel. 3 The N. sing, once (l. 180^) appears pronounced as y before 11 -bhiya were used indepen- without the -s as ksont This word has Accented as \i other forms also according to the deri- dently; the form occurs in a late hymn vative I- declension; cp. Lanman 372 (x. 1073). 12 ending. (bottom). Irregular accentuation of the 13 it be an I. of the deri- 4 The reading of the Mss. in AV. XX. 482 Otherwise may f-declension. is jairXs; the edition has jdnis. vative 14 382-'. 5 This is a transition from the derivative Cp. Lanman 15 There is no example of an ablative. t- declension for the mdhi^T of the RV. 6 The AV. has su-mangali three times; 16 This seems to be the only actual n. declension in the RV. cp. Lanman 377 (top). form of this aratls 17 form ahi-ghnyds (AV.) is a transition 7 There are also the transition forms The devts (AV. Vl. form with shift of accent from the deri- (VI. 45), sakvaris (TS. iv. 4. 4'). metrical vative f-declension. 592); variants (l. 140^) is a purely 18 arums (l. 121^) may be con- lengthening; cp. Lanman 377=. The form for aritnias. 8 This form is also once (Val. 11. lo) used tracted in agreement with a neuter substantive ^gotrdm). 272 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

V. B. m. daksi'^. — f. arayi, mahe-nadi', yami, laksmi (AV.). Du. N. A. A. 2. f. ab/ii-sriya, ghrta-iriya. — 3. m. mana-nid, sadha-nia; senani-grSmanyau (VS. xv. 15). — f. abhi-sriyau (AV.). — B. m. rathia. — f. cakriya, nadia, naptid, yamid, sakthid, srnid; cakriyan (SV,), nddyhc (AV.), sakthiau (AV.)^.

I. B. f. ksonibhydm. — G. A. 3. m.yajna-?iios. — B. f. onios'^, cakrios. — L. B. f. onios, naptlos. PI. N. V. A. I. f. dhiyas, sriyas^. — 2. m. dirghcidhiyas, duradhias, dudh'ias^ 7uina-dhiyas, sic-dhiyas, sv-Sdhias; agni-sriyas , adhvara-sriyas, su- srlyas. — f. SdMas, vycidhias^ (AV.). — 3. m. grama-nias (AV.), devd-vias, pada-vias, sadha-nias; abhi-priyas, kadha-priyas, gana-sriyas, pari-priyis. — f. ab/ti-sriyas, d-priyas (AV.), pra-nias, vdta-pramiyas. — B. m. a/das, apath'ias, rdthias^ su-hastiasT . — f. apaslas (VS. x. 7), ardylas (AV.), aruntas, enias, kalyan'ias, kavasias (VS. xx. 40, 60), gatirias, tiksna-srfigias, ftadias, ndd'icis (AV.), mayUrias^ yatu-dhdnias (AV.), ratkias, laksmias (AV.), vaksias, vi-kesias (AV.), vyasta-kesias (AV.), samudriyas^ sahasra-parnins{ AV.), starias. — With T pronounced as /: once nadyhs (vii. 50*) and 6 forms in the AV., asvataryas, nadyas, naptyas, nddyas, pippalyas, vrksa-sarpyas.

Ace. A. I. f. d/iiyas, b/i'yas (AV.), bkiyds (TS. iv. i. 7^ = VS. xxvii. 7), sr'iyas. — 2. m. durddhias, dud/das, su-sr'iyas^- — f. ddhias (AV.). — 3. m. sad/ia-nlas. — 'B.m.akias, dusprdvias, rat/das. — t. ardyias {A.W.), asta-karnias, kilds'ias, khdrias, dehias, nad'ias, tiaptias, medas, yam'ias, yatu-dhdnias, samudn'yas, sambddha-tandrlas (AV.) 'affliction and exhaustion', starias'^. I. A. I. f. d/nb/ds, srlb/iis'". — 2. m. sv-ddhibhis. — 3. m. gana-sribhis'^'^.

— B. m. hlranya-vdhbhis. — f. kalydnfbhis, ksonibhis, nadibhis, naptlbhis. D. '^ A. 3. m. rta-tiib/iyas^'^, sva-rdbhyas'^^ (VS.xvi. 27), send-ntbkyas'^'' (VS. XVI. 26). — B. f. aparibkyas, nadfbhyas (VS. xxx. 8). G. A. I. f. dhinam and dhiydm, srindm. — 3. f. hiranya-vindm. —

B. m. ah'indm, nadindm 'invokers', rathinam'^'^, — f. arunfndm, krimtndm (AV.), nad'mdm, piiriisindm, svarindm.

L. A. I. f. dJiisn. — B. f. aparfsu, arimhu, nadisu'"'.

3. b. Stems in derivative -T. Lanman, Noun-Inflection 365—400. — Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar 362— 366.

377. I. This declension embraces a very considerable number of stems which are formed by means of the suffix -i (originally -yd) and, except seven

masculines, are restricted to the f gender. It largely supplies the f. form ot words requiring inflexion in more than one gender. Feminine stems are thus

made from nouns in -a, e. g. devi- (m. derd-); from adjectives in -u; e. g. prihv-t- (m. prthu-); from present participles in -ant; e. g. mad ant- 1-

1 Pada dhaksi; cp. RPr. iv. 41. tive J-declension deva-h-isi^'^. IV. 6. y = VS. 2 Treated as a compound in the Pada xvir. 56) 'worshipping the gods'. (vui. 74.15) though malie is "V. 9 Also the transition form slriyas; on 3 The AV. shows no example of -ia. It yahvlas and suparnias see 375 a a. has three transition forms aiidiau,phalgiinyau, '° Also the transition form slribhis (accented aksyau. as a monosyllabic stem). 4 Cp. APr. ni. 61. n Metrical shortening; see Lanman 3722.

5 Also the transition form striyas. 12 There is no example of an Ab. m. or f. 6 This would be vya-dhiyas in the RV. 13 The accent of the G. atas'mtxm 'beggars'

where in compounds ending in -dJii- the 2 would seem to require a stem atasi- and if unaccented is split. not atasi-. 7 See above, 375 B a a, note 3, '4 There is also the transition form strT^u 8 Also the transition form to the deriva- accented as a monosyllable. VI. Declension. Nouns. Vowel Stems. 273

(m. mddant-), -ant, e. g. adat-i- (m. addnt-), or -at, t. g. piprat-i- {va.. piprat-); from perfect participles in -vams, e. g. jagmus-t- (m. jaganvams-); from comparatives in -yams, e. g. ndvtyas-T- (m. ndvTykms-); from words in -tar e. avitr-f- i-^r), g. (m. avitdr-); from adjectives in -tnant, e. g. dhenu-mdt-i- (m. dhenu-mdnt-), and -vant, t. g. dma-vat-i- (m. dma-vant-); from nouns in -a«, e. g. sam-rijn-T- (m. rajan-), -van, e. g. rta-var-i- (m. rta-van-); from adjectives^' in -r«, e. g. arkin-i- (m. arkin-); from compounds ending in -a«f, e. arvac-t- g. (m. arvdnc-), in -

2. There is besides a large group of miscellaneous f. stems of an independent character, having no corresponding m.^, e. g. sdc-i- 'might'. 3. The seven m. sterns^, of which five are proper names, are: Tiraki-, Ndmt-, Fft/iT-, Matali-, Sobhari-; rdstri- 'ruler', siri- 'weaver'. a. The stems of this declension (in contrast with those of the B group of the radical i- declension) do not normally accent the suffix. The exceptions to this rule are of a definite character.

1. When in the first f. group there is a corresponding m. accented on a final syllable which is liable to be reduced in such a way as to be incapable of bearing the accent, is the acute thrown forward on the -T; e. g. m. uru-, f. urv-i-; m. 7ietdr; f. netr-t-; m. ad-dnt; i. ad-at-l- ; to., praty-anc-, f. praiic-t; m. -Man-, f.-gkn-t-. When the m. ends in a, the accent also in several stems remains on the corresponding -T; thus m. devd-, f. devT--, papa- 'evil', i. papT-'i; \n. puro-gavd- 'leader', i. piro-gavi-; m. ramd- 'night', f. rami-; m. vamrd' 'ant', f. vamri-. More usually, however, the accent of such feminines

is thrown back on the first syllable 5; thus m. ayasd- 'made of iron', f. ayast-; m. aritsi-

'red', f. arusT-; xa.. gdndharvd- 'belonging to the ', f. gandharvi-; m. tavisd-

'strong', f. tdvisJ- 'strength'; m. parusa- 'reed', f. parumi- 'reedy', N. of a river; m. paliid-

'grey', i. pdliknJ-; m. mahisd-(' 'buffalo', f. vidhisT-; m. rohiid- 'ruddy', f. rohiiu- 'ruddy cow', m. sam-gayd- 'procuring prosperity for the household', f. sam-gdyl-; m. iydvd- 'brown', f. syavi-; m. syetd- 'white', f. syem- 'white cow'. 2. Again, the miscellaneous group of feminines hardly ever accents the final -T of the stem except when it is a proper name, a shift of accent having here probably taken place to indicate a change of meaning; thus a?-a«^am~- 'Forest-goddess', arundhaii-^ (AN.) N. of a plant and a star, indrant- 'Indra's wife', rodast- N. of the Asvins' wife, vadhri- mati- N. of a mythical female, varunam- 'Varuna's wife', savast- N. of Indra's mother, sinivaR- N. of a goddess; and the river names, anjast-, asikni-^ (but asikni- 'black' and 'night'), go-mat-i- (but go-mat-l- 'rich in cows'), sutudn-.

Inflexion.

378. The inflexion of the derivative i- stems stands in marked contrast with that of the radical f- stems in three respects: (i) no -s is added in the N. sing, masculine or feminine; (2) the endings diverge considerably from the normal ones, the Sing. A. taking -m, the D. -ai, the Ab. G. -as, the L. -am, the du. N. A. -i, the pi. N. A. -s; (3) stems accented on the final vowel shift the acute to the ending in the weak cases of the sing., in the G. L. du., and the G. pi.

1 Adjectives ending in -a do not form adjectives and all participles ending in -a their f. in -* unless they are accented on the form their f. with -a. final syllable, when the accent almost always 5 This is the converse of the accentuation shifts to the first syllable ; e. g. drusi- from in the B group of the radical -i declension, arusa-; but papa- has papt- beside papa-. where the m. in unaccented -a throws the 2 A list of these is given by Grassmann, acute on the final -t of the f. Worterbuch 1722—23. 6 Similarly varfdf- 'protector', f. varuir-i-. 3 Cp. ZuBATY, zu den altindischen mann- 7 Originally a present participle * d-ntndhat-i- lichen J'-stammen, Sitzungsberichte d. Bohm. 'not hindering'. Ges. d. Wiss. 1897, XlX (treats also of the 8 dsikni- also occurs once as the N. of radical <-stems used in the masc). the river. 4 Beside papa-. The great majority of

IndO'-arische Philologle. I. 4, 18 274 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

The forms actually occurring, if made from devi- 'goddess', would be as follows:

Sing. N. devi. A. devim. I. devyi. D. devydi. Ab. devyds. G. devyas. L. devyain. V. devi. Du. N. A. devi, V. devT. D. Ab. devibhyam. G. L. devyos.

PI. N. isVz'/f. A. devis. I. devibhis. D. devibhyas. Ab. devibhyas.

G. devind?n. L. devhu. V. afewfj'. Forms actually occurring are the following: Sing. N. The m. forms are: ndmi, pftki, mdtali, rdstrl, sobharT. The f. forms are very common, being made from nearly 300 stems in the RV. Among the most frequent are: prthivi 'earth' (57), devt (48), sdrasvati (43) N. of a goddess, mahf 'great' (35), ucchdntt 'shining' (16), yati 'going' (14), jdnitrT 'mother' (10), brhati 'great' (10), ghrtdcT 'filled with ghee' (9), maghoni 'bountiful' (9), stri^ 'woman' (3)^. A. m. ndmim. — The f. is formed from over 100 stems in the RV. Among the commonest forms are: prthivim (62), ma/iim^ (35), devim (18), tdvistm (13), urvim (9) 'wide', pipyi'inm'' (9) 'swelling' '. I. This case is formed with the normal ending -a. The only m. form is ndmya. But there are about 40 f forms in the RV. In more than two-thirds of these the suffix is pronounced as a vowel* -ia (in oxytones -id), in the rest as a semivowel -ya (in oxytones -yd). The stem sdmi- 'labour' has, beside sdmya, the contracted form sdmT, which also appears in the compound su-sdml

'with great care'. At the end of a Pada and before vowels'' this I. sdmT is shortened to sdmi^- The forms occurring are: i. dnvya 'subtile', asvabhidhdnya (AV.) 'halter', dsvavatya 'furnished with horses', dsiknya'^ (AV.), kundrndcya 'house lizard', kumbhyd (TS.iii. 2.8'*) 'jar', gstu-mdtya 'spacious', gayatryd (TS. ir. 2.4^) a metre, ghrtdcya, citdntya 'observing', citdyantya 'appearing', /ff^^O"'

(TS. 11. 21.4*), a metre, tmdnya 'by oneself, ddvidyiitatya 'glittering', devdcya 'directed towards the gods', ddivya (AV.) 'divine', 7idvyasya 'new', pdtnya 'wife', mddhu-matya 'accompanied by sweetness', rShinya, vdsvya 'good', vdjavatya 'rich in treasure', vdsya (AV.) 'knife', visvd-bhesajya (AV.) 'all-healing', visvdcya 'universal', visvya 'everywhere' (adv.), idcya 'might', sdmya, sarmaydntyd 'pro- tecting', simya 'work', satracya 'attentive', samicya (Kh. iii. iqS) a goddess, sdrasvatyd (AV.), soma-vatya 'accompanied with Soma', stibhantyd 'praising', hdrinya 'yellow', hiranydya'^° 'golden'. — Oxytones with shift of accent: annadyd (AV.) 'proper food', asiknyd, devyd, puranyd 'ancient', prthivyd, mahyd, samlinyd 'similar', sadkaranyd^^ 'common', sucyd 'needle', sautrdmanyd (AV.) a kind of Indra sacrifice. The TS. and VS. also have urvyd as an adverb 'afar', which in the RV. appears only in the modified form iirviyd.

D. The ending looks like -ai, e. g. devy-di; but it is doubtless in

origin the normal ending -e fused with the suffix -7a, i. &. -yai^-ya-e'^^. Only 13 forms (all f) occur in the RV. These are, besides a few others from the later

1 Cp. Wiedemann, 86.27,211, footnote. 7 This also occurs in the compound 2 In the AV. there are also the transition tirvi-iiiik (vi. 242), if tirvi- = the adv. inslr. forms a-durmangali, su-mangali, nadu In RV. urvyd. I. l8o5 ksont has perhaps dropped its -j owing 8 The compound su-sdmi also occurs once to the following .;-. in the TS. VS. as well as the RV. 3 Perhaps to be read uncontracted as 9 Probably an error for asiknyas; see mahiam in X. 50^; vaifim (11. 1 18) is also to Whitney on AV. v. 138. be read as vdjiiavi. ^o For hiranyayya.

4 Perfect participle oi J>T- 'swell'. " Cp. Lanman 368 (top). 5 There is also the transition form nadtm 12 An indication of this origin is perhaps (AV.). to be found in the fact that of the 13 stems 6 The vocalic pronunciation seems to be the in the RV. taking this dative only one, commoner in the AV. also; cp. Lanman 381. patnyai, has the vocalic pronunciation -iai —:

VI. -Declension. Nouns. Vowel Stems. 275

Samhitas: i. arvacyai (VS.XXIL24) 'hitherward', dvacyai (VS.xxn. 24) 'downward', a'-z/jya^a? 'not desiring', iyatyai 'so great', «

Ab. The ending looks like -as, e. g. prthivy-as; but it is doubtless the normal ending -as fused with the suffix -yd, i. e. -yas = -ya-as^. Only five forms occur in the RV., besides a few others in the later Samhitas: avadydvatyas (AV.) 'disgraceful', urvdsyas N. of a nymph, jdgatyas (VS. XIII. 56), jivantyasi 'living', dur-admanyas (VS. 11. 20) 'bad food', pdtantyas 'flying', prthivyds, brhatyas (AV.), mahyas^. G. The ending is the same as in the Ab. and of similar origin. m. tiraicydsT, pfthyas, sobharyas. — f. The forms occurring in the RV.^ are:

1. amsu-mdtyas'^ N. of a river, ainhu-bhedyas (VS.xxiii. 28) 'having a narrow slit', a/fwaVafyaj N. of a people, urjdyaiityas 'vigorous', osadhyas _ (VS.L2 5) 'plant', tdvisyas, danumatyas 'rich in drops', mdms-pdcanyas 'flesh-cooking', rdtryas, vivdsvatyas 'shining', sdmyas, sShicatyas 'shining', siisyaniyas 'about to bear'. — 2. u?~vyds 'earth', devyds, prthivyds, mahatyds 'great', yatyds, yatyds 'going', vadhrimatyds N. of a woman, siriyds'^°.

L. This case seems to be formed with the ending -am, e. g. devy-dm; but it may be due to the fusion of a particle *-am'^^ with the suffix -ya. It

is formed from 15 stems in the RV., where the pronunciation -iam is con- siderably less than half as common'^ as -yam. Forms occurring are: r. dsiknyam, ucckdntyam, udicyam (TS. IL 4. 14')^ jdgatyam (VS. xxxviii. 18), jahndvyam 'race of ', drsddvatyam N. of a river, ndryam (Kh. IV. 133). 'woman', pdrusnyam N. of a river, prdcyam (TS.11.4. 14^), yavydvatyam 'rich in streams', rdtryam, varandvatya?n (AV.) N. of a river, vasdvyam 'treasury', sdcyam, sdrasvatyam N. of a river, soma-krdyanyam (VS. viii. 54) 'serving as the price of Soma'. — 2. aranyanydm, astrydm 'fire-place', asandydm (AV.) 'stool', gavtnydm (Kh. iv. 133) 'groin', gayatrydm (VS. AV.), catvarimsydm 'fortieth', jyesthaghtiydm. (AV.) N. of an asterism, devydm, naracydm (AV.) N. of a river, prthivydm, striydm (AV.)^3.

(and here the i is preceded by two con- dhtityas, krsyds, deva-keiyds, rairyds, sirsaktyds; sonants). probably also yonyas (vi. 121''), Y3.&3. yonyd. 1 To be pronounced -iai. 7 Pronounced tiraicias. But cp. RoTH, 2 This is an emendation for the reading ZDMG. 48, 115 (bottom). kalyanyai of the edition; cp. Lanman 3832. 8 This case is formed from more stems

3 With split t as in the radical T- stems. in the AV. than in the RV. ; cp. Lanman 355. 4 There are also the transition forms 9 In about 15 per cent of the following bhiydi, irzyaV (VS. XIX. 94), /iriya'z (VS. Xiv. 35) genitives the ending is pronounced -ids. 10 from the radical T- declension, and from the There are also half a dozen transition i- declension deva-hiilyai, turydi, nirrtyai, forms from the 2- declension in the RV. pusfyai, bhujydi, bhftyai, srutyai. anumdtyns, drdiyds, nirrtyas, ffsnyds, bhutnyds 5 -yds is read -ias 4 times out of 25 in (once with crasis in bhumyopari x. 753^ the RV. : prihivias 3 times s.n& jtvantias once, yuvatyds; there are many others in the AV.; always for metrical reasons, cp. Lanman 384 a.sjdmyas (also Kh. v. 5 19); see Lanman 3852. (top). " Cp. Brugmann, Grundriss 2, 265 (p. 619). 6 There are also the transition forms from 12 It is much less common than this is the z-declension, ndbhyas, bhumyds, hetyds; and in the AV. from the AV. a-bhiiiyds, d-rdtyds, d-iasiyds, 13 There are also two transition forms 18* 276 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

V. This case is formed, by shortening the final, from 38 stems (all f ) in the RV. Examples are: devi {2'^), sarasvati {16), prtkivi{ii), maghom{g), vibhavari 'radiant' (8), mahi (6). From the TS.: dmbali (vii. 4. 19') 'mother', kdmpila-^ vasini (vii. 4. 19'; VS.) 'living in KampTla', darvi (1.8.4') 'ladle', /«/«/ (iv. 4. i2't),

mdnduki (iv. 6. i""; VS.) 'frog', deva-yajani (VS.) 'whereon gods are adored'. Du. N. A. V. This form in the RV. ends in -i exclusively, being made

probably with the ending -i (like the f. du. of the derivative -a stems), which

coalesces vifith the -t of the stem '- There is only one m. form, the V. madhvX

'fond of sweetness', an epithet of the Asvins. The f. is very frequent, being made from 76 stems in the RV. and from over 20 in the VS. The commonest forms in the RV. are: ridasiiZ']) 'the two worlds', dyiva-prt/iivi {6^) 'heaven and earth', maki {2']), urvi (20), prthivi (20), devi {i^,), samici (11) 'united', brhati (10), yahvi (6) 'active', aksi (6) 'eyes', prthvi (5). From the TS.: N. chdndasvati 'desiring' and sUrya-patm (iv.3.ii') 'having the sun as husband',

V. iirvi, rodast, patnt (iv. 7. 15*).

a. The -J is twice metrically shortened in frthivi (11. 31^; lU. 54^) and in mahi (IV. 56^; X. 931). b. In the AV. three stems of this declension form transition duals = according

to the radical i- declension: aksyau, dniiyau, phalgunyau^ ; in other texts: ^ avTnyaii [TS.m. 3. lo') 'the groins', painyau (VS. xxxi. 22), rcbhatyau and su-parnyau (Kh. I. 37).

I. aksibhySm {KY.), kumbhibhyam (VS.x1x.27), jostribhyam (VS.xx1.51) 'cherishing', m&dhucibhyam (VS.) 'sweetness-loving', mddhvibhyam (VS.). D. rodasibhyam. — Ab. aksibhydm, dydvaprthivibhyam (VS. xxxvii. 18).

G. aksyos'' (AV.; TS. ill. 2.5=), Artniyos (TS. iv. 5. 2^) 'ends of the bow', ninyos'' drtnyos (VS.xvi. 9), divas-prtkivyos^, ^secret' , pari-nrtantyos {KM.) 'dancing round', rodasyos^. — L. aksyos (AV.), ardnyos, drjunyos, dy&vaprthivyus (VS. XX. 10), pdtantyos, rodasyos, samicyos. PI. N. V. The ending seems to be simply -s, but it is doubtless the normal ending -as, which originally coalesced with the suffix -ya to -yas, the latter then contracting to -is. In the m. the only example is siris. But the f. is very frequent, being tormed irom 166 stems in the RV., and occurring in the independent parts of the TS. at least 25 and of the VS. at least 40 times. The commonest forms are: devis (43), purvis (36) 'many', osadhis (27), vdnis (12) 'songs', pdtnis (11), mahis (11), bhatis (8) 'shining', yahvis (7), devaydntXs (6) 'serving the gods', vdsvis^ (6). In the Khilas occur the 7 forms a-Iaksmis {11.6^), anis (iv.S'), devis {iii.xo''), pavamanis (ill. 10') N. of certain

hymns, bahvis (11. 8^ etc.) 'many', svastydyams (iii. 10'), hiranydyis (v. 15").

a. Transitions from this to the radical T- declension are almost unknown to the

RV. : striyas is the only certain example, sjii prsanyas and stipamyas are probably such; the tendency to use such transition forms is only incipient even in the AV. 9, where K«yafi°(once) and «/fl?a{yaj- (once) occur II. In the Khilas also, occur the 'Caxe.&iotms ghftacyas

from the radical T- declension : sriyam (AV.) 5 With the first member of the Dvandva and dutyam; five from the i- declension: inflected in the sing. G. puramdhydm, bhumyani^ bhftydm, yuvat- 6 Either the G. of nint- (m. nitiyd-) or yam, samgatyam; besides at least 10 addi- shortened for ninydyos. tional ones from the AV. : dvydm, dkiliyam, 7 Once (vi. 24>5) used in the sense of an ciUyain, devd-hutydm, nabhydjn (4- VS. XXIV. l), Ab. pfstydm, bhutydm, yonydm (-j-VS.), vedydviy 8 ika-patnis (AV. X. 8^^) 'having one hus- sdviitydvi. band' is N. pi. f., not N. sing. m. 1 Cp. Brugmann, Grundriss 2, 287 (p. 644). 9 There seem to be no such transitions 2 There are also the transition forms from in the TS. ; but there are at least 3 to the i- the radical I- declension ksoni and once nadi. declension: osadhayas (iv. 1.44), revdtayas i This form in -yau becomes universal in (iv. 2. Ill), pdinayas (v. 2. 112). the post- Vedic language. 1° Beside urvis which occurs 9 times, 4 The Mss. in AV. v. 410 read aksos; see n And yet this form is the only one in Whitney's note. the post-Vedic language. VI. Declension. Nouns. Vowel Stems. 277

'^' ("'• 1°')- The vs. has about vvvl',, .fr'l .. ^f^""'"'«J'«^ lo such forms; devym 1^ f"'""^"! C^^"'- 36) beside/fl/«ri- (VI. phalavatyas {X.KI1. 22), bahvyas vf^ . ; -A^ f""' 34), IX1X.44J beside bahvis, mahanamnyas (XXUI. mailravarunyas 35), (xxiv. 2), maitryas (yiyiiv . 8), j/fl^js/optw (XXIV. 5), V. vamryas (xxxvii. z^aijj/a./^z/vaf 4J, (xxiv. 5), sarasvatyas (xxiv. 4). b. Ihere are no transitions from the radical T- declension to this one in the RV., and in the AV. only nadis (beside nadyas) and laksmts (beside laksmyas). But the transi- tions irom the declension are > numerous: angulls (AV.), avanTs, ajdms, utts, fsifs (AV.), dhamams {Xy.), naktJs, nabhJs (AV.), nirrtis, niskrtTs, pdrsiiis (AN.), PuramdhTs,'-<-'•>.ifslis[KN.\ bhumis, visva-krstTs, irimsT-, sdyonls. ' /'

A. This case is identical in form with the N., and its origin is doubdess similar. It is very frequent, being made from more than 100 stems in the RV. The conimonest forms are: purvfs (40), osadhis (24), mahfs (18), brhatis ddsis (12), (g) 'demonesses', pdinfs (7), pf^atls (7)= 'dappled mares'. I. This case is fairly frequent, being made from 32 stems in the RV. The commonest forms are: sdcibhis (36), tdvinbhis (13), idmJbhis (8), osadhibhis (6), prsatlbhisi (5). The TS. has also ilmibhis (v. 2. 12'), sucibhis (v. 2.11'-^); theVS. amnibhis . (xn.74), jdgatibhis (i. 21), sthalibhis (xix. 27) 'cooking-pots'. D. This case is rare, being formed from only three stems in the RV. and a few others in the later Samhitas: avyadhinlbJiyas (VS.xvi. 24) 'assailing bands', osadkibAyas, kesinibhyas (AV.) 'hairy', gandharvd-paimbhyas (VS. AV.) 'having Gandharvas for spouses', ghosinibhyas (AV.) 'noisy', tdvinbhyas'^, tisthantlbhyas (VS. xxn. 25) 'standing',

bakvfndm, bhahjattndm 'breaking', bhatlndm, bhurijatindm 'gladdening', mahmdm ">, yatindm. This rule does not, however, hold in the SV. and VS., which have mahinam (VS. i. 70; iv. 3); nor in the AV. where the forms narasamsfnatn 'eulogies' and rathajiteytnam 'chariot-conquering' occur. Of the remaining 28 genitives in the RV. * the commonest are: sdsvatmam (10), osadkinam^ (9), mdnusTnam (8), idcmam (4), iyi'mnam''° (3) 'having departed'. From the VS.: dvyadhininam. (xvi. 21). L. This case is fairly common, being formed from 30 stems (all f) in the RV. The most frequent forms are: osadhisu (20), mdnusisu (8), «i/4«j-fjz^ 'neigh- bouring', jdgatisu (2) 'females', tdvistsu {2), yakvtsu (2), rohinisu'^'^ (2). The rest occur only once 'each '^ From Khila iii. 15'': siiddha-dantisu 'white-toothed'.

1 This form should perhaps be read as 8 The G, ndvyasTnam is once used in srenayas in v. 597. agreement with the m. marutdm. 2 Also the transitions from the radical r- 9 kamnam, with contracted -yd-, is the declenslon arums and yatudhanu (AV.). only G. pi. of kanya- in the RV., kanyandm 3 The stems forming this case in the RV. occurs once in the AV. ; see Lanman 399 are enumerated by Lanman 396. (top). 4 nari- 'woman', by shortening its final 1° Perfect participle of i- 'go'. vowel, forms its D. according to the i- 11 There is also the transfer form from declension : ndribhyas. the i- declension svdkdkriisu, in which the 5 Irregularly accented on the final of the long vowel is perhaps metrical. On the stem, otherwise, sdsvaiT-. other hand sirJsu (accent) is a transfer to

6 Or 7 including stri- : strtnam. the radical T-declension. 12 7 On the exceptions mahinam (x. 1341), Lanman enumerates the stems, 399 yattnam (l. 158^), devayatmam (l. 361), see (bottom). J.ANMAN 398 (bottom). 278 I. Allgemeines vnv Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

4. a. Radical stems in -/.

379. No nominal /-stems are derived from roots originally ending in -z, as these (some six or seven) have all joined the consonant declension by adding a determinative -f- There are, however, about a dozen stems in

which i is probably radical in 'a secondary sense, as representing a reduced form of roots ending in -a'. These are with one or two exceptions m. com- pounds formed with -dM = Ma- 'put': api-dhi- 'covering', a-dhi- 'pledge', utsa-dhi- 'receptacle of a spring', vda-dhi- 'receptacle of water', upa-dhi- 'part of the wheel between nave and felly', garbha-dh'i- 'nest', ni-dhi- 'treasury', pari-dJii- 'fence', prati-dhi- 'cross-piece of car-pole', pra-dhi- 'felly', seva-dhi- 'treasure', sd-dhi- 'abode'; perhaps also osa-dhi- f as a shortened form of osa-dhi- 'plant'. Besides these there is prati-sthi- f. 'resistance', from stha- 'stand', and probably the redupUcated stem yayi- 'speeding', in which the -i is secondarily reduced through the older form yayi- from the -a of the root ya- 'go'. These few stems have nothing distinctive in their inflexion, which follows that of the derivative i-stems in every particular. The forms which occur from these words are the following: Sing. N. a-dhi-s, osa-dki-s, nidhi-s, pari-dAi-s, prati-sihi-s, yayi-s, sd-dhi-s. — A. utsa-d/ii-m, uda-dki-jjt, 6sa-dhi-m, garbha-dhi-m, ni-dhi-m, pari-dhi-m, pra- dki-m, yayi-in, seva-dhi-m. — I. yayina. — Ab. uda-dhes. — Du. N. upa- dhi, pra-dhi. — PI. N. Ssa-dhayas, ni-dhdyas, pari-dhdyas, prati-dhdyas, pra- dhdyas. — A. api dhin, uda-dhin, ni-dhin, pari-dhin, pra-dhin. — I. ni- dhibhis. — G. ni-dhinAm. — L. ni-dhisu.

4. b. Derivative stems in -/.

Lanman, Noun Inflection 365 —400. — Whitney, Grammar 335—340, 343. — Cp. Reichelt, Die abgeleiteten i- und z^-slamme, BB. 25, 238— 252,

380. This declension embraces a large number of m. and f stems. There are comparatively few neuter stems; and, except the N. A. sing, and pL, neuter forms are rare, not occurring .at all in several cases. The regular inflexion is practically the same in all genders, except that the N. A. sing, and pi. n. differ from the m. and f , and the A. pi. m. and f differ from each other. There are several peculiarities here as regards the formation of the stem, the endings, and accentuation. The final vowel of the stems shows Guna in three of the weak cases of the singular (D. Ab. G.) as well as in the V. sing, and the N. pi. m. f , while it is abnormally strengthened in the

L. sing. The normal ending -as of the Ab. G. sing, is reduced to -s, while that of the L. sing, is lost. Oxytone stems, when the vowel is changed to

_)>, throw the accent on a following vowel not as Svarita but as Udatta; and even on the -nam of the G. pi., though the stem vowel in that case does not lose its syllabic value.

a. The only word which distinguishes strong forms is sdkhi- 'friend', which takes Vrddhi in its strong stem sdkhay-. These strong forms are frequent: Sing. N. sdkha^, A. sdkhdyavi. Du. N. A. sdkhdya ^ and sdkhdyait. PI. N. sdkhdyas. This word has two further irregularities, the simple stem sdkhi- adding -e in the D. sdkhy-e, and the abnormal ending -ur in the Ab. G. sdkhy-ur. The other forms occurring are regular: Sing. I. sdkhya, V. sdkhe. PI. A. sdkhin, I. sdkhibhis, D. Ab. sdkhibhyas, G. sdkhTnam. Eight com- pounds in the RV. ' are inflected in the same way (also soma-sakhdj VS. IV. 20); but of four others, which have joined the a- declension, there occur the forms A. drdvaydl-

sakha-m (x.39">), 'H. ydvayai-saihd-s [yi. 26^), h. pataydtiy-sakha-ni) and jnandaydi-sakha-m {1. 4^).

1 above, in -i See stems derivative (307). 4 sdkhayd occurs 6 times (also VS. xxvm. 7), 2 Cp. Lindner 56 and Lanman 453. sdkhdyau only once. 3 See J. Schmidt, KZ. 29, 526, note '. 5 See Lanman 400 3. :

"VI. Declension. Nouns. Vowel Stems. 279

b. I. The stem path, when it means 'husband' and is uncompounded, shows irregular inflexion in the Sing. D. and G. (like sakhi-) and the L.: T). pdtye, G.pityur^, L. patyau When it means 'lord's or is compounded, it is regular: D. tataye, b^hasPaiaye, G. pates, praja-pates(TS.), L. gd-patau. — z. The stem ya;«-. 'wife' also takes the abnormal exiAing -ur in the G. sing.: Jdnyur^. This stem has the further irregularity of forming Its JS. smg. jam according to the derivative F- declension. — 3. The stem ari- 'devout' IS irregular in forming several cases like the radical t- stems (except in accentuation) Sing. A. aryam (beside arim), G. arydsK PI. N. A. m. f. aryds. The VS. has also the N. sing. a7'is beside the arts of the RV. c. Twenty-seven stems in the RV. show forms according to the derivative /- declen- sion m the D. Ab. G. L. sing. f. 4, perhaps from a desire to add a distinctively f. ending in a declension which does not distinguish genders in these cases. There is a steady increase of such forms in the later Samhitas; thus while the RV. has only 7 datives in -ai from 2- stems, the VS. has about 40. d. In the RV. 4 or 5 stems show the inHuence of the n- declension in the incipient use of the ending -m in the N. A. n. du., {l)-ni and in N. A. n. pi. ; and in the I. sing., stems taking the ending -na are already 5 times as numerous as those adding the normal -a.

Inflexion.

381. The N. sing. m. f. always takes -s\ the A. simply -m. The D. Ab. G. the y. gunate suffix, to which the Ab. G. add only -s instead of -as. The L. sing, has an altogether abnormal form ending in -a or -au. The N. pi. m. f gunates the -i, to which the normal ending -as is added. The A. pi. in the

m. adds -n, in f. -s, the before which the vowel is lengthened. The G. pi. always takes -nam, lengthening the preceding vowel. The frequent adjective Slid- 'bright' may be used to illustrate the forms actually occurring m the three genders:

Sing. N. m. i. suds, n. Slid. A. m. i. suctm, n. si'ici. I. m. si'icya, s'lidna, f. si'icya, sucT, siid. D. m. {. n. sucaye. Ab. m. f si'tces. G. m. f n. Slices.

L. m. f. n. siica, sucau. V. m. f. suce.

Du. N. A. V. m. f n. suet. I. m. i. n. sudbhyam. D. m. si'icibhyam.

Ab. m. f si'idbhyam. G. m. f. si'tcyos. L. m. i. n. si'tcyos.

f. PI. N. m. sucayas. N. A. n. sueI, Slid, sucmi. A. m. site, I. sucis.

I. m. f. si'idbhis. D. m. i. si'icibhyas. Ab. m. f n. si'icibhyas. G. m,

L. m. f. n. si'idsu. Forms actually occurring are the following: Sing. N. m. This form is very frequent, being made from nearly 250 stems in the RV. The commonest examples are; agnis (389) 'fire', kav{s (90) 'sage', hdris (58) 'tawny', brhas-Jtdtis (52) 'Lord of Prayer', suds (38) 'bright', rsis (32) 'seer', brdhmanas-pdiis (23) 'Lord of Prayer', dtithis (20) 'guesf. a. The stem vi- 'bird', besides the regular N. vis, which occurs 6 times, has the

anomalously gunated form ve-s'^ , which occurs 5 times in the RV. b. The pronominal forms nd-ki-s (50) and ma-ii-s (13) 'no one' are old nominatives which have become indeclinable.

N. f. This form is frequent, being made from 136 stems in the RV. The commonest examples are: dditis (78) 'freedoin', su-matis (22) 'bene- volence', ratis (22) 'gift', nabhis (19) 'navel', waZ/j- (18) 'thought', j'«z'a/'/f (18) 'maiden', bhUmis (12) 'earth', prd-matis (11) 'providence'^.

' This ending is probably due to the 5 Except the irregular m. sdkha and the analogy of the words of relationship, fitur i.jdnT{jdms in AV. XX. 482 is an emendation). etc.; cp. KZ. 25, 289 and 242 f. 6 There is also the transition form from » The VS., however, has pdtye visvasya the radical t- declension vesa-sri-s 'beautifully bhumanas 'lord of the whole world'. adorned' (TS.). 3 Cp.BB. 25,242; Oldenberg, ZDMG. S4i 7 Cp. Reichelt, BB. 25, 250. 49-78. 8 Also the transition forms from the «- 4 Cp. Reichelt, BB. 25, 234—238, and declension aranyanis, osadhis, napiis (AV.), KZ. ratris (AV., VS. xxxvu. J. Schmidt, 27, 382. 21). 28o I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

N. A. n. This form has no ending'. It is made from 37 stems in the RV. The commonest examples are: mdhi (84) 'great', bhilri (47) 'much', sv-asti kdi-di 'heart'^ From other Sarnhitas: dtt-abkisasii (yS.y (35) 'welfare', (9) . s) 'blameless', «-«

(VS. II. 27) 'not single-horsed', atma-sdni (VS. xix. 48) 'life-winning', eka-nemi (AV.) 'having one felly', ir/w'(VS.x.2o) 'active'(?), /&ja/'ra-z/«7Z2(VS.i. 17) 'devoted to warriors', gayatrd-vartani (TS.iii. 1. 10'; VS.xi.-8) 'moving in GayatrT measures', dddhi (AV., VS., Kh.iii. 16=) 'sour milk', pasu-sdni (VS.x1x.48) 'cattle-winning', pfsni{PiN) 'dappled', brakma-vdni {NS.l.^^) ^dtvoted. to Brahmans', loka-sdni (VS. XIX. 48) 'causing space', vddhri (AV.) 'emasculated', vari^ (VS. xxi. 61)

'choiceworthy', sajata-vdni (VS. I. 17) 'conciliating relations'. A. m. This form is very frequent, being made from 205 stems in the RV. and occurring more then 1200 times. The commonest examples are: agnim (269), rayim (180) 'wealth', yonim (61) 'receptacle', pdtim (49) 'lord' or 'hus- band', dhim (40) 'serpent', ddrim (30) 'rock', kavim (28), dtithim (25), brhaspdtim (25), hdrim (24), urtnim (23) 'wave', puramdhim (8) 'bountiful', yayim (2) '(speeding) cloud', arim^ (2) 'devout' s.

f. This is a frequent form, being made from 156 stems in the RV. and occurring more than 600 times. It is thus about half as common as the m. The examples occurring oftenest are: su-matim (41), su-siutim (35) 'excellent praise', vrstim (26) 'rain', matim (22), ratim (20), bkumim {ig), puramdhim (5), rayim (4)*. I. m. This case is formed in two ways. i. Five stems in the RV. add the normal ending a, before which the -i is generally pronounced as y, but half a dozen times as a vowel: pdtya 'husband', sdkhya, urmyiT, pavyd 'felly', rayyd^^ — 2. Owing to the influence of the /z-declension 25 stems in the

RV. add -na instead of the normal -a: agnina^ dfighrina (VS. 11. 8) 'foot',

ddrinS, aslnS 'sword', dhina, urmind, kavina, kasind 'fist', kiki-divind 'blue jay', jamddagnina N. of a seer, devdpina N. of a man, dhasind 'draught', panind 'niggard', pdtind 'lord', pdprina 'delivering', paridh'ind (VS.xviii. 63; TS.v. 7. 7^)

'fence', /««/«« (VS. 1. 1 6) 'hand', ///«««« (Kh.iii. 15'), bfhas-pdtind, manina^g&ai', yayind, rayina, rasmina 'rein', vddkrind, vavrind 'vesture', vasiznd (VS.xxv.'j) 'bladder', vfsa-nabhind 'having strong naves', vrsnind 'strong', si'icind, sdsnind 'bountiful'.

f. This case is formed in two ways, i- About 30 stems in the RV. add the normal ending -a, before which the -i is pronounced as a vowel in about three-fourths of the occurrences of this form, and as y in the rest'. The forms occurring are (a) oxytones: ahtya 'eighty', utyA 'aid', kTrtyd^° (AV.) 'fame', panktya (VS. xxiii. 33) a metre, pHya 'draught', pustyd (AV. TS.) 'prosperity', matyd, mithatyd 'emulation', vasatyd 'abode', vrstya, sanyd (VS. v. 7; TS. IV. 2. i^) 'gain', su-kirtyd 'praise', su-matyd, su-stutyd, svastys. (VS.

' The only i- stem taking -m is the pro- 7 Pronounced Urmia, sometimes alsopdtia, nominal ki-m, probably owing to the false sakhia. analogy of ka-in. 8 ghfnlva (n. 336) possibly stands for 2 Lanman 377 enumerates the forms. ghfni-iva (Pada -i-iva), ghfnl then possibly 3 The Pada text reads vari. According being a contracted I. ioz ghrnya; cp. Lanman to BR. vary a here stands for vdryam a. 379 (middle). 4 Also arydm formed like a radical i- 9 On the other hand -ya is pronounced stem (though differently accented). S times as often as -ia in the AV.; see 5 There are also the transitions from the t- Lanman 380. declension pfthini and sdbharim. 'o AH the Mss. but one read kiriya or 6 Also the transfers from the u declension klriya; see Whitney's note on x. 6^7. aranyanim, onim, 6§adhim, ratrim (AV.), snthilifn (SV.). VI. Declension. Nouns. Vowel Stems. 281

vm. 15; TS. I. 4. 44'); (b) otherwise accented: abhi-sastya (AV.) 'curse', aratya (A V.) 'malignity', dvartya 'distress', asdnya 'thunderbolt', akutya 'purpose', dbhuiya 'ability', htya 'sacrifice', jdlpyJ 'whispering', tfptya (AV.) 'satisfaction', tvisyS 'brilliance', devd-hutya 'invocation of the gods', dhrajya 'impulse'; nabhya (VS. xxv. 9), p&rmya 'heel', piiramdhya, pustya (TS. in. i. 5'), prd- ntatya, bhi'ttya (AV.) 'growth', bh&mya, rdmhya 'speed', r/ijya, 'direction', rucya (AV.) 'lustre', vicya 'seduction', sdkiya (VS. xi. 2; TS. iv. i. 53) 'power', su-bhutya (AV.) 'welfare', stnya 'sickle', svddhitya (AV.) 'knife', hdrsya 'excitement'. -/' 2. A contracted form in is made by 35 stems in the RV. and occurs more than twice as often as the uncontracted -ya. The forms occurring are: a'-«V/r 'thoughtlessness', d-prabhuti 'XxViSs. effort', a-zya//i/ 'sure-footedness', dhuti 'oblation', S//, rju-nXti 'right guidance', cittl 'understanding', justi 'favour', didhiti 'devotion', du-stuti and du-stuti 'faulty hymn', dhiti^ 'thought', ni-siti 'kindling', pdri-vistT 'attendance', puro-jiti 'previous acquisition', prd- niti 'guidance', prd-bhuti 'violence', prd-yati 'offering', prdyuti 'absence', wa/'/, variant 'felly', visti 'effort', viti 'enjoyment', vrsd, sakti and idkti, srusti^ 'vi^illingness', sd-huii 'joint invocation', su-diti 'bright radiance', sii-niti 'good guidance', su-mati, j-z/-^??/? 'being well fixed', su-sastf (Kh.ii. 10') 'good recitation', su-stuti, hdsta-cyuti 'quick motion of the hand'. Also su-papiani {i.\Z2^Y

-z") also {yi. 18'°) 'with swift flight' (in Pada with ; perhaps the two forms heti

'missile' and -isfi (i. i8o<) 'desire', which occurring before r- axe given by the Pada as hetih^ and -istih. a. This form is further shortened to -/" in about a dozen words* in the RV., occurring altogether some 25 times: isdni 'setting in motion', upa-sruti 'giving ear to', updbhrii 'bringing near', tri-visd 'thrice' (= adv.), ni-tikti 'haste', prd-yukti 'impulse', vdsat-krti 'exclamation vasat', sadhd-stuti 'joint praise', su-vrktl 'excellent praise', su-sasti 'good praise', sv-asti, havh-krti 'pre- paration of the oblation'. Perhaps also d-smrti (AV.vii. 106') 'through forget- fulness'. -na b. A few forms follow the analogy of the m. in adding : dhasina 'abode', nsbkina, pretina (VS. xv. 6) 'advance'. n. There is no certain instance of a neuter I.: sucma (11.38^) is perhaps an example, but it may be taken as a masculine. D. m. The stem regularly takes Guna before adding the normal ending

-e; e. g. rsay-e. This is a form of frequent occurrence, being made from 44 stems in the RV. The commonest examples are: agndye (48), dtraye{i2) N. of a seer, sandye (12), ghfsvaye (6) 'gladdening', dabhttaye (5) N. of a man?. From the VS.: brshmaye 'holy', bhuvantdye (xvi.19) 'earth-extender' (?), vrsti- vdnaye (xxxviii.6) 'rain-winning', sandhdye (xxx. 9) 'agreement'. sakhi-, a. The only two stems not taking Guna are paii- 'husband' and which make patye and sakkye^. When compounded pdti- 'lord' forms its D. regularly as amhasas-pataye -paidye; e. g. bfhas-pataye'^, fraja-pataye (VS. XI. 66) 'Lord of Creatures',

380'*. 1 This form is, except in two instances, 5 Cp. Lanman 6 occur eight times at the end of written with y before 3., but is to be read These stanza, four times at the end of with hiatus; it coalesces in the written text a line or internal Pada before vowels, two or three with i or i, but is not always to be so pro- an nounced. times within a Pada before vowels. form this dative are 2 This is the only contracted form occur- 7 The stems which ring in the independent parts of the AV. enumerated by Lanman 382. 8 are never pronounced as 3 The form sadhri (n. 13^) is probably an These words sakhie, adverb 'to the same goal' from sadhri- paiie and 9 This is the only compound in the RV. (LlNDNER p. 112), or it might be an inst. f. pdti-. of sadhn- (Lanman 38o3). formed with 'he P, o^ 4 See^RPr. v«. 15. 282 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

(vs. VII. 30) 'Lord of distress', bhuvana-faiaye (VS. II. 2) 'Lord of the world', bhuva-fataye (VS. II. 6) 'Lord of the atmosphere', vacas-pataye (VS.VH. 1) 'Lord of speech', sanwesa-patnye

VS. II. 20) 'Lord of rest' ; also in the expressions kseirasya pdiaye (AV.) 'Lord of the Field' and {hhiiiasya pataye (AV.) 'Lord of the world', which are virtually compounds i; similarly dUam = pataye (VS. XVI. 17) ; h-at paye's viivasya bhumanas (VS. XVII. 78) 'Lord of all the earth'.

f. This form is made like the m.; e.g. istdy-e. It is very frequent, being formed from 50 stems and occurring over 500 times in the RV. The

commonest examples are: utdye {?,?>), pTtdye {6"]), soma-pitaye (49) 'draught of Soma', vdja-saiaye (24.) 'winning of booty', j-a^aji? (34) 'acquisition', vTtdyei^i), devd-vitaye (22) 'feast for the gods', istdye (20) 'impulse'*.

a. The form vii is frequently used as a dative, similarly an-iiiJ'no help' once and vTii twice, svasii occasionally has this value at the end of a Pada and when it alter- nates with svastaye in v. 51'=. 13, but it may be intended for an adverb 5. b. In the RV. seven stems in -i (all but 2 of which occur in Mandala x), follow the analogy of derivative t- stems and take the ending -a'l: turyai 'victory', devd- hfdyai 'invocation of the gods', nirrtyai 'dissolution', puslyai, bhujyai 'favour', bhftydi 'support', sruiyai 'blessing'. The AV. forms such datives from at least II stems; the TS. has d-samartyai (ill. 3. 8^) 'non-injury', dicr-istyai (ill. 2. Ifi) 'failure in sacrifice', sdkiyai (iv. i. 11); the VS. has nearly 40: d-httyai (vi. 28) 'imperishableness', ddityai (i. 30) 'Aditi', dnu-matyai (xxiv. 32) 'assent', d-bhittyai (xi. 64) 'not bursting', abhi-sastyai (11. 5), d-bhutyai (xxx. 17) 'wretchedness', d-raddhyai (xxx. 9) 'mischance', d-ri^fyai (ll. 3) 'safety', dva-rtyai (xxx. 12) 'distress', d-hatiiyai (xvi. 18) 'non-killing', dkHiycii (iv. 7), ariyai (xxx. 9. 17) 'trouble', utkrantyai (xv. 9) 'upstriding', etyai (xxvil. 45) 'arrival', krsydi (ix. 22) 'tillage', dur-istyai (11. 20), dhrajyai (vi. 18), nabhyai (XXXIX. 2), nisk^tyai (xxx. 9) 'atonement', pahktydi (xm. 58), prdti-sthityai (xv. lo) 'firm footing', prd-sityai^' (IL 20 'attack', prayas-cittyai (xxxix. 12) 'expiation', pretyai (xxvii. 45), bhiityal (XII. 65), bhumya (xxiv. 26), matydi (xxiv. 39), mahydi (xxil. 2o), rayydi (ix. 22), vkiiktyai (XXX. 13) 'separa- tion', vfsfyai (XVIII. 28), vidyai (xix. 16) 'altar', vyustyai (xxil. 34) 'ilawn', vyrddhyai (xxx. 17) 'failure', santyai (in. 43) 'quiet', su-ksitydi (x.xxvir. 10) 'secure dwelling', hetydi (xvi. 18) 'missile'.

n. The only form which seems to occur is sucaye. Ab. m. The stem takes Guna, to which -s only, instead oi-as, is added; e. g. ddres. It is not common, being formed from only 8 or g stems in the

RV.: agnis (TS. iv. 2. 10+; Kh. iv. 6 5), dhes, udadhes 'water-receptacle', gires 'mountain', ghf?ies 'heat', tiraki-rajes (AV.) 'striped across', parna-dhes (AV.)

'feather-holder', prajapates (TS. iv. i. n't), pluses (AV.) 'intestine', yones, vrsd-kapes 'man-ape', satd-m-utesi 'granting a hundred aids', sdm-rtes 'conflict'.

f. This form is made in the same way as in the m. from 1 1 stems in the RV.: ddites, dpites 'entering {iti-) into (cipi)\ abki-sastes, abhi-hrutes 'injury', dmates 'indigence', drates, ahutes (AV.), dhase's 'abode', dhurtes 'injury', nftes'^ (Av.), pdri-sutes 'oppression', bhiimes (AV.), vasate's, srute's 'course'.

a. The RV. has three forms according to the derivative t- declension: nabhyas

(x. 90M), bhiimyas (l. 80*), heiyas (x. 87'9). Besides these the AV. has: d-bhUiyas, d-rdtyas, d-sastyds 'imprecation', ahutyds, Jirsyas, deva-heiyas 'divine weapon', iirsakiyds 'headache'; probably also ydnyas in yonyeva (vi. 121*) for yonya iva.

G. m. The regular form of this case is identical with that of the Ab., but is much more frequent, being made from 42 stems in the RV. The commonest examples are: agnes{^<^), ve's (14), ddres {lo), pa?u's{?>), brhas-pdtesifi), sures (5) 'patron', dtres (4), kaves (4), dhase's (4) 'draught', bhfires (4); fdtes 'lord'

' Equivalent to kseira-pati- (K.) and bhiita- 6 Used in the sense of the ablative with pdti- {AV.). pahi 'protect from'. 2 And a number of other epithets in VS. 7 Cp. RiCHTER, IF. 9, 5. XVI. 17—23. 8 This form nftes is probably an error 3 pdtye otherwise means 'husband'. for dftes 'skin'; see Whitney's note on AV. 4 Lanman 382 enumerates the stems which VI. iS^. take this dative. 5 Cp. Lanman 383 (top). VI. Declension. Nouns. Vowel Stems. 283 occurs once. Elsewhere are found: jamad-agnes (VS. m. 62; Kh. v. 3^), praj^pates (TS. III. i. 4'; Kh. m. t'^''^), yayes"- (Kh. \. lo^. a. The two stems ari- and avi- 'sheep' do not take Giina, and add the normal ending -as: aryds' which occurs nearly 40 times, and dvyas which occurs nearly 20 times. The stem pd/i-, when meaning 'husband', and sdMi- do not take Guaa either, but add the anomalous ending -ur: pdtyur, sdkhyur^.

f. This case, identical in form with the m., is made from 11 stems in the RV.: ddites, abhl-sastes, dmates, istes, krstes 'tillage', deva-vites, nlrrtes, puste's, pfsnes, vrste's, vratdtes 'creeper'. This form is also made by at least 8 stems in the AV.

a. Six stems in the RV. form genitives according to the derivative T- declension, occurring 17 times altogether: dnu-maiyas, draiySs, nirj'tyds, pfinyas, bhumyas, yuvatyas. In the AV. svich forms are made from at least 16 stems and occur over

50 times : jdmyas 'akin' etc. One of these, ddityds, occurs also in the TS. (l. 6. %A and VS. (I. II).

n. The only example is bhtlres, which occurs 16 times. L. This case in all genders ends very anomalously in -a or -au- The latter, ending occurs more than twice as often as the former in the RV. (272 times to 126), while in the N. A. dual -a is nearly 7 times as frequent as -au (1145 times to 171)*. The general conditions under which the parallel L. forms -a and -au occur ' are the same as apply to the dual

-a and -au: -a appears before consonants, -au (as -dv) before vowels, e. g. vir yona vasatav iva (ix. 6 2 '5) 'a bird in the receptacle as in a nest'. But

while the dual -a is the regular form at the end of a Pada, the L. -au is almost exclusively found in that position*. As in the dual N. A. and the perfect sing, i and 3, the a-form is doubtless tlie earlier. It is most pro- bably derived from a locative form with Guna (like the D. Ab. G. V. sing.), e. g. *agndy-i, which dropped the ending (like some other locatives), *agniy then losing its y'' before consonants and lengthening its -a: agnd. The later form agndu must have been due to the influence of the u- stems, the inflexion of which is closely parallel to that of the i- stems, through the Sandhi form -a which is common to both*. m. r. The -a form is made from 7 stems and occurs 40 times in the RV.: agni, ajA 'contest', Urmi, kuksd 'belly', ghfna, ydna, su-rabha^

'fragrant'. . The AV. TS. VS. have no -a form in independent passages, but Kh. '9 III. 1 5 has agnd. 2. The form in -au is taken by 27 stems in the RV.: agndu, ddrau, aratdu''° 'manager', aratndu 'elbow', ajdu, andu 'pin of the axle', urmdu, gdbhastau 'hand', girdu, go-patau 'lord', jTrdu " 'stream', trksdu N. of a prince, dhvasdnau 'sprinkler', ndimccau N. of a demon, nlpatithau N. of a man, pandu, prt-sutdu 'hostile attack', medhyatithau N. of a seer, yajnd-patau 'lord of sacrifice', yonau, rdthavitau N. of a man, vdnas-pdtau'^^ 'lord of

1 Emendation for yaydis. 8 Cp. Meringer, BB. 16, 224. 2 Once or twice to be pronounced arias. 9 Lanman 3882, suggests the possibility I. 1 1210 ydnayi in 3 Cp. Wackeenagel, KZ. 25, 289 f. of restoring djdyi in and 4 Cp. Lanman 514. X. 46*. The n. L. a-prald is used adverbially (vill. cp. 5 See Lanman 385 ff.; and cp. for the = 'without recompense' 3216); Bar- IF. f- dual 340 ff- and 574—576. THOLOMAE, 9, 25$ 10 aratnau. 6 The L. -a appears only 5 times at the BR. would read end of a Pada, and then only in the two 11 jiri- may be f. as there is nothing to forms dmdtata and sarvatdta. show the gender of the word. 12 vdnaspdtau occurs in ir, 7 Cp. the N. sakhd for *sdkhci.y. The old The form Kh. L. may be preserved in feminines like id' also. as;nay-i- 'she who is beside Agni'; cp. IF. la, 3- 284 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

the forest', salmaldu 'silk-cotton tree', sanitau 'attainment', samvaranau 'des- cendant of Sarnvarana', syama-rasmau N. of a man, svddhitau. The AV. also forms the L. in -au from at least 16 stems; among them appears

the uncompounded pdtau (AV. iii. 18^) 'husband" as a variant lor jane in the corresponding passage of the RV. (x. 145''). The TS. has dhau

(v. 6. I" = AV. III. 13'). f. I. The form in -a is made from 21 stems in the RV.: avdna 'river- bed', aja, I'idiia 'sunrise', ksetra-sata 'acquisition of land', go-satd 'winning of cows', tokd-sata 'attainment of offspring', devd-tata 'worship of the gods', dyumnd-sata 'obtainment of strength', mbha, nr-sata 'capture of men', nemd- dhita 'conflict', pTta, prd-bhrta 'offering', medhd-sata 'receiving the oblation', yama-huta 'invocation by prayer', sUra-sata 'battle', sdm-rta, sarvd-tstd 'perfect prosperity', sata^, sruta, svar-sata 'attainment of heaven'. The AV. has nabha (vii. 62'); and the SV. reads sdmtata 'beneficent', as a variant iox sdmtati ofRV.vm. 18'. The TS. and VS. have no independent L. f in -5. 2. The form in -au is more than twice as frequent, being made from 49 stems in the RV. The commonest examples are satdu (17), vilja-satau {16), vyustau (16) 'flush of dawn', abhistau (10) 'help', su-tnatdu (14), gdvistau (7) 'fight', istdu (6), raidu (5), purvd-hutau^ (5) 'first invocation'. The AV. makes this 12 form from 7 stems in independent passages. The TS. has uditau (1.8. 3), purvd-cittau (iv. 2.10=) 'first thought'; the VS. ratha-nabhdu (xxxiv. 5) 'chariot

nave', ratrau (xxm. 4) 'night'; and Kh. i. ii^ s'dra-satau. a. There are J locatives f. formed according to the derivative f- declension with

the ending -am : puravidhyam, bhuTnyam, bk^tydm, yuvaiydm, sdni-gatyani 'assembly'. The AV. has 9 more: dvydm, dkutyam, cittyam, devd-hiUyam, prstyam 'rib', bhutyam, yonydm, vedydm (+ VS. XXVUI. 12), sdmitydm 'assembly'. The VS. has sanyam (vill. 54). b. The locative vedl^ occurring twice (vi. n"; 11. 3'') is the only one formed from an i- stem with the normal ending -i [= vidi-i). The form prdnTil may also possibly be a L. in III. 51^.

L. n. The only form in -a is a-prata (viii. 32'^) 'without recompense'

(used adverbially), and the only one in -au is saptd-rasmau (AV. ix. 5'S) 'seven-rayed'.

V. This case regularly gunates the final vowel in the m. and f. It is very frequent in the m., being formed from 72 stems and occurring over

1 100 times in the RV. In the f. it is not common, being formed from only II stems and occurring only 27 times in the RV.

m. The commonest examples are: dgne^ {"]<)<)), pate{2,^, bfhas-pate^ {7,2), kave (26), brahmanas-pate (17), vanas-pate (14), aghrne (13) 'glowing', sat- pate (13) 'lord of the seat', sakhe (11) 7. In Kh. I. 5? the anomalously formed compound bhuvanas-pate''' 'lord of the world' occurs; in the VS. anghare (iv. 27) a guardian of Soma, dfte (xxxvi. 18) 'bag', drApe (xvr. 47) 'causing to run', bdmbhare (iv. 27) a guardian deity of Soma, bhuvas-pate (iv. 34) 'lord of the earth', sdtesudhe (xvi. 13) 'hundred-quivered', sapte (xxix.2) 'steed'.

a. The V. sobhare is a transfer from the t- declension; and the compounds pdvaka-soce, bhadra-soce, htkra-soce are transfers from the -is declension, doubtless meant to avoid the unusual form -iocis in the V.

1 The RV. has only the form patyau 6 Once (IX. 801) with double accent bfhas- 'husband'. pdte. 2 For this form in vi. 461 the SV. and 7 In make-male '0|.great-souled' (Indra), the VS. have the variant saidu. first member is anomalously gunated as well 3 This form occurs also in AV. v. 11. as the second; cp. mahe-nadi 'O great stream'. 4 Cp. R?r. L 28; n. 35. 8 Formed like vanas-faie. 5 Written with Pluti VS. VIII. lo: dgnaii. VI. Declension. Nouns. Vowel Stems. 28s

f. The forms occurring in the RV. are: adite, anumate, asu-nite 'spirit- world', tste, upa-mate'' 'granting (of wealth)', .r/'f/,? 'radiant', bhume, mate, yuvate, satyatate^ 'truth', sv-angnre 'fair-fingered'. The AV. has darve^ 'spoon'; the VS. svadhite. a. There is also the transfer osadlie from the r- declension.

Du. N. A. V. This form ends in -r^ and can be used in all genders alike. The m. is very frequent, being made from 72 stems in the RV. The commonest examples are: indragni {]%) 'Indra and Agni', hdri (j%), pdti (33), subMs-J>dn {21) 'lords of light'. Elsewhere also occur: sa-tdti (TS.iii. 2. 2^) 'conti- nuous'; bAtiri-rasml {Kh.V7. 22^) \n3.n.y-xs.Ye6.'; viha-vdj>an {K.h.iU22^) 'extend- ing (?) everywhere'. The final vowel is shortened in saksdni (x. 32') 'united'. f. The forms occurring in the RV. are: itd-utl 'extending from hence', uti, fjitT, jami, ddrvJ, dySva-bkiimi 'hQa.Ytn and earth', dharaydt-kavt '^TO\.&c\!mg

the wise', puramdfu, bhuji 'patrons', yuvatt, vdsu-dhitl 'treasuries', iiict, sd-yoni of the same origin', su-prdturti 'very victorious', srut'i. n. The only two regular forms are sua'' and tigmd-heti (AV.) 'having a keen thrust'; also mdhi (with shortened final)5. There are besides one or two secondary forms with -tti made under the influence of the n- declension: aksifii (AV.) 'eyes' and perhaps hdrini (ix. '^o^) from hdri'^. I. m. indragnibhyam, ddmpatibkya>u{hN 'husband wife', — .) and hdribhyam. f. vartambkyam, sronibhyam (VS.xxv.6) 'hips'. — n. sdkthibhyam 'thighs'. D. m. indragnibhyam, indra-brhaspdtibhyam (VS.vii. 23) 'Indra and Brhas- pati', hdribhydm~i.

Ab. m. kicksibhyam (AV. VS.) panibhyam (AY.). — f. pdrsnib/iyam, sronibhyam. — G. m. indragnyds, hdryos. — f. yuvatyos. L. lii. kuksyds, gdbhastyos^, hdryos. — f. Jamyos; gavlnyos (AV.) 'groins', pdrsiiyos (AV.). — n. sdkthyos (VS. xxiv. i). PI. N. V. This form gunates the final vowel of the stem, adding the

normal ending -as in the m. and f.; e. g. agndy-as, utdy-as. It is of very

frequent occurrence, but is nearly twice as common in the m. as the f. m. This form is made from 109 stems in the RV. and occurs 523 times. The commonest examples are: kavdyas (45), vdyas (38), surdyas (36), hdrayas (31), agndyas (27), ddrayas (26), fsayas (26), si'icayas {1?,), pdtayas (16), ras'mdyas (16), vdhnayas (15) 'conveyers'. In the VS. also occur: ajavdyas 'goats and sheep' (in. 43), vfsa-panayas (xxix. 44) 'strong-hoofed', vrihdyas (xviii, 12) 'rice-plants'.

a. The stem «//-, being the only i- stem that does not take Gu^ia, forms its N. pi. like the B group of the radical i- stems (except the accent): ary-as, which occurs 16 times in the RV. b. The form a-hrayas 'shameless' is a transfer from the radical T- declension, and sobharayas 'descendants of Sobharl' from the derivative i- declension.

f. This form is made from 66 stems and occurs 290 times in the RV. The commonest examples are: utdyas (42), dhitdyas (21), matdyas (20), dratayas (18), ratdyas (18), krstdyas {^i), ksitdyas (13) 'mcts', jdnayas (12), vrstdyas (12).

a. The stem ari- has the same anomalous form as in the m. : aiy-ds, which occurs 4 times in the RV.

I Agreeing with a^e. 4 Occurring in x.85'2 and possibly Iv. 56^. 2 The VS. (u. 49) has dan/i from darvT- = 5 Occurring X. 9754 and perhaps also iv. 56*. ddrvi: The VS. (viu. 43) also has vi-iruti 6 BR. and Grassmann place this form which seems to be an irregular V. for vi- under harita-. srute; cp. pw. s. v. 7 No n. forms occur in the D. Ab. dual. 3 The derivative -i, -u and ? stems are i^ This word may be f. also. the only ones which do not take -a or -an in the dual. 286 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

b. About 10 i- stems in the RV. have also N. pi. forms according to the derivative /'- niskj'fts, declension: avdnls"^ 'streams', ajanls 'births', nits'' , ndkfJs 'nights', nirrtTs, puramdhis, bhiimts', visva-krstls''- 'dwelling among all men', sd-yonls. The AV. also has: aiigiills, fstts 'spears', dhamanls 'tubes', nabhJs, pdrsms, fj^sps. c. The stems yayi- 'speeding', iuhhri- 'shining', karkari- 'lute' form their N. pi. '- according to the radical declension ; yayiyas, subhriyas (AV.), liarkaryds (AV.). d. Some z-stems have transfer forms according to the /-declension: ambdyas,

arundyas, kiondyas; osadhayas, sdL-varayas (TS. V. 4. 12^; VS. XVHI. 22). The TS. has also :

garbhiriayas (ir. I. 26), pdtnayas (v. 2. il^ etc.), revdtayas (v. 2. 1 1'), varutrayas (iv. I. 6 j.

N. A. n. I. The normal form, in which the ending -/ coalesces a-prati^ with the final of the stem to -i, is made from 4 stems in the JvV. : 'irresistible', kri'tdhmi 'irascible', tri 'three', sua. The final vowel of this

form is further shortened in six stems: aprati, a-sthuri 'not single-horsed', jami, bhtiri, sdmi^ 'work', siLrabhi. The AV. has also mdhi (besides aprati

and bhiiri). The forms in -i and -i (which are of about equal frequency) taken together occur about 50 times in the RV. 2. There is a secondary form (following the analogy of the «-steins) in -Tni, which is taken by 4 stems having the primary form also: apratini, bhi'irini, h'lcini, surabktni. These forms occur about 14 times. The AV. has also dksini and dsthini; the latter form occurs in the TS. as well (v. 7. 2'); the VS. has iifiglni (xxxix. 8) 'entrails'. A. m. The ending -n here (as in the -a and -u declension) represents original -ns, which in one half (42) of the total occurrences (84) of these forms in -in in the RV. is preserved as -ins or (before vowels) -inr. This A. is made from 31 stems in the RV*. The commonest examples are sarin (14), vdnas-pdim (ri), fanin (9), rasm'in (6), sdkhln (5), girin (4)^. 6.' The TS. also has ddhi-patln (i, 6^) 'lords', dhm (iv. 5. i^; VS. xvi. 5); the VS. has tittirm (xxiv. 20) 'partridges', lAjin'^ (xxiii. 8) 'parched grain', iacin^ (xxiir. 8) 'groats'.

a. The stem ari- is the only one -which does not take -n, but adds the normal ending -as instead, the A. aryds (which occurs 7 times in the RV.) being thus identical with the N. pi. The stem vi- in its only occurrence (i. 104') in the A. pi. uses the N. pi. form vdyas.

f. This form, which is made by adding simple -s (instead of -as), e. g. bhamis, occurs from 42 stems in the RV. The commonest examples are dratis (16), krstis (16), ksitis (8), carsanis (7) 'people', /«ra;«a'/4w (7), avdiiTs (6),

dsastts (5)'. The TS. has abhistis {v./^.i/^^), dinatis (iii..i.4't), yonis {i. <,. 2,''), vyiistTs (iv. 3. 11*); and sdcTs occurs in a Khila (p. 171, 6) ^ a. As in the m., the stem ari- has aryds [occurring 4 times). Two N. forms, citrotayas (x. 140-') 'granting wonderful gifts' and sucayas (AV. v. i^), appear to be used for the A.

I. m.5 This form is made with the regular ending -bhis from! 40 stems in the RV. The commonest- examples are ddribhis (43), rasmibhis (36), /a//z/Mw (28) 'paths', hdribkis {22,), sdkhibhis {1^), suribhis {i/(), agnibhis (\6), anjibhis (10) 'ornaments', fsibhis (10), vibkis'^° (9). — From the VS.: plasibhis (xxv. 8).

I Beside avdnayas, iildyas, bhilmayas, visvd- 5 On the Sandhi of the final -n in this kystayas. form see Lanman 394 f. s The Pada text has aprati. 6 Written with pluti in the text as idjhn,

3 BR. set up a n. stem sdmi- beside f. sdciin, idnii-. Grassmann recognizes sdmT- only, 7 The stems which take this form in the making sdmi always the I. sing, with short- RV. are enumerated by Lanman 3953. ened final vowel. Cp. the I. sing, of sdmi- 8 See ScHEFTELOWiTz' note, p. 171 (bottom). above (p, 274). 9 No n. form occurs. 4 Lanman 395 enumerates the stems 10 Not accented as a monosyllabic stem. which take this accusative. VI. Declension. Nouns. Vowel Stems. 287

f. This form is made in the same way as the m. from 48 stems in the RV. The commonest examples are: utibhis (100), svastibhis (82), matibhis (37). dhitibhis (27), su-vrktibhis (18). a. - The form uii is used 9 times as an I. pi. in the RV., as is shown both by the sense and by the forms agreemg with it ; e. g. Ivabldr iiit (ii. 20=) 'with thine aids'. b. A transfer from the ^-declension is aranibhis 'tinder-sticks'.

D. m. This form is made with _ -bhyas from 9 stems in the RV.: dsva- patibhyas (VS. xvr. 24) 'masters of horses', fsib/iyas\ gand-patibhyas (VS. xvi. 25) 'lords of troops', ddsavanibhyas 'having ten C0MTSt5\ pdtibkyas, ydtibhyas N. of a race, ras'mMyas (VS. xxu. 28), vi-b^yas', vrAta-patibhyas (VS. xvi. 25) 'lords of companies', siicibhyas, svd-patibhyas (VS. xiv. 28) 'masters of dogs', sdkhibhyas, sambkyas, sandhibhyas (VS. xxiv. 25), suribhyas. f. ksitlbhyas, carsantbhyas, deva-jamibhyas (VS. xxiv. 24) 'sisters of the gods'. There is also the transfer from the «"-declension mribhyas 'women'. Ab. m. This case, identical in form with the D., is made from 12 stems in the RV. : agnibhyas, dtribhyas, kavaribhyas 'niggardly', girlbhyas, panibhyas, pavlbkyas, plasibhyas, yonibhyas (VS. xiii. 34), vdnas-pdiibhyas, vibkyas', sdkhibhyas, sanibhyas, sthivibhyas 'bushels'. — f. amhatlbhyas 'distresses', angi'dibhyas (AV.), ksitibhyas, carsanibhyas, jdnibhyas, dhamdnibhyas (AV.) 'blasts'. — n. asthtbhyas^ (AV. n. 33^).

G. m. This form is made from 28 stems in the RV. : (a) oxytones are agnindm, kavinam, girindm, carsamnAm, deva-jaminam (AV.), nidhmdm 'treasures', panindm, pathindm, maninam (AV.), mathindm'', rayincim, vapinSm^ (Av.), vmdm, sanJnd7n^; (b) otherwise accented: dtrinam, dvfnam, dhmam, fsTndm, gandhdrinam N. of a people, cardninam 'active', tuvisvdntnam 'loud- roaring', dhunXnam 'roaring', mahi-svdninam 'very noisy', muninam 'seers', vdnas-pdilnam, vi-mahinam 'very great', vydtinam 'steeds', mcmam, sdkhlnam, hdrinam, havir-mdthinanii 'disturbing sacrifices'. Aho grhd-patxnam (y'Si.\yi.2,9) 'householders', dhdrma-patinam (VS. ix. 'guardians of law'. 39) ; f. This form is made from 18 stems in the RV.': (a) oxytones: kavindm, krstmam, ksitindm, carsanindm, jammdm, dur-matlndm 'hatred', dhautindm 'wells', pustJnam, maffnam, raytndm, su-ksitindm, su-matmAm, su-stutinAm; (b) otherwise accented: aratinam'^ (K.h. l 55), upa-stutmnm 'invocations', jdninam, nirrtinam, mdnanam 'particles of light', si'icinam. L. m. This form is made with the ending -j-^/, which becomes -su, from 16 stems in the RV.: d-kavisu 'not wise', agnisu, anjisu, d-samatisu 'incomparable', ajisu^ apisu 'kinsmen', fsisu, khadisu 'rings', girisu, nidkisu, pathisu, pavisu, yonisu, rasmisu, subhrisu, sUrisu.

f. This form is made from 21 stems, all but three of which [a-vyathi-, jdmi-, subhri-) end in -H-: abhi-maiisu 'plots', a-vyathisu, isiisu, iitisu, rstisu, krstisu, ksitisu, gdv-istisu, jamisu, div-istisu 'devotions', devd-hUtisu, pdristisu 'distresses', pustisu, prd-mtisu, prd-turtisu 'speedy motions', prd-yicktisu, prd-sastisu (TS.i. 7.7'; VS. ix. 6) 'praises', ydma-huHsu, ratisu, vyiistisu, subhrisu, satisu. The form ndrisu'^° is a transfer from the T- declension. n. The only example that occurs is bhurisu.

1 Once accented j^sibhyas in Valakhilya 3 See Whitney's note on AV. xix. 246. XL 6, doubtless an error. 6 Also the numeral trmdm. 2 Not accented as a monosytlabic stem. 7 In about a dozen out of 128 occurrences 3 With wrong accent for dsthibhyas; cp. resolution of -am to -aam seems necessary. asthabhyas (VS. xxiu. 44). 8 Resolution of -am to -aam seems to be 4 Val. 58 ; BR. and Grassmann would read necessary in 4 out of 98 occurrences. maiinam, which is actually the reading of 9 Wrong accent for aratmam. 1° svdha-kriisu is the Kashmir Ms. : Scheftelowitz, Die Apo- On the other hand a kryphen des Rgveda 40. transfer from this to the ?-declension. •

288 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

5. a. Radical u-stems. Lanman, Noun-Inflection 400—419. — Whitney, Grammar 348—352.

382. This declension comprises strictly speaking only m. and f. stems; for the few distinctively n. forms which occur are made only from stems in which the u is shortened and which therefore in form belong to the u- de- clension. The normal endings, as they appear in the inflexion of consonant stems, are taken throughout The G. pi., however, adds the ending -nam to

compound stems'; and the N. sing, always has -s.

This declension contains seven monosyllabic stems, one of which is m.,

five £, and one m. and f ; two reduplicated i. substantives and one adjective; and about 60 compounds, almost exclusively adjectives, made with the roots ;u- 'speed', dyu- {diu-) 'play', pa- 'purify', bhu- 'be', su- 'swell', su- 'bring forth', hu- 'call', and with the modified forms kru-, gu- 'go', dru- 'run', snii- 'drip',

which may be treated as roots. The stems occurring are : i. monosyllables :

m. j'li- 'speeding', 'steed', su- 'begetter'; f du- 'gift', bha- 'earth', bkra- 'brow', sa- 'mother', sytt- 'thread' (VS.), sra- 'stream'. 2. reduplicated stems: jukii- 'tongue', j'uha- 'sacrificial spoon', jogii- 'singing aloud'. 3. compounds

(in the alphabetical order of the roots) : api-ja- 'impelling', kaso-jii- 'hastening

to the water (?)', N. of a man, dhi-Ja- 'inspiring the mind', nabho-jn- 'cloud- impelling', mano-jii- 'swift as thought', yatu-Ju- 'incited by 'demons', vayo-ja- 'stimulating strength', vasu-jii- 'procuring goods', viha-ja- 'all-impelling', sadyo-jii- 'quickly speeding', sena-ja- 'swift as an arrow'. — eka-dyti- m. N. of

a seer, kama-dyii- f. N. of a woman. — agre-pii-^ 'drinking first', uda-pa- 'purified by water', keta-pa- (VS. TS.) 'purifying the will', ghrta-pu- 'clarifying ghee', madhu-pri- 'purifying itself by sweetness', vata-pu- 'purified by the wind', visna-pti- m. N. of a man, su-pu- 'clarifying well', sva-pii- 'broom'. — dn- abhu- 'disobedient', abhi-bhu- 'superior', a-bhii- 'present', pari-bhu- 'surround- ing', punar-bhd- 'being renewed', puro-bhic- 'being in front', pra-bhu- 'excelling', 7nayo-bha- 'causing pleasure', vi-bhu- 'far-extending', viiva-bhti- 'being every- where', vihd-samb/iU- 'beneficial to all', sam-bAii- 'beneficent', sac'a-bhu- 'asso- ciate', su-bhu- 'good', svayam-bhu- 'self-existing', sv-abhii- 'helping well'. — sura-sU- 'exultant with liquor'. — a-su- 'not bringing forth', a-susii- (AV.)

'barren', nava-sii- 'having recently calved', purva-sU- 'bringing forth first', pra-stl- 'bringing forth', yama-su- 'bringing forth twins', raha-sd- 'bringing forth secretly', raja-sU- 'king-creating', viiva-sU- 'all-generating', vira-sU- 'hero- bearing', sakrt-si'i- 'bringing forth once', su-sd- 'bringing forth easily'. — a-hii- 'invoking', u-hd-^ 'crying aloud', varsa-hii- (VS.) f, sumna-hii- (TS.) 'invoking

favour', su-hd- (VS.) 'invoking well'. — mitra-krd- i. a kind of demon. —

agre-gd-'' 'moving forwards'. — raghu-drd- 'running swiftly' 5. — ghrta-snu- 'dripping ghee"".

a. Vocalic pronunciation. Before vowels the ii has regularly a vocalic value in pronunciation. In monosyllabic stems it is always written as -uv; generally also in compounds even when preceded by a single consonant. In the minority of compounds (some 9 stems in the RV.) it is written as v, but pronounced as a vowel. In the latter instances it is always given as u below; c. g. vibhva as vibhua. b. Accentuation. Except in the monosyllabic stems, which follow the general rule, the accent remains throughout on the same syllable, which is almost always the radical one.

1 The monosyllabic and the reduplicated 4 -gu- here = ga- 'go'. stems, on the other hand, added -am, as far 5 Cp. Lanman 402. as can be inferred from bhnvdm &ndJ6guvdm, 6 About a dozen of the above compounds the only examples which occur. (all but 3 or 4 of them being formed with 2 -pii- here = -pa- 'drink'. bhu-) also shorten the final of the stem, 3 Perhaps an onomatopoetic word. which is then inflected like an «- stem. VI. Declension. Nouns. Vowel Stems. 289

Inflexion.

The inflexion 383. is identical in the m. and f. Several of the cases do not occur at all in the m,, viz. Ab. L. V. sing., 'l. D. Ab. G. L. du., D. A.b. pi. In the monosyllabic stems several cases are wanting in both genders, viz. A. D. V. sing., and all the cases of the pi. except the N. A. G. The forms actually occurring, if made from bha- i. 'earth' and the adjectives a-bha- 'present' and ri-bhii- 'far-reaching', would be as follows: 1. Sing. N. bhus. I. bhuva. Ab. bhuvds. G. bhuvds. L. bhuvi (VS.). Du. N. bhuva. I. bhubhyam (VS.). L. bhuvos. PI. N. bhi'was. A. bhuvas. G. bhuvam (VS.).

2. Sing. N. abhus; vibh&s. A. abhuram; vibhuam. I. abhuva; vibhua. D. ablmve; vibhue. Ab. i. vibhiias (AV.). G. m. abhuvas.

Du. N. A. abhuva. PI. N. abhuvas; vibhuas. A. m. f. abhmas; f. vibhi'.as.

I. m. f. abhiibhis. G. m. f. abhiinam. L. m. I. abhiisu. The forms actually occurring are: Sing. N. m. jtis (VS. iv. 17), stts; eka-dyis. — uda-ptis (AV.), keta-pih

IX. 1 1 (VS. I ; TS. V. I _. 3), madhu-pUs ( AV.), vata-pas (AV.). — abhi-bhis, pari-bhiis, puro-bhUs, pra-bhtls (AV.), mayo-bhtts, vi-bhus (AV.), visvd-sambhus, s'am-bhds (VS.

AV.), saca-bhUs, su-bhds (VS. AV.), svayam-bhtls. — sumna-hih (TS. iv. 6. 3+), su-hiis (VS. I. 30) 'invoking well'. — f. bhh, sds, syds (VS. v. 21); j'uhds (AV. VS.). — kama-dyds. — abhi-bhds (AV.), picnar-bhtts, pra-bhns (VS. AV.), mayo- bhus, sam-bhds (AV.). — pra-sds (AV.), yama-sds, raha-sds, vira-siis, su-siis. — varsa-hds (VS. xxiv. 38) 'frog'. A. m. I. kaso-jicvam, mano-juvam, vasu-juvam; abhi-bhuvam (AV.), a-bhiivam, mayo-bhiivam, visvd-sambhuvam, sambht'ivam, saca-bhuvam, sv- abhuvam; 2. vunJ-ptiam; vi-bhi':am, su-bhuain. — f./«/47j«/« 'sacrificial spoon'; 1. kama-dyiivam, 7'iha-ji'ivam, saca-bhuvam; 2. a-s-jani^, visva-si'iam (AV.), saki't-slam.

I. m. I. mano-Ji'tva, sena-juva., sv-abhi'tva; 2. vi-bhiia. — f. bhuva; juhua.

'tongue' and 'spoon'; i. punar-bhi'tva (AV.), mayo-bhuva (TS. i. 8. 3'; VS.

IIL 47). — n. I. mayo-bhuva; 2. su-pua (VS. I. 3). D. m. I. abhi-bhuve, vi-bhine (VS. xxii. 30), visva-bhure, saca-bhure; 2, visna-pue, vi-bhi'ie, su-bhue.

Ab. f. bhuvds; a-susuas (AV.). — G. m. sam-bhi'ivas, sacd-bht'ivas'. — f. bhuvds. — L. f. bhuvi (VS.). — V. f. Juku (AV.). Du. N. A. m. mano-Juva; mayo-bhuva, sam-bhuvd, saca-bhuvd; ghrta- sni'tva^. — f. sri'ivd; apT-jiivS; punar-bhuva, visvd-sambhuvd, viivd-sambhuiau (VS. X. 9), sambhiiva, sacd-bh'iva. — I. f. bhrubhyam (VS.). — L. f. bhruvos. PI. N. m. juvas; I. d-duvas, d-bhuvas, u-huvas, nabho-ji'mas, pari-bhuvas, mano-juvas, mayo-bhiivas, raghudrdvas, vayo-juvas, sam-bhi'ivas, V. sacd- bhuvas (VS. in. 47), sadyo-juvas, su-bhuvas, sv-dbhuvas^; 1. vi-bhuas, sic-bhuas; surd-Mas. — f. duvas, bhuvas; juhi'ias 'tongues' and 'spoons'; i. V. agre-gtivas (VS.), V. agre-puvas {yS,^, dhi-Juvas, punar-bhuvas, mayo-bhuvas, mitra-kri'a as; V. visva-sambhuvas (VS. iv. 7); 2. ghrta-puas, nava-suas, pra-suas, vi-bhuas, su-bhuas.

A. m. dn-dbhuvas, mayo-bhuvas^. — f. diivas, bhuvas; d-bhuvas, d-huvas.

1 The transition form a-sum (VS.) under 3 Cp, Lanman 413 (middle). the influence of the derivative T- stems also 4 There are also the transfers from the occurs. The form ayogum (VS. XXX- 5) is a- declension d-prayuvas, madhyayuvas, initra- perhaps of the same kind. yuvas, sramayuvas. 2 The AV. has also the transition form 5 In n. 143 Jus is perhaps contracted for punar-bhuv-as. jiias.

Indo-arische Philologie. I, 1. 19 290 1. Allgemeines und Spkache. 4. Vedic Grammar. ghrta-snuvas, mayo-bkuvas, sana-juvas\ pra-suas, raja-sicas (VS. x. i) 'king- creating', vi-bkuas^. I. m. a-bhiibhis. — i, juhfibhis 'tongues' and 'spoons'; sva-pubhis.

G. m. joguvam; yatu-janam . — f. bhuvam' (VS. xxxvii. 18); purva- sUnam. L. m. a-bhttsu, puru-bMsu 'appearing to many'. — f. pra-sasu.

5. b. Derivative u- stems.

Lanman, Noun-Inflection 400—419. — Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar 355 —359, 362—364.

384. This declension is almost entirely restricted to f.^ stems, which (like the derivative or B group of the radical i- declension) accent the final vowel and in inflexion are practically identical with the radical stems. The f. stems which it comprises may be divided into two groups. The first

contains about 18 oxytone f. substantives corresponding in several instances to m. or n, stems in -u accented on the first syllable: a-grii- (m. d-gru-) 'maid', kadrii- (m. kddru- 'brown'J 'Soma vessel', kuhii- (AV.) 'new moon', gugguli- (n. guggulu-) (AV.) N. of an Apsaras, guiigii- N. of a goddess, camii- 'bowl', jatti- (n. jatu-) (AV. VS.) 'bat', tana- 'body', dhana- {dhdnu-) 'sandbank' (AV.), nabhami- 'well', nrta- 'dancer', prdakd- (m. pfdsku-) 'serpent'

( AV.), prajana- (AV.) 'organ of generation', vadha- 'bride', svasra- (m. svdsura-) 'mother-in-law', saranyA- N. of a goddess; also kySmbu-^ (n. kiydmbu-) an,

aquatic plant (AV.). The second group comprises oxytone i. adjectives corresponding to m. oxytones: ainkoyii- 'troublesome', aghayii- 'malicious', apasyii- 'active', abhi-dipsii- 'wishing to deceive', avasyii- 'desiring favour',, asita-jmi- (AV.) 'black-kneed', ayti- 'active', udanyu- 'seeking water', caranya- 'movable', carismi- 'moving', jighatsa- 'hungry', tana- 'thin', didhisa- 'wishing

to gain', dzir-hanay ri- 'meditating harm', duvasyu- 'worshipping', devayii- (VS.)' 'devoted to the gods', dravitmi- 'speeding', patayalil- 'flying', panasyi- 'glorious', parayisna- 'victorious', prtanayii- 'hostile', prsanayU- 'tender', phalga- 'reddish', babhrii- 'reddish brown', bibhatsA- 'loathing', makhasyti- 'cheerful', madka-^ 'sweet', matidrayii- 'gladdening', makiyU- 'joyous', mumuksa- 'wishing to free', vacasyu- 'eloquent', vi-panyu- 'admiring', sundhyu- 'radiant', sanayu- 'wishing for gain', sudayitna- 'yielding sweetness'; also su-drii- 'having good wood' {dru-Y.

a. Vocalic pronunciation. Before vowels the -« has almost invariably a vocalic value in pronunciation. It is written as uv in the substantives agru- and kadrii-, and in adjectives when the -il is preceded by y, also in bTbhatsu- ^. Otherwise though always written as v it is (except four or five times at the most in the RV.)8, here also to be pronounced as a vowel. Hence the >forms written in the Samhita with simple 'i are given below with u. b. Accentuation. The derivative ;7-stems not only accent the final syllable^ but

1 VS. XXIV. 25 has the form sTca-pUs a kind 6 Also as a substantive f, 'good beam'. of bird. BR. and pw. however regard su-dri'iam as A. 2 In the V. viivjsam bhuvam pate. of a m. substantive su-dru- 'starkes Holz'. 3 There are only five m. forms: 'ii.prasus 7 This is the regular practice in the TS. 'guest', cfc//(7-i'aK!7j 'whose body is not cooked', even when a single consonant precedes the

sdrva-taniis (AV.) 'whose body is entire'; -it, e. g. iaHuv-am; cp. IS. 13, I05 f. A. krka-dasuam a. kind of demon; I. pi. 8 ianvas 3 times, camvbs once, ianvam maksiibhis 'swift'. perhaps once; cp. Lanman 408 (top).

4 This is the only f. stem in this declen- 9 Except the f. liydmbii- (AV.) and the sion not accented on the final vowel; but two m. Bahuvrlhis dtapia-tanu- and sarva- TA. VI. 41 has the normally accented kyambu-. tanii'. 5 The corresponding m. in this instance is not oxytone, madhu-. VI. Declension. Nouns. Vowel Stems. 291

retain the. accent on that syllable throughout their inflexion. In this respect they agree with the B group of the radical i- declension and differ from the ordinary derivative I- declension.

c. Transition fprms. There is an incipient tendency here to be affected by the analogy of the derivative z"-stems. The only certain example in the RV. is the L. ivasruam (x. 8546) for *ivasrm; the 1. dravitnua is perhaps another instance i. But the AV, has at least 10 such forms: A, kuhum, ianum, vadAum; D. agruvai, vadhvai, svasruai; Ab. punar-bkuvas; G. uniaruas^ 'gourd', prdakuas, svasruas; L. ianudm. The VS. has A. pumscalu7n, D. tanvai, G. tanvas.

Inflexion,

385. In the L. sing, the -i may be dropped in the RV. In the later Samhitas -m sometimes appears in the A. for -am, and -ai, -as, -am are occasionally taken as the endings of the D. G. L. respectively. The ending -am appears once in the RV. also. The forms actually occurring, if made from tami- f. 'body', would be as follows:

Sing. N. tamis. A. tanuam. I. tanua. D. tanue. Ab. tam'ias. G. tanuas. L. tanui and tana. V. tdnu. Du. N. A. tam'ca. D. tanabhyam. L. taniios. PI. N. tani'ias. A. tanuas. I. tanubhis. D. taniibhyas. G. tandnam. L. tanusu. » The forms actually occurring are:

Sing. N. m. prasiis, d-tapta-tanus, sdrva-tanus (AV.). — f. asita-jnUs (AV.)j kuhus (TS. AV.), kySmbus ^ {KSf.), guggulas (AV.), gufigas, jatas (VS.), tands, dhantls (AV.), nrtUs, patayalcis (AV.), prdakas (AV.), phalgUs (VS. XXIV. 4), madhUs (AV.), vadhiis, sundhyiis, svasrds, saranyds. A. m. krkadasuam^. — f. carism'iam, jighatsi'iam (AV.), tanuam^, prdakuam^ (AV.), vadhuain, su-druamT; avasyuvam, dur-hanayi'tvam, deva- yuvam (VS. I. 12), makhasyuvam, vacasyuvam, sundhyicvam, su-dri'cvam (SV.). — With ending -m for -am: kuhnm (TS. AV.), tandm (TS. AV.), pums- calam (VS. XXX. 5), vadhum (AV. ; Kh. iv. 5'). I. f. tanua^, vadkiia; duvasyuva. — D. f. tant'ie^. — With ending -a/: agruvai (AV.), tanvai (VS. xxiiL 44), babhrvdi (VS. xx. 28), vadhvdi^° (AV.), svasrudi (AV.). — Ab. f. kadri'cvas; tanuas.

'' G. f. agri'ivas, sundkyuvas; tamias^^, vadAuas. — With ending -as: tanvhs (VS. III. 17), prdakuas (AV.), svasruds (AV.). L. f. catm'd, tani'd^^. — Without ending: camd'^^, tand^^. — With ending -am-. svasruAm; tanvsm''^ (A^-)) tanuvam^^ (TS. l 7. 12^). V. f. bdbhru, vddhu.

1 Because the accent is shifted to the times. The TS. has tanuva (i. i. los etc.) ending as in the derivative t- declension; In RV. X. 241 camu is once perhaps a con- cp. Lanman 404. tracted I.; see Lanman 409 (top). 2 See Lanman 41 i'. 9 The AV. has tanue 6 times, tanve 3 The TA. has the normal accentuation 7 times. The TS. has tanuve. kyambit-; the corresponding stem in the RV. 1° The AV. has vadhvdi and vadhuai once is kiydmbu- n. each. 4 That the word is m. is probable because 11 The AV, has tanuas 10 times, tanvas sdrvam seems to agree with it (i. 297). The 4 times. The TS. has tanuvas. A. m. abhTruam 'fearless' is a transfer from 12 Three or four times ianuT, metrically the u- declension. lengthened (the Pada has z); cp, Lanman 5 The AV. has tanvam once, tanuam 1 6 times. 411 (bottom). The TS. (iv.3.131) "Wsstaniivi. The TS. regularly \xs.stanuvam[}..%. lo^, etc.). J3 camu occurs 6 times, camui once. 6 The .Mss. all read prdakvam ; see 14 tanu occurs once, tanui 3 times. 15 tanvam Whitney's note on AV. x. 4'^. This should doubtless be read \ 7 As an adj. in vil. 322°, 'made of good see Lanman 412. wood'; as a subst. in x, 288 'good beanj'. J 6 This form in TS. iv. 2. 6^ is a variant 8 The AV. has iamiS 4 times, ianva 5 for the G. sing, tanvas of RV. x. 9710. 19* 292 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

Du. N, A. f. camua, tam'ta. — D. f. haniibhyam'^ (TS. vii. 3. 16'). — L. camuos^.

PI. N. f. I. agruvas; cami'ias, jatiias (AV.), tamias'*, prdakuas (AV.), prajatii'tas (AV.). — 2. ainho-yiwas, apasyuvas, avasyi'ivas, ayuvas, udanyiivas,

carariyi'ivas{PiM.), didhisuas, panasy'ivas, parayisntias, prtanay'ivas, prsanayuvas, bihhatsnvas, makhasyi'ivas, mandrayuvas, niahiyuvas, mumuksuas, sanSyiivas,

sudayitniMs. — yuva-yhs (iv. 41^), agreeing with N. f. dhlyas, appears to be a contracted form for -yii-as^.

A. f. I. agruvas; tanuas^, nabkamias, vadkuasT. — 2. abki-dipsuas,

dravitniias ; vi-panyuvas, sundhyiivas^ - — I. m. maksiibhis'^. — f. ianubhis. — D. f. tannbhyas. — G. f. i. tanUnam, vadhiinatn — 2. aghayfmam '° (AV.), babhrunam, bibhatsi'mam.

L. f. I. camusu, tanihu. — 2. babhrusu.

6. a. Radical u- stems.

385. There are not many u- stems derived from roots originally ending in -u, as several of these (about nine) have joined the consonant declension by adding the determinative -/''. Some eight stems .are, however, formed from roots in -u, all of them but one {dyu-) being compounds. These are: dyu- 'day', abhi-dyu- 'heavenly'; mitd-dru-^^ 'firm-legged', raghu-dru- 'running swiftly'; d-pra-yu-'^^ 'assiduous'; ddhri-gu-'^* 'irresistible', vanar-gi't- 'forest- roaming'; su-sti'i- 'highly praised''^. There are besides some 12 stems in which u is radical in a secondary sense as representing the shortened form of the vowel of three roots ending in -u^^. These are: dhi-ju- 'inspiring the mind', from ju- 'impel'; su-pu- 'clarifying well', from pu- 'purify'; and com- pounds of ^/^S- 'be': d-pra-bhu- 'powerless',

vanar-giis, vi-bhus, sam-bhus'^T . — n. d-pra-bhu, d-prayu, a-bhu, ud-bhi'i (AV.), pra-bhu, mayo-bhu, raghu-dru, vi-bhu, sam-bhu, su-bhu. A. m. ddhri-gum, abhi-dyum, abhi-bhi'nii(AN.), a-bhum,pra-bhum, vi-bhum'^^. I. m. mayo-bhuna. — n. su-puna (AV.).

I There are also two m. transfers from 9 This is only a metrical lengthening of the II- declension, madhuyuva and pasva; the stem vowel (Pada u), cp. Lanman 403 and 413 (mid), 10 Cp. Lanman 418^. ^ This is really a transition form from 11 See above, stems in derivative -^(307). the derivative u- declension. 12 From dru- 'run'. On sddru- see Whit- 3 camuos occurs 14 times, camvds possibly ney's note on AV. xv. 71, once (ix. 962'). 13 From yu- 'separate', 'keep away'. Once ianvas; see Lanman 408 (top). 14 'going unrestrained', hora. g^u- ^a' =gd-, ' The TS. has tanuvas. 15 The words sabar-dhii- 'yielding nectar', 5 On raiha-yus (x, 70^) standing possibly and a-smrta-dhru- 'not caring for enemies', iox -yus ^ yu-as, see Lanman 4152. seem to be compounded with -duh [-dhtik) 6 RV. 20 times, AV. 3 times tanuas; RV. and -druk [-dhruk : see pw.). twice, AV. once ianvas. The TS. has tanuvas. "6 They are therefore transfers from the On Weber's conjecture (IS. 13,58) visvas as radical 2J- declension, all the N, A. neuters A. pi. of *vi'su- see Lanman 41 6^. of which are thus formed.

7 The Mss. of the AV. once read badhvas 17 sabar-dhus (VS. V, 26 ; Kh, IV. 520) == (= vadAuas). sabar-dhiik. * On ratha-yus (vil. 2^) for -yus = yiias, 18 sabar-dhum A. f. = sabar-duham. see Lanman 416''. The VS. (xxi. 25) \^%jatus. ;

VI. Declension. Nouns. Vowel Stems. 293

D. m. dd/iri-gave, abhi-dyave.

G. m. pra-bhos, su-stos. — L. n. ud-bhdu (VS. xv. i), mitd-drau. V. m. adhri-go, pra-bho (AA. iv. i = Kh. v. 4)'. Du. N.^A. V. m._ ddhri-gu\ abhi-dyu (Kh. l s*), pari-bhu (AV.), puru- i>kii, puru-bhu, vanar-gii, sam-bha, sam-bhu. PI. N. m. ddhri-gavas^, abhi-dyavas, d/il-jdvas, mitd-dravas'', vi-bhdvas, V. vi-bhv-as^. — n. mayo-bhu. A, m. mayo-b/iiin, dyiiti, vi-bhiin (VS. xx. 23J. I. m. dyubhis; d-pra-yubhis, abki-dyubhis, vanar-gubhis (AV.), vi-bhubhis.

6. b. Derivative u- stems.

Lanman, Noun-Inflection 400—419. — WHITNEY, Sanskrit Grammar 335—346.

388. This declension embraces a large number of nouns of all genders. The masculine stems greatly preponderate, being about four times as numerous as the feminine and neuter stems taken together; while the neuters consider- ably outnumber the feminines. Thus the N. and A. sing, are formed by about 430 stems in the m., by 68 in the n., and by 46 in the £ in the RV. The normal inflexion which is practically the same in all genders, except the N. A. sing, du, pi. n., is closely parallel to that of the i- stems (380). The stem takes Guna in the same cases; but while in the 2- declension only one word [ari-) ever uses the unmodified stem, 8 or 9 words may do so here. The endings, too, are closely analogous; but while in the i- declension

the ending of the L. sing, is always dropped, it is here retained in several

words; and while the n- declension has affected only the I. sing, of the i- declension, it has here affected all the other cases of the singular which take vowel endings. Finally, the accentuation is exactly parallel to that of of the i- stems.

a. Adjectives in -u often use this stem for the feminine also ; e. g. cam- 'dear' otherwise they form tlie f. in -?7, as tanii-ra,, ianil-i, 'thin'; or in -r, as »?«- m., itrv-i-i, 'broad', prthii- m., prthv-i- f. 'broad', bahu- m„ bahv4- f. 'much', mrdu- (AV.) m., mrdv-t- (VS.) f. .'soft'. b. The 8 stems wliich are analogous to ari- in having forms that attach the normal endings to the unnltered stem are: pah't-, pitu-; kfiu-, krdiu-, madhii-, vdsu-, sisu-, sahasra-baku-. c. Oxytone stems when the final vowel is changed to v, throw the accent on a following vowel not as Svarita but as Udatta; they also shift it to \.\it-nam of the G. pi. even though the stem vowel does not in that case lose its syllabic value; e.g.pahl-nam. d. Transition forms, i. There are in the RV. only three forms which follow the analogy of the derivative T- declension: D. isv-ai, G. isv-as, su-vasiv-as, all in late passages; the AV. also has rajjv-d7n^, — 2. Transitions to the ii- declension appear in the A. d-bhTrvam, from d-bhTru-, and in several words formed with the suffix -yu which make their N. pi. or du. as -yuvas, -yuva. — 3. Besides some 46 I. forms m. and n. sing., there are several transitions to the n- declension in the remaining cases of the sing., all neuter forms (except the m. G. cdninas): D. mddkune; Ab. mddhnnas, sdnunas; G. cdi-unas, ddnunas, druijas, mddhunas, vasunas; L. dyuni, sdnuni; also a few other forms from the later Saiphitas.

Inflexion.

389. The N. sing. m. f always takes -s, the A. simply -jn. The D. Ab. G. sing, sometimes attach the normal endings to the unmodified stem; but

1 In the f. V. prihic-sto 'broad-tufted', the the radical il- declension d-prdyuvas, raghu- u of the stem stu- = stukn- 'tuft' may be radical. druvas. 2 d-smr/a-d/tnl == dsmria-druhd. 5 See Lanman 4142. 3 For ddhri-gavas owing to the false ana- 6 The Mss. in AV. vi. 1212 read rdjvam. logy of gdvas 'cows'. the only form of this word which occurs in 4 There are also the forms according to the RV. is the N. sing, rdjjiis. 2 94 I- Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar. they generally gunate the stem, which then adds only -s instead of -as in the Ab. G. The L. sing, sometimes gunates the stem and adds -t, but generally' takes Vrddhi without an ending. The V. always gunates the stem.

The N. pi. m. f. nearly always gunates the -2(, to which the normal ending

-as is added. The A. pi. in the m. adds -n, in the f. -s, before which the vowel is lengthened. The G. pi. always takes -nam, lengthening the pre-

ceding vowel. The N. A. V. du. m. f. have no ending, simply lengthening the final vowel. The adjective mddhu- 'sweet' may be used to illustrafe the forms actually occurring:

Sing. N. m. f. mddhus, n. mddhu. A. m. f. mddhum, n. mddhu. I. m. f. n. mddhva, m. n. mddhuna. D. m. f. n. mddhave, m. mddhve. Ab. m. f. n. mddhos, m. n. mddhvas, n. mddhunas. G. m. i. n. mddhos, m. n. mddkvas; n. mddhunas.

L. m. f. n. mddkau, m. n. mddhavi, n. mddhuni. V. m. f. mddho, n. mddhu.

Du. N. A. V. m. f. mddhu, n. mddhvT. I. m. mddhubhyam. D. m. mddhubhyam. Ab. m. n. mddhubhyam. G. m. mddhvos, n. mddhunas (AV.).

L. m. f. mddhvos.

PI. N. V. m. f. mddhavas; mddhvas. N. A. n. mddhu, mddhu; mddhuni.

A. m. mddhun; t?iddhvas, f. mddhus; mddhvas. I. m. f. n. mddhubhis. D. m. f. n. mddhubhyas. Ab. m. f. mddhubhyas. G. m. f n. mddhunam. L. m. i. n. mddhusu. The forms actually occurring are the following: Sing. N. m. This form is very frequent, being made from 250 stems in the RV. and occurring nearly 900 times. The commonest examples are: mdus (64) 'drop', visnus (34; 'Visnu', su-krdtus (32) 'skilful', vdsus (25) 'good', ketus (23) 'brightness', rbhus (21) 'deft', vayi'is (20) 'wind', visvdyus (18) 'kind to all men', suni'is (18) 'son', sindhus (17) 'river', cams (16) 'dear', asmayus (16) 'desiring us', devayiis (15) 'devoted to the gods', mdnus (15) 'man'. — isus 'arrow', otherwise f., is once (vm. 66') m.

a. The form, yiis 'moving' is perhaps a corruption in VIII. 18'^, where Bloomfield (JAOS. 1906, p. 72) would read, for ririsisla yur, ririsTstdyur = HrisTsia ayur. b. In vn. 86^ didrksiipo perhaps stands for didfksus-\-upo; but the Pada reads didfksu, and desiderative adjectives otherwise accent the final syllable; cp. Lanman 405 (bottom).

f. This form is made from 31 stems and occurs 73 times in the RV. The commonest examples are dhem'is (22) 'cow', sindhus (11), sdrus (4) 'arrow', vasuyus (3) 'desiring goods', isus (2), gatus (2) 'course', cdrus (2), jivdtus (2) 'life' '. N. A. n. This form, which has no ending, is made from 68 stems and occurs over 400 times in the RV. The commonest examples are mddhu {t]) ('sweetness'), vdsu (77) 'wealth', uru (51) 'wide', caru (27), snnu (18) 'summit', J)rthu (15) 'broad', tri-dhatu (13) 'threefold', puru (13) 'much'. The RV. once has pdsu and the VS. (xxni.30) pani 'animal'. In other Samhitas occur tdlu (VS.) 'palate', trdpu (AV. VS.) 'tin'.

a. The final -u is metrically lengthened in puru (i2 timesj, milhu (twice) 'wrongly', and uru (once) 2. b. The metre seems to require the forms ayu illx. i^fj^'), jaramj-tyu (AV. XIX. 30'), jimu (AV. HI. 19'), parayisnii (AV. VIII. 2^8), bahu (AV. XX. 135'^), instead of the corre- sponding forms with -s, ayus etc., of the Samhita text.

A. m. This form is made from 179 stems and occurs over 700 times in the RV. The commonest examples are: krdtum (55) 'ability', keti'im (34), gatum (33) 'course' and 'song', indum (27), sisum (26) 'child', sindhum (22),

I Lanman 406 enumerates the stems which = The Pada text here always )a2js, puru,

I form this N. mithu, uru. Cp. RPr. VII. | 9, 19, 31; ix. 3. VI. Declension. Nouns. Vowel Stems.

f. This form is made from 15 stems and occurs 50 times in the RV.. fflV;4,?«?<»2 'yielding no milk', arund-psum 'of ruddy appearance', hum, kri'mum N. of a river, drum, jdsum 'resting-place', jigatnum 'speeding', jTrddanum 'sprinkling ^abundantly', Jmitum, dhdnum 'sandbank', dheniim, bhujyutn 'viper', vasuyum, sdrum, sindhum.

I. m. This case is formed in two ways. i. Four stems in the RV. add the normal ending -a, before which the -u is almost invariably pronounced as v. parah-d 'axe', pasv-d; krdtv-a^, Usv-a. — 2. Owing to the influence of the 11- declension 30 stems in the RV. add -na instead of the normal -a: amsi'ml, aktuna 'light', an-aiuna 'not swift', a-bandhuna 'kinless', induna, isuna (Kh. iv. 73)^, uri'ma, rjund 'straight', rtuna 'fixed time', ketuna, krdtuna 3, cetuna 'heed', Jisnuna 'victorious', tri-dhdtuna, dhumd-ketuna 'smoke- bannered', dhrsnt'ma 'bold', pasi'mS, bkanuna, mdnuna, manyima, ripi'ma 'deceiver', vagnuna 'roar', vahati'ma 'bridal procession', vayuna, m-bhinduna 'splitting', visnuna, vfsa-psuna 'of strong appearance', sadhuna 'straight', su- ceti'ma 'benevolence', xis'zifwa (TS.iu. 2. 2 ') 'bridge', stanayitntma 'thunder', smina^ 'summit'.

f. This form is made from 7 stems in the RV. by adding the normal ending -a, before which the u is pronounced as a vowel in five stems : cikitvd (AV.), panvd 'praise'; d-dhenva, isva (AV.; Kh. iv. 5 3 '), mddhva, mehatnvd N. of a river, rdjjva (AV.) 'rope', sdrva, su-sdrtva N. of a river, hdnva 'jaw'-

a. Six oxytone stems and also millm- form instrumentals with interposed -y-; they

are used adverbially with shift of accent to the ending : anu-sthuya 'immediately', amuya 'thus', asuyd 'quickly', dhrmuya boldly', raghuya 'swiftly', sadhuya 'rightly'; mithuya 'falsely'.

n. This case is made in two ways. i. The normal ending -d is added directly to the stem. Of this formation there is only one example: mddhva'' 'honey'. — 2. Owing to the influence of the n- declension 15 stems in the RV. add -na: iiruna, krdhuna 'defective', ghrtd-snuna 'dripping with ghee', jardyuna, 'after-birth', titauna 'sieve', trsima 'greedy', tri-dkdtuna, ddnund 'fluid', druna^ 'wood', dhrsm'mJ, pururima 'far and wide', prthunU, mddhund, vdsunl, sdnuna, svadi'ma 'sweet'.

D. m. This case is formed in two ways. i. The ending -e is added to

the unmodified stem in three words in the RV. : krdtve^, sihe, sakdsra-bahve'' 'having a thousand arms'. — 2. The ending e is added to the gunated final vowel in over 60 stems in the RV. The commonest examples are: mdnave (36), vaydve (23), visnare (13), manydve (12), aydve {\q) 'living', sundve {10), ddsyave (g), ripdve (7), mrtydve (6) 'death', purdve (5)' 'man'. f. This case is made in the same way as the second form of the m. from only three stems in the RV: Jivdtave, dhendve, sdrave. n. This case is formed in three ways. i. The ending -e is added to the

1 Twice out of 59 occurrences pronounced 5 The words snu- and dric- are not accen- kratud. The form krdtva occurs VS. xxxiir. tuated as monosyllabic stems because they 72 and twice in the Khilas (III. 162; v. d^); are the reduced form of the dissyllables and in Kh. iv.536 kartva is perhaps meant sdnu- and ddrii-, for krdtva, 6 krdtve also occurs VS. xiv.8; xxxvill. 28. 2 For the isvd of AV. v. 54. 7 Pronounced -bahue. 3 The form kratuna, occurs 12 times, 8 Lanman 409 enumerates the stems which kraiva 59 times, in the RV. take this dative. 4 This form also occurs in VS. XX. 56 etc., TS. IV. I. 81 (twice) and Kh. v. S*. :

296 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar. unmodified stem in one word: pdsv-e^. — 2. The ending -e is added to the gunated stem in two words: urdve, visvdyave. 3. Owing to the influence of the n- declension -ne is added to the stem in one word in the RV.: mddhune. The AV. also has kaiipune 'mat'. Ab. m. This case is formed in two ways. i. The normal ending -as is added to the unmodified stem in one word only: pitv-ds 'draught'. — 2. The ending -s is added to the gunated stem in 20 words in the RV. amhos 'distress', adhvaryos 'officiating priest', rtjs, krsSnos N. of a divine archer, ksipanos 'archer', gdntos 'course', tanayitnos 'thundering', tanyatos 5 'thunder', devayos, ninitsos 'wishing to blame', puros, babhros (Kh. v. 1 ") 'brown', manyos, mrtyos, ririksos 'wishing to injure', ranisthos 'intestine', vayos, insnos, sdtros, sindhos, snos.

f. This case is made in the same way as the second form of the m. The only two examples are: dhdnos and vdstos 'dawn'. There is also one transition form due to the influence of the T- declension: isv-as. n. This case is made in three ways. i. The ending -as is added to the unmodified stem in one word only: mddhvas. — 2. The ending -s is added to the gunated stem: uros, drJs'^, mddhos (Kh. iv. 12'; TS. iv. 4. 12'), sdnos, svados. — 3. Under the influence of the n- declension -nas is added to the stem: mddAimas, sdnunas. G. m. This case is made in two ways. I. The ending -as is added to the unmodified stem in six words: pasvds, pitvds; krdivas, tnddkvas, vdsvas, sUvasi. — 2. The prevailing form is made by adding -s to the gunated stem, and appears in 70 words. The commonest examples are': ayos (22\ visnos (14), sindhos (13), aktos (11), vayos (10), ddsyos (8), mdnos (8), sdtros (5), karos (4) 'singer'.

a. There is a single transition form according to the n- declension cd}~unas, which occurs only once (vni. 514).

f. This case is formed in one way only, like the second form of the m., from 5 stems: aktos, dhenos, vdstos, sardyos N. of a river, sindhos. n. This case is made like the Ab. n. i. mddhvas'^, vdsvas. — 2. The commonest form, made from 8 stems in the RV. : uros, ksos 'food', guggulos

(AV.) 'bdellium', cdros, mddhos i^- AST.), vdsos ( + AV.), vastos{-{- PCVy&fitWmg', sadhos, svSdos. — 3. ciirunas, danunas, drunas^ , mddhunas'' , vdsunas^.

L. m. This case is formed in two ways. i. The normal ending -/ is added to the gunated final vowel in 7 stems: dnavi 'non-Aryan man', trasddasyavi N. of a king, ddsyavi, druhydvi N. of a man, pdvlravi N. of a man, visnavi, sundvi. — 2. More usually the ending is dropped, leaving the final stem vowel with Vrddhi instead of Guna.

This form of the L. is taken by 19 stems in the RV. : aktdit 'at night', aydu, Urdu, krdtau, cardu 'pot', druhydu, pdrsaii N. of a man, pasdu.

1 The stem pasu- occurs once in the N. 6 There is no certain evidence as to the as a neuter, and pdsve must owing to the gender of dru- 'wood', but, as it is a accent be taken as the D. of that stem; reduced form of dam- which is n., it may be the m, stem is pasu-, D. fasdve, assumed to be n. There is also the form 2 The form d7'6s also occurs in Kh. iv, 5". drSs. 3 Possibly 4 other words written with -os, 7 madhvas occurs 67 times, madhos 13 times, should be pronounced with -uas: dhfsm'ias mddhunas 9 times in the RV. The VS. has

(x. 22^), ripuas {pi .'i^^'), pipruas (vr. 22'), visnuas all three forms in independent passages, (vni. 31^°). 8 vdsvas occurs 38 times, vdsos 8 times,

4 Lanman 410 gives a list of the stems vdsunas 1 1 times in the RV. taking this form of the genitive. 5 Pronounced madhuas twice out of 67 occurrences. VI. Declension. Nouns. Vowel Stems. 297

pu?tt-gau N. of a man, putdkratau N. of a man, purdu, mdnau and maniu \ yadau N. of a ^ man, srihti-gau N. of a man, sindhau, setau 'bond', .fz/aVa« 'sacrificial post'.

f. This case is made in one way only, like the second form of the m. The only example in the RV. is sindhau; the AV. has sarau^ and sntau 'birth'. n. This case is formed in three ways. i. AVith the ending -/ added to the gunated stem only in sanavi, which occurs 9 times. When the adjective djya- or avyiya- 'made of sheep's wool' immediately follows, the L. of this word appears as sAno. The Pada here always has sfinau, but as the metre requires a short syllable it seems likely that the ending has been dropped to avoid a disagreeable sequence of syllables in sanavy dvye, but without leaving the lengthened form of the stem {sdnsv) because of the metre. parallel A form appears to be vdsto in the formula vdsta usrds 'at break of dawn', which occurs 5 times in the RV.". — 2. As in the m., the usual form is that in -au formed from 8 stems: a-rajjdu 'not consisting of ropes', vrdu, ghrsau 'lively', prthdu, mdd/iau, vdsau, vildu 'stronghold', sAnau. — 3. Accord- ing to the n- declension; Ayuni, diruni (AV.), druni (Kh. l 5 "j, sanuni^. V. m. This case, which gunates the final vowel, is formed from 58 stems. The commonest examples are: indo (144), vaso (62), sata-krato (47) 'having a hundred powers', vayo (43), suno (36), su-krato (22)*. f. This case which has the same form as the m., is made from 6 stems: adri-sano 'dwelling on mountain tops', diir-hano 'ugly-jawed', prthu-sto 'having

a broad tuft of hair', sindho, su-blho 'having strong arms', sva-bhano 'self- luminous'. n. The V. n. seems to have been identical in form with the N. judging by the only example which occurs: guggulu'' (AV. xix. 38^). Du. N. A. V. m. This form, which is made by lengthening the final vowel, occurs from 69 stems. The commonest examples are: indra-vayii (22) 'Indra and Vayu', vajlni-vasu (21) 'rich in swift mares', baha (20) 'arms', vfsan-vasu (18) 'possessing great wealth', indra-visnu (13) 'Indra and Visnu'. The TS. has also dgna-vimu (l8. 22') 'O Agni and Visnu'. There are

besides two forms in which the final vowel is shortened ': jigatnu (vn. 65 ') 'speeding' and su-hdntu (vii. 19'') 5 'easy to slay'.

f. This form is made in the same way as the m. but is much rarer, occurring from 5 stems only: jigatntt, dhentt, sd-bandhu 'akin', samand- bandhu 'having the same kin', hd^iu.

n. This form adds the regular ending -f. The only example in the RV. is urv-i. The VS. has according to the «- declension janu-n-t (xx. 8) 'knees'. I. m. amsubhyam (VS.vir. i), an-amayitnubhyam 'curative', vr-bahubhyam 'man's arms', blhi'ibhyam. — f. hdnitbhyam (VS. xi. 78)'". D. m. indra-vayubhyam (VS. vil 8), indra-vimubhyam (VS. vii. 23), bahubhylm.

1 Accented mandu only when followed by 5 sdnavi occurs 9 times, sdno {dvye) % ddhi. times, sdnau 10 times, sdnuni once. 2 A possible m, L. with n would be rajjiini, 6 The V. vibhdvaso in Kh. 11. 8^ is wrongly an emendation for 7-ajani of the Mss. (AV. accented. XX. 1333). For the reading of AV.xx. 13112 7 The Mss. read guggulu or guggulo. See vanisthdu the Mss. have vanisjha which, if Whitney's note on the passage. correct, would be a unique example of -5 8 In both Samhita and Pada text. in the L. of the u- declension. 9 The RV. three times has the curious 3 Emendation for sdrau of the Mss.; see A. m. du, bahdva = bdhii apparently from WHtTNEy's note on AV. v. 25'. a stem bahdva-, 'o 4 See Kaegi, Festgruss an Bohtlingk hdniibhyam, a transition to the ii- stems,

48 f. in TS. IV. I. I02; Vll. 3. 16'. 298 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

Ab. m. uri'ibhyam 'thighs', bahubhyam. — n. janubhyam (AV.). G. m. urvos^, bahvos'^. — n. according to the «- declension: jAnu?ws {KV.). L. m. urvos (AV.), baAvos^. — f. hdnvos'-. PI. N. V. m. This case is formed in two ways. i. The ending -as is added to the unmodified stem. Of this formation the only example is mddhv-as (occurring 4 times). — 2. The ending -as is added to the gunated stem, e. g. aktdv-as. This form is very frequent, being made from 161 stems and occurring over 700 times in the RV. The commonest examples are: hidavas (67), rbhdvas (57), vdsavas (46), suddnavas (42) 'bounteous', si'ndhavas (34), asdvas (30), adhvarydvas (27), aydvas (27), kardvas (18), mitd-jhavas (2) 'firm-kneed'. f. This case is formed in the same two ways as the m. i. Of this for- mation there are only two examples: mddhv-as, sata-kratv-as. — 2. The regular form is made from 1 5 stems in the RV. ; an-asrdvas 'tearless', d-bhiravas 'fearless', a-rif^az'fl'j' 'dustless', isavas, tri-dhstavas, dhendvas,pdrsavas, vasuydvas, sdravas, sanisydvas 'desirous', sd-manyavas and sa-manydvas 'unanimous', sindhavas, su-ketdvas, svd-setavas 'forming one's own bridge', hdnavas. N, A. n. This form is made in two ways. i. Twelve stems take no ending, four of them also lengthening the final vowel sometimes. These forms occur 76 times altogether in the RV., 48 times with short, 28 times with long vowel. The words occurring are: uru, rju, cSru, tri-dkstu, puru', bakti, mdd/iu, vdsu, vTli'i, sdnu, su-dhatu 'manifold', su-hdntu; urU, purU^, vdsu'^, Vila. The Pada text always has the short vowel. — 2. The more usual form follows the n- declension, adding -/?/, before which the final vowel is lengthened. It is made by 14 stems ^ and occurs 127 times alto- gether in the RV. : aghayuni (Kh. iv. 5 3) 'malicious', aniini (AV.) 'minute', alabuni (AV.)* 'gourds', dsruni (AV.) 'tears', karkdndhuni (VS. xix. 23) 'jujube berries', caruni, tri-dhatUni, danuni 'fluid', daruni, devayani, purdni, prthuni, bahilni, mddhUni, yuvayani 'longing for you both', vdsuni, vdstuni, smdsruni, sanuni.

A. m. This case is made in two ways. . i. The normal ending -as is added to the unmodified stem. The only two examples of this formation are pasv-ds and kftv-as^ 'times'. — 2. The usual form is made from 43 stems with the ending -n, before which the vowel is lengthened. The original ending -ns still survives as -mr 45 times before vowels and once as -ms before ca^. The commonest examples are sdtrun (43), ddsyun (27), sindhun (23), aktun (9), rtiin (8), pasttn (5)5. From the VS.: akhUn (xxiv. 26) 'moles', nydnkun (xxiv. 27) 'antelopes', madgm (xxiv. 22) 'diver-birds', malimlun (xi. 78; TS.) 'robbers', rurun (xxiv. 27) 'antelopes'. From the Khilas: isUn

(ill. 168).

f. This like the m. is formed in two ways. i. The only example is mddhv-as, which occurs twice. — 2. The ending -s is added, before which the vowel is lengthened. The only two examples in the RV. (occurring 5

' To be pronounced uruos, bahuos, hanuos 6 The Mss. in AV. xx. 1341 read dlabiitii. in the RV. 1 The A. of a noun kfiu- 'making', used ^ piru seems to be the only form of this adverbially: bhiiri ifivas (ni. 18*) 'many kind in theAV., where it occurs once (xix, times', sdivat kflvas (ill. S41) 'innumerable 2^) 49*). ^ times', ddsd kHvas (AV. XI. 'ten times'. 3 furu occurs 24 times, purii 12 times (all 8 On the Sandhi of these accusatives in but once at the end of a Pada). un see Lanman 415 (bottom) and 41^ 4 vdsii occurs twice, vasu 19 times (12 (top). times at the end of a Pada), 9 Lanman 416 enumerates the stems which 5 Half of these also take the form without form this A. n in the RV. VI. Declension. Pronouns. Personal Pronouns. 299

times) are: hus and dhmis. The Khila after RV. x. 9 has the form vdrenya- kratns 'mtelhgenf, but the text of Kh. iil 13' reads vdrenya-kratus \ I. m. This form is frequent, being made from 50 stems and occurring over 200 times. = The commonest examples are: vdsubhis (24), aktubhis {I'j), rtubkis{i^), asubkis{i2), /5;'/i3/^?>(i 2) 'protectors', bidubhis {\\), bkam'Mis{-j), rbhiibhis (6), sindhubhis (5), snubhis^ (5). f. This case, formed in the same way as the m., is rare^ only 3 examples occurring in the RV. : eka-dhenubhis 'excellent cows', tri-dkitubkis, dhmiibhis. n.. a-rm^^,^zj 'dustless', dsrubhis {YS.yiyiV.()), karkdndhubhis i^^.y.yn.'^z), jarayubhis (AV.), bahubhis, mddhubhis (Kh. i. 11 7), vdsubhis, smdsrubhis (VS. I XXV. ; SV.) 'beards', su-mdntubhis 'benevolent'. D. m. a-satriibhyas 'foeless', rtubhyas (y'&.-yiy.ii.i^), rbhubhyas, guhgi'ibhyas 'descendants of Guhgu', tftsubhyas 'the Trtsus' (a tribe), ddsabhlsubhyas, 'having ten reins', ddsyubhyas, pasubhyas, purubhyas, bahubhyas, mrgayubhyas (VS. XVL 27) 'hunters', vdsubhyas, sindhubhyas. f. There is no example in theRV. The AV. has two: isubhyas, dhenubhyas. — n. sdnubhyas (VS. xxx. 6). Ab. m. aktubhyas, jatrubhyas 'cartilages of the breast bone', jighatsiibhyas {KS[>j 'seeking to devour', ddsyubhyas, bahubhyas, bhfgubhyas 'Bhrgus', mrtyubhyas (Av.), sd-bandhubhyas (AV.). — f, dhdnubhyas, sindhubhyas. G. m. This case is formed from 23 stems in the RV., 12 being oxy- tones and 11 otherwise accented: i. rtunim, rbhundm, rsundm 'flames', carundm, devayundm, pasundm (AV. VS. TS.), pitUndm, purundm, prasundm 'very swift', babhrundm, bahundm, yjtundm 'spectres', ripundm, stayundm (VS.) 'thieves'. — 2. abhi-kratunam 'insolent', abhtsunam 'reins', ahy-drsunam 'gUding like a snake', krdtUnam, tftsunatn, ddsyunam (AV.), piyarunam (AV.) 'mischie- vous', bhfgUnam, mdnunam, vdsunam, sdtrunSm, sd-bandhunam (AV.), sindhunam, svdrunam 'sacrificial posts'. — f. dhenUndm; sindhunam. — n. mddhunam, ydsunam 'embraces', vdsunam. L. m. amsusu (VS. vin. 57), aktusu, dnusu, ast'isu, druhyiisu, pasiisu (AV.), puri'isu, bahusu, yddusu, vi-bandhusu (AV.) 'kinless', visvd-bhanusu 'all-illumining', sdtrusu, sindhusu. — f. vdstusu, sindhusu'^. — n. urusu, vdstusu, smdsrusu, sdnusu, sni'csu^ (VS. TS.).

II. Pronouns.

Benfey, Vollstandige Grammatik 773—780 (p. 333—340). — WmTNEY, Sanskrit Grammar 490—526 (p. 185 — 199). — Pischel, ZDMG. 35, 714— 716. — Delbeuck, Syntaktische Forschungen 5, 204—221 ; cp. Brugmann, KG. 494—525, and Die Demon- strativa der indogermanischen Sprachen, Leipzig 1904.

390. The pronouns occupy a special position in declension, as being' derived from a limited class of roots with a demonstrative sense, and as exhibiting several marked pecuHarities of inflexion. These peculiarities are in some degree extended to a certain number of adjectives.

I. Personal Pronouns.

391. These are the most peculiar of all, as being for each person derived from several roots or combinations of roots, as being specially anomalous in inflexion, as not distinguishing gender and, to some extent.

1 4 ayusu (t. is perhaps transfer The m. A, sindhitn occurs oace (x, 352 ) ^%^) a form in the sense of a f. for ayusu; cp. Lanman 4191, 2 Lanman 416 (bottom) enumerates the 5 With dissyllabic accent as usual. stems taking this case. 3 Accentuated like a dissyllable as elsewhere. ;

300 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

not even number. Some resemble neuters in form ; a few have no apparent case-ending; in two of them the ace. pi. masc. does duty as fem. also. The forms of the first and second person' which occur are: 1. Sing. N. ahdm'^. A. miim, ma. I. maya. D. mdhyam, mdhya, nie^'. Ab. fiidd''. G. mdma, me. L. mdyi^. Du. N. v&m (RV").6. A. nan. D.7 nau. Ab. avdd (TS.). G.^ nau. PI. N. vaydm. A. asmSn'^, nas^. I. asmsbkis. D. asmdbhyam, asmi (RV.), 7ias. Ab. asmdd. G. asmakam^°, asmska^^ (RV.), nas. L. asm^, asmssu''^. 2. Sing. N. tvdm'^i. A. tvSm, tva. I. tvdya, ivd (RV.). D. tiibhyam,

tubhya, te^K Ab. ivdd. G. tdva, te. L. /»/'5 (RV. VS.), tvdyi (AV. VS. TS.). Du. N. yuvdm. A. yuvatfi, vam. I. yuvdbhyavi, yuvAbfiyam. D. z/aw. Ab. >'^z'aV (RV.). G. ji'z^wj (RV. and Kh.i.i2'}, yuvdyos (TS.iii. S.4O, 'vam. PI. yuydm''^. A. yusmdn^T, f yusmds (VS'.), z/aj-'*. D. yusmdbhyam, vas. Ab. yusmdd. G. yi/smd/iam^°, yusmdka (RV^), z/^zx. V,. yusmi.

a. The usual steins representing these personal pronouns in derivation or as first member of a compound are ma-, asma-; iva-, yuva-, yusma-; e. g. ma-vani- 'like me', a««a-rf;«/4- 'hating us', iva-vant- 'WVe. thee', iva-yata- 'presented by thee'; jcaz/a-^M- 'desiring you two', yiivi-dhita- 'established by you two', yuva-daita- 'given by you two'; )'usma- yoxs.' yusmd-datia- 'given you' '9. yant- 'desiring yow' , yusmd-il/a- 'supported by ; by b. The forms mad-, asmad-, ivad- occur a few times as first member of compounds; thus mat-kria- 'done by me', viat-sakhi- 'my companion', mat-tas (AV.) 'from me'; asmdt- sakhi- 'having us as companions', asviad-rdta- (VS.) 'given by us'; tvat-piti'- (TS.) 'having thee as father'; ivad-yoni- (AV.) 'derived from thee', ivdd-ij,vScana- (TS.) 'having thee as umpire'. c. aham-, mam-, mama-; asme-; tvam- are also sometimes found as first member of

compounds ; thus aham-uttara- (AV.) 'struggle for precedence', aham-furva- 'eager to be first', aham-yu- 'proud'; mdm-p:tsyd- (AV.) 'looking at me'; mama-satyd- 'dispute as to

ownership'; asme-hili- 'errand for us' ; ^mff;-ia?«3- 'desiring thee', feaOT-a;^K,'!- (TS.) 'offering to thee'.

2. Demonstrative Pronouns.

392. Td- 'that', which also serves as the personal pronoun of the third

person, 'he', 'she', 'it', is typical, in its inflexion, of the adjectival pronoun. It has the special peculiarity of using the stem sa- for the nom. masc. and fem. sing, and, in the RV., for the loc. sing. masc. and neut. The general peculiarities of the adjectival pronominal declension, as distinct from

1 Cp. Gaedicke, Akkusativ 12—14. according to the nominal declension; cp, 2 On the formation of ahdm cp. J. Schmidt, Brugmann, kg. 519, 2, note. KZ. 36, 405 ff, — All the nominatives of the 1° asmakam and yusmakam are properly personal pronouns are formed with -am as ace, n. of the possessives asmdka-, ytcsvidka-; also the N. sing, of the demonstrative ay- cp, BRUG.MANN, KG. 524, 4. dm and the reflexive svaydm, 11 Occurs only in I. 1731°. 3 The unaccented forms of the personal 12 asmdsti is a new formation according to pronoun (85) may be accompanied by the inst. asmd-bhs. accented words in agreement with them; 13 ivdm must often be read as iuavi. e. g. le jdyatah 'of thee when conquering' '4 te, originally only loc., is used as vo vrtdbhyah 'for you that were confined' dat. and gen.; similarly me; the loc. asmi nas tribhydk 'to us three'. is also used as dat. mad is two or three times unaccented 15 Cp, Bartholomae, loc. cit. in the AV. ^^ Originally *yui-dm where y was substi- 5 Cp. Bartholomae, ZDMG. 50, 725. tuted for the sibilant owing to the influence 6 This seems to be the only nom. form of vaydm; cp. Bartholomae, op, cit. 726, (vi. 55') occurring in the Samhitas. The note; Brugmann, KG, 513 and note 3, 518, 17 nom. in the SB. is avdm, in the AB. dvdm ; yusman is a new formation according the ace. in the SB. is avdm. The iorravdm to the nominal declension (like asman). must be an abbreviation of avdm. i^The inst. was originally in all probability 7 The AB. has dvdhhydm. yusma (like tva), which later he.c3.m.i yusmdbhis 8 The SB. has dvdyos. (like asmdbhis). 9 asman and yusman are new formatives 19 This compound may preserve the old inst. :

VI. Declension. Pronouns. Demonstrative Pronouns. 301 the nominal a- declension, are that i. in the singular they take -d instead of -m in the nom. and ace. neut.; the element -sma- in the dat., abl., loc. masc. and neut.; the element -sya- in the dat., abl, gen., loc. fern.; the suf&x -in in the loc. masc. and neut.'; 2. in the plural they take -e for -as in the nom. masc; s for n in the gen. before -am.

1. The inflexion of ii- accordingly is as follows:

Sing. N. m. sd-s'-, i. sd, n. td-d. A. m. id-m, f. id-m, n. td-d- I. m. te'na^, f. tdya. D. m. n. td-smai, f. td-syai. Ab. m. n. td-smii, f. td-syas. G. m. n. td-sya, f td-syas. L. td-smin'-, sd-smin (RV.), f td-syam.

Du. N. A. m. td, tdu, i. te, n. te. I. m. f. ta-bhyam^. Ab. m. td-bhyam. G. m. n. idyos. I^. m. tdyos.

PL N. m. te, I. tds, n. td, tdni, A. m. tdri, f tds, n. td, tdni. I. m. n. te-bhis, tdis (AV.; Kh- 11. iC), f. td-bhis. D. m. n. te-bhyas, f td-bhyas.

G. m. te'-sam, f. td-sam. L. m. /ij-j^^, f. ta-su.

a. The stem to'- is frequently used in derivation, especially that of adverbs; e. g. td-tha 'thus', ia-vani- 'so great', id-ti (AV.) 'so many', and in the compound td-dfi- 'such'.

b. The neuter form tad is often used as the first member of a compound ; thus tdd-anna- having that food'; tad-apas 'accustomed to that work'; tad-id-artha- 'having just that as an object'; iad-okas- 'delighting in that'; tdd-ojas- 'possessing such power'; tad-vasd- 'having a desire foj- that'; tad-vid- (AV.) 'knowing that'.

2. Two Other demonstrative pronouns are formed from td-. a. One of them, etd-, formed by prefixing the pronominal element e-^, means 'this here'.

It is inflected exactly like td- and is of common occurrence. The forms which occur are m. Sing. m. N. esds or esd ^ A. etdm. I. ete'na. D. etdsmai (TS,). Ab. etdsmai (AV.). G. e'tdsya (AV.). — Du. N. etd, etdu. — PL N. ete. A. etdn. L eteb/tis, etdis (AV.). D. elebhyas.

f. Sing. N. esd. A. etdm. I. etdya. L. etdsyam. — Du. N. ete. — PL

N. etds. A. etds. I. etdbhis (AV.). L. etdsu (AV.).

n. Sing. N. etdd. —PL N. etd ( + VS.), etdni. a. The stem used in derivation and composition is eta-; thus etd-vant- 'so great'; eta-dfs- 'such'. b. The other secondary demonstrative, tyd-, is derived from td- with the suffix -ya^ and means 'that'. It is common in the RV., but rare in the later Samhitas*. It is used adjectivally, being nearly always accompanied by its substantive. It is never found at the beginning of a sentence except when followed by u, cid, mi, or sii'^. The forms occurring are: tyd. m. Sing. N. syd'° ( + VS.). A. tydm. G. tydsya. — Du. N. — PL

N. tye'. A. tydn. I. tyebhis. f. Sing. N. syd. A. tydm. I. tyd (for tydya). G. tydsyas. — Du. N. tye. — PL N. tyds. A. tyds.

n. Sing. N. tydd ( + TS.). — PL tyd, tydni. 393. The demonstrative which appears as ayam in in the nom. sing. masc. and means 'this here', employs the pronominal roots a- and (in various all the modifications) i- in its inflexion, the latter being used in nearly

1 This suffix is once found in the RV., 5 In IX. 562 this form (f.) seems to have in the form oi-min, attached io yadrs- 'having a loc, sense; see Lanman 3434. what appearance', though the stem ends 6 According to Brugmann, KG. 495, 6, originally loc. sing, of a-. in a consonant. <^ Hf-^'-^ 1^ lV note 3, and 2. 2 On the Sandhi of si- and esd- see 7 Cp. Brugmann, KG. 401 495, 8 It occurs two or three times also in B. Grassmann, s, v. tyd-. i The Pada text always reads iena. 9 Cp. 10 tyd- are often to be read with 4 sdsmin occurs nearly half as often as syd- and idsmin in the RV. Vyuha. ;

302 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Gr.\mmar. nom. and ace. forms, the former in the other cases. The ace. sing. mase.

and fem. starts from i-m ', the ace. of i-, and is followed by the nom. ace. du. and pL, all these forms having the appearance of being made from a stem zma-. The nom. sing. fem. is formed from i-', and the nom. ace. sing. neut. from z-d (the N. A. n. of z-), both with the suffix -a»z added. The nom. sing. mase. is formed from a- with the suffix -am and interposing -y-. The remaining cases formed from a-^ are inflected throughout like id-. The inflexion of this pronoun is accordingly as follows:

Sing. N. m. a-y-dm, f. i-y-dm, n. i-d-dm. A. m. im-dm, £ im-Sm, n.

i-d-dm. I. m. e-na'^, f. aya''. D. m. a-smdi^, i. a-sydi. Ab. m. a-smdt^,

f. a-syds. G. m. a-sydT, f. a-syds. L. m. a-smin, f. a-sydm.

Du. N. A. m. imd, imdu, f. ime, n. ime. D. m. a-bhydm (RV.). Ab. m. a-bhydm. G. m. a-y-os (RV.)'*. L. m. a-y-os'^ (RV.).

PI. N. m. ime, f. imds, n. imd, imdni. A. m. imdn^ I. Unas, n. imd,

imdni. I. m. e-bhis, f. a-bkis'^°. D. m. e-bhyds, f. a-bhyds. G. m. e-sdm,

f. a-sam. L. m. e-su, f. a-j-.v. 394. The corresponding demonstrative employed to express remoteness, 'that there', 'yon', appears in the nom. sing. mase. fem. as asdu. The pro-

nominal root employed throughout its inflexion is a-, but always in an extended form only. The fundamental stem used in every case, excepting the nom. sing., is a-m, ace. mase. of a-; this is extended by the addition of the particle ic to amu-, which has become the stem in the oblique cases of

the sing, (with long u in the ace. fem.); in the plur. amd,- is the fem. and amf- the mase. stem (except the ace). The nom. sing, forms are quite peeuHar. In the mase. and fem. the pronominal root a- seems to be compounded with sa- extended by the particle u: a-sd-ti and a-sd-u"; while the neut. has the pronominal -d extended with the suffix -as: a-d-ds. Only one dual form has been noted, and several plural case forms are wanting. The forms found in the Sarnhitas are the following;

m. Sing. N. asdu. A. amum. I. amuna (VS.). D. atnu-smai. Ab. ami'i- smat (AV. TS.). G. amu-sya''^. L. amu-smin (AV.). — PI. N. amP^. A. amUn (AV.). D. amibhyas (AV.). G. ami-sam.

f. Sing. N. asdu. A. amum. I. amiiyd'^''. D. amu-syai (VS.). G. amu- syas (AV.). — Du. N. amU (AV.). — PI. N. amis. A. amiis. n. Sing. N. adds. — PI. N. ama (AV.). 395. A defective unaccented pronoun of the third person meaning 'he', 'she', and in the AV. 'it', is e-na-'s. it occurs almost exclusively in the

1 Cp. Brugmann, kg. 495, 10. 6 The abl. according to the nominal de- 2 From z- is also formed the ace. i-m and clension, d(, is used as a conjunction. the neut. i-d, both used as particles. 7 The form imdsya also occurs once, 3 The Pada text always reads ena (the 8 To be read as Byds, unaccented etta occurs twice). This and all 9 Seems to be wrongly read as dyos in other oblique cases formed from a-, when the Pada text; cp. Lanman 344^ 10 used as nouns may lose their accent; see dlikis occurs ten times in the RV,; it is 85 (3 3; cp. Grassmann, s. v. iddm. On aydm thrice accented dbhis and thrice unaccented: see Brugmann, KG. 498, 3. cp, note 5. 4 This inst. is fairly frequent intheRV. 11 Cp. Brugmann, KG. 495, 6; 498, 4, instead of it andyd occurs twice (ix. 6512.27), 12 This is the only instance of -sya being being probably a later correction to obviate added to any but an a- stem. the hiatus. Otherwise no forms of ana- 13 This form is Pragrhya (70). On its (anena, andyd, andyos) occur in the Sarn- origin cp, IF, 18, 64, note. hitas, But anena (n.) occurs in Kh. III. l6'. 14 Used adverbially, with shifted accent, 5 asmai and asya are accented on the 15 The tame e- (loc, of a-) as in i-ka- first syllable, the former four or five times, 'one', f-i'a 'thus'; cp, Brugmann, KG. 495, 6. the latter about ten times, when specially em- phatic at the beginning of a Pada in the RV. VI. Declension. Interrogative and Relative Pronouns. 303 ace. (the great majority of occurrences being masc. sing.). Otherwise it is found only twice in the inst. sing, and three or four times in the gen. dual. The forms occurring are: rn. Sing. A. mam. I. enena (AV.). — Du. A. enau (AV.). G. ems (RV.), enayos (AV.). — PI. A. enan. f. Sing. A. enl7n^. Du. A. ene. PI. A. enas. — n. N. enad{KS[.; Kh. iv. 6^). 396. Another demonstrative found nearly twenty times in the RV., but, ^ otherwise occurring only once in the AV., is the unaccented pronoun iva- meaning 'one', 'many a one', generally repeated, in the sense of 'one —

another'. The forms occurring are: m. Sing. N. tvas. A. tvam. I. tvena. D. tvasmai. PI. N. tve^. — f. Sing. N. tva. D. tvasyai. — n. Sing. N. tvad. a. The pronoun avd-'^ 'this' is found two or three times in the RV., and only in the gen. du. form, avas in combination with vam, meaning 'of you two being such' (used like sa, e. g. sd tvdm 'thou as such'). b. The pronoun dma-^ 'this' occurs only once in the AV.: dmo 'ham

asmi (xiv. 2 7"), 'this am I'.

3. Interrogative Pronoun. 397. The interrogative ka-, 'who?', 'which?', 'what?' used both as sub- stantive and adjective, is quite regular in its declension, excepting the alter- native neuter form ki-m^, which instead of the pronominal -d has the nominal -m (never elsewhere attached to a stem in -i). The forms occur- ring are: m. Sing. N. kds. A. kdm. I. ke'na. D. kdsmai. Ab. kdsmat (AV.). G. kdsya. L. kdsmin. — Du. kdu. — PI. N. ke. I. kebhis. L. kesu (VS.).

f. Sing. N. kd. A. kirn. I. kdya. G. kdsyxs (AV. VS.). — PI. N. kss. A. kAs. L. kisu. n. Sing. N. A. kd-d' (RV.) and ki-m. — PI. N. A. ka and kani.

a. In forming derivatives, which are numerous, the stem of the interrogative employed is not only ka-, but also ki- and ku-; c. g. kd-li 'how many?'; ki-yant- 'how

great?'; kit-ha 'where?'. The neuter form kim is twice used in this way : kini-yic- 'desiring what?'; kim-mdya- 'consisting of what?'.

b. In the formation of compounds kad occurs twice as first member : in kat-fayd- 'greatly swelling', and kdd-ariha- 'liaving what purpose?', kim is similarly used a few times in the later Samhitas; thus kim-Hld- (VS. TS.) 'being in stony ground', kim-kard- (AV.) 'servant'. 4. Relative Pronoun. 398. The relative pronoun ya- 'who', 'which', 'what' is perfectly regular in its declension. The forms occurring are: m. Sing. N. jaV*. — A. ydm. I. yina.^ Wi.ii.yina. D. ydsmai. Ah. ydsmat^°. G. ydsya. L. ydsmin. — Du. N. A. ya, ydu. D. ydbhyam. G. ydyos. L. ydyos and yds"-"- (RV.). — PI. N. ye. A. y&n. I. yebhis, ydis (AV.; Kh. i. 9"). D. yebhyas. G. ye'sam. L. ye'su.

1 This form occurs once (viil. 6'9) at the fied form in nd-kis and md-kis 'no one', beginning of a sentence and is then accented 'nothing', 'never'. as endm, 7 The relative frequency of kdd to kivi in 2 The unaccented adverb tvaddmm (MS. the RV. is as 2 to 3, IV, 2^) 'sometimes', is derived from this 8 yds is the commonest declensional form pronoun. in the RV., occurring more than 1000 times. 3 See Whitney's note on AV. vixi.

304 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

f. Sing. N. )a. A. ySm. I. ydya. G. ydsyas. L. ydsyam. — Du. N. ye (TS. AV.). G. ydyos. L. ydyos. — PI. N. yds. A. yds. I. ydbhis. D. ydbhyas. G. ydsam. L. ydsu. n. Sing. N. A. ydd. — Du. ye. — PL yd, ydni.

a. The stem oi yd- is used in the formation of many derivatives; &. ^. yd-tha 's.%^ it also appears as first member of a compound in yd-dfs- 'which lilce'. The neuter form

yad is once used similarly in tlie RV. : yat-kdma- 'desiring what'. b. The relative receives the indefinite meaning of 'whoever'' by the addition of kds ca, kds cid, or cid alone; c. g. ydd vo vaydm cairnia kdc cid dgah (11.2714} 'whatever sin we have committed against you'; ydt kirn ca duritdm mdyi (l. 2312J 'whatever sin (there is) in me'; ye cid dhi ivam rsayah purva iidye jiihiiri (1.48'*) 'whatever early seers have called on thee for aid'. 5. Indefinite Pronouns. 399. a. In the RV. there are found the two simple indefinite pro- nouns sama (unaccented) 'any', 'every' and simd- 'every', 'all'. The six forms of the former which occur are: m. Sing. A. samam. D. samasmai. Ab. samasmSt. G. samasya. L, samasmin. — PI. N. same. From simd- are met with the five forms: Sing. V. sima. N. simds. D. simdsjnai (neut). Ab. simdsmat. — Pi. simL b. Compound indefinite pronouns are formed by combining the particles ca, cand, or cid with the interrogative; thus kds ca 'any', 'any one';

kds cand ^djoy ont 50t\tr\ 'every'; kds cid 'a.T\y'., 'some'; 'anyone', 'someone'.

6. Reflexive Pronouns.

400. I. The reflexive adjective is svd- 'own',- which refers to the first

and second as well as the third person of all numbers; e. g. ydd, indragni, mddathaJi sve durone (i. 108') 'when, O Indra and Agni, ye rejoice in your own abode'. 2. The substantive reflexive is sva-y-am 'self, which is derived from svd- with the suffix -am and interposing y (as a-y-dm from a-). It is properly used as a nom. referring to all three persons; e. g. svaydm yajasva divi, deva, devdn (x. 7*) 'do thou thyself, O god, worship the gods in heaven'. Some- times, however, the nominative nature' of the pronoun is forgotten and svaydm is used agreeing in sense with another case; e. g. vatsdm . . svaydm gatum 18'°) . . icchdmanam (iv. 'the calf himself seeking a way'. 3. Other cases than the nom. are regularly expressed in the RV. by tanu- 'body'; e. g. svaydm gatum tanva icchdmanam (iv. i8'°) 'himself seeking a way for himself (tanve)^; yajasva ianvam (x. 7^) 'worship thyself; md hasmahi prajdya, ma tandbhih (x. 1285) 'may we suffer no harm with (regard to our) offspring or ourselves'. The reflexive adjective and a possessive gen. may be added; e. g. dgne, ydjasva tanvam tdva svdm (vi. 11^) 'Agni, worship thine own self'^. 4. There are one or two instances in the RV. of the incipient use of atman- 'soul' in a reflexive sense; thus bdlam dddhana atmdni (ix. 113')

'putting strength into himself; ydksmam sdt~vasmad atmdnas . . vi vrhami (x. 163*) 'I expel the disease from (thy) whole self. The ace. atmdnam, though not met with in the RV. as a reflexive, is frequently found so used

3. in the later Sarnhitas -^ ; also in Kh. in. 10

a. In the formation of compounds sva- several times appears in the substantive as well as the adjective sense as first member; c. g. svd-yukta- 'self-yoked'; sva-yugvan- 'own companion', svaydm is also thus used in a few compounds; thus svayam-ja- 'self- born'; svayam-bhii- 'self-existent'.

I Cp. Delbruck, Syntaktische Forschungen I 2 Cp. Delbrijck op. cit. 135, and Grass- Si 5^9 57°. MANN, s. V. svd- and tanu-. — I 3 See Delbrijck op. cit. 155, VI. Declension. Pronouns. Pronominals. 305

7. Possessive Pronouns.

401. Possessive pronouns are of rare occurrence because the genitive of the personal pronoun is generally used to express the sense which they convey. a. The possessives of the first person are mdmaka- (RV.) 'my', mamakd-

'my', (both formed from the genitive of the personal pronoun mdmay , and asmika- 'our'. The commonest form of the latter is the N. A. neut. asmikam, which is used as the gen. plur. of the personal pronoun ^ The other forms occurring are asmikena, asmSkasas, and asmakebhis. The VS. also has the form asmakds (iv. 24) 'our' from a secondary derivative 3. b. ^ The possessives of the second person are tavakd- (RV.) 'thy', (from tdvd), met with only in the form tavakebhyas; tvd-* (RV.) 'thy',

found only in the inst. pi. tvabhis (11. 20^); and yusmika- 'your', the N. A. neut. of which is used as the gen. pi. of the personal pronoun of the second personj it otherwise occurs only in the RV. in the two forms yusmakena and yusmikabhis. c. Besides being used reflexively, sva- is fairly often employed as a

simple possessive, generally as that of the third person, 'his', 'her', 'their',

but also of the second, 'thy', 'your', and of the first, 'my', 'our'. It is, however, inflected like an ordinary adjective, having only two isolated forms

according to the pronominal declension 5. The forms which occur are: m. sing. N. svds. A. svdm. I. svena and svena^ D. svdya. Ab. svat. G. svdsya. L. sve and svdsmin (RV.). — PI. N. svAs (AV.). A. svan (AV.).

I. svebhis and svdis. D. svSkyas (Kh. v. i^). G. svanam (AV.; Kh. 11. lot). L. svisu.

f. sing. N. svS. A. svim. I. svdya. D. svSyai. Ab. svdyas. G. svdsyas

(RV.). L. svayam. — PI. N. sv3s. A. svas. I. svabkis. L. svasu. n. sing. N. A. svdm. — PI. A. svd.

8. Pronominal derivatives and compounds.

402. A certain number of derivatives are formed from the roots or stems of simple pronouns by means of suffixes which modify the pronominal sense. There are also a few pronominal compounds. a. With the suffix -ka^ conveying a diminutive or contemptuous meaning, derivatives are formed from the pronouns td-, yd-, sd-, and asdu; thus fa-Ad- (RV.) 'that little', of which the forms A. sing. m. takd-m and n. takd-d occur; yd-ka- 'who', 'which', the only forms met with being N. m. yakds, f yaka (VS. xxiii. 22, 23), and N. pi. m. yake (RV.); sa-kd- (RV. AV.) 'that little', of which only N. sing. f. saka occurs; N. sing. f. asakdu 'that little' (VS. XXIII. 22, 23). b. With the comparative suffix -tara derivatives are formed from z-, kd-, and _>>«-; and with the superlative suffix -fama, from the latter two; thus i-tara- 'other'; ka-tard- 'which of two?'; ya-tard- 'who or which of two'; ka-tamd- 'who or which of many?', ya-tamd- 'who or which of many'. c. With -ii derivatives with a numerical sense are formed from kd-,td-, td-ti yd-ti 'as many'. and ^a-; thus kd-ii 'how many?', (AV.) 'so maxif ; No inflected forms of these words occur.

1 Cp. Brugmann, kg. 524, 2. the influence of svd-; cp. Brugmann, 2 Op. cit. 524, 4. op. cit. 524, 2. 3 Formed like mSniakd- beside md?naka-. 5 That is, svdsyas and svdsmm. 6 4 Used as a possessive probably under The Pada text always reads svrna. Indo-arischc Philologie. I. 4. 20 ;

3o6 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

d. With -yanf, expressing the quantitative meaning of 'much', derivatives

are formed from i- and ^t-: i-yant- 'so much' (n. N. sing, iyat, pi. iyanti; kiyate, f. D. sing, iyatyai); ki-yant- 'how much?' (sing. N. n. adv. kiyat, D. m. L. kiyati for kiyati; N. f. kiyati). e. With -vant are formed derivatives from personal pronouns with

the sense of 'like', 'attached to', and from others in the quantitative sense of 'great'; thus tvA-vani- 'like thee', md-vant- 'hke me'; yuva-vant- (RV.) 'devoted to you two' (only D. yuvivate); yusmi-vant- (RV.) 'belonging to you' (only L. pi. yusmdvatsu); eta-vant- and ta-vant- 'so great'; yd-vant- 'as great'; i-vant- 'so great' (sing. N. n. ivat, D. m. n. ivdte, G. ivatas; pi. A. m. ivatas); ki-vant- 'how far?' (G. kfvatas).

f. With -drs, -drsa, -drksa are formed the following pronominal com- pounds: i-dfksa- (VS.) andV-^r/- (VS. TS.) 'such'; eta-dfksa- (VS.) and eta- dfs- 'such' (N. sing. n. etadf-k); ki-dfs- 'what like?' (N. sing. m. kldffi); ta-dfs- 'such' (N. sing. m. ta-dfk); yd-dfs- 'what like' (sing. m. N. yadfk, L. yddfsmin).

9. Pronominal Adjectives.

403. Certain adjectives derived from pronominal roots or allied to pronouns in sense conform in varying degrees to the pronominal declension.

1. The adjectives which strictly adhere to the pronominal type of inflexion are anyd- 'other', and (as far as can be judged by the few forms occurring and by the usage of the later language) the derivatives formed with -tara and -tama from kd- and yd-. The specifically pronominal cases of the latter which have been met with are: sing. N. n. katardd (AV.),

yatardd; katamdd, yatamdd {AN.); D. m. katamdsmai (y^.); G. f. katamdsyas

(AV.); L. f. yatamdsyam (AV.); PI. N. m. katame (AV.), yatame (AV.). No such form of Uara- has been found. The forms of anyd- which occur are: m. sing. N. anyds. A. anyd?n. I. anye'na. D. anydsmai (AV.). G. anydsya. L. anydsmin. — PI. N. any£ A. anydn. I. anyebhis and anydis. D. anyibhyas (AV.). G. anyisam. L. atiyesu.

f. sing. N. anyd. A. anydm. I. anydya. D. anydsyai. G. anydsyas.

L. anydsyam. — Du. N. anyL — PI. N. anyds. A. anyds. I, anyabhis. G. anydsam. L. anydsu.

n. sing. N. anydd. — Du. I. anydbhydm (AV.). — PI. N. anyd. 2. The three adjectives eka- 'one', visva- 'all', sdrva- 'whole' are par- tially pronominal, following this declension except in the nom. ace. sing,

neut., which takes the nominal -m. Thus sing. G. f. ekasyas, L. m. ekasmin^,

pi. N. m. eke., but sing. N. n. ^kam; sing. D. visvasmai^, Ab. visvasmai'-,

L. visvasmin', pi. N. m. visve, G. m. visvesam, f. vUvasam, but sing. N. n.

visvam; sing. D. m. sdrvasmai (AV.), f. sdrvasyai (AV.; AA. iii. 2 5), Ab. m.

sdrvasmat, pi. N. m. sdrve, G. sarvesam (AV.), f. sdrvasam (AV.), but sing. N. n. sarvam. 3. More than a dozen other adjectives which have pronominal affinities in form or sense occasionally show pronominal case-forms (but never -d in the N. A. sing. n.). a. A few adjectives formed with the comparative and superlative suffixes -ra and -ma have such endings; thus dpara- 'lower' has dpare in the N.

pi m. beside dpardsas; iittara- 'higher', 'later', forms the L. sing. f. uttarasyam

' The AV. once has ike as a loc. .sing. ^ The RV. has the nominal forms D. see Whitney's note on AV. xix. 56= in his v'livdya, Ab. vihat, L. visve, once each; translation. visvat (n.) also occurs Kh. II. 6'8. :

VI. Declension. Numerals. Cardinals. 307

(AV.), N. pi. m. uttare; Ab. L. sing, itttarasmat and uttarasmin beside uUarat and nttare; upara- 'lower' has upare beside uparas and uparasas in

the N. pi. m.; avamd- 'lowest' has L. sing, f. avamdsyam; upamd- 'highest'

has sing. L. f. upamdsyam; paramd- 'farthest' has sing. f. G. paramdsyas and

\,. paratndsyam ( + VS.); madhyamd- 'middlemost' has sing. L.f. madhyamdsyam. b. A few other adjectives with a comparative or pronominal sense have occasional pronominal endings. Thus jooz-a- 'ulterior' has sing.D. m.pdrasmaz

(Av.), Ab. m. pdrasmat ( + AV. VS.), G. f. pdrasyas, G. pi. m. pdremm; L. sing. m. pdrasmiti beside pdre\ and N. pi. m. pdre beside pdrasas. purva- 'prior' has

sing. m. D. pArvasmai, Ab. pArvasmat^ G. pi. iji. purvesam, f. piirvasam ; and the N. pi. m. piirve is very common beside the very rare pArvasas. nema- 'other' ^ has m. L. sing, nemasmin, N. pi. ne'me, but N. sing. n. ne'marti and G. pi. m. nemanam (unaccented), svi- 'own', otherwise following the nominal declension has once sing. G.f. svdsyas and once L.n.svdsmm. samand- 'similar', 'common', has once Ab. sing. n. samandsmat beside samandt. c. A few adjectives which are numerical in form or meaning have

occasional pronominal forms; ikms, prathamd- 'first', has G. sing. f. prathamdsyas

(AV.); trtiya- 'third' has L. sing. f. trttyasyam' (AV.); I'lbhaya- 'of both kinds' has m. pi. G. I'lbhayesam, and N. I'lbhaye beside ubhayasas and iibhayas^; kevala- 'exclusive' has once N. pi. m. kevale.

III. Numerals. Benfey, VoUsiandige Grammatik 764— 771. — Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar 475 —488. — Cp. Brugmann, kg. 441 —451.

404. The series of the numerals is based on the decimal system of reckoning. The names of the first ten cardinals, which are of an adjectival character, form the foundation of the rest either by compounding or derivation; the ordinals and numerical adverbs being further derived from the correspond- ing cardinals. A. Cardinals.

405. The names of the fir§,t ten cardinals are: eka- 'one'; dvd- 'two'; tri- 'three'; cati'ir- 'four'; pdnca 'five'; sds- 'six'; saptd 'seven'; add 'eight'; ndva 'nine'; ddsa 'ten'. a. The numbers intermediate between 'ten' and 'twenty' are Dvandva compounds formed by prefixing the accented unit to ddsa 'ten': eka-dasa'* ('one and ten') 'eleven'; dvd-dasa^ 'twelve'; trdyo-dasa'' (AV. VS. TS.) 'thirteen'; cdtur-dasa^ 'fourteen'; pdnca-dasa 'fifteen'; s6-dasa^ (VS. TS.) 'sixteen'; saptd-dasa (TS.) 'seventeen'; astA-dasa (TS.) 'eighteen'; ndva-dasa (VS.) 'nineteen'. b. The remaining cardinals are substantives. The names of the decades from 'twenty' to 'ninety' are either old Dvandva compounds or derivatives formed with the suffix -ti. They are vim-sad- 'twenty'; trim-sdt 'thirty';

1 Cp. Neisser, BB. 30, 303. 5 Here the N. m. du. form dvd is retained « The pronominal endings are recognized instead of the stem form dva-. as alternative in the later language as regards 6 In this and other numeral compounds (vili. N. m. plural form remains in every dvidya- and trtiya-; the Bjfhaddevata 95) the case ; has pratkamasydm as well as dvifiyasyam. e. g. tan . . . irdyas-trimsatam a vaha (l, 452) 3 iibhd- 'both' is declined in the dual only 'bring those thirty-three', N. A. m. ubha and ubhau, f. ubhc, I. ubhabhyam 7 As first member of a compound catur- (once in RV.), G. ubhdyos (twice in RV,). is regularly accented cdttir-, 4 With ckd- for eka- under the influence 8 For sas-dasa, see above 43, b, 3; 56, b. of dvd-dasa. 20* :

3o8 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar. catvarim-sdt 'forty'; fanca-sdt 'fifty'; sas-ti- 'sixty'; safia-ti- 'seventy'; asi-ti- 'eighty'; nava-ti- 'ninety'. The last four are abstract fern, nouns derived from the simple cardinal (except ah-ti-) ^ and meaning originally 'hexad etc. (of tens)'. The others are fem. compounds, the first member of which is 'two', 'three', 'four', or 'five', and the second a remnant of the IE. word for 'ten'; thus trim-sat meant 'three tens', vimsati- was probably in origin an old dual of this formation which ended in -i but was transformed by the influence

of sasti- etc. to a singular fem. in -ti'^- c. The numbers intermediate between these decades are Dvandva compounds formed by prefixing the accented unit to the decade; thus astd- vimsati- (VS.) 'twenty-eight'; eka-trimiat (VS.) 'thirty-one'; trdyas-trimiat 'thirty- three'; ndva-catvarimsat (TS.) 'forty-nine'; ndva-sasti- (TS.) 'sixty-nine';

ndvasiti- (TS.) ' eighty- nine pdnca-navati- (TS.) 'ninety-five'; sdn-navati- (TS.) ' ; 'ninety-six'; asta-navati- (TS.) 'ninety-eight'.

a. In the TS., the number preceding a decade is also expressed by ikait na 'by one not' = 'minus one'; thus ekan na vimsati- 'twenty less one' = 'nineteen'; ekan na calvdnmidt 'thirty-nine'; ekan na sasfi- 'fifty nine';- ekan ndstii- 'seventy-nine'; ekan na satdvi

'a hundred less one', 'ninety-nine' 3. ^. Intermediate numbers may also be expressed by adding together unit and decade with or without ca; c. g. niva ca navatim ca 'ninety and nine'; navatim ndva 'ninety-nine'.

d. The numbers expressing 'a hundred' and its multiples are satd- '100'; sahdsra- '1000'; a-yi'tta- (AV. TS.) 'loooo'; ni-yuta- (TS.; Kh. iv. 12*) 'looooo'; pra-yi'ita- (VS. TS.) '1000 000'; drbuda- (TS.; Kh. iv. 12*) '10 000 000'; nyarbuda- (AV. VS. TS.) 'loooooooo't. a. Intermediate numbers are compounded in the same way with sata- as with the preceding decades; e. g. eka-satam 'a hundred and one'; cdtuh-satam 'a hundred and four'; trimsdc-chatam 'a hundred and thirty',

j3. Multiples may be expressed in two ways. Either the larger number is put in the dual or plural multiplied by the smaller one used adjectivally; e. g. dve sate (VH. 1822) 'two hundred'; sastim sahdsra (VI. 2 6^) 'sixty thousand'; irtni said tri sahdsrani Irimsdc ca ndva ca (lu. 99) 'three thousand three hundred and thirty-nine'. Or the multiplier may be prefixed to the larger number, forming with it a possessive compound accented on the final syllable; e. g. trdyasirimsat tj-i'satah safsahasrah (AV.) 'six thousand three hundred and thirty-three'. Numbers below a hundred are sometimes used multiplicatively in these two ways; c. g. navatir ndva (l. 84^3) 'nine nineties' = 'eight hundred and ten'; iri-sa/td-^ 'thrice seven'; tri-navd- (VS.) 'having thrice nine'.

Inflexion.

406. With regard to their inflexion, which in many respects is pecuhar, the cardinals may be divided into three groups. a. The first group comprises the first four numerals. These are the only cardinals which, like other adjectives, distinguish the genders. They also distinguish the numbers as far as the sense admits: dka- 'one', while inflected chiefly in the singular, forms a plural also in the sense of 'some'; dvd- 'two' is of course inflected in the dual only; and tri- 'three' and catur- 'four' in the plural only.

I. eka- is declined like the second group of pronominal adjectives^. The only form of the abl. sing. 3 met with follows the nominal declension,

1 asT- is radically related to asfdu, cp. in succession: we may infer from the first 56, a. few that each successive number is equal to 2 I. Cp. Brcgmann, kg. 443, ten times the preceding one ; cp. Whitney I In the TS. (B.) are also met with ekasman 475, c. The contents of TS. VII. 2, 11 —20 na pahcasdt and ekasyai nd pancdsdt (vil. 4. 7'') are almost entirely numerals. 'forty-nine': Whitney 477, b. 5 Inflected according to the a- declension 4 In TS. vii. 22" these numerals, followed inst, irisaptdis, by samtidrd-, tnadhya-, dnta^, pardrdhd-, occur 6 See above 403, 2. VI. Declension. Numerals. Cardinals. 309

viz. ikat, used in the compound numerals dkan nd trimsdt 'twenty-nine' etc. occurring in the TS. A single dual case, from eka- in the sense of 'a certain', appears in ike yuvati (AV. x. 7t=') 'a certain pair of maidens'. The forms to be found in the Samhitas are : m. sing. N. ekas. A. ekam. I. ekena.

G. ekasya. L. ekasmin; pi. N. eke. D. ekebhyas. — f. N. eka. A. ekam. I. ekaya. G. ekasyas; du. N. e'ke{kY.); pi. N. ekas (AY.). — n. N. sing, ikam; pi. e'ka.

2. dvd- 'two', declined in the dual only, is quite regular. The forms occurring are; m. N. dvd, dvdu. I. dvabhyam. G. dvdyos. L. dvdyos. — f. N. dve. I. dvdbhyam. — n. N. dve. L. dvdyos. a. The dual form _ dvd is retained in the first member of the numeral compound dvd-dasa 'twelve'. Otherwise dvi- is used as the stem of dva- in derivation, c. g. dm-dhd 'twofold'; and as the first member of compounds, c. g, dvi-fad- 'biped'.

3. The cardinal tri- 'three' is, in the masc. and neut., inflected like a

regular i- stem. The fem. stem is tisf-: the gen. pi. is once (v. 69^) written tisrnam (though the r is actually long metrically)'. The forms occurring

are: m. N. trayas. A. tr'in. I. tribhis. D. tribhyds. G. trindm. L. trisii. —

f. N. tisrds. A. tisrds. I. tisfbhis. D. tisfbhyas. G. tisfnam''. L. tisfsu. — n. N. A. tri, trini.

a. The stem used in derivation and compounding is regularly tri-, e. g. tri-dha 'in three ways'; iri-pdd- 'three-footed'. But tr- appears in tr-ta- (AV.) 'third', as a N., and in the secondary ordinal tr-t-iya- 'third'; and in numeral compounds irim appears in trini-sdt 'thirty', and irayas in irayo-dasa 'thirteen', and trayas-trlmsat 'thirty-three'.

4. caiur- 'four' has the stem catvdr- in the strong forms of the masc,

and neut. In the gen. it has the peculiarity of taking n before the ending

am, though the stem ends in a consonant -5. The fem. stem is cdtasr-, which is inflected like tisf- and shifts its accent YikQ pdnca. The forms occurring are:— m. N. catvdras. A. caturas. 1. caturbhis. D. caturbhyas {KN.). G. caturndm"^.

f. N. cdtasras. A. cdtasras. I. catasfbhis^. — n. N. A. catvdri.

a. The stem used in derivation and compounding is regularly catur- ; e. g. catur- dha 'in four ways'; calur-dasa 'fourteen'; cdtus-pad-^ 'four-footed'. But it is once catvarim- (from the n. pi.) in the numeral compound catvarimidi 'forty'.

b. The second group, comprising the cardinals from 'five' to 'nineteen', though used adjectivally, does not distinguish gender, and takes no ending in the nom. and ace. These numerals also share the same peculiarities of accentuation 7. 5. N. A. pdnca 'five'. I. paiicdbhis. D. pancdbhyas. L. pahcdsu. 6. sds- 'six': N. A. sat. I. sadbhis. D. sadbkyds^. 7. N. A. saptd 'seven'. I. saptdbhis. D. Ab. saptdbhyas. G. saptandm. 8. That the cardinal for 'eight' was an old dual 5 is indicated by its forms in the N. A. astd, astdu and in the only other cases occurring, I. asta- bhis, D. asta-bhyds (TS.). According to the analysis of the Pada text in a late passage of the RV. (x. ay'S),' astottarattat contains the N. astd, doubt- less Ijecause it is preceded by saptd and followed by ndva and ddsa. a. The stem used in compounding has mostly the dual form asia; thus as{d-pad-

'eight-footed', asta-vandhura- 'eight-seated' 10 ; asta-dasa- (TS.) 'eighteen', astd-vimsd- (AV.)

1 See above 12, 13; cp. Benfey, Vedica ^ On the Sandhi, see above 78, und Verwandtes 4. 7 That is, of accenting -a before the ter- 2 On the accentuation, see 94, 2 a. minations -bhts, -bhyas, -su, and the final 3 It shares this peculiarity with san-ndm, syllable in the gen. See above, 93. the gen, plur, of sds-, which however does 8 Cp, note 3. not seem to occur in any of the Samhitas. 9 Cp. Brugmann, kg. 441, 8. 10 4 With accent on the final syllable like These are the only two occurrences in the genitives of pdnca etc. the RV„ for in asfa-karnd- (x. 62') the first 5 G. catasrnam and L. catasf?" occur in B, member is doubtless a past participle. ;

310 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

'twenty-eightfold', asta-cakra- (AV.) 'eight-wheeled', arfa-^ate- (AV.) 'eight-sided', asla-yogd-^ (AV.) 'yoke of eight'. The form asia- begins to appear in the AV. in the derivative asta-dhd 'in eight ways'; and in the compounds asta-kftvas 'eight times', asfa-yoni- 'having eight wombs', asia-vrsd- 'eight times chief.

g. N. A. ndva 'nine'. I. navdbhis. D. navdihyas (TS.). G. navandm.

10. N. A. ddsa 'ten'. I. dasdbhis. D. dasdbhyas (TS.). G. dasanim. L. dasdsu. 11. N. A. ekadasa 'eleven'. D. ekadasdbhyas (TS.). 12. N. A. dvddasa 'twelve. D. dvadasdbhyas (TS.). 13. N. A. irdyodasa 'thirteen'. I. trayodasdbhis (TS.). D. trayodasdbhyas (TS.). 14. N. A. cdturdasa 'fourteen'. D. caturdasdbhyas (TS.). 15. N. A. pdncadasa 'fifteen'. D. pancadasdbhyas (TS.). 16. N. A. sodasa (VS.) 'sixteen'. D. sodasdbhyas (TS.). 17. 18. The N. of the cardinals for 'seventeen' and 'eighteen' does not seem to occur in Mantras. D. saptadasdbhyas (TS.); astadasdbhyas (TS.).

ig. N. A. ndvadasa (VS.) 'nineteen'. I. navadasdbhis (VS.). D. eka7i nd vimsatydi (TS.). c. The third group of cardinals, comprising the numbers from 'twenty' onwards, are substantives inflected regularly according to the declension of the stem final; e. g. N. vimsatl-s 'twenty', A. viinsati-m, I. vimsaty-d; N. trimsdt 'thirty', A. trimsdt am, I. trimsdt- a, L. trimsdt-i. The decades 'twenty' to 'ninety' and their compounds are fem. and nearly always inflected in the sing.; but if the sense requires it they may be used in the plural; e. g. ndva tiavatih 'nine nineties'; navanam i^avat'inSm (i. 191'-') 'of nine nineties'.

a. sata- 'a hundred' and sahasra- 'a thousand' are neuters, which may be declined in all numbers; e. g. dve iale 'two hundred'; saj>td satdni 'seven hundred'.

Syntactical employment of the Cardinals.

407. a. The numerals from 'one' to 'nineteen' are used adjectivally; e. g. trdyo virdh (iii. 56") 'three heroes'; saftdbhih futrdih (x. 72') 'with seven soTii' paticdsu ; Jdnesu (m. 37') 'among the five races'. The bare stem (in the numerals of the second group) is, however, sometimes used in the oblique cases; e.g. saptd hotrbhih (in. ict) 'with seven priests'; ddhi fdnca krstisu

(11. 2'°) 'over the five tribes'. 0. Exceptionally these numerals are, however, to be met with governing a genitive; e. g. ddsa kaldsandm (xv. 3219} 'ten jars'. b. The third group of numerals (from 'twenty' upwards), as singular substantives, is treated in two ways.

1. They may govern a genitive; e.g. pancasdtam divanam (v. i85) 'fifty horses'; sastim dsvanam (vnr.46^') 'sixty horses'; satdm gdnam (i. 126") 'a hundred kine'. So also when satd- and sahdsra- are in the du. or pi. ; e. g. gdvam satdjii (vii. 103'°) 'hundreds of kine'; sakdsrani gdvam (viii. 51^; 'thousands of kine'. 2. They may, remaining singtilar, agree in case with the following plural, being then used adjectivally (not appositionally, because they always precede the substantive in this use); e. g. trimsdd devdk (iii. 9?) 'thirty gods'; trimsdtam yjjanani (r. 123') 'thirty leagues'; trimsdta hdribhih (11. iS^) 'with thirty bays'; sate'na hdribhih (11. 18'') 'with a hundred bays'; satdm purah (iv. 27') 'a hundred forts'; sahdsram hdrayah (iv.46^) 'a thousand bays'. The following word, agreeing with sahdsra-, may be in the singular as a ^collective thus h'lnas cic chepam niditam sahdsrad yfipad amuncah (v. 2I) 'Sunahsepa, who was bound, thou didst release from a thousand posts'. a. satd- and sahdsra- have, in their adjectival use, the peculiarity of sometimes either being put in the plural themselves or retaining the N. A. neuter sing, form (like pdnca) when in agreement with an inst.pl.; e.g. said piiraA. (l. S3*) 'a hundred forts'; sahdsrany VI. Declension. Numerals. Ordinals. Derivatives. 311 adhirathani (x. gS^) 'a thousand wagonloads'; satam piirbhih (vi. 48*) 'with a hundred forts'; sahasram fsibhik (l. 189*) 'with a thousand seers'. p. The numeral pronouns kdti 'how many?', tali 'so many', ydti 'as many', remain uninflected in agreement with nominatives and accusatives plural, which are the only cases found occurring with them in the Samhitas'.

B. Ordinals.

408. The ordinals, being all adjectives ending in -a, are declined throughout in the masc. and neut. according to the nominal a-declension.

The feminine is formed with -Z"^, except in the first four, which take -a, viz. pratkami-2, dvitiya-, trttya-i, turfya- (TS.). The ordinals may best be divided into four groups according to the formation of their stems. 1. The ordinals from 'first' to 'tenth' are formed with various suffixes, viz. {-i)-iya, -tka, -thanid^ -md, the first four in a somewhat irregular manner. a. pra-thamd- 'first' was doubtless formed from pra- with the superlative suffix -taina^, meaning 'foremost', the initial of the suffix being probably changed under the influence of other ordinals formed with -tka {sasthd-, etc.). b. The next three ordinals are formed with the suffix -Tya: dvit-tya- 'second', trt-tya- 'third', secondarily through dvi-td- 'second', and tr-td- 'third', both used as names; tur-iya- 'fourth' for *ktur-iya- (beside catur-tkd-). The

latter when used in the fractional sense is accented turXya- (AV. ) 'quarter's. c. The ordinal for 'sixth', besides the alternative forms for 'fourth' and 'seventh', is formed with -tha: sas-thd- (AV. VS.), catur-tkd- (AV. VS.), saptd-tka- (RV.). d. The ordinals for 'fifth' and 'seventh' to 'tenth' are formed with -ma: panca-md- (AV. VS.), sapta-md- (VS.) beside saptd-tka-, asta-md-, nava-md-, dasa-md-. 2. The stems of the ordinals for 'seventh' to 'nineteenth' are the same as those of the cardinals, except that they are accented on the final syllable. In inflexion they differ from the cardinals in following the ordinary nominal a- declension; thus from ekadasd- 'eleventh' are formed: sing. m. A. ekadasdm; pi. N. ekadasdsah, A. ekadasSn, I. ekadasdis. 3. The ordinals for 'twentieth' to 'ninetieth' (including their com- pounds) seem, judged by some three examples met with in the Samhitas (and some four others in B.), to have been abbreviated forms of the car- dinals, ending in -a: eka-vimid- 'twenty-first' (B.) 'consisting of twenty-one' (VS.), catvarimsd- (RV.) 'fortieth', asta-catvarimsd-{VS.) 'forty-eighth'; catus-trimsd- (B.) 'tlairty-fourth', dva-pancasd- (B.) 'fifty-second', eka-sastd- (B.) 'sixty-first'. 4. The ordinals for 'hundredth' and 'thousandth' are formed with the superlative suffix -tama: sata-tamd-; but sakasra-tamd- has been noted in B. passages only (TS. SB.).

C. Numeral Derivatives. 409. A number of derivatives, chiefly adverbs, are formed from the cardinals. a. There are a few multiplicative adjectives derived with the suffixes tri-); dva-yd- 'twofold'; -a, -ya, -taya, -vaya; thus tray-d^ 'threefold' (from ddsa-taya- 'tenfold'; cdtur-vaya- 'fourfold'. b. Multiplicative adverbs are formed in three different ways. 'Once'

adverbial ace. pra-tamam (B.) 1 Cp. Delbruck 50. 4 Cp. the 2 Inflected like stems in derivative -/: 377. 'specially'. See Brugmann, KG. 447, i. Similarly in B, passages caiurtha- quarter', 3 Both frathama- and tritya- have one 5 form each according to the pronominal de- tfitya- 'third'. clension in the AV. (403, 3, c). 312 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar. is expressed by sa-ktt, which originally seems to have meant 'one making'. The next three are formed with the suffix -s\ dvl-s 'twice'; tri-s 'thrice', catus (AV.) 'four times' (for *catur-s, cp. Av. cathru-ly. Others are expressed by the cardinal and the form kftvas 'times' (probably = 'makings', ace. pi. of */i}lt(-), which, except in a.^la-kftvas (AV.) 'eight times', is a separate word; thus ddsa Iftvas (AV.) 'ten times', bhfiri kftvas (RV.) 'many times' "- c. Numeral adverbs of manner are formed with the suffix -dha; thus dvl-dha 'in two ways or parts'; similarly tri-dhs and tre-dhd, catur-dha, paiica-dhd (AV.), xodki^, sapta-dhd (AV. VS. TS.), asia-dhd (AV.), nava-dhci (AV.), sahasra-dhd.

VII. THE VERB.

BENFEY.VollstandigeGrammatik 788— 920. — Whitney, SanskritGrainmar 527 — 1073. — DELBRiicK, Das altindische Vcrbum, Halle 1874. — Avery, Contributions to the history of verb-inflection in Sanskrit, JAOS. X. (1876), 219-276; 311—324. — Jul. v. Negelein, Zur Sprachgeschichte des Veda. Das Verbalsystem des Atliarva-Veda, Berlin 1898.

410. General characteristics. — Tlie verbal system comprises the two groups of forms which include, on the one hand, the finite verb and, on the other, the nominal formations connected with the verb, The former group represents the forms made with personal endings, viz. indicative, sub- junctive, injunctive, optative, and imperative. The latter group consists of infinitives (nouns of action) and participles (agent nouns). These differ from ordinary nouns inasmuch as they participate in the characteristics of the verb, governing cases, being connected with particular tenses, being used in different voices, and being liable to tmesis when compounded with prepositions. A. The finite verb distinguishes the primary conjugation of the root and the secondary conjugation of derivative formations, viz. desiderative, intensive, causative, and denominative. The latter class does not, however, differ in origin from the former; but doubtless because (in contrast with the present stems of the primary conjugation) it preserves the distinctive meaning

of the stem, it extends the form of the present stem beyond the present system to the whole conjugation. The finite verb further distinguishes voice, tense, mood, number, and person. a. There are two voices, active and middle, which are distinguished throughout the inflexion of the verb (largely also in the participle, though not in the infinitive). The middle forms may be employed in a passive sense, except in the present system where there is a special passive stem inflected with middle terminations. Some verbs are conjugated in both active and middle; e. g. krno-ti and krnu-ti 'makes'; others in one voice only, e. g. ds-ti 'is'; others partly in one and partly in the other; e. g. pres. vdrta-le 'turns', but perf vavdrt-a 'has turned'. b. There are five tenses in ordinary use, viz. the present, the imper- fect, the perfect, the aorist, and the future. The terms imperfect, perfect, and aorist are here used in a purely formal sense, that is, as corresponding in formation to the Greek tenses bearing those names. No Vedic tense has an imperfect meaning, while the perfect sense is generally expressed by the aorist. c. Beside the indicative there are four moods, the subjunctive, the injunctive, the optative, and the imperative, all formed from the stem of the

« Cp. Brugmann, kg. 450, I. 3 For faf-dhd; cp, above 43, b, 3; 56, b; I » C^. 1 loj, a, and note Whitney | p. 307, K :

VII. Verb. Finite Verb. Personal Endings. 313

present, the perfect, and the aorist. The imperfect has no moods; and the only modal form occurring in the future is the unique subjunctive karisyds, from kr- 'make'.

d. The finite verb is, as in other languages, used in three persons in all tenses and moods excepting the imperative, where the first persons are supplied from the subjunctive. As in declension, the three numbers, singular, dual, and plural, are in regular use throughout. B. The nominal verb-forms comprise: a. Participles. The tense-stem of the present, future, aorist, and perfect

each forms an active and a middle participle; e. g. gdcchant-, gdccha-mana- 'going'; karisydnt- 'going to ^q\ yaksyd-mana- 'going to sacrifice'; krdnt-, krand- 'making'; cakrvSms-, cakrand- 'having done'. Besides these, there are passive

participles, present, perfect, and future. The present form is made from the passive stem in -ya\ e. g. siUyd-mSiia- 'being praised'. The perfect passive

participle, on the other hand, is formed from the root; e. g. kr-td- 'made'; as is also (with few exceptions) the future passive participle or gerundive; e. g. vdnd-ya- 'praiseworthy'. b. Gerunds. These are stereotyped cases (chiefly instrumentals) of verbal nouns, and have the value of indeclinable active participles with a prevailingly past sense; e. g. qatvi and gatvAya 'having gone'. c. Infinitives. There are about a dozen differently formed types of infinitives, which are cases of verbal nouns made directly or with a suffix from the root, and hardly ever connected with a tense stem; e. g. idh-am 'to kindle'; gdn-tavdi 'to go'.

A. The Finite Verb.

411. All forms of the finite verb ' may be classed under four groups (i) the present system, comprising the present tense together with its moods and participles, and its augmented past tense, the imperfect; (2) the perfect system, comprising the perfect tense together with its moods and participles, and its augmented past tense, the pluperfect^ (494); (3) the aorist system, comprising the aorist tense together with its moods and participles; (4) the future system, comprising the future tense ^ together with its participles, and its augmented past form, the conditional*.

Personal Endings.

412. The characteristic feature of the finite verb is the addition of personal endings^. These are divided into active and middle; in each of which groups, again, primary and secondary forms are to be distinguished. The primary forms appear throughout the present and future indicative, but in the middle only of the perfect indicative^. The secondary forms appear in augmented indicatives, in injunctives (which are identical in form with un- augmented past indicatives), in the imperative (several forms of which are identical with the injunctive) ?, and in the optative. The subjunctive fluctuates between the primary and the secondary endings, but the latter are about

1 Over 18000 occurrences of verb-forms 4 There is only a single occurrence of have been noted by Avery (221) in the this formation in the Samhitas. RV. 5 Cp. Avery 225 f.; Brugmann, KG. 2 This term is used in a purely formal 771—798. sense, as this rare tense has not a pluper- 6 The 3. pi. has here the peculiar ending fect meaning. re. 3 There is no periphrastic future in the 7 Cp. Brugmann, KG. 729. Saiiihita^ ; ;

314 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

twice as frequent as the former". The perfect indicative active has some of the regular secondary endings {-va, ma, -ur), but the rest are of a peculiar type.

Active endings.

Primary. Sing. i. -?m'. 2. -si. 3. -ti^. Du. i. -vas'^. 2. -thas^. 3. -tas^.

PI. I. -masi, -mas^. 2, -tha, -thanaT . 3. -anti^.

Secondary. Sing. i. -m. 2. -j-9. 3. -t'^°. Du. i. -va. 2. -tarn. 3. -tarn. PI. I. -ma. 2. -/a, -tana^^. 3. -««, -ur".

Middle endings.

Primary. Sing. i. -e. 2. -se^^. 3. -/

Secondary. Sing. i. -?^°. 2. -t/ias'^'-. 3. -;?«"- Du. i. -z/(7/?/. 2. -atham^^. 3. -atam'^. PI. i. -mahi. 2. -dkva?ti'*. 3. -ania^^.

a. Beside the perfect endings containing r, act. du. 2. -aihur, 3. -«//«-, pi. 3. -Zii?-, middle -r(?, some verbs have endings with initial ?- in the 3. pi. mid. ind. and opt. of most tenses. These endings are -re and -rate in the pres. ind.; -rire in the perf. ind.; ran in the opt. pres. and the ind. imperfect, pluperfect, and aorist; ra7n in the ind. aor. ranta in the pluperfect; -rata in the opt. In the AV. -ram and -ratam appear in the 3. pi. impv. mid. 26. b. More than twenty roots have forms in which certain endings are added to the root with the connecting vowel / or less commonly 7. These roots are an- 'breathe', am- 'injure', as- 'be', id- 'praise', Is- 'rule', cud- 'impel', jan- 'beget', tit- 'be strong', dhvan- 'sound', brii- 'speak', vam- 'vomit', vas- 'clothe', vrs- 'rain', snath- 'pierce', sru- 'hear'.

I Avery 227 (middle). 13 In the AV. -sai is the only form of the ^ The subjunctive has -ani and instead of subjunctive (Whitney 561, a). it (13 times) -a; cp. AvERY 225 (mid.) and 14 -tai occurs once in the RV. for 'ie in

Brugmann, kg. 772. the subjunctive ; it is the usual form in the 3 The perf. ind. has the peculiar endings AV. In the RV. -e sometimes occurs for I. -« or -au, 2. -tha, 3. -a or -au in the te in the ind. pres.; it is the only ending sing. in the perf. ind. 4 This ending does not occur in tlie RV. '5 The subjunctive has -vahai. cp. Delbruck, Verbum p. 24. 16 In the a- conjugation -ethe and -etc; 5 The perf. act. du. has the peculiar aithe and -aite appear in the RV. as sub- endings 2. -athur, 3. -alur. junctives in several forms; -aite occurs once 6 -masi occurs 109 times in the RV., being as an indicative; cp. Whitney 547, c and more than 5 times as frequent as -mas (cp. 561, a; Delbruck, Verbum 106 and p. 45 WmTNEY 548 ; AvjiRY 226), but in the AV. (mid.). -mas has become commoner than -masi in 17 -mahai is the usual form in the sub- the proportion of 4 to 3. On these endings junctive in the RV. and AV. cp. Neisser, BB. 30, 311—315. '8 In the RV. once -dhvai in the sub- 7 In the RV. -tha occurs more than 6 junctive. times as often as -Ihana (AVERY 226). The '9 In the impv. -antam and -atdm. perf. ind. has the pecuUar ending -a. 20 In the optative {iy)-a. 8 The an is replaced by a (for the sonant 21 In the impv. -sva. nasal) in reduplicated verbs and a few others 22 In the impv. -tarn. treated as such; cp. Delbruck, Verbum p. 51 23 In the a-conjugation -etham and -etam. (mid). 2) Once -dhva in the RV. 9 The impv. act. adds -dhi, -hi, -ana, -tat 25 In the impv. -antdm; both this ending or no ending. and -anta lose their n under the same con- 10 The 3. impv. has -tu instead of -t; in ditions as -anti. The perf. ind. has -re. the RV. and TS. also -tat; see 418 b. 26 See Delbruck, Verbum 76—78; Avery It In the RV. -ta occurs more than 4 226; Brugmann, ICG. 797; cp. also Bollen- times as often as -tana (560 occurrences to SEN, ZDMG. 22, 599; KuHN, KZ. 18, 400; 125: Avery 226). Benfey, Ueber die Entstehung und Verwen- 12 In the ind. perf., the ind. j-aorist, and dung der im Sanskrit mit r anlautenden the optative, -ur always appears, sometimes Personalendungen, Abh. d. Ges. d. Wiss. zv. also in the imperfect; cp. DELBRUCK, Verbum Gottingen 15, Gottingen 1870; Windisch, p. 52. The impv. has -antu, which loses its n Berichte der sachsischenGesellschaft d. Wiss. under the same conditions as -anti. 1889, p. I ft; ZiMMER, KZ. 30, 224 ff. Vn. Verb. Finite Verb. Augment. Formation of the Moods. 315

svas- 'breathe', sidA- 'repel', sian- 'thunder', stambh--^ 'prop'. There are also a few 3. plurals in -i-re, viz. rwire, pinvire, srnviri, sunvire and hinvire, in which the connecting vowel i appears 2. The Augment.

413. The augment^ (originally doubtless an independent temporal particle) consists of the syllable a-, which is prefixed to the imperfect, pluperfect, aorist, and conditional, giving to those forms the signification of past time. It in- variably bears the acute when the verb is accented, like the preposition immediately preceding a verb in a principal sentence (in). The augment sometimes appears lengthened before n, y, r or v, the only examples being a-nat,^ from nas- 'attain'; d-yunak (beside a-yunak), A-yiikta (beside d-yukta), and a-yuksatam, from ynj- 'join'; d-rinak and d-raik, from ric- 'leave'; d-var, from wr- 'cover'; »/-- a-vrni, from 'choose'; d-vrnak, from z'.;f7- 'turn'; a-vidhyat (beside d-vidhyat), from lyadh- 'wound'. The only one of these forms written with a in the Pada text is d-var (but once also a-var). There is also one passage (ii. i7-9) in which the metre seems to require ihiA. yds ti 'vidhat should be read yds ta dvid/iaf^. a. With the initial vowels /, u, r the augment irregularly contracts to

the Vrddhi vowels ai, au, ar; e. g. dicckas, 2. sing, imperf. of is- 'wish'; dunat, 3. sing, imperf. of lid- 'wet'; drta, 3. sing. aor. of r- 'go'. This appears to be a survival of a prehistoric contraction of a with i, u, r to ai, au, ar,

which is otherwise almost invariably represented by e, 0, ar^. b. The augment is very often dropped. This optional loss is to be explained as a survival from the Indo-European period when, being an in- dependent particle, the augment could be dispensed with if the past sense was clear from the context. In the RV. the number of examples in which the augment is wanting (about 2000) is considerably more than half that of forms in which it is prefixed (about 3300), more than one half of these un- augmented forms being aorists. In the AV. the number of forms which lose

the augment is less than half that of those which retain it, more than four fifths of these unaugmented forms being aorists. In sense, the forms which drop the augment are either indicative or injunctive. The indicatives have for the most part a past, but often also (generally when compounded with prefixes) a present meaning. In the RV., the indicative and injunctive un- augmented forms are about equal in number*; the injunctives being used in nearly one-third of their occurrences with the prohibitive particle md. In the AV. about nine-tenths of the unaugmented forms are injunctive, some four- fifths of these being construed with md.

Formation of the Moods.

414. I. Subjunctive ?. The subjunctive is a very common mood in the RV. and the AV., occurring three or four times as often as the optative. It is formed from- the present, the perfect, and the aorist*. The stem is formed by adding a to the indicative stem. When a strong and weak stem are distinguished, the a is attached to the former; while it coalesces to a with the final of the stem in the a- conjugation. Thus the subjunctive stem of

1 Avery 226. have a historical sense in 488 instances 2 Avery 227 (top). only. 3 Cp. Avery 225; Brugmann KG. 626. 7 See especially W. Neisser, Zur vedischen t Whitney 585, a. Verballehre (Inaugural-Dissertat.), Gottingen 5 Cp. above 19 a, 4. J- 1882 = BB. 7 (1883), 211—241. 6 Whitney 5S7, a. According to Avery 8 Only a single form of the future sub- 225, the unaugmented forms of the RV. junctive occurs. :

3i6 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

the root duh- 'milk' is doh-a-; of yuj- 'join' yundj-a-; but of bhu- 'be' bhdv-a-. Owing to the analogy of the a- conjugation, other verbs sometimes add a instead of a, e. g. brav-a-thd from bru- 'speak''. The subjunctive is on the whole inflected like an indicative, but with fluctuations between the primary and the secondary endings, besides some variations in the endings themselves. Thus in the active, (i) the ending of the i. sing, is -ani, of which the ni is dropped thirteen times in the RV., e. g. doh-ani, yundj-ani, bhdv-ani; bhdv-a; (2) the I. du. and i. 3. pi. have the secondary endings -va, -ma, -an only; e.g. dok-ava, dSk-ama, dih-an; bkdv-ava, bkdv-ama, bhdv-an; (3) the 2. 3. sing, may take the secondary endings as well as the primary; e. g. doh-a-si or doh-a-s; bhdv-a-ti or bkdv-a-t'- In the middle, (i) the only secondary ending is found in the 3. pi., -anta, which occurs beside and more frequently than -ante; (2) the ending -at, which is normal in the i. sing, (being =« + «), has spread from that person to forms in which e would be normal. Thus the i. du. has -avahai only; in the I. pi., -amahai is the usual form in the RV. and AV. beside the rarer

-amahe; in the 2. sing.^ -sai always appears for -se in the AV., though it does not occur in the RV.; in the 2.pl., -dhvai occurs once for -dhve^ in the RV.-; in the 2. 3. du., -aithe and -aite occur several times in the RV., being doubtless intended for subjunctive modifications * of the indicative -ethe and -ete of the a- conjugation; in the 3. sing., -tai occurs once in the RV. for -te, and is the usual form in the AV. a. The subjunctive endings in combination with the -a of the stem are accordingly the following: Active Middle sing. du. pi. sing. du. pi.

1. ani, -a -a-va -a-tna i. -ai -a-vahai -a-makai, -a-mahe 2. -a-si^, -a-s^ -a-thas -a-tha 2. -a-se, -a-sai -aithe -a-dhve, -a-dhvai

3. -a-ti'^, -a-t -a-tas -a-n 3. -a-te, -a-tai -aite -a-nte, -a-nta. 415. Injunctive. The unaugmented forms of past tenses used modally^ are sometimes called improper subjunctives^, but they are more suitably termed injunctives, as they appear to have originally expressed an injunction. This is borne out by the fact that since the IE. period the second and third persons imperfect (except the 2. sing, act.) had come to be used as regular imperatives expressing a command 9. But the unaugmented forms of the imperfect that could be distinguished from the regular imperative (as bhdras, bhdrat, bharan) and especially unaugmented aorists'" are often used in a sense fluctuating between that of the subjunctive (requisition) and of the optative (wish) ". Thus bhdratu 'let him bear', but bhdrat 'may he bear', bhiit 'may he be'. 416. Optative. This mood, which is comparatively rare in the Sam- hitaSj is formed from the present, the perfect, and the aorist. The stem is formed with -yd or -T, which, when strong and weak stem are distinguished.

I Cp. Whitney 560 e ; Brugmann, KG. 719. 7 In the aor. subj., -ti occurs only six times ^ The subjunctive in a is in origin an old in the RV. injunctive: Brugmann, KG. 716 (end). 8 Whitney 563. 3 In the form madayadhvai 'may ye rejoice'. The 3. sinsj. and pi., e. g. bhdrat-u and 4 krnvait!, however, appears once as an bharant-u, are explained as injunctives and the indicative; see Deleruck, Verbum p. 45. particle u: Brugmann, KG, 729, i. 5 In the aor. subj., -si occurs only once 'o The aorist injunctives were probably in the RV. used originally with the prohibitive particle 6 In the a- conjugation a appears throughout ma only: Brugmann, KG. 716, 2 (end). »i •dsif 'ds, etc. Cp. Whitney S7S- : ;

VII. Verb. Formation of the Moods. 317

are attached to the latter. In the a- conjugation -f is added (coalescing with a to e) throughout; in other verbs -T is added in the middle only, and -yi (often to be read as -id) in the active only'- a. Roots ending in a usually change that vowel to e before -ya: e.g. de-yam (perhaps to be explained as ddiianiY 'I would give'. But a is sometimes retained, as in ya-yam 'I would go'. b. The endings are the secondary ones. There are, however, some irregularities in the I. sing, and the 3. pi. i. The 3. pi. mid. always takes -ran instead of -an. 2. The 3. pi. act. always takes -ur, before which the a of -ya. is dropped, while in the a- con- jugation y is interposed between ^^ and -ur. 3. The I. sing. mid. has the peculiar ending a with y interposed between it and the modal -;. 4. The i. sing. act. of the a- con- jugation attaches -am instead of -m (the termination -em being unknown), interposing y between it and the ^"^ of the stem.

a. The endings of the optative in combination with the modal suffix are accordingly the following:

I. Graded conjugation. Active Middle sing. du. pi. smg. du. pi. 1. -yd-m -yd-va -yd-ma 1. -t-y-d -i-vdhi -i-mdhi 2. -yds -yd-tam -yd-ta 2. -T-thds -i-y-atham -t-dhvdm 3- -ya-( -yd-tam -y-i'ir 3. -i-td -i-y-dtatn

2. a- conjugation. 1. -e-y-am -e-va -e-ma i. -e-y-a -e-vahi -e-mahi 2. -e-s -e-tam -e-ta 2. -e-thas -e-y-atham -e-dhvam

3. -e-t -Ham -e-y-ur 3. -e-ta -e-y-atam -e-r-an.

417. Precative. This is a form of the optative which adds an -j- after the modal suffix in several persons, and is made almost exclusively from

aorist stems. ' In the RV. there occur a few forms of the precative in three

persons (i. 3. sing., i. pi.) active, and in two persons (2. 3. sing.) middle; thus active: i. sing, bhu-ya-s-am (aor.) 'may I be'; 3. sing, as-yas (for *as-y3-s-f) 'may he attain' (aor.); babhu-yas 'may he be' (perf.); i.pl. kri-ya-s-ma 'may we do' (aor.); middle: 2. sing. mam-s-T-s-tkds (aor.) and 3. sing, mam-s-i-s-ta (aor.), from man- 'think'. 418. Imperative. This mood has no mood-sign of its own, as all the first persons are subjunctives and the second and third persons are mostly

old injunctives. The purely injunctive forms are the 2. 3. du. and 2. pi. active and middle, ending in -tarn, -tarn, -ta; -atham, -atam, -dhvam. The 3. sing,

pi. act. in -tu'' and -antu^, and the 3. pi. mid. in -antam^ may be modi- fications of injunctives. The imperative has, however, distinctive forms of its own in the 2. sing, act.: -dhi, -hi, -ana, -tat; and in the middle: 2. sing, -sva and 3. sing, -tarn or -am. a. The 2. sing. act. in the a-conjugation has no ending, employing the bare stem (like the vocative singular of the a- declension); e. g. bhdra 'support'; nesa 'lead' (aor. of Ym-). In the graded conjugation, when a strong and weak stem as-e distinguished, the ending is attached to the latter: -dhi is added after both consonants and vowels, -hi (the later form of -dhi^

after vowels only; thus ad-dhi 'eat'; sru-dhi and srnu-dhi '\izzx' ; i-hi 'go', jagr-hi 'awake', pipr-hi 'save', sfnu-hi 'hear'. In the na- class, -hi is added

' On the accentuation cp. above 9 and 24 a. 4 Cp. Brugmann, ICG. 729, i ; IF. 18, 71 ' Cp. Brugmann, kg. 555 (bottom). Delbruck, Vergl. Syntax 2, p, 357. 3 The e (for a) is here probably due to 5 The ending -antu and -aniam lose their the influence of the other forms -es, -ei, etc. « under the same conditions as -anti (p. 314, Brugmann, KG. 728. note *). 3i8 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

only when the root ends in a vowel, but -ana'' when it ends in a consonant; thus pu-mhi 'purify', but as-dna 'eat'. b. The ending -tat occurs some twenty times in the RV. When strong and weak stem are distinguished, it is added to the latter; e. g. vit-tit 'thou shalt regard', dhat-tat 'thou shalt place', kf-nu-tst 'thou shalt make', puni-tat

'thou shalt purify', etc. ^ .Its use is almost restricted to the 2. sing. It is, however, once 3 found in the RV. and once in the TS. in the sense of the 3. sing., once as 2. du. in the RV., once as 2. pi. in the TS., and once as I. sing, in AV.+. It appears to have the value of a future imperative, ex- pressing an injunction to be carried out at a time subsequent to the present. It may originally have been identical with the abl. tad 'after that', 'then'; knm-tdt would thus have meant 'do (it) then' 5.

I. The Present System.

419. This group consists of a present indicative together with a sub- junctive, an injunctive, an optative, an imperative, and participles, besides a past augmented tense called the imperfect because formed analogously to the Greek tense. This is the most important system, as its forms are about three times as common as those of the three other systems taken together *- Hence roots are generally classified according to the manner in which their stems are formed in the present system. Here two distinct conjugations may be conveniently distinguished. The first or a- conjugation, all the stems in which end in -«, retains the stem unaltered (like the a- declension) in every tense, mood, and parti- ciple, accenting the syllable same throughout the present indicative, its moods , and participles, as well as the unaugmented imperfect?. The secondary con- jugations in -a (desideratives, intensives, causatives, denominatives) as well as the future^, follow this conjugation in their inflexion.

The second or graded conjugation is characterized by shift of accent between stem and ending, accompanied by vowel gradation. Minor differences consist in the loss of n in the 3. pi. middle, in the addition of another suffix {-ana instead of -mana) in the middle participle, in the employment of an ending in the 2. sing. impv. act, and in vowel gradation, with shift of accent, in the modal suffix of the optative.

a. The first or a- conjugation.

420. The special characteristics of this conjugation are: X. The -a of the stem is lengthened before the endings of the i. du. and pi. which begin with v and m ; e. g. jayamasi 'we conquer'; while the initial a of the endings of the 3. pi. -anti, -ante, -an, -anta, is dropped; e. g. bhdra-nti 'they bear'.

2. The optative sign is throughout -T, which combines with the -a of the present stem to e; e. g. bhdves. 3. The 2. sing. impv. act. has no ending except the comparatively few instances (about sixteen) in which -tat is added.

' On the origin of this peculiar imperative 5 Brugmann, KG. 732. form cp. Brugmann, KG. 839, 5. * Whitney 600, a. 2 See Delbrijck, Verbum 38. 7 But when the augment was added, it 3 Op. cit. 77; Whitney 571, b. Avery, received tlie accent just like the verbal pre- however (225, bottom), states that it occurs position in a principal sentence (the verb 5 times in the RV. as a 3. sing. itself remaining unaccented). t Whitney, loc. cit. 8 Also aorist stems ending in -a. ;

VII. Verb. Present System. 319

4. The 2. 3. du. mid. substitute e for the a of the endings -athe, -ate; e. g. 2. vahethe 'ye two travel', 3. vardhete 'they two thrive'. 5. The middle participle regularly ends in -mana. a. Five classes or types may be distinguished in the present stems of the a- conjugation. These are: i. Stems in which the radical syllable has a strong grade accented vowel'; e. g. bhdra-ti, from bhr- 'bear'. 2. Stems in which the radical syllable has a weak grade vowel, the thematic a being

accented'; e. g. rujd-ti, from ruj- 'break'. 3. Stems formed with the suffix

-ya, being either (a) ordinary transitive or intransitive verbs 3, e. g. ds-ya-ti 'throws'; or (b) passives, e. g. m-yd-te 'is led'. 4. Stems ending in -aya, being either (a) causatives {-dya) or (b) denominatives {-ayd)''. 5. Stems formed with the suffix -sa, added to the reduplicated root, being desideratives

e. g. pi-pa-sa- 'desire to drink'. The last two classes, which retain the present stem throughout their inflexion, constitute three of the secondary conjugations which will be treated separately below (541 — 570).

I. The radically accented a- class {bhava-").

421. This is by far the commonest type of the a- conjugation, about 300 such present stems occurring in the SamhitasS. The radical vowel takes

Guria, unless it is medial and long by nature or position; thus from/?- 'con-

: : bodk-a-; quer' : fdy-a-; m- 'lead' : ndy-a-; bhu- 'be' bhdv-a-; budh- 'awake'

srp- 'creep' : sdrpa-; h\it jinv- 'quicken' -.jinv-a-; krid- 'play' : krid-a-. Roots

with medial a remain unchanged, e. g. vad- 'speak' : vdd-a-. a. There are, however, several irregularities in the formation of the present stem:

1. iih- 'consider' takes Guna: oka- (but iih- 'remove' remains uncharged: iiha-); guh- 'hide' lengthens its vovifel: gilha-; kram- 'stride' lengthens its vowel in the active: krama- (but krama- in the middle); krp- 'lament' retains its vowel unchanged: kfpa-. — 2. The roots dams- 'bite' and sahj- 'hang' lose their nasal: ddsa-, saja-. — 3. gam- 'go', yam- 'reach', yu- 'separate' form their stem vfilh the suffix -cha- : gaccha-, yaccha-, yuccha-. — 4. Four stems are transfers from the reduplicating class 6; piba- from pa- 'drink', tistha- from stha- 'stand', sfda-'' (for *si-sad-a-) from sad- 'sit', sasca-^ ({ox*sd-sac-a-') from sac- 'accom- pany'; four others 5 are transfers from the mi- class, being either used beside or having entirely superseded the simpler original stems: i-nv-a- from i- 'send', beside i-n6-ti; &- ji-nv-a- itoxa ji- 'quicken', beside /V-wo'-m; hi-nv-a- ixora 'impel', beside hi-no-ti; finv-a- 1°. 'fatten' was doubtless originally *J>i-7iu- from the root pT. 422. Present indicative. The forms of this tense which actually occur, if made from bhdva-, would be as follows: Active. Sing. i. bhdva-mi, 2. bhdva-si, 3. bhdva-ti. Du. i. bAdva-vas (TS.),

2. bkdva-thas, 3. bhdva-tas. PI. i. bhdva-masi zx^ii bhdva-tnas, 2. bkdva-tha^\

3. bhdva-nii. Middle. Sing. r. bhdv-e, 2. bhdva-se, 3. bhdva-te''^. Du. i. bhdva-va/ie, bhdva-nte. 3. bhdv-ete. PI. i. bhdva-inahe^^ , 2. bhdva-dhve, 3. The forms which actually occur are the following:

1 The first class of the Indian gramma- 7 See RozwADOWSKi, BE. 21, 147. 8 reduplicative origin rians. A reminiscence of its 2 The sixth class of the Indian gramma- is the loss of the nasal (the sonant becoming a)

3.pl. : sascati, sascata. rians. in the ending of the rnv-a-, beside f-no-ti from ?'- 'send', is 3 The fourth class of the Indian gramma- 9 to the sixth class. rians. a similar transfer 1° Roots, under pinv. 4 The nominal « preceding the -ya is See Whitney, here sometimes dropped or changed to a 11 vada-ihana is the only example of the these verbs ending -thana in the indicative of the a- or I. See below 562. Some of in -aya, having lost their special stem conjugation. 12 meaning, are treated as a class (the tenth) The RV. once has sobhe as 3. sing, fof of primary verbs. sobhate. 13 Delbruck, Verbum p. 30 (top), AverY 5 See Whitney 214—216, cp, 744. b, and 6 dad-a- occasionally appears for the p. 235, Whitney 735, GrassmanN, 'think', give manamahe (ix. regular dadd-, from da- 'give'. under man 41^), 32° I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

Present Indicative. Active. Sing. i. acdmi, drcami, avami, uhdmi (AV. VS.), khdnami,

gdcchsmi{P^.), carami, codami, jdnami, jayami, tapami {KSf.). tisthami {hSf.), dahami, dhavdmi (AV.), ndyami (AV. TS.), pacami (AV.), patumi, pibami^, bkajdmi, bhdraini, bhavdmi (AV.), mdndaini (TS. iv. 2. 6'j, yacchdmi (AV.), yajdmi (AV.), yacami, rapdmi, rdjaini, rohxmi (AV.), vdddmi, vapdmi (AV.), vd/idmi, sdmsami, siksami, sumbhami, sajami, sapami, sidjmi ' (AV.), svadami, hardmi.

1. atasi, arsasi, arkasi, dziasi, invasi ^, iihasi, ksayasi, cdrasi, jayasi, Jinvasi'^, Jiirvasi, tapasi(AY.), iarasi, tis/Aasi\ tfirvasi, ddsasi, dhanvasi, dksvasi, ndyasi, pdtasi, pinvasi^, plbasf, bhdvasi, bkilsasi, madasi{KV.),ydcchasi, ydj'asi, rdksasi, rajasi, rohasi, vancasi (AV.), vddasi^ vapasi, varsasi (AV), vdhasi, s'amsasi, siksasi, sdrpasi (AY.), sas'casi', sidasi^, harasi (AV.). 3. acati{A.Y), djati, dnati{AN^.), ayati, drcati, ardaH{kN'.), arsati, arkati,

{¥i^h..\i.'Lo'>), dvati, tnvati^, isati, ihati ukati, ejati, osati, krdndaii, kramati{KN.), krllati, ksdyati, ksarati, khanati (AV.), khildati, gdcchati, gUhati (AV.), cdrati,

ce'tati, j'dyati, jinvati^, Jivati^Jurvatijjrayati, tapati, tdrati, tisthati ', tsdrati (AV.), dadati^, dahati (AV.), d

pibati ', piyati, bodhati, bhdfati, bkdnati, bkdrati, bhdrvati, bhdvati, bhdsati (AV.), bhiisati, bhe'dati, mddati, mdrdkati, mehati (AV.), ydcckati, ydjati, ydtati, yabhati (TS. VII. 4. 19^), ydmaii, yacati (AV.), yucchati, rdksati, rddati, rapati^ rdjati, radhaii, rijati, rebhati, rSdhati, rosati, rohati^ vdncati (AV.), vdddti, vdpati, varjati, vardhati, varsaii (AV.), vasati 'dwells', vahati, vAsati, ve'nati, samsati, sdsatii, siksati, sundhati, h'lmbhati, iocati (AV. TS.), sarjati, sdrpati, sadhati, sfdati'^, se'dhati, skandati, stobhati, sphurjati (AV.), sredkati, Adrati, himsati'< (Kh. IV. 5"). ^ Du. I. cdravas (TS. i. 5. 10'). — 2. acathas, drcathas, arhathas, dvathas, invathas'^, karsathas, ksdyathas, gdcchathas, ghosathas, cetathas, janathas, Jlnvatkas', jivatkas, jurvathas, tisthatas^, dhdmathas, naksatkas, nayathas, pdtathas, pinvathas^, bhdrathas, bhdvathas, bhusathas, mddatkas, yajathas, ydtathas, raksathas (AV. TS.), rajathas, ro/iat/ias, vanathas, varathas, vahathas, siksathas, sadathas, sddkatAas, sidathas^, svddathas. 3. invatas^, ejatas (AV.), ksayatas, khadatas (AV.), gdcchatas (AV.), ghosatas, cdratas, tisi/iatas^ (AV.), dravatas (AV.), dhdvatas 'wash', naksatas, pdcatas (AV.), pi?ivatas', pibatas'', bhdvatas, bhflsatas, 7nanthatas, mardhatas, yacchatas (AV.), yucchatas, raksatas, rdjatas, vardhatas (AV.), vasatas, vdhatas. PL I. drcamasi^ drhamasi, khanamasi{AN), cdrdmasi and cdramas{KY.), janamasi, Jayamasi, taramasi, ddyamasi (AV.), dahamasi (AV.), namdmasi (Av.), ndyamasi and naydmas (AV.), pibdmas^ (AV.), budhdmasi, bhajdmas (AV.), bharamasi, mddamasi and madsmas, methamasi, ydjdmasi and ydjdmas, vdddmasi and vaddmas, vasdmasi (AV.), Jamsamas (AV.), sajdmasi (AV.), hardmasi (AV.) and hdrdmas (AV.). 2. djatha^, dvatka, ejatha, krilatha, ksdyatha, khddaika, gdcchatha, caratha (AV.), cetatka, jinvatha^, tdksatha, tiirvatha, dhdvatha (AV.), ndyatha, nasatha, patatha, pinvatha'' (TS. ill. i. 11*), bhdratha, bhdvatha, bkiisatha, mddatha, mosatka, rdksatha, rdjat/ta, rejatha, vahatha, sdrpatha. — With -thana only vddathana. 3. acanti (AV.), ajanti, drcanti, drsanti, drhanti, dvanti, krandanti,

but this, is due to Sandhi (108), manamahe 3 A transfer from the root class for sasti. 'li standing for manamahe aii (Pp.). 4 A transfer from the infixing class, I A transfer from the reduplicating class. 5 The Samhita lengthens the final vowel * A transfer from the nu- class. in at least ten of the following forms. :

VII. Verb. Present System. 321 kramanti (AY.), krilanti, krosaiiti, ksdranti, ksodanti, khananti (AV.), khadanti (^^), gacchanti^ gdmanti, guhanti, cdranti, jdyanti, jdranti, jinvanti'^, jivanti, tdksanti, tdpanti, taranti, tisthanti^, trdsanti, tsdranti, dabhanti, dahanti, dasanti (AV.), drdva?iH, dhanvanti, dhdmanti, dhavanti, dharvanti, naksanti, nandanti, namanti, ndyanti, naianti 'they attain', nlksanti (AV.), nindanti, pdcanti, pdtanti, pinvanti^, ptbanti', ptyanti, bhajanti, bhananti, bkdranti, bMvanii, bhusanti, majjanti, mddanti, mdnthanti, maranti, mard/ianti, mimanti' {ma- 'bellow'), mehanti, ydcchanti, ydjanti, yacanti (AV.), yodhanti (AV.), rdksanti, rdnanti, rddanti, rajanti, reb/ianti, rohanti, vddanti, vananti, vdpanti^ vdrdha7iti, vdrsanti, valganti{hN.)^ vdsanti, vasanti{KV.), vdhanti, vananti, idmsanti, siksanti, socanti, scotanti, sapanti, sarpanti (KS[.), sfdanti^, sedhanti, skandanti, stobhanti, srdvanti, svddanti, svdranti, hdranti (AV.), khnsanti^.

Indicative Middle.

Sing. I. aje, dme, arce, fkse, gacche (TS. i. i. 10^), daye (AV. TS.), 7iame, nikse (AV.), badhe (AV.), bhdre, bkikse, mande, yd/e, rabhe, Idbhe (AV.), vade, vdnde, varte, sraye (AV.), sdhe (AV.), stdve, svaje (AV.), hdve. 1. arsase {AST.), chase, garhase,ga/iase,£dksase,cayase,jarase,josase{AV.), tisthase^, tosase, dohase, naksase, nayase, pavase., pinvase ', bddkase, bhrajase, mamhase, mandase, modase, yacchase, yajase, yamase, raksase, ramase (AV.), rocase, rohase, vdrdkase, vahase, sumbhase, sobhase, sdcase, stdvase, harsase. 3. ajate, ay ate, tksate (AV.), tsaie, hate, ejate'^, edhate, ohate, krpate, kalpate (AV.), kramate, kridate (AV.), gacchate, gahate, guhate, ghosate, cdyate, ce'tate, codate, cydvate (AV.), jdrate, jrmbhate, tandate, tistkate', tej'ate, tosate, ddksate, dadate^ (hS.), dadhate^ {T'Si.ii.2.12''), djhate^, dyotate (AN.), dhavate, ndksate, ndtnate, ndyate (AV.), ndsate, ndsate, pdcate (AV.), pdyate, pdvate, pinvate ', pibate', prdthate, pldvate, bid/iate, bhdjate, bhandate, bhayate, bhdrate, bhiksate, bhojate, bhrdjate, bhresate, mdmkate, madate (AY.), mdrate, modate, ydjate, yatate, yamate, yoj'ate, ramhate, raksate, rapsate^, rdmate, rambate, rejate, rocate, rohate, Idyate {AY.), vancate (AV.), vadate, vanate, vdndate, vapate, vdrate 'covers', vdrtate, vdrdhate, varsate (AV.), vasate (x. 3 7 3), vdhate, ve'pate, vyathate, sapate (AV.), siksate, h'lmbhate, srayate (AV.), sdcate, sakate, sadhate, se'cate, se'vate, stdrate, sayate, stdvate, smayate, sydndate, svadate, hdrsate, hdvate, hasate~, hvdrate. — With -e for -te: Jose, tose'^, make, sdye, se've, stdve. Du. I. sdcavahe. 2. jayethe, jarethe, raksethe, varethe, vahethe, srayethe, sacethe. 3. carete, javete, tarete, namete, bJdhete (AV.), bliayete, bharete, viethete, yatete, rejete, vddete, vartete, vardkete, vepete, vyathete, sacete, smayete, havete.

PI. I. ksadamake (AY.), cdyamahe'^ (KY.), jaramahe, ndksamahe, ndvamahe, ndsdmahe, badhamahe, bhdjamahe, bhdyamahe, bharamahe, mdnamahe^° , mdnda- mahe, maramahe, ydjamahe, yacamahe, rabhamahe, vdnamahe, vdndamahe, sahamahe (AV.), staramahe, stdvamahe, svajamahe, hdvamahe. 1. cayadhve, dhavadhve, badhadhve, bhdradhve, mandadhve, vdhadhve, sayadhve, sdcadhve (AV.).

I Transfer from the -nu class. form of /i«- 'leave'(ix. 275; x.1273); cp.p.322, » A transfer form from the reduplicating note 3. This form is given by Avery 258 as •class. subjunctive of the s- aorist of ha-. 3 A transfer from the infixing nasal class. 8 (iv. 381). With irregular accent, lilie that + In dfejate iniv. 482, V. 64'': V-p. dpaljate. of similar forms in the graded conjugation. 5 dohdte (x. 1 337), Delbruck, Verbum 97, 9 Conjecture for caydsmahe, AV. XIX. 481 and Avery 233, is a mistake for dohaie (a see Whitney's note on the passage in his transfer from the root class). Translation. 6 Cp. Bartholomae, if. 10, 18. 10 See note on bhdvamahe, above, p. 319, '3. 7 From has- 'go emulously', a secondary note

Indo-arische Philologie I. 4, 21 322 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

3. dyante, Tksatite{KY.T?>.), isante, edhante, ksjda?ite, gdcchante{TS.w.2. G''), citante, cydvante, jdyante, jarante 'sing', dsthante'', dddante'^ (AV.\ dhavante, naksante, namante, navante, pdvante, pibanie'', piavante (AN .), bddkante, bhajante, raksante, bhdyante, bharante, bhrajante, modante{kS .), ydjante, yatante^ydcante, rante^, rapsante (AV.), rabhante, ramante, rejante, rjcante, vadante, vdrante, vdrtante, vdrdkante, vahante, vyathante, sayante, h'lmbhante, srayante, sdcante, sdpante, sahante, stdvante, spdrdhante, svajante, svadante, hdrante, Mvante, hdsante^^ (AV.).

Present Subjunctive*.

423. Active. Sing. I. ajani (TS.vii. 4.19'; VS. xxiii. 19), carani, jivani (AV.), tarani (AV.), ndyani, pacani, bhajani, rdjani, vddani (AV.), vdAani, hdrani (AV.). — Without -ni: area. 2. a. With-s/: djasi, gdccAasi (AY.), jayasi, iistAasi^ (AY.), nayasi (AY.), pibasi^, bhdjasi, bhdvasi, bhasasi (AV.), ydjasi, vadasi, vahasi. b. With -s: dvSs, gacchas, jdyas, jivas (KY.), jdrvas^, tisiMs'^, bhdrSs, vadiis (AV.), vdnas (AV.), vdrdhas, iiksas. tisthati'^, 3. a. With -ii: djati, ejati (AY.), gdcchati, jayati,jivati, tdpati, dabhati, dahati, dhanvati, ndyati, pdcati, pdtati, padsti, pibati ', bodkati, bhdjati, bhdrati, bhdvati, marati, ydjati, raksati (AV.), vadati, vahati (AV.), sdmsatiy sdpati (AV.), sumbhati (AV.), srdyati (AV.), sidati ', svddati, svarati. b. With -t: drcat, drsat, drhat, dvat, invSt^, ejat, gdcchat, ghosat, jandi 1 (AV.), ndylt (AV.), nindat, (AV.vi. 8 3), jivat, tisthat \ ddsat (AV.), ddsat, dhavat pdcat, pdtat, piblt\ bhajat (AV.), bhdrat, bhusat, ydcchat, yajat, resat (AV.), rjhatyNY.), vdrdhat, vahat (AY. TS.), sdmsat, sdpat (AY.), siksat, sarpat (KY.),,

skdndat (TS. :. 6. 2-), smdrat (AV.), hdrat (AV.). Du. I. cdrava, jdyava, pibava ', vdnava, sdmsava.

2. dvathas, tarSt/ias (AY.), tisthdthas', ndyathas (PN .), plbat/ias^, bhdvathas (Av.), vadathas, stnarathas. cdrdtasi pibatas'-, vdkatas, sdpatas. 3. , PI. I. drclma, krdmama, khdnama (TS. iv. 1.2^), taksama, namama (TS. v.'].\''), patdma (Kh. p. 171. 6), bhajama, bhdrama, bhdvama, madama, man- thama, marama, yajama, radhama, vadama, vardhama, vdsama, sresama^, hdrdma.

2. dvdtha, gacckatha, jaydtha, jivdtha (TS. v. 7. 4'') 9, yacchixtJia (AV.), vdhdtha. 3. drcdn, krildn, gdcchdn, ghjsdn, cdrdn, jivan (AV.), ddsan (AV.), patan, yacchan (AV.), vdddn, vdrdhdn'^°, vahan, siksdn(AY.), sfd.in' (AV.), karan (AV.). Middle. Sing. i. gdcchai (AV.), mdnai, marai, stdvai. — 2. vardhase;

nayasai (AV.). — 3. jarate, tisthate ', pavate, bhayute, ydjdte, vdhate, srdyate,. svajdtai(KY.). svajdte; cardtai(KY.), jaydtaii^Y'&.KY), yajdtai, srayatai(KY.),

1 A transfer form from the reduplicating 5 A transfer from the -nu class. class. 7 Delbruck, Verbum 82, gives tisthatas, 2 According to Roth, ZDMG. 20, 71, for but I cannot trace it. *ran-anie; WHITNEY, Roots = r-anie, under 8 Perhaps from «-«- = His- 'clasp': cp. ar. f 'go' ; also Grassmann, under root Whitney, Roots. 3 From /las- 'go emulously'; see Whitney's 9 Delbruck 48 gives pibatha also. JO note on AV. iv. 36^ vdrdhan (I. 70''; VI. 1711) as well as drcan 4 No forms of the 2. 3. pi. subj. middle (iv. 552; V. 31^) are given as indicatives by

occur in this class. Delbruck, Verbum 91 ; cp. p. 327, note 3. 5 Delbruck p. 37 (top) gives tdk^as, which I cannot trace. ,

VII. Verb. Present System. 323

Du. I. rabhavahai (TS.iv.4.7=), sdcavahai, sahavahai. — 3. ydtaite. PI. I. ndsamakai, bhajamahai (AV.), ydjamahai, vdnamahai.

Present Injunctive.

424. Active. Sing. i. cydvam, taksam, tistham'^, bhojam, yojam. 2. dvaa, esas (AV.), osas, guhas, caras, tisthas^ (AV.), dd/ias, tiamas (AV.), tnadas (AV.), yamas, vadas (VS. xxin. 25), vanas, vapas, vdras, vasas, venas, socas.

3. arcat, arsat {KSI.y^ , karsat, krandat, krdmat* {AN.), ksarat, carat, ceiat,

codat, janat, jdyat, josat, taksat, tandrat^, tapat, tamat, tdrat, tisthaf^ , dadaf^ ddbhai, ddsat, ddsat, dAsat, drdvat, ndksat, nayat, nasat, pdcat, pdtat, pinvaf, pibat^, prothat, bjdhat, bhdrat, bhavat (AV.), bhasat, bhramsat (AV.), madat {KSf.)^, minat, ydmaf, ranaf, rddat, rdpat, radhat, re/at, resat, rodhat, vddat, vdrat, vdrtat, vdrdhat, vdsat, sakat, iardhat, siksat, sndthat, sramat, sadat, sdrpat, sascaf^, svdjat. PI. 3. arcan, cdran, dabhan, dhavan, ndksan, ndsan ('lose' and 'reach'), b/iaran {AN.), bkavan{KN.), yaman, rdnati, vaman, vardhan, sSsan, sadhan^, sidan^. Middle. Sing. 2. guhathas (AV.), bddhathas, rabhathas (AV.). 3. isata, bharata, rocata, vdrdhata, sacaia, sMhata. PI. 3. dmanta, dyanta, caranta, cyavanta, janania, dsthanta'-, naksanta, namanta, ndyanta, navanta, nasanta, nasanta, pinvanta'^ pravanta, bhdjanta, , bhananta, bhdranta, bhiksanta, yaksanta, yavanta, rananta, ranta (i. 61''; VII. 39^)9, ramanta, r^janta, vanta^°, vdranta ('cover'), vardhanta, vradhanta, socanta, sdcanta, sapanta, sSdhanta, stdvanta, smayanta, hdvanta.

Present Optative.

425. Active. Sing. I. careyam {AY.), bhaveyam (^Q.iy.t. 12^), vadheyam (Av.), sikseyam. — 2. dves, bhaves, tnadei, vanes. — 3. dvet, gdcchet (AV.), caret, taret, pdtet, bhdvet (AV.), yacchet (AV.), Idbhet (AV.), vadet (AV.), vasef^ (Av.), sravet, haret (AV.). — Du. 3. grdsetam. PI. I. kramema, ksayema (AV.), khanema (TS. iv. i. 2*), gacchema (AV. TS.), cayema, carema, jdyema, jivema, tdrema, tisthema ', dasema, patema (TS. rv. 7. 1 3''), bhareina (AV. TS.), bhdvema, bhdsema, mddema, mahema, yatema, rapema, rohema {KS!.), vatema, vadema, siksema, sapema, sideina^ (AV.), hdrema (AV.). — 3. tdreyur, ydceyur (AV.), vaheyur, saheyur (SA. xii. 32). Middle. Sing. i. saceya. — 3. ajeta, kalpeta {?ih..'s.\i. 20), ksameta, jareta, bhikseta, yajeta, vadeta, sdmseta (AV.), saceta, saheta (SA. xii. 20), staveta. Du. I. sacevahi (AV.). — PI. I. gahemahi, bhajemahi, bharemahi, ydtemahi, rabhemahi, sdcemahi. 3. With ending -rata: bharerata.

Present Imperative. 426. Active. Sing. 2. aca, dja, area, drsa, dva, inva'^, uha (AV.), Ssa, karsa, kranda, krama, ksdra, khada (AV. TS.), gdccha, gada (AV.), cdra,

8 1 Transfer form from the reduplicating class. Delbruck, Verbum 89 (p. 63), takes 2 A transfer from the -nu class. hdran as an unaugmented imperfect, but it 3 AV. X. 4', some Mss. risat: see Whit- seems to occur only as a N. sing. m. parti- ney's note in his Translation. ciple. for *ran- 4 Emendation for ksamai, AV. vil. 63' : 9 According to Delbruck 113 see Whitney's Translation. aiita; Whitney, Roots, ?--aKto. Cp.p.322,note 2. "> 1. for *van-an.ia. 5 II. 30', perhaps to be emended to tandat. DelbAUCK c, 6 AV. XX. 492 emendation for mada. II AV. XII. 4=7: should probably be vaset. 5. 7 Delbruck 56 (top) adds raksat. Cp. p. 324, note 21* 324 I- Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

coda, jay a, jmva^, jTva, jurva, josa, tdpa, tara, tistha^, daia (AV.), daha, dhnha (AV.), drava, dhanva, dJiama, dhava, nama, ndya, niksa (AV.), pata,

pava, pinva ', piba ^, protha, bodha, bhdja, bhdra, bhdva, bhUsa, mada, mantha (Av.), manda, myaksa, mrada, ydccha, ydja,ydbha (KY.),yoJa, rdksa, rdna, rdda, raja (AV), roha, vada, vadha (AV.), vapa, vdrdha, vasa^ (AV.), vasa(AV.), vdha, vincha'' (AV.), sdmsa, sdrdha, siksa, sumbka, soca, sraya (AV. TS.), sdra, sarpa, saha (SA. xii. 31), sidAa, sfda^, sedha, skanda (AV.), stana{hN.), srava, svada, svapa, svara, hara, hinva'^. — With ending -tai: avatat,

.) osatat, gacchatat {AN.),jinvatat^{K^.), dakatat, dhSvatat {KV 'xnxi , bhavatat, yacchatat, yacatat, rdksatat, vahatat, srayatat (TS. vii. 4. 19^). 3. ajatu, ahcatu {KSI)-, arcatu, arsatu (AV.), dvatu, invatu'^, Tsatu (AV.), ejatu, esatu (AV.), osatu (AV.), krandatu, kramatu (TS. vir. 3. 11^), krosatu (AV.), tapatu, tisthatu^, {hS.), gacchatu, caratu {hN.), jayatu, jinvatu\ jivatu dahatu (AV.), drrnhatu (AV.), dravatu (AV.), dhavatu, naksatu (AV.), nayatu, paiatu (AV.), pibaiu^, bjdhatu, bhavatu, bhUsatu, manthatu (AV.), tndndatu, yacchatu, yajatu, rdksatu, rajatu (AV.), rohatu, vadatu (AV.), vapatu (TS. AV.), vdrdkatu, varsatu (Kh.ii. 13*), vasatu (AV.), vahatu, siksatu, socatu, sarpatu, sidatu", sedkatu, Ainvatu^. — With ending -iai: gacckatst, smaratat (AV.). Du. 2. ajatam, dvatam, invatam^, osatam, gdcchatam, jdyatam, jaratam,

jinvatam ', taksatam, tdpatam, tlsthatam ^, tiirvatam, dahatam (AV.), dMva- iam, nayatam, patatam, pinvatam, pibatam % badAatam, bAajatam, bAdratam, rdksatam, bAdvatam, . bAusatam, mamAatam (Kh.i. 10^), yaccAatam, ydtatam,

roAatam (TS. I. 8. iZ''), vdnatam, vardAatam, vdAatam, venatam, siksatam, sidatam^, sedhatam. 3. ayatam (AV.), dvatatn, invatam^, krosatam (AV.), gaccAatam, cetatam, jdyatam (AV.), jivatam (AV.), drdvatam, pibatam'' (AV.), bAaratam (AV.), bAavatam, madatam, meAatam (AV.), yaccAatdm, raksatam, vdAatam, vestatam (AV.), sidatam'.

PI. 2. drcata, arsata ^, avata, gaccAata, guAata, carata, codata, janata, jayata, jinvata"^, jtvata, taksata, tapata, tarata, tistAata'-, trasata, daksata,

df-mAata, dAavata, ndyaia, nindata, pdcata, patata (AV.), pinvata ', pibata ', bAd/ata (AV.), bAdrata, bAdvata, bAusata, madata, tndntAata, ydccAata, yajata, yacata, rdksata, roAata, vadata, vanata, vapata, vardAata, vaAata, vrajata (AV.), samsata, sundAata (KJa..iu.. 16^), sumbAata, socata (AV.), sacata, sarpata, sascata^, sidata'^, sedAata, stobAata, sredAata, Aarata (AV.). — With ending -tana: bAajatana. 3. drcantu, drsantu, dvantu, kasantu (AV.), krosantu (AV.), ksarantu, gaccAantu, carantu, jdyantu, jivantu, taksantu, tapantu (AV. TS.), tistAantu', trasantu (AV.), daAantu, drdvantu, dAanvantu (AV.), dAavantu (AV.), dAurvantu, namantu (AV. TS.), nayantu, pacantu, patantu, pibantu', bjdAa'tiu, bAajantu (AV.), bAarantu (AV.), bAdvaniu, matAantu (AV.), madantu, mantAantu (AV.), mdndantu, ydccAantu, yajantu, yiucAantu, rdksantu, radantu, roAantu, lapantu (AV.), vddantu, vapantu, vardAantu, vdrsantu (AV.; Kh. 11.5), vasantu (AV.), vdAantu, vancAantu, sundAantu, sumbAantu (AV.), srosantu, sajantu (AV.),

sarpantu (AV.), sidantu ', sedAantu, stobAantu, sravantu, svddantu, svarantu, Aarantu (AV.). Middle. Sing. 2. dcasva (AV.), edAasva (AV.), kalpasva, kramasva, gaccAasva (AV.), codasva, cyavasva (AV. TS.), jdrasva, tapasva, dayasva (AV.),

1 Transfer from the -»« class. 4 Avery 243 adds vena{1). 2 Transfer from the reduplicating class. 5 The form arsata in AV. VI. 282 is a corrup- 3 AV. in. 4^, perhaps to be read vasa. tion: see Whitney's note in his Translation. ,

Vn. Verb. Present System. 325

naksasva, nabhasva (AV.), namasva, ', nayasva, pdvasva, pinvasva pibasva ', praiAasva, plavasva 3 (Kh. 11. 1 6), bddhasva, bkajasva, bhdrasva, madasva (AV.), mandasva'>, yajasva, yatasva, raksasva, rabhasva, ramasva, vadasva, vdndasva, vdrtasva, vdrdhasva, vdhasva, socasva, srayasva, hancasva, sdcasva, sdhasva, sidasva-, sevasva (AV.), syandasva, svajasva (AV.), svddasva, hdrsasva. 3. edhatam (TS.vii. 4. 19^), kalpatam (AV.), gacchatam,jaratam, tisthatam" (AV.), dadatam', dayatam{KY.), dyotatam (AV.), nabhatJm (AV.), pdvatam,p'.nva- tam^,prathatam, bddhatam, bhayatam (AN.), yajatam, rabhatam (AV.), ramatam (AV.), rocatam, vanatam, vartatam, vdrdhatam, srayailm (AV.), sacatam, saha- tam (Av.). Du. 2. kalpetham (TS. iv. 2. 5'), gahetham (AV.), cjdetham, cyavetham (AV.), jaretham, bAdhetham, yajetham, rabhetham (AV.), vartetham (AV.), vdrdhethdm, vahetham, srayetham, sacetham (AV.), smaretham. 3. kalpetSm (TS. iv. 4. 11^), srayetam, sacetam. PI. 2. ajadhvatn, ksdmadhvam, gacchadhvam, cyavadkvam {TS.iv.'j.i^^),

tisthadhvam ^, nayadhvam, namadhvam, pavadhvam, pinvadhvam ', pibadhvam ^, badhadhvam, bhajadhvam (AV.), bharadhvam, modadhvam, yacchadhvam, yajadhvam, rabhadhvam, rdmadhvam, vadadhvam, vartadkvam, srayadhvam, sacadhvam (AV.), sdhadhvam, syandadhvam (AV.), svajadhvam, harsadh%iam (Av.). — With ending -dhva: ydjadhva.

3. ayantam (AV.), kdlpantam (TS. iv. 4. 11'), JayantSm, tisthantam' namantam, pdvantam^, badhantam (TS. iv. 2. 6*), bharantam (AV.), yajantam, yatantam, radantam (AV.), rabhantam (AV.), ramantam (AV.), layantam, vartantam, vardhantam, srayantam, sacantam, sadhantam, syandantam, hdrsantam (AV.). Present Participle.

427. a. The active form made with the suffix -mit^ is very common. Stems of forms which occur are: djant-, dtant-, drcaiit-, drsant-, drhant-,

dvant-, invant- ', uksant-, ejant-, e'sant-, Sdant-, osant- (AV.), kdlpant- ' (AV.), knjant- (AV.), krdndant-, krSmant-, krilant-, krosant-, ksdyant-, ksdrant-, khdnani- (AV.), kh&dant- (AV.), gdcchant-, gUhant-, ghSsant-, cdtant-, cdrant-, cetant-, cestatit- (AV.), jdjhjhant-, jdnjant-, jdyant-, jdrant-, jinvant-'^, jivant-, jarvant-, tdksant-, tdpant-, tdrant; tisthant-^, tfcrvant-^, ddsant-, ddhant-, dssant-, drdvant-, dhdmant-, dhavant-, dhttrvant-, dhrdjant-, ndksant-, nddaiit- (AV.),

nayant-, ndvant-, pdcant-, pdtant-, pinvant- ', pibajit- ^, pfsant-, prothant-, bhdjant-, bhdrant; bhdrvant-, bhdvant-, bkdsant-, bhUsant-, bhrdjant-, mddant-, mivant- (AV.), tnehant- (AV.), mrocant-, ydksant-, ydcchant-, ydjant-, ydtant-, yacant-, yucchant-, yesant-, rdksant-, rddant-, rdpant- (TS.vii. 1. 11'), rdjant-, ribhant-'^, rihant; Idpant- (AV.), vdiant-, vddant-, vdpant-, vdrdhant-, vdrsant- (AV.), vasant-, vdhant-, ve'nant-, ve'sant-, vrdjant-, vrAdhant-, sdmsant-, sdpant-, idrdhant-, sasant-, siksant-, socant-, hdyant- '°, sdnant-, sdpant-, sdrjant- (AV.), sdrpani-, sadhant-, sShant- or sdhant-, sfdant-^, se'dkant-, skdndant- (AV.), stobhant-, srdvant-, sredhant-, hdyant-, hdrant-, hdrsant-, hhant-. b. The middle participles almost invariably formed with the suffix -mana are also numerous: dtamana-, dmamana-{AN.), dyamana-, iksamana-{KN.), isamana-, kdlpamana- (IS.IY. 2. 10^), kfpamana-, krdks&mana-, krosamana-, ksdmamana-,

1 Transfer from the -nu class. 7 If kalpat, AV. XI. 526, is with WHITNEY 2 Transfer form from the reduplicating in his Translation emended to kalpan. 8 class. From tiirv- a secondary form of tur-, 3 Accented plavasva. 9 Fern, rebhatyau (Kh. I. 37). 10 svdyat, seems to 4 Avery 243 a.iAs yacchasva(^). The form vn. 501, be middle) as 5 Avery 246 adds pinvantam (?). regarded by Delbruck (p. 56, an 6 On the declension of these stems see 314. injunctive of ivi-. ;

326 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

khdnamana-, gAhainana-, guhamana-, cdyamana, jdnamana-, jdramana-, 'singing' and 'approaching', Jdsamana-, jehamana-, tiinjamana', tejamana-, tosamana- (AV.), ddksamana- (AV.), ddsamdna-, dyJtamana-, dhavamana-, ndksamdjia-, ndmamana-, ndyamana-, ndvamana-, nadhamdna-, pdvamSna-,

p'mvanidna- ', ptbdamdna-, prdthamdna- (AV. TS.), prothamana-, badhamana-, bkdiida?iiaJia-, bhdyamdna-, bkdramana-, b/iiksamSria-, bhrdjamdna-, mdmha- tnatia-, mandamana-, me'gkamdna-, modamana-, ydcchamana-, yajamana-, ydta-

mdna-, yiicamana- i^KN .), yddamdna-, rdtnhaindna-, rdksa7nana-, rdbhamana-, rdmbamana-, rdsamdna- (AV.), rejamSna-, rocamdna-, vdndamana-, vdrtamdna-, vdrdhamdiia-, vdhamana-, vepamdna- (AV.), vydthamdna-, siksamana-, si'imbha- mana-, sobhanidna-, srdyamdna-, Irosamdna-, svdncamdna-, sdcamdna-, sdha- mana-, sidvatnd?ia-, spdrdhamdna-, smdyamdna-, sydndamana-, Mrsamdna-, hdvamdna-, hfisamdna-. a. A few middle participles in -ana instead of -mana, seem to be formed from

present stems ofthis class; thus cydvdna-^ pratha7id-, ydtdna- ?Sii. yaidnd-, suinbhdna-^ \ but it is probably better to class them as somewhat irregular or isolated root aorist participles*.

Imperfect Indicative.

428. It is to be noted that the longer ending of the 2. pi. active never occurs in the imperfect of this or any other class of the a- conjugation. Unaugmented forms are fairly common; used injunctively they are in the 3. sing, very nearly as frequent (424) as the regular subjunctive^ (423). Active sing. i. dgaccham (AV.), acaram, ataksam, ataram, anamam,

anayani, apinvam ', abharam, abhavam, abhedam, arodkam, aroham, asidam dvaiii; yamam. 2. dkrandas, aksaras, agacchas, dcaras, dfanas, djayas, dtaras, dtist/ias^, ddahas, adhamas, dnayas, dpinvas'-, apibas^, dbhajas, dbkaras, dbhavas, dmadas, dyafas, dramhas, dradas, avadas, dvapas, dvahas, diiksas, dsadas, dsarpas (AV.), asTdas'^, asedkas, asravas; djas, dvas; tapas (AV.), bhdras. 3. dkrandat, dkramat, dksarat, akhaiiat (AV.), dgacchat, dguhat, dcarat, dcalat {AN.), acetat, djanat, djayat, ajinvat^, dtaksai, atapat, atarat, dtistkat^, ddadat' (AV.), ddahat, addsat, ddnnhat (AV.), ddravat, adhamat, anamat, dnayat, dpacat, dpatat (AV.), dpinvaf^, dpibat', abhajat, abkarat, dbhavat, dbhusat, dmadat, amaiitkai, dmandat, dmurc/iat (AV.), dyacchat, draksat, arapat, aroAat, dvapat, dvasat, dvasat, dvahat, dvenat, dsayaf, dsasat^ (Kh.

I. <)''), dsocat, asajat, asadat, dsidat^, asedkat, askandat (AV.), dharat (AV.); djai, arcat, dvat; dirat {']^Tr-)7, auhat {uh- 'push'); krdndat, carat {KV.), iaksat, tsdrat, drmhat, naksat, nayat, pibat', bkdrat, rebhat, vdhat. Du. 2. djinvatam'^, dtaksatam (AV.), dpinvatam'^, dprathatam, dbkavatam, dmantAatam, aradatam, dsiksatam, dsascatam^, dsTdatam'; ajatam, dvatam; airatam'' (Tr- 'set in motion').

3. atisthatdm'- (AV.), dbkavatam (TS. iv. 7. 15^), avardhatdm; avatdm; auhatdm (AV. VS. TS.). PI. I. dtaksdma, dbhardma (AV.). — 2. dtaksata, dtisthata', dnadata (TS. V. 6. i^), d?iayata, dpinvata'-, dbhavata, avartaia (AV.), dvalgata (TS. v. 6. i^), dsarpata; dvata; auhata (AV). 3. dkasan (AV.), akrdman^ (A.V.), dksaran, akhanan (AV.), aguhan.

^ Transfer from the -nu class. 5 See Whitney 743. " Transfer form from the reduplicating 6 Transfer from the root class. class. 7 Transfer from the root class, in which 3 Cp. WmTNEY 741 a, and Lindner, the verb Fr- is also middle. Nominalbildung 54 (top). 8 akramus is given by Avery 249 as an 4 Cp. Root Aorist 506. impf. of this class with -us, but it is doubt- ;

VII. Verb. Present System. 327

dcaran (AV.), acalan (AV.), ajanan, djayan {KSl), dtaksan, dtaran, dtisthan \ atrasan, ddasan, adravan, adhrajan, anaksan, dnaman (AV.), dnayan, aptnvan^, apiban^ (AV.), dbharan, dbhavan, dbhusan, dmadan, dmandan, dyacchan (AV.), dyacan (AV.), draksan, drajan (AV.j, dvadan, dvapan (AV.), dvardhani, dvahan, mesan {\fvis-), dsamsan, asiksan (AV.), asrayan {Kv}), dsthivan'* (AV.), dsredhan, dsvaran; Ajan, ayan (AV.), arcan^, avan^, dijan (tf/- 'stir'),^ auhan^ (AV.); jinvan, tdksan, tsdran (AV.), dddan'' (AV.), bharan, t bhusan, srosan, sTdan . Middle. Sing. i. aththe' (AV.). — 2. dgahathas (AV.), dpavathas, dmandathas, drocathas; gdhathas (AV.). 3. akalpata^{AN.)^ ataksata, apinvata', abadhata, dmamhata'^, dmanthata, dmandata,^ dramhata, araksata, drocata, dvartata, avardhata, dvalgata (AV.), diapata; djata, dyata; dtksata''° {KY), auhata {ah- 'xtraowe'); caksata, janaia, naksata, nimsata, badhata, rejata. Du. 2. dbadhetham, drabhetham (AV.). — 3. akrpetam, aprathetam,

dbkyasetarn" , drejetam; diksetS7ti'^°. PI. 3. dkalpanta (AV.), akrpanta, dkhana7ita, dgacchanta, ajananta, atisihania'^, ddadanta^, adhavanta'^^, anamania (TS.tv.6.2^), dnayanta, dna- vanta, apacanta, aprathauta, dbkajanfa, abhayanta, dbharanta, dyajanta, ara- manta, drejanta, avadanta, dvartanta, dvardhanta, avepanta (AV.), dvradanta,

dsamanta (TS. IV. 6. 3^), dsacanta, dsapanta, dsahanta; diksafita'^° {KY . TSi.) isanta, krpanta, jananta, navanta, prathanta, bhdjanta {KN.), bhananta, mananta, vapanta.

2. The suffixally accented a- class (tucfd-)^K

429. Nearly one hundred roots belong to this class. The radical vowel is almost always medial, being regularly 2, u or ;•. If the vowel is final, which is very rare, it is almost invariably short. As the -a is accented, the radical vowel appears in its weak form; e. g. huv-d- (but according to the radically accented class, hdv-a-) from hu- 'call'. a. There are, however, some irregularities in the formation of the present stem. I. Several roots instead of appearing in their weak form, are nasalized: kri-'ciit' -.krntd-;

: : pimsd-; : lip- : tfp- 'be pleased' trmpa- ; fis- 'adorn' muc- 'release' muncd- ; 'smear' limpd- ; lup- 'break' : lumpd-; vid- 'find': vindd-; sic- 'sprinkle' : sincd-, A few other roots occasionally have nasalized forms according to this class: thus tundate, beside the regular /«rfa7/ etc., from tud- 'thrust'; dfmhethe, beside dfmhata, etc., from drh- 'make firm'; sumbhdnt:. less an aorist: see WmTNEY, Roots, under of vas- 'shine' with ending -ran (not ava-sran: ykram. accent!}. Cp. Whitney, Roots, under vas 1 Transfer form from the reduplicating 'shine'. class. 8 Delbruck 176 and Avery 247 give 2 Transfer from the -nu class. akj'nvata as (once) a 3. sing. If this is correct, 3 urcan (iv. 552; V. 31') and vdrdkan are the form would be a transfer for akrniUa. given as indicatives by Delbruck 91, 9 dmata is given by Delbruck ioi and followed by AvERY 249. Cp. p. 322, note 1°. Avery 247 as belonging to this class

4 From sfhTv- 'spue', originally *siATv- : cp. (presumably from the root am-), but it is v. Negelein 24, note 6; the root is there doubtless 3. sing. mid. aor. of man- 'think'; wrongly given as sfTv. see Whitney, Roots, under \inan. 3 asihan (AV. xiil. I^) is given by v. NEGE- I" From tks- 'see'. LEIN 18, note I as imperfect of as; but see " From bhyas- 'fear'. Whitney's note on AV. xiii. i^. 12 VII. 18'S: from dhav- 'run' = dhanv-. 6 akrpran being formed with the ending 13 Cp. E. Leumann, Die Herkunft der 6. -ran (Delbruck 124) is doubtless an aorist; Praesensklasse im Indischen (Actes du x. cp. Whitney, Roots under ykrp-. See Cong. Intern. Orient. IL i, 39—44; IF. 5, below, 500. Anz. 109; KZ. 34, 587 ff-)- 7 sran (iv. 2'9) according to Delbruck, Verbum 89 fp. 63, middle), followed by Avery 249, for *asara-n; but avasran is 3. pi. aor. 328 1. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar. beside sumbhate and sobhate, from hibh- 'shine'; srnihaii (TS^.), beside the isgvlar h'athnas etc., from iratk- 'loosen'. — 2. Four roots form their stem with the suffix rhd: is- 'wish':

i-cchd-; ^- 'go' : r-cchd-; prds-'^ 'ask' •.prccha-; vas- 'shine' : u-cchd-. — 3. Two stems are transfers from the nasal class of the second conjugation: /r«a'-, beside //--^/a-, from /r- 'fill'; mrnd; beside mr-nd-, from mr- 'crush'; r/rjd- 'stretch' has become the regular stem beside 3. pi. fiijaie; and j.. pi. umbha-la (AV.), appears beside ubh-nd-, from ubh- 'confine'. — 4. Beside the normal -nu stem f-nu, the root r- also has the transfer stem fnv-d-. —

5. While roots ending in i or u change these vowels into iy or uv before -a (e. g. kdy-d-, from hi- 'dwell', yuv-d- {rom yu- 'join'); the TS. has ksy-dnt- beside RV. ksiydnt- 'dwelling'. b. The present stems chyd- (AV.) 'cut up', dyd- (AV.) 'divide', syd- 'sharpen', syd- 'bind', though regarded by the Indian grammarians as belonging to the -ya class, should most probably be classified here, because the a is accented, z appears beside a in various forms from these roots, and -yd is here often to be read as -ia, while this is never the case in the -ya class.

430. The inflexion is exactly the same as that of bhdva-. The forms which actually occur are the following:

Present Indicative.

Active. Sing. i. icchami, uksami (AV.), kirdmi (AV.), khidami (AV.) girami'^ (AV.), crtami (AV.), tirami, dyami (AV.), disami (TS. AV.), dhuvami (AV.), prcchAmi, muncAmi, rujami, limpami (AV.), vinddmi, visami (AV.) vfscdmi (AV.), vrhami, sincdmi, sulami (TS.VII.4. 19''), suvami, srjdmi, sprsami.

syami {KST. TS.).

2. icchasi (AV.), ucchasi (TS. iv. 3. iiS), tirasi, ksipasi (AV.)j trmpdsl prcckasi, tnynasi, vindasi, vrscasi, suvdsi. 3. andti (AV.), icchati, ucchati, rcchati (AV.), rnvaii, krntdti (AV.),

kr?ati (TS. IV. 2. s*), ksiyati {AV.), khiddti, girati {KM'), chyati (TS. v. 2. 12'), dyati (AV.), pimsati, prcckati, prndti, misati, muncati (AV.), yuvdii, rujdti, ruvdti, vinddti, visati (AV.), vrscati, vrhati, sincati (AV.), suvdti, srjdti, sphiirdti (Av.), syati. Du. 2. rnvathas, bhasathas, muncathas, visathas (AV.), vrhaihas, srjdthas. 3. icchatas (AV.)j muncatas (AV.), sincatas. PI. I. giramas (AV.), crtdmasi (AV.), tiramasi, dyamasi (AV.), nudamasi (AV.) and nudamas (AV.), prcchamas (AV.), mrsamasi, vrhamasi (AV.) and vrhamas (AV.), suvamasi (AV.), srjamasi (AV.) and srjamas (AV.), spriamasi. 2. muncdtha, sincdtha (TS. AV.). 3. atidnti (AV.), icehdnti, uksdnii, ucchdnti, rcchdnti, rnjdnti, rsdnti, ksiydnti (AV.), khiddnti (AV.), crtdnti, tiranti, iunjdnti, prcchdnti, misanti, mucdnii, miincanti, mrsdnti, rujdnti, vindanti, visdnti, vrscdnti, sumbhdnti, sincdnti, suvdnti, srjdnii, sprsdnti, sphurdnti, syanti.

Middle. Sing, i- ise 'send', nude (AV.), prcche, munce (AV.), mrje, vindke, vise (AV.), suse, since, huve. 2. icchase, rnjdse, jusdse (AV.), prcchase, mrsdse, yuvase, vinddse, sincdse. 3. icchate (AV.), uksdte, rnjdte, kirate, krsdte{KV?), tirdte, tundate, turdte (TS.ii. 2. 12''), nudate(KS[), pimsdte, prcchate, prncdte, muncate, mrsate, yuvdte, vinddte, vindhdte, visdte, vrscate (AV.), srjate. — With ending -e: huvS.

Du. 2. drmhethe, nudethe (AV. TS.), yuvethe, vindethe (Kh. i. 12*). 3. tujete. PI. I. nudamahe (AV.), yuvamahe, risdmahe, sicamahe, huvamahe. 3. icchante (AV.), zcksdnte, tirdnte, vijdnte (AV.), vindante (AV.), visdnte, vfscante (AV.), srjante (AV.).

I The suffix -cha has in this instance purposes /S^'a^c/;- (}axA pras-nd- 'question'); cp. attached itself throughout the conjugation prec-or and posco for '^forc-sco in Latin. to the root, which thus becomes for practical ^ From gr- 'swallow'. ;

Vn. Verb. Present System. 329

Present Subjunctive.

^431- Active. Sing. i. srjani; mrksA. — 2. kirasi, muncasi (AV.), rujasi; sincas. — 3. iirsii, bhrjjati, mrfati, tnrdhati, vanati, vidhati, visSti (AV.), suvati,^ srjati (AV.); icchat, ucchdt, rcchat, nudat (SA. xii. 29), ^ccMt, prndt, muncat{AN.), mrlAt, mrsdt (AV.), vrscdt, sincat, srySt, sprsat (AV.). Du. I. visava (AV.). — 3. mrlatas. PI. 2. visaiha (AV.). — 3. ucchan, prcchcin, sphurdn. Middle. Sing, i, prcchai, visdi (TS.iii.s.6'). — 2. yuvase. — z- Mate, Urate. — Du. 2. prv-M^he. — 3. yuvdiie. — PI. i. sincamahai.

Present Injunctive.

432. Active. Sing. 2. icchas (AV.), guhas, ruj'ds, vrhas, vrscas, sicas, srjds. 3. ucckat, krntdt, ksipdt, khidat, jusdt, mrnat (AV.), rujdt, rudkat, ruvdt, vidhat, visat, vr/iat, sincat, srjdf^, sprsat (AA. v. 2=^), sphurat, huvat. PI. 3. trpdn, vidhdn, vindan. Middle. Sing. 3. jusata, tirata. — PI. 3. icchdnta, isanta, jusdnta, tirdnta, nuddnta, bhurdnta, yuvanta, vidhanta, srjanta.

Present Optative.

433. Active. Sing. i. udeyam " (AV.), tireyam (Kh. I. 95), vindeyam (Kh. II. 6=). — 3. iccket, ucchet (AV.), khidet (AV.), prcchet, lumpet (AV.), sincet (AV.), srjit (Av.). — Du. i. vrheva. — 2. tiretam. — PI. i. isema, ksiyema (AV.), rujema, ruhema (Kh. 11. 4^), vane'ma, vidhema, visema, huvema. — 2. tireta tiretana. Middle. Sing. i. huveya. — 3. iccheta (AV.), jusSta. PI. I. vanemahi, vidhemahi. — 3. juserata.

Present Imperative.

434. Active. Sing. 2. icchd, ucchd, ubja{KV), kira, krntd{KV.), ksipa, ksiya (Av.), khida (AV.), crta, chya (AV.), tira, tuda, trmpd, nuda (AV.), pimsd (AV.), prccha, prnca^{KSf.), prna, prusa, muncd, mrnd, mrld, mrsa, yuva, rikha, rujd, ruva, visa, vinda, vrscd, vrkd, srna (AV.), sihca, suva^, srjd, sprsa, sphura, sya. — 'With ending -iai: mrdatat (AV.), vrhatat, visatat

(TS. vix. I. 6*), suvatat. 3. icchatu, uksatu (AV.), ucchatu, ubjatu (AV.), rcchatu, kirdtu (TS.

III. 3.1 15), krsatu(KS.), crtatu{AN.), tiratu(Kh..ii. 11^), trmpatu, dis'atu{KY.), dyatu (Av.), nudatu (AV.), pimiatu, tnuncatu (AV. TS.), mrlatu, visdtu (AV. TS.), vindatu (AV.), vrscatu (AV.), sincatu, suvatu, syatu. — With -iai: visatat (Kh. IV. 6'; 83). Du. 2. uksatam, ubjdtam, tiratam, trmpatam, nudatam (AV.), brhatam (AV.), muncdiam, mrldtam, visatam {KSl.), vrhatam, sihcatam, srjdtam, sphuratam (AV.), syatam.

3. Jusatam (Kh. i. 3'), trmpatam, dyatam (AV.), muncatam, visatam (TS. vn. 3. 13'), suvatam (AV.), syatam.

1 Avery adds srdhat(f): perhaps the aor. prhca is to be inferred from the fem. part. injunctive sridhat is meant. prncat-i- (RV. AV.), though the AV. has also 2 With Samprasarana. This verb other- pfncat-i-, wise follov?s the radically accented a- class. 4 In AV. VII. 14^ Suva appears in the Pp. 3 Transfer from the infixing nasal class as sva. (Vpfc-): that it would have been accented 33° I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

PI. 2. icchata, uksaia, ucchata, umbhata (AV.), rnjdia, khuddta, gr^ta

{KSf^^ tirata, tudafa {AN .), nudata, pimsata, prcchdta, prnata, muiicdta, mrldta, mrndta (AV.), visata (AV.), vrhafa, sundhata, sincata, srjdta, spridta. 3. uksantu (AV.), ucchdtttu, ubjantu, rcchantii, rdantu, krsanhc, chyantu (TS.v. 2.12"), tirantu, tudantu (AV. TS.), disantu (Kh.m. 10'), midantu (AV.), bhurantu, muiicantu, mrlantu, visaniu, sincantu, suvantu, srjantu. Middle. Sing. 2. icchasva, krsasva, gurasva, jusasva, nuddsva, prcchasva

(Kh. II. 13'), pnidsva, mrsdsva, yuvdsva, vinddsva (AV.), visdsva, vrsasva, silicasva, srjasva, sprsawa (AV.); syasva. 3. icchatam(KS[?j, jusdtam, nudatam{AN.; SK.'xii.C)), prnatam, muncatsm (AV.), visatam, srjatam (AV.). Du. 2. ukse'tkam, jusetham, nudetham, prnethsm, vrsetham, srjetham (AV. TS.). — 3. jusetatn.

PI. 2. krajuddhvam (TS. iv. 6. 5^), j'usddkvam, tiradhvam, pfnddhvam, visadhvam (AV.), sincddhvam, srjddhvam, syadhvam. 3. jusdntam, muhcantam (AV.), risantam, vijantam (AV.), vrs'cantam (AV.), sprsantam (AV.). Present Participle.

435. Active, icchdnt-, uksdnt- (AV.), ucchdnt-, ubjdnt-, rsdnt-, krntdnt-, krsdnt-, ksipd/it-, ksiydnt-, khiddnt- (AV.), guhdnt-, citdnt-, jurdnt-, tirdnt-, tujdnt-, tuddnt-, trpdnt-, disdnt-, drmhdnt- (AV.), nuddnt-, nuvd/it-, prcckdnt-, prusdnt- (AV.), bhujdnt-, mithdnt-, misdnt-, muncdnt- mrjdnt-, mrsdnt-, risdnt-, riijd?it-, rudhdiit-, ruvdnt-, vidkdnt-, visdnt-, vrscdnt-, meant-, sumbhdnt-,

s'usdnt- and svasdnt-, sincdnt-, suvdni-, srjdnt-, spkurdni-, kuvdnt-^ {hu- 'call';.

Middle, icchdmana-, uksdmana-, usdmana- ( Y'vas-), usdtnana- {vas- 'wear'), guhdmana-, jusdmana-, dhrsdmana-, nrtdmana-, prcchdmana-, bhurd- mSna-, muncdmana- (AV. TS.), ytivdmStia-, vijdtnana- (AV.), sucdmana-.

Imperfect Indicative.

436. Active. Sing. i. atir^m (TS. iv. i. io3), dprcc/iam, drujam. 2. dtiras, anudas, aprnas, dmuncas, amrnas, arujas, avindas, avrkas, dsrjas, dsphuras, dsyas (AV.); dicchas, ducchas; vindas, vrscas, srjas.

3. dkrntat, akhidat, djusat, dtirat, aduhat (TS. iv. 6. 5''), dpimsat, aprnat, dmuficat, amrnai, amrsat (AV.), arujat, dvidhat, dvindat, dvisat, dvrscat, dsincat, asuvat, dsrjat, asprsat, asphurat, asyat; dicchat (AV.), duksat, ducchat, aubjat; ttidat, trmhdt, rujdt, likhat (AV.), vmdat, vrscdt, syai, sincat, srjdt.

Du. 2. atiratam, amuncatam, dmrnatam, avindatam (Kh. I. 3'), asincatam. 3. dmuiicatam, dsincatani (AV.). PI. I. dicchama. — 2. dpimsata l//z/-), aprcchata, — ( dmuhcata, asrjata. 3. dpimsan, dpTsan^ {KS.v^.(i^), dvindan, dvisa7t{AY), dvrscan^KSl), dsincan, dsjy'an, aspfsan (AV.); ardan (yrd-); duksan; uksan, rujan. Middle. Sing. i. djuse (AV.), avije, dhuve. — 2. amuiicathas, avisathas (Av.). — 3. ajusata, amuncata, dsincata (AV.), asrjata; drmhata. Du. 2. afiudetkam, dvmdetham. PI. 2. ajusadhvam. — 3. djusaiita, atiranta, atvisanta, dnudanta (AV.), amuncanta (AV.), dyuvanta (AV.), avindanta, avisanta, dsrjanta, asprsanta (Av.), dhuvanta; disaiita {is- 'send'); grnanta, jusanta.

'^ The fem. is regularly formed from the 2 Anomalous form for *apimsan, ixorapis- strong stem in -ant; but the weak stem in 'crush'. at appears in sihcai-t-, beside dncani-i-. "VII. Verb. Present System. 331

3. The ya- class '.

437. The present stems formed with this suffix fall into two groups. In the first, consisting of about 70 transitive or intransitive verbs, the suffix is unaccented; in the second, consisting of rather more than 80 verbs with a passive meaning, the suffix is accented. In all probability both groups were identical in origin, with the accent on the suffix. This is indicated by the fact that the root though accented in the first group appears in its weak form; and that this group consists largely of intransitive verbs and to some extent of verbs with a passive sense. The latter are manifestly transfers from

the -yd or passive group with change of accent. Thus jdyate 'is born' is an altered passive beside the active jdnati 'begets'. The accent moreover occa- sionally fluctuates. Thus the passive tniccydte 'is released' once or twice occurs (in the RV. and AV.) accented on the root; and there is no appreciable difference

of meaning between ksiyate and ksiydte 'is destroyed'; jiyate and jiydte 'is

overcome' ; pdcyate and pacydte 'is cooked' ; miyate and miydfe (AV.) 'is in- fringed' ^

A. The radically accented ya- class. 438. The root nearly always appears in a weak form. Thus roots that

otherwise contain a nasal, lose it: drink- 'make firm' : dfh-ya-. The root

vyadh- 'pierce' takes Samprasarana: vidh-ya-. The root spas- 'see' loses its initial: pds-ya-. Several roots ending in a shorten the vowel before the suffix:

dka- 'suck' : d/iaya-; ma- 'exchange' : maya-; va- 'weave' : vdya-; vyd- 'enve-

lope' : vydya--, hva- 'call' : hvdya-i.

a. Several other roots usually stated as ending in a remain unchanged: gd- 'sing' : gaya-; gla- 'be weary' : gldya- (AV.); ira- 'save' : traya-; pyd- 'fill up' -.fyaya-; ra- 'bark' :

raya-; vd- 'blow' ; vdya-; ird- 'boil' ; srdya-''. b. The root iram- 'be weary' lengthens its vowel: srdmya-^. c. The final of roots in -f sometimes becomes both »-6 and Hr; thus jf- 'waste

away' becomes ywya- ^tvA jTrya- (AV.); tf- 'cross' : iftrya- and ttrya-'^ (A-V.). The root pf- 'fill' because of its initial labial becomes purya- only. 439. The forms actually occurring in this class are the following:

Present Indicative.

Active. Sing. i. asyami{KV), isyami, 7iakyamt, pdsyami {KY), vidhyami (AV.), hvdyatni. 2. dsyasi, isyasi, ucyasi {Yuc-), gdyasi, ndsyasi, pdsyasi, piisyasi, rdnyasi, rayasi, risyasi, haryasi. isyati, (AV.), gdyati, jiryati 3. ' dsyati, iyati (RV'.), krudhyati (AV.), jUryati, tanyati, ddsyati, ddhyati (AV.), diyati, divyatl (AV.), dusyati (SA. xn.23), dhayati, nasyati, nfiyati {AM.), pdsyaii, pi'isyati, raytyati, risyati, vayati (AV.), vayati, vidhyati, vyayati, simyati (TS. v. 2. 12'), susyati (Kh. iv. 53^), sidhyati, haryati, hrsyati, hvdyati. Du. 2. diyathas, ranyathas. — 3. asyatas (AV.), nasyatas, pdsyatas, pusyatas, risyatas (AV.), vayatas (AV.)^ vdyatas, sramyatas (AV.).

1 Cp. LoRENTZ, IF. 8, 68— 122. grammarians as ending in -ai and belonging I 2 Also in Brahmana passages of the TS. to the a- class. The latter form is preferable ricyate 'is left' beside ricydie (V.), lupyate 'is from the point of view of gradation. Cp. lost' beside lupyate [AN.], hiyaie 'is left' beside i 27, a, i ; BB. 19, 166. S In B. this analogy is followed by several hiyaie (V.). i

' 3 These are reckoned by the native gram- roots in -am. the 6 In the a- class becomes -ir, e. to | marians as ending in e and belonging ^ -f g. lira-. a- class. This seems preferable from the tf- : of vowel gradation: see 27, a, 3. 7 Only in an emendation aya-tiryati (AV. point of view j

' 4 Such roots are reckoned by the native xix. 98) for dvatiryaiis, Pada dvatik yam. 332 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

PI. I. asyamasi, pdsyamasi and pasyamas (AV.), vidhyamas (AV.), vyayamasi{KN.^%^, haryamasi, hvdyamasi. 2. dsyatha, pdsyatka, pusyatha, risyatha, hdryatha.

3. dsyanti (AV.), Sryanti, gdyanti, juryanti, dasyanti, diyanti, dhdyanti (AV.), naiyanti (AV.), ndhyanti, nftyanti (AV.), pdsyanti, pusyanti, rdnyanti, risyanti, vdyanti, vayanti, vidhyanti (AY. TS.), sramyanti, hdryanii, hvdyanti.

Middle. Sing. i. hye, padye (AV.), g&ye, nahye (TS. i. i. 10^), mdnye, mrsye, vyaye (AV.), hvaye.

2. iyase (z- 'go'), Jdyase, trdyase, ddyase, pdtyase, pyayase, mdnyase, mfyase, mucyase.

3. isyate, iyate, rjyate, ksiyate, Jsyate, Jiyate, trsyate (AV.)j ddyate, dipyate

(AV.), pdcyate, pdtyate, pddyate, pdsyate, pusyate {AN.), budhyate (AV.), manyate, iniyate, mrsyate, rfyate, haryate. Du. 3. jayete (AV.), hvdyete. PI. I. hvdyamahe. — 2. trayadhve. — 3. tyante, ksfyanU, jayante, trayante, pddyante, manyante (AV.), maya7!te, mrsyante, yiidhyante, riyante, hvdyante.

Present Subjunctive.

440. Active. Sing. i. pdsyani (AV.). — 2. pdiyasi, haryasi (AV.); pasyas (AV.); risyas, hdryas. — 3. risyati; pdsyat, pusyat, risyat (TS.i. 6. 2^). PI. I. pdsyama (AV). — 3. pdsyan. Middle. Sing. i. yudhyai. — 2. pasyasai (AV.). — 3. manyate, miicyatai (Av.). — PI. I. hvayamahai (AV.).

Present Injunctive.

Active. Sing. 2. divyas. — 3. gSyat, diyat, pdsyat, vidhyat. — PI. pdsyan. j,. Middle. Sing. 2. manyathas. — 3. Jayata, manyata. — PI. 3. ddyanta.

Present Optative.

Active. Sing. i. vyayeyam. — 2. pasyes. — 3. dasyet, dhayet (AV.), risyet. — Du. 3. hvayetam (TS. iii. 2. 4'). •— PI. I. pdsyema, pusyema, budhyema (AV.), risyema. Middle. Sing. 3. /a/jrfa, manyeta {P^.), miyeta (SA.xii. 20). — PI. I. jdyemahi. Present Imperative.

441. Active, Sing. 2. asya, gsya, dtya, dfhya, nasya, nahya (AV.), nrtya (AV.), pdsya, yudkya, vaya, vidhya, susya (AV.), sivya (AV.), karya, hvaya. — With ending -idt: asyatat (AV.). 3. asyatu, ucyatu (AV.), trpyatu (AV.), nasyatu, nrtyatu (AV.), rddhyatu (Av.), vidhyatu (AV.), susyatu, stvyatu, hvdyatu (AV.).

Du. 2. asyatam, isyatam (KN.), diyatam, nahyatamiKY.), pusyatam {AY.), vidhyatam, hdryatam. — 3. asyatam (AV.TS.), nahyatam (SA.xii. 32), vidhyatam. PI. 2. isyata, gayata, jasyata, ndsyata (AV.), tiahyata (AV.), pdsyata, pusyata, muhyata (AV.), vayata, vidhyata, haryata. — With ending -tana: nahyatana. 3. gayantu (AV.), trpyantu (AV.), nasyantu (AV.), pusyantu, muhyantu, midyantu, vyayantu{PiN.), Hmyantu (TS.v. 2. 11'), haryantu (AV.), hvdyantu{KY.). Middle. Sing. 2. jayasva, trdyasva, dayasva, drhyasva, nahyasva (AV.), padyasva, pasyasva, pyayasva, budhyasva (TS. AV.), majtyasva (TS. AV.), vyayasva, hvayasva (AV.). 3. rdhyatam, jdyatam, trdyatam, dipyatam (TS.Vf.T.iT,^), padyatam (AV.), pyayatam (TS. AV.), manyatam (TS. AV.), medyatam (AV.), rddhyatam (AV.), siyatam. (AV.) 'lie', hvayatam (AV.). ; :

VII. Verb. Present System. 333

Du. 2. trayethatn, manyeikam, hvayetham (AV.). — 3. trayetam. PI. 2. asyadhvam, jayadhvam (AV.), trayadhvam, dayadhvam, nahya- dhvam{hN'.), budhyadhvam, sivyadhvam. — 3. jayantam, trSyantam, padyantam {KY:), pyayantatn, manyaniam {KM.TQ.), vyayantam (TS.ni.3. ii3), hvayantam (TS. III. 2. 4'). Present Participle.

442. Active, dsyant; isyant-, fjyant-, {a.-)kupyant- (AV.), ksudyant-, gayarit-, gfdkyant-^, thyant-, diyant-, nftyant-, pasyant-, ptyant-, pusyant-, ydsyant-,yudhyant-, rdyant-, {d-)lubkyant-{AN'.), vayant-, vidhyani-{KY.), vydyant-, simyant- (TS. v. 2. 12'), sivyant-, hdryant-; and the compound dn-ava-glayant- (AV.) 'not relaxing'. Middle. iyamana-, kayamana-, cdyafnana-, jdyamana-, trayamana-, dayamana-, ndhyamana-^ pdtyamana-, pddyamana-, pdsyamana-, piiryamana-, pydyamana-, budkyamana-, mdnyamana-, yudhyamana-, rddhyamana- (AV.), vasyamana- (AV.), Adryamdna-, hvdyamana-.

Imperfect Indicative.

443. Active. Sing. I. adiyam, dpasyam, avyayam. — 2. apasyas, dyudhyas. — 3. agayat, adkayat, anrtyat (AV.), dpasyat, ayudhyat, avayat (AV.), dvidhyat, avyayat^ dharyat, dhvayat; dsyat. Du. 3. dpasyatam. PI. I. dpasyama. — 3. ajuryan^, dpasyan, dvayan {KST.), a/ivayan{NY.); asyan (AV.).

Middle. Sing. 2. djayathas, aharyathas;jdyathas. — 3. djayata, apatyata,

amanyaia, arajyata (AV.) ; jayata. Du. 2. dhvayethdm (AV.). — 3. dhvayetam. PI. 3. djayanta, dnahyanta (AV.), apadyanta (AV.), dpasyanta, dman- yanta, ahvayanta; jayanta, ddyanta.

B. The suffixally accented yi- class (passive).

Delbruck, Verbum 184 (p. 166 — 169). — Avery, Verb-Inflection 274—275. — Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar 768 — 774; Roots 230— 231. — v. Negelein 38 —40.

444. Any root that requires a passive forms its present stem by adding accented -yd (which never needs to be pronounced -ia). The root appears in its weak form, losing a nasal and taking Samprasarana; thus anj- 'anoint': aj-yd- be anointed'; vac- 'speak' : uc-yd- 'be spoken'. Final vowels undergo the changes usual before -ya in verbal forms: final i and u being lengthened, a mostly becoming r, r being generally changed to ri, and f becoming ir^.

Thus mi- 'fix' : miya-; su- 'press' : suyd-; da- 'give' : di-yd- (but y«a- 'know' : jna-yd-); kr- 'make' : kri-yd-; sf- 'crush' : sirya-.

a.. The root tan- 'stretch' forms its passive from td- : id-ya-. Similarly jan- 'beget' makes its present stem from ja- :jdya-te, which has, however, been transferred to the radically accented ya- class, mri-ya-te 'dies' i^mr-) "• and dhriyate (^dhr-) 'is steadfast', though passives in form, are not so in sense 5.

445. The inflexion is identical with that of the radically accented ya- class in the middle, differing from it in accent only. No forms of the optative are found in the RV. or AV. The forms actually occurring are the following

1 d.va(iryaiis[KN, XIX. 9?) is a corrupt reading 4 This root has a transitive sense ('crush') see Whitney's Translation; cp. p. 331, note •'. only in its secondary form mrn-, and in the 2 Avery 249 adds adkayanif). AV. in the imperative forms mrnlhi and 3 No example of ilr seems to occur in tnrnita. in the Sainhitas, but pur-ya- from pf- 'fill' 5 Cp. above 437. is found in the -ya class. 334 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

Present Indicative.

Sing. I. hiye {ha- 'leave'). — 2. acyase {aiic- 'bend', AV.), ajydse ( Yaj- and 'Yanj-), idhydse, ucydse {Yvac-), luyase, puyase, badhydse (AV.), mucydse (AV.), mrj'ydse, yiijydse, ricyase, rudhyase {rudh- 'hinder';, sasydse {Ysa/ns-), sicydse, stuyase, huydse {/lu- 'call'}. — 3. aj'ydte {Yaj- and Y^'V)! asyate ]/''z'ac-), {ud- 'wet' vad- 'speak'), upydte {KSl), idhydte, ucydte ( udyate and {Yvap-), uhyate {Yvah-), rcydte {arc- 'praise'), kriydte, kslydte 'is destroyed', gamyate (AV.), grhyate (AV.), chidyate (AV.), jiydte (AV.)^ tapyate, i3ydte, tujydte, dabhyate, diydte 'is given' (AV.), diyate 'is divided' (AV.), dukyate, drsyate, dhamyate, dhiyate {dha- 'put'), dhriyate, my ate, pacydte, piyate

'is drunk' {AM.), puyate, prcydte, badhydteXYbandh-)", 7nathydte{KN.), mucydte,

mrjydte, mriydte, yujydte, ricyate, ribkyate^, lupydte {AS[?j, vacydte ( l/waw-), sTryate, sruyate, sicydte, vidydte 'is found', vrj'ydte^, sasydte { Ysains-), Hsyate, huydte 'is called'. suydte 'is pressed', ( Y^u-), srjydte, hanydte,

Du. 3. ucyete { \f vac-). PI. I. tapyamahe (AV.), panyamahe. — 3. upydiite {Yvap-), rcydnte, j-dhyante (AV.), kriydnte, jnayante, trhydnte {KSf), dahyante (AV.), duhydnte

(Av.), bhriyante, miydiite 'are fixed' ( /wr-, AV.), mriyante (AV.), yuj'yante, vacydnte{Yvanc-, KY.), viyante {Yvi; AN.), sasydnte{Ysams-), sTryante{KY.), srjyante (AV.), hanydnte, hilyante.

Present Subjunctive.

446. Sing. 3. uhyate, bhriyate, sisyatai^ (AV.). Du. 2. uhydthe^. Present Injunctive.

Sing. 3. suyata { Ysu-).

Present Imperative.

Sing. 2. idhydsva (AV. TS.), dhiyasva (AV.), dhriyasva (AV.), mucyasva

(Kh. II. II*), mriydsva (AV.), vacyasva {Yvanc-). 3. rdhyatam (AV.), tayatam (AV.~), dhiyatam (AV.), dhuyatam (AV.), dhriyatam {KSl), prcyatam, badhyatam (AV.), mucyatam (AV.), hanydtam (AV.), hlyatam. PI. 2. prcyadhvam (AV. TS.), yujyadhvam, vicyadhvam (AV.). 3. tapyantatn (AV.), trhyantam {Pi>J), prcyantam (AV.), badhyantam, (AV.). bhajyantam ( Ybhanj-, AV.), vacyantam, vrscyantam, hanyantam

Present Participle. 447. acydmana- (AV), ajydmana-, idhydmdna-, udydmana- {j/vad-,

AV.), upydmana- {Yvap-, KS[.), uhydmana-, rcydmana-, krtydmana- (AV.), kriydmana-, {d-)ksTyamana-, glydynana-, guhydmana-, tapydmana-, taydmana-, tujydmana-, trhydmana-, dadydmana-T, diydmana- (AV.), duhydmana- (AV.),

dhiydmaiia-, nahydmana- {AN.), nidydmana-, niyd7?iana-,pacydmana-,pisydmana- mathydmana-, madyd- {AN), puydmana-,pfcydmana-, badhydmana-, bhajydmana-,

mana-, miydmana- {mi- 'fix'), mrj'ydmana-, yamydmana-, vacydmana- { Yvahc-),

1 From \jya- or |//T- 'scathe'. 5 Emendation in AV. II. SI'', ior uchisaiai, 1 2 bhidyate, AV. XX. 1 3 ', is an emendation. the reading of the text. 3 llyate, AV. XX. 1343 4, is an emendation. 6 A 3. pi. mid. in -antai once occurs in 4 The forms vrscate, vricante, vrscantam the TS. in the iormjayantai: Whitnev 760 a. appear occasionally to stand for vrscyate, 7 From the weak present stem dad- of vrsc}>ante, vrscyantam in the AV. See v. Nege- da- 'give'. LEIN 40; Bloomfield, SBE. 42, 418. Vn. Verb. Present System. 335 viydmana- {PiS[.), sasydmana-, skydmana-, srjydmana-, stuydmana-, hanydmana- {KS[\ himsydmana-, huydmana- {hu- 'call'); from the causative of Ybhaj-:bh3jyd- mana- (AV. xit. 4'*). Imperfect Indicative.

448. Sing. 3. aiiiyata, dmucyata, aricyata. — PL 3. dtapyanta (AV. TS.), afacyanta, aprcyanta, dsicyanta (AV.)j acyanta.

b. The second or graded conjugation.

449. The chief characteristic of this conjugation is vowel gradation in the base ' consequent on shift of accent. The base has a strong grade vowel in the singular indicative (present and imperfect) active, throughout the subjunctive, and in the 3. sing, imperative active. Minor peculiarities are: I. loss of n in the endings of the 3. pi. mid. {-ate, -ata, -atrini) ; 2. formation of the 2. sing, imperative active with a suffix, generally -dhi; 3. vowel gradation in the modal suffix of the optative (act. -ya; mid. -i); 4. formation of the middle participle with -ana. a. The second conjugation comprises five distinct classes falling into two main groups in which a) the vowel of the root (simple or reduplicated) is graded; ^) the vowel of the suffix (nearly always containing a nasal) is graded.

a. I. The root class.

450. The base is formed by the root itself, to which the personal endings are directly attached (in the subjunctive and optative with the inter- vening modal suffix). The radical vowel is accented and takes Guna in the strong forms. More than a hundred roots are comprised in this class ^. a. A good many irregularities are met with in this class, with regard to both the base and the endings, i. Vrddhi is taken in the strong forms by mrf- 'wipe' (e. g. marj-mt), and before consonants by roots ending in -u, i. e. by ksnu- 'whet', nu- 'praise', yu- 'unite' (AV.), siu- 'praise'; e. g. stmi-mi^, d-slau-l'', but d-stav-am. — z. The Guna vowel, along with the accent, is retained in the root of si- 'lie' (middle) throughout the weak forms; e.g. sing. I. say-e, 2. si-se. In the 3. pi. this verb at the same time inserts r before the endings: si-rate, si-re (AV.), si-ralam, d-se-rata, d-se-ran^. — 3. Several roots form a base with the connecting vowel / or z' 6 before consonant endings. The roots an-^ 'breathe', rud-^ 'weep', vam 'vomit', svas- 'blow', svap-'^ 'sleep' insert / before all terminations beginning with a consonant, except in 2. 3. impf., where they insert J: e. g. dni-H, anl-i; avamT-t; svasi-ti. The roots id- 'praise' and is- 'rule' add i in some forms of the 2. pers. middle; tdi-sva; isi-se (beside tk-se), isi-dkve. The 3. pi. tsi-re is, owing to its accent ^o, probably to be accounted a present rather than a perfect i'. Occasional (imperative sing.) forms with connecting i from other roots also occur: jdni-sva 'be born', vasi-sva 'clothe', snalhi-hi 'pierce', stani-hi 'thunder'. The root brii- 'speak' regularly inserts i in the strong forms before terminations beginning with consonants; e. g. brdvl-mi. The same i also appears in the form tavT-ti from tii- 'be strong'; in am'i-si and in the TS. '* amJ-ti, ami-sva, dniT-i from am- 'injure'; and in saml-sva (VS.), from sam-

1 Cp. Brugmann, kg. 211. besides sT- retain the accent on the radical 2 Several roots of this class show transfers syllable throughout. See 97, 2 a. to the a- conjugation: cp. Whitnev 625a. 6 This I is, however, in reality originally 3 The RV. has once 2. sing, sto-si (X. 22*), part of a dissyllabic base: cp. Brugmann, a form which Avery 275 takes to be a KG. 212, 2. 3. sing. aor. pass, injunctive. 7 The AV. has also forms according to- 4 Vrddhi on the other hand once appears the a- conjugation: dna-ii, etc. even in the weak form 3. pi. impf. andvan. 8 The RV. has no such forms from rud- On the Vrddhi in these verbs, cp. v. Nege- and svaf-. LEIN 10 a. 9 The AV., however, has the form svap-tu. 10 5 There are some transfer forms according See 97, 2 a and 484. to the a- conjugation from the stem sdy-a-, ! The 3. sing. impf. of this verb is in the including the isolated active form dsayat, MS. aisa (like aduha), cp. Whitney 630. which is common. Nearly a dozen roots " Whitney 634. 336 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

'labour'. — 4. A few roots undergo peculiar shortenings in the weak forms: as- 'be' loses its vowel I (except where protected by the augment) 2, e.g. s-mds 'we are'; han-^ 'slay' in the weak form."; loses its ?i before terminations beginning with consonants (ex- cept m, y or v), but syncopates its a before terminations beginning with vowels, when h reverts to the original guttural gh-; e. g. ha-thd, but han-yama; ghn-anti, part, ghn-ant-; the root vas- 'be eager', takes Samprasarana; e.g. I. pi. us-masi, part, ui-and-'t, but I. sing. vds-mi. The root vas- 'clothe' similarly takes Samprasarana once in the participle us-dnd- (beside the usual vdsdna-). — 5. With regard to endings, the root sas- 'order' loses the n in the 3, pi. active (as well as middle) and in the participle, being treated like roots of the reduplicating class (457)5: 3. pi. impv. iSs-atu (TS.), part. sas-ai-(>. The root duA- 'milk' is very anomalous in its endings: middle impv. 3. sing, dtih-dm, 3. pi. duh-rcim and

duh-ratdni ; ind. 3. pi. mid. dith-re and duh-rdte beside the regular duh-atc (with irregular accent)'; active imperf. 3. sing, d-duh-a-t^ h&%i&&d-dhok, 3. pi. a-drih-ran beside d-duh-an

and duh-ur'^ ; and in the 3. opt. the entirely anomalous sing. duh-T-ydi (RV.) and pi. duh- lydn (RV.) (for duh-ydt and duh-yur).

Present Indicative. 451. A final or prosodically short medial radical vowel takes Guna in

the singular; elsewhere it remains unchanged, excepting the changes of final vowels required by internal Sandhi, and the irregular shortenings mentioned above (450, a 4). The ordinary endings are added directly'" to the root. But the 3. sing. mid. ends in -e nearly as often as in -te; and anomalous endings

appear in the 3. persons of the roots is-, duA-, sas-, sT- ". The forms actually occurring would, if made from i- 'go' and brii- 'speak', be as follows:

Active. Sing. i. e'-mi. 2. e'-si. 3. e'-ti. — Du. 2. i-thds. 3. i-tds. — PI. 1. i'tndsi and i-mds. 2. i-thd and i-thdna. 3. y-dnti. Middle. Sing. i. bruv-e. 2. bru-se. 3. bru-te and bruv-e. — Du. 2. bruv-athe. 3. bruv-ste. — PI. i. bru-mdhe. 2. bru-dhve. 3. bruv-dte. The forms which actually occur are the following: Active. Sing. i. ddmi, dsmi, e'mi, kmaumi, dvesmi {hN^^pami 'protect', marjmi, ySmi, yaumi {AY.) 'join', vasmi, vami, sasmi (AV.), staumi {A.Y. TS.), hanmi, harmi. — With connecting T-: brdvimi.

2. dtsi, e'si, dsi, kdrsi (AV.), caksi {= *caks-si), chantsi ( \/'cha7id-), ddrsi {dr- 'pierce'), pdrsi (pr- 'pass'), pdsi ('protect'), bhdsi, yssi, vaksi {vas- 'desire'), vSsi {Yvi-), sassi, sdtsi, stosi^^, hdmsi. -— With imperative sense 'J; ksesi

{ksi- 'dwell'), j'e'si, josi (== *jos-si -.jus- 'enjoy'), ddrsi, dhdksi {dak- 'burn'), jiaksi {nai- 'attain'), nesi, pdrsi, prasi, bhaksi {bhaj- 'divide'), matsi, masi, ydksi (yaf- 'sacrifice'), ydmsi {yam- 'reach'), yasi, yotsi {yudh- 'fight'), rdtsi {rad- 'dig'), rdsi, vdksi {vah- 'carry'), vesi {Yvi^, s'rosi, saksi {sah- 'prevail'),

sdtsi, hosi {hu- 'sacrifice'). — With connecting J- : amisi, brdvisi.

1 It is, however, preserved in an altered 8 Transfer to the a- conjugation.

form in the 2. sing. impv. act. : e-dhi for 9 The MS. has further anomalous end- *az-dhi (62, 4, 6, p. 57). This verb has the ings in the imperf. mid.: 3. sing, a-duh-a further anomalies of losing its j- in the and 3. pi. a-duh-ra, probably as parallel to 2. sing. pres. a-si, and in inserting l in the the present duke and diihre: Whitney 635. 2. 3. sing. impf. dsT-s, dsT-i. It has no middle. 10 Excepting the few forms of roots which 2 Cp. v. NeGELEIN 83; VAN WlJK, IF. may take connecting i or T (450, a 3). 18, 11 59. See above 450, a 2, 3, 5 ; cp. Johansson, 3 Limited to the active in this conjugation KZ. 32, 512; Neisser, BB. 20, 74. in the RV. 12 See 450, a I, note '. 4 The only middle form. 13 Some of these have no corresponding 5 There are also some transfer forms root present or root aorist; cp. Whitney, according to a- : the conjugation 3. sing. Sanskrit Grammar 624 ; Bartholomae, IF. idsati. 2,271; Neisser, BB. 7, 23off., 20, 7off. ; Brug- 6 Similarly from das- 'worship' the part. MANN, IF. 18, 72; Delbrijck, Verbum 30; dds-ai-. Syntaktische Forschungen 5, 209. 7 In the middle participle the k of the root reverts to the guttural gk: dugh-dna-. VII. Verb. Present System. 337

3. dtti, dsH, eti, kseti, takti {tak- 'rush'), dati {da- 'share'), dasti {das- 'worship'), dvesti, pdti, bhdrii, b/iSti, marsti (SA. xii. 9), yati, rasti {raj- 'rule'), reiki {rih- 'lick'), vasH {vas- 'desire'), v&ti, veti, stauti (AV.; Kh. v. 3^), Mnti. — With connecting -/- or -7"-: dniti, svdsiti; amiti (TS. VS.), taviti {hi- 'be strong'), brdviti.

Du. 2. ithds, krthds, pathds, bhuthds, yathds, vJikds, sthds {as- 'be'),

hathds { Yhan-). 3. attas, etas^ (AV.), ksitds, dvistas (AV.), patas, psatds (AV.), bhUtas, yatas, vatas, stas, snatas, hatds, hmitas.

PI. I. admasi (AV.), imdsi, usmdsi^ { ]/'vas-), stumdsi, smdsi, hanmasi (AV.); dvismds, brumds (AV.), mrjmas (AV.), ySmas, rudkmas (AV.), vidmas (Kh. IV. 533), stiimas (AV.), smas, hanmas. 2. itha, krtha, gathd (RV'.)3, nethd'', pathd 'protect'', yathd, stha, hathd; pathdna, yathdna, sthdna.

3. adanti, amdnti, usdnti, ksiydnti, ghndnti { Yhan-), danii {da- 'cut'), duhanti, dvisdnti (AV.), panti^, bntvdnti, bhanti, mrjdnti, ydnti, ydnii, rikdnti, vanti, ruddnti, vydnti { Yvi-), sdnti. Middle. Sing. i. iye {i- 'go'), tie, is'e, uve'T, duke, bruve, mrje (AV.), yuji, yuve {yu- 'join'), suve {su- 'beget') ^, knuve. 2. ikse, krse, cakse (= *caks-se), dkukse {AV.), bruse, vitse {vid- 'find'), she. — With connecting -/-: isise. cdste 3. aste, itte { Yi4~)> ^rfi?, iste { l/w-), { Ycaks-), brut^, vdste, saste, Uhkte^ {Ysinj-), sute, hate (SA. xii. 27). — With ending -e: ise''°, citd {cit- 'perceive'), duke, bruve, vide ('finds'), sdye'^^. Du. 2. dsathe, isathe, caksathe, vasathe. — 3. asate, iyate, diihate, bruvate, sayate, suvate. PI. I. ismake (AV.), make, limahe (AV), mrjmdhe (AV.), yujmahe, -/- sasmake, se'make (AV.), hUmdhe. — 2. With connecting : tsidkve (AV.). — 3. Asate, irate, ilate, isate, Skate {Yuh-), grkate'^^, cdksate, duhate'-^, dvisdte (AV.), nimsate, bruvdte, rihate"^^, vdsate, sasate, suvate. — With ending -re: duhre, sere (AV.); with -rate: duhrate, se'rate (AV. TS.). Present Subjunctive. 452. In the AV. several forms are irregularly made with a, as if following the a- conjugation. No examples of the 2. du. and pi. mid. are found. The forms which actually occur, if made from bru- 'speak', would be: Active. Sing. i. brdvani, brdva. 2. brdvasi, brdvas. 3. brdvati, brdvat. — Du. I. brdvava. 2. brdvathas. 3. brdvatas. — PL i. brdvama. 2. bravatha. 3. brdvan. Middle. Sing. i. brave. 2. bravase. 3. brdvate. — Du. i. bravavahai.

3. brdvaite. — PI. i. brdvamakai, bravamake. 3. brdvanta. The forms which actually occur are the following: Active. Sing. i. dsani (AV.), brdvani; aya, brava, stdva.

1 With irregular strong radical vowel. placed here rather than in the a- class; on- 2 Once anomalously smdsi. this form cp. Oldenberg, ZDMG. 59, 355 ff.; 3 With loss of nasal as in \/han: Neisser, BB. 25, 315 ff. 4 With irregular strong radical vowel: 9 Hnte (Av.). 10 cp. V. Negelein 33. Avery 234 gives fse only, apparently 5 Once from pa- 'drink', in I. 861 ? instead of ise. The form Tsi would be 3. sing, 6 Thirteen times from pa- 'protect', once mid. perfect. cp. v. Negelein 102; .(II. Ili'l) from/a- 'drink' (probably subj. aor.). " On these forms 7 This form occurring only once in the Neisser, BB. 20, 74. RV. seems to be formed from a doubtful root 12 Placed by Whitney, Roots, doubtfully M 'proclaim'; cp. Whitney, Roots, under u. under the aorist of ygrak-. 13 8 Auve, sing. I. and 3., should perhaps be With irregular accent. Indo-arische Philologie. I. 4. 22 338 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

2. ayasi (AV.), dsasi, bravasi; dyas (AV.), dsas, ksdyas {ksi- 'dwelFj, ghdsas, ddnas, parcas, bravas, vedas, sdkas, hdnas; with -a-: dyas (AV.).

3. dyati, dsati, vayati ( Ym-), vMati, hanati; adat (AV.), dyat, dsat, iraf^, ksayat, gkasat, cayat, de'hat, dohat (i. 164^°), dvdsat (AV.), pat ('pro- tect'), brdvat, ve'dat {vid- 'know'), stdvat, hdtiat (AV. TS.); with -a-: ayat

(Kh. III. i''), asat (AV.), rodat (Kh. 2. 11'). Du. I. kd?iava. — 2. dsatkas, vedathas. — 3. patas 'protect' (iv. 55^). PI. I. ayama, dsdma, ksdyama, dvesama (AV.), brdvama, stdvama, hdnania. — 2. dsat/ia', stavatha; with -a-: bravatha (AV.), kanatha{AN'.). — 3. ayan, dsan^ brdvan, yavaii ('join', AV.iii. 17^), kdna?t (AV.); with -a-: ddan (AV.), ayan (AV.). Middle. Sing, i, stusi'^. — 2. asase. — 3. asate, idhate'', dohate, dvesate (TS. IV. I. io3), vdrjate; with -ia'r. dyatai (AV.), dsatai (AV.); with secondary ending -ta: Tsata. — Du. I. bravavahai. — 3. brdvaite. — PI. i. ilamahai, brdva- mahai; tlamahe. — 3. hdnanta.

Present Injunctive.

Active. Sing. 2. vis. — 3. vet (x. 53?), staut; without ending: dan, rat, han. — PI. 3. yan, san. Middle. Sing. 3. vasta, suta. — PI. 3. ilata, vasata.

Present Optative.

453. Active. Sing. i. iyani, yayam, vidyam, syam. — 2. syds. — 3. adyJt (AV.), iyJt, bruyat, vidydt, syst, hanyat (AV.). Du. 2. bruyatam (TS. iv. 7. 15*), vidyatam, syatam. — 3. syatlm. PI. I. iyama, turyAma, vidydma, sydma, kajiydma. — 2. sydta; sydtana. — 3. adyur, vidyi'ir, syi'ir. Middle. Sing. i. isiya, sdyiya (AV.). — 3. asita, tlita, isita, du/iJta,. bruvJia, sdyita, stuvitd. — PI. i. bruvimahi, vasimahi, stuvimahi. Present Imperative.

454. The endings are added directly to the root, which appears in its' weak form except in the 3. sing, act., where it is strong and accented 5. In the 2. sing, act., -dhi is added to a final consonant, -hi to a vowelj -tat,

which occurs only three times, may be added to either a consonant . or a vowel. In the mid., -am 3. sing., -ram and -ratam 3. pi., occasionally appear for -tarn and -atam^. Active. Sing. 2. add/ii, edhi {as- 'be'), tal/ii {ytaks-), psahi (AV.), mrddhi (AV.), viddhi ('find' and 'know'), sadhi (Ysas-); ihi, jahP, pahi 'protect', brUhi, bhahi, yShi, vahi, vihi*', vihi, stuhi, snahi (AV.); with, connecting -/'-: anihi (VS. iv. 25), snathihi, svasihi (AV.), stanihi; with

-tat: brutat (TS. 1.6.4 j), vittdt, vJtat. — 3. attu, dstu, etu, dvestu (AV.), patu

'protect', psatu (AV.), marstu (AV. TS.), yatii, vastu ( Yvas-), vdtu, vitu, vettu (Av.), sastu, staiitu (AV.), snautu (TS. in. 5. 5^), svdptu (AV.), hdntu; with connecting -7"-: brdvitu.

1 Avery 230 here adds rdhat, which I 5 This is also irregularly the case in six regard as a root aor. subjunctive. or seven forms of the 2. pi., before both -ta

2 vidaiha, AV. I. 32', seems to be a cor- and -tana: Ha, neta, stota; ctana, bravitana, ruption for vldatha; cp. Whitney's note. soiana, hantana. 6 3 For stus-a-i; cp. Avery 238 ; Delbruck, In duham, vidam (AV.), sayxm (AV.); Verbum p. 181^; Neisser, BB. 27, 262— 280; diihram (AV.), duhratam (AV.). Oldenberg, ZDMG. 55, 39. 7 For *jha-hi, from Ask- 'slay': see 32, 2 c, 4 "With irregular accent and weak root and cp. V. Negelein, Zur Sprachgeschichte 8^ (vil. 18) for *indliate, beside inadhaie formed 8 Metrically shortened for vfhi, from \vt-^ from \idh- according to the in6xing nasal class. VII. Verb. Present System. 339 Du. _ 2. attam {KS[>j, itam (AV. TS.), patdm 'protect', briitam (AV.), yatdm, vittdm^ vitdm, statu {as- 'be'), stutam, hatdm. — 3. itam, dugdham {Yduk-), patam^ 'protect', sastam, stam (AV.), hatam (AV.). PI. 2. attd, ltd and eta, paid 'protect', bruta, yatd, sasta (sas- 'cut'), sta (VS. AV.), stota, hatd; with -iana: attana, iiana and e'tana, yatdna, sastdna, sotana {sic- 'press'), hantana; with connecting -T-: bravitana. 3. adantu, ghnantu, drantu, pantu 'protect', bruvantu, yantu, yantu, vantu (Av.), vydntu {Yvi-) and viyantu (TS.), sasatu (TS.v.2. 12'), svdsantu (AV.), santu, svdpantu (AV.). Middle. Sing. 2. irsva, caksva (= *caks-sva), trasva, dhuksva'', mrksva {Ytnrj-, AV.), stusvd (AV.); with connecting -/-: ilisva, jdnisva, vdsisva. 3. aj2"aw, yutam (AV.), vastSm, s'etam (AV.); with -fi/n: duhdm, vidam {vid- 'find', AV.), /ayaw (AV). Du. 2. iratham, caksatham (TS.), duhatham (AV.), vasatham (TS.). — 3. duhatam (AV.). — PI. 2. adhvam ^ l/aj--), ( Trdhvam, trddhvatn, mrddhvam (AV.). — 3. Tratam, stuvatam (AV.); with -/-a/n: duhram (AV.); with -ratam: duhratam (AV.).

Present Participle.

455. The active participle is formed by adding -i«^3 to the weak root; thus y-dnt- from z- 'go'; diih-dnt- from a'w/z- 'milk'; s-dnt- from «j-- 'be'. The strong stems of the participles of das- 'worship' and sas- 'order' lose the n: das-at-'^ and sds-at-^. The middle participle is formed by adding the suffix -and to the weak form of the root; thus iy-and- from l/z-; us-and- from Yvas-; ghn-and- (AV.) from "lA/zara-. In a few examples, however, the radical vowel takes Guna; thus oh-and- from uh- 'consider'; yodk-and- from yudk- 'fight'; say-ana- from si- 'lie'; stav-and- from stu- 'praise'. The final of Y'^uh- reverts to the original guttural in dugh-ana- beside the regular duhana-. The root as- 'sit' has the anomalous suffix -ina in ds-ina- beside the regular as-and-. Several of these participles in -ana alternatively accent the radical vowel instead of the final vowel of the suffix; thus vid-ana- beside vid-and- 'finding'. addnt-, andnt-, Active, usdnt-, ksiydnt-^ 'dwelling', ghndnt- ( l/"/5a«-), duhdnt-, dvisdnt-, dhrsdnt-, pant- 'protecting', bruv-dnt-, bkdnt-, ydnt-, ydnt-, rihdnt-, ruddnt-, vdnt-^ (AV.), vydnt- {Y111-), sdnt-, sasdnt-, stuvdnt-, sndnt-, svapdnt-; ^vith loss of n: ddsat-, sdsat-.

Middle, adand-, asand- and dsfna-, indhana-, iyand- (VS. x. 1 9 ; TS. I. 8. 14O) liana-, irana-, //(2«a- and (once) isand-, usand-^, usand-^ {vas- 'wea.r'), ^°, okana- and ohand- { Yuh-), ksnuvand- ghndnd- (AV.), dihand-, di'ighana- and duhand- and duhana-, dhrsand- (AV.), nijand-, bruvand-, mrjand-, yuvand- {yu-

1 Delbruck 61 and AvERY 242 wrongly 5 As in 3. pi. give this form as duksva. 6 ksyantam TS. IV. I. 2^. 2 In AV. (iv. 142) and TS. (iv. 6. 51) some 7 apa-van KM.ynYi.tfi'' is probably N. sing, Mss. read addhvam. VS. XVII. 65 has adhvam. of this part.; see Whitney's note and cp. 3 The feminine is formed with -t from Lanman 4842. the weak stem ; thus ghnai-f-, duhat-i-, yat-i-, 8 The RV. has once the transfer form yat-i-, bhat-T; rudat-i-, sat-l- (AV.), snat-t-. tdamana-, But the AV. has yantJ- (beside yaii-) and 9 Once, beside the regular vdsana-. The svafanti-; see Whitney, Index Verborum RV. has also once the transfer form 3744- usdmana-. 4 The verb das- may have lost its nasal 10 The form grhana (x. 10312), doubtless in the 3. pi. act., but there is no evidence 2. sing. impv. of the na- class, is regarded of this, as the only form preserved according by Grassmann as a participle. to the root class is 3. sing, ddsti. 22* ;

Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar. 34° I. Allgemeines und

^]o\ri), yodkand-, rihand-, z/a'M«a- 'wearing', vidSna-sxidividand-, vyand-(]/'vT-), sdyana-, s'dsana- (AV.' TS.), siaiana- {su- 'bring forth', AV.), stuvand- and siavand-, svdnd- {su- 'press', SV.)^ Imperfect Indicative.

456. Active. Sing. I. adoham (Kh. v. 15'+), apam ('protect'), dbravam, avedam, akanam; adam (VS. xii. 105), ayam, asam, airam {Yir-). 2. dpas, dyas; dis (AV.); ves iVvT-); with connecting -/-: abravTs (AV.); asis; without ending: dhan; han. -/-: dbravtt, 3. dpat, dyat, avat (AV.), astaut; dit^\ with connecting avamit; dnit, asTt^; without ending: adhok, dvet (AY.), dhan; as (= *as-f, from as- 'be'); kan'^. Du. 2. dyatam, ahatam; astam, ditam; yatam {KY.). — 3. abrUtam {AN.); dttam (VS. xxi. 43), dstam, aitam (AV. VS.). PI. I. ataksma, dpama. — 2. atasta; dita; abravtta; dyatana, dsastana; ditaiia; dbravJtana. — 3. ddikan{KY), anSvan, abruva7i, avyan {Yvt-)\ Ayan 2 -tfr: atvisur, (z-'go'), dsan; aj-a«5 (aj- 'throw'), -^"-/^wa/z (Kh. 1. ^) ; with ending apur {pa- 'protect'); asur {as- 'throw', I. 179^); cdksur, duhur. Middle. Sing. 3. acasta, atakta, dvasta (AV.), dsuta; ditta {Ytd-);

mrsta (i. 174"*), suta. PI. 2. drddhvam. — 3. aghnata (AV.), acaksata, ajanata, dmrjata (AV.), asasata; asata, dirata. VV^ith ending -ran: aduhran (AV.), aseran.

a. 2. The Reduplicating Class.

457. This class is less than half as frequent as the root class, comprising fewer than 50 verbs. The endings are here added to the reduplicated root, which is treated as in the root class, taking Guna in the strong forms. The stem shows the same peculiarity as the desiderative in reduplicating f {= ar) and a with z. Here, however, this rule is not invariable. All the roots with

r except one reduplicate with i. They are r-^go' :i-y-ar-^; ghr- '^\^':jighar-;

: pipar-; bhr- 'bear' : bibhar-; 'run' : tr- 'cross' titr-; pf- 'fill' and /r- 'pass' : sf-

sisar-; pre- 'mix' : piprc-; but vrt- 'turn' : vavart-. While nine roots redupli-

cate a with a, thirteen do so with /. The latter are: ga- ^go' :jiga-; ghra-

'smeir : jighra-; pa- 'drink' -.piba-; ma- 'measure' : mima-; }?ia- 'bellow': mimd-;

sa- 'sharpen': sisa-; stha- 'stand' : tistha-; ha- 'go forth' : jihi-'' ; vac- 'speak' :

vivac-; vas- 'desire' ; vivas-^; vyac- 'extend' : vivyac-; sac- 'accompany' : sisac-'^; han- 'strike' -.jighna-. Three of these, however, pa-, stha-, han-, have per- manently gone over to the a- conjugation, while a fourth, ghra-, is beginning to do so. Contrary to analogy the accent is not, in the majority of verbs belonging to this class, on the root in the strong forms, but on the redupli- cative syllable. The latter is further accented in the 3. pi. act. and mid., as well as in the i. du. and pi. mid. Doubtless as a result of this accentuation, the verbs of this class lose the n of the endings in the 3. pi. act. and mid. e. g. bibhr-ati'^° 3.nd jihafe.

1 To be pronounced thus in the RV., 5 Unaugmented form IV. 31. though always written suvand-. 6 With -y- interposed between redupli- 2 The form aitat (AV. xvm. 34°) seems to cation and root. be a corruption aiait; see Whitney's note in 7 With f for a; inflected in the middle his Translation. only.

3 Cp. V. Negelein 81 ; Reichelt BB. 27, 8 Also vavas-, 89. VS. vm. 46 has the transfer form dsat. 9 Also sasc; 4 arudat (AV.) is a transfer to the a- con- 10 That is, a replaces the sonant nasal.

jugation. In I. 772 vis, 3. sing., seems to be an aor. form = *vi-s-i. :;

VII. Verb. Present System. 341

a. There are a number of irregularities chiefly in the direction of shortening the root in weak forms, i. Roots ending in a drop their vowel before terminations beginning I with vowels : e. g. y^a: mim-e, 3. -pi. mim-ate. yds- axiiydha-, the two commonest verbs in this class, drop the a in all weak forms. — 2. The root vyac- takes Samprasarana

e. g. 3. du. vivikids ; analogously kvar- 'be crooked', makes some forms with Samprasarana, when it reduplicates with u; e. g. jukirihds, 2. sing. mid. injunctive. — 3. The verbs bhas- 'chew', sac- 'accompany', has- 'laugh', syncopate the radical vowel; thus babhas-at,

sing, subj., but baps-ati, ; 3. 3. pi. ind. sasc-ati, 3. pi. ind. pres., sasc-ata, 3. pi. inj. ; jdks-at-, pres. part. — 4. The & of sa- 'sharpen', via- 'measure', ma- 'bellow', ra- 'give', ha- 'go

away' (mid.), and (in AV.) ha- 'leave' (act.) », is usually changed to 7 before consonants; e. g. H fmasi, mimJie, rariihas^, j'ihite, jahtia (AV.); while the roots da- 'give' and dhd- 'pul' dr op their vowel even here 4; e. g. dad-mahe, dadh-mdsi. — 5. The initial of ci- 'observe' reverts to the original guttural throughout; e. g. dkhi (AV.). — 6. When the aspiration of dadh-, the weak base of dha-, is lost before t, ih, s, or dhv, it is thrown back on the initial; c. g. dhat-sva. — 7. The roots di- 'shine', dM- 'think', pi- 'swell', reduplicate with 7; e. g. ddidet; ddidhet; apTpet. — 8. There are a number of transfers from this to other classes. Thus cais- 'see', originally a syncopated reduplicative base {= *cakas-), has become a root inflected according to the root class; jais- 'eat', also originally a reduplicated base (Jaghas-), has become a root from which is formed the past passive participle jag-dha-, and which in the later language is inflected both in the root class and the a- class. The weak bases dad- and dadh- show an incipient tendency to become roots ^, from which a number of transfer forms according to the a- conjugation are made, such as 3. sing. mid. dada-ie, 3. pi. ind. act. dadhanti, 3. pi. impv. act. dadha-ntu, 3. sing. mid. dadha-ie, 2. du. dadhethe (AV.). The roots pa- 'drink', siha-, han-, form only transfer stems according to the a- class: piba-, tisfha-, jighna-; while ghrd-, ma- 'bellow', ra-, bhas-, sac- make occasional forms from transfer stems according to the a- class jighra-, mima-, rdra-, bdpsa-, sdsca-. Inflexion.

458. The forms actually occurring would, if made from b/ir- 'bear', be the following:

Active. Sing. i. bibharmi. 2. bibharsi. 3. bibharti. — Du. 2. bibhrthds. 3. bibhrtas. — Pi. i. bibhrmdsi and bibhrmds. 2. bibhrthd. 3. bibhrati. Middle. Sing. i. bibhre. 2. bibhrse. 3. bibhrte. — Du. i. bibhrvahe. 2. bibhrAthe. 3. bibhrAte. — PI. i. bibkrmahe. 2. bibhrdhve. 3. bibhrate. The forms which actually occur are the following:

Present Indicative.

Active. Sing. i. iyarmi, jdhami, jigharmi, j'uhomi, dddami, dddhami,

piparmi ('fill', AV.), bibharmi, vivakmi ( l/waf-)) sisami. 2. iydrsi°, cikesi {KST.),jdhasi {K^.),jigasi, dddasi, dddkSsi, piparsi, bibharsi,

mamatsi, vavdksi (yvas-), viveisi^ (vis- 'be active'), sisaksi ( i/jai;-), sisarsi^. 3. iyarti, jdhati, jigati, jigharti, juhSti, dddaW^, dddhati, piparti 'fills' and 'passes', bdbhasti (AV.), bibharti and (once) bibhdrti, mimati 'bellows', mimed {ma- 'bellow', SV.), yuyoti 'separates', vavarti (= vavart-ti, 11. 38^), vivakti, vivasti {Yvas'-), vivesii (vis- 'he active), sdsasii (YS.) a.nd sasdsti (TS.vii. 4.19''), sisakti (Ysac-), sisarti. Du.2. dhatthds, niriithds, piprihas, bibhrthds. — 3. dattds (AV.), dddhatas^° (AV.), bibhitds (AV.), bibhrtds, mimttas, viviktds (Yvyac-), vivistas. PI. I. juhumdsi, dadmasi, dadhmdsi, bibhrmdsi, sistmdsi; jahimas'^'^ (AV.), juhumds, dadmas (AV.), dadhmas, bibhrmas (AV.), vivismas. — 2. dhatthd,

1 This of course does not take place in the 6 This is the accentuation in Max Muller's transfer verbs according to the a- conjugation. and Aufrecht's editions, both in Samhita 2 In the RV. hd- 'leave', has only forms and Padapatha. with a (never 7). 7 Cp. Neisser, BB. 30, 303. 3 But rarasva (AV.). 8 With imperative sense. 4 The vowel of ha- 'leave' is also dropped 9 Also the transfer form dddati. 10 dhaitds. in the 3. pi. opt. act. jahyur (AV.). With strong base, for jaki- hrjahi-. 5 From the former is made the past " With base weakened to passive participle dai-td- 'given'. 342 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

piprtAd, bibhrthd. — 3. j'ahati, jighrati (AV.), juhvati, dddati, dddkati^, didyati' {KY.), piprati, bapsati (l/^/^aj-), bibhrati^, sdscati. Middle. Sing. i. jiihve, dade (AV. TS.), dad/ie, mime. — 2. datse (AV.), dhatse. — 3- Jihtte, juhute, datte'-^, dhatte^, mimiie, sisite^; with -e: dadhi (+AV.). Du. I. dddvahe. — 2. dadhathe. — 3. jthaie, dad^dfe'^, mimate^ (v. 82^). PI. I. dddmake, inimimahe (AV.). — 2. jihidhve (AV.). — 3. jihate, dadkate^, mimate ('measure'), sisrate.

Present Subjunctive,

459. Active. Sing. i. dadhani, bibharani (TS. I. 5. 10'). — 2. juhuras, dddas, dadkas, didhyas (AV.), vivesas. — 3. plprati; dadat, dddkat, didayat, didayat'^° (AV.), babhasat, bibharat (AV.), yuydvat 'separate'.

Du. 2. dddkathas, bapsathas (Kh. I. 1 1^'). PI. I. jakama, juhavama, dadhama. — 3. dddan (AV.), ddd/ian, yuyavan. Middle. Sing." 2. dddhase. — 3. dddhate; with -tai- dadatai (AV.). —

Du. I. dadhavahai (TS. i. 5. 10'). — PI. i. daddmahe. — ^. Juhuranta'^'.

Present Injunctive.

Active. Sing. 2. dadas (AV.), bibkes (AV.). — 3. Jigat, dadat (AV.), vivyak.

PI. I. ynyoma^i (AV.).

Middle. Sing. 2. juMrtkas ( Y^W')- 3- jihita. PI. 3. sascata.

Present Optative^*.

Active. Sing. 2. mimiyas (x. 56^). — jahyat^'^ (SA. xii. \i); 'i- juhuyat (AV.), dadyat (AV.), bibhiyat, bibhryat, mamanyat, mimiyat {ma- 'measure'). — Du. 3. yuyuyatam. — PI. i. juhuydma. — 3. jahyiir'^^ (AV.). Middle. Sing. 3. dddhita and dadhitd. — PI. i. dadlmahi, dadhTmdhi. — 3. dadiran. Present Imperative.

460. Active. Sing. i. jdhani (AV.). — 2. daddhi, piprgdhi ( Yprc-), mamaddki, mamandki, yuyodki, vividd/ii {Y'^^?')j sisadhi. — W^ith -A/': ciklhi (ci- 'note', AV.), didihi and didi/ii {y dl-), dehi {Y^^')j dhehi., piprhi, bibhrhi (AV. TS.), mimihi {ma- 'measure'), ririM^^ l/ra-), sisihi. — -tat: jahitat ( With (AV.), dattat, dhattai, piprtat{i:S.Vf./^. 12''). — 3. cikitu {TQ.m.7,.11^), Jdhaiii, jigatu, juhotu (TS. iii. 3. 10'), dddatu, dddhatii, pipartu ('fill' and 'pass'), bibhartu (AV.TS.), mimatu., yayastu, yuyotu, sis'atu, sisaktu.

1 Also the transfer form dddhanti. 11 sahiacdi (RV. III. 3310) is probably sing, i 2 Regarded by Delbruck, Verbum p, 1333, perfect sabj. (p. 361); but occurring beside the as an intensive. aorist form namsai, it may be an aorist, to 3 There is also a transfer form mimanii which tense Whitney, Roots, doubtfully 'bellow'. assigns it. t Also the transfer form dadaie. 12 dJdayante (AV. XVIII. 373) is perhaps a 5 Also the transfer form dadhate. subjunctive. 6 There is also the transfer form rarate 13 With the strong base yuyo- for yuyu-. from \ra-. 14 Avery 24.1 gives here several forms 7 Also the transfer form dadhete (AV.). which it is better to class as optatives per- 8 By Avery 2374 given as 3. sing, sub- fect. unctive middle. 'S With weak base jah-, for jahT-, which 9 TS. 1. 5. 10*, III. \. 82 has the transfer here loses its final vowel like dadd- and form dddante. dadha-. '" Pp. didayat; see Whitney's note on 16 The only form in which ]/?-a- reduplicates

AV. m. 8l with i. ,

VII. Verb. Present System. 343

Du. 2. jahitam (AV.), jigatam, dattdm, dhattdm, pipridm, mimitdm, yuyutdm and yuyotam ', sihtdm, sisrtam. — 3. cikitam {ci- 'note', AV.), datiam, dhattam, piprtam, bibhrtatn, mimitam, sihtSm. PI. 2. iyarta', jahlta (AV.), jigata, juhuta mAjuhoia\ dattd and dddsta*, dhattd and dddkata^, niniJda i\^mj-}, piprkta, piprtd, bibhjta (AV.), bibhrta (TS. iv.2.3'), yuyota^, sisTia, sisakta; jigatana, juMtanai, dadatana'^, dhattana and dddhatana^, pipartana^, bibhitana, mamattdna, yuyStana'', vivaktana. — 3. dadatu (AV.), dadhatuT. Middle. ^ Sing. 2. jihisva, datsva (AV.), dkatsva, mimisva (AV.), rarasva (AV.). — 3. jihltam ^.

Du. 2. jihatkam (TS. I. i. 12'), didhitham (AV.), mimatham, raratfiam. PI. 2. juhudkvam {T?i.\Y.6.i^), raridhvam. — j,. jihatam, dadhatam,

sisratam (Kh. i. 3^).

Present Participle.

461. Active. As the suffix -aitt drops its n (like the endings of the 3. pi. act.) strong and weak stem are not distinguished. The feminine stem of course lacks n also; e.g. Mbhrat-i-. Stems occurring are: cikyat- (cz- 'note') 5, jdhat', jlgat; jiihvat-, titrat- \tr- 'cross'), dddat-, dddhat-, didyat-, didhyat-, bdpsat-, bibhyat-, bibhrat-, sas'cdi- ('pursuer') and sdscat-'^° ('helping'), sisrat-^\ Middle, j'ihsna-, jithvana-, dddana-, dddkana-, didyana-, didhyana-, ptpana- {pa- 'di'mk', AV.) and pipand-'^', pf/yana-^^ (ypi-), niimana-, rdrana-'^'' sisana-. Imperfect Indicative.

462. All the verbs of this class occurring in the 3. pi. act. take the ending -tir except bhr-, which has the normal -an. The verbs da-, dha-, ha- show the irregularity (appearing elsewhere also) of using the strong instead of the weak base in the 2. pi. act. Active. Sing. i. adadam, adadham. — 2. ddadas, ddadhas 's, ddides, dvives {Y'vis-); bibhes (AV.), vive's (jAwzj-), sisas. — 3. aciket {yd-), djahat, aj'tgat, ddadat^^, ddadhat, ddidet, dbibhar, abibhet, dvivyak'^'', asisat; vives {Yvis-). Du. 2. adattam, adhattam. — 3. dviviktam, dmimatam (AV.)''. PI. 2. ddadaia'-^, ddadhata'^'^ and ddhatta; djahatana^'^, ddattana. — 3. abibhran; ajahur, djukavur, adadjir, adadhur, dmamadur, avivyacur; jahur, dadur. didhyur (AV.), vivyacur. Middle. Sing. 2. ddhatthas, dmimithas; didithas (AV.). — 3. dj'iktia, adatta, adhatta, dpiprata^°, dmimiia; sihta. — PI. 3. ajihata, djukvata".

1 With strong base yuyo- for yuyu-. 12 With irregular accent. 2 With strong base iyar- for *iyf-; cp. 13 The anomalous transfer form bibhra- V. Negelein es^f. mana- takes the place of *bibhrana-. 3 With strong base for weak. 14 But perfect rarand-. 4 Strong base ddda- for dad-. 5 There is no sufficient reason for regarding 5 Strong base dadha- for dadh-. ddadhas in X. 739, as a 3. sing. (AVERY 248; 6 Strong base pipar- for pip/ -. Delbruck, Verbum 50, 59). 7 Also the transfer form dadhantu. »6 There is also the transfer form dddat. 8 There is also the 3. sing, transfer form V. Negelein 672 gives dddhat {KV. AV.) which dadatam. seems a misprint for dddhat. 9 cikyat (iv. 38*), nom. sing, m,, is given 17 There is also the unaugmented transfer by V. Negelein 772 as dkyat and explained form vivydcat. as a pluperfect form. 18 WmTNEY, Sanskrit Grammar 665, quotes 10 When compounded with the negative ajahiidm from the TS. (mantra?). particle, sakat- remains unchanged in the '9 With strong base instead of weak. fern, if accented a-sascdt-, but has n if 20 Anomalous form instead of *dpifrta. accented on the prefix: d-sascant-J-. 21 Also the transfer form adadanta. Whitney 1' For inflected forms of these stems see 658 also mentions the unaugmented 3. pi. 312. Jihata. 344 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

^. I. The infixing nasal class.

463. This class, which includes fewer than 30 verbs, is characterized by the accented syllable nd preceding the final consonant of the root in the strong forms. That syllable in the weak forms becomes a simple nasal varying according to the class to which the following consonant belongs.

I. The infix, appearing in forms outside the limits of the present stem, has become part of the root in anj- 'anoint', bhanj- 'break', and hinu- 'injure'. — z. There are a few transfers to the a- class, in which some of these verbs come to be inflected in the later language i, and in which several verbs are regularly nasalized in the present stem {429, a, 1). — 3. Instead of the regular -na-, the root irh- 'crush' infixes -ne- in the strong forms; thus 3. sing, trne-dhi. — 4. In the 3. pi. ind. mid. irregular accentuation of the final syllable occurs exceptionally in each of the forms anjati, indhaie, bhuiljaii^.

Present Indicative.

464. The forms actually occurring, if made from yuj- 'join', would be the following: Active. Sing. i. yundjmi. 2. yundksi. 3. yundkti. — PI. i. yuhjmas. 3. yunjdnti. Middle. Sing. i. yunje. 2. yufikse. 3. yunkte. — Du. 2. yunjAthe.

3. yufijate. — PI. 2. yuhgdhve. 3. yimjdte. The forms which actually occur are the following:

Active. Sing. I. anajmi {AN.), ckmadmi{KV.), trnadmi{Yird-),bhinddnii, yundjmi^ runadhmi (rudh- 'obstruct'). — 2. prndksi hhindtsi, yunaksi, ( Yprc-), vfndksi (z'r;- 'twist'). — 3. anakti, undtti {Y^'^-), krnatti (krt- 'spin'), grnatti^ (AV.x. 7''3), ckindtti{KY.), tniatti, pindsti{Ypis-), bhandkti^yfbhanj-), bhindtti, yundkti (AV.), rindkti (Yric-), rundddhi, vrndkti, hindsti {Yhims-, AV. SA.). PI. I. aiijmas. — 3. anjdnti, unddnti, pimsdnti, prncdnti, bhinddjiti, yunjdnti, viiicanti {vie- 'sift'), vrnjanti.

Middle. Sing. i. anje, rnje {rj- 'direct'), prnce (AV.), yuiije, vriije. — 2. yuhkse (AV.). — 3. ahkte'', itidhe {= ind-dhe, y'idh-), prnkte, yunkte^, rundhi (= rund-dhe, AV.), vrnkte, himste^ (AV). — With ending -e: vrhje. Du. 2. anjathe (Kh. v. 6"*; VS. xxxiii. 33), yunjathe. — 3. anjate (VS. XX. 61), tuiijate, vrnjate (AV.). PI. 2. afigdhve. — 3. anjdte and anjati, indhdte and indhate, rnjate, tuhjdte, prncdte, bkunjdte and bhunjate, yunjdte, rundhate (AV.), vrnjate.

Present Subjunctive.

465. The weak base is once used instead of the strong in the form afij-a-tas for *anaj-a-tas; and the AV. has once the double modal sign a in the form trndh-an. Active. Sing. 2. bhinddas. — 3. rnddhat, bhinddat, yundjat. — Du. I. rindcava. — 3. aiijatas. — PI. 3. andjan, yu7idjan, vrnajan; trndhan (AV.).

Middle. Sing. 3. inddkate, yundjate. — PL i. bhundjamahai, runadha- mahai. Present Injunctive,

Active. Sing. 2. pindk (V/w-), bhindt. — 3. pinak, prndk, bhindt, rinak {Yric-). Middle. PI. 3. yunjata.

1 Thus ud- 'wet' : undtti is inflected as 3 ud grnatti 'ties up', is here only a cor-

unda-ti in B. and S. ; and yuj- 'join' .yundkti ruption of the corresponding ut krnatti of 2L%yuhja-ti in U. and E., beside the old forms. RV. X. 1302, seemingly a form of ^aM- 'tie'. 2 In the RV. anjati occurs once, anjdte 4 AV. ante. 12 times, indhate 4 times, indhdte 15 times, 5 AV. yunte. while bhuhjate and bkunjdte occur once each. 6 With irregular accent. VII. Verb. Present System. 345

Present Optative.

Active. Sing. 3. bhindyat (AV.). — Middle. Sing. 3. prncTtd. Present Imperative.

466. The only ending of the 2. _ sing, act, is -dhi, no form with -tat having been met with. As usual, the strong base sometimes appears in the 2. pi. act.: undtta, yundkta; anaktana, pinastana. Active. Sing. 2. ahdhi^ {Yanj-), uiidhi (= unddki), chindhi (= chind- dhi\ trndhi {= trnddhi), prhdhi {= prngdhi), bhahdhi {^ bhangdhi), bhindhi (= bhinddhi), yundhi (= yuhgdhi, AV.), rundhi (= rutiddhi, AV.), vrAdhi (= vrngdhi). — 3. andktu, chindttu (AV.), trnedhu^ {KS[.), prndkiu, bhanaktu (AV.), bhinattu (AV.), yundktu (AV.), vinaktu ( Yvic-, AV.), vrnaktu, hindstu (Kh. IV. 5^5). Du. 2. antam (= anktam, AV.), chintdm (= chinttdm, AV.), prhktdm. — 3. anktam (VS. 11. 22). PI. 2. undtta^, bhintta (TS. iv. 7. 13^), yundkta, vrhkta; anaktana, pinas- tana. — 3. anjantu, undantu (AV.), yunjdntu (AV.), vrnjantu (AV.). Middle. Sing. 2. ahksva'^ (AV.), ywiksvd, vrnksva (AV.). — 3. iiidham^ (= inddham, AV.), yuntam (= yuhktam, AV.), rundham (= runddham, AV.). — Du. 2. yunjdtham. — PI. 2. indhvam (= inddhvam), yuhgdhvdm. — 3. indhatam. Present Participle.

467. Active, anjdnt-, unddnt- and udat-t- (AV.), riijdnt-, rndhdnt-,. krntati-

(AV.), pimsatf-, prncdnt- 2sA priicati-^ , bhanjdnt- and bhanjatt-, bhinddnt- and bhindatt- (AV.), bhunjatt-, yuhjati-, vihcdnt-, {d-)himsant-. indhana-, Middle, anjand-, tunjand-, tundand-i {KN.), prncand-, bhindand-, yimjand- (TS. iv. i. i'), rundhand-, sumbhand-^, hlmsana-. Imperfect Indicative. 468. Active. Sing. 2. dtrnaf^ (AV.), abhanas^° (AV.), dbhinat, arinak {Yric-), avrnak; unap {Yubh-), rnak (Kh.iv.69), pinak, bhindt. — 3. dtpiat, aprnak (Ypr^-), dbhinat, ayunak and ayunak, avinak (Y'V'c-, AV.), dvrnak {}fvrj-); dunati^ud-); bhindt, rindk, vrndk. — Du. 2. atrntam (= atrnttain). —

PI. 3. dtrndan, dbhindan, av^nj'an; an/an, ayunjan (TS. I. 7. 7^). Middle. Sing. 3. ainddha AV.). — PI. 3. aytmjata, arundhata ( Y^dh-, (AV.); unaugmented; anjata.

^. 2. The nu- class.

Delbruck, Verbum p. 154— 157. — Avery, Verb-Inflection 232 ff. — Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar p. 254 — 260; Roots 213. — v. Negelein, Zur Sprachgescliichte 57— 60; 63-64; 94- 469. More than thirty verbs follow this class in the Samhitas. The stem is formed by adding to the root, in the strong forms, the accented syllable -no, which in the weak forms is reduced to -nu.

1 For ahg-dhi. The final consonant of in the imperatives 3. sing, vid-am and the root is regularly dropped before the diih-am. ending -dhi. 6 AV. also ffncati-. 2 Cp. V. Negelein, Zur Sprachgeschichte 7 \tud- otherwise follows the a- class. 6l3. 8 ysubh- otherwise follows the a- or a- 3 The AV. has the transfer form umbhaia class. (yubh-) according to the a- class. 9 From \trd-. The MSS. have atrinat: 4 AV. XIX.455: dksva emended to d-anksva; see Whitney's note on AV. xix. 32*. see Whitney's note on the passage. 10 For *abhanak-s i^bhanj-): see WHITNEY, 5 v. Negelein 6^, note ', thinks this form Grammar 555, and his note on AV. IIL 6^. may be the starting point- of the ending -am Cp. above 66, c, ;8 2 (p. 61), 346 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

a. Several irregularities occur with regard to root, suffix, and ending, i. The root sru- 'hear' is dissimilated to sr-'^ before the suffix: s^-nu-, sr-no-. — 2. The root c/"- 'cover' assumes the anomalous form of iir- (with interchange of vowel and semivowel): ur-nu; beside the regular vr-nu-^. — 3. Four roots ending in -n, tan- 'stretch', man- 'think', vati- 'win', san- 'gain', seem to form their stem with the suffix -u, being assigned by the Indian grammarians to a separate class, the eighth; but this appearance has probably been brought about by the -an of the root having originally been reduced to the nasal sonant: ta-nii- for "^tn-nu-^. — 4. In place of the regular and very frequent kr-nu-, there appears in the tenth book of the RV. the anomalous stem kuru-, once in the form kur-mas (X. 5l'\ I. pi. pres. ind., and twice in the form kuru (x. 192, 1452), 2. sing. impv. act. The strong form of this stem, karo-'', which has the additional anomaly of Guna in the root, appears in the AV., where however the forms made from k}'n6-, irnu- are still upwards of six times as common as those from karo-, kuru-^. The isolated form taru-te 'attains', which occurs once in the RV. (x. 76^), seems to be analogous in formation to karo-ti, but it may be connected with the somewhat frequent nominal stem iaru-6. — 5. The u of the suffix is dropped, in all the few forms which occur in the 1. pi. ind. act. and mid., before terminations beginning with /n: kur-mds, kfn-mdsi (AV.},

lan-masi (TS.), hin-mas (AV.), hin-masi (AV.); krn-viahe, man-niahe^ . When the -nu is preceded by a consonant, the u becomes uv before vowel endings; e. %. asnuv-anti '^vX sunv-dnd). — 6. In the 3. pi. mid., six verbs of this class take the ending -reS with

connecting vowel -i- : inv-ire, rriv-ire, pinv-ire^, irnv-iriy sunv-ire, hinv-ire. The connecting vowel -i- is also taken by sru- in the 2. sing. mid. srnv-i-se (for *srnu-se) used in a passive sense. — 7. Five stems of this class, i-nu-, r-nu-, ;i-nu-, pi-nu-, hi-nu-, have come to be used frequently even in the RV. as secondary roots following the a- conjugation.

Of these ftnv-a- occurs almost exclusively in the RV. as well as the AV. ; mv-a- alone

is met with in the AV. ; and jinv-a- and hinv-a- are commoner in the RV. than ji-nu- and hi-nu-. Present Indicative.

470. The forms actually occurring, if made from kr- 'make', would be as follows:

Active. Sing. i. krnomi. 2. krnosi. 3. krnoti. — Du. 2. krnu(/ids. 3. krnutds. — PI. i. krnmdsi and krnmds. 2. krnuthd. 3. krnvdnii. Middle. Sing. i. /^r«?//. 2. krnuse. ^. krmtte s.nii. krnve. — Du. 2. krnvaihe. — PL I. Jzrnmahe. 3. krnvdte'^''. The forms which actually occur are the following: Active. Sing. i. urnomi (AV.), rnomi, krnomi, ksinomi (AV. TS.), minomi {mi- 'fix', AV.), vrnomi ('choose', Kh. 11. 65), saknomi (AV.), srnomi, hinomi. — With -U-: karomi (AV. TS.), tanomi. 2. apnosi (AV.), inosi, krnosi, jinosi, strnosi, hinisi; tanosi, vanosi. 3. ahioti {as- 'attain'), apnoti (VS. AV.), inoti, unoti (RV.), Urnoti, rnoti, fdknoti, krnoti, cinoti 'gathers', dasnoti, dunoti (AV.), dhunoti, minoti (AV.), vrnoti, saknoti (AV.), srnoti, siinati, skunoti (AV.), hinoti; karoti (AV. TS. VS.), ianoti, vanoti, sanoti.

Du. 2. asnitthas (Kh. i. 9^), urmcthas, krmithds, vanuthds. — 3. ahiutds, urnutds, krnutas, sumttds; taniitas (Kh. iii. 22*). Pi. I. krnmdsi (AV.), hinmas (AV.), hinmasi (AV.); kurmds, tanmasi

(TS. IV. 5. II'). — 2. asnutha, krnvthd, dhumcthd, sumithd. —• 3. asnuvanti.

J Cp. Delbruck, Verbum p. 154*. (Delbruck 174, Brugmann, KG. 673) of this 2 Cp. Brugmann, kg. 674. phenomenon. There is no example in the 3 Cp. Brugmann, KZ. 24,259; Delbruck Samhitas of the I. du. in -vas and -vahe; but p. 156. *irn-vds, *krn-vdhe must be presupposed to 4 Perhaps starting from the aorist d-kar account for the loss of the -u before -mas and following the analogy of krtto-; cp. and -make: Brugmann, KG. 673. Brugmann, ICG. 656, 3. S Like duh-re in the root class. s Whitney 715. 9 This is the only form (besides the 6 Occurring in idru- 'swift' (?), taru-if- 'con- participle/«'«Z'-fl«a- unA pinv-dnl-, pinv-ai-im in queror', tdru-lra- 'victorious', tdru-sa- 'victor', A V.) in which the stempinu- appears. All others and the verbal stem idrusya-'cross\ 'overcome'. are made from the transfer stem pinva-. 7 Thus krn-mahe is not the only example "o Sometimes accented kfnvaie. VII. Verb. Present System. 347 rpvdnti,^ krpvdnti cinvdnti \ (TS. 1. 1 . 7 ^), dabhnuvanti, dunvanti (AV.), prumuvanti, saknuvdnti (AV.), srnvdnti, sunvdnti, hinvdnti; kurvanti (AV.), tanvdnti. Middle. Sing. i. asnuve, krnve, hinvi; kurve (AV.), manvi (AV.), vanve. amuse, 2. urnuse, krnusi, cinuse, dhunuse; tanuse (AV.). — With connecting vowel -/'-: irnv-i-se. asnute, 3. urnute, krnute, dhunute, prusnute, srnute; kurute (AV.), tatiute, tarute, vanuti. — With ending -e: irnve, sunvej hinve. Du. 2. tativathe. — PI. i. krnmahe, mantnahe. — 3, asnuvate, krnvdte, vrnvdte and vrnvate, sprtwate, hinvdte; kurvdie (AV.), tanvati and ianvdte (AV.). With ending -re: inv-i-re, rnv-i-re, pinv-i-re, srnv-i-re, sunv-i-re, hinv-i-rS. Present Subjunctive.

471. Active. Sing. i. krnava, hinava; sandvani {KSf^. — 2. rndvas, krndvas, trpndvas, srndvas; karavas (AV.). — 3. asnavat^, krndvat, cinavat, dhunavat, prusndvat, s'rndvat, sundvat; vandvat. — With double modal sign a: karavat {AN.), kniavat (AV. xx. 1325). — With ending -iai: asnavatai^ (AV.). — Du. i. ahiavava, krnavava. PI. I. aindvama, krndvama, minavama, sakndvama, sunavama, sprnava?na. — 2. sandvatha; with double modal sign: kpmvatha{YSi.). — asnavan, j,. krndvafi, srndvan.

Middle. Sing. i. amavai (VS. xix. 37), krndvai, sundvai; mandvai. — 2. krnavase; vanavase. — 3. krndvate; mandvate.

Du. I. krnavavahai; tanavdvakai. — 2. asndvaithe. — 3. krnvaite''. PI. I, asndvamahai (x. 97 '7)5, krndvamahai, stpiavamahai (AV.). — 3. asnavanta, krndvanta. Present Injunctive.

Active. Sing.* 2. fnos. — 3. lirnot. — PI. 3. rnvan, minvdn, hinvdn; vanvan.

Middle. Sing. 2. tanuthas. — 3. rnutd. — PI. 3. krnvata; manvata.

Present Optative.

Active. Sing. i. sanuyam. — 3. srnuydi (AV.). PI. I. cinuyama. srtiuyama; vanuyama, sanuydma. Middle. Sing. 3. krnvitaT; manvTta (AV.).

Present Imperative. 472. Active. Sing. 2. srnudhi. — With ending -hi^: aksnuM {aks- 'mutilate', AV.), asnuhi, apnuhi (AV.), inuhi, urnuhi, krnuhi, cinuhi, trpnuhi, dabhnuhi (4-V.), dhunuhi, dhrsnuhi, srnuhi, sprnuhi, hinuhi; tanuhi, sanuhi. — W^ith ending -iai: krnutat, hinutat. — Without ending: i7iu, urnu, krnu, dhUnu (Av.), srnu, sunu, hinu; kuru, tanu. — 3. asnotu, apnofu (AV.), urnotu (Av.), krnotu, cinotu, minotu, srnotu, sunotu; karotu (TS. VS.), tanotu {KSf^, sanotu.

Du. 2. asnutam, , krnutdm, trpnutdm, srnutdm, kinStam^. — 3. asnutam (AV. TS.), krnutam (AV.).

1 skrnvanti aitevpari-.pariskrnvdnti (1X.142), 6 The injunctive form asnavam, AV. XiX. pari skrnvanti (ix. 6423). 556, is a conjecture; see Whitney's note

2 The form arnavat, AV. v. 28 (]//'-), is a on the passage. corruption of avrnot in RV. 7 iirnvTtd occurs in TS. VI. I.3 a.'O.A urnu- 3 The TS. has once asnavatai (Whitney vita in K. (Whitney 713). 701). 8 Cp. Whitney 704. 4 Irregular for krnavaite. 9 With strong stem. 5 Omitted by Avery 238. —

348 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

PI. 2. urnuta, kniutd and krnota ', trpnuta, dhunuta, srnuid and srnota ', suttutd and sunota'-, hinuta (AV.) and hinota^; tanota^ (AV. TS.). —

With ending -tana: krnotana^, sj-notana'^ , sunotana^, hinotana' (x. 30'). — 3. asnuvantu, unnivantu, krnvdntu^ cifiva7itu (^S.y. 2. 11^), srnvdntu, hinvantu; vanvdjitji, sanva?itu. Middle. Sing. 2. urnusva, krnusvd, cinusva (AV.), dhunusva (AV.),

srniisvd; tanusva, vanusva. — 3. asnutam (AV.), krnutam; tanutam (TS. I. 6. 33), manutam, vanutam (AV.). Du. 2. krnvatham (AV.). — PI. 2. krnudhvdm, sunudJivam; tanudhvam, vanudhvam (AV.). — 3. rnvatam (AV.); kurvatam (AV.), tajivdtam (AV.), vanvatam (AV.). Present Participle.

473. Active, urnuvdnt- zxA urnvdnt-, i.-vatl-, rnvdnt-, krnvdnt-^,i.-vati-, cinvdnt-, f. -vatl-, du?ivdnt- (AV.), dkunvd?it', pinvdnt- (AV.), minvdnt-, vf?ivdnt-, srnvdnt-, f. -z/(7//-, sunvdnt-, hinvdnt-, f. -vatl-; kurvdnt- (AV.), f. -z/a//- (AV.),

tanvdnt-, f. -paz"/- (AV.), vanvdnt-.

Middle, urtivand-, krnvand-, cinvand- (TS.iv. 2. 10'), dhunvand-, pinvand-, sunvand-, hinvand-; kurvand- (AV.), tanvand-, manvand-, vanvand-.

Imperfect Indicative.

474- Active. Sing. i. airnavam; krnavam. — 2. dkrnos, dvrnos, dsrnos, dsaghnos, ainos, durnos; akaros (AV.), dvanos, dsanos. — 3. dkrnot, ddkufiot, avrnot, apnot (AV. TS.), ardhnot (AV.), ainot^ durnot; akarot (VS. AV.), atanot, asanot. — Du. 2. akrnutam, adhunutam. PI. 2. akriiuta and akrnota; akrnotana. — 3. dkrnvan, acinvan (AV.), asaknuvan, asr?tvan{AY^; rnvan, minvaii; akurvan {AN.), avanvan, dsajtvan.

Middle. Sing. 2. adhunuthas ; kuruthas (AV.). — 3. akrnuta, ddhunuta; krnuta; akuruta {KSf^^ atatiuta (AV.), dmanuta. PI. 2. dkrnudhvam. — 3. dkrnvata^, avrnvata; Kh.ii akurvata{KS[ .; 135), dtanvata, amanvata, avanvata (AV.).

^. 3. The na- class.

Delbruck, Verbum p. 151 — 153. — Avery, Verb-Inflection 232 ff. — WHrrNEY, Sanskrit Grammar p. 260—263; Roots 214. — v. Negelein, Zur Sprachgeschichte 49 57. — Cp. J. Schmidt, Fesigruss an Roth 179 ff.; Bartholomae, IF. 7, 50—81; Brug- MANN, IF. 16, 509 ff.

475. Nearly forty verbs belong to this class in the Samhitas. The stem is formed by adding to the root, in the strong forms, the accented syllable -nd^, which in the weak forms is reduced to -ni before consong,nts and -n before vowels.

a. There are some irregularities with regard to the root, the suffix, and the endings, i. The root shows a tendency to be reduced in various ways. The roots /r- 'overpower', /5- 'hasten', /i7- 'purify', are shortened; e.g. jin&mi, ;u?tasi, pundti. The root grabh- 'seize' and its later form grah- take

1 With strong stem instead of weak. Thus 3 skrnvani- in pari-skfnvdn (ix. 39'). in four out of seven verbs there is an alter- 4 In X. 134 akrnvata has the appearance native strong form ; and in one other {ianoia) of being used for the 3. sing. (= akrnutd). the strong is the only form occurring. 5 The suffix may originally have been 2 Thus all the forms occurring with -tana -nai of which -rii would be the weak grade have a strong stem. Whitney 704 also (27); but Brugmann, Grundriss 2, 597, note, mentions karota besides the 2. du. krnotam, disagrees with this view. He thinks -«/ has but I do not know whether these forms displaced earlier -ni, KG. p. 512. occur in mantra passages. VII. Verb. Present System. 349

Samprasarana; e. g, grbhmmi and grhn&mi (AV.). Four roots which, in forms outside ^the present system appear with a nasal ^ drop the nasal here; thus danM- 'bind' : badhnami (AV.); manth- 'shake' : mathnami (AV.); skambh-

'make firm' : skabhnati; stambh- 'prop' : stabhn&ti {KSf). The root jna- 'know', also loses its nasal; e. g. ja-na-mi\ — 2. The strong form of the suffix, -na, appears in certain 2. persons impv. act., which should have the weak form -ni; e. g. 2. pi. puna-ta for pum-td. On the other hand -nJ appears once instead of -na in 3. sing. injv. viinit^ (AV.). — 3. A few roots ending in consonants take the peculiar ending -ana in the 2. sing. impv. act.; e. g. grh-and'<. — 4. Transfers to the a- conjugation are made from five roots. These are rare in the case of ^r- 'sing' : grna-ta 2.pl. ind., grna-nta 3.pl. impf.; mi- 'damage' : tnina-t 3. sing, injv., amina-nta 3. pi. impf.; jr- 'crush' only srna (AV.) 2. sing. impv. But pr- 'fill' and mr- 'crush' form the regular a- stems prnd- and mrnd- (beside priia- and mrna-), ten forms being made from the former, and five from the latter in the RV.s

Present Indicative.

476. The forms actually occurring, if made irom grabh- 'seize', would be the following:

Active. Sing. \. grbhnami. 2. grbhnasi. grbhnAti. — 2. -i. Du. grbhntthas,

3. grbknitds. — V\. i. grbhmmdsi 3,-ad grbhmmds. 2. grbhnitha s^-aA. grbhnithdna. 3. grbhndnti.

Middle. Sing. i. grbhni. 2. grbhnise. 3. grbhnite. — PI. i. grbhnTmdhe. 3. grbhndte. The forms which actually occur are the following: Active. Sing. i. asnami ('eat', AV. VS.), istiami (AV.), ksinimi (AV.), grnami {gr- 'sing'), grnami (AV. vi. 7i3, gr. 'swallow'), grbhmmi, grkndmi (AV. TS.), janami, jinami, punami, prnami (AV.), badhndmi^ {bandh- 'bind', AV. TS.), mathnami (AV.), minami, rinami (AV.), s'rndmi (AV.), sinami (AV.), stabhnami, strnami (AV.). — 2. asndsi (AV.), imasi, ^ junasi, prndsi, ritiisi, srnasi. -^ 3. asndti, krmati, ksinati {ksi- 'destroy'), grndti, grbhndti, grhndti (AV.), janiti, jindti, junati, pimdti, pr7idti, mindti, musnati (AV.), rindti, sfndii, sinati, skabhnSti, stabhndti (AV.), hrunati. Du. 2. rinithas. — 3. grnitds, prnitas. PI. I. grnimdsi,junimdsi, mimmdsi, srnimasi (AV.); jammds. — I. janJtha; sfrnithdna (AV.). — 3. aindnti (AV.), ksindnti, grndnti, grbhndnti, grhndnti {KN.'TS.), Jandnti, jinanti, jundnti, pundnti, prndnti, prlnanti, badhndnti (AV.), bhrindnti'i, mindnti, rindnti, srindnti, strndnti. Middle. Sing. i. grn^, grbhne, grhne (AV.), vrne. — 2. gfntse'^, vrms^ (Av.), srinTse, hrnise. — 3. krmite (AV.), ksimte (AV.), grnite, punite, prinlti, rinite, vrnite, srathnite, strnite, hrnite. — With -e for -te: grne.

PI. I. grhntmahe (TS. v. 7. 9'), punimahe (Kh. iii. 10*), vrnimdhe^. —

I Cp. Brugmann, Grundriss 2, 627. 7 The only form occurring of the root ' Originally "'jana- with nasal sonant, *jn- bhrJ- 'consume'. na-; see Brugmann, KG. 666 (p. 511). S The form grnisi also occurs in the RV. 3 On this form see V. Negelein 56, note I. as a I. sing, ind., 'I praise', being formed 4 On the origin of this ending see Brug- from an anomalous aorist stem gfra-f-. mann, Grundriss 2, p. 975. 9 According to Whitney 719, once 5 Beside seven present stems of this class vrnimahi, with reference doubtless to RV. there appear denominative stems in -aya v. 2o3, where, however, vfnimahe 'gne is from the same roots. Cp. v. Negelein 50— 52. only the Sandhi accentuation for vj^mmahe 6 Given, along with a number of cognate agne (see above 108 and p. 319, note '3). forms, as from the root badh-, by v. Nege- lein 57. . ;

35° I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

3. as'nate'^, grb/inate, grhtiate (AV.), janate, pundte (AV.) and punate, badhndte, rinate, vrndte. Present Subjunctive.

477. In the 2. 3. sing., subjunctive forms are indistinguishable from the indicative present, if formed with primary endings, and from the injunctive, if formed with secondary endings, as the modal sign a is merged in the strong stem; thus grbhnati may be 3. sing, indicative or subjunctive; grbhn&s may be 2. sing, injunctive or subjunctive. In such forms therefore the sense or con- struction of the sentence can alone decide their value. These as well as un- mistakable subjunctives are rare in this class. Active. Sing. 2. grbhnS.s,jtmas. — 3./.r«a/z (x. 2*, c^.2i),J>rnat{AN'.). —

PI. I. junama, minatna.

Middle Du. i. krinavahai (TS. I. 8. 4'). — PI. I. Janamahai (AV.).

Present Injunctive.

Active. Sing. I. ksiitam. — 2. rinSs (AV. xx. 135"). — 2. janst', minify (AV. vi. iio^). — PI. 3. minan, rindn (viii. 7^*), Jcamnan. Middle. Sing. 2. hrnithas. — 3. grnfta, grbhnita, vrnita. — PI. i. stniimdhi'' Present Optative. In the middle some forms of the optative cannot be distinguished from unaugmented forms of the imperfect, as the modal sign -i is merged in the suffix -m. The forms actually occurring are very few, being found in the

2. 3. sing. only. Active. 3. asniyat (AV.), grhniyat (AV.), jiniyat (AV.), prniydt. Middle. 2./a«7//^aj-(Kh. iv. 5^°). — 3. z/r;«i'a (TS.1. 1.2' = »z/rZ"/a, VS.iv.8).

Present Imperative.

478. The regular ending of the 2. sing. act. is -hi, while -dhi never occurs. Three verbs take -tat as well. One of these, grak-, and three others ending in a consonant, as-, bandk-, stambh-, take the peculiar ending -and. Active. Sing. 2. ^r«i?/z2 ^ (TS. iv. 4. 12^), grmki, grbknihi {AN.),grknaki^ (AV.), janihi, puncihi^ (SV.), pumhi, ;pritihi (AV.), mrnihi, srnahi^ (SV.), srnihiT, strnihi^ (AV.). — With -tat: 'grhiiitat (AV.)/ janttah (TS. AV.), punitat. — With -ana: asana^°, grAana^° (x. 103'^), badhana {KN^, stabhand (AV.) — 3. grnatu, grhnatu, janatu (AV.), punatu, prnatu (AV.), badhnatu (AV.), srnaiu (AV.), sinatu (AV.). Du. 2. asnitdm, grnitam (TS.iv. i. 8^), grhnttam (AV.), prnitdm, srnitdm, strnitdm. — 3. grnitam, puniiam (AV.).

1 grnati (AV. IV. 21=), given by v. Nege- 5 With strong base instead of grnVii, LEIN as a finite form grnate (unaccented), grhmhi. is the dat. sing, of the participle. 6 With strong base and irregular accent. 2 This form is accented jdnat in the Khila 7 Also the transfer form j?-«a(AV.Xlx. 451). (m. 21) after RV. x. 103 (Aufrecht's Rigveda^, 8 Whitney 723 quotes sirnahi from the 682), but it is correct in the corresponding TS. [VI. 3. 14 passage of the AV. (in. 26J. 9 V. Negelein 57> line 6, seems to regard 3 For fjiindt, jhaidt (AV. XIX. 156), given as jnatdt (un- 4 There seems to be no certain example accented), as an anomalous imperative; but of a 3. pi. Avery 240 gntsgrbhnaia, but this it is the ablative of the past participle. form (ix. 14^) appears to have an imperf. 10 Both forms are omitted by Avery 243 sense; he adds vrnata with a query, but I the latter is regarded by Grassmann as a cannot trace the form. participle. VII. Verb. Perfect System. 351

"PI. 7.. grmta'', grbhnlta, jinitd, puniti a.n6. ptmlta', prmtd, mathmta (AV.), mputa (AV.), strmta (AV.). — With -iana: pumtdna, prmtana, srvfltana. — 3. ainantu (AV.), grnantu (AV. TS.), grhnantu (AV.). janantu (AV.), pundnfu, mathnantu (AV.), badhnantu (AV), sfnantu, srXnantu (AV.), smantu (AV.). Middle. Sing. 2. grbhnisva (Kh. iv. 5^^), /r?2w^'« (Kh.ii. 8'), »/-«"-z'«. — 3. strnitam, hrnitam. • • . 'P\. 2. janrdkvam (AV.), vrnidhvdm. — 2- janatami, vrnatam (AV).

Present Participle.

Active, asndnt-, f. -«//- ^ 479- (AV.), imdnt-, usndnt-, grndnt-, grhndnt- jandnt; f. -atf-, jlndnt- (AV.), pundnt-, f. -0:2^/-, prndni-\ prindiit-, maikndnt-, mindnt-, f. -a//-, mumant-, mrndnt-, rindnt-, srindnt-, skabhndnt-, stmdni-,, r . , . f. -«//- (AV.). > . > . Middle, dpnana-, isnand-, grnand-, grhnand- (AV.), janand-, drUnand-, punand-, prmand-, minand-, rinand-, vrnand-, srnand-, irathnand- {KSI.)^ srmand-, strnand-, hrnand-.

Imperfect Indicative.

480. Active. Sing. i. ajanam, asnam. — 2. dkdnas, agrbknas, aprnas, dminas, amusnas, aramnas, arinas, astabhnas; ubhnas, rinas, srathnas. — 3. agrbhnat, agrhnat (AV.), ajanat (AV.), dprnai, aprJnat, dbadhnat, dmathnat, aminat, amusnat, dramnat, drinat, asrnat, dstabhnat, dstrnat; as'nat (AV.),, aubhnat; janat, badhnat (AV.). Du. 2. dmusmtam, arimtam, avrnitam. — PI. 2. drinita. — 3. akrJnan (Av.), agrbhnan, agrhnan (AV. TS.), ajanan^, aptinan, dbadhnan. asrathnariy dstpian; asnan^ (AV.); dsnan (x. 176^), rindn (x. 138'). Middle. Sing. i. dvrni. — 3. dbadhiiita (TS.i. i.io^), dvrmta, dsrinita. —

PI. I. avr?iTma/ii. — 3. agrbhrtataT, djanata (TS. 11. i. 11^); grbhnata.

11. The Perfect System.

Benfey, VoUstandige Grammatik p. 372—381, — Delbruck, Verbum 112 — 134. — Avery, Verb-Inflection 249—253. — Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar p. 279—296 ; Roots 219— 221. — V. Negelein, Zur Spracligeschichte 70—78.

481. Like the present system, the perfect has, besides an indicative, the- subjunctive, optative and imperative moods, as well as participles and an,

augmented tense, the pluperfect. It is of very frequent occurrence, being taken by nearly 300 verbs in the Samhitas. It is formed in essentially the same-' vsray from all roots, its characteristic feature being reduplication.

I. The Reduplicative Syllable^.

482. The reduplicative vowel is as a rule short. It is, however, long in,

more than thirty verbs. These are kan- 'be pleased' : ca-kan; kip- 'be adapted'

: ca-klp-; gr- 'wake' :j3-gr-; grdh- 'be greedy' -.ja-grdh-; trp- 'be pleased' :

ta-trp-; trs- 'be thirsty' : ta-trs-; dhr- 'hold' : da-dhr-; nam- 'bend' : na-nam-;

1 Also the transfer form according to the (the participle nom. sing. m. jdnan is a- class, grndta (AV. v. 279). common). 2 With strong instead of weak base. 6 In prasnan (AV. XI. 332) the Pada text 3 In Khila 11. lO^ wrongly JanJtam. reads pra-dsnan. 4 With fem. prndnii-, a transfer to the 7 Also the transfer forms aminania andi a- class. grnania (vill. 37). 5 V. Negelein 57 also gives the unaugmented 8 On the reduplicative syllable see v. Nege-- form /anan (RV. AV.), which I cannot trace LEIN 70; cp. Brugmann, Grundriss 2, 846. 352 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

"wipe' : ma-mrj-; mrs- 'touch'"toucli' : ma-mrs-; mah- 'be liberal' : ma-mah-; mrj-

: 'grasp' : ra-rabh-; radh- 'be subject' : ra-radk-; ran- 'rejoice' ra-ran-; rabh-

'win' : va-van-; vas- 'desire' : va-vas-va-vas-; vas- vane- 'be crooked' : va-vak-; van- 'win'

vrj- 'twist' : va-vrj-; vrt- 'turn' : va-vrt-; 'clothe' : va-vas-; vas- 'roar' va-vas-;

: : sa-sad-; sah- 'prevail' vrdh- 'grow' : va-vrdh-; vrs- 'rain' va-vrs-; sad- 'prevail'

di- 'shine' : dt-dl-; dhl- 'think' : di-dht-; : sa-sah-; skambh- 'prop' : ca-skambh-; tu- pr- 'swell' :/f-/r-; Aid- 'be hos'die : Ji-kid- (AV.); fu- 'be swift' :/«->-;

'be strong' : tu-tu-; su- 'swell' : su-su-^. a. The reduplication of r (= ar) and / (= al) is always a''; e. g. kr-

: ca-klp-. 'make' : cakr-; grdh- 'be greedy' : ja-grdh-; kip- 'be adapted'

b. The reduplication of a, t, u is made with a, t, u respectively; e. g. bu-budh-. khad- 'chew' : ca-khad-; bin- 'fear' : bibhi-; budh- 'know' : There are, however, certain exceptions to this rule.

1. Roots containing ya or va and liable to Samprasarana in other forms (such as the past passive participle), reduplicate with / and u respectively-'. Those with j'« are:

: 'move on' : tyaj- 'forsake' : ti-tyaj-; yaj- 'sacrifice' : i-yaj-; vyac- 'extend' vi-vyac-; syand- didyut-''. si-syand- (AV.). Similarly cyu- 'stir' : ci-cyu-'^ (beside cu-cyu-), and dyui- 'shine' : u-vap-; vah- Those with va- are: vac- 'speak' : u-vac-; vad- 'speak' : ti-vad-; vap- 'strew' : van- 'win', vas- 'carry' : u-vah- ; svap- 'sleep' : su-svap-. The three roots yam- 'reach', 'wear', however, have the full reduplication; ya-yam-, va-van-, va-vas-; and vac- 'speak' has it optionally: va-vac- beside u-vac-^. — a. The roots bhu- 'be', su- 'generate'^ and il- 'lie', reduplicate with fl: ba-bhu-; sa-su- (beside su-su-, AV.); sa-it- (in the participle ia-say-ana-) ^.

c. In roots beginning with vowels, the reduplication coalesces with the initial of the root to a long vowel; e. g. an- 'breathe' ; an-; av- 'favour' : av-; 'obtain' as- 'eat' : as-; as- 'be' : as-; ah- 'say' : ah-; r- 'go' : ar- (= a-ar-); ap- if : ap-; id- 'praise' : id-; Tr- 'set in motion' : ir-; uh- 'consider' : uh-. But the root begins with i or u, the reduplicative syllable is separated, in the sing,

act., from the strong radical syllable by its own semivowel: i- 'go' : 3. pi. ty-iir, but 2. sing, i-y-e-tha; uc- 'be pleased': 2. sing. mid. uc-i-se, but 3. sing, act. u-v-oc-aT. a. Five roots beginning with prosodically long a, reduplicate not with a, but with the syllable an-. Only two of these, both containing a nasal, viz. ams~ 'attain' and anj- 'anoint', make several forms; the former, 3. sing, dn-dms-a and an-ds-a, pi. I. dn-as-ma, 2. dn-as-d, 3. an-as-ur; mid. sing. 1.3. dn-as-i; subj. pi. I. dn-ds-d-mahai; opt. sing. I. dn-as- ydm^; the latter, dn-ahja (VS. VIII. 29; TS. III. 3. 10"); mid. sing. I. dn-aj-e, pi. 3. dn-aj-re; subj. sing. I. dn-aj-d; opt. 3. sing, dn-aj-ydt. The root ^dh- (reduced from ardh-) 'thrive', which has a nasalized present stem 9, makes the forms dn-rdh-iir (AV.) and dn-rdh-e. Through the influence of these nasalized verbs, their method of reduplication spread to two others which show no trace of a nasal anywhere. Thus from arc- 'praise' occur the forms dn-rc-icr and dn-rc-i; and from arh- 'deserve', dn-rh-ur (TS'.) beside arh-ire (RV'.). There are besides two isolated forms of doubtful meaning, probably formed from

1 The quantitative form of the stem is 4- Due to the vocalic pronunciation of the governed by the law that it may not contain y: ciu- and diut-. (except in the I. sing, act.) two prosodically 5 This root thus shows the transition short vowels; the only exceptions in the from the full to the Samprasarana redupli- weak stem being the two irregular forms cation. iatane, I. sing, mid., and jajam'ir, 3. pi. act. »6 Cp. Brugmann, Grundriss 2, 846. Thus sah- reduplicates sdsah- and once sasdh- 7 These are the only two examples to be (weak). Cp. Benfey's articles 'Die Quanti- met with in the Samhitas of this form of tatsverschiebungeu in den Samhita- und Pada- reduplication.

Texten', GGA. 19 £f. 8 Beside dsaiur, dsdthe, etc., from as-, the 2 In most of the forms from a- and r- unnasalized form of the same root. Cp, Toots, the Pada text has a. Brugmann, Grundriss 2, p. 1211*. 3 These verbs originally had the full redu- 9 Thus fnddhat, rndhydm, rndhdnt-, accord- plication ya- and va- as is shown by the ing to the infixing nasal class. evidence of the Avesta, which has this only;

cp. Bartholomae, if. 3, 38 (S 59). Vn. Verb. Perfect System. 353

nasalized : an-j-j-ur 2, roots (AV'.), from rj- 'attain' (with present stem r"j-) 'i and an-ah-a 2. pi. act., perhaps from amh- 'compress' ^. This form of reduplication evidently arose from a radical nasal having originally been repeated along with the initial vowel, which is lengthened as in many other stems

(cx-kan , etc), while the root itself is shortened by dropping the nasal*. In the modal forms dnaj-a, dnaj-yat, dn-as-amahai the reduplicative vowel seems to have been shortened because an- came to be regarded as containing an augment (like anat, aorist of nai- 'attain'jS. d. A few irregularities in regard to consonants also appear in the formation of the reduplicative stem. i. The root bhr- 'bear' reduplicates with j (as if from Yhr-), making the stem ja-bhr-, forms from which occur nearly thirty times in the RV., beside only two forms from the regular stem ba-bhr-. — 2. In forming their stem, the five roots ci- 'gather', ci- 'observe', cit- 'perceive', /:'- 'conquer', han- 'smite', revert to the original guttural (as in other reduplicated forms) in the radical syllable : ci-ki-, ci-kit-, ji-gi-, ja-ghan-. e. The root vid- 'know' loses its reduplication along with the perfect sense*. Thus vM-a '1 know'; vid-vAms- 'knowing'. Some half dozen other roots show isolated finite forms without reduplication; and four or five more have unreduplicated participial forms. Thus taks- 'fashion' makes taks-athur and taks-ur; yam- 'guide' -.yam-dtur; skambh- 'prop' : skambh-dthur, skambh-urT; nind- 'blame' : nind-ima''; arh- 'be worthy' : arh-ire; cit- 'perceive' : cet-atur

(AV. VS. SV.) *. Three unreduplicated participles are common : das-vsms- and das-i-vdms- (SV.) 'worshipping', beside the rare dadas-vdms-; midh-v&ms- 'bountiful'; sah-vAms- 'conquering', beside sasah-vAms-. There also occurs once the unreduplicated jani-vams- (in the form vi-janus-ah) beside jajhivAms- 'knowing' (firom Yjha-); and the isolated vocative khid-vas may be the equi- valent of *cikhid-vas, from khid- 'oppress' 9.

2. The Root.

483. Like the present and imperfect, the perfect is strong in the sing. act. Here the root, as a rule, is strengthened, while it remains un- changed in the weak forms. But if it contains a medial a or a final a, it remains unchanged in the strong forms (except that a is lengthened in the 3. sing.), while it is reduced in the weak. In the strong stem, the radical vowel takes Guiia, but in the 3. sing, a final vowel takes Vrddhi instead of Guna"- Thus vis- 'enter' makes viv^s-; druh- 'be hostile', dudroh-, krt- 'cut', cakart-; but bhi- 'fear', i. 2. bibhe-, cakdr-, cakar-''K 3. bibhdi-; sru- 'hear', 1.2. iusro-, 3. susrdu-; kr- 'make', i. 2. 3. In the weak stem, on the other hand, the root remains unchanged; thus vivis-, dudruh-, cakrt-, bibhi-, susru-, cakr-. vowel, i. The verb a. Some irregularities occur in the treatment of the radical

{PiN and ninid-ur. 1 According to both the infixing nasal root beside caskaih-and- .), 8 strong radical syllable. class, 3. pi. rnjate, and the a- class, 3. sing. With adds dabhur, }-hjati. 9 Delbruck, Verbum 148, debhur], 2 Probably for *dnaha; cp. the weak stem but this is rather aorist (beside perf. 10 distinction between sasah- beside sasah-. On the origin of this sing. cp. Schmidt, 3 Cp.DELBRUCK.Verbum 145, and Whitney, the I. sing, and the 3. J. Roots, under ahh 'be narrow or distressing'. KZ. 25, 8ff. and Streitberg, IF. 3, 383—386. " distinction is invariable in the RV., 4 Except in the form an-dmia (cp. fiveyK- This to be the same in the Tcu) beside dn-asa {= -^yo/t-e). and the rule seems d mentions cakdra as an 5 Cp. the Greek aor. inf. iv-eyK-etv and the AV. Whitney 793 form is sing, in all perfect iv-^veyK-rea, exception, but this 3. Index; and 6 Cp. Bezzenberger, GGA. 1879, p. 818; the passages given in his AV. KZ. Brugmann, Grundriss /fl^oAa(AV.lll.l8^) is evidently a corruption; J. Schmidt, 25, 3; ' see Whitney's note and cp. p. 356, note 9. 2, 848. the 7 With the strong (nasalized) form of 23 Indo-arische Philologie. I. i. :

354 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

mrj- 'wipe' takes Vrddhi instead of Guna throughout the strong stem: mamarj-^. — 2. Two instances of the strong stem being used in weak forms occur in the RV. pi. I. yuyopma and 3. vivesur' beside the regular vivisur. — 3. The radical vowel of bhu- remains unchanged in the strong as well as the weak forms, interposing v before

-pX. vowels; thus sing. 2. babhu-tha, 'i. babhii-v-ur. — 4. The weak stem of if- 'cross' appears in the RV. as /iiir- and iuiur-; thus sing. 3. /a/ar-a, but p\. 3. /itir-ur, -paTt. titir-vams-, opt. sing. 3. tiUur-ydt^. a. Roots containing medial a leave the radical syllable unchanged in

sing. I. 2., lengthening the vowel in sing. 3.; they reduce it in the weak stem by contraction; syncopation, or loss of nasal. 1. The roots with initial ya- and va-, which reduplicate with the vowels

i and ti'' respectively, take Samprasarana, the result being contraction to T and u. Thus liova. yaj- 'sacrifice': strong stem i-ydj-, weak tj- (= i-ij-)^;

vac- 'speak' : u-vdc- and uc- (= u-uc-); vad- 'speak' : u-vdd- and ud-\ vap-

'strew' : u-vap- and up-; vas- 'dwell' : u-vds- and us-; vah- 'carry' : u-vdh- and uh-. The root va- 'weave' is similarly treated in the form pi. 3. u-v-ur (= u-u-v-ur). Samprasarana of the root also appears in the weak stem of

svap- 'sleep' and of grabh- and grah- 'seize' : su-svdp- and su-sup- ; ja-grdbh-, ja-grdh- 3,T\d.ja-grbh-,ja-grA-. The roots yam-^, van-, z/a.?- 'wear' have the full reduplication throughout; yam- taking Samprasarana and contracting in the

weak stem, van-' syncopating its a, and vas- retaining it throughout: ya-yam- axid yem- {= ya-im); va-vdn- and va-vn-; va-vas- (both strong and weak). 2. More than a dozen roots containing a between single consonants and reduplicating their initial without change, contract the reduplication and root to a single syllable with medial e. The type followed by these verbs was

doubtless furnished by sad- 'sit', which forms the weak stem sed- (= *sazd-), beside the strong sa-sdd-, and supported by yam-, with its weak stem yem-

{= ya-im) beside the strong yayam-T . The other stems showing this contraction

are formed from tap- 'heat', dabA- 'harm', nam- 'bend', pac- 'cook', pat- 'fall', yat- 'stretch', yam- 'guide', rabh- 'seize', labk- 'take', sak- 'be able', sap- 'curse', sap- 'serve'. The roots tan- 'stretch' and sac- 'follow' also belong to this class in the AV., but not in the RV. The root bhaj- 'divide' though not redupli- cating with an identical consonant in its strong stem ba-bhaj-, follows the analogy of this group in forming the weak stem bhej-. 3. Four roots of this form, however, simply syncopate the radical a without contracting. These are jan- 'beget' -.jajh-, stroagjajdn-; pan- 'admire'

: papn-, strong papan- ; man- 'think' : mamn-^; van- 'win' : vavn-, strong vavan-. Three others have this syncopated as well as the contracted form: tan- 'stretch'

: tatn- and ten- (AV.); 'fall' papt- pet-; sac- 'follow' : pat- : and sasc- and sec- (AV.). Syncopation of medial a also takes place in four roots with initial

guttural: khan- 'dig' : cakhn- {KN?j, strong cakhdn-; gam- 'go' -.jagm-, strong jagdm-; ghas- 'eat' -.jaks-, strong jaghds-; han- 'smite' -.jaghn-, strong jaghdn-. 4. In a few roots with medial a and a penultimate nasal, the latter

is lost in the weak stem 9. Thus krand- 'cry out' : cakrad-; tarns- 'shake' :

tatas-; skambh- 'prop' : caskabh- (AV.), strong caskdmbh-; stambh- 'prop' :

1 The same irregularity appears in the 6 The analogy of yam- is followed by present stem. yaj- in the one form yeje (beside ye); cp. 2 Cp. Brugmann, Giundriss 2, p. 12231. note 5. 3 Cp. V. Negelein 741. 7 See Bartholomae, Die ai. ^-Formen im 4 But they had the full reduplication in schwachen Perfect, KZ. 27, 337—366; Brug- the Ilr. period; cp. Brugmann, Grundriss 2, mann, Grundriss 2, p. 1222; cp. v. Negelein p. 1220^. 71^. 5 In the one form yeje (beside tje), yaj- 8 The strong stem does not occur. follows the analogy of yam-, preserving a 9 Cp. Brugmann, Grundriss 2, p. 1217''. trace of the old reduplication ya-. Vn. Verb. Perfect System. 355 tastabk-, strong tastdmbh-. Similarly, from dambh-, the nasalized form of dabh-^ 'harm', is formed dadabh-, strong daddmbh- (AV.); and from rambh-, the nasalized form of ^a^i-^ 'seize', rarabh-. From (/aw/- 'bite', only the participle dadahdms- occurs. The root bandh- 'bind', both loses its nasal and contracts, forming the weak stem bedh- (AV.) beside the strong babdndh- (AV.). b. Roots with final a retain that vowel in the strong stem, but in the weak reduce it to «^ before consonants and drop it before vowels. Thus dha- 'put' employs dadha- in the strong forms, dadhi- and dadh- in the weak.

3. Endings.

484. The endings in the indicative active are all peculiar (excepting the secondary -wa* and -ma), while in the middle they are identical (excepting the 3. sing, -e and 3. pi. -reY with the primary middle endings of the present. They are the following: 3S6 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

3. Roots with final -r add the endings -fM, -ma, and -se direct (ex- cepting two or three forms), but -re always with connecting -i-; thus ^r- 'do'

: cakdr-tha, cakr-ma, cakr-s^, but cakr-i-rd. Connecting -i- before the other endings appears in Sr-i-tka, ar-i-ma (r-'go'); and va. jabhr-i-se {b/tr- ''htax'). 4. Roots with final consonant add -tha, -ma; se, -re direct if the last syllable of the stem is prosodically short, but with the connecting vowel

-i- if that syllable is long'. Thus tatdn-tha\ jagan-ma, jagrbh-md, yuyicj-ma; dadrk-se, vivit-se; caklp-re', tatas-re, duduh-re', pasprdh-re, yuyuj-re, vivid-re' and others; but as-i-i/ia, uvoc-i-tha, vived-i-tha; uc-i-md, papt-i-md, sed-i-ma; tatn-i-se; ij-i-re, jagm-i-re, tataks-i-re^, yet-i-re. The only exception is vit-tha, which as an old form inherited from the IE. period (Greek oia-'ha.) without reduphcation, remained unaffected by the influence of reduplicated forms. o. Six roots ending in consonants add rire'^ instead of -re: cikii-rire (beside the more usual cikit-re), jagrbh-rire (once beside the aiv.iS. jagrbh-ri), bubhuj-rire (once), vivid- rire (once beside vivid-re), sasrj-rire (once), and diiduh-rire (once in the SV. for the common duduh-re of the RV.)*. b. Vowel endings. Before terminations beginning with vowels final radical vowels are variously treated, i. I, if preceded by one consonant, becomes y, if preceded by more than one, iy\ e. g. from bhi- 'fear', bibhy- atur, bibhy-ur; but from sri- 'resort', sisriy-e. — 2. Final w ordinarily becomes

uv ; e. g. yu- 'join' : yuyuv-e; sru- 'hear' : susruv-e; su- 'swell' : susuve. But

u becomes v in ku- 'call', e. g. ju-hv-e; and iiv in bhu- 'be' and sU- 'bring forth', even in strong forms 5; e. g. 3. sing, ba-bhuv-a, sasuv-a^. — 3. Final -r becomes r; e. g. from kr- 'make', cakr-d, cakr-e. But -f becomes ir in titir-ur

from tf- 'cross', and in 3. sing, tistir-e, part, tistir-and-, from sir- 'strew' (the only root with a r vowel preceded by two consonants that occurs in the perfect). Perfect Indicative,

4.85. The forms actually occurring, if made from kr- 'make', would be the following: Active. Sing. I. cakdraT. 2. cakdrtha. 3. cakdra. — Du. 2. cakrdthur. cakrdiur. - - PI. I. cakrmd. 2. cakrd. 3. cakrur.

Middle, Sing. I . cakre. 2. cakrse. 3. cakre. Du. 2. cakrCithe. cakrdte. — PI. I. cakrmdhe. 2. cakrdhve. 3. cakrire^. The forms which actually occur are the following:

Active. Sing. i. asa, uvdpa (TS. i. 5. 3^), cakara, ciketa [cit- 'observe'), jagama, jagrdbha, jagrdha {P^ .)'), jaghdsa (AV. vi. 117^)", jihTla'^^, tatdpa, dudroka, papana, babkuva, bibkdya, mitnaya (mi- 'diminish'), rarana, rirebha,

vivesa, ve'da", sisraya, susrdva. The TS. (111.5. 5') has the Vrddhi form z/awara {vr- 'cover').

1 This Is in accordance with the rhythmic 5 Instead of the normal dv. rule that the stem may not have two proso- 6 This is the only perfect form of ysii- dically short vowels in successive syllables. occurring. 2 The strength of this rhythmic rule is 7 The I. and 3. of dha- 'put' would both well illustrated by the same root vac- having be dadhau; of vid- 'find', both vivida. the two collateral forms vavak-se and Hc-i-se; 8 The 3. pi. of vid- 'find' would be vividre. cp. also the unique lengthening, in a weak 9 AV. UI. 18^ reads jagraha, but this must form, of the radical a in sa-sah-i-se (beside be emended to jagraha; see Whitney's the usual sasah-) and the Guna \a yuyop-i-md. note. 3 The additional r may have come into ^° j'aghasa here is a misprint iorjaghdsa: use under the influence of forms from roots see Whitney's note on the passage. in r^ like dadhr-ire from \dhr: " Also in AV. IV. 32^ but written jThida 4 The ending -rire is once also added to in the Samhita text, but ji- in Pada. See a root ending in a vowel: dad-rire, from Whitney's note. yda-. 12 Unreduplicated form. VII. Verb. Perfect System. 357

2. iyatha^ and iyetha, cakdrtha, jagdntha {gam- 'go'), jaghdnthajabhartha, jigetha {ji- 'conquer'), tatdntha, dadatha, dadhdrtha {dhr- 'hold'), dadhatha, ninetha, papatha {pa- 'drink'), papratha ', babhatha, yayantha {yam- 'guide'), yaydtha, vavdntka, vavdrtha {vr- 'cover'), vivydktha {vyac- 'extend'), vdttha '°, sasdttha {sad- 'sit'). — With connecting -/-: apitha (AV.), aritha {r- 'go'), ivifha {av- 'favour'), asitha {as- 'be'), uvocitha {uc- 'be pleased'), cakartitka {krt- 'cut'), tatdrditha {trd- 'split'), dudohitha, dudrohitha (AV.), babhavitha, rurojitha, rurodhitha, rurohitha (AV.), vavdksitha, viveditha {vid- 'find'), vivesitha. 3. ana, andmsa and anaia {ami- 'attain'); dpa, ara {r- 'go'), ava, Asa {as- 'eat'), dsa {as- 'be' and as- 'throw'), aha {ah- 'say'), iyaya {i- 'go'), uvdca {vac- 'speak'), uvdsa {vas- 'shine'), uvaha, uvdca {uc- 'be pleased'), cakarta {krt- 'cuf), cakdrsa {krs- 'be lean', AV.), cakira, cakrdma, cakhdda, cakhSna (VS.V.23), cacdksa, cdcarta{crt-'hm.A\KY.), cacdra{hN,), cacchanda, caskdnda,

caskdmbha, cikdya {ci- 'gather'), cikaya {ci- 'observe'), ciketa^ (cit- 'perceive'), jagdma, jagrAha, jaghdna, jaghAsa, jajAna, jajdra (AV.), jabhdra^, jigAya {ji- 'conquer'), jujosa, juhava {hu- 'call'), tatdksa, tatarda, taiarha (AV.), taiAna, tatApa, tatara, taisara {tsar- 'approach stealthily'), tastdmbha, tatana (RV\), tityAj'a, tutAva {tu- 'be strong'), tutSda, daddmbha {dambh- 'harm', AV.), daddrsa, daddbha {dabh- 'harm'), dadara {dr- 'split'), dadAs'a {das- 'worship'), dadharsa, dadhAra, dideva (div- 'play', AV.), didesa (AV.), did- yota (AV.), didaya (VS. xii. 34), nanasa {nas- 'be lost'), nanAha^ (AV.), nanama, nindya, papaca (AV.), papata (AV.), papada, paprA^, pipe'sa, pipesa, pipaya, puposa, babdndha (VS. AV.), babarha {brh- 'make strong', AV.), babhdnja ' {bhanj- 'break'), babhdja, babhuva, bibhaya, bibheda, mamanda {mand- 'exhilarate'), mamdrsa, 7namAtha {math- 'shake', AV.), mamada {mad- 'exhilarate'), mamara {mr- 'die'), mamArja {mrj- 'wipe', AV.), i. mimaya {ma- 'bellow'), 2. mimAya {mi- 'fix'), 3. mimaya {mi- 'damage'), mimdya {mi- 'damage', AV.), mimetha {mith- 'alternate'), mimydksa, mumoda, yayama, yuydja {KST.), yuyddha, yuyopa, rardksa, rarAda, raradha, rireca, ruroca, rurSja, ruroha (AV.), vavaksa, vavanda, vavdrta, vavdrdha, vavarha, vavaca^ {vac- 'speak'), vavara {vr- 'cover'), vavrAja, vavdrta, vavana, vivAya {vT- 'be eager'), vive'da, vive'sa, vive'sa, vivyaca, ve'da^°, sasaka (AV.), sasApa (AV.), sisraya {sri- 'resort'), susoca, sus'rava, sasarja, sasAda, sasana, sasAra, sasuva, sasaha, sisedha, sisaya, susAva {su- 'press'). — With the ending -au: tastkdu, daddu, dadhdu, papdu (pa- 'drink'), paprdu, yaydu. Du. 2. aratkur, avdthur, asathur, lyathur, isdthur, updthur {Yvap^,

uhdthur { Yvah-), cakrdthur, cakhyathur {khya- 'see'), jagrbhdthur, Jagmdthur, jigyathur {ji- 'conquer'), jijinvdthur^, taksathur^°, tasthdthur, daddthur, dadhathur, ninyathur, papdthur {pd- 'drink'), paprathur, pipinvdthur '^, pipyathur {pi- 'swell'), petathur {Ypat-), babhuvdthur, mimiksdthur, yayafhur, yemdthur riricdthur, viddthur'^°, vividdthur, vivydthur {vyd- or vi- 'envelope'), { Yyam-), seddthur {Ysad-), skambhdthur^°.

1 The irregularity of this form which 5 Overlooked by Whitney, Roots, under

occurs once in the RV. and once in the AV. ynak- : AV. VI. 1331. beside the regular iyeiha is hard to explain. 6 The only occurrence of a for au unless 2 In VI. 177 this form stands for the 2. sing. Jaha is a verbal form. oi p-ath- 'extend'; see Neisser, BB. 30, 302. 7 Omitted by AVERY 250. 3 Occurs twice in the RV. also with the 8 RVi. beside the ordinary uvdca. irregular accent cikeia. 9 From Jinv- 'quicken', a secondary root 4 It is very doubtful whether/o.4ovni. 4537 starting from the present stem ;i-nu- of ji- is 3. sing, perfect of ha- 'leave' (cp. Delbruck, 'quicken'; see 469, a, 7. 10 Verbum p. 124), X\kepapra. Pischel, Vedische Unreduplicated form. 11 started Studien I, 163 f., thinks this word with the From Jiinv- 'fatten', which from following ko should be read/a/ia/Jo 'abandon- a present stem of the -nu class; see 469, ing'. Roth thinks {pw.);ahd is an interjection. a, 7. 358 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

Du. 3. apatur, avatur, asatur {as-'aXXain'), asaiur, lydtur, uhdtur{Y'^'^^')> cakratur, cikyatur {ci- 'observe'), cetatur\ jagmatur, jajhdtur {jan- 'beget'), Jahatur{ka-'\^a-wt'}, taiaksdtur, tastkdtur, dadatur, paprdtur {pra-'iiW), petdtur, babhuvdtur, mamdtur {ma- 'measure';, mimiksdtur {miks- 'mix'), yamdtur^, yematur (yyam-), vavaksdtur, vavj'dhatur, sasratur^ iV^f'^ ^)> sisicatur, seddtur {Ysad-).

PI. I. anasma {ami- 'attain'); cakrmd, jaganma, jagrbhmd, tasthi-md

{ Ystka-), dadhi-md, yuyujma, rarabhmd, rari-md {ra- 'give'), vavanmd, vidmd^,

susruma (AV.), susuma. — 'With connecting -/- : arimd, dsimd {as- 'be', AV.), ucimd{Yvac-), udimd (Yvad-), usimd (waj- 'dwell', AV.), cerimd {Y ('^^-j AN.), jaghnimd {Yhan-, AN.), Jihimsimd (AV. TS.), dadasimd, nindima^, mnima^ (TS.iii. 2.8''), paptima, babhiivima yuyopimdT yemimd, vavandima, {AN .), , vidmd^, sekimd {Ysak-, AV.), sascima, susudima {Y^ud-), sedima^ {Ysad-). 2. anaha'^ (RV.), anasd {ami- 'attain'); usd {vas- 'shine'), cakrd, jagmd^° (AV. TS.VS.), dadd, babhuvd, yayd, vidd'^, iasasd, seka{Yiak-), sedd {V sad-). 3. anaiur {ami- 'attain'), anrci'ir {Y^''^-), anrdhur (AV.), anrhur (TS. III. 2.8'); api'tr, arur, aiur {ai- 'attain'), asur {as- 'be'), ahur, ly'ir, isur {is-

'send'), uci'ir, udur {und- 'wet', AV.), uvur {va- 'weave'), usur {vas- 'shine'),

uhiir {Yvah-), cakramur, cakrur, cakhiii'ir {khan-, PN.), cSklpur {AN.), cikitur,

cikyur {ci- 'perceive'), cerur {Year-, AV.), jagrbhiir, jagrhi'ir {PN.), jagmi'cr, jaghnur {]//ian-, AV.), jajanur'^^ axid jaj'iiur {Jan- 'htgtt!), j'abkrur {Y bhr-), jahur {ha- 'leave'), jaharur'^'- {Yhr-, AV.), jagrdhur, jigyur {ji- 'conquer'), jugupur'^^, jujumr, jujuvur {Yju-), takmr''^, tataksur, tastabhur, tasthur, tatrpur

(AV.), tstrsur, titirur{Ytr-), tustuvi'ir, dadsiiir, dadi'ir, dadhtir, dadhrsur {AY.), didyutur (TS. 11. 2. 12^), duduhur, dudruvur (AV.), debhur {dabh- 'harm'),

nanaksur, ninidur, papiir {pa- 'drink'), papt'ir {pat- 'fall'), paprur {pra- 'fill'), pipiiur, pipyur {Yp'^')i babhuvur, bibhidur, bibhyur {bhT-'it.ax'), bedhur {bandh-, AV.), mamur {ma- 'measure'), mamrur {mr- 'die'), mSmrjur, tnamriur, mimiksi'ir {Y myaks-), mimyur {mi- 'fix'), yamur'^^, yayur, yuyudhur, yemur, raradhur {Y>'adh-), riripur, ruruc'ir, ruruhur, vavakmr, vavrjur, vavrur {vr- 'cover'), vavaiur {vai- 'desire'), vavrtitr, vavrdhur, vidur^, vividur, viviiur and (once) vivesur'^^, vivisur, iaiasiir, iairamur, iaiadi'tr, iiiiuvur, iekur {Yiak-), saicur, syand-, sasrur, sisyadur { Y AV.), sisicur, susupur { Ysvap-), susuvur (VS. xx. 63), susruvur (AV.), sediir (Ysad-), sepur, skambhur''*. Middle. Sing. i. ije, idhe {idh- 'kindle'), isi {is- 'move'), uhe {uh- 'con- sider'),

1 AV. m. 212; SV. I. 2. 2. 110, explained by 9 This form (vi. 48') may be 2. pi. from Benfey, SV. Glossary, as 3- da. perf. without a root amh- for *anaha. reduplication. Whitney, note onAV.ni. 212, 1° Cp. Whitney's note on AV. vi. 974. thinks it is a corruption for cetaiu, but quotes ^^ This form without syncope occurs once Weber as taking it for 3. du. perf. from cat- in the RV., jajiiur twice. 12 'frighten into submission'. Whitney on AV. Iil. 96 would emend 2 Unreduplicated form with present meaning this irregular form, the reading of all the (VI. 671). Mss., to jahrvj-. 3 sisralur (RVi.) is an anomalous 3. du. pres. 13 This is the only finite form of this ind. of s}'-, according to the reduplicating secondary root, and it occurs in a late hymn class with perfect ending instead oi*sis)-tds. (vii. 1039); the past participle gupita- also 4 The form vivisma which Avery gives occurs twice in the tenth book. This ^gup- with a query is probably an error for was doubtless evolved from the denomina- vivismas I. pi. pres. (vi. 235' *). tive gopa-yd- 'act as a cowherd'. 5 Cp. IF. 3, 9f.; ZDMG. 48, 519- ' Unreduplicated form occuring once. 6 The metre requires ninJma (see BR. 15 With irregular strong vowel. under tit- 'lead'). 16 With unsyncopated vowel occurring 7 With strong radical syllable. once; 3. sing, tatne. 8 Unreduplicated form. VII. Verb. Perfect System. 359

i. cakrsi, cicyuse, tastM-se (AN.), dadfksi {dfi- 'see'), dadhi-si, paprse> yuyukse Vyuj-, AV.), rari-se, ( ririkse ( Vric-), vavaksi ( Yvac-), vavrse {vr- 'choose'), vivitse {vid- 'find'). — -/- : jAa^r- With connecting ucis^ ( and Yvac-), upise iYvap-), uhise {Yvah-), Jajnise {YJan-), Jabhrise, tatnise, bedhise{hN), iepisi {Ysap-, AV.), sasahise\ Snaje 3. ( Y<^nj-), anase ( Yams-), anrce, anrdhe; ase {as- 'throw'), ij'e iVyj-), iU_{Yid-), idhe (YtdA-), tsi (is- 'move'), uce {uc- 'be pleased'), upe uhe"" {uk- 'consider'), ( Y^'^P-), cake ( Yka-), cakrade ( Y^rand-), cakrame, cakre, caksadi (ksad- 'divide'), caklpe (AV.), cikiti ( Y^t-), cuksiibM {ksubh- 'quake', AV.), cucyuve, jagrhe^, Jagme {Ygam-), jajni {\fjan-\ jabhre ( Ybhr-), jigye l/yV-), jihTle jujuse, 'call'), ( ( Yf>-^4-), juhve {hu- tatakse, tate ( Yta- 'stretch' = //a«-), tatne tatre [tra- 'protect'), tasthe ( Ytan-\ ( Ystka-), titvise, tistire'^ {str- 'strew'), dddrse, dade, dadhanvS'^, dadke, dadhre {dhr- 'hold'), dadhvase {dhvams- 'scatter'), duduke, dudhuve ( Ydhu-, AV.), nanakse'-, nunude, netne {Ynam-), paprkse'^, pape' (pa- 'drink'), pdprathe (RV.) z.n6. papratke

(RV^ AV'.), papre^ ( //ra-, AV.), paspase [spas- 'see'), pipise, pipise, pipile, pipye (;>r-'sweir), pece ( Ypac-), babadhe, babhre ( Ybhr-), bedhe{ Ybandh-, KSf^, bheje {bhaj- 'divide'), mami (ma- 'measure'), mdmahe, mamrje, mimikse^, yuyuje, yuyuve {yu- 'join'), yeje'^ iYyv'-), yeme (l/>a/«-), rarapse, rarabhe ririce, {Y^'^'^bh-), ruruce, rebhi (ifrabh-, AV.), vavakse {Y'"'^^'?-)^ vavande,

vavni ( Yvan-), vavri {vr- 'cover'), vavase {vas- 'desire'), vavase (viii. 4*, vas- 'clothe')", vavrje, vavrie, vavrdhe, vide {vid- 'know'), vivide (vid- 'find'), vivye' {vya- 'envelope'), vivye (vT- 'be eager'), s'asame'(YS.xx.xiii.8y), sasrathe, sasre

{sr- 'crush'), sisriye {sri- 'resort'), susruve, 'swell'), s'epe' susuve [su- ( Y^<^p-, AV.), sasahe^'^ and sasahe^^, sasrje, sasre {sr- 'flow'), sasvaje, sisice, sisyade {Y^yind-, AV.), susuvi {su- 'bring forth').

Du. 2. a/a^/5e ( |Aa/- 'attain'), tjatke{K^.), uhySthe''^ {vr.e,6^), cakramathe, cakrathe, cike'tke'^^ {ci- 'note'), dadtithe, dadhdthe, mamnathe {Yftian-), rarathe {ra- 'give'), riricathe, sasrathe {Ysr-). 3. dsate'^, cakrate, dadhate, pasprdhdte, bhejate {bhaj- 'divide'), mamite 'think'), {ma- 'measure'), mamnate {man- yuyudhste, yemste { Yyam-), rebhate {Yrabh-, AV.), vdvrdhste^^, sasvajste. PI. I. bubhujmdhe, mumucmdhe, vavrmdhe {vr- 'choose'), sdsadmahe {sad- 'prevail'), sasrjmdhe. — 2. dadhidhve.

3. Snaj're{Y^nj-); caklpre, cikitre'{Y':ii-), jagrbhre^', jahi-re { Yha-, AV.),

juhure, juhiir^, tatasre { Ytarns-), tasthi-re, dddrsre, dadhi-re, dadhre, duduhre, nunudre, pasprdhre, pipisre, mami-re {ma- 'measure'), mumucre, yuyujre, riricre,

1 With strong radical vowel: cp. p. 356, 9 yeje occurs three times in the RV. (only note 2. with a- and /r<7-), ije occurs twice as 3. sing., 2 With passive sense. once as I. sing. 3 Omitted by Avery 250. 1° Whitney, Roots, under vas- 'clothe'. 4 From dhanv- a transfer root from dhan- This form is placed by BR. and Grassmann 'run'. Cp. Whitney, Roots 8r. under a root vas- 'aim'. 5 From naks- 'attain', a secondary form " X. 10410 (Avery sasahe), Pada text sasahe. of nas- 'attain'; cp. Whitney, Roots 87. 12 VIII. 9615, (Avery sasahe), Pada text sasahe 6 rv. 437. This form (which is perhaps cp. RPr. 580, 582, 587, 589. rather to be taken as l. sing.) may be formed 13 This seems to be an anomalous form from p-a!is-, a secondary form of prach- for iihathe [uh- 'consider'; cp. Grassmann). 'ask'; cp. Benfey, O. u. O. 3,256; Del- 14 Irregular form (RV'.) for *ciky-athe. BRUCKp. 126'*; Whitney, Roots, and BR. s. v. 13 Thus irregularly accented v. 66^. This prach-. form, asaie, also occurs five times unaccented. 7 papre, given by Avery 250 with a query, >6 The AV. has also the transfer form does not seem to occur in the RV. vavrdhele. 8 From miks; a desiderative formation 17 See notes on AV. xviii.346 in Whitney's from mis- ; cp. Whitney, Roots. Translation. 360 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

rurudhre, vavakre {vatic- 'move crookedly')', vavas're' (vsJ- 'bellow'), vivijre, vidre^, vividre, vivipre, vivisre, sasadre. — With connecting -/'-: arhire^,

(?«>£ (Kh. I. 11'), tjire {Yyaj-), idkire (Yidk-), trire'^, tsire'^ (is- 'send',

AV.), ucire {Yvac-, AV.), Hhire ( ]Az/a/5-), cakrire, cacaksire (VS. XL. 10 : Up.), tataksire, tatnire jagmire, jajnire ( YJan-), jabhrire ( Ybhr-), jihilire ( Yhid-),

tastrire^ AV.), teniri Yti^n-, VS. TS. AV.), dadhanvireT , dadhire ( Ytan-), ( /j-Zf-, ( (Kh.i. 43), dadhrire{Y dhr-), papire (pa- 'di'mk'), bedhire(Ybandh-,KSr), bhejire Y^y(iks-),yetiri( Yy'it-),yemire Yyam-), ( Ybhaj-), mimiksire ( Y>niks-^ma!, and ( rurucire (K.\i.i.i2^), rebhire (Yrabh-), lebhire (Ylabh-), vavaksire, vavandiri, vavasire, sascire (Ysac-), secire (Ysac-, AV.), sedire (Ysad-). — With ending vividrire, sasrjrire. -r'we : cikitrire ( Ycit-), jagrbhriri, dadrire ( Yda-), bubhujrire,

Moods of the Perfect. 486. Modal forms of the perfect are of rare occurrence in the Samhitas except the RV. They are made from the perfect stem in the same way as

from the present stem. It is, however, not always possible to distinguish modal forms of the perfect from those of other reduplicated stems (present reduplicating class, reduplicated aorist, and intensive) either in form (because the reduplication is in many instances the same) or in meaning (because the

perfect is often used in a present sense).

Perfect Subjunctive.

487. The normal method of forming the stem is to add -a-* to the strong perfect stem, accented on the radical syllable. In the active the secondary endings are more usual; e. g. tiistdv-a-t. If the primary endings are added in the active, the reduplicative syllable is in several forms 9 accented, as jt'i;'os-a-si^°. In about a dozen forms, nearly all with secondary

endings, the weak stem " is employed, but whether the reduplicative syllable was then accented is uncertain, because the examples that occur are un- accented. Middle forms, numbering not many more than a dozen, occur only

in the 3. sing., with the ending -te, and in the 3. pi. with the ending -anta.

Active. Sing. I. anaja'^^.-— 1. jujosasi, diddyasi, paprcasi^^ ; cakradas, cakdnas, cikitas (Y cit-), Jiijosas, tatanas, dadasas, diddyas, paprdthas, piprayas, bubodhas, mamddas, mamdhas, mumucas^^, rardnas, sasdhas, si'isudas. 3. ciketati (Y cit-), jiijosati, dddasati, dadhdrsati, didesati^^, didayati,

bubodhaii, mumocaii, vavdrtati; cakdnat, caklpat (AV.), ciketat ( V^«V-), jaghdnat, jabhdrat, jugurat (gur- = gr- 'greet'), jujosat, j'ujuvat^^, tatanat, tustdvat, dddasat, dadhdnat, dadhdrsat, paprdthat, paspdrsat, piprdyat,

mamddat (KN.), mamandat, diddyat, mumucat'^'', tnumurat (inur- = mr-'' crasW),

mumocat, rdrdnat, vavdrtat and vavrtat^*, vavanat (TS. 11. 4. 5'), vividat^^, susravat, susuvaf^^, sasdhat, susudat.

1 With reversion to the original guttural. 9 Cp. the accentuation of the reduplicating 2 With shortening of the radical vowel. class. 3 Without reduplication. 1° Except the forms diddyasi, didayati, 4 In RV. regularly erire. Pp. a-Trire (but dadhdrsati and vavdrtati. 11 in I. 6^ for erire the accentuation should be The two roots muc- and dhfs- make sub- erire = d Trire). The AV. has once sam-Thire junctive forms from both the strong and (xiv. 146). weak stem. 5 isire with irregular accent is probably 12 RV. V. 541: this form (Pp. anaja) is to be regarded as a present (450, 2). regarded by Delbruck ize*" and Avery 6 IF. 8, Anzeiger 13. 251 as a 2. pi. ind. 7 From the secondary root dhanv- = dhan- 13 With double modal sign -a-. 'run'. 14 With weak radical syllable. 8 Two subjunctive forms with double 15 Always d-didesati in relative clauses. modal sign -a- occur: paffcasi and vavfdhati. VII. Verb. Perfect System. 361

Du. 2. ciketathas, ji'ijosathas; ninithas'- (i. 181'). PI. I. cakdnama, tatdnama, susdvama. — 2. fuj'osatha, bubodhatha. — ^. jujusan'^, jujosan, tatdnan, paprdthan, mamddan. Middle. Sing. i. sasvacdi^ {Ysvanc-). — ^.ji'cjosate^, tatdpate, dad/irsate^, yuyojate, vavrdhate^ , sasdmate {sam- 'labour'). — PI. i. andsamahai.

Perfect Injunctive.

488. There are a few singular active and 3. pi. middle forms which must be classed as injunctives, being identical in form with the corresponding un- augmented persons of the pluperfect. These are: Sing. 2. sasas{= *sasas-s). — 3. dudhot (dhu- 'shake'), siset^ (si- 'bind'); sasvdr (= *sasvar-t, from svar- 'sound'); with connecting -T-\ dadharsit. PI. 3. cdkramanta, cakdnanta, tatdnanta, dadabhanta, paprathanta,

mamahanta, rumcanta^, vavrdhd7ita'^, vivyacanta.

Perfect Optative.

489. This mood is formed by adding the accented optative modal suffix combined with the endings (416 a) to the weak perfect stem. The active forms axe -the commonest, occurring more than twice as often as those of the middle.

a. There are a few irregularities in the formation of this mood. i. The radical vowels of pa- 'drink', sru- 'hear', and kr- 'make', being treated as before the -ya of the papT-, susru-, passive (444), the stems of these roots appear before the optative suffix as and cakri-. — 2. The vowel of the reduplicative syllable an- is shortened (as if it contained the augment) in anajyat {ya)!/-). — 3. A connecting -i- is interposed in jalis-t-yat, while the radical i is combined with the ending in iisrlta. — 4. A transfer according to the analogy of the a- conjugation is ririses; possibly also siset^'.

Active. Sing. i. anaiyam; jagamyam, paprcyam, riricyam, vavrtySm. juguryas (gur- = gr- 'gxtti'),pupusyas, pupuryas {pur- =pr-, 2. cakriyasT ,

'fill'), babhuyas, rtirucyas, vavrtyas, vivisyas, lusruyas^. 3. anajyat; cacchadyatjakfiyat^ {ghas- '&aX'),jagamyat, jagayilt {ga-'go'), jagrbhyat, juguryit, tutujyAt, tuturyit {Ytur- = tf-), ninTyat^°, papatyat (AV.), papiyat'^'^ (/;> 'drink'), paprcyat, babhuyat, mamadyat, riricyat, vavrtySt, sasadyat (AV.), sasrjyat, sasahyat. Du. 2. jagamyatam, miruyitam. PI. I. tuiuryama, vavrtyama, susuydma, sasahyama. 3. jagamyur, tatanyur, dadhanyur, mamrdyur, vavrjyur, vavrtyttr. Middle. Sing. i. vavrtxya. — 2. caksamithas, vavrdhithas. — ^.jagrasita, dudhuvita, mamrjxta, vavrtita, sisritd {sri- 'resort'), susucita. PI. I. vavrtimahi. There also occurs in the middle one precative form: Sing. 2. sasah-i-s-thas. Perfect Imperative. 490. The regular perfect imperative is formed like the present impera- tive of the reduplicating class, the 3. sing, active being strong. Hardly more

reduplicating 1 Abnormal form without modal sign or of the root si-) according to the injunctive strong radical vowel; cp. HiRT, IF. 12, 220. class; or a reduplicated aorist 2 With weak radical syllable. (Grassmann and Whitney 868 a). 6 5 this form. 3 This form occurs only once (ill. 3310) See note on beside the j-aor. namsai, and may therefore 7 Cp. v. Negelein 66. 8 radical vowel. be an irregular redupl. aorist, to which it With lengthened interposed -l-. is doubtfully assigned by WmTNEY 863 a. 9 With 10 IF. 220. 4 SV. jujosate, Cp. HiRT, 12, of the final radical vowel 5 This form, however, might be a transfer " With change present optative from sa- (the collateral form a to I. 362 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

than twenty regular forms occur, nearly all of them being active. There are also some irregular imperatives, being transfer forms which follow the analogy of the a- conjugation, made from either the strong or the weak perfect stem.. Active. Sing. 2. cakandhi, cikiddhi {]/ cit-), dididdhi^ {Ydis-), piprihi,

mumugdhi ( Ymuc-')^ sasadhi ( y/aj- 'order'), susugdhi ( yiuc-). 3. cakantu, didestu\ habhutu'^, mamdttu, mumoktu, rdrantu. Du. 2. jajastdm ^ (Jas- 'be exhausted'), mumuktam, vavrktam.

PI. 0,. jujustana, didistana {Ydis-), vavrttana^. Middle. Sing. 2. dadkisvd, mimiksvd^, vavrtsva^- Pl. 2. dadhidhvam, vavrddkvam^ (viii. 20'*). — 3. With the unique ending -ram: dadrsram (AV.)* 'let be seen'. a. The transfer forms are: Active. Yiu. 2. j'ujosatam, mumocatam. — PI. 2. mumocata'^, rarandta^"

(I. 171'). Middle. Sing. 2. piprdyasva, mamahasva, vavrdhasva, vavrsasva. — PI. 3. mamahantam. Perfect Participle.

Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar 802— 807. — Delbruck, Verbum 229. — Lindner 84 and 216.

491. There is an active and a middle participle, and both occur fre- quently. Both are formed from the weak stem of the perfect, being accented on the suffix. The strong form is made by adding the suffix -vSms to the unstrengthened perfect stem; e. g. cakr-vS7ns-, jaghan-vams-. If the stem is reduced to a monosyllable, the suffix is nearly always added with the connecting vowel -z- ", zs papt-i-vdms- ixom. pat- 'fall'. Unreduplicated stems, however, do not take the connecting vowel '^ as vidvdms-. The weak stem of the active participle is identical in form with the 3. pi. ind. act. if written with

-us instead of -ur; e. g. cakrus-. The middle participle is formed by adding the suffix -a«a to the weak perfect stem; thus from cakr- is made cakr-and-.

Active. 492. cakrvStns-'^i, cakhvams-'^^, cikitvains- (f cikitisi-), jaganvdms- (f j'ag- musi-), jagrbhvdms-, jagmivdms- (TS. iv. 2. i* for RV. x. i^ jaganvdms-), jaghanvdms- (f d-jaghnusi-), janivdfns-'^^, JigTvdms- {fi- 'conqa.&x'), jujurvdms-

1 Whitney, Roots 73, doubtfully assigns 10 Owing to the strong radical vowel this this and the cognate forms didesati, didista should perhaps be regarded rather as a to the reduplicating present class. 2. pi. subjunctive. (The final vowel is long 2 With ii unchanged, as elsewhere in in the Pada text also.) The accent of these strong forms. transfer forms was perhaps, except when 3 Beside ind. jajasa (AV.j. Whitney, the radical syllable was strong, normally on Roots 53, assigns this form to the redupli- the thematic -a-. Cp. Whitney, Sanskrit cated aor. beside 3. sing. ajTjasata (SB.). Grammar 815. 4 Given by AvERY 268 as a reduplicated 'I Not, however, in dadvdms-, nor in the

aorist in the form of vavftana (sic). problematic form cakhvamsam (ll. 14'*), which 5 For "mimiks-sva. Whitney, Roots 120, seems to be formed from a root kha-. assigns this form to the reduplicating present 12 Except visivdnu- (AV.). class. 13 With the weak stem in the ace. sing. 6 Whitney, Roots 164, assigns this form cakrusam (x. 137'). to the reduplicating present class. 14 Without connecting vowel. 7 Written vavrdhvam. 15 Only the weak stem of this participle 8 Cp. Whitney's note on AV. xii. 333. occurs in the form vi-jdnus-ah; cp. above 9 Perhaps also susiiddla (AV, 1. 26*) placed 482 e. by Whitney, Roots 188, under the perfect, but, Sanskrit Grammar 871, doubtfully under the reduplicated aorist. ";

VII. Verb. Perfect System. 363

{jur- =jr- 'waste away'), jujusvdms-, jujuvAms-, tatanvams-, tastabhvcitm-, tasthi-vams- (f. tasthusT-), titirvims-'^ , tustuvams- (l/'j/«-), dadasvams- {dams- 'bite'), dadasvams-, dadavims-' (AV.), dadasi'is-, dadivdms- (AV.), dadrvAms-

(f. dadrusX- 3, AV., dr- 'pierce'), dadrsvams- (f. dadrsusT-), dadvams- {da- 'give'), dadAanvdms; dadkrsvims-, didivSms-, papivams- {pa- 'drink'), paprvdms- {i. papriisT- pr-^hW), ; pipivams- {L pipyHSi-;pi-''s-vft\V), pupusvAms-, babhuvams-

(f. babhuvi'isi-), bibhivAms- (f. bibhyusi-), mamand'm-, mamrvAms- (f. mamrusT- mr- 'die'); yayi-vAins- {sfya-), rari-vAms- (f. rari'isl-, AV.), ririkvdms-'' {Yric-), ririhvams-, rurukvAms-'' {Yruc-), vavanvAms-, vavarjiisi-^, vavrvAms-^ {vr- 'cover'), vavrtvams-, vavrdhvAms-T ,vivikvAins-* {vic-'siK), vividvAjns-, vividhvAms- {Yvyadk-), susukvams-^ {Ysuc-), susruvAms-, susuvAins-, sasavAms-^, sasrvAms-

(f. sasrusT-), sasahvams-, susupvAms- {Ysvap-), susuvAms-, sedi'is- {sad- 'sit'). -/'-: a. With connecting arivAms- presupposed by f. ari'm- {r- 'go'), tyivAms- (f. Tyi'm-), usivAms- {vas- 'dwell'), zZjiJjf- (TS. iv. 3. iiS; vas- 'shine'), okivims-^ (weak stem uc-us-, Yuc^, jaksivAms- {ghas- 'eat', VS. AV. TS.), jajmvams-^° {YJna-), paptivAms-, viviswAms- {TS.iv.y. 1^'). Also the negative compound d-sascivams- presupposed by the feminine d-sascun-.

b. Without reduplication: dasvAtns-, vidvAms- (f. vidusf^, sahvAms-; perhaps also khidvams- in the voc. khidvas. Similarly formed is midhvAms- (f. mTlkusT-) 'bountiful', though the root is not found in independent use. With irregular connecting -i-: dssivdms- (SV.), visivdms- (AV.), and the negative compound d-varjivdms- presupposed by the f. d-varjusT- (AV.).

Middle.

493. aksdnd- {Ydks-), anajand- {Yanj-), dnasdnd- {Y<^fns-, KV.), ardnd-, apand-, tjand- {Yyaj-^, Ucand- {Yvac-), cakamand-^^ (AV.), [cakand- {Ykd-), cakramdnd-, cakrand-, caksadand-, caskabhand- (AV.), cikiiand- { l/aV-), jagras- and-j^ jagmand-, jajndnd- {YJan-), jahrsdnd-, jihiland-, jujusand-, juhurdnd- tatrsand-, { Y^^-)t jujuvdnd-, tatrddnd-, tastabhdnd-, iasthdnd-, tdtrpand-, titvisdnd-, tistirand- {Ystf-), tustuvdnd-, tutujdnd-'^i, tepand- {Yi'^p-)> dadand-, dadrsand-, dadrand- {dra- 'run'), dddrhand-, didyutand-, duduhand-^ papand- {pd- 'drink'), paprathdnd-, paspasdnd-, pasprdhdnd-, pipriydnd-, pipydnd-, babrhdnd-, babhrdnd-, bubudhdnd-, bhejdnd-, mdmakdnd-, mumucdnd- (AV.), {ramh- 'hasten'), yuyujdnd-, yemdnd- { Yytim-), rardnd-, rdraksand-, rdrahdnd- riricdnd-, rurucdnd-, rebkdnd- (AV.), kbhdnd- {Y^dbh-), 1. vdvasdnd- {vas- 'desire'), 2. vdvasand- {vds- 'bellow'), i. vdvasdnd- {vas- 'wear'), 2. vdvasdnd- {vas- 'dwell'), 3. vdvasdnd- {vas- 'aim'), vdvrdhdnd-, vdvrsdnd-, vivydnd- {Yvyd-), s'as'amdnd-", sas'aydnd-'^* {st- 'lie'), sas'dnd- {s'd- 'sharpen', AV.), sasramdnd-.

1 There also occurs the weak stem iatarus-, to be read sasanvams- (cp. the f. sasanusT- from \tf-. in B.); see Arnold, Vedic metre p. 1442. 2 With strong stem instead of weak. 9 With strong radical vowel and reversion 3 Given under dra- 'run' in the AV. Index to the original guttural. Verborum, but translated by WmTNEV, AV. '° The i may here perhaps more correctly V. 138, as from dr- 'pierce'. be regarded as a reduced form of the basic \ With reversion to the original guttural. vowel, as in dadi-, tasthi- etc. 11 5 With strong radical vowel. The a is not syncopated in kam- or 6 The anomalous gen. sing, with an addi- mm-. tional reduplicative syllable, va-vavrus-as 12 Doubtfully assigned by Whitney, Roots, appears once (l. 1735); cp. ZDMG. 22, 605. to the reduplicating class. 7 There occurs once(lv.2'7) the anomalous 13 More frequently with the intensive accent participle with pres. suffix vavrdkdntas iutujana-. (Grassmann, Aorist). 14 With the double irregularity of strong 8 From san- 'gain'. The metre seems radical syllable and reduplication with a. almost invariably to require this participle 5

364 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

is.sadana-'' (sad- 'prevail'), sUriyand- {sri- 'resort'), susucand-, sshijajia-', stistwana-i, sasrjand-, sasrand-^, sasvafand-, sasahafid-^, sismiySnd-, sisvidand-, susvand- (su- 'press'), sehand- ^o-^-) ^• susupatid- ( Ysvap-), ( Y

Pluperfect.

Benfey, Vollstandige Grammatik p. 353. — Abhandlungen der konigl. Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften zu Gottingen 75, p. 151 — 154. — Delbruck, Verbum 419. — Avery, Verb-Inflection 253. — Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar 817—820.

494, This tense, which is a pluperfect in form but not in meaning, is an augmented preterite made from the perfect stem. As in the perfect, the strong stem is used in the singular active, the weak elsewhere. The endings

are the secondary ones; in the 3. pi. -ur always appears in the active and -Iran in the middle. There is some difficulty in distinguishing this tense from the imperfect of the reduplicating class and from the reduplicating aorist*.

Though its sense is the same as that of the imperfect, its forms may usually be distinguished (when the reduplication would be identical in both tenses) by

the fact that the verb in question is not otherwise conjugated according to the reduplicating present class. On the other hand, the sense helps to distinguish the pluperfect from the aorist, when the reduplication would be identical in both tenses. With the aid of these criteria some sixty forms may be classed

as belonging to the pluperfect. The augment is, as in other past tenses, dropped in several instances. The -s and -t of the 2. 3. sing, are in some forms preserved by an interposed -i- (as in the aorist). Several transfer forms according to the a- conjugation are met with in this tense. 495. Active. Sing. r. acacaksam, ajagrabkam, atustavam; dpiprayam^ (TS. V. I. ii3; VS. XXIX. 7); cakaram, ciketam {Ycit-), Jagrabkam (AV.).

2. dj'agan^ ; dtyes^ (v. 2*); cakdn, nandmas. — 'With -7-: dbubhojis, dvivesis, dvivesis; jihitnsis'^° (AV.). 3. djagan'^^, aciket iydt-^; rardn'^'^. — With -/-: acucyavif^^, djagrabhit, arirecTt, dvavacit, avavarit^^. — With thematic -a-: acakraf, acikitat and aciketat {Y<:it-), adadhavaf^^ 'ran', asusravat'^'^ (MS.), dsasvajat; cakradat, jagrabhat (VS. xxxii. 2), tastdmbhat (i. I2i3).

Du. 2. dtatamsatam'^T , amicmuktam; mumuktam. — 3. avavaktam {vai- 'desire'). -7- PI. 2. djaganta; djagantana, ajabhartana'^^ . — With acucyavTtana^^.

3. dcucyavur, dsisrayur, asusravur'^'^ , dblbhayur (Kh. i. 75). Middle. Sing. i. dsusravi. — 3. didista dis-^. ( Y DUi 2. dpasprdhetham ''.

1 With the intensive accent. perfect of i- 'go' {= d-iy-e-s), WHITNEY, Roots, 2 With the intensive accent and regarded as pluperfect of is- or es- 'move' (= d-iy-es). by Whitney, Roots 174, and by Lindner, Roth and Grassmann as aorist of \Ts: Nominalbildung p. 54, as an intensive. 10 With irregular accent. 3 With the intensive accent and assigned " For *d-jagam-t.

by Lindner, 1. c, to the intensive, but by 12 From ran- 'rejoice' (l. 1 2212). Whitney, Roots 175, to the perfect. 13 Cp. Whitney 868 a. 14 4 Once also anomalously with -tiiana : From vf- 'cover'; cp. Delbruck, Verbum sasrmdnd: p. 122''. 5 sasahana- once in RV., sehand- thrice, 1 Whitney regards this form as an aorist, from ^sah-. but the reduplicative vowel is that of the 6 On such doubtful forms see specially pluperfect, while the sense (ix. 877) does Delbruck, Verbum 158 (p. 135 f.). not seem decisive. 7 Whitney 866 also quotes apiprayan 16 Whitney 866. from the TS. 17 Transfer form. 8 For *d-jagam-s. 18 With strong radical vowel. 9 Benfey (p. 152) and Delbruck, Verbum '9 These three are, however, classed by p. 123 and 128, regard this form as a plu- Whitney 861, and Roots, as aorists. ;

VII. Verb. Aorist System. 365

PI. 3. dcakriran, ajagmiran, dpeciran{Ypac-,hN^;avavrtran; dsasrgram^. — Transfer forms according to the a- conjugation: dtitvisanta, ddadrhanta, ddadrmhanta (TS. iv. 6. 2*), dvavasanta {vas- 'bellow'); cakrpdnta, dddhrsanta (Av.), vavaianta {vas- 'bellow'). — With ending -ranta: avavrtranta.

Periphrastic Perfect.

496. This formation made with the reduplicated perfect of kr- 'make' which governs the ace. of a fem. substantive in -a derived from a secondary

(causative) verbal stem, is found only once in the Mantra portion of the

Vedas: gamayam cakara (AV. xviii. 2^^) 'he caused to go' (lit. 'he made a causing to go'). In the Brahmana portions of the Samhitas (TS. MS. K.), such periphrastic forms (made even with an aorist) are occasionally met with.^

III. The Aorist System.

497. The aorist is of frequent occurrence in the Vedas, being made from about 450 roots. An augmented tense taking the secondary endings and forming moods and participles, it is distinguished from the imperfect by lack of a corresponding present 3 (e. g. 3. sing. aor. d-kar, 3. sing. imp. d-krnot, 3. sing. pres. krnoti) and by difference of meaning {dkar 'he has done', dkrnot, 'he did'). There are three distinct types of aorist. 1. The simple aorist adds the endings to the root either directly or with the connecting vowel -a-. It thus resembles the imperfect of the root- class or of the accented d- class. This type of aorist is formed by nearly 170 roots. Some nine or ten roots have, beside the regular forms of the simple aorist, a certain number of other forms which have the appearance of indicatives present. They seem to represent a transition to the formation of a new present stem. The most striking example is the aorist stem voca-

from which the 3. sing, vocati occurs several times. 2. The reduplicated aorist resembles the imperfect of the reduplicating present class. It is, however, distinguishable from the latter not only in meaning, but by a certain peculiarity of reduplication and by being nearly always formed with a connecting -a-. This type of aorist is taken by about 85 roots. added -a, between 3. The sigmatic aorist inserts -s-, with or without an the root and the endings. It is taken by rather more than 200 roots. Thus each of the three types has one form following the analogy of the graded conjugation, and another following that of the a- conjugation. The sigmatic aorist has, however, further subdivisions. Upwards of 50 roots take more than one form of the aorist. One verb, aorist; from two of budh- 'wake', has even forms from five varieties of the from one of the second, e. g. the first type, e. g. d-bodk-i and budhd-nta; bodh-i-s-a-t. a-bUbudh-a-t; and from two of the third, e. g. d-bhut-s-i and

sometimes sporadic With reversion to the original gut- 3 There are, however, forms from the same stem as the aorist tural. normal ones; thus the 2. du. pres. a See Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar 1073 a, b beside the numerous regular jAC0Br,KZ.35,S78—S87;B6htlingk,ZDMG. kr-thas occurs besides the Syntax forms of the nu- class. 52, article 11; Delbruck, Altindische kgl. Bohm. 426'' f. ; LUDWIG, Sitzungsber. d. Ges. d. W., phil.-hist. Kl. Nr. xill. '

366 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

I. Simple Aorist, A. Root Aorist. Benfey, Vollstandige Grammatik 840. — Avery, Verb-Inflection 253— 256. — Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar, 299—304; Roots 222 f. ; AV. Index Verborum 380. 498. This form of the simple aorist is taken by about 100 roots (and by more than 80 of these in the RV.), the commonest being those with medial a (nearly 30 in number). It is inflected in both the active and the middle voice. The root is strong in the indicative active singular, but weak elsewhere. Roots ending in vowels, however, show a tendency to retain the strong vowel throughout the indicative active except the 3. plural. a. Roots ending in a, of which there are some eight, retain the a throughout the indicative active except the 3. pi., where they drop it before the ending which in these verbs is invariably -ur. In the middle indicative, the radical vowel is weakened to «^ The forms which occur from these roots, if made from sthd- 'stand', would be the following:

Active. Sing. i. dstham. 2. dsthas. 3. dsthat. — Du. 2. dsthstam. 3. dstha- tam. — PL I. dsthama. 2. dsthata. 3. dsthitr. Middle. Sing. 2. dsthithas. 3. dsthita. — PI. i. dsthimaJti. 3. dsthiran. b. Roots ending in r, of which there are some ten, take Guna throughout the indicative active except the 3. pi. Roots ending in f and a (of which, however, few dual and plural forms occur) show the same tendency. The root bhu- 'be' retains its u throughout (as in the perfect), interposing v between it and a following a. The forms met with from kr- 'make' are the following: Active. Sing. i. dkaram. 2. dkar. 3. dkar. — Du. 2. kartam (AV.). 3. dkartam. — PL i. dkarma. 2. dkarta. 3. dkran. Middle. Sing. r. akri. 2. dkrthas. 3. dkrta. — PL 3. dkrata. : The forms which actually occur are the following

Indicative Active.

499. Sing. I. dkaram, dgamam'-, agam {ga- 'go'), dgrab/iam, adJiam, dfiam^ (/a- 'drink'), abhuvam^, abhedam, ai'odham (rz^i//^- 'hinder'), dsravam, astham.

(AV.) ; karam, gamam, gam (AV.), dam^, dham (AV.), vam^ {vr- 'cover'). 2. agas, adasT, dpas, apras, dbhus, aires, dsthas; gas, das, dMs, bhus, sthas. — ^A^ith loss of ending: akar, dkran (Ykrand-), dgan^, dghas, avar {vr- 'cover'), aspar; dnap, avar {vr- 'cover'); kar, kran^° {ykrat?i-), bhet {Ybhid-), vdr, vdrk^'^. 3. dgat, acet" {ci- 'collect'), ddat^^, ddhat {dha- 'put'), adhat {dha- 'suck', AV.), dpat, aprat (AV.), dbhut, dsret {Ysri-), dsrot, dsthat,

' As in the perfect before consonant (l. 126=), which though not analyzed in endings and in the past passive participle, the Pada text, appears to stand for a-adam e. g. ia-sihi-se (AV.), and sthi-ta- from stha- as indicated by both sense and accent. 'stand'. 6 For varam formed by false analogy as " This might also be the sing. I. of the a first person to 2. sing, vah (for *var-s) thematic aorist agama-t etc. appearing as if formed with the -s of 2. sing. 3 No forms of pa- 'protect' are made 7 There is also the transfer form ados according to this aorist, while pa- 'drink' (l. 1218), which though not analyzed in the (present stem piba-^ has no forms from the Pada text, is shown by both sense and accent root in the present system exceptpdnii (RV'.j to stand for a-adas. and paihds (AV».), but perhaps even these 8 For * a-gams. are rather to be taken as meant for aorist 9 For *d-nai-s from nas- 'attain', where i 10. forms ; cp. p. 369, note and p. 368, note *anak would have been phonetic (54, 6). 4 With the usual absence of Guna in this 10 For *kram-s. root; later abhUvam. I' For *varj-s from yvrj-. 5 There is also the transfer form adam 12 There is also the transfer form adat VII. Verb. Aorist System. 367 asraf (VS. viii. 28); gat, ddt, dMt'', bhut, sthlt. — With loss of ending: dkar, akran^ {Ykram-), dkran {Ykrand-), agan, aghas, dcet {cit- 'observe'), atan, {dr- adar 'pierce'j, abhet, dbhrat ( ybhraj-), amok \\fmuc-, AV.), dmyak {Ymyaks-), dvart^, avrk^ (AV.), dstar; anat, dvar; kar, gan, nat {Ynas- 'attain', AV.), bke't, vdr, vark, skan ( Y^kand-).

Du. 2. agatam (AV.), dbhutam, amuktam (Kh. i. 12^); kartam (AV.), gatam (AV.), datam, dhatam, spartam. 3. dkartam, agatam (AV.), ddhatam (VS. xx. 57), dnastam ('reach'), dpatam (VS. xxxviii. 13), abhutam; gatam (AV.), datam. PI. I. dkarma, dganma, dgama, ddarsma {TS.iii. 2. ^*), adama^, dpama, dbhumaT, asthama (AV.), dhema {Yhi^; dhama, bhuma (AV.). 2. dkarta, agata (AV.), dbhuta; abhutana, dketana; karta (AV.) and krta^ (AV.), gata (AV.), sthata (AV.). 3. dkran (Y^r-)) dksan^ iYs^'^^')! dgman, dhhuvan, avrjan, avrtan'^° (AV.), avratt, dsriyan (]//«-), dsravan {AN.), asvitan, ahyan {Y hi-), asthan'^'^ (AV.); kran (AV.), ksan {Yghas-), gman, vran. — "With ending -ur: dkramur, dgur, ddur, ddhur, apur (i. 164'), dyamur, dsthur; gur, dabhur, diir, dhur, nrtur'^^, mandur, sthur.

Indicative Middle,

500. Sing. I. akri, ajani, ayuji, avri {vr- 'choose'), akvi ( |//5s-, AV.). 2. dkrthas, agathas (VS. iii. 19), adhithas, dyukthas, dsthithas. 3. akrta, dgata (AV.), ddista, adhita, aprkta (l//.r/-), dmata (|/««(Z«-), amrta (AV.), dyukta, dvrkta (Y^Tj), avrta ('choose' and 'cover'), dsrsta, askrta (x. 1273), dsthita, dspasta (Vj/a/-), dsita {si- 'sharpen'); iyukta; arta (r- 'go'), asta {as- 'attain'); arta {r- 'go'), krta, gurta {gur- 'greet'), gdha^^', mrta (AV.). Du. 1. gdnvahi. — 3. ad/tltam^^ {ydka-).

PI. I. dganmahi, adimahi (TS. I. 8. 6') and adima/ii'^ (VS. ill. 58)'5, adhimahi^'' {Ydha-), apadmahi (VS. iv. 29), dmanmaki, ayujmahi, dhumahi; d/iTmahi'^* {Ydha-).

2. dcidhvam {ci- 'note'), dmugdhvam^ ( Y^^^c-), ayugdhvam. 3. akrata^^, dgmata, atnata; arata, ds'ata {as- 'attain'); yujata. — With abudhran, the ending -/•an : akrpran^T, agrbhran, ajusran, ddriran, apadran, dyujran, az'aj-ra«'*(z'aj-- 'shine'), dvisran, avrtran, dsrgran^'^, dsthiran, asprdhran. — 'With ending -ram: ddrsram, dbudhram, dsrgram^^.

9 agh(d)san. (l. 1276, II. 124, V. 328) which, though not For 10 analyzed in thePada text, appears to stand Misprinted as acrtan in the text of AV. for d-adai. III. 311 : see Whitney's note. 11 I For *asras-t: see Sandhi p. 6l3. Transfer form probably for asthur iiom. s Also the transfer form {J>rdii) dhai j/M- 'stand'; see AJP. 12, 439; IF. 5, 388;

; Sanskrit Grammar (IV. 275). KZ. 22, 435 Whitney, xili. l^. 3 For *akram-i. 847, and his note on AV. 12 This form might be regarded as an un- 4 For *avart-t from vrt- 'turn'. 5 Seemingly with anomalously weak root augmented perfect. yghas-; for *avri-t. But the form really stands by 13 For gh{d)s-ia, from cp. p. S6> 3- afavrk 14 With t for i; cp. BrugmANN, Grundriss haplology for the 3. sing. mid. avrkta : 6'; Oi,denberg,ZDMG. iamah (AV. XIII. 29) 'he has wasted away 2, p.896; v.Negelein the darkness': see Wackernagel, KZ. 40, 63, 297. 15 From da- 'share'. 544—547- 30' 16 There is also the transfer form k7-ania 6 That is, in adama (v. 5), which though not analyzed in the Pada text, must stand (I. I4i^j. 17 Bloomfield, Johns Hopkins Uni- for a-addma. Cp. Roots versity Circular, Dec. 1906, p. 10. 7 arudhma is quoted in Whitney's 18 note 7. as occurring in the MS. [I. 65; 94, 6]. Cp. p. 327, 19 reversion to the original guttural. 8 Emendation for kriam (AV. Xix. 44^)- With ,

368 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

Passive Indicative of the Root Aorist.

Delbrhck, Verbum l8i^. — Avery, Verb-Inflection 275. —Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar Sprachgeschichte — Cp. Osthoff, IF. 842 — S45 ; Roots 240. — V. Negelein, Zur 4. 3, 390; HiRT, IF. 17, 64 f.

501. There is a peculiar middle form, made from about 45 roots in the Samhitas (40 of them occurring in the E.V.), which is used with a predomi- nantly passive meaning'. When it is formed from verbs with a neuter signi- fication, like gam- 'go', the sense remains unaltered (as in the past passive

participle). It is a 3. sing, indicative, in which the augmented root takes the

ending-?. This -i, otherwise the ending of the i. sing, middle, appears to be used in the regular 3. sing, perfect middle (e. g. dadhe, 1. and 3. sing.), and sometimes in the 3. sing, present middle (e. g. sdye, i. and 3. sing.). The characteristic feature of this passive form is the strengthening of the root as compared with other middle forms, e. g. dkari beside akri (i. sing. mid.)^

a. A prosodically short medial i, u or r takes Guna, while a is normally

lengthened; a final i, u or r takes Vrddhi, while final a interposes aj before the ending. The accent in unaugmented forms is always on the root. The forms actually occurring are: Sing. 3. dkari, agSmi, dceti, dcchedi, djani^, dj'nayi, dtapi, ddarsi, ddhayi, dpadi (AV.), dpayi ('drink'), aprayi (AV. VS.), dbodhi, dbkrSji, amayi {^va.tasu.x&'), dmodi, dmyaksi, dyatni, i2>'az'2''(VS.xxviii. 15), dyoji, dradhi, aroci, avahi (Kh. v. 153), avaci, dvari ('cover'), avedi ('find'), dsoci, dsrayi (Ys'ri-), dsarji, dsadi, dsavi (jAj'a:^-), dstdri, dstavi, dhdvi; ceti, jdnijani, tari, darsi, dayi{^g\Y&'),ddyi{%m.&!), dhdyi, pddi, ve'di ('find'), sadi^. — Used injunctively: ghosi, ceti, chedi, tari, dhdyi, bhari, bhedi (VS. xi. 64), mod (A v.), yoji, reci, rod, vandi, varhi, vaci, samsi, sari, sesi {sis- 'leave', AV.), srdvi, sarji, sadi, hayi {ha- 'leave', AV.); also the unique form jaray&yi 'let him be embraced', from the secondary stem jara-ya- 'play the lover'.

Root Aorist Subjunctive.

502. Active. Sing. I. kdrani,gamani,gani, bhuvSni. — 2. kdrasi; kdras, gamas, gSs^, tdrdas, das, d/ids, pdrcas, pAs (iv. 20'* 'drink'), prds, bhi'ivasT yamas, vdras ('choose'), sdsas, sthds. 3. karaii, fosati, darsati (AV.), ddti, dhati, padsti^, bhidati, radhati, varjati, sthdti; kdrat, gdmat, garat {gr- 'swallow', AV.), gat, Josat, ddt, dkdt, padat^ (AV.), rndtkaf) {KY.vii. ^o^), yamat, yodhat, radkat, vdrat {'choose'), vdrtat, srdvat, sdghat, sat, sthat, spdrat. — Without Guna; fdhat, bhuvat, sri'wat (RV'.). Du. 2. karathas, gamathas, darsathas, pathds'^° (AV. vii. 29'), bhuthds'^'^, sravathas. — 3. karatas, gamatas, bhutas''^, srdvatas, sthdtas.

1 In one or two passages this form seems from roots ending in 5 cannot be distinguished to have a transitive meaning; cp. Whitney, from injunctives. Sanskrit Grammar 845 (end). 7 Formed without Guna as in the ind. 2 Cp. Brugmann, Grundriss 2, 1054, 3. aor. and perfect. 3 This augmented form always occurs in 8 With double modal sign -a-. the RV. with short radical vowel, beside 9 This form has a subjunctive sense ('might the unaugmented jani as well as jani. shake'); it might otherwise be an injunctive 4 From yu- 'separate'. of the a- aorist. 5 The form svani (vi. 46M) may be the 10 Assigned by Whitney, Roots, to the 3. sing, passive aorist (BR. and doubtfully present of the root class. Whitney, Roots 201), but Grassmann, s. v. Ji Both bhuthas (vi.675) and bkutas (x.27') svani, regards it as a neut. substantive in -i. seem to be meant for subjunctives formed Cp. Neisser, BB. 30, 305 ff, anomalously without mood sign, instead of 6 The 2. 3. sing, with secondary endings *bhuvathas and *bhuvatas. .

Vll. Verb. Aorist System. 369

PI. I. kdrama, gamdma, gama, dJiama, radhama. — 3. karanti, gdmanti, panti'^ (11. II'*); kdran, gdman, garaji, ddrsan, bhuvaii, yaman. Middle. Sing. 2. kdrase, josase {KSi:). — 3. idhate'' (RV.), kdrate, bkojate, yojate, vdrjate, stdrate. — Du. 2. dhethe^, dhaithe. — PI. i. kdramahe, gdmamafiai, dhamahe, manatnahe (VS. iv. 1 1), staramahe. — 3. yavanta {yu- 'separate'). Root Aorist Injunctive.

503. Active. Sing. i. karam (AV.), gam, dham (VS. i. 20), bkuvam, ihojam, yojam, sthani.

1. jes, thus, bhes (/Mr-, VS. 1.23 etc.; TS.iv. 5. 10'). — With loss of ending: kar (TS. i. 3. 7^), dhak {dagh- 'reach'}, bhet {ybkid-), rok {Vruj-, VS.), var ('cover'), vark {YvrJ-), star, spar. 3. bkat, sret, ut-thdt (^stha-, Kh.ii. ii^). — With loss of ending: gan (VS. XXVII. 31; TS. V. 6. I*), dhak {Ydagk-), nak and naf (nas- 'attain'), vdr,

vark, skdn ( Y^kand-), stan'-. PI. I. gama, chedma^, daghma, bhuma, bhema^, homa^ {ku- 'call';. — 3. bhuvan, vrdn. — With ending -ur: kramur, gur, dabhur, dur, dhiir, sthur.

Middle. Sing. i. ndmsi {nami- = nas- 'attain'). —: 2. dhrthas (AV.), nutth&s, bhitthas (VS. xi. 68), mrthas {mr- 'die'), mrsthas {Y^r?-), rikthas iYric-), vikthas {Yvij-, VS. 1.23). — 3. arta (Yr-), asta {as- 'attain'), vukta (TS.iv. 3. 1 1*), vikta iy^'V'-), WtC' iw- 'choose'). — PI. i. dhimahi^ (j/'a'/Sa-). 3. asata (SA. xii. 1 9). Root Aorist Optative.

504. Active. Sing. I. asydm {as- 'attain'), rdhyam (AV.), deyamT, dheyam^, vrjyam, sakyam. — 2. avyas, asyas, rdhyas, gamyas, jneyas, bhuyds, mrdhyas, ssahyas. — 3. bhuyat^ (AV.). Du. I. yujyava. — 3. yujydtam. PI. I. asydma, rdhydma, kriyama, bhuydma, vrjydma, sahydma"^, stheyamaT — 3. asyur {as- 'attain'), dheyur, sahyur. Middle. Sing. i. asiya, muriya {mr- 'die', AV.). — 3. arita {Yr-) uhita-^° {Yva/i-), vurita {vr- 'choose'). — Du. 2. rdhathe.

PI. I. asimdhi, idhimahi, rdhimdhi, nastmahi ('reach'), nasTmahi, prcTmahi, mudimahi, yajnimahi, simahi^'^ {sa- 'bind'). a. Precative forms of the root aorist are common in the active, being made from about twenty roots in the Samhitas.

Active. Sing. I. apyasam'^^ {KK.y.Ti.^i) rdkyasam (VS.viii.g), jivydsam (AV. VS.), pr/y3sam ^3 {AY.), bhuydsam, bhraj'yasam {KY.), bhriyasam (yS.ii.?,),

radhyasam (VS. xxxvii. 3), vadhyasam (VS. AV.), srUyasam (AV.). — 3. avyas, asyas ('reach'), rdhyas, gamyds, daghyas, peyas {^Arvak!), bhuyds, yamyas, yuyas'^^ yzi- 'separate'), vrjyas, sruyas, sahyas.

1 Assigned by WHITNEY, Roots, to the 7 For da-iyam, i ^ha-iyam, stha-iydma. present of the root class. 8 The RV. has no forms of the 3. sing, 2 With weak and unaccented root. in -yai, but only the somewhat numerous 3 A transfer form for *dhdthe. precatives in -yds '-yas-t. t This form may, however, perhaps pre- 9 With irregular strong radical vowel, ferably be classed as an imperfect injunctive Padapatha sahydma; cp. RPr. IX. 30. along with stanihi as pres. impv., as in 10 Aor. opt. in Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar Whitney's Roots. These are the only forms 837 b, but pres. opt. in 'Roots' 157. •of the simple verb beside the aor. astamt (AV.). 11 With loss of d before the modal -J-. 12 5 With strong radical vowel. Accented apydsam in the ed. (B. I.). 6 Probably to be explained as the in- 13 Whitney,- in AV. in. 54, would emend junctive corresponding to the augmented this form to bhriydsam : see his note on indicative adhimahi (see 500, note '+); it that passage. might, however, be the I. pi. opt. mid. with 14 According to Avery 241, 3. sing. pres. Joss of a before the modal -i-. opt.

Inclo-arische Fhilologie. I. 4. 24 370 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

Du. 2. bhuyastam (VS. 11. 7). — PL i. rdhySsma {KY .), kriyasma, bhuyasma (AV. VS.), radhyasma (AV.). — 2. bhuyasta"- (TS. in. 2. 5*). Middle. Sing. 3. padistd, mucista'.

Root Aorist Imperative, 505. The active forms of this mood are fairly numerous, occurring in all the 2. and 3. persons; but middle forms occur in the 2. pers. only, ten in the sing, and two in the pi. In the 2. persons active of all numbers, several forms irregularly strengthen the root, which is then nearly always accented.

Active. Sing. 2. krdhi, gadhi, bodhii, yandhi ( Yycn-), yodki^, randhi {=rand-dhi; Yrandh-), viddhi {Yvis-, AV.), vrdhi 'cover', sagdhi {Ysak-), srudhi, sprdhi. — With ending -hi: gahi, pahi (AV.), mahi 'measure',. sahi 'bind'. 3. gantu, datu, dhatu, patu (AV.), bhfitu, sroiu, sotu (su- 'press'). Du. 2. kartam'^ (AV.) and krtdtn, gatdm axid gantdm^, jitam^ datam, dhaktam {Y dagh-), dkatam, patam{KY.), b/iutdm, bhrtam {YS.xi. 2,o),yantdm^^ riktam {Yric-), varktam^ iYwJ-), vartam'" {vr- 'cover'), volkdm^, saktam, srutdm, sitam (si- 'bind'), sutdm, sihatam, sprtam. 3. gantam^ (VS. ix. 19), ghdstam (VS. xxi. 43), dataj?i, patam, volhdm^. kdrtai krta, and gdntaT gatd, data, d/idta^, pata (AV.)^ PI. 2. and gata , sruta sr6ta'^°, sota^ bhutd, ydnta^, varta'^ (Yw^-), sasta ( l/"/a»zj--), and {Y^u-), sthata, heta^ (Y ^^')- — With ending -tana: kdrtana^, gdntana^, gatana, dkatana, dhetana^^, patana (AV.), bkutana, yantana^, sotana {Ysu-). 3. gdmantu, dantu (da- 'cut', AV. xii. 3^), dhantu, pantu (AV.)j sruvantu. Middle. Sing. 2. krsvd, dhisvd (Ydhd-), yuksvd; accented on the

root: mdtsva, ydksva, rdsva, vdmsva (van- 'win'), sdksva'^^ (i. 42', j/jac-); unaccented disva (da- 'give', VS. xxxviii. 3), masva 'measure'. PI. 2. krdkvam, vodhvam '^ (VS.).

Root Aorist Participle. 506. Of the active form of the participle of the root aorist few examples occur. But the middle form is common, nearly forty examples being met with in the RV. The accent here generally rests on the final syllable of the suffix -ana, but in several examples it is on the radical syllable. Active, rdhdnt-, krdnt-, gmdnt-, citdfit-, psni-, bhiddnt-, sthdnt-; also dyutdnt-^* as first member of a compound. Middle, arand-, idhand-, urand- 'choosing', I'lhana- (Yvah-), krand-'^^^ citana-, cydvana-, jusand-, trsand-, drsand- and dfsana-, dyutand- and dyutana-, dAuvand- (TS.i'v./\..i2i), nidand-, pisand-, prcand-, prathand-, bud/iand; b/iiyand-, manand-, mandand-, (vi-)mdna- (TS. iv. 6. 32), yatand- and ydtana-, yujand-^

I AV. xvffl. 486 has the corrupt reading 7 Once (vi. 49^') accented gantd. bhiiyaslha; see Whitney's note on that 8 With the accent of strong forms. passage. 9 For ziart-ta (like Tjarti for vari-ti). ^ The form graihtsta is a 2. pi. injv. beside 1° Always sruid or iroia; also sold (cp, the I. pi. ind. agrabhtsma according to the RFr. VII. 14 f.). is- aorist. " 'With e for a. 3 From both bhii- 'be' for *bhu-dhi and 12 sdksva (III. 377) is from ysah-, being an bttdh- 'awake' for *b6d-dhi instead of *bud- s- aor. form, for *sah-s-sva beside I. sing,, dhi. mid. asdksi and sdksi, 4 For *ySd-dhi instead of *yuddhi. 13 For vah-dhvam through *vazh-dhvam. 5 With strong root. '4 In dyuiad-ydman- 'having a shining- 6 For vah-iam, vah-iam through *vazh-tam, track'. ^vazh-tam. 15 Cp. BB. 20, 89, ;

VII. Verb. Aorist System. 371

rucand-, ruhana-, vdsana- 'dwelling', vipand-, vrand- 'covering', subhand- and sumbhana-, svitand-, sacand-, suvand-'^ and svand- (SV.) (su- 'press'), srjand-, sjirdhand-, hiySnd-^. As members of compounds only, -cetana- and -hrayana-'!' occur.

B. a- Aorist. Avery, Verb-Inflection 256 f. — Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar p. 305—308; Roots 224 AV. Index Verborum 380. — v. Negelein, Zur Sprachgeschichte 32—34.

507. This form of the simple aorist is taken by nearly 60 roots, chiefly by such as contain a medial vowel. In the RV. less than half as many verbs form a- the aorist as form the root-aorist ; and it is more frequent in the AV. than in the RV. The root generally appears in the weak form, the stem being made with an added -a, which in unaugmented forms is normally accented. This form of the aorist therefore resembles an imperfect of the d- class. Middle forms are of rare occurrence in this aorist.

a. A certain number of irregularities occur in the formation of tlie stem. i. The radical vowel of ias- 'order' is reduced to /*, e. g. sisat^ (iv. 2'). — 2. Some half dozen roots containing a medial a followed by a nasal, drop the nasal; these are krand- 'cry out', tarns- 'shake', dhvams- 'scatter', bhrams- 'fall', randh- 'make subject', srams- 'fall'. — 3. On the other hand r- 'go' and sf- 'flow' take Guna and accent the radical syllable, as dranta (unaugmented 3. pi.) and sarat. — 4. Several roots form transfer stems from the root aorist. Some half dozen do this by reducing a final radical a to a. This is regularly the case in khya- 'see', vya- ,'envelope', hva- 'call'; e. g. akhyat, dvyat, ahvat; but from da- 'give', dha- 'put', and stha- 'stand', only occasional transfer forms occur; thus adat; adhat [SV.) and dkai; dsihai [AN^.). On the other hand, occasional transfer forms are made from kr- 'make', and gam- 'go', in which the radical syllable remains strong; e. g. dkarat (AV.) and dgamat.

Indicative.

508. The forms of the indicative actually occurring, if made from vid- 'find', would be as follows:

Active. Sing. 1. dvidam. z.dvidas. t,- dvidat. — V\.i. dvidama. 2. dvidata. 3. dvidan. Middle. Sing. i. dvide. 3. dvidata. — PI. i. vidamahi. 3. dvidanta. The forms which actually occur are the following:

Active. Sing. i. dkhyam, agrbham (Kh. iii. 155), dtrfam (AV. TS.), airham (AV.), anijam (AV.), dmucam (AV.), druham (TS. VS. AV.), dvidam, dvrdham (Kh. iv. 8^), asakam (VS. ii. 28), dsanatn, dsaram, ahyam^ {Vhi-, AV.), ahvam (AV.); dpam (AV.); aram, vidam. 2. dkaras (AV.), dkrtas {krt- 'cut'), dkhyas (TS. AV.), druhas, dvidas, asadas (TS. VS. AV.), dsaras; dfas; kdras,guhas, drukas, bMvasT, mucas {KV.),vidds. 3. dkarat^ (AV.), akramat (AV.), dkhyat, dgamat^ (AV.), dgrdhat, acchidat (AV.), atanat, dtasat{YS. AV.), adrpaP (AV.), adhaf° {Ydha-, SV.), dmucat.

1 Always written thus in the RV., but to be follow the root-aorist (dhema, ahyan, etc.), pronounced svdna-. this is probably to be regarded as a transfer 2 Hardly any of these participles occur form, since the regular form according to

in any of the other Sainhitas : rucdnd- the root aorist ought to be *dkayam. (VS. xn. l), ruhdna- (TS. IV. I. 2*), svdna- 7 A transfer form, bhuva-s, following (SV.). bhuv-am as if from a stem bhuva-. 3 In d-cetana- 'thoughtless', and a-hrayana- 8 Transfers from the root aorist, following 'bold'. the 1. sing, dkar-am, dgam-am. 4 As in the weak forms of the present 9 Emendation in AV. XX. 136^. stem. 10 Transfer from the root aorist for 5 At the same time accenting the radical a-dMi. syllable. f> Though the other forms from yU- 24* 372 I. Allgemeinks und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar. drudat {KS[?i, arudhat, drukat, dvidat, avrtat {KM.), avrdhat, avyat^ iV^y^-)> ds'a/eat (AY.), ahicat, dsramat{AM.), dsadai, dsanat, dsarat, dsicat{TS. 111.2. ?>^), dsrpat (AV.), dhvat^; ddat' {Vda-), apat, arat, astkafi (AVK); trsat (AV.), dhaf- {)fdha-), bhuvat\ viddt, sadat {hSI), sdnat, sdrat. PI. I. aruhama (VS. viii. 52), dvidama, dsanama, dhvama; vfdhama^

(AV. V. 1 9). — 2. dvyata'; arata. 3. akhyan, akraman (AV.), agaman (AV.), acchidan (AV.), ddrsan (TS. IV. 5. i^), arudkan (AV.), druhan, dvidan, avrjan, avrdhan (VS. xxxiii. 60), asakan (AV.), dsadan, asanan, asaran, asican; ipan, arafi, astkan^ {AY.-xm. i5); khydn, dhvasdn^, viddn, sadan. Middle. Sing. i. dhve; hve (AV.). — 3. akhyata, dvyata''; arata; vyata'. — PI. I. Hsamahi {yias-). — 3. avidanta (AV.), ahvanta; dranta, krdnta''.

a- Aorist Subjunctive. 509. The forms of this mood are rare and ahnost restricted to the active. Active. Sing. 2. viddsi; vidds. — 3. mucati; vidat. Du. I. ruhdva. — 2. vidathas. — 3. gamatas (AV. x. 7^^). PI. I. arama; radhama, risama, sadama. — 2. gamatha (AV.), risatha, vidatha; risathana. Middle. Sing. 3. mucate, sisstai^ (sis- 'leave', AV. 11. 312). PI. I. sisamahe'i (AV. SV.).

a- Aorist Injunctive.

510. Active. Sing. i. aram, kkyam, ddrsain, radkam, risam, ruhdm, vidatn, sanam. 2. kradas, krudhas (AV.), khyds, guhas, grdhas (AV. VS.), druhas (AV.), mucds, vidas, risas (VS.xi.68; TS.iv.1.9^), sisas ('leave'), sadas, srpas (AV.). 3. ksudhat (Av.), khyat, grdhat (AV.), tanat, tamat, trsat (AV.), dasat,

dhrsdt (Kh.iv. i), bhrasat, }nucat, risat, rudhat, ri'ihaf", viddt, sisat^'^, sramat, srisat, sriivat^'', sadat, sdnat''°, srpat (AV.), sridhat. PI. 3, aran, khyan, gdman (VS. xvii. 78), trpdn, trsan (VS.vi. 31), drsan, druhan, risan, vidan, sakan (AV.). Middle. Sing. 3. vidata (AV. xiii. 23^). PI. I. aramahi (AV.); grhamahi. — 3. aranta, budhdnta, tnrsanta, viddtita. a- Aorist Optative.

511. This mood is rare and confined to the active in the RV., though three or four middle forms occur in the later Sarnhitas. Active. Sing. i. apeyam'^^ (AV.), gameyam, drseyam, bhideyam (AV.),

1 Transfer form. '° With accent on the radical syllable. 2 i^. 11 A transfer form : see p. 366, note From sas- 'order', with accent on the 3 See p. 327, note '. root. ^ prati dhat (iv. 27^). 12 It is hard to decide whether this form, 5 WHlTNEy, note on AV. v. l', would in- which occurs only once (l. 127^) beside the stead of dvim vrdkatna read (with. Paipp.) regular srdvat, should be classed here as an dvTvj'dhama. injunctive of the a- aorist, or as an irregular

6 A transfer form from ystha- ; cp. Whit- subjunctive of the root-class following the ney's note on AV. XIII. I^. analogy of hhiivat (cp. 502). 7 With loss of medial nasal, from ydAvams-. 13 In prdpeyam (AV. III. 20^), analyzed in 8 This form is probably a corrupt reading the Pada text asprd dpeyam; cp. Whitney's

for the passive sisyaiai : see WfflTNEY's note note on the passage. on AV. II. SI-'. 9 For sisamahi of RV. VIII. 241. . :

VII. Verb. Aorist System. 373

videyam^ (AV.), sdkeyam (Kh.iv.S't), saneyam. — 2. games (VS.). — 3. rdhet (AV.), garnet, yamet"- (AV.), videt, sanet, se(i (VS. ix. 5, 6). PI. I. asema ('attain'), rdheina (AV.), gamema, drsema (AV.), pusema, bhujema, ruhema, videma (AV.), sakima, sadema, sanema and sdnema, srasema^.

Middle. Sing. i. videya (VS. iv. 23). — PI. i. gamemahi. There is also one precative form: 3. sing, videsta (AV.) 'may she find'.

a- Aorist Imperative.

512. This mood is also of rare occurrence and is restricted to the active, excepting two middle plural forms.

Active. Sing. 2. kara^ (RV'.), bhuja (TS. iv. 5. it), muca, ruha (AV.), sada, sdna^, sdra. — 3. sadatu. Du. 2. aratam, karatanP (RV.), khyatam, ruhdtam, vidatam, sddatam. 3. aratam, karatam *, sadatam. PI. 2. khydta, sadata; sadatana. — 3. sadantu. Middle. PI. 2. mucadhvam. — 3. sadantam (AV.).

a- Aorist Participle.

a. There are hardly more than a dozen certain examples of the parti- ciple of this aorist.

Active, trpdnt-, dhrsdni-, rlsant- or rUant-^, vrdhdnt-, sisdnt- (sas- 'order'), sncdnt-, '°, ^°; sddant- sdnant- and as first member of compounds : krtdnt-, ' guhdnt- , viddnt- ' Middle, guhdmdna-, dhrsdmana-, firtdmana-, sucdmana-; possibly also ddsamana-^'. Probably three participles in -ana are to be regarded as belonging to this aorist: dhrsand- (AV.), vrdhand-, sridkSjid-.

2. Reduplicated Aorist.

Delbruck, Verbum 143 f. — Avery, Verb-Inflection 266—268. — Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar 856 — 873; Roots 224; Atharvaveda, Index Verborum 380. — v. Negelein, Zur Sprachgeschichte 68 f.

513. This type of aorist is formed from nearly 90 verbs in the Sarnhitas. Though it has come to be associated with the secondary conjugation in -dya (causative), it is not in form (with a few slight exceptions) connected with

that stem, being made directly from the root. It is, however, in sense connected with the causative, inasmuch as it has a causative meaning when the corresponding verb in -aya has that meaning. As an augmented reduplicated form, it has affinities with the imperfect of the reduplicating present class and with the pluperfect. It may, however, be distinguished from the imperfect by the long reduplicative vowel, by the thematic -a- which nearly always appears in the stem, and often by the meaning; and from the

1 Emendation in AV.XIX.42 for vide yam; 7 A transfer form from the root aorist see Whitney's note. (otherwise kj-tarri). 2 A probable conjecture for yame in AV. 8 A transfer form from the root aorist. xvill. 2 3. 9 Once with the short, six times with the 3 From sa- 'gain', as if sa- [sa-tt). Cp. long vowel in the Samhita text (Pp. always t) V. Negelein 34. see APr. 583, 584, 588. 4 With loss of the radical nasal, from 30 With accent on the root as also risant- ysrams; and risant-. 5 A transfer from the root aorist (other- 11 In kridd-vasu- 'disclosing wealth', ^a^ai/- wise krdhi). Avery 243 adds g-aviaij). avadya- 'concealing faults', vidad-vasu- 'win- 6 With accent on the root instead of the ning wealth'. second syllable; always sdnd: cp. RPr. vii. 12 As occurring beside the a- aorist in- 14. 19. 33- junctive form dasat (510). 374 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

pluperfect by difference of reduplication when the root contains a or r, and often by meaning. a. The characteristic feature of this aorist is the almost invariable quantitative sequence of a long reduplicative and a short radical vowel (_o). The vowels a, f, /', as well as ?, are reduplicated with i^, which (unless it becomes long by position) is lengthened if the radical vowel is (or is made) prosodically short; e. g. d-jijan-a-t from jan- 'beget'; d-vTvrdh-a-t from vrdh- 'grow', but ciksip-a-s from ksip- 'throw'. In order to bring about this trochaic rhythm, the radical vowel has to be shortened or the nasal dropped in the roots vas- 'bellow', sadh- 'succeed', hid- 'be hostile', krand- 'cry out', jambh- 'crush', randh- 'subject', syand- 'flow', srams- 'fall' ; e. g. avTvasat, acikradat. In jihvaratam (TS.) the reduplicative vowel, being already long by position, is unnecessarily lengthened.

1. In a few forms the reduplicative vowel is, contrary to the prevailing rhythmic rule, left short: jigrtam sxii. jigrta (beside djlgar); didhrtam and ririsas (beside ririsas). On the other hand, in the isolated injunctive form didipas^, the radical vowel remains long, and in dmTmet both the reduplicative and the radical syllable are long (beside nilmayat with the regular rhythm). 2. The p of the causative stems jna-paya-, stha-paya-, ha-paya, ar-faya- (.r- 'go'), is retained in the aorist, the radical vowel being at the same time reduced to i in the first three: ajijnipaHJ^S.), dtisthifat, jihipas; the s of the causative stem bhJsaya- is also retained: blbhis-as (TS.). 3. The root dyut- 'shine', reduplicates with i: adidyutat''. In the aorist formed

from the causative stem arpaya-, the reduplicative 2 appears after, instead of before, the radical vowel, doubtless owing to the difficulty caused by the initial a and the augment: arp-i-p-am (AV.). The initial a also led to the anomaly of reduplicating the whole of the root am 'injure', and then prefixing the augment : dm-am-at. 4. There are three anomalous aorists formed from nas- 'be lost', pat- 'fall', and vac- 'speak', in which besides an irregular reduplicative vowel, the radical a is syncopated [a-pap-t-at, d-ne-s-an) or contracted {d-voc-af). As beside the former two the regular redupli- cated aorists apipatai and anlnasat occur, and as all three have the regular reduplicative vowel a of the perfect 5, they appear to have been originally pluperfects which before being shortened had the form of *d-papai-at^, *d-nanas-at, *d-vavac-ai^. But they all came to be regarded as aorists. This is imdoubted in the case of dvocat owing to its numerous mood forms; dpaptat, moreover, has an imperative form beside it; and dnesan (TS VS.) has a distinctly aoristic meaning.

b. The reduplicated aorist in the great majority of forms makes its stems with a thematic -a-. Before this, a final r regularly, and r and u in two or three forms, take Guna; e. g. adidhar-a-t ( Ydkr-), bibhay-a-t ( ybkl-), cucyav-a-t ( j/Vj'w-), dudrdv-a-t ( Ydru-). The inflexion of this aorist stem is like that of an imperfect of the a- conjugation. c. About a dozen roots, however, have occasional forms from stems made without thematic -a-, the inflexion then being like that of an imper- fect of the reduplicating class. These roots are ma- 'bellow'; sri- 'resort'; tu- 'be strong', dru- 'run', dhu- 'shake', nu- 'praise', pu- 'cleanse', yu- 'separate',

1 In yklp-, the only root in which it 5 That is, nes- for nanas-, on the analogy occurs. of sed- for *sazd- in the perfect: this form 2 In the reduplicating present class f is of contraction would be unique in an original almost invariably, and a predominantly, re- aorist. duplicated with z (457). 6 Like a-sasvaj-at; becoming a-papi-at like 3 In form this might be a pluperfect. A a-cakr-ai beside cakar-am. similar reversal Of the ordinary rhythm appears 7 The cause of the anomalous contraction in the three forms dtaiamsatatii (i. I20'), may be due to the awkwardness of com- adadhdvat (ix. 877), vavdksat (SV. I. I, 2, 2, 3 bining the augment with the reduced redupli- var. lect. for vavdksa of RV. X. 115') each cative syllable a- of the perfect (*a-uvac-a(). occurring once, but owing to the reduplica- The accentuation of the augment would also tive vowel they should rather be accounted favour the second syllable taking Sampra- pluperfects. Cp. p. 364, note 'S. sarana: d-va-uc-at. 4 See 514, note '. VII. Verb. Aorist System. 375

su- 'generate', srz(- 'flow'; gr- 'waken', Mr- 'hold'; svap- 'sleep'; e. g. asis're-f (TS.), ddudro-t, djTgar, sisvap. Beside forms made thus, occur others made from several of these roots with the thematic -a-; and those made from the roots ending in u (the majority), cannot be distinguished in form from plu- perfects. The number of forms of this type which can with certainty be classed as aorists is therefore very small. d. Besides the indicative all the moods are represented in this aorist, but no participial form has been found.

Reduplicated Aorist Indicative.

514. The forms actually occurring would, if made from jan- 'beget' with thematic -a-, be the following: Active. Sing. i. djTjanam. 2. djijanas. 3. djijanat. — Du. 2. ajtjanatam. — PI. I. djijanama. 2. djTjanata. 3. djijanan.

Middle. Sing. 3. djijanata. — PI. 2. djijanadhvam. 3. djjjananta. The forms actually occurring (including those made without thematic -a-) are: Active. Sing. i. acikrsam, ajigamam (TS. VS. AV.), ajijabham (AV.), atisthipam (AV.), adudusam (AV.), aninasam, apiparam (pr- 'pass', AV.), dmimadam (AV.), avocam, dsisamam (Jam- 'be quiet', AV.); arpipam (AV.), 2. acikradas, djijanas, dtisthipas, dtitaras (AV.), atitrpas (AV.), aninasas ('be lost', AV.), apiparas (AV.), abubhuvas (AV.), dmimadas (AV.), arurupa^ (AV.), dvivrdhas (AV.), dnsamas (AV.); jihvaras {KSf.), didyutas\ rurupas (AV.), Mucas (TS. iv. i. 43), sisvapas. — Without thematic -a-: tutos'', susros; ajTgar^ {gr- 'swallow'), djigar [gr- 'waken'); didhar, sisvap. 3. acikradat, aciklpat (AV.), acicarat (AV.), dcukrudhat, acucyavaf- (K.), ajijnipat i!Y'Ss.ii.\.ii.i), djijanat, djiMdat{KY.), dtisthipat, ddidyutat^, adidharat, adudusat, dninasat, dpaptat axiA dpipatat, abubud/iat, amUmuhat{AN.), drtramat, drurucat, avivasat ('has bellowed', Yvas-), avivipat, avivrtat, dvTvrdkat, dvocat, asisriyat^ (AV.), dsisvitat, dsTsamat (AV.), asisyadat (Ysyajid-); amamat {Yam-); jijanat, didyutat{YS.:^-x.-xviii. 22), didharat, dudrdvat, nesat^, bibhayat, vavrtat, vocat, sisndtkat. — Without thematic -a-: ddudrot, dnunot, dpupot, dmimef (wa- 'bellow'), dsisrefi, asusot (Ysu-, MS.), dsusrot (VS. xviii. 58; TS. V- 7- 7')j tutot, dudkot {dku- 'shako'); djigar {gr- 'waken'), asisnat {Ysnath-); didhar. — Du. 2. drurujatam (Kh. i. 5'°). PL I. dtrtrpsma (yS:.mi.2ci), atitrsama, apaptSma (Kh.iii.iC)), apipadama (Av.), dvtvrtama (AV.), dvocama. 2. djijapata"^ (VS. ix. 12), arurucata (VS. xxxvir. 15). 3. dcikradan, djijanan, atitrasan (AV.), adidharan (AV.), aninasan (AV.), «»!?/«« (VS. XVI. 10; TS. IV. 5. it),), apaptan, apiparan {pr- 'cross'), dmimrnan (Av.), dvTvatan, avTvaran (AV.), avivasan {vas- 'bellow'), avtvipan, dvivrdhan, dvocan, dsTsaman (AV.), dsusubhan, asisrasan ( Y^rams-, AV.), astsadan { Ysad-, VS. XII. 54; TS. IV. 2. 4t); jijanan, paptan.

1 -Reduplicated with i owing to the vocalic (= SV.) and for sisriye in TS. I. 5. 3'. See pronunciation of the y (diui-) as in the per- Whitney's note on AV. vi. 3l'5. fect: see 482 a I. 6 This form occurs once in the RV. (vi. IJ7)

2 Classed by Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar as a, past tense (along with three other un-

858 a, as an aorist, but Roots 63, as plu- augmented forms : rocaia, aria, tisfhai) and perfect; similarly tiiioi below. twice as an injunctive. Bartholomae, KZ. ij 3 Occurring only in RV. I. 163' = VS. 27., 360, note regards it as a, pluperfect. XXIX. 18 = TS. IV. 6. 7^. 7 Whitney 868 a; v. Negelein 691. 4 Whitney 866 (Mantra?). 8 Occurs TS. I. 8. 102 with other aorists. 5 This form occurs only once (AV. vi. 31^), 9 From the causative stem japaya- of as a variant for dhiyate in RV. x. iSg^S ji- 'conquer'. .

376 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

Middle. Sing. 3. dvivarata {vr- 'cover', AV.; TS. v. 6. i^). — With ending -/ for -ta: atitape. PI. 2. dvivrdhadhvam. — 3. dtitrpanta (VS. xix. 36), dbJbhayanta, dsisyadanta dmimadanta, dvivasanta ( Yvas-), dvivrdhanta, dvocanta, ( Ysyand-),

dsusudanta (TS. I. 8. lo"^) ; jijananta.

Reduplicated Aorist Subjunctive.

515. This mood is of rare occurrence, only about a dozen forms having been noted. The active is represented in all the persons of the sing, and the I. pi. only; the middle by a single dual form. Active, Sing. i. raradha, voca. — 2. tUapasi (AV.), vocasi (VS.xxiii.si). — 3. aklpsti, pisprsati'^, vocatP, vocati, stsadhati^ [ysadh-).

PI. I. cukrudhama, rtramama, vocama, slsadhama ( Ysadh-). Middle. Du. i. vocavahai.

Reduplicated Aorist Injunctive.

516. Forms of this mood are of common occurrence in the active, in which voice more than fifty have been found; but in the middle only five have been noted. Active. Sing. i. cukriidhatn, j'lj'anam, didkaram, vocam. ^i), 2. cikradas, ciksipas, jihvaras, jlhipas {c2x&. ha-paya^, iiirsas (TS. ill. 2. didtpas, didyufas, didharas, riinafnas, nfnasas, paptas, pisprias, piparas {pr-

'cross'), bibhisas (TS. iii. 2. 5^), mimrsas, riradhas, ririsas, vTvijas, vocas, sUnathas, sisrdthas, susucas (AV.), sTsadhas {Y-sadk-). 3. cucyavat, tistkipat, didharat, dudravat, dudusat, nesat, paptat (AV.), piparat {pr- 'cross', RV.) and pipdrat {pr- 'cross', RV. = TS. i. 6. i23), piparat {pr- 'fill'), mimayat'', riradhat {Yrandh-), ririsat, vocat, Hsrathat, sisvadat {Ysvad-). — Without thematic -a-: nunot {nu- 'praise'), yuyot {yu- 'separate'), susrot. Du. 2. jihvaratam^ (VS. v. 17) z.-a.Ajihvaratam'= (TS.' 1.2.13^), rTradhatam^. PI. 2. riradhatai, rJrisata^ (i. 89'' = VS. xxv. 22). 3. ciksipan (AV.), papian, riraman, vocan, suhccan (VS. xxxv. 8). Middle. Sing. i. voce. — 2. btbhisatkas^ PI. 3. jijananta, vacanta, sTsapanta (sap- 'serve').

Reduplicated Aorist Optative. 517. The forms of this mood are rare, numbering altogether (including a precative) not more than a dozen. The majority of these come from vac- 'speak', and the rest from two other roots, cyu- 'stir' and ris- 'hurt'. Active. Sing. i. vociyam. — 2. ririses, voces. — 3. vocet (AV.). Du. 2. vocetani. — PI. I. vocenia^. — 3. vociyur. Middle. Sing.i. voceya. — Pl.i. cucyuvimdAi^, vocemahi. — 3. cucyavTrata^,

There is also the precative sing.3. rtris-T-s-ta'^ (vi.517) or riris-T-s-ta{yiii.i?>'^i).

I As if from an indicative 3. sing, '^apisffk. 6 Formed from the causative stem bhisaya- ' Like an indicative present in form. of bhl- 'fear'. 3 These forms refute the statement of 7 This form occurs six times in the RV., HiRT, IF. 12, 214 f., that the reduplicated, three times unaccented and three times as well as the root and a- aorist, has no sub- accented vocima. Avery 268 wrongly states junctive, but only injunctive forms. Cp. 502, 509. vodma to occur five times and vocema (sic) t This form seems to have an injunctive once. sense in RV. x. 2722, its only occurrence. 8 Without thematic -a-. 5 Reckoned here an injunctive form (not 9 In the Pada text riristsfa. imperative) because accompanied by ma: cp. Delbruck, Altindische Syntax p. 361'. VII. Verb. Aorist System. 377

Reduplicated Aorist Imperative. 518. Forms of this mood are rare, numbering hardly more than a dozen. They occur in the active only. Active. Sing. 2. vocatat. — 3. vocatu. — Du. 2. jigrtdm (gr- 'waken'), didhrtam, vocatam. — PI. 2. jigrtd, didhrta, paptata ' (i. 88'), vocata, susuddta (AV. i. 26'') ^ — 3. pupurantu {pr- 'fill'), Hsrathantu.

3. Sigmatic Aorist.

519. The general tense sign of this aorist is an j added to the root. This s in the vast majority of verbs (more than 200) comes immediately before the endings. When such is the case, the stem may be formed in three different ways: the j being added i. direct to the root, e. g. a-jai-s-am iji- 'conquer'); 2. with a connecting -i-, e. g. a-kram-i-s-am {kram- 'stride');

3. with an additional s- prefixed to the connecting -z-, e. g. a-ya-s-i-s-am (ya- 'go'). The inflexion of these three varieties (A) follows that of the graded conjugation. In a small number of verbs the stem is formed by adding -s extended with a thematic a; e. g. d-rnk-sa-t {ruh- 'mount'). The inflexion of this fourth form (B) of the sigmatic aorist is like that of an imperfect of the a- conjugation. Of the four varieties of the sigmatic aorist, the first two, the j- aorist and the is- aorist, are very common, each being formed by nearly 100 roots. The other two are rare, the sis- aorist being made from only six, and the sa- aorist from only nine roots.

A. I. The s- aorist. Delbruck, Verbum 177—179, — Avery. Verb-Inflection 257—259. — WrnxNEY, Sanskrit Grammar 878 — 897; Roots 225—226; Atharvaveda, Index Verborum 380. — V. Negelein, Zur Sprachgeschichte 83 — 84. 520. In this form of the sigmatic aorist, the radical vowel as a rule takes Vrddhi {a being lengthened) in the active. In the middle, on the other hand, excepting final I and u (which take Guna), the radical vowel remains unchanged. Thus in the active there occur the forms i. sing. a-jai-sam{YJi-)i (i-bkar-sam{Ybhr-), ^. sing, d-rai/i (Yrit:-), 3. pi. d-cchant-sur (j\fchand-); while in the middle we find i. sing, a-vit-si (Yvid-), d-bhut-si

( Ybudh-'), a-srk-si ( Y^TJ-)-, a-nu-si {nu- 'praise'), beside forms with Guna from roots ending in ? or Zi! such as 3. pi. a-he-s-ata {Yhi-)., a-ne-s-ata {Yni-), I. sing, a-sto-si (]Ajz'«-).

a. There are, however, some irregularities, i. In a few active injunctive forms

Guna appears instead of Vrddhi, e.g. sing. 2. /V-j (l/^V-), pi. l.fe-sma. — 2. In two or three middle forms of saA- 'overcome', the a is lengthened, c. g. sing. I. sak-si^. — 3. The root is shortened in a few middle forms; thus the a of da- 'cut', is reduced to i in sing. I- opt. di-s-Tya, and the nasal of gam- 'go' and man- 'think' is dropped in the forms a-ga-smahi and ma-sTya. — 4. After a consonant other than n m r, the tense sign s is dropped before i, ih, and dh; thus a-bhak-ta beside d-bhak-s-i l^bkaj-); fat-ihas (AV.) beside fat-s-i {\/j>ad; AV.); a-sto-dhvam^ Instil-), where the s on becoming z cerebralized the following dental before disappearing \*a-sto-z-dhvam). In addition to the indicative, all the moods of this form of the aorist occur. There iS also a participle, but it is rare.

1 An imperative form like this justifies 188), though the reduplicative vowel is the classification of afaptat etc. as an actual short. Cp. p. 362, note 9. aorist, apart from its possible origin as a 3 Also in the active subjunctive form pluperfect. sdksdma, where the a would normally remain 2 Pada text susuddta. It is perhaps better short, as the radical vowel in this mood to class this form here (cp. Whitney, Sanskrit takes Guna only. Grammar 871) than as a transfer form of 4 The only example in this aorist of the the perfect imperative from y/siid- (Roots ending -dhvam. 378 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

Indicative.

521. The only point in which the inflexion differs from that of the imper- fect of the graded conjugation is that the 3. pi. active invariably ends in -ur.

a. The following peculiarities and irregularities are moreover to be noted. 1. In the active; in the RV. ^ the endings -s and -t of the 2. 3. sing, disappear, and the tense sign also, unless the root ends in a vowel; e. g. a-kar{KS^, 3. sing. Irorayhr-, =*a-har-s-i, but a-ha-s, 3. sing, from ha- 'leave' = *a-ha-s-t. The AV. and TS., however, less often than not, insert a connecting -t- before these endings, thus preserving both the latter and the s of the tense stem; e. g. a-naik-s-i-t [\/niJ-, AV.), a-tam-s-T-t (ytan-, TS.). In four forms in which the -t- is not inserted, the -s and -/, as distinctive of the 2. and 3. persons, abnormally take the place of the -s of the stem or the final consonant of the root: a-h-ai-t (AV.) for *a-srai-s-t {]/sri-); a-hai-t (AV.) for *d-Aai-s-( (yhi-); a-va-i (AV. viu. 121) for *a-vas-i^ (vas- 'shine'); 2. sing, srii-s (AV.) for *srdj-s-s^ {V'fJ')- T^^^ K.V. also has a-yd-s for *a-yaj-s-s {yaj- 'sacrifice') beside the phonetically regular form in the 3. sing. a-ydf for *a-ydj-s-i. — 2. In the middle nine first and one or two third persons singular appear in which the stem is made with the addition of -s, but which have both the ending and the meaning of the present; and the -s is added to a present stem and not to the aorist form of the root. Thus formed are from a present stem of i. the a- class: arca-s-e 'I praise', yaja-s-e 'I worship' (vni. 25'); 2. the a- class, nasalized: rnja-s-e'' 'I strive after'; 3. the ya- class: gdy-i-se^ 'I sing'; 4. the nd- class: gfiti-s-i^ '1 pia.ise' ; pum-s-e T purify'; 5. the root class: kr-s-e 'I make', hi-s-e 'I impel', stu-s-c^ *1 praise' ; 6. the intensive: carkr-s-e which (like stusi'^ in I. 122^) is a 3. sing, with a passive sense: 'is praised'.

522. The forms of the indicative actually occurring wouldj if made from •bhr- 'bear' in the active and stu- 'praise' in the middle, be as follows: Active. Sing. I. dbharsam. 2. dbhar, ab/iSrsis {AN.). 3. dbhar; abharsit (AV.TS.). — Du. 2. dbharstam. 3. abharstam. — PL i. dbharsma. 2. dbharsta. 3. dbharsur.

Middle. Sing. i. dstosi. 2. dstosthas. 3. dstosta. — Du. 3. dstosatam. — PL I. dstosmahi. 2. dstodhvam. 3. dstosata. The forms which actually occur are the following:

I. Active. Sing. akarsam (AV.), ajaisam ( 1//V-), dpraksam ( Yprach-, AV.), >abharsam, dyamsam ayasam, dsparsam {spr- 'win'), ( Yyam-), dharsam ( Y^f)- 2. akran {Ykrand-), agkas^° {Yghas-, AV. xx. 129'*), a'/4aj- (/4a- 'leave', AV. II. 10''). — With irregular -s: aySs {Yyv'-)^ ^^3s {Y^rj-i AV.). — -/"-: With connecting aratsis (ra;//^- 'succeed', AV.), avatsis^^ (z^aj-- 'dwell', AV.); bhaists (AV.). 3. With loss of the ending -t: ajais^^ (Yji-), apras {Ypf^-)> (^has {hd- 'leave'). — With loss of both tense sign and ending: dkran^^ {Y krand-), dksar Yksar-), acait lA«V-), acchan chand-), !/'/««-), ( ( ( Y atan ( atsar ( Ytsar-), ddyaut Ydyut-), adhak dah-), aprak {pre- 'mix', ( ( ^ AV.), aprat { Yprach-), abhar, ayat j/ya/'-), dyan araiit "t ( { Yyam-), ( Yrudh-, AV.), dvat { Yvah-), avails {vas- 'shine', AV.), as'vati {Ysvit-), asyan {Ysyand-), dsrak (Y-^.r/-), dsvar {Ysvar-), ahar {Yhr-, AV.); draik {Yric-); dyaut, vat {Yvah-). —

1 and the Kathaka, Whitney 888. in one passage (l. 122"), however, it appears 2 In avdt t the may, however, represent to be a 3. sing, with a passive sense: 'is the final s of the root, the form possibly praised'. standing for *a-vdt-s-i; see above 44 a 2, 9 On stusi in general, see Oldenberg, and Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar 167. ZDMG. 59,3S5ff-. Neisser, BB. 30.315—325. 3 The phonetically 1° regular form would be Cp. above 499, dghas sing. 2. 3. ''srdi. Cp. p. 61 (middle). " Cp. V. Negelein 83, note S; above 4 Also the participle rfijas-dnd-. 44, a I. 5 From gdya-, with -i- for -a-. 12 For *ajais-t. 6 From the weak stem. 13 For *akrdnd-s-t. 7 These three forms seem to represent H For *araudk-s-i. the transition of aorist stems to employment IS Cp. avdt-s-T-s (AV.) from vas- 'dwell'. as present stems. Cp. note 2 and p. 36 (top). 8 The form stusi is frequent as a I. sing.; ; — —

VI. Verb. Aorist System. 379

With irregular -f: asrait ( )fsri-, AV.), dhait ( Yhi; AV.). With connecting -/-: atamsit {ytan-, TS.iv. 7. 135; VS.xv. 53), anaiksit (Vnij-, AV.): rautstt iYrudk; Kh.1v.75). Du. 2. dsrastam^ iV^rj; AV.). — 3. abkarstam {WS.xxvlll.l^), asvarstam

( V^jz/or-). Pl.i. djaisma, dhhaisma. — 2. dcchania^ {Ychand-), anaista (TS.v.7.2*). 3. dcchantsur, dbhaisur, amatsur {Yinad-), ayasur, dvaksur (Y^^^-t AV.)3. Middle, Sing. i. ddz/esi iYi^i^'-), ddhi^ {da- 'give',' AV.), anusi (Ynu-), dbhaksi {Y^haj-), dbhutsi {Ybudh-), dmasi {ma- 'measure', AV.), dmuksi {Ymuc-, AV.), avitsi {vid- 'find'), asaksi^ {Ysak-), asrksi, astosi; mamsi {Yman-), vrksi^ ^Y'^VJ-, AV.), saksi^. 2. djnasthas (AV.), dtapthas'' (AV.IX.5*), aprkthas {Yprc-, AV.), dmukthas {Ymuc-, AV.). 3. apr^ia (V>.rc-), dbhakta {Ybhaj-), V. dmamsta (VS • 40), amatta ( yz«a(/-), ayamsta {Yyam-), ayasta {YyV'), dramsta {Yram-), drabdha {Yrabh-), asakta {Y^aj-), dsrsta {Y^V'-), astosta. Du. 3. anusstam, amamsatam (VS. xxxviii. 13), dyuksatam {Yy*/')- PI. I. agasmahi^{Ygam-), aprks}naM{Yprc-, AY.), abhutsmahi {Ybudh-), dviksmahi {Y^is-), asrksmahi {Y^fj-, TS. i. 4. 45^; VS. xx. 22). 2. dstodhvam (for *d-stos-dkvam from s(u- 'praise'). 3. akramsata (AV.), ddrksata {Ydrs-), ddhuksata {Yduh-), ddhursata"^ {dhvr- 'injure'), adhusata, dnusata, anesata { YnT-), dbhutsata { Ybudh-), amatsata amamsata ( Y^^n-), ( Ymad-), ayamsata { Yyam-), ayuksata { Yyu/-), aramsata (AV.), drasata, alipsata, dviksata (lAwz/-), avrtsata {Yvrt-), avrsata {vr- 'choose', AV. iii. 38), asaksata {sac- 'accompany';, dsrksata {YsTJ-)i dstosata, ahUsata {hu- 'call'), ahasata, ahrsata { Yhr-), ahesata { Yhi-).

s- Aorist Subjunctive.

523. This mood is quite common in the RV., but decidedly less so in the other Sarnhitas. Its forms are, however, frequent only in the active, in which all persons are represented except the i. du. The middle is much less common, about 20 forms occurring altogether; only one of these is found in the dual, and two in the plural. The root regularly takes Guna throughout before the tense sign", in the middle as well as the active. The primary endings are frequent, being used almost exclusively'^ in the du. and the 2. pi. In the middle 3. sing, and pi. the exceptional ending -tai occurs in two forms in later Samhitas (AV. TS.). Active. Sing. i. stosani. — 2. darsasi {dr- 'split'); jesas {Yj^')i vdksas {Y'vah-). — 3. nesati {YnT-{, parsati {pr- "'take across'), pasati ('protect'), matsati {Ymad-), yosati {yu- 'separate'), vaksati {Y^ah-), sak- sati {Ysah-, AV.); dksat {as- 'attain', x. 11 7), hsesai {ksi- 'dwell'), 1//V-), 'split'), 'give'), drasat chanisat ( Y'^hand-), jesat { ddrsat {dr- dasat {da-

1 Emendation for asrasfrani of the Mss., 4 Cp. V. Negelein 834. AV. IV. 28'*; see Whitney's note. 5 With anomalous long vowel. 2 For * acchant-s-ia. 6 See Whitney's note on AV. vi. 302. J Avery 257 adds the form avesan, which 7 For * d-tap-s-ihas. occurs twice in the RV., regarding it doubt- 8 With loss of the radical nasal {a taking less as an s- aorist of yvJ-. It would as such the place of the sonant nasal). have the double anomaly of absence of 9 With interchange of the radical vowel Vjddhi and the ending -an. It is probably and semivowel: see 50, b. 10 3. pi. impf. oi\vis- in both passages (l. 1702 The a of sak is lengthened in the forms X. 114'). GrA-SSMANN in X. 114' regards it sdksama and saksate. as aorist of \vi-. " Excepting only the 3. du. act. yaksatam. 38o I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

'reach'), pdksat pdrsat ('take {dra- 'run'), naksat [nas- nhat ( YnT-), ( Ypac-), across'), /rd'W (l//rr-); bhaksat {ybkaj-), bharsat {Ybhr-), tndtsat {Ymad-), ydmsat {Yyam-), ydksat {Yyaj-)-, yasat, yosat (yu- 'separate'), rasat, vdmsat {Yvan-), vdksat ("l/z/a/^-), valsat (Kh. v. 15'^), vesat^ (l^^r-)^, saksat {sac- 'accoinpany' ^ and sah- 'overcome'''), satsat {Ysad-), sarsat (j/^jt-, AV.), stosat, sraksat ( Y^U'i ^S. xxi. 46). Du. 2. ddsatkas, dkasathas, pdrsathas (j>r- 'take across'), vdksathas (vr- 'cover'). ( Y^ak-, AV.), varsathas 3. pasatas ('protect'), yamsatas {Yyam-), yaksatas (Vj'^/-), yosatas (yu- 'separate', AV.), vaksatas (Y'^"^-)- — With -tarn: yaksatam {Yyv'')- "PI. 1. j'e'sSma {YJi-)i vdmsama (j/z/aw-), sdksama^ {Y^ak-), stosama. — 2. dkasatha, nesatha^ pdrsatha ('take across'), mdtsatha. — 3. parsafi ('take across'), yamsan {Yy^'^'); ^dsan, vdksan, sesan {si- 'lie'). Middle. Sing. i. namsai, mdmsai (l/"OTa;z-). — 2. dfksase^, prksase^ mamsase Y^^<^ii-). — 3. krainsate, trasate, darsate {dr- 'split'), ( YPr'^')i ( l/waw-), mdmsate (Ywan-), yamsate ( j/j/aw-), yaksate ( lA'^'-), rasate, vamsate ( saksate^ {Ysah-)T. — With ending -iai: mdsatai (AV.). Du. 2. trasathe (for *trSsait/ie). — PI. 3. ndmsante mdmsante ( Y^am-^, (]/»?««-). — With ending -tai: mamsatai^ (TS. vii. 4. 15').

5- Aorist Injunctive.

524. Injunctive forms are of fairly common occurrence, especially after vii. Judged by the extremely few accented forms occurring, the accent was

on the radical syllable. All the forms occurring in the i . sing. act. are irregular in one way or another: nearly all of them take Guna instead ofVrddhi, while yusa7n (AV.) only lengthens the radical vowel {yu- 'separate'). Three first

persons from roots in -a substitute e"^ for that vowel, as yesam from ya- 'go'; the same substitution takes place in the i.pl. gesma (AV.), desma (VS.), and

3. pi. sthesur (AV.). Active. Sing. i. j'esam''" {Yp-, VS. ix. 13 etc.), yUsant {yu- 'separate', AV.), stosam'^°; from roots ending in -a: gesam {ga- 'go', VS. v. 5), yesam {ya- 'go'), sthesam 9 {stha- 'stand', VS. 11. 8). 2. jes'^°; bhak {Ybhaj-), yat {YyV-)) yo-us {yu- 'separate'), Avar {Yhvar-, VS. I. 2). — With connecting -T-: hasTs (Kh. iv. 85; AA. 11. 7).

3. dhak{Ydah-), bhak{Ybhaj-), bhar{Ybkr-), mauk{Ymuc-, VS. I. 25), iai-" {ha- 'leave'). — With connecting -7-: tapsit (VS. xiii. 30), vaksTi {Yvah-, AV.), Msit (TS. vii. 3. 13'; AV.), hvarfit {Y hvar-, VS. i. 2). Du. 2. taptam {Ytap-^ VS. v. 33), yausta?n {yu- 'separate'), srastam {Ysrj-, AV).

1 As appearing in immediate juxtaposition 6 Weak radical vowel instead of Guna. •with prhat (I. 180S), this form appears to be 7 Avery 258 adds hasate, also Whitney, an aorist subjunctive of m-, not a present Grammar 893 a; but this form is doubtless injunctive of yvis- {pesaii). a 3. sing. mid. pres. of has- 'hasten', a secon- 2 Avery 258 gives sisai, among these dary form of ha- 'leave' according to the a-

forms, as occurring _ once. He doubtless class; also hasanie (AV. IV. 36^). Cp. p. 321, means ni-sisat (iv. 2') which occurs beside note 7. the subjunctives bharat and udtrat. But it 8 See Weber's ed. of the TS., p. 310, 15, cannot be an s- aorist (which would be note ". siksat). Whitney, Roots, takes it as an a- 9 Made perhaps from an i- form of roots aorist of Hs- 'leave', Grassmann, Worter- ending in -a. Cp. Whitney, Grammar 894 c. buch 1392, as an aorist oisas-. Cp. above 510. "> Formed perhaps under the influence of 3 In I. 12910 ('accompany'). the subjunctives jesat and stosat, 4 In V. 306 ('conquer'). II Unnecessarily regarded by Delbrijck, 5 With lengthened radical vowel. Verbum p. 60 (80) as from /5/-- 'take'. VII. Verb. Aorist System. 381

PL I. yausma {yu- 'separate', VS.1v.22). — With Guna only: gesma"^ (ga- 'go', AV.), j/sma {Yji-), desma-" {da- 'give', VS. 11. 3 2 J. — 2. naista iYni-), yausta (Yyu- 'separate', AV.)^ ss^ta' (TS. iii. 3. 9'). — 3. jahur AV.), dkasur, {Yji; yausur {yu- 'separate'), sthesur"- {KST. xvi. 4?), hasur. Middle. Sing. i. gasi {ga- 'sing'), niksi ( Ynij-, AV.), patsi ( Ypad-, AV.), bhakd {YbhaJ-, vi[. 41^), rnesi (mi- 'diminish', AV.), yamsi {Yyam-), yaksi iVyu'-), vdimi {Yvan-), vrksi {Vvrj-). 2. cyost/ias{Y':y^i-), chitihas[Yckid-, AN.), pattkas (Ypad-, KSf.), bhitthas (TS. IV. I. 9^), mamsthas {Yman-, AV.; VS. xiii. 41), mestMs {Y»ii-, AV.), ramstkas (Yram-, AV.), hasthas {ha- 'go forth', AV.). ksesta {ksi- 'destroy', 3. AV.), nesta { Ym-, AV.), pasta {pa- 'drink', AV.), mamsta KSf.), {Yman-, mamsta^ {Yman-, AV. xi. 2^), mesta (wr- 'fail', AV.), hasta {ha- 'be left', AV.).

Du. 2. srksatham {Y^TJ-, VS.-xix. 7). PI. I. yutsmahii {Y'yudh-, AV.), hasmahi {ha- 'be deprived of). 3, dhuksata {Yduh-), nusata, matsata {Ymad-), muksata {Ymuc-), saksata {Ysac- 'accompany').

«- Aorist Optative.

525. This mood occurs in the middle only in this form of the sigmatic aorist. The 2. 3. sing, always appears with the precative s excepting

the one form bhakstta in the SV. (i. i. 2. 4^). Sing. I. distya'- {da-'-cxA'), bhakstyd{Ybhaj-), masiya^ {y man-), muksjya, rasiya, saksTya^ {Y^ah-, AV.), strsiya {Y str-, AV.) 2. mamsisthds {Yman-). — 3. darsTsta {dr- 'tear'), bhakstta (SV.), mamsista (Yman-), mrksista {mrc- 'injure'). Du. 2. trSsitham (for *tras-iyatha.m).

PI. I. dhuksTmdhi {Yduh-, TS. i. 6. 4^), bhaksTmdhi {YbhaJ-), mamsimdhi {Yman-), vamsimdhi and vasimahi^ {Yvan-, ix. 72*), saksTmdhi {\fsac-). — 3. mamsTrata. s- Aorist Imperative.

526. No certain regular forms of the imperative occur in the active. Two or three, such z.% yaustam, naista, might have been classed here, but as they occur with mS. only, they have been placed among the injunctives. There are, however, the two transfer forms in the 2. sing, nesa {Ym-, AV.) and parsa {pr- 'take across') 7. The only forms of the imperative occurring in the middle are three made from ra- 'give' and one from sah- 'conquer'.

Middle. Sing. 2. siksva. — 3. rasatam. — Du. 2. rasatham. — PI. 3. rasantam. s- Aorist Participle.

527. Only two or three forms of the active participle are found. These are ddksant- and dhdksant- from dah- 'burn', and sdksant- from sah- 'prevail'. In the middle there are no regular forms. There is one doubtful example in which the stem is extended with -a- and accordingly adds the suffix -mana, as in the a- conjugation: dhi-s-a-mana- {dhi- 'think').

There are, besides, a dozen stems irregularly formed by adding j' to the root with an intermediate -a-, and taking the regular ending -ana. These forms

I See p. 380, note 9. 5 Root weakened by loss of nasal (a taking = For sap-s-ta. the place of the sonant nasal). ^ 3 A somewhat doubtful reading : see With irregular lengthening of the radical Whitney's note on AV. vii. 52^. vowel. t With the radical a weakened to i. 7 See WfflTNEY, AV. Index Verborum 382. :

382 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

may be accounted as belonging to the s- aorist. All but two of them occur in the RV. They are: arsasand- 'injuring', dhasana- {]fuh-') 'lying in wait', jrayasand- (Yjri-) 'far-extending', dhiyasand- (^dhi-) 'attending', namasand- (Ynam-) 'rendering homage' (AV.), bhiydsana- iybhi-) 'fearing' (AV.), mandasand- (T/mand-) 'rejoicing', yamasand- (yyam-) 'being driven' (with passive sense), rabhasand- i^rabh-) 'agile', vrdhasand- ^vrdh-) 'growing', savasand- (]/"/«-) 'strong', sahasdnd- (^sah-^ 'mighty'.

A. 2. The is- Aorist. Delbruck, Verbum p. 179— iSo. — Avery, Verb-Inflection 259— 261. — Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar 898—910; Roots 226—227; AV. Index Verborum 380. — v. Negelein, Zur Sprachgeschichte 85-—86. 528. About 80 roots take this form of the sigmatic aorist in the RV. and about a dozen others in the AV. The -s is here added to the root with the connecting vowel -i-. The radical vowel as a general rule takes Guna throughout; but in the active a final vowel takes Vrddhi and a medial -a is sometimes lengthened. No roots with final -a and few with final -t take this aorist. The terminations are the same as those of the s- aorist, excepting that the 2. and 3. sing. act. end in -IS (= is-s) and -it (= is-t). Active and middle forms, though frequent, are rarely both made from the same root, occurring thus in about fifteen verbs only. This is the only aorist from which a few forms are made in the secondary conjugation ^. Besides the indicative, all the moods are represented in this aorist, but no participial forms have been met with.

Indicative.

529. In the active all persons are represented except du. i. 2. and pi. 2.; but in the middle only sing. 2. and 3. occur besides a single form of sing, i (Kh.), du. 3. and pi. 3. (VS.). a. A few irregularities occur in the formation of this tense''- i. The forms atarima (beside the normal dtarismd) and avadiran^ (AV.), are probably to be regarded as irregular forms with abnormal loss of the aoristic -s. — 2. The root grabh- 'seize' takes the connecting vo'wel 7^ (as it does in other verbal forms) instead of -z-, as agrabhisma. — 3. In the sing. i. act., the ending -Tm appears instead of -isam in the three forms dkramlm, vddhtm,

and agrabhim (TS.), doubtless owing to the analogy of the 2. and 3. sing, -is and -if-. — 4. The abnormal ending -aii appears in the 3. sing, in dsarait^ (AV.) beside asarit (AV.)"^. The normal forms occurring, if made from kram- 'stride', would be as follows Active. Sing. i. dkramisam. 2. dkramis. 3. dkramit. — Du. 3. dkra- mistam. — PL i. dkramisma. 3. dkramimr.

Middle. Sing. i. dkramisi (Kh.). 2. dkramidhas. 3. dkramista. — Du. 3. dkramisatam. — PI. 3. dkramisata (VS.). The forms which actually occur are the following:

1 From causatives dhvanayti, ailayit (yH-, 4 Cp. Delbruck, Verbum p. 188. AV.), from a desiderative trlsTs {\/rdh-, AV.). 5 This abnormal ending also occurs in 2 The weak form of the root appears in the secondary conjugation in the denomi-

the injunctive nudisfhas (AV.) and the opta- native aor. dsafaryaii [AM .): see below 570. live rucisTya (AV.) and gmislya (VS.), which 6 Both these forms also show the irregu- syncopates the radical vowel as in the root larity of taking Gu;ia instead of Vjfddhi. aor. and the perfect of this verb,. 3 Cp. Whitney 904 d. ;

VII. Verb. Aorist System. 383

Active. Sing. i. akanimm, akarisam, akramisam, acayisam (AV.), acarisam, abharisam {ybhr-, AV.), avadkisam (AV.), avadisam (AV.), ds'am- sisam, asanisam; aiisam {as- 'eat', AV.); ravisam. — VVith ending -Jm: akramtm, agrabhim (TS.); vddhim. 2. akramts, adrmhis (VS. vi. 2), dvadhis, avarsis \ asiaris (Ystr-, AV.) asis' (as- 'eat', AV.), du^sTs {uks- 'grow'); kramis, vddhis. 3. dkarit, dkramit, dgrabhit, dgrakft{P^Y.), dtarit, adrmhit (MS. iv. 13^), anaylf {Yni-, AV.), dmandit, ayastt, dyodhit, aravit, dvadktt, dvarsit (^vrs-^ AV.), dsamsit, asarit'^ ^ (AV.), asavit, astanit (AV.), dsvanit; avit, ant (as- 'eat', AV.); jarvit {jurv- 'consume'}, tarit, vddhit. — With ending -aitx asaraii^ (AV). Du. 3. dtnanthistam; jdnistam.

PI. I. agrabhisma, dtarisma and atarima^, dvadhisma (VS. ix. 38). 3. ataksisur, dtarisur, adhanvisur, dnartisur, dnindisur, apavimr, dman- disur, atnadisur, arSjisur, aranisur {ran- 'rejoice'), dravisur, avadisur, asavisur; aksisur^ (i. 163'°), anisur {\fan-, AV., TS.), dvisur (}fav-). — With -ran-^ avadiran (AV.).

Middle. Sing. i. aiksisi (Kh. i. i': Yiks-). — 2. djanisthas {KSl .), asamisthas {sam- 'labour'), asayisthas, dsramisthas; jdnisthas. 3. akrapista {\fkrp^, djanista, adhavista, anavista, aprathista, arocista

(VS. XXXVII. 1 5), avasista {vas- 'wear'), dsamista, dsahista; duhista {uh- 'con^. sider'); krdmista, jdfiista, prdthista, mdndista, yamista. Du. 3. dmandhatam. — PI. 3. dgrbhisata (VS. xxi. 60).

/s- Aorist Subjunctive.

530. Active forms of this mood are fairly common, but are almost exclusively limited to the 2. and 3. sing. Middle forms are very rare, occurring only in the pi., where not more than four examples have been noted. Active. Sing. i. davisaniT. — 2. avisos, k&tiisas, tarisas, raksisas, vddhisas, vAdisas (AV.), vesisas, samsisas. 3. kdrisat, jambhisat, josisat, tSrisat, nindisat (AV.), pdrisat ('take, across'), bodhisat, mdrdhisat, yacisat, yodhisat, raksisat, vanisat{KY.), vyathisat (VS. VI. 18), samsisat (TS. v. 6. 8^), sanisai, savisat^ {su- 'vivify'). PI. 3. sanisan'^ (AV. v. 35). Middle. PI. i. yacisamahe, sanisamahe. — 3. vanisanta'^° (J^S. iv. 7. 14'), sdnisania. is- Aorist Injunctive. 531. Forms of the injunctive are commoner than those of the subjunctive. In the active they are found almost exclusively in the 2. 3. sing., 2. du. and 2. 3. pi.; in the middle nearly a dozen forms occur, all but one in the sing. The forms of this mood have the accent on the root (as in the un- augmented indicative).

Active. Sing. i. sdmsisam, himsisam (VS. i. 25).

1 Avery 259 adds avarkis as occurring once. 7 Cp. V. SCHROEDER, WZKM. I3, II9— 122. 2 See Whitney's note on AV. xi. 3=6. 8 This form occurs also in two passages 3 With. Guna instead of Vrddhi of final of the AV. ; in a third (AV. I. 182J savisak vowel; cp. Bartholomae, Studien 2, 165. appears instead of it. Cp. Whitney's note, 4 See Whitney's note on AV. vi. 662, on this passage, and his Grammar 151 a. where the reading aiar'ti is better supported; 9 The corresponding passage of the RV. cp. his note on AV. vi. 65'. (x. 128'') has vanusanta, and of the TS.^ 5 With loss of the aoristic -s. (IV. 7- 14') vanisanta. 6 From aks- 'attain' (WHITNEY, Roots i) 10 See preceding note. a secondary form of Vas-; otherwise a. sis- aorist from as- 'attain'. Vedic 384 I- Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Grammar.

2. avis, kramis (AV.), jivTs (AV.), taris, barhls, mdthis, mardkts, mosTs, yavis, yodliis, raksis (AV.), rand/tls, lekhis (VS. v. 43), vddhis, /(7irr.f (VS.x1.45), savis, spharJs, himsTs (VS. AV.). — With -ais\ sarais (-[fs'r-, AV.). {das- 3. asti (a/- 'eat'), ^arf/ (^r- 'swallow'), carit, jTvit (AY.), tarit, dasit 'waste'), barh% mdtkit, vadhit (TS.iv. 2. 9'; VS. xiii. 16), vent, svanit, himsit. Du. 2. tdristam, mardhistam, himsistam (AV. VS.). PI. I. sramisma. — 2. grabhista, vadhista, himsista (AV. TS.); mathistana (AV.), rdnistana (Yran-), vadhistana. — 3. jarisur (jr- 'waste away'), jivisur (Av.), tarisur'' (AV.), vadhisur (AV.), vadisur (AV.), hbnsisur (AV.). Middle. Sing. i. radhisi (AV.). — 2. ksanisthas'' (AV.), nudisthas^ {AV.), marsisthas i:\fmrs-), vadhisthas (Kh. 11. 1 1^), vyathisthas (AV.). — 3. panista, pavista, badhista. — PL I. vyathismahi (AV.).

/s- Aorist Optative.

532. This mood is rare, occurring in the middle only and being formed from hardly a dozen roots. Though the ending is accented, the root appears in a weak form in gmisTya^ (VS.) and riicisiya (AV.). The 2. and 3. sing. take the precative -s-.

Middle. Sing. i. edhisiyd (AV.), gmisiya^ (VS. iii. \^), janinya (AV.)5, rucinya^ (AV.). — 2. modisTsthas (AV.). — 3. janisista, vanisista. Du. I. sahisivahi (AV.). — PI. I. edhisimdhi (AV.), tarisTmaki, mandiu- mahi{y'Si.Yi.\i\\ TS.i.2.3' etc.), vandistmdhi, vard/itsimdM {YS.ii.i4,xxxviii. 21), sahinmahi (AV.), sahisimdhi (Pada text sakisTtndki).

is- Aorist Imperative. 533. Forms of this mood are rare, occurring in the active only and being made from six or seven roots at the most. Among these forms, two only are distinctively imperative, aviddhi and avisiu; a few others can be distinguished by having the accent on the ending; the rest, being unaccented and used without ma, cannot be distinguished from injunctives. Sing. 2. aviddhi. — 3. avistu. — Du. I. avistdm, kramistam, gamistam, ^anistdm, cayistam {ci- 'gather'), yodhistam (;\fyudh-), vadhistam, hiathistam. — 3. avistam. — Pi. 2. avitd°) avistdna, inathistana.

A. 3. The sis- Aorist.

Delbruck, Verbum p. 179. — Avery, Verb-Inflection 261. — Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar 911 —916; Roots 227. — v. Negelein, Zur Sprachgeschichte 86. 534. This aorist, which is inflected exactly like the is- aorist, is formed by only six or seven roots in the Samhitas. Middle forms occur in the optative only. Indicative.

Sing. I. ayasisam. — Du. 3. aySsistam (VS. xxviii. 14). — PI. 2. dya- sista. — 3. agasisur {ga- 'sing'), ayasisur^. Subjunctive.

Sing. 3. gasisat (ga- 'sing'), yasisai.

1 With accent on tlie ending instead of S This may be regarded as a form irregu- the root, larly lacking s = avistd. 2 Cp. Brugmann, KZ. 24, 363 f. 7 dksimr is formed from as- 'attain', accord- 3 With weak form of root. ing to Delbruck, Verbum p. 179; according 4 Cp. ZiMMER, KZ. 30, 222. to Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar 913, and 5 The Kathaka lias the forms janiseyavi Roots I, from the secondary root aks-; see s^ndjaniseya 6. made from a secondary -a- stem I above p. 383, note .(Whitney 907). | VII. Verb. Aorist System. 38s

Optative.

Middle. Sing. i. vamsisiya'^ {van- 'win', AV.). — 2. yasisistkas^. — PI. I. pyasisimahii 9'° (AV.; VS. 11. 14; MS. iv. [p. 181, 9]).

Injunctive.

Sing. I. ramsisam'' (SV.i. 4. i. 25). — Du. 2. hasistam (AV.). — 3. hasistam (AV.). — PI. 2. hashta (AV.). — 3. hasisur (AV.)."

Imperative.

Du. 2. yasistdm. — PI. 2. yasTsta^ (i. i65'5).

B. The sa- Aorist.

Delbruck, Verbum p. 179. — Avery, Verb-Inflection 262. — Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar gi6 —920; Roots 227. — v. Negelein, Zur Sprachgeschichte 86.

535. In the Samhitas this form of the sigmatic aorist is taken by only nine roots, which end in / s s or h and contain the medial vowels i u or r. The thematic a doubtless came to be employed in these few verbs to avoid a difficult agglomeration of consonants when the endings were added. The inflexion is like that of an imperfect of the d- class of the first conjugation, the -sd- being accented* in unaugmented forms. Besides the indicative, only forms of the injunctive and imperative occur, altogether fewer than a dozen. No subjunctive, optative, or participial forms have been noted.

Indicative.

536. Neither forms of any person of the dual nor of the 2. pi. occur in the indicative of this type of the s- aorist The active forms greatly pre- dominate, the middle being represented in the 3. sing, and pi. by only three or four forms altogether.

Active. Sing. i. avrksam {\fvrh-). — 2. adhuksas (Y^uh-, VS. i. 3), aruksas {^ruh-, AV.); ruksas {Yruh-, KSf.). — 3. dkruksat i^fkrus-), aghuksat {\fguh^, aduksat^ and ddhuksat {}fduh-), dmrksat (Ymrs-, AV.) druksat iYruh-), dsprksat {]fsprs-, AV.; VS. xxviii. 18). — PI. i. amrksama {Ymrj- 'wipe'), aruksama {Y^ruh-, AV.). — 3. ddhuksan (Ydu^-); duksan^ and dhuksdn (Y^duh-). Middle. Sing. 3. ddhuksata'^; duksata^ and dhuksata. — PI. 3. amrksanta (Ywj-)- Injunctive.

Active. Sing. 2. duksas, mrksas (ymrs-). — 3. dviksat (^dvis-, AV.). — PI. 2. mrksata {Ymrs-). Middle. Sing. 3. duksata^ and dhuksata {Yduh-), dviksata {Ydvis-, AV.). — PI. 3. dhuksdnta {Yduh-). Imperative.

Active. Du. 2. mrksatam (Y^mrj-). — 3. yaksatam yyaj-). Middle. Sing. 2. dhuksdsva {yduh-).

6 » In the Mss. vajnsisTya; see Whitney's Three forms occur accented thus ; the note on AV. IX. IH. root is, however, accented in dhuksata. 2 With precative s. 7 See above 32 b. 3 In the Mss. pyaHsiviahi; see Whitney's 8 See above 32 b. ' note on AV. VII. 81^. 9 In IX. 1 108 the form adhuksata seems 4 Variant for rasiya of the RV. to be a 3. pi. 5 With « for i. AVERY 261 gives the form as yasisid, Indo-arische Philologie. I. 1. 25 . ;

386 I. AlXGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VeDIC GRAMMAR.

IV. The Future System.

Delbruck, Verbum p. 183—184. — Avery, Verb-Inflection 262. — Whitney,

Sanskrit Grammar 931—941; Roots 228 f. ; AV. Index Verbonim 380. — v. Negelein, Zur Sprachgescliichte 86 — 87.

537. The Stem is formed by adding -syd^ or (rather less frequently with connecting -?'-) -isyd^ to the root, which gunates a final or a prosodi- cally short medial vowel. As the subjunctive frequently has a future sense, and even the present indicative may have it, the occasion for the use of actual future forms seldom arises in the RV., which forms a future stem from only fifteen roots, while the AV. does so from more than thirty (about eight of these occurring in the RV. also) ' There is only one subjunctive and one conditional form, but some twenty participles occur.

a. In the following sterns the suffix -sya is added direct: isi- 'abide' :

/ese-syd-i; ji- 'conquer' -.je-syd-; dah- 'burn' : dhak-syd-; yaj- 'sacrifice' -.yak- syd-; vac- 'speak' : vak-syd-; su- 'bring forth : sii-sya-''. In the AV. also occur:

/- 'go' : e-syd-; krt- 'cut' : kari-sya-; kram- 'stride' : kram-syd-; gtip- 'protect' : gop-sya-; da- 'give' : da-syd-; ni- 'lead' : ne-sya-; mt/i- 'mingere' : mek-syd-^;

yyok-sya-'^; : vah- 'carry' ya- 'go' : ya-syd-; yuj- 'join' radh- 'succeed' rat-sya-;

: vak-syd-; vrt- 'turn' : -vart-syd-T ; sad- 'fall' : sat-sya-; sah- 'prevail' : sak-sya-^; ha- 'leave' ; ha-sya- ; hii- 'sacrifice' : ho-syd-. In the VS. bandh- 'bind' : bhant-syd-. b. In the following stems the suffix is added with connecting -/'-:

av- 'favour' : av-isyd-'^; as- 'shoot' : as-isyd-; kr- 'do' : kar-isyd-; jan- 'beget' : jan-isya-; bhu- 'be' : bhav-isyd-; man- 'think' : man-isyd-; va- 'weave' : vay-isyd-'^° san- 'acquire' : san-isyd-; sr- 'hasten' : sar-isyd-; stu- 'praise' : siav-isyd-. From ^/4/-- causative stems: 'support' : dharay-isyd-; vas- 'clothe oneself : vasay-isyd-.

The AV. has the following additional stems: gam- 'go' : gatn-isya-; dhr-

'maintain' : dhar-isyd-; nas- 'disappear' : nas-isja-; pat- 'fly' : pat-isyd-; inr- 'die'

: 7nar-isya-\ vad- 'speak' : vad-isya-; vrt- 'turn' : vart-isya-}^ ; svap- 'sleep' : svap-

isyd-'^^; han- 'slay' : hati-isyd-. From causative stems: dus- 'spoil' : dusay-

isya-; vr- 'cover' : varay-isya- 'shield'. 538. a. Subjunctive. The only subjunctive form occurring is kar-isyd{-s) in IV. 30^^. '3 b. Conditional. The only example occurring is formed from bhr- 'bear'

: d-bkar-isya-t 'he was going to bear off' (11. 30^). c. Participles. A good many participial forms occur. The following stems are met with: Active. av-isyd7it-^^, as-isydnt-, e-sydnt-{K}I)^^, kar-isydnt-, kse-sydnt-, Man- isydnt- (TS.), je-sydjit-^'' (AV.), da-sydnt- (AV.), dhak-sydnt-, pat-isydnt- (AV.),

1 On the origin of this suffix see Brug- 7 See Whitney's note on AV. xv. (P 8 MANN, Grundriss 2, 747 fp. 1092), who con- An emendation : see note on saksye. nects the -isya form with the is- aorist; and 9 Cp. Delbruck, Verbum p. 184. V. Negelein, Zur Sprachgeschichte 85. 'o Op. cit. p. 183. 2 According to Whitney 937 the future n In the form dnvartisye for dmt-variisye; is formed from over 60 roots in the TS. but see p. II, 18. 12 I am uncertain how many of these occur See Whitney's note on AV. xix. 479. 13 in independent Mantra passages. The form karifya (l. 1659) is probably to 3 This is the only stem in which -sya is be explained as the same subjunctive

read -sia : ksesidntas. to be (= karisyds) : cp. BR. sv. karisya. 4 This stem has the double irregularity 14 Cp. Delbruck, Verbum p. 183. of accenting the root and not taking Guna: 15 \-a praisydn (AV. V. 2214), Pp. p-a-esydn, cp. the perfect sasiiva. but Whitney = fra-isyan. 16 5 The Mss. read meksami in AV. vli. In AV. XV. 201 nearly all the Mss. read 1021: cp. Whitney's note. jyesydn (as if from yjyd-) iox jesydn. 6 Doubtful reading see noKe.^ ^.>,%'] onyoksye. —

VII. Verb. Future System. 387

bhar-isydnt- (TS.), bhav-isydnt- (AV. VS.), ya-sydnt- (AV.), vac- 'speak' : vak-sydnt-, vay-isydntr, san-isydnt-, sar-isydnt-, sU-syant-, han-isydnt-. Middle, kramsyd-mana- {KY.), Janisyd-mana- (y?,.-i^vm.e,), yaksyd-mana-, stavisyd-mana- (AV.). Future Indicative. 539. The future is inflected, in both active and middle, Uke the present of the a- conjugation. The forms actually met with in the Samhitas would, if made from kr- 'do', be the following:

Active. Sing. I. karisydmi. 2. karisydsi. ^. karisydii. — T>m.2. karisyatkas (TS.). 3. karisyatas (AV.). — PI. i. karisydmas and karisydmasi (AV.). 2. kar- isydtha. 3. karisyanti (AV.).

Middle. Sing. i. karisye. 2. karisyase. 3. karisyate. The forms actually occurring are the following: Active. Sing. I. esyami(AY.), karisyami{KV.), karisyamiiNN.), carisyatni

(VS. 1.5), jesydmi, bhantsydmi (lAi^i^W/J-, VS. xxii. 4) ', meksyimi'^ (AV.), vaksydmi (Yvac-), stavisydmi. 2. karisydsi, jesyasii^S.y.ysii.^l), b/iavisyasi{A.Y.), marisyasi{KY.), rats- yasi {Yradh-, AV.), vaksyasi {^vac-, TS.11.6. i25), sanisyasi, hanisyasi (AV.). 3. karisyati, gamisyati (AV.), nasisyati (AV.), nesyati (AV.), patisyati (AV.), bhavisydti, marisyati (AV.), vadisyati (AV.), sanisyati, sthasyati (VS. VI. 2), hanisyati (AV.). Du. 2. karisyathas (TS. iv. i. 9^). — 3. marisyaias (AV.), vaksyatas iYvak; KSf.). PI. 1. bharisyamas (VS. xi. 16), vaksyAmas (Yvac-), svapisydmasi (AV.). 2. karisydtha, bhavisyatha, sarisyatha (AV.). 3. gofsyanti ^^gup-, AV.), satsyanti i^sad-, AV.), hasyanti i^hd-, AV.). Middle. Sing. i. dharisye (AV.), manisye, yoksye^ (AV.), vartisye^ (AV.), jfl/^jjifS (y'j-a/^-j AV.). — 2. stavisyase. — 3. janisyate, stavisyate (AV.). Periphrastic Future. 540. Of this formation, common in the later language, there seems to be an incipient example inVS.xviii. 59 = TS.v.7.7': anvaganta yajndpatir vo dtra 'the sacrificer is following after you here', a modification of AV. ¥1.123'- ^'- anvaganta yajatnanah svastl, which Whitney translates 'the sacrificer follows after well- being' *- V. Secondary Conjugation. 541. As opposed to the primary conjugation, there are four derivative formations in which the present stem is used throughout the inflexion of

the verb and is everywhere accompanied by the specific sense connected with that stem. The forms which occur outside the present system are, how- ever, rare. The four derivative formations are the desiderative, the intensive, the causative, and the denominative.

I. The Desiderative. Delbruck, Verbum p. 184— 186. — Avery, Verb-Inflection 230, 268— 270. Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar 1026 — 1040; Roots 2335. — v. Negelein, Zur Sprachgeschichte 88—90. 542. Though the least frequent of the secondary conjugations, the desi- derative is perhaps best dealt with first, as being akin in derivation and

1 In AV. III. 95 Roth and Whitney's 3 All the Mss. in AV. xix. ly- read yokse edition reads bharisyami; but Whitney, note (but Paipp. yoksye). on that passage, would emend this to 4 In anvartisye (AV. XIV. 156) given under bhantsyami {]/bandh-), and Shankar Pandit the root art- by Whitney, AV. Index Ver- reads bhatsyami. borum; see p. 386, note ^i. 2 Whitney's emendation for meksami of 5 The IMss. in AV. 11. 27s read sakse. vil. 1021. 6 Cp. Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar the Mss. J see his note on AV. 946. 25* 388 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar. meanino- to the future', the last of the primary verbal formations treated above (537 — 540). The desiderative is formed from the root with an accented reduplicative syllable and the suffix -sa, which expresses the desire for the to action or condition denoted by the root; e. g. pa- 'drink' : pi-pa-sa- 'desire drink'. Desiderative stems from fewer than sixty roots are met with in the Samhitas. The characteristic reduplicative vowel is /', which appears in all reduplicate with u) stems except those formed from roots containing u (which ; and the root generally remains unchanged. Thus jha- 'know' -.ji-jna-sa- (AV.);

: 'drink' : tij- jya- 'overpower' : ji-jya-sa-; da- 'give' di-da-sa-; pa- pi-pa-sa-; 'be

: bhid- 'split' : U-ihit-sa-; mis- 'mix' : sharp' : ti-tik-sa-; nid- 'blame' ni-nit-sa-;

: .pi-pn-sa-; mi-mik-sa-; ris- 'hmt' : ri-rik-sa- ; jit- '\e&d' ni-ni-sa-; pri- 'lovs'

'release' : guh- 'hide' : ju-guk-sa-'^ ; duh- 'milk' : du-duk-sa-''; muc- mii-muk-sa-;

'be' : bii-bhu-sa- ; trd- yudh- 'fight' : yu-yut-sa-; ruh- 'ascend' : ru-ruk-sa-; bhu-

: 'turn' : 'pierce' : ti-trt-sa-; trp- 'dehght' : tl-trp-sa-; drs- 'see' di-drk-sa-; vrt-

vi-vrt-sa-; srp- 'creep' : si-srp-sa-. a. A few desideratives reduplicate with a long vowel: fur- (= //-)

'cross' : tii-tur-sa-; bad/i- 'oppress' : bi-hhat-sa-; man- 'think' : mt-mam-sa- (AV.) 'investigate'. On the other hand, two desideratives abbreviate the reduplica-

tive syllable by dropping its consonant; thus yaj- 'sacrifice' : i-yak-sa- for

*yi-yak-sa- 3 ; nas- 'attain' : i-nak-sa-, for *ni-nak-sa-, perhaps through the influence of iyak-sa-; and the RV. has one desiderative form from ap- 'obtain' in which

the reduplication is dropped altogether: ap-santa. b. The radical vowel is lengthened when i, u, or r is final (the

latter becoming ir); thus ci- 'see' : ci-ki-sa-; ji- 'conquer' -.ji-gl-sa-; yu- 'unite'

: kr- : ci-kir-sa- : : yi'i-yu-sa-; sru- 'hear' su-sru-sa-; 'make' (AV.); hr- 'take' ji-hir-sa- (AV.); dhvr- 'injure' : du dhur-sa- with u because vowel and semi- vowel have interchanged*.

ft.. A few roots with medial a followed by n or m lengthen the

vowel; thus man- 'thiak' .mt-mam-sa- (AV.) ; Mn- 'smite' :ji-gMm-sa-; gam-

'go' : ji-gaTU-sa- (AV.); two others do so after dropping the nasal, viz. va7i-

'win' : vi-va-sa-; and san- 'gain' : si-sd-sa-^. c. In nearly a dozen roots, on the other hand, the radical vowel is weakened.

1. In a few roots final a is reduced to T and, in one instance, even

i^; thus ga- 'go' -.ji-gT-sa- (SV.); pa- 'drink' : pi-pi-sa- (RV.) beside pi-pa-sa-;

ha- 'go forth' : ji-hT-sa-i (AV.); dha- 'put' : di-dhi-sa- (RV.) beside dhit-sa-. 2. Half a dozen roots containing a ox a shorten the root by syncopation

resulting in contraction with the reduplicative syllable; da- 'give' : dit-sa-, for

dl-d\a\-sa-, beside di-da-sa-; dha- 'put' : dhi-t-sa-, for di-d/i-\aYsa-, beside di-

dhi-sa-; dabh- 'harm' : di-p-sa-, for di-d\a\bh-sa-; labh- 'take' : li-p-sa- (AV.), for

li-l\d\bh-sa-; sak- 'be able' : si-k-sa-, for si-s[a"\k-sa-; sah- 'prevail' : si-k-sa-, for

sl-sia^k-sa-; similarly initial a in ap- 'obtain' : zp-sa-^ (AV.); and in fdk-

'thrive' : iri-sa- (AV.) the initial r is treated as if it were ar-^. a. In a few roots the consonants undergo exceptional changes; thus palatals revert

to the original guttural in ci- 'note' : d-ki-sa-; cit- 'perceive' : ci-kit-sa-; ji- 'conquer' -.ji-gT-sa-;

1 Cp. V, Negelein %(i. 5 As in the past participle 574, 2 a. 2 See above 32 b. 6 As in the past participle 574, 3. 3 Cp. V. Negelein 68, note 2. The i being 7 In AV. XX. 1272 the Mss. read jihisate the reduplicative vowel, cannot be explained probably for jihTdate. in the same way as that of the perfect 8 Cp. Brugmakn 2, 854, 1027. i-yaj- for '*ya-ya,j-, where i- has the nature 9 V. Negelein (89, note ») thinks irisd- can of Sanaprasarana. only be explained from i-irdh-sa-. 4 Cp. ydlv- : dyii-ta- etc., below 573 a. VII. Verb. Future System. Secondary Conjugation. 389

kan- 's\3.y' : ji-ghdm-sa-. In ghas-. 'eat' the final j- becomes t before the s of the suffix: ji-ghat-sa-^ (A^V.). p. The desiderative suffix -sa is never added in the RV. with the connecting vowel ->; but there is one example of this formation in the AV,, viz. pat- 'fly' -.pi-pat-i-sa-^.

Inflexion.

543. The desiderative is inflected regularly like verbs of the a- conjuga- tion in both voices, having the moods and participles of the present tense, as well as an imperfect. No forms outside the present system occur in the RV. with the exception of the perfect from mis-, mi-miks-iir^ etc. (in which, how- ever, the desiderative stem is treated as a root) besides two aorist forms and oiie passive participle in the AV. *. The forms of the present indicative, active and middle, which actually occur, would if made from vi-va-sa- 'desire to win', be as follows; Active. Sing. i. vivasami. 2. vivasasi. 3. vivasati. — Du. 2. vivasathas.

3. vivasatas. — PI. i. vivasamas. 3. vivdsanii. Middle. Sing. i. vivase. 2. vivasase. 3. vivasate. — PI. i. vivUsamahe. v'wasante. 544. Forms occurring elsewhere in the present system are the following: a. Subjunctive. Active. Sing. 3. jighamsat (TS.), tUrpat, dipsat (TS. AV.), nlnitsat, vivasat. — PI. 3. iyaksan, titrtsan, vivasan. b. Injunctive. Active. Sing. 3. inaksat, cikitsat, vivasat. — Middle. PI. 3. apsanta, didhisanta, siksanta. c. Optative. Active. Sing. i. ditseyam, vivaseyam. — 3. vivaset. —

PI. I. didkisema, vivasema. — Middle. Sing. i. didhiseya. d. Imperative. Active. Sing. 2. cikitsa, dipsa (AV.), mimiksa, vivasa.— — 3. cikitsatu (AV.). — Du. 2. mimiksatam, sisasatam. — 3. mimiksatam. PI. 2. cikitsata (TS.), vivasata. — 3. didhisantu. e. Participles. Active, inaksant-, iyaksant-, ipsant- (AV.), trtsant- (AV.), cikitsant-, jighamsant-, diisant-, dipsant-, duduksant-, pipisant-, bubhusant-^ yuyutsant-, yuyusdni-, ririksant- {Yris-), ruruksant- i^ruh-), vlvasant-, sisasant-, sisrpsant-, stksant-. — Middle, lyaksamana-, trtsamana- (AV.), Ji^tsamana-, mumtiksamana-, lipsamana- (AV.), siksamana-iTS.), susrusatnana-; and with -ana: didhisana-. 2. dsisSsas. — ajighamsat, asisasat. — f. Imperfect. Active. Sing. 3. PI. 3. dyuyutsan, dsisasan; duduksan, bibhitsan. g. Aorist. Sing. 2. acikitsis (AV.), irtsis (AV.). h. Passive. No finite form of the passive seems to occur in the Sam- mimamsydmana- hitas; of participles, no certain form of the present occurs, has been (AV.'ix. 6'*)^ being a conjecture; and of the past only one form noted: mimamsitd- (AV. ix. 6^*)^. occur: didrks-enya- 'worthy to be i. Gerundive. Two regular forms are also one or seen' and susrus-enya- (TS.) 'worthy to be heard'. There paprks-inya- 'to two irregular formations: didrks-iya- 'worthy to be seen' and be asked' (unless from aorist stem)?. than a dozen m k. Verbal adjective. A considerable number (more the desiderative stem with the the RV.) of verbal adjectives are formed from

5 Cp. Whitney's note in his translation; J See above 44 a, I. in his grammar 1039 he quotes rurutsyamana 2 The desiderative of 7W- 'live', /yTw-j-ja-, lyrudA-) from K. 37, 12 {apa-). occurs in VS. XL. (Ts'a Up.). of ^Whitney 1037 quotes the gerund wamam- 3 According to Grassmann, perf. des. sitva from K. mih- 'mingere'; cp. Whitney, Roots, s. v. miks. lost 7 See below, Gerundive 580. 4 In all these forms the stems have cp. their distinct desiderative meaning: Whitney 1033. 39° I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

suffix -u. They have the value of a present participle governing a case; thus iyaks-u- 'wishing to sacrifice'; y^^^J•-^^ 'wishing to conquer'; didhis-t'i- 'desiring to win'; dips-u- 'wishing to injure'; vivaks-u- (AV.) from vac- 'speak'; sisas-u-

'eager to win' '. 2. Intensives.

Delbruck, Verbum p. 130— 134. — Avery, Verb-Inflection 230, 270—272. — Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar 1000— 1025; Roots 232 f. — v. Negelein, Zur Sprach- geschichte 78—80. — Lindner, Altindische Nominalbildung 10 (p. 48) and 21 c (parti- ciples). — BuRCHARDi, Die Intensiva des San.skrit und Avesta. Teil I. Halle 1892; Teilll. BB. 19, 169-225.

545. The intensive or, as it is also often called, the frequentative implies intensification or repetition of the sense expressed by the root^. It is a common formation, being made from over 90 roots in the Samhitas. The stem is derived from the root by means of a reduplicative syllable, the

characteristic feature of which is that it always has a strong form. The

reduplicative syllable may be formed in three different ways : r. radical i u are always reduplicated with a Guna vowel, and a and r (ar) often with a; 2. roots containing r or a followed by r I n m more usually reduplicate with a and liquid or nasal; 3. a considerable number of intensives interpose

the vowel » between the reduplicative syllable and the root. 1. a. Roots containing f or u reduplicate with e or 0; thus a'/- 'per-

ceive' : cekit-; tij- 'be sharp' : ti-tij-; dis- 'point' : de-dis-y nij- 'wash' : ne-nij-;

m- 'lead' : ne-ni-; pis- 'adorn' : pe-pis-; mi- 'damage' : me-mi-; rih- 'lick' : re-

rih-; vij- 'tremble' : ve-vij-; vid- 'find' : vi-vid-; vis- 'be active' : ve-vis-; vt-

'enjoy' : ve-vi-; sidh- 'repel' : se-sidh-; gu- 'sound' -.jo-gu-; dhu- 'shake' : do-dhu-;

nu- 'praise' : no-nu-; pruth- 'snort' : po-pruth- ; hhu- 'be' : bo-bhu-; yu- 'join' : yo-yu-; yu- 'separate' : yo-yu-; ru- 'cry' : ro-ru-; ru- 'break' : ro-ru-; sue- 'gleam'

: so-suc-; su- 'generate' : so-su-; sku- 'tear' : co-sku-; hu- 'call' : jo-hu-. b. More than a dozen roots with medial a (ending in mutes or sibilants, and one in ni), as well as three with final -r, reduplicate with a: kas-

'appear' : ca-kas-; gam- 'go' -.ja-gam-; nad- 'sound' : na-nad-; pat- 'fall' -.pa- pat-; badh- 'oppress' : ba-badh-; raj- 'colour' : rA-raj-; randh- 'make subject' :

raraiidh-; rap- 'chatter' : ra-rap-; lap- 'prate' : la-lap-; vac- 'speak' : va-vac-;

vad- 'speak' : va-vad-; vas- 'be eager' : va-vas-; vas- 'bellow' : vA-vas-; svas-

'blow' : sa-has-; gr- 'wake' -.ja-gr-; dr- 'split' : da-dr-; dhr- 'hold' : da-dhr-;

also cal- 'stir' : ca-cal- (AV.). 2. All other roots containing r (and dr- and dhr- alternatively) and

several with medial a followed by r /, or a nasal, reduplicate with -ap, -al or -an, -am. Thus:

a. kr- 'commemorate' : car-kr- and car-kir-; krs- 'drag' : car-krs-; gr- -.jdr-gur- 'swallow' zxA jal-gul-; tr- 'cross' : tar-tr- (RV.); dr- 'split' : ddr-dr-

dar-dir-; 'hold' : and dhr- ddr-dhr-; brh- 'make strong' : bdr-brh-; bhr- 'bear'

•.jar-bhr-i; mrj- 'wipe' : mar-j>irj'-; mrs- 'touch' : mar- mrs-; vrt- 'turn' : var-

vrt-; sr- 'flow' : sar-sr-; hrs- 'be excited' \jar-hfs-.

b. car- : 'move' car-car- (AV.); cal- 'stir' : -calcal- (MS.) beside -ca-cal-

(AV.); : phar- 'scatter' (?) par-phar-; kram- 'stride' : can-kram-; gam- 'go' -.jafi-

gam-; jambh- 'chew up' : jan-jabh-; : tarns- 'shake' tan-tas-; dams'- 'bite' : dan-

das-; nam- 'bend' : nan-nam-; yam- 'reach' -.yam-yam-; stan- 'thunder' : /«;«- Stan- (AV.).

I Grassmann, p. 1727, gives a list of the " The specific meaning of the formation desiderative adjectives in -sii occurring in is wanting in the intensives of gr- 'wake', the RV. (about 15); four occur in the AV.: cU- 'perceive', nij- 'wash', vis- 'work'. cikitsu-, jighatsu; dipu-, bibhatsu- ; cp. WHIT- 3 The palatal/ in the reduplication is like NEY 1038. that of Mr- in the perfect formya-Mara (482 d). ;

VII. Verb. Secondary Conjugation. 391

"• intensives show irregularities in the ^ f^"". reduplicative syllable; thus r- 'go' : «/-ay- (dissimilation); g-aA- 'plunge' -.jah-gah- (from a root which otherwise has no nasal in inflected forms) bddh- i; 'oppress': bad-badh- (only example of a final mute being redu- plicated); gur- 'greet' and bhur. 'quiver' reduplicate with a: jar-gur- a.nA Jar-bhur-K p. In a few roots containing r or r the radical syllable varies; thus gf- 'swallow' : jar-gur- 3.-a6.jal-gul-; car- 'move' : car-cur- beside car-car-; ir- 'cross' : tar-tur-hes\Ae iar-lar-. Over 3. twenty roots with final or penultimate nasal, r, or u, inter- pose an / (or i if the vowel would be long by position) between the redu- plicative syllable and the root: a. krand- 'cry out' : kan-i-krand- and kan-i-krad-; gam- 'go' : gan-T-gam- (but gan-i-gm-at); pan- 'admire' : pd7i-i-pan-; />/5a«- 'spring' : pdn-i-phan-; icand- 'shine' : can-i-scad- saji- ^ 'gain' : san-i-san-; ; skand- 'leap' : kan-i-skand- and can- i-skad-; syand- 'flow' : sdn-i-syad-; svan- 'sound' : san-i-svan-; han- 'slay' : ghan- i-ghan-.

b. kr- 'make' : kar-i-kr- car-i-kr- and (AV.) 3; tr- 'cross' : iar-t-tr-; bhr-

'bear' : bhar-i-bhr-, vr- 'cover' : var-t-vr-; vrj- 'twist' : vdr-i-vrj- ; vrt- 'turn' : var-i-vrt-. C. /«- 'be strong' : tdv-I-tu-; dhu- 'shake' : ddv-i-dhu-; nu- 'praise' : «aV

z-«2^-; (^«^ 'shine' : ddv-i-dyut-.

a. Primary Form. Present Indicative. 546. With the exception of eight or nine verbs, which take a secondary form (inflected in the middle only and identical in appearance with a passive), the intensive is inflected like the third conjugational class. The only difference is that I may be inserted between the root and terminations beginning with consonants; it is common in the i. and 3. sing. ind. act., and is also some- times found to occur in the 2. 3. du. ind. and the 2. 3. sing, imperative and imperfect activet. The forms actually found, if made from the intensive of nij- 'wash', would be the following in the indicative:

Active. Sing. i. nenej-mi and nenej-t-mi. 2. nenek-si. 3. nenek-ti and nmej-i-ti. — Du. 2. nenej-i-thas^. 3. nenik-tds. — PI. i. nenij-mas and ne?iij- masi (AV.). 3. nenij-ati.

Middle. Sing. i. nenij-e. 3. nenik-te. — Du. 3. nenij-ate. — PI. 3. nenij-ate. The forms actually met with are: Active. Sing. i. carkarmi, vevesmi (AV.); cakasinii, johavimi, dardar-

fmi. — 2. alarsi, jagarsi (Kh. 11. 3), ddrdarsi, ddrdharsi. — 3. dlarti, kdni- kranti, ganiganti, janghanti, varivarii and vdrvarti^; -calcaliti (MS.m. 13'); carcariti (AV.), cdkasiti, jarbhuriti, jalgulUi (TS.), johaviti, tartariti, dardariH, dodhavtti, ndnnamTti t, nonaviti, papatiti, bobhaviti, yamyamiti, rarajtti (AV.), rarapTti, roraviti, lalapTti (AV.), vavaditi, sosavTti. Du. 2. tartarJthas^. — 3. jarbhrtds. PI. I. nomemas and nonumasi (AV.). — 3. jfrgrati (AV.), ddvidyutaii, nanadati, bkarib/irati, vdrvrtati. Middle. Sing. i. joguve. — 3. tetikte, de'diste, ndnnate^, nenikte.

1 Though it has in nominal derivatives; 6 For vdrvart-ti, varTvai-i-ti; cp. Grassmann, see Whitney, Roots, s. v. gah; cp. Bur- s. v. vri. CHARDi, BB. 19, 179; V. Negelein 79- 7 See note 9. 2 Cp. p. 390, note 3. 8 Cp. note 5. 3 In the participle kdrikr-at and -cdrikr-ai 9 With loss of nasal [a = sonant nasal) for (AV.). *ndnnan-te{i. 1406). AuFRECHT, RV^., and Max 4 This f never occurs if the reduplication MULLER, K\^.,\ixitendmna-te{a\so Padapatha) contains t: thus no-nav-i-ti and nav-i-no-t, but the participle ndnnamat (via. 438), AUF- but never *navi-nav-t-ti, Cp. Delbruck, RECHT ndnn-. Max Muller ndmn-; the3.sing. Verbum p. 13 1; v. Negelein 79. ndnnamitHy. %'^) AuFRECHT^, ndvinamiti Max 5 For *nenik-thas; the only 2. du. which MULLER2 ; similarly ndnnamdne (x, 82') AUF- occurs is iartar-i-ihas for *iartf-thas. RECHT, ndmnanidne Max Muller (also Pp.). -

- 392 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

sarsrte; with -e for -^e: c^kite, jdngahe, joguve, badbadhi^ and babadhe, yoyuve, sarsrl — Du. 3. sarsrate. — PI. 3. dedisate. 547. a. Subjunctive. Active. Sing. i. janghdnani. — 2. jagarasp (AV.); janghanas, jalgulas. — 3. caniskadat, carkrsat, cekitat, jdnghanat, jagarat (AV.), dardirat, davidyutat, parpharat, bdrbrhat, mdrmrjat, marmrsat, sanisvanat. — Du. 1. Jahgka'nava. — PI. I. carkirama, veviddma. — 3. carkiran,

('commemorate'), cakasan'^ {hN.), papatan, Usucan. Middle. Du. 3. iantasaite. — PI. 3. jdnghananta, jarhrsanta, tionuvanta, marmrjanta, sosucanta. b. Optative. No certain form occurs in the RV. 3, and only two or three in other Samhitas: Sing. 3. vevisyat (AV.). — PI. I. jagryama (VS.

TS. MS.), jagriyama (TS. I. 7. 10'). c. Imperative. Examples of forms of all the 2. and 3. persons are found excepting the 3. pL, but no middle form has been met with. Active. Sing. 2. carkrdhi (AV.) 'remember', jagr/ii, dardrhi, dadrhi, 7ienigdki {KY.), barbrki^; janghamhi (AV.), cakasihi (VS. TS.), iamstamhi (Av.). — With -iat: carkrtat, jagrtat^. — 3. dardartu, marmartu, vevestu (AV.); vavaditu (AV.), johavitu (AV.). — Du. 2. jagrtam. — 3. Jagrtam (AV.). — PI. 2. jagrta (AV.), caiikramata^ 548. Participle. Active, kdnikradat-, kdrikrat-, ghdnighnat-, -cdrikrat- (AV.), cdkasat-, cikitat-, fdnghanat-, jdrbhurat-,jdgrat-, ddridrat- (IS. iv.e,. 10''), ddrdrat-, ddvidyutat-, ndnnamat-, ndnadat-, pdnipnat-, pdniphanat-, p^pisat-, bobhuvat- (AV.), mdrmrjat-, yoyuvat- (yu- 'ward oif'), rerihat-, rSruvat-, vdvasat- (vas- 'roar'), ve'visat-, sosucat-, shidhat-. Middle?, cikitana-, jdnjabkana-{KV.), JdrbhurSna-, j'drkrsana-, ddndas- ana-, ndnnamana-, pepisana- (AV. TS.), bdbadkana-, mimyana-, yoyuvana-

{yu- 'join'), rorucana-, iostecana-, sdrsrana-. a. The participles badbadhand- and marmrjand- (beside mdrmrjana-), though irregularly accented, unmistakably belong to the intensive, kdnikrat once (ix. 63^°) appears as an abbreviated ioxra oi kdnikrad-at. The participle jdnghan-at- syncopates the radical vowel in the gen. sing.: jdhghn-at-as; an- other form of the intensive participle from the same root syncopates the radical vowel throughout: ^/^iw^/4«-a/-; a\so pdnipn-at-. The obscure form ^5,4iz« (x. 29') may be the nom. of an intensive participle with anomalous accent for cdkan-at^. 549. Imperfect. Altogether (including unaugmented forms, some of which are used injunctively) about thirty forms of the imperfect occur, among them only four examples of the middle. In the active all persons are re- presented except the i. du. and the 2. pi.; but in the middle only the 3. sing, and pi. are met with.

Active. Sing. i. acakasam ; dedisam. — 2. ofagar, adardar; dardar. — 3. adardar, adardhar, avarlvar; kdniskan, dardar, ddvidyot, ndvinot; djohavlt, dyoyavtt, droravtt, dvavacit. Du. 2. adardrtam. — 3. avavaktam. — PI. I. marmrjmd. — 3. acarkrsur (Av.), djohavur, adardirur, anonavur.

I With irregular accent. ^ The participles rdrah-ana-, raraks-ana-, ' With double modal sign. and jahfs-ana- (beside JdrArs-ana-) are pro- 3 Cp. Whitney 1009 a. bably perfect participles, although no other 4 For barbrh-hi, the final h being dropped perfect forms with a in the reduplicative

after being cerebralized before -dhi : *bari^z- syllable occur from these roots (ra/i-, rah-, dhi (58, I b, «; 62, 4 e). ^r?-); cp. Whitney 1013. 5 This form occurs once in the AV, as a 8 I regard it as 3. sing. perf. inj. = I. person: cp. Whitney ion a. *cakdn-i(4,%,Z). Cp. Bartholomae, IF. 7, ni, 6 With anomalous connecting -a- for Grassmann, under the root kd-; Whitney, ^cahkran-ta. Sanskrit Grammar 1013 b; Roots 17. VII. Verb. Secondary Conjugation. 393

Middle. Sing. 3. ddedista, dnannata^. — PI. 3. marmrjata'. 550. a. Perfect. A few perfect forms with intensive reduplication and present sense are met with: Active. Sing. i. jagara. — 3. jagara, davidhava {dku- 'shake'), nSnava^ (nu- 'praise').

The only perfect participle occurring is jagrvdms-. b. Aorist. The only trace of an aorist being formed from the intensive is cdrkr-s-e 'thinks of, 3. sing, mid., formed like hi-s-e and stu-s-e. It occurs three times in the RV., always with a present sense.

c. Causative. A causative formed frona the intensive is once found in the participle varJvarj-dyant-i- (AV.) 'twisting about' (l/w/7-).

b. Secondary Form.

551. The rare secondary form of the intensive is identical in meaning with the primary. In form it is indistinguishable from a passive, the suffix -yd being added to the primary stem and the inflexion being the same as that of the passive. Altogether about a dozen forms have been met with from nine roots. The only persons represented are the 2. and 3. sing, and 3. pi. indicative; and there is also a present participle. The forms actually occurring are the following: Present indicative. Sing. 2. coskuydse. — 3. dedisydte (AV. VS.), neniydte (Y^.), marmrjydte, rerihydte, vevij'ydte, vevtyate. — PL 3. tarturyante (/Vr-), marmrjydnte. Participle. carcurydmSna- {\^car-), nentydmana-, marmrjydmana-.

3. The Causative.

Delbruck, Verbum p. 209— 216. — Avery, Verb-Inflection 262—268. — Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar p. 379 —386; Roots 235 f. — v. Negelein 44—48.

552. The causative verb expresses that its object is caused to perform the action or to undergo the state denoted by the root; e. g. pdram evd paravdtam sapdtnim gamayamasi (x. 145*) 'we cause our rival to go to the far distance'. It is by far the commonest of the secondary conjugations, being formed from over 200 roots in the Sarnhitas; but of about 150 causative stems appearing in the RV. at least one-third lack the causative meaning. The stem is formed by adding the suffix -dya to the root, which as a rule is strengthened. Those verbs in which the root, though capable of being strengthened, remains unchanged, have not a causative"* ,' but an iterative sense, being akin in formation to denominatives s (which sometimes even have the causative accent). The whole group may originally have had this meaning, from which the causative sense was developed till it became the prevalent one*. This may perhaps account for an iterative formation, the reduplicated aorist, having specially attached itself to the causative. Both the iterative and the causative form are occasionally made from the same root; e. g. patdya-ti 'flies about' and patdya-H 'causes to fly' beside the simple verb pdta-ti 'flies'.

* 1 See p. 391, note 9. MS. (l. 8^); the latter form is irregular in 2 avavasanta (yvds-) is probably a plu- accent. Cp. B6htlingk's Lexicon, o. v. perfect (p. 365, top). 3- I'- 3 Whitney 1018 quotes also dodravaidnt- 4 Cp. Whitney 1042 b. 'run',) from the TS., and yoyava (ytc- 'sepa- 5 Cp. V. Negelein 44. rate'), and lelaya {it- 'be unsteady') from the 6 Cp. Brugmann, kg. 698. :

394 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

553. The root is strengthened in different ways according to the nature and position of its vowel.

Initial or medial / « /• / (if not long by position) take Guna ; thus

a. cit- 'perceive' : cd-dya- 'teach'; mih- 'mingere' : meh-dya- 'cfeiise to rain'; ris-

'be hurt' : res-dya- 'injure'; vid- 'know' : »,?;/-«;/«- 'cause to knbw'; vip- 'tremble'

: vep-dya- 'shake'; vis- 'enter' : ves-dya- 'cause to enter'; vist- 'wrap' : vest-dya-

(AV.) 'involve'; snih- 'be moist' : sneh-dya- 'destroy';

b. kup- 'be agitated' : kop-dya- 'shake' ; krudh- 'be angry' : krodh-dya- 'en-

rage'; /Jjwi/- 'be agitated': ^j-(7a'-ffya- 'shake'; ghiis- 'sound' ^/^^j-aya- 'proclaim'; :

: -.jyot-dya- cud- 'impel' cod-dya-, \^.; jus- 'enjoy' : jos-dya- 'caress'; x^'«^ 'shine'

(AV.) 'enlighten'; tics- 'drip' : tos-aya- 'bestow abundantly'; dyiit- 'shine' \ dyot-

aya- 'illumine'; pus- 'thrive' : pos-aya- 'nourish'; budh- 'be awake' : bodh-dya-

'waken'; muh- : 'bewilder'; 'fight' yodh-dya- 'cause 'be dazed' moh-dya- yudh- :

to fight'; yup- ^QEa.ct' : yop-dya-, id.; rue- 'shins' : roc-dya- 'illumine'; rud-

'weep' : rod-dya- 'cause to wail'; ruh- 'rise' : roh-dya- 'raise'; lubh- 'desire

eagerly' : lobh-dya- 'allure'; sue- 'flame' : soc-dya- 'set on fire'; subh- 'shine' :

sobh-aya- (AV.) 'adorn'; sus- 'grow dry' : sos-dya- (AV.) 'make dry';

c. rd- 'dissolve' (intr.) : ard-dya- 'destroy'; krs- 'be lean': kars-dya- 'emaciate';

trp- 'be pleased' : tarp-dya- 'delight'; drs- 'see' : dars-dya- (AV.) 'show'; nrt-

'dance' : nart-dya- 'cause to dance'; brh- or vrh- 'tear' : barh-dya- 'thrust';

mrc- 'injure' : marc-dya-, id.; mrj- 'wipe' : marj-dya-, id.; vrj- 'turn' : varj-aya-

(AV.) 'cause to turn'; vrt- 'roll' : vart-dya- 'cause to revolve'; vrdh- 'grow' :

vardh-dya- 'augment'; vrs- 'rain' : vai-s-dya- 'cause to rain'; srdA- 'be bold' :

sardh-dya- 'cause to be bold'; hrs- 'be excited' : hars-dya- 'excite ;

d. kip- 'be adapted' : kalp-dya- 'arrange'. 554. The following verbs, mostly lacking the causative ineaning, leave

the root unchanged: il- 'be quiet' : il-dya- (AV.) 'cease'; cii- 'observe' : cit-

dya- 'stimulate' (also cet-dya-^; ris- 'be injured' : ris-aya- id. (beside res-dya-');

vip- 'quiver' : vip-dya- 'agitate' (also vep-aya-) ;

iuj- 'be eager' : tuj-dya- id.; tier- 'overwhelm' : tur-dya- id.; tus- 'be content'

: ius-dya- id.; dyut- 'shine' : dyut-aya- id. (beside dyot-aya- 'illumine'); ruc-

'shine' : ruc-aya- id. (beside roe-dya- 'illumine') ; sue- 'shine' : sue-dya- id. (beside

soe-dya- 'illumine'); subh- 'shine' : subh-dya- id. (also sobh-aya- 'adorn' AV.).

The vowel is lengthened in dus- 'spoil' : dus-dya- id.

krp- 'lament' : krp-dya- id.; mrd- 'be gracious' : mrl-dya-'^ id.; sprh- 'be

eager' : sprh-aya- id. In the case oi grabk- 'grasp', the root is even weakened: grbh-dya- id. a. Vowels long by nature or position remain unchanged, but the

stem, in this case, usually has the causative sense: ing- 'move' : ing-dya- 'set

in motion'; iks- 'see' : iks-dya- 'cause to see'; mkk- 'swing' : inkh-dya- 'shake';

Tr- 'set in motion' : ir-dya- id.; jXv- 'live' : jiv-dya- 'animate'; dip- 'shine' : dip-

dya- 'kindle'; pid- 'press' -.pid-aya- (AV.) 'distress'; vi4- 'be strong' (in vil-ii-

'strong') : vTl-dya- 'make strong'^;

uks- 'grow up' : uks-aya- 'strengthen'; kud- (does not occur in the simple

form) : kul-aya- 'scorch'; sundh- 'purify' : sundh-aya- id.; sud- 'make pleasant'

sud-dya- id.; sphurj- 'rumble' : sphurj-dya- id.;

drmh- 'make firm' : drmh-aya- (AV.) 'hold fast';

a. Two roots with medial f take Guna; srlv- 'fail' : srev-aya- beside sriv-aya-i (AV.)

'lead astray'; hid- 'be hcstile' ; helaya- in the participle d-helayani- 'not angry'; while

' Cp. V. Negelein 46, note i. 3 In AV. VI. 73= all the Mss. but one have = Delbruck 189, 4 regards vildya- as a srtv-. denominative. :

Vn. Verb. Secondary Conjugation. 395

two others already it have in the root: rej- 'tremble' : rej-aya- 'shake'; med- 'be fat' : med-dya- 'fatten'.

555- An initial or a medial a (if not long by position) is lengthened in some thirty roots: am- 'be injurious' : am-dya- 'be injured'; kam- 'desire' : kam-dya- 'love'; cat- 'hide oneself : cat-dya- 'drive away'; chad- 'cover" : chad- dya- id.; tan- 'stretch' : tan-aya- (AV.) 'make taut'; tap- 'burn' : tap-dya- (AV.) •cause to burn'; tras- 'be terrified' : tms-aya- (AV.) 'terrify'; nas- 'be lost' : nas-dya- 'destroy'; pad- 'go', 'fall' : pad-dya- 'cause to fall'; phan- 'bound' : phan- aya- 'cause to bound'; bhaj- 'divide' : bhaj-aya- 'cause to share'; bhras- 'fall' bhras-dya- : 'cause to fall'; man- 'think' : man-ava-'' {KSf.) 'esteem'; yat- 'stretch' yat-dya- 'unite'; yam- 'guide' -.yam-aya- CP^.ydm-) 'present'; tap- 'pra.ts' : lap-aya- (AV.) a- 'cause to cry'; 7'at- 'apprehend' : vat-dya- 'inspire'; vari- 'win' : van-ay

(AV.) 'conciHate' (Pp. z/aw-); vas- 'dwell, : wai--aya- 'cause to stay'; z/aj- 'wear'

: vas-dya- 'clothe'; vas- 'shine' : vas-aya- 'illumine'; sat-^ 'cut in pieces' : s'at-dya- id.t; (AV.) s'vas- 'snort' : svas-aya- (AV.) 'cause to resound'; spas- 'see' : spas-dya-

'show'; svap- 'sleep' : svap-aya- 'send to sleep'. a. Five or six other causatives optionally retain the a: gam- 'go' gam-dya- and gam-aya- (RV.) 'bring'; das- 'waste away' : das-aya- and das-aya-

(AV.) 'exhaust'; dhvan- 'disappear' : dhvan-aya- (RV.) and dhvan-aya- (RV.)

'cause to disappear'; pat- 'fall' : pat-dya- 'fly about' (in RV. only once, i. 169?,

'cause to fall') and pat-dya- 'cause to fall'; mad- 'be exhilarated' : wa(/-a>a- (AV.)

and mad-dya- 'rejoice'; ram- 'rest' : ram-dya- and ram-dya- 'cause to rest'. 556. Some twenty-five roots with initial or medial a (short by position) remain unchanged, as the causative meaning is mostly absent: an- 'breathe'

: -an-dya- (AV.) 'cause to breathe'; chad- 'seem' : chad-dya- id.; jan- 'beget' :

jan-dya- id.; tvar- 'make haste' : tvar-dya- (AV.) 'quicken'; dam- 'control'

: dam-dya- id.; dhan- 'set in motion' : dhan-dya- id.; dhvas- 'disperse' (intr.) :

dhvas-dya- 'scatter' (tr.); nad- 'roar' : nad-dya- 'cause to resound'; nam- 'bend'

(tr. ~and intr.) : nam-aya- 'cause to bend', 'strike down'; pan- 'admire' : pan-dya-

id.; prath- 'spread out' : prath-dya- id.; mah- 'be great' : mah-dya- 'magnify'; raj-

'colour' : raf-aya- (AV.) id.; ran- 'rejoice' : ran-dya- id. and 'gladden'; vyath-

'waver' : vyath-dya- 'cause to fall'; sam- 'be quiet' : sam-dya- (AV.) 'appease';

snath- 'pierce' : snath-aya- id.; srath- 'loosen' : srath-dya- id.; stan- 'thunder' :

stan-dya- id.; svad- 'enjoy', 'sweeten' : svad-dya- id.; svan- 'sound' : svan-aya- s id. ; svar- 'sound' : svar-dya- (AV.) id.

a. If long by nature or position medial a. remains unchanged, the

causative sense being more often lacking than present: thus arc- 'shine' : arc-

aya- 'cause to shine'; kas- 'appear' : kas-dya- (AV.) 'cause to be viewed';

krand- 'roar' : krand-dya- 'cause to roar'; caks- 'see' : caks-aya- 'cause to appear';

chand- 'sQQxa! : chand-aya- {&..; jambh- 'chew up', 'crash' •.Jambh-dya-iA.; tams-

'set in motion' : tams-dya-\^.; dambh- 'destroy' : dambh-dya- id.; badh- 'oppress'

: badh-aya- (AV.) 'force'; bhaks- 'partake of : bhaks-dya- id.; mamh- 'bestow' :

mamh-dya id.; mand- 'gladden' : mand-dya- 'satisfy'; yac- 'ask' : yac-dya- (AV.)

'cause to be asked for'; ramh- 'hasten' : ramh-dya- (AV.) id.; randh- 'make

subject' : randh-dya- id. ; raj- .'rule' : raj-aya- (AV. TS.) 'be king'; radh- 'succeed'

: radh-aya- (AV.) 'make successful'; vaks- 'grow' : vaks-aya- 'cause to grow';

1 Finite forms of the simple root chad- do 4 No form or derivative of the simple not occur; the part, channa- is found in B. root sat- occurs in V. ; see Whitney, Roots, 2 In AV. XV. 102 the reading should be s. v. sat. manayet; see Whitney's note. 5 Occurring only in the participle svarayani- 3 In AV. IV. 184 sapaya, vifhich would be am (AV. XIII. 22), which Whitney translates the causative of iap-, is probably a wrong 'shining'. reading; cp. Whitney's note. :

396 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

sa7ns- 'proclaim' : sams-dya- 'cause to proclaim'; svanc- 'spread' : svanc-dya- 'cause to spread out'; syand- 'flow' : syand-aya- id.; srams- 'fall' : sramsaya- (AV.) 'cause to fall'. 557. Final /, u, r take Guna or Vrddhi, the latter being commoner. a. The only example of a causative stem from a root ending in an z- vowel is that of /esi- 'possess', which takes Guna: ksay-dya- 'cause to dwell securely'.

b. Final u takes Guna or Vrddhi; cyu- 'waver' ; cyav-dya- 'shake'; dru-

'run' : drav-aya- 'flow' and drav-dya- 'cause to flow'; bhu- 'become' : bhav-dya-

(AV.) 'cause to become'; ^?i!- 'se^paxaXe : yav-aya- a.nd yav-dya- id. ; s'ru- 'heax'

: srav-dya- and srav-dya- 'cause to hear'; jV«-' 'dissolve' : srav-dya- and srav-

aya- (Pp. h-av-) 'cause to move'; srii- 'flow' : sravaya- (AV.) 'cause to flow'.

c. Final r usually takes Vrddhi; thus ghr- 'drip' : ghar-aya- (AV.) 'cause

'fill' to drip'; dhr- 'hold' : dhar-dya- id.; pr- 'pass' : par-dya- id.; fr- : pur-dya-

(AV.) 'fulfil'; inr- 'die' : mar-dya- (AV.) 'kill'; vr- 'confine' : var-dya- id. Two causatives have the Guna as well as the Vrddhi form; jr- 'waste away' -.jar-

dya- and jar-dya- (Pp. jar-) 'wear out', 'cause to grow old'; sr- 'flow' : sar-dya- id. and sar-aya- 'cause to flow'. One root in -r takes Guna only: dr- 'pierce'

: dar-dya- 'shatter'.

558. Roots ending in -a. form their causative stem by adding -pdya;

thus ksa- 'burn' : ksa-paya- (AV.) id.; gla- 'be weary' : gla-paya- (Pp. gldp-)

'exhaust'; da- 'give' : da-paya- (AV.) 'cause to give'; dha- 'put' : dha-pdya-

'cause to put'; dha- 'suck' : dha-pdya- 'suckle'; mla- 'relax' (intr.) : mla-pdya-

(AV.) 'relax' (tr.); va- 'blow' : va-pdya- 'fan'; stha- 'stand' : stha-paya- 'set up';

^- sna- 'wash' (intr.) : sna-pdya- 'bathe' (tr.) In three roots the a is shortened jna- 'know' -.jha-paya- (AV.) 'cause to know'; sra- 'boil' : sra-pdya- (AV.

TS.) 'cook'; sna- 'wash' : sna-pdya- (AV.) beside sna-pdya- 'bathe' (tr.). a. A few roots ending in other vowels take -paya. Two stems are

formed by adding the suffix to the gunated root: ksi- 'possess' : kse-paya-

'cause to dwell' beside ksaydya-; r- 'go' : arpaya- 'cause to go'. In the VS.

two roots in i substitute a for that vowel before -paya : ji- 'conquer' : ja-paya-

'cause to win'; sri- 'resort' : {icd-)sra-paya- (VS'.) 'raise'. a. Two roots with initial p and ending in -a do not form their causative stem with -paya, but add the ordinary suffix -aj/a with interposed^: pa. 'drinlc' •.p'iy-dya-, 'cause to

'overflow' : (a-'pydy-dya- 'fill is doubtless AraiW ; pya- (AV.) up'. This seeming irregularity due to the original form of the root^. Inflexion.

559. The causative is inflected regularly like the verbs of the a- con- jugation in both voices. It is to be noted, however, that in the i. pi. pres. the termination -masi occurs in the RV. and AV. ten times as often as -mas; that in the 2. pi. no forms in -thana axe met with; and that in the 3. sing, mid. e never appears for -aU. a. The forms of the present indicative active and middle, which actually occur, would if made from kalpdya- be the following: Active. Sing. i. kalpayami. 2. kalpdyasi. ,3. kalpdyati. — Du. 2. kalp- dyathas. 3. kalpayatas. — PL i. ia/payamasi a.nd ia/pdyamas. 2. kalpdyatha. 3. kalpdyanti. Middle. Sing. i. kalpdye. 2. kalpdyase. 3. kalpdyate. — Du. 2. kalpd- yethe. 3. kalpdytte. '— PI. i. kalpayamahe. 3. kalpdyante. Forms that occur elsewhere in the present system are the following:

I This root, of which only three forms " The causative stem ha-paya-, from ha- occur in the RV., seems to be only a varied 'forsake' is presupposed by the aorist/7/4z^ar. spelling for sru- 'flow'. 3 See above 27 a l and 4. VII. Verb. Secondary Conjugation. 397

b. Subjunctive. Active. Sing.i. cetdyani{i:S.iii. 2.10=; MS. iv. 5^), randha- yani. — 2. coddyasi, mrldy'asi, randkdyasi{NN.), variayasi{TQ.Yn.^.2o^); jandyas

(Av.), yavayas{KN.), yodhdyas.— 3. arday3H{KY.), kalpdyati, tarpayati{A.W.), padayati (AV.), parayati, purayati (AV.), mardyail (AV.), mrldyati, rajayati (TS. 11. 4. 14^), sudayati; kalpaydt{KY.), coddyat, pardyat, marcdyat, sadayat, saydyjt (TS. I. 8. 6^). — Du. I. Trdyava. — 2. dhapayathas (AV.), padayathas (AV.), vasayatkas{KY.), sSdayai/ias{AY.). — 3. kulayatas. — PI. i. irayama, dharayama. — 2. chaddyatka, vardhayatha (AV.). — 3. srapdyan (TS.:v.i.s'»). — Middle. Sing. 2. kamdyase, coddyase, josdyase, maddyase, yatayase, madayathas (AV. IV. 25^). — 3. codayate, ckandayate, dharayate, maddyate, vartayate; tnkhdyatai

(AV.)j cetdyatai (TS. i. i. 13^), dharayatai (AV.), rajayatai (AV.), varayatai (AV.). — Du. I. ihkhayavahai, kalpayavahai, janayavahai (AV.). —• 3. madd- yaite. — PI. 2. kamdyadhve, inadayadhve; madayadhvai. c. Optative. This mood is very rare^ only four forms occurring in the RV. and two in the AV. Sing.2.y(z«a>'^j'(Kh.ii. io4), dharayes. — 3. »2a«aj/if/ (Av.), vadayet {h.A\TL.2.tj), vesayet{AN.), sprhayet. — P\,x. citdyema,marjayema. d. Imperative. Forms of this mood are common, nearly 120 occurring in the RV.; of these, however, quite one half are in the 2. sing. act. No forms of the 3. sing, and du. mid. are met with in the RV. No impv. in -tai is found in the RV. and only one in the AV. : 2. sing. dharayataV. The forms actually occurring, if made from kalpdya-, would be the following;

Active. Sing. 2. kalpdya and kalpayatat (AV.). 3. kalpayatu. — Du. 2. kalpdyatam. 3. kalpayatam. — PL 2. kalpdyata. 3. kalpdyantu. Middle. Sing. 2. kalpdyasva. — Du. 2. kalpdyetham. — PI. 2. kalpdya- dhvam. 3. kalpayantam.

e. Participles. The active participle in -aw/, with fem. in -r, is common;

e. g. jan-dyant-, f. jan-dyanf-i- 'producing'. The middle participle, which is always formed with -mana, is rare. In the RV. are found only mahdya- mana- 'glorifying', yatdya-mana- 'reaching', vardhdya-mana- 'increasing', and in the AV. only kamdya-mana- 'desiring'; in the TS. (iv. 2. 6^) catdya-mana-. f. Imperfect. Forms of this tense, both augmented and unaugmented, are frequent. In the RV. some 130 occur in the active, about two-thirds of which are in the 2. and 3. sing. Middle forms are rare except in the 3. pi. In the active the i. and 3. du., and i. and 2. pi. are wanting; in the middle

all the I. persons and the 3. du. are unrepresented. Some 50 unaugmented forms are used as injunctives in the RV. ^ The forms actually occurring, if made from jandya-, would be the following: Active. Sing. i. ajanayam; janayam. 2. djanayas; jandyas. 3. djanayat; jandyat. — Du. 2. djanayatam. — PI. 3. djanayan; janayan. Middle. Sing. 2. ajanayathas; jandyathas. 3. djanayata; janayata. — Du. 2. djanayetham. — PL 2. ajanayadhvam. 3. djanayanta; jandyanta. 560. Outside the present system very few causative forms occur. These are found in the following formations. a. Future. Only four forms occur in the RV. and AV. Active. Sing. I. dusayisyimi (AV.). 3. dharayisydti. — Middle. Sing. 2. vasayisydse 'wilt adorn thyself. 3. varayisyate (AV.) 'will shield'. b. Perfect. The only example of a periphrastic perfect occurring in

the Sainhitas is made from a causative stem: gamaydm cakara (AV.). c. Aorist. The reduplicated aorist has attached itself to the causa- tive, probably because the intensive character of the reduplicated form became

I In K. the iorms yamayatat and cyavayatat 2 See Avery 264. occur; and in pL z. the unexampled ending dhvat in varayadhvat; Whitney 1043 d. .

398 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar. associated with the originally iterative meaning of the causative. But in form it is unconnected with the causative stem, being derived directly from the

root; and more than one-third of the verbs which form it in the RV., and about one-fifth in the AV., have no causative stem in -aya. There are, how- ever, eight forms which are actually made from the causative stem: Sing. i. arp-ip-am (AV.) from ar-paya-; 2. jihip-as from ha-paya-'^ 'cause to depart';

atisthip-as and ^. dtisthip-at horn siha-paya- 'ia&texi.' ; ajijnip-at (Jl^.) from /««- paya- 'cause to know'; PI. 2. djijap-ata (VS.) from japaya- 'cause to conquer' (]///-); Sing. 2. act. bibhis-as i!TS>.) and mid. bTbhis-athas from bhi-saya-: 'frighten', anomalous causative of bhi- 'fear'. a. There are besides three /s-aorists formed from the causative stem: vyathay-Js (AV.) from -vyathaya- 'disturb'; ailay-it (AV.) from ilaya- 'has quieted down'; dkvanay-Tt' from dhvanaya- 'envelope'. 561. Nominal derivatives, a. The only present passive participle appears in the form bhaj-yd-mana- (AV. xii. 5^'). There are also a few past participles: ghar-i-ta- (AV.) 'smeared'; cod-i-td- 'impelled'; -ves-i-ta- (AV.) 'caused to enter'. b. A few gerundives in -ayya are formed from causative stems: trayay- ayya- 'to be guarded'; panay-dyya- 'admirable'; sprhay-ayya- 'desirable' 3. c. Ten infinitives formed with -dhyai from the causative stem are met with in the RV.: isdyad/iyai, irdyadhyai, tamsayddhyai, nasayddhyai, manda- yddhyai, madayddhyai, risayddhyai, vartayddkyai, vajayddhyai, syandayddhyai'' d. Four gerunds formed with -tva from causative stems are met with in the AV.: arpay-i-tvd, kalpay-i-tvS., saday-i-tvs, srainsay-i-tvB. e. Finally several ordinary nouns are derived from the causative stem with various suffixes; a few verbal nouns in -ana: drp-ana- (AV.) 'thrusting';

-bhi-s-ana- 'frightening'; one or two agent nouns in -if, f. -tr-t : coday-i-tr-i- 'stimulator'; bodhay-i-tf- 'awakener'; a few adjectives in -a as second members

of compounds: a/Z-Zaraya- 'putting across' ; wzV/zaraya- 'patting down'; vacam- Thkhayd- 'voice-impelling'; visvam-ejaya- 'all-stimulating'; an adjective in -alu: patay-alu- (AV.) 'flying'; five adjectives in -isnu: tapay-isnu- 'tormenting'; namay-isnu- 'bending'; patay-isnt'i- 'flying'; paray-isnu- 'rescuing'; maday-isnii-

'intoxicating'; seven adjectives in -itnu: -amay-itnu- 'making ill'; tanay-itnu-

'thundering' ; (//-az/oy-zV^i/- 'speeding'; posay-iinii- 'nourishing'; maday-itm't- 'intoxi- cating'; suday-itmi- 'streaming sweetness'; stanay-itnu- m. 'thunder'; and three

adjectives in -u: dharay-u- 'streaming' 5; bhavay-i'i- 'animating'; manday-u- 'rejo icing'. 4. The Denominative. Delbruck, Verbum p. 201—209, 216—218. — Avery, Verb-Inflection 272—274.— WrnxNEY, Sanskrit Grammar 1053— 1068. — v. Negelein, Zur Sprachgeschichte 40—44. — Cp. Brugmann, kg. 693—696.

562. The denominative is nearly always formed from a nominal stem with the suffix -ya. The latter is normally accented; but a certain number of unmistakable denominatives, such as mantrd-ya-te 'takes counsel', have the causative accent and thus form a connecting link between the regular denomi- natives and the causatives'' The formation is a frequent one, more than a hundred denominative stems occurring in the RV., and in the AV. about

I The stem ha-paya- does not itself other- BR. and Grassmann to be analyzed as wise occur in V. ; cp. p. 396 note 2. dhara-yu-, » The TS. IV. 6. 92 has instead dhvanayit. 6 There can be little doubt that the de- 3 See below 579. nominative suffix -ya is identical with that 4 Cp. DelbrtJck, Verbum 2n; and below of the causative as virell as that of the verbs 585, 7. of the fourth class; cp. Whitney 1055 a; 5 Whitney, Roots, s. v. dh}-; according to V. Negelein 44; Brugmann, KG. 690, 694. ^ ,

VII. Verb. Secondary Conjugation. 399

thirty (or about fifty if those which form present participles or derivative

nouns only are included). The general meaning of the denominative is that the subject expressed by the inflexion stands in some relation to the noun from which the stem is formed. It may usually be rendered by 'be or act like'; 'regard or treat as'; 'turn into or use as'; 'wish for'. Denominatives formed with -ya are best classified according to the final of the nominal stem to which the suffix is added. 563. Steins in -a, which usually remains unchanged; thus amitra-yd- 'act like atf enemy', 'be hostile'; indra-ya- 'behave like Indra'; ksema-yd- 'take a rest'; jara-ya- 'treat like a lover', 'caress'; deva-yd- 'serve the gods'; yusma-yd- 'seek you'; vasna-yd- 'deal with the price', 'bargain'. With the causative accent: {pary-)ankhd-ya-^ 'clasp (round)'; arthd-ya- 'have as a desire'; rtd-ya- 'act according to sacred order'; kulayd-ya- 'build a nest'; nild-ya- 'bring together'; pald-ya- (AV.) 'act as guardian', 'protect'; mantrd-ya- 'take counsel'; mrgd-ya- 'treat as a wild animal', 'hunt'; vavrd-ya; 'put in hiding', 'shrink from'; vajd-ya- 'act like a steed', 'race' (beside vaja-yd-)- vJrd-ya- 'play the m,an'; sa-bhagd-ya- (AV.) 'apportion'

a. One or two denominatives are from nominal stems extended with -a: is-a-ya- 'have strength' (jV-)^j iirj-d-ya- 'have strength' {urj-)^.

a. The -a is, however, often lengthened: agha-yd- 'plan mischief; ajira-ya- 'be swift'; amitra-yd- (AV.) 'be hostile' (Pp. -dyd-); asva-yd- 'desire horses'; rtd-yd- 'observe sacred order' (beside r/a'^ya-); tilvila-yd- 'be fertile'; tuda-yd- (AV.) 'thrust'; dhupa-yd-^ {MS. KY.) 'be like smoke', 'fume'; priya-yd- 'become friends'; matha-yd- (AV.) 'shake'; musa-ya-^ (AV.) 'steal'; yajna-yd- 'sacrifice'; rathira-yd- 'be conveyed in a car'; randkana-ya-'' 'make subject'; vrsa-yd- 'act hke a bull'*; sama-yd- 'be active' {sdma-); subha-yd- 'be beauti- ful' 9; sratha-ya- 'make loose' (Pp. -aya-)^"; satvana-yd- (AV.) 'act like a warrior'; sumna-yd- 'show benevolence'; skabha-yd- 'make firm'. In most of these examples the Pada text has a short a.

a. The denominative oja-ya- 'employ force' is formed from oja-, shortened for ojas- 'strength'.

b. The -o. of the nominal stem is sometimes changed to -7: adhvari-yd- 'perform the sacrifice' (adhvard-); caram-yd- 'follow a course' {cdrana-), 'pursue'; tavisl-yd- 'be strong' {tavisd-); putrT-yd- 'desire a son' {putrd-); rathi-yd- 'drive in a car' (rd(Aa-); sapathi-yd- (AV.) 'utter a curse' {sapdtha-).

In nearly every instance here the Pada text has t. Even in the Sarnhita text the AV. has putri-yd- 'desire a son', and the RV. the denominative participle (with shifted accent) dnni-yant- 'desiring food' {dnna-).

a. For the -a of the nominal stem e is substituted in vare-yd- 'play the wooer' (vara-), 'woo'.

c. The final -a of the nominal stem is sometimes dropped " : "adhvar-yd- 'perform sacrifice' (beside adhvari-yd-); krpan-yd- 'be eager'; tavis-yd- 'be

1 Regarded as a causative by Grassmann, 6 See Whitney on AV. iv. 21 2. s. V. afikh. 7 Based on randhana , an assumed deri- ' DelbrOck 189, 1 regards the form vative of the root randh-. hastayatas as a denominative ; but the accent 8 Beside vrsan-yd-, from vj'sa-, the form would be unique: its explanation by BR. which vr;an- assumes before terminations and Grassmann as a compound, hasia-yatas or before second members of compounds 'wielded by the hand', is doubtless the beginning with consonants. correct one. 9 From subha-, an assumed derivative of 3 Cp. Delbrucic 189, 2. suhh- 'shine'. 4 Grassmann regards this verb as a 1° There is also a causative form srathdya-, causati ve: see Worterbuch, s. v. urjay. from sraih- 'loosen'. J' 5 See Whitney's note on AV. iv. 196. Cp. V, Negelein 40. 400 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar. mighty' (beside tavisT-yd-); turan-ya- 'be speedy'; daman-ya-^ 'overpower'; several bhuran-yd- %& 2.Q.'as€ ; vMur-yd- 'sUggev' ; saran-yd- 'h.a,sten' . There are other denominatives which presuppose nouns in -ana: thus dhisan-yd- 'pay attention'; risan-yd- 'commit faults'; ruvan-ya- 'roar'; huvan-ya- 'call'. The derivation of isan-yd- beside isana-ya- 'impel' is perhaps similar; but the nominal stem on which this denominative is based may be isdni- 'impulse'^- 564. Stems in -a, which usually remains unchanged: gopa-yd- 'act as herdsman', 'protect'; /wa-_yi- 'speed to earth'; ducchuna-yd- 'desire mischief 3; prtana-yd- 'fight'; bhandana-yd- 'strive for glory'; mana-yd- 'feel^attachmenf; rasana-yd- (AV.)'» 'put on a girdle'. Similar stems are to be assumed in rgha-yd- 'tremble', and hrna-yd- 'be wrathful'; and dhiya-yd- 'pay attention' is based on dhiya- ^ = dht- 'thought'. «. The -a of the nominal stem is once shortened, if krpa-yd- (RVi.) 'mourn'6 is a denominative and different from the causative krpdya- (554)- The a is dropped in prtan-yd- 'fight' beside frtana-yd-. a. There are more than a dozen denominatives with a preceding -ya-, without any corresponding noun in a; thus asa-yd- 'attain' 7; tuda-yd- (AV.)

'thrust'; dama-yd- 'tame' 7; nasa-ya-* (x. 40'') 'reach'; pana-ya- 'boast of; vasa-yd- 'invest oneself with'; vrsa-ya- 'cause to rain' 9. Seven such denomi- natives, however, appear beside present bases according to the ninth class in na: grbha-yd- 'seize' (grbh-ns-); matka-yd- 'shsikt' {math-nd-); prusa-yd- 'drip' {prus-ndnt-, VS.); musa-yd- 'steal' (mus-nd-); sratha-ya- 'loosen' (Jrath-nd-); skabha-yd- 'fasten' [skabh-nd-); siabha-yd- 'support' {stabh-na-). 565. Stems in -/, which is nearly always lengthened (though usually short in the Pada text) : arati-yd- (RV. VS.) 'be malevolent', but arati-yd- (AV. and RV. Pp.); kavi-yd- 'be wise'; jani-yd- 'seek a wife', \iM\. jani-yd- (AV.); dur-grbhi-ya- 'be hard to grasp'; mahi-yd- 'be delighted'; rayi-yd- 'desire wealth'; sak/iT-yd-^" 'seek friendship'.

a. In a few instances the i is either treated as a or tal

566. Stems in -u, which (except gatu-yd- twice) is always long (though always short in Pp.): ffJ'S-^a- 'grumble'; rju-yd- 'be straight'; kratu-yd- 'exert the intellect'; gatu-yd- and gatu-yd- 'set in motion'; pitu-yd- 'desire nourishment'; valgu-yd- 'treat kindly'; vasu-yd- 'desire wealth'; satru-yd- 'play the enemy', 'be hostile'; sukratu-ya- 'show oneself wise'. Moreover, isu-ya- 'strive', may be derived from tsu- 'arrow'; and nouns in -u are presupposed by ahku-yd- 'move tortuously', and stabhu-yd- 'stand firm'. a. In go-, the only stem in -0, the diphthong becomes -av before the denominative suffix: gav-yd- 'desire cows'.

' From an assumed adjective derivative 8 Delbruck, 1. 1., regards nasaya- (x. 406) damana-. as a denominative, BR. as causative of nas-. 2 Cp. Delbruck 189, 4. 9 To be distinguished from vj'sdyd- 'act 3 The Pada text wrongly ducchunayd-. like a bull'. 4 Cp. Whitney's note on AV. xiv. a^*. 'o Cp. V. Negelein 41 (middle). 5 Which perhaps became an independent 11 From the reduplicated root su- 'press'. noun through the influence of the instru- 12 According to Delbruck 205, p. 57, also mental form in such compounds as dhiya-jiir- duhiya- in the forms duhiydt and dnhiydn 'growing old in devotion'. (optatives Grassmann, Worterbuch, and 6 Cp. Grassmann, s. v. k)-pay. Whitney, Roots, s. v. duh). Cp. 450, a 5. 7 Cp. Delbruck 199 (p. 217, middle), ;

VII. Verb. Secondary Conjugation. 401

567. Consonant stems usually remain unchanged before the suffix. a. The only stem ending in -j is bhisdj- 'physician' : bhisaj-yd- 'play the physician', 'heal'. b. There is one denominative, isudh-yd- 'implore', which seems to pre- suppose a stem in -dh, viz. isudh-^, but is probably a denominative from isu-dhi- (like pdtya- 'from pdti-) 'put in the arrow', 'aim'^' c. Denominatives formed from stems in -n are uksan-yd- 'act like a bull';

udan-yd- 'irrigate'; brahtnan-yd- 'be devout' ('act like z. brahman!) ; vfsan-yd-^ 'act like a bull', 'be lustful'.

d. A denominative formed from a stem in -or is vadhar-yd- 'hurl a bolt' {vddkar-). Stems in -ar are further presupposed in rathar-yd- 'ride in a car'; irathar-yd- 'become loose'; sapar-yd- 'worship'. e. The consonant stems most frequently used to form denominatives are those in -as: apas-yd- 'be active'; avas-yd- 'seek help'; canas-yd- 'h^ %2X\%'ii&A' duvas-yd- "^adore"; namas-yd- 'pay homage'; nr-manas-yd- 'be kindly disposed to men'; manas-yd- 'bear in mind'; vacas-yd- 'be audible'; varivas-yd- 'grant space'; sravas-yd-^ 'hasten'; sa-canas-yd- 'cherish'; su-manas-yd- 'be gracious'; sv-apas-yd- 'act well'. Stems in -as are further presupposed by iras-yd- 'be angry'; dasas-yd- 'render service to'; payias-yd- 'excite admiration'; sacas-yd- 'receive care'. A few denominatives have further been formed from stems in -a following the analogy of those in -as; thus makhas-yd- 'be cheerful' (makhd-) and su-makhas-yd- (TS.) 'be merry'; manavas-yd- 'act like men' {manavd-). The stem avis-yd-, appearing in the participle avisydnt- 'helping willingly', apparently a denominative (beside avisya- 'desire', avisyi'i- 'desirous'),

seems to be formed from *av-is- = dv-as- 'favour' 5. f. A few denominatives are formed from stems in -us: tarus-yd- 'engage in fight' (fdr-us-); vanus-yd- 'plot against' (van-iis- 'eager'); vapus-ya- 'wonder'

(vdp-us- 'marvellous'). This analogy is followed by uru-s-yd- 'seek wide space' from a stem in -u {uric- 'wide'). 568. There are a few denominative forms made without a suffix direct from nominal stems, but they nearly always have beside them denominative stems in -ya; thus bhisdk-ti (viii. 79^) 'heals' 3. sing, from bhisdj- 'act as phy- sician' (also m. 'physician'); a-bhisnak (x. 131'), 3. sing, impf oibhimaj- 'heal'. Similarly there appear the forms sing. 2. isana-s, 3. isana-t, pi. 3. isana-nta

\)QS\A^isan-yd-; pi. 3. krpdna-nta beside krpan-yd-; pi. i. taruse-ma, 3. idrusa-nte, tarusa-nta beside tarus-yd-; pi. 3 vanusa-nta beside vanus-yd-. Possibly the form vdnanvati is a denominative meaning 'is at hand', from a noun "^van-anu-, beside the simple verb van- 'win'^. Inflexion.

569. The denominative is regularly inflected throughout the present system according to the a- conjugation in both voices. The commonest form

is the 3. sing, active and middle. The forms of the present indicative active and middle that actually occur would, if made from manas-yd- 'bear in mind', be the following: Active. Sing. i. manasyami (AV.). 2. manasydsi. 3. manasydti. — Du. 2. manasydthas. 3. manasydtas. — PI. i. manasyamasi and manasydmas. 2. manasyatha. 3. manasydnti. Middle. Sing. i. manasyL 2. manasydse. 3. manasydte. — Du. 2. manasyethe. 3. manasydte (AV.). — PL i. manasyamahe. 3. manasydnte.

1 Cp. DELBiucK 194. from sru- = sru- 'flow'^ but GrassmANN 2 Cp. Grassmann, s. v. isudhy. from sru- 'hear'. 3 Beside vrsaya-; cp. p. 399, note s Cp, Grassmann, b. v. avisy. 4 According to BR. derived from sravas- 6 Cp. Delbruck p, 218.

Indo-aiische Philologie. I, 4. 26 402 I. Allgemeines und Speache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

Forms that actually occur elsewhere in the present system are the following: a. Subjunctive. Active. Sing. i. namasya. — 2. urusySs, kirtdyas (Av.), sravasyds. — 3. apasySt, arafiyit (TS. IV. i. io3; VS. xi. 80), aratiydt (Av.), urusydt, caranyat (AV.), durasyit (AV.), duvasyif, prianydt, vanusyAt, vareydt) vasUySt, sravasydi, saparyst. — Du, 3. varivasydtas. — PI. 3. prtanyan (AV.), saparydn, saranydn. — Middle. Sing. 2. arthdyase, nildyase. — 3. ahkhdyate. b. Injunctive. Active. Sing. 2. irasyas, risanyas, ruvanyas. — PI. 3. turanyan, duvasyan, namasyan, saparyan. — Middle. Sing. 3. panayata. —

PI. 3. rghaydnta, rfayanta, krpdnanta, tarusanta, dhunayanta ', rucayanta, vanusanta, susvdyanta. c. Optative. Active. Sing. 2. dasasyes. — 3. urusyet, caranyet (TS. 1.8.22'), dasasyet, duvasyet. — PI. I. isayema, tarusema, saparyema. — Middle. Sing. 3. manasyeta (AV.). d. Imperative. Active. Sing. 2. isanya, urmyd, gatuyd, gurdhaya, gopayd (AV. TS.), grbhaya, daiasyd, duvasya, namasya, varivasyd, vajaya

(TS. I. 7. 8'), irathaya, saparya. — 3. urusyatu, gopayaiw^ (AV.), bhisajyatii (TS. V. 2. 12^). — Du. 2. urusydtam, gopaydtam, canasydtam, dasasydtam. — 3. urusydtam. — PI. 2. isanyata, urusyata, grbhaydta (AV.), gopayata (AV.), dasasyata, duvasydta, namasydia, risanyata, saparyata. — 3. urusyantu, gopayantu (AV.), varivasyantu. — Middle. Sing. 2. arthayasva, vTrdyasva (AV. TS.), vrsayasva (AV.). — PI. 2. tilvilayddhvam, vtrdyadhvam. — 3. dhunayantam. e. Participle. The present participle active in -ant (with fem. -ant-i) is very common, while the middle form in -mana, occurs fairly often. a. Examples of the active are aghaydnt-, ankuydnt-, adhvariydnt-, amitra- ydnt-, aratlydnt-, asvaydnt-, isanydnt-, isdyant- and isaydnt-, isuydnt-, udan- ydnt-, urjdyant-, rghaydnt-, rtdyant-, rtaydnt-, gavydnt-, gopaydnt- (AV.), iavisTydnt-, dasasydnt-, duvasydni-, devaydnt-, namasydnt-, paldyant- (AV.), putriydnt-, prtanaydnt-, prtanydnt-, bhandanaydnt-, bhuranydnt-, mathaydnt-, musaydnt-, yajhaydnt-, yusmaydnt-, rathiraydnt-, rathiydnt-, vasUydnt-, vasna~ ydnt-, vajdyant- and vajaydnt-, vrsanydnt-, satrUydnt-, sTkaydnt- (VS.) 'dripping', sakhiydnt-, satvanaydnt- (AV.), saparydnt-, sumnaydnt-, susvdyant-, hrnaydnt- 'angry'. ^. Examples of the middle are rghaydmana-, rjuydmana-, ojaydmana-, kanduydmana- (TS.), kaviydmana-, caranfydmana-, tavisydmana-, priyaydmana- (AV.), {d-prati-)manyuyamana- (AV.), rasanaydmana-, vrsaydmana-, samanayd- mana-, sumakhasydmana- (TS.), sumanasydmana-, stabhuydmana-, svapasyd- mana-, hrniydmana- 'angry'. f. Imperfect. Active. Sing. 2. arandhanayas. — 3. aprtanyat, dskabhayat (AV.); urusyat, damanyat, dhupdyat (AV.); abhisnak. — Du. 3. urusydtam. — PL 3. anamasyan, asaparyan; turanyan, vapusyan, saparyan (TS. II. 2. 12*). — Middle. Sing. 3. dpriyayaia. — Du. 2. avirayetham. — PI. 3. isanayanta. 570. Outside the present system no denominative form occurs in

the RV. except unayts ( + AV.), 2. sing, m- aorist (used injunctively with ma)

1 The form bhurdjanta (iv. 43^) is according declension {go-pd-) occur in the RV. To to pw. = bhrajanta for bhrajjanta {bhraj'j- *be the denominative must be due the secon- roasted'). Cp. note in Oldenberg's Rgveda. dary root gup- 'protect' [jugupur once, gupitd- 2 This denominative is derived from the twice in the RV.). Cp. p. 358, note i3. How very frequent go-pa- 'cowherd', of which gup- should be a denominative of go- 'cow' two transition forms according to the a- (v. Negelein 43, note 5) is not clear. ::

Vn. Verb. Nominal Verb Forms. Past Passive Participles. 403

from unaya- 'leave unfulfilled' {una-). A few otlier forms occur in the later Samhitas. Thus the AV. has the peculiar form dsaparyait (AV. xrv. 2=°)% ]probably sing, aorist, 3. with -ait ioi -n\ The VS. (n.31) has the 3. pi. aorist a^-vrsay-is-ata 'they have accepted". The TS. has the 2. pi. aor. pspay-is-ia lead mto evil' (used injunctively with mi). The TS. (iii. 2. 83) has also the future participles kanduyisydnt- 'about to scratch', meghayisydnt- 'about to be cloudy', hkayisydnt- 'about to drip', with the corresponding perfect participles passive kanduyitd-, meghitd-, stkitd-. B. Nominal Verb Forms.

571. A large number of nominal formations partake of the verbal character inasmuch as they express time (present, past, or fiiture); or the relations between subject and object, implying transitive or intransitive action, and active, middle, or passive sense. Such formations are participles (in- cluding verbal adjectives), infinitives, and gerunds. The participles formed from tense-stems having already been treated -5, only those that are formed directly from the root remain to be dealt with. These are the verbal adjectives which have the value either of past passive participles or of future passive participles (otherwise called gerundives).

a. Past Passive Participles.

572. The past passive participle is formed by adding, in the great majority of instances, the suffix -fo'i (with or without connecting -?-), or far less commonly the suffix -no. (direcfly) to the root. When formed from a transitive verb, it has a passive as weU as a past sense; e. g. as- 'throw' as-td- 'thrown'; da- 'give' : dat-td- 'given'. But when formed from an intransi- tive verb, it has a neuter past sense; e. g. gam- 'go' : ga-td- 'gone'; pat- 'fall' .pat-i-td- (AV.) 'faUen'.

573. When -id is added direct, the root tends to appear in its weak form. Very frequently, however, the form in which the root is generally stated, if ending in vowels, remains imchanged, while those ending in con- sonants are usually modified only in so far as is required by the rules of internal Sandhi; y^»»/a- thus : mla-td- 'softened'; Yy^'-y^'^'^' 'gone'; jAra-

: ra-td- 'given'; '-ji-td- 'conquered'; ]/"/«- : sri-td- leaning on'; YJ^' YP"^' • pri-td- 'rejoiced'; Y^hi- : bhi-td- 'frightened'; Yy^' i- 'yoke' and 2. 'ward oflf'

: -yu-ta-; j/'jra- : sru-td- 'heard'; y^J^- : stu-td- 'praised'; Y^hu- : bhu-td- 'be-

come'; Yhu- : hu-td- 'called'; |A^- : kr-td- 'made'; Y^^T' '• -bhr-ta- 'borne'; ' "vr-td- 'covered' and 'chosen'; ' mrk-td-^ Y'VT' Yw^' (RV.) 'injured'; ]/"«V- : sik-td- 'poured out'; Y^V' ' tik-td- 'sharp'; YyW' ' yuk-td- 'yoked'; Y^TJ-

' : mrs-td- 'rubbed'; Y^tj- ^{-fd- 'discharged'; l/aV- : cit-td- 'perceived'; jAz/r/-

vrt-td- 'turned'; jAwa^- 'be exhilarated' : mat-td- (AV.); Y^^^- ' id-dhd- 'kind- led'; Ykrudh- : krud-dhd- 'angry'; ]A/a/- : tap-td- 'hot'; Y^P" '• rip-td- (RV.)

'besmeared'; |A^?/- : dis-td- 'shown'; "[/^a/- : nas-td- 'losf '-jus-td- ; YJ^?' (RV.)

'gladdened' dxA jus-ta- 'welcome'; /z>-/i- 'crushed'; : y^«>- : i/"yJaj- z/Z-iaj-Za- g"--^^^-^ 'split'; Ys^f^- ' 'hidden'; Y^rh- : tr-dhd- 'crushed'; Y^ah- : dag-dhd-^

'bumf; Y^i^- ' dig-dhd- (AV.) 'besmeared'; Y^^^' • dug-dhd- 'milked'; y^//r^-

1 Cp. V. NEGSLEIN 41 ; BOHTLINGK, ZDMG. S Only in the compounds d-mrkta- and 52, sioff. m-fkta-vahas: 2 As in the AB. form agrahhaisam beside * In roots in -h which cerebralize the agrahhit; cp. v. Negelein 41, note 2. suffix, the vowel is lengthened as compen- declension 311 in sation for 3 See under —313, and the loss of the cerebral z : cp. the account of the various tenses (present, p. 51, note 2. perfect, aorist, future). 7 In the RV. only in agni-dagdha- 'burnt 4 Cp. Reichelt, BB. 27, 9S— 97. with fire'. 26* ;:

Vedic Grammar. 404 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4.

/ot»/4- : : drug-dhd- 'hurtful'; Ynah- : nad-dhd- 'bound'; : dr-dhd- 'firm'; ydruh- 'licked'; /r«-4- mug-dhd- and mu-dhd- {KSi:) 'bewildered'; Yrih- : ri-dhd- (RV.)

y^ja/:- : sa-dhd- 'overcome'. : ru-dhd- (AV.) 'ascended'; ordinary a. Occasional irregularities in the form of the root are not due to the semi-vowel: rules of internal Sandhi. Thus some roots show an interchange of vowel and : instead of sw- 'sew' : syii-td-; mtv- 'push' -muia- (VS. AV.) div '^\&f : dyii-ta- (AV.); *«j«7-/«-i; Avr- 'make crooked' has Am-td- 'crooked', beside the regular -hvr-ta- (RV.);

'sv/eeten' : svai-id- gur- 'greets sometimes a long vowel appears in the root:_ svad- ; root; da- giir-ta-; sr- 'mix': -nr-ta-, hes\Ac m-id- from srJ- 'mix', the usual form of the 'give', beside the regular form -da-ia- in Iva-data- (RV.) 'given by thee', otherwise always has dat-id; formed from dad-, the weak form of the present base. medial) 574. Roots which contain the syllables ya, ra, va (initial or are generally weakened by Samprasarana; those which contain a nasal (medial or final), by dropping it; those which end in a oi ya, by shortening

the former to f or i, the latter to r. Thus:

: prach- 'ask' : prs-td-; 1. yaj- 'sacrifice' : is-td-; vyadh- 'pierce' vid-dhd-;

'speak' : uk-td-; vap- 'strew' bhras- 'fall' : bhrs-td- beside bhras-td- (AV.); vac-

: u-dhd-; svap- 'sleep' : sup-td- : up-td-; vas- 'shine' : us-td-; vah- 'carry' (AV. VS.). u. A shortening akin to Samprasarana appears in av- 'favour' : -u-ta-; va- 'weave'

u-td-; ira- 'boil' : ir-td- beside srd-td-. 'confine' 2. A medial nasal is dropped in anj- 'anoint' : ak-td-; umbh-

firm' : -ba-dha-; sundh- : ub-dkd-; dams- 'bite' : das-td- (AV.); bamh- 'make radical a representing the 'purify' : sud-dhd-. Final n and m are dropped (the 'think' wa-jfi- sonant nasal) in ksan- 'wound' : -ksa-ta-; ian- ' stxetcV :(a-id-; man- :

: na-td-; 'reach' -.ya-td-. han- 'smite' : ha-td-; gam- 'go' :ga-td-; nam- 'bend' yam-

a. A few roots in -an have a instead of -an^: khan- 'dig' : kha-id-; jan- 'be born' in -an, ja-td-; van- 'win' : -va-ta-; san- 'gain' : sa-td-; while some roots in -am and one 'stride' kran-td- retaining the nasal, have an : d/ivan- 'sound' : dhvdntd- (VS. XXXIX. 7) ; kram- : has the (AV.); sam- 'be quiet'; sdn-td- (AV.); ham- 'be ytt.^.xf : irdn-td-; dham- 'blow' irregular dhmd-td- and dham-i-td-.

3. Final a is shortened to T in ga- 'sing' -.gi-td-; dha- 'suck' : dhi-td-; hi-td-; pa drink' -.pT-td-^; to i in da- 'bind' : -di-ta-; dha- 'put' : -dhi-ta- and 'stand' ma- measure mi-td-; sa- 'sharpen' : si-td-; sa- 'bind' : si-td-; stha- sthi-td-.

Final ya is shortened to i in jya- 'overpower' : jT-td- (AV.) ; vya-

'envelope' : vi-td-; syS- 'coagulate' : h-td-.

a. Internal shortening of 5 to i appears in sds- 'order' : sis-fa-; and medial a entirely

disappears in ghas- 'eat' : -gdha- (TS.) and in the compounded form of dattd- 'given',

which becomes -t-ia- . deva-Ud- 'given by the gods'; vy-a-ita- (AV. VS.), n. 'the opened mouth'; fdri-tta- (VS. IX. 9) 'deposited'; -pratJ-tta- (AV.) 'given back'. The same syncopated

form appears in the compound participle of da- 'divide' : dva-tta- (VS.) 'cut off'.

575. When -ta is added, as it is in many verbs, with connecting -/-, the root is not weakened (excepting four instances of Samprasarana)'*. It is thus added to a number of roots ending in consonants and to all second- ary verbs. a. The roots to which it is thus regularly added are those that end:

I. in t'wo consonants: thus uks- 'sprinkle' : uks-i-td-; ubj- "'force' :

ubj-i-td- (AV.); nind- 'revile' : nind-i-td-; raks- 'protect' : raks-i-td-; sumbh-

'beautify' : -sumbh-i-ta- (AV.); hims- 'injure' : hims-i-td- (AV.); but taks- 'fashion' has tas-td-;

1 See above 50 b- 4 In grbh-i-td- iiom.grabh- 'seize' and gf'h- 2 Representing the long sonant nasal. T-ia- (AV.) from grah- id. ; uks-i-id- from vaks- 3 The more correct way of stating these 'increase'; ud-i-td- from vad- 'speak'; srth- roots would be gai-, dhai-, pai-; cp. 27 a. i-td- from srath- 'slacken'. ;:

VII. Verb. Past Passive Participles. 405

2. in voiceless aspirates: likh- 'scratch' : likh-i-td- (AV.); grath- 'tie' : grath-i-td-; nath- 'seek aid' : nath-i-td-; math- 'stir' : math-i-td-; in cerebral 3. d: id- 'praise' : il-i-td-; hid- 'be hostile' : hil-i-td-; in 4. semivowels: car- 'movt' : car-i-td-'^; Jiv- 'Ywt' -.jlv-i-td-. b. The suffix is also added with -i- to a number of roots ending in simple consonants, especially sibilants, about which no "rule can be stated. Such are the following participles arranged according to the final of the root

yac- 'ask' :yac-i-fd-(kY.); pat- 'fall' : pat-i-td- {KSf.); rad- 'dig' : rad-i-td- (AV.);

vad- 'speak' : ud-i-td-; vid- 'know' : vid-i-td- (AV.)% dudh- 'stir up' : di'idh-i-ta- (RV.); nadh- 'seek aid' : nadh-i-td-; badh- 'oppress' : badh-i-td-; pan- 'admire'

pan-i-td-; kup- 'be : agitated' -kup-i-ta-; gup-^^ protect' : gup-i-td- beside gup-td-

(AV.); yup- 'obstruct' : yup-i-td- (AV.); rup- 'break' : -rup-i-ta-; drp- 'rave' :

-drp-i-ta- zxA -drp-ta-; /a/- 'prate' : lap-i-td- {KY.) ; grabh- 'seize' : grbh-i-td- and

grah- 's6.ze -.grh-T-td- {KY.); skabh- '^xo^' : skabh-i-td-; stabh-'-gxo^' -.stabh-i-td-;

dham- 'blow' : dham-i-td- (beside dhma-td-); as- 'eat' : as-i-td-; pis- 'adorn' : pis-i-td- (AV.) beside pis-ta-; is- 'send' : is-i-td-; IS- 'move' : -is-i-ta-; tvis- 'be stirred' : tvis-i-td-; dhrs- 'dare' : dhrs-i-td- beside dhrs-td-; prus- 'sprinkle' : prus-i-td-; mus- 'steal' : mus-i-td-; hrs- 'be ex-

cited' : hrs-i-td- ; gras- 'devour' : gras-i-td-.

a. The verb ha- 'leave' forms its past participle anomalously (like da- 'give') from the reduplicated present hast: Jah-i-td- (cp. the pres. part. /a^-ni;-). ^, In the AV. is once (rx. 638) found a past passive participle extended with the

possessive suffix -vant, which gives it the sense of a perfect participle active : ai-i-ta- vani- (Pp. aiiid-vant-) 'having eaten'.

c. Secondary verbs, almost exclusively causatives*, add -ita after

dropping -aya-; thus arp-aya- 'cause to go' : arp-itd- and drp-ita-; inkh-dya-

'cause to quake' : Inkh-itd-; cod-dya- 'set in motion' : cod-iid-; vil-dya- 'make

strong' : vil-itd-; snath-aya- 'pierce' : snath-itd-; svan-aya- 'resound' : -svan-ita-.

The only past passive participle formed from a denominative is bham-itd- 'enraged', from bhdma- 'wrath'. 576. The suffix -na is always attached directly to the root, which

as a rule remains unweakened. Among roots ending in consonants, it is taken by those in d, besides two or three in the palatals c and /; among roots in vowels, it is taken by those ending in the long vowels a, T, f, besides one in U. a. The final of roots in -d is assimilated to the n of the suffix; thus chid-

: 'cut off' : chin-nd-; tud- 'pvLsh' : tun-nd- ; trd- 'pieics' -trn-na- (VS.xx.XYi. 2); nud- 'pvish' : -ftun-na- (SV.) beside nut-td-\ pad- ^go' pan-nd- (AV.); bhid- 'split': :

bhin-nd-; vid- 'find' : vin-nd- (AV.) beside vit-td-; sad- 'sit' : san-nd- (VS. AV.)

beside sat-td-; shand- 'leap' : skan-nd-; syand- ^move on' : syan-nd-; svid- 'sweat'

: svin-nd-. The original participle of ad- 'eat' survives only (with change of accent) in the neuter noun dn-na- 'food'.

b. The roots in palatals which take -na are : pre- 'mix' : -prg-na- (RV.)

beside prk-td-; vrasc- 'cut up' : vrk-nd-; ruj- 'break' : rug-nd-. c. Roots in -a remain unchanged or weaken the final to I: drd- 'sleep'

: -dra-na- (AV.); da- 'divide' : di-nd-; ha- 'leave' : hi-nd-; final -ya is shortened

to -i: sya- 'coagulate' : st-nd- (VS.) beside si-td-.

d. Roots in -T and -u remain unchanged: kst- 'destroy' : -ksi-na- (AV.)

1 Also ar-i-td- if derived from a somewhat 3 See p. 402, note 2. doubtful root ar- 'praise'; cp. Whitnev, 4 No examples of past participles from Roots, s. v. dr. desideratives (except mimamsitd-, AV.) and 2 mad-itd- is probably from the causative intensives seem to occur in the Samhitas. of mad- 'be exhilarated'. 4o6 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

bit- 'crush' : PT- 'swell' : />f-»i- (AV.); -Ml-na- (AV.); ll- 'cling' : -li-na- (AV.);

du- 'burn' : du-nd- (AV.). e. Roots in -r change that vowel to -ir or (generally when a labial

precedes) -ur before -na: gf- 'swallow' : gir-nd-; jf- 'waste away' -.jir-nd- (AV.)

and yar-«a-; tf- 'pass' : itr-nd-; pf- 'fill' : pur-nd- beside pur-td-; mr- 'crush' :

mur-nd- (AV.); if- 'crush' : sir-nd- (AV.) beside sur-td- (RV. I. 174*)'; stf-

'strew' : sttr-nd- beside -str-ta-.

b. Future Passive Participles (Gerundives).

577. Verbal adjectives formed with certain suffixes have acquired the value of future participles passive, expressing that the action of the verb is or ought to be suffered. There are four forms of such gerundives in use in the RV.: that derived with the primary suffix -ya, which is common, and those derived with the secondary suffixes -dy-ya, -in-ya, and -tv-a, about a dozen examples of each of which are met with. In the AV. are also found two instances each of gerundives in -tavya and -aniya. 578. By far the most frequent form of gerundive is that in -ya, about 40 examples occurring in the RV. and about 60 in the AV. This suffix is nearly always to be read as -ia, which accounts for the treatment of final

radical vowels before it. The root, being accented, appears in a strong form, excepting a few instances in which there is the short radical vowel i u or r. 1. In the following examples a final short vowel remains unchanged, a -t-' being interposed: -i-t-ya- 'to be gone'; apa-mi-t-ya- (AV. vi. 117O 'to be thrown away' (? mi- 'fix') 3; sru-t-ya- 'to be heard'; -kr-t-ya- 'to be made'; car-kf-t-ya- 'to be praised' (kr- 'commemorate'). 2. Otherwise final r, u, r regularly take Guna or Vrddhi, the final element of which always appears as y, v, r as before a vowel; thus from

ll- 'cling' : a-lAy-ya-'' , an epithet of Indra; nu- 'praise' : ndv-ya- 'to be praised';

bhu- 'be' : bhdv-ya- and bhav-yd- 'future'; hu- 'call' : hdv-ya- 'to be invoked';

vf- 'choose' : vdr-ya- 'to be chosen'.

3. Final -a coalesces with the initial of -ia to e, between which and -a

a phonetic y is interposed; thus da- 'give' : de'-ya- (^ da-i-y-a-) 'to be given';

khya- 'see' : -kkye-ya- (AV.); ma- 'measure' ; me'-ya- (AV.). In the RV., how- ever, the form Jiia-ya- once occurs in the compound bala-vi-jha-yd- (x. 103^) 'to be recognized by his might'. 4. A medial vowel either remains unchanged or, if short, may take Guna, and a is sometimes lengthened; thus fd-ya- 'to be praised'; guh-ya- 'to be hidden'; -dhrs-ya- 'to be assailed'; dvh-ya- (AV.) 'to be hated' i^dvis-); yodh-ya- 'to be fought' {}/yudh-); drdh-ya- 'to be completed' {^frdh-); mdrj-ya- to be purified' {\finrj-); cdks-ya- 'to be seen'; ddbh-ya- 'to be deceived'; rdmh-ya- 'to be hastened'; rddh-ya- 'to be won'; vdnd-ya- 'praiseworthy'; sdms-ya- 'to be lauded'; -sdd-ya- from sad- 'sit'; -mad-ya- from mad- 'be ex- hilarated'; v&c-ya- 'to be said' iyvac-). 579. Hardly a dozen gerundives, almost restricted to the RV., are formed with -dy-yai (which with one exception is always to be read -dyid): daks-ayya- 'to be conciliated'; pan-dyya- 'to be admired'; vid-dyya- 'to be

1 -sTr-ta- The form is also found in the 4 Cp. Grassmann, £,. V. MS. : Whitney, Roots, s. v. yir- 'crush'. 5 Cp. Lindner, Nominalbildung 22; Del- 2 Cp. the -t added to roots ending in BRUCK, Verbum 233; Whitney 966 c; Bar- -', -«, -r to form nominal stems (308), THOLOMAE, BB. 15, 179 n. I; BB. 20, 85. 3 The meaning is uncertain : Whitney translates the word by 'borrowed'. See his notes in his Translation. VII. Verb. Infinitive. 407 found'; irav-ayya- 'glorious'; -hnav-ayya- 'to be denied'. A few are formed from secondary verbs ; from causatives: trayay-ayya- 'to be guarded' {Ytrd-) '; panay-ayya- 'admirable' {Ypan-); sprhay-ayya- 'desirable' {^fsprh-); from a desiderative: di-dhi-s-ayya- 'to be conciliated {ydha-); from an intensive: vi-tan-tas-Ayya- 'to be hastened' {;}[tarns-). Akin to these gerundives is the anomalous form stusi-yya- 'to be praised', derived direct from the infinitive stusi 'to praise'^. 580, More than a dozen gerundives are formed with -en-ya (generally to be read -enid): tks-Snya- 'worthy to be seen', il-inya- 'praiseworthy', -car- e'nya- 'to be acted', drs-enya- 'worthy to be seen', -dvis-enya- 'malignant', a-bhus-Snya- 'to be glorified', yudh-enya- 'to be combatted', vdr-enya- 'desirable'. From the aorist stem is formed -yams-inya- 'to be guided' iyyam-); and perhaps paprks-enya-^ 'desirable' {:)fprach-). A few are also derived from

secondary verbs; from desideratives : didrks-Snya- 'worthy to be seen' iydrs-), susrus-enya- (TS.) 'deserving to be heard'; from intensives: mar- mrj-enya- 'to be adorned', vavrdh-enya- 'to be glorified'; from a denomina- tive: sapary-enya- 'to be adored'. 581. About a dozen gerundives, almost restricted to the RV.t, end in -iv-a (generally to be read as -tu-a), which seems to be the infinitive stem in -tu turned into an adjective by means of the suffix -a: kdr-tva- 'to be made', jdn-i-tva- and jdn-tva- 'to be bom', ji-tva- 'to be won', ndn-tva- 'to be bent', bhdv-T-tva- 'future', vdk-tva- 'to be said', sdn-i-tva- 'to be won', s6-tva- 'to be pressed', sni-tva- 'suitable for bathing', hdn-tva- 'to be slain', he-tva- 'to be driven on' (|//z/-).

a. In the AV. there begins to appear a gerundive in -tav-ya. It probably started from the stem of the predicative infinitive in -tav-e, which was turned into an adjective by means of the suffix -ia^. The only examples of this formation are jan-i-tav-ya- 'to be born' (AV. IV. 237) and hims-i-tav-ya- 'to be injured' (AV. v. 186). b. There are also two examples in the AV. of a new gerundive in -an-lya, which is derived from a verbal noun in -ana with the adjective suffix -Tya. These are upa-jiv-aniya- 'serving for subsistence' ^ 'to be subsisted on' (AV. VIII. 1022); a-manir- aniya- 'fit for address' [a-mdnirana-) == 'worthy to be addressed' (AV. viri. 10^)6.

c. Infinitive.

A. LuDWiG, Der Infinitiv im Veda, Prag 1871. — J. Jolly, Geschichte des Infinitivs im Indogermanischen (Munchen 1873), especially p. Ill — 137. — Delbruck, Das alt- indische Verbum (1874), p. 221 —228; Altindische Syntax p. 410—425. — AvERY, Verb- Inflection in Sanskrit, JAOS. 10,275—276 (1876). — Brunnhofer, tjber die durch ein- fache flectirung der wurzel gebildeten infinitive des Veda, KZ. 30 (1890), 504— 513. — Bartholomae, Zur bildung des dat. sing, der a-stamme, BB. 15. 221 — 247. — v. Negelein, Zur Sprachgeschichte des Veda (1898), 91. — Fritz Wolff, Die infinitive des Indischen und Iranischen. Erster teil : Die ablativisch-genetivischen und die accusativischen infini- tive, Giitersloh 1905.

582. The infinitive, all the forms of which are old cases of nouns of action, is very frequently used, occurring in the RV. alone about 700 times. The case-forms which it exhibits are those of the accusative, dative, ablative- genitive, and locative. Only the first two are common, but the dative is by far the commonest, outnumbering the accusative in the proportion of 12 to I in the RV. (609 to 49)", and of 3 to i in the AV.* Infinitives are

1 Cp. Grassmann, s. v., and Whitney 105 i f. 5 Cp. Brugmann, KG. 809. 2 See Brugmann, KG. 809. 6 The gerundive meaning in these two 3 See Benfey, Vollstandige Grammatik verbal adjectives is probably only incipient. 904 and 860. The second is expressly connected with the 4 A few of these are also found in B., verbal noun d-mantrana-. also an additional one, ho-tva- 'to be sacri- 7 AvERY 231. ficed', in the MS. (l 93). 8 Whitney 986. 4o8 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar. formed chiefly from radical stems or stems in -tu, only a few dative and locative forms being made from other stems. It is somewhat remarkable that the ace. form in -turn which is the only infinitive in the later language, hardly occurs in the RV., being found there only five times'', while the dative infinitive, which is more than seven times as frequent as all the rest in the RV., has almost disappeared even in the Brahmanas. The formations which are restricted to the infinitive meaning are the datives in -tavai, -dhyai, and (the very few) in -se, besides a small number of locatives in -sdni. In other forms it is often difficult to draw a strict line of demarcation between the infinitive^ and ordinary case uses 3.

I. Dative Infinitive.

583. This infinitive ends in -

-bddh-e 'to bind' (AV.), -bitdhe (TS. i. 2. 3') 'to awake', -mfse 'to forget', -ydks-e 'to speed', -yi'ij-e 'to yoke', -rdbh-e 'to seize', -ri'ij-e 'to break', -vdc-e 'to speak' (l/"z/a

-vrj-e 'to put round', -vft-e 'to turn', -sds-e 'to proclaim', -sdd-e 'to sit', -sud-e 'to enjoy', -skdd-e 'to leap', -skdbh-e 'to prop', -spfs'-e 'to touch', -sydd-e 'to flow', -svdj-e 'to embrace'''.

1 AvEE.y 230. 5 That is, srad-dM and pra-me, which 2 Whitney 970 1; Wolff p. i. might, however, be explained as locatives. 3 Cp. Whitney 982. On the uses of the 6 In viil. 415 the dative, accented tuj-e, infinitive, cp. Brugmann, KG. 805—811. occurring independently, appears to be a t Cp. Whitney 982, a— d, substantive. 7 Cp. the list in Ludwig p. 56—58. Vn. Verb. Infinitive. 409

0. One infinitive is also formed from a reduplicated root: Hmdth-e (in. 31^3) 'to attack'; but according to Grassmann' it is the locative of a substantive meaning 'attack'. 585. The remaining dative infinitives are formed from verbal nouns derived with nine different suffixes. 1. Some 25 of these are datives of stems in -as^. They are the following: ayas-e (i. 5 7 3) 'to go', arhds-e 'to be worthy of, rcds-e 'to praise', rnjds-e 'to strive after', ksddas-e^ 'to partake of, cdksas-e 'to see', cards-e 'to fare', javds-e'- (iii. 50^) 'to speed', jivds-e 'to live', tujds-e 'to hurl', dohds-e 'to milk', dh&yas-e 'to cherish', dhruvds-e 'to sit firmly', pusyds-e 'to thrive', bhdras-e^ 'to bear', bhiyds-e 'to fear', bhojds-e 'to enjoy', rajds-e 'to shine', vrnjds-e 'to turn aside', vrdhds-e 'to further', sobhds-e 'to shine', sriyds-e 'to be resplendent', sdhyas-e^ 'to conquer', spdras-e 'to help to', spurdhds-e 'to strive after', hards-e 'to seize'.

a. Three roots form an infinitive stem with -S only instead of -as: ji-s-i 'to con- quer', upa-prak-s-i^ (v. 476) 'to unite', stu-s-i 'to praise' '.

2. Some half dozen are formed firom stems in -/': is-dy-e^ (vi. 52''S) 'to refresh', tuj-dy-e (v. 46^) 'to breed', drs-dy-e 'to see', mah-dy-e 'to rejoice', yudh-dy-e 'to fight', san-dy-e 'to win'; cit-dy-e^ (VS.) 'to understand'. 3. Four or five are formed from stems in -ti: is-tdy-e 'to refresh', pi-tdy-e 'to drink', vT-tdy-e 'to enjoy', sa-tdy-e 'to win'; perhaps also u-tdy-e (nfn) 'to help (his men)'. 4. Over 30 dative infinitives are formed from stems in -tu (added to the gunated root, in some instances with connecting vowel), from which ace. and abl. gen. infinitives are also formed:

o. dt-tav-e 'to eat', ds-tav-e 'to attain', ds-tav-e (VS.; TS. iv. 5. i^) 'to shoot', e-tav-e 'to go', 6-tav-e 'to weave' {\fva-), kdr-tav-e 'to make', gdn-tav-e and gd-tav-e 'to go', da-tav-e 'to give', prdti-dha-tav-e 'to place upon', dhd-tav-e 'to suck', pdk-tave (AV.) 'to cook', pdt-tav-e 'to fall', pd-tav-e 'to drink', bhdr- tav-e 'to bear away', mdn-tav-e 'to think', ydn-tav-e 'to present', yds-tav-e 'to

sacrifice', ys-tav-e 'to go', yo-tav-e 'to ward off'', vdk-tav-e 'to speak', prd-van- tav-e 'to win' (y^z/aw-), vdr-tav-e 'to restrain', vds-tav-e 'to shine', vd-tav-e (AV.) 'to weave', v^t-tav-e (AV.) 'to find', v6-lhav-e 'to convey', pdri-iak-tav-e 'to over-

come', sdr-tav-e 'to flow', sU-iav-e 'to bring forth', se-tav-e (AV.) 'to bind', jt?'-

/tep-i? 'to press', sto-tav-e 'to praise', hdn-tav-e 'to slay'. ^. dv-i-tav-e 'to refresh', cdr-i-tav-e 'to i2xt\ jiv-d-tav-e (TS. iv. 2. 65; VS. xvixi. 67) 'to live', sdvi-tav-e 'to bring forth', stdr-t-tav-e (AV.) 'to lay low', srdv-i-tav-e 'to flow', hdv-i-tav-e 'to call'. 5. Over a dozen infinitives are formed from stems in -fai^a (added like -fe to the gunated root), which are doubly accented. a. e'-tavdi 'to go' (also dty-, dnv-, etavdi), 6-tavdi 'to weave', gdn-tavdi 'to go' (also upa-gantavdi), dd-tavdi 'to give', pdri-dha-tavdi (AV.) 'to envelope', pd-tavdi 'to drink', dpa-bhar-tavdi 'to be taken away', mdn-tavdi 'to think', md-tavdi 'to low', sdr-tavdi 'to flow', sa-tavdi (AV.) 'to bring forth'), /^i«- /az/aV 'to slay'".

1 s. V. iisnatha. prdkse. Cp. Oldenberg. Rgveda, note on 2 As a rule the suffix, but in half a dozen V. 47^- instances the root, is accented. 7 See Delbruck p. 181 (I, 5); cp. above, I. 3 According to Grassmann, 2. sing, middle. p. 378, note 8 4 According to Gkassmann, dat. of the Cp. however, Delbruck 207. substantive javas meaning 'swiftness'. 9 Perhaps more probably a substantive, 'for understanding'. 5 According to Grassmann, dat. of the according to BR.: comparative sahyas. 10 The MS. has kdrtavai, cp. WHITNEY 6 Delbruck, Verbum, and Avery accent 982 d and Wolff 7 (p. 9), .

4IO I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

^. jiv-i-tavdi (AV.) 'to live' (Pp. -ta vdi), ydm-i-tavdi 'to guide', srdv-i-tavdi 'to flow'. 6. There seems to be only one certain example of a dative infinitive formed from a stem in -iya: i-tydi 'to go". 7. Some 35 dative infinitives almost limited to the RV.' are formed from stems in -dhya added to verbal bases ending in a (generally accented), and seem to have the termination -dhyai: iyd-dhyai 'to go' (^i-), ird-dhyai^ 'to seek to win', isd-dhyai and isdya-dhyai 'to refresh', irayd-dhyai 'to set in motion', ksdra-dhyai 'to pour out', gdma-dhyai 'to go', grnd-dkyai {Kk. v. 2. i") 'to praise', card-dhyai 'to fare', jard-dhyai 'to sing', tamsayd-dhyai 'to attract', tard-dhyai to overcome', duhd-dhyai 'to milk', dhiyd-dhyai 'to deposit' {Ydha-'),

nasayd-dhyai 'to cause to disappear', piba-dhyai 'to drink', prnd-dkyai 'to fill', bhdra-dhyai 'to bear', mandd-dhyai 'to delight in', mandayd-dhyai 'to rejoice',

madayd-dhyai 'to delight in', ydja-dhyai'> 'to worship', risayd-dhyai 'to injure oneself, vandd-dhyai 'to praise', vartayd-dhyai 'to cause to turn', vdha-dhyai 'to guide', vajayd-dhyai 'to hasten', vavrdhd-dhyai (from the perfect) 'to strengthen',

vrjd-dhyai 'to turn to', sayd-dhyai 'to lie', sucd-dhyai 'to shine', sacd-dhyai 'to partake', sdha-dhyai 'to overcome', stavd-dhyai 'to praise', syandayd-dhyai 'to flow', huvd-dhyai 'to call'. The TS. has also one of these infinitives ending

in -£: gamd-dhye (i. 3. 6^). 8. Five dative infinitives are formed from stentis in -man: trd-man-e

'to protect', da-man-e 'to give', dhdr-man-e (x. 88^) 'to support', bhdr-man-e 'to preserve', vid-mdn-e^ 'to know'. 9. Three dative infinitives are formed fi'om stems in -van: tur-vdn-e

'to overcome' (lA^?^-), da-vdn-e 'to give', dhur-van-e 'to injure' (lA^/^w--).

2. Accusative Infinitive.

586. This infinitive is an accusative in sense as well as in form, being used only as the object of a verb. It is primarily employed as a supine with verbs of motion^ to express purpose. It is formed in two ways. a. More than a dozen radical stems in the RV. and several others in the AV. form an accusative infinitive with the ending -ani^

The root nearly always ends in a consonant and appears in its weak form. It is not always easy to distinguish these infinitives from substantives, but the following include all the more certain forms: sam-idham 'to kindle', vi-cft-am 'to unfasten', pra-tir-am {ytf-) 'to prolong', prati-dkam 'to place upon' (Av.), {vi-, sam-ypfcch-am 'to ask', pra-miy-am 'to neglect' (Ymi-), ydm-am^ 'to guide', yi'idh-am. (AV.) 'to fight', a-rdbh-am 'to reach', a-ri'ih-am 'to mount', a-vis-am 'to enter', mbh-am 'to shine', a-sdd-am 'to sit down's. b. Five accusative infinitives from stems in -iu (of which the dative

1 In X. 106* hhujydi, occurring beside 7 The only roots in vowels taking it are fusfyai, is doubtless a substantive; other dha-, mi-, if-. cases of the word are also met with: see 8 Occurs three times in the RV., always Grassmann, s. v. bhuji. The MS.1. 6^ has also dependent on sakema. sadhyai(ixQ\a. sah-\-ti); rohisyai, which occurs 9 Perhaps also sam-oh-am (strong radical in the TS.l.3.io=is doubtless a substantive; vowel) and ufa-spij-am. Cp. the list in see Delbrijck 201 and Whitney 977. Wolff, p. 87 — 90. There are several quite 2 This infinitive form occurs once only doubtful examples from the AV., as nih-

in the AV. in a. Rigvedic passage. kkid-am (conjecture), pra-idnk-am, sam-riidh-

3 An intensive formation i\ora.\radh-{(>if, 1). am. See Whitney's notes in his Translation \ yajadhyai TS. IV. (>. 2,^; VS. XVII. 57. on AV. IV. 162; V. 18^; VII. 50^. 5 Whitney 974 also quotes ddr-mane. 6 Cp, Wolff 32, 40. Vn. Verb. Infinitive. 411

form is much commoner) ' occur in the RV. and about the same number of others in the AV.: dt-tum (AV.) 'to eat', 6-tum 'to weave', kdr-tum (AV.) 'to make', ni-kartum (Kh. iv. s'S) 'to overcome', khdn-i-tum (VS.xi. 10) 'to dig', da-tum 'to give', drds-tum (AV.) 'to see', prds-tum 'to ask', prd-bhar-tum 'to

present', yAc-i-tum (AV.) 'to ask for', dnu prd-volhum 'to advance , spdrdh-i-tum (AV.) 'to contend with'^

3. Ablative-Genitive Infinitive.

587. This infinitive is formed in two •ways, Hke the accusative in- finitive, either from a radical stem or from a verbal noun in -tu (from which a dative and an ace. infinitive are also formed) 3. The former, therefore, ends in -as, the latter in -ios. As these endings are both ablative and genitive in form, the cases can only be distinguished syntactically. The ablative use is by this criterion shown to preponderate considerably. a. The -as form has the ablative sense almost exclusively, as is

indicated by its being employed with words governing the ablative, viz. the adnominal prepositions rte 'without', purd 'before', and the verbs pa- 'protect' tra- 'rescue', bhi- 'fear'. It occurs with the same kind of attraction as appears

with the dative infinitive: thus trddhvam kartdd ava-pdd-as (11. ag*)* 'save us

firom the pit, from falling down (into it)'. There are six such ablatives in the E.V.: a-tfd-as 'being pierced', ava-pdd-as 'falling down', sam-pfc-as 'coming in contact', abhi-sris-as 'binding', abhi-svds-as 'blowing', ati-skdd-as 'leaping across'. a. There seems also to be at least one example (11.28^) of the genitive

use, viz. ni-mis-as . . Ue 'I am able to wink', the construction of lAw- being the same as with the genitive infinitive in -tos (b a). Another instance is

perhaps a-pfc-as 'to fill' (viii. 409). b. Of the infinitives in -tos occurring in the RV. some six are shown by the construction to be ablatives. They are: ^-tos 'going', gdn-tos 'going', jdni-tos 'being born', ni-dha-tos 'putting down', sdr-i-tos 'being shattered', s6-tos

'pressing', hdn-tos 'being struck'; perhaps also vds-tos (i. 17 4^) 5. a. Three infinitives in -tos have the genitive sense, viz. kdr-tos 'doing' (with madhya) ^, dd-tos 'giving', and yo-ios 'warding off' (both with is- 'have power'). In two passages in which tse governs the infinitive attraction of the object appears as with the dative infinitive: tse raydh suvfryasya dates

(vii. 4^) 'he has power over wealth (and) brave sons, over giving (them)', i. e.

'he has power to give wealth and brave sons'; also ydsya . . tse . . yotos (vi. 18'^) 'whom he can ward off'?.

4, Locative Infinitive.

588. This form of the infinitive is rare, since thirteen or fourteen examples at the most occur. Several of these are, however, indistinguishable in meaning from ordinary locatives of verbal nouns*. a. Five or six of these locatives are formed from radical stems: vy-us-i 'at the dawning', sam-cdks-i 'on beholding', drs-i and sam-drs-i 'on seeing', budh-i 'at the waking'. As these nearly always govern a genitive, they are preferably to be explained as simple locatives of verbal nouns.

1 See above 585, 4. it governs the ablative rather than the 2 See the list in Wolff p. 68 -71- genitive. ^ 3 Above 585, 4 and 586. See Delbruck, Altindische Syntax p. 418, 4 Cp. also vnr. Ii=: pura jatrubhya a-tfdas and cp. Wolff 58. before the cartilages being pierced'. 8 Cp. DELBRtJCK2I2(p.227) and WfflTNEY i See Wolff n. 985. 6 On this word see Wolff 14, who thinks 412 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

b. One locative infinitive is formed from a stem in -far: dhar-idr-i 'to support' and vi-dhar-tar-i 'to bestow'. c. Eight locatives with a genuine infinitive meaning are formed from stems in -san in the RV. They are: gr-nf-sdn-i^ 'to sing', tar-T-sdn-i 'to cross', ne-sdfi-i 'to lead', par-sdn-i 'to pass', abhi-bhu-sdn-i 'to aid', su-sdii-i 'to swell', sak-sdn-i 'to abide' {\/sac-Y, upa-str-ni-sdn-i'^ 'to spread'.

a. The form isdn-i (11. 2 9), seems to be derived from is- 'emit' for is-sdn-V^.

d. Gerund.

589. A considerable number (upwards of 120) of forms ending in -ivi, -tvs, -tvdya, -tya, -ya occur in the RV. and AV. in the sense of gerunds expressing an action which accompanies or more often precedes that of the finite verb. They are doubtless old cases + (the first most probably a locative, the rest

instrumentals) of verbal nouns formed with -tu, -ti, -i, all of which are also employed in the formation of infinitives'. The first three are formed from the simple root, the last two from the compounded root. 590. A. a. Of the gerunds formed from the simple root, those in -ivi are the commonest in the RV., there being fifteen altogether in the RV. They hardly ever occur in any of the other Sarnhitas. They appear to be old locatives^ of stems in -tu, which as a rule is added directly to the root, but in two instances with connecting -/-. They are kr-tvt 'having made', kha-tvi (TS. IV. I. I*) 'having dug', ga-tvt 'having gone', gu-dhvi 'having concealed', jani-tvi 'having produced', jus-tvT 'liking', pT-tvi 'having drunk', pu-tvi 'having cleansed', bhu-tvi 'having become', vr-tvi 'enclosing', vrk-tvi 'having over- thrown' {Ywj-), vis-tvi 'working' i^vis-), vrs-tvt 'showering', skabhi-tvi 'having propped', ha-ivi 'having smitten', hi-ivi 'having abandoned (^M-). b. The gerund in -iva, an old instrumental of a verbal noun in -tu, is formed by nine roots in the RV. and about thirty more in the AV. Those found in the RV. are: pi-tvA 'having drunk', bhit-tvd 'having shattered', bhu- iva 'having become', mi-tvd 'having formed' {y/mS-), yuk-tvi 'having yoked', vr-tvi 'having covered', sru-tvd 'having heard', ha-tvd 'having slain', hi-tva 'having abandoned' {Yha-). The forms occurring in the AV. include two formed from secondary verbal stems and three others formed with the connecting vowel -«-. They are: is-tvA 'having sacrificed' iyyaj-), kalpay-i-tva 'having shaped', kr-tvd 'having made', krt-tvd 'trading', ga-tva 'having gone', grh-i-tvd 'having seized', jag-dhvd 'having devoured' i^jaks-), ci-tvd. 'having

gathered', cay-i-tvd 'noting', tir-tvA 'having crossed' (l//f-), tr-dhvS. 'having shattered' 7 ()/"/r//-), dat-tvd 'having given', drs-tvA 'having seen', pak-tvA 'having cooked', pu-tvA 'having purified', bad-dhvA 'having bound', bhak-tvA 'sharing', mrs-tvA 'having wiped off', ru-dhvA 'having ascended', lab-dhvA 'taking', vit-tvA 'having found', vrs-tvA 'cutting off' {Yvrasc-)^, sup-tvA 'having slept', stab- dhvA 'having established', stu-tvA 'having praised', sna-tvA 'having bathed', sramsay-i-tva 'letting fall', hims-i-tvA 'having injured'. One gerund in -tva also occurs though compounded v/ith a prefix: praty-arpay-i-tvA (AV.) 'having sent

^ Formed from the present base. 6 Bartholomae, loc, cit. 2 From ysac-, BR„ Delbruck, Verbum 7 irs-tva in AV. XIX. 346 is probably to be 213; from \sah-, Whitney 978. read tris fiia 'thrice thee'; see Whitney's 3 See B6HTLINGK, pw. s. V. isdni, and cp, Translation. Whitney 978, Oldenberg, note on 11. 2^. 8 See note on AV. viii. 32 in Whitney's 4 Cp. v.Negelein, ZurSprachgeschichte 91. Translation (RV. has vrk-iva). 5 Cp. Bartholomae, BB. 15, 227, 239; Brugmann, Grundriss 2, logo. Vn. Verb. Gerunds. 413

in opposition'. From the KMas : j'anay-i-tvd (1.4*); from the VS. i-tvd (xxxii. 12), vid-i-tva (xxxi. 18) 'having known', spr-tvd (xxxi. i) 'pervading'. c. The rarest gerund in the RV. is that in -ivaya, being formed from only seven roots. It appears to be a late formation, occurring only in the tentli Mandala, excepting one example in the eighth (viii. 100*) in a hymn which is marked by Arnold'' as belonging to the latest period of the RV. Two of these gerunds {gatvaya and hatvaya) recur in the AV, which, how- ever, has no additional examples of this type. These forms have the appearance

of being datives of stems in -tva, but the use of the dative in this sense is in itself unlikely, as that case is otherwise employed to express the final meaning of the infinitive. Hence Bartholomae^ explains the forms as a metrical substitute for a fem. inst. in -tvdya (from the stem -tva), or for a loc. of -tva with enclitic a added. There seems to be another possible explanation. Three of the seven forms occurring appear instead of the corresponding forms in -tva of the older Mandalas. Owing to this close connexion and the lateness as well as the rarity of these forms, we may here have a tenta- tive double formation, under the influence of compound gerunds formed with -ya which end in -aya, such as a-ddya 'taking'.

The forms occurring are /^r-Zz/ajca (VS. xi. 5 9 ; TS. iv. i. 54) 'having made', ga-tvdya 'having gone', jag-dhvdya 'having devoured', ta-tvdya (VS.xi. i) 'having stretched', dat-tvdya 'having given', drs-tvdya 'having seen', bhak-tvdya 'having attained', yuk-tudya 'having yoked', vr-tvdya (TS. iv. i. 2^; VS. xi. 19) 'having covered', ha-tvdya 'having slain', hi-tvdya 'having abandoned'. 591. B. "When the verb is compounded, the suffix is regularly either -ya or -iya. In at least two-thirds of these forms the vowel is long in the RV.+ a. Nearly 40 roots in the RV. and about 30 more in the AV., when compounded with verbal prefixes, take the suffix -ya^. Four roots take it also when compounded with nouns or adverbs. The forms occurring in the RV. are in the alphabetical order of the radical initial: a-dc-ya 'bending', fra-drp-ya 'setting in motion', prati-is-ya 'having sought for', abhi-i'ip-ya 'having enveloped' i^vap^, vi-kft-ya 'having cut in pieces', abhi-krdm-ya 'approaching*, abhi-khyd-ya 'having descried', abhi-g&r-ya. 'graciously accepting', sam-gfbh-ya 'gathering', prati-gfh-ya. 'accepting', anu-ghi'cs-ya 'proclaiming aloud', abhi-cdks-ya 'regarding', prati-cdks-ya 'observing' and vi-cdks-ya 'seeing clearly', ni-cdy-ya 'fearing", pari-tdp-ya 'stirring up' (heat), vi-tur-yd 'driving forth', a-dd-ya 'taking' and pari-dd-ya 'handing over", ati-div-ya 'playing higher', anu-dfs-ya 'looking along', abhi-pdd-ya 'acquiring', pra-pruth-ya 'puffing out', vi-bhid-ya 'shattering', abhi-bhu-ya 'overcoming', vi-md-ya 'disposing' and sam-md-ya 'measuring out', sam-mil-ya 'closing the eyes', vi-muc-yd 'unyoking', a-mus-yd 'appropriating', anu-mfs-ya 'grasping', a-yU-ya^ 'taking to oneself, a-rdbh-ya 'grasping' and sam-rdbA-yd 'surrounding oneself with', ni-ri'idh-yd 'having restrained', abhi- vft-ya 'having overcome' and a-vft-ya 'causing to roll towards', abhi-vldg-yd 'pursuing', ni-sdd-ya 'having sat down', vi-sdh-ya 'having conquered', ava-sd-ya 'having unyoked', sam-hd-ya 'preparing oneself {hd- 'go'). Compounds formed with adverbs are: punar-dd-ya 'giving back', mitha-spfdh-ya 'vying together'; and with nouns, karna-grh-ya 'seizing by the ear', pdda-gfh-ya 'grasping by the foot', hasta-grh-ya 'grasping by the hand'.

1 The MS. has also the form sam-iray-i- 5 On the gerund in -ya cp. Neisser, BB. tvd: Whitney 990 a. 30,308—311. 2 Vedic Metre p. 283. 6 -yu-ya is also compounded with ni- and 3 BB. IS, p. 239, 12. 4 Cp. Whitney 993 a. 414 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

The additional roots thus compounded in the AV. are: ud-iik-ya 'having carried up', a-krdm-ya 'stepping into' and pari-krdm-ya 'striding about', sam-gir-ya 'swallowing up', sam-grh-ya'^ 'having grasped'^, vi-cchid-ya 'having cut asunder', upa-ddd-ya 'putting in' {da- 'give') 3, abhi-dhA-ya 'encircling', vi-dhii-ya 'shaking off', para-ni-ya 'leading away', a-pdd-ya 'arriving at' and pra- pdd-ya 'going forward', sam-pd-ya 'drinking up', vi-bhaj-ya 'having apportioned', (caus. oiYbhaj-)^ sam-bhii-ya 'combining', ni-mdjj-ya 'having immerged' {)fmajj-), apa-ma-ya 'having measured off''', apa-mfj-ya 'having wiped off', sam-rdbh-ya 'taking hold together', a-ri'ih-ya 'ascending', satn-lup-ya 'having torn up'S, upa-vii-ya 'sitting down', pari-vis-ya 'attending upon', sam-sd-ya 'sharpening', a-sdd-ya 'sitting upon' and ni-sdd-ya 'sitting down', sam-sic-ya 'having poured together', apa-s'idh-ya 'driving away', sam-siv-ya 'having sewed', nih-sfp-ya 'having crept out', ati-sthd-ya 'excelling', prati-sthd-ya 'standing firm', ut-thd-ya 'arising'. From the VS.: ni-Hr-ya (xvi. 13) 'having broken off', sam-sfj-ya (xi. 53) 'having mingled', ati-hd-ya (xxv. 43) 'having missed'. b. Roots which end in a short vowel, either originally or after losing a nasal, add -iya. (nearly always in RV.) or -tya instead of -y&, when com- pounded. The following gerunds are thus formed in the RV. : -i-tya 'having gone' with a/z-, abhi- and a-, -i-tya with abhi- and prati-; a-gd-tya 'having come' iYg'^'n-), a-df-tya 'regarding', a-bhf-tya 'bringing', vi-hd-tya 'having driven away' iyhan-)\ and with adverbial prefixes aram-kf-tya 'having made ready', akhkkalT-kf-tya 'shouting'. From the Khilas: aty-d-hr-tya (iv. 5^9). The AV. has the following gerunds from nine additional roots nir-f-tya 'separating' (?)'', abhi-ji-tya 'having conquered', and sam-ji-tya 'having wholly conquered', a-td-tya^ 'having expanded', apa-mi-tya 'having borrowed' ()/"/««-), ud-yd-tya 'lifting up', pra-d-vr-tya 'having enveloped', upa-sru-tya 'having over- heard', ud-dhf-tya 'having taken up' i^hr-)\ also in composition with a sub- stantive: namas-kf-tya. The VS. has upa-stu-tya (xxi. 46) 'having invoked' and pra-stii-tya (xxi. 46) 'having lauded'.

VIII. INDECLINABLES.

I. Prepositions.

Gaedicke, Der Akkusativ im Veda (Breslau 1880), p. 193—210. — Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar 1077 — 1089, H23— 1130. — DELBRUCK.Altindisclie Syntax p. 440—47 1. — Cp. Benfey, VoUstandige Grammatik 241 and 784. — Brugmann, KG. p. 457—480, — J. S. Speijer, Vedische und Sanskrit-Syntax, Grundriss i. 6, 87. 592. Two classes of prepositions are to be distinguished. The first class embraces the genuine or adverbial prepositions. These are words with a local sense which, being primarily used to modify the meaning of verbs, came to be connected independently with the cases governed by the verbs thus modified. They show no signs of derivation from inflexional forms or (except tirds and purds) forms made with adverbial suffixes. The second class embraces what may be called adnominal prepositions. These are words which are not compounded with verbs, but govern cases only. As regards form, they almost invariably end in case terminations or adverbial suffixes.

1 -grhya also appears compounded with 1 5 v. Negelein 92 gives -vidh-ya (]/vyadh-] ni-, vi- and prati-. and -sus-ya as occurring in the AV., but 2 The gerund d-ghra-ya (AV. xix. 8^), they are not to be found in Whitney's the reading of the text, is not found in the Index verborum.

Mss. and is doubtless wrong ; cp. WfflTNEY's 6 See note on AV. x. 2^ in Whitney's Index Verborum. Translation. i From the present base of ydd-, cp, 7 Conjectural reading in AV. XX. 136-'; Whitney 992 a. see Whitney's Index Verborum 4 afa-ma-ya is a conjectural reading. VIII. Indeclinables. Adverbial Prepositions. 415

A. Adverbial Prepositions.

593. Of the twenty-two included in this class', eight are never used adnominally, viz. dpa^ 'away'; ud 'up', 'out'; ni 'down', 'into'; nis 'out'; /ara

'away'; pra 'forth'; vi 'asunder' (often = 'dis-', 'away'); sdm^ 'together'*. Three others, for the most part employed adnominally, are restricted in their adverbial use to combination with particular verbs, viz. dccha 'towards', tirds 'across', purds 'before'. The remaining eleven, being employed both adverbially and adnominally, are: dti 'beyond'; ddhi 'upon'; dnu 'after'; antdr 'within'; dpi 'on'; abhi 'against'; dva 'down'; a, 'near'; upa 'up to'; pari 'around'; prdti 'towards'. a. When combined with verbs ^ these prepositions are not compounded in the principal sentence^. Generally speaking, they immediately precede the verb; but they are also often separated from it, e. g. s. tva visantu (i. s') 'may they enter thee'. Occasionally the preposition follows the verb, e. g. indro gS. avrnod dpa (viii. 633) 'Indra disclosed the cows'. Two prepositions are not infrequently combined with the verb''; no certain instances of three being thus used can be quoted from the RV., though a few such instances occur in the AV. ^ On the other hand, a preposition sometimes appears quite alone 9; the verb 'to'^be', or some other verb commonly connected with it, can then be supplied without difficulty; e. g. d, ta na indra (i. 10") 'hither, pray, (come) to us, Indra'. Or the preposition appears without the verb in one part of the sentence, but with it in another; e. g. pari mdm, pdri me yt) prajdtn, pdri nah pahi ydd dhdnam (AV. 11. 'protect me, protect my pro- jeny, protect what wealth (is) ours'. As the verb normally stands at the end of the sentence, the preposition would naturally come after the object. Hence as a rule it follows the noun governed by the verb (though it is also often found preceding the noun). Primarily used to define the local direction ex- pressed by the verb which governs a case, prepositions gradually became connected with particular cases. In the RV. it is still often uncertain whether the adverbial or the adnominal sense is intended. Thus das'vimsam upa or 'do gacchatam (i. 4 7 3) may mean either 'do ye two go-to the pious man' ye two go to-the pious man'. When used adnominally the preposition only

I On the relative frequency of these pre- that practically all verbs except denomina- positions in the RV. and AV. see WmTNEY, tives were capable of combining with pre- Sanskrit Grammar 1077 a. positions. On the other hand, some verbs ' On the relation of dpa, api, upa, ni, occur only in combination with prepositions pdri to corresponding Greek prepositions (Delbruck, loc. cit.). 6 21 flf. dccha, tirds, purds seem never to be see J. Schmidt, KZ. 26, in 3 sdm seems in a few passages to have compounded with the verb even depen- attained an independent prepositional use dent clauses ; see Delbruck p. 469 (mid.). pdrd always im- with the instrumental: sdm usddbhih (I. (>\ 7 When there are two, dva sdm pdifiibhih (n. 16'), sdm fkvabhih _(vm^ mediately precedes the verb; a and always; ud, ni, prd usually. On the 9712), sdm jyotisa jyotih (VS.11.9), sdm ayusa nearly other hand, abhi is all but invariably the (TS. I. I. 102); iDUt in all these examples the case perhaps depends on the compound first of the two; ddhi and dnu are nearly sense of the verb, BR, do not recognize always so, upa and prdti usually; cp. Del- the prepositional use, cp, Delbruck p. 459; bruck 234. 8 prepositions on the other hand, see Grassmann s. v. Cp. Delbruck 235. Three in B.; sdm and WHITNEY 1127. sdm is used with combined with a verb are common last is then almost invariably a or dva. the inst. in Kh. I. 47. the elliptical imperative use of pre- 4 The adverbs avis and pradur 'in view' 9 On the PiscHEL, VS. I. igf.; Brug- are used with ^as-, ybkii- and \kr- only, positions cp. 13, IF. 18, Delbruck, Vergleichende 5 Though a certain number of verbs are MANN, 128; never actually met with in the RV. and Syntax 3, 1 22 f. AV. in combination with prepositions (cp. Delbruck p. 433), there can be litte doubt 4i6 I. Allgemeines xotd Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar. defines the local meaning of the case. It cannot be said to 'govern' the case, except perhaps when a 'up to' or purds 'before' are connected with the ablative. 594. The fourteen genuine prepositions which are used adnominally are almost entirely restricted to employment with the accusative, loca- tive, and ablative. Six are used with the accusative only, viz. dccha, dti, dtiu, abhi, prdti and tirds; one (dpi) with the locative only; one iava) with the ablative only (and that very rarely). The remaining six take the accusative and one or both of the other two cases: pdri takes the ablative also; upa the locative also; ddhi, antdr, d, purds take both the locative and the ablative also. The first two^ of these six belong primarily to the sphere of the accusative, the last four to that of the locative. Thus it appears that the genuine prepositions were at the outset practically associated with these two cases only. The ablative came to be used secondarily with pdri in the sense of 'from (around)'; and similarly with locative prepositions, ddki = 'from (upon)', antdr = 'from (within)', s = 'from (on)'. In all these, the sense of the ablative case com- bined with the original meaning of the preposition to form a new double notion. But in purds 'before' and in s, when it meays 'up to', which are both used before the case, the ablative sense has completely disappeared. The following is a detailed account of the genuine prepositions in their alphabetical order.

accha 'towards'.

595. In combination with verbs of motion and of speaking "^ dccka^ expresses direction in the sense of '(all the way) to'*. Used adnominally with the same meaning, it takes the accusative, which either precedes or follows. It is rare except in the RV. ^ Examples of its use are: prd yatana sdkhimr dccAa (1.16^^^) 'proceed hither to your friends'; I'cpa pragat . . dccha pitdram matdram ca (i. i63'3) 'he has come forward hither to his father and mother'; kdm dccha yunjathe rdtham (v. 74^) 'to (go to) whom do ye two yoke your car?'; dccha ca tva^ena ndmasa vddamasi (viii. 21^) 'and to thee we speak with this devotion'; preydm agad dhisdna barhir dccha (TS. 1.1.2' =

MS. I. i^ == K. I. 2) 'this bowl has come forward hither to the litter'.

aii 'beyond'.

596. Adverbially dti is frequently used in the sense of 'beyond', 'over', 'through', with verbs of motion. Whether it is used adnominally with these and cognate verbs is somewhat uncertain. There are, however, a few distinct instances of such use^ of dti in other connexions with the accu- sative; e. g. satdm dasam dti srdjah (vni. 56^) 'a hundred slaves (beyond =) in addition to garlands'; purvtr dti ksdpah (x. 77=) 'through many nights'; kdd asya^dti vratdm cakrma (x. i25) 'what have we done (beyond =) contrarv

1 In regard to iifa the sense of 'motion locative in the v. r. sadanesu accha iaz to' seems to be the primary one; for it is sddanani accha (RV. IX. gn), used twice as often with the ace, and its 5 It is used with over twenty roots in position before the loc. is less primitive. the RV. and with only two in the AV. 2 It is once (vm. 3313) also used with (Whitney 1078). In the TS. it occurs with i- iru- 'hear' in the sense of 'listen to'. 'go' (IV. 1. 81; 11.2. 1 2^) and with vad- 'speak' 3 The final a is short only at the end of (IV. s. i» = VS. XVI. 4). a Pada and in I. 3117 and ix. 106'; other- 6 The adnominal use survives through wise always dccha, the Brahmanas into the . 4 In the SV. it is once used with the VIII. Indeclinables. Adverbial Prepositions. 417

his to ordinance?'; y6 devo mdrtyam dti (AV. xx. 1277) 'the god who (is) beyond mortals'. adhi 'upon'.

597. The general meaning of ddhi in its adverbial use is 'upon', e. g. ddhi gam 'come upon', then 'find out', 'learn'.

In adnominal use the proper sphere of ddhi is the locative, with which it is almost always connected. Here, however, there is sometimes an uncertainty whether the preposition belongs to the verb or the noun; e. g. nakasya prsthd ddhi tisthati (i. 1255) 'he stands upon the ridge of the firma- ment'. When referring to a person ddhi means 'beside', 'with' (from the notion of wielding sway over); e. g. ydn, nasaiya, paravdti ydd va stho ddhi turvdse (i. 47?) 'when, O Nasatyas, ye are at a distance or with Turvasa'. a. From the locative the use of ddhi extended to the ablative, with which it is less frequently connected. It then primarily has the compound sense 'from upon'; e. g. dtah ... d gahi divd va rocandd ddhi (i.69) 'thence come, or from the bright realm of heaven'. Often, however, the simple ablative meaning alone remains; e. g. hfdaydd ddhi (x. 1633) 'from the heart'; pi'irusad ddhi (VS.xxxii. 2) 'from Purusa'. A somewhat extended sense is occasionally

found; e. g. ydm . . . kdiiva idhd rtsd ddhi (i. 36") 'whom Kanva kindled (proceeding from =) in accordance with sacred order'; md panir bhur asmdd ddhi (1. 333) 'be not niggardly with regard to us'. b. From the locative the use of ddhi further spread to the accusative, though in a very hmited way, to express the sphere on or over which an action extends; e. g. prthu prdtikam ddhy Mhe agnih (vii. 36') 'Agni has been kindled over the broad surface'. Otherwise, when taking the accusative in the sense of 'upon' with verbs of motion, ddhi nearly always belongs to the verb.

a. In the RV. only, adhi is used seven times with the (following) instrumental singular or plural of snCl- 'height', to express motion along and over = 'across'; e. g. cakrdm . , . ddhi snund brhatd vdrtavianajti (iv, 282J 'the wheel rolling across the mighty height'. This is probably to be explained as the instrumental of the space (by =) through which motion takes place (e. g. vdto an:driksena yaii 'the wind goes through the air', I. 16114), the preposition that regularly means 'upon' being added to define the action as taking place 'over' as well as 'along'. The VS. has the regular locative of snU' with ddhi -.Jifihivyd ddhi snusu (xvu. 14) 'on the heights of the earth'.

anu 'after'.

598. In its adverbial use dnu primarily means 'after', e. g. dnu i- 'go after', 'follow'; from this fundamental sense are developed various modifications such as 'along', 'through'. In its adnominal use dnu takes the accusative only. When the influence of the verb is still felt, it means 'after', 'along', 'throughout'; e. g. pdra me yanti dhitdyo gSvo nd gdvyUtir dnu (i. 2 5 '*) 'my prayers go abroad like kine

(seeking) after pastures'; t'cpa prd yanti dhitdyah rtdsya pathya dnu (m. 12 7) 'forth go my prayers along the paths of sacred order'; ydt pdnca mdnusam dnu nrtnndm (viii. 9^) 'the might which (exists) throughout the five peoples'; similarly prthivtm dnu (VS. xiii. 6) 'throughout the earth', vdnaspdtimr dnu (VS. xiii. 7) 'in all trees', pradiso 'nu (VS. xxxii. 4) 'throughout the regions'. When used in closer connexion with nouns dnu expresses: a. sequence in time: 'after' or (with plurals) 'throughout'; t.g.parvam

dnu prayatim (i. 12 65) 'after the first presentment'; dnu dyUn 'throughout the days' = 'day after day'. b. conformity: 'after' = 'in accordance with'; e. g. svdm dnu vratdm

(i. 128") 'according to his own ordinance'; amftath dnu (VS.iv. 28) 'after the

Indo-arische Fhilologie. I. 1. 27 .

4i8 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

manner of immortals'; dnu josam (TS. i. i. 13^ = VS. 11. 17) 'for (= to suit) thy enjoyment'. This is the commoner independent use.

aniif 'between'.

599. In its adverbial use, which is not frequent, antdr means 'between', 'within', 'into'; e. g. antas car- 'move between or within'; antdh pas- 'look, into'; antdr ga- 'go between', 'separate'; antar-vidvSn 'knowing (the difference) between', 'distinguishing'. The fundamental and by for the most frequent adnominal use of antdr is connected with the locative in the sense of 'within', 'among'; e. g. antdh samudre 'within the ocean'; apsu^antdr 'within the waters'; antdr devhu 'among the gods'; gdrbhe antdh (VS.xxxii.4) 'within the womb'; matrtamasu^

antdh (TS. i. 8. 12" = VS. x. 7) 'in the best of mothers'. a. From the locative its use extends in a few instances to the ablative in the sense of 'from within'; e. g. antdr dsmanah 'from within the rock'; esii yayau paramad aittdh ddreh (ix. 87*) 'it has come from the highest stone'. b. From the locative its use further extends, in several instances, to the accusative, in the sense of 'between' (expressing both motion and rest), generally in connexion with duals or two classes of objects; e. g. mahan sadhdsthe dhruvd i nisatto 'ntdr dydva (in. 6*) 'the great one who has

sat down in the firm seat between the two worlds'; indfa it somapA e'kah . antdr devan mdrtyams ca (viiLat) 'Indra is the one Soma-drinker (between =) among gods and mortals' '-

dpi 'upon'.

600. In its adverbial use with verbs of motion dpi generally means 'into',

e. g. dpi gam- 'go into', 'enter'; but this sense assumes various modifications

which may be expressed by 'on', 'over', 'up' ; e. g. dpi dha- 'put upon', 'close up'; dpi nah- 'tie up'; dpi-ripta- 'smeared over' = 'blind'.

In its adnominal use, which is rare, dpi is connected with the loca- tive only. It then has the sense of 'on'; e. g. aydm, agne, tve dpi yam yajndm cakrma. vaydm (11. 5^) 'this (is), O Agni, the sacrifice which we have offered on thee'^. abhi 'towards'.

601. In its adverbial use abhi means 'towards' with verbs of motion,

e. g. abhi dru- 'run towards'; it further commonly makes verbs of action

transitive, e.g. krand- 'roar' : abhi krand- 'roar at'; it also sometimes, especially with bhii- 'be', comes to have the sense of superiority: abhi bhu- 'overcome'. The adnominal use of abhi is fairly frequent, though in many individual instances difficult to distinguish from its adverbial use. It is connected with the accusative only, in the sense of 'to'; e.g. ud irsva nari^abhijXvalokdm (x. r8*) 'Arise, woman, to the world of the living'. The sense of 'over' (implying dominion), abstracted from one of its secondary adverbial uses, is

occasionally found; e. g. visva yds carsaiiir abhi (i. 86^) 'who (is) over all men'.

I In the later language antdr is not in- 2 The adverb dpi begins to be employed frequently used with the genitive (as well secondarily in the RV. (though rarely) as a as the locative). An example of this occurs conjunctional particle meaning 'also'; cp. as early as VS. XL. £ (= Ha Upanisad5): Brugmann, kg. 588, 5. tad antdr asya sdrvasyaf tdd u sdrvasya ^asya bdhyatdh 'it is within this all and it is with- out this all'. VIII. Indeclinables. Adverbial Prepositions. 419

dva 'down'.

602. In its adverbial use, dva generally means 'down', e. g. dva gam- 'come down'; but is has also the extended sense of 'away', 'off', e. g. dva srj- 'discharge'.

In its adnominal use, which is very rare and doubtful, it is connected with the ablative in the sense of 'down from'. In the following two examples, especially the second, the case seems to be directly dependent on the preposition: vrstim dva divd invatam (vn. 64^) 'send rain down from heaven'; ye te panthano dva divdh (AV. vii. 55') 'which (are) thy paths down from the sky". a 'near'. 603. The adverbial use of a with verbs expressing either physical or mental motion is very common in the sense of 'near', 'hither', 'towards',

'to', 'upon'; e. g. d aj- 'drive hither'; d krand- 'cry to'; d dhi- 'think upon', 'attend to'. Less commonly, when used with verbs expressing rest or occurrence, it means 'in' or 'at'; e. g. a ksi- 'dwell in', d Jan- 'be born at' a place. When used adnominally, a regularly follows the case, excepting only one sense of the ablative. It is primarily and most commonly connected with the locative, when it has the sense of 'on', 'in', 'at', 'to'; e.g. updstha d 'on the lap'; dadhus tva bhfgavo mdnusesu^d (i. 58^) 'the Bhrgus brought thee to men'. a. From the locative its use extended to the ablative, with which it is used fairly often. It is generally used after this case, when it primarily has the compound sense of 'from on' (cp. ddhi); e. g. parvatdd d 'from (on) the mountain'. It also means, secondarily, 'away from'; e. g. yds cid dhi tva bahiibhya a sutdvam avlvasati (i. 849) 'who entices thee away from many (others) with his Soma draught'. This secondary meaning is sometimes further extended to express preference; e. g. yds te sdkhibhya d vdram (i. 4*) 'who is a boon to thee (in distinction) from friends', i. e. 'who is better to thee than friends'. o. In about a dozen instances in the RV., d is used before the ablative to express 'up to''; e. g. yatt girlbhya d samudrdt (vii. 95^) 'going from the mountains up to the sea'; d nimrucah (i. 161 '°) 'till sunset' 3. This reversal of meaning is probably due to the reversal of the natural order of the words: samudrdd a 'from the sea' thus becoming a samudrdt 'to the sea'. b. The use of d is further extended to the accusative, with which it

is least frequently connected, generally meaning 'to', 'upon', to express the

. ca devdn visa d ca goal with verbs of motion; e. g. antdr lyase . yusmdms mdrtan (iv. 2^ 'thou goest mediating to you, the gods, and to the people, the mortals'; matdra sidatatn barhir d (i. 142?) 'may the two mothers seat themselves upon the htter'; ehy a nah (AY. 11. 5*) 'come hither to us'; devdndm vaksi priydm a sadhdstham (TS. v. i. 11' = VS. xxix. i) 'bring (it) to the dear abode of the gods'. In closer connexion with nouns, d is used to express purpose in the phrases josam d 'for enjoyment', and vdram a 'for pleasure'. upa 'up to'.

and a, expressing 604. In its adverbial use upa is in sense akin to abhi fundamental meaning of close 'near to'; e. g. upa gam- 'go near to'. The

the old sense of 'from' as well as 1 Cp. Delbruck p. 451. with 2 With very few exceptions this is the 'up to'. also 3 It. is occasionally found after the abla- only use of a to be found in B. ; in C. ablative, but tive in this sense; see Grassmann s. v. a. a is found only before the 27* 420 1. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

contiguity is often coupled with the idea of subordination or inferiority; e. g.

upa sad- 'sit down close to', 'approach reverentially'; upa as- 'sit under',' adore'. In its adnominal use upa is most frequently connected with the accu-

sative (which it more often precedes than follows) in the sense of 'to'; e. g.

d yahi . . I'lpa brdhtnani vaghdtah (i. 35) 'come to the prayers of the wor- shipper'.

a. It is also used (about half as frequently in the RV.) before the

locative in the sense of 'beside', 'upon', 'at': yS, I'lpa sfirye (i. 23'?) 'who (are) beside the sun'; upa dydvi '(upon =) up to the sky' (from below);

upa jmdnn upa vetase dva tara (VS. xvii. 6 = MS. II. 10') 'descend upon the earth, upon the reed'. a. Quite exceptionally (only three times) upa occurs in the RV. with the (following) instrumental. In two passages it expresses sequence of time in the phrase upa dyubhis (v. 533; vill. 408) 'day by day'. Once it expresses conformity: ydsmai vimus trim pada vicakrama upa mitrdsya dharmabhih (Val. IV'') 'for whom Visnu strode forth his three steps in accordance with the ordinances of Mitra'. These abnormal senses of upa are parallel to those of anu (598 a, b), and the construction to that of adki (597 a).

iirds 'across'.

605. Adverbially tirds is used in the sense of 'aside', but only with the two verbs dha- 'put' and bhu- 'be', in the Sainhitas'; thus tiro dha- 'put aside',

'conceal'; tiro bhu- 'disappear'; e. g. ajakavdnt tiro dadhe (vii. 50 'j 'I put

away the scorpion'; ma tiro 'bhut (AV. via. i') 'may it not disappear'. Adnominally tirds is used fairly often in the RV., and a few times in the AV., in the sense of 'across', 'over', 'through', 'past', with (nearly always before) the accusative^; Q.g. d ye tanvdnti rasmibhis tirdh samudrdm {i.ig'^)

'who spread with their rays across the ocean'; ndyanti duritd tirdh (i. 4i3) 'they lead him through (so as to escape) dangers'; tiro visvam drcato yahy arvdn (x. 89'*) 'come hither past (leaving behind) all singers'.

a. Figuratively tirds occasionally means 'contrary to'; e. g. devdnSm cit

tiro vdsam (x. lyit) 'even against the will of the gods'; yo no .. tirds cittdni jighamsati (vii. 59^) 'who desires to slay us contrary to expectations' (= 'un-

awares'), yo no .. tirdh satydni . . jighamsat (TS. iv. 3. 13^) 'who may desire to slay us contrary to oaths'. pari 'around'.

606. In its adverbial use pari generally means 'around', e. g. pari i- 'go around^,;^ figuratively it also means 'completely', e. g. pari vid- 'know fully' (op. TTS'^/ oThs). Its adnominal use starts from the accusative, with which case it is, however, not very commonly connected. Here, too, it is not always certain that the preposition does not belong to the verb. It nearly always immedia- tely precedes the accusative in the sense of 'around', 'about'; e. g. pari dydm anydd lyate (i-so"') 'the other (wheel) goes around the sky'. The following is one of the two instances in which /«>/ comes after the accusative 3: havamahe sraddhdm madhydmdinam pdri{:y^.it,\^ 'we invoke Sraddha (about =) at noon'*. a. Its use then extends to the ablative, with which it is much more frequently connected. Here it has primarily the compound sense of 'from around'; e. g. divas pari (i. 47^) 'from the sky (which is) around'; tdmasas pari (i. 50^°) 'from the surrounding darkness'. The original meaning (as in

I In the SB. and later tirds is used with sense of 'away from' = 'without the know- kr- 'do' also. ledge of. It is found at least once in the AV. ^ i Cp. Grassmann, s. v. pari, 784 (bottom) (xu. and occasionally 339) in the SB. in the 4 Like the German preposition 'um'. Vni. Indeclinables. Prepositional Adverbs. 421

ddhi) then disappears, leaving only the ablative sense 'from'; e. g. tvdm

adbhyas tvdm dsmanas J>dri . . jayase (11. i ') 'thou art born from the waters, from the rock'. puras 'before'.

607. Adverbially purds is combined with kr- 'do', and dha- 'put' only, in the sense of 'iu front'; e. g. indrah kniotu prasave rathdm purdh (i. io29) 'may Indra place (our) car in front in the enterprise'; indram vUve deviso

dadhire purdh (i. 131') 'the all-gods placed Indra in the forefront'. Adnominally purds occurs about nine times in the RV., in the sense of 'before' and connected with the accusative, the ablative, and the locative;

e. g. dsadan matdram purdh (x. 189') 'he has sat down before his mother'; nd gardabhdm purd dsvan nayanti (111.53^0 'they do not place the ass before

the horse' {dsvat); ydh sfnjaye purd . . samidhydte (iv. is'*) 'who is kindled before Srnjaya'. prdti 'against'.

608. Used adverbially prdti means 'towards', 'against', e. g. prdti i- 'go towards or against'; prdti ma- 'counterfeit', 'imitate'. From this sense the notion of equality was developed, as in prdti as- 'be a match for'; e. g. indra, ndkis tva prdty asty esam, visva jatany abhy asi tani"- (vi. 255) '0 Indra,

none of them is equal to thee; thou art superior to all these beings'. The verb as- often being omitted, prdti appears to be used like an adjective; e. g. indram nd mah?id prthivt cand prdti (1.55') 'not even the earth (is) equal to Indra in greatness'. The preposition further comes to express adverbially the sense of 'back'; e. g. prdti uh- 'thrust back'; prdti bru- 'reply'. Adnominally /raV/ is used with the accusative only, altogether about a dozen times in the RV. With verbs of motion^ or of calling it means

'towards', 'to' (though here there is sometimes a doubt whether it does not rather belong to the verb); e. g. prdti tydtn cdrum adhvardm gopJthdya prd

huyase (i. 19') 'thou art summoned to the beloved sacrifice to drink the milk'. With verbs of protecting it means 'against' = 'from'; e. g. dgne rdksa. no dmhasah, prdti sma, deva, risatah (vii. 15^3) 'O Agni, protect us from distress, against injurers, god'. Sometimes it means 'over against', 'opposite'; (v. i') 'Agni has awakened in e. g. dbodhy agnih . . prdti . . ayatim usdsam face of the coming Dawn'. It expresses conformity in the phrase /ri/^' t-aVaw? 'according to desire' (cp. dnu b, upa a, a). a. In the phrase frati vasloh 'at dawn', occurring three times in the RV., the pre- position seems to take the ablative, but vastoh may here be meant for an adverbial form 3. B. Adnominal Prepositions.

609. This class of words which is never compounded with verbs, but only governs oblique cases (with the exception of. the dative), cannot be clearly distinguished from adverbs such as urdhvdm (which from B. onwards in sense of 'above' is also used as a preposition with the ablative the and the genitive the 'after'). It is to be noted that several of them govern and instrumental, cases practically never connected with the genuine prepositions in the Sarnhitas. The following is an account of these words arranged in their alphabetical order*.

1 Both aiki and prati primarily express with verbs of motion: here it expresses ap- direction 'towards', but the former tends to proximate position = 'about', 'at', 'on'; it to', 'in equality with'. imply superiority or attack ('at'), the latter also means 'in regard comparison and equality or repulsion ('back'). 3 Cp. BR., and Delbruck p. 463. several of these (avds, are, 2 In B. prati is regularly used after the 4 Though samdyd, sumdd. accusative, though apparently never connected paras, sdcS, saniiur, sanutdr, 422 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

adhds 'below'.

610. With the accusative adhds occurs only once in the RV., in the sense of 'below': tisrdh prthivir adho astu (vii. 104^') 'may he be below the three earths'. It is also found once with the ablative (or genitive) in the same sense: adhdh . . padoh (x. 166^) 'below (my) feet'. The latter use also occurs once in the SV. and once in the AV. : yi te ;pdntha adho divdh (SV.

I. 2. 2. 3') 'thy paths which are below the sky'; adhds te dsmano manyum upasyamasi yd guruh (AV. vi. 42') 'we cast thy fury under a stone that (is) heavy'. aniara 'between'.

6ii.- This word occurs five times in the RV. with a following accu- sative in the sense of 'between', e. g. antard ddmpati 'between husband and wife'. It also occurs a few times in the AV. and VS. before duals; e. g. antari dydvaprihivt 'between heaven and earth'.

abhitas 'around'.

612. This adverb is employed in a few passages of the RV. and AV. in the sense of 'around' with the accusative; e. g. sdro nd purndtn abhito vddantah (vii. 1037) 'talking as round a brimful lake'; ye devA rastrabhfto 'bhito ydnti sUryam (AV. xiii. \^-^ 'the kingdom-bearing gods who go around the sun'.

avds 'down from'.

613. in the RV. avds occurs four times with the ablative (cp. dvd) in the sense of 'down from'; e.g. avdh sAryasya brhatdh purisat {y^.i'j^'^) 'down from the vast misty region of the sun'. It is further employed four or five times with the instrumental; e. g. avo divA patdyantam patamgdm (i. 163^) 'a bird flying down from heaven'. The latter use seems to be analogous to that of ddhi with the instrumental (597 a).

upari 'above'.

614. This adverb occurs three times in the RV. after the accusative in the sense of 'above', 'beyond'; e. g. Hsrdh pi'thivir updri (i. 34*) 'above the three earths'. It is also found once with the instrumental in the combi- nation bhumyopdri^ i. e. bhumyd updri (x. 753) 'beyond the earth'. It is, however, more likely that here we have an irregular euphonic combination for bhamya\h\ updri^ and that the case governed by the preposition is the genitive. This would account for the frequent use of updri with the genitive in the later language, While the instrumental would be unique.

rte 'without'.

615. This word^ is used fairly often in the RV., and occasionally in the later Sarnhitas, before or after the ablative (sometimes separated from it) in the sense of 'without'; e. g. nd rti tvdi kriyate kirn cand (x. ii29) 'without thee nothing is done'; yebhyo nd 'rti pdvate dhAma kim cand (TS. iv. 6. i+ = VS. XVII. 14) 'without whom no dwelling is purified'.

'smdd) disappear in C, there is nevertheless I See Grassmann, s. v. updri; cp. above in the later language a large increase in p. 6s (top). their numbers, greatly supplemented by the " In origin an old locative. On some periphrastic use of nouns and by the pre- other words representing; old case-forms, positional gerunds. Cp. SPEIJEK, Vedische used prepositionally {arvak etc.), cp. Whit- und Sanskrit-Syntax 89 — 93. ney 1 1 28, Vin. Indeclinables. Prepositional Adverbs. 423

paras 'beyond'.

616. In the RV. paras is used with the accusative, instrumental, ablative,

and locative; but in the later Sainhitas it seems to be found with the abla- tive only. a. It takes the accusative six or seven times in the sense of 'beyond', not only locally, but also to express superiority or excess; e. g. dti s&ryam pardh sakuna iva paptima (ix. 107^°) 'we have flown away like birds beyond the sun'; nahl deva nd mdrtyo mahds tdva krdtum pardh (i. 19^) 'for neither god nor mortal (goes) beyond the might of thee, the great'. b. It is employed nearly three times as frequently with the instrumental, for the most part in the sense of 'beyond'; e. g. paro mdtraya (vir. 99') 'beyond measure'. In some passages this sense is somewhat modified. Thus the word twice means 'over' (as opposed to avds); e. g. yds te amh'cr avds 7 ca yah pardh sruci (x. 1 ' j) 'thy juice which (fell) down firom and over the

ladle'. Twice, moreover, it expresses 'without' ; e. g. paro mayabhis (v. 44') 'without wiles'. c. With the locative it occurs only once in the sense of 'beyond': yi trimsdti trdyas paro devAso barhir isadan (viii. 28') 'the gods who, three in excess of thirty, have seated themselves upon the litter'. d. It is found in three passages of the RV., as well as a few times in the AV. and the VS., with the ablative in the senses of 'beyond', far 'from',

and 'away from'; e. g. paro divdh (AV. ix. 4") 'beyond the sky'; asmat . . pardh (viii. 27'^) 'far from him'; tvdt pardh (AV. xii. 3^9) 'apart from thee'; paro mujavati 'tihi (VS.iii.6i) 'go away beyond (Mount) Mujavat'. The last example may probably be an instance of the accusative with/araj = 'beyond (the tribe of) the Mujavants'^

purdsiad 'in front of,

617. This adverb is used two or three times in the Samhitas with the genitive in the sense of 'before', 'in front of; e. g. sdmiddhasya purdstat (in. 8^) 'in front of the kindled one'; vdjah purdstad utd madhyato nah (TS.

IV. 7. 12^ = VS. XVIII. 34) 'strength be before us and in the midst of us'.

pura 'before' (time).

In the RV. pura is used some twenty times,, and in the later Samhitas occasionally, before or after the ablative. It has primarily the sense of 'before' (of time); e. g. pura nu jardsah (viii. 67^°) 'before old age'; puri krurdsya visfpah (TS. I. i. 9^ = VS. i. 28) 'before the departure of the cruel (foe)'. This sense is^ however, often modified to express exclusion, sometimes equivalent to 'without', 'except', 'in preference to', e. g. pura sambadhdd abhy a vavrtsva (n. 16*) 'turn to us before (= so as to save us from) distress'; pura mdi (AV.xii.3*^) 'except me'. bahirdba 'outside'.

618. This adverb^ is once used in the VS. with the ablative in the sense of 'outside', 'from': iddm ahdm taptdm vir bahirdhd yajhan nissrjami (VS. V. 11) 'this heated water I eject from the sacrifice'. saca 'with'.

619. The use of sdca is almost restricted to the RV., where it is common before and after the locative, meaning 'in association with', 'beside', 'at'.

'outside' (used also with 1 The word mujavani- occurs in the plural simple form bahis is in and later. as the name of a tribe in AV. v. 22* etc. abl.) frequent B. 2 It is used fairly often in B. and S. The 424 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

'in'; e. g. indra td dhdryoh sdcS (1.7') 'Indra with his two bays'; m^ddyasva suti sdc3 (1.81*) 'rejoice at the pressed libation'; ndmucav asuri sdcs. (VS.xx.68) 'along with the demoniac Namuci".

saniiiir 'apart from'.

620. This adverb is used two or three times' in the RV. after the accusative in the sense of 'beside', 'apart from'; e. g. pdtim sanitiir {v. 12^) 'without a lord'. sanutdr 'far from'.

621. AUied to the preceding word, sanutdr appears once in the RV. with the ablative in the sense of 'far away from': ksitrSd apasyam sanutds cdrantam (v. 2t) 'far from the field I saw him wandering'.

sahi 'with'.

622. This adverb is common in the RV. as well as the later Saiphitas, before and after the instrumental in the sense of 'with'; e. g. sahd fsib/tih

(i. (VS. viii. 'with the after- 23"+) 'together with the seers' ; jardyunS sahd 28)

birth'; sakd pdtya (TS. I. i. 10") 'with (my) husband'; mdnasS sahd (AV. 1. 1*) 'together with divine mind'. sakdm 'with'.

623. In the same sense as, but less frequently than, sahd, the adverb

sakdm ^ is used before and after the instrumental; e. g. sakdm siryasya

rasmibhih (i. 47 ?) 'together with the rays of the sun'; sakdm gan mdnasa yaj'ndm (VS. xxvn. 31) 'may he come with thought to the sacrifice'; sakdrn jarSyuna pata (AV. i. 11*) 'fly with the afterbirth'.

sumdd 'with'.

624. This word occurs four times as an adverb < in the RV. with the sense of 'together'. It is found once governing the instrumental in the sense of 'with': jayi pdtim vahati vagnuna sumdt (x. 32^) 'the wife weds the husband with a shout of joy'.

smdd 'with'. 625. Besides being used adverbially some half dozen times in the RV. with the sense of 'together', 'at the same time', smdd^ also occurs about as

often with the instrumental, meaning 'with'; e. g. smdt sUrlbhih (i. 51 '5) 'together with the princes'.

2. Adverbs.

Grassmann, Worterbuch 1737— 1740. — WHITNEY, Sanskrit Grammar 1097—II 17. 626. Adverbs are most conveniently grouped as those which are formed with adverbial suffixes and those which are formed with case-endings. The former class may be best described according to the suffixes alphabetically arranged, the latter according to the ordinary sequence of the cases.

» Though not found in the AV., saca 4 sumdd also appears as the first member survives in the TB. (l. 2. 18). of a compound in sumdd-amsu-, sumdd-garia-, 2 Cp. BR. and Grassmann, s. v. surndd-raiha: 3 On other adverbs of similar meaning, 5 smdd also appears as the first member with case-endings {samdya, sardtham) used of six or seven compounds. prepositionally, see Whitney 1127. Vni. Indeclinables. Adverbial Suffixes. 425

A. Adverbial suffixes, 627. -as forms adverbs chiefly of a local or temporal meaning; thus iir-ds 'across', par-ds 'beyond', ^ur-ds 'before', sa-£v-as and sa-dy-ds 'to-day', at once sv-ds 'to-morrow', ; Ay-ds 'yesterday'; also mi^A-ds 'wrongly'. 628. -tas expresses the ablative sense of 'from'. It forms adverbs: a. from pronouns; e. d-fas ^ g. 'hence', amii-^as 'from there', M-ias whence?', ia-tas 'thence', yd-ias 'whence', and, with accent on the suffix, i-ids from hence', mat-tds (AV.) 'from me'. b. from adjectives and substantives; e. g. anyd-ias 'from another place', daksina-tds 'from the right', sarvd-tas 'from all sides'; agra-tds 'in front', hrt-tds 'firom the heart', etc.; the suffix is added to a locative case-form in patsu-tds 'at the feet', beside pat-tds 'from the feet'. c. from prepositions: dnti-tas 'from near', abhi-tas 'around', ^iari-tas (AV.) 'round about".

o. These adverbs in -tas are sometimes used as equivalents of ablatives; e. g ato bhuyas 'more than that'; iatah sasthdt (AV.) 'from that sixth'. On the other hand, the ablative sense is sometimes effaced, the locative meaning: takinga its place;r e. e. ap-ra- ias 'in front'. » & 5

629. -tat (an old ablative of ta- 'this')' has an ablative or a loca- tive meaning. It is attached to adverbial case-forms and adverbial or ad- nominal prepositions; thus Mak-tat 'from above', prak-tat 'from the front'; ardt-tat 'from afar', uttarit-tat 'from the north', parakit-tat 'from a distance'; pasci-tat 'from behind'; adhds-tat 'below', avds-tat 'below', pards-tat 'beyond', purds-tat 'in or from the front', and with inserted s (probably due to the influence of the preceding forms) updri-s-tat '(from) above'. 630. -// in dn-ti 'near', i-ti 'thus'; probably also in d-ti 'beyond', prd-ti 'towards'.

631. -tra or -trd has a local sense, and is mostly attached to pro- nominal stems or stems allied to pronouns in sense; thus d-tra 'here', amu- tra (AV.) 'there', kii-tra 'where?', td-tra 'there', y d-tra 'where'; anyd-tra 'else- where', ubhayd-tra 'in both places', visvd-tra 'everywhere' ; asma-trd 'among us', sa-tra 'in one place', 'together'; daksina-trd 'on the right side', puru-trA 'in many places', bahu-tra 'amongst many'; deva-tri 'among the gods', paka-ira in simplicity', purusa-trd 'among men', mariya-tri 'among mortals', sayu-tri 'on a couch'.

o. These adverbs in -ira are sometimes used as equivalents of locatives; e. g. ydtrddhi 'in which', hasta a daksina-trd 'in the right hand'. This locative sense also some- times expresses the goal; e. patho devatra . g. . yandn (x. 737) 'roads that go to the gods'. 632. -tha forms adverbs of manner, especially from pronominal stems; thus d-tha (more usually with shortened vowel, dtha) 'then', i-t-thd 'thus', imd-tha 'in this manner', ka-tha 'how'; td-tha 'thus', yd-tha 'in which manner'; anyd-tha 'otherwise', visvd-tha 'in every way'; urdhvd-tha 'upwards', purvd-tha 'formerly', pratnd-tha 'as of old'; rtu-thd 'regularly', namd-tha (AV.) 'by name'; evd-tha 'just so'. a. -tham occurs beside -tha in i-t-thdm 'thus', and ka-thdm 'how?'. 633. -da forms adverbs of time almost exclusively from pronominal roots; thus i-da 'now', ka-di' 'when?', ta-dd 'then', ya-dd 'at what time'; sd-da 'always'; sarva-dd (AV.) 'always'. a. -dam occurs beside -da in sd-dam 'always'; and -dd-nTm, an extended form of -da, appears in i-dd-mm 'now', ta-dd-mm 'then', viha-di-ntm 'always'.

I In the RV. idt itself is once used in- I 2 In the RV. nearly always accented kadi dependently in the sense of 'in this way'. | when followed by cana = 'never'. :

426 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

b.

with the sense of '(so many) times', 'in (so many) ways', '-fold'; thus eka-

dha (AV.) 'singly', dvi-dha 'in two ways', trl-dha and tre-dha 'triply', catur-dhs, 'fourfold', so-dha 'in six ways', dvadasa-dha. (AV.) 'twelvefold'; kati-dha 'how many times?', tati-dha (AV.) 'in so many parts', puru-dhd'- 'variously', baJiu- dha 'in many ways', visvd-dka^ 'in every way', sasva-dhd 'again and again'; priya-dhi (TS.) 'kindly', pre-dhd (MS.) 'kindly', bahir-dha (VS.) 'outward',

mitra-dhd (AV.) 'in a friendly manner' ; d-d/ia and (with shortened final) d-dAa

'then', a-d-dhd ('thus' =) 'truly'; sdma-dha^ (Kh. i. n't) 'in the same way'. a. sa-dha-, occurring as the first member of several compounds, in the

sense of ('in one way' ==) 'together', is probably formed with the same suffix,

the final vowel being shortened •; in independent use it appears as sahd 'with's. With the same original suffix appear to be formed other adverbs in -ha; thus i-hd 'here' (Prakrit idka), ku-ha 'where?', visvd-ha^ and visvd-ha^ 'always', sama-ha 'in some way or other'. 635" -VOL, expressing similarity of manner, forms two adverbs: i-va 'like', 'as'*; e-vd, often with lengthened final, e-vd 'thus', -vdm appears beside -va in e-vdm 'thus', which occurs once in the RV. (x. 1513) instead oi evd, and

a few times in the AV. with vid- 'know'; it is also found in the SV. (1.3. 1. 1") nd ki evdm ydtha tvdm 'there is nothing such as thou'. 636. -vat forms adverbs meaning 'like' from substantives and adjectives; e. g. afigiras-vdt 'like Angiras', manu-vdt 'as Manu (did)'; purana-vdt, purva- vdt, p>ratna-vdt 'as of old'. In origin it is the accusative neuter (with adver- bial shift of accent) of the suffix -vant, which is used to form adjectives of a similar meaning (e. g. tvd-vafit- 'like thee'). 637. -sds is used to form adverbs of measure or manner with a distri- butive sense, often from numerals or words implying number; thus sata-sds (AV.) 'by hundreds', sakasra-sds 'by thousands'; sreni-sds 'in rows'; similarly rtu-sds 'season by season', deva-sds 'to each of the gods', parva-ids 'joint by joint', manma-sds 'each as he is minded'. 638. -s forms two or three multiplicative adverbs: dvi-s 'twice', iris 'thrice', and probably catur for *catur-s (cp. Zend cathrus) 'four times'.

The same suffix forms a few other adverbs: adhd-s 'below' (cp. ddha-ra 'in- ferior'), avd-s 'downwards' (from dva 'down'), -dyu-s'^ (from dyu- 'day') in anye-dyu-s (AV.) 'next day' and ubhaya-dyu-s (AV.) 'on both days'; perhaps also in avis 'openly' and bahi-s 'outside"". 639. -hi forms a few adverbs of time from pronominal roots; thus kdr-hi 'when?', tdr-hi 'then?'" The first part of these words seems already to contain an adverbial suffix -r'^ (thus kd-r = Lat. curY^. 640. There are also some miscellaneous adverbs consisting of isolated

' Cp. Bkugmann, kg. 585. 8 In the late parts of the RV. and in the ' The final vowel oipurudha and viSvddha AV. iva has often to be read as va; cp. appears shortened before a double consonant Arnold, Vedic Metre 129, but see Olden- in the RV. berg, ZDMG. 61, 830. 3 Cp. sama-ha. 9 See Meringer, IF. 18, 257; cp. Richter, 4 in ddha, As purudha, visvadha. IF. 9, 238; SCHULZE, KZ. 28, 546. 5 See above 58, 2 a (p. 52). 10 Cp. Brugmann, KG. 584. 6 Just as vUvadha beside vi'madha; but 11 amur-hi, etar-hi, yar-hi also occur in B. cp. Brugmann, kg. 582. 12 Cp. avd-r, which occurs once beside 7 On the other hand msvaha 'always' is the usual avd-s. == visva. aha 'all days' i^alle Tag-e') with" a 13 Cp. Brugmann, KG. 583. single accent, like a compound; see Grass- MANN, s. V. Vin. Indeclinaeles. Adverbial Case-forms. 427

words or small groups, mostly of obscure origin, formed with other suffixes. The latter in alphabetical order are: -a : kv-a (always ku-a) 'where?' and a-dy-d"^ 'to-day'. -or : pun-ar 'again' and sasv-dr 'secretly'. -a antar-a : 'between', pur-s 'before'; perhaps also in nana 'variously', which may be = na-na 'so and so' from tlfe pronominal foot «a-^ -it daksin-it : 'with the right hand'; and -vit in cikit-vit 'with deliberation'. -.jat-u -u 'ever', miih-u 'wrongly', muh-u 'suddenly'; anti-sth-u 'at once' ('standing after', from Ystha-, cp. su-sth-i'c 'in good state').

-UP : muh-ur 'suddenly'.

-k -.jyd-k 'long'. In several other adverbs -k with more or less probability represents the final of a root; thus ninik 'secretly' (probably from *nini-ac- adj. 'secret'), madrik 'towards me' (contracted from madriak, neut. adv. of tnadriac- adj. 'turned to me'); anu-sdk 'in succession' ('following after' -.Ysac-); ayu-sdk 'with the cooperation of men' {sac- 'follow'); usd-dhak 'with eager consumption' ('eagerly burning' : Y^ah-). -idn -.pra-tdr 'early' and sanu-tdr 'away' (621). -iun : sani-tur 'away' (620).

-nam -. nu-ndm 'now' and nana-ndm 'variously' (642 d).

B. Adverbial Case-forms. 641. A large number of case-forms of nominal and pronominal stems, often not otherwise in use, are employed as adverbs. They become such when no longer felt to be case-forms 3. Forms of all the cases appear with adverbial function.

Nominative. Examples of this case are prathamdm 'firstly', dvitiyam 'secondly'; e. g. divas pari prathamdm faj'ne agnir, asmdd dvitiyam pdri jatdvedah (x. 45') 'Agni was first born from heaven, secondly he, Jatavedas, (was born) from us'. Such adverbs are to be explained as originally used in apposition to tlie verbal action: 'as the first thing, Agni was born'. A masculine form has become stereotyped in ki-s as an interrogative adverb; its negative forms nd-kis and ma-kis are often used in the sense of 'never' or simply 'not'. 642. Accusative. Adverbs of this form are to be explained firom various meanings of the accusative. The following are examples of nominal forms representing: a. the cognate accusative: rca kapotam nudata pranodam (x. 1655) 'by song expel the pigeon as expulsion'; citrdm bhanty usdsah (vi. 65^) 'the Dawns shine brightly' (= 'a bright scil. shining'); marmrjmS. te ianvam bhiiri kftvah (ill. 1 8*) 'we adorned thy form many times' (originally 'makings'); similarly dhrsnu 'boldly', puri'i 'much', 'very", bhuyas 'more'; and the compara-

tive in -taram added to verbal prefixes; e. g. vi-tardm vi kramasva (rv. 18") 'stride out more widely'; sam-tardm sdm siiadhi (AV. vii. 16') 'quicken still further'; prd tdm naya pra-tardm (x. 4 5 5) 'lead him forward still further'; ud enam ut-tardm «aya (AV.vi. 5') 'lead him up still higher'; so also ava-tardm, paras-tardm, para-tardm 'further away', and the fem. accusatives sam-tardm and paras-tardm (AV.).

I Cp. Reichelt, BB. 25, 244. 3 On the distinction between case function

» Cp. op. cit. 839; Persson, if. 2, 200 fif., and adverbial use see Brugmann, KG. 571.

'auf diese (oder) jene Weise' ; Bartholomae, IF. JO, 10— 12, originally 'separatim'. 428 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

b. the appositional accusative; thus osa-m 'quickly' (lit. 'burningly'), kama-tn 'according to desire'; nama 'byname', rupd-m 'inform', satya-m 'truly'.

c. the accusative of direction ; e. g. dgra-m (/-) '(go) to the front of, 'before'; dsta-m {gam-) '(go) home'. off', d. the accusative of distance and time ; e. g. durd-m 'a long way

'far'; nakta-m 'by night', sayd-m 'in the evening', cird-m '(for a) long (time)', fi'itya-m 'constantly', parva-m 'formerly'. a. There are also some adverbs derived from obsolete nominal stems, which would seem for the most part to have belonged originally to the sphere of the cognate tusni-m 'in silence', accusative; thus dra-m 'sufficiently' (from *ara- 'fitting'), ila-m (AV.) id. ; nanana-m (from nana) 'variously', nuna-m (from nu) 'now'; sdkd-m 'together' (from *sakd- 'accompaniment': sac- 'follow' 2.

p. Finally a number of accusative adverbs are formed from pronominal stems; 'ever' [e.g. Jm thus aa'a'j- 'there', 'thither" ; zV 'just', 'even'; tddm 'here', 'now'; im yd

'whenever'); sumd-d and smd-d 'together'. 643, Instrumental. With the ending of this case (sometimes plural) are formed adverbs from substantives, adjectives, and pronouns, the latter two groups being at first probably used with the ellipse of a substantive. Various senses of the instrumental case are expressed by these adverbs. Usually they imply manner or accompanying circumstances; e. g. tdras-a 'with speed'; sdhas-a 'forcibly'; tdvin-bhis 'with might'; ndvyas-a 'anew'; end 'in this (way)', 'thus'. Not infrequently they express extension of space or time; e. g. dgrena 'in front'; aktu-bhis 'by night'; div-a 'by day' (but div-S. 'through the sky'); dosS. 'in the evening'. a. The substantive instrumentals are chiefly formed from feminine stems in -a not otherwise in use, but corresponding mostly to masculines or neuters in -a; thus a-datrayO. 'without (receiving) a gift' (ddtra- 'gift'); asays 'before the face of, 'openly' {*dsS- = as- 'face'); rtayS 'in the right way' {*rtd- = rtd-); naktaya 'by night' i^ndkta- = ndkia-); sumnayd 'piously' {*sutnnd- = sumnd-); svapnayd (AV.) 'in a dream' <*svdpna- = svdpna-). a. Several of these feminines are instrumentals from stems in -ta and identical in form with the stem; thus tirascd-ta 'through'; devd-ia 'among the gods'; bahu-td '^N\K!a. the arms'; sasvdr-la 'in secret'; dvi-ta 'in two ways' may have a similar origin (dvi-td-'t-vio')^. We have perhaps also old instrumentals of feminine stems in -a in tdditna 'then' = 'at that time'; and in vrtha 'according to choice', 'at will' {*vf-thd- 'choice', from vr- 'choose').

^. In a. few examples the instrumental seems more probably to be that of a radical

stem virith adverbial shift of accent rather than from a stem in -d ; thus guh-d In secret', rather inst. of guh- 'hiding'*, than of a stem *guh-a-^; similarly mff-d 'in vain' [*mfs-

'neglect' : inst. m;-s-d); sdc-d 'together' {^sdc- 'accompaniment' : inst. sac-d). In a-siha (RV.), perhaps meaning 'at once', we seem to have an instrumental adverb from a radical d- stem a-stha- ('no standing') = 'without delay". b. The adjective instrumentals end either in -a (plural -ais) or -ya. The former are derived from a- stems and a few consonant stems in -c; the

latter are anomalous feminines from u- stems and one or two t- stems: a. apakd 'afar' (dpaka- 'far'); irmd 'quickly' (trmd-); uccd and uccdis 'on high' {uccd-); daksind 'to the right' {ddksina-); paracdis 'for away' (^parsed-); pascd 'behind' i^pascd-); madhyd 'in the midst' {mddhya-); sdnais 'slowly'

1 Cp. Gray, IF. 11, 307 ff.; Foy, IF. 12, 4 The normal inst. of which would be 172. guh-d. 2 For some other adverbs of obscure 5 Cp. RV. 1. 67^ guhd guham gas and in origin, which were originally accusatives, the next stanza guhd bhdvantam. see Whitney imf. 3 Cp. Benfey, SV. Glossary, and Grass- MANN, Worterbuch, s. v. Vni. Indeclinables. Particles. 429

{*Mna-) and sdnakais id.; sdna^ 'from of old' (sdna-); samani 'in the same way' (sdmana-); tirak-a 'across'; 7iic-i 'downwards'; prac-a 'forwards'. ^. anu-stku-y-a'^ 'at once' {anu-sthii 'following', adv. from stha- 'stand'); asu-y-S. 'swiftly' (am-); dhrsnu-y-S. 'boldly' {dhrsnii-); mithu-y-A 'falsely' {mithu, adv. from mith- 'be hostile'); raghu-y-s. 'rapidly' (raghu-)\ sadhu-y-a 'straight'

{sSdkti-) ; also urviy-A (for urvy-a) 'far', from urvt f. of uri'i- 'wide'; and

vUvy-a 'everywhere', from *vis'vt-, irregular f. of visva- 'all', beside the regular

inst. f. visvaya, which itself seems once (viii. 68^) to be used adverbially. c. Pronominal instrumentals are formed from several stems in -a and one in -u. Some appear in the masculine (or neuter) form of -a or the feminine of -ya; so and 'thus' {and- 'that'); ams. 'at home' (dma- 'this'); a-yd 'thus' {a- 'this'); end 'thus' (ena- 'this'); Jia-yd 'how?' {kd- 'who?'); ubhayd 'in both ways' {ubhdya- 'both'). From amu- 'that' is formed the adverb amu-y-d 'in that way', with the anomalous interposition of y ^. To the influence of the latter word is probably due the form kuhayd 'where?' (RV'.) beside the usual kuha 'where ?'- 644. a. Dative. The adverbial use of this case is rare. Examples are: apardya 'for the future' (from dpara- 'later'); vdraya 'according to wish' (vara- 'choice'). b. Ablative. This case is on the whole used adverbially fairly often.

It is, however, seldom formed from substantives, as ardt 'from a distance', asdt 'from near'; or from pronouns, as at 'then', tdt 'thus', ydt 'as far as'.

It is most commonly formed from adjectives; thus durdt 'from afar'; nicdt 'from below'; pascdt 'from behind'; saksdt 'visibly'; and with shifted accent: adhardt 'below' (ddhara-); apakdt 'from afar' (dpaka-); amdt 'from near' (dma-); uitardt 'from the north' (uttara-); sandt^ and sanakdt 'from of old' (sdna-). c. Genitive. The adverbial use of this case is very rare. Examples are aktos 'by night' and vdstos 'in the morning'. d. Locative. Several forms of this case have an adverbial meaning; thus dgre 'in front'; abhi-svare '\)€cC\a.i^ (lit. 'within call'); astam-tke'aX home'; ake 'near'; are^ 'afar'; rte 'without'; dur^ 'afar'; and in the plural aparisu 'in fiiture'.

3. Particles. Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar 122, 132—133. — Delbruck, Altindische Syntax p. 240—267. — Cp. Brugmann, kg. 817—855. 645. Other adverbial words, the derivation of which is obscure and the meaning of which is abstract or general, may be classed as particles. They form three groups, the emphatic, the conjunctional, and the negative, the particles, as throwing stress first being the most numerous. The emphatic on a preceding word, are either enclitic or incapable of beginning a sentence; nature; but the nega- the conjunctional particles, except utd, are of a similar generally occupy an emphatic tives, having a strongly antithetical meaning, position in the sentence. words 646. The emphatic particles may usually be translated by such stress on the word they follow. as 'just', 'indeed', or rendered merely by

to the influence of the numerous 1 In the last three adverbs the accent perhaps due in -ya from stems in -a, amu- being does not shift to the final syllable. adverbs pronominal a- stem. 2 These anomalous forms are due per- an isolated sanat occurs also AA. v. 2. 2 . haps to the influence of the pronominal 4 are, arat, cp- NeisseR, BB. 19, amu-y-a. 5 On ft^- of is 140. 3 The anomalous interposition y ^ ;

43° I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

They are afiga; dha^, gha, ha (the last two less emphatic than dha); sma; svid (generally following an interrogative) = 'pray'; vdi, nearly always following the first word of a sentence. Three particles which emphasize the preceding word more strongly in the sense of 'certainly', 'in truth', are kila (+ AV.), khdlu (RV., not in AV.), bhdla (RV. AV'.). In the RV. ti'i usually empha- sises exhortations = 'pray', but sometimes also statements = 'surely'; once (vi. 295) it seems to mean 'but', which is its sense in its single occurrence in the AV. The particle nd, when it means 'as it were', 'like', was in origin probably an emphatic particle = 'truly' 647. There are several conjunctional particles, some of which are com- pounded. ^3 'now', 'again', is commonly used deictically and anaphorically after pronouns and verbs. Both u-td and ca mean 'and', ca when compounded with the negative particle as cand originally meant 'not even', but the negative sense generally disappears and cand turns the interrogative pronoun into an indefinite, as kds cand 'some one't. ca when compounded with id, that is ced, means 'if. nu 'now' generally follows the first word of the sentence. The disjunctive particle is va 'or', hi (generally following the first word of a

sentence) expresses the reason for an assertion = 'for', 'because'; it is also used with imperatives, when it means 'then'. It occurs once in the RV. (vi. 48') compounded with the negative nd, but without change of meaning: hind 'for'.

648. The negative particle which denies assertions is nd 'not'. Its

compound ned (= nd id) expresses an emphatic 'not'; it is, however, usually employed in the final sense of 'in order that not', 'lest'. Its compound nd-kis

often means 'never', and nd-kim, in the only two stanzas in which it occurs

(viii.78^- 5), has the same sense. The negative also occurs twice (x. 54^; 843) compounded with nu as nanu, which expresses a strong negative = 'not at air, 'never'. When it is compounded with hi as nahi, the latter word retains the meaning of both particles: 'for not'.

ma 'not' is the prohibitive particle regularly used with the injunctive 5. It is compounded with the petrified nom. -kis and ace. -kitn to md-kis and mi-kim. The former frequently and the latter in its only two occurrences mean 'never'.

a. Adverbial words occurring in compounds only.

649. A limited number of words of an adverbial character have either entirely lost or, in a few instances, nearly lost their independent character, being found in combination with half a dozen particular verbs or as the first member of nominal compounds. In two or three examples the original independence of such words can still be traced. 650. A few mostly onomatopoetic reduplicative words appear only compounded with the roots kr- 'do' and bhu- 'be', the prefixed form generally ending in -a, once in -l: thus akhkhali-krtya^ (vir. 1033) 'croaking', alala-

' Another frequent particle of the same junctive, nor the imperative, nor the opta- meaning, id, has already been mentioned tive except in the form bhujema; see among the pronominal accusative adverbs. DELBRtJCK p. 361 (top). In the Khilas it 2 Greek val, Lat. nae, cp. Lith. net 'as it occurs two or three times with the 2. impv. were' (cp. Brugmann, KG. 839); this sense pasya (iir. 1517), tisfha (iv. 525), and once at of na is generally explained as derived from least with the subj. : vadali{i..vadeti.

the negative ='not (precisely)' : see Whitney '^ This is the only instance of the prefix Il22h; cp. BB. 22, 194 ff. ending in -i instead of -a in the RV. In 3 On the Sandhi of u, see above 71, lb. the AV. -r appears before forms of kr- in 4 Cp. Delbruck, op. cit. p. 544. the nominal compounds vatt-kfta- and vaff- 5 It is not used with the ordinary sub- kard; designations of a disease. VIII. Indeclinables. Particles. 431

bhdvant- (iv. 18°) 'sounding merrily'; jahjana-bhdvant- (vm. 43^) 'sparkling';

kikira krnu (vi. 53?) 'tear to tatters'; masmasa-karam (AV. v. 23*) 'I have crushed',

masmasA kuru (VS. xi. 80) and mrsmrsi kuru (MS. 11. 7') 'crush', malmala-

bhdvant- (MS. 11. 13^9; TS.1.4. 34^) 'glittering', bharbhara-bhavat (MS. II. 2': B.) 'became confounded'; bibiba-bhavant- (MS. 1.6': B.) 'crackling'.

651. The adverb avis 'openly', 'in view', is found in combination with

the verbs as-, bhu- and kr- only. With the latter it means 'make visible', e. g. avis karta (i. 86') 'make manifest'. With the two former, which are

sometimes omitted, it means 'become visible', 'appear'; e. g. avis ssnii (vm. 8^^)

'being manifest'; avtr agnir abkavat (i. 143^) 'Agni became manifest'.

pra-diir, lit. 'out of doors', begins to appear in the AV. in combination with Y^'^^'j meaning 'become manifest', 'appear'. 652. The word srdd, which originally probably meant 'heart'', is often

found in combination with dha- 'place', in the sense of 'put faith in', 'credit',

nearly always, however, separated from the verb by other words, e. g. srdd

asmai dhatta (11. i25) 'believe in him'; srdd asmai, naro, vdcase dadhatana (VS. viii. 5) 'give credence, O men, to this utterance'. It also appears in the substantive srad-dhd- 'faith'. The word is once also found with Y^r- in the

sense of 'entrust' : srdd visva virya krdhi (viii. 75^) 'entrust all boons (to us)'. 653. The interjection h'ln is compounded with kr- 'make' in the sense

of 'utter the sound hin\ 'murmur'; thus gdnr . . hiilh akrnot (i. 164^*) 'the cow lowed'; hih-krnvati (i. 164^') 'lowing'; hin-krtaya svdha (VS. xxii. 7)

'hail to the sound hifi ; tdsma usa hih-krnoti (AV. ix. 6'*5) 'for him the dawn utters hifi. 654. A few substantives, after assuming an adverbial character, are found compounded with participial forms, dsta-m 'home', which still appears as a noun in the RV., though commonly used adverbially in the accusative with verbs of motion, is combined like a verbal prefix with participles of i- 'go' in the AV.: astam-ydnt- 'setting', astam-esydnt- 'about to set', dstam-ita- (AV.xvii. 1^3)2 'set'. The noun ndmas- 'obeisance' is similarly compounded in the gerund with kr -'make' in the AV.: namas-kftya^. In the RV. itself names of parts of the body, with no tendency otherwise to adverbial use, are thus compounded with the gerund oi grah- 'seize': karna-gfhya 'seizing by the ear', pada-grhya 'seizing by the foot', hasta-gfhya 'grasping the hand'*. The transition to this use was probably supplied by nouns compounded with past participles, as sdhas-krta- 'produced by force'. 655. There are besides a few monosyllabic adverbial particles which occur as prefixes compounded with nominal forms only. By far the most frequent of these is the negative prefix, which appears in the form of an- before vowels and a- before consonants. It is compounded with in- numerable substantives and adjectives, but rarely with adverbs, as a-kutra 'to the wrong place', a-pundr ('not again' =) 'once for all'; dn-eva (AV.) 'not so'. 656. sd-, as a prefix expressive of accompaniment, is employed as a reduced form of the verbal prefix sam^, and interchanges with saha-; e. g. sd-cetas- 'accompanied by wisdom', 'wise', beside sahd-cchandas- 'accompanied with songs'. namas 1 See UhlenbeCK, Kurzgefasstes Etymo- language, but! the independent form logisches Worterbuch der altindisclien kj'tva is occasionally found ; cp. Brhaddevata, Sprache, Amsterdam 1888—89, s. v. iraddha. I. I, critical note in my edition. 2 For some other later nominal compounds 4 Cp. WraxNEY 990 b and above 591 a of this kind see Whitney 1092 c. (p. 413, bottom) and S9l b. in the later 5 Cp. above 250, i This is the regular form 432 I. Allgemeines VND Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar. VIII. Indeclinables.

657. dus- (appearing also, according to the euphonic combination, as dur-,

dus-, dus-)^, means 'ill', 'hard to'; e. g. dur-gd- '(place) difficult of access', dur-yuj- 'ill-yoked', dur-mati- 'ill-will'; dui-cyavand- 'hard to shake'; dus-kftd- 'ill-doue'; dus-sdha- 'irresistible'. 658. su- 'weir, 'easy to' is compounded with a much larger number of

words than dus-"; e. g. su-kdra- 'easy to accomplish'; su-kft- 'acting well', su-gd- 'easy of access', su-mati- 'good-will', su-yuj- 'well-yoked'. It is, however,

still found in a state of transition in the RV., where it occurs independently

more than 200 times 3, being then connected in sense with the verb only*;

e. g. asmdn su jigyusah krtam (i. 17 7) 'make us well victorious' 5.

4. Interjections.

659. A certain number of words having the nature of interjections occur in the Sarnhitas. They are of two kinds, being either exclamations or imitative sounds. a. The exclamations are bdt (RV.) 'truly', baia (RV.) 'alas!', hdnta 'come' used exhortatively with the subjunctive, and hayi 'come', before voca- tives, hiriik 'away!', huruk (RV.) 'away!', hat (AV.) 'ho!'. Perhaps uve (x. 867)^. b. Interjections of the onomatopoetic type are: kikira (RV.) used with kr- 'make the sound kikird' = 'tear to tatters'; kikkits. (TS.) used in invoca- tions (TS. HI. 4.2'); ciscA (RV.) 'whiz!' (of an arrow) used with kr- 'make a whizzing sound'; phdt (AV. VS.) 'crash!', phdl (AV. xx. 135^) 'splash!'; bs. (TS. = AV.) 'dash!'; bhuk (AV. xx. 135') 'bang!', sdl (AV. xx. 135=^) 'clap!

1 See Grassmann, Worterbuch, columns sv dpayati 'may he go well away' as a 614—619. compound: su-dpayati; but this is doubt- 2 Op. cit, columns 1526 1560. less an error for su dpa ayaii. — \ See Whit- \ 3 In the .\V. it is still used independently, ney's note on this passage in his Translation but only 14 times. of the AV. 4 See Grassmann, op. cit., s. v. su. 6 See Neisser, BB. 30, 303; cp. above 5 The Pada text of AV. XIX. 4910 treats p. 337, note 7. ADDENDA AND CORRIGENDA.

It should be noted, in addition to what is said at the end of § i (p. 2), that when the abbreviations 'VS.' etc. indicate the occurrence of a form in a later Veda, they only mean that the form in question is not found in the E.V., while it may occur in parallel passages of one or more of the other Sarnhitas also. The symbols ' + VS.' etc. are intended to draw attention to the fact that the form indicated occurs in a later Sarahita as well as in the RV. — In the enumeration of words, stems, inflected forms, and suffixes, initial alphabetical order is the principle followed. But it is occasionally varied for clearness of grouping. Thus the arrangement, in the case of compounds, is sometimes according to the final member (e. g. 308, 375 A, 591 a) or, in the case of roots, according to the medial or final vowel (e. g. 421, 483). The principle is also departed from when examples only of very frequent forms are given. Thus the nom. forms of present participles are arranged in the order of the conjugational classes (314); the nom. and other cases of the a-declension are given according to frequency of occurrence (372). Adverbs are classed according to the alphabetical order of the suffixes (626 — 640) or the sequence of the cases (641 — 644). — The principle of giving the meanings of words has been followed throughout the work. But this has been modified in two ways in the enumeration of inflected forms. In declension the meaning is given only with the first occurrence of a case-form of any word found in the same paragraph (e.g. 372). It seemed impossible to follow the same method in lists of inflected verbal forms. For, owing to the modifications of sense due to context and compounding with prepositions, the meaning could not be satisfactorily stated by giving it with the first occurrence of forms from the same root. The meaning has therefore been stated with the root only or when forms from different roots might be confused (e. g. 444, 445). But as the index gives the meaning of every root and enumerates all paragraphs containing forms from that root, the general sense of all such forms may easily be ascertained. — As regards references, figures without an added 'p.' always indicate paragraphs when books are divided into paragraphs; e. g. 'Delbruck, Verbum 184 (p. 166 — 169)'; otherwise they refer to the page. When pages have to be referred to they are for the convenience of the reader often divided into quarters; thus Lanman 372^ means the third quarter of p. 372 in Lanman's Noun-Inflection. P. 23, line 19 for orignal read original. — P. 51, note ^ for *guzdhd read *guzdha-. — P. 56, 1. 27, for KSf. read Av. and/^r 'weak read weak. — P. 58, 1. 4 from below, for cak\an\anta read cak\an\antu. — P. 60, 1. 2, for appears read

1. {a-yas a-yas\ appears as. — P. 61, 1. Tifor become ri?a^ becomes; 34, for read 2 cp. Oldenberg, — 1. 36, >^ fall') read 'fall'. — P. 66, § 72, b: ZDMG. 63, 298. certain this in read P. 67, I. 30, for There seems to be no instance of theRV. This is of regular and, as far as d is concerned, of very frequent occurrence in the RV., e. g. tan (for tad) mitrdsya (i. iis^); 1. 31, after cakran nd

Indo-arische Philologie I. i.. 28 434 1- Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

1. s. — (x. 95"- '3) for however read too. — P. 70, 1 7, insert often also after But

P. 83, 1. 27, for Reduplicated stems read Reduplicated present stems; 1. 28, after 'invoking' add but perfect Hsriyand- 'having resorted to'. — P- 99; 1-2 from below, insert (AV.) after ma-mdd-a-t; note ^, for ri-hati read rih-ate. —

P. 100, last line: on ddsa-mana- cp. p. 373 note ". — P. 109, 1. 3 from below, for vevij-d read vevij-d- and for cara-car-a read cara-car-d-. — P. 119,

1. 21, iox jigis-i'i TfsA jigis-i't-. — P. 141, 1. 2 from below, for medh-i-rd- read

medh-i-rd-. — P. 146, 1. d, for 204 read 244. — P. 156, 1. 20, for vdrunas

read vdrunas and 1. 22, {ox pitdra- rend fitdra. — P. 157, 1. 26, for occurs read occur. — P. 169, 1. 21, dSxtx purusa-vyaghrd- add (VS.). — P. 192, 1. 9 from below, for mahxntas read makdntas. — P. 197, note '', for 55 read 66 c /S. — P. 199, note ^ add Cp. Oldenberg, ZDMG. 63, 300—302. — P. 202, I. sing.: Oldenberg, ZDMG. 63, 289, would place the form rdna

(ix. 7') here. — P. 209, 1. 25, for 'width read width. — P. 215, note 5, for Bahuvrlhi read a Bahuvrihi. — P. 238, note ', add Cp. Oldenberg, ZDMG. 63, 300 — 302. — P. 255, 1. II, for Ssas read -asas\ % 371, 1. S, for ending read endings. — P. 257, lines 9 and 12: on krand, dand, and sakkyd (as ace. pi.) cp. Oldenberg, ZDMG. 63, 287 — 290. — P. 264, 1. 3 from below: according to Oldenberg, ZDMG. 63, 293, also iatruhdtyai. — P. 279, 1. 10, for «-declension read r-declension. — P. 304, 1. 9 from below, for atman- read

atmdn-. — P- 315 delete i after 414. — P. 317, 1. 20, for -yat read -ydt. — P. 320, sing. 3.: ydmati should perhaps be classed as a root aor. subj., though this form seems to have a distinctly indicative sense in the two passages in which it occurs; du. 2. for sadathas read sddai/ias, which form should per-

haps rather be classed as a root aor. subj.; pi. i., delete ddyamasi {AN.). —

P. 321, 1. 2, delete gdmanti: see p. 369 top; 1. 12: the shift of accent is in- sufficient (cp. hims-te) for the treatment of hUnsanti as a transfer form (cp.

p. 100, 1. 13): it should preferably be placed in 464 after vrnjanti. — P. 321,

Indicative Middle: Sing, i,, delete daye (AV. TS.). — Sing. 3., delete bhofate, yojate, stdrate (p. 369, top) ; read vdhate before vasate, and sayate before siksate. —

Du. 3., add sobhete. — PI. i , delete staramahe (p. 369, top).-—^ P. 323, S 424, Sing. I., delete Mtf/(3:;«, jiT/'a;// (503). — Sing. 2., dt\t\.z yamas, vdras (^02). — Sing. 3. delete yamat, radhat, sakat (502), tamat, ddsat, sramat, sadat (510),

minat (477), sndthat (452); for vdrat read varat ('cover'): — PL 3., delete

yama7i{i^o2), vaman, sdsan {/^e^2), 3.dd s'rdsan. — Middle. PI. 3., delete yavanta

(502). — P. 324, 1. 4, ior yq/a rend yoj'a; last line, delete dayasva (AV.). —

P. 325, S 427 a, delete sdsant- (455) and sdnant- (512). — P. 326, 1. i, for cdyamana read cdyamana-; % 428, Sing. 3., delete asadat ($08). — P. 328, 1. 3,

: s'rna- read Four; 1. 4 add gr- 'sing' : grnd- (AV.) beside grnd-, and sr- 'crush' for Two (AV.) beside srnd-. — § 430, Sing. 2., read ksipasi (AV.) before

tirasi; Middle. Sing, i., delete mrje and suse{i,^\). — P. 329, § 431, Sing. 3., delete prnit; % 432, delete guhas, rudhat, trpdn (510) and add bhujdt (b/iuf

'bend'). — P. 330, 1. 11, add meddtam; I. 14, after TS. iv. 6. 5' add = AV. VS. MS. — S 435, delete ksiydnt-, mrjdnt-{j^e,e^), citdnt- (506), guhdnt-, sucdnt- (512), susdnt-, svasdnt- (455); insert 'bending' after bhujdnt-; Middle, delete guhdmana-, dkrsdmSna-, nrtdmana-, sucd7nana- (512). — § 436, Sing. 2., add adyas. — P. 332, 1. i, add dayamasi (AV.); 1. 7, add daye (AV. TS.); § 441, add raya. — P. 333, 1. 12, delete cdyamana-. — P. 337, lines 6 and 8, delete bhuthds and bhutds (502), and (AV.) after psatds; Middle. Sing, i., for mrje

(AV.) read mrje; add suse {]^s'vas- 'blow'). — P. 338, 1. 2., delete parcas,

idkas (502); 1. 5, add snathat; 1. 10, add vdman, sdsan; 1. 12, delete vdrjate (502). — S 4S4) Act. Sing., add drahi (AV.) and dratu (AV.) and after psahi delete (AV.); note *, add Perhaps root aor. subj.; cp. 502 (p. 369). — );

Addenda and Corrigenda. 435

P- 339> 1- 6, delete sotana (su- 'press'): cp. 505. — § 455, Act, delete dhrsdnt- (512), a.^^ mrjdnt-, susdnt-, svasdnt-; Middle., delete dhrsand- {AN.), add tvaksand-. — P. 340, 1. 3, delete svand- {su- 'press', SV.): cp. 506. — 1 — 1. i+. P. 342, 1 1, delete piprati. — P. 343, 1. 1 2, for TS. iv. 6. 5 read TS. iv. 6. P- 34S> S 467, delete krntati- and sumbhand-. — P. 350, 1. 11, ior prnat {hS read prnat; 1. 16, add minat (for minat). — P. 359, 1. 23, delete VS. xxxiu. 87

1. 24, after sr- 'crush' add AV.; 1. 26, after 'bring forth' addAY.; note ", for sasahe read sasahi. — P. 361, 1. 10, add cakdn before sasvdr. — P. 362, 1. 6: cakantu though sing, in form is pi. in meaning and stands by haplology for cakanantu: cp. p. 58, 1. 4 from below. — P. 364, 1. 12, read -ran or -iran for -iran; 1. 9 from below, delete dvavacit (549). — P. 366, 1. 5 from below, delete dkran {Ykrand-): see 522 (j-aor.). — P. 367, 1. 2, delete dkran iykrand-): see 522 (j-aor.); 1. 22, delete aprJda {Yprc-): see 522 (f-aor.). — P. 368,

§ 502, 1. 3, add sdkas; 1. 6, for yamat read ydmat; 1. 7, add sdkat; 1. 9, after pathds add 'drink'. — P. 369, 1. 5 from below: on apyasam (AA. v. 3. 2) see Keith, Aitareya Aranyaka, p. 157, note '°, and Index iv, Y^P'- — P- 374i 1. 2 2, add bibhis-athas. — P. 383, 1. 8, delete ayasit. — P. 384, 1. 4 from below, add 3. ayasit. — P- 397) 1- 2 and 1. 24, add vJldyasi and vildyasva.

28* LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS.

AA. = Aitareya-Aranyaka, AB. = Aitareya-Brahmana. AJPh. = American Journal of Philology. APr. = Atharva-Prati^akhya. ASL. = Ancient Sanskrit Literature. AV. = Atharva-Veda. Av. = Avesta. B. = Brahmana. BB. = Bezzenberger's Beitrage. BI. = Bibliotheca Indica. BR. = BoHTLiNGK and RoTH (St. Petersburg Dictionary). C. = Classical Sanskrit. GGA. = Gottingische Gelehrte Anzeigen. IE. = Indo-European. IF. = Indogerraanische Forschungen. Ilr. = Indo-Iranian. IS. = Indische Studien. JAOS. = Journal of the American Oriental Society. K. = Kathaka. KG. = Brugmann's Kurze Vergleichende Grammatik. Kh. = Khila. KZ. = KuHN's Zeitschrift. MS. = MaitrayanI Samhita. N. = (Proper) Name. O. u. O. = Orient und Occident. Pp. = Pada-patha. pw. = Petersburger Worterbuch (B6htlingk's Smaller Lexicon). Paipp. = Paippalada. RPr. = Rigveda-Prati^akhya. RV. = Rigveda. S. = Sutra. SA. ^ Sankhayana-Aranyaka. SB. = Satapatha-Brahmana. SEE. = Sacred Books of the East. SV. = Sama-Veda. TB. = Taittiriya-Brahmana. TPr. = Taittirlya-PratiSakhya. TS. = Taittiriya-Samhita. Up. = Upanishad. V. = Vedic. VPr. = Vajasaneyi-Pratisakhya. VS. :^ (l) Vajasaneyi-Samhita; (2) Vedische Studien. Wb. = Worterbuch. WZKM. = Wiener Zeitschrift fur die Kunde des Morgenlandes. YV. = Yajur-Veda. ZDMG. = Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenlandischen Gesellschaft. ;,

I. SANSKRIT INDEX.

The references in both Indexes are to paragraphs.

a-, an-, negative particle com- antar 'between', prep, with aor. 529, inj. 53I; pp. pounded loc. with nouns 251, abl. ace. 599. ,,575 b, 6SS- antara 'between', prep, with dsman- 'stone', inflected 329, yams- 'attain', sj. pr. 470, 47 1 ace. 611. |/t. as- 'be', pr. 45 1, sj. 452, a, impv. 472 ; pf. 482 c 485, anyd- 'other' 403, I. inj. 452, opt.453, inipv.454, sj. 487, opt. 489, pt. 493; ap- 'water' 334. pt. 455, impf. 456; pf. 482 c, root aor. 500, inj. 503 ; opt. apdd- 'footless' 319 a. 485- prec. fl-aor. n. 504, 504; opt. dfas- 'work' and apds- 'ac- J/2. as- 'throw', pr. 439, impv. 511; j-aor.sj.523; inf.58s,4. tive', inflected 344. 441, pt. 442, impf. 443.456; yamh- 'compress', pf. 482 c a; dpi 'upon', prep, with loc. 600. pf. 485; ft. 537; ps. 445; p. 358, n. 9. abhanas, 2. s. impf. ybhanj- pp. 572; inf. 585,4. akramim, I. s. aor. ]/kram- 65 c 2; p. 345, note 10. asau 'that', inflected 394. 66 c § z. abhi 'towards', prep, with ace. askrta, root aor. of kr- 'make' yaks- 'mutilate', pr.impv. 472 601. 500. pr. pt. 473; u-aor. 529. abhitas 'around', prep, with asmaka 'of us' 390, 1. aksan, root aor. of ghas- 499. ace. 612. asrat 3. s. aor. ysras- 66c;S2; ahkhaya- den., sj. 569 a. yam- 'injure', pr. 422, 451, 499-

yac- 'bend', pr. 422, impv. inj. 424, pt. 427 ; red. aor. yah- 'say', pf. 482 c, 485. 426; ps. pr. 445, pt. 447, 514; cs. 555. ahdm T, inflected 391, I. impf. 448; gd. 591 a. ajnba, f. voc. 374 (p. 265). accha 'towards', prep, witli aydm 'this', inflected 393. a 'near', prep, with loc. abl. ace. 595. ayas 2. s. aor. yyaj- 66 c 2, 522. ace. 603. yaj- 'drive', pr. 422, sj. 423, araCiya- den., sj. 569 a. ad 'then', Sandhi of 67. opt. 425, impv. 426, pt. 427, ari- devout', inflected 380 b 3. an- pf. red. syllable 482 c a. impf. 428; ps. 445, pt.447; yarc- 'shine', 'praise', pr. 422, -and pf. pt. suffix 491. inf. 584b. sj. 423, inj. 424, impv. 426, ysp- 'obtain', pr. 470, impv. sj. pt. yanj- 'anoint', pr. 464, 465, 427, impf. 428; ps. 445, 472, impf 474, pt. 479 ; pf. impf. pf- c a, c, impv. 466, pt. 467, pt. 447 ; 482 485 ; 482 485, pt.493; prec. 468; pf. 482 c a, 485, sj. cs. 556; inf. 585,1. 504; o-aor. 508, opt. 511; 487, opt. 489, pt. 493; ps. arthdya- den., sj. 569 a, impv. _ des. 542, sj. 544. 445. pt- 447; PP- 574.2. 569 d. abhu- 'present', inflected 383. l/a/ -'wander', pr. 422, pt. 427. yarh- 'deserve', pr. 422, sj. ]/flr- 'praise' (?), pr. 439. aii 'beyond', prep, with ace. 423, pt. 427; pf. 485; inf. avayas, nom. of avayaj- 302. 596- 581, I. avis 'openly', adv. with \as-, ]/ad- 'eat', pr. 451, sj. 452, arhire, 3. pi. pf. 482 c «. ybhii-, ykr- 651. opt.453, impv. 454, pt. 455, yav- 'favour', pr. 422, sj. 423, ]/aj-'sit', pr. 451, sj.452, opt. impf. 456; pp. 576 a; inf. inj. 424, opt. 425, impv, 426, 453, impv. 454, pt. 455, 585,4, 586 b. pt. 427, impf. 428; pf. 482 c, impf. 456. adant- 'eating', inflected 295 c. 485 ; root aor. opt., prec. adhas 'below', prep, with ace. 504; z>aor. 529, sj. 530, inj. yi- 'go', pr. 422, 439, 451, abl. 610. 531, impv. 533; ft. 537, pt. sj. 452, inj. 424, 452, opt. inf. impv.426, pt. ddhi 'upon', prep, with loc. 538 ; pp. 574.1 «; 585,4- 453, 454, 427, abl. ace. inst. 597. flz'a-'this', pron., inflected 396. 442, 455; impf- 428, 456; yan- 'breathe', pr. 422, 430, dva 'down', prep, with abl.602. pf. 482 c, 485, pt. 492; plup. ft- 451, impv. 454, pt. 4SS. avayas, nom. of avayaj- 66 495 ; 537, 539, pt. impf. 456; pf. 482 c, 485; c /S 1; 302. 538; gdv. 578,1; inf. 585, zj-aor. 529; cs. 556. avds 'down from', prep, with I, 4. 5. 6, 7. 587 b; gd. anaks- 'eyeless' 340. abl. 613. 590 b, 591 b. anadvdh- 'ox' 351 a. dvi- 'sheep' p. 283 (top). yihg- 'move' cs. 554 a. anasamahai, pf. sj. yams- yas- 'eat', pr. 476, opt. 477, id- 'refreshment' 304. 482 c a. impv. 478, pt. 479, impf. \idh- 'kindle', pr. 464, sj. 465, is- pf. with ace. pf. 482 c, ; I impv. 466; 485; root

'. aor. sj. 502, opt. 50.)., pt. uloka- p. 59, note 490; plup. = pf. inj. 495; 506; ps. 44";. irapv. 446, \us- 'burn', p. 422, inj. 424, w-aor. 529, sj. 530. pt. 447, 455. 467, impf.468; impv. 426, pt. 427, 479. kamydms- 'younger', inflected 346.' pp. 573; inf. 584 b, 586 a. u:a.s- f. 'dawn' 4433; 344 yinv- 'send', pr. 422, 470, sj. (P- 233)- ykam- 'love', pf. pt. 493; cs. 423, impv. 426,472, pt. 427, ,555. sj. 559 b, pt. 559 6. impf. 474. iiti- 'aid', d. s. = inf. 585,3 kdrntan- 'act', inflected 329. iyaiha, 2. s. pf. ]//- 485. contracted dat. s. p. 282; ykas- 'scratch', impf. 428. y/Z-'be quiet', cs.554,aor.56oa. inst. s. = inst. pi. p. 287. ykas- 'open', pr. impv. 426; yi. w- 'desire', pr. 430, sj. 431, iinaya- den., aor. 570. PP- 573- inj. 432, opt. 433, impv. 434, ]/l. ah- 'remove', pr. 422, yka- = ykan- 'enjoy', pf. pt.435, impf. 436; gd.591 a. impv. 426, impf. 428. 485, pt. 493. 1/2. is- 'send', pr. 430, 439, y2. iih- 'consider', pr. 422, ykas- 'appear', intv. 545, i, 476, inj. 432, impf. 436, 451 (3-pl-). pt- 455; pf- 546, 547. pt. 548, impf. impv. 441, pt. 442, 479; 482 e, 485; j-aor. pt. 527; 549; cs. 556 a. b- /j-aor. 529. kirtdya- den., sj. 569 a. . 48s; pp. 575 isanaya- den., impf. 569 f.; ykuf' 'be angry', pr.pt. 442; inf. 585, I a 3; 588 c a. yr- 'go', pr. 430, 458, 470, cs. 553 b; pp. 575 b. isanya- den., impv. 569 d. sj- 43i>47i, iiij-47i> ™pv. ykiij- 'hum', pr. pt. 427. isaya- den., opt. 569 c. 434, 460, 472, pt. 473, impf. ykUd- 'burn', cs. 554 a, sj. 474; pf. 482 c, 485, pt. 559 b. yr- = yi., pr. 451. 492, 493; root aor. 500, yi. kf- 'make', pr. 451, 470 yiks- 'see', pr. 422, pt. 427, inj. 503, opt. 504, pt. 506; (inflected), sj.471, inj. 471, impf. 428; z>-aor. 529; cs. fl-aor. 508, sj. 509, inj. 510, opt. 471, impv. 472, pt. 473, gdv. impf. _ 554; 580 a. impv. 512; red. aor. 514; 474; pf. 482 a, 485 inkh- 'swing', cs. 554 a, sj. intv. 545, 2, 546; cs. 558 a, (inflected), opt. 489, pt. 492, 559 b, pp. 575 c. aor. 560, pp. 575 c, gd. 493; plup. 495; root aor. \Td- 'praise', pr. 45 1, sj. 452, 590 b, 591 a, b. (inflected) 498, 499, 500, inj. 452, opt. 453, impv. fghayd- den., inj. 569 b. sj. 502, inj. 503, opt. 504, 454, pt. 455; pf- 482 c, yr/- 'direct', pr. 430, 439, prec. 504, impv. 505, pt. 485; pp. 575 a 3; gdv. 464, impv. 434, pt. 442, 506; o-aor. 508, impv. 572; 578,4, 580. 467, impf. 468. j-aor. 522; ft. 537, 539 (in- \7r- 'set in motion', pr. 45 1, yrnv- 'go', pr. 430. flected), sj. 538, pt. 538; sj. 452, impv. 454, impf. riaya- den., inj. 569 b. des. 542 b; intv. 545, 3, pt. pt. pf. c, rii 428,456, 455 ; 482 'without', prep, with abl. 548; ps. 445, pt. 447, aor. 485; cs. 554 a, sj. 559 b. 615- 501; PP- 573; gdv- 578, I, \Ts- 'be master', pr. 422, 451, yrd- 'stir', pr. 422, impv. 434, 581; inf. 585,4, 586b, 5S7b; inj. 424, opt. 453, pt. 455, impf. 436; cs. 553 e, sj. gd. 590 a, b, c, 591 b. impf. 428; 'be able to' with 559 b. y2. kr- 'commemorate', is-a.or. inf. 587 a K, b a. yrdh- 'thrive', pr. 470, sj. 464, 529; intv. 545,2, 546, 547, y/j- 'move', pr. 422, inj. 424, impv. 441, pt. 467, impf. aor. 550b, gdv. 578, I. impv.426, pt.427; pp.575b. 474; pf. 485; root aor. sj. yi. kr^- 'cut', pr. 430, inj. y;"/5- 'desire', pr. 422; pf. 485. 502, opt. 504, prec. 504, 432, impv. 434, pt. 435, pt. 506; 3-aor. opt. 511; impf. 436; pf. 485; a-a.OT. /< particle 647; Sandhiof7lb. des. 542, pt. 544; ps. 445, 508, pt. 512; ft. 537, 539; y«- 'proclaim' 451, 470. impv. 446; gdv. 578, 4. gd. 591 a. \uks- 'sprinkle', pr. pt. 427; yr-t- 'injure'(?), j-aor. pt. 527. y2. kri- 'spin', pr. 464; ps. u-aor. 529; cs. 554 a; pp. yrs- 'rush', pr. 422, 430, sj. pr. pt. 447. 575 a I. 423, inj. 424, impv. 426, yk/p- 'lament', pr. 422, pt. yuc- 'be pleased', pr. 437, pt. 427, 435- 427, impf. 428; plup. 495; impv. 441; pf. 482 c, 485, root aor. 500; /j-aor. 529; pt. 492. ika- 'one' 403, 2, 406 a I. cs- 554. yud- 'wet', pr. 464, impv. 466, eka-pad- 'one-footed' 319 a. krfana- den., sj. 569 a. pt. impf. 427, 467, 468; pf. \ej- 'stir', pr. 422, sj. 423, yk^s- 'be lean', pr.impv. 434; 485; ps. 445- impv. pt. pf. cs. _ 426, 427, impf. 485; 553 c. Ufa 'up to', prep, with ace. 428. ykrs- 'plough', pr. 422, 430, loc. inst. 604. yedh- 'thrive', pr. 422, impv. inj. 424, impv.426, pt.435; ufari 'above', prep, with ace. 426; w-aor. opt. 532. pf. 485; red. aor. 514; intv. 614. ena- 'he, she, it', inflected 395. 545. 2. 547. impf. 549. yubj- 'force', pr.impv. 434, pt. ykf- 'scatter', pr. 430, sj. 431, impf. a I. oiivdms- 435. 436; pp.575 pf. pt. 492 a. impv. 434; z>-aor. sj. 530. yubh- 'confine', pr. impv. 434, yklp- 'be adapted', pr. 422, impf. 468, 480. kd- 'who?', pron. 397. opt. 425, impv. 426, pt. 427, urusya- den., sj. a, opt. kandHya- den., ft. 569 and pp. 570. impf. 428; pf. 482, 485; sj. 569 c, impv. 569 d, impf. ykan- 'enjoy, pr.pt. 442; pf. 487; red. aor. 514, sj. 515; 569 f; pp. 574, 2. sj. inj. 482, 487, 488, impv. cs- 553 d, 559 (inflected), sj. ; ;

I. Sanskrit Index. 439

559b,impv.559 d(mflected) opt. 425, pt. 427, impf. 428, 479. impf. 436; inf. 585,7, gd. 590 b. pf. 485; ft. pt. 538; pp. 588 c. ykraks- 'crash', pr.pt. 427. 574,2; inf.586b; gd.590a. 1/2. ^/-- 'awake', pf482; red. krdnta, root aor. ykr-, p. 367, ykha- = khaji-, pf. pt. 492. aor. 512, impv. 518; intv, n. 16. ykhad- 'chew', pr. 422, impv. 545. lb. 546, 547. pt. 548, ykrand- 'cry out', pr. 422, inj. 426, pt. 427; pf. 482b, 485. impf. 549, pf- 55°. 424, impv. 426, pt. 427, ykhid- 'tear', pr. 420, inj. 432, yg^dh- 'be greedy', jDr. pt. impf. 428; pf. 485, sj. 487; opt- 433. impv. 434, pt. 442; pf. 482, 485; a-aor. plup. 495; a-aor. inj. 510; 435, impf. 436; pf.pt.482d, 508, inj. 510. red.aor.5i4, inj. 516; j-aor. 492 b. grbhaya- den., impv. 569 d. 522; intv. 545,3, 546, pt. ykhiid- 'futuere', pr. impv. 434. ygf- 'swallow', pr. 430, 479 548; cs. 556 a. ykkya- 'see', pf. 485; a-aor. root aor. sj. 502; red. aor. \kram- 'stride', pr. 422, sj. 508, inj. 510, impv. 512; 514; M-aor. inj. 531 ; intv. 423, inj. 424, opt. 425, gdv. 578,3; inf. 584 a; gd. 545, lb, 2a, 547; pp.576; impv. 426, 434, pt. 427, 591a. gd. 591 a. impf. 428; pf. 485, inj. 488, go- 'cow', inflected 365. pt- 493; root aor. 66,4 a, ygad- 'say', pr. impv. 426. gopaya- den., impv. 569 d; 499. inj- 503; 'z-aor. 508; ygam- 'go', pr. 422, 451, sj. p. 402, n. 2. j-aor. 522, sj. 523; «-aor. 423, opt. 425, impv. 426, gdha, 3. s. root aor. yghas-, 529 (infiectedj, inj. 531, pt. 427, impf. 428; pf. 485, p. 367, note 13. ft. plup. 'woman', (bottom); impv. 533, 537; intv. opt. 489, pt. 492, 493 ; ^Ka- 367 547c; pp. 574,2; inf. 584b; 495; periphr.pf. 496, 560 b; p. 263, note I. gd. 591 a. root aor. 499, 500, sj. 502, ygrath- 'tie', pr. 464; pp. ykri- 'buy', pr. 476, sj. 477, inj. 503, opt. 504, prec. 504, 575 a 2. impf. 4S0; gd. 590 b. impv. 505, pt.506; a-aor.508, ygrabh- 'seize', pr. 476 (in- \krJd- 'play', pr. 422, sj. 423, sj. 509,inj.5io,opt. 511; red. flected), sj. 477, inj. 477, pt. 427. aor. 514; j-aor. 522, w-aor. impv. 478, impf. 480; pf. ykrudh- 'be angry', pr. 439; opt. 532, impv. 533; ft. 537, 485, opt. 489, pt. 492; plup. a-aor. inj. Sl°> red. aor. 539, periph. ft. 540; des. 495; root aor. 499, 500; 512, sj. 515, inj. 516; cs. 542; intv. 545, 1,3, 546; a-aor.508; 2>-aor. 529; cs. 5S3b; pp. 573- cs. 555 a; ps. 445, aor. 501; 554; pp. 575 b; inf. 584b; \krus- 'cry out', pr. 422, impv. pp. 572. 574,2; inf. 585,4, gd. 591 a 426, pt. 427; ja-aor. 536. 5.7. 587 b; gd. 590 b, c. ygras- 'devour', pr. opt. 425; yksad- 'divide', pr. 422; pf. ygarh- 'chide', pr. 422. pf. opt. 489, pt. 493; pp. 485, pt- 493; inf- 585. l-_ yi.ga- 'go', pr. 458, inj. 459, 575 b. yksan- 'wound', is-^ox. inj. impv. 460, pt. 461, impf. ygrah- 'seize', pr. 476, opt. 531; pp. 574,2. 462; pf. 489; root aor. 499, 477, impv. 478, pt. 479, yham- 'endure', pr. opt. 425, sj. 502, inj. 503, impv. 505; impf 480; pf. 485; a-aor. pf. opt. j--aor. inj. des. c; inj. 510; ;>-aor. 529; pp. impv. 426, pt. 427 ; 524; 542 489. inf._ 585, 4. 575 b; gd. 590b, 591 a. yksar- 'flow', pr. 422, inj. 424, y^.ga- 'sing', pr. 439, inj. gravan- 'pressing- stone', in- impv. 426, pt. 427, impf. 440, impv. 441, pt. 442; flected 331. 428; j-aor. 522; inf. 585, 7. j-aor. inj. 524; sis-aax. 534; ygla- 'be weary', pr.pt. 4-12; yksa- 'burn', cs. 558. pr. pt. 447; pp. 574. 3- cs. 558. yi.ksi- 'possess', pr. 422, 430, gaiuyl- den., impv. 569 d. opt. pf. 4Si. sj- 452, opt. 425,433, ygdh- 'plunge', pr. 422, yghas- 'eat', pr. sj. 452; pt. 427, 435, 455, impv. 425, impv. 426, pt. 427, 485, opt. 489, pt. 492; root intv. a, impv. j-aor. 434, .f-aor. sj. 523 ; ft. 537, impf. 428; 545,2 546. aor. 499, 505; pt. 538; cs. 557 a, 558 a. ygu- 'sound', intv. 545, 1, 546. 522; des. 542 (p.389, top); yz. ksi- 'destroy', pr. 439,470, ygtip- 'protect', pf. 485 (cp. pp. 57.4. 3 a- J3); 476, inj. 477. iinpf- 48o; p. 358, note ft. 537, yghus- 'sound', pr. sj. 423, j--aor. inj. 524; ps. 445, pt. 539; PP- 575 t>. pt. 427; cs. 553 b; ps. aor. 447- ygur- 'greet', pr. impv. 434; 501; gd. 591 a. yksip- 'throw', pr. 430, inj. pf. sj. 487, opt. 489; root yghr- 'drip', pr. 458 ; cs. 557 c, 432, impv. 434, pt. 435; aor. 5CO; intv. 545, 2a; pp. ps. pt. 561 a. 'smell', red. aor. inj. 516. 573 a; gd. 591 a. yghra- fr. 458. yksT- = kd- 'destroy', pp. ygiih- 'hide', pr. 422, inj. ycaks- 'see', pr. 422, 576 d. 424, impv. 426, pt. 427, 451, yksud- 'be agitated', 'crush', impf. 428; a-aor. 508, inj. impv. 454, impf. 428, 456; plup. cs. pr. 422, pt. 442; cs. 553 b. 510, pt. 512 a; j-a-aor. pf. 485; 495; yksudh- 'be hungry', cs. aor. 536; des. 542; ps. pt. 447; 556 a; gdv. 578, 4; inf. gd. b, 588 a; gd. inj. 510. PP- 573; gdv- 578, 4; 584 585,1, yksubh- 'quake', pf. 485. 590 a. 591 a, b. caksus- 'eye', inflected ]/%««- -whet', pr. 451, pt. 455. gurdhaya- den., impv. 569 d. 342. yi. gr- 'sing', pr. 476, inj. ycal- 'hide', pr. pt. 427; cs.

sj. impv. pt. pt- e. ykhan- 'dig', pr. 422, 423, I 477, 434, 478, 555, 559 ; ;

440 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

uspad- 'four-footed' 319 a. yjalis- 'eat', gd. 590 b, c. sj. 423, opt. 425, impv. 426 yean- 'be pleased', «ir-aor. yjajh; pr. pt. 427. (top), pt. 427; inf- 585.7- impv. 533. \ljahj- pr. pt. 427. \jrmbh- 'gape', pr. 422. canasya- den., impv. 5^9 "^^ yjan- 'generate', pr. 422, sj. yjf- 'waste away', pr. 422, car- 'move', pr. 422, sj. 423, 423, inj. 424, impv. 426, 439, impv. 426, pt. 427, inj. 424, opt. 425, impv. 454, pt. 427, impf. 428, 435. impf. 441; pf- 485, 426, pt. 427, impf. 428 456; pf. 485, pt. 493; root pt.492; z>-aor. inj. 531; cs. pf. 485; red. aor. 514; is- aor. 500; red. aor. 514 (in- 557 c; pp. 576 e. aor. 529, inj. 531; ft. 539; flected), inj. 516; zj-aor. yjeh- 'pant', pr. pt. 427. intv. 545. 2 b, 546, 551; pp. 529, opt. 532; ft. 537,539; yjha- 'know', pr. 476, sj. 477, 575 a 3; gdv. 580; inf. cs.556, sj.559b, opt. 559 c, opt. 477, impv. 478, pt. 585, I, 4, 7- pt. 559 e, impf. 559 f (in- 479, impf. 480; pf. pt. 492, caranya- den., sj. 569 a, opt. c. flected); pp. 574, 2; gdv. 492 a; root aor. opt. 504; carmamnd- 'tanner' p. 38 n. ' 580, 581; inf. 587 b; gd. red. aor. 514; j-aor. 522; p. 249 note 4. 590 a. des. 542; cs. 558, aor. 560; _ ycal- 'stir', impf. 428; intv. jani- 'wife' 380 b 2. gdv. 578,3; ps. 445, aor. 545. 2, 546. janitor- 'begetter' 390. 501. cakan inj. pf. 488 (cp. p. 392 \jamhh- 'chew', red. aor. 5 14; yjya- 'overpower', pr. 439, note 8). w-aor. 530; intv. 545, 2, 476, opt. 477, pt. 479; des. ycay- 'note', pr. pt. 427; is- pt. 548; cs. 556 a. 542; ps. 445; pp. 574,2. aor. 529; gd. 590 b, 591 a. \jas- 'be exhausted', pr. impv. yjyut- 'shine', cs. 553 b. J/l. ci- 'gather', pr. 422, 470, 441, pt. 427; pf. impv. 490. yjri- 'go', pr. 422; j-aor. pt. sj. 452, 471, opt. 425, 471, jaha, 3. s. pf.? p. 357 note 4. 527- impv. 472, pt. 473, impf. jahi, 2. ». impv. yhan- 32 c; 474; pf- 485; root aor. 499; p. 50 note 9. id- 'that', inflected 392, 1. M-aor. 'offspring', ytams- 'shake', pf. impv. 533; gd. 590b. ja- inflected 368. 485 ; plup. 1/2. ci- 'note', pr. 458, impv. yjd- 'be born', pr. 439, inj. 495; a-aor. 508; intv. 545, 460, pt. 461, 462; pf. 485; 440, opt. 440, impv. 441, 2 b; sj. 547, gdv. 579; cs. root aor. 500; des. 542. pt. 442. impf. 443. 556 a; inf. 585,7. ydt- 'perceive', pr. 422, 451, janivdnis- pf. pt. 482 d. ytai- 'rush', pr. 451, impf. inj. 424, impv.426, pt. 427, jaraya- den., ps. aor. 501. 456. impf. 428; pf. 485, sj. 487, yji- 'conquer', pr. 422, 451, ytaks- 'fashion-', pr. 422, sj. impv. 490, pt. 492, 493; sj. 423, inj. 424, opt. 425, 423, inj. 424, impv. 426, plup. 495 ; root aor. 499, impv. 426, pt. 427, impf. 454, pt. 427, impf. 428, pt. 506; j^-aor. 522; des. 428; pf. 485, pt. 492; root 456; pf. 485; z>-aor. 529; 542, sj. 544; intv. 545, I, aor. inj. 503, impv. 505, pp. 575 a I. 546, 547. pt. 548; cs. 553, red. aor. 514; j--aor. 522, I/I. tan- 'stretch', pr. 470, sj. 554. sj. 559 b, opt. 5590; sj. 523, inj. 524; ft. 537, 471, inj. 471, impv. 472, ps. aor. 501; pp. 573; inf. 539, pt. 538; des. 542, pt. pt. 473, impf. 474; pf. 485, 585,2. 544; ". 558 a; pp. 573; sj. 487, inj. 488, opt. 489, ycud- 'impel', pr. 422, inj. gdv. 581; inf. 585, la; gd. pt.492; root aor. 499, 500; 424, impv. 426; cs. 553 b, 591 b. a-aoi. 508, inj. 510; j-aor. sj- 559 t>, ps.pt. 561 a, pp. yji- oxjihv- 'quicken', pr. 422, 522; cs. 555; pp. 574, 2; 575 c- 470, impv. 426, pt. 427, gd. 591 b. ycrt- 'bind', pr. 430, impv. impf. 428; pf. 485. ]/2. tan- 'roar', pr. 439. '434; pf- 485; inf. 586 a. yjru- 'live', pr. 422, sj. 423, tanu- 'body', inflected 385 cetatur pf. ydt-, p. 358 ii. i. opt. 425, impv. 426, pt. = 'self 400, 3. \cest- 'stir', pr. pt. 427. 427; prec. 504; M-aor. inj. ytand- 'be weary', pr. 422, ycyu- 'move', pr. 422, inj. 531; cs. 554a; pp.575a3; inj.(?) 424. 424, impv. 426; pf. 482bi, gdv. 581 b; inf. 585,1,4,5. ytap- 'be hot', pr. 422, sj. 485; plup. 495; red. aor. yjus- 'enjoy', pr. 422, 430, 423, inj. 424, impv. 426, S14, inj. 516, opt. 517; 451, inj. 424, 432, sj. 431, pt. 427, impf. 428; pf. 485, j-aor. inj. 524; cs. 557b. opt. 433, impv. 426, 434, sj. 487, pt. 493; red. aor. pt. 435, impf. 436;. pf. 485, 514, sj. 515; j-aor. 522, ychad- or chand- 'seem', pr. sj. 487, impv. 490, pt. 492, inj. 524; cs. 555; ps. 445, 451; pf. 485, opt. 4S9; 493; root aor. 500, sj. 502, impv. 446, pt. 447, impf. j-aor. 522, sj. cs. pt. z>-aor. sj. aor. 523; 556, 506; 530; cs. 448; 501 ; pp. 573; 556 a, sj. 559 b. 553 b, sj. 559 b; pp. 573; gd. 591 a. ychad- 'cover', cs. 555. gd. 590 a. ytam- 'faint', a-aor. inj. 510. \cha- 'cut up', pr. 430, impv. yjil- 'be swift', pr. 422, 476, taru^a- den., inj. 569 b, opt. 434- sj- 477; pf- 482, 485, sj. ,569 c. ychid- 'cut off', pr. 464, impv. 487, pt. 492,493;inf.585,i. idt, abl. adv. 'in this way' 466; root aor. inj. 503; yjurv- 'consume', pr. 422, sj. 629. 3-aor. 508; j-aor. inj. 524; 423, impv. 426, pt. 427; tij- 'be sharp', pr. 422, pt. ps.445, aor. 501; pp. 576a; w-aor. 529. 427; des. 542; intv. 545, i, gd. 591 a. yjr- 'sing', pr. 422 (p. 322), 546; pp. 573. ;

I. Sanskrit Index. 441

tiros 'across', prep, with ace. inz'/^'threefold',inflected306. root aor. impv. 505 ; .r-aor. 605. tvo- 'many a one', inflected inj. 525; ps- 445. pt. 447; _ tilvilayd- den., impv. 569 d. 396. PP- 574, 3 «, 576 c. ytu- 'be strong', \ivaks- 'fashion', pt. da- 'bind', impf. ps. pr. 45 1 ; pf. pr. 455. y^. 443; 482, 485; red. aor. 514; tvam 'thou', inflected 391, 2. aor. 501; pp. 574,3- intv. 545, 3. yivar- 'make haste', cs. 55^- ydas- 'make offering', pr. 422, opt. l//«/- 'urge', pr. 430, 464, ytvis- 'be stirred', impf. 436, 45', 470, sj. 423, 425, pt. 427, 435, 467; pf. opt. 456; pf.485, Pt.493; plup- pt. 455, impf. 428; pf. 489, pt. 493; cs. 554; ps. 495; PP- 575 b; inf. 584 b. 485, sj.487, pt. 492, 492 b. 445, pt. 447; inf. 584 b, ytsar- 'approach stealthily', ydis- 'point', pr. 430, opt. pt- pf- sj. 585. I. 2. pr. 422, impf. 428 ; pf 434, 435; 485, ytud- 'thrust', pr. 430, impv. 485; j-aor. 522. 487, impv. 490; plup. 495; root j-aor. 522; 434, pt. 43S. 467. impf- aor. 500; 436; pf._485; pp. 576 a. ydams- 'bite', pr. impv. 426, intv. 545,1,546, impf. 549, ytur- = tr- 'pass', pr. 430, pt. 427; pf. pt. 492; intv. 551; PP- 573; inf. 584 b. opt- 453; des. 542; cs.554; 5452 b, pt. 548; pp. 574,2. ydi/i- 'smear', pr. sj. 452, pt. gd. 591 a. ydaks- 'be able', pr. 422, 455, impf 456; pp. 573- tarmiya- den., inj. 569b, impf. impv. 426, pt. 427; gdv. yi. dl- 'fly', pr. 439, inj. 440, pt. impf. 569 f. 579- impv. 441, 442, yius- 'drip', pr. 422, pt. 427; ydagk- 'reach to', root aor. 443- cs. 553 b. inj. 503; prec. 504, impv. yz. dl- 'shine', pr. 458, sj. impv. pt. 461, ]/A«- 'be content', cs. 554. 505. 459, 460, \'tuTv- 'overcome', pr. 422, dan, g. of ddvi- 'house', p. 37 impf. 462; pf. 482, 485, impv. 426, pt. 427. (bottom); 66,4a; 338. sj. 487, pt. 492- impv. ytrd- 'split', pr. 464, impf. ydan- 'straighten'?, pr. sj. yd'if- 'shine', pr. 439, ; red. aor. inj. 516; cs. 468; pf. 485, pt. 493; root 452, inj. 452. 441 a. aor. sj. 502 ; des. 542, sj. dant- 'tooth' 313. 554 y^iz/- 'play', pr. inj. 440; 544; pp. 576a; inf. 587 a. ydabh- or dombh- 'harm', pr. 439, gd- ytrp- 'be pleased', pr. 430, 422, 470, sj. 423, inj. 424, pf. 485; pp. 573 «; sj. 471, impv. 434, 441. impv. 472; pf. 485, inj. 591 a. ydii- or die- 'burn', pr. 470, pf. ; root aor. inj . 472, pt. 435 ; 482, 485, 488 499, 503 pt. w-aor. sj. 530; pp. pt. 493; a-aor. 508, inj. des. 542, sj. 544; cs. 556 a; 473; d. 510, pt. 512; red. aor. 514; ps. 445; gdv. 578,4; inf. 576 ydudh- 'stir up', pp. 575°- des. 542, sj. 544; cs. 553 c, 584 b. durasyd- den., sj. 569 a. sj. 559 b. ydam- 'control', cs. 556. duvasyd- den., sj. 569 a, opt. ytrs- 'be thirsty', pr. 439, pt. damanya- den., impf. 569 f. c, impv. 569 d. 442; pf. 4S2, 485, pt. 493; dasasyd- den., opt. 569 c, impv. 569 red. d. ydus- 'spoil', pr. 439; root aor. pt. 506 ; o-aor. 508, 569 aor. 514, inj. 516; ft. cs. inj. 510; red. aor. 514, inj. ydas- or das- 'waste', pr. 422, cs. 516. 439, sj. 423, inj- 424, pt- 537, 560; 554. particle as opt. pf. pt. dus- 'ill', adverbial \trh- 'crush', pr. sj. 465, impf. 427, 440 ; 492 i first member of compounds 436; pf. 485; a-aor. 508; a-aor. inj. 510, pt. 5 12; 251, 657- ps. 445, impv. 446, pt. 447; w-aor. inj. 531; cs. 555. yduh- 'milk', pr. 422, 45^, gd- b, c. !- 'burn', pr. 422, 439, PP- S73; 590 impv. inj. impv. sj. 452, opt. 453, 454, -ytf- 'pass', pr. 422, 430, 470, 451, sj. 423, 424, pt. impf. 428; pt. 455, impf. 436, 456; sj. 423> 43 1> inj. 424. 432, 426, 427, -r-aor. 522, inj. pt.527; pf. 485, pt.493; opt. 425, 433, impv. 426, j-aor. 522, 524, inj. 524, opt. 525; jfl-aor. 434, pt. 427, 435, 461, iinpf- ft. 537, pt- 538; PP- 573- 536; des. 542, pt. 544; ps. 428,436; pf. 485, opt. 489, yi. da- 'give', pr. 422, 458, opt. 445, pt. 447; pp. 573; inf- pt. 492; red. aor. 514; is- sj. 459, inj. 424, 459, I, 7- impv. 460, pt. 585, , aor. 529, sj. 530, inj. 531, 459, 426, . , pf.485, di'iddbha-, Sandhi of, p. 70 opt. 532; intv.545,2,3, 546, 461, impf.428, 462; note 3; 81, lb. ps.aor.50i; pp.S76e; pt. 492; root aor. 499, 500, 551 ; pf. opt. yi.dr- 'pierce', pr. 451; inf. a, 586 a, sj. 507, inj. 503, 504; 584 585,7.9, root aor.

442 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

5441, 580; cs. 553 c; ps. 440; root aor. 499; cs. 527; intv. 545,2, 546, pt. 445, aor. 501; gdv. 580; 558; pp.574; inf. 585. 1,4- 548, impf. 549; « 556; inf. inf. 584 b, 585, 2, 586 b, |/l. dhav- 'run', pr. 422, sj. PP- 574,2; gdv. 58 1 ; 5S8 a; gd. 590 b, c, 591 a. 423, inj. 424, impv. 426, 584 b. ydrh- 'be firm', pr. 430, impv. pt. 427; plup. 495. ]/l. nas- 'be lost', pr. 439, pt. pf- 426, 441, 435, impf. ]/2. dhav- 'wash', pr. 422, inj. 424, impv. 44 1 ; 428,436; pf.pt. 493; plup. impv. 426; «V-aor. 529. 485; red. aor. 514, irj. 516; 495; «>-aor, 529; cs. 554a; dhi- 'thought', inflected 376. ft. 537. 539; cs. 555, inf. pp. 573- ydhJ- 'think', pr. sj. 459, pt. 585.7; PP- 573- devt-, inflected 378. 461, impf. 462; i..f. 482; ]/2. nas- 'obtain', pr. 451, sj. dehi, pr. impv. \da- 'give' j-aor. pt. 527. 423, inj. 424; root aor. 499, 62, 4 b. dhunaya- den., inj. 569 b, inj. 503, opt. 504, j-aor. sj. dyav- 'heaven', inflected 364. impv. 569 d. 523; des. 542 a, sj. 544; inf. \dyul- 'shine', pr. 422, impv. ydhii- 'shake', pr. 430, 470, 584 b. 426, pt. 427; pf. 482 b I, sj. 441, impv. 446, 472, ynas- 'unite', pr. 422, inj. 485, pt. 493; root aor. pt. pt. 473, impf. 474; pf.48S, 424; root aor. opt. 504. 506; red. aor. 514, inj. inj. 488, opt. 489; root aor. ynah- 'bind', pr. 439, impv. 516; intv. 545,3, 546, pt. pt. 506; red. aor. 514; 441, pt. 442, impf. 443; 547, impf. 549; cs. 553 b, j-aor. 522; intv. 545, I, 3, pf- 485; ps. pt. 447; PP- 554. 546, pf. 550; gd. 591 a. 573- dyaus, accentuation of voc. dhiipaya- den., impf. 569 f. ynaih- 'seek aid', pp. 575 a2. 85. note "I ydhi~4jv-'\vCyart' 'seek aid', pr. part. 93. 364 (p. 247). , pr. 422, impv. ynadh- yi, dra- 'run', pr. impv. 454; 426, pt. 427. ,427; PP- 575 b. pf. pt. 493; j-aor. sj. 523; ydhr- 'hold', red. aor. 514, nav- 'ship', inflected 365. intv. pt. 547. .inj. 516, impv. 518; pf. ynims- 'kiss', pr. 45 1, impf. ]/2. dra- 'sleep', pp. 576 c. 482,485; root aor. inj. 503; 4.28. ydru- 'run', pr. 422, impv. ft. 537. 539; intv. 545.1,2, yiiiks- 'pierce', pr. 422, impv. 426, pt. 427, impf. 428; 546, impf. 549; cs. 557 c, 426; inf. 584 b. pf. 485; red. aor. 514, inj. sj- 559 b, opt. 559 c, ft. ynij- 'wash', pr. impv. 460, 516; cs. 557 b. 537. 560; ps. 445, impv. pt. 455; a-aor. 508; j--aor. ydruh- 'be hostile', pf. 4S5; 446; inf. 585, 1,8. 588 b. 522, inj. 524; intv. 545, I, a-aor. 508, inj. 5 10; pp. ydhrs- 'dare', pr. impv. 472; 546 (inflected), 547. 573- pf. 485, sj. 487, inj. 488, ynind- 'revile', pr. 422, sj. ydrii- 'hurl'(?), pr. pt. 479. pt. 492; plup. 495; o-aor. 423, impv. 426; pf. 485; dvipdd- 'two-footed' 319 a. inj. 510, pt. 512; pp. 575b; root aor. pt. 506; M-aor. dvis- 'hatred', inflected 340. gdv. 578,4; inf. 584 b. 529, sj. 530; des. 542, sj. ydvis- 'hate', pr. 451, sj. 452, ydhraj- 'sweep', pr. pt. 427, 544; ps.pt. 447; pp. 575 a I. impv. 454, pt. 455; j-a-aor. impf. 428. yiii- 'lead', pr. 422, 451,458, inj. 536; gdv. 578,4, 580. ydhvams- 'scatter', pf. 485; sj. 423, inj. 424, impv. 426, dvipa- 'island' 255, 4. ffi-aor., 508;" cs. 556. pt. 427, impf. 428; pf. 485; ydhvan-'sa\ixvd.\ cs. 555, aor. sj. 487 (cp. p. 361 note'), ydhan- 'run', pf. sj. ^87, opt. 560 a; pp. 574, 2«. opt. 489; j--aor. 522, sj. 489; cs. 556. ydhvr- 'injure', j-aor. 522; 523, inj. 524, impv. 526; ydhanv- '^-an' pr. sj.423, , 422, des. 542; inf. 585, I. 2>-aor. 529; ft. 537, 539; impv. 426; pf. 485, pt. 492; des. 542; intv. 545,1, 551 w-aor. 529. nd 'like', Sandhi of 67, p. 63 ps.445, Pt'447, impf. 448; dhanvan- 'bow', inflected 331. note 9. inf. 58S c; gd. 591 a. ydham- or dhma- 'blow', pr. ndkis, indecl. pron., old nom. nTlaya- den., sj. 569 a. 422, impv. 426, pt. 427, sing. 381b (p. 279, bottom). |/l. nu- 'praise', pr. 422, inj. impf. 428: ps. 445; PP- nakta- n. 'night', irreg. nom. 424, pt. 427, impf. 42S, 574.2, 575 b. du. 372. 456, pt. 435; red. aor. 514, ydhav- 'flow', impf. 428. ynaks- 'attain', pr. 422, inj. inj. 516; j-aor. 522, inj. j/l. dha- 'put', pr. 422, 458, 424, impv. 426, pt. 427, 524; «>-aor.529; intv. 545, 1, sj. opt. 459, 459, impv. 460, impf. 428; pf. 485. 546, 547, impf. 549, pf- pt. 461, impf. 462; pf. 485, ynad- 'sound', pr. t. ] 427, 550; gdv. 578, 2. impv. 490; root aor. 499, impf. 428; intv. 545,1 b, yz. nu- 'move', pr. 422, impf. 500; o-aor. 508; j-aor. sj. 546, pt. 548; cs. 556. 428. inj. 523, 524; des. 542, nddbkyas, dat. ainapat- 62, 3 b ynud- 'push', pr. 430, sj. 431, sj- gdv. "-. 544. 579; cs. 558, 321 note inj. 432, impv. 434, pt.435, sj- SS9b; ps. 445, impv. ynand- 'rejoice', pr. 422. impf. 436; pf. 485; root pt. aor. 446, 447, 501, sj. ynabh- 'burst', pr. impv. 426. aor. inj. 503; ir-aor. inj. 502, inj. 503, opt. 504, ynam- 'bend', pr. 422, sj. 531; PP- 576 a; inf. 584 b. impv. 505; pp. 574,3; inf. 423, inj. 424, impv. 426, ]/nrU 'dance', pr. 439, impv. 584 a, a, 585,4,5,7, 586 pt. 427, impf. 428; pf. 482, 441, pt. 442; root aor. 499; 587 b; gd. a. 591 485; plup. 495; red. aor. ffl-aor. pt. 512; is-SiOi. 529; J/z. dha- 'suck*, pr. opt. 439, inj. 516; J aor. sj. 523; pt. cs. 553 c. ; ;

I. Sanskrit Index. 443

ypac- 'cook', pr. 422, 439, sj. 424, impv. 426, pt. 427, ypraks- =prach- 'ask', pf. 485 423, inj. 424, impv. 426, impf. 428; pf. 485. (cp. p. 359 note 6); inf. 585, pt. 427, irapf. 428; pf. 485; ypibd- 'stand firm', pr. pt. I a. plup. 495; j-aor. si. 523; 427. ypracA- '3.i\C, pr. 430, sj.431, ps.445, pt-447. impf. 448; ypis- 'adorn', pr. 430, impv. opt. 433. impv. 434, Part. inf. 585,4; gd. 590 b. 434, impf. 436; pf. 485; 435, impf. 436; j-aor. 522; padbhis, inst. i; pi. 42 c, 43 b I, root aor. pt. 506; intv. 545, gdv. 544 i, 580; pp.574, 62,4 b (p. 57) note 3, 350 I a, pt. 548; ps. pt. 447; inf. 584 b, 586 a, b. (p. 238 note I). PP- 575 b. pi-dti 'against', prep, with ace. \\.pal- 'fly', pr. 422, sj. 423, ypi§- 'crush', pr. 464, inj. 465, 608. inj. 424, opt. 425, impv. impv. 466, impf. 436, pt. pratyafic-, inflected 299. 426, pt. 427, impf. 428; 467, impf. 468; pf. 485; |^?-a//;- 'spread', pr.422, impv. pf. 485, opt. 489, pt. 492; PP- 573- 426, pt. 427, impf. 428; pf. red.aor. 514, inj. 516, impv. ypid- 'press', pf. 485; cs. 485 (cp. p. 357 note =), sj. 518; ft. 537, 539, pt. 538; ,554 u.. 487, inj. 488, pt. 493; root des. 542; intv. 545,1, 546, ^«-aor. sj. 530; cs. 557 c, 426. pr. impv. paras 'beyond', prep, with ace. sj. 559 b; inf. 58Sb. ]/^M- 'devour', 451, inst. loc. abl, 616. yprn- 'fill', pr. 430, sj. 431, 454- pari 'around', prep, with ace. impv. 434, impf. 436; inf. yphan- 'spring', intv. abl. 606. 585. 7- 545, 3, pt. cs. ypas- 'see', pr. 439, sj. 44°. yprc- 'mix', pr. 430, 464, vay 548; 555. 'scatter', intv. inj. 440, opt. 440, impv. 465, opt. 465, impv. 434. l/^.4a?--_ 545,2, 441, pt. 442, impf. 443. 460, 466, pt. 467, impf. 547 a. yi. pa- 'drink', pres. 422, sj. 468; pf. sj. 487, opt. 489; ybamh- 'make firm', pp. 574, 2. 423, inj. 424, impv. 426, root aor. sj. 502, opt. ybandh- 'bind', pr. 476, impv. pt. 427, 461, impf. 428; pf. 504, pt. 506; j-aor. 522, sj. impf. 480; pf. 485; 485, opt. 489, pt. 492, 493; 523; ps. 445, impv. 445, 478, ft. ps. impv. impf. 76 b 539; 445. root aor. 499, sj. 502, prec. pt. 447, 448 ; pp. 5 537. pt. 447; inf. 584 b, 504, impv. 505, pt. 506; inf. 584 b, 587 a. 446, impf. b. j--aor. inj. 5^4; des. 542, prtanya- den., sj. 569 a, 590 bahirdha 'outside', prep, with pt. 544; cs. 558 a; ps.445, 569 f. abl. 618. aor. 501; pp. 574,3; inf. yprs- 'sprinkle', pr. pt. 427, ybadh- 'oppress', pr. 422, inj. 585.3.4.5.7; g-aor. \2.pa- 'protect', pr. 451, sj. 477, opt. 477, impv. 460, impf- inj. 531; des. 542; intv. 452, impv. 454, pt. 455. 478, pt. 442. 479. opt. pt. 545, lb, 2a, 546, pt. 548; impf. 456; j-aor. sj. 523. 462, 480; pf. 489, inj. cs. 555 a; pp. 575 b. papaya- den., aor. inj. 570. 492; red. aor. 516, ybudh- 'wake', pr. 422, ypi- or pt- 'swell', pr. 422, impv. 518; cs. 557 c, sj. 439, e- sj. 423, inj. 424, opt. 440, 470, pt. 442, 461, 473; pf. ';59b; pp. 576 impv- impv. 426, 441, pt. 442; 482; 485. pt- 492, 493; ypyd- 'fill up', pr. 439. j-w-aor. 01 1. pf. 482 b, sj. 487, pt. 493; pp. 576 d. 441, pt. 442; root aor. 500, pt. 506; \pinv- 'fatten', pr. 422, inj. 534; cs. 558 «. ;

444 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

3-aor. inj. 510; red. aor. 465, pt. 467; pf. 485; root ymad- or mand- 'exhilarate', sj. 514; j-aor. 522; z'j-aor. si. aor. sj. 502, inj. 503 ; a-aor. pr. 422, 451, 458, 423, 530; ps. aor. SOI; inf. opt. 511, impv. 512; inf. inj. 424, opt.425, impv. 426, 584 b, 588 a. 584 b, 585. I- 460, pt. 427, impf. 428,462; ybrh- 'make big', pr. impv. ybhur- 'quiver', pr. inj. 432, pf. 485, sj. 487, opt. 489, 434; pf. 485, pt. 493; U- impv. 434. pt. 435; intv. impv. 490, pt. 492; root j intv. aor.499, impv. pt. aor. inj. 531; 545, 2, I 545. 2 «, 546, pt. 548. 505, 506; 547 a. ybha- 'be', pr. 422, sj. 423, red. aor. 514; j--aor. 522, j bodhi, impv. of ybhii- and inj. 424, opt. 425, impv. sj. 523, inj. 524, pt. 527; ybudk- 32 c, 505 note 3. 426, pt. 427, impf. 428; u-aor. 529, opt. 532; cs. \bru- 'say', pr. (inflected) 45 1, pf. 482 b I, 485, opt. 489, 555 a, 556 a, sj. 559b; ps. sj. (inflected) 452, opt. 453. pt. 492; root aor. 499, sj. pt. 447; PP-573; gdv. 578, impv.454, pt.455. impf.456. 502, inj. 503, opt. 504, prec. 4; inf. 585,7. \bli- 'crash', pp. 576 d. 504; a-aor. 508; red. aor. mddhu- 'svieet' , inflected 389. 514; ft. 537, 539, pt. 538; madhya- 'in the midst of ybhaif- 'partake of, cs. 556 a. des. 542, pt. 544; intv. 587 b a. \bhaj- 'divide', pr. 422, 451, 545, I, 546, pt. 548; cs. yman- 'think', pr. 422, 439, sj. 423, inj. 424, opt. 425, 557b; pp.573; gdv. 578,2, 470, sj. 423, 440, 471, inj. impv. 426, pt. 427, impf. 581; inf. 584a, 588c; gd. 440, 471, opt. 440, 459, 428; pf. 485, pt. 493; j-aor. 590 a, b, 591 a. 471, impv. 441. 472, pt. 522, sj. 523, inj. 524, opt. bhii- 'earth', inflected 383. 442, 473. impf- 443. 474; 525; cs. 555, ps. pt. 447, ybhils- 'adorn', pr. 422, sj. pf. 485 ; root aor. 500, sj. 561, gd. 591 a; ps. pr. pt. 423, opt. 425, impv. 426, 502, pt. 506; j-aor. 522, 447; gd- 59° b, c. pt. 427, impf. 428; gdv. sj- 523. inj- 524; ft. 537, \bhanj- 'break', pr. 464, impv. 580. 539; des. 542, ps. 544 h, 466, pt. 467, impf. 468; ybhr- 'bear', pr. 422, 451, pp.544h;C5.555, opt.559c; pf. 485; ps. impv. 446. 458 (inflected), sj. 423, 459, pp. 574. 2; inf. 585, 4, 5. \bhan- 'speak', pr. 422, inj. inj. 424, opt. 425, 459, manasya- den., pr. (inflected) 424, impf. 428. impv. 426, 460, pt. 427, 569, opt. 5690. \bhand- 'be bright', pr. 422, 461, impf. 428, 462; pf. niantraniya,- gdv. 581 b. pt. 427. 482 d, 485, sj.487, pt. 493; ]/l. ma- 'measure', pr. 451, ybharv- 'devour', pr. 422. plup. 495; root aor. prec. opt. 459, impv. 460, pt. 461, bhdvanU 'being', inflected 314. 504, impv. 505 ; j--aor. (in- impf. 462; root aor. impv. \bhas- 'devour, pr. 430, 458, flected) 522, sj. 523, inj. 505, pt. 506; j-aor. 522; sj. 459, inj. 424, pt. 461. 524; /j-aor. 529; cond.538, ps. aor. 501; pp. 574, 3; ybhd- 'shine', pr. 451, impv. ft.pt.538; intv.545,2, 546; gdv. 578,3; inf. 584 a; 454. pt. 455- ps. 445, sj. 446, aor. 501 gd. 590 b, 591 a. bhamaya- 'be angry', den., pp. pp.573; inf. 585,585, 4.5.7.8. y2.ma- 'exchange', pr. 439; 575 c. 586b; gd. 591 b. gd. 591 b. ybhas- 'shine', pr. sj. 'roast', sj. ma- 'bellow', pr. 422, 423, ybhrjj- pr. 431. "I/3. 422, 458; pt. 427- ybhyas- 'fear', impf. 428. pf. 585; red. aor. 514, inj. ybhiks- 'beg', pr. 422, inj. 424, ybhrams- 'fall', pr. inj. 424; 516; inf. 585,5. opt. 425, pt. 427. a-aor. inj. 510; cs. 555; ma, prohibitive particle used ybhid- 'split', pr. 422, 464, PP- 574. vrith injunctive 648. sj. 465, inj. 465, opt. 465, ybhraj- 'shine', pr. 422, pt. matdr- 'mother', inflected 360. impv. 466, pt. 467, impf. 427; root aor. 499, prec. mas- 'month' 44, 3, 340 (in- 428,468; pf. 485 ; root aor. 504; ps. aor. 501. flected). 499. sj. 502. inj. 503. P'- ybhn- 'consume', pr. 476. ymi- 'fix', pr. 470, sj. 471, 506; o- aor. opt. 511 ) -f-aor. ybhres- 'totter', pr. 422. inj. 471, impv. 472, part. inj. 524; des. 542, impf. 473, impf. 474; pf. 485; 544; ps.aor.50i; pp.S76a; ymamh- or mah- 'be great', ps.445, pt.447; gdv.578,1. gd. 590 b, 591 a. pr.422, opt. 425, impv. 426, ymiks- 'mix', pf. 485 (cp. p. bhisaj- 'heal'j den., pr. 568. pt. 427, impf. 428; pf. 482, 359 note 8), impv. 490. bhisajya- den., impv. 569 d. 485, sj.487, inj. 488, impv. ymigh- 'mingere', pr. pt. 427. bhisnaj- 'heal', den., impf. 568, 490, pt. 493; cs. 556, 556a, ymith- 'alternate', pr. 422, pt. 569 f. pt. 559e; inf. 584b, 585, 2. 435; pf- 485- yihl- 'fear', pr. 422, 458, sj. ymajj- 'sink', pr. 422; gd. ymis- 'mix', des. 542, impv.544. 423, inj. opt. 459, impv. 591a. ymis- 'wink', pr. 430, pt. 435; 426, 460, pt. 427, 461, impf. madgu- 38 c, 44 a 3 a (p. 36), inf. 587 a a. 428, 462; pf. 482 b, 485, 62,4 b note 3 (p. 57). ymiA-'mingeie' i^pr. 4.22, impv. pt. 492; plup. 495; root ymath- or matiih- 'stir', pr. 426, pt. 427; ft. 537, 539; aor. inj. 503, pt. 506; red. 422,476, Ej.423, impv.426, cs. 553 a; inf. 584b. aor. 514, inj. 516; j-aor. 478, pt. 479, impf. 428, 480; ymi- 'damage', pr. 439, 476, 522, pt. 527; cs. aor. 560; pf. 485; root aor. sj. 502; subj. 477, inj. 477, opt. inf. I. inj. 585, 2>-aor. 529, 531 ; ps. 440, pt. 479, impf. 480; ybhuj- 'enjoy', pr. 464, sj. 445. pt. 447; PP- 575 a 2. pf. 485; j-aor. inj. 524; ;; ;

I. Sanskrit Index. 445

intv. 545. 1. Pt- 548; inf. a-aor. inj. 5 10; red. aor. inj. y2. yu- 'separate', pr. 422, inj. opt. 584 a, 586 a. 516; M-aor. inj. 531 ; inf. 458; sj. 459, 459, mtdvdms; pf. pt. 492 b. 584 b. 459, impv. 426, 460, pt. ymil- 'wink', gd. 591 a. meghaya- den., ft. and pp. 570. 427; root aor. sj. 502, prec. ymrv- 'push', red. aor. inj. 516; pr. pt. 427 ; pp. ymed- 'be fat', pr. impv. 441 504; 573 «• cs. 554 a. j-aor. sj. 523, inj. 524; is- ymuc- 'release', pr. 430, ymyaks- 'be situated', pr. impv. aor.inj. 53i;intv.545,I, pt. 439. sj. 431, 440, impv. 426; pf. 485; rootaor.499; 548, impf. 549; cs. 557 b, aor. 434, pt. 435. impf. 436; ps. aor. 501. sj- 559 b; ps. 501 ; pp. pf. 485, sj. pt. ymruc- 'set', pr. pt. 427. 573; inf. 585,4, 587 b. 487, 493; _ plup. 495; root aor. 499, ymla- 'relax', cs. 558; pp. 573. yyuj- 'join', pr. 451, 464 (in- 500, prec. 504; o-aor. 508, flected), sj. 465, inj. 46s, sj. 509, inj. 510, impv. 512; ya- 'who', rel. pron. 398. impv. 426, 466, pt. 467, j-aor. 522, inj. 524, opt. yyaks- 'press on'(?), pr. inj. impf. 468; pf. 485, sj. 487, 525, des. 542, pt. 544; ps. 424, pt. 427; inf. 584 b. pt. 493; root aor. 500, sj. aor. 501; gd. 591 a. yyaj- 'sacrifice', pr. 451, opt. 502, inj. 503, opt. 504, impv. ymud- 'be merry', pr. 422, 425, impv. 426, pt. 427, 505, pt. 506; .r-aor. 522; pt. pf. impf. pf. 482bi, ft- impv- impv. 426, 427 ; 485 428; 485, 537. 539; PS.44S. root aor. opt. 504; y-aor. pt. 493; root aor. impv. 446, aor. 501; pp. 573; inf. opt. 532; ps. aor. 501; inf. 505; j-aor. 522, sj. 523,inj. 584 b; gd. 589 b, c. 584 b. 524; ja-aor. impv. 536; ft. yyudh- 'fight', pr. 422, 439, ymur- = mr- 'crush', pf. sj. 537; des. 542, sj. 544; 451, sj. 440. impv. 441, pt. 487. pp. 574; inf. 585.4.7; gd. 442, 455, impf- 443; Pf- ymus- 'steal', pr. 422, 476, 590 b. 485 ; root aor. sj. 502, impv. pt. 479, impf. 480; M-aor. yajnasn-, inflected 376. 505; j-aor. inj. 524; «-aor. inj. 531; pp. 575 b; inf. yyat- 'stretch', pr. 422, sj. 529, sj. 530. inj- 531. impv. 584 b; gd. 591a. 423, opt. 425, impv. 426, 533; des. 542, pt. 544; cs. yniuh- 'be dazed', pr. impv. pt. 427; pf. 485; root aor. 553b, sj. 559b; gdv. 578,4, 441; red.a0r.s14; cs.553b; pt. 506; cs. 555, sj. 559b, 58o;inf. 584b, 585,2, 586a. pt- 6- yyup- 'obstruct', pf. 485; cs. PP- 573; inf- 584 b. 559 ymiirch- 'thicken', impf. 428. yyabh- 'futuere', pr. 422, impv. S53,b; pp. 575 b. yi. mr- 'die', pr. 422, sj. 426. yusmaka 'of you' 391, 2. pron. a, 423; pf. 48s, pt. 492; root yyam- 'reach', pr. 422, 451, yuyam 'you', 49 391,2. aor. 500, inj. 503, opt. 504; sj. 423, inj. 424, opt. 425, yyes- 'be heated', pr. pt. impf. ft. 537. 539; cs. 557 c; ps. impv. 426, pt. 427, 427- 445, impv. 446; PP-576e. 428; pf. 482 b I, 485, pt. y2. mr- 'crush', pr. impv. 493; root aor. 499, sj. 502, yramh- 'hasten', pr. 422, pt, impf. pf.pt. 478; pt. 479; intv. 547 c. opt. 504, prec. 504, impv. 427, 428; 493 ymrks- 'stroke', pr. sj. 43 1. 505; a-aor. opt. 511; j-aor. cs. 556 a; gdv. 578, 4. ymrc- 'injure', j-aor. opt. 525 522, sj. 523, inj. 524, pt. yraks- 'protect', pr. 422, sj impv. pt. cs. 5S3!c; sj. 559b; pp.573- 527; 2>-aor.S29;intv.545,2, 423, 426, 427 impf. pf. pt.493 ymrj- 'wipe', pr. 45 1, impv. 546;cs.555;ps.pt.447. aor. 428; 485, gdv. (>-aor. a I. 454. Pt-45S. impf. 456; pf- 501; pp. 574, 2; aor. 530; pp. 575 yraj- ranj- 'colour', impf. 482, 485, opt. 489; jo-aor. 580; inf. 585, 4, Sft 586 a; or intv. lb, cs, 536; intv. 545, 2, 547, pt. gd. 591 b. 443; 545, 546; 548, impf. 549. 55'. gdv. yyas- 'be heated', pr. impv. ratlii- m. f. 'charioteer , inflect- 580; cs. 553 c, opt. 559 c; 460, pt. 442. ed ps. 445. pt-447; PP-S73; yya- 'go', pr. 45 1, opt- 453. 376. inj gdv. 578.4; gd. 590 b. impv. 454, pt. 455, impf. yrad- 'dig', pr. 422, 451, impv. pt. ymrd- 'be gracious', pr. sj. 456;pf. 485, pt. 492; j-aor. 424, 426, 427, sis- impf. pf. 431, impv. 434; cs. 554. 522, sj. 523, inj. 524; 428; 485; pp, aor. sj., opt., impv. b. sj- 559 b- 534, 575 or randh- 'make sub mrn- 'crush', pr. 430, mj.432, 534; ft- 537. pt- 538; pp- yradh- pr. impv. pf. impv. 434, impf. 436; red. 573; inf. 584 a, 585,4. ject', 441; root aor. impv. aor. 514. yyac- 'ask', pr. 422, opt. 425, 482; 505 pt. impf. o-aor. sj. 509, inj. 510; ynifd- 'crush', pf. opt. 489- . impv. 426, 427, cs. aor. sj. inj. 516 y7nrdh- 'neglect', pr. 422, sj. 428; w-aor. sj. 530; red. 515, opt. 575 b; inf. 586 b. w-aor.inj.53i; mtv.545,lb; 431 ; root aor. 504; 5S6a;pp. pr. pt. cs. a, sj. b. z>-aor. sj. 530, inj. 531. yyad- 'unite'P), 427. 556 559 yran- 'rejoice', pr. ymrs- 'touch', pr. 430, sj. yi.yu- 'unite', pr. 430, 45 1. 422, 439, inj- impv- inj. 424, impv.426; pf.482, 431, impv. 434. pt- 435; sj. 431,452, 432. sj. impv. 490; impf. 436; pf- 482, 485; 434. 454, pt- 435. 455. 485, 487, des. plup. z>-aor. inj. jo-aor. 536; intv. 545.2. impf. 436; pf. 485; 495; 529, pt. intv. 531; cs. 556. S47 a; gd. 591 a. 542, 544; 545.1. randhanaya- den., impf. f- \mr?- 'not heed', pr. 439; 546, pt. 548; pp. 573; gd. 5^9 yrap- 'chatter', pr. 422, inj. pf. 485; root aor. inj. 503- 591a. ; ;;

446 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

impf. ru- 424, opt. 425, pt. 427, yr. 'cry', pr. 430, inj. impv. 434, pt. 435, '™P''- 428; intv. 545, I b, 546. 432, impv. 434, pt. 435; 436; pf. 485; cs. 556 a. yraps- 'be full', pr. 422; pf. w-aor. 529; intv. 545, I a, yvac- 'speak', pr. 458, impv. 485- pt. 548, impf. 549. 460; pf. 482 b I, 485, pt. yral/h- or rambk- 'grasp', pr. y2. ru- 'break', M-aor. 529; 493; red. aor. 514, sj. 515, 422, sj. 423, inj. 424, opt. intv. 545, I, 546, pt- 548. inj. 516, opt. 517, impv. 435, impv. 426, pt. 427, ynic- 'shine', pr. 422, inj. 518; ft. 537, 539, pt. 538; impf. 428; pf. 482, 485, 424, impv. 42G,pt.427, impf. intv. 545, lb, impf. 549; ps. pt. 493; j-aor. 522, pt. 428; pf. 485, inj. 48S, opt.489, 445, aor. 501; pp. 574, I; 527; inf. 584b, 586 a; gd. pt. 492, 493; root aor. pt. gdv. 578,4, 581; inf. 584b, 591 a. 506; red. aor. 5 14; M-aor. 585, 4- yram- 'rejoice', pr. 422, inj. 529, opt. 532; intv. pt. 548; yvanc- 'move crookedly', pr. 424, impv. 426, impf. 428, OS. 553 b, 554; inf. 584 b. 422; pf. 482, 485; ps. 445, 480; red.aor. 514, sj. 515, rucaya- den., inj. 569 b. impv. 446, pt. 447. inj. 516; J-aor. 522, inj. yruj- 'break', pr. 430, sj. 431, yvat- 'apprehend', pr. opt. 524; «>-aor. inj. 534; cs. inj. 432, opt. 433, impv. 425, pt. 427 ; red. aor. 514; 555 a. 434, pt. 435, impf- 436; cs. 555. yramb- 'hang down', pr. 422, pf. 485; root. aor. inj. 503; yvad- 'speak', pr. 422, sj. pt. 427. red. aor. 514; jjp. 576 b; 423, inj. 424, opt. 425, 433, yi.ra- 'give', pr. 451, impv. inf 584 b. impv. 426, pt. 427, impf. 460, pt. 461, impf. 456; pf. \rud- 'weep', pr. 45 1, sj. 452, 428; pf. 485; w-aor. 529, 485, impv. 490, pt- 492, pt. 455; a-aor. 508; cs. sj. 530, inj. 531; ft. 537, 493 ; root aor. impv. 505 553 b- 539; intv. 545,1 b,S46, 547 c, j-aor. 522, sj. 523, opt. 525, yi. rudh- 'grow', pr. 422, inj. opt. 559 c; ps. pt. 447, impv. 526; pp. 573. 424, pt. 435, impf. 428. pp. 575 b. yz. ?-a-'bark', pr. 439, pt. 442. y2. rudh- 'obstruct', jjr. 451, yvadh- 'slay', pr. opt. 425, yras- 'give', pr. pt. 427. 464, sj. 465, impv. 466, pt. impv. 426; root aor. prec. yraj- 'be liingly', pr. 422, 467, impf. 468; pf. 485; 504; M-aor. 529, sj. 530, 451, sj. 423, inj. 424, 452, root. aor. 499; s-aor. 508, inj. 531, impv. 533. impv. 426, pt. 427, impf. inj. 510; .f-aor. 522; ps. yvan- 'win', pr. 422, 470: sj. 428; w-aor. 529; cs. 556a, 445; gd. 591 a. 423,431, 471, inj- 424, 471. sj. 559 b; inf. 585, I. yrup- 'breali', red-aor. 514; opt. 425, 433, 471, impv. yradh- 'succeed' sj. pr. 422, I'P- 575 b. 426, 472, pt. 473, impf. 423, impv. 441, pt. 442; ruvanya- den., inj. 569 b. 474; pf. 482, 485, sj. 487, pf. root aor. sj. \rus- 485 ; 502, 'be vexed', pr. 422. pt. 492 ; root aor. impv. 505 prec. 504; j--aor. 522; is- y-i-uh- 'ascend', pr. 422, sj. j-aor. sj. 523, inj. 524, opt. aor. inj. 531; ft. 537.539; 423, opt. 425, impv. 426, 525; z>-aor. sj.530, opt. 532; cs. a; ps. aor. gdv. pt. impf. pf. 556 501 ; 427, 428; «>-aor. opt. 534; des. 542, inf. 578, 4| 585,7. 485; root aor. pt. 506; a- 543 (inflected), sj. 544; cs. y;-/- or ri- 'flow', pr. 439, 476, aor. 508, sj. 509, inj. 510, 555; PP-574,2a; inf. 585,4. inj- 477, pt-479; impf.4So. opt. 511; j-a-aor. 536; des. vanusa- den, inj. 569 b. yHkh- 'scratch', jDr. impv. 434. 542, pt. 544; cs. 553 b; vanusya- den., sj. 569 a. yric- 'leave', pr. 464, sj. 465, pp. 573; inf. 586 a; gd. yvand- 'greet', pr. 422, impv. inj. impf. 465, 468; pf. 4S5, 590 b, 591 a. 426, pt. 427; pf. 485; is- opt. 489. pt. 492, 493; plup- yrej- 'tremble', pr. 422, inj. aor. opt. 532; ps. aor. 501 root aor. inj. impv. 495; 503, 424, pt. 427, impf. 428; cs. gdv. 578, 4; inf. 585, 7. 505; j-aor. 522; ps. 445, 554 «- yi. vap- 'strew', pr. 422, inj. impf. 448, aor. 501. 424, impv. 426, pt. 427, yrip- 'smear', pf. yiap- 'prate', 485; pp. pr. impv. 426, impf. 428; pf. 482 b 1, 485 573- pt. intv. I 427 ; 545, b, 546; ps. 445,pt. 447; pp. 574, 1; ynbh- 'sing', jir. pt. 422, 427, cs. 555; PP- 575 b. gd. 591 a. impf 42S; ps. pf. 445; 485. ylabh- 'take', pr. 422, opt. y2. vap- 'shear', pr. (2. s., ]/«.'- 'tear', pr. 430, impv. 425; pf. 485, pt. 493; des. 3 pi. act.) 422. pt. pt. 434, 435- 542, 544; gd. 590 b. vapusya- den., impf. 569 f.' yris- 'be hurt', pr. 439, sj. yii/ih- 'scratch', impf. 436; vam, 1. a. aor. of w?"- 'cover' 423, 440, inj. 424, opt. 440; M-aor. inj. 531; pp. 575 a 2. 66 C/S2, 499. <7-aor. sj. inj. pt. 509, 510, yiip- 'smear', pr. 430; j-aor. yvam- 'vomit', pr. sj. 452, 512; red. aor. inj. 516, opt. • 522. impf. 456. 517, prec. des. yii- 517; 542, 'cling', pr. 422, impv. varivasyd- den., sj. 569 a, impv. pt. 544; cs. 553, 554; inf. 426; pp. 576 d; gdv. 578,2. 569 d. ,585,7- ylup- 'break', pr. opt. 433; vareya-, den., sj. 569 a. rifanya- den., inj., impv. ps- 445; gd- 591 a. yval; j-aor. sj. 523. b, d. 569 yiubh- 'desire', pr. pt. 442; yvalg- 'bound', pr. 422, impf. yrih- 'liclc', pr. 451, pt. 455; cs. 533 b. 428. pf. pt. 492; intv. I a, 545, vavrdhdnt; anom. pf. pt, p. pt- 548, 551; pp. 573- yva&s- 'increase', pr. 430, 363 note 7. ;

I. Sanskrit Index. 447

yvas- 'desire', pr. 422, 451, 492 b; cs. 553; pp. 575 b; inj. 477, opt. 477, impv. 458, sj. 423, inj. 424, opt. inf. 585, 8; gd. 590 b. 478, pt. 479, impf. 480; 42s, impv. 426, 4S4, pt. yz. vid- 'find', pr. 430, 451, pf. 485; root aor. 500, sj. 4SS, impf. 428, pt. 435; inj. 432, opt. 433, impv. 502, inj. 503, opt. 504, pt. pf. 482, 485; intv. 545, I. 434. 454, pt- 455. impf. 506; j-aor. 522; pp. 573; yi. vas- 'shine', pr. 430, sj. 436; pf. 485, sj. 487, pt. gdv. 578, 2, 580. 431. inj- 432, opt. 433. 492; o-aor. (inflected) 508, yvjy- 'twist', pr. 422, 464, impv. 434, pt. 435, impf. sj. 509, inj. 510, opt. 511, sj. 465, impv. 466, impf. pf. pt. 436 ; 485, 492, 493 prec. 511, impv. 512, pt. 468; pf. 482, 485, opt. 489, plup. 495; root aor. 500; 512; j-aor. 522; intv. 547 a; impv. 490, pt. 492, 492 b; j-aor. cs. sj. 522; 555; pp. ps. 445. aor. 501 ; pp. 576 a; root aor. 499, 500, 502, 574; inf. 585, 4, 588 a. gdv. 579; inf. 584 b, 585, inj. 503, opt. 504, prec. \'2. vas- 'wear', pr. 451, inj. 4; gd. 590 b. 504, impv. 505; a-aor. 508; 452, opt. 453, pt. 435, impv. vid- 'finding', inflected, 319. j-aor. 522, inj. 524; intv. 454, pt. 455. impf- 4S6; yvidh- 'worship', pr. sj. 431, 545, 3, cs. 550 c; cs. 553 c; pf. 482, 485, pt. 493; is- inj. 432. opt. 433, pt. 435. inf. 584 b, 585, I, 7; gd. aor. 529; cs. 555, ft. 537, impf. 436. 590 a. 560. yvUtdh- 'lack', pr. 430. yvrl- 'turn', pr. 422, 458, inj. 1/3. vas- 'dwe'l', pr. 422, inj. vasiiya- den., sj. 569 a. 424, impv. 426, pt. 427, 424, impv. 426, pt. 427, yvip- 'tremble', pr. 422, pt. impf. 428; pf. 482, 485, sj. impf. 428; pf. 485, pt. 492, 427, impf. 428; pf. 485; 487, opt. 489, impv. 490, 493; root aor. pt. 506; root aor. pt. 506; red. aor. pt. 492; plup. 495; root j-aor. 522; cs. 555, sj. 514; cs. 553 a, 554. aor. 499, 500, sj. 502, impv. 559 b. vibhu-, inflected, 383. 505; s-aor. 508; red. aor. yvah- 'carry', pr. 422, 451, vis-, inflected, 350. 514; j-aor. 522; ft. 537, sj. 423, opt. 425, impv. yvis- 'enter', pr. 430, sj. 43 1, 539; des. 542; intv. 545, 426, pt. 427, impf. 428; inj. 432, opt. 433, impv- 2,3, 546; cs. 553c, sj. 559b; pf. 482 b I, 485; root aor. 434. pt- 435. impf. 436; PP- 573; inf- 584 b, cs. opt. 504, impv. 505, pt. pf. 483, 485,. opt. 489, pt. 585, 7; gd. 591 a. 506; j--aor. 522, sj. 523, 492, 492 b; plup. 495; root yvrdh- 'grow', pr. 422, sj. inj.524;ft.537, S39;ps.445, aor. 500, impv. 505; J-aor. 423, inj. 424, impv. 426, sj.446, pt. 447; pp. 574; inf. 522; ij-aor. 531; cs. 553 a, pt. 427, impf. 428; pf. 482, 585. 4, 7. 586 b; gd. 591 a. opt. 559 c, pp. 561 a; 485, sj. 487, inj. 488, opt. yi. va- 'blow', pr. 439, 451, inf. 586 a; gd. 591 a. 489, impv. 490, pt. 492, impv. 454, pt. 455, impf. visvaiaspad- 'having feet on 493; a-aor. 508, pt. 512 a; 456; cs. 558. every side', 319 a. red. aor. 5^4; .f-aor. pt. y2. va- 'weave', pr. 439, yvis- 'be active', pr. 458, sj. 527; «-aor. opt. 532; cs. impv. 441, pt. 442, impf. 459, impv. 460, pt. 427, 553 c, sj. 559 b, pt. 559 e; 443; pf- 485; ft. 537. pt- impf. 42S, 462; pf. 485; intv. gdv. 580; inf. 584 b, 538; PP- 574. i«; inf. 585. is-^ox. sj. 530; intv. 545, I a, 585, I, 7- 4, 5, 586 b. 546, 547 b, pt. 548; inf. yvrs- 'rain', pr. 422, impv. -vams, pf. pt. suffix, l8l, 347, 584 b. 426, 434, pt. 427; pf. 482, 491. yvist- or vesf- 'wrap', pr. impv. impv. 490, pt. 493; v-aor. vac-, inflected, p. 180. 426; cs. 553. 529; cs. 553 c; gd. 590 a. v.ijaya- den., impv. 569 d; yz/J 'enjoy', pr. 45 1, sj.452, inj. vrsiiya- den., impv. 569 d, inf. 585, 7. 4S2,impv.454,pt.455; impf. aor. 570. yvanch- 'desire', pr. impv., 456; pf. 485; j-aor. sj. 523; yvrh- 'tear', pr. 430, inj 432, 426. intv. 545, I a. 551; ps. 445, opt. 433, impv. 434, impf. vdm 'we two' 391, I. pt. 447, inf. 585, 3. 436; pf. 485; M-aor. 536; yvas- 'bellow', pt. 442; pf. yvld- 'make strong', cs. 554 a- cs- 553 c; ps- aor. 501. 482, 485, pt. 493; plup. vTraya- den., impv. 569 d, vidi-, loc. sing. p. 284 (mid.). 495; red. aor. 514; intv. impf. 569 f. yven- 'long', pr. 422, inj. 545, I b, pt. 548, impf. 549- vTldya-., sj. 559 b, impv. 424, impv. 426, pt. 427, c- impf. yvas = 3. vas- (?) pr. 422. '559 d, pp. 575 428. vi- 'bird' 38 1 a. yi. vr- 'Sover', pr. 422, 470, yvyac- 'extend', pr. 458, inj. yvic- 'sift', pr. 464, impv. 466, inj. 424, 47'. impv. 472, 459, impf. 462; pf. 482 b I, pt. 467, impf. 468; pf. pt. pt. 473, impf. 474; pf.485, 485, inj. 488. 492; ps. impv. 446. pt. 492; plup. 495; root yvyath- 'waver', pr. 422, pt. yvij- 'tremble', pr. 430, impv. aor. 499, 500, inj. 503, 427; is-3.or. sj. 530, inj. 434, pt- 435. impf- 436; impv. 505, pt. 506; red. 531; cs. 556, aor. 560 a. pf. 485; root aor. inj. 503; aor. 514; j-aor. sj. 523; yvyadh- 'pierce', pr. 439, red. aor. inj. 5 16; intv. intv. 545, 3; cs. 557 c, sj. inj. 440, impv. 441, pt. ps. aor. impf. pf- pt. 545, 1 a, SSI- 559 b; ft. 537, 560; 442, 443; 492; yi. vui- 'know', pr. 451, sj. 501. PP- 573; inf. 585. 4; pp. 574, I ; inf. 584 b. 452, opt. 453, impv. 454, g1. 590 a, b, c, 591 b. yvya- 'envelope', pr. 439, impf. 456; pf. 485, pt. y2. z/-- 'choose', pr. 470, 476, opt. 440, impv. 441, pt. ;

448 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

442, impf. 443; pf- 48s. inj. 510; ps. 445, sj. 446, ysram- 'be weary', pr. 439; pt. 493; fl-aor. 508; pp. aor. 501. pf. 485, pt. 493; fl-aor. 574, 3- yi. il- 'lie', pr. 422, 451, opt. 508, inj. 510; z>-aor. 529, pr. impv. impf. impv. inj. yvraj- 'proceed', 453, 428, 456, , 531; pp. 574, 2«. 426, pt. 427; pf. 485. 441, 454. pt. 455; pf- sravasya- den., sj. 569 a. yvrad- 'weaken', impf. 428. 482 b 1 a, pt. 493; j-aor. sj. yira- (sri-, if) 'boil', pr. yvrasc- 'cut up', pr. 430, sj. 523; !>aor. 529; inf. 585, 7. 476, pt. 479, impf. 480; cs. 431, inj. 432, impv. 434, y2. si- 'sharpen' = ysa-, root 558, sj. 559 b; pp.574, I a. pt. 435, impf. 436; ps. aor. 500. yhi- 'resort', pr. 422, sj. 423, impv. 446; pp. 576 b; gd. sikaya- den., ft. and pp. 570. impv. 426, pt. 427, impf. 590 b. yiuc- 'gleam', pr. 422, inj. 428; pf. 485, opt. 489, pt. yvradh- 'stir up', pr. inj. 424, 424, impv. 426, pt. 427, 493; plup. 495; root aor. pt. 427. impf. 428; pf. 485, pt. 499; red. aor. 514; j-aor. yzilag- pursue(?) gd. 591 a. 492, 493, opt. 489, impv. 522; ps. aor. 501; cs. 558 a; yvli- 'crush' = yW:-. 490; a-aor. 508, pt. 512 a; PP- 573- red. aor. 514, inj. ^\(>; is- yiris- 'clasp', pr. sj. 423 yiams- 'praise', 422, sj. 423, aor. inj. 531; intv. 545, I a, a-aor. inj 510; inf. 587 a. opt. 425, impv. 426, pt. 547 a, pt. 548; cs. 553 b, ysrJ- 'mix', pr. 476; pp. 427, impf. 428; root aor. 554; ps. aor. 501; inf 573 a; inf. 585, I. impv. 505 ; j>-aor. 529, sj. ..585. 7- ysru- 'hear', pr. 451, 470, 53°. inj- 531; cs. 556 a; suci-, inflected, 381. sj. 471, opt. 471, impv. ps. 445, pt. 447, aor. 501; yhij- pf.pt. 493 (p.364note2). 472, pt. 473, impf. 474; gdv. 578, 4; inf. 584 b. yia«(j?/4- 'purity', pr.422,impv. pf. 485, sj. 48 7, opt. 489, pt. yiak- 'be able', pr. 470, sj. 426,434; cs.554a; pp.574,2. 492; plup. 495; root. aor. 471, impf. 474; pf. 485; yhcbh- or sunibh- 'beautify', 499, sj- 502, prec. 504, impv. root aor. sj. 502, opt. 504, 422, 430, sj. 423, impv. 505; a-aor. inj. 510, des. impv. 505; fl-aor. 508, inj. 426, pt. 427, 435 ; root aor. 542 b, pt. 544, gdv. 544 i, 510, opt. 511; des. 542,2, pt. 506; red. aor. 514; 580; cs. 557 b; ps. 445, pt. 544; inf. 585, 4. cs. 553 b, 554; PP- 575^1; aor. 501; pp. 573; gdv. ysat- 'cut in pieces', cs. inf. 5S4 b, 585, 1, 586 a. 578, I, 579; gd. 590 b, 555- ysus- 'dry', pr. 439, impv. 59' b. |/l. sad- 'prevail', pf. 482, 441; cs. 553 b. ysrus- 'hear', pr. inj. 424, 485, pt. 493. yiil- or hi- 'swell', pr. pt. impv. 426, pt. 427, impf. sad- 'fair, ft. pf- sj. 1/2. 537, 539. . 427; 482, 485, 487, 428. ysap- 'curse', pr. 422, sj. 423, opt. 489, pt. 492, 493 (p. ysvaTtc- 'spread', pr. impv. pt. impf. pf. 427, 428; 364 note 3); j-aor. pt. 527; 426, pt. 427; pf. sj. 487 j-aor. inj. 4^5; 524. inf. 588 c. (cp. p. 361 note 3); cs. yi. sam- 'labour', pr. 439, yi}-)i- = ysf- 'crush', pr. 556 a. impv. pt. pf. impv. 441, 442; 434. svdn-, accentuation, p. 80 485, sj. 487, pt. 493; z>-aor. ysrdh- 'be defiant', inj. 424, (bottom). 529- impv. pt. ykias- 426, 427; cs. 'blow', 45 r, impv. 454, iam- 'be quiet', impf. y2. 553 c. pt. 455; intv. 545, lb; cs. red. aor. 428; 514; cs. 556; yif- 'crush', 476, impv. 478; 555; inf 587 a. pp. 574, 2 a. pt. 479, impf. 480; pf. 485; yivit- 'be bright', root aor. y'sas- 'cut', pr. impv. 454. 2>-aor. 529, inj. ps. pt- 531 ; 499. 506; red. aor. 514; \sa- 'sharpen', pr. impv. aor. 458, 445. 501 ; pp. 573 a, j-aor. 522. 460, pt. 461, impf. 436, 576 e; mf. 587 b; gd. 591a. 462; pf. pt. 493; pp. 574, socis-, inflected, 342. sat 'six' 43 a 2. gd. 3; 591 a. yicand- or cand- intv. 545, 3. sat 53 a 2. ysas- 'order', pr. 422, 45 1, yicam- 'labour'(?), pr. inj. 477. ysthlv- 'spue', impf. 428. sj. 452, impv. 454, pt. 455, yiaii- 'drip', pr. 422. impf pt. 428, 456; 485, ysnath- 'pierce', pr. sj. 452, sa-, adv. particle in com- inj. impv. 488, 490; root impv. 454; red. aor. 514, pounds, 250, 656. aor. sj. 502; a-aor. 508, sj. inj. 516; zV-aor. impv. 533; sakhi-, inflected, 380 a. inj. pt. 512a; cs. 509, 510, pp. 556; cs. pp. 575 c; inf. ysagh- 'be equal to', impf. «• ,574. 3 584 b. 474; root aor. sj. 502. yiiks- = des. of iak- 'be yiya- 'coagulate', pp. 574, 3, ysac- 'accompany', pr. 422, able', pr. 422, sj. 423, inj. 576 c. 458, sj. 423, inj. 424, 459, 424, opt. impv. yh'aih- 425, 426, 'slacken', pr. 476, pt. opt. 425, impv. 426, 460, pt. 427, impf. 428: these 479. impf. 480; pf. 485; pt. 427 b, 461, impf 428; forms strictly speaking red. aor. inj. 516, impv. pf. 485, pt. 492; root aor. belong to 543, 544. 518; cs. 556. impv. 505, pt. 506; j-aor. yiihj- 'twang', pr. srathar-yd- 451. den. 567 d. 522, sj. 523, inj. 524, opt. sitipad- 'white-footed' 319 a. srathaya- den. d. 564 a, 569 525; inf. 585, 7, 588 c. yHm- 'labour' = yi. iam-. had- 'heart', used adverbially saca 'with', prep, with loc' ysif- 'leave', a-aor. sj. 509, with ykf- and ydha-, 652. 619. I. Sanskrit Index. 449 ysaj- and sanj- "hang", pr. 422, 505; a-aor.opt.su; cs. sj. pt. 447, aor. 501; pp. 573; impv. 426, impf. 428 ; j-aor. 559 t; pp. 574, 3; inf. gd. 591 a. 522. 584 a; gd. 591 a. ysfp- 'creep', pr. 422, sj. yscid- 'sit', pr. 422, 451, sj. sakdm 'with', prep. with. inst. 423, inj. 424, impv. 426, 423, inj. 424, opt. 425, 623. pL 427, impf. 428; a-aor. impv. 426, pt. 427, impf. ]/sadh- 'succeed', pr. 422, inj. 508, inj. 510; des. 542, 428; pf. 485; opt. 487, 424, impv. 426, pt. 427, pt. ,544; gd. 591 a. pt. 492; o-aor. 508, inj. red. aor. sj. 515, inj. 516. senani-, inflected, 376. 510, opt. 511, impv. 512, y«- 'bind', 476, impv. 478; ysev- 'attend upon', pr. 422, pt. 512; red. aor. 514; pf. 485, sj. 487; root aor. impv. 426. j-aor. sj. 523; cs. sj. 559 b; impv. 505; inf. 585, 4. yskand- 'leap', pr. 422, sj. ps. aor. SOI; pp. 576 a; ysic- 'pour', pr. 422, 430, sj. 423, impv. 426, pt. 427, gdv. 578, 4; inf. 584 b, 431, inj. 432, opt. 433, impf. 428; pf. 485; root 586 a; gd. 591 a. impv. 434, pt. 435, impf. aor. 499, inj. 503 ; intv. sadka- 'together', adv. 634 a. 436; pf. 485; a-aor. 508; 545, 3, 547, impf. 549; PP- sadhamds, nom. oi sadhamdd- ps. 445, pt. 447, impf. 576 a; inf. 584 b, 587 a. 66 eft 319 a. 448; pp. 573; gd. 591 a. yskabh- or skambh- 'prop', ysan- 'gain', 470, sj. 471, opt. ]/I. sidh- 'repel', pr. 422, pr. 476, pt. 479; pf- 482, 471, impv. 472, impf. 474; impv. 426, pt. 427, impf. 485, pt. 493; pp. 575 b; pf. 485, pt. 492; a-aor. 508, 428; pf. 485; intv. 545,1, inf._584 b; gd. 590 a. inj. 510, opt. 511, pt. 512; pt. 548; gd. 591 ». skabhaya- den., impf. 569 f. M-aor. 529, sj. 530; ft. 537, "|/2. sidh- 'succeed', pr. 439. ysku- 'tear', pr. 470; intv. 539, pt. 538; des. 542, sj. sTda-, present base of sad- 'sit', 545, I' 551- 8. 'make', 544; intv. 545, 3; pp. 574, p 57 note yskr- = kf- p. 55 10. 2; gdv. 581; inf. 585, ysTv- 'sew', pr. impv. 441, note 2,3- pt. 442; pp. 573 «; gd. ystan- 'thunder', pr. impv. sanitur 'apart from', prep. 591 a. 426, 454; root aor. inj. with ace. 620. su 'weir, adv. particle, as 503 (or. pr. inj. 452); is-

sanuiar 'far from', prep, with first member of compounds, aor. 529; intv. 545 > 2> 547; abl. 621. 251, 658. cs. 556. ysap- 'serve', pr. 422, inj. ysu- 'press', pr. 430, 470, ystabh- or stambh- 'prop', pr. impf. 424, opt. 425, pt. 427, sj. 471, impv. 472, pt. 476, impv. 478, 480; pf. pt. plup- impf. 428; pf. 485; red. 473; pf. 485, pt. 492,493; 485, 492, 493 ; ' gd. b. aor. inj. 516. root aor. impv. 505, pt. 495 ;PP-S75b; 590 pr. saparyd- den., sj. 569 a, opt. 506; ps. 445, inj. 446, aor. yslu- 'praise', 422, 451, 569 c, impv. 569 d, impf. 501; gdv. 581; inf. 585,4, sj. 423, 452, inj. 424, 452, impv. 569 f; aor. 570; gdv. 587 b. opt. 425, 453, 454, 580. sumdd 'with', prep. with, inst., pt. 427, 455; impf- 456; pf- sam 'with', prep. with. inst. 624. 4S5, sj. 487, pt. 492. 493; j-aor. 522 (in- 593 note 3; adv. 'together' susvaya- den., inj. 5^9 t)- plup. 495; inj. as first member of com- ysu- 'generate', pr. 430, 451, flected), sj. 523, 524; pounds 250. SJ..431, inj. 452, impv. 434, ft. 537, 339; ps- 445, Pt- gdv. sama- 'any', pron. 399. pt. 435, 455. impf. 436, 447, PP- 573; 579; gd- saranyd- den., sj. 569 a. 456; pf. 482b I, 485; red. inf. 585, la, 4, 7; sarvapad- 'all-footed' 319 a. aor. 514; z>-aor. 529, sj. 590 b, 591 b. pr. impv. ysas- 'sleep', pr. 458, impv. 530, inj. 531; ft. 537, pt. ystubh- 'praise', 422, I, pt. 427. 454, pt- 455, impf- 456- 538; intv. 545, 546; 426, pr. sdh; inflected, 352. inf. 585, 4, 5. ystr- 'strew', 470, 476, impv. ysak- prevail', pr. 422, 451, ysud- 'put in order', pf. 485, sj. 471, inj. 477, red. aor. pt. impf. 480; pf. 2, sj. 423, opt. 4;25, impv. sj. 487; 514, 478, 479, pt. ; root aor. 426, pt. 427, impf. 428; impv. 518; CS. 554 a, sj. 485, 493 499, sj. inj. 503; j-aor. opt. pf. 482, 485, sj. 487, opt. 559 b. 502, impv. w-aor. 529; ps. aor. 489, pt. 492, 492 b, 493; ysr- 'flow', pr. 458, 525; pf. pp. 576 e; inf. 584 a, root aor. opt. 504, prec. 426, 460, pt. 461 ; 485, 501; 588 c. 504; j-aor. 522, sj. 523, pt. 492, 493; a-aor. 508; 585, 4. ystka- 'stand', pr. 422, sj. opt. 525, pt. 527; w-aor. j-aor. sj. 523; ft. 537,539, intv. 423, inj. 424. opt. 425, impv. 529, opt. 532; ft. 537, 539; pt. 538; 545, 2, 546, c; inf. 426, pt. 427, impf. 428; des. 542, pt. 544; pp. 573; pt. 548; cs. 557 pf. 485, pt. 492, 493; root inf. 585, X, 7; gd. 59.1 a. 585, 4, 5- sj. aor. (inflected), 499, sahd 'with' prep, with inst. ysrj- 'emit', pr. 422, 430, 498 inj. opt. 622; in compounds 656. 43T, inj- 432. opt. 433, 500, sj. 502, 503, impv. pt. 506; sahasrapad- 'thousand-footed', impv. 434, pt. 427, 435, 504, 505, pf- opt. a-aor. 508; red. aor. 514, 319 a. impf. 436; 485, plup. inj. 516; i-aor. inj. 524; ysd- 'bind', pr. 430, impv. 489, pt. 493; 495; aor. 500; j-aor, 522, ft. 539; cs. 558, aor. 560; 434, impf. 436; root aor. root inj- ps- pp. 574, 3; gd. 591 a. sj. 502, opt. 504, impv. sj. 523, 524; 445, tndo-arische Philologie. I. 4. 29 ;

45° !• Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar. I. Sanskrit Index,

ysHa- 'bathe', pr. 45 1, imp v. 514, inj. 516; cs. 557 b; des. 542 c I; cs. aor. 560; 454. Pt-4SS; cs. 558; gdv. inf. 585, 4, 5- gd. 591 a- S8i; gd. 590 b. svd- 'own' 400, I ; 'his' etc. yhas- 'go emulously', pr. pt. ysniA- 'be moist', cs. 553. 401 c. 427. ysnu- 'distil', pr. impv. 454. ysvaj- 'embrace', pr. 422, sj. ")//4z- 'impel', jDr. 470, inj. 47 1, yspai- 'see', pf. 485, pt. 493; 423, inj. 424, impv. 426; impv. 472, pt. 427, 473; root aor. 500; r.s. 555. pf. 485, pt. 493; plup. 495; root aor. 499, impv. 505; ]/s/>r- 'win', pr. 470, sj. 471, inf. 584 b. pt. 506; ffl-aor. 508; J'- aor. impv. 472; root aor. 499, svdiavas-, 44, 3, dat. pi. p. 226 522; gdv. 581; inf. 584 a. sj. 502, inj.S03, impv. 505; note 2, and p. 233. yhinis- 'injure', pr. 422, 464, J- aor. 522; inf. 585, I; gd. ysvad- and svdd- 'sweeten', impv.466, pt. 467; pf. 485; 590 b. pr. 422, sj. 423, impv. 426; plup. 495; M-aor. inj. 531; ysprdh- 'contend', pr. 422, red. aor. inj. 516; cs. 556; ps. pt. 447; pp. 575 a i; pt. 427; pf. 485, pt. 493; PP- 573 a- gdv. 581 a; gd. 590 b. plup. 495; root aor. 500, ysvan- 'sound', w-aor. 529, yhinv- = hi- 'impel', pr.impv. pt. 506; inf. 585, I, 586 b; inj.53i;intv. 545.3. sj. 547; 426. gd. 591 a. cs. 556; cs. pp. 575 c. yhid- 'be hostile', pf. 482, yspri- 'touch', pr. 430, sj. 431, ysvap- 'sleep', pr. impv. 426, 485, pt 493; red. aor. 514; inj. 432, impv. 434, impf. 454. pt- 455; pf- 482 b I, cs. 554 a; pp. 575 a 3. 436; pf. sj. 487; red. aor. 485, pt. 492, 493; red. aor. yhu- 'sacrifice', pr. 451, 45S, sj- 515. inj- S'S; JO-aor. 514; ft. 537, 539; cs. 555; sj-459, opt459. impv. 460, 536; inf. 584 b. PP; 574; gd- 590 b. pt.461, impf. 462; ft 537; yspfk- 'be eager', cs. 554, svaydm 'self 400, 2. ps. aor. 501. opt- 559 c, gdv. 561 b, ymar- 'sound', pr. 422, sj. yhil- 'call', pr. 422, 430, 45 1, 579- 423, impv. 426, impf. 428; 458, inj. 424, 432, opt. 433, ysphur- 'jerk', pr. 430, sj. pf. inj. 488; j--aor. 522; cs. pt.427, 435, impf. 436; pf. 431, inj. 432, impv. 434, 556- 485; root aor. 500, inj. 503; pt. 435, impf. 436. ysvid- 'sweat', pf. pt. 493 a-aor. 508; j'-aor.522; intv. ysphurj- 'rumble', pr. 422; pp. 576 a. 545.1, 546,547, impf- 549; cs. 554 a. ps. 445, pt. 447; pp. 573; ysphf- 'jerk', ir-aor. inj. yhan- 'strike', pr. 451, sj. 452, gdv. 578,2; inf. 585,4,7. S3'- inj. 452, opt. 453, impv. yi.hr- 'take', 422, 451, sj. smad 'with', prep, with inst., 454. pt- 455; pf- 485. sj. 423, opt. 425, impv. 426, pt. ft. pt. impf. pf. 625. 487, 492; 537. 539, 427, 428 ; 485 ; ysmi- 'smile', pr. 422, inj. pt. 538; des. 542, sj. 544; j-aor. 522; des. 542; inf. 424, pt. 427; pf. pt. 493. intv. 545,3. 546, 547, pt 585, l; gd. 591b. ysmi"- 'remember', pr. sj. 423, 548, 548 a; ps. 445, impv. 1/2. hr- 'be angry', pr. 476, impv. 426. 446, pt. 447, impf. 456; inj- 477, impv. 478, pt ysyand- 'move on', pr. 422, PP- 574.2; gdv. 581; inf. 479- impv. 426, pt. 427; pf. 585. 4. 5; gd. 590 t>, c, yhrs- 'be excited', pr. 422, 482 b I, 485; red. aor. 514; 591 b. 439. in>pv. 426, pt 427; j-aor. 522; intv. 545, 3; yhar- 'be gratified', pr. 439, pf. pt. 493; intv. 545, 2, cs. 556 a; pp. 576 a; inf. sj. 440, impv. 441, pt. 442, 547, pt- 548; cs. 553 c; pp. 584 b, 585, 7. impf. 443. 575 b. \sras- 'fair, root aor. 66 c 2, hastin-, inflected 333. yhes- 'whinney', pr. pt. 427. 499 ; a-aor. opt. 511; red. y\. ha- 'leave', pr. 458, sj. yhmi- 'hide', pr. 45 1; gdv. aor. 514; cs. 556 a; gd. 459, opt. 459, impv. 460, 579- 590 b. pt. 461, impf. 462; pf. 485; yhri- 'be ashamed', root aor. sras, 2. 3. J- aor. VW'i 522. j-aor. 522, inj. 524; jir-aor. pt. 506. ysridh- 'blunder', pr. 422, inj. 534; ft. 537, 539; cs. yhva- 'call', pr. 439, sj. 440, pt. impf. 2 impv. 426, 427, p. 396 note ; ps. 445, impv. opt. 440, impv. 441, pt. 428; (7-aor. inj. 510, pt. 446, aor. 501; pp. 575 b a, 442, impf. 443. S12. 576 c; gd. 590 a, b, c. yh-vr- 'be or make crooked', ysrJv- 'fail', cs. 554 a a. y2. ha- 'go forth', pr. 458, pr. 422, 476, sj. 459, inj. \/sru- 'flow', pr. 422, opt. inj. 459, impv. 460, pt.461, 459; pf- 485. pt. 493; 425, impv. 426, pt. 427, impf. 462; red. aor. inj. red. aor. 514, inj. 516; impf. pf. red. aor. j-aor. 428; 485; 516; 522, inj. 524; j-aor. inj. 524; pp. 573 a.. 4; ;

II. GENERAL INDEX

Ablative: sing. masc. formed the case-ending of the abl. 330 b, 334 a, 336 a, 338, in two, neuter in three 644 b, of the ace. 642, 339 a, 341 a, 343 a, 344 der. i^-stems ways from 389. 642 a, 642 d ft of the dat. (p. 230 note 6), 345, 347, Accusative: pi. masc. and 644 a, of the gen. 644 c, 349 a, 351 a, 354 a, 356, fem. formed in two ways of the instr. 372 (p. 257), 363, 380 a. der. from «-stems 389 374 (P- 264), 374 (f. pi. Causative stem : nominal deri- appositional 642 b ; cognate p. 267), of the loc. 643, vatives in -ana, -if, -a, -alu, 642 a; of direction 642 c; 644 d, of the nom. 641. isnu, -iinu, -u 561 ej form- of distance and time 642 d. Alternative nominal stems ed with suffix -paya 5S8, Accentuation 83 — IH; aorist _ 253, 318 a 4, 328 c, 332 a. the p of which sometimes 505 (root aor.), 507 (a-aor.), Amredita compounds 257, 6, retained in the reduplicated 535 (jiz-aor.); augment 96; 258, 319. (p. 198 note 5); aorist 513 a 2.

causative 552; denomina- accentuation of 88; Sandhi Cerebralization : of«,inverbal tive 562; double 85 a, 91 in 57 b y, 78, I c. forms after the r of pre- (p. 96), 105 a; lack of 85 b; Anudatta accent 83, 84. positions 47 A a; after r, r, irregular monosyllabic 94, Anunasika for final « 77 I b, s, in the second member of I a, 368 n. '4 (rad. J-stems), 77, 2 d. nominal compounds 47 A b, 362 n. 7 {ray-), 364 c (dydv-, Anusvara for m 75, 2, 3, for n 81, 2 e; in a following word >o- 4)"*-), 376, p. 272 n. H 77, 2 a b c ; in the intensive 47 A c ; of initial t 78, 2 b. [strt-); normal nominal 384b reduplicative syllable 60b. Cerebrals: their origin 42, (der. ?7-stems), 382 b (radical Aoristic s: added to present unexplained 43 c, 47 B c; K-stems); shift of 22, 29 stem 521 a 2; lost 520 a 4, Prakritic 42 b, 47 B; re- 38 d, 58 d, 107 (case-forms 529 a. presenting old palatals 43; as adverbs), 299, 319, and Archaic Sandhi in compounds t for final j 66 b 6 (S, / and d 389 (inst. as adv.), 311 81. for J 42 d ; J for palatal /

(participles as substantives), Aspirates : two in the same 314 (nom. neut. of parti- syllable avoided 32, 40 a. Compounds : characteristic ciples as adv.), 374 (inst. ad- Assimilation: of s 53, 57, 78; features 241, consisting of verbs p.264mid.), p. 273 n.' of final consonants 74; of phrases293,3, gender 241 a, (fem. of a-stems), 94, 2 — final i to I and palatals 76, Sandhi 81, suffixes 256, (oxytones), 377,3a and 378 I, 2; of final media to tmesis p. 143 (bottom), 260; (der. r-stems), 380 (der. z- following nasal 74 a; final first member consisting of stems), 388 c (der. «-stems\ m to following mutes 75, 2, adverbs 247, 274 b, 278 c, 94, I (monosyllabic stems), to y Iv 75,4. 289 b, nouns with case- 334 b {dp-), 364 c {div-), Attraction with the dative and endings 242, 248, 27s, 277, 93 a a (cardinals); systems ablative infinitive 583, 587. 278 a, 280, 287, 355 (p. 242 of 84. Augment 413; lengthened note 3), 368 (p. 252 notes Adjectives: fem. of 299 {anc- 413; dropped 413 b; irre- 2, 3. 13. P- 253 noteS), par- stems),326an. i3(fl«-stems), gular Sandhi of 413 a. ticles 251, 278 c, 284, 289 c, 330a (wow-stems), 332 note9 prepositions 249, 274a, 278d, (««-stems), 345 {yams-items), Breathing A: represents sonant 283, 298a, 292,1, alternative present 347 {vams-stsras), 375 a, aspirates, guttural, palatal, stems 244, 245, 2 a, b; last p. 270 (j/a-stems), 377, I cerebral, dental, labial 58; stems 292, (various stems), 388^.3 {u- when final becomes i or i member consisting of alter- stems). 66b6S, 351 b. native stems 253, or present Adverbs: two classes 626; stems 272. irregularities formed from nouns 442 a, Case-endings, normal 295 c. Conjugation : of

: adverbs (treat- a-class a, of the 643 a, 643 b, from pronouns Case-forms as the 421 the order of the cases) fl-class a, of the ya^ 642 d /S, 643 c, from nume- ed in 429 641 strong and weak class 438, of the j/o-class rsJs 634 ; multiplicative 638 —644; miscellaneous 640; of man- 295 d, 297, 298, 301, 313, (passive) 444 a, of the root the redu- ner 632; of time 639; with 31S. 323. 32Si 326b, 32Sb, class 450 a, of 29* ;

452 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar.

plicated class 457 a, of the gen. -as, dat. -ai 374, 385 70, lb,c(3 + ?^or/-), p.2512 infixing nasal class 463, I, in conjugation, -ana 2. sing, (N. sing. f. a-stems), 372 of the fiu-c\a.ss 469 a, of implv. 475, 3, -am 3. sing, (N. A. n. du. and L. pl. the «a-class 47=; a. impv. mid. 454, -i for -ta a-stems), 374 a, b (N. sing. Consonants lost: 81, 2 a, in 3. sing. red. aor. p. 376 and L. pl. a-stems). final group 66 c, 521 a; (top), -iran 494, 495, 529, Hybrid form 348 (N. pl. pf. mute between nasal and -ur 3. pl. 456, 494, 499, pt.). mute 62, 3c; i between 503, -au 1. 3. sing. pf.

j- two consonants 62, 3 b, 484, 485, -e 3. sing. mid. Imperative : endings of the 2. between two mutes 355 for -te 422, 430, 451, 458, 3. sing. 418. note 9, 520 a 4, m or « in 464, 476, 546, -tana 2. pl. Infinitive: ace. from roots theinst. of-«fl« stems328b. impv. 426, 441, 454, 472, 586 a, from verbal nouns

Contraction : in secondary 478, 505, -tat impv. 418 b, in -tu 586 b; dat. 368, in Sandhi 70, 3; in the per- 426, 434, 44!. 454. 460, -dhyai from causatives56l c, fect 483 a 2; in declension 472,478, 5i8,S47.S59 -rire 3. pl. pf. 451, 456, in plup. 495, in 566 a, in consonants 567; mid. 484, 40, 485, -re 3. j--aor. 521 a I, 522, in intv. formed without a suffix pl. mid. pr. 451, 469 a 6, 546, in reduplicative syllable 568; inflexion 569; parti- 470, pf. 484, 3, 4, -hi 2. 545; oi y between vowels ciples 569 e. sing. impv. 418 a, 454. 372; of sibilants 77, 2abc; Dentals : cerebralized 42 a, c, Exclamations 659 a. of t 77, 2 f. 47 A; replace cerebral and Instrumental: sing. m. n. labial 44 a 3 /3; s cerebra- Foreign words 42, 45 b; formed in two ways in der. lized 57, palatalized 53 ai, 47 Be; 52 bg; 57, i ^, 7. a-stems 372 (also pi.), f. in 3, 54, changed to i 44 a, Future participles 538. der. a-stems 374, m. n. in 522, unchanged before r der. «-stems 389, m. f. in

T. a, a, or r 57, 2 a un- Genitive : sing. m. formed in der. «-stems 381. changed in Amredita com- two, n. in three ways, in Interchange : of vowel and pounds 57, 2b7; « replaces derivative a-stems 389. consonant 50 b, 81 e, 469 w46d/3, 66, 4 a; k before Gerund: in -tvi 590 a; in -tva a 2, 542 b, 573 a; of ?-and p 77, 2 a, before / 77, 2 e. 590 b; in -tvdya 590 c; in / 52 a. Dissimilation 43 b I, b 2 p. 55 -yU. and -tya 591. Interjections 659; hih com- note 8, 3^1 notes 5 and 6, Gerundive: in -ya 578;' in pounded with J//5/-- 653. 469 a 1,545, 2 a (p. 391 top). ayya 579; in -enya 580; Dissyllabic pronunciation in -tva 581, in -tavya 581 a; JihvamulTya for final s 78, 2c. 363 a, (f5?« etc.), 364 a in -amya 581 b. (dydm), (gen. pl. of Gradation 372 of vowels 51 ; in Labials 45 : b often in words a-stems). compounds 243, 255; in of foreign origin 45 b, Doubling of finaj n 77. dissyllabic bases 27 b; in interchanges with w 45 a 3, Dravidian influence 42. suffixes 27 c. in place of m 45 a 5. Dvandvas: accentuation 262, Guria 22; in z'-stems 380; in Lengthening of vowels 81, 267 note?; gender a-stems 264, 388; in the pr. 1 d, 81, 2f, 82 b, 224 a, 266; plural 265; singular stem. 421, 451, 457, 469; 255 b, 313. 315. 318 a 2, 266. in the pf. 483 ; in the root 319 a, 329 (N. A. sing, n.), aor. ps. 501 ; in the a-aor. 344 (N. sing.), 354 (N.sing.), Elision; of final a before e a; 507 in the j-aor. 520, 360 (L. sing.), 372 (I. sing.), and 2 a, after 70, e and 523, 524; in the 2>-aor. 513 a (red. aor.), 520 a 2 " 72, of a before ending 528; in the cs. 553, 557; (^-aor.), 554 and 555 (cs.), of gen. loc. du. 372 (p. in the gdv. 578. 563 a, 565 and 566 (den.). 260 top); of final m 70, Gutturals: interchange with Locative: sing. m. formed in 3 b, 75, followed by con- palatals, labials, and ,r 34; two ways, f. in four ways, traction notes = and 4 372 with palatals 36 a, 37, 38, in der. i-stems 381, m. in (p. 256): oly and v 72, i b, 39. 41, b 2, 43^4. 43 b 2. two ways, n. in three ways ofi>-79, 1 b; ofj78, 73; ib. in der. «-stems 389; San- Enclitics 85 b I. Haplology 64, 499 (p. 367 dhi of locatives in -l and Endings: in declension 295 c, note 5). « 71, 2 b. abnormal fem. loc. -am, Hiatus 67, 69 a, b, c (duals), Loss of nasal in pf. 483 a 4; 1 _ 2

n. General Index. 453

in a-aor. 5°7; ^^ s-3.or. Prepositions : two classes voiced dental 62, 4 b, ce- S2oa3; in pp. 574, 2. 592; adverbial, not com- rebralized before loss 62, pounded with verbs 5935 4 c; palatal spirant («) Metathesis sob, 51 c, in 63; adnominal, used with cases, before d, dh 62, 4 d. quantity (asthas, Mat etc.) 594; accentuation 102, 103, Strong forms: in declension 507 a 4. 105, no (p. 107). 295 d; in conjugation 449, Pronominal declension: in- 483. 501. 520. 528, »- declension: influence on 494. 498, fluence on nominal 371. Subjunctive 414. the der. 2- declension 380 d, Suffixes: primary nominal on the der. o-declension 371. Reduction of final a to i 26, 113 a (list); secondary no- Nasalization: of vowels 66, i, 483 b, 484 a I, of medial minal 190 (list); adverbial 70, I b, 70, 2 b, 372 note 5 a to i 507 a I, 574, 3, 576 c. 627—640. (p. 256), p. 258 note 3 and Reduplicated aorist connected Supplementary stems in de- note 5; of semivowels 75, with the causative 513. clension 315, 326 c, 330 c, of / 77, 2 e. Reduplication 37 e; aorist 339b, 343 b, 357. 362 a. Nominal stems, obsolete, pre- 513; rhythmic rule 513 a; Svarita accent 83, 84; in served in adverbs 642 d a. intensive 60b, 545; perfect Sandhi 108. Nominative: pi. formed in 62, 4S2, vowel lengthened Syncope 25,1 3, 324 (-/^fl«-), two ways, in der. a-de- — 482, irregular 482 d, sylla- 325, 327, 328 b; 483 a 3 clension 372, in der. a-de- ble an- 482 c K, syllable (pf.), 513 a 4 (red. aor.), clension, 374, in der. z'-de- lost 482 e, rhythmic rule 542 c 2 (des.), 548 a (intv.). clension 381, in der. u-A&- a note i, note ». clension 484 4 389. .Transfer forms : in declension Rhotacism 51a, 52 a. 313 note 5, 315, 316 (p. 196 Onomatopoetic words f, 52 ^1, Samprasarana note 4), 317 note 7, note 659 b; in compounds 251, 22, 23, 24, 318 a 326d, 33od, c, 326 b, 482 b I, 483 a I, (cs.) 5, 334 5. 650- c, 341 b, 343 c, 349 c, 554; (pp.) 574. 575- 339 351 c, 3S4b, 364b, 375 aa, Palatals: two series 35; new Sandhi 31, 2, 38 c, 46 d a, 378 (p. 275 notes and 276 palatals 36, 37, 38; old 47 A; duplicate forms bottom), 380 c, 381 (f. D. palatals 40 (ch), 41 (y); 67 b; initial n cerebra- Ab. G. L. sing.), 384 c, new palatals revert to lized 47 A c; 54 a (i for 388 d, 389 (G. sing, m., gutturals, in pf. 482 d 2, s), 57 {s for s), 58 and I. du.); in conjugation: 492, 495, in root aor. 80 b {h aspirated), 59 and 421 a 4, 429a 3, 4, 457 a 8, 500 note 19 (p. 367), indes. 74 note 5 (/ for d), 62{av), 463,2, 469 a 7, a4, 495. 542ca; fbecomes^ 66b2; 62, I (final group of con- 475 II 499 note (p. 367), 507 a4 j becomes k ox f (>(> h z; sonants). (a-aor.). s replaces s 54 1, becomes Semivowels y and v pronoun- Transfer stems in compounds i before j 54 b, 349 b, be- ced as iy and uv 48 a, comes s before i th 42 a, with a syllabic value 48 b, 254- a, becomes d before bh lost 62; inserted be- 56 y Udatta accent 83, 84. vowels d, inter- 349 b. tween 49 Unreduplicated perfect forms Parallelism, form due to, changes with z/ 49 c; V 482 e, 492 b. 206 note c, interchanges with 6 and j/ 327 (p. 3), 354 UpadhmSnlya for final j 78, 1 c nakta N. A. du. 372, 50 a; final r 66, 5, indi- Particles: three groups 645; cated in the Padapatha Visarjaniya for final dental s ^°, s a-, sa-, dus; su- as first 66 b note becomes or 66, 6 a, 78, I c— e ; for final members of compounds s 79, 2 b, c, lost 62, 4; / r 79, 2 a, d. 655-658- gradually increases at the Vocative: accentuation 93,109; Participial forms compounded cost of r 52 a, in foreign formed with -mas and -vas with substantives used ad- words 52 g, / for d in the from -mani, -mams and -vant verbially 654. later Samliitas 52 d, for d stems 315, 316, 340, with Passive: present system 444 52 e, final / 66 b 5 note 9. -vas from -van and -vams —448; aorist 501; past Shortening of vowels 81, 2 g stems 331, 348, with -yas participle formed with -(a (a, t), 70, 1 b and p. 259 from -yams stems 346; 572—575. with -na 576. note 7 (5 before r), 327 [a final vowel gunated in i- Perfect: irregularities in the in aK-stems), 352 {-sa/i-), stems 381, and «-stems 389. root 483 a; subjunctive 487, 360 (du. of -iar stems), Vowels: e for original as injunctive 488, optative 362 b (ray-), 369 (radical 15 b I, 62,4 b; lost 25, 489, imperative 490. a), 372 (dual a), 378 (dual 26 a, 563 c, 564 a. Pragrhya vowels: T, ii 69 c, »), p. 277 note 4 {ndri-), 38 Vrddhi 22 a, 25 B, 483 (pf-). (j-aor.), 71J 2; e 72,2, 374 (du. f. (r of n. pi.). 501 (ps. aor.), 520 final / of o-stems), 72, 3. Sibilant lost: initial and 524, 528, 557 (cs-). 578, Prakritic words 42 b, 47 B. andj62, 2, 78 e 2, 3, 81,2 a (gdv.). mutes Precative 417, 489, 504, sn, — c; J and J between note 9; j before Weak forms for strong 348. SI 7. 525. 62,3, 355

—— ——

CONTENTS.

INTRODUCTION .... page 1—5 IV. NOMINAL STEM FORMATION General scope of this work i. — Verbal page 107—143. Authenticity of the Texts 2. Primary and Secondary Suffixes 112. — I. PHONOLOGY .... page 5—59 1. Primary Nominal Derivation: Action Ancient pronunciation 3. — The sounds Nouns and Agent Nouns 1 13. — i. Pri- Language i. of the Vedic 4. — The simple mary Nominal Suffixes 114— 189. — 6 Vowels — 14. — 2. The Diphthongs 15 2. Secondary Nominal Derivation: Form 16. — Lengthening of Vowels 17. — Loss and Meaning 190. — Secondary Nominal of Vowels 18. — Contraction 19. — Hiatus Suffixes 191 — 240. 20. — Vowel Gradation 22 29. — — The V. . COMPOUNDS . . page 143-178 Consonants 30—47: Doubling of Con- Form of Compounds 241. — A. First Mem- sonants 30. — Modes of Articulation 31. — ber of Compounds 242—251. — B. Last Loss of Aspiration 32. — Aspirates in con- Member of Compounds 252—256. —^Classi- tact with other Mutes S3- — The five fication of Compounds 257; i. Iteratives Classes of Mutes 34—45 : I. Gutturals 34. ^ 258. — 2. Copulatives (Dvandvas) 259 2. Palatals 35— 38. — Irregular Palatalization 258. — 3, Determinatives 269—284. — 39. — Old Palatals 40—41. — 3. Cerebrals 4. Possessives (Bahuvrlhis) 285 — 291. — 42—43. — 4. Dentals 44. — 5. Labials 5. Governing Compounds 292. — 6, Syn- 45. — Nasals 46. — Cerebral n 47. — tactical Compounds 293. Semivowels 48 52. — Sibilants 57. — 53 — VL DECLENSION . . . page 178—312. The Breathing A 58. — Cerebral / 59. — General Character 294. — I. Nouns 295. — Anusvara and Anunasika 60. — Voiceless A. Consonant Stems 296 — i. — —365. Pala- Spirants 61. — Loss of Consonants 62. tal Stems 297—303. — 2. Cerebral Stems Metathesis Syllable 6^. — 64. 304. — 3. Dental Stems 305—333 : Stems IL EUPHONIC COMBINATION (SANDHI) in -i 306 —308. — Derivate Stems in -va/, page 59—76. -tat, -it, -ut and secondary -t 309—310. — Nature of Vedic Sandhi 65. — Finals in Participial Stems in -at and -ant^ 1 1 —314. — pausa 66. — Rules of Sandhi 67- — Stems in -mant and -vant 315—316. — Lengthening of Final Vowels 68. — Con- Stems in Radical -th 317. — Stems in -d traction of Similar Vowels 69. — Con- 318—320. — Stems in -dh 321—322. — traction of a with Dissimilar Vowels 70. — Stems in Radical -n 323 —324. — Deri- Final f and u before Dissimilar Vowels vative Stems in -an, -man,

456 I. Allgemeines und Sprache. 4. Vedic Grammar. Contents.

-K stems 384—385. — 6 a. Radical -u III. The Aorist System 497—536- — Aorist; stems 386—387. — 6 b. Derivative -u Characteristics 497. — i. Simple stems 388—389. A. Root Aorist 498— 506; B. a-Aorist 507 II. Pronouns 390—403: i. Personal 391. 5 1 2. — 2. Reduplicated Aorist 513—518.— 2. Demonstrative 392—396. — 3. Inter- 3. Sigmatic Aorist 519: A. i. The j- Aorist rogative 397. — 4. Relative 398. — 5. In- 520—527. — A. 2. The j>-Aorist 528 definite 399. — 6. Reflexive 400. — 533. — A. 3. The jw-Aorist 534. — B. The 7. Possessive 401. — 8. Pronominal Deri- xfl-Aorist 535—536. vatives and Compounds 402. — g. Pro- IV. The Future System 537—540. — nominal Adjectives 403. Formation of the Stem S37. — Subjunctive, III. NiTMERALS 404—409. — A. Cardinals Conditional, Participles 538. — Indicative 405—407. — B. Ordinals 408. — C. Nu- 539. — Periphrastic Future 540. meral Derivatives 409. V. Secondary Conjugation 541—570. Intensive VII. THE VERB . . . page 312—4T 4 1. Desiderative 542— 544. — 2. General Characteristics 410. — A. The 545—551- — 3- Causative 552—561. — Finite Verb 411 — 570. — Personal Endings 4. Denominative 562 — 570. 412. — The Augment 413. — Formation B. Nominal Verb Forms 571—591- — of the Moods: Subjunctive 414, Injunctive Characteristics 571. — a. Past Passive 415, Optative 416, Precative 417, Impera- Participles 572—576. — b. Future Passive tive 418. Participles (Gerundives) 577—581. — c. In- I. The Present System 419—480. — finitive 582—588: i. Dative Infinitive Characteristics 419. — a. First or a-Con- 583 — 585. — 2. Accusative Infinitive 586.— jugation 420 —448: Characteristics 420. — 3. Ablative-Genitive Infinitive 587. — I. The Radically accented a-Class [bhdva-) 4. Locative Infinitive 588. — d. Gerund 421 — 428. — 2. The Suffixally accented 589-591. a-Class (iudd-) 436. — The ya- 429 — 3. Vni. INDECLINABLES . page 414-432. jTrt- Class 437: A. The Radically accented 1. Prepositions 592 —625 : A. Adverbial Class 438-443. — B. The Suffixally Prepositions 593—608. — B. Adnominal accented j/a-Class (Passive) 444—448. Prepositions 609 — 625. b. The Second or Graded Conjugation 2. Adverbs 626—644: A. Adverbial Suffixes 449 —480. — a I. The Root Class 450— (in alphabetical order) 627— 640. — B. Ad- 456. — a 2. The Reduplicating Class 457 verbial Case-forms (in the order of the

462. — |3 I. The Infixing Nasal Class 463 cases) 641 — 644. 468; — p 2. The «K-Class 469—474. — 3. Particles 645 — 658: emphatic 646, con- ^ 3. The KS-Class 475 —480. junctional 647, negative 648. — a. Ad- II. The Perfect System 481—496. — verbial Words in Compounds 649—658. Characteristics 481. — 1. The Reduplica- 4. Interjections 659. tive Syllable 482. — 2. — The Root 483. Addenda and Corrigenda . . page 433 3. The Endings 484. — Perfect Indicative List of Abbreviations 436 485. — Moods of the Perfect 486 490. — — Sanskrit Index . 437 Perfect Participle 491—493. — Pluperfect General Index . 451 — Periphrastic Perfect 494—495. 496. Table of Contents . 455

The printing was commenced m May, 1907, and afterwards delayed by the death of the editor Prof. Kielhorn.